JP2024007989A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To further improve efficiency and visibility in a game by exercising ingenuity in a type and a position of a member disposed on a game board in a game machine.SOLUTION: In a game machine 10, a first non-electric accessory 39A is operated and a second winning hole 315A is opened when game balls flowing into an introduction port 371 of a non-electric operation device 37 enter a first non-electric operation port 376A, and a second non-electric accessory 39B is operated and a second winning hole 315B is opened when the game balls enter a second non-electric operation hole 376B. The second non-electric accessory 39B is disposed in a position closer to an inflow area (return spring 310) of game balls into a game area in an upper side in a vertical direction in an upstream side in a flow-down direction of the game balls relative to the first non-electric accessory 39A in a state in which the game machine 10 is viewed in front. The first non-electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory 39B are positionally misaligned in a fore-and-aft direction and are aligned and each operation mode differs.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 294

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

In a gaming machine, a plurality of types of gaming members (for example, various displays, various winning devices, and distribution devices) are arranged in the gaming area of the gaming board in order to generate gaming properties that improve the interest of the game.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-192094

In gaming machines, it is desired to improve the efficiency and visibility of gaming by devising the types and positions of components placed on the gaming board.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
an inflow section (371) through which game balls flow in one ball at a time;
a first operating means (372) operable to cause a game ball to flow into the inflow section when a predetermined condition (a winning of a winning lottery in a time-saving gaming state) is satisfied;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, a second operating means (39A) different from the first operating means can be caused to perform a predetermined operation (opening operation of the second prize opening 315A). The first ball entry section (376A) is the trigger,
a first detection section (376Aa) for detecting entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, at least a specific operation (of the second prize opening 315B) is performed on the third operation means (39B) different from the first operation means and the second operation means. a second ball entry portion (376B) that serves as an opportunity to perform the opening operation);
a second detection section (376Ba) for detecting entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section;
a guiding means (374) for guiding the game ball to a predetermined flow path by acting on the progress of the game ball flowing in from the inflow portion;
A gaming machine comprising:
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section, the guiding means, which is in a first state for guiding game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section, is activated. Switching means (drive control (processing) of the movable guide section 374) for switching to a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry section and can enter the second ball entry section ),
The third operating means is located above the second operating means in the vertical direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an example of a general drawing reservation storage area in the storage area of the main controller shown in FIG. 8; The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a game information storage area in the storage area of the main controller. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a performance information display device of a main controller. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display on a performance display monitor of a performance information display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display on a setting value display section of the performance information display device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control device. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first special figure pending command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. 18. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a through gate processing procedure executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17. FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the common figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 21. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern data setting process executed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 22. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern variation start process executed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 22. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 26. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 26. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 21. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 21. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value change process executed in the main process of FIG. 21. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of specific performance information update processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 21. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36. FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 21. FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 21. FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 21. FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 21. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of operation detection processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of operation button operation detection processing executed in the operation detection processing of FIG. 43. FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 43. FIG. A table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation status. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table used to set a variation type (effect pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 47; FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table used to set a variation type (effect pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 47; FIG. FIG. 51(A) is a diagram showing an example of the color of a decorative pattern, and FIG. 51(B) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table used when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 47. figure. FIG. 52(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first pending image display section, the variable image display section, and the already changed image display section set in the symbol display section in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 52(B) is the fixed variable gaming state. The figure which shows an example of the 2nd pending image display part and the said variable image display part which are set to a symbol display part in a time-saving game state. The figure which shows an example of the change of the pending image in a 1st pending image display part. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game performance control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42. The front view showing an example of the game board of the game machine concerning the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. 56 is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of the wing accessory device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 55. FIG. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first special figure pending command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. 63. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure pending command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. 63. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation start process executed in the normal pattern game control process in the main process of FIG. 66. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol winning game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 66. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol winning game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 66. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 66. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 66. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 71. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 71. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure variation pattern setting process B executed in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 73. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure variation pattern setting process B executed in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 73. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure variation pattern setting process B executed in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 73. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 66. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 66. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 66. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 66. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 66. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 66. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 66. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a variation type (variation pattern) setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 86; The figure which shows the screen example of the symbol display part in various game states. The figure which shows an example of the one-shot announcement performance of RUSH performance. The figure which shows an example of the battle performance of RUSH performance. The figure which shows an example of the battle performance of RUSH performance. The figure which shows an example of a result performance and a branch performance. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. The front view which shows the example of operation of the movable rotary accessory member provided in the game board. FIG. 3 is a partially cutaway side view showing the periphery of the movable rotating accessory member. 94 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 93. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 93. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a general map reservation storage area in the storage area of the main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the common figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 104. 106 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the normal pattern data setting process executed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 105. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern variation start process executed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 105. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 104. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 104. 109 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 109. A flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 109. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 104. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 104. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 104. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 104. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 106. 118 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 117. 118 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 117. A table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation status. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 106. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 106. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the 1st stop symbol selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 122. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game production setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 122. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table used to set a variation type (effect pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 122; FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table used to set a variation type (effect pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 122; FIG. A diagram for explaining the movable timing of the movable rotating accessory member. A diagram for explaining a movable mode of a movable rotating accessory member. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a drive pattern of a movable rotating accessory member. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a drive pattern of a movable rotating accessory member. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining drive data for driving a movable rotating accessory member. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a drive pattern and drive data of a movable rotating accessory member. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a drive pattern and drive data of a movable rotating accessory member. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a drive pattern of a movable rotating accessory member. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining drive data for driving a movable rotating accessory member. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a drive pattern and drive data of a movable rotating accessory member. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the accessory action effect setting process executed in the special figure game effect setting process of FIG. 125. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the button effect setting process executed in the special figure game effect setting process of FIG. 125. A diagram for explaining button effects. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game performance control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 106. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotating accessory control process executed in the special figure game production control process of FIG. 141. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotating accessory control process executed in the special figure game production control process of FIG. 141. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotating accessory control process executed in the special figure game production control process of FIG. 141. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotating accessory control process executed in the special figure game production control process of FIG. 141. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotating accessory control process executed in the special figure game production control process of FIG. 141. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotating accessory control process executed in the special figure game production control process of FIG. 141. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotating accessory control process executed in the special figure game production control process of FIG. 141. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotating accessory control process executed in the special figure game production control process of FIG. 141. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the button production control process executed in the special figure game production control process of FIG. 141. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the button production control process executed in the special figure game production control process of FIG. 141. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 106. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining drive data for driving a movable rotating accessory member. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining the special electric prize winning device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 154. FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining the special electric prize winning device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 154. FIG. 157(A) is a block diagram showing an example of a part of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 154, FIG. 157(B) is a diagram showing prize balls of various winning openings, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing signal types output to the outside. A diagram showing output forms of various signals output to the outside of the gaming machine. A diagram showing output forms of various signals output to the outside of the gaming machine. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a through gate processing procedure executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17. FIG. A diagram showing an example of transition of gaming states. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the common figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. 165 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern data setting process executed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 164. 165 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation start process executed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 164. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 168. 168. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 168. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game number management process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game number management process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special electric start control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 163. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the V winning jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 163. 164 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of signal output processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 163. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. FIG. The figure which shows the example of a screen in a pattern display part. The figure which shows the example of a screen in a pattern display part. The figure which shows the example of a screen in a pattern display part. Flowchart showing. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 192 is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of the wing accessory device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 191. FIG. 192 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 191. FIG. 192 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the display control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 191. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image when the power is turned on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface B. An explanatory diagram illustrating the back surface C. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an additional data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a table used in the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 191, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of the performance flow of the special figure game performance. The figure which shows an example of the re-lottery performance of special figure game performance. The figure which shows an example of the re-lottery performance of special figure game performance. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. 209 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the common figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. 211 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern data setting process executed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 210. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation start process executed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 210. A flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. 215 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 214. 215 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 214. 209 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol game number management process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. 209 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol game number management process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. (A) is a diagram showing an example of calculating the break-even point, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the opening performance of a small winning game. The figure which shows the image example of the opening performance of the small winning game. (A) is a diagram showing a modified example (border notification) of the opening performance of a small winning game, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing an image example of a modified example (border notification) of the opening performance of the small winning game. (A) is an image example of a border notification in a special figure game, and (B) is a diagram showing an image example of a V winning prize display in a small winning game. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. 209 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. 209 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. 209 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 209. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of a main processing procedure executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 191. 233 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of vibration sensor input monitoring/presentation processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 232. 233 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 232. 233 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 232. 233 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 232. 233 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 232. 233 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 232. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 191. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of a main processing procedure executed by the display control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 191. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command interrupt processing executed by the display control device, and (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of V interrupt processing executed by the display control device. 241(B) is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the V interrupt processing of FIG. 241(B). (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reserved pitch count command process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 242, and (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the confirmed command process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 242. Flowchart (C) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the demo command processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 242. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern command processing executed in the command judgment processing of FIG. 242, and (B) shows an example of the procedure of the stop type command processing executed in the command judgment processing of FIG. 242. flowchart. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of continuous notice command processing executed in the command determination process of FIG. 242, and (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of back image change command processing executed in the command determination process of FIG. Flowchart showing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation button operation command processing executed in the command judgment process of FIG. 242, and (B) shows an example of the procedure of error command processing executed in the command judgment process of FIG. 242. flowchart. 241(B) is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display setting processing executed in the V interrupt processing of FIG. 241(B). 241(B) is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display setting processing executed in the V interrupt processing of FIG. 241(B). (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the pending image setting process executed in the display setting process of FIG. 248, and (B) shows an example of the procedure of the warning image setting process executed in the display setting process of FIG. 248. Flowchart (C) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation process executed in the display setting process of FIG. 248. 249 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a comparison process executed in the display setting process of FIG. 248. 249 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of button update processing executed in the display setting processing of FIG. 248. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the transfer setting process executed in the V interrupt process in FIG. 241(B), and (B) is the resident image transfer setting executed in the transfer setting process in FIG. 252(A). 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure. FIG. 252(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal image transfer setting process executed in the transfer setting process. 241B is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the drawing process executed in the V interrupt process of FIG. 241(B). FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram for explaining a first winning opening, a second winning opening, a first opening/closing member, and a second opening/closing member. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an incoming ball sorting device. A diagram for explaining a variable winning device. A diagram for explaining a variable winning device. FIG. 260(A) is a block diagram showing an example of a main part of the system configuration of a gaming machine, and FIG. 260(B) is a diagram showing the number of prize balls when game balls enter various ball entry sections. The figure which shows the game flow (transition of a gaming state) of a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the start-up winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of through gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17. FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by a main controller. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the common figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 267. 268 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern data setting process executed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 268. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern variation start process executed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 268. 267. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 267. 267. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 267. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 267. A diagram showing an example of a pseudo jackpot game pattern command. A diagram showing an example of a pseudo jackpot game production pattern. A diagram for explaining a special 2 game production pattern. A diagram for explaining a small winning game production pattern. A diagram for explaining a jackpot game performance pattern. A diagram for explaining a pseudo jackpot game performance (display) in an example of a jackpot game performance pattern (jackpot game performance pattern A1). 274 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 273. 274 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 273. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 267. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 267. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 267. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 267. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 267. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 267. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 267. 268 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 267. 268 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 267. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42. FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the example of a display in the pattern display part in a special figure game. The figure which shows the example of a display in the pattern display part in a small winning game and a jackpot game. A diagram showing the vicinity of the second prize opening and the non-electric accessory. A sectional view for explaining a variable winning device. A sectional view for explaining a variable winning device. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view for explaining a non-electrically operated device. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view for explaining a non-electrically operated device. 295 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 294. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of through gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17. FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by a main controller. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the common figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 308. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 308. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 308. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 308. 313 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 312. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 312. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 308. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 308. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 308. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 308. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 308. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 308. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 308. 309 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 308. 309 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 308. FIG. 295 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 294. FIG. 295 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 294. FIG. 295 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 294. FIG. 295 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 294.

Hereinafter, each embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. Furthermore, the following embodiments are examples of embodying the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 54.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are exploded views of the gaming machine 10, and FIGS. 4 to 6 are front views of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment are defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine, but other games such as a reel-type game machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball game machine, and a play ball game machine can also be used. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by having its left end rotatably supported by the outer frame 14 . Moreover, the left end portion of the inner frame 12 is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12 by having its left end rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determining section 21, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination section 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 7) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not it is pressed. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20. This operation button 20 is triggered by an operation on the operation button 20 by a player during a predetermined operation reception period in a special figure game performance executed in a special figure game that clearly shows the lottery result of a jackpot lottery to the player. Operation button to be executed Operated to execute a performance or the like.

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, the operation button 20 may include a jog dial. In this case, when performing various game settings by operating the jog dial, you can select options (items) on various setting screens, such as production stages (background productions), characters, and music during jackpot games, as well as selection frequency of predetermined productions and jackpot expectations. A desired item can be provisionally selected from game settings such as degree, and the provisionally selected option (item) can be selected by operating the operation button 20.

Further, the number of operation means for accepting operations by the player, such as the operation button 20, may be one, but a plurality may be provided. In addition to the operation button 20, the operation means includes, for example, a rotatable handle, a rotatable lever, a push member that can move forward and backward (reciprocating) forward and backward, and a symbol display section 341 and a sub-movable display, which will be described later. Examples include a touch panel provided in the section 38, or a combination of two or more of these operating means (for example, an operating means that can rotate and move forward and backward), and a touch panel provided with the operating button 20 on these operating means (for example, a handle or lever). It may also be an operation means (operation means provided with operation buttons 20 or a touch panel).

The selection determining unit 21 is operated by the player, and is, for example, a push button used when the player makes various game settings by accepting press operations from the player in a standby state where no game is being played. be. Various game settings include, for example, settings for characters that appear in game performances, settings for the frequency of execution of various performances such as button performances, settings for jackpot expectations for various performances, and the like. This selection deciding section 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a decision button 21B.

The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to temporarily select a desired item from the options (items) on various setting screens when making various game settings, for example, and the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 21A It includes a selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214. Here, provisional selection means a state in which the provisionally selected content is determined (stored in the RAM 512) by operating the determination button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 is an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch, which switch the input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, as shown in FIG. 211d. These switches 211a to 211d are connected to the input/output I/F of the audio lamp control device 5. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been operated based on the input signals of each of the switches 211a to 211d.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is detected that an operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has started, it is determined that each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been operated. Of course, it may be determined that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed when it is detected that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 continues or has been completed. .

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. Further, the decision button 21B includes a decision operation switch 21Ba that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later. The decision operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the audio lamp control device 5. Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine whether or not the decision operation switch 21Ba has been operated, based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

In addition, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the decision button 21B, a touch panel is provided to accept the player's operation of the symbol display section 341 and the sub movable display section 38, which will be described later, and the touch panel is used as the operation means. It is also conceivable that it could be set up as It is also conceivable to provide a rotating member such as a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214). Further, the selection operation switches 211a to 211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba (see FIG. 7) are contact type switches, but if they can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by a player, for example, piezoelectric elements may be used. etc.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the game machine 10, a basic game is played by firing a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the firing handle 22, the game ball firing mechanism 32 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls put out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130, which will be described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a line. It is used to guide the game ball to the game ball firing mechanism 32. Further, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used to store surplus game balls in the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect that outputs audio. Note that the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination section 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp or an LED, and performs a lamp effect depending on the lighting color and blinking mode such as lighting or turning off.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball firing mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by having its left end rotatably supported by the front frame 11 as described above. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball firing mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Note that, in FIG. 2, the description on the surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and includes a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning hole 313, a first winning hole 314, a second winning hole 315, a variable winning hole 316, through gates 317L, 317R, and A mouth 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a sub movable display section 38, and a movable accessory member 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, or the variable winning hole 316 are discharged from the out hole 318. be done.

Here, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The firing rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and directs the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is something that guides. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the firing rail 321 one ball at a time. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for firing the game ball supplied onto the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the player's operation of the firing handle 22, and game balls are fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 onto the game board 31. In addition, the game ball firing mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that fires the game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 have openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front and back direction. ing. And, on the back side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entry of game balls corresponding to each of the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 7) are provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the gaming board 31, so that the out ball sensor 318a (described later) (See FIG. 7). The through gates 317L, 317R are vertically penetrating gates through which game balls can pass, and have entry sensors 317La, 317Ra (see FIG. 7) that can individually detect game balls passing through the through gates 317L, 317R. . On the game board 31, there is a possibility that a game ball launched to the left side area of the game board 31 will pass through the through gate 317L, and a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317R. There is. and. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the ball entry sensors 317La, 317Ra (see FIG. 7), a normal winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open the second prize opening 315. Then, when the lottery result in the general lottery is a win, a game ball can enter the second prize opening 315 by opening the electric accessory 315b, which will be described later. That is, in the game machine 10, the game ball can be launched to the left side area of the game board 31 in addition to the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). Even in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315.

In addition, the high probability mode has a high jackpot probability of a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery (see FIG. 9(B)), and is a mode in which it is easy to shift to the jackpot game state where a jackpot game is executed. This mode is a mode in which the jackpot probability of a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery is low (see FIG. 9(A)), and it is difficult to shift to a jackpot game state where a jackpot game is executed. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a common symbol as a result of the common symbol lottery is high (see Figure 12 (B)), and the second prize is achieved because the electric accessory 315b, which will be described later, operates frequently. In contrast to the mode in which the entry of a game ball into the mouth 315 is easily allowed, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a regular figure as a result of the lottery per ordinary figure is low (FIG. 12(A) ), this is a mode in which it is difficult to allow a game ball to enter the second prize opening 315 because the frequency of operation of the electric accessory 315b is low.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 7) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331. The detection result of 318a is input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command to make the payout control device 7 pay out game balls according to the detection results from the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a. Hereinafter, the detection of the ball entering the game ball by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as winning. Moreover, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result by the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here matches the number of fired game balls fired onto the game board 31 by the game ball firing mechanism 32.

Note that the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the out ball sensor 318a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the entry of game balls using other detection methods. It may be any sensor.

Further, the second winning hole 315 is provided with an electric accessory (electric role) 315b that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, when the electric accessory 315b opens, the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315, and when the electric accessory 315b closes, the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315. Balls are limited.

Further, the variable winning hole 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole 316. The opening/closing door 319 is opened/closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, when the opening/closing door 319 opens, the game ball can enter the variable winning hole 316, and when the opening/closing door 319 closes, the game ball entering the variable winning hole 316 is restricted. Ru. In addition, the opening/closing door 319 is moved to a position where the variable prize opening 316 is opened in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and is kept on standby at a position where the variable winning opening 316 is closed at other times. As a result, a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in a round game in a jackpot game can enter the variable winning hole 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 is detected by the ball entering sensor 314a or the ball entering sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery. The main control unit 331 then controls the display on the main display section 36 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, the lottery results from the main control unit 331 are transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display on the variable display unit 34, etc. according to the lottery results.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316 is detected by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, if the ball enters the general winning hole 313, the number of prize balls is 10, if the ball enters the first prize hole 314 or the second prize hole 315, the number of prize balls is three, and if the ball enters the variable prize hole 316, the number of prize balls is 3. In this case, the number of prize balls is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result conducted by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the state shifts to a jackpot game state, and a round game to be described later in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or By repeating this (16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. If the lottery result is a win, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state is an opening/closing state in which a round game is played five times in which the variable winning hole 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until the upper limit number (for example, 9) or more game balls enter the variable winning hole 316. This is a gaming state including an execution mode. The 16R guaranteed variable jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that includes an opening/closing execution mode in which round games are played 16 times, and can be expected to pay out a larger amount of prize balls than the 5R jackpot gaming state, which is more advantageous for the player than the 5R jackpot gaming state. It is a game state.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display section 341, such as a liquid crystal display, arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. The symbol display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the symbol display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the symbol display section 341 displays a variable display of decorative symbols according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first prize hole 314 or the second prize hole 315. , and various image effects such as a special figure game effect executed in conjunction with the variable display effect. Further, the symbol display section 341 may have a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, etc., or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. The device may further include a touch panel that accepts touch operations by a person.

For example, the fluctuating display effect of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 is performed by scrolling a plurality of types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" in order in the vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, etc. It will be done. Note that sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the decorative designs. Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine types of decorative patterns from "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, in the special pattern game, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is performed so that the fluctuating display of all the decorative symbols stops after a preset fluctuating display time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuating display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341. executed. More specifically, in the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, all the decorative symbols first fluctuate along a preset fluctuation direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and then the fluctuations of the plural decorative symbols stop in sequence. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbols on all the lines stops and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable display of the decorative symbols ends.

When the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display section 341 ends, the symbol display section 341 displays a state in which the decorative symbols are lined up on one or more active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative pattern clearly indicates or suggests the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", "16R sure strange jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot", decorative symbols of the same type will be displayed lined up on the active line, clearly indicating that it is a jackpot. be done. Further, the type of jackpot may be clearly indicated by a combination of decorative symbols on the active line, but it is not necessarily clearly indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is a "16R guaranteed variable jackpot", the symbol combination of, for example, "777", which is set as a symbol combination indicating a 16R guaranteed variable jackpot among the decorative symbols, is lined up on the active line. is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols other than "777" are lined up on the active line is displayed. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", a state in which the symbol combinations such as "333", which have been set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a 5R guaranteed strange jackpot among the decorative symbols, are lined up on the active line is displayed. Or, a state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols other than symbol combinations indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot such as "777" or "333" are lined up on the active line is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", among the decorative symbols, combinations of decorative symbols that are set in advance as symbol combinations indicating normal jackpots, such as "222" and "444", indicating variable probability jackpots are selected. A state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols are lined up on the active line is displayed. Further, if the lottery result is "lost", a state in which different combinations of decorative symbols are lined up on the active line (for example, "323" or "723", etc.) is displayed.

In addition, the symbol display section 341 displays a special symbol game effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, along with a variable display of decorative symbols in the special symbol game. In addition, if the lottery result is "16R sure-change jackpot" and jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of decorative symbols indicating the 16R probability-change jackpot are displayed lined up on the active line, a 5R probability-change jackpot will be displayed as a special pattern game effect. A suggestion effect suggesting a jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game performance, a promotion performance is executed that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the special symbol game is a 16R probability-variable jackpot. Similarly, if the lottery result is a "5R regular jackpot" and jackpot symbol combinations other than the decorative symbol combinations that indicate a regular jackpot are displayed on the active line, the 5R regular jackpot will be displayed as a special game effect. A suggestive effect that suggests a jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game performance, a promotion performance etc. that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the special symbol game is a 5R probability-variable jackpot is executed.

Further, in the symbol display section 341, when the gaming state shifts to a jackpot gaming state, jackpot game performances including an opening performance, an opening/closing execution mode performance, and an ending performance are displayed.

The sub-movable display section 38 includes a display device 381 such as a liquid crystal display, and is provided in the left area on the front side of the symbol display section 341. This sub movable display section 38 is connected to the MPU 61 via the input/output I/F 62 of the display control device 6 (see FIG. 7), and is based on the display variation pattern command transmitted from the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. Then, under the control of the MPU 61, an image effect is executed on the display device 381 together with the symbol display section 341 in a special figure game or a jackpot game.

Note that the display device 381 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display, and an organic EL display. Furthermore, in addition to the display device 381, the sub movable display section 38 may further include a touch panel that receives touch operations from the player.

Further, the sub-movable display section 38 is movable in the left-right direction D3 between a standby position (position shown in FIG. 4) shown by a phantom line in FIG. 5 and an operating position shown by a solid line in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor 38a that supplies driving force to the sub-movable display section 38, and a motor 38a that supplies a driving force to the sub-movable display section 38, and a return motor 38a for detecting that the sub-movable display section 38 has returned to the standby position. It has a detection section 38b. The motor 38a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection section 38b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The sub-movable display section 38 and the motor 38a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the sub-movable display section 38 is moved to the standby position (see FIG. 4) according to the rotational direction of the motor 38a. to the right (actuation direction) toward the operating position (solid line position in Figure 5), or leftward (return direction) from the operating position (solid line position in Figure 5) to the standby position (see Figure 4). . For example, the sub movable display section 38 is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 4) to the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5) when the motor 38a rotates in the forward direction; By rotating in the opposite direction, it is moved from the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5) to the standby position (see FIG. 4).

The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 38c to which a motor 38a and a return detection section 38b are connected. The motor driver 38c is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. The motor driver 38c then controls the motor 38a according to control instructions from the audio lamp control device 5. Further, the motor driver 38c can acquire the detection result by the return detection section 38b and transmit it to the audio lamp control device 5. Note that the motor driver 38c may be omitted, and the motor 38a and the return detection section 38b may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5.

Such a sub-movable display section 38 is operated in order to perform an effect related to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in a special figure game or a jackpot game. For example, in a special drawing game, the sub movable display section 38 operates as a jackpot confirmation effect that shows that the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and also as a chance to improve the expectation that the lottery result is a jackpot. It operates as a close-up performance. In addition, the sub movable display section 38 displays a promotion effect (performed in the jackpot game) that clearly indicates that the actual lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result suggested by the special figure game effect in the jackpot game. In addition to being operated as a promotion effect for the number of rounds or a promotion effect from a normal jackpot to a probability-variable jackpot, the lottery result of a jackpot lottery may be a jackpot while the right to execute a special game that is executed after the jackpot game is reserved. It is also possible to operate it as a pending consecutive winnings confirmation effect that notifies that a certain item is included.

Note that the standby position and operating position of the sub-movable display section 38 are not limited to the left area on the front side of the symbol display section 341, but may be at other positions. Further, the number of sub-movable display sections 38 is not limited to one, and may be plural, and the plurality of sub-movable display sections 38 may cooperate, interlock, follow, or follow. Furthermore, the sub-movable display section 38 may be movable in other directions in addition to or in place of the left-right direction D3. For example, the sub movable display section 38 may be movable in the vertical direction D2, diagonally, etc., and may also be rotatable in a clockwise direction, a counterclockwise direction, etc. Further, the sub movable display section 38 can be omitted, and one or more immovable display devices may be provided in place of the sub movable display section 38.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main display section 36 includes a normal symbol display section 361, a first special symbol display section 362, a second special symbol display section 363, and a first special symbol display section 363 arranged at the upper right corner of the game board 31. It includes a number display section 364 and a second special symbol reservation number display section 365.

The normal symbol display section 361 includes a pair of LEDs as a normal symbol (common symbol), and is used in a lottery for a common symbol to determine whether or not to release the electric accessory 315b, which is executed when a prize is won in the through gates 317L and 317R. The lottery result is displayed by a combination of LED pairs turning on and off. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the LED pair (variably displays the normal symbols) when a prize is won in the through gates 317L and 317R, and turns each LED on or off (stops the normal symbols) after the variable display time has elapsed. display) to display the results of the general drawing lottery. It should be noted that displaying the lottery result in the lottery per regular symbol by fluctuating display and stop display of the regular symbol (common symbol) is referred to as a "regular symbol game" or "common symbol game."

The first special symbol display section 362 includes a 7-segment display device as a first special symbol (first special symbol), and determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game triggered by winning in the first prize opening 314. The lottery result in the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of seven segments on the seven segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (displays the first special symbol in a variable manner) when a prize is won in the first winning hole 314, and displays each segment after the variable display time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning on or off (the first special symbol is stopped and displayed). Note that displaying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by varying display and stop display of the first special symbol (first special symbol) is referred to as a "first special symbol game" or "first special symbol game."

The second special symbol display section 363 includes a 7-segment display device as a second special symbol (second special symbol), and determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game triggered by winning the second prize opening 315. The lottery result in the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the seven segments on the seven segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (displays the second special symbol in a variable manner) in response to a winning in the second winning hole 315, and displays each segment after the variable display time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning on or off (the second special symbol is stopped and displayed). Note that displaying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by variable display and stop display of the second special symbol (second special symbol) is referred to as a "second special symbol game" or "second special symbol game."

In addition, below, the first special symbol (first special symbol) and the second special symbol (second special symbol) may be referred to as "special symbol" or "special symbol", and the first special symbol game (first special symbol) may be referred to as "special symbol" or "special symbol". 1 special pattern game) and the second special pattern game (second special pattern game) may be referred to as a "special pattern game" or "special pattern game."

The first special figure reservation number display section 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and the first special figure reservation number is the number of reservations for the right to play the first special figure game generated by winning the first prize opening 314. The number of reservations N is displayed by the number of four LEDs lit.

The second special figure reservation number display section 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and is a second special figure which is the number of reservations of the right to execute the second special figure game generated by winning the second prize opening 315. The number of reservations M is displayed by the number of four LEDs lit.

The movable accessory member 39 has two positions: a predetermined standby position shown in FIG. 4 located above the symbol display section 341 (position shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 6), and a standby position shown in FIG. 6 set below the standby position. It is movable in the vertical direction along the surface of the symbol display section 341 between the operating position shown by the solid line. The operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6) is a position closer to the center of the symbol display section 341 than the standby position (see FIG. 4). Further, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6), the coverage rate with respect to the surface of the symbol display section 341 is higher than when it is in the standby position (see FIG. 4). In addition, the movable accessory member 39 has a plurality of lamps 391 arranged in an annular shape on the periphery. In this embodiment, 15 lamps 391 are arranged on the movable accessory member 39, and each lamp 391 can be turned on and off individually. Further, each of the plurality of lamps 391 is, for example, an LED lamp, and can be lit in a plurality of colors including white, yellow, green, red, or a mixture thereof. In this way, each lamp 391 can be turned on and off individually, and can be turned on in multiple colors, so that, for example, when the movable accessory member 39 is activated, the lighting pattern of each lamp 391, the lighting color, Depending on the number of lights lit, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the special drawing game will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation level), or to clearly indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot. become. For example, regarding the lighting colors, it is possible to set the jackpot expectation level to be higher in the order of white, yellow, green, and red, and by appropriately setting the lighting pattern and lighting color, a rainbow lamp effect can be executed. By doing so, it is also possible to execute a confirmation performance that clearly indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A in the standby position (see FIG. 4), but the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is displayed using the lamp 391 in the portion exposed from the opening 31A. It is also conceivable to perform a performance that suggests the degree of expectation that it will be a jackpot. For example, in this embodiment, since the four lamps 391 located on the lower side are exposed from the opening 31A (see FIG. 4), a jackpot can be expected depending on which of these lamps 391 is lit. It is possible that this suggests the degree of Furthermore, in addition to the four lamps 391 located on the lower side, it is also possible to suggest the degree of jackpot expectation by an image displayed on the symbol display section 341.

In addition, the movable accessory member 39 may be entirely hidden without being exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position. Further, the gaming machine 10 may include a plurality of movable accessory members 39. Furthermore, the movable accessory member 39 may be one in which a plurality of separated movable members are combined, one that can be transformed into two or more forms, or one that is equipped with a display such as a liquid crystal display device. Of course, the movable accessory member 39 is not limited to covering a part of the display screen of the symbol display section 341, but may cover the entire display screen. Moreover, the central part of the movable accessory member 39 may be configured as an illumination part that can be turned on and off. In this case, by lighting or blinking the illumination section, it becomes possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot or to carry out an effect that clearly indicates a jackpot.

Such a movable accessory member 39 is operated in order to perform an effect related to a lottery result in a jackpot lottery in a special figure game or a jackpot game. For example, in a special drawing game, the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a jackpot confirmation effect that indicates that the lottery result is a jackpot, and also as a chance to improve the expectation that the lottery result is a jackpot. It operates as a close-up performance. In addition, the movable accessory member 39 is provided with a promotion effect (performed in a jackpot game) that clearly indicates that the actual lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result suggested by the special figure game effect in a jackpot game. In addition to being operated as a promotion effect for the number of rounds or a promotion effect from a normal jackpot to a probability-variable jackpot, the lottery result of a jackpot lottery may be a jackpot while the right to execute a special game that is executed after the jackpot game is reserved. It is also possible to operate it as a pending consecutive winnings confirmation effect that notifies that a certain item is included.

As shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor 39a that supplies driving force to the movable accessory member 39, and a return detection unit 39b that detects that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. has. The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection section 39b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The movable accessory member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the movable accessory member 39 is moved to the standby position (see FIG. 4) according to the rotational direction of the motor 39a. from the operating position (see the solid line in Figure 6) downward (actuation direction), or from the operating position (see the solid line in Figure 6) to the standby position (see Figure 4) upward (return direction). . For example, the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 4) to the operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6) when the motor 39a rotates in the forward direction; By rotating in the opposite direction, it is moved from the operating position (see solid line in FIG. 6) to the standby position (see FIG. 4).

The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 39c to which a motor 39a and a return detection section 39b are connected. The motor driver 39c is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. The motor driver 39c then controls the motor 39a according to control instructions from the audio lamp control device 5. Further, the motor driver 39c can acquire the detection result by the return detection section 39b and transmit it to the audio lamp control device 5. Note that the motor driver 39c may be omitted, and the motor 39a and the return detection section 39b may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5.

Further, each lamp 391 of the movable accessory member 39 is individually connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5, and each lamp 391 is individually turned on and off by the audio lamp control device 5. It can also be lit in multiple colors.

It is also conceivable that the game board 31 is provided with a magnetic sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 and the variable winning hole 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, if an attempt is made to fraudulently guide game balls to the first prize opening 314 or the variable prize opening 316 using a magnet, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the radio wave sensor are input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect the fraudulent act in the event that an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the ball entering sensors 314a, 315a causes false detection of the entering of a game ball. Note that the radio wave sensor is capable of detecting radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores game balls supplied from the island equipment (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. Note that when the game balls in the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

The peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The firing control device 8 controls the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation of the firing handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage level to a control device and a driving means provided within the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 7 to 16.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 7, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that performs main control of games in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Furthermore, the MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4. Further, the input/output I/F 42 is connected to incoming ball sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, out ball sensor 318a, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 inputs the game ball into the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316 based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, and 317Ra. It is determined whether there is a ball or not and whether the game ball has passed through the through gates 317L and 317R. Furthermore, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (the number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, the power supply control device 9, etc. are connected to the input/output I/F 42.

Then, the MPU 41 sends the voice lamp control device 5 a general figure variation pattern command, an electric accessory opening command, an electric accessory closing command, a special figure fluctuation pattern command, a first special figure hold command, a second special figure hold command, Special figure shift command, jackpot game start command, opening start command, opening end command, open/close execution mode start command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, open/close execution mode end command, ending start Outputs commands such as ending commands, jackpot game end commands, game setting value change commands, etc.

The normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the variable display time of normal symbols in the normal pattern game (normal pattern fluctuation pattern) and the lottery result in the normal pattern winning lottery. The normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is executed based on the information stored in the normal pattern holding storage area 412c (see FIG. 11), which will be described later, when starting the variable display of normal symbols in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36. This is set in step S1709 in the normal pattern fluctuation start process in FIG. 24, which will be described later. In addition, the normal pattern variation pattern command may be a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 only of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the normal pattern game (the normal pattern variation pattern). In this case, a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the lottery for ordinary symbols is set as a command different from the ordinary symbol variation pattern command.

The electric accessory opening command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is to be opened (activated). The electric accessory opening command is set in step S1809 in the normal figure game control process in FIG. 25, which will be described later, when opening (activating) the electric accessory 315b.

The electric accessory closing command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is closed (returned). When closing (returning) the electric accessory 315b, the electric accessory closing command is set in step S1816 in the normal figure game control process in FIG. 25, which will be described later.

The special pattern fluctuation pattern command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the variable display time of special symbols in the special pattern game and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, Contains information about jackpot type. The special symbol fluctuation pattern command is used when starting the variable display of special symbols in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36, in the special symbol holding storage area 412b (FIG. 8), which will be described later. (see) is set in step S2105 in the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 28, which will be described later. In addition, the special pattern fluctuation pattern command includes information that can identify the type of special symbol whose fluctuation has started, but the special symbol fluctuation pattern command when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started and the special symbol fluctuation pattern command when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. The special figure variation pattern command when variation is started may be set as another special figure variation command. Further, the special symbol variation pattern command may be a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 only of the variable display time and the special symbol in the special symbol game. In this case, a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result and jackpot type in the jackpot lottery is set as a command different from the special figure variation pattern command.

The first special figure hold command and the second special figure hold command are stored in the later-described special figure hold storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. When the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M increases, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased reservation, the variable display time of the special symbol (special symbol fluctuation pattern), and the first This is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the number N of reserved special figures or the number M of second reserved figures. The first special figure hold command and the second special figure hold command are used when the first special figure hold number N or the second special figure hold number M increases. ), the first special figure pending command setting process in step S1105 in the starting winning process in FIG. 18 (described later) (or in step S1207 in the first special figure pending command setting process in FIG. S1209) or is set in the second special figure hold command setting process of step S1110.

The special figure shift command is used when the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M decreases due to the start of the special figure game (fluctuating display of special figures). 1 holding area REA1 to 4th holding area REA4, or 1st holding area REB1 to 4th holding area REB4 of 2nd special drawing holding storage area REB (see FIG. 8). Showing the result of the lottery for the jackpot lottery. This is a command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the information has shifted. The special figure shift command is set in step S2008 in the special figure data setting process of FIG. 27, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of starting a jackpot game, that is, that the gaming state will shift to the jackpot gaming state. It is set in step S2204 in the jackpot game control process.

The opening start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start the opening of the jackpot game, and is set in step S2208 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later, when starting the opening of the jackpot game. be done. Note that the opening start command can be omitted because the jackpot game start command can notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game will be started.

The opening end command is a command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in step S2214 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 30, which will be described later, when ending the opening of the jackpot game. be done.

The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game, and when starting the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game, the jackpot game control shown in FIG. 30, which will be described later, is executed. It is set in step S2216 in the process.

The round game start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of starting each round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game and of round number information indicating what round the round game is. , is set in step S2217 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 30, which will be described later, when starting each round game. In addition, apart from the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the time of starting the round game, and the command may be sent to the audio lamp control device 5.

The round game end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to end the current round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and when ending each round game, the jackpot game shown in FIG. It is set in step S2229 in the control process.

The interval start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and when starting the interval, the jackpot game control shown in FIG. 31, which will be described later, is executed. It is set in step S2233 in the process.

The interval end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to end the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and when ending the interval, the jackpot game control shown in FIG. 32 described later is executed. It is set in step S2239 in the process.

The opening/closing execution mode end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to end the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game, and when ending the opening/closing execution mode, steps in the jackpot game control process of FIG. It is set in S2241.

The ending start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start the ending of the jackpot game, and is set in step S2242 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 31, which will be described later, when starting the ending.

The ending end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of ending the ending of the jackpot game, and is set in step S2248 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 32, which will be described later, when ending the ending.

The jackpot game end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game ends, and is set in step S2250 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29, which will be described later, when ending the jackpot game.

The game setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the game setting value after the change. It is set in step S2408 in the game setting value change process.

Note that commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal with a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 performs the main timer assignment described below every time the clock signal rises (or falls). Assume that the loading process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operation clock for the control main body in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform the jackpot lottery and the regular winning lottery will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter storage area 412a, the special drawing holding storage area 412b, and the general drawing holding storage area 412c of the RAM 412 to determine the variable display time of the jackpot lottery results and special drawings. settings, the lottery results for ordinary symbols, and the variable display time of ordinary symbols.

The lottery counter storage area 412a stores a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 as lottery counters. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining the type of loss when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. Further, the lottery counter storage area 412a stores a jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and a special symbol variation type counter CS1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The special symbol variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variable display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36. Furthermore, the lottery counter storage area 412a stores a normal winning random number counter C4, a normal winning type random number counter C5, a normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2, and a common pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 as lottery counters. The normal winning random number counter C4 is used for the normal winning drawing to decide whether or not to make the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 into an electric winning opening state. The ordinary winning type random number counter C5 is used when sorting the ordinary winning type (short open or long opening) when the result of the ordinary winning lottery is a general winning. The normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2 is used to set the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. The ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2 is used to determine the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbols in the ordinary symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36.

Each of the lottery counters C1 to C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS2 is used as a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. It will be done. Updated values are recorded in each lottery counter C1 to C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS1, and jackpot lottery results, variable display time of special symbols, jackpot type and loser type settings, and regular lottery results , is referred to by the MPU 41 when setting the variable display time of the normal symbol and the type per common symbol.

The special figure reservation storage area 412b includes a first special figure reservation storage area REA, a second special figure reservation storage area REB, and a special figure execution area AE. The first special figure reservation storage area REA includes a first reservation area REA1, a second reservation area REA2, a third reservation area REA3, a fourth reservation area REA4, and a first special figure reservation number storage area NAA. The second special figure reservation storage area REB includes a first reservation area REB1, a second reservation area REB2, a third reservation area REB3, a fourth reservation area REB4, and a second special figure reservation number storage area NAB.

When a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special symbol variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is It is acquired as the special figure success/failure information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in any one of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is It is acquired as the special figure success/failure information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. Note that the lottery counter storage area 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special symbol fluctuation (type counter CS1, etc.) may be provided individually.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the first holding area REA1 to the first special drawing holding storage area REA. 4 reservation area REA4, and any of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB.

Therefore, the special drawings stored in the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA and the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REB4 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB are In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game that is executed based on the symbol validity information, the special symbols (symbol display section 341 It is possible to determine in advance the variable display time (special pattern variation pattern) for the decorative pattern).

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the special figure winning/failure information is stored in the first holding area REA1, second holding area REA2, and third holding area REA3 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA. , are stored in an empty area in the priority order of the fourth reservation area REA4. In the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA, the number of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 in which special figure validity information is stored is stored as the first special figure reservation number N.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the special figure validity information includes the first holding area REB1, second holding area REB2, third holding area REB3, and third holding area REB3 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB. 4 reservation area REB4 is stored in a vacant area in priority order. In the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, the number of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 in which the special symbol validity information is stored is stored as the second special figure reservation number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA, and the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REB4 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB. With a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations, it is possible to reserve up to four pieces of special symbol win/fail information as winning histories for the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315, respectively.

In addition, it is also possible as another embodiment that the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315 are provided with a holding area where the maximum number of holdings is 8, and even in this case, the total number of holding areas is up to 8. It is possible to retain the special drawing winning history information as a winning history. The storage process of the special figure validity information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

The special symbol execution area AE is the first special symbol execution area AE in the first special symbol holding storage area REA when variable display of special symbols starts in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36. This storage area is used to move the special symbol validity information stored in the first reservation area REB1 of the first reservation area REA1 or the second special symbol reservation storage area REB. Specifically, the special figure validity information in the first holding area REB1 of the second special figure holding storage area REB is prioritized and moved to the special figure execution area AE, and When there is no special symbol validity information in REB1 and the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage area NAB is 0, the first reservation area of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA The special figure validity information of REA1 is moved to the special figure execution area AE. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game, and in the variable probability game state and the time-saving game state, which are high-frequency support modes, the game ball is placed on the right side area of the game board 31. The second special figure game is mainly executed by executing a so-called right-handed hit.

In addition, the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA and the second special figure reservation number storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area REB If the difference from the second special figure reservation number M stored in NAB is 2 or more, the value of the reservation area with a larger number may be given priority and moved to the special figure execution area AE. Other embodiments are possible. In addition, the special figure validity information of the first holding area REA1 of the first special figure holding storage area REA and the first holding area REB1 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB may be alternately moved to the special figure execution area AE. Other embodiments are possible.

Then, at the start of one special figure game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on numerical information stored as special figure success/failure information in the special figure execution area AE. At this time, if the first holding area REA1 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA is moved to the special drawing execution area AE, the special drawing validity information stored in the second holding area REA2 will be changed to the first holding area REA1. The special symbol validity information stored in the third reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the special symbol validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first holding area REB1 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB is moved to the special drawing execution area AE, the special drawing validity information stored in the second holding area REB2 is transferred to the first holding area REB1. The special symbol validity information stored in the third reservation area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the special symbol validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. will be returned to. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated in the same way as the jackpot random number counter C1. Then, the game balls are placed in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening in the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA1 or the second special drawing holding storage area REA2. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the timing of winning at 315 is stored.

There are two types of random number values for winning the jackpot, depending on the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area in the ROM 411, corresponding to the low probability mode which is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state, and the high probability mode which is the variable probability gaming state. It is set. Here, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode validity table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode validity table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B), the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot probability) is set to the game setting value as a low probability mode win/fail table and a high probability mode win/fail table, respectively. A plurality of different validity tables are provided depending on the situation. The low probability mode success/failure table and the high probability mode success/failure table each include six success/failure tables corresponding to six levels of game setting values 1 to 6. In the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high jackpot probability that is advantageous to the player. becomes.

With game setting value 1, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 206 (0 to 205) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 821 (0 to 820) probability mode validity tables. That is, with the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/79.1, which is about four times that of the low probability mode. 9 (820/65536).

With game setting value 2, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 212 (0 to 211) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 845 (0 to 844) probability mode validity tables. That is, at game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/77.1, which is about four times that of the low probability mode. 6 (845/65536).

With game setting value 3, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 218 (0 to 217) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 869 (0 to 868) probability mode validity tables. In other words, at game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

With game setting value 4, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 224 (0 to 223) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 893 (0 to 892) probability mode validity tables. That is, with the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

At game setting value 5, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 230 (0 to 229) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 917 (0 to 916) probability mode validity tables. That is, at game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

With game setting value 6, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 236 (0 to 235) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 236 (0 to 235) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 941 (0 to 940) probability mode validity tables. That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

It should be noted that if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers that result in a jackpot win, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

Here, in the low-probability mode win/fail table and the high-probability mode win/fail table, the random numbers that result in a jackpot are common in jackpot drawings between the same game setting values, but it is also possible that the random numbers that are a jackpot are not common. It will be done. Furthermore, the random numbers that result in a jackpot win may not be continuous values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

Further, six low probability mode success/failure tables and six high probability mode success/failure tables are provided according to the six levels of game setting values, but it is sufficient that there is at least one success/failure table for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low probability mode success/failure tables corresponding to game setting values at multiple levels, while providing one high probability mode success/failure table. That is, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of stages of game setting values for the low probability mode, and to make the jackpot probability uniform without providing a staged game setting value for the high probability mode. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be made uniform, and a plurality of levels of game setting values may be provided in the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots, variable jackpot and normal jackpot, is set according to the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 9(C) is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 9(C), when the type of special pattern game is the first special pattern game triggered by winning in the first winning hole 314, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R probability variable jackpot is from 0 to 9. The number of random numbers that result in a 16R probability variable jackpot is five from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot is five from 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of special figure game is a second special figure game triggered by winning in the second winning hole 315, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R probability variable jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and a 16R probability variable jackpot. The number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that normally result in a jackpot in 5R is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is set to be the same at 75%, but compared to the first special symbol game, the probability of winning is 16R in the second special symbol game. The probability of a guaranteed jackpot is set high. That is, in the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b) and the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the normal game state (low probability mode and electric Compared to the low-frequency support mode (in which the probability of opening the accessory 315b is low), the expected value of acquiring game balls when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set higher.

In both the first special figure game and the second special figure game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability-variable jackpot, the probability-variable game state (high probability mode and high-frequency support mode) is entered after the end of the jackpot game. Transition. In the gaming machine 10, no upper limit is set for the number of special symbol games that can be executed in the variable probability gaming state, and the gaming machine 10 is configured as a so-called loop probability variable machine.

Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is entered after the jackpot game ends. In the gaming machine 10, an upper limit value (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special figure games that can be executed in the time-saving game state (number of time-saving games), and a jackpot is achieved within this upper limit value of the number of special figure games. If the result of the lottery is not a jackpot, a transition is made to a normal game state which is a low-frequency support mode after the execution of the special figure game of the upper limit value. In addition, the number of times the special figure game is played in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100 times, but may be another number of times.

In addition, the transition from the variable probability gaming state to the normal gaming state is not limited to the case where the special figure game with the upper limit value is executed, but may be executed, for example, when the state transition lottery (fall lottery) is won. . In this case, until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times, the transition (fall) from the variable probability game state to the normal game state is prevented, and the predetermined number of times is set as the minimum number of special figure games to be executed in the variable probability game state. Guarantees may also be considered. This prevents the number of special figure games executed in variable probability game states from becoming significantly reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, individual winnings are made for each of the first winning hole 314, which becomes an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second winning hole 315, which becomes an opportunity to execute the second special symbol game upon winning. A minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same for games. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop-probability machine, but may also be configured as an ST machine including a V-ST machine, a type-two type mixed machine, or the like.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", " It is determined whether it is a "5R normal jackpot" or a "miss".

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R definite variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which a variable prize opening 316 is opened in a predetermined manner is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed. In addition, as an opening mode of the variable winning a prize hole 316 in each round game, it is possible to open the variable winning a prize hole 316 once, for example. Of course, it is also possible to open the variable winning hole 316 multiple times in some or all of the round games.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, a transition is made to a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high and a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. In this embodiment, the variable probability gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of 5R normal jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, the game shifts to a time-saving game state which is a low probability mode in which the probability of winning the jackpot is low and a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. In the present embodiment, the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) continues until the player is notified of the lottery results of the jackpot lottery a preset number of times, such as 100 times. , or ends when the player is notified that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot before the predetermined number of times has elapsed.

In addition, it is also possible to perform a falling lottery from the variable probability game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state in the special figure game as another embodiment. In addition, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, the transition from the variable probability gaming state to the jackpot gaming state and the time saving gaming state is not made. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpots: a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, and a 5R normal jackpot. It is also possible to have other jackpot types such as round normal jackpot and 16R normal jackpot.

In addition, the reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated by sequentially incrementing it by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17, which will be described later, and reaches the maximum value. It is later set back to 0. Then, the game balls are placed in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening in the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA1 or the second special drawing holding storage area REA2. 315, the value of the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning is stored.

In the gaming machine 10, the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss is selected by the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, according to the out-of-reach type table stored in the out-of-reach type table storage area in the ROM 411, after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops before and after the out-of-reach pattern, and a reach also occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of three types of out-of-reach is set, including a reach other than before and after out-of-reach where the final stop symbol stops at a place other than before and after the reach-to-reach symbol, and a complete out-of-reach where no reach occurs.

Here, FIG. 9(D) is a diagram showing an example of a deviation type table. In the example shown in FIG. 9(D), the value of the random number that results in a reach that is out of the order is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that results in a reach other than the end or end is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that causes a reach that is completely out of the order is 39. ~238. In addition, the MPU 41 determines that a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a special pattern game in which a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variation jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, in a special pattern game that shifts to a jackpot game state. .

Here, reach refers to a state in which a symbol combination of decorative symbols indicating winning a jackpot is likely to occur during the period from when the fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol display section 341 starts until when the symbols are stopped and displayed. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions of decorative symbols on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is fluctuated. be. In addition, while the reach in the symbol display section 341 is in a fluctuating state, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the level of expectation, or a story production process in which the player's operations on the operation buttons 20 are reflected in the production. Participatory operation performance processing and the like are executed. Note that during execution of these production processes, the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner.

The special figure variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 displays a special symbol (symbol display section) in the first special symbol display section 362 or second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery The special figure variation pattern type (variable display time of special symbols) indicating the variable display time of the decorative symbols in 341 is determined. By determining the special figure fluctuation pattern type in this way, the audio lamp control device 5 can control general characteristics such as multi-reach performance, super reach performance, and special reach performance of high-speed fluctuation performance (basic performance, non-reach performance). The variation type (performance pattern) in the figure game is determined according to the special figure variation pattern type (variation display time of special symbols). The special figure variation type counter CS1 is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main process of FIG. 21, which will be described later, is executed once by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated in step S1414 even within the remaining time in the main process. . Then, the game balls are placed in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening in the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA1 or the second special drawing holding storage area REA2. 315, the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 at the timing of winning is stored.

Then, the MPU 41 determines the variable display time of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and a variation table (see FIGS. 10(A) to 10(C)) that is preset according to the result of the jackpot lottery. Determine the special figure fluctuation pattern that indicates. Specifically, the MPU 41 stores a normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 10(A)), a probability variable jackpot variation table (see FIG. 10(B)), or a miss variation table (see FIG. 10(B)) stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. The special figure fluctuation pattern type is specified with reference to FIG. 10(C)). Note that these fluctuation tables may be provided separately for low probability mode and high probability mode. Moreover, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

Here, FIG. 10(A), FIG. 10(B), and FIG. 10(C) are diagrams showing examples of variation tables. In the normal jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 10(A), the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 10(B), and the loss fluctuation table shown in FIG. Patterns are associated in advance. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R regular jackpot", the MPU 41 displays the normal jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. The probability variable jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 10(B) is referred to, and when the lottery result is a "lose", the loss fluctuation table shown in FIG. 10(C) is referred to, and the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern is specified.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10(A) and 10(B), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variable jackpot variation table, the special symbol variation pattern "01" is set according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. to "03" is selected. Here, when the special symbol variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach production pattern with a variation display time of 30 seconds as the variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 etc. A special game performance is executed according to a normal reach performance pattern. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is the normal reach performance. In addition, when the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern with a variation display time of 60 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 etc. A special game performance is executed according to the super reach performance pattern. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is the super reach performance. Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the special reach production pattern with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds as the variation type (production pattern), and the symbol display section 341 etc. A special game performance is executed according to a special reach performance pattern. The special reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is a special reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 10(C), the deviation variation table corresponds to the stop display type of the decorative symbol when a deviation is determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3 (reach outside the front and back, reach other than the front and back, and complete failure). Therefore, a correspondence relationship between the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the special figure variation pattern is determined. More specifically, when the stop display type at the time of a miss is a reach that is out of front and back or a reach other than a reach that is out of front and back, one of the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected depending on the value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1. is selected. On the other hand, when the stop display type at the time of a miss is a complete miss, either the special figure variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the special figure variation type counter CS1. In addition, when the special figure variation pattern "04" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach production pattern (7 seconds non-reach production pattern) with a variation display time of 7 seconds as the variation type (production pattern type). Then, a special figure game performance is executed in accordance with the 7 second non-reach performance pattern on the symbol display section 341 or the like. In addition, when the special figure variation pattern "05" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach production pattern (10 seconds non-reach production pattern) with a variation display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (production pattern type). Then, a special figure game performance is executed in accordance with the 10-second non-reach performance pattern on the symbol display section 341 or the like.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variable display when a winning pattern corresponds to the special pattern variation pattern "04", the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed as a combination of missing symbols without accompanying a preview effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. A fluctuating display of the outlier pattern that is stopped and displayed is executed. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, as a fluctuating display when a winning pattern corresponds to the special pattern fluctuation pattern "05", the fluctuating display of decorative symbols stops when the combination of symbols comes off, accompanied by a preview performance in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. A variable display of the displayed deviation pattern is executed. In addition, when the fluctuation display is displayed when the player misses the special figure fluctuation pattern "05", a player participation type operation performance that reflects the player's operation of the operation button 20 may be executed as a preview performance. be.

In addition, the type of special figure variation pattern is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 10(A), FIG. 10(B), and FIG. 10(C).

For example, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the normal reach performance executed in the normal reach performance pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "01", and the normal reach performance is selected from among them. One of the normal reach effects will be executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the super reach performance executed in the super reach performance pattern corresponding to the special pattern variation pattern "02". One of the super reach effects selected from is executed. The super reach performance is a reach performance with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach performance, and the probability (expectation level) of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is higher than the normal reach performance, and the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than the special reach performance. This is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation level) is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of special reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as special reach performances executed in the special reach performance pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "03", among which One of the special reach effects selected from is executed. The special reach performance is a reach performance that has a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach performance, and is, for example, a performance that develops from the normal reach performance or the super reach performance. The special reach performance is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expectation level) of winning the jackpot is higher than the normal reach performance or the special reach performance.

Note that the performance patterns corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern include operation performances in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance, for example, a single-shot operation performance in which a single-shot operation is reflected in the performance, and a button operated by the player. This may include operation performances in which the player participates, such as a continuous-hit operation performance in which a continuous tap operation of 20 is reflected in the performance, and a long-press operation performance in which a long-press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variable display time of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 (the variable display time of the decorative symbol on the symbol display section 341), A special figure variation pattern command indicating the special figure variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is input to the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 selects a special figure with "A" attached in front of the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Outputs one of the variable pattern commands "A01" to "A03". In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R definite strange jackpot", the MPU 41 uses a special symbol fluctuation pattern with "B" attached in front of the special symbol fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" indicating that it is a 5R definite strange jackpot. Outputs one of the commands “B01” to “B03”. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R guaranteed strange jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "C" to the front of the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 16R guaranteed strange jackpot. Outputs one of the commands “C01” to “C03”. In addition, if the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 issues a special pattern fluctuation pattern command "D01" with a "D" indicating a loss in front of the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "05". ~ Output one of "D05". That is, the special figure variation pattern command includes not only the special figure variation pattern (time of special figure game) which is the variable display time of the special symbol, but also information specifying the result of the jackpot lottery. The audio lamp control device 5 is capable of determining not only the special pattern fluctuation pattern (special pattern game time), which is the variable display time of the special pattern, but also the result of the jackpot lottery, based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern command. Based on the variable display time of the special symbol (special symbol game time) and the result of the jackpot lottery, the variation type (performance pattern) displayed on the symbol display section 341 etc. and the stoppage of the decorative symbol can be determined. Decide details such as display combinations. Then, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display section 341 to display the decorative pattern in a variable manner and stop display based on details such as the determined variation type (performance pattern), and also performs an image effect in accordance with the variable display of the decorative pattern. Furthermore, the speaker 26 performs a sound performance in accordance with the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, and the illumination section 27 performs an illumination performance (lamp performance).

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 executes a simple process for determining the display time of the decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. It turns out. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode of the decorative symbols actually displayed on the symbol display section 341 are determined by the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes. It is.

The variation tables shown in FIGS. 10(A) to 10(C) are commonly used in various gaming states (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, and variable probability gaming state), but the variation tables shown in FIGS. 10(A) to 10(C) are Alternatively, variable tables may be set separately for the high-frequency support mode (time-saving gaming state and variable probability gaming state) and the low-frequency support mode. In addition, when setting individual fluctuation tables for each gaming state or support mode, the average value of the fluctuation display time may be higher in the normal gaming state (low-frequency support mode), for example in the time-saving gaming state and in the variable-probability gaming state (high-frequency support mode). frequency support mode). In addition, when setting different fluctuation tables for the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state, the average value of the fluctuation display time may be set longer in the time-saving gaming state than in the variable probability gaming state, or It may be set longer than the time-saving gaming state.

Here, FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an example of the general drawing reservation storage area 412c of the storage area of the main controller 4 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the common picture holding storage area 412c includes the common picture first holding area SE1, the common picture second holding area SE2, the common picture third holding area SE3, the common picture fourth holding area SE4, and the common picture fluctuation It includes a pending number storage area SNA and a general figure execution area SAE.

The first holding area SE1 to the fourth holding area SE4 are normal winning random number counters C4 that are acquired as normal drawing correctness information used in the winning lottery when the game balls pass through the through gates 317L and 317R. , a normal winning type random number counter C5, and a normal pattern variation type counter CS2.

The ordinary figure fluctuation reservation number storage area SNA stores the number of ordinary figures first reservation area SE1 to ordinary figure fourth reservation area SE4 in which ordinary figures validity information is stored. That is, the normal figure fluctuation pending number storage area SNA is a storage area that stores the number of pending rights to play the normal figure game.

The normal pattern execution area SAE is a memory used to move the normal pattern validity information in the normal pattern first holding area SE1 when the fluctuating display of the normal pattern starts in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36. It is an area. Then, at the start of one normal pattern game, the MPU 41 executes numerical information (normal winning random number counter C4, normal winning type random number counter C5, general pattern variation type 12(A) and 12(B)) and a per-normal pattern classification table (see FIGS. 12(C) and 12(B)) based on the value of counter CS2). (D)) is used to perform a lottery for a common symbol, and a common symbol variation table (not shown) is used to determine the common symbol fluctuation display time for the normal symbol. At this time, if the general pattern validity information stored in the general pattern first holding area SE1 is moved to the general pattern execution area SAE, the general pattern correctness information stored in the general pattern second holding area SE2 is The normal pattern correctness information shifted to the first holding area SE1 and stored in the normal pattern third holding area SE3 is shifted to the normal pattern second holding area SE2, and the normal pattern correctness information is stored in the basic pattern fourth holding area SE4. The information is shifted to the general map third holding area SE3.

The normal winning random number counter C4 is periodically updated by sequentially incrementing it by 1 within the range of 0 to 299, for example, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. 17, which will be described later, and after reaching the maximum value. Returned to 0. The value of the normal winning random number counter C4 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R is stored in the normal pattern first holding area SE1 to the normal pattern fourth holding area SE4 of the normal pattern holding storage area 412c. be done. In addition, at a predetermined timing, a lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time is performed based on the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal drawing holding storage area 412c.

Here, FIGS. 12(A) and 12(B) are diagrams illustrating an example of a normal figure hit/fail table. In the present embodiment, there are two types of normal pattern hit/failure tables: a low frequency support mode normal pattern hit/failure table shown in FIG. 12(A), and a high frequency support mode normal pattern hit/fail table shown in FIG. 12(B). is set. That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the probability of hitting a regular symbol is different between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, and the probability of hitting a regular symbol is higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. It is set.

The low-frequency support mode normal figure win/failure table shown in FIG. 12(A) is a table used in the normal figure winning lottery in the normal gaming state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 12(A), in the low-frequency support mode normal figure hit/failure table, when the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is 0, the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is 1 to 299. If it is set to off. That is, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the probability of winning a normal figure is set to 1/300, and the operating frequency of the electric accessory 315b is made low.

The high-frequency support mode normal figure winning probability table shown in FIG. 12(B) is a table used in the common figure winning lottery in the variable probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, which are the high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 12(B), in the high-frequency support mode normal figure hit/failure table, contrary to the low frequency support mode normal figure hit/failure table, when the value of the random number counter C4 for a normal figure is 0, the result is lost. When the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is 1 to 299, it is set to be per ordinary figure. In other words, in the fixed variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (high-frequency support mode), the probability of hitting a regular symbol is set to 299/300, and the probability of hitting a regular symbol is set higher than in the normal gaming state (low-frequency support mode). At the same time, the frequency of operation of the electric accessory 315b is increased.

Note that the probability of winning a low-frequency support mode normal pattern and the probability of hitting a normal pattern of high-frequency support mode are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 12(A) and 12(B) and can be changed as appropriate.

In step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17, which will be described later, the normal winning type random number counter C5 is periodically updated by sequentially incrementing it by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and reaches the maximum value. It is later set back to 0. Then, the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R is stored in the normal pattern first holding area SE1 to the normal pattern fourth holding area SE4 of the normal pattern holding storage area 412c. Stored. In addition, when the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area SE4 is a general pattern win, the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area By the value of the normal hit type random number counter C5 stored in the area SE4, the type per normal pattern (per short open normal pattern and per long open normal pattern), that is, the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is set.

Here, FIG. 12(C) and FIG. 12(D) are diagrams showing an example of a type distribution table per ordinary figure. In this embodiment, as the type distribution table per ordinary figure, the low frequency support mode type distribution table per ordinary figure shown in FIG. 12(C) and the type distribution table per common figure in the high frequency support mode shown in FIG. Two types are set: a minute table. That is, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the distribution probabilities of the types per regular map (per short open regular map and per long open regular map) are different between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode.

Here, in the case of a short-open normal win, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the game ball is placed in the second prize opening 315 for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds). A game with a short open normal pattern that allows the player to enter the ball is executed. In this short-open normal game, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315 because the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is short, and in many cases, the game ball does not enter the second winning hole 315. .

On the other hand, in the case of a long-open normal pattern win, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a longer time (for example, 6 seconds) than in the short-open normal pattern game, so that the second winning hole 315 is opened more than in the short-open normal pattern game. A long open normal pattern winning game is executed in which the game ball can enter the ball for a long time (for example, 6 seconds). In this long open regular map winning game, since the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is long, the game ball easily enters the second prize opening 315, and the right to execute the second special map game is limited to the upper limit number (for example, 4). ).

The low-frequency support mode per-regular figure type distribution table shown in FIG. 12(C) is a table used in the lottery per per-regular figure in the normal gaming state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 12(C), in the low-frequency support mode per normal pattern type distribution table, when the value of the per normal pattern random number counter C5 is 0 to 99, the type random number per short open general pattern, per normal pattern When the value of the counter C5 is between 100 and 199, it is set per long open standard figure. In other words, in the normal gaming state (low frequency support mode), the distribution ratio between short open regular symbols and long open regular symbols is set to 1:1. Of course, the distribution ratio between the short open normal pattern and the long open normal pattern in the normal gaming state (low frequency support mode) does not necessarily have to be 1:1 and can be changed as appropriate. The distribution rate per figure is zero (the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 per long open general figure is zero) or approximately zero (the value of the ordinary per type random number counter C5 per long open general figure is 1 or 2) It is also possible to set it to

The high-frequency support mode normal figure type distribution table shown in FIG. 12(D) is a table used in the common figure lottery in the variable probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state, which are the high-frequency support modes. As shown in FIG. 12(D), in the high-frequency support mode per ordinary figure type distribution table, when the value of the type random number counter C5 per ordinary figure is 0, the type random number counter C5 per short open ordinary figure, When the value of is between 1 and 199, it is set per long open general map. In other words, in the variable probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (high frequency support mode), it is set so that it is easier to be sorted into long open regular symbols than short open regular symbols. Of course, the distribution ratio between the short open normal pattern and the long open normal pattern in the variable probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state (high frequency support mode) is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 12(D), but may be determined as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the distribution rate per short open regular map to zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 per short open regular map is zero).

Note that the electric accessory 315b is not limited to being opened once per game per common figure, but may be opened multiple times. In this case, the opening time and opening interval (interval between openings) of each opening of the electric accessory 315b in one game per common figure may be one type or multiple types.

The general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main process of FIG. It is repeatedly updated in step S1414 even within the remaining time within the main process. Then, the value of the regular pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gates 317L, 317R is stored in the standard pattern first holding area SE1 to the standard pattern fourth holding area SE4 of the standard pattern holding storage area 412c. Stored. Further, at a predetermined timing, the general pattern fluctuation display time is determined with reference to the general pattern fluctuation display table (not shown) based on the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the general pattern holding storage area 412c. Ru.

The general pattern fluctuation display table (not shown) includes, for example, a high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation table that is referred to when in high frequency support mode, and a low frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation table that is referred to when in low frequency support mode. and a fluctuation display table. In the high-frequency support mode ordinary figure fluctuation display table and the low-frequency support mode ordinary figure fluctuation display table, a plurality of ordinary figure fluctuation display times are set in correspondence with, for example, the value of the ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2. Further, normally, the high frequency support mode ordinary figure fluctuation display table is set so that the average time of ordinary figure fluctuation display time is shorter than that of the low frequency support mode ordinary figure fluctuation display table. For example, some fluctuation display times set in the high-frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table are set to be longer than some fluctuation display times set in the low-frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table. All the fluctuation display times set in the high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table may be set to be longer than all the fluctuation display times set in the low frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table. You can.

Note that a common pattern fluctuation display table may be set in both the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, and at least one of the high-frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table and the low-frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table. The number of ordinary figure fluctuation display times set in one ordinary figure fluctuation display table may be one type. Further, the general pattern fluctuation display time may be set according to the general pattern fluctuation pending number X. For example, the general pattern fluctuation display time may be set to become shorter as the general pattern fluctuation pending number X increases. , it may be set such that the smaller the number of pending changes in ordinary figures X is, the longer the ordinary figure fluctuation display time becomes.

Here, FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information regarding game history, ball payout performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, the game information storage area 412d includes "Number of out balls", "Number of balls paid out from the general winning hole", "Number of balls paid out from the first winning hole", and "Number of balls paid out from the second winning hole" as the game information. ”, “Variable winning slot payout number of balls”, “Setting value”, “Base information”, “Continuous accessory ratio information”, “Role ratio information”, “Cumulative number of jackpot drawings”, “Number of unit jackpot drawings”, The "number of jackpot hits" and "number of consecutive losses" are stored. Among these game information, "game setting value", "base information", "continuous accessory ratio information", "accessory ratio information", and "number of unit jackpot drawings" are game information related to ball payout performance (performance information ).

“Number of out balls” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired onto the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17, which will be described later.

The "number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" is the cumulative value of game balls paid out in response to winnings to the general winning hole 313 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" is the prize ball command setting in step S1403 in the main process of FIG. When setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winnings to the general winning opening 313 in the process, it is updated to a value that adds the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. .

“Number of balls paid out from the first winning hole” is an integrated value of game balls paid out in response to winnings to the first winning hole 314 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of balls paid out from the first winning hole" is determined by the number of winning balls in step S1403 in the main process of FIG. When setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning into the first winning opening 314 in the command setting process, the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Update to.

"Number of balls paid out from the second winning hole" is an integrated value of game balls paid out in response to winnings to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "number of balls paid out from the second winning hole" is determined by the number of winning balls in step S1403 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command to make the payout control device 7 pay out the number of prize balls according to the winnings to the second winning opening 315 in the command setting process, the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Update to.

The "variable winning hole payout ball number" is the cumulative value of game balls paid out in response to winnings in the variable winning hole 316 in the jackpot game state. This "variable winning hole payout number of balls" is the prize ball command setting in step S1403 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the variable winning opening 316 in the process, it is updated to a value that adds the number of paid balls due to the current winning. .

The "gaming setting value" is for selecting the low probability mode winning/failure table (see Figure 9(A)) and the high probability mode winning/failing table (see FIG. 9(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (win/fail determination). . In other words, the "game setting value" defines the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In this embodiment, as described later, there are six levels of setting values (six types of low probability mode success/failure tables with different jackpot probabilities (see Figure 9(A)) and high probability mode success/failure tables (see Figure 9(B))). is being prepared. The "game setting value" is updated in the game setting value changing process shown in FIG. 35, which will be described later.

"Base information" is information about the "base" which is the payout rate (ball output rate) in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this "base" is the "number of out balls" in the normal gaming state. ” is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out of the “general winning hole number of paid out balls” and “first winning hole number of paid out balls”. When the "base" is expressed in a mathematical formula, "base" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" + "number of balls paid out from the first winning hole") / "number of out balls". The "base information" includes information regarding the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36, which will be described later (steps S2505 and S2506). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent number of out balls reached 60,000 balls is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous number of out balls reached 60,000 balls is The 60,000-ball base B2 from the previous game is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412, respectively. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. In addition, if the current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, the "base information" includes the "number of balls paid out from the general winning opening" and "the number of balls paid out from the first winning opening." Apart from the "Number of balls paid out" and "Number of out balls", "Number of balls paid out from the general winning opening", "Number of balls paid out from the first winning opening", and "Number of out balls" for base calculation are stored.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes "current base BL", "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and "previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are included in the history. However, the past three or more 60,000-ball bases may be kept as a history. Further, the "base information" may include the cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

"Continuous role object ratio information" is the total number of balls paid out by winning in all the winning holes (general winning hole 313, 1st winning hole 314, 2nd winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) from which prize balls are paid out. This is information regarding the "continuous role ratio" which is the ratio occupied by the number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening. When the "continuous accessory ratio" is expressed in a mathematical formula, "continuous accessory ratio" = 100 x "number of variable winning holes paid out balls" / "total number of paid balls". The "continuous accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process shown in FIG. 36, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "continuous accessory ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous accessory ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall until the present. The "continuous role ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), or for a period until a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state. It may be a continuous accessory ratio for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous accessory ratio information" may include both the cumulative consecutive accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio over a certain number of periods.

"Accessory ratio information" is based on the total number of balls paid out by winning in all winning holes (general winning hole 313, 1st winning hole 314, 2nd winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) from which prize balls are paid out. , is information regarding the "accessory ratio" which is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out from the second winning hole and the variable number of balls paid out from the variable winning hole. When the "accessory ratio" is expressed in a mathematical formula, it is "accessory ratio" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the second winning opening" + "number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening")/"total number of balls paid out". The "accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process shown in FIG. 36, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "accessory object ratio information" is stored as the cumulative accessory ratio from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. In addition, the "accessory ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state, It may be an accessory ratio for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous accessory ratio information" may include both the cumulative accessory ratio and the accessory ratio over a certain number of periods.

The "cumulative number of jackpot drawings" refers to the number of jackpot drawings held in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the time the gaming machine 10 was started before the game hall opened for business until now. It is the number of times. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is determined by the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 triggered by a win in the first prize opening 314 in the normal gaming state. It is also the number of cumulative changes displayed. The "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is displayed in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in step S2106 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. 1 is added each time the variable display of 2 special symbols is started. Further, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

"Number of unit jackpot drawings" is the number of jackpot drawings triggered by a winning of a certain number of minus difference balls in the first prize opening 314 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) (main (number of times the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display section of the display section 36 has been executed). In this embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting "the number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" and "the number of balls paid out from the first winning hole" from the "number of out balls". In other words, the "unit jackpot lottery number" is the number of fluctuating displays of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 for an average of 1,000 yen (jackpot (number of times the lottery was received). Note that the "number of unit jackpot drawings" may be the number of jackpot drawings for a certain number of "out balls" in the normal gaming state. The “unit jackpot lottery number” is updated in the specific performance information update process shown in FIG. 36, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot drawings" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot drawings from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall until the present. Note that the "number of unit jackpot drawings" refers to a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state, It may be for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, both the cumulative number of unit jackpot drawings and the number of unit jackpot drawings in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information as the "number of unit jackpot drawings."

The "number of jackpots" is the number of times that the jackpot lottery result was a jackpot after the game machine 10 was activated before the gaming hall started operating until now. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by 1 each time a jackpot game is started, for example, in the jackpot game control process shown in FIG. 29, which will be described later. Furthermore, the "number of jackpots" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

"Number of consecutive losses" is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is consecutively unsuccessful in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and if the lottery result is a jackpot, it is 0 times. cleared. The "number of consecutive misses" is determined when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is When starting the variable display of the special figure, if the result of the judgment based on the low probability mode correctness table in step S2103 is wrong, it is added by 1, and if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, it is cleared to 0 times. be done. In this embodiment, the "number of consecutive losses" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of consecutive losses" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 14, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "setting values" stored as gaming information (performance information) in a gaming information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. . The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a set value display section 45, a set value change operation section 46, and a ROM47. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 15, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a position where it can be viewed when the inner frame 12 is expanded (FIG. reference). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-seg display. Although the performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, it may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and may be provided in other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. may be provided. It is also possible to display the "base information" using the first special symbol display section 362 and/or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

The 7-segment displays 431 to 434 can display numbers "0" to "9" and alphabets "A" to "F". In addition, in the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when displaying the alphabet "B", a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "8" and the number "8." is displayed, and the alphabet "D" is displayed. When displayed, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "0" and "0" is displayed. Furthermore, when displaying any of the alphabets "A" to "F", it is also possible to light up dots to clearly indicate the alphabet.

In the performance display monitor 43, among the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments in which "base type" is displayed as an abbreviation, and the right two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments in which "base type" is displayed as an abbreviation. Displays 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which base values (%) calculated by the MPU 41 are displayed. For example, in a case where the current base BL is 31%, "BL", which is an abbreviation for the current base BL, is "8." and "L" on the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432, which are identification segments. The base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" on the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434, which are ratio segments. That is, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display "8.", "L", "3", and "1" in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 is used to collectively turn on and off the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) when pressed, and is located in an easily operable position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded. (See Figure 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on when the upper half of the performance display switch 44 is pressed, and the power is turned off when the lower half is pressed. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn on the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, allowing the performance display monitor 43 to display base information. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn off the power, the power to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. . Note that the performance display switch 44 may be provided at a location other than the main controller 4.

Here, FIG. 15(A) is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 15(B) to 15(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 yen is displayed as "base information". The sequence loops from ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2 to current base BL, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. The example shown in FIG. 15(B) shows that the current base BL is 28%, and the example shown in FIG. 15(C) shows that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%. In the example shown in , it is shown that the base B2 of 60,000 balls from the time before last was 32%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

In addition, programs necessary to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as a program that calculates the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and the current base information on the performance display monitor 43. A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the two-previous 60,000-ball base B2 at regular intervals is stored in a ROM 47 provided in the main controller 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. Thereby, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in the ROM 411. Further, a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main controller 4.

In addition, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of or in addition to the "base information", "continuous accessory ratio information" and "accessory ratio information" are stored in the game information storage area 412d. Other performance information may also be displayed.

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured with other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 14, the setting value display section 45 is used to select the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 9(A)) and the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 9(B)) to be referred to in the jackpot lottery. It displays the above-mentioned game setting values, and is composed of a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display section 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured with other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display, and may be configured using the performance display monitor 43. Game setting values may also be displayed.

The setting value change operation unit 46 turns on and off the power of the 7-segment display by pressing the unit, and allows changing the setting value by rotating the 7-segment display when the power is turned on. The set value change operation section 46 has a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, for example, and a function as a rotary switch whose contacts are switched by a rotation operation (rotation by a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of display on the setting value display section 45 of the main controller 4.

As shown in FIG. 16(A), when the set value display section 45 is in the off state and the set value change operation section 46 is pressed, the 7 segment display is energized and the set value display section A number is displayed at 45. The numbers displayed at this time are the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicate the current setting values. In the illustrated example, the set value is "1". On the other hand, if the set value change operation section 46 is pressed while the set value display section 45 is lit, the power to the 7-segment display is cut off, causing the set value display section 45 to turn off. Become.

As shown in FIG. 16(B), when the set value display section 45 is in a lit state and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is changed. . In the illustrated example, when the set value display section 45 is rotated clockwise, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 increases, and when the set value display section 45 is rotated counterclockwise, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 becomes larger. The number displayed will be smaller. When the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display section 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as a setting value. Therefore, if the power to the 7-segment display is turned off by pressing the set value change operation part 46 while the number corresponding to the desired set value is displayed on the set value display part 45, the power will not be turned off. The number that was displayed immediately before is determined as the setting value. Thereby, the MPU 41 selects a low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 9(A)) or a high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 9(B)) selected according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. A jackpot lottery can be held based on the following.

Note that the method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of rotating the set value changing operation section 46 and then turning off the power of the set value display section 45. For example, the setting value can be determined by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see Figure 1), or by repeatedly pressing or holding down the operation button 20 (see Figure 1). A method of changing the number displayed on the value display section 45 and then turning off the power of the set value display section 45. A method of displaying the set value by inserting a key into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4, etc. and rotating the key. It is also possible to change the number displayed on the section 45 and then remove the key.

Here, the performance information display device 4A including the set value display section 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. Further, the control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Therefore, the setting value display section 45 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 with respect to the front frame 11, the setting value display section 45 can be set to the outside of the game machine 10 (on the front side of the front frame 11). ), it is possible to select a visible state or an invisible state. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11, the setting value display section 45 cannot be visually recognized, while opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11. The setting value display section 45 can be visually recognized. As a result, when a player plays a game on the gaming machine 10, the setting value display section 45 is not visible unless the game board 31 is opened. The value is prevented from being grasped by the player. Then, when the setting value display section 45 is in the lit state, the setting value changing operation section 46 is turned off by pressing the setting value changing operation section 46 . Therefore, by keeping the set value display section 45 in an off state during business hours of the game hall, the set value display section 45 can be visually recognized when the game board 31 is opened due to balls jamming in the game machine 10, etc. Even if the player is in the state, the setting value display section 45 can prevent the player from grasping the setting value.

On the other hand, when the set value display section 45 is in the off state, when the set value change operation section 46 is pressed, the set value display section 45 is turned on, and the numbers corresponding to the game set values are hidden. Therefore, when the game board 31 is opened to the front frame 11 and the set value change operation section 46 is pressed during non-business hours of the game hall, the set value display section 45 is turned on. The game setting value can be confirmed based on the numbers displayed on the setting value display section 45, and furthermore, the game setting value can be changed by rotating the setting value changing operation section 46. This makes it possible to change the setting value outside of business hours with a simple operation while ensuring the confidentiality of the setting value during business hours.

In this embodiment, the performance information display device 4A is provided in the main control device 4, but the performance information display device 4A may be provided separately from the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331. 33 may be provided separately from the main control unit 331.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a sound lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on the control signal input from the main control unit 331, the symbol fluctuation display and the Execute the performance display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Furthermore, the MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp blinking patterns used in special figure game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 sends commands to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4 by having the MPU 51 execute processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 511. (control signal) to control the display on the symbol display section 341. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the playback audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination section 27 in accordance with the display on the symbol display section 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls image display on the symbol display section 341, playback audio output from the speaker 26, and blinking mode of the illumination section 27 when executing a special figure game performance and a jackpot game performance that will be described later.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Then, commands such as a special figure variation pattern command, a first special figure hold command, a second special figure hold command, and a special figure shift command are inputted from the main controller 4 to the audio lamp control apparatus 5. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs display variation pattern commands and the like to the display control device 6. Note that another embodiment may include a configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5. Moreover, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes one control device having the functions of both the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also considered as another embodiment.

Further, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 . In the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 controls the audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination section 27 based on commands input from the main control device 4. Further, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input/output I/F 52. Thereby, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game performance is executed on the symbol display section 341 and the sound is output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control audio output effects, lamp effects based on the blinking mode of the illumination section 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 receives ordinary figure fluctuation pattern commands, electric accessory opening commands, electric accessory closing commands, special figure fluctuation pattern commands, first special figure holding commands, second special figure holding commands, and special figure holding commands input from the main controller 4. Figure shift command, jackpot game start command, opening start command, opening end command, open/close execution mode start command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, open/close execution mode end command, ending start command , an ending end command, a jackpot game end command, a game setting value change command, and other commands to perform predetermined arithmetic processing.

Specifically, when a special figure variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines a special figure variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern command, and controls the display of a display variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern. It is transmitted to the device 6 (see step S3107 in the command determination process in FIG. 47), and starts symbol variation display on the symbol display section 341. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the special symbol variation pattern command indicates a miss, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the miss is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command etc. inputted from the audio lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input/output I/F 62, etc., and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display section 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. Note that bidirectional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a 1-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of variable symbols such as decorative symbols used in the variable symbol display of the symbol display section 341, advance notice effects images, reach effect images, jackpot effect images, and miss effect images. ing. Note that the images displayed on the symbol display section 341 include still images and moving images. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variable display and the effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stopper that switches whether or not to pay out game balls. It also includes a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls being paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, when a dispensing error such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 132 occurs to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

The ball rental device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 stores data in a recording medium such as a card inserted into the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set in advance and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to pay out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, but may be a coin-shaped or stick-shaped storage medium that includes an IC chip, for example. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the amount of cash by inserting cash.

[Launching control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 moves the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the launch rail 321 by driving the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated. Let it feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22 and directs the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31 by driving the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation. and fire it. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is turned on and off at a preset period (for example, 0.6 seconds) as a drive signal. As a result, in the game machine 10, one game ball is fired toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22. Thereby, the firing control IC 81 determines, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, that the greater the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, the higher the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball firing mechanism 32. Adjust the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the firing handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily operate to stop the firing of the game ball. is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the firing handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball firing mechanism 32 stops firing the game balls. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and gaming in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 is prevented. Furthermore, the player can stop the firing of the game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with his/her thumb or the like at any timing while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drive units, etc., +5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, etc.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on and off the power to the gaming machine 10, and a RAM erasing switch 91 that is operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is in the ON state.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as a charging means that is charged with electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply is cut off, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. I judge that. In addition, when the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 41. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 performs a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed during a power outage. Executes NMI interrupt processing, etc. Note that in this embodiment, descriptions of startup processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described. Furthermore, in the start-up process, it is checked whether the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing to determine the detection state of a sensor connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, out ball sensor 318a, etc. are determined. At this time, if the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, and 317Ra is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information. Further, when an out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and updates the number of out balls in the gaming information storage area 412d. do.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, clears the counter value to 0. do.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the normal win random number counter C4, and the normal win type random number counter C5. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the normal win random number counter C4, and the normal win type random number counter C5, and When the value reaches the maximum value, the corresponding counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start-up winning process associated with a winning to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 18.

The launch control process starts the launch of the game ball on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is the process of enabling. In addition, the firing control process disables the firing of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the firing handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. This is the process of The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, when the game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, the MPU 41 executes through gate processing to update the information stored in the general figure holding storage area 412c of the RAM 412, and the main timer Ends interrupt processing. Note that details of the through gate processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the starting prize winning process will be explained with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a win in the first winning hole 314. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there has been a winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process moves to step S1102, and if it determines that there has been no winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), the process moves to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol reservation number N stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the first special figure reservation number N is the maximum reservation number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the first special figure reservation number N is not the maximum reservation number (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the first special figure reservation number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17, and in step S1402 in the main process in FIG. 21, which will be described later. And obtain the counter value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S1414, and apply the counter value to the first reservation areas REA1 to 4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. It is stored in the first vacant reservation area of the reservation area REA4.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol validity information for the first special symbol reservation acquired in step S1104 becomes the subject of judgment regarding the propriety of a jackpot in step S2102 or S2103 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. The content of the special figure validity information is confirmed, and a first special figure holding command setting process is executed to set the first special figure holding command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. The details of the first special figure pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 19.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a win in the second winning hole 315. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there has been a winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process moves to step S1107, and if it determines that there has been no winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: No). ), the start winning process ends.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (four in this embodiment). Here, if the second special symbol reservation number M is the maximum reservation number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process. On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number M is not the maximum reservation number (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the second special figure reservation number M as an update process (step S1108). .

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17, and in step S1402 in the main process in FIG. 21, which will be described later. And obtain the counter value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S1414, and apply the counter value to the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth of the second special figure reservation storage area REB of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. It is stored in the first vacant reservation area in the reservation area REB4.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol validity information for the second special symbol reservation obtained in step S1109 becomes a target for determination of the propriety of a jackpot in step S2102 or S2103 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. The content of the special figure validity information is confirmed, and a second special figure holding command setting process is executed to set a second special figure holding command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second special figure pending command setting process is similar to the first special figure pending command setting process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 19, detailed explanation will be omitted. The second special figure hold command setting process is the same as the first special figure hold command setting process in FIG. The number N" may be read as the "second reserved special drawing number M."

[First special figure hold command setting process]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special figure pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. In addition, the 1st special figure hold command includes information indicating that the command is the 1st special figure hold command, the result of the jackpot lottery (jacket type or loss), special figure fluctuation display time, and 1st special figure hold. Information such as the number N is included. Hereinafter, the first special figure pending command setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 19.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 19, the MPU 41 reads out the first special figure reservation number N from the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA, and at the same time reads out the first special figure reservation number N corresponding to each first special figure reservation. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is read from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is high probability mode, and if it is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process moves to step S1203. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the high probability mode (step S1202: No), that is, if it is in the low probability mode, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the high probability mode based on the variable probability gaming state flag. The variable probability gaming state flag is a flag indicating whether or not it is a variable probability gaming state, that is, whether or not it is a high probability mode. This variable probability gaming state flag is set to ON in step S2317 of FIG. 34 when the gaming state is transferred from the variable probability jackpot gaming state to the variable probability gaming state in the gaming state transition process described later, and the gaming state is changed from the variable probability gaming state to the variable probability gaming state. When shifting to the probability variable jackpot gaming state or the normal jackpot gaming state, it is set to OFF in step S2309 of FIG. 33.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out the high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 9(B)) stored according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 35, which will be described later, and selects the high probability mode. Based on the win/fail table, a win/fail determination is performed to determine whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 9(A)) that is saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 35, which will be described later, and Based on the probability mode validity table, a determination is made as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win.

In addition, in steps S1203 and S1204, the validity determination is performed based on the high probability mode validity table or the low probability mode validity table that is saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 35, which will be described later. However, in step S1203 or S1204, after reading the game setting value saved in step S2408 in the game setting value change process of FIG. The propriety judgment may be made by selecting the mode propriety table one by one.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process moves to step S1206. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to jackpot winning (step S1205: No), that is, if it is a loss, the process moves to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the special symbol winning/failure information is stored in the third holding area REA3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 18, the jackpot type counter included in the special drawing winning/failure information stored in the third holding area REA3 The counter values of C2 and special figure variation type counter CS1 are read out. In addition, among the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4, the holding area in which the special figure winning/failure information is stored in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 18 is stored in the first special drawing holding number storage area NAA. This can be determined based on the value of the number of reservations N.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, and the first special symbol reservation number N to the first special symbol reservation command. In this way, since the first special figure hold command includes the first special figure hold number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first special figure hold command By referring to the number of reservations N included in the 1 special symbol reservation command, the 1st special symbol reservation command corresponds to the 1st special symbol validity information stored in any of the 1st reservation area REA1 to the 4th reservation area REA4. It is possible to recognize whether the

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1, and the first special symbol reservation number N to the first special symbol reservation command (step S1209).

Note that the first special figure hold command set in step S1207 or S1209 of the first special figure hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as shown in FIG. It is deleted after being sent to the audio lamp control device 5 together with other commands in step S1401 of the main process. Furthermore, the content of the first special figure hold command explained here is only an example, and if it is possible to grasp the same content as the first special figure hold command in the voice lamp control device 5, the content will be explained here. It's not limited to what you do. For example, it is also possible that part or all of the information of the first special figure reservation command is included in other commands.

[Through gate processing]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the through gate process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. In the through gate process, when the game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the general figure reservation storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The through gate process will be described below with reference to FIG. 20.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 20, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the game ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317L is determined based on winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process in step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1303, and if it determines that the game ball has not passed through the left through gate 317L. (Step S1301: No), the process moves to step S1302.

<Step S1302>
If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: No), it determines whether the game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317R is determined based on winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process in step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1303, and if it determines that the game ball has not passed through the right through gate 317R. (Step S1302: No), the through gate process ends.

<Step S1303>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), or when it determines that the game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302: Yes), the MPU 41 stores information in the RAM 412. Determine whether or not the general pattern fluctuation pending number X stored in the general pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA set in the general pattern pending storage area 412c is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment) (step S1303). The MPU 41 terminates the through gate processing when the number of regular figure fluctuations pending X is the maximum number of reserves (step S1303: Yes), and when the number X of regular figure fluctuations pending is not the maximum number of pending members (step S1303: No), The process moves to step S1304.

<Steps S1304 and S1305>
If the number X of regular pattern fluctuations pending is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1303: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number X of general pattern fluctuations pending (step S1304), and in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Obtain the counter values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5 that are updated, and the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 that is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main process in FIG. The value is stored in the first vacant holding area among the first to fourth holding areas SE4 of the holding area 412c in the RAM 412 (step S1305), and the through gate process ends.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of the regular figure game, special figure game, and jackpot game are executed. In the main processing, the processing in steps S1401 to S1411 is executed as a regular processing at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter updating processing in steps S1413 and S1414 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing in steps S1401 to S1411 to the next cycle. Ru.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1401, the MPU 41 transmits output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Execute external output processing to send to. For example, in the RAM 412, a general pattern fluctuation pattern command, an electric accessory opening command, an electric accessory closing command, a special pattern fluctuation pattern command, a first special pattern hold command, a second special pattern hold command, a special pattern shift command, and a jackpot game start. Command, opening start command, opening end command, open/close execution mode start command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, opening/closing execution mode end command, ending start command, ending end command, jackpot game If a command such as an end command or a game setting value change command is set, the command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5. Further, if a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 updates the values of the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the regular figure variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the special pattern variation type counter CS1 and the regular pattern variation type counter CS2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, clears the counter value to 0. .

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a winning has occurred in the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, the variable winning hole 316, etc., based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. to judge. If a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning is set in the RAM 412. At this time, in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a winning occurs in the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314, the MPU 41 stores the winning information in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The number of balls paid out from the general winning hole or the number of balls paid out from the first winning hole is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. In addition, in the time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), when a winning occurs in the second winning hole 315, the MPU 41 stores the RAM 412 The number of balls paid out from the second winning hole stored in the game information storage area 412d is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, when a winning occurs in the variable winning opening 316, the MPU 41 changes the number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening stored in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Update to the added value.

<Step S1404>
In step S1404, the MPU 41 executes a standard game control process that controls the progress of the standard game. The details of the general figure game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24.

<Step S1405>
In step S1405, the MPU 41 executes a normal pattern winning game control process that controls the progress of the normal pattern winning game that is executed when the result of the normal pattern winning lottery is a win. In addition, the details of the game control process per normal figure will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 executes a special figure game control process that controls the progress of the special figure game. The details of the special pattern game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28, but in the special pattern game control process, when starting the variable display of special symbols, the pattern variation display in the pattern display section 341 The special figure fluctuation pattern command necessary for this is set. At this time, the MPU 41 controls the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17, and the special figure that is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of this process. Based on each value of the variation type counter CS1, a special figure variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process that controls the progress of the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. The details of the jackpot game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a gaming state transition process that controls transitions between various gaming states (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state, variable probability jackpot gaming state, and normal jackpot gaming state). Note that details of the gaming state transition process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

<Step S1409>
In step S1409, the MPU 41 executes game setting value change processing. In this game setting value change process, a process for controlling the display or non-display of setting values or changing the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed in accordance with the operation on the setting value change operation section 46. . Note that details of the game setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game setting value changing process is executed in the main process, but during the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or between the start-up process and the start of launching the game ball. It is also conceivable that it will be executed in a limited manner. As a result, after the player starts playing, the game setting values cannot be changed until the next power is turned on, so game setting values cannot be changed during the business hours of the game hall. It can be prevented.

<Step S1410>
In step S1410, the MPU 41 executes specific performance information update processing of the game information. In this embodiment, base information and the like are updated as specific performance information. Note that details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

<Step S1411>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43. In this display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in the specific performance information update process of step S1410 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Note that details of the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41.

<Step S1412>
In step S1412, the MPU 41 determines whether the execution timing for the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the timing to execute the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes), the process moves to step S1401, and executes each process from S1401 described above. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the next main processing execution timing has not arrived (step S1412: No), the MPU 41 determines that the next main processing execution timing has not arrived (step S1412: No). During the remaining time, steps S1413 and S1414 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes).

<Step S1413>
In step S1413, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, sets the counter value to 0. clear.

<Step S1414>
In step S1414, the MPU 41 updates the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the regular symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter values of the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the regular figure variation type counter CS2, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, after updating the special pattern variation type counter CS1 and the regular pattern variation type counter CS2, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1412.

[Public figure game control process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the common figure game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of FIG. In the normal pattern game control process, processing for controlling the fluctuating display and stop display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 is executed. Hereinafter, the normal figure game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal pattern game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (the normal pattern game is being executed) is on. is determined (step S1501). The normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to ON in step S1711 when the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern game) is started in the normal pattern fluctuation start process of FIG. 24, which will be described later, and the normal pattern is stopped and displayed ( When the general figure game ends), it is set to OFF in step S1510 in the corresponding general figure game control process.

The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1507 when the flag during normal figure fluctuation display is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the common figure game is being executed. On the other hand, when the flag during normal pattern fluctuation display is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
If the common figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, if the common figure game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the electric accessory 315b is being opened (the common figure game is being executed). It is determined whether the electric accessory opening flag indicating ``is on'' (step S1502). The electric accessory opening flag is set to ON in step S1811 when the electric accessory 315b is opened, and is set to ON in step S1818 when the electric accessory 315b is closed, in the game control process per normal figure in FIG. Set to off.

When the electric accessory opening flag is on (step S1502: Yes), that is, when the game per common symbol is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the common symbol game control process. On the other hand, when the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the game per common figure is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
When the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the normal game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on. It is determined whether or not (step S1503). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later, the jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1503: Yes), if the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process. That is, in this embodiment, the common figure game is not started while the jackpot game is being executed.

Of course, the common figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed. In this case, according to the support mode type (high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode) before the jackpot game starts, that is, according to the game state before shifting to the jackpot game state, the normal figure holding storage area 412c is Based on the validity information (values of the random number counter C4 per regular pattern, the random number counter C5 per general pattern type random number counter C5, and the general pattern variation type counter CS2 per general pattern) moved from the general pattern first holding area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE, the general pattern is A determination of whether the winning lottery is correct or not is executed. In other words, if the gaming state before the jackpot game is executed is the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state in the high-frequency support mode, the regular pattern winning probability table for the high-frequency support mode (see FIG. 12(B)), Based on the common pattern per type table (see Fig. 12 (D)) and the general pattern variation table (not shown), the general pattern per lottery (normal pattern hit or missed), the normal pattern per type (long open general pattern hit or short) (per open regular map) and regular map fluctuation display time are set. On the other hand, if the gaming state before the jackpot game is executed is the normal game state which is the low-frequency support mode, the normal pattern winning probability table for the low-frequency support mode (see FIG. 12(A)), the normal pattern winning type Based on the table (see FIG. 12(C)) and the general pattern fluctuation table (not shown), the lottery per standard pattern (hit or missed), the type of per standard pattern (per long open standard pattern or per short open standard pattern) ), and the normal map fluctuation display time are set.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
When the jackpot game flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 stores it in the normal pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA set in the normal pattern pending storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not the number of pending changes in ordinary figures X is 0 (step S1504). The MPU 41 ends the general pattern game control process when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), and when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 ends the processing. The process moves to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 executes normal pattern data setting processing for the normal pattern validity information stored in the general pattern pending storage area 412c (step S1505), The process moves to step S1506. Note that details of the ordinary map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol fluctuation start process for causing the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 to execute a variable display of the normal symbol based on the information stored in the common symbol holding storage area 412c. , the general figure game control process ends. Note that the details of the normal pattern fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

<Step S1507>
If the normal figure fluctuation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, if the normal figure game is being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on. It is determined whether or not (step S1507). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later, the jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game flag is on (step S1507: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1509. On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed since the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display ( Step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (end the common symbol game).

When the normal symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ends the common symbol game). If there is, the process moves to step S1509. On the other hand, if the normal pattern fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ends the normal pattern game). ), if it is not the timing to do so, the general figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S1509 to S1511>
When the common figure fluctuation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes) and when the jackpot game flag is on (step S1507: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is started while the common figure game is being executed, Or, if the regular symbol fluctuation display time of the regular symbols has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to stop displaying the fluctuating regular symbols (end the regular symbol game), the MPU 41 The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery for the common symbol (step S1509), and the common symbol fluctuation display flag is set to indicate that the normal symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (the common symbol game is being executed). is set to off (step S1510). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern variation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed, that is, the normal pattern game has ended (step S1511), and ends the normal pattern game control process.

In addition, the ordinary figure fluctuation stop display flag is used to determine whether it is the timing to start the ordinary figure winning game (release the electric accessory 315b) in step S1801 of the ordinary figure winning game control process in FIG. 25, which will be described later. Referenced for.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution of the normal pattern game is not limited to the timing to stop displaying the normal pattern (to end the normal pattern game), which is fluctuatingly displayed as the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern has elapsed. If a jackpot game is started during the game, the fluctuating normal symbols are stopped and displayed (the common symbol game is ended). That is, when the jackpot game is started, the normal pattern game is forcibly ended before the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern passes. Of course, even when a jackpot game is started, the normal pattern game may be continuously executed until the normal pattern fluctuation display time elapses.

[Public figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general pattern data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1505 of FIG. 22. In the ordinary figure data setting process, the storage contents of the ordinary figure holding storage area 412c in the storage area of the main control device 4 in FIG. 11 are updated. Hereinafter, the ordinary figure data setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 23.

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in FIG. 23, in the normal pattern data setting process, the MPU 41 first subtracts 1 from the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X stored in the normal pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA (step S1601), and The general pattern validity information is moved from the holding area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE (step S1602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the common symbol validity information stored in the common symbol second holding area SE2 to the common symbol fourth holding area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the common figure validity information of the common figure second holding area SE2 is moved to the common figure first holding area SE1, and the common figure correctness information of the common figure third holding area SE3 is moved to the common figure second holding area SE3. The area SE2 is moved to the area SE2, and the general pattern validity information of the general pattern fourth holding area SE4 is moved to the general pattern third holding area SE3.

[General figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of FIG. 22. In the normal symbol variation start process, the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display section 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery results in the common symbol winning lottery. Hereinafter, the normal pattern fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to FIG. 24.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 24, in the regular pattern fluctuation start process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high frequency support mode flag indicating the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time saving gaming state) is on. (Step S1701). The high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON in step S2313 of FIG. 34 when the jackpot game ends in the gaming state transition process described later, and the gaming state changes from the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state to the variable probability jackpot gaming state or normal. It is set to OFF in step S2307 of FIG. 33 when shifting to the jackpot gaming state, or in step S2326 of FIG. 34 when the gaming state shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

When the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S1701: Yes), that is, when the high-frequency support mode is the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1702, and switches to the high-frequency support mode. If the flag is off (step S1701: No), that is, if the normal gaming state is the low frequency support mode, the process moves to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
When the game is in the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state that is the high-frequency support mode (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the common symbol hits based on the high-frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is normal based on the high-frequency support mode per-normal pattern propriety table (see FIG. 12(B)) and the high-frequency support mode per-normal pattern classification table (see FIG. 12(D)). Whether the values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal drawing validity information stored in the normal drawing execution area SAE of the drawing holding storage area 412c, correspond to the normal drawing winning. Make a judgment as to whether or not it is true or not.

On the other hand, if the normal gaming state is the low-frequency support mode (step S1701: No), a determination is made as to whether or not a common symbol has been hit based on the low-frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is normal based on the low-frequency support mode per-normal pattern propriety table (see FIG. 12(A)) and the low-frequency support mode per-normal pattern type distribution table (see FIG. 12(C)). Whether or not the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal drawing correctness information stored in the normal drawing execution area SAE of the drawing holding storage area 412c, correspond to the winning of a normal drawing. A judgment is made as to whether or not the above is correct.

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
When the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is a win for a common symbol (step S1702 or S1703), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the determination is a long open symbol for which the second prize opening 315 is opened long ( Step S1704). If the result of the judgment is that the long open standard is a hit (step S1704: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the long open standard hit flag indicating that the result of the check is that the long open standard is a hit ( Step S1705), the process moves to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the validity determination is that the long open normal pattern is not hit (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1706.

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
If the result of the win/fail determination is not a long open regular hit (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the win/fail determination is a short open regular hit where the second winning opening 315 is opened short. (Step S1706). When the result of the validity determination is that the short open regular pattern is hit (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the short open regular pattern hit flag indicating that the result of the validity determination is the short open regular pattern hit ( Step S1707), the process moves to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the validity determination is not a short open regular hit (step S1706: No), that is, if the result of the validity determination is a failure, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
When the long open general map hit flag is set to on (step S1705), when the short open general map hit flag is set to on (step S1707), or when the result of the validity determination is negative (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the normal symbol fluctuation display time on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 in the normal pattern game, with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation display table (not shown). Execute the general figure fluctuation pattern setting process. As mentioned above, the common pattern fluctuation display table (not shown) includes the high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation table that is referred to when in the high frequency support mode, and the low frequency fluctuation table that is referred to when in the low frequency support mode. Support mode includes normal figure fluctuation display table. Therefore, in the general pattern fluctuation pattern setting process, the general pattern fluctuation pattern is set based on the general pattern fluctuation display table according to the support mode type. In addition, the high frequency support mode ordinary symbol fluctuation display table is set so that the average time of the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol is shorter than the low frequency support mode ordinary symbol fluctuation display table, so the high frequency support mode In this case, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the time for playing the regular game is shorter.

Then, in addition to the general pattern fluctuation pattern set in step S1708, the MPU 41 receives the result of the validity determination in step S1702 or S1703 (result of the general pattern lottery) and the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode). A general figure fluctuation pattern command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the support mode (different from the support mode) (step S1709), and the process moves to step S1710.

Note that the common figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 5 uses the general pattern variation pattern command to display an effect corresponding to the normal pattern game on the symbol display section 341, for example, an effect indicating that the normal pattern game is being executed. An effect showing the results of a drawing or lottery for a common map is executed.

Further, the general pattern fluctuation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of at least the general pattern fluctuation pattern, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern result or the type of support mode is not necessarily the general pattern fluctuation pattern command. There is no need to notify the audio lamp control device 5. For example, the result of the lottery for common symbols can be determined by setting the lottery result command for common symbols when the judgment is made in step S1702 or S1703, and the type of support mode can be set to high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode. When the transition is made, the voice lamp control device 5 may be notified by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of support mode after the transition.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, that is, that the normal pattern game is being executed (step S1711), and starts the normal pattern fluctuation start process. finish.

In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is referred to in step S1501 in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 22 to determine whether the normal pattern game is being executed (during the normal pattern fluctuation display).

[Game control processing per regular map]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. In the normal figure winning game control process, when the result of the common figure winning lottery is a win, a permissible state is established in which the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 is permitted by controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 315b. Processing for switching between the restricted state and the restricted state is executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 25, the normal figure winning game control process will be explained.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 25, in the normal pattern per game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed (the normal pattern game has ended) is on. (Step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing at which the game per common symbol can be started. In addition, the normal symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1511 when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game control process of FIG.

If the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the timing at which the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1802. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1813.

<Step S1802>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, when the timing is such that the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed. It is determined whether it is on (step S1802). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later, the jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1802: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the normal winning game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if a jackpot game is forced to end due to the start of the jackpot game, even if the result of the jackpot lottery for the jackpot game is a jackpot, the jackpot game will not be played. Will not start. That is, in this embodiment, the normal winning game is not started while the jackpot winning game is being executed. Of course, a new common figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
If the jackpot game flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the long open general hit flag is set to on (step S1803). . The long open regular map hit flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per regular map is a long open regular map, and when the result of the lottery per common map is a long open regular map, It is set to ON in step S1705 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished playing game is a long open playing winning. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1804 when the long open general map hit flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), and when the long open general map hit flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), the process moves to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long open regular map hit flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular open regular lottery for the completed regular map game is a long open regular match, the MPU 41 A value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the per-figure game (time during which the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315), is set as the value of the opening time counter (step S1804). The opening time counter is referred to in step S1815 of the normal symbol game control process in order to determine the return timing of the electric accessory 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open standard hit flag to OFF (step S1805), and moves the process to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long open double hit flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the lottery to win a short open double for the completed double open game is not a long open double hit, the MPU 41 selects a short open double hit. It is determined whether the hit flag is set on (step S1806). The short open regular map hit flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per regular map is a short open regular map, and when the result of the lottery per regular map is a short open regular map, the short open regular map hit flag in Figure 24 It is set to ON in step S1707 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished betting game is a short opening winning. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1807 when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), and when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to OFF (step S1806: No), that is, if the result of the winning lottery for the finished coin game is a loss, the process moves to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
When the short open regular map winning flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, when the result of the regular winning lottery for the finished regular map game is a short open regular hit, the MPU 41 A value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the per-figure game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315), is set as the value of the opening time counter (step S1807). . Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open regular pattern hit flag to OFF (step S1808), and moves the process to step S1809.

<Steps S1809 to S1811>
If the result of the winning lottery is a win and the flag indicating the winning type (long open winning flag or short opening winning flag) is set to OFF (step S1805 or S1808), the MPU 41 The electric accessory 315b is activated (step S1809). As a result, the second winning hole 315 is opened, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole 315. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory release command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is released (step S1810), and also sets an electric accessory release command that indicates that the electric accessory 315b is released. The electric accessory opening flag is set to on (step S1811), and the process moves to step S1812.

Note that the electric accessory release command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. From this, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an effect indicating that the electric accessory 315b is released, for example, on the symbol display section 341, based on the electric accessory release command.

<Step S1812>
If the result of the winning lottery is a win, and the process of opening the electric accessory 315b is executed (steps S1803 to S1811), or both the long open regular winning flag and the short open regular winning flag are turned off. If set (if the result of the lottery to win the normal symbol is a loss) (step S1803 and step S1806 are both No), the MPU 41 indicates that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed (that the common symbol game has ended). The normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag shown is set to OFF (step S1812), and the normal pattern per game control process is ended.

<Step S1813>
When the ordinary figure fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 sets the electric accessory that is set to ON when the electric accessory 315b is released in step S1811 of the ordinary figure per game control process. It is determined whether the open flag is set to on (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game per common symbol is being executed. When the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the common map winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1814. On the other hand, when the electric accessory opening flag is set to OFF (step S1813: No), that is, when the game per common symbol is not being executed, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per common symbol.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
When the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the game per common symbol is being executed, the MPU 41 sets the flag in step S1804 or S1807 of the corresponding common symbol game control process. 1 is subtracted from the value of the open time counter (step S1814), and it is determined whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b. If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1816. On the other hand, when the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, when it is not the timing to return the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per normal symbol.

<Steps S1816 to S1818>
When the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 returns the electric accessory 315b (step S1816). As a result, the second winning hole 315 is closed, and entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory closing command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is closed (step S1817), and also sets an electric accessory closing command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is closed (step S1817). The accessory opening flag is set to OFF (step S1818), and the normal figure game control process is ended.

Note that the electric accessory closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 is able to terminate, for example, the performance performed on the symbol display section 341, which indicates that the electric accessory is opened, based on the electric accessory closing command.

[Special figure game control processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. In the special figure game control process, the storage contents of the special figure holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is controlled, for example, the The variable display and stop display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 is controlled. Hereinafter, the special figure game control process will be explained with reference to FIG.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is on. In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends. .

When the jackpot game flag is on (step S1901: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game control process. That is, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the first special symbol game or the second It is determined whether the special figure fluctuation displaying flag indicating that the special figure game is being executed is on (step S1902). The special symbol variation display flag is set to on in step S2107 when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later, and the special symbol game control When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the process, it is set to off in step S1909.

If the special symbol variable display flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is variable and displayed (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1906. On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed and the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 performs processing. The process moves to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the special symbol fluctuation display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed and the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 displays the special symbol on hold. Both the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the storage area 412b and the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not is 0 (step S1903).

When both the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M are 0 (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 suspends the right to execute the first special figure game and the second special figure reservation. If there is no reservation of the right to play the game, the special figure game control process is ended. On the other hand, if either the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 suspends the right to execute the first special figure game; If at least one of the rights to execute the second special figure game is reserved, the process moves to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If either the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, the right to execute the first special figure game is reserved and the second special figure game is held. If there is at least one of the reservations of the right to execute the ( Step S1904), the process moves to step S1905. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

<Step S1905>
In step S1905, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 (first special symbol game or second special symbol). A special figure fluctuation start process is executed to execute the figure game, and the special figure game control process is ended. The details of the special figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

<Step S1906>
When the special symbol fluctuation display flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol. From the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the second special symbol game, the special symbol for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set in the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process of step S2104 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. It is determined whether the figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1906). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the special symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game.

When the special symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), that is, the timing to stop displaying the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game. If so, the process moves to step S1907. On the other hand, if the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: No), the MPU 41 stops and displays the special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is not the timing to end the figure game, the special figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S1907 to S1909>
If the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), that is, at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner and ending the special symbol game. In this case, the MPU 41 causes the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 to stop and display the special symbol in a manner according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game. (Step S1907). Then, the MPU 41 turns on the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1908), and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. The flag indicating that the special figure fluctuation display is in progress (the special figure game is being executed) is set to OFF (step S1909), and the special figure game control process is ended.

[Special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1904 of FIG. 26. In the special figure data setting process, the storage contents of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special figure data setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 27.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is 0 or not. The MPU 41 determines that when the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), that is, when there is no second special figure reservation for the second special figure game and there is a first special figure reservation for the first special figure game. (See step S1903 in the special figure game control process in FIG. 26), the process moves to step S2002. On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), that is, if there is a second special figure reservation for the second special figure game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2005. That is, the MPU 41 starts the second special pattern game with priority over the first special pattern game by determining whether or not the second special pattern reservation number M for the second special pattern game is 0.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special pattern game is started with priority over the first special pattern game, but the first special pattern game is started with priority over the second special pattern game. Also, the special figure game is started in the order in which the game balls enter the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 (order of reservation), and either the first special figure game or the second special figure game is started. may be executed. In addition, the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other without setting a priority order for starting the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, and the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other. The second special figure game may be executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation of special figures).

<Steps S2002 to S2004>
When the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 stores the first special figure reservation stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. The number N is subtracted by 1 (step S2002), and the special symbol validity information is moved from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol validity information of the second to fourth reservation areas REA2 to REA4 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in step S2004, the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REA2 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2. It is moved to the reservation area REA2, and the special symbol validity information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. When the process of step S2004 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2008.

<Steps S2005 to S2007>
If the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 stores the second special figure reservation number stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. M is subtracted by 1 (step S2005), and the special symbol validity information is moved from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2006). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB one by one (step S2007). Specifically, in step S2007, the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the fourth reservation area REB2. The special symbol validity information in the reservation area REB4 is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S2007 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2008.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 41 controls the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA, or the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REB4 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB. A special figure shift command indicating that the special figure validity information has been shifted is set in the RAM 412, and the special figure data setting process is ended. This special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 changes the number of pending displays corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the second special symbol pending displayed on the symbol display section 341 based on the special symbol shift command. be able to.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 of FIG. 26. In the special symbol variation start process, the first special game or the second special symbol is started by starting the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363. A game (special figure game) is started, and various processes associated with the start of the special figure game are executed. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to FIG. 28.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 28, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state which is a high probability mode. Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined by whether or not the variable probability gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state which is the high probability mode is set to on. The variable probability gaming state flag is set to ON when the gaming state is transferred from the variable probability jackpot gaming state to the variable probability gaming state in step S2317 of FIG. 34 in the gaming state transition process described below, and the gaming state is set to is set to OFF when transitioning from a variable probability gaming state to a variable probability jackpot gaming state or a normal jackpot gaming state.

If the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state that is a high probability mode (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2102, and if the gaming state is not a variable probability gaming state that is a high probability mode (step S2101: No). ), that is, if the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state which is a low probability mode, the process moves to step S2103.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
If the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state that is a high probability mode (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 selects a high probability mode that is saved according to the gaming setting value in step S2410 in the gaming setting value change process of FIG. 35, which will be described later. The mode propriety table (see FIG. 9B) is read out, and propriety determination is performed based on the high probability mode propriety table (step S2102).

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the variable probability gaming state which is the high probability mode (step S2101: No), that is, if the gaming state is the time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state which is the low probability mode, the MPU 41 operates as shown in FIG. In step S2410 in the game setting value change process, the low probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 9(A)) stored according to the game setting value is read out, and the propriety determination is executed based on the low probability mode propriety table. (Step S2103).

In addition, in steps S2102 and S2103, the validity determination is performed based on the high probability mode validity table or the low probability mode validity table that is saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 35, which will be described later. However, in steps S2102 and S2103, after reading the game setting value saved in step S2408 in the game setting value change process of FIG. The probability mode validity determination may be made by selecting each probability mode validity table one by one.

<Step S2104>
When the judgment is made in step S2102 or S2103, the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in the special symbol game. The symbol fluctuation display time is set as a special symbol fluctuation pattern (step S2104).

In addition, when the result of the judgment in step S2102 or S2103 is a normal jackpot, the fluctuation display time (special pattern fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the same as the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal If the result of the judgment in step S2102 or S2103 is a probability variable jackpot, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the probability variable jackpot variation table (see FIG. 10(B)), and if the result of the validity determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a failure, the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 and the failure fluctuation table (see FIG. 10(C)) are set. Set based on.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 41 sends a special figure fluctuation pattern command that includes the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game, which is the result of the validity determination in step S2102 or S2103, and the special figure fluctuation pattern set in step S2104. is set in the RAM 412, and the process moves to step S2106. The special figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute the special figure game performance on the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the special figure variation pattern command.

In addition, as mentioned above, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "A" to the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Any one of "A01" to "A03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R sure-change jackpot," the MPU 41 adds "B" to the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" with "B" indicating a 5R probability-change jackpot, "B01" to " B03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "16R probability-variable jackpot," the MPU 41 adds "C" indicating a 16R probability-variable jackpot to the special pattern variation patterns "01" to "03", "C01" to " C03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "loss", the MPU 41 selects one of the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "08" with "D" attached to indicate a loss, "D01" to "D08". is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "lose", the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of win (front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete win) in the special figure variation pattern command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 41 starts the special symbol game by starting the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36, and returns the process to step S2107. to move to.

In addition, when the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the special symbols, it adds 1 to the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the win/fail determination based on the low probability mode win/fail table in step S2103 is a win, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive wins" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and determines whether the win/fail result is a jackpot. Clear the "number of consecutive misses" to 0 in certain cases.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets on the special symbol variable display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed), and moves the process to step S2108. The special symbol fluctuation display flag indicates that the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed (special symbol This is referred to in order to determine whether or not a figure game is being executed.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 41 sets off the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol fluctuation has been stopped (the special symbol game has ended), and moves the process to step S2109. The special symbol fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 is stopped and displayed in step S1908 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. , is referred to in step S2202 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29, which will be described later, to determine whether or not it is the timing at which the jackpot game can be started.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving gaming state flag indicating the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) is on. The time-saving game state flag is set to ON when the normal jackpot game ends in step S2321 of FIG. 34 in the game state transition process described later, and the game state is changed to the time-saving game in step S2310 of FIG. 33 or step S2325 of FIG. This is set to OFF when the state is changed to a jackpot game state or a normal game state.

When the time-saving gaming state flag is on (step S2109: Yes), that is, when the time-saving gaming state is in effect, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2110. On the other hand, when the time-saving game state flag is off (step S2109: Yes), that is, when it is not in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol fluctuation start process.

<Step S2110>
When the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2109: Yes), that is, when it is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the time-saving game state. (Step S2110), and the special symbol fluctuation start process ends. The time saving number counter is set when the gaming state is transferred from the jackpot gaming state to the time saving gaming state in step S2320 in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 34, which will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time saving number counter is set when the gaming state shifts from the jackpot gaming state to the time saving gaming state, but the time saving number counter is set when the gaming state shifts from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variable gaming state. It may also be set when it is set when it is set. That is, the gaming machine 10 can be configured as a so-called ST machine by setting the maximum number of special symbol games to be executed in a variable probability gaming state to a finite number of times.

In addition, when the normal jackpot game that is executed based on the fact that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot ends, the gaming machine 10 returns to the normal gaming state without shifting from the jackpot gaming state to the time-saving gaming state. It is also possible to set it to shift, and in this case, the time saving number counter is not set after the end of the normal jackpot game.

[Jackpot game control processing]
Here, FIGS. 29 to 32 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 in the main process of FIG. 21. In the jackpot game control process, processing for controlling the progress of the jackpot game, such as opening/closing control of the opening/closing door 319 provided in the variable prize opening 316, is executed. Hereinafter, the jackpot game control process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 29, in step S2201, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is on. The jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S2206 of the jackpot game control process when starting the jackpot game, and is set to OFF in step S2252 of the jackpot game control process when ending the jackpot game.

When the jackpot game flag is on (step S2201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2211. On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S2201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2202.

<Step S2202>
When the jackpot game flag is off (step S2201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed is on or not. to judge. The special symbol fluctuation stop flag is set to ON in step S1908 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. 26 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and is set to ON in step S1908 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. It is set to OFF in step S2108 in the special figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the jackpot game by determining whether or not the special figure game that was started when the jackpot game is not being executed has ended.

If the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the jackpot game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2203. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation stop flag is off (step S2202: No), that is, when the jackpot game cannot be started because the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started (executed) when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (while the special symbol game is being executed), but the jackpot game is not started (executed) when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (while the special symbol game is being executed). A jackpot game may be started (executed) at any time. For example, a jackpot game may be started (executed) during the variable display of the first special symbol, and conversely, a jackpot game may be started (executed) during the variable display of the second special symbol. Specifically, as mentioned above, by making it possible to change the first special symbol and the second special symbol to fluctuate simultaneously, the second special symbol game is executed while the jackpot game for the first special symbol game is being executed. , the first special figure game may be executed during execution of the jackpot game for the second special figure game. Furthermore, a jackpot game for the first special figure game and a jackpot game for the second special figure game may be executed simultaneously, or a jackpot game for the first special figure game and a jackpot game for the second special figure game. If the start condition for the other jackpot game is satisfied while one of the jackpot games is being executed, the other jackpot game may be started after the one jackpot game ends.

<Step S2203>
When the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot. Decide whether or not. Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot is determined based on the result of the jackpot lottery stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 41, for example. Judgment is made based on the special map validity information.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2204. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is not a jackpot (step S2203: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process. .

<Step S2204>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 starts the jackpot game and determines the type of the jackpot game (probable variable jackpot game or normal jackpot game). ) is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of the jackpot game start command (step S2204), and the process moves to step S2205. The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute a jackpot game effect according to the jackpot game type based on the jackpot game start command.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is to be started, and moves the process to step S2206. The jackpot game start flag is referred to in step S2301 in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 33, which will be described later, when determining whether to shift the gaming state to the variable probability jackpot gaming state or the normal jackpot gaming state.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and moves the process to step S2207. In order to judge whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, the jackpot game in progress flag is used in step S2201 of the jackpot game control process, step S1503 of the regular figure game control process in FIG. 22, and special figure in FIG. 26. It is referred to in step S1901 of the game control process.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 41 sets a round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and shifts the process to step S2208. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round number counter to "5" when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot and 5R normal jackpot, and sets the round number counter to "5" when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot. Set "16" to "16".

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of starting the opening of the jackpot game, and moves the process to step S2209. The opening start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the opening effect on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening start command.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time, and moves the process to step S2210. The opening time counter is referred to in step S2213 of FIG. 30 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the opening.

<Step S2210>
In step S2210, the MPU 41 sets on the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S2211 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether or not the opening is in progress.

<Step S2211>
If the jackpot game flag is on (step S2201: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening flag, which indicates that the opening is in progress, is on. (Step S2211).

If the opening flag is on (step S2211: Yes), that is, if the opening is in progress, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2212 in FIG. 30. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S2211: No), that is, if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S2222.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the opening flag is on (step S2211: Yes), that is, when the opening is being executed, as shown in FIG. 30, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time ( Step S2212), it is determined whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (Step S2213). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the opening.

If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2213: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2214. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2213: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2213: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game will end. The opening end command is set (step S2214) and the opening end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the opening performance executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress to OFF (step S2215), and moves the process to step S2216.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing execution mode start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that an opening/closing execution mode in which a plurality of round games (5 or 16 rounds) are executed, and processes The process moves to step S2217. The opening/closing execution mode start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the opening/closing execution mode performance executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening/closing execution mode start command.

<Step S2217>
In step S2217, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that a round game is to be started, and moves the process to step S2218. The round game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start a round game presentation corresponding to each round game including round number display etc. on the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the round game start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the round game performance is executed individually in each round game, but the round game performance is a series of one performance in the opening/closing execution mode, and in each round game, the number of rounds of the round game is may also be displayed. In this case, it is not necessary to perform an interval performance between round games, or a performance that displays the number of rounds of a round game to be executed next time may be performed as an interval performance.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and further opens the variable prize opening 316 by operating the opening/closing door 319 (step S2219), and processes The process moves to step S2220.

<Steps S2220 and S2221>
In step S2220, the MPU 41 sets on the round game in progress flag indicating that the round game is being executed, further sets a round game time counter indicating the remaining time of the round game (step S2221), and End the game control process. The round game time counter performs the steps in FIG. 31 of the jackpot game control process in order to judge whether it is the timing to end the round game (return the opening/closing door 319 and close the variable prize opening 316) when the specified time has elapsed. Referenced in S2224.

<Step S2222>
Returning to FIG. 29, if the opening flag is off (step S2211: No), that is, if the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the round game flag indicating that the round game is being executed to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S2222). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a round game is being executed.

When the round game flag is on (step S2222: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2223 in FIG. 31. On the other hand, when the round game flag is off (step S2222: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2226.

<Steps S2223 and S2224>
When the round game in progress flag is on (step S2222: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, as shown in FIG. Subtract 1. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2224). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the round game (close the variable prize opening by returning the opening/closing door 319) after the predetermined time has elapsed.

If the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2224: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the round game at the timing when the round game ends (the variable prize opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319) when the specified time has elapsed. If there is, the process moves to step S2228. On the other hand, if the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), the MPU 41 determines the timing to end the round game (close the variable prize opening by returning the opening/closing door 319) when the specified time has elapsed. If not, the process moves to step S2225.

<Step S2225>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the round game (close the variable prize opening by returning the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 , it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 (step S2225). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 can be determined by detecting the entry of a game ball into the ball entry sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. The determination is made based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412.

If the game ball enters the variable winning hole 316 (step S2225: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2226, and if the game ball does not enter the variable winning hole 316 (step S2225: No), the jackpot game control process ends.

<Steps S2226 and S2227>
When a game ball enters the variable winning hole 316 (step S2225: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the value of the ball entering number counter indicating the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole 316 in the round game. Add 1 (step S2226). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the ball entering number counter after addition has reached 10 (step S2227), that is, the round game ends when the upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning hole 316 (opening/closing door Upon the return of 319, it is determined whether it is the timing to close the variable winning opening.

If the value of the ball entering number counter after addition has reached 10 (step S2227: Yes), that is, the MPU 41 ends the round game by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 (opening/closing door 319). If it is the timing to close the variable winning a prize opening due to the return of , the process moves to step S2228. On the other hand, if the value of the ball entering number counter after addition has not reached 10 (step S2227: No), the MPU 41 ends the round game by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 (opening/closing). If it is not the timing to close the variable prize opening due to the return of the door 319, the jackpot game control process is ended.

<Step S2228>
If the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2224: Yes), or if the value of the number of balls entered counter reaches 10 (step S2227: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the opening/closing door 319. As a result, the variable prize opening is closed (step S2228), and the process moves to step S2229. That is, when it is the timing to end the round game due to the passage of the specified time or due to the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316, the MPU 41 closes the variable winning hole 316 and ends the round game. .

<Steps S2229 to S2231>
In step S2229, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the round game ends. The round game end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the round game performance executed in the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears an entry number counter indicating the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole 316 in the round game (step S2230), and also clears the entry number counter indicating that the round game is being executed. The flag is set to off (step S2231), and the process moves to step S2232.

<Step S2232>
In step S2232, the MPU 41 determines whether the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 0 (step S2232), that is, it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode (unplayed round games ).

If the round number counter is 0 (step S2232: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2241. On the other hand, if the round number counter is not 0 (step S2232: No), that is, if there is an unplayed round game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2233.

<Step S2233>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S2232: No), that is, if there is an unplayed round game, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start an interval between round games. (step S2233), and the process moves to step S2234. The interval start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an interval effect on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the interval start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the interval performance is performed in the interval between round games, but the interval performance may be omitted and the round game performance for the previously executed round game may be continuously performed in the interval. Also, a round game effect may be executed for the next round game to be executed.

<Steps S2234 and S2235>
In step S2234, the MPU 41 sets on an interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval time counter indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S2235), and ends the jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is referred to in step S2238 in FIG. 32 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the interval (start the round game).

<Step S2236>
Returning to FIG. 29, when the round game flag is off (step S2222: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. It is determined whether it is on (step S2236). The during interval flag is set to ON in step S2234 of FIG. 31 in the jackpot game control process when starting an interval, and is turned off in step S2240 of FIG. 32 in the jackpot game control process when ending the interval. Set.

If the during-interval flag is on (step S2236: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2237 in FIG. 32. On the other hand, if the during-interval flag is off (step S2236: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2245.

<Steps S2237 and S2238>
If the during interval flag is on (step S2236: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, as shown in FIG. Subtract (step S2237). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2238), that is, whether or not it is the timing to end the interval (start the round game).

If the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2238: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2239. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2238: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the interval (start the round game), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2239 and S2240>
If the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2238: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 sends an audio signal to the lamp control device 5 to notify that the interval has ended. Set the interval end command to be notified. The interval end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the interval effect executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the during-interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed (step S2240), and shifts the process to step S2217 described above. By moving the process to step S2217 in FIG. 30 described above, the processes of steps S2217 to S2221 regarding the start of the round game are executed, and the jackpot game control process is ended.

<Step S2241>
Returning to FIG. 31, when the round number counter is 0 (step S2232: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 uses the voice lamp control device to notify the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. An opening/closing execution mode end command to be notified to No. 5 is set (step S2241), and the process proceeds to step S2242. The opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the round game performance (opening/closing execution mode performance) executed in the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the opening/closing execution mode end command.

<Step S2242>
In step S2242, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start the ending of the jackpot game, and moves the process to step S2243. The ending start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the ending effect on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the ending start command.

<Steps S2243 and S2244>
In step S2243, the MPU 41 sets on the ending-in-progress flag indicating that the ending is in progress. Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending time counter indicating the remaining ending time (step S2244), and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referred to in step S2247 in FIG. 32 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game).

<Step S2245>
Returning to FIG. 29, if the interval flag is off (step S2236: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, whether the ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed is on or not. is determined (step S2245).

If the ending flag is on (step S2245: Yes), that is, if the ending is in progress, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2246 in FIG. 32. On the other hand, if the ending flag is off (step S2245: No), that is, if the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2250.

<Steps S2246 and S2247>
If the ending flag is on (step S2245: Yes), that is, if the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter indicating the remaining ending time, as shown in FIG. Step S2246). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2247). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the ending (big hit game).

If the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2247: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2248. On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2247: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the ending (big hit game), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2248 and S2249>
When the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2247: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 sends an audio lamp control device to end the ending of the jackpot game. Set the ending end command to be notified to 5. The ending end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the ending effect executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag indicating that the ending is in progress to OFF (step S2249), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2250>
Returning to FIG. 29, if the ending flag is off (step S2245: No), that is, if the game is not in the opening, round game, interval, or ending, the MPU 41 sends a voice message indicating that the jackpot game is over. A jackpot game end command to be notified to the lamp control device 5 is set (step S2250), and the process moves to step S2251. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the jackpot game performance executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the jackpot game end command.

<Steps S2251 and S2252>
In step S2251, a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set on. The jackpot game end flag is referenced in step S2312 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 34, which will be described later, in order to determine whether to shift from the jackpot gaming state to the high-frequency support mode (variable probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state). Ru.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed (step S2252), and ends the jackpot game control process.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIGS. 33 and 34 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in FIG. 21. In the gaming state transition process, processing for controlling the transition of various gaming states (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state, variable probability jackpot gaming state, and normal jackpot gaming state) is executed. The game state transition process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

<Step S2301>
As shown in FIG. 33, in step S2301, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is to be started is on. In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S2205 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game is ended.

If the jackpot game start flag is on (step S2301: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2302. On the other hand, if the jackpot game start flag is off (step S2301: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2312 in FIG. 34.

<Steps S2302 and S2303>
When the jackpot game start flag is on (step S2301: Yes), that is, when starting the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S2302), and the jackpot game to be started is a probability-variable jackpot game. It is determined whether there is one (step S2303). Whether or not the jackpot game to be started is a probability-variable jackpot game is determined based on the special pattern validity information stored in the special pattern execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special pattern holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 412. Ru.

When starting the probability-variable jackpot game (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2304. On the other hand, if the variable probability jackpot game is not to be started (step S2303: No), that is, if the normal jackpot game is to be started, the process moves to step S2305.

<Step S2304>
When starting the variable probability jackpot game (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the variable probability jackpot game state flag indicating that the variable probability jackpot game state is the state in which the variable probability jackpot game is executed (step S2304), and executes the process. The process moves to step S2305. The variable probability jackpot game state flag is used in step S2315 of FIG. 34 of the game state transition process in order to determine whether to shift the gaming state to the variable probability gaming state or the normal gaming state when ending the jackpot game. Referenced in

<Steps S2305 and S2306>
In step S2305, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state is on. The normal gaming state flag is set to ON in step S2324 of FIG. 34 of the gaming state transition process when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, and is set to ON in step S2324 of FIG. (gaming state), it is set to OFF in step S2306 of the gaming state transition process.

If the normal gaming state flag is on (step S2305: Yes), that is, in the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag to OFF (step S2306), and ends the gaming state transition process. On the other hand, if the normal gaming state flag is off (step S2305: No), that is, if the normal gaming state is not but the high frequency support mode (variable probability gaming state or time saving gaming state), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2307. do.

<Step S2307>
If the normal gaming state flag is off (step S2305: No), that is, if the normal gaming state is not but the high-frequency support mode (variable probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state), the MPU 41 indicates that the high-frequency support mode is in the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode flag shown is set to OFF (step S2307), and the process moves to step S2308.

<Steps S2308 and S2309>
In step S2308, the MPU 41 determines whether the variable probability gaming state flag indicating the variable probability gaming state is on. The variable probability gaming state flag is set to ON in step S2317 of FIG. 34 when transitioning from the variable probability jackpot gaming state to the variable probability gaming state in the gaming state transition process, and changes from the variable probability gaming state to the jackpot gaming state (probable variable jackpot gaming state or When transitioning to the normal jackpot game state), it is set to OFF in step S2309.

When the probability variable gaming state flag is on (step S2308: Yes), that is, in the case of the probability variable gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the probability variable gaming state flag to OFF (step S2309), and ends the gaming state transition process. On the other hand, when the variable probability gaming state flag is off (step S2308: No), that is, when the time saving gaming state is neither the normal gaming state nor the variable probability gaming state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2310.

<Steps S2310 and S2311>
When the variable probability game state flag is off (step S2308: No), that is, when it is a time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag indicating that it is a time-saving game state to off (step S2310). Then, the MPU 41 clears the time-saving number counter indicating the remaining number of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state (step S2311), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S2312>
When the jackpot game start flag is off (step S2301: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 turns on the jackpot game end flag indicating to end the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S2312). The jackpot game end flag is set to ON in step S2251 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game end flag is on (step S2312: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is to be ended, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2313. On the other hand, when the jackpot game end flag is off (step S2312: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the jackpot game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2322.

<Steps S2313 and S2314>
When the jackpot game end flag is on (step S2312: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is to be ended, the MPU 41 sets the high-frequency support mode flag indicating that the high-frequency support mode is on (step S2313). ), the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set to OFF (step S2314), and the process moves to step S2315.

<Step S2315>
In step S2315, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable probability jackpot game state flag indicating the variable probability jackpot game state in which the variable probability jackpot game is executed is on. The probability variable jackpot game state flag is set to ON in step S2304 of FIG. 33 when the probability variable jackpot game state is transferred from the probability variable gaming state, the normal gaming state, or the time-saving gaming state to the probability variable jackpot game state in the game state transition process, and the variable probability jackpot game state is set to ON in step S2304 of FIG. When the state is changed to the variable probability gaming state, it is set to OFF in step S2318.

If the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag is on (step S2315: Yes), that is, if the probability variable jackpot gaming state is present, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2316. On the other hand, when the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag is off (step S2315: No), that is, when the probability variable jackpot gaming state is not but the normal jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2319.

<Step S2316>
If the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag is on (step S2315: Yes), that is, if the probability variable jackpot gaming state is present, the MPU 41 sets a probability variable gaming state command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the probability variable jackpot gaming state is present. (step S2316), and the process moves to step S2317. The variable probability game state command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute a special symbol performance corresponding to the variable probability gaming state on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the variable probability gaming state command.

<Step S2317>
In step S2317, the MPU 41 sets on the variable probability gaming state flag indicating the variable probability gaming state, and moves the process to step S2318. The variable probability gaming state flag is referred to in step S2308 in FIG. 33 in the gaming state transition process in order to specify the gaming state when starting the jackpot game.

<Step S2318>
In step S2318, the MPU 41 sets the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag indicating that the probability variable jackpot gaming state is OFF, and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S2319>
If the probability variable jackpot game state flag is off (step S2315: No), that is, if the probability variable jackpot game state is not the normal jackpot game state, the MPU 41 notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that it is the time saving gaming state. A time-saving gaming state command is set (step S2319), and the process moves to step S2320. The time-saving game state command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute a special symbol performance corresponding to the time-saving game state on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the time-saving game state command.

<Steps S2320 and S2321>
In step S2320, the MPU 41 sets a time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of special symbols that can be executed in the time saving gaming state. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit of the number of special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state (100 times in this embodiment) in the time-saving number counter. The time saving number counter is decremented by 1 in step S2110 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 28 every time a special figure game is started in the time saving game state, and by executing the special figure game a specified number of times, the time saving game state is changed to the normal game. In order to determine whether or not to transition to the current state, reference is made in step S2323 of the game state transition process.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag indicating that the time-saving game state is on (step S2321), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S2322>
If the jackpot game end flag is off (step S2312: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-saving game state flag indicating the time-saving game state is on. (Step S2322).

When the time-saving gaming state flag is on (step S2322: Yes), that is, when the time-saving gaming state is in effect, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2323. On the other hand, when the time-saving game state flag is off (step S2322: No), that is, when it is not in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Step S2323>
When the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2322: Yes), that is, when the time-saving game state is in effect, the MPU 41 determines that the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the remaining number of special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving game state is 0. It is determined whether or not (step S2323). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift from the time-saving game state to the normal game state by executing the special figure game a specified number of times.

When the value of the time-saving number counter is 0 (step S2323: Yes), that is, when the time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2324. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (step S2323: No), that is, when the time saving gaming state does not shift to the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 ends the gaming state transition process.

<Steps S2324 to S2326>
When the value of the time-saving number counter is 0 (step S2323: Yes), that is, when the time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state by executing the special figure game a specified number of times, the MPU 41 indicates that it is the normal game state. The normal game state flag is set on (step S2324). Then, the MPU 41 sets off the time-saving gaming state flag indicating that the time-saving gaming state is in effect (step S2325), and sets off the high-frequency support mode flag indicating that the high-frequency support mode is present (step S2326). ), the game state transition process ends.

[Game setting value change processing]
Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value changing process executed in step S1409 of the main process in FIG. In the game setting value change process, a process of controlling display or non-display of the setting value or change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed in accordance with the operation on the setting value change operation section 46. The setting value changing process will be described below with reference to FIG. 35.

<Step S2401>
As shown in FIG. 35, in step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game setting value displaying flag indicating that the game setting value is displayed on the setting value display section 45 is on. The game setting value displaying flag is used when the game setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by switching the power of the setting value display unit 45 from OFF to ON, as described below in the game setting value changing process. In the case where the setting value display unit 45 is set to on in step S2405 and the game setting value is hidden in the setting value display unit 45 by switching the power of the setting value display unit 45 from on to off, the game setting value change process It is set to off in step S2412, which will be described later.

When the game setting value displaying flag is on (step S2401: Yes), that is, when the game setting value is displayed on the setting value display section 45, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2406. On the other hand, when the game setting value displaying flag is off (step S2401: No), that is, when the game setting value is not displayed on the setting value display section 45, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2402.

<Step S2402>
When the game setting value displaying flag is off (step S2401: No), that is, when the game setting value is not displayed on the setting value display section 45, the MPU 41 changes the power of the setting value display section 45 from OFF to ON. It is determined whether it has been switched (step S2402), that is, whether an operation has been performed on the setting value change operation section 46 to turn on the power of the setting value display section 45.

When the power of the set value display section 45 is switched from off to on (step S2402: Yes), in other words, the MPU 41 performs an operation to turn on the power of the set value display section 45 using the set value change operation section 46. If so, the process moves to step S2403. On the other hand, if the power of the set value display unit 45 cannot be switched from off to on (step S2402: No), the MPU 41 performs an operation to turn on the power of the set value display unit 45 to the set value change operation unit 46. If this is not done, the game setting value changing process ends.

<Steps S2403 to S2405>
When the power of the setting value display section 45 is switched from off to on (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2403). A number indicating the game setting value is displayed on the setting value display section 45 (step S2404). This allows you to check the current game setting values. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the setting value displaying flag indicating that the game setting value is displayed on the setting value display section 45 (step S2405), and ends the setting value changing process.

<Step S2406>
If the set value displaying flag is set to on (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation to change the game setting value has been performed. If the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2407, and if the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S2406: No), The process moves to step S2409.

<Steps S2407 and S2408>
When the set value change operation section 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the set value display section 45 (step S2407). For example, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before rotation, and vice versa. When the set value change operation section 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is displayed.

Note that if the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is "6" and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 will not be displayed. If the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is changed to "1" and the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is "1" before rotation, and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, the setting value is changed to "1". The number displayed on the value display section 45 is changed to "6". Also, when the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is "6", it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and when the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is "1" In addition, it may be possible to prevent further rotation to the left.

Then, the MPU 41 overwrites and stores the numbers displayed on the setting value display section 45 as game setting values on the game setting values in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2408), and ends the setting value changing process. As a result, when the power of the setting value change operation section 46 is switched from on to off, the gaming setting values stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off are finally stored in the RAM 412 as valid gaming setting values. The game information is stored in the game information storage area 412d. Therefore, by changing the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 by rotating the setting value changing operation section 46, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed. Then, the game setting value can be determined by turning off the power of the setting value display section 45 while the number corresponding to the desired game setting value is displayed on the setting value display section 45.

In addition, in step S2408, the MPU 41 sets a game setting value change command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the game setting value after the change.

<Step S2409>
If the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S2406: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S2409), that is, whether or not the set value has been changed. It is determined whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation unit 46 to turn off the power of the set value display unit 45. If the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2410, and determines that the power of the set value display unit 45 has not been switched from on to off. If so (step S2409: No), the setting value change process is ended.

<Steps S2410 to S2412>
When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 displays a low probability mode propriety table (Fig. 9(A)) and the high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 9(B)) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S2410).

Here, in step S2410, a low probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 9(A)) and a high probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 9(B)) according to the game setting values stored in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 are performed. ) is selected. That is, since the low probability mode success/failure table and the high probability mode success/failure table have the same game setting value selected, it is easy to change the game setting value. However, the setting value in the low probability mode and the game setting value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, the setting value of the low probability mode and the high probability mode may be set at different stages (numerical values), for example, the setting value of the low probability mode is "1" and the setting value of the high probability mode is "6". It becomes possible to do so.

Then, the MPU 41 hides the numbers corresponding to the game setting values on the setting value display section 45 (step S2411), sets the setting value display flag to OFF (step S2412), and performs the setting value change process. end.

[Specific performance information update process]
Here, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1410 in the main process of FIG. In the specific performance information update process, specific performance information such as base information is updated. Further, FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

<Steps S2501 to S2503>
As shown in FIG. 36, in step S2501, the MPU 41 calculates various payout ball numbers for the current base calculation from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, for example, the "general winning prize" in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). The CPU reads out the number of balls paid out from the mouth and the number of balls put out from the first winning opening, and further reads the number of out balls in the normal gaming state for current base calculation from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2502). Then, the MPU 41 calculates the "number of out balls" in the normal gaming state based on "the number of balls paid out from the general winning hole", "the number of balls paid out from the first winning hole", and "the number of out balls" in the normal gaming state for the current base calculation. ”, the “current base BL” which is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out from the “general winning hole number of paid out balls” and “the number of paid out balls from the first winning hole” is calculated and stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The "current base BL" is updated (step S2503), and the process moves to step S2504.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of out balls in the normal gaming state for the current base calculation read from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S2502 has reached 60,000 balls. If the number of out balls in the normal gaming state for current base calculation has reached 60,000 balls (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2505, and if the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2505. (Step S2504: No), the process moves to step S2509.

<Steps S2505 to S2508>
If the number of out balls in the normal gaming state for current base calculation has reached 60,000 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 41 updates various base information stored in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2505). ~S2507). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 37(A) and 37(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the two-previous 60,000-ball base in the base information (step S2505), and changes the current base The BL is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S2506), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S2507).

Then, the MPU 41 clears the general winning hole payout ball number, the first winning hole payout ball number, and the out ball number in the normal gaming state for base calculation stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 balls. (step S2508), and the process moves to step S2509.

<Step S2509>
When the base information stored in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is updated (steps S2505 to S2508), or when the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S2504: No), the MPU 51 updates information other than the base information. Other specific performance information (for example, unit jackpot lottery number, continuous role object ratio, role object ratio) is read out from the game information storage area 412d, and other specific performance information is determined based on the read information. The performance information is calculated, the value of other specific performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is updated (step S2509), and the specific performance information update process is ended.

[Performance display monitor display control processing]
Here, FIGS. 38 to 41 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1411 of the main process in FIG. The display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 38, in step S2601, the MPU 41 determines whether the BL displaying flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 is set to on. Here, when display of the current base BL is started on the performance display monitor 43, the BL displaying flag is set to ON in step S2606 described later in the display control process or step S2630 in FIG. 41.

When the BL displaying flag is set to ON (step S2601: Yes), that is, when the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2608 in FIG. 39. On the other hand, if the BL displaying flag is set to OFF (step S2601: No), that is, if the current base BL is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2602.

<Step S2602>
If the BL displaying flag is set to off (step S2601: No), that is, if the current base BL is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 displays the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43. It is determined whether or not the B1 displaying flag indicating that the image is being displayed is set to on (step S2602). Here, when the performance display monitor 43 starts displaying the previous 60,000-ball base B1, the B1 displaying flag is set to ON in step S2612 of FIG. 39, which will be described later, in the display control process.

If the B1 displaying flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), that is, if the 60,000-ball base B1 was previously displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2617 in FIG. do. On the other hand, if the B1 displaying flag is set to off (step S2602: No), that is, if the 60,000-ball base B1 was not displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2603. .

<Step S2603>
If the B1 displaying flag is set to off (step S2602: No), that is, if the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 displays the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43. It is determined whether the B2 displaying flag indicating that the base B2 is being displayed is set on (step S2603). Here, the B2 displaying flag is set to ON in step S2621 of FIG. 40, which will be described later, in the display control process when display of the 60,000-ball base B2 is started on the performance display monitor 43.

If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), that is, if the 60,000-ball base B2 was displayed on the performance display monitor 43 the previous time, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2626 in FIG. 41. do. On the other hand, if the B2 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S2603: No), that is, if the 60,000-ball base B2 is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2604. .

<Step S2604>
If the B2 display flag is set to off (step S2603: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S2604). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S2604: Yes), the process moves to step S2605, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S2604: No), the corresponding End display control processing.

<Steps S2605 to S2607>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S2604: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S2605). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37(A), "8.", "L" indicating that the current base BL is 29%, If "2" and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. 37(B), the current base BL is 0%. ``8.'', ``L'', ``0'', and ``0'' are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets on the BL displaying flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2606). Furthermore, in order to display the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time, the MPU 41 sets a BL display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2607), and controls the display. Finish the process.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the BL displaying flag is set to on (step S2601: Yes), that is, when the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, as shown in FIG. 39, the MPU 41 executes step S2607 of FIG. The value of the BL display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 set in is subtracted by 1 (step S2608), and it is determined whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not. A judgment is made (step S2609). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1.

If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2609: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 performs processing. The process moves to step S2610. On the other hand, if the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2609: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 performs processing. The process moves to step S2614.

<Steps S2610 to S2613>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2609: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 The BL displaying flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the display monitor 43 is set to OFF (step S2610), and the previous 60,000 ball base included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is set to OFF. B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2611). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. ”, “3”, and “3” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 37(B), the previous 60,000 balls are displayed. “8.”, “1”, “2”, and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets on the B1 display flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2612). Furthermore, in order to display the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time, the MPU 41 sets a B1 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2613), the display control process ends.

<Step S2614>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2609: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 switches the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2614). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2615, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2614: No). ), the display control process ends.

Note that when the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, thereby displaying the alphabet indicating the current base BL. and the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S2615 and S2616>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL displaying flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 to off (step S2614: Yes). S2615). Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears the value of the BL display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 to 0 (step S2616), and ends the display control process.

<Steps S2617 and S2618>
Returning to FIG. 38, if the B1 displaying flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), that is, if the 60,000-ball base B1 was previously displayed on the performance display monitor 43, as shown in FIG. The MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the previous 60,000-ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 set in step S2613 in FIG. 39 (step S2617), and calculates the B1 display time after the subtraction. It is determined whether the value of the counter is 0 (step S2618). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2.

If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2618: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2. If so, the process moves to step S2619. On the other hand, if the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2618: No), that is, it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2. If so, the process moves to step S2623.

<Steps S2619 to S2622>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2618: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2, the MPU 41 sets the B1 displaying flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B1 was previously displayed on the performance display monitor 43 to OFF (step S2619), and sets the base information included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000-ball base B2 from the previous two times to be held (step S2620). For example, if the base information stored in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. ”, “3”, and “2” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43, and if the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets on the B2 display flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 was displayed two times before on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2621). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a B2 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time on the performance display monitor 43 in order to display the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2622), the display control process ends.

<Step S2623>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2618: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2, the MPU 41 It is determined whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2623). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the process moves to step S2624, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2623: No), the corresponding End display control processing.

Note that when the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 The alphabets and numbers indicating the are turned off.

<Steps S2624 and S2625>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the MPU 41 sets to off the B1 display flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43. At the same time (step S2624), the value of the B1 display time counter is cleared to 0 (step S2625), and the display control process ends.

<Steps S2626 and S2627>
Returning to FIG. 38, if the B2 displaying flag is set to on (step S2603: Yes), that is, if the 60,000-ball base B2 was displayed on the performance display monitor 43 two times before, as shown in FIG. The MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the 60,000-ball base B2 from the previous time on the performance display monitor 43 set in step S2622 of FIG. 40 (step S2626), and calculates the B2 display time after the subtraction. It is determined whether the value of the counter is 0 (step S2627). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000-ball base B2 two weeks ago to the current base BL.

If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2627: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL, the MPU 41 performs processing. The process moves to step S2628. On the other hand, if the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2627: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL, the MPU 41 performs processing. The process moves to step S2632.

<Steps S2628 to S2631>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2627: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000-ball base B2 before the previous time to the current base BL, the MPU 41 On the display monitor 43, the B2 displaying flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 was displayed two times before is set to OFF (step S2628), and the current base included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is set to OFF. The BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2629). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37(A), "8.", "L", "2" and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 37(B), the current base BL is 0%. ``8.'', ``L'', ``0'', and ``0'' are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, indicating that the performance is present. Then, the MPU 41 sets on the BL displaying flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2630), and sets the flag to display the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time. A BL display time counter is set (step S2631), and the display control process ends.

<Step S2632>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2627: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000-ball base B2 two days ago to the current base BL, the MPU 41 switches the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2632). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the process moves to step S2633, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2632: No), the corresponding End display control processing.

Note that when the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the 60,000-ball base B2 from the previous time The alphabets and numbers indicating the are turned off.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the base information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, and the base information is hidden on the performance display monitor 43 when the performance display switch 44 is turned off. may be displayed on the performance display monitor 43 at all times while the gaming machine 10 is powered on, or may be displayed on the performance display monitor 43 while the front frame 11 is open. good.

<Steps S2633 and S2634>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the MPU 41 sets to off the B2 display flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 was displayed two times before on the performance display monitor 43. (Step S2633). Further, the MPU 41 clears the value of the B2 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the 60,000-ball base B2 from the previous time to 0 (step S2634), and ends the display control process.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 54.

Note that in another embodiment, part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In addition, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27, startup processing at the time of startup of the audio lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power outage, etc. Descriptions of those processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, a sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process with a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 42, the MPU 51 performs counter update processing (step S2701), operation detection processing (step S2702), command determination processing (step S2703), and special figure game production control processing (step S2704) in the sub-timer interrupt processing. ), and jackpot game performance control processing (step S2705).

[Counter update processing]
In the counter update process (step S2701), the MPU 51 updates the production pattern type counter, the first stop symbol type counter, the variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the production type counter and the first stop symbol type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The production pattern type counter is used to determine the variation type (production pattern) based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Further, the first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to know the remaining variable display time, that the variable display is in progress, that the variable display of the symbol display section 341 has ended, etc.

[Operation detection processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in step S2702 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 42 will be described. Here, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process.

As shown in FIG. 43, in the operation detection processing, the MPU 41 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S2801), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2802), selection button operation detection processing (step S2803), selection operation detection pattern determination Processing (step S2804), determination button operation detection processing (step S2805), and determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2806) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection processing]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2801 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be determined whether or not there is. Here, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
As shown in FIG. 44, in the operation button operation detection process, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag (step S2901). Next, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag (step S2902). Thereafter, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag (step S2903), and ends the operation detection process.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2903, the operation status of the most recent three times at an interval of 1 msec is set as the operation history of the operation button 20 in the first detection flag to the third detection flag. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the two previous operation state is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 43, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, the operation of the operation button 20 is determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag is set for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the history. The operation pattern flags consist of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, if only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is being continued (see FIG. 46(A)). Furthermore, if only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 46(A)). Furthermore, if only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 46(A)). If all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 is not operated (see FIG. 46(A)). Here, FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. Further, FIG. 46(A) is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status for the operation button 20. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46(A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 45, in the operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines whether the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to on (step S3001). . Here, if the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3002. The process moves to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
If the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set on ( Step S3002). Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3003, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3003. The process moves to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set on (step S3003). ). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3004, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3004. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag on, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off (step S3004), and The operation detection pattern determination process ends. That is, when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second operation pattern. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 46(A)). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operating state of the operation button 20 continues. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and send this operation button operation continuation command to the audio lamp control device 5. . As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation button 20 is being continuously operated, and therefore the operation button 20 is being continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. I can keep track of the time. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time period during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Step S3005>
If the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on (step S3005). ). Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3006, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3006. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3006). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3007, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3007. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag on and turns off the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag (step S3007). That is, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 46(A)), and the operation detection pattern determination process ends. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times will be reflected, so the radio wave Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3008). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3010, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3010. The process moves to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag on, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off (step S3009), and The operation detection pattern determination process ends. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 46(A)). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). can.

<Step S3010>
If the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No) , or when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag off (step S3010), and The operation detection pattern determination process ends. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (See FIG. 46(A)). Note that when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state.

[Selection button operation detection processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation process>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, since the upper selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 44, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the upper selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "upper selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Down selection button operation process>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the lower selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 44, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Left selection button operation process>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the left selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 44, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the left selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Right selection button operation process>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 44, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 performs up selection operation detection pattern determination processing, down selection operation detection pattern determination processing, left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, and right selection operation detection pattern determination processing. Execute pattern determination processing.

<Up selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects an upper selection operation from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. An up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upward selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 45, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the upward selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 46(B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the upper selection button 211 for three times. If this occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

In addition, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been completed). used.

Furthermore, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that, when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in a non-operated state.

<Down selection operation detection pattern judgment process>
In the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the down selection button from the operation history of the down selection button 212 determined based on the first down selection operation detection flag, the second down selection operation detection flag, and the down selection operation detection flag. A down operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, the down selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 45, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process shown in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 46(C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the down selection button 212 for three times. If this occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

In addition, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third lower selection operation detection flags. Set all of them to off. Note that when all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in the non-operated state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects a left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 45, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 46(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the left selection button 213 for three times. If this occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third left selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operated state.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, since the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 45, detailed explanation will be omitted. In addition, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 45, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process changes the "operation detection flag" to the "right selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" to It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 46(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the three operation states of the right selection button 214. If this occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 continues.

In addition, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third right selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that, when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in the non-operated state.

[Enter button operation detection processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in the determination button operation detection process (step S2805), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the decision button operation detection process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 44, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the determination button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "determination button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Decision operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806), the MPU 41 selects the decision button from the operation history of the decision button 21B determined based on the first decision operation detection flag, the second decision operation detection flag, and the third decision operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 21B is set. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 45, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "determination operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 46(F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" have occurred as the operation states of the determination button 21B three times. In this case, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first determination operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON. The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from a non-operating state to an operating state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has started). .

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the third decision operation pattern flag to ON, and the first decision operation pattern flag is set to ON. The operation pattern flag and the second determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has been completed). .

Furthermore, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc. occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 controls all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags. Set to off. Note that, when all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in a non-operated state.

[Command judgment processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 42 will be described. Here, FIGS. 47 and 48 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing.

<Step S3101>
As shown in FIG. 47, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4 (step S3101). Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S3101: Yes), the process moves to step S3102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S3101: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

Note that the command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. In addition, the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is erased from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S3101 and becomes the target of processing. is memorized.

<Step S3102>
When a command is received (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102). The special symbol variation pattern command is a command that indicates the variable display time of special symbols in the special symbol game (special symbol variation pattern) and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

Here, if the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3103, and if the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102: No) , the process moves to step S3107.

<Steps S3103 and S3104>
If the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a variation type (production pattern) setting process (step S3103) based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. And the stop symbol combination setting process (step S3104) is executed. Hereinafter, details of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process and the stop symbol combination setting process will be explained.

[Variation type (production pattern) setting process]
In the variation type (performance pattern) setting process, special figure game effects are executed by various production means (symbol display section 341, speaker 26, illumination section 27, movable accessory member 39, sub movable display section 38) in the special figure game. is set. Specifically, based on the special figure variation pattern command, the MPU 51 refers to the variation type table (see FIG. 49), sets the variation type (effect pattern) and variable display time, and further sets the variation type (effect pattern). ) The effect pattern type is set based on the effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 50).

Here, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the variation type (effect pattern).

As shown in FIG. 49, in the variation type table, the content of the variation display time and variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command is defined. For example, the special pattern fluctuation pattern command "A01" whose lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the special pattern fluctuation pattern is "01" is associated with the fluctuation display time "30s" and the fluctuation type "normal reach effect pattern". ing. In addition, the special pattern fluctuation pattern command “B02” where the lottery result is “5R guaranteed strange jackpot” and the special pattern fluctuation pattern is “02” corresponds to the fluctuation display time “60s” and the fluctuation type “Super reach effect pattern”. The special pattern fluctuation pattern command "C03" where the lottery result is "16R guaranteed strange jackpot" and the special pattern fluctuation pattern is "03" has a fluctuation display time of "90s" and a fluctuation type "Special reach performance pattern". are associated. Furthermore, the special pattern fluctuation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "lost" and the special pattern fluctuation pattern is "04" is associated with the fluctuation display time "7s" and the fluctuation type "non-reach performance pattern". The special pattern fluctuation pattern command “D05” where the lottery result is “lost” and the special pattern fluctuation pattern is “05” is associated with the fluctuation display time “10s” and the fluctuation type “non-reach performance pattern”. It is being

Further, FIGS. 50(A) to 50(C) are diagrams showing examples of effect pattern type selection tables. The performance pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (performance pattern). Specifically, FIG. 50(A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in a special figure game effect is a normal reach effect, and FIG. 50(B) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table in a special figure game effect. This is a super reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual effect type is a super reach effect, and FIG. 50(C) is a super reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual effect type is a special reach effect. This is the special reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the number of production types corresponding to each variation type is five types will be described as an example, the number of production types may be six or more. Moreover, in FIG. 50, the performance type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 50(A), the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss) ``Rendering pattern X1'' to ``Rendering pattern X5'' are defined. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a normal reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the normal reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the performance patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach performance pattern type selection table are performances in which, for example, a normal reach performance in which the decorative symbol becomes a reach state after the end of a high-speed variation performance in which the decorative symbol changes at high speed is executed. , the final individual performance type is a normal reach performance.

In addition, in the super reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 50(B), "performance pattern Y1" to "performance pattern Y5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. It is being Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a super reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects a performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from table. Here, the performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach performance pattern type selection table are such that, for example, the normal reach performance is executed after the high-speed fluctuation performance ends, and the final individual performance type has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach performance. This is a performance that develops into a super reach performance with a higher performance and longer execution time than a normal reach performance. In addition, the super reach performance pattern type selection table may include a super reach performance pattern that develops into a super reach performance after the high-speed fluctuation performance ends, without going through the normal reach performance.

Furthermore, in the special reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. It is being Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects a special reach performance pattern type from the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from table. Here, performance patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach performance pattern type selection table are, for example, normal reach performance and super reach performance are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation performance, and furthermore, as the final individual performance type, normal reach performance and super reach performance. This is a performance that develops into a special reach performance with higher expectations for a jackpot than a reach performance, and a longer performance execution time than a normal reach performance. In addition, the special reach performance pattern type selection table includes special reach performance patterns that develop into special reach performance after the end of high-speed fluctuation performance or normal reach performance without going through at least one of normal reach performance and super reach performance. You can stay there.

[Stopping symbol combination setting process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process, a symbol combination is set when a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) that are variably displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the special symbol game are stopped and displayed on the active line. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the stop symbol combination based on the special symbol variation pattern command with reference to the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 51(B)).

Here, FIG. 51(A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the decorative pattern type and the color of the decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 51(A), in this embodiment, numbers "1" to "9" are set as decorative patterns, and among these numbers, "3" and "7" are red. , "1", "5" and "9" are green, and "2", "4", "6" and "8" are red. In the present embodiment, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is notified by a combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on one or more active lines set in the symbol display section 341. For example, if the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the same number will be displayed as a zero on the active line, and if the result of a jackpot lottery is a loss, the decorative pattern will be displayed as a zero on the active line. It is stopped and displayed when other than.

It is also conceivable to create a difference in the advantage of the player depending on the type of decorative symbol (number, color). For example, odd numbers are more advantageous to the player than even numbers, and among odd numbers, red "3" and "7" are set to be more advantageous to the player than green "1", "5" and "9". It is possible to do so. In this case, for example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the type of jackpot may be specified or suggested by a combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed. For example, when the stopping symbol combination is "777", it is clearly indicated that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, when the stopping symbol combination is "333", it is clearly indicated that it is a probability variable jackpot, and when the stopping symbol combination is an even number, it is clearly indicated that it is a variable jackpot. If the number is 5R, it may be indicated that it is a normal jackpot. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, depending on the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed, there is an expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery for a specific suspension of the special pattern game to be executed after the special pattern game will be a jackpot. The degree (expected degree of jackpot) may be made explicit or implied. For example, in a special figure game until a special figure game for a specific hold is executed, a random number of the same color is displayed as a so-called chance number, and the expectation level of a jackpot is determined by the color of the numbered number (chance number), a so-called look-ahead effect. It may also be explicitly stated or implied. Specifically, the expectation level of a jackpot in a special map game for a specific hold is the highest for red random spots (chance spots), the next highest for green random spots (chance spots), and the lowest for blue random spots. It may be set so that the variation pattern of the special figure game for a specific hold or the chance number of colors according to the win/fail information is displayed in a stopped state.

In this embodiment, the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed last. It is a design that

Here, FIG. 51(B) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 51(B), in the first stop symbol selection table, a decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, in FIG. 51(B), the decorative patterns are "1" to "9", and the symbol combination "777" indicates that "333" is a probability-variable jackpot (either a 5R probability-variable jackpot or a 16R probability-variable jackpot). ” is a symbol combination that indicates a 16R probability-variable jackpot, and a double number other than "333" and "777" is a symbol combination that indicates either a 5R regular jackpot, a 5R probability-variable jackpot, or a 16R probability-variable jackpot. It is a premise.

When the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is selected from decorative symbols other than "3" and "7" with a predetermined probability. It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R regular jackpot", the symbol combination "333" or "777" indicating a 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is not displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, when the lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", "7" is not distributed as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined from decorative symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is a "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination "777" indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot will not be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is a "5R probability-variable jackpot", the symbol combinations of zeros other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R probability-variable jackpot, may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", the result of the stop display of the decorative symbols may be a zero number symbol combination other than the symbol combination "333" which suggests a 5R normal jackpot. Then, when the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed strange jackpot" and a decorative pattern other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 recognizes that it is a 5R guaranteed strange jackpot in the jackpot game. Execute the clearly indicated 5R definite change promotion performance.

Furthermore, in the lottery result of "16R guaranteed strange jackpot", there is a distribution for all decorative symbols from "1" to "9", and the first stop is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9". The design is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability-variable jackpot," the symbol combinations of zeros other than the "777" symbol combination indicating a 16R probability-variable jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "16R sure-change jackpot," the stop-display result of the decorative pattern is a zero-number symbol combination other than the "777" symbol combination that suggests a 5R probability-change jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot. can be done. Then, when the lottery result is a "16R probability-variable jackpot" and "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R probability-variable promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability-variable jackpot in the jackpot game. .

Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stopped symbol combination that will be stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display section 341 in the special symbol game is determined.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "lost", there is a distribution for all decorative symbols from "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 51 selects the miss type selected based on the miss type table (see FIG. 9(D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol. A second stopped symbol is determined based on the stopped symbol. For example, when the miss type is front and back miss reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, if the miss type is reach other than front and back miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined by the design. Further, when the miss type is a complete miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be a different symbol from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. Note that the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols may be determined in the display control device 6. Only the first stop symbol is determined in the audio lamp control device 5, and the second and final stop symbols are determined in the display control device 6. You may decide.

<Step S3105>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in FIG. 47, in step S3105, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the received special figure variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the special figure variable pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining display time, etc. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol fluctuation display has ended when the fluctuation display counter reaches 0.

<Step S3106>
In step S3106, the MPU 51 sends a display variation pattern command to the display control device for specifying the performance pattern type set in step S3103 of the command determination process and the content of the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols determined in step S3104. 6, and the command determination process ends. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the performance pattern type and the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores variable images and performance images of decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display on the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses, and The changes in the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in order. During the variable display of decorative symbols, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the pattern display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, etc. .

Furthermore, when outputting the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets, for example, a special figure game presentation flag on. This special figure game performance flag is a flag indicating that a special figure game performance is being executed.

<Step S3107>
If the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3107). The special figure shift command is used when the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M decreases due to the start of the special figure game (fluctuating display of special figures). 1 holding area REA1 to 4th holding area REA4, or 1st holding area REB1 to 4th holding area REB4 of the 2nd special drawing holding storage area REB (see FIG. 8). Showing the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. This command indicates that information has shifted.

When the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3108, and when the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S3107: No), the process moves to step S3110. to move to.

<Steps S3108 and S3109>
If the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the special figure data setting process (step S3108) and the special figure data image display process (step S3109), and executes the command determination process. finish.

Here, the special figure data setting process executed in step S3108 is the special figure validity information data (special figure This is the process of shifting (updating) the data (figure data). The special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) is an area corresponding to the special figure holding storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4, and is equivalent to the special figure holding storage area 412b. Special map data is stored. The special figure holding storage area corresponding areas (not shown) include the first special figure holding storage area REA, the second special figure holding storage area REB of the special figure holding storage area 412b, and the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8). It includes a first special figure pending storage area corresponding area, a second special figure pending storage area corresponding area, and a special figure execution area corresponding area, respectively. In addition, the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area is the first special figure holding storage area corresponding to the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4 (see FIG. 8) of the first special figure holding storage area REA in the special figure holding storage area 412b. It includes an area corresponding to the first to fourth reservation areas in the figure (not shown) and a first special symbol reservation number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number storage area (see FIG. 8). Furthermore, the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area corresponds to the first to fourth holding areas REB1 to REB4 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure holding storage area REB in the special figure holding storage area 412b. It includes an area corresponding to the first to fourth reservation areas in the figure, and an area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area (see FIG. 8).

On the other hand, the special figure data image display process executed in step S3109 is based on the special figure data stored in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512 shifted (updated) in step S3108. This is a process of shifting an image related to special figure data (special figure data image) (see FIGS. 52 and 53) displayed on the display section 341.

Here, FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of the special figure data image displayed on the symbol display section 341 before and after receiving the special figure shift command. Specifically, FIG. 52 (A1) and FIG. 52 (A2) are diagrams showing examples of special figure data images before receiving a special figure shift command, and FIG. 52 (B1) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure data image before receiving a special figure shift command. This is an example of the special pattern data image after receiving the special pattern shift command for the first special pattern game in the display state of the special pattern data image shown in FIG. 52 (B2), and FIG. 52 (B2) is the special pattern data image shown in FIG. This is an example of a special figure data image after receiving a special figure shift command for the second special figure game in the display state of .

As shown in FIG. 52 (A1) and FIG. 52 (A2), the special symbol data image is displayed on special symbol data image display sections 75, 76, and 77 set in the symbol display section 341. The special figure data image display units 75, 76, and 77 display the special figure execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512, and the first special figure holding storage area. Corresponding to the corresponding area and the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area, it includes a special figure fluctuation image display area 75, a first special figure holding image display area 76, and a second special figure holding image display area 77.

The special figure fluctuation image display area 75 corresponds to the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area corresponding to the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special figure holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4. This is an area for displaying the special pattern game image for the special pattern game based on the special pattern data stored in the special pattern execution area corresponding area (not shown). In the special figure fluctuation image display area 75, when special figure data is stored in the area corresponding to the special figure execution area, the special figure game image is displayed, while the special figure game image is displayed in the area corresponding to the special figure execution area. If no figure data is stored, the special figure game image is not displayed. That is, the special symbol game image is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and is hidden when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In other words, by displaying the special pattern game image, it is made clear that the special pattern game is being executed, and by hiding the special pattern game image, it is made clear that the special pattern game is over. .

In the example shown in FIG. 52 (A1) and FIG. 52 (A2), the special figure data is stored in the area corresponding to the special figure execution area, and the special figure game image (cross This shows a state in which the hatched circle) is displayed.

The first special figure pending image display area 76 is the above-mentioned special figure pending storage corresponding to the first special figure pending storage area REA (see FIG. 8) of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4. This is an area for displaying the first special figure pending image for the first special figure game based on the special figure data stored in the first special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the area corresponding area. This first special figure holding image display area 76 is located in the first to fourth holding area corresponding areas (not shown) of the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area in the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area. Correspondingly, the first special figure first pending image display area 761, the first special figure second pending image display area 762, the first special figure third pending image display area 763, and the first special figure fourth pending image display Includes area 764. Then, in the first special figure reservation image display area 76, if special figure data is stored in any of the areas corresponding to the first to fourth reservation areas (not shown), the first special figure reservation image display area 76 is displayed. While the image is displayed, the first special figure reserved image is not displayed if no special figure data is stored in any of the first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown). That is, when there is a reservation for the first special figure game, the number of first special figure reservation images corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N is displayed, and when there is no reservation for the first special figure game, the number of first special figure reservation images is displayed. Do not show. In other words, the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure game is specified based on the number of displayed first special figure reservation images.

In the example shown in FIG. 52 (A1), the first special figure pending image is displayed in the first special figure first to third pending image display areas 761 to 763, and the first special figure fourth pending image display area 764 The first special figure pending image is not displayed. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (A1), the special figure data is in the first to third reservation area corresponding areas of the first special figure first to fourth reservation area corresponding areas (not shown). This indicates that no special figure data is stored in the area corresponding to the first special figure fourth reservation area, and that the first special figure reserve number N for the first special figure game is three.

The second special figure pending image display area 77 is the above-mentioned special figure pending storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending storage area REB (see FIG. 8) of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4. This is an area where a second special figure pending image for the second special figure game is displayed based on the special figure data stored in the second special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the area corresponding area. This second special figure holding image display area 77 is located in the second special figure holding area corresponding area (not shown) of the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area in the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area. Correspondingly, the second special figure first pending image display area 771, the second special figure second pending image display area 772, the second special figure third pending image display area 773, and the second special figure fourth pending image display Region 774 is included. Then, in the second special figure holding image display area 77, when special figure data is stored in any of the second special figure first to fourth holding area corresponding areas (not shown), the second special figure holding image display area 77 is displayed. While the image is displayed, the second special figure pending image is not displayed if no special figure data is stored in any of the second special figure first to fourth holding area corresponding areas (not shown). That is, when there is a hold for the second special figure game, the number of second special figure pending images corresponding to the second special figure hold number M is displayed, and when there is no hold for the second special figure game, the number of second special figure pending images is displayed. Do not show. In other words, the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is specified based on the displayed number of second special figure reservation images.

In the example shown in FIG. 52 (A2), the second special figure pending image is displayed in the second special figure first to second pending image display areas 771 to 772, and the second special figure third to fourth pending image The second special figure pending image is not displayed in the display areas 773 to 774. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (A2), the special figure data is in the area corresponding to the second special figure first to second reservation area of the area corresponding to the second special figure first to fourth retention area (not shown). is stored, and no special figure data is stored in the area corresponding to the second special figure third and fourth reservation areas, indicating that the second special figure reserve number M for the second special figure game is two. There is.

Then, in the special figure data image display process, when the received special figure shift command is for the first special figure, that is, when the first special figure game is started, the special figure is executed in the area corresponding to the special figure holding storage area. The special figure game image is displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 based on the special figure data stored in the area corresponding area (not shown), and further, the first special figure reservation in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area is performed. The first special figure pending image is displayed in the first special figure pending image display area 76 based on the special figure data stored in the storage area corresponding area (not shown). For example, in a state where the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure shown in FIG. 52 (A1) is 3 pieces and the second special figure reserve number M for the second special figure is 0 pieces, the special figure game ends. When a new first special figure game is started by doing so, as shown in FIG. 52 (B1), the special figure game image is displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75, and the first special figure The first special figure reserved image is displayed in the first special figure first to second reserved image display areas 761 to 762 of the reserved image display area 76. That is, as shown in FIG. 52 (A1) and FIG. 52 (B1), by starting a new first special figure game, the first special figure pending image display area is displayed before the start of the first special figure game. The first special figure pending image displayed in the first special figure first pending image display area 761 of 76 is shifted to the said special figure fluctuation image display area 75 as the said special figure game image, and the first special figure held image of said first special figure game is Each of the first special figure pending images displayed in the first special figure second to third pending image display areas 762 to 763 of the first special figure pending image display area 76 before the start is displayed as the first special figure pending image display. It is shifted to the first special figure first and second reserved image display areas 761 and 762 in the area 76.

On the other hand, in the special figure data image display process, when the received special figure shift command is for the second special figure, that is, when the second special figure game is started, the special figure is executed in the area corresponding to the special figure holding storage area. The special figure game image is displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 based on the special figure data stored in the area corresponding area (not shown), and further, the second special figure reservation in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area is performed. A second special figure pending image is displayed in the second special figure pending image display area 77 based on the special figure data stored in the storage area corresponding area (not shown). For example, in a state where the first special figure reservation number N for the second special figure shown in FIG. 52 (A2) is one and the second special figure reserve number M for the second special figure is two, the special figure game ends. When a new second special figure game is started by doing so, as shown in FIG. 52 (B2), the special figure game image is displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75, and the second special figure The second special figure reserved image is displayed in the second special figure first reserved image display area 771 of the reserved image display area 77. That is, as shown in FIG. 52 (A2) and FIG. 52 (B2), by starting a new second special figure game, the second special figure pending image display area is displayed before the start of the second special figure game. The second special figure pending image displayed in the second special figure first pending image display area 771 of 77 is shifted to the said special figure fluctuation image display area 75 as the said special figure game image, and the second special figure held image of said second special figure game is The second special figure pending image that was displayed in the second special figure second pending image display area 772 of the second special figure pending image display area 77 before the start is the second special figure in the second special figure pending image display area 77. It is shifted to the first pending image display area 771.

Note that the special pattern data images in the special pattern data image display sections 75, 76, and 77 may be displayed continuously from the start of the special pattern game to the end of the special pattern game, but It may be in a non-display state for a part of the period. For example, when a super reach effect or special reach effect is executed in the special figure game, the special figure data image is hidden while the super reach effect or special reach effect is being executed so as not to obstruct the visibility of these effects. It may also be displayed. In this case, the special figure data image may be re-displayed before or after the end of the super reach effect or special reach effect, or the non-display state may be continued. In addition, when the special figure data image is hidden, while the special figure data image is hidden, the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure game and the second special figure for the second special figure game It is also possible to display an image such as a number that clearly indicates the number of reservations M.

The special pattern data images in the special pattern data image display sections 75, 76, and 77 show the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game or the reserved special pattern game will be a jackpot depending on the display mode. degree) may be specified or implied. For example, by setting multiple display modes (forms such as color, shape, pattern, effect, combination of two or more of these) corresponding to the jackpot expectation level as a special figure data image, multiple display modes can be set based on the results of the jackpot lottery. A predetermined display mode for the special figure data image may be set from the display mode. When specifying or suggesting the jackpot expectation based on the display mode of the special figure data image, the display mode of the special figure data image is changed (so-called pending change) until the special figure game for the special figure data image ends. ). In this case, the change in the display mode of the special figure data image is performed so that the jackpot expectation level becomes the same or higher (promotion), and a change that lowers the jackpot expectation level (demotion) is not performed. Of course, when a change in the display mode of the special figure data image (demotion change) that lowers the jackpot expectation is performed, it is also conceivable that the jackpot expectation becomes higher. In addition, there is no particular restriction on the timing of changing the display mode of the special figure data image, such as at the start of the special figure game (the timing at which the special figure data image shifts), or after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the special figure game (the timing at which the special figure data image shifts). For example, from the start of the special figure game until the start of the ready-to-win performance, during the execution of the ready-to-win performance, before and after the development to the ready-to-win performance with higher expectations for jackpot), etc.

In the example shown in FIG. 52, the special figure data image display sections 75, 76, 77 include the special figure fluctuation image display area 75, the first special figure pending image display area 76, and the second special figure pending image display area 77. Although three types are set, it is also possible to change the display contents of the special figure data image display sections 75, 76, and 77 depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal game state, the second special figure pending image display area 77 is not displayed, and the special figure variable image display area 75 and the first special figure pending image display area 76 are displayed, and in the variable probability game state and the time-saving game. In this state, it is also possible to display the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 and the second special figure pending image display area 77 without displaying the first special figure pending image display area 76.

<Step S3110>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 47, if the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S3107: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special figure hold command (step S3110). The first special figure reservation command includes information indicating that the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure game increases, information regarding the first special figure reservation number N after the increase, and information regarding the increasing number of first special figure reservations. It includes information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3111, and if the received command is not the first special figure hold command (step S3110: No), The process moves to step S3113.

<Steps S3111 and S3112>
If the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special figure hold information update process (step S3111) and the first special figure hold image display process (step S3112). Then, the command determination process ends.

Here, the first special figure holding information update process executed in step S3111 is performed in the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area. This is the process of adding (updating) special figure data). Specifically, in the first special figure holding information update process, the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 ( (See Figure 8), the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first vacant holding area corresponds to the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 in which the special figure validity information is stored. It is stored in the first to fourth reservation area corresponding areas (not shown) set by the first special map. For example, when the special figure validity information is stored in the second holding area REA2 (see FIG. 8) of the first special figure holding storage area REA in the special figure holding storage area 412b, the information corresponding to the second holding area REA2 is stored. The special figure data is stored in the set first special figure second reservation area corresponding area (not shown). In addition, in the first special figure reservation information update process, 1 is added to the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area. .

On the other hand, the first special figure pending image display process executed in step S3112 is based on the special figure data added (updated) to the first special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S3112. A process of adding the first special figure pending image to the special figure pending image display area 76 is executed.

Here, FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of the special figure data image displayed on the symbol display section 341 before and after receiving the first special figure hold command or the second special figure hold command. Specifically, FIG. 53(A) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure data image before receiving the first special figure hold command or the second special figure hold command, and FIG. This is an example of the special figure data image after receiving the first special figure hold command for the first special figure game in the display state of the special figure data image shown in A).

FIG. 53(A) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation image is displayed, one first special figure pending image and two second special figure pending images are displayed. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 53(A), the special figure game is being executed, the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure game is 1, and the second special figure reservation for the second special figure game is This shows that the number M is two.

Then, in the first special figure holding image display process that is executed when the first special figure holding command is received in the display state of the special figure data shown in FIG. 53(A), the holding for the first special figure game increases. When there are two pieces, based on the special figure data stored in the first special figure second holding area corresponding area (not shown) of the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area. , as shown in FIG. 53(B), the first special figure pending image is displayed in the first special figure second pending image display area 762 of the first special figure pending image display area 76.

<Step S3113>
If the received command is not the first special figure hold command (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special figure hold command (step S3113). The second special figure reservation command includes information indicating that the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game increases, information regarding the second special figure reservation number M after the increase, and information regarding the increasing second reservation number M. It includes information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery.

When the received command is the second special figure holding command (step S3113: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3114, and when the received command is not the second special figure holding command (step S3113: No), The process moves to step S3116.

<Steps S3114 and S3115>
If the received command is the second special figure hold command (step S3113: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special figure hold information update process (step S3114) and the second special figure hold image display process (step S3115). Then, the command determination process ends.

Here, the second special figure holding information update process executed in step S3114 is performed in the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area. This is the process of adding (updating) special figure data). Specifically, in the second special figure holding information update process, the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 ( (see Figure 8), the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first vacant reservation area corresponds to the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 in which the special figure validity information is stored. It is stored in the second special chart first to fourth reservation area corresponding areas (not shown) set by the following. For example, when the special figure validity information is stored in the third holding area REB3 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure holding storage area REB in the special figure holding storage area 412b, the information corresponding to the third holding area REB3 is stored. The special figure data is stored in the set first special figure third reservation area corresponding area (not shown). In addition, in the second special figure reservation information update process, 1 is added to the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area. .

On the other hand, the second special figure pending image display process executed in step S3115 is based on the special figure data added (updated) to the second special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S3114. A process of adding a second special figure pending image to the special figure pending image display area 77 is executed.

Here, FIG. 53(C) is an example of the special figure data image after receiving the second special figure hold command for the second special figure game in the display state of the special figure data image shown in FIG. 53(A).

In the second special figure hold image display process that is executed when the second special figure hold command is received in the display state of the special figure data shown in FIG. 53(A), in other words, the hold for the second special figure game increases. If there are 3 pieces, based on the special figure data stored in the 2nd special figure 3rd holding area corresponding area (not shown) of the 2nd special figure holding storage area corresponding area in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area, As shown in 53(C), the second special figure pending image is displayed in the second special figure third pending image display area 773 of the second special figure pending image display area 77.

<Step S3116>
If the received command is not the second special figure pending command (step S3113: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S3116). The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start a jackpot game, and is set when starting a jackpot game in step S2204 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. .

When the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3117, and when the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3116: No), the process moves to step S3119. to move to.

<Steps S3117 and S3118>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game performance setting process (step S3117), sets the jackpot game in progress flag to ON (step S3118), and processes the command determination process. end.

In the jackpot game performance setting process, a process for setting a jackpot performance including an opening performance, opening/closing execution mode performance (round game performance and interval performance), and ending performance to be executed in the jackpot game is executed.

In addition, the jackpot game in progress flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed, and in step S3201 in the jackpot game performance control process in FIG. It is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the progress of the jackpot game performance.

<Step S3119>
If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S3119). The opening start command is a command indicating to start the opening of the jackpot game, and is set when starting the opening in step S2208 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. .

If the received command is an opening start command (step S3119: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3120, and if the received command is not an opening start command (step S3119: No), the process moves to step S3121. do.

<Step S3120>
If the opening start command is received (step S3119: Yes), the MPU 52 sets the opening presentation start flag to ON (step S3120), and ends the command determination process. The opening performance start flag is a flag for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game, and is referenced in step S3202 in the jackpot game performance control process in FIG. 54, which will be described later, to determine whether or not to start the opening performance. .

<Step S3121>
If the received command is not an opening start command (step S3119: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening end command (step S3121). The opening end command is a command indicating to end the opening of the jackpot game, and is set when the opening is ended in step S2214 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 30 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. .

When the received command is an opening end command (step S3121: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3122, and when the received command is not an opening end command (step S3121: No), the process moves to the step of FIG. The process moves to S3123.

<Step S3122>
When the opening end command is received (step S3121: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening performance end flag to ON (step S3122), and ends the command determination process. The opening performance end flag is a flag that ends the opening performance of the jackpot game, and is referenced in step S3205 in the jackpot game performance control process in FIG. 54, which will be described later, to determine whether or not to end the opening performance. .

<Step S3123>
If the received command is not an opening end command (step S3121: No), as shown in FIG. 48, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command (step S3123). The round game start command is a command that indicates the start of the round game in the open/close execution mode and also indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is a command that indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is a command that indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is a command that indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is a command that indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time. This is set when starting a round game in the opening/closing execution mode in step S2217 in the control process.

When the received command is a round game start command (step S3123: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3124, and when the received command is not a round game start command (step S3123: No), the process moves to step S3126. to move to.

<Steps S3124 and S3125>
When the round game start command is received (step S3123: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance start flag to ON (step S3124), and stores the round number information indicating which round the round game is in the RAM 512. (step S3125), and the command determination process ends. The round game performance start flag is referred to in step S3208 of the jackpot game performance control process in FIG. 54, which will be described later, to determine whether to start each round game performance of the opening/closing execution mode performance.

<Step S3126>
If the received command is not a round game start command (step S3123: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command (step S3126). The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and when the round game is ended in step S2229 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. is set to

When the received command is a round game end command (step S3126: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3127, and when the received command is not a round game end command (step S3126: No), the process moves to step S3128. to move to.

<Step S3127>
If the round game end command is received (step S3126: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S3127), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game performance in step S3211 in the jackpot game performance control process in FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3128>
If the received command is not a round game end command (step S3126: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval start command (step S3128). The interval start command is a command indicating to start an interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and starts the interval in step S2233 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Set in case.

Here, if the received command is an interval start command (step S3128: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3129, and if the received command is not an interval start command (step S3128: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3129. The process moves to S3130.

<Step S3129>
If the received command is an interval start command (step S3128: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect start flag to ON (step S3129), and ends the command determination process. The interval performance start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the interval performance in step S3214 in the jackpot game performance control process of FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3130>
If the received command is not an interval start command (step S3128: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval end command (step S3130). The interval end command is a command indicating to end the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and ends the interval in step S2239 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 32 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Set in case.

Here, if the received command is an interval end command (step S3130: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3131, and if the received command is not an interval end command (step S3130: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3131. The process moves to S3132.

<Step S3131>
If the received command is an interval end command (step S3130: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to ON (step S3131), and ends the command determination process. The interval performance end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the interval performance in step S3217 in the jackpot game performance control process of FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3132>
If the received command is not an interval end command (step S3130: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command (step S3132). The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set when starting the ending in step S2242 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. .

Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S3132: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3133, and if the received command is not an ending start command (step S3132: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3133. The process moves to S3134.

<Step S3133>
If the received command is an ending start command (step S3132: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON (step S3133), and ends the command determination process. The ending performance start flag is referred to when determining whether to start the ending performance in step S3220 of the jackpot game performance control process in FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3134>
If the received command is not an ending start command (step S3132: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending end command (step S3134). The ending end command is a command indicating that the ending of the jackpot game ends, and is set when ending the ending in step S2248 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 32 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. .

Here, if the received command is an ending end command (step S3134: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3135, and if the received command is not an ending end command (step S3134: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3135. The process moves to S3136.

<Step S3135>
If the received command is an ending end command (step S3134: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to ON (step S3135), and ends the command determination process. The ending effect end flag is referred to when determining whether to end the ending effect in step S3223 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3136>
If the received command is not an ending end command (step S3134: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3136). The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game is ended in step S2250 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. .

Here, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3137 when the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3136: Yes), and when the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3136: No), the process The process moves to step S3139.

<Step S3137>
If the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3136: Yes), the MPU 51 sets off the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed (step S3137), and executes the command determination process. finish.

<Step S3138>
If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3136: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4 (step S3138), and ends the command determination processing.

[Jackpot game production control processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect control process executed in step S2705 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 42 will be explained. In the jackpot game performance control process, a process for controlling the jackpot game performance according to the progress of the jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot game performance set in the jackpot game performance setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. 47. be done. Here, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game performance control process. Hereinafter, the jackpot game performance control process will be explained with reference to FIG.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 54, in the jackpot game production control process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on (step S3201). The jackpot game in progress flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed, and is set to ON when a jackpot game start command is received in step S3118 in the command determination process of FIG. 47. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being executed.

When the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3202. On the other hand, when the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 51 ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3202>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening performance start flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes). The opening performance start flag (S3202) is a flag for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the opening start command is received in step S3120 of the command determination process in FIG. 47. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the opening performance.

If the opening performance start flag is set to ON (step S3202: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3203. On the other hand, if the opening performance start flag is set to OFF (step S3202: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3205.

<Steps S3203 and S3204>
When the opening performance start flag is set to ON (step S3202: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 performs the following in the jackpot game performance setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. A process for starting the set opening effect is executed (step S3203). Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening performance start flag to OFF (step S3204), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3205>
If the opening performance start flag is set to OFF (step S3202: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening performance end flag is set to ON (step S3202: No). The punning performance end flag (S3205) is a flag that ends the opening performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the opening end command is received in step S3122 of the command determination process in FIG. 47. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the opening performance.

If the opening performance end flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3206. On the other hand, if the opening performance end flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3208.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
If the opening performance end flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 executes processing to end the opening performance (step S3206). Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening performance end flag to OFF (step S3207), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3208>
If the opening performance end flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 determines whether the round game performance start flag is set to ON ( Step S3208). The round game performance start flag is a flag for starting the round game performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when a round game start command is received in step S3124 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the round game performance.

If the round game performance start flag is set to ON (step S3208: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3209. On the other hand, when the round game performance start flag is set to OFF (step S3208: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3211.

<Steps S3209 and S3210>
When the round game performance start flag is set to ON (step S3208: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance setting in step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. A process for starting a round game performance of the jackpot game performance set in the process is executed (step S3209). Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game performance start flag to OFF (step S3210), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3211>
If the round game performance start flag is set to OFF (step S3208: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game performance end flag is set to ON. (Step S3211). The round game performance end flag is a flag that ends the round game performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the round game end command is received in step S3127 in the command determination process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the round game production.

When the round game performance end flag is set to ON (step S3211: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3212. On the other hand, when the round game performance end flag is set to OFF (step S3211: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3214.

<Steps S3212 and S3213>
When the round game performance end flag is set to ON (step S3211: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 executes processing to end the round game performance (step S3212). Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game performance end flag to OFF (step S3213), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3214>
If the round game performance end flag is set to OFF (step S3211: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval performance start flag is set to ON. (Step S3214). The interval performance start flag is a flag for starting the interval performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the interval start command is received in step S3129 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the round game performance.

If the interval effect start flag is set to ON (step S3214: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the interval effect, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3215. On the other hand, if the interval effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3214: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the interval effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3217.

<Steps S3215 and S3216>
When the interval performance start flag is set to ON (step S3214: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game performance setting process in step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. Processing for starting the interval performance of the set jackpot game performance is executed (step S3215). Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval performance start flag to OFF (step S3216), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3217>
If the interval performance start flag is set to OFF (step S3214: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval performance end flag is set to ON (step S3214: No). S3217). The interval performance end flag is a flag that ends the interval performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when an interval end command is received in step S3131 in the command determination process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the interval presentation.

If the interval performance end flag is set to ON (step S3217: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3218. On the other hand, if the interval performance end flag is set to OFF (step S3217: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3220.

<Steps S3218 and S3219>
If the interval performance end flag is set to ON (step S3217: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 executes processing to end the interval performance (step S3218). Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval performance end flag to OFF (step S3219), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3220>
If the interval performance end flag is set to OFF (step S3217: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending performance start flag is set to ON (step S3217: No). S3220). The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ending start command is received in step S3133 in the command determination process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the ending effect.

If the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S3220: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3221. On the other hand, if the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3220: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3223.

<Steps S3221 and S3222>
If the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S3220: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 performs the following in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. Processing for starting the ending effect of the set jackpot game effect is executed (step S3221). Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending performance start flag to OFF (step S3222), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S3223>
If the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3220: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S3220: No). S3223). The ending performance end flag is a flag that ends the ending performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ending end command is received in step S3135 in the command determination process in FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the ending effect.

If the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S3223: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3224. On the other hand, when the ending performance end flag is set to OFF (step S3223: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the ending performance, the MPU 51 ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Steps S3224 and S3225>
If the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S3223: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 executes processing to end the ending effect (step S3224). Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending performance end flag to OFF (step S3225), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Furthermore, in other embodiments described below, descriptions of the same configuration and steps similar to the processing procedure as the gaming machine 10 described in the above-described first embodiment will be omitted. Note that it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second embodiment]
As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine is equipped with a "numeric value storage process" as a first numerical information setting means and a second numerical information setting means, and a "subtraction process" as a subtracting means, and It is equipped with a "display effect" as a specific effect, a "effect display process" as a effect display means, a "game state" as a specific game state and a predetermined game state, and an "update process" as an update means. ", and also includes a "correspondence display" as a specific correspondence display.

The first numerical information setting means and the second numerical information setting means may be any process that sets (stores) various numerical information regarding the game. As the first numerical information setting means and the second numerical information setting means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters acquired by starting winnings may be set in a predetermined storage area. (Storing) numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters acquired by the first special jackpot lottery executed when a game ball enters the first prize opening is set in a predetermined storage area ( Numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters obtained by the second special jackpot lottery executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening is set (stored) in a predetermined storage area. ) processing, processing to set (storage) numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the first special figure for the first special figure game in a predetermined storage area, variable display time of the second special figure for the second special figure game A process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to a predetermined storage area in a predetermined storage area, a process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special drawing game in a predetermined storage area, 2. A process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special figure game in a predetermined storage area, and a process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters obtained by the lottery winning the regular figure in a predetermined storage area. A process of setting (storing) in a storage area, a process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the fluctuating display time of a general figure for a general figure game in a predetermined storage area, a lottery for winning a general figure notified by a general figure game. A process for setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the result in a predetermined storage area, a process for setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the number of round games in a jackpot game in a predetermined storage area, and a high support mode (second A process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executions of the special figure game in a predetermined storage area in a state where the electric accessory installed in the winning opening has a high operating frequency or operating probability, and after the jackpot game ends. The process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executions of the special figure game in the A time-saving gaming state, which is the high support mode to which the transition is made, in a predetermined storage area, and the process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executions of the special figure game in the a-time saving gaming state, which is the high support mode to be transitioned to, and the process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executions of the special figure game in a predetermined storage area. The process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executions of the special figure game in the B time-saving game state, which is a high support mode that is transitioned to by executing the game, in a predetermined storage area, and the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol. A process of setting (storing) in a predetermined storage area numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executions of the special figure game in the c time-saving game state, which is a high support mode to which the special figure game is transferred after the end of the special figure game that is out of stop. The process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the number of remaining special figure games required before transitioning to the time-saving gaming state in a predetermined storage area, and the number of reserved rights to execute the first special figure game. 1 Process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings N in a predetermined storage area, numerical information corresponding to the second number of reserved special drawings M, which is the number of reserved rights to execute the second special drawing game. A process of setting (storing) in a predetermined storage area, a process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the number of reservations of the right to play the general game game, X, in a predetermined storage area, and displaying. A process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N displayed on the device in a predetermined storage area, and a process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the second special figure reservation number M displayed on the display device. A process of setting (storing) in the storage area of A process of setting (storing) the number of displayed images on the display device in a predetermined storage area, and a process of setting (storing) the number of displayed second special figure reserved images on the display device corresponding to the number M of second reserved special figures in a predetermined storage area ( storage), arbitrary combinations thereof, etc.

The subtraction means may be any process that subtracts various numerical information. As a subtraction means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the first special figure in the first special figure game, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the first special figure in the second special figure game, etc. 2 Process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the special figure, process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the regular figure in the regular figure game, numerical information corresponding to the number of round games in the jackpot game Processing to subtract numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executions of special figure games in high support mode, process to subtract numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in a time-saving gaming state (b) Processing to subtract numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state; (c) Numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state. (b) Processing to subtract numerical information corresponding to the number of remaining special figure games required before transitioning to the time-saving gaming state; A process of subtracting the numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved figures N, a process of subtracting the numerical information corresponding to the second reserved number of special figures M, which is the number of reserved rights to play the second special figure game, and a process of executing the regular figure game. A process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the number of reserved general symbols X, which is the number of reserved rights for the right to do so, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number N displayed on the display device, and a process displaying on the display device A process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the second special figure reservation number M to be displayed, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the general figure fluctuation reservation number X displayed on the display device, a process corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N A process of subtracting the number of second special figure pending images displayed on the display device, a process of subtracting the number of second special figure pending images displayed on the display device corresponding to the second special figure pending number M, any of these Examples include combinations of.

The updating means may be any process that updates various numerical information. As the updating means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a process of updating numerical information in a predetermined storage area that stores numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters obtained by jackpot lottery; A process for updating numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the first special figure in the special figure game, a process for updating numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the second special figure in the second special figure game, and a process for updating the numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the second special figure in the second special figure game. Processing to update numerical information corresponding to the fluctuating display time of regular figures in games, process to update numerical information corresponding to the number of round games in jackpot games, and correspondence to the maximum number of executions of special figure games in high support mode. A process of updating the numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state, b. The maximum number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state (c) Processing to update the numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state; (b) Processing to update the numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state; A process of updating numerical information corresponding to the number of special figure games, a process of updating numerical information corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N, which is the number of reserves of the right to execute the first special figure game, a second special figure game The process of updating the numerical information corresponding to the second special drawing reservation number M, which is the reservation number of the right to play the general drawing game, and the numerical information corresponding to the general drawing fluctuation reservation number X, which is the reservation number of the right to play the general drawing game. A process of updating, a process of updating numerical information corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N displayed on the display device, a process of updating numerical information corresponding to the second special figure reservation number M displayed on the display device, A process of updating the numerical information corresponding to the general figure fluctuation pending number X displayed on the display device, and a second special figure corresponding to the second special figure pending number M, which is the reserved number of rights to execute the second special figure game. Examples include a process of updating the number of pending images displayed on a display device, an arbitrary combination thereof, and the like.

The specific performance may be any performance executed in a predetermined gaming state. As a specific performance, if it is possible to realize the purpose of the present invention, for example, a performance performed during execution of the first special figure game, a performance executed during execution of the second special figure game, and a performance executed during execution of the jackpot game. Production executed during execution of the small winning game, production executed during the execution of the regular winning game, production executed during the execution of the regular winning game, low support mode (second prize winning) A performance that is performed during a state in which the frequency or probability of operation of an electric accessory provided in the mouth is low), a performance that is performed during a high support mode, a performance that is performed in a state where a jackpot game is likely to occur, A performance that is executed in a state where there is a high probability that the lottery result in a jackpot lottery will be a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, a performance that is executed in a state where a small winning game is likely to occur, and a performance that is executed in a state where the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is advantageous to the player. A performance that is executed in a state where the probability of a small hit is high, a performance that is executed while the time-saving gaming state is being executed, b a performance that is executed while the time-saving gaming state is being executed, and c a performance that is executed during the execution of the time-saving gaming state. Performance, performance executed during execution of the first special figure game in the normal gaming state, performance executed during execution of the second special figure game in the normal gaming state, a first special figure in the time-saving gaming state A performance that is executed during the execution of the game, a performance that is executed during the execution of the second special figure game in the time-saving game state, b a performance that is executed during the execution of the first special figure game in the time-saving game state, b A production executed during the execution of the second special figure game in the time-saving game state, c a production executed during the execution of the first special figure game in the time-saving game state, c A second special figure in the time-saving game state A production that is executed during the execution of a game, a production that is executed during the execution of the first special figure game that is triggered by a game ball entering the first winning hole in the normal gaming state, and a production that is executed during the execution of the first special figure game that is triggered by the game ball entering the first winning hole in the normal gaming state. A production executed during the execution of the second special figure game that is triggered by the game ball entering the second winning hole, a. During the execution of the second special figure game, which is executed when the game ball enters the second prize opening in the time-saving game state. (b) A performance executed during the execution of the first special figure game triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening in the time-saving game state; (b) A second performance in the time-saving game state. A production that is executed during the execution of the second special figure game that is triggered by the game ball entering the winning slot, and a production that is triggered by the game ball entering the first winning slot in the time-saving game state. Performance executed during the execution of the first special figure game to be executed, c Executed during the execution of the second special figure game executed in response to the game ball entering the second prize opening in the time-saving game state. Examples include performances that are performed, arbitrary combinations thereof, and so on.

The performance display means may be any process that displays a performance in a predetermined gaming state. As the effect display means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a process of displaying the effect for the first special figure game, a process of displaying the effect for the second special figure game, a process of displaying the effect for the jackpot game, etc. , a process of displaying an effect for a small winning game, a process of displaying an effect for a general figure game, a process of displaying an effect for a normal figure winning game, a process of displaying an effect for a low support mode, a process of displaying an effect for a high support mode. processing, processing to display an effect in a state where a jackpot game is likely to occur, processing to display an effect in a state where the lottery result in a jackpot lottery has a high probability of being a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, and a process to display an effect in a state where a small win game is likely to occur. A process for displaying a performance, a process for displaying a performance in a state where there is a high probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a small win advantageous to the player, a process for displaying a performance in a time-saving gaming state, b a process for displaying a performance in a time-saving gaming state. Processing to display, c Processing to display the performance in the time-saving game state, Processing to display the performance in the normal gaming state, Processing to display the performance in the normal gaming state, a Performance for the first special figure game in the time-saving gaming state A process of displaying the effect for the second special figure game in the time-saving game state, b process of displaying the effect for the first special figure game in the time-saving game state, b process of displaying the effect for the first special figure game in the time-saving game state. A process of displaying an effect for the second special figure game in the c time saving game state, a process of displaying an effect for the first special figure game in the c time saving game state, an effect for the second special figure game in the c time saving game state , a process of displaying an effect for the first special figure game that is executed when a game ball enters the first winning hole in the normal gaming state, and a process of displaying the effect on the second winning hole in the normal gaming state. A process of displaying an effect for the second special figure game that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the first prize opening, and a first process that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the first prize opening in the time-saving game state A process of displaying an effect for the special figure game, a process of displaying an effect for the second special figure game that is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening in the time-saving game state, and b a time-saving process. A process of displaying an effect for the first special game that is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole in the gaming state, b. The entry of the game ball into the second winning hole in the time-saving gaming state. A process of displaying an effect for the second special figure game that is executed in response to c. Examples include processing to display a production, processing to display a production for a second special figure game that is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening in the time-saving gaming state, and any combination thereof. It will be done.

The specific gaming state may be any gaming state in which a specific game among a plurality of types of games can be executed. As the specific gaming state, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a gaming state in which the first special figure game can be executed, a state in which the right to execute the first special figure game is reserved, a second special figure game, etc. A gaming state in which a game can be executed, a state in which the right to execute a second special figure game is reserved, a gaming state in which a second special figure game can be executed, a gaming condition in which a jackpot game can be executed, a small winning game can be executed. Possible game states, game states where you can play the regular game, game states where you can play the game that hits the regular game, a game state that is a low support mode, and a normal game state that is a low support mode and a low probability mode with a low jackpot probability. , a gaming state that is a high support mode, a variable probability gaming state that is a high support mode and a high probability mode with a high jackpot probability, a time saving gaming state that is a high support mode and a low probability mode, a time saving gaming state, b time saving gaming state, c A time-saving gaming state, a gaming state in which a jackpot game is likely to occur, a gaming state in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, a gaming state in which a small winning game is likely to occur, a lottery result in the jackpot lottery A game state in which there is a high probability of a small win that is advantageous to the player, a game state in which hitting the game ball to the left side of the game board (so-called left-handed hitting) is encouraged, and a game state where hitting the game ball to the right side of the game board (so-called left-handed hitting) is encouraged. Examples include game states in which right-handed players are encouraged, arbitrary combinations thereof, and the like.

The specific correspondence display may be any display that corresponds to various numerical information. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the specific correspondence display may be, for example, a display corresponding to the number of rounds played in a jackpot game, a display corresponding to the number of balls played in the jackpot game, a display corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpots. , Display corresponding to the total number of balls played during the jackpot series, Display corresponding to the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the variable probability gaming state, Remaining special symbols necessary before moving to the b time-saving gaming state in the normal gaming state A display corresponding to the number of games to be played, a display corresponding to the remaining number of special figure games that can be played in the time-saving gaming state, a display corresponding to the remaining number of special figure games that can be played in the time-saving gaming state, b a display that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state Display corresponding to the number of remaining special figure games remaining, c Display corresponding to the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the time-saving game state, Display corresponding to the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in a state where jackpot games are likely to occur, Jackpot The display corresponds to the number of remaining special symbol games that can be executed in a state where the lottery result has a high probability of becoming a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, and the display corresponds to the remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in a state where small winning games are likely to occur. a display corresponding to the number of remaining special pattern games that can be played in a state where there is a high probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a small win that is advantageous to the player, and a display that corresponds to the number of reserved rights to play the first special pattern game. Examples include a display corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N, a display corresponding to the second special figure reservation number M which is the number of reservations for the right to play the second special figure game, and an arbitrary combination thereof.

By the way, gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of gaming states with different occurrence conditions and gaming values. Then, each game state is notified. Although each game state is often established independently without overlapping each other, depending on the type, they may occur overlappingly. For example, conventionally, by satisfying a condition during a gaming state of lower value, there has been a transition to a gaming state of higher value. In this case, the notification is switched based on the transition of the gaming state because it is a transition of the gaming state that is favorable for the player.

However, if a game state with a lower value occurs during a certain game state, it is not necessarily the player's wish to switch the notification to the game state with a lower value. Therefore, it is desirable to suitably perform notification control when gaming states overlap.

Some gaming machines are equipped with a first winning hole that provides an opportunity to execute the first special drawing game, and a second winning hole that provides an opportunity to execute the second special drawing game. is provided with an electric accessory 315b, thereby switching between a state where the entry of game balls into the second prize opening is restricted and a state where it is permitted. In this case, the game state is set to a low support mode in which the frequency or probability of operation of the electric accessory 315b is low, and a high support mode in which the frequency or probability of operation of the electric accessory 315b is high. The gaming state may be set to a normal gaming state where the jackpot probability is low and is a low support mode, and a time saving gaming state where the jackpot probability is low and is a high support mode. In addition, as the time-saving gaming state, in addition to the a-time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game, the c-time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time-saving symbol stop can be set. be.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine, various performances are executed depending on the gaming state and the gaming situation. For example, after a jackpot game ends, a performance (for example, a RUSH performance) that clearly shows that the jackpot game is in an advantageous state where it is easy to win consecutive games may be executed. In the RUSH performance and the like, the jackpot lottery result is announced through a predetermined performance such as a battle performance or a mission performance. In addition, in the c time-saving game state, a c-time saving game state performance that clearly indicates that the c time-saving game state is in effect is executed. In the c time saving game state production, a background image unique to the c time saving gaming state and an image showing that it is in the c time saving gaming state are displayed, as well as images showing the remaining number of special figure games in the c working time saving gaming state. Is displayed.

However, during the execution of the RUSH performance, the game may shift to the c-time saving game state. In this case, if the c time-saving game state performance for the c time-saving game state is executed with priority over the RUSH performance, the RUSH performance ends midway and it is switched to the c time-saving game state performance. Therefore, in RUSH performances such as battle performances and mission performances, it becomes impossible to check the results of the jackpot lottery results. As a result, if the RUSH effect is switched to the c time-saving game state effect while the RUSH effect is being executed, there is a concern that the RUSH effect will become a mere shell and the interest in the game will decrease.

In contrast, in the present invention, even if the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during which the specific performance is being executed, the specific correspondence display is not started. Further, in the present invention, even if the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, the specific correspondence display after the update is not started. In this way, if the specific condition or update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation while the specific effect is being executed, the specific corresponding display will not start, so that the second game time operation during the execution of the specific effect will not be started. Even if the specific conditions or update conditions are met during execution, the specific response display prevents the specific performance from being terminated midway, so the game will not be affected due to the specific performance being terminated midway. A decline in interest is prevented.

On the other hand, in the present invention, based on the end of the specific performance, the specific correspondence display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the specific performance is started. In this way, by starting the specific response display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the specific performance, the specific response display can be started without ending the specific performance midway. Therefore, a decrease in interest in the game due to the failure to start the specific correspondence display is prevented.

Specifically, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state a that shifts after the end of the time-saving jackpot game, the second game round is executed based on the game ball entering the second prize opening 315 as the second ball entry means. The second special figure reservation number M as the first numerical information corresponding to the second reservation number for the right to execute the second special figure game as the operation is determined in step S1108 (Fig. 63), the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB as the first counting means is set, and the special figure as a subtraction process is set based on the start of the second special figure game for the second special figure reservation as the subtraction condition. In step S3806 (see FIG. 72) in the figure data setting process, the second special figure reservation number M set in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB is subtracted. In addition, in this embodiment, for the second special figure game executed based on the game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the a-time saving game state, the RUSH performance as the display performance is changed to the RUSH performance as the performance display process. It is set in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the special pattern game that informs that the result of the jackpot lottery as a specific condition is that the time-saving symbol is out of stop, the game state is shifted to c-time-saving game state, and c-time-saving game state In step S4211 (see FIG. 80) in the game state transition process as the numerical value storage process, the second numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executable special figure games is stored in the c time saving number counter as the second counting means. is set to In addition, in this embodiment, the number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the c time-saving game state is determined based on the start of the special figure game as an update condition in step S3724 in the special figure game control process (see FIG. 71). Based on the updated value of the c time-saving game counter, it is possible to display the remaining number of c time-saving games (performance) as a corresponding display.

In the present embodiment, the variation as the effect display process is applied to the second special figure game executed based on the game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving game state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game. During the execution of the RUSH performance as a display performance in the type (performance pattern) setting process, if the game state is shifted to c time-saving gaming state based on the jackpot lottery result being outside the time-saving symbol stop, RUSH While the performance is being executed, the remaining c time-saving game count display (performance) as a corresponding display in the c time-saving game state is not executed. In this way, when transitioning to the c time-saving game state during the RUSH performance, the display of the remaining number of c time-saving games (performance) in the c time-saving game state is not executed while the RUSH performance is being executed, so that during the RUSH performance Even if the jackpot lottery result is shifted to the c time-saving game state based on the time-saving pattern stop being off, the RUSH performance is prevented from being ended midway by displaying the remaining number of c time-saving games (performance). Therefore, a decrease in interest in the game due to the RUSH performance being terminated midway is prevented.

Further, in this embodiment, when the game state shifts to the c time-saving game state as a gaming state while the RUSH performance is being executed as the display performance, the remaining c time-saving game number display (performance) is executed after the RUSH performance ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the RUSH performance, the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the time saving game state c at the time of the end of the RUSH performance is started. In this way, based on the end of the RUSH performance, the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be performed in the time saving game state at the time of the end of the RUSH performance is started, thereby ending the RUSH performance midway. This is due to the fact that the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state does not start because the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state can be started without. A decrease in interest in the game is prevented.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 92, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment.

[Configuration of gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. Here, FIG. 55 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIGS. 56 and 57 are views of the wing accessory device 83 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing main parts.

[Through gate 317R]
As shown in FIG. 55, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a through gate 317R is provided only in the right side area of the game board 31, and no through gate is provided in the left side area of the game board 31. Here, as described in the first embodiment described above, a game ball that has been shot out to the right side area of the game board 31 can enter the second prize opening 315. Further, the second winning hole 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b that switches between a state where the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted and a state where it is allowed. Then, the electric accessory 315b is activated when the result of the winning lottery, which is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 317R, is a winning lottery (see FIGS. 68 and 69). Therefore, in order to operate the electric accessory 315b and cause the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315, it is necessary to hit the game ball to the right to the right area of the game board 31. Note that in this embodiment, since no through gate is provided in the left side area of the game board 31, step S1301 is omitted in the through gate process in FIG. 20 of the first embodiment described above.

[Feather accessory device 83]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above, and is configured as a 1 type and 2 type mixing machine instead of a loop fixed changing machine, and has a wing role provided on the right side area of the game board 31. A material device 83 is provided. The feather accessory device 83 is operated in a small win game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second special figure game is a small win, and is used to enter the V winning hole 833 described below in the small win game. This provides an opportunity to execute a type 2 jackpot game by entering the game ball.

The feather accessory device 83 is provided above the variable winning hole 316 and on the right side of the symbol display section 341. As shown in FIG. 83, the feather accessory device 83 has an introduction port 831 for introducing the game ball 99 into the interior of the feather accessory device 83, and a closed position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 56) in which the introduction port 831 is closed. It has a movable vane portion 832 that is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between the opening position (the position indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 56) and the open position (the position indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 56) where the inlet 831 is opened. In a state where the introduction port 831 is closed by the movable wing portion 832 in the standby position, the game ball 99 is not introduced into the wing accessory device 83. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57(A) and 57(B), when the movable wing portion 832 is in the open position and the introduction port 831 is open, the movable wing portion 832 does not allow the game ball 99 to be received. It is possible. The game ball 99 received by the movable wing part 832 can be introduced into the interior of the wing accessory device 83 via the introduction port 831. The movable wing part 832 is operated to the open position when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery triggered by a prize in the second prize opening 315 is a small win (see FIG. 61(A)), and the movable wing part 832 is operated to the open position, and the movable wing part 832 is operated to the open position, and the movable wing part 832 is operated to the open position when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery triggered by a prize winning in the second prize opening 315 is a small win (see FIG. 61(A)). For example, the feather accessory device 83 is opened only for the time (1.8 seconds or less) during which 1 to 3 game balls 99 enter the ball. Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 at the time of a small win may be set as appropriate and is not limited to the time shown above.

Inside the wing accessory device 83, a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, and a V winning opening opening/closing part 835 are provided. The V winning hole 833 and the normal winning hole 834 are each provided with a ball entering sensor (not shown), and these ball entering sensors detect that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 833 or the normal winning hole 834. be done. The V winning hole opening/closing part 835 is between the closed position (see FIG. 57(A)) where the V winning hole 833 is closed and the open position (see FIG. 57(B)) where the V winning hole 833 is opened. It is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). The V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 normally waits at a closed position where the V winning opening 833 is closed, and when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a small win, it is activated at a predetermined timing to open the V winning opening. The prize opening 833 is opened.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, various tables and the like used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 58 to 62.

[Public figure hit/fail table, etc.]
Here, FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of a win/fail table for hitting ordinary cards. In this embodiment, two types of normal game winning winning/losing table are set: a normal game state winning winning winning/failing table shown in FIG. has been done. That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the probability of winning a normal figure is different between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and the probability of winning a normal figure is set higher in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state. .

The normal game state normal figure win/failure table shown in FIG. This is the table used in . As shown in FIG. 58(A), in the normal game state per normal figure win/fail table, if the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is 0, the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is 1 to 299. If the setting is off. In other words, the normal gaming state (low support mode) is a low profit state in which the probability of winning a common symbol in the lottery winning a common symbol is set to 1/300, and the second prize opening 315 is difficult to open.

The time-saving game state normal figure win/failure table shown in FIG. This is the table used in . As shown in FIG. 58(B), in the short-time game state normal figure hit/failure table, contrary to the normal game state normal figure hit/fail table, if the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is 0, it is out of order. If the value of the winning random number counter C4 is between 1 and 299, it is set to be a regular hit. In other words, in the time-saving gaming state (high support mode), the probability of winning a common symbol in the lottery per common symbol is set to 299/300, and the probability of winning a common symbol is set higher than in the normal gaming state (low support mode). , it is a high profit state in which the second prize opening 315 is likely to be opened.

As described above, in the gaming state that is the low support mode, it is difficult for the second winning hole 315 to be opened, and therefore, there is a low possibility that the player will obtain a special profit by opening the second winning hole 315.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a time-saving gaming state as described later, a time-saving gaming state is entered after a jackpot game ends, and a time-saving gaming state is entered after a specified number of variable games (for example, 1000 times) are executed after a jackpot game ends. A time-saving gaming state (b) and a time-saving gaming state (c), which is transferred when the jackpot lottery result is outside the time-saving symbol stop, are set. The probabilities are set to be the same. Of course, the probability of hitting a common symbol may be set differently depending on the type of time-saving gaming state. In addition, the probability of hitting a normal figure in the normal gaming state (low support mode) and the probability of hitting a normal figure in the time-saving gaming state (high support mode) are as shown in the examples shown in FIGS. 58(A) and 58(B). is not limited and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the short game state normal symbol hit/win win/fail table may be referred to in the special symbol probability fluctuation state or in the time saving game state.

Here, FIG. 58(C) and FIG. 58(D) are diagrams showing an example of a normal pattern fluctuation table. In this embodiment, two types of normal pattern fluctuation tables are set: a normal gaming state normal pattern fluctuation table shown in FIG. 58(C) and a time saving gaming state normal pattern fluctuation table. That is, in this embodiment, as described later, the regular game fluctuation time is different between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and the regular game fluctuation time is set to be shorter in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(C), in the normal game state normal pattern variation table, when the value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 is 0 to 98, the value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 is changed for 30 seconds. is set to 1 second when is 99. That is, in the normal game state, the normal figure fluctuation time is set long, and the operating frequency of the electric accessory 315b (the opening frequency of the second prize opening 315) is set low.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58(D), in the time saving game state normal figure variation table, when the value of the normal figure variation type counter CS2 is 0 to 99, it is set to 1 second. That is, in the time-saving game state, the normal figure fluctuation time is set short, and the operating frequency of the electric accessory 315b (the opening frequency of the second winning opening 315) is set high.

Here, FIG. 58(E) shows the type of game state and the opening mode (release FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship with time.

As shown in FIG. 58(E), when the winning lottery result is a winning lottery, the electric accessory 315b is opened in the winning game as described above, and the second prize opening 315 is opened. Although the game ball 99 is allowed to enter, the opening form (maximum opening time) of the electric accessory 315b in the game with a normal figure is set according to the game state in which the lottery with a normal figure is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, when five game balls enter the second prize opening 315, the electric accessory 315b is closed, and one electric accessory 315b is closed. The maximum number of game balls that can be won into the second winning hole 315 by opening is set to five.

Specifically, in the normal gaming state, which is a low support mode, and in the time-saving gaming state, which is triggered by the jackpot lottery result being outside of the time-saving symbol stop, the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b is determined by the maximum opening time of the game ball. It is set to 0.1 seconds (short opening), which is shorter than the firing interval (0.6 seconds). In this short opening, even if the game balls are continuously launched to the right side area of the game board 31, it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game balls to enter the second winning hole 315. Therefore, in the normal game state and the c-time saving game state, left-handed hitting, in which the game ball is hit to the left side area of the game board 31, is encouraged. In addition, in the c time-saving game state, the maximum number of time-saving games is set to 10, 20, 30, or 40 depending on the type of time-saving symbol stop failure, and the maximum time-saving game where the jackpot lottery result is a failure. When the special figure game is executed a certain number of times, a transition is made to the normal game state.

Here, as described above, the time-saving game state c is entered when the result of the jackpot lottery is that the time-saving symbol is not stopped. In addition, as will be described later, in a special pattern game where the result of the jackpot lottery is that the time-saving symbol is not stopped, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display section 341 in a combination that corresponds to the time-saving symbol not being stopped. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, a plurality of types (four types) are set as the maximum number of times of time-saving games in the c time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbols corresponding to the maximum number of times of time-saving games are stopped and displayed. For example, as described below, in the case of a time-saving symbol stop failure A whose maximum number of time-saving games is 10, "119" or "991", which is a non-reach, is stopped and displayed, and the maximum number of time-saving games is 20. In the case of the time-saving symbol stop missing B, "554" or "556", which is a non-reach, is stopped and displayed, and in the case of the time-saving symbol stop missing C, where the maximum number of time-saving games is 30, "332", which is a non-reach, is displayed. Or "334" is stopped and displayed, and in the case of time-saving symbol stop failure D where the maximum number of time-saving games is 40, "776" or "778", which is a non-reach, is stopped and displayed (see Figure 61 (D) ). As a result, the player can understand from the display combination that the decorative symbols are stopped that the result of the jackpot lottery is that the time-saving symbol is not stopped, and furthermore, the player can understand the maximum number of time-saving games in the c-time-saving gaming state. It becomes possible to do so.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of time-saving games in the c-time-saving game state is set to four types, but it is also possible to set the maximum number of time-saving games in the c-time-saving game state to one to three types. , it is also possible to set multiple types other than four types. Furthermore, the maximum number of time-saving games in the c-time-saving game state can be changed in various ways.

On the other hand, in the time saving game state a which is transferred after the end of the jackpot game, the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b is set to 15 seconds (long opening) which is 25 times the firing interval of the game ball. In this long opening, when the game balls are successively launched into the right side area of the game board 31, it is possible to enter five game balls, which is the maximum number of winnings. Therefore, in the time-saving game state a, right-handed hitting, in which the game ball is hit to the right side area of the game board 31, is encouraged. In addition, in the time-saving game state a, the maximum number of time-saving games is set to one, and when the game per common symbol is executed once, the state is shifted to the normal game state.

In addition, in the b time-saving game state that is transferred to after executing the variable game a specified number of times (for example, 1000 times) after the end of the jackpot game, the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b is 3 seconds, which is 5 times the firing interval of the game ball. (Medium open). In this medium open mode, the expected number of balls that will land when the game balls 99 are continuously launched is set to 1 or more, for example, 1 to 3 balls will enter the second prize opening 315 for each game ball. A game ball about the size of a ball is entered. Therefore, in the time-saving game state b, right-handed hitting in which the game ball is hit to the right side area of the game board 31 is encouraged. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state b, the maximum number of time-saving games is set to 500, and when the special figure game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss is executed 500 times, the state is shifted to the normal game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, when five game balls enter the second winning hole 315, the electric accessory 315b is returned to the second winning hole 315. will be closed.

It should be noted that the maximum opening time and maximum opening number of the electric accessory 315b in the normal figure game in various game states are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 58(E), and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 58(E), only one type of maximum opening time and maximum number of openings of the electric accessory 315b is set as a game per normal figure for each game state, but in the normal game state, At least one of the maximum opening time and the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the game per common figure is set for at least one of the gaming states a, b, and c. You may.

[First special drawing jackpot success/failure table]
The first special figure jackpot success/failure table is used for the first special figure jackpot lottery which is executed when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314. Here, FIG. 59(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first special drawing jackpot success/failure table.

As shown in FIG. 59(A), the first special figure jackpot success/failure table includes six jackpot success/failure tables corresponding to six levels of game setting values 1 to 6. In each jackpot success/failure table, either a jackpot or a miss is selected as the lottery result in the first special figure jackpot lottery, depending on the value (random value) of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, in the first special drawing jackpot win/fail table, in the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1 (the value of the game setting value is large (in order), the lottery result in the first special drawing jackpot lottery has a high jackpot probability of being a jackpot, which is advantageous to the player.

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table with game setting value 1, of the 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 206 random numbers from 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, and the others The random number corresponds to the loss, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1/318.1 (206/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of game setting value 2, among the 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 202 random numbers from 0 to 211 correspond to the jackpot, and the others The random number corresponds to a loss, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/309.1 (212/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table with game setting value 3, of the 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 218 random numbers from 0 to 217 correspond to the jackpot, and the others The random number corresponds to the loss, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1/300.6 (218/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table with game setting value 4, among the 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 224 random numbers from 0 to 223 correspond to the jackpot, and the others The random number corresponds to the loss, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1/292.6 (224/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table with game setting value 5, among the 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 230 random numbers from 0 to 229 correspond to jackpots, and others The random number corresponds to the loss, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1/284.9 (230/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table with game setting value 6, among the 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 236 random numbers from 0 to 235 correspond to jackpots, and others The random number corresponds to the loss, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1/277.7 (236/65536).

When the first special figure jackpot lottery is performed based on the jackpot propriety table selected according to the game setting value, the jackpot game is executed when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot.

In addition, in the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of this embodiment, the jackpot random numbers are continuous values, but the jackpot random numbers may not be continuous values but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

In addition, there are 6 1st special figure jackpot success/failure tables provided according to the 6 levels of game setting values, but it is only necessary to have at least one 1st special figure jackpot success/failure table, and the game setting values are 6 levels. Not limited.

[First special jackpot type distribution table]
The first special figure jackpot type distribution table indicates the type of jackpot when the lottery result in the first special figure jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize opening 314, is a jackpot. Used for sorting. Here, FIG. 59(B) is a diagram showing an example of the normal-a time-saving first special jackpot type distribution table, and FIG. 59(C) is a diagram showing an example of the b-time-saving-c time-saving first special pattern jackpot type distribution table. It is a figure showing an example.

The normal-a time-saving first special figure jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. It is. In the normal-a time-saving first special jackpot type distribution table, among the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) from 0 to 19, 12 random values from 0 to 11 are 4R time-saving jackpots. , 8 random numbers from 12 to 19 are 4R normal jackpots. In this embodiment, two types of first special drawing jackpots are set: 4R time-saving jackpot and 4R normal jackpot, and the distribution rate of 4R time-saving jackpot is set to 60%, and the distribution rate of 4R normal jackpot is set to 40%. has been done.

Here, when the lottery result in the first special drawing jackpot lottery is a 4R time-saving jackpot and a 4R normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable winning hole 316 is opened is repeated twice.

In the 4R time-saving jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on the 4R time-saving jackpot ends, the game is shifted to the a-time-saving game state, which is a high support mode. In this time-saving game state a, the number of operations of the electric accessory 315b is once, but the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b is set to 15 seconds, which is 25 times the game ball firing interval of 0.6 seconds. has been done. Furthermore, the maximum number of game balls that can be won by opening the electric accessory 315b once is five. Therefore, when shifting to the time saving game state a, the second special figure game can be executed up to five times. In the 4R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on the 4R normal jackpot ends, a transition is made to a normal gaming state which is a low support mode.

The b-c time-saving first special figure jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 59(C) is used when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation of the first special figure is the b-time-saving gaming state or the c-time-saving gaming state. It is something. In the bc time-saving first special figure jackpot type distribution table, 20 random numbers, which are all the values (random numbers) of the 20 jackpot type counters C2 from 0 to 19, are 4R time-saving jackpots. In other words, if the first special figure jackpot occurs in the b time-saving game state or the c-time saver game state, the so-called RUSH direct hit that always shifts to the a time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the first special figure jackpot. It will be a jackpot. Note that RUSH means that, as will be described later, there is a high probability that the result of a jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening 315 will be a small win (20% in this embodiment (see FIG. 61(A)). )), this is an advantageous situation for players who tend to continue playing jackpot games triggered by small wins.

[First special jackpot fluctuation table]
The first special figure jackpot fluctuation table is the first special figure in the first special figure game that is executed for the first special figure jackpot lottery when the lottery result in the first special figure jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Used to set the special figure fluctuation pattern (variable display time). Here, FIG. 59(D) is a diagram showing an example of the first special drawing jackpot fluctuation table.

As shown in FIG. 59(D), in the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation table, special symbol fluctuation patterns are associated in advance according to the value of the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1. In this first special figure jackpot variation table, one of the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special figure jackpot variation table, among the 200 special figure variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 10 random numbers from 0 to 9 have a variation display time of 30 seconds. A certain special figure fluctuation pattern "01" corresponds to 110 random numbers from 10 to 119, and a special figure fluctuation pattern "02" with a fluctuation display time of 60 seconds corresponds to 80 random numbers from 120 to 199. The special figure fluctuation pattern "03" whose fluctuation display time is 90 seconds corresponds to the numerical value.

Here, when the special figure variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach effect pattern with a special figure variation display time of 30 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 The normal reach performance pattern is executed in such cases. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is the normal reach performance. In addition, when the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern with a special figure variation display time of 60 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 The super reach performance pattern is executed in such cases. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is the super reach performance. Furthermore, when the special figure variation pattern "03" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern with the longest special figure variation display time of 90 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display section A special reach performance pattern is executed in 341 and the like. The special reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is a special reach performance.

[First special figure out type distribution table]
The first special figure winning lottery type distribution table is used to sort out the type of winning when the lottery result in the first special drawing jackpot lottery is a winning lottery. Here, FIG. 59(E) is a diagram illustrating an example of the first special figure out type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 59(E), in the first special figure out type distribution table, out out types are defined according to the value (random value) of the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, in the first special figure off type distribution table, among the 239 reach random number counter C3 values from 0 to 238, 9 random numbers from 0 to 8 are out-of-order reach; 30 random numbers of 38 are reaches except for the front and back, and 200 random numbers of 39 to 238 are completely off.

Here, reach means a state in which a pattern combination of decorative patterns that indicates winning the jackpot is likely to occur during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 until the display of the decorative patterns stops. is the fluctuating state shown. In one example, the same decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the pattern display section 341, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the remaining one stop position is fluctuating. In addition, while the reach in the symbol display section 341 is in a fluctuating state, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the level of expectation, or a story production process in which the player's operations on the operation buttons 20 are reflected in the production. Participatory operation performance processing and the like are executed. It should be noted that during execution of these production processes, it is conceivable that the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner.

A reach that is off the front and back is a miss in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before and after the reach symbol after a reach due to a decorative pattern occurs, and a reach other than a reach that is off the front and back is a miss that stops after a reach due to a decorative pattern occurs. This is a miss in which the stopping symbols stop at locations other than before and after the reach symbol. Moreover, a complete miss is a miss where no reach occurs due to a decorative pattern (non-reach miss).

In addition, in the first special pattern failure type distribution table, time-saving symbol stop failure that moves to c time-saving gaming state is not set as the failure type, but time-saving symbol stop failure may be set as the failure type.

[1st special figure off variation table]
The first special figure out-of-game fluctuation table is the first special figure in the first special figure game that is executed for the first special figure jackpot lottery when the lottery result in the first special figure jackpot lottery is a loser. Used to set the special figure fluctuation pattern (variable display time). Here, FIG. 59(F) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure off fluctuation table.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), in the first special figure out fluctuation table, the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time ) is specified. This first special figure off variation table includes a first special figure off variation table for off reach (front and back off reach and reaches other than front and back off), and a first special figure off variation table for complete off.

In the first special pattern deviation table for deviation reach (front and rear deviation reaches and reaches other than front and rear deviations), the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" are set according to the value (random value) of the special pattern fluctuation type counter CS1. One is selected. Specifically, in the first special pattern deviation variation table for the deviation reach (front and rear deviation reaches and reaches other than front and rear deviations), out of the 200 special pattern variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 0 to 99. The 100 random numbers correspond to the special pattern fluctuation pattern "01" in which the special pattern fluctuation display time is 30 seconds, and the 50 random numbers from 100 to 149 correspond to the special pattern fluctuation pattern "01" in which the special pattern fluctuation display time is 60 seconds. The figure variation pattern "02" corresponds to the 50 random numbers from 150 to 199, and the special figure variation pattern "03" in which the special figure variation display time is 90 seconds corresponds.

In the first special pattern deviation variation table for complete deviation, either the special pattern variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special pattern variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special pattern deviation variation table for complete deviation, among the 200 special pattern variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 150 random values from 0 to 149 are displayed as special pattern variation. The special figure fluctuation pattern "04" whose time is 7 seconds corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern "05" whose special figure fluctuation display time is 10 seconds to the 50 random numbers from 150 to 199. .

[B time saving - c time saving 2nd special jackpot jackpot right or wrong table]
b Time saving - c time saving 2nd special figure jackpot right or wrong table is for the 2nd special figure jackpot lottery which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize opening 315 in the b time saving gaming state and the c working time saving gaming state. used. Here, FIG. 60(A) is a diagram showing an example of the b time saving-c time saving second special chart jackpot success/failure table.

As shown in FIG. 60(A), the b time saving-c time saving second special pattern jackpot success/failure table is the same as the aforementioned first special pattern jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 59(A)). In addition, in this embodiment, the b time saving - c time saving second special drawing jackpot success/failure table is set separately from the first special drawing jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 59(A)). The 2nd special pattern jackpot success/failure table may be omitted and the 1st special pattern jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 59(A)) may be used in the 2nd special pattern jackpot lottery in the time-saving gaming state b and the time-saving gaming state c.

[B time saving - c time saving 2nd special jackpot type distribution table]
b time saving - c time saving 2nd special figure jackpot type distribution table is the game ball to the 2nd prize opening 315 when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation of the 2nd special figure is the normal gaming state or a time saving gaming state. It is used to sort out the type of jackpot when the lottery result in the second special jackpot lottery executed in response to the entry of a ball is a jackpot. Here, FIG. 60(B) is a diagram showing an example of the b time saving-c time saving second special chart jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 60(B), in the b time saving - c time saving 2nd special jackpot type distribution table, all 20 values (random values) of the 20 jackpot type counters C2 from 0 to 19 are The random number is a 4R time-saving jackpot. In other words, when the second special figure jackpot occurs in the b time-saving gaming state or the c-time saving gaming state, the so-called RUSH direct hit that always shifts to the a time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the second special drawing jackpot. It will be a jackpot. Note that RUSH means that, as will be described later, there is a high probability that the result of a jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening 315 will be a small win (20% in this embodiment (see FIG. 61(A)). )), this is an advantageous situation for players who tend to continue playing jackpot games triggered by small wins.

[B time saving - c time saving 2nd special jackpot fluctuation table]
The first special figure jackpot fluctuation table is used when the gaming state at the start of variation of the second special figure is b time-saving gaming state or c time-saving gaming state, and the lottery result in the second special drawing jackpot lottery is a jackpot. It is used to set the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the second special figure in the second special figure game executed for the second special figure jackpot lottery. Here, FIG. 60(C) is a diagram showing an example of the b time saving-c time saving second special pattern jackpot fluctuation table.

As shown in FIG. 60(D), the b time saving-c time saving second special pattern jackpot variation table is similar to the first special pattern jackpot variation table described above (see FIG. 59(D)). In addition, in this embodiment, the b time saving - c time saving second special drawing jackpot fluctuation table is set separately from the first special drawing jackpot variation table (see FIG. 59(D)); The 2nd special figure jackpot variation table may be omitted and the 1st special figure jackpot variation table (see FIG. 59(D)) may be used in the 2nd special figure jackpot lottery in the b time-saving gaming state and c time-saving gaming state.

[B time saving - c time saving 2nd special map out type distribution table]
The b time saving - c time saving 2nd special figure out type distribution table is for when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation of the 2nd special figure is b time saving gaming state or c time saving gaming state, the 2nd special drawing jackpot lottery It is used to sort out the type of lottery result when the lottery result is a loss. Here, FIG. 60(D) is a diagram showing an example of the b time saving-c time saving second special drawing out type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 60(D), the b time saving-c time saving second special figure out type distribution table is the same as the first special figure out type distribution table described above (see FIG. 59(E)). In addition, in this embodiment, the b time saving - c time saving second special figure missing type distribution table is set separately from the first special figure missing type distribution table (see FIG. 59(E)); -The c time-saving second special figure out type sorting table is omitted, and the first special figure out type sorting table is used in the second special figure jackpot lottery in the b time-saving gaming state and the c-time saving gaming state (see Fig. 59 (E)). may be used.

In addition, in the b time saving - c time saving 2nd special figure off type distribution table, time saving symbol stop off which moves to c time saving gaming state is not set as the off type, but time saving symbol stop off is set as the off type. Good too.

[B time saving - c time saving 2nd special figure off fluctuation table]
The b time saving - c time saving 2nd special figure out fluctuation table shows the lottery results in the 2nd special figure jackpot lottery when the gaming state at the start of the variation of the 2nd special figure is the b time saving gaming state or the c time saving gaming state. It is used to set the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the second special figure in the second special figure game that is executed for the second special figure jackpot lottery when it is a loss. Here, FIG. 60(E) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure off fluctuation table.

As shown in FIG. 60(E), the b time saving-c time saving second special figure off variation table is similar to the first special figure off variation table described above (see FIG. 59(F)). In addition, in this embodiment, the b time saving - c time saving second special figure off variation table is set separately from the first special figure off variation table (see FIG. 59(F)); You may omit the 2nd special figure off variation table and use the 1st special figure off variation table (see FIG. 59(F)) in the 2nd special figure jackpot lottery in the b time saving gaming state and the c time saving gaming state.

[Normal-a time saving 2nd special jackpot jackpot table]
The normal-a time-saving second special figure jackpot win/fail table is used for the second special figure jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize opening 315 in the normal game state and the time-saving game state a. Ru. Here, FIG. 61(A) is a diagram showing an example of the normal-a time-saving second special chart jackpot success/failure table.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), the normal-a time saving second special chart jackpot success/failure table is different from the first special chart jackpot success/failure table described above (see FIG. 59(A)). As a result, "big win" is not set, and two types of "small win" and "miss" are set, and the small win probability and the loss probability are set to be the same for all game setting values. Specifically, in the normal-a time-saving second special figure jackpot success/failure table, among the 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 13107 random numbers from 0 to 13106 are jackpot. Correspondingly, the other random values correspond to misses, and the small hit probability is set to about 1/5 (13107/65536).

Note that the small winning probability defined by the normal-a time saving second special figure jackpot propriety table is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 61(A), and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, a "jackpot" may be set as the result of the second special pattern jackpot lottery in the normal-a time-saving second special pattern jackpot success/failure table. In this case, it is conceivable that the jackpot probability is the same as the first special figure jackpot win/fail table (see FIG. 59(A)) so that the probability differs depending on the game setting value.

[a time-saving 2nd special figure out type distribution table]
The a time-saving second special figure winning type distribution table is used when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation of the second special figure is the a time-saving gaming state, and when the lottery result in the second special figure jackpot lottery is a loser. Used to sort out types of outliers. Here, FIG. 61(B) is a diagram illustrating an example of a time-saving second special figure out-of-time type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 61(B), unlike the above-mentioned first special pattern missing type distribution table (see FIG. 59(E)), in the a-time-saving second special pattern missing type distribution table, the different types of missing types are There are no reaches other than off reach and front/back off, and only complete off is set. Specifically, in the a time saving second special figure out type distribution table, all the random numbers of the 239 reach random number counter C3 values from 0 to 238 are set to completely out.

In addition, in the a time-saving second special figure out-of-order type distribution table, you may set the out-of-front reach and the reach other than out-of-front out as the out-of-order types. In addition, in the time-saving second special pattern failure type distribution table, although time-saving symbol stop failure that transitions to the time-saving gaming state c is not set as the failure type, time-saving symbol stop failure may be set as the failure type.

[Normal game state 2nd special figure out type distribution table]
The normal gaming state 2nd special figure out type distribution table is used when the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation of the 2nd special figure is the normal gaming state, and when the lottery result in the 2nd special figure jackpot lottery is a loser. Used to sort out types of outliers. Here, FIG. 61(C) is a diagram showing an example of a normal game state second special figure out type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 61(C), in the normal gaming state second special figure missing type sorting table, unlike the first special figure missing type sorting table (see FIG. 59(E)), the missing type is There are no reaches other than front and back off reach and front and back off, and complete off and time-saving symbol stop off are set. Specifically, in the normal gaming state second special figure out type sorting table, out of the 239 values of the reach random number counter C3 from 0 to 238, 227 random numbers from 0 to 226 are completely out of place, The 12 random numbers from 227 to 238 are the time-saving symbol stop failures (time-saving symbol stop failures A to D) that transition to the time-saving gaming state. That is, in the normal game state second special symbol failure type distribution table, the probability of time-saving symbol stop failure (time-saving symbol stop failure A to D) is set to about 5%.

As shown in FIGS. 61(C) and 61(D), in this embodiment, as a time-saving symbol stop failure, c a time-saving symbol stop failure with a different maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state a time-saving symbol stop failure b Four types of time-saving symbol stop failure C and time-saving symbol stop failure D are set, and the probability of each time-saving symbol stop failure A to D is set to 3/239 (approximately 1.25%).

Time-saving symbol stop failure A occurs when the maximum number of special symbol games (maximum number of time-saving games) that can be executed in the c-time-saving gaming state is 10, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is one of 227 to 229. Set. In the special pattern game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is time-saving pattern stop failure A, the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the pattern display section 341 is stopped and displayed at "119" or "991". In other words, "119" and "991" are associated with the time saving symbol stop display combination A, and "119" and "991" as the stop display combination of decorative symbols are associated with the time saving symbol. Applies to.

Time-saving symbol stop failure B occurs when the maximum number of special symbol games (maximum number of time-saving games) that can be executed in the c-time-saving gaming state is 20 and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is one of 230 to 232. Set. In the special pattern game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is time-saving pattern stop failure B, the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the pattern display section 341 is stopped and displayed at "554" or "556". In other words, "554" and "556" are associated with the time-saving symbol stop display combination B, and "554" and "556" as the stop-display combination of decorative symbols are associated with the time-saving symbol. Applies to.

Time-saving symbol stop failure C occurs when the maximum number of special symbol games (maximum number of time-saving games) that can be executed in the c-time-saving gaming state is 30 and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is one of 233 to 235. Set. In the special figure game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is time-saving symbol stop failure C, the decorative symbols variably displayed in the symbol display section 341 are stopped and displayed at "332" or "334". In other words, "332" and "334" are associated with the time saving symbol stop display combination C, and "332" and "334" as the stop display combination of decorative symbols are associated with the time saving symbol. Applies to.

Time-saving symbol stop failure D occurs when the maximum number of special symbol games (maximum number of time-saving games) that can be executed in the c-time-saving gaming state is 40 and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is one of 236 to 238. Set. In the special pattern game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is time-saving pattern stop failure D, the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the pattern display section 341 is stopped and displayed at "776" or "778". In other words, "776" and "778" are associated with the time saving symbol stop display combination D, and "776" and "778" as the stop display combination of decorative symbols are associated with the time saving symbol. Applies to.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is that the time-saving symbol is not stopped, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the symbol display section 341 is stopped and displayed as the time-saving symbol. Therefore, even in a situation where a jackpot cannot be expected because the decorative symbols are not reachable and the jackpot lottery result is a miss, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the time-saving symbols to stop being displayed. Can be done. Furthermore, the player can grasp the maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving game state based on the type of time-saving symbols (combination type of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed). Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the time-saving symbols with the highest maximum number of time-saving games will be displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, in this embodiment, although four types of time-saving symbol stop failures are set, the time-saving symbol stop failures are not limited to four types, and do not need to be multiple types, for example, may be one type. In addition, when setting multiple types of time-saving symbols to stop and miss, it is not necessary to equalize the probability (distribution) of each time-saving symbol to miss the stop, and the probability (distribution) of some or all of the time-saving symbols to miss is different from that of other time-saving symbols. It may be different from stop failure.

In addition, in this embodiment, two types of time-saving symbols are associated with one type of time-saving symbol stop failure, but even if one type of time-saving symbol is associated with one type of time-saving symbol stop failure. In addition, the number of time-saving symbols associated with part or all of the time-saving symbols being stopped may be different from the number of time-saving symbols being associated with other time-saving symbols being stopped. Furthermore, a plurality of types of maximum time-saving game counts may be associated with one type of time-saving symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot lottery result is out of the time-saving pattern stop, the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the pattern display section 341 is stopped and displayed as the time-saving pattern, but in addition to or in place of this, , even if a (time saving) symbol corresponding to the time saving symbol stop is set as the stop display symbol of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363. good. In this case, the type of stop display symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 and the maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the time-saving game state (maximum number of time-saving games). May be associated.

In the above-mentioned normal game state second special pattern out type distribution table, time-saving symbol stop failure is set, but time-saving symbol stop failure is not set in the other loss type distribution tables (Fig. 59 (E), FIG. 60(D), and FIG. 61(B)). In other words, the reason why the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery is that the time-saving pattern is not stopped is because the second special pattern at the start of the second special pattern in the normal gaming state is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315. There is only a special jackpot lottery.

Here, in this embodiment, the number of games per normal figure that is executed in the time-saving game state a is one time, the maximum opening time in this one game per normal figure is set to 15 seconds, and the maximum number of prizes to be won is set to 5. (See FIG. 58(E)). Therefore, when a game per regular symbol is executed based on the transition to the time-saving game state a (when the second prize opening 315 is opened by the operation of the electric accessory 315b), in addition to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, , it becomes possible to execute the second special figure game a total of five times, with a variable display of the second special figure based on a maximum of four second special figure reservations (so-called remaining reservations). And, while the maximum opening time of the game per regular figure in the a time-saving game state is 15 seconds, the variable display time (variable pattern) of the second special figure game started in the a time-saving game state as described later. is 40 seconds (see FIG. 62(A)), so if the regular figure winning game ends before the second special figure game that is executed first after the transition to the time-saving game state a ends, the time-saving game a state to the normal gaming state. As a result, the second special figure game based on the second special figure reservation (remaining reservation), which is executed after the end of the second special figure game, is started in the normal game state. In addition, as mentioned above, the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the normal game in the normal gaming state is 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 58(E)), and the second prize opening in the normal gaming state 315 is impossible or extremely difficult, and left-handed hitting in which the game ball is hit to the left side area of the game board 31 is encouraged. There is virtually no possibility that the second special figure game will be executed by the game ball entering 315. Therefore, the second special figure game is started in the normal game state when the game to the second prize opening 315 is performed in the regular figure winning game that is executed when the time saving game state is shifted to a time saving game state after the end of the time saving jackpot game. This is the second special figure game that was put on hold due to the ball entering the game. In other words, in the normal game state second special figure out type sorting table, a game ball enters the second prize opening 315 by the operation of the electric accessory 315b in the time-saving game state a that shifts after the end of the time-saving jackpot game. Therefore, if the second special figure reservation number M is 1 or more (if there is a remaining reserve), when starting the second special figure game to be executed based on the second special figure reservation (remaining reserve), Referenced.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a normal winning game is executed based on the display performance being shifted to the time-saving gaming state (the second prize opening 315 is opened by the operation of the electric accessory 315b) ), in addition to the relevant variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the second special figure based on up to four second special figure reservations (so-called remaining reservations) is executed up to a total of five times. In the 2 special figure game, a RUSH performance as a display performance including a battle performance is performed on the symbol display section 341 and the like. Moreover, the battle performance is a remaining reservation performance that is executed for the second special symbol reservation (remaining reservation) triggered by the transition to the time-saving game state a, as described later. On the other hand, if the jackpot lottery result is outside the time-saving symbol stop, the system moves to c-time-saving gaming state, but in this c-time-saving gaming state, c-specific to the c-working-time-saving gaming state that makes it possible to identify that it is the c-time-saving gaming state. A time-saving game performance (display performance such as a unique background performance and a display performance of the remaining time-saving number of times) is executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like (see FIG. 88(C)).

In this way, in the time-saving game state a, the game per normal figure is executed only once, but after the game per normal figure ends, the time-saving game state a is transferred to the normal game state, and the second game in the time-saving game state a. 2. If the remaining reservation that is executed when the game ball enters the winning hole 315 includes a notification that the jackpot lottery result is outside the time-saving pattern stop, it will be notified that the time-saving pattern is outside the stop. After the notified second special figure game ends, the time saving game state c is entered. That is, in this embodiment, a game state in which the second special symbol game including the remaining reservation that is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state a, and a normal game can be performed. The state or the time-saving game state c occurs overlappingly.

Then, the second special game including the remaining reservation that is executed when the game ball enters the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving game state (a so-called RUSH state, which is a jackpot successive game state) is a jackpot This is a game state in which the game value is high because small winning games that provide an opportunity to play games occur with high probability (see FIG. 61(A)), and jackpot games are likely to occur. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state and c-time saving gaming state, since it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315, the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 as a trigger. Since the jackpot lottery is executed as follows, it is difficult to generate a jackpot game (see FIG. 61(A)). Therefore, the gaming state in which the second special game including the remaining reservation, which is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state a, can be executed is likely to cause a jackpot game. This is a gaming state with a higher gaming value than the normal gaming state and c-time saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the RUSH effect is executed as a display effect in the second special figure game including the remaining reservation, which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize opening 315 in the a-time saving game state. (See Figures 89 to 91). In particular, for the second special figure game corresponding to the remaining reservation, a battle effect is executed as a display effect. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, a unique display effect is executed that clearly or suggests that the game is in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 88(A)), and in the c-time saving gaming state, it clearly indicates or suggests that it is in the c-time-saving gaming state. A unique display effect is executed (see FIG. 88(C)). Therefore, if there is a jackpot lottery result that is outside the time-saving pattern stop during the remaining hold, the display effect will be more than a battle effect that is executed for the second special symbol game corresponding to the remaining hold that has a high gaming value. Also, if priority is given to the normal game state performance or c time-saving game performance that is executed in response to the normal game state or c-time saving game state with low gaming value, the battle performance will be aborted midway, and the battle performance will not be displayed from the symbol display section 341. It is no longer possible to judge the result (whether the small win is correct or not). Therefore, in this embodiment, as a display effect, a battle effect (RUSH effect as a specific effect) that is executed in a game state in which a second special figure game corresponding to a remaining hold with a high game value can be executed is used. It is executed with priority over the normal game state performance and c time-saving game performance that can be performed in the normal game state and the c-time saving game which have a lower game value than the game state to be executed. That is, in this embodiment, when game states with different game values are executed overlappingly, the display effect for the game state with the higher game value is executed with priority. As a result, when a battle performance as a display performance is started, it is possible to notify the player of the success or failure of a small hit based on the battle result in the battle performance, without interrupting the battle performance due to duplication of game states. It becomes possible. In particular, even if the jackpot lottery result is outside of the time-saving symbol stop while the remaining balance is pending, and the time-saving symbol is not stopped and the state is shifted to c-time-saving gaming state, the battle performance as the display performance Based on the battle results, it becomes possible to notify the player of the success or failure of the small win.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the a time-saving game state, the game per normal figure is executed only once, and after the end of the game per common figure, the time-saving game state a is transferred to the normal game state, and in the a time-saving game state If the remaining hold that is executed when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315 includes a notification that the jackpot lottery result is outside the time-saving symbol stop, the time-saving symbol is outside the stop. After the end of the second special figure game that has been notified, a transition is made to the time-saving game state c under the game control of the MPU 41. In other words, at the end of the battle performance as the display performance, the game is in the normal game state or c-time saving game state. Therefore, if all the jackpot lottery results for the remaining reservations that are executed after the game ball enters the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state are all wins, after the RUSH performance as the display performance ends, the RUSH performance Depending on the game state at the end of the time (whether or not the time-saving symbol stops or not), a normal game state performance or a time-saving game state performance is executed as a display performance.

Here, the normal gaming state and c-time saving gaming state have in common that it is difficult to generate a jackpot game (see Fig. 59 (A)), but in the normal gaming state, it is difficult to enter a RUSH (a state with high probability of jackpot success). While the distribution of the time-saving jackpot that is the trigger is 50% (see Figure 59 (B)), in the c-time-saving gaming state, the distribution of the time-saving jackpot that is the trigger for entering RUSH (occurrence of a state with high probability of successive jackpots) is 100% (see FIG. 59(C)), and a jackpot in the c time-saving gaming state is a jackpot that is a direct hit from RUSH. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state c is a gaming state that has a higher gaming value for the player than the normal gaming state in that the distribution of time-saving jackpots that trigger RUSH entry (occurrence of jackpot consecutive high probability state) is high. In other words, after the RUSH performance as the display performance ends, the normal game state performance or c time-saving game state performance is executed as the display performance, but from the player's perspective, the c time-saving game state performance is executed after the RUSH performance ends. It is a preferable state to do so. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the RUSH effect as the display effect ends, a branch effect to be described later that clearly or suggests which of the c time-saving game state effect and the normal game state effect to be executed as the display effect is a display effect. (See Figure 92). Therefore, even if the battle effect executed based on the remaining balance informs the player that he has not won a small win, the player may not be able to receive the c time-saving game effect, which is a chance for a direct RUSH hit, after the battle effect ends. By continuing to play the game, it becomes possible to maintain interest in the game, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Jackpot type distribution table when winning V]
The V winning jackpot type distribution table is used to allocate the type of jackpot game to be executed based on the game ball entering the V winning hole 833 in the small winning game. Here, FIG. 61(E) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table at the time of V winning.

As shown in FIG. 61(E), in the V winning jackpot type distribution table, 16R time-saving jackpot and 4R time-saving jackpot are set as jackpot types. The 16R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which a round game is executed 16 times in the opening/closing execution mode, and after the 16R time-saving jackpot game ends, the game is transferred to the time-saving game state a. The 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which a round game is executed four times in the opening/closing execution mode, and after the 4R time-saving jackpot game ends, the state is shifted to the a-time-saving game state. In the V winning jackpot type distribution table, 0 to 3 of the values of the jackpot type counter from 0 to 19 are 16R time-saving jackpots, and 4 to 19 are 4R time-saving jackpots. That is, in the V winning jackpot type distribution table, the probability (distribution) of the 16R time-saving jackpot is 20%, and the probability (distribution) of the 4R time-saving jackpot is 80%.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are two types of jackpot games that are executed based on the game ball entering the V winning hole 833 in the small winning game, but there is only one type of jackpot game. or three or more types, and the number of round games executed in the jackpot game is not limited to 4R and 16R.

[a time saving 2nd special figure fluctuation table]
The a time-saving second special figure fluctuation table shows the special figure fluctuation pattern (fluctuating display time) of the second special figure in the second special figure game when the game state at the start of the variation of the second special figure is the a time-saving game state. used to set. Here, FIG. 62(A) is a diagram showing an example of the a time saving second special symbol variation table.

As shown in FIG. 62(A), the time-saving second special pattern fluctuation table a is the first special pattern jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 59(D)) and the first special pattern loss fluctuation table (see FIG. 59(F)). )), this is a table that is referred to regardless of whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a loss, and the variation pattern (variation display time) is 40 seconds.Special figure variation pattern "08" Only one type is set. Thereby, it is possible to reliably transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state during the execution of the first second special figure game when the time-saving game state a has been changed. In addition, as described above, when the time-saving game state a is shifted, the RUSH effect is executed in the symbol display section 341, etc., but in the first second special figure game when the time-saving game state is shifted to the time-saving game state a, A button performance is executed as a one-shot notification performance (described later) of the RUSH performance (see FIG. 89(D)), and the success or failure of a small hit is notified by this button performance. Since there is only one type of variation pattern (variation display time) of 40 seconds set in the a time saving second special figure variation table, the button performance before the battle performance in the RUSH performance is executed at a good tempo. This allows for a smooth transition to battle production.

[Normal gaming state 2nd special figure pending 2nd special figure fluctuation table]
The normal game state 2nd special figure pending 2nd special figure fluctuation table is a special figure fluctuation pattern of the 2nd special figure in the 2nd special figure game when the game state at the time of the start of variation of the 2nd special figure is the normal game state. (Fluctuating display time). In other words, the normal gaming state 2nd special symbol reservation 2nd special symbol fluctuation table is used when starting the 2nd special symbol game for the 2nd special symbol reservation (remaining reservation) triggered by the transition to the time-saving gaming state a. be done. Here, FIG. 62(B) is a diagram illustrating an example of the second special figure holding second special figure fluctuation table in the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 62(B), the normal gaming state second special symbol pending second special symbol variation table includes the aforementioned first special symbol jackpot variation table (see FIG. 59(D)) and the first special symbol off variation table. Unlike the table (see Figure 59 (F)), this is a table that is referred to regardless of whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a loss, and the type of the second special pattern fluctuation pattern (variation display time) is set according to the remaining reservation pattern. In this embodiment, eight types, numbered 1 to 8, are set as remaining reservation patterns.

As shown in FIGS. 62(C) and 62(D), the remaining reservation pattern 1 is a transition from the time-saving gaming state a to the normal gaming state (the second special feature started first after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state a). This is a pattern in which the number of second special symbols remaining when the figure game ends) is one, and the result of the jackpot lottery for that one second special symbol remaining pending is a loss. Remaining reservation pattern 2 is the number of second special symbols remaining when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state a to the normal gaming state (the second special symbol game that was first started after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state a ends). There are 2 pieces, and this is a pattern in which the results of the jackpot lottery for the 2 pieces of second special symbol remaining pending are all losers. Remaining reservation pattern 3 is the number of second special symbols remaining when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state a to the normal gaming state (the second special symbol game that was first started after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state a ends). There are 3 pieces, and this is a pattern in which the results of the jackpot lottery for the 3 pieces of second special symbol remaining pending are all losers. Remaining reservation pattern 4 is the number of second special symbols remaining when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state a to the normal gaming state (the second special symbol game that was first started after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state a ends). There are 4 pieces, and this is a pattern in which the result of the jackpot lottery for the 4 second special symbols remaining pending is a loss.

On the other hand, the remaining reservation pattern 5 is the second special symbol remaining reservation when the time-saving gaming state a transitions to the normal gaming state (the second special symbol game that was first started after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state a ends). The number is 1 to 4, and the pattern is such that the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game that is started first while the second special figure is pending is a small win. Remaining reservation pattern 6 is the number of second special symbols remaining when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state a to the normal gaming state (the second special symbol game that was first started after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state a ends). 2 to 4 pieces, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the 2nd special figure game that is started first while the 2nd special figure is pending is a loss, and the 2nd special figure game that is started second while the 2nd special figure is pending. This is a pattern in which the result of the jackpot lottery for the figure game is a small win. Remaining reservation pattern 7 is the number of second special symbols remaining when the time-saving gaming state a transitions to the normal gaming state (the second special symbol game that was first started after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state a ends). There are 3 to 4 pieces, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the 2nd special map game that is started first and second while the 2nd special map is pending is a loss, and the jackpot lottery is started 3rd while the 2nd special map is pending. This is a pattern in which the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game is a small win. Remaining reservation pattern 8 is the number of second special symbols remaining in case of transition from the time-saving gaming state a to the normal gaming state (the second special symbol game that was first started after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state a ends). 4 pieces, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the 2nd special map game that starts from the first to the 3rd game of the 2nd special map pending is a loss, and the 2nd special map game that starts from the 4th game of the 2nd special map that is pending. This is a pattern in which the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a small win.

As shown in FIGS. 62(B) and 62(D), in this embodiment, for the remaining reservation patterns 1 and 5, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern for one second special symbol remaining reservation is A special figure variation pattern "09" in which the second special figure variation display time is 120 seconds is set, and the second special figure game of 120 seconds is executed once for the remaining reservation of the second special figure. For the remaining reservation patterns 2 and 6, a special symbol fluctuation pattern with a second special symbol fluctuation display time of 60 seconds is used as a second special symbol fluctuation pattern for each of the first to two second special symbol residual reservations. 02'' is set, and the second special figure game of 60 seconds is executed twice for the remaining reservation of the second special figure. For remaining reservation patterns 3 and 7, a special symbol fluctuation pattern with a second special symbol fluctuation display time of 40 seconds is used as a second special symbol fluctuation pattern for each of the first to three second special symbol remainder reservations. 10'' is set, and the second special figure game of 40 seconds is executed three times for the remaining reservation of the second special figure. For remaining reservation patterns 4 and 8, a special symbol fluctuation pattern with a second special symbol fluctuation display time of 30 seconds is used as a second special symbol fluctuation pattern for each of the first to four second special symbol remainder reservations. 01'' is set, and the second special figure game of 30 seconds is executed four times for the remaining reservation of the second special figure. That is, for each remaining reservation pattern, the total variable display time of the second special figure game executed in each remaining reservation pattern is standardized to 120 seconds. Therefore, the battle performance (remaining reservation performance) of the RUSH performance described below is executed as a display performance that is completed in 120 seconds, and the second special figure game is executed for how many times the second special figure remaining reservation is performed during the battle performance. It's getting harder to understand what happened.

In addition, the total variable display time of the second special figure game executed in each remaining reservation pattern is not limited to 120 seconds, and can be changed as appropriate. Moreover, the variable display time of the second special figure executed in each remaining reservation pattern does not necessarily need to be equal. In addition, the total variable display time of the second special figure game executed in each remaining reservation pattern does not need to be standardized and may be different for each remaining reservation pattern, and each remaining reservation pattern has multiple variable display times. Time may also be associated.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
The main timer interrupt processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment is basically the same as the main timer interrupt processing of the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above. The procedures of the special figure pending command setting process and the second special figure pending command setting process are different from those of the first embodiment described above.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the starting prize winning process will be explained with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 63, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a win in the first winning hole 314. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there has been a winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the specific condition is satisfied, the process moves to step S1102, and it is determined that there has been no winning in the first winning opening 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process moves to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol reservation number N stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the first special figure reservation number N is the maximum reservation number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the first special figure reservation number N is not the maximum reservation number (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the first special figure reservation number N as a numerical value storage process (step S1103). ). When numerical information is stored in the first special figure pending number storage area NAA, a first special figure pending game state is entered in which the first special figure game can be executed.

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 stores the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. Obtain the counter value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in steps S1402 and S1414 in the process, and use the counter value as the first reserve of the first special figure reserve storage area REA of the special figure reserve storage area 412b in the RAM 412. A process of storing in the first vacant reservation area among the areas REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 is executed.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol validity information for the first special symbol reservation acquired in step S1104 becomes the subject of judgment regarding the propriety of a jackpot in step S2102 or S2103 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. The content of the special figure validity information is confirmed, and a first special figure holding command setting process is executed to set the first special figure holding command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. The details of the first special figure pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 19.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a win in the second winning hole 315. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there has been a winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process moves to step S1107, and if it determines that there has been no winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: No). ), the start winning process ends.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (four in this embodiment). Here, if the second special symbol reservation number M is the maximum reservation number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process. On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number M is not the maximum reservation number (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the second special figure reservation number M as a numerical value storage process (step S1108). ). When numerical information is stored in the second special figure pending number storage area NAB, the first special figure pending game state is entered in which the second special figure game can be executed.

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 stores the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. Obtain the counter value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in steps S1402 and S1414 in the process, and use the counter value as the first reserve of the second special figure reserve storage area REB of the special figure reserve storage area 412b in the RAM 412. A process of storing in the first vacant reservation area among the areas REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 is executed.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol validity information for the second special symbol reservation obtained in step S1109 becomes a target for determination of the propriety of a jackpot in step S2102 or S2103 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. The content of the special figure validity information is confirmed, and a second special figure holding command setting process is executed to set a second special figure holding command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second special figure pending command setting process is similar to the first special figure pending command setting process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 19, detailed explanation will be omitted. The second special figure hold command setting process is the same as the first special figure hold command setting process in FIG. The number N" may be read as the "second reserved special drawing number M."

[First special figure hold command setting process]
Here, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special figure pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. In addition, the first special figure hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first special figure hold command, the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type or loss type), special figure fluctuation display time, and the first special figure. Information such as the number of reservations N is included. Hereinafter, the first special figure hold command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 64.

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
As shown in FIG. 64, in the first special figure reservation command setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first selects the first special figure reservation number from the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. N is read out, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first special symbol reservation is read out from the RAM 412 (step S3301). Then, the MPU 41 refers to the first special drawing jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 59(A)) and determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting prize is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. A judgment is made (step S3302). When the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting prize is a jackpot (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3303. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting prize is not a jackpot (step S3302: No), that is, if it is a loss, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3305.

<Step S3303>
When the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting prize is a jackpot (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3303). For example, when the special symbol winning/failure information is stored in the third holding area REA3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 63, the jackpot type counter included in the special drawing winning/failure information stored in the third holding area REA3 The counter values of C2 and special figure variation type counter CS1 are read out. In addition, among the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4, the holding area in which the special figure winning/failure information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 63 is stored in the first special drawing holding number storage area NAA. This can be determined based on the value of the first special figure reservation number N.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2 (jackpot type), the special pattern fluctuation type counter CS1 (special pattern fluctuation pattern), and the first special pattern reservation number N to the first special pattern reservation command, and The special figure hold command setting process ends.

<Steps S3305 and S3306>
If the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting prize is not a jackpot (step S3302: No), that is, if it is a loss, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the reach random number counter C3 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3305). . Next, the MPU 41 sets the reach random number counter C3 (missing type), the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 (special figure fluctuation pattern), and the first special figure reservation number N to the first special figure reservation command (step S3306), and The first special figure pending command setting process ends.

In this way, the first special figure reservation command set in step S3304 or S3306 includes the first special figure reservation number N read out in step S3301. Therefore, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that has received the first special figure hold command refers to the first special figure hold number N included in the first special figure hold command, so that the first special figure hold command is It is possible to recognize which of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 corresponds to the first special symbol validity information stored. As a result, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 displays the first special figure pending image (FIG. 88(A) and FIG. 88(C)) as a corresponding display for the first special figure game in the first special figure pending image display area 76. (see).

Note that the first special figure hold command set in step S3307 or S3309 of the first special figure hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as shown in FIG. It is deleted after being sent to the audio lamp control device 5 together with other commands in step S1401 of the main process. Furthermore, the content of the first special figure hold command explained here is only an example, and if it is possible to grasp the same content as the first special figure hold command in the voice lamp control device 5, the content will be explained here. It's not limited to what you do. For example, it is also possible that part or all of the information of the first special figure reservation command is included in other commands.

[Second special figure hold command setting process]
Here, FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special figure pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1110 in the start winning process of FIG. In addition, the second special figure reservation command includes information indicating that the command is the second special figure reservation command, and information such as the result of the jackpot lottery, the special figure fluctuation display time, and the second special figure reservation number M. is included. The second special figure hold command setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 65.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 65, in the second special figure pending command setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not it is in the normal gaming state (step S3401). Whether or not it is in the normal gaming state is determined in steps S4216, S4222, and S4228 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. This is determined based on the normal gaming state flag that is set to on when the game is shifted to.

When the MPU 41 is in the normal gaming state (step S3401: Yes), the process moves to step S3409, and when it is not the normal gaming state (step S3401: No), the process moves to step S3402.

<Step S3402>
If it is not the normal gaming state (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the a-time saving gaming state (step S3402). Whether or not it is in the a time saving gaming state is determined based on the a time saving gaming state flag which is set to ON after the end of the time saving jackpot game in step S4246 of the gaming state transition process in FIG.

When the MPU 41 is in the a-time saving gaming state (step S3402: Yes), the process moves to step S3409. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the a time saving game state (step S3402: No), that is, in the a time saving gaming state or the c time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3403.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
If it is not in the a time-saving gaming state (step S3402: No), that is, in the a-time-saving gaming state or the c-time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 selects the At the same time as reading out the number M of 2nd special figure reservations, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each 2nd special figure reservation is read out from the RAM 412 (step S3403). Then, the MPU 41 refers to the b time saving - c time saving second special chart jackpot propriety table (see FIG. 60(A)), and determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting prize is a jackpot or not based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. It is determined whether there is one (step S3404). When the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting prize is a jackpot (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3405. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting prize is not a jackpot (step S3404: No), that is, if it is a loss, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3407.

<Step S3405>
When the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting prize is a jackpot (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3405). For example, when the special symbol winning/failure information is stored in the third holding area REB3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process in FIG. 63, the jackpot type counter included in the special drawing winning/failure information stored in the third holding area REB3 The counter values of C2 and special figure variation type counter CS1 are read out. In addition, among the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4, the reservation area in which the special symbol winning/failure information is stored in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 63 is stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage area NAB. This can be determined based on the value of the second special figure reservation number M.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2 (jackpot type), the special pattern fluctuation type counter CS1 (special pattern fluctuation pattern), and the second special pattern reservation number M to the second special pattern reservation command, and The special figure hold command setting process ends.

<Steps S3407 and S3408>
If the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting prize is not a jackpot (step S3404: No), that is, if it is a loss, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the reach random number counter C3 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3407). . Next, the MPU 41 sets the reach random number counter C3 (missing type), the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 (special figure fluctuation pattern), and the second special figure reservation number M to the second special figure reservation command (step S3408), and The second special figure pending command setting process ends.

<Steps S3409 to S3411>
In the case of the normal gaming state (step S3401: Yes) or in the case of the a time-saving gaming state (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 selects the special pattern variation pattern "08" with a variation display time of 40 seconds as the special pattern variation pattern. ” (step S3409). Then, the MPU 41 reads the second special figure reservation number M from the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB, and also reads out the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each second special figure reservation. The value is read from RAM 412 (step S3410). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot lottery result (jackpot type, small hit, loss type), special symbol fluctuation pattern, and second special symbol reservation number M to the second special symbol reservation command (step S3411), and sets the second special symbol reservation command (step S3411). The pending command setting process ends.

In this way, the second special figure reservation command set in step S3406, S3408 or S3411 includes the second special figure reservation number M read out in step S3403 or S3410. Therefore, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that has received the second special figure hold command refers to the second special figure hold number M included in the second special figure hold command, so that the second special figure hold command is It is possible to recognize which of the second reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 corresponds to the second special symbol validity information stored therein. As a result, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 displays the second special figure pending image (FIG. 88(B) and FIG. 88(D)) as a corresponding display for the second special figure game in the second special figure pending image display area 77. (see).

The second special figure hold command set in step S3406, S3408 or S3411 of the second special figure hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412 and executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4. It is erased after being sent to the audio lamp control device 5 together with other commands in step S1401 of the main process in FIG. 66, which will be described later. Furthermore, the content of the second special figure hold command explained here is only an example, and if it is possible for the voice lamp control device 5 to grasp the same content as the second special figure hold command, the explanation will be given here. It's not limited to what you do. For example, it is also possible that part or all of the information of the second special figure reservation command is included in other commands.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
The main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment is basically the same as the main processing of the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 21), but as shown in FIG. The difference is that the small winning game control process is executed and some of the processing procedures are different. Hereinafter, regarding the main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment, we will focus on the differences from the main processing of the main control device 4 in the above-mentioned first embodiment and the processing necessary for explaining this embodiment. Explain.

[Public figure game control process]
The normal pattern game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of FIG. 66 of this embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in the normal pattern fluctuation start process. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 67, the normal pattern fluctuation start process of this embodiment will be described.

[General figure fluctuation start processing]
In the ordinary symbol variation start process of this embodiment, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display section 361 is started, and when the lottery result in the ordinary symbol lottery is a win, the ordinary symbol per type (electric accessory) is determined. 315b) is set.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 67, in the normal pattern fluctuation start process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not it is in the normal gaming state (step S3501). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state when starting the variable display of normal symbols (common pattern game) is the normal gaming state. In other words, when the normal symbols start to fluctuate, it is determined whether the normal gaming state is a low support mode or the time-saving gaming state is a high support mode, and based on the type of support mode at the start of the fluctuation of the regular symbols, Judgment is made as to whether or not the

Whether or not it is in the normal gaming state is determined in steps S4216, S4222, and S4228 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. This is determined based on the normal gaming state flag that is set to on when the game is shifted to.

When the MPU 41 is in the normal gaming state (step S3501: Yes), the process moves to step S3402, and when it is not the normal gaming state (step S3402: No), the process moves to step S3405.

<Steps S3502 to S3504>
If the normal gaming state flag is set to on (step S3501: Yes), that is, if the mode is low support mode, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal gaming state A determination is made as to whether the winning drawing is a winning lottery (step S3502), and it is determined whether the result of the determination is a winning lottery (step S3503).

In addition, whether or not the result of the judgment is a normal figure is determined by a random number counter per normal figure obtained by entering the game ball 99 into the normal figure 317R and stored in the normal figure holding storage area 412c (see FIG. 11). Judgment is made based on C4.

If the result of the judgment based on the normal game state normal figure hit/failure table is a normal figure hit (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short open normal figure hit flag to ON (step S3504), and returns the process to step S3504. The process moves to S3511. The short open normal figure winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the general figure drawing is a short open winning in which the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b is 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 58(E)), In step S3609 of the normal figure game control process in FIG. 67, which will be described later, it is referred to when determining whether or not to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to the short opening as the opening time of the electric accessory 315b.

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment based on the normal game state normal figure hit/fail table is not a normal figure (step S3503: No), that is, if the result of the judgment is a failure, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3511. .

<Steps S3505 and S3506>
If it is not in the normal gaming state (step S3501: No), that is, if it is in the time-saving gaming state which is the high support mode (if it is in any of the a-time-saving gaming state, the b-time-saving gaming state, and the c-time-saving gaming state), the MPU 41 Based on the time-saving game state normal figure winning probability table (see FIG. 58(B)), a judgment is made regarding the winning lottery of a common figure (step S3505), and it is determined whether the result of the judgment is a winning common figure. (Step S3506).

It should be noted that whether or not the result of the judgment is a winning of a normal figure is obtained by the entry of the game ball 99 into the through gate 317R, similarly to step S3502 described above, and is obtained by entering the game ball 99 into the through gate 317R, and the normal figure holding storage area 412c (see FIG. 11). ) The determination is made based on the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure stored in the area.

If the result of the judgment based on the short-time gaming state normal figure hit/failure table is a normal figure hit (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3507, and if the result of the judgment is not a normal figure hit (step S3506: Yes). Step S3506: No), that is, if the result of the validity determination is negative, the process moves to step S3509.

<Steps S3507 and S3508>
If the result of the judgment based on the time-saving gaming state normal figure winning probability table is that the normal figure is winning (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the a time-saving gaming state (step S3507). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state when starting the variable display of normal symbols (common pattern game) is the time-saving gaming state a. Whether or not it is in the a time saving gaming state is determined based on the a time saving gaming state flag which is set to ON after the end of the time saving jackpot game in step S4246 of the gaming state transition process in FIG.

When the MPU 41 is in the a-time saving gaming state (step S3507: Yes), it sets the long open normal map hit flag on (step S3508), and moves the process to step S3511. The long open normal figure winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the general figure winning lottery is a long open winning in which the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b is 15 seconds (see FIG. 58(E)), and as described below. In step S3603 of the normal figure game control process in FIG. 68, it is referred to when determining whether or not to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to the long opening as the opening time of the electric accessory 315b. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the a time saving game state (step S3507: No), the process moves to step S3509.

<Steps S3509 and S3510>
If it is not in the a time saving gaming state (step S3507: No), the MPU 41 determines whether it is in the b time saving gaming state (step S3509). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state when starting the variable display of normal symbols (common symbol game) is the time-saving gaming state b. b Whether or not the time-saving gaming state is determined is determined in step S4203 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. Based on this, the judgment is made based on the b time saving game state flag which is set to ON when the normal game state is transferred to the b time saving game state.

When the MPU 41 is in the b-time saving game state (step S3509: Yes), it sets the medium open normal map winning flag to on (step S3509), and moves the process to step S3511. The medium open normal figure winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the normal figure winning lottery is a medium open winning in which the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b is 3 seconds (see FIG. 58(E)). In step S3606 of the game control process per normal figure in FIG. 68, it is referred to when determining whether or not to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to the middle opening as the opening time of the electric accessory 315b. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the b-time saving game state (step S3507: No), the process moves to step S3509.

<Steps S3511 and S3512>
If the result of the winning lottery for a regular map is a loss (step S3503 or S3506: No), if the short open standard winning flag is set to on (step S3504), or if the long open standard winning flag is set to on. (Step S3508), or when the medium open normal symbol hit flag is set to on (Step S3510), the MPU 41 starts variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (Step S3511) . Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation display flag to ON, which indicates that the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, that is, the normal pattern game is being executed (step S3512), and starts the normal pattern fluctuation start process. finish.

[Game control processing per regular map]
Here, FIGS. 68 and 69 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure of the normal game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. 66. In the normal figure winning game control process, when the result of the common figure winning lottery is a win, a permissible state is established in which the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 is permitted by controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 315b. Processing for switching between the restricted state and the restricted state is executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, the game control process per normal symbol will be explained.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 68, in the normal pattern game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern game has ended) is on. (Step S3601). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing at which the game per common symbol can be started. In addition, the normal symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1511 when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game control process of FIG.

If the normal pattern variation stop display flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, if it is the timing at which the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3602. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3616 in FIG. 69.

<Step S3602>
When the normal figure fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, when the timing is such that the normal figure winning game can be started, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed. It is determined whether it is on (step S3602). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3602: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the normal winning game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if a jackpot game is forced to end due to the start of the jackpot game, even if the result of the jackpot lottery for the jackpot game is a jackpot, the jackpot game will not be played. Will not start. That is, in this embodiment, the normal winning game is not started while the jackpot winning game is being executed. Of course, a new common figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S3602: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
If the jackpot game flag is off (step S3602: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the long open general hit flag is set to on (step S3603). . The long open regular map hit flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per regular map is a long open regular map, and when the result of the lottery per regular map is a long open regular map, the flag in Figure 67 It is set to ON in step S3508 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished playing game is a long open playing winning. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3604 when the long open general map hit flag is set to on (step S3603: Yes), and when the long open general map hit flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), the process moves to step S3606.

<Steps S3604 and S3605>
When the long open general map winning flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), that is, when the result of the general winning lottery for the completed general map game is a long open general winning map, the MPU 41 performs a numerical value storage process. As, the value corresponding to 15 seconds (see FIG. 58(E)), which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b (the time during which the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315) in the long open normal game, is released. Processing to set the value of the time counter is executed (step S3604). The opening time counter is referred to in step S3618 of the normal symbol game control process in order to determine the return timing of the electric accessory 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open standard hit flag to OFF (step S3605), and moves the process to step S3612.

<Step S3606>
If the long open regular map winning flag is set to off (step S3603: No), that is, if the result of the regular open regular lottery for the completed regular regular map game is not a long open regular lottery, the MPU 41 selects a medium open regular map. It is determined whether the hit flag is set on (step S3606). The medium-open standard winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per standard drawing is a medium-open standard winning, and when the result of the lottery per standard drawing is a medium-open standard winning, It is set to ON in step S3510 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery for the finished standard game is a medium open standard win. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3607 when the medium open regular map hit flag is set to ON (step S3606: Yes), and when the medium open regular map hit flag is set to OFF (step S3606: No), the process moves to step S3609.

<Steps S3607 and S3608>
When the medium open general map winning flag is set to on (step S3606: Yes), that is, when the result of the general open standard winning lottery for the completed general standard game is a medium open general winning map, the MPU 41 performs a numerical value storage process. As, the value corresponding to 3 seconds (see FIG. 58(E)), which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the medium open normal game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315), is released. Processing to set the value of the time counter is executed (step S3607). Then, the MPU 41 sets the medium open normal figure hit flag to OFF (step S3608), and moves the process to step S3612.

<Step S3609>
If the flag for hitting a medium-open general map is set to OFF (step S3606: No), that is, if the result of the lottery to win a medium-open standard map for the completed standard game is not a hit for a medium-open standard map, the MPU 41 selects a short open standard map. It is determined whether the hit flag is set on (step S3609). The short open regular map hit flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per regular map is a short open regular map, and when the result of the lottery per regular map is a short open regular map, the short open regular map hit flag in Figure 67 It is set to ON in step S3504 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished betting game is a short opening winning. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3610 when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to ON (step S3609: Yes), and when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to OFF (step S3609: No), that is, if the result of the winning lottery for the finished regular symbol game is a loss, the process moves to step S3612.

<Steps S3610 and S3611>
When the short open regular map winning flag is set to ON (step S3609: Yes), that is, when the result of the regular regular winning lottery for the completed regular regular map game is a short open regular lottery, the MPU 41 performs a numerical value storage process. As, the value corresponding to 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 58(E)), which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the game per short opening normal figure (the time during which the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315). A process for setting the value of the open time counter is executed (step S3610). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open standard hit flag to OFF (step S3611), and moves the process to step S3612.

<Steps S3612 to S3614>
If the result of the winning lottery is a win, and the flag indicating the type of winning (long open regular winning flag, medium open regular winning flag, or short open regular winning flag) is set to OFF (step S3605 , S3608 or S3611), the MPU 41 operates the electric accessory 315b (step S3612). As a result, the second winning hole 315 is opened, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole 315. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory release command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is released (step S3613), and also sets an electric accessory release command that indicates that the electric accessory 315b is released. The electric accessory opening flag is set to on (step S3614), and the process moves to step S3615.

Note that the electric accessory release command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. From this, the audio lamp control device 5 can start a display effect indicating that the electric accessory 315b is released, for example, on the symbol display section 341, based on the electric accessory release command.

<Step S3615>
If the result of the winning lottery is a win and the process of opening the electric accessory 315b is executed (steps S3603 to S3614), or both the long open regular winning flag and the short open regular winning flag are turned off. If it is set (if the result of the winning lottery is a loss) (steps S3602, S3606 and step S3609 are all No), the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed (that the common symbol game has ended). ) is set to off (step S3615), and the normal pattern per game control process is ended.

<Step S3616>
When the ordinary figure fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S3601: No), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the electric accessory opening flag set to is set to on (step S3616). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game per common symbol is being executed. When the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S3616: Yes), that is, when the game per common map is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3617. On the other hand, when the electric accessory opening flag is set to OFF (step S3616: No), that is, when the game per common symbol is not being executed, the MPU 41 ends the game control process for the common symbol.

<Steps S3617 and S3618>
If the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S3616: Yes), that is, if the game per common symbol is being executed, the MPU 41 updates the game in step S3604 of the game control process for the common symbol as an update process. , S3607 or S3610 is executed to subtract 1 from the value of the open time counter (step S3617), and it is determined whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3618). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b. If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3618: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3619. On the other hand, when the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3618: No), that is, when it is not the timing to return the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per normal symbol.

<Steps S3619 to S3621>
When the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3618: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 returns the electric accessory 315b (step S3619). As a result, the second winning hole 315 is closed, and entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory closing command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is closed (step S3620), and also sets an electric accessory closing command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is closed. The accessory opening flag is set to OFF (step S3621), and the process moves to step S3822.

Note that the electric accessory closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can terminate the display effect, which is executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like, and indicates that the electric accessory is opened, based on the electric accessory closing command.

<Step S3622>

In step S3822, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the a time-saving game state flag indicating the a time-saving game state is set to ON. The time-saving game state flag a is set to ON after the end of the time-saving jackpot game in step S4246 of the game state transition process in FIG.

If the a time-saving game state flag indicating the a time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3622: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3823, and sets the a time-saving game state flag to OFF. If so (step S3622: No), the normal symbol per game control process is ended.

<Steps S3623 and S3624>
If the a time-saving gaming state flag indicating that the a-time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3622: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state to the normal gaming state to ON. (Step S3623). The normal gaming state transition flag is referred to in step S4215 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 81 when determining whether or not to transition the gaming state from the time-saving gaming state a to the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the a time saving game state flag to OFF (step S3624), and ends the game control process per normal symbol.

Here, in the normal symbol winning control process of this embodiment, when a common symbol winning game is executed in the a time saving game state, the gaming state is changed to the a time saving gaming state in step S3623 based on the end of the common symbol winning game. The normal gaming state transition flag for transitioning from to the normal gaming state is set to ON, and the time-saving gaming state flag a is set to OFF in step S3624. In other words, in this embodiment, when a game per normal figure is started in the time-saving game state a, the game state changes to the time-saving game a by executing the game per normal figure (operating the electric accessory 315b once). The state is transferred to the normal gaming state. And, as mentioned above, when a game with a normal figure is executed based on the transition to the time-saving game state a (when the second prize opening 315 is opened by the operation of the electric accessory 315b), the second special figure In addition to the variable display, it is now possible to perform the second special pattern game a total of five times, including a variable display of the second special pattern based on a maximum of four second special pattern reservations (so-called remaining reservations). The second special figure game based on the remaining reservation of the second special figure is started in the normal game state which has been transferred from the time saving game state a.

[Special figure game control processing]
Here, FIGS. 70 and 71 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. 66. In the special figure game control process, the storage contents of the special figure holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is controlled, for example, the The variable display and stop display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 is controlled. Hereinafter, the special figure game control process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 70, in the special figure game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on (step S3701). . In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game flag is on (step S3701: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game control process. That is, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S3701: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3702.

<Step S3702>
When the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3701: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the first special symbol game or the second It is determined whether the special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that the special figure game is currently being executed is on (step S3702). The special symbol variation display flag is set to ON in step S3915 when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 71, which will be described later, and the special symbol game control When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the process, it is set to off in step S3710.

If the special symbol variable display flag is on (step S3702: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is variable and displayed (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3706. On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation display flag is off (step S3702: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed and the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 performs processing. The process moves to step S3703.

<Step S3703>
When the special symbol fluctuation display flag is off (step S3702: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed and the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 displays the special symbol on hold. Both the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the storage area 412b and the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not is 0 (step S3703).

When both the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M are 0 (step S3703: Yes), the MPU 41 suspends the right to execute the first special figure game and the second special figure reservation. If there is no reservation of the right to play the game, the special figure game control process is ended. On the other hand, if either the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3703: No), the MPU 41 suspends the right to execute the first special figure game; If at least one of the rights to execute the second special figure game is reserved, the process moves to step S3704.

<Step S3704>
If either the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3703: No), that is, the right to execute the first special figure game is reserved, and the second special figure game is held. If there is at least one of the reservations of the right to execute the ( Step S3704), the process moves to step S3705. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 (first special symbol game or second special symbol). A special figure fluctuation start process is executed to execute the figure game, and the special figure game control process is ended. The details of the special figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

<Step S3706>
If the special symbol variation display flag is on (step S3702: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variable display (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol. From the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the second special symbol game, the first special symbol set in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process of step S3903 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 73, which will be described later, or the same special symbol It is determined whether the special symbol variation display time for the second special symbol set in the second special symbol variation pattern setting process A, B of step S3907 or S3909 in the variation start process has elapsed (step S3706). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the special symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game.

When the special symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3706: Yes), that is, the timing to stop displaying the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game. If so, the process moves to step S3707. On the other hand, if the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3706: No), the MPU 41 stops and displays the special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is not the timing to end the figure game, the special figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S3707 to S3710>
If the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3706: Yes), that is, at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner and ending the special symbol game. In this case, the MPU 41 causes the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 to stop and display the special symbol in a manner according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game. (Step S3707). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S3708), and the audio lamp control device indicates that the special symbol game has ended. 5 is set (step S3709). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets off the special symbol variation display flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the variable display state (the special symbol game is being executed) (step S3710), and switches the processing to 71, step S3711.

<Steps S3711 and S3712>
In step S3711 of FIG. 71, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the remaining setting counter is 0 or not. The remaining setting counter is executed for the second special symbol reservation (remaining reservation) due to the game ball entering the second prize opening 315 triggered by the electric accessory 315b being released in the time-saving gaming state a. This indicates the remaining number of times of the second special figure game (special variation), and is set in step S4015 of the second special figure variation pattern setting process B of FIG. 74, or step S4019 or S4023 of FIG. 75.

If the value of the remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of special fluctuations for the remaining reservation of the second special symbol is 0 (step S3711: Yes), the MPU 41 notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the special fluctuation is finished. A special fluctuation end command is set (step S3712), and the special figure game control process is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining setting counter is not 0 (step S3711: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3713.

<Step S3713>
If the value of the remaining setting counter is not 0 (step S3711: No), the MPU 41 determines that the ceiling number counter indicating the number of remaining special figure games until the gaming state is shifted to the time-saving gaming state b is set. It is determined whether the ceiling number counter flag shown is set on (step S3713). The ceiling number counter is set when the jackpot game ends in step S4251 of the game state transition process in FIG. 82, and the ceiling number counter flag is set when the ceiling number counter is set in step S4252 of the game state transition process. is set to on when

If the ceiling number counter flag indicating that the ceiling number counter is set is set to ON (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3714, and sets the ceiling number counter flag to OFF. If so (step S3713: No), the process moves to step S3717.

<Steps S3714 to S3716>
If the ceiling number counter flag indicating that the ceiling number counter is set is set to ON (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 performs update processing until the gaming state is shifted to the time-saving gaming state b. A process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ceiling number counter indicating the remaining number of special figure games is executed (step S3714), and the process moves to step S3715.

In step S3715, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ceiling number counter after subtraction is 0 or not. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to shift the gaming state to the time-saving gaming state b. When the value of the ceiling number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3715: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to shift the gaming state to the time-saving gaming state b, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the time-saving gaming state b. The time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3716), and the special figure game control process is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the ceiling number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3715: No), that is, if it is not the timing to shift the gaming state to the b-time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 ends the special figure gaming control process.

<Steps S3717 and S3718>
If the ceiling number counter flag indicating that the ceiling number counter is set is set to OFF (step S3713: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the fluctuation display is outside the time-saving symbol stop. (Step S3717). Here, the time-saving symbol stop failure is a jackpot lottery result in which the gaming state is transferred to the c-time-saving gaming state after the end of the variable display. That is, in step S3717, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift to the time-saving game state c after the variable display is stopped.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable display is that the time-saving symbol is not stopped (step S3717: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the c-time-saving gaming state transition flag that shifts the gaming state to the c-time-saving gaming state (step S3718). ), the special figure game control process ends. The c time-saving gaming state shift flag is referred to in step S4208 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 80 when determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the c-time saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable display is not out of the time-saving symbol stop (step S3717: No), that is, if the gaming state is not to be shifted to the c-time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3719.

<Step S3719>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the fluctuation display is not outside the time-saving symbol stop (step S3717: No), that is, if the gaming state is not to be shifted to c-time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 selects b-time-saving game which indicates that it is in the b-time-saving gaming state. It is determined whether the status flag is set to on (step S3719). The b time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON when the gaming state is transferred from the normal gaming state to the b-time saving gaming state in step S4203 of the gaming state transition process in FIG.

If the b time saving gaming state flag indicating the b working time saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3719: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3720, and the b working time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3719: No), the process moves to step S3723.

<Steps S3720 to S3722>
If the b time saving game state flag indicating the b time saving game state is set to ON (step S3719: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates the remaining number of time saving games that can be executed in the b time saving gaming state as an update process. b A process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter is executed (step S3720), and the process moves to step S3721. The b time saving number counter is set when the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state to the b time saving gaming state in step S4205 of the gaming state transition process in FIG.

In step S3721, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the b time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 or not. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to shift the gaming state from the time-saving gaming state b to the normal gaming state. If the value of the b time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3721: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to shift the gaming state from the b time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 changes the gaming state to the b time saving gaming state. The normal game state transition flag for transitioning from the state to the normal game state is set to on (step S3722), and the special symbol game control process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the b time saving number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3721: No), that is, if it is not the timing to shift the gaming state from the b time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 performs the special figure game control process. end.

<Step S3723>
If the b time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3719: No), that is, if the gaming state is not in the b-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 turns on the c-time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the c time-saving game state is in the c-time-saving game state. is set (step S3723). The c time saving gaming state flag is set to ON when the gaming state is transferred from the normal gaming state to the c working time saving gaming state in step S4209 of the gaming state transition process in FIG.

If the c-work-saving gaming state flag indicating that the c-working-time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3723: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3724, and sets the c-working-time saving gaming state flag to OFF. If so (step S3723: No), the special figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S3724 to S3726>
When the c time saving game state flag indicating that the c time saving game state is set to on (step S3723: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates the remaining number of time saving games that can be executed in the c time saving gaming state as an update process. c A process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter is executed (step S3724), and the process moves to step S3725. The c time saving number counter is set when the gaming state is transferred from the normal gaming state to the c time saving gaming state in step S4211 of the gaming state transition process in FIG.

In step S3725, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the c time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 or not. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to shift the gaming state from the time-saving gaming state c to the normal gaming state. If the value of the c time-saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3725: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to shift the gaming state from the c-time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 changes the gaming state to c-time saving gaming. The normal game state transition flag for transitioning from the state to the normal game state is set to on (step S3726), and the special symbol game control process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the c time saving number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3725: No), that is, if it is not the timing to shift the gaming state from the c time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 performs the special figure game control process. end.

[Special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3704 of the special figure game control process in FIG. In the special figure data setting process of this embodiment, the storage contents of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special figure data setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 72.

The special figure holding storage area 412b of this embodiment is similar to the first embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but as shown in FIG. The first special figure holding storage area REA (first holding area REA1, 2nd holding area REA2, 3rd holding area REA3, 4th holding area REA4, and 1st special drawing holding number storage area NAA), and a second start triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening 315 The second special figure reservation storage area REB (first reservation area REB1, second reservation area REB2, third reservation area REB3, fourth reservation area REB4, and second special symbol reservation number storage area NAB), and the first special symbol display section 362 or second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36, the variable display of special symbols is started. This is a storage area for moving the special drawing validity information stored in the first holding area REA1 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA or the first holding area REB1 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB. It includes a special figure execution area AE.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 72, in the special pattern data setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the second special pattern reservation number M for the second special pattern game is 0 (step S3801). The MPU 41 determines that when the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S3801: Yes), that is, when there is no second special figure reservation for the second special figure game and there is a first special figure reservation for the first special figure game. , the process moves to step S3802. On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3801: No), that is, if there is a second special figure reservation for the second special figure game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3806. That is, the MPU 41 starts the second special pattern game with priority over the first special pattern game by determining whether or not the second special pattern reservation number M for the second special pattern game is 0.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special pattern game is started with priority over the first special pattern game, but the first special pattern game is started with priority over the second special pattern game. Also, the special figure game is started in the order in which the game balls enter the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 (order of reservation), and either the first special figure game or the second special figure game is started. may be executed. In addition, the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other without setting a priority order for starting the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, and the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other. The second special figure game may be executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation of special figures).

<Steps S3802 to S3804>
When the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an update process by updating the number M of the second special figure reservation stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. Executes the process of subtracting 1 from the number N of 1 special figure reservation (step S3802), and moves the first special figure validity information from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA to the special figure execution area AE ( Step S3803). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the first special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA one by one (step S3804). Specifically, in step S3804, the first special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REA2 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the first special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved. The information is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the first special symbol validity information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. When the process of step S3804 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3805.

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a first special figure shift command indicating that the first special figure validity information of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA has been shifted. Then, the special figure data setting process ends. This first special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5, based on the first special figure shift command, displays a hold display corresponding to the first special figure hold displayed on the symbol display section 341 (FIGS. 88(A) and 88(C) ) can be changed.

<Steps S3806 to S3808>
If the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3801: No), the MPU 41 performs a subtraction process on the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. The process of subtracting 1 from the special figure reservation number M is executed (step S3806), and the second special figure validity information is moved from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB to the special figure execution area AE (step S3807). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the second special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB one by one (step S3808). Specifically, in step S3808, the second special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, and the second special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2. and moves the second special symbol validity information of the fourth reservation area REB4 to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S3807 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3809.

<Step S3809>
In step S3809, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a second special symbol shift command indicating that the second special symbol validity information of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB has been shifted. Then, the special figure data setting process ends. This second special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5, based on the second special figure shift command, displays a hold display corresponding to the second special figure hold displayed on the symbol display section 341 (FIGS. 88(B) and 88(D) ) can be changed.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3705 of the special symbol game control process in FIG. In the special symbol fluctuation start process of the present embodiment, by starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 based on the starting winning of the game ball to the first winning hole 314, or by starting the fluctuating display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362, The first special game or the second special pattern game (special pattern game) is started by the start of the variable display of the second special pattern in the second special pattern display section 363 based on the start winning of the game ball to 315. Various processes associated with the start of the figure game are executed. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to FIG. 28.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 73, in the special figure fluctuation start process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game (step S3901). When the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3902. If the special figure game to be started is not the first special figure game (step S3901: No), that is, if the special figure game to be started is the second special figure game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3904.

<Steps S3902 and S3903>
If the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 41 draws the first special figure jackpot lottery based on the first special figure jackpot propriety table (see FIG. 59(A)). (Step S3902), further executes the first special figure fluctuation pattern setting process (Step S3903), and moves the process to Step S3910.

In the first special pattern fluctuation pattern setting process, the MPU 41 selects the first special pattern jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 59(D)) or the first special pattern out fluctuation based on the result of the first special pattern jackpot lottery in step S3902. With reference to the table (see FIG. 59(F)), a first special figure fluctuation pattern, which is a variable display time of the first special figure in the first special figure game to be started, is set.

<Step S3904>
If the special figure game to be started is not the first special figure game (step S3901: No), that is, if the special figure game to be started is the second special figure game, the MPU 41 indicates that it is in the b time saving game state. b It is determined whether the time saving gaming state is set to on (step S3504). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state in the case of starting the variable display of the second special figure (second special figure game) is the time-saving game state b. Note that the b time-saving game state flag indicates that, in step S4203 of the game state transition process in FIG. 80, after the end of the jackpot game, the special drawing game in which the jackpot lottery result is a loss is executed a specified number of times (for example, 500 times). It is set to ON when the normal gaming state is transferred to the time-saving gaming state b based on .

When the b time-saving game state indicating the b time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3904: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3906. On the other hand, when the b time-saving game state is set to OFF (step S3904: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3905.

<Step S3905>
b If the time-saving game state b indicating the time-saving game state is set to OFF (step S3904: No), the MPU 41 determines that the time-saving game state c indicating the time-saving game state c is set to ON. It is determined whether or not there is one (step S3505). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state in the case of starting the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol game) is the c time-saving gaming state.

When the c time-saving game state indicating the c time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3906. On the other hand, when the c time-saving game state is set to OFF (step S3905: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3908. That is, the MPU 41 determines that the game state when starting the variable display of the second special figure (second special figure game) is not the time-saving game state b and the time-saving game state c, but the normal game state or the time-saving game state a. If so, the process moves to step S3908.

<Steps S3906 and S3907>
b If the time-saving gaming state b indicating the time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3904: Yes), or c If the time-saving gaming state c indicating the time-saving gaming state is set to ON (Step S3905: Yes), that is, if the game state when starting the variable display of the second special figure (second special figure game) is the b time saving game state or the c time saving game state, the MPU 41 A second special pattern jackpot lottery is performed based on the time-saving second special pattern jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 60(A)) (step S3906), and a second special pattern fluctuation pattern setting process A is further executed (step S3907). , the process moves to step S3910.

In the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process A, the MPU 41 uses the b-time saving - c time-saving second special figure jackpot variation table (see FIG. 60(C)) based on the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery result in step S3906. Or, refer to the b time saving - c time saving second special figure off fluctuation table (see Figure 60(E)) and determine the second special figure fluctuation pattern which is the variable display time of the second special figure in the second special figure game to be started. is set.

<Steps S3908 and S3909>
When c time saving game state is set to off (step S3905: No), that is, when starting the variable display of the second special figure (second special figure game), the game state is b time saving game state and c time saving game state. If it is not in the gaming state but in the normal gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 performs the second special figure jackpot lottery based on the normal-a time-saving second special figure jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 61(A)). (Step S3908), further executes the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process (Step S3908), and moves the process to Step S3910.

In the second special pattern fluctuation pattern setting process B, the MPU 41 selects a time saving second special pattern fluctuation table (see FIG. 62(A)) or the normal second special pattern fluctuation table based on the result of the second special pattern jackpot lottery result in step S3908 With reference to the special figure fluctuation table (see FIG. 62(B)), a second special figure fluctuation pattern, which is a variable display time of the second special figure in the second special figure game to be started, is set. The details of the second special figure variation pattern setting process B will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a special pattern fluctuation pattern command including the result of the jackpot lottery in step S3902, S3906 or S3908 and the special pattern fluctuation pattern set in step S3903, S3907 or S3909, and processes The process moves to step S3911. The special figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute the special figure game performance on the symbol display section 341 etc. as a display performance based on the special figure variation pattern command.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "4R time-saving jackpot", the MPU 41 selects the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" with an "A" indicating that it is a 4R time-saving jackpot, "A01" to " A03'' is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "4R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "B" indicating that it is a 4R concave jackpot to the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "03", "B01" to "B01". Any one of "B03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure variation pattern command. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "small win", the MPU 41 adds "C" to the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01", "02", "08" to "010" to indicate a small win. Any one of "C01", "C02", "C08" to "C010" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "loss", the MPU 41 adds "D" to the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "05" and "08" to "10" to indicate a loss. Any one of "D01" to "D05" and "D08" to "D10" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "lost", the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of miss (front/back off reach, front/back off reach, non-front/back off reach, complete miss, time-saving symbol stop/miss) in the special symbol variation pattern command.

<Step S3911>
When the special symbol variation pattern command is set, the MPU 41 starts the special symbol game by starting the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36. (step S3911). Specifically, when the MPU 41 is based on the starting winning of the game ball to the first winning hole 314, the MPU 41 starts the first special game by starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362. When the second special symbol game starts and is based on the starting winning of the game ball into the second winning hole 315, the second special symbol game is started by the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the special symbol variation display flag indicating that the special symbol is being varied and displayed (the special symbol game is being executed) (step S3911), and ends the special symbol variation start process.

[Second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B]
Here, FIGS. 74 to 76 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B executed by the MPU 41 in step S3909 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. In the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B of this embodiment, the storage contents of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. The second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B will be described below with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76.

<Step S4001>
As shown in FIG. 74, in the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the a time-saving game state flag indicating the time-saving game state is set to ON. do. The time-saving game state flag a is set to ON after the end of the time-saving jackpot game in step S4246 of the game state transition process in FIG.

When the a time saving game state flag indicating that the a time saving game state is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4002, and sets the a time saving game state flag to OFF. If so (step S4001: No), the process moves to step S4006.

<Steps S4002 and S4003>
When the a time-saving game state flag indicating that the a-time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to record the fluctuation of the second special figure in the second special figure game. At the same time as executing the process of setting 40 seconds of the variable pattern "08" (see FIG. 62(A)) as the display time (step S4002), a voice lamp indicates that the second special figure game will start in the time saving game state a. A special fluctuation start command to be notified to the control device 5 is set (step S4003), and the process moves to step S4004. That is, the MPU 41 notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that there is a high probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a small win, and that a special variation that makes it easier to execute a jackpot game will be started.

The special fluctuation start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the special variation start command, displays a display effect that informs the player that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a small win is high, and that the special variation is such that a jackpot game is likely to be executed. A RUSH effect (see FIG. 89) can be started as a specific effect.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game is a small win. When the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game is a small win (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is not a small win (step S4004: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a loss, the MPU 41 executes the process in step S4005. to move to.

<Step S4005>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is not a small hit (step S4004: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a loss, the MPU 41 determines that the special variation has started. A special fluctuation start flag indicating that the flag is set to ON (step S4005), and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process B is ended. The special fluctuation start flag indicates that the second special figure game to be started is the second special figure game (a time-saving game In order to judge whether or not it is a second special figure game based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the state (second special figure game with remaining reservation), it is referred to in the next step S4006.

<Step S4006>
If the a time saving game state flag indicating that the a time saving game state is set to OFF (step S4001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the special fluctuation start flag is set to on (step S4001: No). S4006). That is, the MPU 41 determines that the second special figure game to be started is the second special figure game (a time-saving game state) that is executed consecutively after the second special figure game of missing notification started in the time-saving game state a. It is determined whether or not it is a second special figure game based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 (second special figure game with remaining reservation).

When the special fluctuation start flag is set to ON (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that the second special figure game to be started is the same as the second special figure game of the missed notification that was started in the a time saving game state. Next, if it is a second special figure game to be executed continuously (a second special figure game with remaining reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state), the process is performed in step The process moves to S4007. On the other hand, when the special fluctuation start flag is set to OFF (step S4006: No), the MPU 41 determines that the second special figure game to be started is the second special figure of the missing notification that was started in the time saving game state a. If it is not the second special figure game that is executed consecutively after the game (the second special figure game with the remaining reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving game state a), the process is The process moves to step S4024 in FIG. 76.

<Steps S4007 and S4008>
If the special fluctuation start flag is set to ON (step S4006: Yes), that is, the second special figure game to be started is consecutive to the second special figure game of the missed notification that was started in the time saving game state a. In the case of a second special figure game to be executed (a second special figure game with remaining reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the time saving game state), the MPU 41 starts the special fluctuation. The flag is set to OFF (step S4007), and the process moves to step S4008.

<Steps S4008 and S4009>
In step S4008, the MPU 41 executes the second special figure game at the end of the second special figure game that was first executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the a time-saving game state. The remaining reservation pattern (see FIGS. 62(B) to 62(D)) and the remaining reservation number for the remaining reservation, which is the reservation of the right to do so, are specified (step S4008), and the remaining reservation pattern command is set (step S4009). , the process moves to step S4010.

The remaining reservation pattern command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the remaining reservation pattern and the number of remaining reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the time saving gaming state a. This remaining hold pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the battle effect (see FIGS. 90 and 91) of the RUSH effects as a display effect based on the remaining pending pattern command. In addition, the voice lamp control device 5 can manage the remaining number of reservations based on the remaining reservation pattern command, and as a result, the remaining number of reservations is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as a second special figure reservation image, which is a display effect. It becomes possible to display.

<Steps S4010 and S4011>
In step S4010, the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining reservation pattern specified in step S4008 corresponds to either remaining reservation pattern 1 or remaining reservation pattern 5.

If the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to either the remaining reservation pattern 1 or the remaining reservation pattern 5 (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to insert the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving gaming state. A process is executed to set 120 seconds, which is the special pattern fluctuation pattern "08", as the second special pattern fluctuation display time for the second special pattern game, which is the remaining reservation based on the ball entering (step S4011), and The figure variation pattern setting process B ends. On the other hand, if the remaining reservation pattern does not correspond to either the remaining reservation pattern 1 or the remaining reservation pattern 5 (step S4010: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4012.

<Step S4012>
If the remaining reservation pattern does not correspond to either the remaining reservation pattern 1 or the remaining reservation pattern 5 (step S4010: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining reservation pattern specified in step S4008 corresponds to the remaining reservation pattern 2 or the remaining reservation pattern. It is determined whether any of the above applies (step S4012).

If the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to either the remaining reservation pattern 2 or the remaining reservation pattern 6 (step S4012: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4013, and the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to the remaining reservation pattern 2 or the remaining reservation pattern. If none of 6 apply (step S4012: No), the process moves to step S4016 in FIG. 75.

<Step S4013>
If the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to either the remaining reservation pattern 2 or the remaining reservation pattern 6 (step S4012: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to insert the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving gaming state. A process is executed to set 60 seconds, which is the special pattern fluctuation pattern "02", as the second special pattern fluctuation display time for the second special pattern game which is the remaining reservation based on the ball entering (step S4011), and the process is executed in step S4014. to move to.

<Steps S4014 and S4015>
In step S4014, the MPU 41 turns on the remaining reservation pattern 2 and 6 flags indicating that the remaining reservation pattern is either the remaining reservation pattern 2 or the remaining reservation pattern 6. Then, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of reserved game balls based on the entry of game balls into the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state to 1 ( Step S4015), the second special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process B is ended.

<Step S4016>
If the remaining reservation pattern does not correspond to either the remaining reservation pattern 2 or the remaining reservation pattern 6 (step S4012: No), as shown in FIG. 3 and remaining reservation pattern 7 is determined (step S4016).

If the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to either the remaining reservation pattern 3 or the remaining reservation pattern 7 (step S4016: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4017, and the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to the remaining reservation pattern 3 or the remaining reservation pattern. If none of the above applies (step S4016: No), the process moves to step S4020.

<Step S4017>
If the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to either the remaining reservation pattern 3 or the remaining reservation pattern 7 (step S4016: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to insert the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving gaming state. A process is executed to set 40 seconds, which is the special pattern fluctuation pattern "10", as the second special pattern fluctuation display time for the second special pattern game which is the remaining reservation based on the ball entering (step S4017), and the process is executed in step S4018. to move to.

<Steps S4018 and S4019>
In step S4018, the MPU 41 sets on the remaining reservation pattern 3 and 7 flags indicating that the remaining reservation pattern is either the remaining reservation pattern 3 or the remaining reservation pattern 7. Then, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second prize opening 315 in the a-time saving gaming state to 2 ( Step S4019), the second special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process B is ended.

<Step S4020>
If the remaining reservation pattern does not correspond to either the remaining reservation pattern 3 or the remaining reservation pattern 7 (step S4016: No), the MPU 41 determines that the remaining reservation pattern specified in step S4008 corresponds to the remaining reservation pattern 4 or the remaining reservation pattern 8. It is determined whether any of the following apply (step S4020).

If the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to either the remaining reservation pattern 4 or the remaining reservation pattern 8 (step S4020: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4021, and the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to the remaining reservation pattern 4 or the remaining reservation pattern. If none of the above applies (step S4020: No), the second special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process B is ended.

<Step S4021>
If the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to either the remaining reservation pattern 4 or the remaining reservation pattern 8 (step S4020: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a numerical storage process to insert the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving gaming state. A process is executed to set 30 seconds, which is the special pattern fluctuation pattern "01", as the second special pattern fluctuation display time for the second special pattern game which is the remaining reservation based on the ball entering (step S4021), and the process is executed in step S4022. to move to.

<Steps S4022 and S4023>
In step S4022, the MPU 41 turns on the remaining reservation patterns 4 and 8 flags indicating that the remaining reservation pattern is either the remaining reservation pattern 4 or the remaining reservation pattern 8. Then, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state to 3 ( Step S4023), the second special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process B is ended.

<Step S4024>
If the special fluctuation start flag is set to OFF (step S4006: No), that is, the second special figure game to be started is consecutive to the second special figure game of the missed notification that was started in the time saving game state a. As shown in FIG. 75, if the second special figure game is not executed (the second special figure game with the remaining reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state a), as shown in FIG. The MPU 41 determines whether the remaining reservation patterns 2 and 6 flags indicating that the remaining reservation pattern is either the remaining reservation pattern 2 or the remaining reservation pattern 6 are set on (step S4024).

If the remaining pending patterns 2 and 6 flags are set to ON (step S4024: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4025, and if the remaining pending patterns 2 and 6 flags are set to OFF (step S4024: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4025. S4024: No), the process moves to step S4029.

<Steps S4025 to S4028>
When the remaining hold pattern 2 and 6 flags are set to ON (step S4024: Yes), the MPU 41 performs numerical storage processing based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving gaming state. A process is executed to set 60 seconds, which is the special pattern variation pattern "02", as the second special pattern variation display time for the second special pattern game that is on hold (step S4025). Then, as a subtraction process, the MPU 41 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of reserved game balls based on the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state (a). Step S4026), it is determined whether the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is 0 (Step S4027).

When the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4027: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the remaining reservation pattern 2 and 6 flags to OFF (step S4028), and executes the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B. end. On the other hand, when the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4027: No), the MPU 41 ends the second special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process B.

<Step S4029>
When the remaining reservation pattern 2 and 6 flags are set to off (step S4024: No), the MPU 41 sets the remaining reservation pattern 3 indicating that the remaining reservation pattern is either the remaining reservation pattern 3 or the remaining reservation pattern 7. , 7 flag is set on (step S4029).

If the remaining pending patterns 3 and 7 flags are set to ON (step S4029: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4030, and if the remaining pending patterns 3 and 7 flags are set to OFF (step S4029: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4030. S4029: No), the process moves to step S4034.

<Steps S4030 to S4033>
When the remaining reservation pattern 3 and 7 flags are set to ON (step S4029: Yes), the MPU 41 performs numerical storage processing based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving gaming state. A process is executed to set 40 seconds, which is the special pattern variation pattern "10", as the second special pattern variation display time for the second special pattern game that is on hold (step S4030). Then, as a subtraction process, the MPU 41 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of reserved game balls based on the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state (a). Step S4031), it is determined whether the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is 0 (Step S4032).

When the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4032: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the remaining reservation pattern 3 and 7 flags to OFF (step S4033), and executes the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B. end. On the other hand, when the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4032: No), the MPU 41 ends the second special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process B.

<Step S4034>
When the remaining reservation pattern 3 and 7 flags are set to off (step S4029: No), the MPU 41 selects the remaining reservation pattern 4, which indicates that the remaining reservation pattern is either the remaining reservation pattern 4 or the remaining reservation pattern 8. , 8 flag is set on (step S4034).

If the remaining pending patterns 4 and 8 flags are set to ON (step S4034: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4035, and if the remaining pending patterns 4 and 8 flags are set to OFF (step S4034: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4035. S4034: No), the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B is ended.

<Steps S4035 to S4038>
When the remaining reservation pattern 4 and 8 flags are set to on (step S4034: Yes), the MPU 41 performs numerical storage processing based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving gaming state. A process is executed to set 30 seconds, which is the special pattern variation pattern "01", as the second special pattern variation display time for the second special pattern game that is on hold (step S4035). Then, as a subtraction process, the MPU 41 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of reserved game balls based on the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state (a). Step S4036), it is determined whether the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is 0 (Step S4037).

When the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4037: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the remaining reservation pattern 4 and 8 flags to OFF (step S4037), and performs the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B. end. On the other hand, when the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4037: No), the MPU 41 ends the second special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process B.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery is executed according to the gaming state at the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, but the jackpot lottery is executed depending on the gaming state when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. A jackpot lottery may be executed accordingly.

[Small winning game control process]
Here, FIGS. 77 to 79 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407-1 in the main process of FIG. In the small winning game control process of this embodiment, the small winning game is executed based on the fact that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening 315 is a small winning. In this step, a process for controlling the operation of the wing accessory device 83 is executed.

<Step S4101>
As shown in FIG. 77, in the small winning game control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first sets the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is determined whether or not there is one (step S4101). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first special figure or the second special figure is stopped and displayed, so that it is time to start the small winning game. The special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when the first special figure or the second special figure is stopped and displayed in step S3709 in the special figure game control process of FIG.

When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), that is, when the timing is such that the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4102. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4106.

<Step S4102>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), that is, when the timing is such that the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a small winning. It is determined whether or not (step S4102). Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win is determined based on the result of the jackpot lottery stored in the RAM 413 when the jackpot lottery is performed in step S3808 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a small win (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4103. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small win (step S4102: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the MPU 41 ends the small win game control process.

<Steps S4103 to S4105>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a small win (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the small win game start flag indicating that the small win game is started (step S4103). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the opening flag indicating that the opening of the small winning game is being executed (step S4104), and also executes a process of setting an opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening as a numerical storage process. is executed (step S4105), and the small winning game control process ends.

<Step S4106>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening of the small winning game is being executed. Determine whether or not it is set to on.

If the opening flag is set to ON (step S4106: Yes), that is, if the opening of the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4107. On the other hand, if the opening flag is set to OFF (step S4106: No), that is, if the opening of the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4115 in FIG. 78.

<Steps S4107 to S4109>
When the opening flag is set to on (step S4106: Yes), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 updates the opening time counter value by 1 from the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening. A subtraction process is executed (step S4107), and it is determined whether the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4108). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the opening and start the operation of the movable wing part 832 of the wing accessory device 83 in the small winning game.

If the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4108: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that it is the timing to end the opening and start operating the movable wing section 832 of the wing accessory device 83 in the small winning game. If so, the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed is set to OFF (step S4105), and the process moves to step S4110. On the other hand, if the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4108: No), in other words, in the small winning game, the MPU 41 determines that it is not the timing to end the opening and start the operation of the movable wing section 832 of the wing accessory device 83. If so, the small winning game control process is ended.

<Step S4110>
In the small winning game, if it is the timing to end the opening and start the operation of the movable wing section 832, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the movable wing section 832 of the wing accessory device 83 (step S4110), and returns the process to step S4110. The process moves to S4111 (step S4110). In this way, by starting the operation of the movable wing part 832 of the wing accessory device 83 in the small winning game, the introduction port 831 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened, and the game into the inside of the feather accessory device 83 is opened. The ball can enter the ball.

<Steps S4111 and S4112>
In step S4111, the MPU 41 sets on the movable wing operation flag indicating that the movable wing section 832 is being operated (step S4111). Then, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a movable wing part operating time counter indicating the remaining operating time of the movable wing part 832 as a numerical value storage process (step S4112), and moves the process to step S4113.

<Steps S4113 and S4114>
In step S4113, the MPU 41 sets on the V winning opening opening/closing part operation standby flag indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 is on standby for operation (step S4113). Then, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a V winning opening opening/closing part operation standby time counter indicating the remaining time until the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 starts as a numerical value storage process (step S4114), and The winning game control process ends.

<Step S4115>
When the opening flag is set to OFF (step S4106: No), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is not executed, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the V winning a prize opening/closing part operation standby flag indicating that the game is in progress is set to ON (step S4115). If the V winning opening opening/closing part operation standby flag is set to ON (step S4115: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4116, and if the V winning opening opening/closing part operation standby flag is set to OFF. (Step S4115: No), the process moves to step S4122.

<Steps S4116 and S4117>
When the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to ON (step S4115: Yes), the MPU 41 performs an update process to display the remaining information until starting the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83. A process of subtracting 1 from the V winning opening opening/closing part operation standby time counter indicating the time is executed (step S4116), and it is determined whether the value of the V winning opening opening/closing part operation waiting time counter after the subtraction is 0 ( Step S4117). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the operation of the V winning opening/closing part 835 and opening the V winning opening 833.

If the value of the V winning opening opening/closing part operation standby time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4117: Yes), the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 to generate a V winning prize. If it is the timing to open the mouth 833, the process moves to step S4118. On the other hand, if the value of the V winning opening/closing unit operation standby time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4117: No), the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening/closing unit 835 (opens the V winning opening 833). If it is not the timing, the process moves to step S4130 in FIG. 79.

<Steps S4118 to S4121>
If the value of the V winning opening opening/closing part operation standby time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4117: Yes), that is, the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is started to open the V winning opening 833. If it is the timing to open, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 (step S4118), and turns on the V winning opening opening/closing part operation flag indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 is activated. settings (step S4119).

Then, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a V winning opening opening/closing part operating time counter indicating the remaining operating time of the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 (step S4120), and The standby flag is set to OFF (step S4121), and the process moves to step S4130 in FIG. 79.

<Step S4122>
When the V winning opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to OFF (step S4115: No), the MPU 41 activates the V winning opening/closing unit which indicates that the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is activated. It is determined whether the partial operation flag is set on (step S4122). The MPU 41 moves the process to step S2023 when the V winning opening opening/closing part operation flag is set to ON (step S4122: Yes), and when the V winning opening opening/closing part operation flag is set to OFF (step S4122: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2023. S4122: No), the process moves to step S4130 in FIG.

<Step S4123>
If the V-winning port opening/closing unit operation flag is set to ON (step S4122: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the V-winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V-winning port 833 of the feather accessory device 83. is set (step S4123). The V winning flag is set to ON in step S4125 when a game ball enters the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83.

If the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to ON (step S4123: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4126, and If the winning flag is set to OFF (step S4123: No), the process moves to step S4124.

<Steps S4124 and S4125>
When the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S4123: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has entered the V winning hole 833 of the wing accessory device 83 (step S4124). Whether or not the game ball has entered the V-winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 can be determined by checking, for example, when the game ball 99 has entered the V-winning hole 833 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main process of FIG. The determination is made based on whether or not a ball entry sensor (not shown) detects that the ball has been hit.

When the game ball enters the V winning hole 833 of the wing accessory device 83 (Step S4124: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to ON (Step S4125), and moves the process to Step S4126. On the other hand, when the game ball has not entered the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S4124: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4126.

<Steps S4126 and S4127>
In step S4126, the MPU 41 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the V winning opening/closing part operation time counter indicating the remaining operating time of the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 as an update process, and further, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the V winning opening/closing part operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4127). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the V winning opening/closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (closing the V winning opening 833).

If the value of the V winning opening opening/closing part operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4127: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (closes the V winning opening 833). ), the process moves to step S4128. On the other hand, if the value of the V winning opening/closing part operating time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4127: No), the MPU 41 restores the V winning opening/closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (opens the V winning opening 833). If it is not the timing to close (close), the process moves to step S4130 in FIG. 79.

<Steps S4128 and S4129>
If the value of the V winning opening opening/closing part operating time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4127: Yes), that is, the timing to restore the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 of the wing accessory device 83 (close the V winning opening 833) If so, the MPU 41 returns the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 (step S4128), and sets the V winning opening opening/closing part operation flag indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 is activated to OFF (step S4128). S4129), the process moves to step S4130 in FIG.

<Step S4130>
As shown in FIG. 79, in step S4130, the MPU 41 determines whether a movable wing operation flag indicating that the movable wing section 832 is activated is set to on. If the movable blade operation flag is set to ON (step S4130: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4131, and if the movable blade operation flag is set to OFF (step S4130: No). , the small winning game control process ends.

<Steps S4131 and S4132>
If the movable wing operation flag is set to ON (step S4130: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the movable wing operation time counter indicating the remaining operation time of the movable wing section 832 as an update process. Processing is executed (step S4131). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the movable blade operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4132). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the small winning game by returning the movable wing portion 832 and closing the introduction port 831.

If the value of the movable blade operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4132: Yes), the MPU 41 determines the timing to end the small winning game by returning the movable blade part 832 and closing the introduction port 831. If so, the process moves to step S4133. On the other hand, if the value of the movable blade operation time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4132: No), the MPU 41 returns the movable blade part 832 and closes the introduction port 831, thereby ending the small winning game. If it is not the timing, the small winning game control process is ended.

<Steps S4133 to S4135>
When the value of the movable blade operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4132: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the small winning game by returning the movable blade 832 (step S4133). Then, the MPU 41 turns off the movable wing operation flag indicating that the movable wing section 832 is being operated (step S4134), and turns on the small winning game end flag indicating that the small winning game has ended. setting (step S4135), and ends the small winning game control process.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIGS. 80 to 83 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of the main process in FIG. 66. In the gaming state transition processing of this embodiment, processing for shifting various gaming states is executed. The gaming state transition process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83.

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 80, in the gaming state transition process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state is set to on (step S4201). . The normal gaming state flag is set to ON in step S4216, step S4223, or step S4226 in FIG. 81 when the gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state in the gaming state transition process; When the gaming state is transferred from , it is set to OFF in steps S4207, S4213, steps S4238 and S4248 in FIG. 82, or step S4263 in FIG. 83.

If the normal gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), that is, if the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4202. On the other hand, if the normal gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4201: No), that is, if the gaming state is other than the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4214 in FIG. 81.

<Step S4202>
When the normal gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 performs b-time-saving game to shift the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state b. It is determined whether the state transition flag is set to on (step S4202). b The time saving game state transition flag is set in step S3716 of the special figure game control process in FIG. Set to on.

If the b-time-saving game state transition flag that shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the b-time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4203, and changes the b-time-saving game state to the b-time-saving game state. If the transition flag is set to OFF (step S4202: No), the process moves to step S4208.

<Steps S4203 and S4204>
If the b-time-saving game state transition flag for shifting the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the b-time-saving gaming state is set on (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates that the gaming state is the b-time-saving gaming state. The b time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4203), and the b time saving game state transition command is set (step S4204).

The b time saving game state transition command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the gaming state has shifted to the b time saving gaming state, and further includes information regarding the maximum number of time saving games that can be executed in the b time saving gaming state. . This b time saving game state transition command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the b time-saving game state transition command, produces effects specific to when the gaming state is in the b time-saving game state (background effect, right-handed display, remaining b time-saving game count display, Display effects such as chance notification and display of the number of pending second special figure games) (see FIG. 88(B)) can be started, and furthermore, the remaining number of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving game state b can be started through the update process. becomes possible to manage.

In addition, in this embodiment, information regarding the maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed in the b-time-saving game state is included in the b-time-saving game state transition command and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5; The command may be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 as a command different from the state transition command.

<Steps S4205 to S4207>
In step S4205, the MPU 41 executes, as a numerical value storage process, a process of setting a b time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games that can be executed in the b time saving game state. The maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving game state b is set to 500, for example (see FIG. 58(E)). Then, the MPU 41 sets the b-time saving game state transition flag and the normal game state flag to OFF (steps S4206 and S4207), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4208>
If the b-time-saving game state shift flag that shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state b is set to OFF (step S4202: No), the MPU 41 changes the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the c-time-saving gaming state. It is determined whether the c-time saving game state transition flag to be transitioned is set to on (step S4208). c The time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON when the special figure game in which the jackpot lottery result is outside the time-saving symbol stop is completed in step S3718 of the special figure game control process in FIG.

If the c-time-saving gaming state transition flag that shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the c-time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4209, and changes the c-working-time-saving gaming state to the c-time-saving gaming state. If the transition flag is set to OFF (step S4202: No), the transition process for the gaming state is ended.

<Steps S4209 and S4210>
If the c-time-saving gaming state transition flag that shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the c-time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 changes the c-working-time-saving gaming state, which indicates that the c-time-saving gaming state is the c-time-saving gaming state. The state flag is set to ON (step S4209), and the c time-saving gaming state transition command is set (step S4210).

The c time-saving game state transition command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the transition to the c time-saving game state, and further includes information regarding the maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed in the c time-saving game state. This c time saving game state transition command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the c time-saving game state transition command, produces effects specific to when the gaming state is in the c time-saving game state (background effect, left-handed display, remaining c time-saving game count display, (see Figure 88(C)), and furthermore, the number of remaining time-saving games that can be executed in the c-time-saving game state can be started through the update process. It becomes possible to manage.

In addition, in this embodiment, information regarding the maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed in the c-time-saving game state is included in the c-time-saving game state transition command and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5; The command may be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 as a command different from the state transition command.

<Steps S4211 to S4213>
In step S4211, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting the remaining number of time-saving games that can be executed in the c-time-saving game state in the c-time-saving number counter as a numerical value storage process. c The maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state is 10 times (time-saving symbol stop missing A), 20 times (time-saving symbol stop missing B), and 30 times (time-saving symbol stop missing) depending on the type of time-saving symbol stop missing. C) or 40 times (time-saving symbol stop failure D) (see FIG. 61(D)). Then, the MPU 41 sets the c time-saving game state transition flag and the normal game state flag to OFF (steps S4212 and S4213), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4214>
If the normal gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state is set to OFF (step S4201: No), that is, if the gaming state is other than the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 81, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-saving game state flag a indicating that the gaming state is the time-saving game state a is set on (step S4214).

When the a time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4214: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the a working time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4215. On the other hand, when the a time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4214: No), that is, when the gaming state is not the normal gaming state and the a time saving game state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4220.

<Step S4215>
When the a time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4214: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the a time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state to shift the gaming state from the a time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. It is determined whether the gaming state transition flag is set to on (step S4215). The normal game state transition flag that shifts the gaming state from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state is used in the normal game control process of FIG. It is set to on in step S3623.

If the normal gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state from the time-saving gaming state a to the normal gaming state is set to ON (step S4215: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4216, and sets the normal gaming state shifting flag. is set to OFF (step S4215: No), the transition process for the gaming state is ended.

<Steps S4216 and S4217>
If the normal gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state from the time-saving gaming state a to the normal gaming state is set to on (step S4215: Yes), the MPU 41 changes the normal gaming state to the normal gaming state, which indicates that the gaming state is the normal gaming state. The state flag is set to ON (step S4216), and a normal game state transition command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the state has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4217).

The normal game state transition command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the normal game state transition command, performs specific effects (background effects, hold display of the first special figure game (first special figure hold)) when the game state is the normal game state. Display effects such as images) (see FIG. 88(A)) can be executed.

<Steps S4218 and S4219>
In step S4218, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state transition flag to OFF, and further, the MPU 41 sets the a time-saving gaming state flag to OFF (step S4219), and ends the transition processing of the gaming state.

<Step S4220>
If the a-time-saving game state flag indicating that the gaming state is the a-time-saving game state is set to OFF (step S4214: No), that is, if the gaming state is other than the normal gaming state and the a-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b time-saving game state flag indicating the b time-saving game state is set to on (step S4220).

When the b time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4220: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the b working time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4221. On the other hand, if the b time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4220: No), that is, if the game state is not the normal game state, a time-saving game state, or b time-saving game state, the MPU 41 causes the process to proceed to step S4226. Transition.

<Step S4221>
When the b time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4220: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the b working time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state to shift the gaming state from the b working time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. It is determined whether the gaming state transition flag is set to on (step S4221). The normal game state transition flag that shifts the game state from the b-time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is set when the special figure game of the b-time saving game is executed a specified number of times (for example, 500 times (see FIG. 58(E))). It is set to ON in step S3722 of the special figure game control process in FIG.

If the normal gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state from the time-saving gaming state b to the normal gaming state is set to ON (step S4221: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4222 and sets the normal gaming state shifting flag. is set to OFF (step S4221: No), the transition process for the gaming state is ended.

<Steps S4222 and S4223>
If the normal gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state from the time-saving gaming state b to the normal gaming state is set to ON (step S4221: Yes), the MPU 41 changes the normal gaming state to the normal gaming state, which indicates that the gaming state is the normal gaming state. The state flag is set to ON (step S4222), and a normal game state transition command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the state has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4223).

The normal game state transition command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the normal gaming state transition command, displays effects specific to when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (background effects, display effects such as a hold display for the first special figure game) ( (see FIG. 88(A)).

<Steps S4224 and S4225>
In step S4224, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF, and further, the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4225), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4226>
If the b time saving gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the b time saving gaming state is set to OFF (step S4220: No), that is, the gaming state is other than the normal gaming state, the a working time saving gaming state, and the b working time saving gaming state. If so, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the c-time-saving game state flag indicating that the gaming state is the c-time-saving game state is set to on (step S4226).

When the c time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4226: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the c working time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4227. On the other hand, when the c time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4226: No), that is, when the game state is not the normal game state, a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, or c time-saving game state, The process moves to step S4232 in FIG. 82.

<Step S4227>
When the c time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4226: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the c working time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state to shift the gaming state from the c working time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. It is determined whether the gaming state transition flag is set to on (step S4227). The normal game state transition flag that shifts the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state is set to the specified number of times (10, 20, 30, or 40 times (see FIG. 61(D) )) When the special figure game of c time-saving game is executed, it is set to ON in step S3726 of the special figure game control process of FIG. 71.

If the normal gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state from the c-time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is set to ON (step S4227: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4228 and sets the normal gaming state shifting flag. is set to OFF (step S4227: No), the transition process for the gaming state is ended.

<Steps S4228 and S4229>
If the normal gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is set to ON (step S4227: Yes), the MPU 41 changes the normal gaming state to the normal gaming state, which indicates that the gaming state is the normal gaming state. The state flag is set to ON (step S4228), and a normal game state transition command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the state has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4229).

The normal game state transition command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the normal gaming state transition command, displays effects specific to when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (background effects, display effects such as a hold display for the first special figure game) ( (see FIG. 88(A)).

<Steps S4230 and S4231>
In step S4230, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF, and further, the MPU 41 sets the c time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4231), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4232>
If the c time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4226: No), that is, if the game state is not the normal game state, a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, or c time-saving game state, the MPU 41 operates as shown in FIG. As shown in (step S4232), it is determined whether the jackpot game status flag is set to on. The jackpot game state flag indicates that the gaming state is a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed, and is set to ON in step S4234 when the jackpot game is started.

When the jackpot gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state in which a jackpot game is executed is set to ON (step S4232: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4245. On the other hand, when the jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S4232: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4233.

<Steps S4233 and S4234>
If the jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S4232: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game is started is set to ON (step S4233). ). The jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S2205 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29 when the jackpot game is started.

When the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game is started is set to ON (step S4233: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state to be a jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed. The gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4234), and the process moves to step S4235. On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4233: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4253 in FIG. 83.

<Steps S4235 and S4236>
In step S4235, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game to be started is a time-saving jackpot in which the gaming state is shifted to the time-saving gaming state a after the jackpot game ends. If the jackpot game to be started is a time-saving jackpot in which the gaming state is transferred to the time-saving game state a after the end of the jackpot game (step S4235: Yes), the MPU 41 changes the gaming state to the time-saving game a after the end of the jackpot game. A time-saving game state transition flag to be shifted to state a is set on (step S4236), and the process moves to step S4237. If the jackpot game to be started is not a time-saving jackpot (step S4235: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4237.

<Steps S4237 and S4238>
In step S4237, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state is set on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery when the gaming state is the normal gaming state is a jackpot.

When the normal gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state is set to ON (step S4237: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. If the jackpot game is started based on this, the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4238), and the process moves to step S4244. On the other hand, when the normal gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state is set to ON (step S4237: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4239.

<Steps S4239 to S4241>
In step S4239, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b time-saving gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the b time-saving gaming state is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery when the gaming state is the b-time saving gaming state is a jackpot.

The MPU 41 executes the jackpot lottery when the b time saving gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the b working time saving gaming state is set to ON (step S4239: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the b working time saving gaming state. When the jackpot game is started based on the result being a jackpot, the b-time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4240). Then, as an update process, the MPU 41 executes a process of clearing a b time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of executable time saving games when the gaming state is the b time saving gaming state (step S4241), and returns the process to step S4244. to move to.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 determines that when the b time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4239: No), that is, the jackpot lottery to be started is a jackpot lottery when the game state is the b time saving game state. If it is not based on this, the process moves to step S4242.

<Steps S4242 and S4243>
In step S4242, the MPU 41 sets the c time saving game state flag to OFF, and further, as an update process, the MPU 41 sets the c time saving game state flag indicating the remaining number of executable time saving games when the gaming state is the c time saving gaming state. A process of clearing the number of times counter is executed (step S4243), and the process moves to step S4244.

<Step S4244>
When the MPU 41 executes various processes such as setting off the flag related to the gaming state before starting the jackpot game (steps S4234 to S4243), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S4244), Finish the migration process.

<Steps S4245 to S4249>
If the jackpot game state flag indicating that the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state in which a jackpot game is executed is set to ON (step S4232: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state to indicate that the jackpot game is to be completed. It is determined whether the end flag is on (step S4245). The jackpot game end flag is set to ON in step S2251 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game end flag is on (step S4245: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is to be ended, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4246. On the other hand, when the jackpot game end flag is off (step S4245: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not ended, the MPU 41 ends the transition processing of the game state.

<Steps S4246 to S4252>
When the jackpot game end flag is on (step S4245: Yes), that is, to end the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state a, based on the end of the jackpot game. It is determined whether the gaming state transition flag is set to on (step S4246).

If the a time saving game state shift flag that shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the a time saving gaming state based on the end of the jackpot game is set to ON (step S4246: Yes), the MPU 41 changes the gaming state to the a time saving gaming state. A time-saving gaming state flag indicating the gaming state is set to ON (step S4247). Then, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving game state transition command a to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the time-saving game state a (step S4248), and moves the process to step S4251.

The a time saving game state transition command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the a time-saving game state transition command, performs a special production (background production, RUSH display, right hit display, remaining a time-saving game) when the gaming state is the time-saving game state a. Display performances such as displaying the number of times and displaying the number of reservations for the second special figure game) (see FIG. 88(D)) can be started.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the number of time-saving games (the number of times the second prize opening 315 is opened) when the gaming state is the a-time-saving gaming state is set to one, the a-time-saving gaming state transition command includes: Information indicating the maximum number of executable time-saving games when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state a is not included. Of course, the a-time-saving gaming state transition command may include information indicating the maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed when the gaming state is the a-time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when the time-saving game state transition flag a is set to OFF (step S4246: No), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating that the game state is the normal game state to ON (step S4249). . Then, the MPU 41 sets a normal gaming state transition command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the gaming state has transitioned to the normal gaming state (step S4250), and moves the process to step S4251.

Note that the normal game state transition command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the normal gaming state transition command, displays effects specific to when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (background effects, display effects such as a hold display for the first special figure game) ( (see FIG. 88(A)).

<Steps S4251 to S4254>
In step S4251, a jackpot game state flag indicating that the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state is set to OFF (step S4251), and a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set to OFF (step S4252). ). Furthermore, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a ceiling number counter indicating the remaining number of special symbol games required before the game state is transferred to the time-saving game state b to a specified number of times (for example, 500 times). At the same time (step S4253), the ceiling number counter flag indicating that the ceiling number counter is set is set to ON (step S4254), and the transition processing of the game state is ended.

<Step S4255>
When the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game is started is set to OFF (step S4233: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the small win game state flag is set to ON, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S4255). The small winning game state flag indicates that the gaming state is a small winning game state in which a small winning game is executed, and is set to ON in step S4257 when the small winning game is started.

If the small win game state flag indicating that the game state is a small win game state in which a small win game is executed is set to ON (step S4255: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4259. . On the other hand, when the small winning game state flag is set to OFF (step S4255: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4256.

<Steps S4256 to S4258>
When the small winning game state flag is set to OFF (step S4255: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the small winning game start flag indicating that the small winning game is started is set to ON. (Step S4256). The small winning game start flag is set to ON in step S4103 of the small winning game control process in FIG. 77 when the small winning game is started.

If the small winning game start flag indicating that the small winning game is started is set to ON (step S4256: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that the gaming state is a small winning game state in which a small winning game is executed. The small winning game state flag indicating that the small winning game is to be started is set to ON (step S4257), and the small winning game start flag indicating that the small winning game is to be started is set to OFF (step S4258), and the transition processing of the gaming state is performed. end. On the other hand, when the small winning game start flag is set to OFF (step S4256: No), the MPU 41 ends the transition process of the game state.

<Step S4259>
If the small winning game state flag indicating that the gaming state is a small winning game state in which a small winning game is executed (step S4255: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that the small winning game ends. It is determined whether or not the small winning game end flag indicating the flag is on (step S4259). The small winning game end flag is set to ON in step S4132 in the small winning game control process in FIG. 79 when the small winning game ends.

When the small winning game end flag is on (step S4259: Yes), that is, when ending the small winning game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4260. On the other hand, when the small winning game end flag is off (step S4259: No), that is, when the small winning game is not ended, the MPU 41 ends the transition processing of the game state.

<Steps S4260 and S4261>
When the small winning game end flag is on (step S4259: Yes), that is, when ending the small winning game, the MPU 41 sets a small winning game state in which the small winning game is executed. The winning game state flag is set to OFF (step S4260), and the small winning game end flag indicating that the small winning game ends is set to OFF (step S4261), and the process moves to step S4262.

<Step S4262>
In step S4262, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to ON. The V winning flag is set to ON when a game ball enters the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in step S4125 in the small winning game control process in FIG.

When the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to ON (step S4262: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4263. On the other hand, when the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S4262: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4266.

<Steps S4263 and S4264>
When the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to ON (step S4262: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates that a jackpot game is started. A jackpot game start flag is set on (step S4263), and a time-saving game state shift flag a is set on, which causes the game state to shift to the time-saving game state a after the end of the jackpot game (step S4264). Then, the MPU 41 sets off the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S4265), and ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S4266 and S4267>
If the V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to OFF (step S4262: No), the MPU 41 determines that the gaming state is the normal gaming state. The normal game state flag indicating the flag is set on (step S4266). Then, the MPU 41 sets a normal gaming state transition command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the gaming state has transitioned to the normal gaming state (step S4267), and ends the gaming state transition processing.

Note that the normal game state transition command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the normal gaming state transition command, displays effects specific to when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (background effects, display effects such as a hold display for the first special figure game) ( (see FIG. 88(A)).

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In this embodiment, part of the command determination process among the processes of the audio lamp control device 5 is different from the above-described first embodiment.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, the command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. This differs from the command determination process of the first embodiment described above in that an effect display process for executing a RUSH effect as a specific effect is executed for the second special figure game executed based on the second special figure game. Here, FIGS. 84 to 86 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt process in the above-described first embodiment shown in FIG.

<Step S4501>
As shown in FIG. 84, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received (step S4501). If the MPU 51 receives the command (step S4501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4502, and if the command is not received (step S4501: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Step S4502>
When a command is received (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a normal gaming state transition command (step S4502). The normal gaming state transition command indicates a transition to the normal gaming state, and when transitioning from another gaming state to the normal gaming state, steps S4217 and S4223 in FIG. 81 in the gaming state transition process , S4229 or step S4250 of FIG.

If the received command is a normal gaming state transition command (step S4502: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4503, and if the received command is not a normal gaming state transition command (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4503. The process moves to step S4505.

<Steps S4503 and S4504>
If the received command is a normal gaming state transition command (step S4502: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a normal gaming state flag indicating that the normal gaming state is on (step S4503). The normal game state flag is referred to when determining whether or not to set a performance corresponding to the normal game state in step S4618 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process in FIG. 87, which will be described later. Then, the MPU 51 sets off the gaming state flag corresponding to the gaming state before shifting to the normal gaming state (step S4504), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S4505>
If the received command is not a normal gaming state transition command (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a b-time saving gaming state transition command (step S4505). The b time saving game state transition command indicates that the b time saving gaming state is to be transitioned to, and when the normal gaming state is transitioned to the b time saving gaming state, step S4204 in the gaming state transition process in FIG. 80 is executed. It is set in .

If the received command is a b-time-saving gaming state transition command (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4506, and if the received command is not a b-time-saving gaming state transition command (step S4505: No), The process moves to step S4509.

<Steps S4506 to S4508>
If the received command is a b-time-saving gaming state transition command (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 sets on the b-time-saving gaming state flag indicating the b-time-saving gaming state (step S4506). The b time-saving game state flag is referred to when determining whether to set a performance corresponding to the b-time saving game state in step S4619 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process in FIG. 87, which will be described later.

In addition, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 51 performs a process of setting the maximum number of special symbol games that can be played in the b time saving game state as the value of the b time saving number counter in the storage area for the b time saving number counter set in the RAM 512. Execute (step S4507). The value of the b time saving number counter is set to 1 in the time saving number counter updating process in step S4539 of the command determination process when the special figure is started in the b time saving gaming state, that is, when a variable pattern command is received in the b time saving gaming state. Subtracted (updated). That is, the value of the b time saving number counter set in the storage area for the b time saving number counter of the RAM 512 indicates the maximum remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the b time saving gaming state. Then, the MPU 51 can grasp the remaining maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the b time saving game state by referring to the value of the b time saving number counter. Thereby, the MPU 51 can display the remaining maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the b time saving game state as a display effect on the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 88(B)).

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the normal gaming state flag for the gaming state before shifting to the time-saving gaming state b to OFF (step S4508), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S4509>
If the received command is not the b time-saving game state transition command (step S4505: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the c time-saving game state transition command (step S4509). The c time saving game state transition command that satisfies the specific condition indicates that the c time saving gaming state is to be transitioned to the c time saving gaming state which is a specific gaming state, and when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the c time saving gaming state, FIG. This is set in step S4210 in the gaming state transition process.

If the received command is a c-time-saving gaming state transition command (step S4509: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4510, and if the received command is not a c-time-saving gaming state transition command (step S4509: No), The process moves to step S4513 in FIG. 85.

<Steps S4510 to S4512>
If the received command is a c-time-saving game state transition command (step S4509: Yes), the MPU 51 sets on the c-time-saving game state flag indicating the c-time-saving game state (step S4510). The c time-saving game state flag is referred to in step S4621 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process in FIG. be done.

In addition, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 51 stores the maximum number of special symbol games that can be played in the c time saving game state as second numerical information in the storage area for the c time saving number counter set in the RAM 512. Processing to set it as a value is executed (step S4511). The value of the c time saving number counter is set to 1 in the time saving number counter updating process in step S4539 of the command determination process when the special figure is started in the c time saving gaming state, that is, when the variable pattern command is received in the c time saving gaming state. Subtracted (updated). That is, the value of the c time saving number counter set in the storage area for the c time saving number counter of the RAM 512 indicates the maximum remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the c time saving gaming state as specific numerical information. Then, the MPU 51 can grasp the remaining maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the c time-saving game state by referring to the value of the c time-saving number counter as the second numerical information. Thereby, the MPU 51 can display the remaining maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state on the symbol display section 341 as a specific correspondence display (see FIG. 88(B)).

In addition, in this embodiment, a transition is made to the c time-saving game state when the result of the jackpot lottery is that the time-saving symbol is not stopped. The result of the jackpot lottery is that the time-saving symbol is not stopped only for the jackpot lottery (win/fail determination) notified by the second special symbol game that is started in the normal game state (see Figure 61(C)). . In the normal gaming state, the operating frequency of the electric accessory 315b is low and the operating time is short, so it is difficult to expect the game ball to enter the second prize opening 315. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state a that is transferred after the end of the time-saving jackpot game, multiple game balls can enter the second prize opening 315 by one operation of the electric accessory 315b, and in the time-saving game state a. The second special figure game can be executed a plurality of times based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315. Then, when a plurality of game balls enter the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state a, the second special figure game to be executed first is started in the time saving game state a, and the remaining second winning hole 315 The second special figure game (the second special figure game based on remaining reservation), which is executed in response to the ball entering the ball, is started in the normal game state. In other words, the c time-saving game state is shifted to when a time-saving pattern stop failure is included in the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game based on the remaining reservation.

Here, when transitioning to the time-saving game state a after executing the jackpot game, for the second special figure game executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state a. A RUSH effect as a specific effect is executed as a display effect. In the RUSH performance, when multiple game balls enter the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving game state a, a one-shot announcement performance is performed as a display performance for the second special figure game that starts in the time-saving game state a. (See FIG. 89) is executed and the battle effect ( 90 and 91) is executed. As described above, the time-saving symbol can be stopped only for the jackpot lottery for the remaining reservation that is started in the normal gaming state. Therefore, while the battle performance is being executed, the normal game state may be shifted to the time-saving game state C. However, even if the state is shifted to the time-saving game state C while the battle production is being executed, the battle performance that is the display performance is A battle performance is executed for the second special figure game corresponding to a predetermined number of remaining reservations without being interrupted. As a result, even if the transition is made to the c-time-saving game state during the execution of a battle performance, the remaining maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the c-time-saving game state is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as a specific corresponding display. It never happens. In addition, by giving priority to the battle performance and executing it, the c-time-saving game state performance, which is unique to the c-time-saving game state, is not executed as a display performance. On the other hand, when transitioning to the c time saving game state, a c time saving number counter is set, and in the time saving number counter updating process in step S4539 of the command determination process described later, the remaining maximum feature executable in the c time saving gaming state is set. By updating the number of games shown in the figure, after the end of the battle performance, based on the value of the c time saving number counter as specific numerical information, the remaining maximum number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state is displayed as a specific corresponding display. It can be displayed on the symbol display section 341, and it is also possible to start c time-saving game state performance.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the normal gaming state flag for the normal gaming state, which is the gaming state before shifting to the c time-saving gaming state, to OFF (step S4512), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S4513>
If the received command is not the c time saving game state transition command (step S4509: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the first special figure shift command (step S4513). The 1st special figure shift command indicates that the 1st special figure validity information of the 1st holding area REA1 to 4th holding area REA4 of the 1st special figure holding storage area REA has shifted, and the 1st special figure holding storage area REA When the first special symbol validity information of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the storage area REA is shifted, it is set in step S3805 in the special symbol data setting process of FIG. 72.

If the received command is the first special figure shift command (step S4513: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4514, and if the received command is not the first special figure shift command (step S4513: No), The process moves to step S4516.

<Steps S4514 and S4515>
If the received command is the first special figure shift command (step S4513: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special figure data update process (step S4514), and also updates the first special figure data image as the effect display process. Display processing is executed (step S4515), and the command determination processing ends.

<Step S4516>
If the received command is not the first special figure shift command (step S4513: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special figure shift command (step S4516). The second special figure shift command indicates that the second special figure validity information of the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REB4 of the second special figure holding storage area REB has been shifted, and the second special figure holding storage area REB When the second special symbol validity information of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the storage area REB is shifted, it is set in step S3809 in the special symbol data setting process of FIG. 72.

When the received command is the second special figure shift command (step S4516: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4517, and when the received command is not the second special figure shift command (step S4516: No), The process moves to step S4519.

<Step S4517 and Step S4518>
If the received command is the second special figure shift command (step S4516: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special figure data update process (step S4517), and also updates the second special figure data image as the effect display process. Display processing is executed (step S4518), and the command determination processing ends.

Here, a special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) corresponding to the special figure holding storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5. be done. This special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) includes the first special figure holding storage area REA, the second special figure holding storage area REB of the special figure holding storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) of the main controller 4. It includes a first special figure pending storage area corresponding area, a second special figure pending storage area corresponding area, and a special figure executing area corresponding area corresponding to each of the special figure execution areas AE (see FIG. 8). Then, in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the audio lamp control device 5, data of special figure validity information (special figure data) are stored.

Then, in the first special figure data update process executed in step S4514, the same process as steps S3802 to S3804 in the special figure data setting process of FIG. 72 executed by the main control device 4 is executed as an update process. . Specifically, in the first special figure data setting process, the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area of the first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area is subtracted by 1. Then, the first special figure validity information (first special figure data) is moved from the first holding area corresponding area of the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area to the special figure execution area corresponding area, and the first special figure holding storage area is moved. The first special figure validity information (first special figure data) of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area corresponding area of the corresponding area is shifted one by one.

Further, in the second special figure data update process executed in step S4517, the same processes as steps S3806 to S3808 in the special figure data setting process of FIG. 72 executed by the main control device 4 are executed. Specifically, in the second special figure data setting process, as a subtraction process, the second special figure reservation number stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area of the second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area The process of subtracting 1 from M is executed, and as an update process, the second special figure validity information (second special figure data ) is moved, and the second special figure validity information (second special figure data) of the second holding area REA2 to fourth holding area corresponding area of the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area is shifted one by one.

On the other hand, in the first special figure data image display process executed in step S4515, the first special figure data stored in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512 shifted (updated) in step S4514. Based on this, the image related to the first special figure data (first special figure data image) displayed on the symbol display section 341 (see FIGS. 88(A) and 88(C)) is shifted.

Here, FIG. 88 is an example of a screen on the symbol display section 341 in various gaming states. Specifically, FIG. 88(A) is an example of the screen in the normal gaming state except during the RUSH performance, FIG. 88(B) is an example of the screen in the b-time saving gaming state, and FIG. 88(C) is an example of the screen in the c-time-saving gaming state. This is an example of a screen in the state, and FIG. 88(D) is an example of a screen during RUSH effect. In the symbol display section 341, special symbol data image display sections 75, 76, and 77 are set according to various game states. The special figure data image display sections 75, 76, 77 are the special figure execution area of the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512. Corresponding to the corresponding area (not shown), the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area, and the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area, the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 and the first special figure holding image display area 76 and a second special figure pending image display area 77.

As shown in FIGS. 88(A) and 88(C), in the normal game state and c time-saving game state except during the RUSH performance, the special symbol fluctuation image is displayed as the special symbol data image display sections 75, 76, and 77. The area 75 and the first special figure pending image display area 76 are set, and the second special figure pending image display area 77 is not set. That is, in the normal game state and c time-saving game state except during the RUSH performance, the special pattern fluctuation image display area 75 is stored in the special pattern execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special pattern holding storage area corresponding area (not shown). The variable image is displayed based on the first special figure data, and is stored in the first special figure hold storage area corresponding area of the special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) in the first special figure hold image display area 76. The first special figure holding image is displayed as a corresponding display based on the first special figure data, and the second special figure holding image is displayed as a corresponding display based on the second special figure data stored in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown). 2 Special drawing pending images are not displayed.

Here, in the normal game state and c time-saving game state, as described above, the game ball is hit to the left side area of the game board 31, so-called left-handed hitting, and the game ball enters the first winning hole 314. It is encouraged to take the first special drawing jackpot lottery. Therefore, in the normal game state and c time-saving game state except during the RUSH performance, the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 and the first special figure pending image display area 76 are set as the special figure data image display parts 75, 76, 77. (the first special figure pending image is displayed as a corresponding display), and the second special figure pending image display area 77 is not set (the second special figure pending image is not displayed as a corresponding display). On the other hand, it becomes possible to suggest that left-handed hitting is encouraged.

Then, in the first special figure data image display process of step S4514, which is executed in the normal game state and c time-saving game state except during the RUSH performance, based on the content shifted (updated) in the process of step S4514 as an updating means. Then, based on the first special figure data stored in the special figure execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) and the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area, the fluctuation image is And the first special figure pending image is displayed as a corresponding display. As a result, the number of first special figure pending images as corresponding displays displayed on the symbol display section 341 decreases by one from the end of the first special figure game (Fig. 52 (A1) and Fig. 52 ( (See B1)).

In addition, in the normal game state and c time-saving game state except during the RUSH performance, the first special figure pending image is displayed as the corresponding variation image and the corresponding display, and the second special figure pending image is not displayed as the corresponding display, but the RUSH effect The second special figure pending image may be displayed as a corresponding display in the normal game state excluding the middle or c time-saving game state. That is, both the first special figure pending image and the second special figure pending image may be displayed as the corresponding display in the normal game state and c time saving game state except during the RUSH performance.

As shown in FIGS. 88(B) and 88(D), in the time-saving gaming state b and during the RUSH performance, the special symbol data image display areas 75, 76, and 77 display the special symbol variation image display area 75 and the second The special figure pending image display area 77 is set, and the first special figure pending image display area 76 is not set. That is, in the b-time saving game state and during the RUSH performance, the second special figure stored in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) and the special figure execution area corresponding area (not shown) is displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75. The fluctuation image is displayed based on the data, and the second special figure is stored in the second special figure hold storage area corresponding area of the special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) in the second special figure hold image display area 77. A second special figure holding image is displayed as a corresponding display based on the data, and a first special figure holding image is displayed as a corresponding display based on the first special figure data stored in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown). is not displayed.

Here, in the b-time saving game state and during the RUSH performance, as described above, by hitting the game ball to the right side area of the game board 31, so-called right-handed hitting, and letting the game ball enter the second prize opening 315. It is encouraged to take the second special drawing jackpot lottery. Therefore, during the b-time saving game state and RUSH performance, the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 and the second special figure pending image display area 77 are set as the special figure data image display parts 75, 76, 77 (as the corresponding display) (the second special figure pending image is displayed), and the first special figure pending image display area 76 is not set (the first special figure pending image is displayed as a corresponding display), so that the player cannot hit right. It becomes possible to suggest that it is encouraged.

However, during the RUSH performance, right-handed hitting, in which the game ball is hit to the right side of the game board 31, is advantageous for the player and is encouraged, so as long as the player properly (intentionally) hits the right-handed ball, For example, unless a game ball launch failure occurs, the game ball will not enter the first prize opening 314 and win. However, during the RUSH performance, the second special figure reservation number M tends to become the maximum reservation number because it is in the high support mode, and when the second special figure reservation number M is the maximum reservation number, the second prize opening 315 There is no need to enter the game ball into the ball. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. Therefore, if the second special figure pending number M is the maximum pending number and the first special figure pending number is not the maximum pending number, the first special figure game will be played continuously immediately after the RUSH effect ends. In order to make the first special figure reservation number the maximum reservation number, the player may attempt to enter the game ball into the first winning hole 314 by intentionally hitting the ball to the left. Further, even if the player attempts to launch the game ball to the right side area of the game board 31, the game ball may be launched to the left side area of the game board 31 against the player's will due to poor launch of the game ball. Sometimes it happens. In this way, even during the RUSH effect in which right-handed hitting is encouraged, the game ball may be hit to the left side area of the game board 31. Therefore, a game ball may enter the first winning hole 314 even during the RUSH performance. Even if a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 due to a game that is not encouraged (for example, hitting left during RUSH), the gaming machine does not invalidate the winning and treats it as a legitimate ball entering. . That is, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 as a specific condition, the first special symbol hold command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5. Information is stored in the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure holding storage area corresponding area. Numerical information related to the first special figure is stored by numerical storage processing, but during RUSH production, The first special figure pending image is not displayed as a corresponding display. That is, during the RUSH performance, the first special figure pending image is not displayed as a corresponding display during the RUSH performance, but if a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, etc., the update process is performed. When executed, the data of the first special figure validity information (first special figure data) in the first special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure pending storage area corresponding area is updated.

Then, in the second special figure data image display process of step S4518, which is executed in the b-time saving game state and during the RUSH performance, the special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) is displayed based on the content shifted (updated) in step S4517. Based on the second special figure data stored in the special figure execution area corresponding area (omitted) and the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area, the fluctuation image and the second special figure holding image as the corresponding display are displayed. is displayed. As a result, the number of second special figure pending images displayed on the symbol display section 341 is reduced by one from the end of the previous second special figure game (see FIG. 52 (A2) and FIG. 52 (B2)). .

In addition, during b-time saving game state or RUSH performance, the second special figure pending image is displayed as the corresponding variation image and the corresponding display, and the first special figure pending image is not displayed as the corresponding display. This is because even if the first special figure pending image is displayed as a corresponding display for the first special figure game in which the variable display is not executed, the information obtained from the image is unnecessary information, and such This is because even if an image corresponding to unnecessary information is displayed, it only hinders the visibility of the necessary image from the player's perspective. However, the first special figure pending image may be displayed as a corresponding display during the b-time saving game state or during the RUSH performance. That is, both the first special figure pending image and the second special figure pending image may be displayed as the corresponding display in the normal game state and c time saving game state except during the RUSH performance.

By the way, in this embodiment, various game state transitions are executed, but before and after the game state transition, the first special figure pending image and the first special figure pending image as corresponding displays on the special figure data image display sections 75, 76, 77 are displayed. The display mode of the two special figure pending images may be different. For example, when the gaming state is transferred from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the display state of the first special figure pending image as the corresponding display is maintained, and the second special figure pending image as the corresponding display is maintained. While the non-display state of is maintained (see FIG. 88(C) → FIG. 88(A)), when the gaming state is transferred from the time-saving gaming state b to the normal gaming state, the first The special figure pending image is changed from the non-display state to the display state, and the second special figure pending image as a corresponding display is changed from the display state to the non-display state (FIG. 88(B)→FIG. 88(A)).

In addition, when the gaming state is transferred from the time-saving gaming state a to the normal gaming state, even in the normal gaming state, the game is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state a. For the second special figure game, a RUSH effect is executed as a specific effect, and during this RUSH effect, the display state of the second special figure pending image as a corresponding display is maintained, and the second special figure pending image as a corresponding display is maintained. The non-display state of the 1 special figure pending image is maintained (see FIG. 88(D)). Of course, during the execution of the RUSH effect, even if a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the non-display state of the first special figure pending image as a corresponding display is maintained, but in this case, The first special figure pending number N stored in the first special figure pending number storage area corresponding area of the first special figure pending storage area corresponding area set in the RAM 512 is updated by the update process.

On the other hand, if the RUSH effect ends without a jackpot game being executed, the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure holding storage area corresponding area set in the RAM 512 at that point ), based on the data of the first special figure validity information (first special figure data), the first special figure pending image as a corresponding display which had been in a non-display state is changed to a display state, while the first special figure pending image is changed to a display state. The second special figure pending image as a corresponding display is made non-displayed (FIG. 88(D)→FIG. 88(A)). That is, with the end of the RUSH effect as the specific effect, the display manner of the first special figure pending image and the second special figure pending image as corresponding displays in the special figure data image display sections 75, 76, 77 changes.

<Step S4519>
Following the explanation of FIG. 85, if the received command is not the second special figure shift command (step S4516: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S4519). ). The first special figure hold command indicates that the information stored in the first special figure hold storage area REA1 has been updated, and when a game ball enters the first prize opening 314, the first When the information stored in the special figure reservation storage area REA1 is updated, it is set in step S3304 or S3306 in the first special figure reservation command setting process of FIG. 63.

If the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S4519: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4520, and if the received command is not the first special figure hold command (step S4519: No), The process moves to step S4522.

<Steps S4520 and S4521>
If the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S4519: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an update process for the first special figure hold information as an update process (step S4520), and also displays a corresponding display as an effect display process. Display processing of the first special figure pending image is executed (step S4521), and the command determination processing is ended.

Here, in the updating process of the first special figure holding information executed in step S4520, the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area is updated with the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown). This is a process of adding (updating) the data (first special figure data). Specifically, in the update process of the first special figure holding information, the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first special figure holding storage area REA of the special figure holding storage area 412b in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is updated. (See Figure 8), the first special figure data corresponding to the first special figure validity information stored in the first vacant holding area is stored in the first holding areas REA1 to REA1 where the first special figure validity information is stored. It is stored in the first to fourth reservation area corresponding areas (not shown) that are set corresponding to the four reservation area REA4. For example, if the first special figure validity information is stored in the second holding area REA2 (see FIG. 8) of the first special figure holding storage area REA in the special figure holding storage area 412b, it corresponds to the second holding area REA2. The first special figure data is stored in a first special figure second reservation area corresponding area (not shown) that is set as follows. In addition, in the update process of the first special figure reservation information, 1 is added to the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area. , numerical information added by numerical storage processing is stored.

On the other hand, the display process of the first special figure holding image as a corresponding display executed in step S4521 is the first special figure added (updated) to the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S4520. Based on the data, a process of adding the first special figure pending image to the first special figure pending image display area 76 as a corresponding display is executed.

<Step S4522>
If the received command is not the first special figure hold command (step S4519: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special figure hold command (step S4522). The second special figure hold command indicates that the information stored in the second special figure hold storage area REB1 has been updated. When the information stored in the special figure reservation storage area REA1 is updated, it is set in step S3403, S3406, or S3408 in the second special figure reservation command setting process of FIG.

When the received command is the second special figure holding command (step S4522: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4523, and when the received command is not the second special figure holding command (step S4522: No), The process moves to step S4525 in FIG. 86.

<Steps S4523 and S4524>
If the received command is a second special figure holding command (step S4522: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an update process of the second special figure holding information as an update process (step S4523), and also displays a corresponding display as an effect display process. Display processing of the second special figure pending image is executed (step S4524), and the command determination processing is ended.

Here, the updating process of the second special figure holding information executed in step S4523 is performed by updating the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area. This is a process of adding (updating) the data (second special figure data). Specifically, in the update process of the second special figure holding information, the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second special figure holding storage area REB of the special drawing holding storage area 412b in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is updated. (See Figure 8), the second special figure data corresponding to the second special figure validity information stored in the first vacant holding area is stored in the first holding areas REB1 to REB1 where the second special figure validity information is stored. It is stored in the first to fourth reservation area corresponding areas (not shown) set corresponding to the 4 reservation area REB4. For example, when the second special figure validity information is stored in the second holding area REB2 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure holding storage area REB in the special figure holding storage area 412b, it corresponds to the second holding area REB2. The second special figure data is stored in a second special figure second reservation area corresponding area (not shown) that is set as follows. In addition, in the update process of the second special figure reservation information, 1 is added to the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area. Ru.

On the other hand, the display process of the second special figure holding image as a corresponding display executed in step S4524 is the second special figure added (updated) to the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S4523. Based on the data, a process of adding a second special figure pending image to the second special figure pending image display area 77 as a corresponding display is executed.

<Step S4525>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 85, if the received command is not the second special figure hold command (step S4522: No), as shown in FIG. 86, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special fluctuation start command or not. is determined (step S4525). The special fluctuation start command indicates that the second special figure game is executed first after transitioning to the time-saving game state a based on the game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving game state a. Yes, when the first second special figure game is started in the a time saving game state, it is set in step S4003 in the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B in FIG.

When the received command is a special fluctuation start command (step S4525: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4526, and when the received command is not a special fluctuation start command (step S4525: No), the process moves to step S4527. to move to.

<Step S4526>
If the received command is a special fluctuation start command (step S4525: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special figure game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving game state. A RUSH performance start flag is set to ON to start a RUSH performance as a specific performance that notifies that the game is in a state where the probability of small winning is high and the jackpot game is easy to be executed (step S4526), and the command determination process is performed. end. The RUSH effect start flag is referred to in step S4601 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. 87, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to set the RUSH effect, and the RUSH effect start flag is set to ON. RUSH effect is set when there is.

The RUSH effect is set for the second special game that is executed when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state, and as described above, the RUSH effect is 2 Set for the special figure game. This RUSH performance consists of a one-shot announcement performance (see Figure 89) that is executed for the second special figure game that is executed first after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state a, and a second RUSH performance after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state a. It includes a battle effect (see FIGS. 90 and 91) executed for the second to fifth special figure games. In addition, the RUSH effect is a battle effect when all of the second special game games that are executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the a-time saving game state are to notify of winnings. This includes a result effect and a branch effect as display effects that are executed after the end of (see FIG. 92).

Here, FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of a one-shot announcement effect executed at the beginning of the RUSH effect. As shown in FIG. 89, the one-shot announcement performance is executed by performing a button performance. In this one-shot announcement performance, first, an image imitating the operation button 20 is displayed to prompt the player to operate the operation button 20 (see FIG. 89(A)).

Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game is a small win, the movable accessory member 39 is activated by the player's operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 89(B)), and the movable accessory member 89 (A)), the player is informed that the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special pattern game is a small win.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game is a loss, the movable accessory member 39 is not activated even by the player's operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 89(D)), and the decorative pattern is The player is informed that the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a loss by being stopped and displayed at a random number other than the double number (see FIG. 89(E)).

Further, FIGS. 90 and 91 are diagrams showing an example of a battle performance that can be executed next to the one-shot announcement performance of the RUSH performance. In the battle performance, depending on the result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character, a jackpot will be placed in the second special figure reservation (remaining reservation) of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the one-shot announcement performance of the RUSH performance. It is notified whether or not the lottery results include a small win. In addition, the battle performance will not be executed if there is no second special figure reservation (remaining reservation) of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the one-shot announcement performance of the RUSH performance, and the remaining reservation is 1 Executed if there are more than one.

As shown in FIG. 90(A), in this embodiment, types of patterns A to D are set as battle effects. Patterns A and B are those in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character, and during the second special figure reservation (remaining reservation) of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the one-shot announcement performance of the RUSH performance. This is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery does not include a small jackpot. Patterns C and D are those in which an ally character wins against an enemy character, and during the second special figure suspension (remaining suspension) of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the one-shot announcement performance of the RUSH performance. This is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery includes a small win.

In battle performance pattern A, a character image indicating the start of a battle is displayed on the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 90(B)), the enemy character attacks first (see FIG. 90(D)), and the enemy character's attack is replaced by an ally. The character is hit (see FIG. 91 (B2)) → the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character (see FIG. 91 (B3)).

In battle performance pattern B, a character image indicating the start of a battle is displayed on the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 90(B)), an ally character attacks first (see FIG. 90(C)), and the ally character's attack is rejected by the enemy. The character defends (see Figure 91 (B1)) → The enemy character counterattacks (see Figure 90 (D)), and the attack of the enemy character hits the ally character (see Figure 91 (B2)) → The ally character becomes the enemy. The character is defeated (see FIG. 91 (B3)).

In battle performance pattern C, a character image indicating the start of a battle is displayed on the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 89(B)), an ally character attacks first (see FIG. 89(C)), and the ally character's attack is directed against the enemy. The character is hit (see FIG. 91 (A1)) → the ally character wins against the enemy character (see FIG. 91 (A3)).

In battle performance pattern D, a character image indicating the start of a battle is displayed on the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 89(B)), the enemy character first attacks (see FIG. 90(D)), and the enemy character's attack is replaced by an ally. The character defends (see Figure 91 (A2)), the ally character counterattacks (see Figure 90 (C)), the ally character's attack hits the enemy character (see Figure 91 (A1)) → the ally character becomes the enemy This is to win against the character (see FIG. 91 (A3)).

Then, the battle performance is executed according to the number of times of the second special figure game according to the type of the remaining reservation pattern. Specifically, in remaining reservation patterns 1 and 5, a battle effect is executed for one second special figure game, and in remaining reservation patterns 2 and 6, a battle effect is executed for two second special figure games. The effect is executed, and in the remaining reservation patterns 3 and 7, the battle effect is executed for three second special figure games, and in the remaining reserve patterns 4 and 8, the battle effect is executed for one second special figure game. The performance is executed. That is, in the remaining reservation patterns 2 to 4 and the remaining reservation patterns 6 to 9, excluding the remaining reservation patterns 1 and 5, the battle effect is executed collectively for a plurality of second special symbol games. In this embodiment, as described above, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. Therefore, if a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 during the execution of a battle performance (the area corresponding to the first special figure pending number storage area of the first special figure pending storage area corresponding area set in the RAM 512), Even if the first special figure pending number N stored in is added by the update process), the second special figure game is executed with priority. As a result, until the predetermined number of second special figure games that are the targets of execution of the battle performance are completed, the second special figure pending storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending storage area corresponding area set in the RAM 512 is The second special figure pending number M stored in the area is subtracted to 0 by the subtraction process by the execution of the second special figure game (the number of second special figure pending images displayed on the symbol display section 341 is 0). Until this happens, the first special figure game based on the game ball entering the first winning hole 314 during the execution of the battle performance as the display performance is not started. Thereby, the battle performance is not hindered based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 during the execution of the battle performance. Moreover, the first special figure game based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 314 during execution of the battle performance is started after the battle performance ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88(D), in the RUSH performance as a specific performance, for example, an image indicating that a RUSH is in progress (a text image of "Jackpot RUSH"), an image indicating the number of jackpot RUSHs ("RUSH x 3 ” text image) and an image indicating the total number of balls to be played in the jackpot RUSH (text image “3000 balls”) are displayed at least for a part of the period while the RUSH effect is being executed. Some or all of these images may be omitted, and it is also possible to display an image showing the remaining number of special figure games that can be played in the jackpot RUSH.

Further, FIG. 92(A) is a diagram showing an example of a screen in the result performance, and FIGS. 92(B) to 92(D) are diagrams showing examples of the screen in the branching performance. Note that FIGS. 92(E) and 92(F) are diagrams showing examples of screens after the branch effect ends.

The result performance and branch performance as the display performance shown in FIG. 92 notify that all of the second special figure games that are executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving game state a are out. is executed if the Specifically, the result performance and the branch performance are performed when the number of the second special figure games executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the a time-saving game state is one. After the one-shot announcement performance (see FIG. 89(E)) that notifies you of a miss, the result performance and branch performance are executed, and the game ball enters the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state a. If the number of second special figure games to be executed as a trigger is 2 to 5, the second special figure game is executed after the end of the battle performance (see FIG. 91 (B3)) that notifies you of a loss.

As shown in FIG. 92(A), in the result performance, the results of a series of jackpot games (multiple jackpot games) including the first jackpot game that can be executed using the first jackpot game that does not go through a small win game are shown. The image is displayed. Specifically, in the result performance of this embodiment, together with the text image of "result announcement", an image indicating the number of successive jackpots (the text image of "RUSH 5 times"), and the total number of balls rolled in the consecutive jackpot game. An image indicating the number (a text image of "Total balls rolled out: 2600 balls") is displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp the number of successive jackpots and the total number of balls put out.

In addition, even if the first jackpot game that does not go through the small winning game triggers a transition to the time-saving gaming state a, the game ball will not enter the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state a, which was initially shifted. If all of the second special symbol games executed using the ball as a trigger signal a loss, it will be a so-called single-shot jackpot rather than a consecutive jackpot, but for the sake of simplicity, it can also be used in the case of a single-shot jackpot. It is called Renso. In the case of a single jackpot, the number of consecutive hits is 1, and a text image of "RUSH 1" is displayed as an image indicating the number of consecutive jackpots.

In addition, the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed in the result presentation of this embodiment includes the first jackpot game that does not go through the small winning game, but the first jackpot game is excluded and the number of consecutive jackpot games is counted. may be displayed.

Furthermore, in the result effect of this embodiment, an image (an image of a leftward arrow and a text image of "left-handed hit") that prompts the player to hit left-handed is displayed. Here, in this embodiment, if all of the second special symbol games executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the a-time saving game state are ones that notify of winnings, the relevant When all of the second special figure games are finished (when the RUSH effect is finished), at the end of the last executed second special figure game (at the start of the next first executed special figure game) The gaming state is either a normal gaming state or a time-saving gaming state. In other words, if the gaming state at the end of the last executed second special figure game (at the start of the next first executed special figure game) is that all of the second special figure games are completely off. is in a normal game state, and when one of the second special symbol games is a time-saving symbol stop failure, it is in a time-saving game state. In both the normal game state and the c-time saving game state, left-handed hitting, in which the game ball is hit to the left side area of the game board 31, is encouraged. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the time saving game state is shifted to a time saving game state after the end of the time saving jackpot game (while the RUSH effect is being executed) or during the jackpot game, the game ball is launched into the right side area of the game board 31 as described above. Right-handed hitting is encouraged. That is, when it is announced in the RUSH performance that the RUSH will end, switching from right-handed to left-handed batting is encouraged. Therefore, by displaying an image that encourages left-handed hitting in the result performance, the player can understand that the encouraged launching area of the game ball onto the game board 31 has been changed.

As shown in FIG. 92(B), the branching effect is executed as a button effect. Specifically, in the branch performance of the present embodiment, the operation button 20 is pressed in order to prompt the player to operate the operation button 20, along with a character image of "choice of fate" indicating that the branch performance is being executed. A simulated image and a text image of "Press!!" are displayed.

Here, as mentioned above, if all of the second special symbol games executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the a time-saving game state are ones that notify of winnings, the relevant When all of the second special figure games are finished (when the RUSH effect is finished), at the end of the last executed second special figure game (at the start of the next first executed special figure game) The gaming state is c-time saving gaming state or normal gaming state. In the c time-saving gaming state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the distribution of the time-saving jackpot is 100% (see Figure 59 (C)), whereas in the normal gaming state, the distribution of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In this case, the distribution of the time-saving jackpot is 50% (see FIG. 59(C)). Therefore, the time-saving gaming state c is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 92(C), in the branch performance, all of the second special figure games that are executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state a are not successful. If the second special figure game is to be notified and all of the second special figure games have ended (RUSH effect has ended), the end point of the second special figure game that was executed last (the first special figure game that will be executed next) If the game state at the start of the game shown in the figure is the time-saving game state c, which is more advantageous than the normal game state, a character image of "Congratulations!" is displayed. As a result, if all of the second special symbol games executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the c time-saving game state are to notify the player that the game is a loss, When all of the second special figure games are finished (when the RUSH effect is finished), at the end of the last executed second special figure game (at the start of the next first executed special figure game) It is clearly or suggested that the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92(D), in the branch performance, all of the second special figure games executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state a are not successful. If the second special figure game is to be notified and all of the second special figure games have ended (RUSH effect has ended), the end point of the second special figure game that was executed last (the first special figure game that will be executed next) If the game state at the start of the game shown in the figure is the normal game state which is more disadvantageous than the time-saving game state c, a character image of "Zannen..." is displayed. As a result, if all of the second special symbol games executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the c time-saving game state are to notify the player that the game is a loss, When all of the second special figure games are finished (when the RUSH effect is finished), at the end of the last executed second special figure game (at the start of the next first executed special figure game) It is clearly or suggested that the gaming state of c is a normal gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, when displaying a text image such as "Congratulations!" or "Zannen..." in a branching effect, an image (an image of a left-pointing arrow and a text image of "left-handed hit") urging the player to play left-handed is displayed. . That is, the image that prompts the player to play left-handed is displayed from beginning to end during execution of the branch effect. Of course, the image that prompts the player to play left-handed may be displayed during a part of the period during which the branch effect is being executed, or may be omitted.

Furthermore, after the branch effect that clearly indicates or suggests that the time-saving gaming state c is shown in FIG. 92(C), an image related to the game in the time-saving gaming state c is displayed as shown in FIG. 92(E). . The character images "RUSH confirmed with jackpot!!" and "Sudden chance" correspond to images related to the game in the c time-saving game state. In this way, by displaying the image related to the game in the time-saving game state c, the player can understand that the RUSH effect has ended and that the game is in the time-saving game state c. Then, in the case of c-time saving gaming state, after the RUSH effect ends, if there is a reservation of the right to execute the first special figure, then the first special figure is reserved in the number corresponding to the number N of first special figures reserved. The image is displayed as a corresponding display. In other words, if the right to execute the first special is suspended due to a game ball entering the first winning hole 314 during the execution of the RUSH performance, the first special at the end of the RUSH performance, etc. A number of first special figure pending images corresponding to the number N of pending figures are displayed as a corresponding display.

Further, an image (an image of a leftward arrow and a character image of "left-handed hit") urging the player to play left-handed is displayed. As a result, the player can understand that it is desirable to switch from right-handed to left-handed, and can avoid being disadvantaged by continuing to play right-handed. Note that the image that prompts the player to play left-handed may be displayed until a certain period of time has passed after the image is displayed.For example, it may be displayed continuously until the c-time saving game state ends; It may be displayed until a certain number of special figure games are executed after the image is displayed, it may be displayed until a certain period of time has passed after the image is displayed, or it may be displayed until the image is displayed until a certain period of time has elapsed. It may be displayed until a certain number of game balls are consecutively hit to the left.

Furthermore, while the C time-saving game state performance is being executed, the remaining C time-saving game number is displayed as a specific corresponding display indicating the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the C time-saving game state (character image of "8 times remaining"). is displayed.

In addition, the player can play the second special figure game in the c time-saving game state executed during the execution of the RUSH performance based on the number of c time-saving games displayed when the image related to the game in the c time-saving game state is displayed. It is possible to grasp the number of times, and it is also possible to grasp which remaining reservation was the result of the jackpot lottery for which the time-saving symbol stopped. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 92(E), the character image "8 remaining" is displayed as the c time-saving game count display, but based on this c time-saving game count display, the initially set c time-saving game The number of times is 10, and it can be understood that two special figure games have already been executed in the c time-saving game state, and the jackpot announced by the second special figure game executed three times ago. It is possible to know after the fact that the result of the lottery was that the time-saving symbol was not stopped.

On the other hand, after the branch effect that clearly or suggests that the normal gaming state is shown in FIG. 92(D) ends, an image related to the game in the normal gaming state is displayed as shown in FIG. 92(F). The character images "RUSH confirmed with jackpot!!" and "Sudden chance" correspond to images related to the game in the c time-saving game state. In this way, by displaying images related to games in the normal gaming state, the player can understand that the RUSH effect has ended and that the normal gaming state is in progress. In the normal gaming state, after the RUSH effect ends, if there is a reservation of the right to execute the first special figure, the number of first special figure pending images corresponding to the first special figure pending number N is displayed. is displayed as a compatible display. In other words, if the right to execute the first special is suspended due to a game ball entering the first winning hole 314 during the execution of the RUSH performance, the first special at the end of the RUSH performance, etc. A number of first special figure pending images corresponding to the number N of pending figures are displayed as a corresponding display.

Further, an image (an image of a leftward arrow and a character image of "left-handed hit") urging the player to play left-handed is displayed. As a result, the player can understand that it is desirable to switch from right-handed to left-handed, and can avoid being disadvantaged by continuing to play right-handed. Note that the image that prompts the player to hit left-handed may be displayed until a certain period of time has elapsed after the image was displayed; for example, the image may be displayed until a certain number of special figure games have been executed after the image was displayed. The image may be displayed until a certain period of time has passed after the image is displayed, or the image may be displayed until a certain number of game balls are consecutively hit to the left after the image is displayed. Good too.

Note that in this embodiment, the result effect is executed before the branch effect, but the branch effect may be executed before the result effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the result effect (see FIG. 92(A)) and the branch effect (see FIG. 92(B) to FIG. 92(F)) are executed separately; A part or all of one may be executed redundantly with the other. For example, in the screen example of the result effect shown in FIG. 92(A), the image shown in FIG. 92(B) may also be displayed, and the screen of the branching effect shown in FIGS. 92(C) and 92(E) In the example, the result image shown in FIG. 92(A) may also be displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, the result performance and the branch performance have been described as part of the RUSH performance, but one or both of the result performance and the branch performance may be performed as a performance different from the RUSH performance. That is, in this embodiment, the result performance and the branch performance are executed in the second special figure game that is executed last among the remaining reservations, but one or both of the result performance and the branch performance are performed in the result performance. And the branch performance may be executed in (at the start of) the first special figure game that is executed after the end of the second special figure game that is executed last among the remaining reservations.

<Step S4527>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 86, if the received command is not a special fluctuation start command (step S4525: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a remaining pending pattern command (step S4527). The remaining reservation pattern command is the second special feature of FIG. 74 when the remaining reservation pattern (see FIG. 62) of the remaining reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving gaming state is set. It is set in step S4009 in figure variation pattern setting process B.

If the received command is a remaining pending pattern command (step S4527: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4528, and if the received command is not a remaining pending pattern command (step S4527: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4532. to move to.

<Steps S4528 to S4531>
If the received command is a remaining pending pattern command (step S4527: Yes), the MPU 51 stores the remaining pending pattern in the RAM 512 based on the remaining pending pattern command (step S4528), and starts a battle performance in the RUSH performance. The battle performance start flag is set on (step S4529). The battle performance start flag is referred to in step S4604 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process in FIG. 87, which will be described later, in order to determine whether to start the battle performance, and the battle performance flag is set to on. In this case, a battle performance will be set.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 performs a process of setting the value of the remaining reservation number counter in the storage area for the remaining reservation counter set in the RAM 512 as a numerical storage process based on the information regarding the remaining reservation number included in the remaining reservation pattern command. (Step S4530). Then, the MPU 51 turns on the remaining pending number counter flag indicating that the remaining pending number counter is set (that there is remaining pending) (step S4531), and ends the command determination process.

In step S4530 of the command determination process, the second special figure game is executed at the end of the second special figure game that was first executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving game state a. The value of the remaining pending number counter is set to the value corresponding to the number of rights to execute (remaining pending number). Here, in this embodiment, the maximum number of reservations for the second special symbol is set to 4, so the remaining number of reservations is one of 1 to 4. Then, in the storage area for the remaining reservation number counter set in the RAM 512, when the relevant remaining reservation number is 1, the value of the remaining reservation number counter is set to 1, and when the relevant remaining reservation number is 2, the value of the remaining reservation number counter is set to 1. 2 is set as the value of the remaining reservation counter, when the relevant remaining reservation number is 3, the value of the remaining reservation counter is set to 3, and when the relevant remaining reservation number is 4, the remaining reservation number counter is set to 2. 4 is set as the value of the number counter.

Further, the value of the remaining reservation number counter is subtracted (updated) by 1 in step S4542 of the command determination process described later, when the second special symbol game for the remaining reservation ends. Therefore, the value of the remaining reservation number counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games that can be executed based on the remaining reservation. As a result, the MPU 51 can display the number of second special symbol games for the remaining pending games on the symbol display section 341 by referring to the remaining pending number counter.

Here, details will be described later, but for the second special figure game to be executed based on the remaining reservation, it is specified based on the remaining reservation pattern command in the variation type (performance pattern) setting process described later. A battle effect (see FIGS. 90 and 91) is set based on the remaining reservation pattern (see FIG. 62(D)). For example, in the case of remaining reservation pattern 1, the battle effect is executed for one second special figure game for one remaining reservation, and in the case of remaining reservation pattern 2, the battle effect is executed twice for two remaining reservations. A battle effect is executed for the special figure game, and in the case of the remaining reservation pattern 3, a battle effect is executed for the 3 second special figure games for the three remaining reservations, and in the case of the remaining reservation pattern 4. A battle effect is executed for four second special figure games for the four remaining reservations. In other words, when the second special figure game for the remaining reservation ends, the remaining reservation number counter is decremented (updated) by 1 to indicate the number of unplayed second special symbol games of the remaining reservation. The value corresponds to the number of unexecuted second special figure games in which the battle performance is executed. Therefore, the battle performance is continuously executed until the value of the remaining reservation number counter becomes 0 in the storage area for the remaining reservation number counter set in the RAM 512.

<Step S4532>
If the received command is not a remaining pending pattern command (step S4527: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special fluctuation end command (step S4532). In the special fluctuation end command, the value of the remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of special fluctuations for the remaining reservation of the second special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving gaming state is 0. In this case, it is set in step S3712 in the special figure game control process in FIG.

If the received command is a special fluctuation end command (step S4532: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4533, and if the received command is not a special fluctuation end command (step S4532: No), the process moves to step S4534. to move to.

<Step S4533>
If the received command is a special variation end command (step S4532: Yes), the MPU 51 sets on the RUSH performance end flag that ends the RUSH performance (step S4533), and ends the command determination process. The RUSH performance end flag is referred to in step S4612 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process in FIG. 87, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to end the RUSH performance, and the RUSH performance end flag is set to ON. If there is, the RUSH effect is ended.

<Step S4534>
If the received command is not a special variation end command (step S4532: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S4534). The special figure variation pattern command is set in step S3910 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 73 when the special figure variation pattern for the first special figure game or the second special figure game is set.

If the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S4534: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4535, and if the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S4534: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4535. The process moves to step S4540.

<Step S4535>
If the received command is a special pattern variation pattern command (step S4534: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a variation type (performance pattern) to be executed in the symbol display section 341 etc. in the special pattern game as production display processing. (Rendering pattern) setting processing is executed (step S4535), and the processing moves to step S4536. The details of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

<Step S4536>
In step S4536, the MPU 51 selects a plurality of decorative symbols ( For example, a stop symbol combination setting process is executed to set a symbol combination when the symbols (for example, three) are stopped and displayed on the active line, and the process moves to step S4537.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop failure, the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols is set to correspond to the time-saving symbol stop failure type (see FIG. 61(D)). . Specifically, as the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols, "119" or "991" is set when the time-saving symbol is off-stop A, and "554" or "991" is set when the time-saving symbol is off-stop B. 556'' is set, if the time-saving symbol stop is missed C, then ``332'' or ``334'' is set, and if the time-saving symbol is not stopped D, ``776'' or ``778'' is set.

<Step S4537>
In step S4537, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the received special figure variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the special figure variable pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining display time, etc. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol fluctuation display has ended when the fluctuation display counter reaches 0.

<Step S4538>
In step S4538, the MPU 51 sends a display variation pattern command to the display control device for specifying the performance pattern type set in step S4535 of the command determination process and the content of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S4536. 6, and the command determination process ends. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the performance pattern type and the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores variable images and performance images of decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display on the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Step S4539>
In step S4539, the MPU 51 executes time saving number counter update processing and ends the command determination processing. In this time saving number counter update process, 1 is subtracted from the value of the b time saving number counter or c time saving number counter set in the storage area for the b time saving number counter or c time saving number counter set in the RAM 512, and Processing to store the value is executed. Specifically, when the b time-saving game state flag set to on in step S4506 of the command determination process is set to on, that is, when the b time-saving game state flag is set to b, the MPU 51 sets the b time-saving game state flag to the RAM 512. Subtract 1 from the value of b time saving number counter set in the storage area for the time saving number counter. In addition, in the time saving number counter update process, the MPU 51 stores the RAM 512 1 is subtracted from the value of the c time saving number counter set in the storage area for the c time saving number counter.

<Step S4540>
If the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S4534: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure game end command (step S4540). The special symbol game end command is executed in step S3709 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. It is set in .

If the received command is a special figure game end command (step S4540: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4541, and if the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S4540: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4541. The process moves to step S4545.

<Steps S4541 to S4544>
If the received command is a special figure game end command (step S4540: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the remaining reservation number counter flag indicating that the remaining reservation number counter is set is set to on. (Step S4541). The remaining reservation number counter flag executes the second special figure game at the end of the second special figure game that was first executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving game state. This is a flag indicating that a remaining reservation number counter indicating the number of unplayed second special symbol games out of the remaining reservation, which is the reservation of the right to play, is set.

When the remaining reservation number counter flag is set to ON (step S4541: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining reservation number counter as a subtraction process (step S4542). That is, the MPU 51 updates the value of the remaining pending number counter stored in the storage area set in the RAM 512 at the end of the second special symbol game during execution of the battle performance in the RUSH performance as the specific performance. In this way, while the battle performance is being executed, the value of the remaining reservation number counter stored in the storage area set in the RAM 512 at the end of the second special figure game is updated (subtracted), so that, for example, the remaining reservation number counter is updated (subtracted). Even if the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time-saving symbol stop that moves to the c-time-saving gaming state, the value of the remaining pending number counter stored in the storage area set in the RAM 512 is By referring to this, it is possible to continue executing the battle performance until the value of the remaining number of reservations counter reaches 0, and this is unique when the time-saving gaming state is in effect after the value of the remaining number of reservations counter reaches 0. It becomes possible to execute c time-saving game state effect (see FIG. 88(C)) as a display effect.

On the other hand, if the remaining pending number counter flag is set to OFF (step S4541: No), that is, if there is no need to process the remaining pending, the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the remaining pending number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4543). If the value of the remaining pending number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4543: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the remaining pending number counter flag to OFF (step S4544), and ends the command determination process. That is, the MPU 51 ends the management (update) of the remaining reservation number when the value of the remaining reservation number counter becomes 0. In other words, the battle effect ends when the value of the remaining reservation number counter becomes 0 in the storage area for the remaining reservation number counter set in the RAM 512.

On the other hand, if the value of the remaining pending number counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4543: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. That is, when the value of the remaining reservation number counter is not 0, the MPU 51 continues to manage (update) the remaining reservation number. In other words, if the value of the remaining reservation number counter in the storage area for the remaining reservation number counter set in the RAM 512 does not become 0, the battle performance is continued.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the remaining reservation number counter is updated (subtracted) at the time of receiving the special symbol fluctuation pattern, that is, at the start of the special symbol game. It may be updated (subtracted) at any time.

In addition, the number of remaining reservations specified from the remaining reservation pattern command is managed (updated), but instead of this, the second reservation number executed in the battle performance is based on the remaining reservation pattern specified from the remaining reservation pattern command. The number of special figure games may be specified and the second special figure game number may be managed (updated). In this case, the number of times the second special figure game is executed in the battle effect is determined by setting a battle effect counter corresponding to the number of times the second special figure game is played in the storage area set in the RAM 512, and setting this battle effect counter to the second special figure game number. By updating at the start (or end) of the figure game, it is possible to manage the remaining number of second special figure games to be executed in the battle performance. Thereby, the MPU 51 can specify the second special figure game in which the battle effect ends by referring to the value of the battle effect counter.

<Step S4545>
When the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S4540: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (step S4545) and ends the command determination processing.

[Variation type (production pattern) setting process]
Here, FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of this embodiment. In the variation type (performance pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the variation type (performance pattern) etc. to be executed in the symbol display section 341 etc. in the special figure game are set according to the game state type etc. The variation type (effect pattern) setting process of this embodiment includes a process for setting a one-shot announcement effect and a process for setting a battle effect, which serve as effect display means for setting a RUSH effect as a specific effect.

<Step S4601>
In the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the RUSH effect start flag is set to on (step S4601). The RUSH effect start flag is a flag for starting a RUSH effect as a specific effect, and is set to ON in step S4524 of the command determination process in FIG. 86 when a special variation start command is received.

If the RUSH effect start flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4602, and if the RUSH effect start flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the process proceeds to step S4602. The process moves to step S4604.

Here, in this embodiment, in step S4601, by determining whether or not the RUSH performance start flag is set to on, priority is given to the display performance over the time-saving game state performance b and the time-saving game state performance c. It becomes possible to execute a RUSH effect as a specific effect. For example, the remaining reservation of the second special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state a is started in the normal gaming state, and during the remaining reservation, the jackpot lottery result is outside the time-saving symbol stop. If such a state is included, the state shifts to the time-saving game state c after the second special symbol game in which the jackpot lottery result is outside the time-saving symbol stop. In this case, when the c time-saving game state performance corresponding to the c time-saving game state is executed as the display performance, the battle performance that has been executed as the RUSH performance until then is ended midway.

On the other hand, by determining whether or not the RUSH effect flag is set on, it becomes possible to execute the RUSH effect as a display effect with priority over the time-saving game state effect c. As a result, the battle performance that is being executed as the RUSH performance is prevented from ending midway.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a display performance, the battle performance is prevented from ending midway by executing the RUSH performance as a specific performance with priority over the c time-saving game state performance, but the RUSH performance is terminated. By suspending the transition to the c time-saving game state until (all remaining pending second special symbol games are completed), it may be possible to prevent the battle performance from ending midway.

<Steps S4602 and S4603>
If the RUSH performance start flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 executes processing as a performance display means for setting the aforementioned one-shot announcement performance (see FIG. 89) included in the RUSH performance. (Step S4602). Then, the MPU 51 sets the RUSH performance start flag to OFF (step S4603), and ends the variation type (performance pattern) setting process.

<Step S4604>
If the RUSH performance start flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the battle performance start flag is set to ON (step S4604). The battle performance start flag is a flag that starts a battle performance as a RUSH performance when executing a RUSH performance as a specific performance, and is turned on in step S4527 of the command determination process in FIG. 86 when a remaining pending pattern command is received. is set to In other words, the battle effect is that if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game that is executed first after the transition to the time-saving game state is a loss, then the battle effect for the second special figure game will be executed at the end of the second special figure game. Executed when there is a remaining hold.

If the battle performance start flag is set to ON (step S4604: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4605. On the other hand, if the battle performance start flag is set to OFF (step S4604: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4611.

<Steps S4605 and S4606>
If the battle performance start flag is set to ON (step S4604: Yes), the MPU 51 specifies the remaining pending pattern stored in the RAM 512 in step S4526 of the command determination process in FIG. 86 (step S4605). Then, as a performance display process, the MPU 51 executes a process of setting the aforementioned battle performance (see FIGS. 90 and 91) included in the RUSH performance as a specific performance as a display performance based on the remaining pending pattern (step S4606), the process moves to step S4607.

Here, in this embodiment, among the game balls entering the second winning opening 315 in the time saving gaming state a, the first game ball entering the second winning opening 315 in the time saving gaming state a In contrast, a one-shot notification effect is executed, and a battle effect is set when a remaining hold pattern is set for the second and subsequent game balls entering the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state. Ru. That is, if there is a second special figure pending (remaining pending) at the end of the second special figure game based on the first entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving game state, the battle performance is executed. If there are a plurality of the remaining reservations, a battle effect is collectively set for the second special figure game to be executed based on the plurality of second special figure reservations. Specifically, if the results of the jackpot lottery for the remaining reservation are all the remaining reservation patterns 1 to 4 (see FIG. 62(C)), the battle performance pattern A or the battle performance in which the ally character loses. When pattern B (see FIG. 90 (A)) is set and remaining reservation patterns 5 to 8 (see FIG. 62 (C)) include a small win in the result of the jackpot lottery for the remaining reservation, In this case, a battle effect pattern C or a battle effect pattern D (see FIG. 90(A)) in which the ally character wins is set. When there are multiple remaining reservations, a battle effect is set all at once for the second special figure game that is executed based on the plurality of second special figure reservations, so that the battle effect can be set multiple times for the remaining reservations. This prevents the battle effect settings from being executed.

<Steps S4607 and S4608>
In step S4607, the MPU 51 sets the battle effect already set flag to ON, and further sets the battle effect start flag to OFF (step S4608), and moves the process to step S4609.

The battle production already set flag is one or more (2 to 4) number one at the end of the second special figure game based on the first entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the time saving game state. This is a flag indicating that there is a 2 special figure pending (remaining pending) and a battle effect is set for the remaining pending, and the battle effect is set in step S4611 of the fluctuation type (effect pattern) setting process. referenced to determine whether or not the

In addition, while the RUSH performance (one-shot announcement performance and battle performance) is being performed as a specific performance, as mentioned above, an image indicating that the RUSH is in progress (a character image of "Jackpot RUSH") and a number of jackpot RUSHs are displayed. An image (text image of “RUSH (See Figure 88 (D)), but these images may be set at the same time when setting a one-shot announcement effect or battle effect, or they may be set at the same time as when setting a one-shot announcement effect or battle effect. It may be set at different timings.

<Steps S4609 and S4610>
In step S4609, the MPU 51 determines whether the battle effect set in step S4606 is battle effect pattern A or battle effect pattern B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a battle effect (see FIG. 90(A)) in which an ally character loses in a battle has been set.

If the battle performance set in step S4606 is battle performance pattern A or battle performance pattern B (step S4609: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a battle performance in which the ally character is defeated in battle (see FIG. 90(A)). If so, as the effect display process, a process of setting a branch effect (see FIG. 92) as a display effect is executed (step S4610), and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is ended.

Here, in battle performance pattern A or battle performance pattern B (see FIG. 90(A)) in which the ally character loses in battle, the battle performance pattern A or battle performance pattern B (see FIG. 90(A)) is used when all jackpot lottery results for the remaining reservations in which the battle performance is performed are losers. Set. In other words, a branching effect (see FIG. 92) as a display effect is used after the end of the battle effect when it is clearly or suggested to the player that the high probability of jackpot success will end due to the defeat of an ally in the battle effect. executed. As mentioned above, during the execution of the battle performance for the remaining pending game, it is in the normal gaming state or c time-saving gaming state, and this c time-saving gaming state is a time-saving jackpot that provides an opportunity to shift to the jackpot consecutive winning high probability state. This is a gaming state in which the probability of ``is higher'' than in the normal gaming state, so the gaming value is higher than in the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the branch performance (see FIG. 92), it is determined which of the two types of gaming states that have different gaming values for the player is in, that is, the c time-saving gaming state that has the higher gaming value for the player. Whether or not it is specified or implied is indicated. In this way, by executing a branching effect that clearly or suggests whether or not the player is in a time-saving gaming state where the game value is high for the player, a series of jackpots can be achieved due to the defeat of an ally character in a battle effect. Even in a situation where the player's interest in the game decreases because it is clearly or suggested to the player that the high probability state will end, the game state is advantageous to the player due to the branching effect as a display effect c. Time-saving game Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the current state will be clearly or hinted at, a decrease in interest in the game is prevented.

On the other hand, if the battle performance set in step S4606 is not battle performance pattern A or battle performance pattern B (step S4609: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the game ball enters the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving game state. Based on the fact that a small win is included in the result of the jackpot lottery for the remaining reservation based on the ball, the battle effect pattern C or battle effect pattern D (see FIG. 90(A)) in which the ally character wins the battle is determined. If set, the variation type (effect pattern) setting process ends.

<Step S4611>
If the battle performance start flag is set to OFF (step S4604: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the battle performance already set flag is set to ON (step S4611). That is, the MPU 51 performs a battle production for the second special figure hold (remaining hold) at the end of the second special figure game based on the first entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving game state. is set.

If the battle effect already set flag is set to ON (step S4611: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4612, and if the battle effect already set flag is set to OFF (step S4611: No). , the process moves to step S4617.

<Step S4612>
If the battle performance already set flag is set to ON (step S4611: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the RUSH performance end flag for ending the RUSH performance as a specific performance is set to ON (step S4611: Yes). S4612). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to end the RUSH effect (battle effect) when the battle effect is being executed.

If the RUSH effect end flag is set to ON (step S4612: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4613. On the other hand, if the RUSH performance end flag is set to OFF (step S4612: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the RUSH performance (battle performance), the MPU 51 ends the variation type (performance pattern) setting process. .

<Steps S4613 to S4616>
If the RUSH effect end flag is set to ON (step S4612: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the battle effect already set flag indicating that a battle effect has been set to OFF (step S4613), and also sets the RUSH effect to OFF (step S4613). The RUSH effect end flag for ending the process is set to OFF (step S4614), and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is ended.

Furthermore, as an update process, the MPU 51 executes a process of clearing the remaining pending number counter (step S4615), sets the remaining pending number counter flag to OFF (step S4616), and performs the fluctuation type (effect pattern) setting process. end. That is, when ending the RUSH effect (battle effect), the MPU 51 ends the management (update) of the remaining number of reservations. In other words, when ending the battle performance as a display performance when the remaining number of reservations is not 0 (when the remaining reservation includes a small winning jackpot lottery result), the MPU 51 manages the remaining number of reservations ( update).

<Steps S4617 and S4618>
If the battle effect already set flag is set to OFF (step S4611: No), that is, if the battle effect (RUSH effect) is not being executed, the MPU 51 turns on the normal game state flag indicating that the normal game state is in progress. is set (step S4617).

If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4617: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state performance as the display performance (step S4618), and ends the variation type (performance pattern) setting process. On the other hand, when the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4617: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4619.

Then, if the RUSH effect ends without a small winning game being executed (if the ally character is defeated in the battle effect), in the normal game state after the end of the RUSH effect, the second special figure reservation number M is The second special figure pending image is not displayed as a corresponding display of the number, and the number of first special figure pending images corresponding to the first special figure pending number N at the end of the RUSH performance is displayed as a corresponding display ( (See FIG. 88(A)). That is, when the RUSH effect ends, the display of the special figure pending image as a corresponding display is switched from the second special figure pending image to the first special figure pending image. This suggests the player to switch from right-handed to left-handed based on the end of the RUSH performance.

<Steps S4619 and S4620>
If the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state is set to OFF (step S4617: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the b time-saving gaming state flag indicating the b-time-saving gaming state is set to ON. It is determined whether or not there is one (step S4619).

If the b time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4619: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the b time-saving game state performance as the display performance (step S4620), and ends the variation type (performance pattern) setting process. do. On the other hand, when the b time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4619: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4621.

In addition, in the b time saving game state production, a background production (stage production) different from other gaming states is executed as a display production, and based on this background production (stage production), it is possible to identify the b time saving gaming state. It is said that Further, as shown in FIG. 88(B), in the time-saving game state effect b, an image related to the game in the time-saving game state b is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 88(B), the character images "RUSH confirmed with jackpot!!", "Right hit", and "Ceiling chance" correspond to images related to the game in the b time-saving game state. Further, while the b time-saving game state effect is being executed, a character image "50 times remaining" is displayed as a corresponding display indicating the remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the b time-saving game state.

<Steps S4621 and S4622>
If the b-time-saving game state flag indicating that the b-time-saving game state is set to OFF (step S4619: No), the MPU 51 sets the c-time-saving game state flag c indicating that the c-time-saving game state is on. It is determined whether or not it has been set (step S4621).

If the c time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4621: Yes), the MPU 51 sets c time-saving game state performance as the display performance (step S4622), and ends the variation type (performance pattern) setting process. do. On the other hand, when the c time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4621: No), the MPU 51 ends the variation type (performance pattern) setting process.

In addition, in the c time saving game state performance, as mentioned above, it is executed in the c time saving game state except when the RUSH performance is being executed, but a background performance (stage performance) different from other game states is performed as a display performance. , Based on this background effect (stage effect), it is possible to identify that the time-saving game state c is the specific game state. Further, as shown in FIG. 88(C), in the c time saving game state production, an image related to the game in the c time saving gaming state is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 88(C), the character images "RUSH confirmed with jackpot!!", "Left hit", and "Sudden chance" correspond to images related to the game in the c time-saving game state. In addition, while the C time-saving game state production is being executed, a character image of "10 remaining" (remaining c time-saving game number display) is displayed as a specific corresponding display indicating the remaining number of special symbol games that can be performed in the c time-saving game state. is displayed.

As described above, in the present invention, the specific correspondence display is not started even if the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation in which the specific effect is being executed. Further, in the present invention, even if the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during execution of the specific performance, the updated specific correspondence display is not started. In this way, if the specific condition or update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, the specific corresponding display will not start, so that the second game operation during the execution of the specific effect will not be started. Even if the specific conditions or update conditions are met during execution, the specific response display prevents the specific performance from being terminated midway, so the game will not be affected by the specific performance being terminated midway. A decline in interest is prevented.

On the other hand, in the present invention, based on the end of the specific performance, the specific correspondence display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the specific performance is started. In this way, by starting the specific correspondence display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the specific performance, it is possible to start the specific correspondence display without ending the specific performance midway. Therefore, a decrease in interest in the game due to the specific correspondence display not being started is prevented.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state a that transitions after the end of the time-saving jackpot game, the second game round is executed based on the game ball entering the second prize opening 315 as the second ball entering means. The second special figure reservation number M as the first numerical information corresponding to the second reservation number for the right to execute the second special figure game as the operation is determined in step S1108 (Fig. 63), the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB as the first counting means is set, and the special figure as a subtraction process is set based on the start of the second special figure game for the second special figure reservation as the subtraction condition. In step S3806 (see FIG. 72) in the figure data setting process, the second special figure reservation number M set in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB is subtracted. In addition, in this embodiment, for the second special figure game executed based on the game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the a-time saving game state, the RUSH performance as the display performance is changed to the RUSH performance as the performance display process. It is set in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the special pattern game that informs that the result of the jackpot lottery as a specific condition is that the time-saving symbol is out of stop, the game state is shifted to the c-time-saving game state, and the c-time-saving game state is In step S4211 (see FIG. 80) in the game state transition process as the numerical value storage process, the second numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executable special figure games is stored in the c time saving number counter as the second counting means. is set to In addition, in this embodiment, the number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the c time-saving game state is determined based on the start of the special figure game as an update condition in step S3724 in the special figure game control process (see FIG. 71). Based on the updated value of the c time-saving game counter, it is possible to display the remaining number of c time-saving games (performance) as a corresponding display.

In the present embodiment, the variation as a production display process is applied to the second special figure game executed based on the game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving game state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game. During the execution of the RUSH performance as a display performance in the type (performance pattern) setting process, if the game state is shifted to c time-saving gaming state based on the jackpot lottery result being outside the time-saving symbol stop, RUSH While the performance is being executed, the remaining c time-saving game count display (performance) as a corresponding display in the c time-saving game state is not executed. In this way, when transitioning to the c time-saving game state during the RUSH performance, the display of the remaining number of c time-saving games (performance) in the c time-saving game state is not executed while the RUSH performance is being executed, so that Even if the jackpot lottery result is shifted to the c time-saving game state based on the time-saving pattern stop being off, the RUSH performance is prevented from being ended midway by displaying the remaining number of c time-saving games (performance). Therefore, a decrease in interest in the game due to the RUSH performance being terminated midway is prevented.

Further, in this embodiment, when the game state shifts to the c time-saving game state as a gaming state while the RUSH performance is being executed as the display performance, the remaining c time-saving game number display (performance) is executed after the RUSH performance ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the RUSH performance, the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the time saving game state c at the time of the end of the RUSH performance is started. In this way, based on the end of the RUSH performance, the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be performed in the time saving game state at the time of the end of the RUSH performance is started, thereby ending the RUSH performance midway. This is due to the fact that the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state does not start because the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state can be started without. A decrease in interest in the game is prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, a one-shot announcement performance and a battle performance are executed as the RUSH performance, but one of the one-shot announcement performance and the battle performance may be omitted, and one of the one-shot announcement performance and the battle performance may be omitted. Alternatively, other performances such as a mission performance may be performed instead of both performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, a battle effect is collectively set for the remaining reservation of the second special figure game that is executed for the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the a time-saving game state. However, when there are a plurality of such remaining reservations, effects may be set individually for each remaining reservation.

Further, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first embodiment described above can be made within an applicable range.

Further, in each embodiment, matters described in other embodiments can also be applied within an applicable range.

[Third embodiment]
As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine is equipped with a "starting ball entering section" as a starting ball entering means, a "lottery process" as a win/fail lottery means, and a "display effect" as a specific effect. ", and also includes "display control processing" as display control means, "movable body" as movable means, "movable body control processing" as movable control means, and "display control processing" as specific information. It has "information", it has "continuous motion" as a series of specific motions, it has a "return side position" as a first position, it has a "drive side position" as a second position, and It is provided with a "termination determination condition" as a termination condition, and is also provided with a "termination determination" as a determination means.

The starting ball entering means may be provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball. As the starting ball entrance means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a ball entry hole that generates a special figure game when a game ball enters, a first special figure game that triggers a first special figure game when a game ball enters. A ball entrance (first prize opening) that generates a second special game when a game ball enters, a ball entrance that generates a second special game when a game ball enters (second prize opening), and a regular game when a game ball enters. Ball entry gate (through gate) that generates a ball entry gate, Ball entry gate that activates a movable object (electric accessory, feather object) when a game ball enters, Ball entry gate that allows ball entry in small winning games, A ball entry opening that generates a jackpot game using a ball as an opportunity, a ball entry opening that allows a ball to enter in a small winning game, a ball entry opening that generates a time-saving gaming state using the entry of a game ball as an opportunity, a ball entry opening that allows a ball entry to occur in a jackpot game, A ball entrance that generates a variable gaming state when a game ball enters, a ball entrance that allows a ball to enter in a jackpot game and generates a time-saving gaming state when a game ball enters, and any combination thereof. Examples include.

The winning/failure lottery means may be any process that executes various types of lottery. As long as it is possible to realize the purpose of the present invention, the winning/failure lottery means may include, for example, a process of executing a lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game will occur, a process to execute a lottery to determine whether or not a small win game will occur, and a general process. A process of executing a lottery to determine whether or not a figure-winning game will occur; activating movable objects (electric accessories, feather objects, etc.) with high frequency or high probability; activating movable objects with low frequency or low probability from a game state; A process of executing a lottery to determine whether to fall into a gaming state, a process to execute a lottery to determine whether to fall from a variable gaming state to a normal gaming state, a lottery to determine whether to fall from a time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state. Examples include processing to execute, arbitrary combinations thereof, and so on.

The specific performance may be any performance as long as it is performed on the display means according to the results of various lottery selections. Specific presentations include, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a display presentation executed by a display means provided with a liquid crystal display, a display effect carried out by a display means provided with a dot matrix display, and a display device provided with a plasma display. A display effect executed by a display means having an organic EL display, a display effect executed by a display means according to the result of a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game, and a small win game generated. A performance executed by the display means according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a game per game; , feathered objects, etc.) with high frequency or high probability, to a game state where movable bodies are operated with low frequency or low probability, a performance that is executed according to the result of a lottery, or a variable probability game. A performance that is executed according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to fall from the state to the normal gaming state, a performance that is executed according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to fall from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, and a jackpot game. The performance is executed by the display means in the special figure game according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game, and the effect is executed by the display means in the first special figure game according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the jackpot game. A performance executed by the display means in the second special figure game according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game, and a performance to be executed by the display means according to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game. The production executed by the display means in the special figure game when the result of the jackpot lottery is the one that will cause a jackpot, A performance executed by the display means in the first special figure game, a performance executed by the display means in the second special figure game when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will cause a jackpot, and a result of the jackpot lottery will generate a small hit. If the result of the jackpot lottery is to cause a small win, the performance to be executed by the display means in the first special drawing game, A performance executed by the display means in the second special figure game when the result is something that causes a small win, and an effect executed by the display means in the special figure game when the result of the jackpot lottery is something that causes a time-saving game state. A performance executed by the display means in the first special figure game when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that causes a time-saving gaming state, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that causes a time-saving gaming state. The production executed by the display means in the second special figure game, the production carried out by the display means in the jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery causes a jackpot, and the result of the jackpot lottery is in a probability-variable jackpot game state (the relevant If the result of a jackpot lottery is a production that causes a time-saving jackpot game state (transition to a time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game), the performance is executed on the display means. The effect is executed on the display means when the result of the jackpot lottery is the one that causes a normal jackpot game state (transition to the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game). an opening performance executed by the display means at the opening of a jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will cause a jackpot; opening and closing execution of the jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will cause a jackpot. The opening/closing execution mode effect is executed by the display means in the mode, the round game effect is executed by the display means in the round game of the jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to cause a jackpot, and the result of the jackpot lottery is the one that causes a jackpot. If the result of a jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot, the interval effect is executed by the display means at the interval of the jackpot game, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot, the ending effect is executed by the display means at the end of the jackpot game. A production executed on the display means in a general figure game according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a game to win a figure; A performance executed by the display means in a game with a common figure, a performance executed by the display means in a game with a common figure when the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a game with a common figure is a loss, a movable body A performance executed on a display means according to the result of a lottery as to whether or not to cause the movable body to fall from a gaming state in which it operates with high frequency or high probability to a gaming state in which it operates with low frequency or low probability, and from a variable probability gaming state to a normal game. A performance executed by the display means according to the result of a lottery as to whether or not to fall from the time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state; Examples include arbitrary combinations thereof.

The display control means may perform any process as long as it determines and executes a performance from among a plurality of performance display modes. As the display control means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a process of determining and executing a display effect to be executed on a display means having a liquid crystal display from among a plurality of effect display modes, a dot matrix display, etc. A process of determining and executing a display effect to be executed by a display means provided with the display means from among a plurality of effect display modes, and a process of determining and executing a display effect to be executed by a display means including a plasma display from among a plurality of effect display modes. A process of determining and executing a display effect to be executed on a display means having an organic EL display from among a plurality of effect display modes, a display means according to a result of a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game. The process of determining and executing the performance to be executed from among a plurality of performance display modes, and the process of determining and executing the performance to be executed on the display means from among a plurality of performance display modes, and the process of determining and executing the performance to be executed on the display means in accordance with the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a small winning game. A process of determining and executing an effect from among a plurality of effect display modes, a process of determining and executing an effect to be executed on the display means according to the result of a lottery as to whether or not to generate a game with a common symbol, Executed according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to change the game state from a game state where movable objects (electric accessories, feather objects, etc.) are activated with high frequency or high probability to a game state where movable objects are activated with low frequency or low probability. A process for determining and executing a performance to be performed from among a plurality of performance display modes, and a process for determining and executing a performance from among a plurality of performance display modes, and a process for determining and executing a performance to be performed in accordance with the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to change the game state from a variable probability gaming state to a normal gaming state. A process to determine and execute from among a plurality of performance display modes, a process to determine and execute a performance to be executed from among a plurality of performance display modes depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to change the time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state, and a jackpot. A process of determining and executing a performance to be performed by a display means in a special figure game from among a plurality of performance display modes according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a game, and a process to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game. A process of determining and executing the performance to be performed by the display means in the first special figure game from among a plurality of performance display modes according to the result of the lottery, and a process of determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game according to the result of the lottery. A process of determining and executing the performance to be performed by the display means in the second special figure game from among a plurality of performance display modes, A process of determining and executing a performance to be performed from among a plurality of performance display modes, and a process of displaying a plurality of performances to be performed on a display means in a special figure game when the result of a jackpot lottery is one that will cause a jackpot. A process to be determined and executed from among a plurality of performance display modes, and a performance to be executed by the display means in the first special drawing game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot is determined from among a plurality of performance display modes. A process to be executed, a process of determining and executing the performance to be performed by the display means in the second special figure game from among a plurality of performance display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot; A process of determining and executing an effect to be executed by a display means in a special figure game from among a plurality of effect display modes when the result is something that causes a small win, and a process that causes a small win to occur as a result of a jackpot lottery. , the process of determining and executing the performance to be performed by the display means in the first special figure game from among a plurality of performance display modes, and the second process when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will cause a small win. A process of determining and executing the performance to be executed by the display means in the special figure game from among a plurality of performance display modes, and a process of determining and executing the performance to be executed by the display means in the special figure game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a time-saving game state. The process of determining and executing the performance to be performed from among a plurality of performance display modes, and the process of determining and executing the performance to be performed from among a plurality of performance display modes, and the process of determining and executing the performance to be performed on the display means in the first special figure game when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that generates a time-saving gaming state. A process to be determined and executed from among a plurality of effect display modes, and a plurality of effect display modes for the effect to be executed by the display means in the second special figure game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a time-saving gaming state. A process of determining and executing a performance from among a plurality of performance display modes, a process of determining and executing a performance to be performed on a display means in a jackpot game when the result of a jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot, When the result of the jackpot lottery results in a variable-probability jackpot gaming state (transition to a variable-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game), a performance to be performed on the display means is determined from among a plurality of performance display modes and executed. processing to determine a performance to be performed on the display means from among a plurality of performance display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that causes a time-saving jackpot game state (transition to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game) The processing executed by the display means when the result of the jackpot lottery results in a normal jackpot game state (transition to the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game) is performed in multiple effect display modes. A process to be determined and executed from among a plurality of performance display modes, and an opening effect to be executed on the display means at the opening of the jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to cause a jackpot to be determined from among a plurality of effect display modes and executed. processing, a process of determining and executing an opening/closing execution mode performance to be executed by the display means in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game from among a plurality of performance display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot; A process of determining and executing a round game performance to be executed on a display means in a round game of a jackpot game from among a plurality of performance display modes when the result of a lottery is to generate a jackpot, A process of determining and executing an interval effect to be executed by the display means at the interval of a jackpot game from among a plurality of effect display modes when the result of a jackpot lottery is one that causes a jackpot. The process of determining and executing the ending performance to be executed by the display means at the ending of the jackpot game from among a plurality of performance display modes, A process of determining and executing the production to be executed by the display means from among a plurality of production display modes, and a process of determining whether or not to generate a game per common figure, and a game per common figure when the result of the lottery is a win for a common figure. The process of determining and executing the performance to be executed by the display means from among a plurality of performance display modes, and displaying in the game per normal pattern when the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a game based on the normal pattern is a loss. A process of determining and executing the performance to be performed by the means from among a plurality of performance display modes, and changing from a game state where the movable body is operated with high frequency or high probability to a game state where the movable body is operated with low frequency or low probability. A process of determining and executing a performance to be performed on the display means from among a plurality of performance display modes according to the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to cause the player to fall, and a lottery to determine whether or not to cause the player to fall from a variable probability gaming state to a normal gaming state. A process of determining and executing a performance to be performed on the display means from among a plurality of performance display modes according to the result of the display means, and a process of determining and executing the performance to be performed on the display means from among a plurality of performance display modes, and a display means according to the result of a lottery as to whether or not to change from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. Examples include a process of determining and executing a performance to be performed from among a plurality of performance display modes, and an arbitrary combination thereof.

The movable means may be provided in the game area and can be operated while the performance is being displayed. As a movable means, as long as it is possible to realize the purpose of the present invention, for example, a movable means that is operated while displaying a performance in a special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game), a display of an effect in a jackpot game, etc. Those that operate during the display of effects in a small winning game, those that operate while displaying an effect in a normal winning game, those that can move on a straight path, and those that can move on a non-linear path. movable, movable along a curved path, reciprocating between two positions, rotatable, the tip of the movable means moving along an arcuate path around a fulcrum; Items that can be rotated, items that can change shape, items that combine or separate multiple movable members, items that can be expanded or contracted at least in part, items that are equipped with a display part such as a liquid crystal display, items that can emit light. Those equipped with a light emitting part, those that operate as a performance, those that operate as a performance in a special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game), special figure games (first special figure game or second special figure game) Those that are operated to notify the player whether or not a predetermined effect will be executed in a special figure game, those that are operated to notify the player whether or not a super reach will be executed, and whether or not a special reach will be executed. Those that are operated to notify the player of the situation, those that are operated to notify the player whether the situation is more advantageous than the previously suggested situation, and those that are operated to indicate or suggest that the expectation of a jackpot is high. Some are operated to announce that it is a guaranteed variable jackpot, and some are operated to announce that it is a fixed variable jackpot with a higher expected ball payout value after indicating that it is a fixed variable jackpot. things, things that are usually operated to announce that it is a definite jackpot after suggesting that it is a jackpot, things that are usually operated to announce that it is a time-saving jackpot after suggesting that it is a jackpot, Normally, it is operated to announce a time-saving jackpot after indicating that it is a jackpot, and to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the ball entrance (opening or closing the ball entrance). What is operated, allowing or restricting (entering) the entry of game balls into the ball entrance that provides an opportunity to execute a special map game (first special map game or second special map game) by entering the game ball. Things that are operated to open or close the ball mouth), things that are operated in special figure games (first special figure game or second special figure game), things that are operated in jackpot games, and things that are operated in the opening of jackpot games. Things that operate, things that operate in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game, things that operate in a round game in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game, things that operate in the interval of the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game, endings of a jackpot game. Those that are operated to open or close the ball entrance (variable prize opening) that is opened and closed during round games, those that are operated during round games and that are opened and closed in round games and that cause the ball to enter the jackpot after the jackpot game ends. Those operated to open or close the ball entry hole (V winning hole) that provides an opportunity to shift to the frequency support mode (variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state), those that are opened and closed in small winning games, and the entry of game balls. A device that is operated to open or close a ball entrance that awards a prize ball with a ball, and is opened and closed in a small winning game, and provides an opportunity to generate a jackpot game after the small winning game ends when a game ball enters. Items that are operated to open or close the ball entrance (V winning opening), items that are operated to switch the flow path of the game ball, launching hammers that are moved to launch the game ball, Examples include a ball sending device that moves the ball to a position where it can be fired by a firing mallet, and any combination thereof.

The movable control means may be any process as long as it determines and executes the movable mode of the movable means. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the movable control means may, for example, determine the movable mode of the movable means during the display of the performance in the special figure game (the first special figure game or the second special figure game). A process to be executed, a process to determine and execute the movable mode of the movable means while displaying the production in the jackpot game, a process to determine and execute the movable mode of the movable means while displaying the production in the small win game, A process of determining and executing a movable mode of the movable means during the display of a performance in a per-picture game, a process of determining a movable mode in which the movable means moves along a linear path, and moving the movable means along a linear path. , determining a movable manner in which the movable means moves along a non-curved path and moving the movable means along the non-curved path; determining a movable manner in which the movable means moves along a curved path and moving the movable means along a curved path; A process of moving the movable means along a target path, a process of determining a route for reciprocating the movable means between two positions, and a process of reciprocating the movable means between the two positions, and determining a movable manner in which the movable means rotates. A process of rotating the movable means by rotating the movable means, a process of determining a movable manner in which the tip of the movable means moves along an arcuate path about a fulcrum, and rotating the movable means, and a movable manner of changing the form of the movable means. A process of determining and changing the form of a movable means, a process of determining a movable mode of coupling or separating a plurality of movable members and coupling or separating a plurality of movable members, a process of enlarging or contracting at least a part of the movable means. A process of determining a mode and enlarging or contracting at least a part of a movable means, a process of determining a movable mode of a movable means including a display section such as a liquid crystal display and moving the movable means, a movable device having a light emitting section capable of emitting light. The process of determining the movable mode of the means and moving the movable means, the process of determining the movable mode of the movable means as a performance and moving the movable means as a performance, the process of moving the movable means as a special figure game (first special figure game or first special figure game) A process of determining the movable mode as a performance in the special pattern game (2 special pattern game) and moving the movable means in the special pattern game, and a process of moving the movable device in a predetermined performance in the special pattern game (the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game). A process of determining a movable mode to notify the player whether or not to execute Super Reach and moving the movable means, and determining a movable mode to notify the player whether or not to execute Super Reach and moving the movable means. A process of determining a movable mode for notifying the player of whether or not a special reach is to be executed by the movable means, and a process of moving the movable means, and a process of determining whether the movable means is in a more advantageous state than the previously suggested state. The process of determining the movable mode to be announced and moving the movable means, the process of determining the movable mode and moving the movable means in a movable mode that clearly or suggests that the expectation of jackpot is high, and the process of determining the movable mode and moving the movable means in a movable mode that clearly indicates or suggests that the expectation of jackpot is high. The process of determining a movable mode to announce something and moving the movable means, and after indicating a probability variable jackpot, determining a movable mode to announce that it is a probability variable jackpot with a higher expected ball payout value and moving the movable means. The process of moving the game, the process of determining the movable mode and moving the movable means after suggesting that it is a jackpot, and announcing that it is a guaranteed variable jackpot after suggesting that it is a jackpot, and the process of announcing that it is a time-saving jackpot after suggesting that it is a jackpot. A process of determining a movable mode to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the ball entrance (opening or closing the ball entrance) and moving the movable means. , allowing or restricting the entry of game balls into the ball entrance (opening the ball entrance), which provides an opportunity to execute a special map game (first special map game or second special map game) by entering the game ball. The process of determining the movable mode of the movable means (or closing) and moving the movable means, and the process of determining the movable mode of the movable means in the special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) and performing the special figure game (first special figure game) A process of moving the movable means in a special figure game or a second special figure game), a process of determining the movable mode of the movable means in a jackpot game and moving the movable means in a jackpot game, a process of moving the movable means at the opening of a jackpot game. A process of determining a movable mode and moving the movable means in the opening, a process of determining a movable mode of the movable means in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game and moving the movable means in the opening/closing execution mode, and a process of moving the movable means in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. A process of determining the movable mode of the movable means in a round game and moving the movable means in the round game, a process of determining a movable mode of the movable means at the interval of the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game and moving the movable means at the interval. , A process of determining the movable mode of the movable means at the ending of the jackpot game and moving the movable means at the ending, and a process of determining the movable mode of the movable means that opens or closes the ball entrance (variable prize opening) that is opened and closed in the round game. The process of determining and moving the movable means in a round game, determining the movable mode that allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance by the movable means (opening or closing the ball entrance) and moving the movable means processing, allowing or restricting the entry of game balls into the ball entrance (ball entrance The process of determining the movable mode of the movable means (opening or closing) and moving the movable means, which is opened and closed in a round game, and provides an opportunity to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the jackpot game due to the entry of a game ball. The process of determining the movable mode of the movable means that opens or closes the ball entry hole (V winning hole) and moving the movable means, which is opened and closed in a round game, and enters a variable game state after the end of the jackpot game due to the entry of a game ball. The process of determining the movable mode of the movable means to open or close the ball entry hole (V winning hole) that provides an opportunity for transition, and moving the movable means, which is opened and closed in a round game, and when the game ball enters the jackpot game. The process of determining and moving the movable mode of the movable means that opens or closes the ball entrance (V winning hole) that provides an opportunity to shift to the time-saving gaming state after the end, and the movable mode of the movable means that switches the flow path of the game ball. Examples include a process of determining the value and moving the movable means, and an arbitrary combination thereof.

The specific information may be a data group as long as it is set in one setting process corresponding to various movable modes of the movable means and allows the movable means to execute a series of operations based on the information set in one setting process. . As the specific information, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a task table (driving data 1) that causes the movable means to execute a series of operations through multiple processes, a task table (drive data 1) that causes the movable means to execute a series of operations through multiple processes, etc. a task table (driving data 1) for controlling the drive source (for example, a motor) of the movable means in order to operate the movable means in various movable modes in a special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game); , information for operating the movable means in various movable modes in a jackpot game, information for operating the movable means in various movable modes in a small win game, information for operating the movable means in various movable modes in a regular winning game, information on a linear path. information for operating the movable means in various movable modes along a curved path, information for operating the movable means in various movable modes along a non-linear path, information for operating the movable means in various movable modes along a curved path, and two positions. Information for operating the movable means in a movable manner in which the movable means is reciprocated at least once between the two, information for rotating the movable means in various movable manners, and movable manner in which the tip of the movable means is moved along an arcuate path around a fulcrum. information corresponding to various movable modes that change the shape of the movable means, information corresponding to various movable modes that combine or separate a plurality of movable members, and at least part of the movable means. Information corresponding to various movable modes for enlarging or contracting the game ball, information for opening and closing the ball entrance into which a game ball can enter in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means, and an opportunity to execute a special figure game by entering a game ball. information that opens and closes the prize opening that awards prize balls in various movable manners by the operation of a movable means, information that opens and closes the ball entrance that awards a prize ball when a game ball enters in various movable manners by the operation of a movable means, special figure game (1st special figure game or 2nd special figure game), information for opening and closing in various movable modes by the operation of a movable means the ball entrance that awards a prize ball when a game ball enters the ball; information that opens and closes the entrance ball opening that gives prize balls by the operation of the movable means in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means, and the information that opens and closes the entrance ball entrance that gives the prize ball when the game ball enters in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game by the operation of the movable means. Information for repeatedly opening and closing multiple times in various movable modes, information for opening and closing a ball opening that awards a prize ball by entering a game ball in a round game of a jackpot game in various movable modes by the operation of a movable means; Information set corresponding to the operation of the whole or a part of the movable mode, information corresponding to the operation of the movable means common to a plurality of movable modes, time-series operation of the whole or a part of the movable mode of the movable means (scenario data, drive data), information corresponding to information (scenario data, drive data) indicating the time-series operation of the movable means that is common to multiple movable modes, information corresponding to the whole or part of the movable means in one movable mode. Numerical information set corresponding to the movable time of the movable means, numerical information set corresponding to the number of times the movable means can move in whole or in part in one movable mode, repetition included in one movable mode of the movable means Numerical information set corresponding to all or part of the number of operations, and set corresponding to all or part of the waiting period until the next operation of one movable mode of the movable means is started. Numerical information set corresponding to all or part of the waiting period until the operation of the movable means starts, Numerical information set corresponding to all or part of the waiting period until the operation of the movable means starts, Number of times the ball entrance into which the game ball can enter is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means Numerical information set corresponding to all or part of the maximum number of times that the ball entrance into which the game ball can enter is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means, Numerical information that is set corresponding to all or part of the remaining number of times the ball entrance into which a game ball can enter is opened and closed by the operation of a movable means, and the number of times a ball entry hole into which a game ball can enter is opened and closed in whole or in part; Numerical information set corresponding to all or part of the number of times the ball opening is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means, and the means that moves the ball opening that awards a prize ball when a game ball enters in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game. Numerical information is set corresponding to all or part of the number of times the ball is repeatedly opened and closed by the operation of the movable means, and in a round game of a jackpot game, the ball entry opening that awards a prize ball when a game ball enters is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means. Numerical information set corresponding to all or a part of the number of times, all or part of the maximum number of times that the ball entrance that awards a prize ball by entering a game ball in a round game of a jackpot game is opened and closed by the operation of a movable means. Numerical information set corresponding to the part corresponds to all or a part of the remaining number of times the ball entry hole that awards a prize ball by entering a game ball in a round game of a jackpot game is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means. Examples include numerical information to be set and arbitrary combinations thereof.

The series of specific operations may be any operation performed within the movable range of the movable means. As a series of specific operations, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, continuous operations performed within the movable range of the movable means, or between the starting point (return side position) and the return position (drive side position). An operation in which the movable means is reciprocated at least once, a standby position (return side position) when the movable means is in a non-driving state, and a maximum movable position (the farthest position from the standby position) when the movable means is in a driven state. The movable means is reciprocated at least once between the drive side position)), and the movable means is set at an intermediate position between the standby position and the maximum movable position as a starting point (return side position) or a turning position (drive side position). An operation in which the movable means is reciprocated at least once at least once, an operation in which the movable means is reciprocated at least once with the standby position as the starting point (return side position) and the intermediate position as the turning position (drive side position), the intermediate position as the starting point (return side position) An operation in which the movable means is reciprocated at least once with the maximum movable position as the return position (drive side position), and one of the mutually different intermediate positions as the starting point (return side position) and the other intermediate position as the return position (drive side position), an operation in which the movable means is reciprocated at least once, an operation that includes at least one movement of the movable means in the direction toward the standby position, and an operation in which the movable means is moved in the direction toward the maximum movable position. An operation that includes movement at least once, an operation that moves the movable means in a direction toward the standby position and positions the movable means at or near the standby position (return side position) at least once, The operation of moving the movable means in the direction toward the maximum movable position (drive side position) or positioning the movable means at least once in the vicinity thereof, the operation of moving the movable means in the direction toward the standby position (return side position) The operation of positioning the movable means at least once at the position, the operation of moving the movable means in the direction toward the maximum movable position (drive side position) and positioning the movable means at least once at an intermediate position, and the operation of moving the movable means at a predetermined position. Rotation of the means, rotation of the movable means at the standby position (return side position), rotation of the movable means at the maximum movable position (drive side position), rotation of the movable means at the intermediate position, actuation of the movable means The action of opening and closing the winning opening at least once by activating the ball opening, the action of opening and closing the ball entry opening at least once by operating the movable means in the special drawing game (first special drawing game or second special drawing game), jackpot game The operation of opening and closing the winning opening at least once by operating the movable means in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game, the operation of opening and closing the winning opening at least once by operating the movable means in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game, the movable means in the round game of the jackpot game. The operation of opening and closing the winning hole at least once by activating the , the operation of opening and closing the ball entrance at least once by activating the movable means in a small winning game, and the operation of opening and closing the ball entrance at least once by activating the movable means in a winning game. Examples include actions of opening and closing the ball mouth at least once, arbitrary combinations thereof, and the like.

The first position and the second position may be different positions set within the movable range of the movable means. As the first position and the second position, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, the standby position (return side position) when the movable means is in a non-driving state, and the maximum position when the movable means is in a driving state. Movable position (the position furthest from the standby position (drive side position)), an intermediate position set between the standby position and the maximum movable position (the farthest position from the standby position), and the maximum movable position among the intermediate positions. A position closer to the standby position than the position, a position near the standby position among the intermediate positions, a position closer to the maximum movable position than the standby position among the intermediate positions, a position near the maximum movable position among the intermediate positions , the starting point (return side position) when the movable means performs a reciprocating motion, the return position (drive side position) when the movable means performs a reciprocating motion, the rotational position when the movable means performs a rotational motion, and the movable means expanded. A position where movement or contraction is performed, a position where multiple movable members are combined or separated, a position where the ball entrance into which game balls can enter is closed (return side position) or opened (drive side position) position), position to close (return side position) or open position (drive side position) to generate a special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) triggered by the entry of a game ball. ), a position where the ball entrance is closed (return side position) or opened (drive side position), where the ball entrance is allowed in the jackpot game and a prize ball is awarded when the game ball enters, and the ball entry hole is allowed in the jackpot game. The position where the ball entry port is closed (return side position) or opened (drive side position), which generates a certain variable gaming state when a game ball enters, is said to be the position where the ball enters in a jackpot game, and the game ball enters the game ball. A position where the ball entrance is closed (return side position) or opened (drive side position), which generates a time-saving gaming state when the ball enters, and the ball entrance is allowed to enter in small winning games, and the entry of the game ball is A position where the ball entrance is closed (return side position) or opened (drive side position), which generates a jackpot game as a trigger, and a ball entry is possible in a small winning game, and the time-saving game state is triggered by the entry of a game ball. Examples include a position where the ball entry port is closed (return side position), a position where it is opened (drive side position), and any combination thereof.

The termination condition may be any condition that causes the series of specific operations of the movable means to be terminated. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the termination condition may be, for example, that the maximum operating time of the movable means has elapsed, or that subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter, etc.) set corresponding to the maximum operating time of the movable means has elapsed. ) is 0 or the addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, the maximum number of movements of the movable means has elapsed, and the subtraction type numerical information ( (subtraction type counter, etc.) is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, all processes specified by the operation data set for the operation of the movable means are completed, and the movable means The number of times the means returns to the predetermined position is a specified number of times, and subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) that defines the number of times the movable means returns to the predetermined position is 0 or additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value, the movable means has completed a specified number of reciprocating movements, and the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means is 0 or is an additive type. The numerical information (additional counter, etc.) is at the maximum value, the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the special figure game are completed, and the specified number of reciprocating operations of the movable means in the special figure game is completed. The set subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value, and the operating means operable by the player is operated by the player; The operating means is operated by the player within a preset predetermined period, the predetermined period elapses without the player operating the operating means, and the maximum movable time of the movable means is set. The operating means is operated by the player within a predetermined period, the predetermined period set as the maximum movable time of the movable means passes without the operating means being operated by the player, and the movable means is operated in a jackpot game. The specified number of reciprocating movements is completed, and the subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter, etc.) set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the jackpot game is 0 or the addition type numerical information (addition type counter) etc.) is the maximum value, the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the small winning game are completed, and the subtraction formula value is set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the small winning game. The information (subtraction type counter, etc.) is 0 or the addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, the movable means has completed the specified number of reciprocating movements in the game per ordinary figure, the game per ordinary figure The subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter, etc.) set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating operations of the movable means in , is 0 or the addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, The winning opening opened and closed by the operation has been opened and closed a specified number of times, and the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in response to the opening and closing of the winning opening the specified number of times by the operation of the movable means is 0 or increment. The formula numerical information (additional counter, etc.) is at the maximum value, and the winning opening opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) has been opened and closed the specified number of times. In the special figure game (the first special figure game or the second special figure game), the subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter, etc.) that is set in response to the opening and closing of the winning opening a specified number of times by the operation of the movable means. 0 or the addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, the winning opening opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the jackpot game has been opened and closed a specified number of times, and the winning hole is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the jackpot game. If the subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter, etc.) set corresponding to the opening and closing of the winning opening a specified number of times (a predetermined number of round games corresponding to the jackpot type) is 0 or the addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, that the opening and closing of the winning opening opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the small winning game has been completed the specified number of times, and that the winning opening has been opened and closed a specified number of times by the operation of the movable means in the small winning game. Regulations for the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) to be set to be 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) to be the maximum value, and for the prize opening to be opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the game with common figures. When the number of openings and closings are completed, and when the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) that is set in response to the opening and closing of the winning opening a specified number of times due to the operation of the movable means in the normal game is 0 or the additive numerical information ( Examples include the fact that the value of an incrementing type counter, etc.) is at its maximum value, the occurrence of an error in the operation of the movable means, and any combination thereof.

The determining means may determine whether or not the termination condition is satisfied. As a determination means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, determination of whether the maximum movable time of the movable means has elapsed, and subtractive numerical information set corresponding to the maximum movable time of the movable means may be used. Determining whether or not (subtraction type counter, etc.) is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, determining whether the maximum number of times the movable means has passed, the maximum number of movable means Determination of whether the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set corresponding to the number of movements is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value, and for the operation of the movable means Determining whether all processes specified by the set operation data have been completed, determining whether the number of times the movable means has returned to a predetermined position is a predetermined number of times, and returning the movable means to a predetermined position. Determine whether the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) that specifies the number of times is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value, and determine whether the reciprocating movement of the movable means has completed the specified number of times. Determine whether or not the subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter, etc.) set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means is 0 or the addition type numerical information (addition type counter etc.) is the maximum value. Judgment whether or not the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the special figure game have been completed, Subtraction formula set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the special figure game Determining whether numerical information (subtraction type counter, etc.) is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, and determining whether the player has operated the operation means that can be operated by the player. Determination, Determination of whether or not the operating means has been operated by the player within a preset predetermined period, Determination of whether or not the predetermined period of time has elapsed without the player operating the operating means; Determining whether or not the operating means is operated by the player within a predetermined period set as the maximum movable time of the movable means, and determining whether or not the operating means is operated by the player within the predetermined period set as the maximum movable time of the movable means. determination whether or not the specified number of reciprocating operations of the movable means in the jackpot game have been completed; Determine whether the subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter, etc.) is 0 or the addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value. Judgment whether or not the subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter, etc.) set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the small winning game is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter etc.) is the maximum value, determining whether the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the game per normal figure has been completed, and determining whether the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in the game per normal figure has been completed. Determining whether the correspondingly set subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter, etc.) is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, and winning openings that are opened and closed by the operation of the movable means. Judgment whether or not opening/closing of the stipulated number of times has been completed, subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter, etc.) set in response to opening/closing of the winning slot a specified number of times by operation of the movable means is 0 or addition type numerical value Determining whether information (additional counter, etc.) is at the maximum value, opening/closing a specified number of times for the winning opening that is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) Determination of whether or not the game has ended, subtraction type numerical information set in response to the opening and closing of the winning opening a specified number of times by the operation of the movable means in the special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) Determining whether or not (subtraction type counter, etc.) is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, and opening and closing of the specified number of times for the winning opening that is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the jackpot game is completed. Judgment as to whether or not the prize winning slot is opened and closed a specified number of times by the operation of the movable means in a jackpot game (a predetermined number of round games corresponding to the type of jackpot). etc.) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at the maximum value, and whether the winning opening opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the small winning game has been opened and closed the specified number of times. Judgment of whether or not the subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter, etc.) set in response to opening and closing of the winning opening a specified number of times by the operation of the movable means in the small winning game is 0 or the addition type numerical information (addition type counter etc.) ) is the maximum value, determining whether or not the winning opening opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in a game with a normal figure has been opened and closed the specified number of times, Determining whether subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in response to opening and closing of the winning opening a specified number of times by operation is 0 or addition numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value; Examples include determining whether an error has occurred in the operation of the movable means, and any combination thereof.

By the way, a gaming machine is provided with a movable body that is driven in various games. The movable body is used, for example, in a special game that announces the result of a jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the prize opening, or in a jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. It is moved in a movable manner, including continuous motion, such as reciprocating motion. In controlling the movable body, it is desired to perform operation control and termination control of the movable body with more efficient control.

In a gaming machine, a movable body is moved while a display effect is being performed on a display means. As for the movable mode of the movable body, a plurality of movable modes are provided to increase interest. The movable form mentioned here includes the locus of motion of the movable body, the number of motions, the amount of motion, etc., and also naturally includes combinations thereof. The movable body performs various operations between the predetermined initial position and the movable limit position. At this time, the control unit that controls the movable body is required to control the movable body more appropriately by sharing control and data for common movable modes in order to simplify control and reduce the amount of data. There is. This not only reduces the memory load by reducing the amount of drive data used for one movable mode, but also reduces the number of times drive data must be read and temporarily stored (set) when operating the movable body. control burden) is reduced. When the movable body is operated based on common drive data, after all control processing based on the common drive data is completed, the subsequent motion of the movable body is individually controlled according to each movable mode. The next operation of the movable body is executed based on the set drive data.

However, even when a common movable mode is executed, the termination conditions and termination timing for ending the common movable mode and proceeding to the next operation may differ depending on the movable mode to be executed. For this reason, in conventional movable object control, it has not been possible to efficiently control the end of a predetermined movable mode and control the transition to the next operation.

In contrast, an object of the present invention is to efficiently control the end of a predetermined movable mode and control the transition to the next operation.

Specifically, in gaming machines, for example, during execution of display effects on the display means in various games, the performance is improved by moving a performance accessory, which is a type of movable body, and the interest of the game is improved. is planned. For example, the movable body is driven to suggest that a special figure game will develop into a super reach (SP reach) or a special reach (SPSP reach) during execution of a display effect on the display means, After announcing that it is a normal jackpot, it is driven to suggest that it is a variable probability jackpot in the special figure game or the jackpot game that is executed after the end of the special figure game. In this case, after the movable body performs a continuous movement such as a reciprocating movement, the movable body performs an action that makes an announcement advantageous to the player or an action that makes an announcement that is disadvantageous to the player according to the subsequent notification content. (or the movable body is not operated).

In addition, when controlling a performance accessory that is a type of movable body, when the movable body is moved in one movable mode determined from a plurality of movable modes, a common operation in those movable modes (for example, the above-mentioned One common drive data (see FIG. 132) is used for continuous motion (such as reciprocating motion). This drive data is stored in the ROM, read out from the ROM in response to common operations of movable bodies in various movable modes, and set (temporarily stored) in the RAM in one setting process. This is a data group that causes a common continuous motion of a movable body to be executed by multiple processes based on the information set in . Specifically, the drive data in this embodiment controls the stepping motor in order to execute three types of reciprocating motions with different motion amounts and motion trajectories of the movable body as continuous motions common to a plurality of movable modes. It is set as a task table, and by sequentially executing the processes specified by this task table, the movable body gradually moves forward from the top of the display unit toward the center while reciprocating, and then returns to the initial position. A continuous operation is performed. In this way, by setting one common drive data for a common continuous operation in a plurality of movable modes, the amount of drive data used for one movable mode can be reduced. Not only can the memory burden be reduced, but also the control burden such as reading drive data from the ROM and setting it in the RAM (temporary storage) when operating the movable body is reduced. When the movable body is operated based on common drive data, after all control processing based on the common drive data is completed, the subsequent motion of the movable body is individually controlled according to each movable mode. The next operation of the movable body is executed based on the set drive data.

On the other hand, the player's operation on the operation button 20 may be valid during a predetermined period set during the execution period of the continuous motion of the movable body. In this case as well, the drive is individually set for the subsequent movement of the movable body after all control processing based on the common drive pattern data is completed, not at the timing when the operation on the operation button 20 is executed. The next motion of the movable body is executed based on the pattern data.

However, the timing at which the operation button 20 is operated during the predetermined period in which the operation on the operation button 20 is valid is not uniform but irregular. Therefore, the time from when the operation button 20 is operated until the end of the control processing of the movable body based on the common drive data is not uniform and is indefinite. That is, after the end determination condition for a common continuous motion in a plurality of movable modes is satisfied by operating the operation button 20, the end control of the movable body for the common continuous motion may not be executed immediately. Therefore, the time required for the next motion to start after a common motion of the movable body is uneven, making it difficult for the movable body to smoothly transition from the common continuous motion to the next motion. Sometimes there isn't. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable because the movement of the movable body cannot be smoothly transitioned. In particular, for example, when the operation button 20 is operated immediately after the start of a predetermined period in which the operation on the operation button 20 is valid, the movement of the operation button 20 is less than when the operation button 20 is operated immediately before the end of the predetermined period. It takes a long time for the player's body to perform the next action, and it is not possible to immediately move on to the next action after the operation button 20 is operated. It is easy to feel uncomfortable when the movement does not move on to the next movement. As mentioned above, the movable body may be operated to indicate whether or not to make various announcements during the execution of display effects in special figure games and jackpot games, so in this case, The sense of discomfort felt by the player due to the movement of the movable body causes a reduction in the performance effect of the movable body.

In contrast, in the present invention, when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the movable control means moves the ball while the display means is displaying one specific performance according to the lottery result of the win/fail lottery means. One movement aspect for the means is determined. Further, in the present invention, while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the movable control means executes a series of specific operations for the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movable mode. .

Furthermore, in the present invention, while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the movable control means executes a series of specific operations for the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movable mode. In this case, when the movable means is located at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, the determining means determines whether or not a condition for ending the series of specific operations is satisfied. In this way, when the movable control means executes a series of specific operations for the movable means based on the specific information set corresponding to the one movable mode while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, When the movable means is located at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, the determination means determines whether or not the termination condition for a series of specific operations is satisfied, thereby performing movable control based on specific information. In a series of specific operations of the movable means by the means, each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, by the movable control means, the determination means determines whether the termination condition is satisfied. be done. Further, in the present invention, when the determining means determines that the termination condition is satisfied in the series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on the specific information, the termination means causes the position to be moved to the first position or its vicinity. The movement of the movable means is stopped, and the series of specific operations is completed. That is, in the present invention, in a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on the specific information, even before all movable control of the movable means based on the specific information is completed, the movable means is moved to the first position or in the vicinity thereof. Each time the movable means is positioned, the termination means can stop the movement of the movable means and terminate the series of specific operations, provided that the termination condition is satisfied. As a result, when the termination condition is satisfied during execution of a series of specific operations of the movable means, the movement of the movable means based on the specific information is performed at the stage where the movable means is located at or near the first position after the termination condition is satisfied. It is possible to stop and complete a series of specific operations. As a result, when it is determined that the conditions for ending a series of specific operations are satisfied, the series of specific operations of the movable means can be immediately terminated, so that termination control of the movable means can be performed smoothly. can. Therefore, in the present invention, since it is possible to smoothly transition from a series of specific operations of the movable means to the next operation, the player is not made to feel uncomfortable after it is determined that the termination condition for the series of specific operations is satisfied. , the series of specific operations of the movable means can be completed. Therefore, when another individual operation is subsequently performed after a series of specific operations of the movable means is completed, it is possible to smoothly transition from the series of specific operations to the other individual operations. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning to the action. Thereby, even if the movable means is operated for the purpose of presentation while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, it becomes possible to operate the movable means without impairing the presentation effect.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the result of the jackpot lottery executed by lottery processing triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 as a ball entry starting part is announced. In the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a display effect is set by a special figure game effect setting process as a display control process, and a display variation pattern command is received by the display control device 6 as a display control process. A display effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 according to the processing of the case. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 as a movable body during execution of display performance is determined from a plurality of movable modes A to D by the accessory motion effect setting process as the movable body control process. , The movable rotating accessory member 37 as a movable body is movable based on one movable mode determined from a plurality of movable modes A to D during execution of display performance by the movable rotating accessory control process as the movable body control process. be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, one drive data is used for operations in drive patterns A to C, which are common continuous operations in a plurality of movable modes A to D, and in which the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be indefinite. The movable rotary accessory member 37 as a movable body is moved based on the information of 1 (accessory object movement scenario data), and after the operation in drive patterns A to C is completed, individual movement according to each movable mode A to D is performed. The movable rotary accessory member 37 as a movable body is moved in one of the drive patterns D to G as a continuous operation based on the information of the drive data 2 to 5. In this way, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved based on the information of one drive data 1 for the operations in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations in the plurality of movable modes A to D. Not only can the memory load be reduced because the amount of drive data used for the movable modes A to D of 1 can be reduced, but it is also possible to control readout and temporary storage of drive data when operating the movable rotating accessory member 37. The burden is reduced.

In the present embodiment, the operations in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the plurality of movable modes A to D, and in which the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be undefined, constitute one drive. When executed based on the information of data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data), the movable rotation is moved from the drive side position, intermediate actuation position 1 or intermediate actuation position 2, to the return side position, the standby position or intermediate actuation position 1. At the timing when the accessory member 37 is returned, it is determined whether the end determination condition for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, is satisfied, that is, whether the operation button 20 has been operated by the player. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the conditions for determining the end of the operation in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the plurality of movable modes A to D, are not satisfied, the operation in the plurality of movable modes A to D is continued. The operations in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in to D, are continued. On the other hand, if the conditions for determining the end of the operation in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the plurality of movable modes A to D, are satisfied (the operation on the operation button 20 by the player is In some cases), even if the movable rotating accessory member 37 is in the middle of the operation in the drive patterns A to C, which are common movements of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the information of the drive data 1 (accessories action scenario data), the movable rotating accessory member 37 The operations in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the object member 37, are completed. Then, based on the information of individual drive data 2 to 5 corresponding to each movable mode A to D determined according to the notification content, it is movable by movement in drive patterns D to G, which are individual movements as continuous movements. The movable rotary accessory member 37 as a body is moved.

As described above, in this embodiment, based on the information of drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data), drive patterns A to C, which are common movements of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in a plurality of movable modes A to D, are created. When the operation is executed based on the information of one drive data 1 (accessory object operation scenario data), the common rotation accessory member 37 is returned from the drive side position to the return side position at the timing It is determined whether the conditions for determining the end of the motions in drive patterns A to C, which are motions, are satisfied (whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player). In other words, in the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, each time the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the return side position, it is determined whether or not the end determination condition is met. It is determined whether the player operates the operation button 20 or not. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied in the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations (when the player presses the operation button 20 If it is determined that there has been an operation), the movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 located at the return side position is stopped, and the operations in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, are completed. As a result, if the end determination condition for the operation in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, is satisfied during the execution of the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive patterns A to C, which are the common operations, the end is completed. At the stage when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is located at the return side position after the determination condition is satisfied, the movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped and the operations in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, are completed. Can be done. As a result, if it is determined that the conditions for determining the end of the common motion in the drive patterns A to C are satisfied, the common motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the drive patterns A to C is immediately terminated. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to immediately shift to the next operation from the satisfaction of the termination determination condition of a continuous operation, which is common to the plurality of movable modes A to D, and the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be indefinite. As a result, after it is determined that the termination determination conditions of the plurality of movable modes A to D are satisfied, the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is terminated without causing any discomfort to the player, and the movable body is moved to the next operation. The transition can be made smoothly. Therefore, when another individual action is subsequently performed after the common action of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is completed, the common action can smoothly transition to the other individual action. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning to the action. As a result, even if the movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated for the purpose of display during execution of the display performance in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the movable rotation can be performed without impairing the production effect. It becomes possible to operate the accessory member 37.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 152, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment.

[Configuration of gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. Here, FIGS. 93 to 95 are front views showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 96 is a front view showing an example of the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 provided on the game board 31. , FIG. 97 is a partially cutaway side view showing the periphery of the movable rotating accessory member 37.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determining section 21, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination section 27, etc. .

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 7) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not it is pressed. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20, as described later (see FIGS. 119 and 120). This operation button 20 is triggered by an operation on the operation button 20 by a player during a predetermined operation reception period in a special figure game performance executed in a special figure game that clearly shows the lottery result of a jackpot lottery to the player. The operation button to be executed is operated to execute the performance (see FIG. 140).

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the game machine 10, when a player performs a rotation operation on the firing handle 22 as a predetermined game operation, a game ball is fired from a game ball firing mechanism 32 (described later) with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A basic game is played. For example, in response to a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 by the player, a game ball is launched to the left side of the game board 31, which is called a left-handed hit, and a game ball is launched to the right side of the game board 31, which is called a right-handed hit. can be executed. In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is encouraged in order to enter the game ball into the first winning hole 314 as the starting ball entry part and execute the first special symbol game, and in the variable probability game state In the time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to execute the second special game by letting the game ball enter the through gate 317R and the second winning hole 315 as the starting ball entry part, and in the jackpot game state, Right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to allow the game ball to enter the variable winning hole 316. Therefore, the player can prevent the occurrence of disadvantages by performing a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 that is encouraged depending on the game state.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game ball firing mechanism 32, a game board 31, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The firing rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and directs the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is something that guides. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and by performing a reciprocating operation that is a continuous movement of a movable body between a return side position and a driving side position, balls are stored in the upper tray 23. The game balls are fed onto the firing rail 321 one ball at a time. The solenoid 323 moves the game ball supplied onto the firing rail 321 to the inner rail 311 and the inner rail 311 by causing the firing hammer, which is a movable body, to perform continuous reciprocating motion between the return side position and the driving side position. This is a driving means for firing toward the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, when the player is performing a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the player's operation of the firing handle 22, and one solenoid is activated every 0.6 seconds. A game ball is fired toward the game area. In addition, the game ball firing mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that fires the game balls using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

As shown in FIG. 93, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning hole 313, a first winning hole 314 and a second winning hole 315 as starting ball entry means, and a variable winning hole. A port 316, through gates 317L and 317R, an out port 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, and a movable rotary accessory member 37 as a movable means are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending out the launched game balls toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, or the variable winning hole 316 are discharged from the out hole 318. be done. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, or the variable winning hole 316, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, if the ball enters the general winning hole 313, the number of prize balls is 10, if the ball enters the first prize hole 314 or the second prize hole 315, the number of prize balls is three, and if the ball enters the variable prize hole 316, the number of prize balls is 3. In this case, the number of prize balls is 10.

In addition, if a game ball enters the through gates 317L, 317R, no prize ball will be paid out, but the game ball entering the through gates 317L, 317R will be used as an opportunity to perform a winning lottery process. Processing is executed. Then, when the result of the winning lottery is a winning lottery, a game winning a winning symbol is executed. In this normal figure winning game, the second prize opening 315, which is the starting ball entry part, is opened by operating the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body. In other words, by executing the movement control process for the electric accessory 315b, one movement mode is determined from a plurality of movement modes (0.1 seconds short opening, 6 seconds long opening), and in the game per normal figure. , 1, the electric accessory 315b moves between the standby position (return side position) where the second winning opening 315 is closed and the operating position (driving side position) where the second winning opening 315 is opened. A continuous motion is carried out, which is moved back and forth. In this way, when the second winning hole 315 is opened in the normal winning game, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315.

Here, in this embodiment, the second winning hole 315 is opened for 0.1 seconds, the movable mode in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315, and the second winning hole 315 is opened for 6 seconds. Two movable modes are set in which the game ball is opened and the game ball can easily enter the second winning hole 315 (see FIG. 103(C) and FIG. 103(D)). Therefore, in the movement control process for the electric accessory 315b, one movement mode is determined from two movement modes in which the ease with which the game ball enters the second prize opening 315 is different and the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be uncertain. Continuous operation of the electric accessory 315b is performed in the determined one movable mode.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 as a starting ball entering section, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41 of the main control device 4) that executes the winning/losing lottery means , a process related to a jackpot lottery as a win/fail lottery process is executed. The result of the jackpot lottery conducted in the main control unit 331 is a special pattern game (first special pattern game or second special pattern game) in which the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is displayed in a variable manner. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed after the special figure game ends. In this jackpot game, round games are repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 or 16 times) in the opening/closing execution mode.In each round game, the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, waits for the variable prize opening 316 to close. It is reciprocated between the position (return side position) and the operating position (drive side position) where the variable winning a prize opening 316 is opened. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, as a movable control process for the opening/closing door 319, the number of round games is determined from a plurality of number of round games (for example, 5 or 16) according to the result of the jackpot lottery, and By executing the round game, a continuous operation in which the opening/closing door 319 is repeatedly moved back and forth is executed. In this way, in the jackpot game, the variable prize opening 316 is repeatedly opened by the continuous operation of the opening/closing door 319, so that a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 97, the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, can be moved up and down, rotated, and expanded/contracted by an accessory drive mechanism 37a (see FIG. 98), although the details will be described later. , is operated in order to provide the player with predetermined information regarding the game in the special figure game. Here, in the present embodiment, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is used to notify the player whether or not a predetermined performance (super reach performance or special reach performance) will be executed, or to inform the player whether or not the result of a jackpot lottery is executed. After suggesting a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot, it is operated in one movable mode determined from a plurality of movable modes in order to notify the player whether or not it is a 16R probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, various notifications are given to the player depending on the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37, and four movable modes are set corresponding to the content of the notice. Specifically, the four movable modes are movable mode A (SP development announcement) that notifies the player that a super reach effect will be executed, and a movable mode that notifies the player that a special reach effect will be executed. B (SPSP development announcement), movable mode C (probability promotion announcement) that announces to the player that it is a guaranteed variable jackpot, and the fact that the prescribed performance (super reach performance or special reach performance) is not executed, or the result of the jackpot lottery. A movable mode D (notice of no development, announcement of no promotion) is set to notify that is not a probability-variable jackpot (normal jackpot) (see FIG. 129).

The movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, may be moved in order to provide the player with predetermined information regarding the game in the jackpot game. For example, when it is specified that the result of a jackpot lottery in a special figure game is a normal jackpot, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved as a probability-variable promotion effect to announce that the result of a jackpot lottery is a probability-variable jackpot in a jackpot game. You can. In addition, if there is a reservation of the right to execute a special drawing game, an announcement that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special drawing game that is executed after the end of the jackpot game is a jackpot (so-called pending consecutive games) (notification), the movable rotating accessory member 37 may be moved in the jackpot game.

In addition, by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the special figure game, depending on the movable mode, it is possible to determine whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special figure game is a jackpot. It may also be possible to notify whether or not there is a high expectation that the announced result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot.

The movable rotating accessory member 37 has a shape resembling a flower when viewed from the front in the reduced state, and is arranged on the front side of the symbol display section 341. Note that the installation location of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not limited to the front side of the symbol display section 341, and can be changed, and may be any location where the movable rotating accessory member 37 is movable and visible to the player. Bye. The movable rotating accessory member 37 includes a plurality of plate-like members 370, a rotating shaft 372, and a plurality of expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373.

The plurality of plate-like members 370 have the same or substantially the same shape imitating flower petals, and are made entirely of resin, for example. Of course, at least one of the plurality of plate members 370 may have a different shape. Moreover, the plurality of plate-like members 370 do not necessarily have to have a shape imitating flower petals.

The rotating shaft 372 is a portion into which rotational driving force is input from an accessory drive mechanism 37a (see FIG. 98), which will be described later, and extends in the front-rear direction of the game board 31 toward the symbol display section 341. The rotating shaft 372 is brought into a rotating state by inputting rotational force from the accessory drive mechanism 37a under the control of the MPU 51, and becomes non-rotating by stopping the input of rotational force from the accessory drive mechanism 37a under the control of the MPU 51. state.

Note that the rotational speed of the rotating shaft 372 (the plurality of plate-like members 370) in the rotating state, that is, the rotational speed of the movable rotating accessory member 37, is not particularly limited and may be constant or indefinite. Furthermore, the rotation speed and rotation direction may be changed.

A plurality of expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 are radially fixed to the rotating shaft 372 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the plurality of expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 can rotate around the rotation shaft 372 by rotating the rotation shaft 372. The rotating shaft 372 is rotatably supported by a support ring 375 fixed to an elevating shaft 374, and movement in the front-rear direction is regulated by a regulating ring 376. Here, the elevating shaft 374 moves the rotating shaft 372 in the vertical direction, and moves the rotating shaft 372 in the vertical direction by a driving force input from an accessory drive mechanism 37a (see FIG. 98), which will be described later. Thereby, the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be moved in the vertical direction as a whole by moving the rotating shaft 372 in the vertical direction.

Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 supports one plate member 370 and can slide the supported plate member 370 along the radial direction of the rotating shaft 372. Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 moves the supported plate-like member 370 along the radial direction of the rotating shaft 372 by converting a rotational force inputted from, for example, a later-described accessory drive mechanism 37a (see FIG. 98) into a linear force. to move the slide. As each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373, a known mechanism that converts rotational force into linear force can be adopted. Specifically, each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 includes an actuator that includes one or more components such as a rack, a screw shaft, a ball screw, an endless belt, a wire, a chain, various gears such as spur gears and bevel gears, and rollers. It will be done. Moreover, each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 may utilize magnetic force or electromagnetic force.

In this way, in the movable rotary accessory member 37, the rotating shaft 372 is rotatably supported by the elevating shaft 374, and the plate-like member 370, 371 is supported in a slidable manner. Therefore, the first rotating accessory member 37 is movable in the vertical direction on the front side of the symbol display section 341, is rotatable around the rotation axis 372, and can be expanded and contracted around the rotation axis 372. .

Here, FIG. 98 is a block diagram showing an example of a main part of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 98, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled in vertical movement, rotation, and expansion/contraction via the accessory drive mechanism 37a controlled by the MPU 51. The accessory drive mechanism 37a is connected to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 via the input/output I/F 52. The accessory drive mechanism 37a includes, for example, a plurality of motors, a return detection section for detecting that the movable rotating accessory member 37 has returned to the standby position, and a motor driver.

The plurality of motors are, for example, stepping motors, DC motors, etc., and the return detection section is, for example, an optical sensor, a contact sensor, etc. Each motor is connected to a rotating shaft 372, a plurality of expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373, and an elevating shaft 374 of the movable rotating accessory member 37 via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear. Driving force is input to the mechanism 373 and the lifting shaft 374. The movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to a standby position (see FIG. 93), which is a predetermined return side position shown in FIG. 94) and the drive side position shown by a solid line in FIG. 94, where the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved most downward and the entire movable rotary accessory member 37 is exposed. It is movable up and down between the positions on the front side of the symbol display section 341. Further, as shown in FIG. 96, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is rotatable in the counterclockwise direction on the front side of the symbol display section 341 by inputting rotational force to the rotation shaft 372. Although the rotational position of the movable rotating accessory member 37 may be any position between the standby position and the operating position, in this embodiment, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is rotated at the operating position. Further, in the movable rotating accessory member 37, each plate-like member 370 is slid in the radial direction of the rotating shaft 372 on the front side of the symbol display section 341 by inputting a driving force to the expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373. It can be scaled up and down. The movable rotating accessory member 37 is rotatable in both the reduced state (see FIG. 96(A)) and the enlarged state (see FIG. 96(B)) on the front side of the symbol display section 341.

Further, the accessory drive mechanism 37a has a motor driver connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. The motor driver then controls each motor according to control instructions from the audio lamp control device 5. Further, the motor driver can acquire the detection result by the return detection section and transmit it to the audio lamp control device 5. Note that the motor driver may be omitted, and each motor and the return detection section may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5.

Note that there is no particular restriction on the configuration for vertically moving, rotating, and expanding/contracting the movable rotary accessory member 37. For example, the driving force for rotating and expanding/contracting the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not limited to that provided by a motor, but may be provided by another driving source such as a solenoid.

Here, with reference to FIG. 99, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform the jackpot lottery and the regular winning lottery will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter storage area 412a, the special symbol reservation storage area 412b, and the regular symbol reservation storage area 412c of the RAM 412 to perform processing related to the jackpot lottery, which is a win/fail lottery process. It executes the execution and setting of the variable display time of special symbols, the execution of processing related to the regular symbol winning lottery which is the win/fail lottery process, and the setting of the variable display time of the regular symbols.

The lottery counter storage area 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used in a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game, as a lottery counter used to execute processing related to a jackpot lottery that is a win/fail lottery process. , a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a reach random number counter used when determining the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss. C3 is stored.

In addition, the lottery counter storage area 412a includes a jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1 as a lottery counter, and the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 or the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36. 2. A special symbol variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation display time of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 363 is stored.

Furthermore, in the lottery counter storage area 412a, the electric accessory 315b of the second prize opening 315 is set in the electric role open state as a lottery counter used to execute the process related to the winning lottery which is the win/fail lottery process. Ordinary hit random number counter C4 used in the lottery to determine whether or not to win a regular symbol, and when sorting the type of winning symbol (short open or long open) when the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to win a regular symbol is a regular symbol. A normal win type random number counter C5 to be used is stored.

In addition, the lottery counter storage area 412a includes a normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2 used for initial value setting of the normal winning random number counter C4 as a lottery counter, and a normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2 used for initial value setting of the normal winning random number counter C4, and a normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2 in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36. A common symbol variation type counter CS2 used to determine the symbol variation display time is stored.

Each of the lottery counters C1 to C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS2 is used as a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. It will be done. Updated values are recorded in each lottery counter C1 to C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS1, and execution of processing related to jackpot lottery, which is win/fail lottery processing, setting of variable display time of special symbols, jackpot type, and loss. It is referred to by the MPU 41 when setting the type, executing processing related to the jackpot lottery that is a win/fail lottery process, setting the variable display time of the normal symbol, setting the type of winning the common symbol, etc.

The special figure reservation storage area 412b includes a first special figure reservation storage area REA, a second special figure reservation storage area REB, and a special figure execution area AE. The first special figure reservation storage area REA includes a first reservation area REA1, a second reservation area REA2, a third reservation area REA3, a fourth reservation area REA4, and a first special figure reservation number storage area NAA. The second special figure reservation storage area REB includes a first reservation area REB1, a second reservation area REB2, a third reservation area REB3, a fourth reservation area REB4, and a second special figure reservation number storage area NAB.

When a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 as the starting ball entry section, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special figure fluctuation type counter stored in the RAM 412 Information corresponding to CS1 is acquired as the special figure success/failure information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315 as the starting ball entry section, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special figure fluctuation type counter stored in the RAM 412 Information corresponding to CS1 is acquired as the special figure win/fail information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. Note that the lottery counter storage area 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special symbol fluctuation (type counter CS1, etc.) may be provided individually.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the first holding area REA1 to the first special drawing holding storage area REA. 4 reservation area REA4, and any of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB.

Therefore, the special drawings stored in the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA and the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REB4 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB are In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game that is executed based on the symbol validity information, the special symbols (symbol display section 341 It is possible to determine in advance the variable display time (special pattern variation pattern) for the decorative pattern).

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first prize opening 314 as the starting ball entry part, the special figure winning/failure information is stored in the first holding area REA1 and second holding area REA2 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA. , the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4 in priority order. In the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA, the number of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 in which special figure validity information is stored is stored as the first special figure reservation number N.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second prize opening 315 serving as the starting ball entry section, the special figure winning/failure information is stored in the first holding area REB1, second holding area REB2, and second holding area REB2 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB. They are stored in vacant areas in priority order of the third reservation area REB3 and the fourth reservation area REB4. In the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, the number of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 in which the special symbol validity information is stored is stored as the second special figure reservation number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA, and the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REB4 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB. With a total of 8 storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations, it is possible to store up to 4 pieces of special drawing win/fail information as the winning history in the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315 as the starting ball entry section. It is possible.

In addition, it is also possible as another embodiment that a holding area with a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common to the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315 as the starting ball entry part, and even in this case. It is possible to retain up to eight pieces of special drawing winning history information in total. The storage process of the special figure validity information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

The special symbol execution area AE is the first special symbol execution area AE in the first special symbol holding storage area REA when variable display of special symbols starts in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36. This storage area is used to move the special symbol validity information stored in the first reservation area REB1 of the first reservation area REA1 or the second special symbol reservation storage area REB. Specifically, the special figure validity information in the first holding area REB1 of the second special figure holding storage area REB is prioritized and moved to the special figure execution area AE, and When there is no special symbol validity information in REB1 and the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage area NAB is 0, the first reservation area of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA The special figure validity information of REA1 is moved to the special figure execution area AE. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game, and in the variable probability game state and the time-saving game state, which are high-frequency support modes, the game ball is placed on the right side area of the game board 31. The second special figure game is mainly executed by executing a so-called right-handed hit.

In addition, the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA and the second special figure reservation number storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area REB If the difference from the second special figure reservation number M stored in NAB is 2 or more, the value of the reservation area with a larger number may be given priority and moved to the special figure execution area AE. Other embodiments are possible. In addition, the special figure validity information of the first holding area REA1 of the first special figure holding storage area REA and the first holding area REB1 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB may be alternately moved to the special figure execution area AE. Other embodiments are possible.

Then, at the start of one special figure game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on numerical information stored as special figure success/failure information in the special figure execution area AE. At this time, if the first holding area REA1 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA is moved to the special drawing execution area AE, the special drawing validity information stored in the second holding area REA2 will be changed to the first holding area REA1. The special symbol validity information stored in the third reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the special symbol validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first holding area REB1 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB is moved to the special drawing execution area AE, the special drawing validity information stored in the second holding area REB2 is transferred to the first holding area REB1. The special symbol validity information stored in the third reservation area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the special symbol validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. will be returned to. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated in the same way as the jackpot random number counter C1. In the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special figure holding storage area REA1 or the second special figure holding storage area REA2, game balls are placed in the first prize opening as the starting ball entry area. 314 or the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the timing of winning the second prize opening 315 is stored.

There are two types of random number values for winning the jackpot, depending on the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area in the ROM 411, corresponding to the low probability mode which is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state, and the high probability mode which is the variable probability gaming state. It is set. Here, FIG. 100(A) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode validity table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 100(B) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode validity table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 100(A) and 100(B), the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot probability) is set to the game setting value as a low probability mode win/fail table and a high probability mode win/fail table, respectively. A plurality of different validity tables are provided depending on the situation. The low probability mode success/failure table and the high probability mode success/failure table each include six success/failure tables corresponding to six levels of game setting values 1 to 6. In the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high jackpot probability that is advantageous to the player. becomes.

With game setting value 1, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 206 (0 to 205) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 821 (0 to 820) probability mode validity tables. That is, with the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/79.1, which is about 4 times that in the low probability mode. 9 (820/65536).

With game setting value 2, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 212 (0 to 211) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 845 (0 to 844) probability mode validity tables. That is, at game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/77.1, which is about four times that of the low probability mode. 6 (845/65536).

With game setting value 3, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 218 (0 to 217) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 869 (0 to 868) probability mode validity tables. In other words, at game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

With game setting value 4, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 224 (0 to 223) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 893 (0 to 892) probability mode validity tables. That is, with the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

At game setting value 5, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 230 (0 to 229) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 917 (0 to 916) probability mode validity tables. That is, at game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

With game setting value 6, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 236 (0 to 235) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 236 (0 to 235) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 941 (0 to 940) probability mode validity tables. That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

It should be noted that if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers that result in a jackpot win, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

Here, in the low-probability mode win/fail table and the high-probability mode win/fail table, the random numbers that result in a jackpot are common in jackpot drawings between the same game setting values, but it is also possible that the random numbers that become a jackpot are not common. It will be done. Furthermore, the random numbers that result in a jackpot win may not be continuous values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

Further, six low probability mode success/failure tables and six high probability mode success/failure tables are provided according to the six levels of game setting values, but it is sufficient that there is at least one success/failure table for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low probability mode success/failure tables corresponding to game setting values at multiple levels, while providing one high probability mode success/failure table. That is, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of stages of game setting values for the low probability mode, and to make the jackpot probability uniform without providing a staged game setting value for the high probability mode. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be made uniform, and a plurality of levels of game setting values may be provided in the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots, variable jackpot and normal jackpot, is set according to the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 100(C) is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 100(C), when the type of special figure game is the first special figure game triggered by winning in the first winning hole 314 as the starting ball entry part, the random number that results in a 5R probability variable jackpot is The numbers are 10 from 0 to 9, the random numbers for a 16R probability variable jackpot are five from 10 to 14, and the numbers for a 5R normal jackpot are five from 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of special figure game is a second special figure game triggered by winning in the second winning hole 315 as the starting ball entry part, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R probability variable jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4. The number of random numbers that result in a 16R variable jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is set to be the same at 75%, but compared to the first special symbol game, the probability of winning is 16R in the second special symbol game. The probability of winning a jackpot is set high. That is, in the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b) and the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the normal game state (low probability mode and electric Compared to the low-frequency support mode (in which the probability of opening the accessory 315b is low), the expected value of acquiring game balls when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set higher.

In both the first special figure game and the second special figure game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability-variable jackpot, the probability-variable game state (high probability mode and high-frequency support mode) is entered after the end of the jackpot game. Transition. In the gaming machine 10, no upper limit is set for the number of special symbol games that can be executed in the variable probability gaming state, and the gaming machine 10 is configured as a so-called loop probability variable machine.

Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is entered after the jackpot game ends. In the gaming machine 10, an upper limit value (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special figure games that can be executed in the time-saving game state (number of time-saving games), and a jackpot is achieved within this upper limit value of the number of special figure games. If the result of the lottery is not a jackpot, a transition is made to a normal game state which is a low-frequency support mode after the execution of the special figure game of the upper limit value. Note that the number of times the special figure game is played in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100 times, but may be another number of times.

In addition, the transition from the variable probability gaming state to the normal gaming state is not limited to the case where the special figure game with the upper limit value is executed, but may be executed, for example, when the state transition lottery (fall lottery) is won. . In this case, until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times, the transition (fall) from the variable probability game state to the normal game state is prevented, and the predetermined number of times is set as the minimum number of special figure games to be executed in the variable probability game state. Guarantees may also be considered. This prevents the number of special figure games executed in variable probability game states from becoming significantly reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first winning hole 314 serves as a starting ball entry section that becomes an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game upon winning, and the starting ball entry section that serves as an opportunity to execute the second special symbol game upon winning a prize. An individual allocation table is set for each second winning hole 315, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. However, it is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop-probability machine, but may also be configured as an ST machine including a V-ST machine, a one-type and two-type mixed machine, or the like.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", " It is determined whether it is a "5R normal jackpot" or a "miss".

Here, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R definite variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, the variable prize opening in the jackpot game is determined based on the movable body aspect of the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body set for the 5R jackpot. An opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which 316 is opened in a predetermined manner is repeated five times. In addition, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R jackpot, the opening and closing of the round game will be repeated 16 times in the jackpot game based on the movable body mode of the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body set for the 16R jackpot. Execution mode is executed. In other words, in the jackpot game, information corresponding to the movable body mode according to the number of round games in the jackpot game determined according to the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is set, and based on this information, the jackpot game The opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body depending on the number of round games of is moved back and forth by continuous motion.

In addition, each round game is started when the maximum opening time of the variable prize opening 316 has elapsed, or when the player performs an appropriate predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22, as described below. Since the game ends when the maximum winning number of game balls enters the previous game, the timing at which the end determination condition for each round game is satisfied may be indefinite. Since the timing at which the end determination condition is satisfied may be indefinite, the period during which the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, is moved to the operating position, which is the drive side position, in each round game is indefinite. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 319 is continuously operated, at least the first period (for example, when the maximum opening of the variable prize opening 316 A second period that is longer than the first period (for example, when the maximum opening time of the variable winning hole 316 has elapsed). .

Further, since the timing at which the termination determination condition is satisfied may be indefinite, the timing at which the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game) ends may also be indefinite, and as a result, the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game) may also be indefinite. In other words, as the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game), depending on the type of jackpot game, at least the first period corresponding to the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game) of the 5R certain variable jackpot game and the 5R normal jackpot game. and a second period that is longer than the first period corresponding to the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game) of the 16R probability variable jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, in one round game in a jackpot game, there is a standby position (return side position) where the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, closes the variable winning opening 316, and a waiting position (return side position) where the variable winning opening 316 is closed. The movable body is moved back and forth once between the operating position (driving side position) that opens the A certain opening/closing door 319 is reciprocated multiple times between a standby position (return side position) that closes the variable winning opening 316 and an operating position (driving side position) that opens the variable winning opening 316, and the end determination condition is satisfied. It is also possible to set a plurality of opening/closing modes of the variable prize opening 316 (moving modes of the opening/closing door 319 which is a movable body) for the jackpot game by adopting a movable mode of continuous operation where the timing can be indefinite.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, the maximum opening time of the variable winning hole in each round game in the jackpot game is uniform, but by setting a plurality of maximum opening times of the variable winning hole in each round game. It is also conceivable to set a plurality of opening/closing modes of the variable prize opening 316 (moveable modes of the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body) for the jackpot game.

In addition, in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game in which the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, is placed in the standby position, which is the return side position, the jackpot is determined by the first control. The game is shifted to a variable probability game state which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the movable electric accessory 315b. In the present embodiment, the probability variable gaming state is maintained until the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process executed by the MPU 41 is determined to be "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot". continue.

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends in which the movable opening/closing door 319 is placed in the return position, which is the standby position, the second control reduces the probability of winning the jackpot. The mode is shifted to a time-saving game state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode in which the movable electric accessory 315b has a high probability of opening. In this embodiment, the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) lasts until the player is notified of the jackpot lottery result in a preset number of lottery processes, such as 100 times. The game continues or ends when the player is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a jackpot before the predetermined number of times has elapsed.

In addition, it is also possible as another embodiment to perform a lottery process to determine whether or not to fall from the variable probability game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state in the special figure game. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a loss, the transition from the variable probability gaming state to the jackpot gaming state and the time saving gaming state is not made. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpots: a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, and a 5R normal jackpot. It is also possible to have other jackpot types such as round normal jackpot and 16R normal jackpot.

In addition, the reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated by being sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17, and reaches the maximum value. It is later set back to 0. Then, in the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA1 or the second special drawing holding storage area REA2, the game ball is placed in the first prize opening where the starting ball enters. 314 or the value of the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning the second prize opening 315 is stored.

In the gaming machine 10, the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss is selected by the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, according to the out-of-reach type table stored in the out-of-reach type table storage area in the ROM 411, after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops before and after the out-of-reach pattern, and a reach also occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of three types of out-of-reach is set, including a reach other than before and after out-of-reach where the final stop symbol stops at a place other than before and after the reach-to-reach symbol, and a complete out-of-reach where no reach occurs.

Here, FIG. 100(D) is a diagram showing an example of a deviation type table. In the example shown in FIG. 100(D), the value of the random number that results in a reach that is out of order is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that results in a reach that is not out of the order is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that causes a reach that is completely out of order is 39. ~238. In addition, the MPU 41 determines that a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a special pattern game in which a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variation jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, in a special pattern game that shifts to a jackpot game state. .

Here, reach refers to a state in which a symbol combination of decorative symbols indicating winning a jackpot is likely to occur during the period from when the fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol display section 341 starts until when the symbols are stopped and displayed. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions of decorative symbols on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is fluctuated. be. In addition, while the reach in the symbol display section 341 is in a fluctuating state, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the level of expectation, or a story production process in which the player's operations on the operation buttons 20 are reflected in the production. Participatory operation performance processing and the like are executed. Note that during execution of these production processes, the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner.

The special figure variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 displays a special symbol (symbol display section) in the first special symbol display section 362 or second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery The special figure variation pattern type (variable display time of special symbols) indicating the variable display time of the decorative symbols in 341 is determined. The special symbol variation pattern type (variation display time of the special symbol) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 as a special symbol variation pattern command together with the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. The audio lamp control device 5 executes display control processing and movement control processing based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern command, thereby controlling the performance in special pattern games (first special pattern game or second special pattern game) and jackpot games. , controls the display effects on the variable display unit 34 (symbol display section 341) and the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body. Specifically, by executing a display control process according to the result of the jackpot lottery when a special figure game is started, the display effect to be executed in the special figure game is determined, and the determined display effect is used as the special figure game. This is executed in the symbol display section 341. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, by executing the display control process when the jackpot starts, the display effect to be executed in the jackpot game is determined, and the determined display effect is the jackpot game. This is executed in the symbol display section 341. Also, during the display performance in which this jackpot game is executed, a voice performance on the speaker 26 and a lamp performance on the illumination section 27 are performed. Furthermore, by executing the movable control process according to the result of the jackpot lottery when the special figure game is started, the continuous movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 executed in the special figure game is determined from a plurality of movable modes. When the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is determined, the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is executed in the special figure game. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, by executing the movable control process when the jackpot starts, the display effect to be executed in the jackpot game can be determined, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 If the continuous movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is determined, the continuous movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is executed in the jackpot game.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main process of FIG. be done. Then, in the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA1 or the second special drawing holding storage area REA2, the game ball is placed in the first prize opening where the starting ball enters. 314 or the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 at the timing of winning a prize in the second winning hole 315 is stored.

Then, the MPU 41 selects the special symbol based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and a variation table (see FIGS. 101(A) to 101(C)) that is preset according to the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process. A special figure fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time is determined. Specifically, the MPU 41 stores the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 101(A)), the probability variable jackpot variation table (see FIG. 101(B)), or the miss variation table (see FIG. 101(B)) stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. The special figure fluctuation pattern type is specified with reference to FIG. 101(C)). Note that these fluctuation tables may be provided separately for low probability mode and high probability mode. Moreover, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

Here, FIG. 101(A), FIG. 101(B), and FIG. 101(C) are diagrams showing examples of fluctuation tables. In the normal jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 101(A), the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 101(B), and the loss fluctuation table shown in FIG. Patterns are associated in advance. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the lottery process is a "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 displays the normal jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. If the lottery result is a "probability variable jackpot", refer to the probability variation jackpot variation table shown in FIG. 101(B), and if the lottery result of the lottery process is a "loss", refer to the loss variation table shown in FIG. 101(C), Identify the type of pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 101(A) and 101(B), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variable jackpot variation table, the special symbol variation pattern "01" is set according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. to "03" is selected.

Here, if the special symbol fluctuation pattern "01" is selected when the normal jackpot fluctuation table or the probability-variable jackpot fluctuation table is referred to, the display control process by the sub-control unit 332 changes the fluctuation type (effect pattern type). A normal reach effect pattern with a display time of 30 seconds is determined, and a special game effect is executed in accordance with the normal reach effect pattern on the symbol display section 341 and the like. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is the normal reach performance.

Furthermore, if the special symbol fluctuation pattern "01" is selected when the normal jackpot fluctuation table or the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table is referred to, the normal reach is displayed as a display effect on the symbol display section 341 by the movable control processing by the sub-control unit 332. The movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 when the performance corresponding to the performance pattern is executed is a continuous motion that announces a probability-variable jackpot (see FIG. 129(C)) or a normal jackpot. A movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)) is determined as a continuous motion to notify that something is going on, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is movable during execution of the performance corresponding to the normal reach performance pattern on the symbol display section 341. It is operated in mode C (see FIG. 129(C)) or movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)).

In addition, when the special symbol variation pattern "02" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variable jackpot variation table is referred to, the audio lamp control device 5 controls the variation type (effect A super reach effect pattern with a variable display time of 60 seconds is determined as the pattern type), and a special game effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like according to the super reach effect pattern. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is the super reach performance.

Furthermore, if the special symbol fluctuation pattern "02" is selected when the normal jackpot fluctuation table or the probability-variable jackpot fluctuation table is referred to, the sub-control unit 332 performs movable control processing to display a super as a display effect on the symbol display section 341. As a movable mode of the movable rotating accessory member 37 when a performance corresponding to the reach performance pattern is executed, there is a movement mode A (see FIG. 129(A)) as a continuous movement to notify that the super reach performance will develop. , movable mode C (see FIG. 129(C)) is a continuous motion that announces a definite variable jackpot, or movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)) is a continuous motion that announces a normal jackpot. The movable rotary accessory member 37 moves between movable mode A (see FIG. 129(A)) and movable mode C (see FIG. 129(A)) during execution of the performance corresponding to the determined and super reach performance pattern on the symbol display section 341. (see FIG. 129(D)) or movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)).

Furthermore, if the special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability-variable jackpot variation table is referred to, the display control process by the sub-control unit 332 allows the variation display time to be set as the variation type (effect pattern). A special reach effect pattern in which the longest is 90 seconds is determined, and a special game effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like according to the special reach effect pattern. The special reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is a special reach performance.

In addition, if the special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variable jackpot variation table is referred to, a special display effect is displayed on the symbol display section 341 by the movable control processing by the sub control unit 332. As a movable mode of the movable rotating accessory member 37 when a performance corresponding to the reach performance pattern is executed, there is a movement mode A (see FIG. 129(A)) as a continuous movement to notify that the super reach performance will develop. , Movable mode B (see FIG. 129(A)) is a continuous motion that announces that it will develop into a special reach effect, and Movable mode C is a continuous motion that announces that it is a guaranteed variable jackpot (see FIG. 129(C)). ) or as a continuous motion to announce a normal jackpot, movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)) is determined, and during execution of the performance corresponding to the super reach performance pattern on the symbol display section 341, the movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)) is determined. The rotary accessory member 37 has movable mode A (see FIG. 129(A)), movable mode B (see FIG. 129(B)), movable mode C (see FIG. 129(C)), or movable mode D (see FIG. 129(C)). 129(D)).

As shown in FIG. 101(C), the deviation variation table corresponds to the stop display type of the decorative symbol at the time of a deviation determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3 (reach outside the front and back, reach other than the front and back, and complete failure). Therefore, a correspondence relationship between the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the special figure variation pattern is determined. More specifically, when the stop display type at the time of a miss is a reach that is out of front and back or a reach other than a reach that is out of front and back, one of the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected depending on the value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1. is selected. Then, if any of the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected when the winning fluctuation table is referred to, and when the above-mentioned normal jackpot fluctuation table or probability-variable jackpot fluctuation table is referred to, the special symbol Similarly to the case where one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected, the sub control unit 332 selects the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" as the variation type (effect pattern) through the movable control process. A predetermined reach performance pattern (normal reach performance pattern, super reach performance pattern, or special reach performance pattern) is determined according to the type, and a special game performance is executed in accordance with the predetermined reach performance pattern on a symbol display section 341 or the like.

In addition, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern "01" is selected when the out-of-reach fluctuation table is referred to, the movement control processing by the sub-control unit 332 causes the display performance on the symbol display section 341 to correspond to the normal reach performance pattern. As the movable mode of the movable rotating accessory member 37 when is executed, movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)) is determined as a continuous motion to notify that the super reach performance will not develop, and the symbol display section 341 During execution of the performance corresponding to the normal reach performance pattern, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated in movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)).

In addition, when the special symbol variation pattern "02" is selected when the losing variation table is referred to, the movement control processing by the sub-control unit 332 causes the display effect on the symbol display section 341 to correspond to the super reach effect pattern. The movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 when the performance is executed is movable mode A (see FIG. 129(A)) as a continuous motion that announces that the super reach performance will develop, and the development into a special reach performance. A movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)) is determined as a continuous motion to notify that the movable rotating accessory member 37 , is operated in movable mode A (see FIG. 129(A)) and movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)).

In addition, when the special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected when the losing variation table is referred to, the movement control processing by the sub-control unit 332 causes the special reach effect pattern to be supported as the display effect on the symbol display section 341. The movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 when the performance is executed is movable mode A (see FIG. 129(A)) as a continuous motion that announces that the performance will develop into a super reach performance, and the development into a special reach performance. A movable mode B (see FIG. 129(B)) is determined as a continuous motion to announce that the movable rotating accessory member 37 , is operated in movable mode A (see FIG. 129(A)) and movable mode B (see FIG. 129(B)).

On the other hand, when the stop display type at the time of a miss is a complete miss, either the special figure variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the special figure variation type counter CS1. In addition, when special figure fluctuation pattern "04" is selected, the display control processing by the sub-control unit 332 causes a non-reach performance pattern (7 seconds non-reach performance) with a fluctuation display time of 7 seconds as the fluctuation type (performance pattern type). pattern) is determined, and a special figure game performance is executed in accordance with the 7-second non-reach performance pattern on the symbol display section 341 or the like. In addition, when the special figure fluctuation pattern "05" is selected, the display control processing by the sub-control unit 332 causes a non-reach performance pattern (10 seconds non-reach performance) with a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds as the fluctuation type (performance pattern type). pattern) is determined, and a special figure game performance is executed in accordance with the 10-second non-reach performance pattern on the symbol display section 341 or the like. In addition, when the stop display type at the time of detachment is completely detached, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not moved.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, the variable display of decorative symbols is changed to a combination of missed symbols without accompanying a preview effect in which a character, message, etc. is displayed as a variable display when a missed symbol corresponds to the special pattern variation pattern "04". A fluctuating display of the outlier pattern that is stopped and displayed is executed. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, as a fluctuating display when the winning pattern corresponds to the special pattern fluctuation pattern "05", the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols stops when the combination of the missing symbols is accompanied by a notice display in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. A variable display of the displayed deviation pattern is executed. In addition, when the fluctuation display is displayed when the player misses the special figure fluctuation pattern "05", a player participation type operation performance that reflects the player's operation of the operation button 20 may be executed as a preview performance. be.

In addition, the type of special figure variation pattern is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 101(A), FIG. 101(B), and FIG. 101(C).

For example, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the normal reach performance executed in the normal reach performance pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "01", and the normal reach performance is selected from among them. One of the normal reach effects will be executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the super reach performance executed in the super reach performance pattern corresponding to the special pattern variation pattern "02". One of the selected super reach effects is executed. The super reach performance is a reach performance with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach performance, and the probability (expectation level) of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot is higher than the normal reach performance, and the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than the special reach performance. This is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation level) is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of special reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as special reach performances executed in the special reach performance pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "03", among which One of the special reach effects selected from is executed. The special reach performance is a reach performance that has a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach performance, and is, for example, a performance that develops from the normal reach performance or the super reach performance. The special reach performance is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expectation level) of winning the jackpot is higher than the normal reach performance or the special reach performance.

Note that the performance patterns corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern include operation performances in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance, for example, a single-shot operation performance in which a single-shot operation is reflected in the performance, and a button operated by the player. This may include operation performances in which the player participates, such as a continuous-hit operation performance in which a continuous tap operation of 20 is reflected in the performance, and a long-press operation performance in which a long-press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, a single operation performance is executed when notifying the player whether or not it is a 16R probability-variable jackpot. Specifically, the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 to notify that it is a 16R probability-variable jackpot is movable mode C (see FIG. 129(C)) or movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)). is set, the end judgment condition of the valid period (the operation of the operation button 20 or the elapse of the valid period ) is established and the single operation effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 until it is determined that the process is completed (see FIG. 140(C)).

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variable display time of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 (the variable display time of the decorative symbol on the symbol display section 341), A special figure variation pattern command indicating the special figure variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process is input to the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot before the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Outputs one of the special figure fluctuation pattern commands "A01" to "A03". In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R definite strange jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "B" indicating that it is a 5R definite strange jackpot before the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Outputs one of the variation pattern commands "B01" to "B03". Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "16R guaranteed variable jackpot," the MPU 41 adds a special symbol with "C" indicating that it is a 16R probable variable jackpot before the special symbol fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Outputs one of the variation pattern commands "C01" to "C03". In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "loss", the MPU 41 sends a special pattern fluctuation pattern command "01" to "05" with "D" indicating a loss in front of the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "05". Outputs one of "D01" to "D05". That is, the special figure variation pattern command includes not only the special figure variation pattern (special figure game time) which is the variable display time of the special symbol, but also information specifying the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process. The audio lamp control device 5 is capable of determining not only the special pattern fluctuation pattern (special pattern game time), which is the variable display time of the special pattern, but also the result of the jackpot lottery, based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern command. Based on the variable display time of the special symbol (special symbol game time) and the result of the jackpot lottery, the variation type (performance pattern) displayed on the symbol display section 341 etc. and the stoppage of the decorative symbol can be determined. Decide details such as display combinations. Then, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display section 341 to display the decorative pattern in a variable manner and stop display based on details such as the determined variation type (performance pattern), and also performs an image effect in accordance with the variable display of the decorative pattern. Furthermore, the speaker 26 performs a sound performance in accordance with the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, the illumination unit 27 performs an illumination performance (lamp performance), and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is activated as necessary. It is made to move in predetermined movement modes A to D.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 executes a simple process for determining the variable display time of decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. It turns out. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode of the decorative symbols actually displayed on the symbol display section 341 are determined by the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes. It is.

The fluctuation tables shown in FIGS. 101(A) to 101(C) are commonly used in various gaming states (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, and variable probability gaming state), but the fluctuation tables are individually set for each gaming state. may be set, and variable tables may be set separately for high frequency support mode (time saving gaming state and variable probability gaming state) and low frequency support mode. In addition, when setting individual fluctuation tables for each type of gaming state or support mode, the average value of the fluctuation display time may be higher in the normal gaming state (low-frequency support mode), for example in the time-saving gaming state and in the variable-probability gaming state (high-frequency support mode). frequency support mode). In addition, when setting different fluctuation tables for the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state, the average value of the variable display time may be set longer in the time-saving gaming state than in the variable probability gaming state, or It may be set longer than the time-saving gaming state.

Here, FIG. 102 is a block diagram showing an example of the general map reservation storage area 412c of the storage area of the main controller 4 shown in FIG. 99. As shown in FIG. 102, the common picture reservation storage area 412c includes a common picture first holding area SE1, a common picture second holding area SE2, a common picture third holding area SE3, a common picture fourth holding area SE4, a common picture fluctuation It includes a pending number storage area SNA and a general figure execution area SAE.

The first holding area SE1 to the fourth holding area SE4 are the normal drawing lottery that is executed in the lottery process to determine whether or not it is a normal drawing when the game ball passes through the through gates 317L, 317R. This is a storage area for storing a normal winning random number counter C4, a normal winning type random number counter C5, and a normal winning pattern variation type counter CS2, which are acquired as the normal pattern validity information to be used.

The ordinary figure fluctuation reservation number storage area SNA stores the number of ordinary figures first reservation area SE1 to ordinary figure fourth reservation area SE4 in which ordinary figures validity information is stored. That is, the normal figure fluctuation pending number storage area SNA is a storage area that stores the number of pending rights to play the normal figure game.

The normal pattern execution area SAE is a memory used to move the normal pattern validity information in the normal pattern first holding area SE1 when the fluctuating display of the normal pattern starts in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36. It is an area. Then, at the start of one normal pattern game, the MPU 41 calculates the numerical information (normal winning random number counter C4, normal winning type random number counter C5, normal winning type random number counter C5, and general pattern fluctuation type Based on the value of the counter CS2), a per-normal figure validity table (see FIGS. 103(A) and 103(B)) and a per-normal figure type distribution table (see FIGS. 103(C) and 103(B)), which will be explained below. (D)) is used to perform a lottery for a common symbol, and a common symbol variation table (not shown) is used to determine the common symbol fluctuation display time for the normal symbol. At this time, if the general pattern validity information stored in the standard pattern first holding area SE1 is moved to the standard pattern execution area SAE, the standard pattern validity information stored in the standard pattern second holding area SE2 is The normal pattern correctness information that was shifted to the first holding area SE1 and stored in the normal pattern third holding area SE3 was shifted to the normal pattern second holding area SE2, and the normal pattern correctness information was stored in the normal pattern fourth holding area SE4. The information is shifted to the general map third holding area SE3.

The normal winning random number counter C4 is periodically updated by sequentially incrementing it by 1 within the range of 0 to 299, for example, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. 17, and after reaching the maximum value. Returned to 0. The value of the normal winning random number counter C4 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R is stored in the normal pattern first holding area SE1 to the normal pattern fourth holding area SE4 of the normal pattern holding storage area 412c. be done. In addition, at a predetermined timing, a lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time is performed based on the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal drawing holding storage area 412c.

Here, FIGS. 103(A) and 103(B) are diagrams illustrating an example of a common figure hit/failure table. In this embodiment, there are two types of normal pattern hit/failure tables: a low frequency support mode normal pattern hit/failure table shown in FIG. 103(A), and a high frequency support mode normal pattern hit/failure table shown in FIG. 103(B). is set. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a common symbol in the lottery per common symbol that is executed in the lottery process to determine whether or not it is a common symbol is different between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, and In the support mode, the probability of hitting a regular pattern is set higher than in the low-frequency support mode.

The low-frequency support mode normal pattern winning success/failure table shown in FIG. 103(A) is used in the normal pattern winning lottery that is executed in the lottery process to determine whether or not the normal pattern is a winning pattern in the normal gaming state, which is the low frequency support mode. This is a table that As shown in FIG. 103(A), in the low-frequency support mode per-regular figure validity table, when the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is 0, the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is 1 to 299. If it is set to off. That is, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to 1/300, and the operating frequency of the electric accessory 315b is made low.

The high-frequency support mode normal pattern hit/failure table shown in FIG. This is a table used in the lottery. As shown in FIG. 103(B), in the high-frequency support mode normal figure hit/failure table, contrary to the low frequency support mode normal figure hit/failure table, when the value of the random number counter C4 for a normal figure is 0, the result is lost. When the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is 1 to 299, it is set to be per ordinary figure. In other words, in the fixed variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (high-frequency support mode), the probability of hitting a regular symbol is set to 299/300, and the probability of hitting a regular symbol is set higher than in the normal gaming state (low-frequency support mode). At the same time, the frequency of operation of the electric accessory 315b is increased.

Note that the low frequency support mode normal pattern winning probability and the high frequency support mode normal pattern hitting probability are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 103(A) and 103(B) and can be changed as appropriate.

In step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17 described above, the normal winning type random number counter C5 is periodically updated by sequentially incrementing by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and reaches the maximum value. It is later set back to 0. Then, the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R is stored in the normal pattern first holding area SE1 to the normal pattern fourth holding area SE4 of the normal pattern holding storage area 412c. Stored. In addition, when the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area SE4 is a general pattern win, the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area By the value of the normal hit type random number counter C5 stored in the area SE4, the type per normal pattern (per short open normal pattern and per long open normal pattern), that is, the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is set.

Here, FIG. 103(C) and FIG. 103(D) are diagrams showing an example of a type distribution table per ordinary figure. In this embodiment, as the type distribution table per ordinary figure, the low frequency support mode type distribution table per ordinary figure shown in FIG. 103(C) and the type distribution table per common figure in the high frequency support mode shown in FIG. Two types are set: a minute table. That is, in this embodiment, the distribution probabilities of the types per regular map (per short open regular map and per long open regular map) are different between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. In addition, in this embodiment, by setting two types of maximum opening time of the second winning hole 315 in the game per common figure, the opening/closing mode of the second winning hole 315 in the game per common figure (the electric role which is a movable body) is set. Two types of opening/closing modes are set as the movable modes of the object 315b in which the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be indefinite. Of course, there may be three or more types of opening/closing manners of the second winning a prize opening 315 in the game with common symbols.

Here, in the case of a short-open normal figure, the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is opened for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the game ball enters the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entry part. A game is executed in which the ball can be entered for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds). In this short-open normal map winning game, information corresponding to the opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) of the electric accessory 315b is set, and the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, moves from the standby position, which is the return side position, to the drive side. position, which is the operating position. Thereafter, when it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied due to the elapse of the opening time of the electric accessory 315b, the electric accessory 315b is returned from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position. Ru. In the short open regular winning game, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315 because the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is short, and in many cases, the game ball does not enter the second winning hole 315.

On the other hand, in the case of a long open normal figure game, the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is opened for a longer time (for example, 6 seconds) than in the short open normal figure game. A long open normal pattern winning game is executed in which a game ball can enter the second prize opening 315, which is a ball part, for a long time (for example, 6 seconds). In this long open normal figure winning game, information corresponding to the opening time (for example, 6 seconds) of the electric accessory 315b is set, and the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, moves from the standby position, which is the return side position, to the drive side position. It is moved to a certain working position. Thereafter, when it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied due to the elapse of the opening time of the electric accessory 315b, the electric accessory 315b is returned from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position. Ru. In the long open regular map winning game, the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is long, so the game ball easily enters the second prize opening 315, and the right to execute the second special map game is limited to an upper limit number (for example, 4 balls). It is possible to hold it until

The low frequency support mode normal pattern per type distribution table shown in FIG. This is the table used. As shown in FIG. 103(C), in the low-frequency support mode per normal pattern type distribution table, when the value of the random number per normal pattern counter C5 is 0 to 99, the type random number per short open general pattern, per normal pattern When the value of the counter C5 is between 100 and 199, it is set to be per long open regular map. In other words, in the normal gaming state (low frequency support mode), the distribution ratio between short open regular symbols and long open regular symbols is set to 1:1. Of course, the distribution ratio between the short open normal pattern and the long open normal pattern in the normal gaming state (low frequency support mode) does not necessarily have to be 1:1 and can be changed as appropriate. The distribution rate per figure is zero (the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 per long open general figure is zero) or approximately zero (the value of the ordinary per type random number counter C5 per long open general figure is 1 or 2) It is also possible to set it to

The high-frequency support mode normal figure type distribution table shown in FIG. This is a table used in the drawing lottery. As shown in FIG. 103(D), in the high-frequency support mode per ordinary figure type distribution table, when the value of the per ordinary figure type random number counter C5 is 0, the short open ordinary figure per type random number counter C5 When the value of is between 1 and 199, it is set per long open general map. In other words, in the variable probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (high frequency support mode), it is set so that it is easier to be sorted into long open regular symbols than short open regular symbols. Of course, the distribution ratio between the short open normal pattern and the long open normal pattern in the fixed variable gaming state and the time saving gaming state (high frequency support mode) is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 103(D), but may be determined as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the distribution rate per short open regular map to zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 per short open regular map is zero).

In addition, the movable mode of the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is not limited to once per game per common symbol, but may be multiple times. In this case, the opening time and opening interval (interval between openings) of each opening of the electric accessory 315b in one game per normal figure may be one type or multiple types. In other words, the movable mode of the electric accessory 315b in the normal figure winning game is not limited to the above-mentioned two types of short opening and long opening, but can be changed in various ways.

The general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main process of FIG. It is repeatedly updated in step S1414 even within the remaining time within the main process. The first ball holding area SE1 to the fourth holding area SE4 of the ball holding storage area 412c contain the fluctuation of the ball at the timing when the game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R, which are the starting ball entry parts. The value of type counter CS2 is stored. Further, at a predetermined timing, the general pattern fluctuation display time is determined with reference to the general pattern fluctuation display table (not shown) based on the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the general pattern storage area 412c. Ru.

The general pattern fluctuation display table (not shown) includes, for example, a high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation table that is referred to when in high frequency support mode, and a low frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation table that is referred to when in low frequency support mode. and a fluctuation display table. In the high-frequency support mode ordinary figure fluctuation display table and the low-frequency support mode ordinary figure fluctuation display table, a plurality of ordinary figure fluctuation display times are set in correspondence with, for example, the value of the ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2. Further, the high-frequency support mode ordinary figure fluctuation display table is usually set so that the average time of ordinary figure fluctuation display time is shorter than that of the low-frequency support mode ordinary figure fluctuation display table. For example, some of the variable display times set in the high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table are set to be longer than some of the variable display times set in the low frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table. All the fluctuation display times set in the high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table may be set to be longer than all the fluctuation display times set in the low frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table. You can.

Note that a common pattern fluctuation display table may be set in both the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, and at least one of the high-frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table and the low-frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table. The number of ordinary figure fluctuation display times set in one ordinary figure fluctuation display table may be one type. Further, the general pattern fluctuation display time may be set according to the general pattern fluctuation pending number X. For example, the general pattern fluctuation display time may be set to become shorter as the general pattern fluctuation pending number X increases. , it may be set such that the smaller the number of pending changes in ordinary figures X is, the longer the ordinary figure fluctuation display time becomes.

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, in the game per common figure, the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, has a standby position (return side position) where the second winning opening 315 is closed, and a waiting position (return side position) where the second winning opening 315 is closed. It is reciprocated once between the operating position (driving side position) where it opens, but the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, moves back and forth once between the opening position (driving side position) and the standby position (returning position) where the movable electric accessory 315b closes the second prize opening 315. By adopting a movable mode of continuous movement that moves back and forth multiple times between the side position (side position) and the operating position (drive side position) that opens the second winning opening 315, the second winning for the game with a common figure is achieved. As the opening/closing manner of the mouth 315 (the movable manner of the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body), it is also possible to set a plurality of opening/closing manners in which the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be indefinite.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 115. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 performs a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed during a power outage. Executes NMI interrupt processing, etc. Note that in this embodiment, main processing will be explained.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of the regular figure game, special figure game, and jackpot game are executed. In the main processing, the processing in steps S1401 to S1411 is executed as a regular processing at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter updating processing in steps S1413 and S1414 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing in steps S1401 to S1411 to the next cycle. Ru.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 104, in step S1401, the MPU 41 transmits output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Execute external output processing to send to. For example, in the RAM 412, a regular pattern fluctuation pattern command, an electric accessory opening command, an electric accessory closing command, a special pattern fluctuation pattern command, a first special pattern holding command, a second special pattern holding command, a special pattern shift command, a jackpot game start Command, opening start command, opening end command, open/close execution mode start command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, opening/closing execution mode end command, ending start command, ending end command, jackpot game If a command such as an end command or a game setting value change command is set, the command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5. Further, if a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 updates the values of the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the regular figure variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the special pattern variation type counter CS1 and the regular pattern variation type counter CS2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, clears the counter value to 0. .

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a winning has occurred in the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, the variable winning hole 316, etc., based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. to judge. If a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning is set in the RAM 412. At this time, in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a winning occurs in the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314, the MPU 41 stores the winning information in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The number of balls paid out from the general winning hole or the number of balls paid out from the first winning hole is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. In addition, in the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) or variable probability gaming state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode), the MPU 41 controls the RAM 412 The number of balls paid out from the second winning hole stored in the game information storage area 412d is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, when a winning occurs in the variable winning opening 316, the MPU 41 changes the number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening stored in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Update to the added value.

<Step S1404>
In step S1404, the MPU 41 executes a standard game control process that controls the progress of the standard game. The details of the general figure game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 to 107.

<Step S1405>
In step S1405, the MPU 41 executes a normal pattern winning game control process as a movable body control process that controls the progress of the normal pattern winning game that is executed when the result of the normal pattern winning lottery is a win. In addition, the details of the game control process per normal figure will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 executes a special figure game control process that controls the progress of the special figure game. The details of the special pattern game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111, but in the special pattern game control process, when starting the variable display of special symbols, the pattern variation display in the pattern display section 341 The special figure fluctuation pattern commands necessary for this are set. At this time, the MPU 41 controls the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17, and the special figure that is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of this process. Based on each value of the variation type counter CS1, a special figure variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process as a movable body control process that controls the progress of a jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. The details of the jackpot game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a gaming state transition process that controls transitions between various gaming states (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state, variable probability jackpot gaming state, and normal jackpot gaming state). Note that the gaming state transition process of this embodiment is similar to the gaming state transition process of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. .

<Step S1409>
In step S1409, the MPU 41 executes game setting value change processing. In this game setting value change process, a process for controlling the display or non-display of setting values or changing the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d in accordance with the operation on the setting value change operation section 46 is executed. . Note that the game setting value changing process of this embodiment is similar to the game setting value changing process of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 35, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game setting value changing process is executed in the main process, but during the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or between the start-up process and the start of launching the game ball. It is also conceivable that it will be executed in a limited manner. As a result, after the player starts playing, the game setting values cannot be changed until the next power is turned on, so game setting values cannot be changed during the business hours of the game hall. It can be prevented.

<Step S1410>
In step S1410, the MPU 41 executes specific performance information update processing of the game information. In this embodiment, base information and the like are updated as specific performance information. Note that the specific performance information update process of this embodiment is similar to the specific performance information update process of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 36 and FIG. Omitted.

<Step S1411>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43. In this display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in the specific performance information update process of step S1410 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Note that the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 of this embodiment is similar to the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 of the above-described first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. A detailed explanation will be omitted.

<Step S1412>
In step S1412, the MPU 41 determines whether the execution timing for the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the timing to execute the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes), the process moves to step S1401, and executes each process from S1401 described above. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1412: No), the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process arrives. During the remaining time, steps S1413 and S1414 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes).

<Step S1413>
In step S1413, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. clear.

<Step S1414>
In step S1414, the MPU 41 updates the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the regular symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter values of the special pattern variation type counter CS1 and the regular pattern variation type counter CS2, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, after updating the special pattern variation type counter CS1 and the regular pattern variation type counter CS2, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1412.

[Public figure game control process]
Here, FIG. 105 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the regular game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of FIG. In the normal pattern game control process, processing for controlling the fluctuating display and stop display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 is executed. Hereinafter, the normal figure game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 105.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 105, in the normal pattern game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner (the normal pattern game is being executed) is on. is determined (step S3201). The normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to ON in step S3411 when the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern game) is started in the normal pattern fluctuation start process of FIG. 107 described later, and the normal pattern is stopped and displayed ( When the general figure game ends), it is set to OFF in step S3210 in the corresponding general figure game control process.

The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3207 when the flag during normal figure fluctuation display is on (step S3201: Yes), that is, when the common figure game is being executed. On the other hand, when the flag during normal pattern fluctuation display is off (step S3201: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3202.

<Step S3202>
If the normal figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S3201: No), that is, if the normal figure game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is open (while the normal figure game is being executed). ) is on (step S3202). The electric accessory opening flag is used when the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable object, is released (when the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable object, is driven When the electric accessory 315b is closed (when the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is located in the standby position, which is the return side position), it is set to ON in step S3511. case), it is set to off in step S3518.

When the electric accessory opening flag is on (step S3202: Yes), that is, when the game per common symbol is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the common symbol game control process. On the other hand, when the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S3202: No), that is, when the game per common figure is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3203.

<Step S3203>
When the electric accessory release flag is off (step S3202: No), that is, when the normal game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on. It is determined whether or not (step S3203). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 112, which will be described later, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3906 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3952 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3203: Yes) and the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the standard game control process. That is, in this embodiment, the common figure game is not started while the jackpot game is being executed.

Of course, the common figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed. In this case, according to the support mode type (high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode) before the jackpot game starts, that is, according to the game state before shifting to the jackpot game state, the normal figure holding storage area 412c is Based on the validity information (values of the random number counter C4 per regular pattern, the random number counter C5 per general pattern type random number counter C5, and the general pattern variation type counter CS2 per general pattern) moved from the general pattern first holding area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE, the general pattern is A determination of whether the winning lottery is correct or not is executed. In other words, if the gaming state before the jackpot game is executed is the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state which is the high-frequency support mode, the regular pattern winning probability table for the high-frequency support mode (see FIG. 103(B)), Based on the common pattern per type table (see Figure 103 (D)) and the general pattern fluctuation table (not shown), the general pattern per lottery (normal pattern hit or missed), the normal pattern per type (long open general pattern hit or short) (per open regular map) and regular map fluctuation display time are set. On the other hand, if the gaming state before the jackpot game is executed is the normal gaming state in which the jackpot game is executed, the normal pattern winning probability table for the low frequency support mode (see FIG. 103(A)), the normal pattern winning type Based on the table (see Figure 103(C)) and the general pattern variation table (not shown), the lottery per standard pattern (hit or missed), the type of per standard pattern (per long open standard pattern or per short open standard pattern) ), and the normal map fluctuation display time are set.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S3203: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3204.

<Step S3204>
When the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3203: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 stores it in the normal pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA set in the normal pattern pending storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not the number of pending regular pattern fluctuations X is 0 (step S3204). The MPU 41 ends the normal pattern game control process when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S3204: Yes), and when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S3204: No), the MPU 41 ends the processing. The process moves to step S3205.

<Step S3205>
If the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S3204: No), the MPU 41 executes the general pattern data setting process for the general pattern validity information stored in the general pattern pending storage area 412c (step S3205), The process moves to step S3206. Note that details of the ordinary map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

<Step S3206>
In step S3206, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol fluctuation start process for causing the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 to execute a variable display of the normal symbol based on the information stored in the common symbol holding storage area 412c. , the general figure game control process ends. Note that the details of the ordinary figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107.

<Step S3207>
If the normal figure fluctuation display flag is on (step S3201: Yes), that is, if the normal figure game is being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on. It is determined whether or not (step S3207). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 112, which will be described later, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3906 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3952 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3207: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3209. On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S3207: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3208.

<Step S3208>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3207: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed since the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display ( Step S3208). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (end the common symbol game).

When the normal symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S3208: Yes), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ends the common symbol game). If there is, the process moves to step S3209. On the other hand, if the normal pattern fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S3208: No), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ends the normal pattern game). ), if it is not the timing to do so, the general figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S3209 to S3211>
When the normal figure fluctuation display flag is on (step S3201: Yes) and when the jackpot game flag is on (step S3207: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is started while the normal figure game is being executed, Or, if the regular symbol fluctuation display time of the regular symbols has elapsed (step S3208: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to stop displaying the fluctuating regular symbols (end the regular symbol game), the MPU 41 The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery for the common symbol (step S3209), and the common symbol fluctuation display flag is set to indicate that the normal symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (the common symbol game is being executed). is set to off (step S3210). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern variation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed, that is, the normal pattern game has ended (step S3211), and ends the normal pattern game control process.

In addition, the ordinary figure fluctuation stop display flag determines whether or not it is the timing to start the ordinary figure winning game (release the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body) in step S3501 of the ordinary figure winning game control process in FIG. 108, which will be described later. referenced to determine whether

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution of the normal pattern game is not limited to the timing to stop displaying the normal pattern (to end the normal pattern game), which is fluctuatingly displayed as the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern has elapsed. If a jackpot game is started during the game, the fluctuating normal symbols are stopped and displayed (the common symbol game is ended). That is, when the jackpot game is started, the normal pattern game is forcibly ended before the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern passes. Of course, even when a jackpot game is started, the normal pattern game may be continuously executed until the normal pattern fluctuation display time elapses.

[Public figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general map data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3205 of FIG. 105. In the ordinary figure data setting process, the storage contents of the ordinary figure reservation storage area 412c in the storage area of the main controller 4 in FIG. 102 are updated. Hereinafter, the ordinary map data setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 106.

<Steps S3301 to S3303>
As shown in FIG. 106, in the normal pattern data setting process, the MPU 41 first subtracts 1 from the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X stored in the normal pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA (step S3301), and The general pattern validity information is moved from the holding area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE (step S3302). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the common symbol validity information stored in the common symbol second holding area SE2 to the common symbol fourth holding area SE4 one by one (step S3303). Specifically, in step S3303, the common figure validity information of the common figure second holding area SE2 is moved to the common figure first holding area SE1, and the common figure correctness information of the common figure third holding area SE3 is moved to the common figure second holding area SE3. The area SE2 is moved to the area SE2, and the general pattern validity information of the general pattern fourth holding area SE4 is moved to the general pattern third holding area SE3.

[Public figure fluctuation start process]
Here, FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3206 of FIG. 105. In the normal symbol variation start process, the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display section 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery results in the common symbol winning lottery. Hereinafter, the normal pattern fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to FIG. 107.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 107, in the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high frequency support mode flag indicating that the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time saving gaming state) is on is on. (Step S3401). The high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON in step S2313 of FIG. 34 when the jackpot game ends in the above-mentioned gaming state transition process, and the gaming state changes from the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state to the variable probability jackpot gaming state or normal. It is set to OFF in step S2307 of FIG. 33 when shifting to the jackpot gaming state, or in step S2326 of FIG. 34 when the gaming state shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

When the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S3401: Yes), that is, when the high-frequency support mode is the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3402, and switches the high-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode. If the flag is off (step S3401: No), that is, if the normal gaming state is the low frequency support mode, the process moves to step S3403.

<Steps S3402 and S3403>
When the game is in the probability variable gaming state or the time-saving gaming state which is the high frequency support mode (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is a common symbol hit based on the high frequency support mode (step S3402). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is normal based on the high-frequency support mode per-normal pattern propriety table (see FIG. 103(B)) and the high-frequency support mode per-normal pattern classification table (see FIG. 103(D)). Whether the values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal drawing validity information stored in the normal drawing execution area SAE of the drawing holding storage area 412c, correspond to the normal drawing winning. A judgment is made as to whether or not it is true or not. That is, when the MPU 41 is in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 performs a lottery to determine whether or not it is a hit on a regular figure based on the high-frequency support mode regular figure hit propriety table and the high-frequency support mode regular figure hit classification table. Execute processing.

On the other hand, if the normal gaming state is the low-frequency support mode (step S3401: No), a determination is made as to whether or not a common symbol has been hit based on the low-frequency support mode (step S3403). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is normal based on the low-frequency support mode per-normal pattern propriety table (see FIG. 103(A)) and the low-frequency support mode per-normal pattern type distribution table (see FIG. 103(C)). Whether or not the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal drawing correctness information stored in the normal drawing execution area SAE of the drawing holding storage area 412c, correspond to the winning of a normal drawing. A judgment is made as to whether or not the above is correct. In other words, when the MPU 41 is in the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is a hit on a regular map based on the low-frequency support mode regular map hit or failure table and the low-frequency support mode regular map hit type distribution table. Execute processing.

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
When the MPU 41 determines whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol through a lottery process that determines whether or not it is a winning symbol (step S3402 or S3403), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the determination is the second prize opening, which is the starting ball entry part. It is determined whether or not 315 is a long-open regular pattern hit (step S3404). If the result of the judgment is that the long open standard is a hit (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the long open standard hit flag indicating that the result of the check is that the long open standard is a hit ( Step S3405), the process moves to step S3408. On the other hand, if the result of the validity determination is not a long open standard hit (step S3404: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3406.

<Steps S3406 and S3407>
If the result of the win/fail judgment is not a long open normal pattern (step S3404: No), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the correct/fail judgment is a short open normal pattern in which the second prize opening 315, which is the starting ball entry part, is opened short. It is determined whether there is one (step S3406). If the result of the validity determination is that the short open regular pattern is hit (step S3406: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the short open standard hit flag indicating that the result of the validity determination is the short open standard hit ( Step S3407), the process moves to step S3408. On the other hand, if the result of the validity determination is not a short open regular hit (step S3406: No), that is, if the result of the validity determination is a failure, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3408.

<Steps S3408 and S3409>
When the long open general map hit flag is set to on (step S3405), when the short open general map hit flag is set to on (step S3407), or when the result of the validity determination is negative (step S3406: No), the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the variable display time of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 in the normal pattern game, with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation display table (not shown). Execute the general figure fluctuation pattern setting process. As mentioned above, the common pattern fluctuation display table (not shown) includes the high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation table that is referred to when in the high frequency support mode, and the low frequency fluctuation table that is referred to when in the low frequency support mode. Support mode includes normal figure fluctuation display table. Therefore, in the general pattern fluctuation pattern setting process, the general pattern fluctuation pattern is set based on the general pattern fluctuation display table according to the support mode type. In addition, since the high frequency support mode ordinary symbol fluctuation display table is set so that the average time of the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol is shorter than the low frequency support mode ordinary symbol fluctuation display table, the high frequency support mode In this case, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the time for playing the regular game is shorter.

Then, the MPU 41 calculates, in addition to the normal pattern variation pattern set in step S3408, the result of the success/failure determination based on the lottery process for determining whether or not the normal pattern is a hit in step S3402 or S3403 (the result of the normal pattern winning lottery). and the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode) to the audio lamp control device 5 (step S3409), and the process moves to step S3410. do.

Note that the common figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, in the audio lamp control device 5, based on the general pattern fluctuation pattern command, an effect corresponding to the general pattern game, for example, an effect indicating that the general pattern game is being executed, is displayed on the symbol display section 341 etc. An effect showing the results of a drawing or lottery for a common map is executed.

Further, the general pattern fluctuation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of at least the general pattern fluctuation pattern, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern result or the type of support mode is not necessarily the general pattern fluctuation pattern command. There is no need to notify the audio lamp control device 5. For example, the result of the lottery for common symbols can be determined by setting the lottery result command for common symbols when the judgment is made in step S3402 or S3403, and the type of support mode can be set to high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode. When the transition is made, the voice lamp control device 5 may be notified by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of support mode after the transition.

<Steps S3410 and S3411>
In step S3410, the MPU 41 starts variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S3410). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation display flag to ON, which indicates that the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, that is, that the normal pattern game is being executed (step S3411), and starts the normal pattern fluctuation start process. finish.

In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is referred to in step S3201 in the normal pattern game control process in FIG. 105 to determine whether the normal pattern game is being executed (during the normal pattern fluctuation display).

[Game control processing per regular map]
Here, FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. 104. In the normal figure winning game control process, when the result of the common figure winning lottery by the lottery process to determine whether or not it is a common figure winning is a win, opening/closing control is performed by continuous operation of the electric accessory 315b which is a movable body. By doing this, a movable body control process is executed to switch between a permissible state that allows the entry of the game ball into the second winning a prize opening 315, which is the starting ball entry part, and a restrictive state that restricts the entry of the game ball. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 108, the game control process per normal symbol will be explained.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 108, in the normal pattern per game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern game has ended) is on. (Step S3501). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to start a game for winning common symbols that causes the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, to perform continuous operations. In addition, the normal symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON in step S3211 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game control process of FIG. 105.

If the normal pattern variation stop display flag is on (step S3501: Yes), that is, if it is the timing at which the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3502. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S3501: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3513.

<Step S3502>
When the normal figure fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S3501: Yes), that is, when the timing is such that the normal figure winning game can be started, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed. It is determined whether it is on (step S3502). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 112, which will be described later, the jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S2906 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3952 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3502: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the normal winning game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if a jackpot game is forced to end due to the start of the jackpot game, even if the result of the jackpot lottery for the jackpot game is a jackpot, the jackpot game will not be played. Will not start. That is, in this embodiment, the normal winning game is not started while the jackpot winning game is being executed. Of course, a new common figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S3502: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3503.

<Step S3503>
If the jackpot game flag is off (step S3502: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the long open general hit flag is set to on (step S3503). . The long open flat map winning flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the long open standard lottery is a long open standard lottery based on the lottery process that determines whether or not it is a standard winning pattern. If it is a long open regular figure hit, it is set to ON in step S3405 of the regular figure fluctuation start process in FIG. 107. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished playing game is a long open playing winning. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3504 when the long open general map hit flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), and when the long open general map hit flag is set to OFF (step S3503: No), the process moves to step S3506.

<Steps S3504 and S3505>
If the long open general map winning flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), that is, if the result of the general standard winning lottery in the lottery process for the finished general map game is a long open general winning map, the MPU 41 As the movable body control process, the movable body is In order to execute a long opening as a movable mode of the electric accessory 315b, a process is executed to set the value of an opening time counter (step S3504). The opening time counter is referred to in step S3515 of the game control process per normal figure in order to determine the timing to return the electric accessory 315b from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open normal pattern hit flag to OFF (step S3505), and moves the process to step S3509.

<Step S3506>
If the long open regular map hit flag is set to off (step S3503: No), that is, if the result of the regular open regular lottery for the completed regular regular map game is not a long open regular match, the MPU 41 selects a short open regular map. It is determined whether the hit flag is set on (step S3506). The short open regular map winning flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the short open regular lottery is a short open regular lottery based on the lottery process that determines whether or not it is a regular regular lottery. When it is a short open regular figure hit, it is set to ON in step S1707 of the regular figure fluctuation start process in FIG. 24. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished betting game is a short opening winning. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3507 when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to ON (step S3506: Yes), and when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to OFF (step S3506: No), that is, if the result of the winning lottery for the finished coin game is a loss, the process moves to step S3512.

<Steps S3507 and S3508>
If the short open regular map winning flag is set to on (step S3506: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular regular lottery winning by the lottery process for the completed regular regular map game is a short open regular lottery, the MPU 41 As the movable body control process, based on the information corresponding to 0.1 second, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the short open normal game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315), In order to execute short opening as a movable mode of the movable electric accessory 315b, a process is executed to set the value of the opening time counter (step S3507). The opening time counter is referred to in step S3515 of the game control process per normal figure in order to determine the timing to return the electric accessory 315b from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position. Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open regular pattern hit flag to OFF (step S3508), and moves the process to step S3509.

<Steps S3509 to S3511>
If the result of the winning lottery in the lottery process is a win, and the flag indicating the type of hitting the winning symbol (long open winning flag or short opening winning flag) is set to OFF (step S3505 or S3508), The MPU 41 executes a movable body control process to operate the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, from the standby position, which is the return side position, to the operating position, which is the drive side position (step S3509). As a result, the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entry portion, is opened, and the game ball enters the permissible state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole 315. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory release command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is released (step S3510), and also sets an electric accessory release command that indicates that the electric accessory 315b is released. The electric accessory opening flag is set to on (step S3511), and the process moves to step S3512.

Note that the electric accessory release command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. From this, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an effect indicating that the electric accessory 315b is released, for example, on the symbol display section 341, based on the electric accessory release command.

<Step S3512>
If the result of the lottery is a win, the movable body control process is executed to open the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body (steps S3503 to S3511), or when the long open regular figure hit flag and the like are executed. If the short open normal symbol winning flags are both set to off (if the result of the common symbol winning lottery by the lottery process is a loss) (step S3503 and step S3506 are both No), the MPU 41 displays the normal symbol stopped. The normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation has been completed (that the normal pattern game has ended) is set to OFF (step S3512), and the normal pattern per game control process is ended.

<Step S3513>
When the common figure fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S3501: No), the MPU 41 sets the electric accessory that is set to ON when the electric accessory 315b is released in step S3511 of the normal symbol per game control process. It is determined whether the open flag is set to on (step S3513). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game per common symbol is being executed. When the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S3513: Yes), that is, when the common map winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3514. On the other hand, when the electric accessory opening flag is set to OFF (step S3513: No), that is, when the game per common symbol is not being executed, the MPU 41 ends the game control process for the common symbol.

<Steps S3514 and S3515>
When the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S3513: Yes), that is, when the game per common symbol is being executed, the MPU 41 sets the flag in step S3504 or S3507 of the game control process for the common symbol. 1 is subtracted from the value of the open time counter (step S3514), and it is determined whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3515). That is, as a movable body control process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position, based on the satisfaction of the end determination condition. Make a termination judgment.

If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3515: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b to the standby position which is the return side position, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3516. do. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3515: No), that is, if it is not the timing to return the electric accessory 315b to the standby position which is the return side position, the MPU 41 controls the game per normal figure. Finish the process.

<Steps S3516 to S3518>
When the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3515: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b to the return side position, which is the standby position, the MPU 41 The object 315b is returned from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position (step S3516). As a result, the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entry portion, is closed, and the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory closing command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is closed (step S3517), and also sets an electric accessory closing command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is closed. The accessory item opening flag is set to OFF (step S3518), and the normal symbol winning game control process is ended.

Note that the electric accessory closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 is able to terminate, for example, the performance performed on the symbol display section 341, which indicates that the electric accessory is opened, based on the electric accessory closing command.

In addition, in this embodiment, regarding the case where the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is driven to the drive side position only once in a game per common figure (when the second prize opening 315 is opened once) As described above, the electric accessory 315b may be driven to the drive side position multiple times in one game per common figure (the second prize opening 315 may be opened multiple times), and in this case, the 2 When the winning opening 315 is closed (when the electric accessory 315b as a movable body is in the standby position which is the return side position), an end determination is made to determine whether the end determination condition for ending the game per common figure is satisfied. , when the second winning hole 315 is opened, the condition for determining the end of the normal winning game is set, and the end determination is not executed when the second winning hole 315 is opened. This is because while the second winning hole 315 is open, it is not possible to end the normal winning game, so for control purposes, the second winning opening 315 will be opened even though the normal drawing winning game has ended. , this is because problems occur. Furthermore, if this problem is dealt with through control, unnecessary controls will increase. Therefore, when the second winning opening 315 is closed (when the electric accessory 315b as a movable body is in the standby position which is the return side position), the end judgment is made as to whether the end judgment condition for ending the game per common figure is satisfied. By doing so, it becomes possible to efficiently control the movement and termination of the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body. Of course, even if the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is driven to the drive side position only once in one game per normal figure, the end judgment is made to end the game per normal figure when the second winning opening 315 is closed. It may also be possible to determine whether the condition is satisfied or not.

[Special figure game control processing]
Here, FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. In the special figure game control process, the storage contents of the special figure holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is controlled, for example, the The variable display and stop display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 is controlled. Hereinafter, the special figure game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 109.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 109, in step S3601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is on. In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 112, which will be described later, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3906 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3552 when the jackpot game ends. .

When the jackpot game flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game control process. That is, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3602.

<Step S3602>
When the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 controls whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (first special symbol game or second special symbol). It is determined whether the special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that the special figure game is currently being executed is on (step S3602). The special symbol variation display flag is set to ON in step S3807 when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 111, which will be described later, and the special symbol game control When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the process, it is set to off in step S3609.

If the special symbol variable display flag is on (step S3602: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is variable and displayed (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3606. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation display flag is off (step S3602: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not in progress and the special symbol is not in variation display (the special symbol game is in progress), the MPU 41 processes the The process moves to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
When the special symbol fluctuation display flag is off (step S3602: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed and the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 displays the special symbol on hold. Both the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the storage area 412b and the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not is 0 (step S3603).

When both the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M are 0 (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 suspends the right to execute the first special figure game and the second special figure reservation. If there is no reservation of the right to play the game, the special figure game control process is ended. On the other hand, if either the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3603: No), the MPU 41 suspends the right to execute the first special figure game; If at least one of the rights to execute the second special figure game is reserved, the process moves to step S3604.

<Step S3604>
If either the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3603: No), that is, the right to execute the first special figure game is reserved and the second special figure game is held. If there is at least one of the reservations of the right to execute the ( Step S3604), the process moves to step S3605. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

<Step S3605>
In step S3605, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 (first special symbol game or second special symbol). A special figure fluctuation start process is executed to execute the figure game, and the special figure game control process is ended. The details of the special figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111.

<Step S3606>
When the special symbol fluctuation display flag is on (step S3602: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol. From the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the second special symbol game, the special symbol for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set in the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process of step S3804 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 111, which will be described later. It is determined whether the figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S3606). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the special symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game.

When the special symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3606: Yes), that is, the timing to stop displaying the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game. If so, the process moves to step S3607. On the other hand, if the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3606: No), the MPU 41 stops and displays the special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is not the timing to end the figure game, the special figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S3607 to S3609>
If the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3606: Yes), that is, at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner and ending the special symbol game. If so, the MPU 41 causes the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 to stop and display the special symbol in a manner according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game. (Step S3607). Then, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S3608), and at the same time, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The flag indicating that the special figure fluctuation display is in progress (the special figure game is being executed) is set to OFF (step S3609), and the special figure game control process is ended.

[Special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3604 of FIG. 109. In the special figure data setting process, the storage contents of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special figure data setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 110.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 110, in step S3701, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is 0 or not. The MPU 41 determines that when the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S3701: Yes), that is, when there is no second special figure reservation for the second special figure game and there is a first special figure reservation for the first special figure game. (See step S3603 in the special figure game control process in FIG. 109), and the process moves to step S3702. On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3701: No), that is, if there is a second special figure reservation for the second special figure game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3705. That is, the MPU 41 starts the second special pattern game with priority over the first special pattern game by determining whether or not the second special pattern reservation number M for the second special pattern game is 0.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special pattern game is started with priority over the first special pattern game, but the first special pattern game is started with priority over the second special pattern game. Also, the special figure game is started in the order in which the game balls enter the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entering part (order of reservation), and the first special figure game and the second special figure game are started. Either one of the figure games may be executed. In addition, the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other without setting a priority order for starting the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, and the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other. The second special figure game may be executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation of special figures).

<Steps S3702 to S3704>
When the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 stores the first special figure reservation stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. The number N is subtracted by 1 (step S3702), and the special symbol validity information is moved from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA to the special symbol execution area AE (step S3703). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA one by one (step S3704). Specifically, in step S3704, the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REA2 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2. It is moved to the reservation area REA2, and the special symbol validity information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. When the process of step S3704 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3708.

<Steps S3705 to S3707>
If the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3701: No), the MPU 41 stores the second special figure reservation number stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. M is subtracted by 1 (step S3705), and the special symbol validity information is moved from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB to the special symbol execution area AE (step S3706). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB one by one (step S3707). Specifically, in step S3707, the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the fourth reservation area REB2. The special symbol validity information in the reservation area REB4 is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S3707 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3708.

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, the MPU 41 controls the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA, or the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REB4 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB. A special figure shift command indicating that the special figure validity information has been shifted is set in the RAM 412, and the special figure data setting process is ended. This special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 changes the number of pending displays corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the second special symbol pending displayed on the symbol display section 341 based on the special symbol shift command. be able to.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3605 of FIG. 109. In the special symbol variation start process, the first special game or the second special symbol is started by starting the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363. A game (special figure game) is started, and various processes accompanying the start of the special figure game are executed. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to FIG. 111.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 111, in step S3801, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state which is a high probability mode. Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined by whether or not the variable probability gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state which is the high probability mode is set to on. The variable probability gaming state flag is set to ON when the gaming state is transferred from the variable probability jackpot gaming state to the variable probability gaming state in step S2317 of FIG. 34 in the above-described gaming state transition process, and the gaming state is is set to OFF when transitioning from a variable probability gaming state to a variable probability jackpot gaming state or a normal jackpot gaming state.

If the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state that is a high probability mode (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3802, and if the gaming state is not a variable probability gaming state that is a high probability mode (step S3801: No). ), that is, if the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state which is a low probability mode, the process moves to step S3803.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state that is a high probability mode (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 selects the high probability mode that is saved according to the gaming setting value in step S2410 in the gaming setting value change process of FIG. 35 described above. The mode propriety table (see FIG. 100(B)) is read, and propriety determination is performed based on the high probability mode propriety table (step S3802).

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the variable probability gaming state which is the high probability mode (step S3801: No), that is, if the gaming state is the time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state which is the low probability mode, the MPU 41 operates as shown in FIG. In step S2410 in the game setting value change process, the low probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 100(A)) stored according to the game setting value is read out, and the propriety determination is executed based on the low probability mode propriety table. (Step S3803).

In addition, in steps S3802 and S3803, the validity determination is performed based on the high probability mode validity table or the low probability mode validity table that is saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 35 described above. However, in steps S3802 and S3803, the game setting value saved in step S2408 in the game setting value change process of FIG. The probability mode validity determination may be made by selecting each probability mode validity table one by one.

<Step S3804>
When the judgment is made in step S3802 or S3803, the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in the special symbol game. The symbol fluctuation display time is set as a special symbol fluctuation pattern (step S3804).

In addition, when the result of the judgment in step S3802 or S3803 is a normal jackpot, the fluctuation display time (special pattern fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the same as the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal If the result of the judgment in step S3802 or S3803 is a probability variable jackpot, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the probability variable jackpot variation table (see FIG. 101(B)), and if the result of the validity determination in step S3802 or S3803 is an error, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the error variation table (see FIG. 101(C)) are set. Set based on.

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, the MPU 41 sends a special pattern fluctuation pattern command that includes the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game, which is the result of the judgment in step S3802 or S3803, and the special pattern fluctuation pattern set in step S3804. is set in the RAM 412, and the process moves to step S3806. The special figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute the special figure game performance on the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the special figure variation pattern command.

In addition, as mentioned above, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "A" to the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Any one of "A01" to "A03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R sure-change jackpot," the MPU 41 adds "B" to the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" with "B" indicating a 5R probability-change jackpot, "B01" to " B03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "16R probability-variable jackpot," the MPU 41 adds "C" indicating a 16R probability-variable jackpot to the special pattern variation patterns "01" to "03", "C01" to " C03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "loss", the MPU 41 selects one of the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "08" with "D" attached to indicate a loss, "D01" to "D08". is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "lose", the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of win (front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete win) in the special figure variation pattern command.

<Step S3806>
In step S3806, the MPU 41 starts the special symbol game by starting the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36, and returns the process to step S3807. to move to.

In addition, when the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the special symbols, it adds 1 to the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the win/fail determination based on the low probability mode win/fail table in step S3803 is a win, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive wins" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and determines whether the win/fail result is a jackpot. Clear the "number of consecutive misses" to 0 in certain cases.

<Step S3807>
In step S3807, the MPU 41 sets on the special symbol variable display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed), and moves the process to step S3808. The special symbol variation display flag indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol This is referred to in order to determine whether or not a figure game is being executed.

<Step S3808>
In step S3808, the MPU 41 sets to OFF the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol fluctuation has been stopped (the special symbol game has ended), and moves the process to step S3809. The special symbol fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 is stopped and displayed in step S3608 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. , is referred to in step S3902 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 112, which will be described later, to determine whether or not it is the timing at which the jackpot game can be started.

<Step S3809>
In step S3809, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving gaming state flag indicating the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) is on. The time-saving game state flag is set to ON when the normal jackpot game ends in step S2321 of FIG. 34 in the above-mentioned game state transition process, and the game state is changed to the time-saving game in step S2310 of FIG. 33 or step S2325 of FIG. This is set to OFF when the state is changed to a jackpot game state or a normal game state.

When the time-saving gaming state flag is on (step S3809: Yes), that is, when the time-saving gaming state is in effect, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3810. On the other hand, when the time-saving game state flag is off (step S3809: Yes), that is, when it is not in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol fluctuation start process.

<Step S3810>
When the time-saving game state flag is on (step S3809: Yes), that is, when it is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the time-saving game state. (Step S3810), and ends the special symbol fluctuation start process. Note that the time saving number counter is set when the gaming state is transferred from the jackpot gaming state to the time saving gaming state in step S2320 in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 34 described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time saving number counter is set when the gaming state shifts from the jackpot gaming state to the time saving gaming state, but the time saving number counter is set when the gaming state shifts from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variable gaming state. It may also be set when it is set when it is set. That is, the gaming machine 10 can be configured as a so-called ST machine by setting the maximum number of special symbol games to be executed in a variable probability gaming state to a finite number of times.

In addition, when the normal jackpot game that is executed based on the fact that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot ends, the gaming machine 10 returns to the normal gaming state without shifting from the jackpot gaming state to the time-saving gaming state. It is also possible to set it to shift, and in this case, the time saving number counter is not set after the end of the normal jackpot game.

[Jackpot game control processing]
Here, FIGS. 112 to 115 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 in the main process of FIG. 104. In the jackpot game control process, processing for controlling the progress of the jackpot game, such as a movable body control process for opening and closing the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body provided in the variable prize opening 316, is executed. Hereinafter, the jackpot game control process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 112, in step S3901, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is on. The jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3906 of the jackpot game control process when starting the jackpot game, and is set to OFF in step S3952 of the jackpot game control process when ending the jackpot game.

When the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3901: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3911. On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S3901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3902.

<Step S3902>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3901: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed is on or not. to judge. The special symbol fluctuation stop flag is set to ON in step S3608 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. 109 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and is set to ON in step S3608 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. It is set to OFF in step S3808 in the special figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the jackpot game by determining whether or not the special figure game that was started when the jackpot game is not being executed has ended.

If the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is on (step S3902: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the jackpot game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3903. On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is off (step S3902: No), that is, when the jackpot game cannot be started because the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started (executed) when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (while the special symbol game is being executed), but the jackpot game is not started (executed) when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (while the special symbol game is being executed). A jackpot game may be started (executed) at any time. For example, a jackpot game may be started (executed) during the variable display of the first special symbol, and conversely, a jackpot game may be started (executed) during the variable display of the second special symbol. Specifically, as mentioned above, by making it possible to change the first special symbol and the second special symbol to fluctuate simultaneously, the second special symbol game is executed while the jackpot game for the first special symbol game is being executed. , the first special figure game may be executed during execution of the jackpot game for the second special figure game. Furthermore, a jackpot game for the first special figure game and a jackpot game for the second special figure game may be executed simultaneously, or a jackpot game for the first special figure game and a jackpot game for the second special figure game. If the start condition for the other jackpot game is satisfied while one of the jackpot games is being executed, the other jackpot game may be started after the one jackpot game ends.

<Step S3903>
When the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is on (step S3902: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot. Determine whether or not. Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot is determined based on the result of the jackpot lottery stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 41, for example. Judgment is made based on the special map validity information.

If the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3904. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is not a jackpot (step S3903: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process. .

<Step S3904>
If the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 41 starts the jackpot game and determines the type of the jackpot game (probable jackpot game or A jackpot game start command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of a normal jackpot game (step S3904), and the process moves to step S3905. The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute a jackpot game performance such as a display performance executed on the symbol display section 341 according to the jackpot game type based on the jackpot game start command.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is to be started, and moves the process to step S3906. The jackpot game start flag is referred to in step S2301 in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 33 described above when determining whether to shift the gaming state to the probability variable jackpot gaming state or the normal jackpot gaming state.

<Step S3906>
In step S3906, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and moves the process to step S3907. In order to judge whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, the jackpot game in progress flag is used in step S3901 of the jackpot game control process, step S3203 of the general figure game control process in FIG. 105, and special figure in FIG. 109. It is referred to in step S3601 of the game control process.

<Step S3907>
In step S3907, the MPU 41 generates a subtractive formula indicating the remaining number of round games based on information (round number information) set corresponding to the maximum number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode according to the jackpot type. A movable body control process for setting a round number counter is executed, and the process moves to step S3908. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round number counter to "5" when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot and 5R normal jackpot, and sets the round number counter to "5" when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot. Set "16" to "16". As a result, in the round game, based on the information set as the round number counter corresponding to the jackpot type, the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, is moved between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the drive side position by the number of times according to the jackpot type. A movable body control process is executed in which the movable body is moved back and forth between the movable body and the operating position, and a continuous operation is executed in which the timing at which the end determination condition is met is indefinite depending on the type of jackpot.

Note that in this embodiment, the round number counter is set as a subtraction type counter, but the round number counter may be set as an addition type counter. When the round number counter is set as an incremental counter, for example, when the value of the round number counter becomes a value corresponding to the maximum number of round games, the termination determination condition of the opening/closing execution mode is satisfied, and the MPU 51 determines the termination. The opening/closing execution mode is ended when it is determined that the determination condition has been met. In other words, when it is determined that the termination determination condition of the opening/closing execution mode whose satisfaction timing is undefined is satisfied, the movable body control process is performed by the MPU 41 to terminate the continuous operation of the opening/closing door 319 which is the movable body. executed.

<Step S3908>
In step S3908, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of starting the opening of the jackpot game, and moves the process to step S3909. The opening start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an opening performance such as a display performance performed on the symbol display section 341 based on the opening start command.

<Step S3909>
In step S3909, the MPU 41 sets a subtractive opening time counter as information indicating the remaining opening time based on the information (opening time information) set corresponding to the maximum opening time to be executed in the jackpot game. , the process moves to step S3910. The opening time counter is referred to in step S3913 in FIG. 113 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the opening.

In this embodiment, the opening time counter is set as a subtraction type counter, but the opening time counter may be set as an addition type counter. When the opening time counter is set as an incremental counter, for example, when the value of the opening time counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum opening time, the opening end determination condition is satisfied and the MPU 41 The opening is ended when it is determined that the end determination condition has been met.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, the MPU 41 sets on the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S3911 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether or not the opening is in progress.

<Step S3911>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3901: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening in progress flag indicating that the opening is in progress is on. (Step S3911).

If the opening flag is on (step S3911: Yes), that is, if the opening is in progress, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3912 in FIG. 113. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S3911: No), that is, if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S3922.

<Steps S3912 and S3913>
When the opening flag is on (step S3911: Yes), that is, when the opening is being executed, the MPU 41 calculates 1 from the value of the opening time counter as information indicating the remaining opening time, as shown in FIG. It is subtracted (step S3912), and it is determined whether or not the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the opening end determination condition (step S3913). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the opening.

If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3913: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that it is the timing to end the opening based on the end determination that the opening end determination condition is satisfied. If so, the process moves to step S3914. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3913: No), the MPU 41 determines that it is not the timing to end the opening based on the determination that the opening end determination condition is not satisfied. If so, the jackpot game control process is ended.

<Steps S3914 and S3915>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3913: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is the timing to end the opening based on the end determination that the opening end determination condition is satisfied. , the MPU 41 sets an opening end command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game ends (step S3914). It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the opening performance such as the display performance executed on the symbol display section 341 based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress to OFF (step S3915), and moves the process to step S3916.

<Step S3916>
In step S3916, the MPU 41 determines that the opening/closing execution mode in which a plurality of (5 or 16) round games are executed is started, that is, the opening/closing execution mode is a continuous operation of the opening/closing door 319 which is a movable body. An opening/closing execution mode start command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that opening/closing will be executed in a movable manner determined according to the jackpot type, and the process moves to step S3917. The opening/closing execution mode start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an opening/closing execution mode performance such as a display performance executed on the symbol display section 341 based on the opening/closing execution mode start command.

<Step S3917>
In step S3917, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that a round game is to be started, and moves the process to step S3918. The round game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start a round game performance such as a display performance executed on the symbol display section 341 based on the round game start command, and can also start a round game performance such as a display performance executed on the symbol display section 341 in each round game. The number of rounds can be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the round game performance is executed individually in each round game, but the round game performance is a series of one display performance etc. in the opening/closing execution mode, and the round game performance is executed in the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, the number of rounds of a round game may be displayed. In this case, it is not necessary to perform an interval effect between round games, or an effect that displays the number of rounds of the next round game to be executed may be performed as an interval effect.

<Steps S3918 and S3919>
In step S3918, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the subtractive round number counter as information indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and further moves the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, to the return side position, which is the standby position. A movable body control process is executed to open the variable prize opening 316 by moving it from the position to the operating position which is the drive side position (step S3919), and the process moves to step S3920.

<Steps S3920 and S3921>
In step S3920, the MPU 41 sets on the round game in progress flag indicating that the round game is being executed, and further sets the flag corresponding to the maximum time of the round game (the maximum movable time of the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body). Based on the round game time information set in step S3921, a movable body control process is executed to set a subtractive round game time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the round game (step S3921), and the jackpot game control process is executed. finish. The round game time counter determines the end of the round game (returns the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position) when a specified time has elapsed in the movable body control process. In order to execute the end determination as to whether or not the conditions are satisfied, reference is made in step S3924 in FIG. 214 of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, in this embodiment, the round game time counter is set as a subtraction type counter, but the round game time counter may be set as an addition type counter. When the round game time counter is set as an incremental counter, for example, in the movable body control process, when the value of the round game time counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum round game time, the round game is started. The round game is ended when the termination determination condition is satisfied and the MPU 41 determines that the termination determination condition is satisfied.

<Step S3922>
Returning to FIG. 112, if the opening flag is off (step S3911: No), that is, if the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the round game flag indicating that the round game is being executed to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3922). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a round game is being executed.

When the round game flag is on (step S3922: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3923 in FIG. 114. On the other hand, when the round game flag is off (step S3922: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3926.

<Steps S3923 and S3924>
When the round game in progress flag is on (step S3922: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, as shown in FIG. 114, the MPU 41 displays a round game time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the round game. Subtract 1 from the value. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3924). That is, as a movable body control process, the MPU 41 makes an end determination to end the round game (returns the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position) when a specified time has elapsed. It is determined whether the condition is satisfied or not.

If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3924: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the round game when the specified time has elapsed according to the end determination in the movable body control process (the opening/closing door which is a movable body) If it is determined that the round game is to be ended due to the establishment of the end determination condition that causes the round game to return from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position, the process moves to step S3928. On the other hand, if the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3924: No), in other words, the MPU 41 ends the round game when the specified time has elapsed according to the end determination in the movable body control process (opening/closing the movable body). If it is determined that the round game is not to be terminated due to failure of the termination determination condition that causes the door 319 to return from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position, the process moves to step S3925.

<Step S3925>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3924: No), in other words, the round game ends when the specified time elapses according to the completion judgment (the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, is moved from the operating position, which is the drive side position). If it is determined that the round game is not to be ended due to failure of the termination determination condition to cause the game to return to the standby position that is the return side position, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 (step S3925). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 can be determined by detecting the entry of a game ball into the ball entry sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. The determination is made based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412.

If the game ball enters the variable winning hole 316 (step S3925: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3926, and if the game ball does not enter the variable winning hole 316 (step S3925: No), the jackpot game control process ends.

<Steps S3926 and S3927>
When a game ball enters the variable winning hole 316 (step S3925: Yes), the MPU 41 inputs an addition formula as information indicating the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole 316 in the round game. 1 is added to the value of the pitch number counter (step S3926). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the number of balls entered after the addition has reached 10 (step S3927), that is, as a movable body control process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the number of balls entered after the addition has reached 10 (step S3927). A termination determination is made as to whether or not the termination determination condition for terminating the game (returning the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position) is satisfied. In other words, the conditions for determining the end of the round game are the elapse of the specified time and the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316, and since the timing for determining the end of the round game is satisfied is indefinite, the condition for determining the end of the round game is During execution, a termination determination is made as to whether any of these termination determination conditions are satisfied.

If the value of the ball entering number counter after addition has reached 10 (step S3927: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that the upper limit number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 316 based on the end determination in the movable body control process. If it is determined that the end determination condition for ending the round game (returning the movable opening/closing door 319 from the drive side position, which is the operating position, to the return side position, which is the standby position) is satisfied, the process is performed in step The process moves to S3928. On the other hand, if the value of the number of balls entered after addition has not reached 10 (step S3927: No), the MPU 41 sends the upper limit number of game balls to the variable prize opening 316 based on the end determination in the movable body control process. If it is determined that the end judgment condition for ending the round game due to the ball entering (returning the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position) is not satisfied, The jackpot game control process ends.

In this embodiment, the number of balls entered is set as an additive counter, but the number of balls entered may be set as a subtractive counter. When the number of balls entered counter is set as a subtractive counter, for example, in the movable object control process, when the value of the number of balls entered counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum number of balls entered, the round game The round game is ended when the termination determination condition is satisfied and the MPU 41 determines that the termination determination condition is satisfied.

<Step S3928>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3924: Yes), or if the value of the ball entry counter reaches 10 (step S3927: Yes), the MPU 41 performs the following as a movable body control process: The variable winning opening is closed by returning the opening/closing door 319 as a movable body from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position (step S3928), and the process moves to step S3929. That is, when it is determined by the end determination in the movable body control process that the end determination condition for ending the round game is satisfied, the MPU 41 returns the opening/closing door 319, which is the movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position. By returning to the standby position, which is the side position, the variable prize opening 316 is closed and the round game ends.

<Steps S3929 to S3931>
In step S3929, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the round game ends. The round game end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the round game performance such as the display performance executed on the symbol display section 341 based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of balls entered as information indicating the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole 316 in the round game (step S3930), and also indicates that the round game is being executed. The round game flag is set to OFF (step S3930), and the process moves to step S3932.

<Step S3932>
In step S3932, the MPU 41 determines whether the round number counter as information indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 0 (step S3932), that is, as a movable body control process, ends the opening/closing execution mode. A termination determination is made as to whether or not termination determination conditions are met.

If the round number counter is 0 (step S3932: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that the termination determination condition for terminating the opening/closing execution mode is satisfied based on the termination determination in the movable body control process (there is no unexecuted round game). ), the process moves to step S3941. On the other hand, the MPU 41 determines that if the round number counter is not 0 (step S3932: No), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the opening/closing execution mode by the termination determination in the movable body control process is not satisfied (the unexecuted round game is Yes), the process moves to step S3933.

Here, when the variable prize opening 316 is opened (when the opening/closing door 319 as a movable body is in the operating position which is the drive side position), set the conditions for determining the end of the opening/closing execution mode (opening of the 5th R or 16th R). The reason why the end determination is not executed when the variable winning hole 316 is opened is that the opening/closing execution mode cannot be terminated while the variable winning hole 316 is open. This is because the prize opening 316 will be opened, causing a problem. Furthermore, if this problem is dealt with through control, unnecessary controls will increase. Therefore, when the variable prize opening 316 is closed (when the opening/closing door 319 as a movable body is in the standby position which is the return side position), it is necessary to perform the termination determination as to whether the termination determination condition for terminating the opening/closing execution mode is satisfied. This makes it possible to efficiently control the movement and termination of the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body.

<Step S3933>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S3932: No), that is, it is determined by the end determination in the movable body control process that the end determination condition for ending the opening/closing execution mode is not satisfied (there is an unexecuted round game). If so, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of starting the interval between round games (step S3933), and moves the process to step S3934. The interval start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an interval effect such as a display effect executed on the symbol display section 341 based on the interval start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, interval effects such as display effects are performed in the intervals between round games, but the interval effects are omitted, and in the intervals, round game effects such as display effects for the previously executed round game are performed. It may be executed continuously, or a round game effect such as a display effect for the next round game to be executed may be executed.

<Steps S3934 and S3935>
In step S3934, the MPU 41 sets on an interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets a subtractive interval time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S3935), and ends the jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is used in step S3938 in FIG. 115 in the jackpot game control process to determine whether the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting the round game) is satisfied as the movable body control process. Referenced in

<Step S3936>
Returning to FIG. 112, when the round game flag is off (step S3922: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. It is determined whether it is on (step S3936). The during interval flag is set to ON in step S3934 in FIG. 114 in the jackpot game control process when starting the interval, and is turned off in step S3940 in FIG. 115 in the jackpot game control process when ending the interval. Set.

If the during-interval flag is on (step S3936: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3937 in FIG. 115. On the other hand, if the during-interval flag is off (step S3936: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3945.

<Steps S3937 and S3938>
If the during-interval flag is on (step S3936: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 stores the interval time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the interval, as shown in FIG. Subtract 1 from the value (step S3937). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3938), that is, the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting the round game) is determined as the end determination in the movable body control process. Determine whether it is true.

If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3938: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting the round game) is satisfied in the end determination in the movable body control process. If it is determined that there is, the process moves to step S3939. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3938: No), the MPU 41 determines that the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting the round game) is satisfied in the end determination in the movable body control process. If it is determined that the jackpot game control process is not executed, the jackpot game control process is ended.

<Steps S3939 and S3940>
If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3938: Yes), that is, it is determined that the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting the round game) is satisfied in the end determination in the movable body control process. If so, the MPU 41 sets an interval end command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the interval ends. The interval end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the interval performance such as the display performance executed on the symbol display section 341 based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the during-interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed (step S3940), and shifts the process to step S3917 described above. By moving the process to step S3917 in FIG. 113 described above, the processes of steps S3917 to S3921 regarding the start of the round game are executed, and the jackpot game control process is ended.

<Step S3941>
Returning to FIG. 114, if the round number counter is 0 (step S3932: Yes), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the opening/closing execution mode is satisfied by the termination determination in the movable body control process (the unexecuted round game ), the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing mode termination command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to terminate the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game (step S3941), and moves the process to step S3942. do. The opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the round game performance (opening/closing execution mode performance) such as the display performance executed on the symbol display section 341 based on the opening/closing execution mode end command.

<Step S3942>
In step S3942, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start the ending of the jackpot game, and moves the process to step S3943. The ending start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an ending effect such as a display effect executed on the symbol display section 341 based on the ending start command.

<Steps S3943 and S3944>
In step S3943, the MPU 41 sets on an ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets a subtractive ending time counter as information indicating the remaining ending time (step S3944), and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referenced in step S3947 in FIG. 115 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether or not to end the ending (jackpot game) due to the satisfaction of the ending determination condition for the ending (jackpot game). .

In this embodiment, the ending time counter is set as a subtraction type counter, but the ending time counter may be set as an addition type counter. When the ending time counter is set as an incremental counter, for example, when the value of the ending time counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum opening time, the ending completion determination condition is satisfied and the MPU 41 The ending is terminated when it is determined that the termination determination condition has been met.

<Step S3945>
Returning to FIG. 112, if the during interval flag is off (step S3936: No), that is, when the interval between rounds is not being executed, whether or not the ending during flag indicating that the ending is being executed is on. is determined (step S3945).

If the ending flag is on (step S3945: Yes), that is, if the ending is in progress, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3946 in FIG. 115. On the other hand, if the ending flag is off (step S3945: No), that is, if the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3950.

<Steps S3946 and S3947>
When the ending flag is on (step S3945: Yes), that is, when the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 calculates 1 from the value of the ending time counter as information indicating the remaining ending time, as shown in FIG. Subtract (step S3946). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3947). That is, the MPU 41 makes an end determination as to whether or not the ending end determination condition is satisfied.

If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3947: Yes), that is, if it is determined by the end determination that the ending end determination condition is satisfied, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3948. . On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3947: No), that is, if it is determined that the ending termination determination condition is not satisfied, the MPU 41 executes the jackpot game control process. finish.

<Steps S3948 and S3949>
When the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3947: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 sends an audio lamp control device to end the ending of the jackpot game. Set the ending end command to be notified to 5. The ending end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the ending performance such as the display performance performed on the symbol display section 341 based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag indicating that the ending is in progress to OFF (step S3949), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S3950>
Returning to FIG. 112, if the ending flag is off (step S3945: No), that is, if the game is not in the opening, round game, interval, or ending, the MPU 41 sends a voice message indicating that the jackpot game is over. A jackpot game end command to be notified to the lamp control device 5 is set (step S3950), and the process moves to step S3951. The jackpot game end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the jackpot game performance such as the display performance executed on the symbol display section 341 based on the jackpot game end command.

<Steps S3951 and S3952>
In step S3951, a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set on. The jackpot game end flag is referenced in step S2312 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 34 described above in order to determine whether to shift from the jackpot gaming state to the high-frequency support mode (variable probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state). Ru.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed (step S3952), and ends the jackpot game control process.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 150.

Note that in another embodiment, part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In addition, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27, startup processing at the time of startup of the audio lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power outage, etc. Descriptions of those processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, a sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process with a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 performs a counter update process (step S2701), an operation detection process (step S2702), a command determination process (step S2703), and a special figure game performance control process (step S2704). ), and jackpot game performance control processing (step S2705).

[Counter update processing]
In the counter update process (step S2701), the MPU 51 updates the production pattern type counter, the first stop symbol type counter, the variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the production type counter and the first stop symbol type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The production pattern type counter is used to determine the variation type (production pattern) based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Further, the first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to know the remaining variable display time, that the variable display is in progress, that the variable display of the symbol display section 341 has ended, etc.

[Operation detection processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in step S2702 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 116 will be described. Here, FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process.

As shown in FIG. 117, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S4001), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S4002), selection button operation detection processing (step S4003), selection operation detection pattern determination Processing (step S4004), determination button operation detection processing (step S4005), and determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S4006) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection processing]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S4001 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be determined whether or not there is. Here, FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG. 118.

<Steps S4101 to S4103>
As shown in FIG. 118, in the operation button operation detection process, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag (step S4101). Next, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag (step S4102). After that, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag (step S4103), and ends the operation detection process.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S4101 to S4103, the operation status of the most recent three times at an interval of 1 msec is set as the operation history of the operation button 20 in the first detection flag to the third detection flag. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the two previous operation state is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 117, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S4002 in the operation detection process, the operation of the operation button 20 is determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag is set for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the history. The operation pattern flags consist of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, if only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is being continued (see FIG. 120(A)). Furthermore, if only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 120(A)). Furthermore, if only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 120(A)). If all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 is not operated (see FIG. 120(A)). Here, FIG. 119 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. Further, FIG. 120(A) is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation situations for the operation buttons 20. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120(A).

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 119, in the operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines whether the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to on (step S4201). . Here, if the first operation detection flag is on (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4202, and if the first operation detection flag is off (step S4201: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4202. The process moves to step S4205.

<Step S4202>
If the first operation detection flag is on (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set on ( Step S4202). Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4203, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S4202: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4203. The process moves to step S4208.

<Step S4203>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set on (step S4203). ). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4204, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S4203: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4204. The process moves to step S4210.

<Step S4204>
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag on, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off (step S4204), and The operation detection pattern determination process ends. That is, when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 120(A)). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 continues to be operated. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the audio lamp control device 5. . As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation on the operation button 20 is continuing, and therefore, the operation button 20 is continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. I can keep track of the time. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time period during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Step S4205>
If the first operation detection flag is off (step S4201: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on (step S4205). ). Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4206, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S4205: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4206. The process moves to step S4210.

<Step S4206>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S4206). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4207, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S4206: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4207. The process moves to step S4210.

<Step S4207>
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag on and turns off the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag (step S4207). That is, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 120(A)), and the operation detection pattern determination process ends. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, if the second operation pattern flag is used to determine whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times will be reflected, so the radio wave Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S4208>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S4202: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S4208). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4210, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4210. The process moves to step S4209.

<Step S4209>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag on, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off (step S4209), and The operation detection pattern determination process ends. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 120(A)). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). can.

<Step S4210>
If the third operation detection flag is off (step S4203: No), if the second operation detection flag is off (step S4205: No), if the third operation detection flag is off (step S4206: No) , or when the third operation detection flag is on (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag off (step S4210), and The operation detection pattern determination process ends. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (see FIG. 120(A)). Note that, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state.

[Selection button operation detection processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 117, in the selection button operation detection process (step S4003), the MPU 41 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation process>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, since the upper selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 118, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the upper selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "upper selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 118.

<Down selection button operation process>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the lower selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 118, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 118.

<Left selection button operation process>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the left selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 118, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the left selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 118.

<Right selection button operation process>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 118, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 118.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 117, in the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S4004), the MPU 41 performs up selection operation detection pattern determination processing, down selection operation detection pattern determination processing, left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, and right selection operation detection pattern determination processing. Execute pattern determination processing.

<Up selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects an upper selection operation from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. An up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upward selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 119, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process shown in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 120(B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the upper selection button 211 for three times. If this occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

In addition, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been completed). used.

Furthermore, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that, when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in a non-operated state.

<Down selection operation detection pattern judgment process>
In the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the down selection button from the operation history of the down selection button 212 determined based on the first down selection operation detection flag, the second down selection operation detection flag, and the down selection operation detection flag. A down operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, the down selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 119, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process shown in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 120(C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the down selection button 212 for three times. If this occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

In addition, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third lower selection operation detection flags. Set all of them to off. Note that when all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in the non-operated state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects a left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 119, detailed explanation will be omitted. In addition, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process shown in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 120(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times. If this occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third left selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that, when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operated state.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 119, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. In addition, in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 120(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the three operation states of the right selection button 214. If this occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 continues.

In addition, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third right selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that, when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in an inoperable state.

[Enter button operation detection processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 117, in the determination button operation detection process (step S4005), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B, and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the determination button operation detection process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 118, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the determination button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "determination button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 118.

[Decision operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S4006), the MPU 41 selects the decision button from the operation history of the decision button 21B determined based on the first decision operation detection flag, the second decision operation detection flag, and the third decision operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 21B is set. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 118, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "determination operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 118.

Here, as shown in FIG. 120(F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" have occurred as the operation states of the determination button 21B three times. In this case, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first determination operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B continues.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON. The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from a non-operating state to an operating state (whether or not the decision button 21B has started operating). .

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the third decision operation pattern flag to ON, and the first decision operation pattern flag is set to ON. The operation pattern flag and the second determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has ended). .

In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc. occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 controls all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags. Set to off. Note that, when all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in the non-operated state.

[Command judgment processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 116 will be described. Here, FIGS. 121 and 122 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing.

<Step S4301>
As shown in FIG. 121, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4 (step S4301). Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S4301: Yes), the process moves to step S4302. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S4301: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

Note that the command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. In addition, the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is erased from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S4301 and becomes the target of processing. is memorized.

<Step S4302>
When a command is received (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S4302). The special symbol variation pattern command is a command that indicates the variable display time of special symbols in the special symbol game (special symbol variation pattern) and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

Here, if the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4303, and if the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S4302: No) , the process moves to step S4307.

<Steps S4303 and S4304>
If the received command is a special pattern variation pattern command (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 performs stop symbol combination setting processing (step S4303) and variation type based on the special pattern variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. (Rendering pattern) setting processing (step S4304) is executed. For details of the stop symbol combination setting process, refer to FIGS. 123 and 124, and for details of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process,
This will be explained with reference to FIGS. 125 to 138.

<Step S4305>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in FIG. 121, in step S4305, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the received special figure variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the special figure variable pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining display time, etc. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol fluctuation display has ended when the fluctuation display counter reaches 0.

<Step S4306>
In step S4306, the MPU 51 sends a display fluctuation pattern command to the display control device for specifying the content of the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols determined in step S4303 of the command determination process and the production pattern type set in step S4304. 6, and the command determination process ends. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the performance pattern type and the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores variable images and performance images of decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes display performances such as a variation display and a production display on the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination, variation type, and production type of decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command. do.

Specifically, in the symbol display section 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses, and The variations of the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in order. During the variable display of decorative symbols, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the pattern display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, etc. .

Furthermore, when outputting the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets, for example, a special figure game presentation flag on. This special figure game performance flag is a flag indicating that a special figure game performance is being executed.

<Step S4307>
If the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S4302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure shift command (step S4307). The special figure shift command is used when the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M decreases due to the start of the special figure game (fluctuating display of special figures). 1 holding area REA1 to 4th holding area REA4, or 1st holding area REB1 to 4th holding area REB4 of 2nd special drawing holding storage area REB (see Figure 99). This command indicates that information has shifted.

When the received command is a special figure shift command (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4308, and when the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S4307: No), the process moves to step S4310. to move to.

<Steps S4308 and S4309>
If the received command is a special figure shift command (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the special figure data setting process (step S4308) and the special figure data image display process (step S4309), and executes the command determination process. finish.

Here, the special figure data setting process executed in step S4308 is the special figure validity information data (special figure This is a process of shifting (updating) the figure data). The special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) is an area corresponding to the special figure pending storage area 412b (see FIG. 99) set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4, and is equivalent to the special figure pending storage area 412b. Special map data is stored. The special figure holding storage area corresponding areas (not shown) include the first special figure holding storage area REA, the second special figure holding storage area REB of the special figure holding storage area 412b, and the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 99). It includes a first special figure pending storage area corresponding area, a second special figure pending storage area corresponding area, and a special figure execution area corresponding area, respectively. In addition, the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area is the first special figure holding storage area corresponding to the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4 (see FIG. 99) of the first special figure holding storage area REA in the special figure holding storage area 412b. It includes an area corresponding to the first to fourth reservation areas in the figure (not shown) and a first special symbol reservation number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number storage area (see FIG. 99). Furthermore, the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area corresponds to the first to fourth holding areas REB1 to REB4 (see FIG. 99) of the second special figure holding storage area REB in the special figure holding storage area 412b. It includes an area corresponding to the first to fourth reservation areas in the figure, and an area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area (see FIG. 99).

On the other hand, the special figure data image display process executed in step S4309 is based on the special figure data stored in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512 shifted (updated) in step S4308. This is a process of shifting an image related to special figure data (special figure data image) displayed on the display section 341.

Here, the special figure data image is displayed on a special figure data image display section set in the symbol display section 341 (not shown). The special figure data image display section displays the special figure execution area corresponding area (not shown), the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area, and the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512. Corresponding to the area corresponding to the 2nd special figure pending storage area, it includes a special figure variable image display area, a 1st special figure held image display area, and a 2nd special figure held image display area.

The special figure fluctuation image display area is the special figure holding storage area corresponding area corresponding to the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 99) of the special figure holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4. This is an area for displaying the special figure game image for the special figure game based on the special figure data stored in the figure execution area corresponding area (not shown). Then, in the special figure fluctuation image display area, when special figure data is stored in the area corresponding to the special figure execution area, the special figure game image is displayed, while the special figure game image is displayed in the area corresponding to the special figure execution area. If no data is stored, the special figure game image is not displayed. That is, the special symbol game image is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and is hidden when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In other words, by displaying the special pattern game image, it is made clear that the special pattern game is being executed, and by hiding the special pattern game image, it is made clear that the special pattern game is over. .

The first special figure pending image display area 76 is the above-mentioned special figure pending storage corresponding to the first special figure pending storage area REA (see FIG. 99) of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4. This is an area for displaying the first special figure pending image for the first special figure game based on the special figure data stored in the first special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the area corresponding area. This first special figure holding image display area corresponds to the first to fourth holding area corresponding areas (not shown) of the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area in the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area. It includes a first special figure first pending image display area, a first special figure second pending image display area, a first special figure third pending image display area, and a first special figure fourth pending image display area. In the first special figure pending image display area, when special figure data is stored in any of the first to fourth holding area corresponding areas (not shown), the first special figure held image is displayed. On the other hand, if no special figure data is stored in any of the first to fourth holding area corresponding areas (not shown), the first special figure holding image is not displayed. That is, when there is a reservation for the first special figure game, the number of first special figure reservation images corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N is displayed, and when there is no reservation for the first special figure game, the number of first special figure reservation images is displayed. Do not show. In other words, the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure game is specified based on the number of displayed first special figure reservation images.

The second special figure pending image display area is the above-mentioned special figure pending storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending storage area REB (see FIG. 99) of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4. 2nd special figure reservation storage area of the corresponding area This is an area for displaying the second special figure reservation image for the second special figure game based on the special figure data stored in the corresponding area (not shown). This second special figure holding image display area corresponds to the second special figure holding area corresponding area (not shown) of the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area in the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area. It includes a second special figure first pending image display area, a second special figure second pending image display area, a second special figure third pending image display area, and a second special figure fourth pending image display area. Then, in the second special figure pending image display area, when special figure data is stored in any of the second special figure first to fourth holding area corresponding areas (not shown), the second special figure held image is displayed. On the other hand, if no special figure data is stored in any of the second special figure first to fourth holding area corresponding areas (not shown), the second special figure pending image is not displayed. That is, when there is a hold for the second special figure game, the number of second special figure pending images corresponding to the second special figure hold number M is displayed, and when there is no hold for the second special figure game, the number of second special figure pending images is displayed. Do not show. In other words, the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is specified based on the displayed number of second special figure reservation images.

Then, in the special figure data image display process, when the received special figure shift command is for the first special figure, that is, when the first special figure game is started, the special figure is executed in the area corresponding to the special figure holding storage area. The special figure game image is displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 based on the special figure data stored in the area corresponding area (not shown), and further, the first special figure reservation in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area is performed. The first special figure pending image is displayed in the first special figure pending image display area 76 based on the special figure data stored in the storage area corresponding area (not shown).

On the other hand, in the special figure data image display process, when the received special figure shift command is for the second special figure, that is, when the second special figure game is started, the special figure is executed in the area corresponding to the special figure holding storage area. The special figure game image is displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 based on the special figure data stored in the area corresponding area (not shown), and further, the second special figure reservation in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area is performed. A second special figure pending image is displayed in the second special figure pending image display area 77 based on the special figure data stored in the storage area corresponding area (not shown).

<Step S4310>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 121, if the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S4307: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special figure hold command (step S4310). The first special figure reservation command includes information indicating that the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure game increases, information regarding the first special figure reservation number N after the increase, and information regarding the increasing number of first special figure reservations. It includes information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S4310: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4311, and if the received command is not the first special figure hold command (step S4310: No), The process moves to step S4313.

<Steps S4311 and S4312>
If the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S4310: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special figure hold information update process (step S4311) and the first special figure hold image display process (step S4312). Then, the command determination process ends.

Here, the first special figure holding information update process executed in step S4311 is performed in the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure holding storing area corresponding area. This is the process of adding (updating) special figure data). Specifically, in the first special figure holding information update process, the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 ( (see Figure 99), the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first vacant holding area corresponds to the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 in which the special figure correctness information is stored. It is stored in the first to fourth reservation area corresponding areas (not shown) that are set as follows. For example, when special figure validity information is stored in the second holding area REA2 (see FIG. 99) of the first special figure holding storage area REA in the special figure holding storage area 412b, the information corresponding to the second holding area REA2 is stored. The special figure data is stored in the set first special figure second reservation area corresponding area (not shown). In addition, in the first special figure reservation information update process, 1 is added to the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area. .

On the other hand, the first special figure pending image display process executed in step S4312 is based on the special figure data added (updated) to the first special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S4312. A process of adding the first special figure pending image to the special figure pending image display area is executed.

<Step S4313>
If the received command is not the first special figure hold command (step S4310: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special figure hold command (step S4313). The second special figure reservation command includes information indicating that the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game increases, information regarding the second special figure reservation number M after the increase, and information regarding the increasing second reservation number M. It includes information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the received command is the second special figure hold command (step S4313: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4314, and if the received command is not the second special figure hold command (step S4313: No), The process moves to step S4316.

<Steps S4314 and S4315>
If the received command is the second special figure hold command (step S4313: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special figure hold information update process (step S4314) and the second special figure hold image display process (step S4315). Then, the command determination process ends.

Here, the second special figure holding information update process executed in step S4314 is performed in the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area. This is the process of adding (updating) special figure data). Specifically, in the second special figure holding information update process, the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 ( (see Figure 99), the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first vacant reservation area corresponds to the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 in which the special figure validity information is stored. It is stored in the second special chart first to fourth reservation area corresponding areas (not shown) set by the following. For example, when special figure validity information is stored in the third holding area REB3 (see FIG. 99) of the second special figure holding storage area REB in the special figure holding storage area 412b, the information corresponding to the third holding area REB3 is stored. The special figure data is stored in the set first special figure third reservation area corresponding area (not shown). In addition, in the second special figure reservation information update process, 1 is added to the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area. .

On the other hand, the second special figure pending image display process executed in step S4315 is based on the special figure data added (updated) to the second special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S4314. A process of adding a second special figure pending image to the special figure pending image display area 77 is executed.

<Step S4316>
If the received command is not the second special figure pending command (step S4313: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S4316). The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start a jackpot game, and is set when starting a jackpot game in step S3904 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 112 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. .

When the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S4316: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4317, and when the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S4316: No), the process moves to step S4319. to move to.

<Steps S4317 and S4318>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S4316: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game production setting process (step S4317), sets the jackpot game in progress flag to ON (step S4318), and processes the command determination process. end.

In the jackpot game performance setting process, a process for setting a jackpot performance including an opening performance, opening/closing execution mode performance (round game performance and interval performance), and ending performance to be executed in the jackpot game is executed. The opening performance and the ending performance are display performances executed by display control processing on the symbol display section 341, which is a control target different from the opening/closing door 319, with the variable prize opening 316 being closed by the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body. be. Specifically, the opening performance is executed in the symbol display section 341 before the opening/closing door 319 starts opening/closing by the movable body control process, and the ending performance is executed after the opening/closing of the opening/closing door 319 is finished by the movable body control process. This is executed in the symbol display section 341. The opening/closing execution mode performance (round game performance and interval performance) is a display performance executed in a state where the variable prize opening 316 is opened and closed by the movement of the opening/closing door 319 by the movable body control process. That is, the opening/closing of the variable prize opening 316 by the opening/closing door 319 is performed while the opening/closing execution mode performance is displayed as the display performance on the symbol display section 341.

In this jackpot game effect setting process, display control processing is executed to set the display effects to be executed on the symbol display section 341 in the opening, opening/closing execution mode (round game and interval), and ending in the jackpot game, and Processing is executed to set the audio performance on the speaker 26 and the lamp performance on the illumination section 27, which are performed during the opening, opening/closing execution mode (round game and interval), and ending. Furthermore, during the performance in the opening/closing execution mode (round game and interval), the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, is opened/closed.

Note that the opening performance, opening/closing execution mode performance (round game performance and interval performance), and ending performance may be one type or multiple types. For example, when setting multiple types of opening performance, opening/closing mode performance (round game performance and interval performance), and ending performance, a performance for a guaranteed variable jackpot, a performance for a normal jackpot, and a case where a variable probability game state continues. It is conceivable to set the performance of

In addition, the jackpot game in progress flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed, and in step S5201 in the jackpot game performance control process in FIG. It is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the progress of the jackpot game performance.

<Step S4319>
If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S4316: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S4319).The opening start command starts the opening of a jackpot game. This is a command indicating that the opening is to be started in step S3908 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 112 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an opening start command (step S4319: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4320, and if the received command is not an opening start command (step S4319: No), the process moves to step S4321. do.

<Step S4320>
When the opening start command is received (step S4319: Yes), the MPU 52 sets the opening presentation start flag to ON (step S4320), and ends the command determination process. The opening performance start flag is a flag for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game, and is referenced in step S5202 in the jackpot game performance control process in FIG. 152, which will be described later, to determine whether or not to start the opening performance. .

<Step S4321>
If the received command is not an opening start command (step S4319: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening end command (step S4321).The opening end command ends the opening of the jackpot game. This is a command indicating that the opening is ended in step S3914 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 113 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

When the received command is an opening end command (step S4321: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4322, and when the received command is not an opening end command (step S4321: No), the process moves to the step of FIG. The process moves to S4323.

<Step S4322>
If the opening end command is received (step S4321: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening effect end flag to ON (step S4322), and ends the command determination process. The opening performance end flag is a flag that ends the opening performance of the jackpot game, and is referenced in step S5205 in the jackpot game performance control process of FIG. 152, which will be described later, to determine whether or not to end the opening performance. .

<Step S4323>
If the received command is not an opening end command (step S4321: No), as shown in FIG. 122, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command (step S4323). The round game start command is a command that indicates the start of the round game in the open/close execution mode and also indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is a command that indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is a command that indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is a command that indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time. This is set when starting a round game in the opening/closing execution mode in step S3917 in the control process.

When the received command is a round game start command (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4324, and when the received command is not a round game start command (step S4323: No), the process moves to step S4326. to move to.

<Steps S4324 and S4325>
When the round game start command is received (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game production start flag to ON (step S4324), and stores the round number information indicating which round the round game is in the RAM 512. (step S4325), and the command determination process ends. The round game performance start flag is referred to in step S5208 of the jackpot game performance control process in FIG. 152, which will be described later, to determine whether to start each round game performance of the opening/closing execution mode performance.

<Step S4326>
If the received command is not a round game start command (step S4323: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command (step S4326). The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and when the round game is ended in step S3929 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 114 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. is set to

When the received command is a round game end command (step S4326: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4327, and when the received command is not a round game end command (step S4326: No), the process moves to step S4328. to move to.

<Step S4327>
When the round game end command is received (step S4326: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance end flag to ON (step S4327), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game performance in step S5211 in the jackpot game performance control process in FIG. 152, which will be described later.

<Step S4328>
If the received command is not a round game end command (step S4326: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval start command (step S4328). The interval start command is a command indicating to start the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and starts the interval in step S3933 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 114 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Set in case.

Here, if the received command is an interval start command (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4329, and if the received command is not an interval start command (step S4328: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4329. The process moves to S4330.

<Step S4329>
If the received command is an interval start command (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect start flag to ON (step S4329), and ends the command determination process. The interval performance start flag is referred to when determining whether to start the interval performance in step S5214 in the jackpot game performance control process of FIG. 152, which will be described later.

<Step S4330>
If the received command is not an interval start command (step S4328: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval end command (step S4330). The interval end command is a command indicating to end the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and ends the interval in step S3939 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 115 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Set in case.

Here, if the received command is an interval end command (step S4330: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4331, and if the received command is not an interval end command (step S4330: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4331. The process moves to S4332.

<Step S4331>
If the received command is an interval end command (step S4330: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to ON (step S4331), and ends the command determination process. The interval performance end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the interval performance in step S5217 in the jackpot game performance control process of FIG. 152, which will be described later.

<Step S4332>
If the received command is not an interval end command (step S4330: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command (step S4332). The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set when starting the ending in step S3942 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 114 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. .

Here, when the received command is an ending start command (step S4332: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4333, and when the received command is not an ending start command (step S4332: No), the process moves to step S4333. The process moves to S4334.

<Step S4333>
If the received command is an ending start command (step S4332: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON (step S4333), and ends the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether to start the ending effect in step S5220 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 152, which will be described later.

<Step S4334>
If the received command is not an ending start command (step S4332: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending end command (step S4334). The ending end command is a command indicating that the ending of the jackpot game ends, and is set when ending the ending in step S3948 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 115 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. .

Here, if the received command is an ending end command (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4335, and if the received command is not an ending end command (step S4334: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4335. The process moves to S4336.

<Step S4335>
If the received command is an ending end command (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to ON (step S4335), and ends the command determination process. The ending effect end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the ending effect in step S5223 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 152, which will be described later.

<Step S4336>
If the received command is not an ending end command (step S4334: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S4336). The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game is ended in step S3950 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 112 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. .

Here, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4337 when the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S4336: Yes), and when the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S4336: No), the process The process moves to step S4339.

<Step S4337>
If the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S4336: Yes), the MPU 51 sets off the jackpot game flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed (step S4337), and executes the command determination process. finish.

<Step S4338>
If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S4336: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4 (step S4338), and ends the command determination processing.

[Stopping symbol combination setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S4303 of the command process in FIG. 121 will be explained. In the stop symbol combination setting process, a symbol combination is set when a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) that are variably displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the special symbol game are stopped and displayed on the active line. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets a stop symbol combination based on the special symbol variation pattern command with reference to a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 123), which will be described later. Here, FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table, and FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process. Hereinafter, the stop symbol combination setting process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

As shown in FIG. 123, in the first stop symbol selection table, a decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, in FIG. 123, the decorative patterns are "1" to "9", and "333" is a symbol combination indicating a probability-variable jackpot (either a 5R probability-variable jackpot or a 16R probability-variable jackpot), and "777" is a 16R probability-variable jackpot. It is assumed that the symbol combination that indicates a guaranteed variable jackpot, or the number of zeros other than "333" and "777", is a symbol combination that indicates either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R fixed variable jackpot, or a 16R fixed variable jackpot. .

When the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is selected from decorative symbols other than "3" and "7" with a predetermined probability. It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R regular jackpot", the symbol combination "333" or "777" indicating a 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is not displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, when the lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", "7" is not distributed as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined from decorative symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is a "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination "777" indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot will not be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is a "5R probability-variable jackpot", the symbol combinations of zeros other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R probability-variable jackpot, may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", the result of the stop display of the decorative symbols may be a zero number symbol combination other than the symbol combination "333" which suggests a 5R normal jackpot.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16R guaranteed strange jackpot", there is a distribution for all decorative symbols from "1" to "9", and the first stop is determined by a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9". The design is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability-variable jackpot," the symbol combinations of zeros other than the "777" symbol combination, which indicates a 16R probability-variable jackpot, may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "16R sure-change jackpot," the pattern combinations other than the "777" symbol combination, which indicate a 5R chance-change jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, are stopped and displayed. can be done.

Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stopped symbol combination that will be stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display section 341 in the special symbol game is determined.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "lost", there is a distribution for all decorative symbols from "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 51 selects the miss type selected based on the miss type table (see FIG. 100(D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol. A second stopped symbol is determined based on the stopped symbol. For example, when the miss type is front and back miss reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, if the miss type is reach other than front and back miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined by the design. Further, when the miss type is a complete miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be a different symbol from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. Note that the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols may be determined in the display control device 6. Only the first stop symbol is determined in the audio lamp control device 5, and the second and final stop symbols are determined in the display control device 6. You may decide.

Here, FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process. Hereinafter, an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 124.

<Steps S4401 to S4403>
As shown in FIG. 124, in the first stop symbol selection table, the MPU 51 first specifies the value of the first stop symbol type counter (step S4401), and also specifies the result of the jackpot lottery (step S4402). Then, the MPU 51 sets a stop symbol combination based on the value of the first stop symbol type counter specified in step S4401 and the result of the jackpot lottery specified in step S4402 (step S4403), and executes the process in step S4403. The process moves to S4404.

<Step S4404>
In step S4404, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery specified in step S4402 is a 16R probability variable jackpot. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S4404: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4405, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S4404: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4405. The process moves to step S4406.

<Step S4405>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S4404: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the stop symbol combination set in step S4403 is "777" which announces a 16R probability variable jackpot. do. Then, when the stop symbol combination is "777" (step S4405: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4406, and when the stop symbol combination is not "777" (step S4405: No), the process moves to step S4407. to move to.

<Step S4406>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a 16R probability-variable jackpot (step S4404: No), or if the stopping symbol combination is "777" (step S4405: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability-variable non-promotion flag to ON (step S4406), the stop symbol combination setting process ends. The 16R fixed variable non-promotion flag executes the 16R fixed variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in the drive pattern G (see FIG. 129(D) and FIG. 137), and also executes the 16R fixed variable promotion effect. This is a flag to execute a button effect (see FIG. 140) before the execution of the effect, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is driven in a drive pattern in step S4945 in FIG. 144 or step S4953 in FIG. 145 in the movable rotating accessory control process described later. G (see FIG. 129(D) and FIG. 137), or in step S4702 of the button effect setting process in FIG. 139, which will be described later, it is determined whether or not to execute the button effect. Referenced for.

<Step S4407>
If the stop symbol combination set in step S4403 is not "777" that announces a 16R probability-variable jackpot (step S4405: No), the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability-variable promotion flag to ON, and performs the corresponding stop symbol combination setting process. end. The 16R variable promotion flag executes the 16R variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in the drive pattern F (see FIGS. 129(C) and 135), and also executes the 16R variable promotion effect. This flag is used to execute a button effect (see FIG. 140) before the execution of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in step S4942 in FIG. 144 or step S4950 in FIG. 145 in the movable rotating accessory control process described later. (See FIG. 129(C) and FIG. 135) to determine whether to set the drive data 4 to be moved, or to execute the button effect in step S4701 of the button effect setting process in FIG. 139, which will be described later. Reference is made to determine whether or not.

[Variation type (production pattern) setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in step S4304 of the command process in FIG. 121 will be described. In the variation type (performance pattern) setting process, special pattern game effects to be executed by various presentation means (symbol display section 341, speaker 26, illumination section 27, movable rotating accessory member 37) in the special pattern game are set. Hereinafter, the variation type (effect pattern) setting process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 125 to 140.

<Step S4501>
As shown in FIG. 125, in the variation type (production pattern) setting process, the MPU 51 first refers to the variation type table (see FIG. 126) based on the special figure variation pattern command, and sets the variation type (production pattern) and The variable display time is set, and the effect pattern type is further set based on the effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 127) corresponding to the variation type (effect pattern) (step S4501).

Here, FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the variation type (effect pattern).

As shown in FIG. 126, in the variation type table, the content of the variation display time and variation type (performance pattern) corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command is defined. For example, the special pattern fluctuation pattern command "A01" whose lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the special pattern fluctuation pattern is "01" is associated with the fluctuation display time "30s" and the fluctuation type "normal reach effect pattern". ing. In addition, the special pattern fluctuation pattern command “B02” where the lottery result is “5R guaranteed strange jackpot” and the special pattern fluctuation pattern is “02” corresponds to the fluctuation display time “60s” and the fluctuation type “Super reach effect pattern”. The special pattern fluctuation pattern command "C03" where the lottery result is "16R guaranteed strange jackpot" and the special pattern fluctuation pattern is "03" has a fluctuation display time of "90s" and a fluctuation type "Special reach effect pattern". are associated. Furthermore, the special pattern fluctuation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "lost" and the special pattern fluctuation pattern is "04" is associated with the fluctuation display time "7s" and the fluctuation type "non-reach performance pattern". The special pattern fluctuation pattern command “D05” where the lottery result is “lost” and the special pattern fluctuation pattern is “05” is associated with the fluctuation display time “10s” and the fluctuation type “non-reach performance pattern”. It is being

Further, FIGS. 127(A) to 127(C) are diagrams showing examples of effect pattern type selection tables. The performance pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (performance pattern). Specifically, FIG. 127(A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in a special figure game effect is a normal reach effect, and FIG. 127(B) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table in a special figure game effect. This is a super reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual effect type is a super reach effect, and FIG. 127(C) is a super reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual effect type is a special reach effect. This is the special reach performance pattern type selection table that is referred to.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the number of production types corresponding to each variation type is five types will be described as an example, the number of production types may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 127, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 127(A), the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss). ``Rendering pattern X1'' to ``Rendering pattern X5'' are defined. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a normal reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the normal reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the performance patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach performance pattern type selection table are performances in which, for example, a normal reach performance in which the decorative symbol becomes a reach state after the end of a high-speed variation performance in which the decorative symbol changes at high speed is executed. , the final individual performance type is a normal reach performance.

In addition, in the super reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 127(B), "performance pattern Y1" to "performance pattern Y5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. It is being Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a super reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects a performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from table. Here, for performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach performance pattern type selection table, for example, a normal reach performance is executed after the end of a high-speed fluctuation performance, and furthermore, as the final individual performance type, the expected level of jackpot is higher than the normal reach performance. This is a performance that develops into a super reach performance that is high and has a longer execution time than a normal reach performance. In addition, the super reach performance pattern type selection table may include a super reach performance pattern that develops into a super reach performance after the high-speed fluctuation performance ends, without going through the normal reach performance.

Furthermore, in the special reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 127(C), "performance pattern Z1" to "performance pattern Z5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. It is being Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects a special reach performance pattern type from the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from table. Here, performance patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach performance pattern type selection table are, for example, normal reach performance and super reach performance are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation performance, and furthermore, as the final individual performance type, normal reach performance and super reach performance. This is a performance that develops into a special reach performance with higher expectations for a jackpot than a reach performance, and a longer performance execution time than a normal reach performance. In addition, the special reach performance pattern type selection table includes special reach performance patterns that develop into special reach performance after the end of high-speed fluctuation performance or normal reach performance without going through at least one of normal reach performance and super reach performance. You can stay there.

<Steps S4502 and S4503>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 125, in step S4502, the MPU 51 determines whether the performance pattern set in step S4501 is a normal reach performance pattern. The MPU 51 sets a multi-reach flag (step S4503) when the performance pattern set in step S4501 is a normal reach performance pattern (step S4502: Yes), and moves the process to step S4508. The normal reach flag is referred to in step S4601 of the accessory action effect setting process in FIG. 138, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the performance pattern set in step S4501 is not a normal reach performance pattern (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4504.

<Steps S4504 and S4505>
If the performance pattern set in step S4501 is not a normal reach performance pattern (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the performance pattern set in step S4501 is a super reach performance pattern (step S4504). If the performance pattern set in step S4501 is a super reach performance pattern (step S4504: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a super reach flag (step S4505), and moves the process to step S4508. The super reach flag is referred to in step S4606 of the accessory action effect setting process in FIG. 138, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the performance pattern set in step S4501 is not a super reach performance pattern (step S4504: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4506.

<Steps S4506 and S4507>
If the performance pattern set in step S4501 is not a super reach performance pattern (step S4504: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the performance pattern set in step S4501 is a special reach performance pattern (step S4506). . If the performance pattern set in step S4501 is a special reach performance pattern (step S4506: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a special reach flag (step S4507), and moves the process to step S4508. The special reach flag is referred to in step S4614 of the accessory action effect setting process in FIG. 138, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the performance pattern set in step S4501 is not a special reach performance pattern (step S4506: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4508.

<Step S4408>
In step S4408, the MPU 51 executes an accessory action effect setting process, and moves the process to step S4409. In the accessory activation effect setting process, details will be described later, but when a super reach effect or special reach effect is executed in a special figure game effect, or if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a jackpot, the special figure game A movable body control process is executed to set the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body in the performance.

<Step S4409>
In step S4409, the MPU 51 executes the button effect setting process and ends the special figure game setting process. The details of the button production setting process will be described later, but during the execution period of the special game production, the movable rotation is performed between the time when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line as a double mark, and the time when the decorative symbol is displayed as a fixed stop. Before notifying the player whether or not the game will be promoted to 16R probability-variable jackpot by the operation of the accessory member 37, an effect is set to prompt the player to operate the operation button 20.

[Accessory object operation effect setting processing]
Next, the accessory operation effect setting process executed in step S4508 of the special figure game effect setting process in FIG. will be explained first.

Here, FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of the operation timing of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body. In the present embodiment, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is used to notify that a super reach performance will develop, to notify that a super reach performance will not develop, to notify that a special reach performance will develop, and to notify that a special reach performance will not develop. It is activated to announce that there is a 16R guaranteed strange jackpot, and to announce that there is a 16R guaranteed strange jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 128, the operation timing of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is set according to the performance type (performance pattern) set in step S4501 of the special figure game performance setting process of FIG. 125.

Specifically, when the performance type (performance pattern) is a completely off performance pattern, the operation timing of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not set. That is, when the performance type (performance pattern) is completely off, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not operated.

When the performance type (performance pattern) is a normal reach performance pattern, accessory actuation timing A is set as the actuation timing of the movable rotating accessory member 37. The accessory actuation timing A is set at the final stage of the normal reach performance, and is started when time T1 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game.

Then, at accessory actuation timing A in the case of the normal reach performance pattern, the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is a 16R probability odd jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability odd jackpot. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability-variable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, it is not a 16R probability-variable jackpot (16R probability-variable promotion). If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, it will notify that it will not develop into a special reach (SP non-development). It is operated in movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)), which will be described later.

When the performance type (performance pattern) is a super reach performance pattern, accessory activation timing A and accessory activation timing B are set as the operation timings of the movable rotating accessory member 37. The accessory actuation timing A is set at the final stage of the normal reach performance, and is started when time T1 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game. Accessory object activation timing B is set at the final stage of the super reach performance, and is started when time T2 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game.

Then, at the accessory actuation timing A in the case of the super reach production pattern, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, develops into a super reach regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process (SP It is operated in a movable mode A (see FIG. 129(A)), which will be described later, to notify the user of the progress (development).

In addition, at accessory actuation timing B in the case of the super reach effect pattern, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, will receive a 16R probable strange jackpot if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probable strange jackpot. It is operated in a movable mode C (see FIG. 129(C)) which will be described later to announce something (16R probability-variable promotion), and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability-variable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, it is not a 16R probability-variable jackpot ( It is activated in a moving mode D (see Figure 129 (D)), which will be described later, and announces that it will not develop into a special reach (SPSP non-development) if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. It is operated in movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)).

When the performance type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, accessory activation timing A, accessory activation timing B, and accessory activation timing C are set as the operation timings of the movable rotating accessory member 37. The accessory actuation timing A is set at the final stage of the normal reach performance, and is started when time T1 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game. Accessory object activation timing B is set at the final stage of the super reach performance, and is started when time T2 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game. Accessory object activation timing C is set at the final stage of the special reach performance, and is started when time T3 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game.

Then, at the accessory actuation timing A in the case of the special reach production pattern, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, develops into a super reach regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process (SP It is operated in a movable mode A (see FIG. 129(A)), which will be described later, to notify the user of the progress (development).

In addition, at the accessory actuation timing B in the case of the special reach performance pattern, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, develops into a special reach regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process (SPSP It is operated in a movable mode A (see FIG. 129(A)), which will be described later, to notify the user of the progress (development).

In addition, at the accessory actuation timing C in the case of the special reach performance pattern, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is a 16R probability strange jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability strange jackpot. It is operated in a movable mode C (see FIG. 129(C)) which will be described later to announce something (16R probability-variable promotion), and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability-variable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, it is not a 16R probability-variable jackpot ( It is operated in a movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)) which will be described later to notify 16R (probable change, non-promotion).

Here, FIGS. 129(A) to 129(D) are diagrams showing an example of the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body. As shown in FIGS. 129(A) to 129(D), in this embodiment, movable mode A, movable mode B, movable mode C, and movable mode D are set as movable modes of the movable rotating accessory member 37. ing.

The movable mode A shown in FIG. 129(A) is to notify that the super reach performance will develop, and after the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled in the movable mode A by the movable body control process, the movable rotation will start. In the symbol display section 341, which is a control target different from the accessory member 37, control to display a super reach effect as a display effect is executed by display control processing. The movable mode B shown in FIG. 129(B) announces that the special reach performance will develop, and after the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled in the movable mode B by the movable body control process, the movable rotation In the symbol display section 341, which is a control target different from the accessory member 37, control to display a special reach effect as a display effect is executed by display control processing. The movable mode C shown in FIG. 129(C) is to notify that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot. For example, after the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled in the movable mode C by the movable body control process, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is In the symbol display section 341, which is a control target different from the accessory member 37, control is executed to display a display effect that announces that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot.

On the other hand, the movable mode D shown in FIG. 129(D) is for announcing that the game will not develop into a super reach performance, a special reach performance, or a 16R guaranteed strange jackpot. In this case as well, after the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled in movable mode D by the movable body control process, the display is displayed on the symbol display section 341, which is a control target different from the movable rotating accessory member 37, by the display control process. Control for displaying effects may also be executed.

In this manner, in the present embodiment, the control executed after completing a series of specific operations of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, includes a control target different from the movable rotating accessory member 37. In this way, the control executed after the series of specific operations of the movable rotating accessory member 37 includes a control target different from the movable rotating accessory member 37, so that the series of the movable rotating accessory member 37 After the specific operation is completed, it becomes possible to reapply the information provided by the movable rotary accessory member 37 to a control target different from the movable rotary accessory member 37. As a result, even if the player misses the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 or does not understand the content given by the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, the movable rotary accessory member 37 It becomes possible to provide information anew to the player on a control target different from the previous one. In addition, in this embodiment, the control executed after completing a series of specific operations of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, includes a control target different from the movable rotating accessory member 37, so that the movable rotating accessory member 37 Depending on the movement of the accessory member 37, it is also possible to clearly indicate or suggest the performance to be performed later. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 and expecting that it will be specified or suggested that a performance advantageous to the player will be executed. , the interest in playing games is improved.

The movable mode A, the movable mode B, the movable mode C, and the movable mode D include a common continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 that is a movable body. In this common continuous operation, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved according to a drive pattern A, a drive pattern B, and a drive pattern C, which will be described later. In the movable mode A shown in FIG. 129(A), the movable rotating accessory member 37 is movable according to the drive pattern D described later after the common continuous operation (drive pattern A, drive pattern B, and drive pattern C). be done. In movable mode B shown in FIG. 129(B), the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved according to a drive pattern E described later after a common continuous operation (drive pattern A, drive pattern B, and drive pattern C). . In a movable mode C shown in FIG. 129(C), the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved according to a drive pattern F, which will be described later, after a common continuous operation (drive pattern A, drive pattern B, and drive pattern C). . In a movable mode D shown in FIG. 129(D), the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved according to a drive pattern G described later after a common continuous operation (drive pattern A, drive pattern B, and drive pattern C). .

Further, as shown in FIG. 129(E), the ROM 511 of the audio lamp control device 5 stores drive data as information for operating the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in a predetermined movable manner. Data storage area is set. This drive data storage area includes drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1), drive data 2 (accessory object movement scenario data 2), drive data 3 (accessory object movement scenario data 3), and drive data 4 (accessory object movement scenario data 3). Action scenario data 4) and drive data 5 (accessory action scenario data 5) are stored. When controlling the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, based on drive data 1, drive data corresponding to the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is read from the drive data storage area set in the ROM 511. The read drive data is set in a temporary storage area provided in the RAM 512. Then, the MPU 51 controls the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, based on the drive data 1 set in the temporary storage area of the RAM 512. Here, since the ROM 511 is a nonvolatile memory, it is suitable for storing drive data, but since the readout speed is slow, it is difficult to directly read the drive data from the ROM 511 to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37. Not suitable. Therefore, by setting the drive data read from the drive data storage area of the ROM 511 in the temporary storage area of the RAM 512 and controlling the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, the drive data can be directly read from the drive data storage area of the ROM 511. Compared to the case where the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is controlled by the control, the operating speed of the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be improved.

The details of the drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1) will be described later with reference to FIG. This is information that causes the member 37 to perform a common continuous operation. That is, when it is decided to operate the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in the movable modes A to D, drive data 1 read from the drive data storage area of the ROM 511 is stored in the temporary storage area of the RAM 512. By simply setting the number of times, it becomes possible to cause the movable rotating accessory member 37 to perform a common continuous operation. Further, by controlling the common continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1, it becomes possible to simplify the control of the movable rotating accessory member 37 and reduce the amount of data. This not only reduces the amount of drive data used for one movable mode, reducing the memory load, but also allows readout and temporary drive data when operating the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body. Control burden such as memory is reduced. When the movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated based on the common drive data 1, the subsequent operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is performed after all control processing based on the common drive data 1 is completed. On the other hand, the next operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is executed based on drive data 2 to 5 that are individually set according to each movable mode.

The details of the drive data 2 (accessory object movement scenario data 2) will be described later with reference to FIG. In movable mode A, information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in drive pattern D (see FIG. 133(A)) as an individual operation after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C). be.

The drive data 3 (accessory movement scenario data 3), the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. In movable mode B, information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in a drive pattern E (see FIG. 134(A)) as an individual operation after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C). be.

The drive data 4 (accessory motion scenario data 4), the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. In aspect C, this is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in a drive pattern F (see FIG. 135), which will be described later, as an individual operation after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C).

The details of the driving data 5 (accessories movement scenario data 5) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the movable mode D of the movable rotary accessory member 37 that announces that it is not SPSP (non-development) or 16R fixed-variable jackpot (16R fixed-variable non-promotion), after the common continuous motion (drive patterns A to C), individual motions This is information for moving the movable rotating accessory member 37 in a drive pattern G (see FIG. 137(A)), which will be described later.

In this way, the movable mode A, the movable mode B, the movable mode C, and the movable mode D include a common continuous motion as the motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 that is a movable body. Of the movable modes A to D, movable mode A, movable mode B, and movable mode C are for giving an advantageous notice to the player by the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37. On the other hand, among the movable modes A to D, the movable mode D is for giving a disadvantageous notice to the player by the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37. That is, in the present embodiment, after the control of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body by continuous operation common to movable modes A to D, is completed, in movable modes A to C, a notification advantageous to the player is made. The first control is executed, and in the movable mode D, the second control is executed to give a disadvantageous notice to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, although the details will be described later, at the end of the continuous operation common to the movable modes A to D, the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is located at the standby position, which is the return side position. Movement is stopped in this state. That is, in the present embodiment, after the control of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body by continuous operation common to movable modes A to D, is completed, in movable modes A to C, a notification advantageous to the player is made. In both cases where the first control is executed and, in movable mode D, where the second control is executed in which a disadvantageous notice is given to the player, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is in the standby position which is the return side position. The operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is started in a state where it is positioned at . Therefore, when the continuous operation common to the movable modes A to D is completed, the subsequent control of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is either the first control or the second control without any discomfort. Subsequent control of the movable rotating accessory member 37 can be started smoothly. As a result, if it is determined that the continuous operation is terminated when the termination determination condition is satisfied, even if the timing of the termination determination is indefinite, the first control and the second control are It is possible to move to the next operation according to drive patterns D to G executed by.

Here, FIG. 130(A) is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in drive pattern A, which is a common continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body. (B) is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in drive pattern B, which is a common continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, and FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement of the movable rotation accessory member 37 in the drive pattern C which is a common continuous operation|movement of the movable rotation accessory member 37.

As shown in FIG. 130(A), drive pattern A, which is a common continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, is such that the movable rotating accessory member 37 is in the standby position (FIG. 130(A1)) which is the return side position. (see FIG. 130 (A3)). Note that the intermediate operating position 1 is set at a position between the standby position and the maximum operating position (the farthest position from the standby position) of the movable rotating accessory member 37 than the standby position (near the standby position).

As shown in FIG. 130(B), drive pattern B, which is a common continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, is such that the movable rotating accessory member 37 is in the standby position (FIG. 130(B1)) which is the return side position. (see FIG. 130 (B3)). Note that the intermediate operating position 2 is set at a position closer to the maximum operating position than the intermediate operating position 1 between the standby position and the maximum operating position (the farthest position from the standby position) of the movable rotating accessory member 37. .

As shown in FIG. 131, the drive pattern C, which is a common continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, is such that the movable rotating accessory member 37 moves from the standby position (see FIG. 131 (A1)) to the intermediate operating position 1 ( 131(A2)), the intermediate operating position 1 is the return side position (see FIG. 131(A2)), and the intermediate operating position 2 is the drive side position (see FIG. 131(A3)). This is a drive pattern in which the actuator is reciprocated twice between the two positions, and then returned to the standby position from the intermediate operating position 1 (see Fig. 131 (A2)) (see Fig. 131 (A4)).

As mentioned above, the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is based on information stored in the drive data storage area set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5. This is realized based on drive data 1 (accessory object motion scenario data 1). Here, FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1), which is information stored in the drive data storage area. The drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1) shown in FIG. 132 is a data group that defines the control content and control order for performing a common continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body. This is an example in which the vertical movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for raising and lowering.

As shown in FIG. 132, drive data 1 (accessory object motion scenario data 1) is processed by processing No. 01~Processing No. The movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated according to drive patterns A to C in accordance with Process No. 29. 01~Processing No. Among 29, processing No. 01~Processing No. 09 corresponds to the process for drive pattern A, and process No. 10 ~ Processing No. 17 corresponds to the process for drive pattern B, and process No. 17 corresponds to the process for drive pattern B. 18 ~ Processing No. 29 corresponds to the process for drive pattern C.

Processing No. for drive pattern A, which is a continuous operation. 01~Processing No. In the process No. 09, first, drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1) is set in the temporary storage area of the RAM 512, and then the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is kept in a stopped state for 200 msec (process No. 01). The stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotated 12 steps in the forward direction (processing No. 02). As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved downward by 12 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position. After the rotation of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained in a stopped state for 12 msec (processing No. 03), the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotated 12 steps in the opposite direction (processing No. 04). As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved upward by 12 mm after the stopped state of the movable rotary accessory member 37 at the intermediate operating position 1 is maintained for 12 msec, so that the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the return side. It is located at the standby position. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is reciprocated once between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position. Thereafter, after the rotation of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 40 msec (processing No. 05), processing No. 06 ~ Processing No. By executing the process No. 09, the above-mentioned process No. 02 ~ Processing No. Similarly to the case where the process of 05 is executed, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is reciprocated once between the standby position which is the return side position and the intermediate operation position 1 which is the drive side position. As a result, processing No. 01~Processing No. By executing the process of 09, the movable rotary accessory member 37 moves to the standby position (see FIG. 130 (A1)), which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 130 (A2)), which is the drive side position. The operation of drive pattern A, which involves two reciprocations between the two points, is executed.

Processing No. for drive pattern B, which is a continuous operation. 10 ~ Processing No. In process No. 17, first, the stepping motor for raising and lowering is rotated 36 steps in the forward direction (process No. 10). As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved downward by 36 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive side position. Then, after maintaining the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering for 36 msec (processing No. 11), the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotated in the opposite direction for 36 steps (processing No. 12), and the stepping motor for lifting and lowering The motor rotation stop state is maintained for 40 msec (Process No. 13). As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved upward by 36 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position, so that the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved at the return side position. One reciprocation is made between a certain standby position and an intermediate operating position 2 which is a driving side position. Furthermore, processing No. 14 ~ Processing No. By executing the process No. 17, the above-mentioned process No. 10 ~ Processing No. Similarly to the case where the process No. 13 is executed, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is reciprocated once between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive side position. As a result, processing No. 10 ~ Processing No. By executing the process of 17, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved to the standby position (see FIG. 130 (B1)), which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive side position (see FIG. 130 (B2)). The operation of drive pattern B, which involves two reciprocations between the two positions, is executed.

Process No. for drive pattern C, which is a continuous operation. 18 ~ Processing No. In the process No. 29, first, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotated 12 steps in the forward direction (processing No. 18), and the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 40 msec (processing No. 19). As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved downward by 12 mm, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is positioned from the standby position (see FIG. 131 (A1)) to the intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 131 (A2)). Ru. As described above, the intermediate operating position 1 in the driving pattern C is the return side position in the reciprocating movement between the intermediate operating position 1 and the intermediate operating position 2 in the driving pattern C. Then, the stepping motor for elevating and lowering is further rotated 24 steps in the forward direction (processing No. 20), and the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for elevating and lowering is maintained for 24 msec (processing No. 21). As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is further moved downward by 24 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the intermediate operating position 2 (see FIG. 130 (A3)). As described above, the intermediate operating position 2 in drive pattern C is the drive side position in the reciprocating movement between intermediate operating position 1 and intermediate operating position 2 in drive pattern C. Furthermore, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotated 24 steps in the opposite direction (processing No. 22), and the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 40 msec (processing No. 23). As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved upward by 24 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 131 (A2)), which is the return side position. The accessory member 37 is reciprocated once between intermediate operating position 1, which is the return side position, and intermediate operating position 2, which is the driving side position. After that, processing No. 24 ~ Processing No. By executing the process No. 27, the above-mentioned process No. 20 ~ Processing No. 23, the movable rotating accessory member 37 moves between intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 131 (A2)) which is the return side position and intermediate operating position 2 (see FIG. 131 (A2)) which is the drive side position. (see A3)). As a result, processing No. 20 ~ Processing No. By executing the process of 27, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved to intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 131 (A2)) which is the return side position and intermediate operating position 2 (see FIG. 131 (A3) which is the drive side position). (see). Further, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is further rotated by 12 steps in the opposite direction (processing No. 28), and the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 40 msec (processing No. 29). As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is returned to the standby position (see FIG. 131 (A1)). As a result, processing No. 18 ~ Processing No. By executing the process No. 29, the operation of the drive pattern C for the movable rotating accessory member 37 is executed.

Here, in the drive data 1, the period during which the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is in a stopped state at the intermediate operation position 1, which is the drive side position when operated in the drive pattern A, is the period when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is in a stopped state. The time period is set to 12 msec corresponding to the number of steps (12 steps) of upward and downward movements in the reciprocating motion of the member 37. In addition, in drive data 1, the period during which the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is in a stopped state at the intermediate operation position 2, which is the drive side position when operated in the drive pattern B, is the period when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is in a stopped state. The time period is set to 36 msec corresponding to the number of steps (36 steps) of upward and downward movements in the 37 reciprocating movements. Furthermore, in drive data 1, the period during which the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is in a stopped state at the intermediate operation position 2, which is the drive side position when operated in the drive pattern C, is the period when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is in a stopped state. The time period is set to 24 msec corresponding to the number of steps (24 steps) of upward and downward movements in the reciprocating motion of No. 37. That is, in the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, the stop time at the drive side position is set according to the amount of movement of the reciprocating motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37, The larger the amount of reciprocating movement is, the longer the stopping time at the drive side position is set. That is, in this embodiment, in the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, at least the first period is the period during which the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the drive side position. Three types are set, including a second period that is longer than the first period. In the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, the larger the amount of movement of the reciprocating operation, the longer the stop time at the drive side position is set. The larger the amount of movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the reciprocating motion, the more slowly the movable rotating accessory member 37 moves. That is, by setting a plurality of periods in which the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved to the drive side position in the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, for example, at least the first By including the period and the second period which is longer than the first period in the continuous operation, the movable rotating accessory member 37 can be operated in various drive patterns. It becomes possible to diversify continuous motion. As a result, when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved for the purpose of display during execution of a display performance on the symbol display section 341, it is possible to improve the performance, thereby improving the interest of the game. Ru.

In addition, in the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1, the period during which the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the drive side position is at least a first period and a period longer than the first period. It is sufficient to include the second period, and it may be set regardless of the amount of movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the reciprocating motion.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process No. defined in the drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1). 05, Processing No. 09, Processing No. 13. Processing No. 17. Processing No. 23. Processing No. 27, and processing No. While the process No. 29 is being executed, a termination determination is performed to determine whether or not a termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, based on the drive data 1 is satisfied. That is, the end determination is performed a plurality of times at different timings from the start of the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1. Although the details will be described later, when it is determined that the termination determination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 is satisfied, the continuous operation is terminated. Ru. In other words, the end timing of the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 is indefinite. As a result, the execution period of the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 becomes indefinite, and at least the first period is set as the execution period of the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1. and a second period that is longer than the first period.

On the other hand, the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 is the period during which the special figure game is executed, which is set at the start of the change of the special figure, and it cannot be changed during the change of the special figure. do not have. As a result, the execution period of the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 becomes indefinite, and at least the first period is set as the execution period of the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1. and a second period that is longer than the first period, the period after the end of the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1, that is, the remaining variable time of the special figure game. Becomes indeterminate. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute a display effect on the symbol display section 341 according to the remaining variable time of the indefinite special symbol game. For example, it is possible to make the display effect when the remaining variable time of the special figure game is long and the display effect when the remaining variable time of the special figure game is short. If the condition for determining the end of the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 is the operation of the operation button 20 by the player, the earlier the timing at which the player operates the operation button 20, the more The remaining fluctuation time of the figure game becomes longer. Therefore, in the display effect when the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure game is short, for example, the timing when the player operates the operation button 20 is slow and the execution period of the continuous action is in the second period which is longer than the first period. As a display effect in a certain case, while the default display effect is executed, if the remaining variable time of the special figure game is long, for example, the timing when the player operates the operation button 20 is early and the execution period of the continuous operation is the first. As a display effect during period 1, it becomes possible to execute a premiere effect. This makes it possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 20 for the purpose of executing the premium performance as the display performance.

Here, the movable body has various movable modes consisting of a plurality of motions, and the movable mode to be executed is determined by lottery or the like. On the other hand, the movable bodies have a common movement mode. At this time, if drive data is set separately for each movement of the movable body (moves slightly downward from the initial position, returns to the initial position from the downward movement position, etc.), the next It is necessary to perform a series of processes such as specifying an action to be executed next, reading drive data for the next action to be performed from ROM and setting it in RAM, setting termination conditions for the action being executed, and determining the end. . Since the movable mode of the movable body includes a plurality of motions, if the above-mentioned series of processes were to be executed for each motion included in the movable mode being executed, the number of processing steps would increase. It's a big burden. Moreover, if one movement in one movement mode of the movable body is common to one movement in another movement mode, storing the same drive data in duplicate in the ROM requires a large amount of data. It is useless because it becomes. Therefore, by storing one common drive data (data list, task data) in the ROM for operations common to multiple movable modes of the movable body, one common drive data from the ROM can be stored in the ROM. By reading the data once and setting one common drive data to the RAM once, it becomes possible to cause the movable body to perform a common operation. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required for the ROM when causing the movable body to perform a common operation, and to simplify control such as reading drive data from the ROM and setting drive data to the RAM.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable modes (moveable modes A to D) are provided for the movable rotating accessory member 37, and drive patterns A to C of these movable modes A to D are provided. The actions are common. In this embodiment, drive data 1 for continuous motion (drive patterns A to C) common to a plurality of movable modes A to D for the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is stored in the ROM. Therefore, when a continuous operation common to a plurality of movable modes A to D is performed on the movable rotating accessory member 37, drive data 1 is read out from the ROM once, and drive data 1 is stored in the RAM once. Set. As a result, the amount of drive data required to realize each of the movable modes A to D can be reduced, which not only reduces the memory load but also allows readout and temporary storage of drive data when operating the movable rotary accessory member 37. (setting) and other control burdens are reduced.

By the way, even if a continuous motion common to multiple movable modes for a movable body is executed based on one common drive data, there is no end judgment condition for other movable modes among the multiple movable modes. may include items with different values. That is, the timing at which the end determination condition for continuous motion common to a plurality of movable modes of the movable body is satisfied may be indefinite. For example, the termination determination condition may be set such that the player performs an operation on the operating means within a predetermined period that is set during the execution period of a common continuous action. In other words, the end timing of a continuous motion common to a plurality of movable modes for the movable body and the timing of transition from a common continuous motion to the next motion are uncertain. However, when a continuous motion common to multiple movable modes for a movable object is executed based on one common drive data, until all processes (movements) specified by one common drive data are completed. , cannot finish a common continuous operation and cannot move on to the next operation.

In addition, in order to deal with termination judgment conditions that are satisfied at irregular timings, we also perform termination judgment on whether or not the termination judgment condition is satisfied for each movement in a common continuous movement, specify the next movement, and determine the next movement. If the drive data for one operation is read from the ROM and the drive data for the next operation is set in the RAM, the termination determination condition is satisfied even if the termination determination condition is satisfied at an undefined timing. Although it is possible to immediately move on to the next operation after one operation, the burden of control and data amount increases, as in the case where drive data is provided for each operation.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as a movable body control process, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved based on the drive data 1 (accessory object operation scenario data) using a drive pattern A in which the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be indefinite. When operating, process No. 05 and processing No. When the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the standby position which is the return side position of the reciprocating movement by executing the process of A termination determination is made as to whether or not termination determination conditions for the continuous movement of the rotating accessory member 37 are satisfied. Specifically, in this embodiment, in step S4948 of the movable rotating accessory control process in FIG. 05 and processing No. If it is determined that the process of 09 is being executed, in step S4949 of the movable rotating accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player, which is the termination determination condition. A judgment is made. Then, processing No. 05 or processing No. If it is determined that the termination determination condition is satisfied in the termination determination during the execution of the process of 09, the movable rotating accessory member based on the drive data 1 does not execute all the processes specified by the drive data 1. 37 (stepping motor for elevating and lowering) is terminated. That is, processing No. 05 or processing No. If it is determined that the termination determination condition is satisfied in the termination determination during execution of the process of 09, the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is located at the standby position, which is the return side position, The continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 is ended.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the movable object control process, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated in a drive pattern B in which the timing at which the end determination condition is met may be uncertain based on the drive data 1 (accessory object operation scenario data). , treatment No. 13 and processing no. When the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the standby position which is the return side position of the reciprocating motion by executing the process of 17, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved based on the drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data). A termination determination is made as to whether or not termination determination conditions for the continuous movement of the rotating accessory member 37 are satisfied. Specifically, in this embodiment, in step S4948 of the movable rotating accessory control process in FIG. 13 and processing no. If it is determined that the process of 17 is being executed, in step S4949 of the movable rotating accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player, which is the termination determination condition. A judgment is made. Then, processing No. 13 or processing No. If it is determined that the termination determination condition is satisfied in the termination determination during the execution of the process No. 17, the movable rotating accessory member based on the drive data 1 does not execute all the processes specified by the drive data 1. 37 (stepping motor for elevating and lowering) is terminated. That is, processing No. 13 or processing No. If it is determined that the termination determination condition is satisfied in the termination determination during execution of the process No. 17, the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is located at the standby position, which is the return side position, The continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 is ended.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the movable body control process, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated in a drive pattern C in which the timing at which the end determination condition is met may be indefinite based on the drive data 1 (accessory object operation scenario data). , treatment No. 23 and processing No. When the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the intermediate operation position 1, which is the return side position of the reciprocating motion, by executing the process of 27, the drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data) A termination determination is made as to whether or not termination determination conditions for the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the above are satisfied. Specifically, in this embodiment, in step S4948 of the movable rotating accessory control process in FIG. 23 and processing No. If it is determined that the process of 27 is being executed, in step S4949 of the movable rotating accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player, which is the termination determination condition. A judgment is made. Then, processing No. 23 or processing No. If it is determined that the termination determination condition is satisfied in the termination determination during execution of the process No. 27, the process is changed to process No. 27. 28, processing No. 28 and processing no. By executing the process No. 29, the control of the movable rotary accessory member 37 (stepping motor for elevating and lowering) based on the drive data 1 is completed. That is, processing No. 23 or processing No. If it is determined that the termination determination condition is satisfied in the termination determination during the execution of the process of 27, the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, moves from the intermediate operation position 1, which is the return side position of the reciprocating operation, to the standby position. After returning to the position, the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 is terminated.

In other words, when operating the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 (accessory object operation scenario data) in drive patterns A to C in which the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be indefinite, the execution is performed based on the drive data 1. The continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 that is common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is such that regardless of when the end determination condition is satisfied, the movable rotating accessory member 37 that is a movable body is , and is finished in the state of being located at the standby position, which is the return side position.

As described above, in this embodiment, the movable body control process is common to the plurality of movable modes A to D for the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, and is performed continuously in which the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be indefinite. The motions (drive patterns A to C) are executed based on information corresponding to one common drive data 1 (accessory object motion scenario data 1). Therefore, compared to the case where drive data is set for each motion included in each movable mode, the burden of control and data amount can be reduced as described above.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the movable body control process, the continuous operation ( When the drive patterns A to C) are executed based on information corresponding to one drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1), the movable rotating accessory member 37 returns to the return position of the reciprocating movement. Or, when the movable rotating accessory member 37 is located at the intermediate operation position 1, the end determination is made as to whether or not the end determination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is satisfied based on the drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data 1). It will be done. As a result, the end determination of whether or not the condition for determining the end of the continuous movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1) is satisfied is the reciprocating motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37. Since this is performed at the return side position of When terminating the operation, there is no need to move the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, or the moving distance of the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be reduced. In addition, the end determination as to whether or not the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous motion based on the drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1) is satisfied is performed when the movable rotating accessory member 37 returns to the return side position of the reciprocating motion. By being executed every time the object is positioned, the end determination is repeatedly executed a plurality of times in the continuous operation. As a result, when it is determined in the end determination that the end determination condition of the continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 (accessory object motion scenario data 1) is satisfied, the continuous motion is Not only can the process be terminated immediately after it is determined that the termination determination condition is satisfied, but also it can be terminated immediately after the termination determination condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to immediately shift to the next operation from the satisfaction of the termination determination condition of a continuous operation, which is common to the plurality of movable modes A to D, and the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be indefinite.

Furthermore, since it is common to multiple movement modes A to D, it is possible to immediately shift to the next operation from the satisfaction of the termination judgment condition of a continuous operation in which the timing of satisfaction of the termination judgment condition may be indefinite. When transitioning from a common continuous motion in modes A to D to individual next motions in each movable mode A to D, it is possible to smooth the motion transition between the common continuous motion and another next motion. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable with the transition to the previous action. Thereby, even if the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated for the purpose of presentation, it becomes possible to operate the movable rotating accessory member 37 without impairing the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the drive data 1 is configured as a data group for controlling the stepping motor, and the process No. 1 that is being executed in the drive data 1. is specified, and the specified processing No. Although it has been determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the end determination based on the above, the drive data 1 may be configured as a data group for executing the process of performing the end determination. For example, as shown in FIG. 163, drive data 1 is set while the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is returned to the standby position, which is the return side position of the reciprocating motion, that is, the process No. 06, Processing No. 11. Processing No. 16. Processing No. 21, Processing No. 28, Processing No. 34, and processing No. It can be configured as a data group on which the termination determination is performed in step 37. Even in such drive data 1, the termination determination is executed every time the movable rotating accessory member 37 is returned to the standby position, so even if the termination determination condition is satisfied at an irregular timing, the control and While reducing the burden on the amount of data, it is possible to immediately shift to the next operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 after the end determination condition is satisfied. In addition, by simply executing the processes in the order specified in the drive data 1, it is possible to determine whether or not the end determination condition for the common continuous motion is satisfied. Process No. 1 is executed in drive data 1 in order to determine whether or not the termination determination condition is satisfied. The advantage is that there is no need to specify

Here, FIG. 133(A) and FIG. 133(B) are diagrams for explaining the drive pattern D. Drive pattern D is an individual pattern that is executed after the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to each of the movable modes A to D is completed in the movable mode A that announces the development to super reach (SP development). It is a pattern of movement. The drive data 2 (accessory object movement scenario data 2) shown in FIG. 133(B) is an example in which the vertical movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for raising and lowering.

As shown in FIG. 133(A), drive pattern D is such that the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, moves from a standby position (see FIG. 133(A1)) to a return side position to a movable rotation which is a drive side position. A reciprocating motion in which the accessory member 37 is stopped at the maximum operating position for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) (see FIG. 133 (A2)), and then returns to the standby position (see FIG. 133 (A3)), which is the return side position. is the driving pattern to be executed. That is, in this embodiment, after the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to each of the movable modes A to D ends, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the maximum operating position and stopped for a certain period of time. By executing this, it is announced that it will develop into a super reach (SP development).

As shown in FIG. 133(B), drive pattern D is a drive pattern in which the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated based on information corresponding to drive data 2 (accessories operation scenario data 2). It is. This drive data 2 (accessory object movement scenario data 2) is the processing No. 01~Processing No. This is for controlling the stepping motor for lifting and lowering in accordance with 05.

Processing No. In 01, after the drive data 2 (accessory object movement scenario data 2) is read out, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 10 msec. As a result, the state in which the movable rotary accessory member 37 is located at the standby position, which is the return side position, is maintained (see FIG. 133 (A1)).

Processing No. At 02, the stepping motor for raising and lowering is rotated 72 steps in the forward direction. Furthermore, processing No. At 03, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 2000 msec. As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved downward by 72 mm, so that the movable rotating accessory member 37 is located at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is brought to the maximum operating position. The positioned state is maintained for 2 seconds (see FIG. 133 (A2)).

Processing No. At 04, the stepping motor for raising and lowering is rotated 72 steps in the opposite direction. Furthermore, processing No. At 05, the stopped state of the stepping motor for raising and lowering is maintained for 10 msec. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved upward by 72 mm, so that the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position. As a result, in drive pattern D, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is reciprocated once between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the maximum operation position, which is the drive side position.

Here, FIGS. 134(A) and 134(B) are diagrams for explaining the drive pattern E. The drive pattern E is an individual movement executed after the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to each of the movement modes A to D in the movement mode B that notifies the development to a special reach (SPSP development). It is a pattern of movement. In addition, in the drive data 3 (accessory object movement scenario data 3) shown in FIG. This is an example of a case where the image is controlled by a stepping motor for scaling.

As shown in FIG. 134(A), the drive pattern E is such that the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, moves from the standby position (see FIG. 134(A1)) which is the return side position to the movable rotation which is the drive side position. After the accessory member 37 is stopped at the maximum operating position for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) (see FIGS. 133 (A2) to 133 (A4)), it returns to the standby position, which is the return side position (FIG. 133 (A5)). This is similar to the aforementioned drive pattern D in that a reciprocating movement is performed (see), but while the movable rotating accessory member 37 is stopped at the maximum operating position for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds), the expansion/contraction (see Fig. 133 (A2) to FIG. 133 (A4)). That is, in this embodiment, after the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to each of the movable modes A to D is completed, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the maximum operating position, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the maximum operating position. By expanding and contracting the member 37 at the maximum operating position, it is announced that the special reach will develop (SPSP development).

As shown in FIG. 134(B), drive pattern E is a drive pattern in which the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated based on information corresponding to drive data 3 (accessories operation scenario data 3). It is. This drive data 3 (accessory object movement scenario data 3) is the processing No. 01~Processing No. This is for controlling the stepping motor for raising and lowering and the stepping motor for expanding and contracting in accordance with 07.

Processing No. In 01, after the drive data 3 (accessory object movement scenario data 3) is read out, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 10 msec. As a result, the state in which the movable rotary accessory member 37 is located at the standby position, which is the return side position, is maintained (see FIG. 134 (A1)).

Processing No. At 02, the stepping motor for raising and lowering is rotated 72 steps in the forward direction. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved downward by 72 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position (see FIG. 134 (A2)).

In addition, processing No. 01 and processing No. In step 02, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for expansion/contraction is maintained.

Processing No. At 03, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for elevating and lowering is maintained for 2000 msec, and the stepping motor for expanding and contracting is rotated 50 steps in the forward direction. Furthermore, processing No. In 04, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for expansion/contraction is maintained for 1900 msec. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is brought into an expanded state at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position, and this expanded state is maintained (see FIG. 134 (A3)).

Processing No. At 05, the stepping motor for expansion/contraction is rotated 50 steps in the opposite direction. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is returned to its contracted state at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position (see FIG. 134 (A4)).

Processing No. At 06, the stepping motor for raising and lowering is rotated 72 steps in the opposite direction. Furthermore, processing No. At 07, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 10 msec. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is returned to the standby position, which is the return side position (see FIG. 134 (A5)).

In addition, processing No. 06 and processing No. At step 07, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for expansion/contraction is maintained.

Here, FIGS. 135 and 136 are diagrams for explaining the drive pattern F. The driving pattern F is a continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to each of the movable modes A to D in the movable mode B that announces that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variable jackpot (probable variable promotion). It is a pattern of individual actions that are executed after the end of the action. In addition, in the drive data 4 (accessory object movement scenario data 4) shown in FIG. This is an example of a case where the rotation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled by the stepping motor for rotation.

As shown in FIG. 135, the drive pattern F is such that the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, moves from the standby position (see FIG. 134 (A1)), which is the return side position, to the movable rotary accessory member, which is the drive side position. After being stopped at the maximum operating position of 37 for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) (see Figures 133 (A2) to 133 (A4)), it is returned to the standby position (see Figure 133 (A5)), which is the return side position. This is similar to the aforementioned drive pattern D and drive pattern E in that a reciprocating motion is executed, but the expansion and contraction are performed while the movable rotating accessory member 37 is stopped at the maximum operating position for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds). Unlike drive pattern D in that the movable rotating accessory member 37 is rotated (see FIGS. 133 (A3) and 133 (A4)), while the movable rotating accessory member 37 is stopped at the maximum operating position for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) It differs from drive pattern E in that it is rotated (see FIG. 133 (A3) and FIG. 133 (A4)). That is, in this embodiment, after the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to each of the movable modes A to D is completed, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the maximum operating position, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the maximum operating position. By expanding, contracting and rotating the member 37 at the maximum operating position, it is announced that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variable jackpot (probability variable promotion).

As shown in FIG. 136, drive pattern F is a drive pattern in which the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated based on information corresponding to drive data 4 (accessory object operation scenario data 4). This drive data 4 (accessory object movement scenario data 4) is the processing No. 01~Processing No. This is for controlling the stepping motor for raising and lowering, the stepping motor for expanding and contracting, and the stepping motor for rotation in accordance with 07.

Processing No. In step 01, after the drive data 4 (accessory object movement scenario data 4) is read out, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 10 msec. As a result, the state in which the movable rotary accessory member 37 is located at the standby position, which is the return side position, is maintained (see FIG. 136 (A1)).

Processing No. At 02, the stepping motor for raising and lowering is rotated 72 steps in the forward direction. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved downward by 72 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position (see FIG. 135 (A2)).

In addition, processing No. 01 and processing No. In step 02, the rotation stopping state of the stepping motor for expansion/contraction and the stepping motor for rotation is maintained.

Processing No. In 03, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is kept in a stopped state for 2000 msec, the stepping motor for expansion and contraction is rotated 50 steps in the forward direction, and the stepping motor for rotation is rotated 2000 steps in the forward direction. . Furthermore, processing No. In 04, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for expansion/contraction is maintained for 1900 msec. As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is rotated in an enlarged state at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position, and the rotation in this enlarged state is maintained (see FIG. 135 (A3)).

Processing No. At 05, the stepping motor for expansion/contraction is rotated 50 steps in the opposite direction, and the rotation of the stepping motor for rotation is stopped. As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is placed in a non-rotating enlarged state at the maximum operating position, which is the driving side position (see FIG. 135 (A4)).

Processing No. At 05, the stepping motor for expansion/contraction is rotated 50 steps in the opposite direction. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is returned to its contracted state at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position (see FIG. 134 (A4)).

Processing No. At 06, the stepping motor for raising and lowering is rotated 72 steps in the opposite direction. Furthermore, processing No. At 07, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 10 msec. As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is returned to the standby position, which is the return side position (see FIG. 135 (A5)).

In addition, processing No. 06 and processing No. At step 07, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for expansion/contraction is maintained.

By the way, the drive pattern D is a drive pattern executed after the continuous operation of the drive patterns A to C in the movable mode A (see FIG. 129(A)), and the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is The process starts from the standby position, which is the return side position (see FIG. 133(B)). Drive pattern E is a drive pattern executed after the continuous operation of drive patterns A to C in movable mode B (see FIG. 129(B)), and is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37 is in the return side position. The process is started from the position (see FIG. 134(B)). The drive pattern F is a drive pattern executed after the continuous operation of the drive patterns A to C in the movable mode C (see FIG. 129(C)), and is a standby pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37 is in the return side position. The process is started from the position (see FIG. 136). The drive pattern G is a drive pattern executed after the continuous operation of the drive patterns A to C in the movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)), and is a standby pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37 is in the return side position. The process starts from the position (see FIG. 137(B)). In other words, the individual operations performed after the end of the continuous operations common to the plurality of movable modes A to D are performed with the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, located at the standby position, which is the return side position. Processing starts from

On the other hand, the continuous motion common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is ended with the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, being located at the standby position, which is the return side position, as described above. In other words, the position of the movable rotating accessory member 37 when a continuous motion common to a plurality of movable modes A to D ends, and the individual The position of the movable rotary accessory member 37 at which the movement starts is the common standby position. Therefore, when the continuous motion common to the plurality of movable modes A to D ends, individual motions executed in accordance with the movable modes A to D can be started smoothly and without any discomfort. As a result, when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is caused to perform a continuous operation common to a plurality of movable modes A to D in which the timing at which the termination determination condition is satisfied is undefined based on the drive data 1, it is possible to terminate the movable rotating accessory member 37 at any timing. Even if the determination condition is met, it is possible to transition from a continuous motion common to movable modes A to D to a motion unique to movable modes A to D.

Here, FIGS. 137(A) and 137(B) are diagrams for explaining the drive pattern G. Drive pattern G is that it does not develop into a super reach (SP non-development), does not develop into a special reach (SPSP non-development), or the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (16R probability variation non-promotion). This is a pattern of individual motions executed after the continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to each of the movable modes A to D is completed in movable mode D that announces. The drive data 5 (accessory object movement scenario data 5) shown in FIG. 134(B) is an example in which the vertical movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for raising and lowering.

As shown in FIG. 137(A), the drive pattern G is such that the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, moves from the return side position, which is the standby position (see FIG. 137(A1)), to the drive side position, which is the intermediate operation. After being stopped at position 1 for a certain period of time (for example, 0.04 seconds) (see FIG. 137 (A2)), a reciprocating operation is performed in which it returns to the standby position, which is the return side position (see FIG. 137 (A1)). This is a driving pattern. That is, in this embodiment, after the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to each of the movable modes A to D ends, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is reciprocated between the standby position and the intermediate operation position 1. In other words, if the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not moved to the maximum movable position, it will not develop into a super reach (SP non-development), it will not develop into a special reach (SPSP non-development), or in the lottery process. It is announced that the result of the jackpot lottery is not a 16R probability-variable jackpot (16R probability-variable non-promotion).

As shown in FIG. 137(B), the drive pattern G is a drive pattern in which the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated based on information corresponding to drive data 5 (accessories operation scenario data 5). It is. This drive data 5 (accessory object motion scenario data 5) is the processing No. 01~Processing No. This is for controlling the stepping motor for lifting and lowering in accordance with 05.

Processing No. In 01, after the drive data 5 (accessory object motion scenario data 5) is read out, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 10 msec. As a result, the state in which the movable rotary accessory member 37 is located at the standby position, which is the return side position, is maintained (see FIG. 137 (A1)).

Processing No. At 02, the stepping motor for raising and lowering is rotated 12 steps in the forward direction. Furthermore, processing No. At 03, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 40 msec. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved downward by 12 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position (see FIG. 137 (A2)).

Processing No. At 04, the stepping motor for raising and lowering is rotated 12 steps in the opposite direction. Furthermore, processing No. At 05, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 10 msec. As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is returned to the standby position, which is the return side position (see FIG. 137 (A1)).

Here, FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the accessory action effect setting process executed in step S4508 of the special figure game effect setting process of FIG. 125. In the accessory action effect setting process of this embodiment, a movable body control process is executed to set the movable timing and movable mode of the movable rotating accessory member 37. Hereinafter, an example of the procedure of the accessory action effect setting process of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 138.

<Step S4601>
As shown in FIG. 138, in the role object operation effect setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first sets the normal reach flag indicating that the normal reach effect pattern is set as the special figure game effect for the special figure game to be turned on. The multi-reach flag used to determine whether the normal reach effect pattern is set (step S4601) is set to determine whether the normal reach effect pattern is set in step S4502 in the special figure game effect setting process of FIG. It is set to on in step S4503 in the effect setting process.

If the normal reach flag is set to on (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4602, and if the normal reach flag is set to off (step S4601: No), the process moves to step S4606. Transition.

<Steps S4602 and S4603>
If the normal reach flag is set on (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T1 counter (step S4602), further sets the T1 drive flag on (step S4603), and returns the process to step S4604. Transition.

The T1 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing A, which is set at the final stage of the normal reach performance, starts. The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1, which is the start timing of accessory operation timing A. In other words, when the normal reach performance pattern is set, when the T1 drive flag is on and the value of the T1 counter is 0, the drive of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is started, and the accessory actuation timing A The movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved in (see FIG. 128).

<Steps S4604 and S4605>
In step S4604, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot lottery result in the lottery process is a loss. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss (step S4604: Yes), the MPU 51 sets on the SP non-development flag indicating that the result is a loss that will not develop into a super reach (normal reach loss) (step S4604), and The object action effect setting process ends. That is, by setting the SP non-development flag to ON, if the normal reach performance pattern is set and the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a loss, the super reach will be activated at the accessory activation timing A. The movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved to notify that the situation will not develop.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a loss (step S4604: No), that is, if it is a jackpot, the accessory action effect setting process is ended. In addition, if the normal reach performance pattern is set and the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is not a loss (if it is a jackpot), depending on the jackpot type, a notification that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 16R The movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved at accessory activation timing A to notify that it is not a probability variable jackpot.

<Step S4606>
When the normal reach flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 sets the super reach flag indicating that the super reach effect pattern is set as the special figure game effect for the special figure game to be turned on. It is determined whether or not (step S4606). The super reach flag is set to ON in step S4505 of the special figure game effect setting process when it is determined that the super reach effect pattern is set in step S4504 of the special figure game effect setting process of FIG. Ru.

If the super reach flag is set to ON (step S4606: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4607, and if the super reach flag is set to OFF (step S4606: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4607. The process moves to S4614.

<Steps S4607 to S4609>
If the super reach flag is set on (step S4606: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T1 counter (step S4607) and sets the T1 drive flag on (step S4608). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets on the SP development flag indicating development to super reach (step S4609), and moves the process to step S4610.

The T1 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing A, which is set at the final stage of the normal reach performance, starts. The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1, which is the start timing of accessory operation timing A. The SP development flag is a flag indicating that the SP development flag will develop into a super reach, and in order to determine whether or not to notify that the development will develop into a super reach by the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, the SP development flag is a flag that indicates that the SP development flag will develop into a super reach. It is referred to in step S4930 in the accessory control process. In other words, when the super reach effect pattern is set, when the T1 drive flag is on and the value of the T1 counter is 0, the drive of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is started, and the accessory actuation timing is At A, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to notify that the super reach will develop (see FIG. 128).

<Steps S4610 and S4611>
In step S4610, the MPU 51 sets a T2 counter, further sets a T2 drive flag on (step S4611), and moves the process to step S4612.

The T2 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing B, which is set at the final stage of the super reach performance, starts. The T2 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T2, which is the start timing of accessory operation timing B. In other words, when the super reach production pattern is set, when the T2 drive flag is on and the value of the T2 counter is 0, the drive of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is started, and the accessory actuation timing is At B, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved (see FIG. 128).

<Steps S4612 and S4613>
In step S4612, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot lottery result in the lottery process is a loss. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss (Step S4612: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the SPSP non-development flag to ON (Step S4613), and ends the accessory action effect setting process. The SPSP non-development flag is a flag indicating that the SPSP does not develop into a special reach (super reach is out), and is used to determine whether or not to notify that it will develop into a super reach by the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37. This is referred to in step S4941 in the movable rotating accessory control process in FIG. 144, which will be described later. In other words, by setting the SPSP non-development flag to ON, if the special reach performance pattern is set and the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a loss, the special The movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to notify that it will not develop into a reach.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a loss (step S4612: No), that is, if it is a perfect result, the accessory action effect setting process is ended. In addition, if the super reach performance pattern is set and the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is not a loss (if it is a jackpot), depending on the jackpot type, an announcement that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, or The movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved at accessory activation timing B in order to notify that it is not a 16R probability-variable jackpot.

<Step S4614>
When the super reach flag is set to OFF (step S4606: No), the MPU 51 sets the special reach flag indicating that the special reach effect pattern is set as the special figure game effect for the special figure game to be turned on. It is determined whether or not it has been set (step S4614). The special reach flag is set to ON in step S4507 of the special figure game effect setting process when it is determined that the special reach effect pattern is set in step S4506 of the special figure game effect setting process of FIG. Ru.

If the special reach flag is set to ON (step S4614: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4615. On the other hand, when the super reach flag is set to OFF (step S4614: No), the MPU 51 ends the accessory action effect setting process. That is, when a non-reach performance pattern that is not a reach performance pattern is set, the flag for operating the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is not set to ON, and the timing for operating the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not set. shall not be set either. As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not moved in the non-reach performance pattern.

<Steps S4615 to S4617>
If the special reach flag is set on (step S4614: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T1 counter (step S4615) and sets the T1 drive flag on (step S4616). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets on the SP development flag indicating development to super reach (step S4617), and moves the process to step S4618.

The T1 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing A, which is set at the final stage of the normal reach performance, starts. The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1, which is the start timing of accessory operation timing A. The SP development flag is a flag indicating that the SP development flag will develop into a super reach, and in order to determine whether or not to notify that the development will develop into a super reach by the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, the SP development flag is a flag that indicates that the SP development flag will develop into a super reach. It is referred to in step S4930 in the accessory control process. In other words, when the special reach effect pattern is set, when the T1 drive flag is on and the value of the T1 counter is 0, the drive of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is started, and the accessory actuation timing is At A, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to notify that the super reach will develop (see FIG. 128).

<Steps S4618 to S4620>
In step S4618, the MPU 51 sets a T2 counter. Further, the MPU 51 sets the T2 drive flag on (step S4619), sets the SPSP development flag indicating development to special reach on (step S4620), and moves the process to step S4621.

The T2 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing B, which is set at the final stage of the super reach performance, starts. The T2 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T2, which is the start timing of accessory operation timing B. In other words, when the special reach performance pattern is set, when the T2 drive flag is on and the value of the T2 counter is 0, the drive of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is started, and the accessory actuation timing is At B, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to notify that the special reach will develop (see FIG. 128).

<Steps S4621 and S4622>
In step S4621, the MPU 51 sets a T3 counter. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the T3 drive flag to ON (step S4622), and ends the accessory action effect setting process.

The T3 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing C, which is set at the final stage of the special reach performance, starts. The T3 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T3, which is the start timing of the accessory operation timing C. In other words, when the special reach effect pattern is set, when the T3 drive flag is on and the value of the T3 counter is 0, the drive of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is started, and the accessory actuation timing is At C, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved (see FIG. 128).

[Button effect setting process]
Next, the button effect setting process executed in step S4509 of the special figure game effect setting process in FIG. 125 will be explained. Here, FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the button effect setting process of this embodiment. The button effect setting process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 139.

<Step S4701>
As shown in FIG. 139, in the button effect setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the 16R variable promotion flag is set to on (step S4701). The 16R variable promotion flag executes the 16R variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in the drive pattern F (see FIGS. 129(F) and 135), and also executes the 16R variable promotion effect. This is a flag that causes the button effect (see FIG. 140) to be executed before the execution of . This 16R variable probability promotion flag is used to set the stop symbol combination in FIG. It is set to on in step S4407 of the process.

If the 16R variable promotion flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4703, and if the 16R variable promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4701: No), the process proceeds to step S4703. The process moves to step S4702.

<Step S4702>
If the 16R variable probability promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4701: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R variable probability promotion flag is set to ON (step S4702). The 16R fixed variable non-promotion flag executes the 16R fixed variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in the drive pattern G (see FIG. 129(D) and FIG. 137), and also executes the 16R fixed variable promotion effect. This flag is used to execute a button effect (see FIG. 140) before executing the effect. This 16R variable probability non-promotion flag is used as a combination of decorative symbols to stop display when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 5R probability variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot, or when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot. When a value other than "777" is set, it is set to ON in step S4406 in the stop symbol combination setting process of FIG. 124.

If the 16R variable non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4702: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4703, and if the 16R variable non-promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4702: No). , the button effect setting process ends.

<Steps S4703 and S4704>
If the 16R variable promotion flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes) or if the 16R variable variable non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4702: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T3 drive flag to ON. It is determined whether or not it has been set (step S4703). The T3 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T3 (see FIG. 128), which is the start timing of the accessory actuation timing C set at the final stage of the special reach performance. If there is, and a special reach performance pattern is set, it is set to ON in step S4622 in the accessory action performance setting process of FIG. 138. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the timing for finally moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 set in the accessory action performance setting process of FIG. 138 is the accessory activation timing C set at the final stage of the special reach performance. to judge.

When the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4703: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the timing for finally moving the movable rotating accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. If it is the accessory activation timing C set at the final stage of the ready-to-reach performance, the T3 button performance flag is set to ON (step S4704), and the button performance setting process is ended. The T3 button performance flag is a flag that executes a button performance at the accessory activation timing C (see FIG. 128) when time T3 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game, and is a flag that executes a button performance in the button performance setting process of FIG. 150, which will be described later. In S5107, it is referenced to determine whether it is the timing to execute the button effect.

On the other hand, when the T3 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4703: No), the MPU 51 determines the timing at which the movable rotating accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. 138 is finally moved. , if it is not the accessory actuation timing C set at the final stage of the special reach performance, the process moves to step S4705.

Here, the button performance is such that when a 16R variable promotion effect or a 16R variable non-promotion effect is executed by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, a 16R variable promotion effect or a 16R variable non-promotion effect is executed. At the accessory activation timings A to C (see FIG. 128), a display effect is included in which a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 in order to prompt the player to operate the operation button 20. The button performance is executed during a period in which a pressing operation as a predetermined game operation on the operation button 20 is valid (button operation valid period). It is set to the execution timings A to C (see FIG. 128). Further, the button performance is started when the button operation valid period starts, and ends when the operation button 20 is pressed by the player within the button operation valid period, or when the button operation valid period has elapsed. For example, as shown in FIG. 140, in the button effect, an image imitating the operation button 20 and an image indicating the remaining period of the button operation validity period are displayed on the symbol display section 341. Of course, the image with the button effect shown in FIG. 140 is just an example, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, when the button effect is being executed (within the valid button operation period), if the player presses the operation button 20 as a predetermined game operation, the movable rotating role common to movable modes A to D The continuous motion is terminated by the satisfaction of the end determination condition for the continuous motion of the object member 37, and then the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is moved to produce a 16R variable promotion performance or a 16R variable non-promotion performance. is executed. Furthermore, if the operation button 20 is not operated by the player while the button performance is being executed (within the valid button operation period), the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, will be movable after the button operation valid period has elapsed. By doing so, a 16R definite-variable promotion performance or a 16R definite-variable non-promotion performance is executed.

<Steps S4705 and S4706>
If the T3 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4703: No), that is, the timing to finally move the movable rotating accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. 138 is the timing of the special reach effect. If the accessory actuation timing C is not set at the final stage, the MPU 51 determines whether the T2 drive flag is set to on (step S4703). The T2 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T2 (see FIG. 128), which is the start timing of accessory actuation timing B set at the final stage of the super reach performance. Yes, and if the super reach effect pattern is set, it is set to ON in step S4611 in the accessory action effect setting process of FIG. 138. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the timing for finally moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 set in the accessory action performance setting process of FIG. 138 is the accessory activation timing B set at the final stage of the super reach performance. to judge.

When the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4705: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the timing to finally move the movable rotating accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. If it is the accessory activation timing B set at the final stage of the ready-to-reach performance, the T2 button performance flag is set to ON (step S4705), and the button performance setting process is ended. The T2 button performance flag is a flag that executes the button performance at the accessory activation timing B (see FIG. 128) when time T2 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game, and is a flag that executes the button performance in the button performance setting process of FIG. 150, which will be described later. In S5104, it is referenced to determine whether it is the timing to execute the button effect.

On the other hand, when the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4705: No), the MPU 51 determines that the timing to finally move the movable rotating accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. , if it is not the accessory actuation timing B set at the final stage of the super reach performance, the process moves to step S4707.

<Steps S4707 and S4708>
If the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4705: No), that is, the timing to finally move the movable rotating accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. 138 is the same as that of the super reach effect. If it is not accessory actuation timing B set at the final stage, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the T1 drive flag is set to on (step S4707). The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1 (see FIG. 128), which is the start timing of the accessory actuation timing A set at the final stage of the normal reach performance. , when the normal reach performance pattern is set, it is set to ON in step S4603 in the accessory action performance setting process of FIG. 138. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the timing for finally moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 set in the accessory action performance setting process of FIG. 138 is the accessory activation timing A set at the final stage of the normal reach performance. to judge.

When the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4707: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the timing to finally move the movable rotary accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. 138 is normal reach. If it is the accessory actuation timing A that is set at the final stage of the performance, the T1 button performance flag is set to ON (step S4708), and the button performance setting process ends. The T1 button performance flag is a flag that executes a button performance at the accessory activation timing A (see FIG. 128) when time T1 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game, and is a flag that executes the button performance in the button performance setting process of FIG. 150, which will be described later. In S5101, it is referenced to determine whether it is the timing to execute the button effect.

On the other hand, when the T1 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4707: No), the MPU 51 determines the timing at which the movable rotating accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. 138 is finally moved. , if it is not the accessory actuation timing A set at the final stage of the normal reach performance, the button performance setting process is ended.

[Special figure game production control processing]
Next, the special figure game performance control process executed in step S2704 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 53 will be explained. In the special figure game effect control process of this embodiment, the special figure game effect executed in the special figure game is controlled based on the special figure game effect set in the special figure game effect setting process of FIG. Here, FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game performance control process. Hereinafter, an example of the special figure game performance control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 141.

<Step S4801>
In the special figure game effect control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first controls the movable body in the special figure game based on the role object operation effect set in the role object operation effect setting process as the movable body control process in FIG. A movable rotating accessory control process as a movable body control process for controlling the operation of a certain movable rotating accessory member 37 is executed (step S4801). The details of the movable rotating accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 142 to 149.

<Step S4802>
In step S4802, the MPU 51 executes a button performance control process that controls the execution of the button performance in the special figure game based on the button performance set in the button performance setting process of FIG. 139. Note that details of the button presentation control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151.

<Step S4803>
In step S4803, the MPU 51 executes other performance control processing regarding performances other than the role object operation performance and the button performance in the special figure game.

[Movable rotating accessory control process]
Next, an example of the movable rotating accessory control process executed in step S4801 of the special figure game production control process in FIG. 141 will be described. In the movable rotating accessory control process of this embodiment, a movable body that controls the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, based on the accessory operation effect set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. Control processing is executed. Here, FIGS. 142 to 149 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotating accessory control process. The movable rotating accessory control process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 142 to 149.

<Steps S4901 and S4902>
As shown in FIG. 142, in the movable rotating accessory control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the T1 drive flag is set to on (step S4901). The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1, which is the start timing of accessory actuation timing A (see FIG. 128) set at the final stage of the normal reach performance.

If the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4901: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the T1 counter indicating the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing A starts (step S4902), and executes the process. The process moves to step S4903. On the other hand, if the T1 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4901: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4903.

<Steps S4903 and S4904>
In step S4903, the MPU 51 determines whether the T2 drive flag is set to on (step S4903). The T2 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T2, which is the start timing of accessory actuation timing B (see FIG. 128), which is set at the final stage of the super reach performance. .

If the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4903: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the T2 counter indicating the remaining time until accessory actuation timing B starts (step S4904), and performs processing. The process moves to step S4905. On the other hand, if the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4903: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4905.

<Steps S4905 and S4906>
In step S4905, the MPU 51 determines whether the T3 drive flag is set to on (step S4905). The T3 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T3, which is the start timing of accessory actuation timing C (see FIG. 128) set at the final stage of the special reach performance. .

If the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4905: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the T3 counter indicating the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing C starts (step S4906), and executes the process. The process moves to step S4907. On the other hand, if the T3 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4905: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4907.

<Step S4907>
In step S4907, the MPU 51 determines whether the T1 drive flag is set on. If the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4907: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4908. On the other hand, if the T1 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4907: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4910.

<Steps S4908 and S4909>
If the T1 drive flag is set to on (step S4907: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T1 counter indicating the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing A starts is 0. (Step S4908). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body.

When the value of the T1 counter is 0 (step S4908: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 sets the T1 drive flag to OFF (step S4908), and performs processing. The process moves to step S4916. On the other hand, if the value of the T1 counter is not 0 (step S4908: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4910>
If the T1 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4907: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4910). If the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4910: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4911. On the other hand, if the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4910: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4913.

<Steps S4911 and S4912>
If the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4910: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T2 counter indicating the remaining time until accessory actuation timing B starts is 0. (Step S4911). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body.

When the value of the T2 counter is 0 (step S4910: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 sets the T2 drive flag to OFF (step S4912), and executes the process. The process moves to step S4916. On the other hand, if the value of the T2 counter is not 0 (step S4911: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4913>
If the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4910: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4913). If the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4913: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4914. On the other hand, if the T3 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4913: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4920 in FIG. 143.

<Steps S4914 and S4915>
If the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4914: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T3 counter indicating the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing C starts is 0. (Step S4914). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body.

When the value of the T3 counter is 0 (step S4914: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 sets the T3 drive flag to OFF (step S4915), and performs processing. The process moves to step S4916. On the other hand, if the value of the T3 counter is not 0 (step S4914: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4916>
If it is the timing to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 sets drive data 1 (accessory object operation scenario data 1) (see FIG. 132) (step S4916). Drive data 1 is information that causes the movable rotary accessory member 37 to perform a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) in the movable modes A to D of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body. . That is, the MPU 51 controls the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the common drive data 1 regardless of the movable mode.

In this way, in this embodiment, the continuous motion (drive patterns A to C) common to the plurality of movable modes A to D for the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is one common drive data 1 ( This is executed based on information corresponding to the accessory motion scenario data 1). In addition, as described above, the drive data 1 is stored in the ROM, and when a continuous operation common to a plurality of movable modes A to D is performed on the movable rotating accessory member 37, the drive data 1 is driven from the ROM. Data 1 is read out once, and drive data 1 is set in the RAM once. Then, the movable rotary accessory member 37 performs a continuous operation common to the plurality of movable modes A to D by reading the drive data 1 from the ROM once and setting the drive data 1 to the RAM once. It is movable. As a result, the amount of drive data required to realize each of the movable modes A to D can be reduced, which not only reduces the memory load but also allows readout and temporary storage of drive data when operating the movable rotating accessory member 37. The control burden is reduced.

<Steps S4917 to S4919>
In step S4917, the MPU 51 activates the drive data 1 scenario timer in order to cause the movable rotating accessory member 37 to perform continuous operations (drive patterns A to C) according to the processing procedure specified in the drive data 1 (see FIG. 132). At the same time, a drive data 1 set flag indicating that drive data 1 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is set on (step S4918). Then, the MPU 51 processes the process No. of drive data 1 (see FIG. 132). 1 (step S4919), and the movable rotating accessory control process ends.

<Step S4920>
If the T3 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4913: No), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the drive data 1 set flag indicating 1 set of drive data is set on (step S4920).

If the drive data 1 set flag is set to ON (step S4920: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4921, and if the drive data 1 set flag is set to OFF (step S4920: No). , the process moves to step S4961 in FIG. 146.

<Steps S4921 to S4923>
If the drive data 1 set flag is set to on (step S4920: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 1 scenario timer (step S4921), and based on the updated value of the drive data 1 scenario timer, It is determined whether it is the timing to proceed to the next process defined in drive data 1 (step S4922).

If it is the timing to move to the next process specified in the drive data 1 (step S4922: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in the drive data 1 (step S4923), and Control processing ends. For example, as shown in FIG. 132, processing No. 1 in drive data 1. 5, that is, when the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is in a stopped state, the process is executed in process No. 6, the process of rotating the stepping motor for elevation by 12 steps in the forward direction is executed.

In this way, by referring to the drive data 1 scenario timer updated in step S4921 and sequentially executing the next process in drive data 1, the process No. in drive data 1 is executed. 1~Processing No. All 29 processes are executed. As a result, a continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) common to a plurality of movable modes A to D is performed on the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body.

On the other hand, if it is not the timing to proceed to the next process defined in drive data 1 (step S4922: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4924.

<Step S4924>
If it is not the timing to move to the next process defined in drive data 1 (step S4922: No), the MPU 51 selects process No. 28 execution flag is set on (step S4924). Processing No. 28 execution flag indicates the process No. 28 in drive data 1. 28 (see FIG. 132), and while the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is in a stopped state at the intermediate operation position 1, which is the return side position, a plurality of movable modes A to D are executed. When it is determined that the end determination condition for continuous motion common to the above is satisfied (when it is determined that the operation button 20 has been operated), the step of FIG. 145 described later in the movable rotating accessory control process is executed. It is set to on in S4959. In other words, processing No. 28 execution flag is used when the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is terminated while the movable rotary accessory member 37 is in a stopped state at the intermediate operation position 1. This is a flag for ending the continuous operation with the movable rotating accessory member 37 returned to the standby position by skipping the process to step 28. Thereby, even if the movable rotary accessory member 37 is not in the standby position, the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be immediately returned to the standby position and the continuous operation can be ended.

Then, the MPU 51 executes processing No. If the No. 28 execution flag is set on (step S4924: Yes), the process moves to step S4925, and the process No. If the No. 28 execution flag is set to off (step S4924: No), the process moves to step S4927 in FIG.

<Steps S4925 and S4926>
Processing No. 28 execution flag is set to ON (step S4924: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the process No. 28 execution flag of drive data 1. 28 is executed (step S4925). Then, the MPU 51 resets the drive data 1 scenario timer (step S4926), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the process number when all processes of drive data 1 are executed as the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer. Set to the value when 28 is started. As a result, the processing No. of drive data 1. 28 and processing no. 29 (see FIG. 132) can be sequentially executed, and the processing of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 can be completed with the movable rotary accessory member 37 returned to the standby position.

<Step S4927>
If it is not the timing to proceed to the next process defined in drive data 1 (step S4922: No), as shown in FIG. 144, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is the maximum value. (Step S4927). That is, the MPU 51 determines the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 due to the satisfaction of the end determination condition based on the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 1. Make a termination judgment.

If the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4927: Yes), that is, the termination determination condition based on the completion of all processes defined by drive data 1, the MPU 51 terminates the drive data. If it is determined that it is the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on Step S4928, the process moves to step S4928. On the other hand, if the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4927: No), in other words, the termination determination condition based on the fact that all the processes specified by the drive data 1 have not been completed, the MPU 51 determines that If it is determined that it is not the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1, the process moves to step S4948 in FIG. 145.

<Steps S4928 and S4929>
If the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4927: Yes), that is, if the end determination condition is met and it is the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1, the process ends. If it is determined, the MPU 51 activates the drive data 1 scenario timer for causing the movable rotating accessory member 37 to perform continuous operations (drive patterns A to C) according to the processing procedure defined in the drive data 1 (see FIG. 132). is cleared (step S4948). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 1 set flag indicating that drive data 1 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 to OFF (step S4929), and shifts the process to step S4930. do. That is, when the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4927: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is ended.

<Step S4930>
In step S4930, the MPU 51 determines whether the SP development flag indicating development to super reach is set on.

If the SP development flag indicating development to super reach is set on (step S4930: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4931, and if the SP development flag is set to off (step S4930: Yes) S4930: No), the process moves to step S4933.

<Steps S4931 and S4932>
If the SP development flag indicating development to super reach is set on (step S4930: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 2 unset flag on (step S4931). The drive data 2 unset flag is a flag for setting drive data 2, and is referenced in step S4961 in FIG. 146, which will be described later, to determine whether drive data 2 is to be set.

The drive data 2 is based on the common continuous motion (drive patterns A to C) based on the drive data 1 in the movable mode A of the movable rotating accessory member 37 that announces the development to super reach (SP development). This is information for later moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in drive pattern D (see FIG. 129(A) and FIG. 133) as an individual operation.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SP development flag to OFF (step S4932), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4933>
If the SP development flag indicating that it will develop into a super reach is set to OFF (step S4930: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the SP non-development flag indicating that it will not develop to a super reach is set to on. is determined (step S4933).

If the SP non-development flag indicating that the super reach will not develop is set to ON (step S4933: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4934, and if the SP non-development flag is set to OFF. (Step S4933: No), the process moves to step S4936.

<Steps S4934 and S4935>
If the SP non-development flag indicating that it will not develop into super reach is set on (step S4933: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 unset flag on (step S4934). The drive data 5 unset flag is a flag for setting drive data 5, and is referenced in step S5000 of FIG. 149, which will be described later, to determine whether drive data 5 is to be set.

The drive data 5 is a common continuous motion (drive patterns A to C) based on the drive data 1 in the movable mode D of the movable rotary accessory member 37 that announces that it will not develop into a super reach (SP non-development). This is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive pattern G (see FIG. 129(D) and FIG. 137) as an individual operation after .

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SP non-development flag to OFF (step S4935), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4936>
If the SP non-development flag is set to OFF (step S4933: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the SPSP development flag indicating development to special reach is set to ON (step S4936).

If the SPSP development flag indicating development to special reach is set on (step S4936: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4937, and if the SPSP development flag is set off (step S4936: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4937. S4936: No), the process moves to step S4939.

<Steps S4937 and S4938>
If the SPSP development flag indicating development to special reach is set on (step S4936: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 3 unset flag on (step S4937). The drive data 3 unset flag is a flag for setting drive data 3, and is referenced in step S4974 in FIG. 147, which will be described later, to determine whether drive data 3 is to be set.

The drive data 3 is based on the common continuous motion (drive patterns A to C) based on the drive data 1 in the movable mode B of the movable rotating accessory member 37 that announces the development to a special reach (SPSP development). This is information for later moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive pattern E (see FIG. 129(B) and FIG. 134) as an individual operation.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SPSP development flag to OFF (step S4938), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4939>
If the SPSP development flag is set to OFF (step S4936: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the SPSP non-development flag indicating that it will not develop into a special reach is set to ON (step S4939).

If the SPSP non-development flag indicating that the special reach will not develop is set to ON (step S4939: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4940, and if the SPSP non-development flag is set to OFF. (Step S4939: No), the process moves to step S4942.

<Steps S4940 and S4941>
If the SPSP non-development flag indicating that it will not develop into a special reach is set on (step S4939: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 unset flag on (step S4940). The drive data 5 unset flag is a flag for setting drive data 5, and is referenced in step S5000 of FIG. 149, which will be described later, to determine whether drive data 5 is to be set.

The drive data 5 is a common continuous motion (drive patterns A to C) based on the drive data 1 in the movable mode D of the movable rotating accessory member 37 that announces that it will not develop into a special reach (SPSP non-development). This is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive pattern G (see FIG. 129(D) and FIG. 137) as an individual operation after .

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SPSP non-development flag to OFF (step S4941), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4942>
If the SPSP non-development flag is set to OFF (step S4939: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R variable promotion flag is set to ON (step S4942). The 16R variable promotion flag executes the 16R variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in the drive pattern F (see FIGS. 129(C) and 135), and also executes the 16R variable promotion effect. This is a flag that causes the button effect (see FIG. 140) to be executed before the execution of .

If the 16R variable promotion flag is set to ON (step S4942: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4943, and if the 16R variable promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4942: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4943. The process moves to step S4945.

<Steps S4943 and S4944>
If the 16R variable promotion flag is set on (step S4942: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 4 unset flag on (step S4943). The drive data 4 unset flag is a flag for setting drive data 4, and is referenced in step S4987 in FIG. 148, which will be described later, to determine whether drive data 4 is to be set.

The drive data 4 is a common continuous motion (drive patterns A to C) based on the drive data 1 in the movable mode C of the movable rotating accessory member 37 that announces that it will not develop into a special reach (SPSP non-development). This is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive pattern F (see FIG. 129(C) and FIG. 135) as an individual operation after .

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R variable promotion flag to OFF (step S4944), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4945>
If the 16R variable probability promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4942: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R variable probability promotion flag is set to ON (step S4945). The 16R fixed variable non-promotion flag executes the 16R fixed variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in the drive pattern G (see FIG. 129(D) and FIG. 137), and also executes the 16R fixed variable promotion effect. This flag is used to execute a button effect (see FIG. 140) before executing the effect.

If the 16R variable non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4945: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4946, and if the 16R variable non-promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4945: No). , the movable rotating accessory control process ends.

<Steps S4946 and S4947>
If the 16R variable probability non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4945: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 unset flag to ON (step S4946). The drive data 5 unset flag is a flag for setting drive data 5, and is referenced in step S5000 of FIG. 149, which will be described later, to determine whether drive data 5 is to be set.

In addition, the drive data 5 is a common continuous movement based on the drive data 1 (drive pattern A to This is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive pattern G (see FIG. 129(D) and FIG. 137) as an individual operation after C).

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R variable probability non-promotion flag to OFF (step S4947), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4948>
If the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4927: No), as shown in FIG. 145, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to make the termination determination as to whether or not the termination determination condition is satisfied. is determined (step S4948). Specifically, the MPU 51 selects process No. 1 from among the processes executed based on drive data 1. 05, Processing No. 09, Processing No. 5. Processing No. 13. Processing No. 17. Processing No. 23. Processing No. 27 and processing no. 29 (see FIG. 132).

If it is time to make a termination determination as to whether the termination determination condition is satisfied (step S4948: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4949, and performs termination determination as to whether the termination determination condition is satisfied. If it is not the timing to perform (step S4948: No), the movable rotating accessory control process ends.

Here, as shown in FIG. 132, process No. 1 is executed based on drive data 1. 05, Processing No. 09, Processing No. 5. Processing No. 13. Processing No. 17. Processing No. 23. Processing No. 27 and processing no. 29 (see FIG. 132) is the drive side position of the reciprocating motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, which is a continuous motion in drive patterns A to C executed based on drive data 1. It is executed at the timing when the actuator is positioned at the standby position or the intermediate operation position 1, which is the return side position. That is, in the present embodiment, as a movable body control process, continuous motion (drive patterns A to C) common to a plurality of movable modes A to D for the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is combined into one drive data. 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1), when the movable rotating accessory member 37 is located at the return position or intermediate operation position 1, which is the return side position of the reciprocating movement, An end determination is made as to whether or not conditions for determining the end of continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1) are satisfied. As a result, the end determination of whether or not the condition for determining the end of the continuous movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1) is satisfied is the reciprocating motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37. Since this is performed at the return side position of When terminating the operation, there is no need to move the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, or the moving distance of the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be reduced. In addition, the end determination as to whether or not the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous motion based on the drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1) is satisfied is performed when the movable rotating accessory member 37 returns to the return side position of the reciprocating motion. By being executed every time the object is positioned, the end determination is repeatedly executed a plurality of times in the continuous operation. As a result, when it is determined in the end determination that the end determination condition of the continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 (accessory object motion scenario data 1) is satisfied, the continuous motion is Not only can the process be terminated immediately after it is determined that the termination determination condition is satisfied, but also it can be terminated immediately after the termination determination condition is satisfied. Therefore, the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable after it is determined in the end determination that the end determination condition is satisfied or after the end determination condition is satisfied. . Therefore, after the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data 1) is completed, the movable rotary role member 37 in the drive patterns D to G specific to each of the movable modes A to D is sequentially moved. When an individual motion of the object member 37 is executed, it is possible to smoothly transition from a continuous motion common to a plurality of movable modes A to D to an individual motion of each of the other movable modes A to D. When the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved in A to D, when the continuous operation common to a plurality of movable modes A to D is shifted to the individual operations of each of the other movable modes A to D. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable. Thereby, even if the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated for the purpose of presentation, it becomes possible to operate the movable rotating accessory member 37 without impairing the presentation effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is located at the return position or intermediate operation position 1, which is the return side position, in a continuous operation common to a plurality of movable modes A to D, , a termination determination is made as to whether or not the termination determination condition of the continuous operation is satisfied, but while the movable rotating accessory member 37 is being moved toward the drive side position in the continuous operation, the termination determination condition is satisfied. A termination determination is not made as to whether or not this holds true. This is because if the movable rotary accessory member 37 is immediately stopped moving while it is being moved to the drive side position, the next operation of the continuous operation is started. At the start, move the movable rotating accessory member 37 to the start position of the next operation, or start the movable rotating accessory member 37 at the movable stop position on the driving side position when determining the end of the continuous operation and move the movable rotating accessory member 37 to the start position of the next operation. This is because, as a result of the need to start the movement of 37, it is necessary to perform unnecessary control or complicated control, and there is a possibility that the transition from one continuous operation to the next operation cannot be performed smoothly. Therefore, while the movable rotary accessory member 37 is being moved toward the drive side position in the continuous operation, no end determination is made as to whether or not the end determination condition is satisfied, resulting in unnecessary control and complicated control. Since there is no need to perform specific control, it is possible to properly control the end of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in continuous operation, and to smoothly transition from one continuous operation to the next operation, the movable rotating accessory member 37 can be controlled properly. The movement of the object member 37 can be suitably controlled.

<Step S4949>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 132, if it is the timing to make the termination determination as to whether or not the termination determination condition is satisfied (step S4948: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a predetermined game operation on the operation button 20 by the player. It is determined whether a certain pressing operation has been performed (step S4949). That is, while the MPU 51 is performing continuous operations (drive patterns A to C) of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, based on the drive data 1, the MPU 51 is configured to press the operation button 20 by the player, which is a predetermined game operation. A termination determination is made as to whether or not a termination determination condition based on the operation is satisfied. Note that whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20 is determined by the operation of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" as the three operation states of the operation button 20 in the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. Judgment is made based on whether a pattern occurs or not.

In this way, the condition for determining the end of the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body based on the drive data 1, is a pressing operation, which is a predetermined game operation, on the operation button 20 by the player. On the other hand, as described above, the timing for determining whether or not the termination determination condition is satisfied is determined by the process No. 1, which is executed based on drive data 1. 05, Processing No. 09, Processing No. 5. Processing No. 13. Processing No. 17. Processing No. 23. Processing No. 27 and processing no. 29 (see FIG. 132) is being executed, and the reciprocating motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is a continuous motion in drive patterns A to C executed based on drive data 1. This is the timing when the motor is moved from the drive side position to the return side position, which is the standby position or intermediate operating position 1. Therefore, in the case where the condition for determining the end of continuous motion is satisfied before all the control processing for the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is completed due to the pressing operation of the operation button 20 by the player. Also, when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is located at the standby position or the intermediate operation position 1, which is the return side position, it is determined whether or not the continuous operation end determination condition is satisfied. Therefore, if the continuous motion termination determination condition is satisfied before all control processing for the continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is completed due to the player's pressing operation on the operation button 20, the termination determination condition When the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the standby position or the intermediate operating position 1 after the above is established, the continuous operation can be terminated. As a result, when the continuous motion termination determination condition is satisfied, the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be immediately terminated. The continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be ended without making the person feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the next operation (operation of drive pattern C or drive pattern D) is performed after the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is completed, the continuous operation can be smoothly transitioned to the next operation. To prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning from a continuous action to another action. As a result, even if the movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated for the purpose of displaying the display performance on the symbol display section 341, the movable rotating accessory member 37 can be operated without impairing the performance effect. It becomes possible to do so.

When the player presses the operation button 20 as a predetermined game operation (step S4949: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4950, If the pressing operation that is the predetermined game operation is not performed (step S4949: No), the movable rotating accessory control process is ended.

<Step S4950>
When the player presses the operation button 20 as a predetermined game operation (step S4949: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability promotion flag is set to on (step S4950). ). The 16R variable promotion flag executes the 16R variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in the drive pattern F (see FIGS. 129(C) and 135), and also executes the 16R variable promotion effect. This is a flag that causes the button effect (see FIG. 140) to be executed before the execution of .

If the 16R variable promotion flag is set to ON (step S4950: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4951, and if the 16R variable promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4950: No), the process proceeds to step S4951. The process moves to step S4953.

<Steps S4951 and S4952>
If the 16R variable promotion flag is set on (step S4950: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 4 unset flag on (step S4951). The drive data 4 unset flag is a flag for setting drive data 4, and is referenced in step S4987 in FIG. 148, which will be described later, to determine whether drive data 4 is to be set.

In addition, drive data 4 is a common continuous motion based on drive data 1 (drive patterns A to C) in movable mode C of the movable rotating accessory member 37 that announces that it is a 16R probability-variable jackpot (16R probability-variable promotion). This is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive pattern F (see FIG. 129(C) and FIG. 135) as an individual operation after .

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R variable promotion flag to OFF (step S4952), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4953>
When the 16R variable probability promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4950: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R variable probability promotion flag is set to ON (step S4953). The 16R fixed variable non-promotion flag executes the 16R fixed variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in the drive pattern G (see FIG. 129(D) and FIG. 137), and also executes the 16R fixed variable promotion effect. This flag is used to execute a button effect (see FIG. 140) before executing the effect.

If the 16R definite variable non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4953: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4954, and if the 16R definite variable non-promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4953: No). , the movable rotating accessory control process ends.

<Steps S4954 and S4955>
If the 16R variable probability non-promotion flag is set on (step S4953: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 unset flag on (step S4954). The drive data 5 unset flag is a flag for setting drive data 5, and is referenced in step S5000 of FIG. 149, which will be described later, to determine whether drive data 5 is to be set.

In addition, the drive data 5 is a common continuous movement based on the drive data 1 (drive pattern A to This is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive pattern G (see FIG. 129(D) and FIG. 137) as an individual operation after C).

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R variable non-promotion flag to OFF (step S4955), and moves the process to step S4956.

<Step S4956>
In step S4956, the MPU 51 determines that the process of the drive data 1 for which the completion determination was made is the process No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, No. 17 (see FIG. 132). That is, the MPU 51 determines that the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is satisfied (the operation button 20 has been operated). At the timing, it is determined whether the movable rotating accessory member 37 is in a stopped state at the standby position.

The MPU 51 determines that the process of the drive data 1 for which the end determination was made is the process No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, No. 17 (step S4956: Yes), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is satisfied (operation button 20 If the movable rotating accessory member 37 is in a stopped state at the standby position at the timing when it is determined that the operation has been performed, the process moves to step S4956. On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines that the process of the drive data 1 for which the end determination was made is the process No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, No. 17 (step S4956: No), that is, the termination judgment condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is satisfied (the operation button 20 is If the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not in a stopped state at the standby position at the timing when it is determined that the operation has been performed, the process moves to step S4959.

<Steps S4957 and S4958>
The process of drive data 1 for which the end determination was made is process No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, No. 17 (step S4956: Yes), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is satisfied (operation button 20 If the movable rotating accessory member 37 is in a stopped state at the standby position at the timing when it is determined that the operation has been performed on the The drive data 1 scenario timer for causing the rotating accessory member 37 to execute continuous operations (drive patterns A to C) is cleared (step S4957). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 1 set flag indicating that drive data 1 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 to OFF (step S4958), and controls the movable rotating accessory member 37. Finish the process. That is, at the timing when it is determined that the end determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is satisfied (the operation button 20 is operated), the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped at the standby position, the process based on drive data 1 is ended by setting the drive data 1 set flag to OFF, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is stopped at the standby position. Then, the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is ended.

<Step S4959>
The process of drive data 1 for which the end determination was made is process No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, No. 17 (step S4956: No), that is, the termination judgment condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is satisfied (the operation button 20 is If the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not in a stopped state at the standby position at the timing when it is determined that the operation has been performed, the MPU 51 determines that the process of the drive data 1 for which the end determination was made is the process No. 23, No. 27 (see FIG. 132) (step S4959). That is, the MPU 51 determines that the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is satisfied (the operation button 20 has been operated). At the timing, it is determined whether the movable rotary accessory member 37 is in a stopped state at the intermediate operating position 1 or not.

The MPU 51 determines that the process of the drive data 1 for which the end determination was made is the process No. 23, No. 27 (see FIG. 132) (step S4959: Yes), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is satisfied. If the movable rotating accessory member 37 is in the stopped state at the intermediate operation position 1 at the timing when it is determined that the operation button 20 is present (the operation button 20 has been operated), the process moves to step S4960.

On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines that the process of the drive data 1 for which the end determination was made is the process No. 23, No. 27 (see FIG. 132) (step S4959: No), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is satisfied. If the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not in the stopped state at the intermediate operating position 1 at the timing when it is determined that (the operation button 20 has been operated), the movable rotating accessory member 37 is terminated.

<Step S4960>
The process of drive data 1 for which the end determination was made is process No. 23, No. 27 (see FIG. 132) (step S4959: Yes), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is satisfied. If the movable rotary accessory member 37 is in the stopped state at the intermediate operation position 1 at the timing when it is determined that the operation button 20 is in the state (the operation button 20 has been operated), the MPU 51 executes processing No. 28 execution flag is set to ON (step S4960), and the movable rotating accessory control process ends.

Here, as described above, processing No. 28 execution flag indicates the process No. 28 in drive data 1. 28 (see FIG. 132), the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is completed with the movable rotary accessory member 37 returned to the standby position. In step S4924 of FIG. 143 of the movable rotating accessory control process, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body that is in a stopped state at intermediate operating position 1, is returned to the standby position, and multiple It is referred to in order to judge whether or not to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the movable modes A to D.

<Step S4961>
If the value of the driving data 1 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4927: No), in other words, the termination judgment condition based on the fact that all the processes specified by the driving data 1 have not been completed, When it is determined that it is not the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, as shown in FIG. 146, the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 2 unset flag is set to on. (Step S4961). The drive data 2 unset flag is a flag that causes drive data 2 to be set.

If the drive data 2 unset flag is set to ON (step S4961: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4962, and if the drive data 2 unset flag is set to OFF (step S4961: No), the process moves to step S4967.

<Steps S4962 to S4966>
If the drive data 2 unset flag is set to ON (step S4961: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 2 unset flag to OFF (step S4962), and also sets the drive data 2 (accessories motion scenario data) to OFF. 2) (see FIG. 133(B)) is set (step S4963). Drive data 2 includes common continuous motions (drive patterns A to C) in movable mode A of the movable rotating accessory member 37 (see FIG. 129(A)) that announces development to super reach (SP development). This is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in drive pattern D (see FIG. 133(A)) as an individual operation after .

Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 2 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the drive pattern D according to the processing procedure prescribed in the drive data 2 (see FIG. 133(B)), and also sets the drive data 2 scenario timer (step S4964). ), a drive data 2 set flag indicating that drive data 2 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is set on (step S4965). Furthermore, the MPU 51 selects the process No. of drive data 2. 1 (step S4966), and the movable rotating accessory control process ends.

<Step S4967>
When the drive data 2 unset flag is set to OFF (step S4961: No), the MPU 51 sets drive data indicating that drive data 2 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37. It is determined whether the 2-set flag is set on (step S4967).

If the drive data 2 set flag is set to ON (step S4967: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4968, and if the drive data 2 set flag is set to OFF (step S4967: No). , the process moves to step S4974 in FIG. 147.

<Steps S4968 to S4970>
If the drive data 2 set flag is set to on (step S4967: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 2 scenario timer (step S4968), and based on the updated value of the drive data 2 scenario timer, It is determined whether it is the timing to proceed to the next process defined in drive data 2 (step S4969).

If it is the timing to move to the next process specified in the drive data 2 (step S4969: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in the drive data 2 (step S4970), and Control processing ends. For example, as shown in FIG. 133(B), processing No. in drive data 2. 3, that is, when the stepping motor for elevating and lowering is in a stopped state, the process is executed in process No. 3. By moving to step 4, the process of rotating the stepping motor for elevating and lowering 72 steps in the opposite direction is executed.

In this way, by referring to the drive data 2 scenario timer updated in step S4968 and sequentially executing the next process in drive data 2, the process No. in drive data 2 is executed. 01~Processing No. All processes of 05 are executed. As a result, the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is performed in the drive pattern D (see FIG. 133(A)) as an individual operation.

On the other hand, if it is not the timing to proceed to the next process defined in the drive data 2 (step S4969: No), the MPU 51 transfers the process to step S4971.

<Step S4971>
If it is not the timing to proceed to the next process defined in the drive data 2 (step S4969: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4971). That is, the MPU 51 has reached the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 2 due to the satisfaction of the end determination condition based on the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 2. Make a termination judgment.

When the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4971: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the process based on the fact that all processes defined by the drive data 2 (see FIG. 133(B)) are terminated. When the determination condition is satisfied and it is determined that it is the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 2, the process moves to step S4972. On the other hand, if the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4971: No), in other words, the termination determination condition based on the fact that all the processes specified by the drive data 2 have not been completed, the MPU 51 determines that When it is determined that it is not the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 2, the movable rotating accessory member 37 ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Steps S4972 and S4973>
If the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4971: Yes), that is, if the end determination condition is met and it is the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 2, the process ends. If determined, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 2 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the drive pattern D according to the processing procedure specified in the drive data 2 (see FIG. 133(B)). Step S4972). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 2 set flag indicating that drive data 2 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 to OFF (step S4973), and controls the movable rotating accessory member 37. Finish the process. That is, when the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4971: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is ended.

<Step S4974>
If the drive data 2 set flag is set to OFF (step S4967: No), as shown in FIG. 147, the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 3 unset flag is set to ON (step S4974). The drive data 3 unset flag is a flag that causes drive data 3 to be set.

If the drive data 3 unset flag is set to ON (step S4974: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4975, and if the drive data 3 unset flag is set to OFF (step S4974: No), the process moves to step S4980.

<Steps S4975 to S4979>
If the drive data 3 unset flag is set to ON (step S4974: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 3 unset flag to OFF (step S4975), and also sets the drive data 3 (accessories motion scenario data) to OFF. 3) (see FIG. 134(B)) is set (step S4976). Drive data 3 indicates common continuous motions (drive patterns A to C) in movable mode B (see FIG. 129(B)) of the movable rotary accessory member 37 that announces development into special reach (SPSP development). This is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in a drive pattern E (see FIG. 134(A)) as an individual operation after .

Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 3 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the drive pattern E according to the processing procedure defined in the drive data 3 (see FIG. 134(B)), and also sets the drive data 3 scenario timer (step S4977). ), a drive data 3 set flag indicating that drive data 3 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is set on (step S4978). Furthermore, the MPU 51 processes the process No. 3 of drive data 3. 1 (step S4979), and the movable rotating accessory control process ends.

<Step S4980>
If the drive data 3 unset flag is set to OFF (step S4974: No), the MPU 51 sets drive data indicating that drive data 3 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37. It is determined whether the 3-set flag is set on (step S4980).

If the drive data 3 set flag is set to ON (step S4980: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4981, and if the drive data 3 set flag is set to OFF (step S4980: No). , the process moves to step S4987 in FIG. 148.

<Steps S4981 to S4983>
If the drive data 3 set flag is set to on (step S4980: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 3 scenario timer (step S4981), and based on the updated value of the drive data 3 scenario timer, It is determined whether it is the timing to proceed to the next process defined in drive data 3 (step S4982).

If it is the timing to move to the next process specified in the drive data 3 (step S4982: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in the drive data 3 (step S4983), and Control processing ends. For example, as shown in FIG. 134(B), processing No. in drive data 3. 2, that is, when the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotating in the forward direction, the process is executed as process No. 2. By shifting to step 3, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is brought to a rotation stop state.

In this way, by referring to the drive data 3 scenario timer updated in step S4981 and sequentially executing the next process in drive data 3, the process No. in drive data 3 is executed. 01~Processing No. All processes of 07 are executed. As a result, the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is performed in the drive pattern E (see FIG. 134(A)) as an individual operation.

On the other hand, if it is not the timing to proceed to the next process defined in the drive data 3 (step S4982: No), the MPU 51 transfers the process to step S4984.

<Step S4984>
If it is not the timing to proceed to the next process defined in the drive data 3 (step S4982: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4984). That is, the MPU 51 determines the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 3 due to the satisfaction of the end determination condition based on the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 3. Make a termination judgment.

When the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4984: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the process based on the fact that all processes defined by the drive data 3 (see FIG. 134(B)) are terminated. When the determination condition is satisfied and it is determined that it is the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 3, the process moves to step S4985. On the other hand, if the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4984: No), that is, if the termination determination condition is not satisfied based on the fact that all the processes specified by the drive data 3 have not been completed, the MPU 51 When it is determined that it is not the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 3, the movable rotating accessory member 37 ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Steps S4985 and S4986>
If the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4984: Yes), that is, if the end determination condition is met and it is the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 3, the process ends. If it is determined, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 3 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the drive pattern E according to the processing procedure specified in the drive data 3 (see FIG. 134(B)). Step S4985). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 3 set flag indicating that drive data 3 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 to OFF (step S4986), and controls the movable rotating accessory member 37. Finish the process. That is, when the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4984: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is ended.

<Step S4987>
If the drive data 3 set flag is set to OFF (step S4980: No), as shown in FIG. 148, the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 4 unset flag is set to ON (step S4987). The drive data 4 unset flag is a flag that causes drive data 4 to be set.

If the drive data 4 unset flag is set to ON (step S4987: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4988, and if the drive data 4 unset flag is set to OFF (step S4987: No), the process moves to step S4993.

<Steps S4988 to S4992>
If the drive data 4 unset flag is set to ON (step S4987: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 4 unset flag to OFF (step S4988), and also sets the drive data 4 (accessory motion scenario data) to OFF. 4) (see FIG. 136) is set (step S4989). Drive data 4 includes common continuous movements (drive patterns A to C) in movable mode C (see FIG. 129(C)) of the movable rotating accessory member 37 that announces a 16R probability-variable jackpot (16R probability-variable promotion). ), this information is information for moving the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the drive pattern F (see FIG. 135) as an individual operation.

Then, the MPU 51 sets a drive data 4 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the drive pattern F according to the processing procedure specified in the drive data 4 (see FIG. 136) (step S4990), and A drive data 4 set flag indicating that drive data 4 has been set to control the operation of the rotating accessory member 37 is set on (step S4991). Furthermore, the MPU 51 processes the process No. 4 of the drive data 4. 1 (step S4992), and the movable rotating accessory control process ends.

<Step S4993>
If the drive data 4 unset flag is set to OFF (step S4987: No), the MPU 51 sets drive data indicating that drive data 4 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37. It is determined whether the 4-set flag is set on (step S4993).

If the drive data 4 set flag is set to ON (step S4993: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4994, and if the drive data 4 set flag is set to OFF (step S4993: No). , the process moves to step S5000 in FIG. 149.

<Steps S4994 to S4996>
If the drive data 4 set flag is set to on (step S4993: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 4 scenario timer (step S4994), and based on the updated value of the drive data 4 scenario timer, It is determined whether it is the timing to proceed to the next process defined in drive data 4 (step S4995).

If it is the timing to proceed to the next process specified in the drive data 4 (step S4995: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in the drive data 4 (step S4996), and Control processing ends. For example, as shown in FIG. 136, processing No. 4 in drive data 4. 2, that is, when the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotating in the forward direction, the process is executed as process No. 2. By shifting to step 3, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is brought to a rotation stop state.

In this way, by referring to the drive data 4 scenario timer updated in step S4994 and sequentially executing the next process in drive data 4, the process No. in drive data 4 is executed. 01~Processing No. All processes of 07 are executed. As a result, the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is performed in the drive pattern F (see FIG. 135) as an individual operation.

On the other hand, if it is not the timing to proceed to the next process defined in the drive data 4 (step S4995: No), the MPU 51 transfers the process to step S4997.

<Step S4997>
If it is not the timing to proceed to the next process defined in the drive data 4 (step S4995: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4997). That is, the MPU 51 determines the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 4 due to the satisfaction of the end determination condition based on the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 4. Make a termination judgment.

When the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4997: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the termination determination condition based on the fact that all processes defined by the drive data 4 (see FIG. 136) are terminated. When the determination is made that it is the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 4, the process moves to step S4998. On the other hand, if the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4997: No), in other words, the termination determination condition based on the fact that all the processes defined by the drive data 4 have not been completed, the MPU 51 determines that When it is determined that it is not the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 4, the movable rotary accessory control process is ended.

<Steps S4998 and S4999>
If the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4997: Yes), that is, if the termination determination condition is met and it is the timing to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 4, the process ends. If determined, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 4 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the drive pattern F according to the processing procedure defined in the drive data 4 (see FIG. 136) (step S4998). . Then, the MPU 51 sets off the drive data 4 set flag indicating that drive data 4 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 (step S4999), and controls the movable rotating accessory member 37. Finish the process. That is, when the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4997: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is ended.

<Step S5000>
If the drive data 4 set flag is set to OFF (step S4993: No), as shown in FIG. 149, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the drive data 5 unset flag is set to ON (step S5000). The drive data 5 unset flag is a flag that causes drive data 5 to be set.

If the drive data 5 unset flag is set to ON (step S5000: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5001, and if the drive data 5 unset flag is set to OFF (step S5000: No), the process moves to step S5006.

<Steps S5001 to S5005>
If the drive data 5 unset flag is set to ON (step S5000: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 unset flag to OFF (step S5001), and also sets the drive data 5 (accessory motion scenario data) to OFF. 5) (see FIG. 137(B)) is set (step S5002). The driving data 5 is a movable rotating accessory member 37 that announces that it will not develop into a super reach (SP non-development), that it will not develop into a special reach (SPSP non-development), or that it will not be a 16R probability variable jackpot (16R probability variation non-promotion). In movable mode D (see FIG. 129(D)), after the common continuous motion (drive patterns A to C), the movable rotating accessory member is moved in drive pattern G (see FIG. 137(A)) as an individual motion. This is the information that moves 37.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the drive pattern F according to the processing procedure prescribed in the drive data 5 (see FIG. 137(B)), and also sets the drive data 5 scenario timer (step S5003). ), a drive data 5 set flag indicating that drive data 5 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is set on (step S5004). Furthermore, the MPU 51 processes the process No. 5 of the drive data 5. 1 (step S5005), and the movable rotating accessory control process ends.

<Step S5006>
When the drive data 5 unset flag is set to OFF (step S5000: No), the MPU 51 sets drive data indicating that drive data 5 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37. It is determined whether the 5 set flag is set on (step S5006).

If the drive data 4 set flag is set to ON (step S5006: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5007, and if the drive data 5 set flag is set to OFF (step S5006: No). , the movable rotating accessory control process ends.

<Steps S5007 to S5009>
If the drive data 5 set flag is set to ON (step S5006: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 5 scenario timer (step S5007), and based on the updated value of the drive data 5 scenario timer, It is determined whether it is the timing to proceed to the next process defined in drive data 5 (step S5008).

If it is the timing to move to the next process specified in the drive data 5 (step S5008: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in the drive data 5 (step S5009), and Control processing ends. For example, as shown in FIG. 137(B), processing No. in drive data 5. 03, that is, when the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is in a stopped state, the process is executed as process No. 03. By shifting to 04, the stepping motor for raising and lowering is rotated 12 steps in the opposite direction.

In this way, by referring to the drive data 5 scenario timer updated in step S5007 and sequentially executing the next process in drive data 5, the process No. in drive data 5 is executed. 01~Processing No. All processes of 05 are executed. Thereby, the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is performed in the drive pattern G (see FIG. 137(B)) as an individual operation.

On the other hand, if it is not the timing to proceed to the next process defined in the drive data 5 (step S5008: No), the MPU 51 transfers the process to step S5010.

<Step S5010>
If it is not the timing to proceed to the next process defined in the drive data 5 (step S5008: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S5010). That is, the MPU 51 determines the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 5 due to the satisfaction of the end determination condition based on the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 5. Make a termination judgment.

When the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S5010: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the process based on the fact that all processes defined by the drive data 5 (see FIG. 137(B)) are terminated. When the determination condition is met and it is determined that it is the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 5, the process moves to step S5011. On the other hand, if the value of the driving data 5 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S5010: No), in other words, the termination determination condition based on the fact that all the processes defined by the driving data 5 have not been completed, the MPU 51 determines that When it is determined that it is not the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 5, the movable rotating accessory member 37 ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Steps S5011 and S5012>
If the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S5010: Yes), that is, if the end determination condition is met, the process ends when the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 5 is ended. If determined, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 5 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the drive pattern G according to the processing procedure specified in the drive data 5 (see FIG. 137(B)). Step S5011). Then, the MPU 51 turns off the drive data 5 set flag indicating that the drive data 5 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 (step S5012), and controls the movable rotating accessory member 37. Finish the process. That is, when the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S5010: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is ended.

[Button production control processing]
Next, button effect control processing FIGS. 150 and 151 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the button effect control process of this embodiment. The button effect control process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151.

<Step S5101>
As shown in FIG. 150, in the button effect control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the T1 button effect flag is set to on (step S5101). The T1 button performance flag is a flag that executes a button performance at the accessory activation timing A (see FIG. 128) when time T1 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game, and at the accessory activation timing A, the 16R variable promotion performance or the 16R When the variable probability non-promotion effect is executed, it is set to ON in step S4708 in the button effect setting process of FIG. 139.

If the T1 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5101: Yes), that is, if the button effect is to be executed at accessory activation timing A (see FIG. 128), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5102. On the other hand, if the T1 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5101: No), that is, if the button effect is not executed at accessory activation timing A (see FIG. 128), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5104. .

<Steps S5102 and S5103>
When the T1 button performance flag is set to ON (step S5101: Yes), that is, when the button performance is executed at the accessory activation timing A (see FIG. 128), the MPU 51 selects the role set at the final stage of the normal reach performance. It is determined whether the value of the T1 counter indicating the remaining time until object operation timing A starts is 0 (step S5102). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the button effect.

If the value of the T1 counter indicating the remaining time until the accessory activation timing A that is set at the final stage of the normal reach performance is started is 0 (step S5102: Yes), that is, at the timing to start the button performance, the MPU 51 If so, the T1 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5103), and the process moves to step S5110 in FIG. 151.

On the other hand, if the value of the T1 counter indicating the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing A that is set at the final stage of the normal reach performance is started is not 0 (step S5102: No), the MPU 51 determines the timing to start the button performance. If not, the button effect control process ends.

<Step S5104>
If the T1 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5101: No), that is, if the button effect is not executed at accessory actuation timing A (see FIG. 128), the MPU 51 sets the T2 button effect flag to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S5104). The T2 button performance flag is a flag that executes the button performance at the accessory activation timing B (see FIG. 128) when time T2 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game, and at the accessory activation timing B, the 16R probability-variable promotion performance or the 16R When the variable probability non-promotion effect is executed, it is set to ON in step S4706 in the button effect setting process of FIG. 139.

If the T2 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5104: Yes), that is, if the button effect is to be executed at accessory actuation timing B (see FIG. 128), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5105. On the other hand, if the T2 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5104: No), that is, if the button effect is not executed at accessory activation timing B (see FIG. 128), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5107. .

<Steps S5105 and S5106>
If the T2 button performance flag is set to ON (step S5104: Yes), that is, if the button performance is to be executed at accessory activation timing B (see FIG. 128), the MPU 51 is set to the final stage of the super reach performance. It is determined whether the value of the T2 counter indicating the remaining time until accessory activation timing B starts is 0 (step S5105). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the button effect.

If the value of the T2 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of accessory actuation timing B set at the final stage of the super reach performance is 0 (step S5105: Yes), the MPU 51 determines the timing to start the button performance. If so, the T2 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5106), and the process moves to step S5110 in FIG. 151.

On the other hand, if the value of the T2 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of accessory activation timing B set at the final stage of the super reach performance is not 0 (step S5105: No), the MPU 51 starts the button performance. If it is not the timing, the button effect control process is ended.

<Step S5107>
When the T2 button performance flag is set to OFF (step S5104: No), that is, when the button performance is not executed at accessory actuation timing B (see FIG. 128), the MPU 51 sets the T3 button performance flag to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S5107). The T3 button performance flag is a flag that executes a button performance at the accessory activation timing C (see FIG. 128) when time T3 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game, and at the accessory activation timing C, the 16R probability-variable promotion performance or the 16R When the variable probability non-promotion effect is executed, it is set to ON in step S4702 in the button effect setting process of FIG. 139.

When the T3 button performance flag is set to ON (step S5107: Yes), that is, when the MPU 51 executes the button performance at accessory activation timing C (see FIG. 128), the process proceeds to step S5108. On the other hand, if the T3 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5107: No), that is, if the button effect is not executed at the accessory actuation timing C (see FIG. 128), the MPU 51 returns the process to step S5114 in FIG. to move to.

<Steps S5108 and S5109>
When the T3 button performance flag is set to ON (step S5107: Yes), that is, when the button performance is executed at accessory activation timing C (see FIG. 128), the MPU 51 is set at the final stage of the special reach performance. It is determined whether the value of the T3 counter indicating the remaining time until accessory actuation timing C starts is 0 (step S5108). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the button effect.

If the value of the T3 counter indicating the remaining time until the accessory activation timing C which is set at the final stage of the special reach performance is started is 0 (step S5108: Yes), the MPU 51 determines the timing to start the button performance. If so, the T3 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5109), and the process moves to step S5110 in FIG. 151.

On the other hand, if the value of the T3 counter indicating the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing C set at the final stage of the special reach performance is started is not 0 (step S5108: No), the MPU 51 starts the button performance. If it is not the timing, the button effect control process is ended.

<Steps S5110 and S5111>
If it is the timing to start the button effect, as shown in FIG. 151, the MPU 51 sets a button effect start command to start the button effect (step S5110), and sends this button effect start command to the display control device 6. (Step S5111). Thereby, in the symbol display section 341, a button effect as a display effect is started under the control of the display control device 6.

<Steps S5112 and S5113>
In step S5112, the MPU 51 sets a button operation valid period timer corresponding to a period during which the player's operation on the operation button 20 is valid (button operation valid period). Then, the MPU 51 turns on the operation valid period timer flag indicating that the button operation valid period timer is set (step S5113), and ends the button effect control process.

<Step S5114>
In step S5114, the MPU 51 determines whether the operation valid period timer flag indicating that the button operation valid period timer is set is set to on. If the operation valid period timer flag is set to ON (step S5114: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5115. On the other hand, if the operation valid period timer flag is set to OFF (step S5114: No), the MPU 51 ends the button effect control process.

<Steps S5115 and S5116>
If the operation valid period timer flag is set to on (step S5114: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the button operation valid period timer (step S5115), and determines that the value of the button operation valid period timer after the subtraction is 0. It is determined whether there is one (step S5116). That is, it is determined whether or not to end the button effect based on the elapse of the button operation valid period.

If the value of the button operation valid period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step S5116: Yes), that is, if the button operation valid period has elapsed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5119. On the other hand, if the value of the button operation valid period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (step S5116: No), that is, if the button operation valid period has not elapsed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5117.

<Steps S5117 and S5118>
If the value of the button operation valid period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (step S5116: No), that is, if the button operation valid period has not elapsed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player. (Step S5117). Whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player is determined in the operation detection pattern determination process shown in FIG. Judge based on whether or not.

If the player operates the operation button 20 before the button operation valid period has elapsed (step S5117: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the button operation valid period timer (step S5118), and moves the process to step S5119. On the other hand, if the operation button 20 has not been operated by the player before the button operation valid period has elapsed (step S5117: No), the MPU 51 ends the button performance control process.

<Steps S5119 to S5121>
If the value of the button operation valid period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step S5116: Yes), that is, if the button performance ends because the button operation valid period has elapsed, or if the button operation is performed by the player before the button operation valid period has elapsed. When the button 20 is operated (step S5117: Yes), the MPU 51 sets off the operation valid period timer flag indicating that the button operation valid period timer is set (step S5119).

Then, the MPU 51 sets a button effect end command to end the button effect (step S5120), transmits this button effect end command to the display control device 6 (step S5121), and ends the button effect control process. . Thereby, in the symbol display section 341, the button presentation as a display presentation is ended under the control of the display control device 6.

[Jackpot game production control processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect control process executed in step S2705 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 116 will be explained. In the jackpot game performance control process, a process for controlling the jackpot game performance according to the progress of the jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot game performance set in the jackpot game performance setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. 121. be done. Here, FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game performance control process. Hereinafter, the jackpot game effect control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 152.

<Step S5201>
As shown in FIG. 152, in the jackpot game performance control process, the MPU 51 first determines whether the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on (step S5201). The jackpot game in progress flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed, and is set to ON when a jackpot game start command is received in step S4318 in the command determination process of FIG. 121. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being executed.

When the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5202. On the other hand, when the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S5201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 51 ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S5202>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5201: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening performance start flag is set to ON (step S5201: Yes). The opening effect start flag (S5202) is a flag for starting the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the opening start command is received in step S4320 of the command determination process in FIG. 121. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the opening performance.

When the opening performance start flag is set to ON (step S5202: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5203. On the other hand, if the opening performance start flag is set to OFF (step S5202: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5205.

<Steps S5203 and S5204>
When the opening performance start flag is set to ON (step S5202: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 executes processing to start the opening performance (step S5203). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to start a display effect on the symbol display section 341 of the opening effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, an audio control process is executed to start the audio effect on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process is executed to start the lamp effect on the decoration part 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening performance start flag to OFF (step S5204), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S5205>
If the opening performance start flag is set to OFF (step S5202: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening performance end flag is set to ON (step S5202: No). The punning performance end flag (S5205) is a flag for ending the opening performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the opening end command is received in step S4322 of the command determination process in FIG. 121. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the opening performance.

If the opening performance end flag is set to ON (step S5205: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5206. On the other hand, if the opening performance end flag is set to OFF (step S5205: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5208.

<Steps S5206 and S5207>
If the opening performance end flag is set to ON (step S5205: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 executes processing to end the opening performance (step S5206). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to end the display effect on the symbol display section 341 of the opening effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. 121. Then, an audio control process is executed to end the audio effect on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process is executed to end the lamp effect on the decoration section 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening performance end flag to OFF (step S5207), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S5208>
If the opening performance end flag is set to OFF (step S5205: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 determines whether the round game performance start flag is set to ON ( Step S5208). The round game performance start flag is a flag for starting the round game performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when a round game start command is received in step S4324 in the command determination process of FIG. 122. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the round game performance.

If the round game production start flag is set to ON (step S5208: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the round game production, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5209. On the other hand, when the round game performance start flag is set to OFF (step S5208: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5211.

<Steps S5209 and S5210>
When the round game performance start flag is set to ON (step S5208: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 executes processing to start the round game performance of the jackpot game performance ( Step S5209). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to start a display effect on the symbol display section 341 of the round game effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, a sound control process is executed to start a sound effect on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process is executed to start a lamp effect on the decoration part 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game performance start flag to OFF (step S5210), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S5211>
If the round game performance start flag is set to OFF (step S5208: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the round game performance, the MPU 51 determines whether the round game performance end flag is set to ON. (Step S5211). The round game performance end flag is a flag that ends the round game performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when a round game end command is received in step S4327 in the command determination process of FIG. 122. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the round game production.

When the round game performance end flag is set to ON (step S5211: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5212. On the other hand, when the round game performance end flag is set to OFF (step S5211: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5214.

<Steps S5212 and S5213>
When the round game performance end flag is set to ON (step S5211: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 executes processing to end the round game performance (step S5212). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to end the display effect on the symbol display section 341 of the round game effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, a sound control process is executed to end the sound effect on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process is executed to end the lamp effect on the decoration part 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game performance end flag to OFF (step S5213), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S5214>
If the round game performance end flag is set to OFF (step S5211: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the round game performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval performance start flag is set to ON. (Step S5214). The interval performance start flag is a flag for starting the interval performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the interval start command is received in step S4329 in the command determination process of FIG. 122. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the round game performance.

If the interval effect start flag is set to ON (step S5214: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the interval effect, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5215. On the other hand, if the interval effect start flag is set to OFF (step S5214: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the interval effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5217.

<Steps S5215 and S5216>
If the interval performance start flag is set to ON (step S5214: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 executes processing to start the interval performance of the jackpot game performance (step S5215). . Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to start a display effect on the symbol display section 341 of the interval effects set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, an audio control process is executed to start the audio effect on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process is executed to start the lamp effect on the decoration part 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval performance start flag to OFF (step S5216), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S5217>
If the interval performance start flag is set to OFF (step S5214: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval performance end flag is set to ON (step S5214: No). S5217). The interval performance end flag is a flag for ending the interval performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when an interval end command is received in step S4331 in the command determination process of FIG. 122. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the interval presentation.

If the interval performance end flag is set to ON (step S5217: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5218. On the other hand, if the interval performance end flag is set to OFF (step S5217: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5220.

<Steps S5218 and S5219>
When the interval performance end flag is set to ON (step S5217: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 executes processing to end the interval performance (step S5218). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to end the display effect on the symbol display section 341 of the interval effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, an audio control process is executed to end the audio effect on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process is executed to end the lamp effect on the decoration section 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval performance end flag to OFF (step S5219), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S5220>
If the interval performance end flag is set to OFF (step S5217: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending performance start flag is set to ON (step S5217: No). S5220). The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting an ending effect, and is set to ON when an ending start command is received in step S4333 in the command determination process of FIG. 122. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the ending effect.

If the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S5220: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5221. On the other hand, if the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S5220: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5223.

<Steps S5221 and S5222>
If the ending performance start flag is set to ON (step S5220: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the ending performance, the MPU 51 executes processing to start the ending performance of the jackpot game performance (step S5221). . Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to start a display effect on the symbol display section 341 of the ending effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, an audio control process is executed to start the audio effect on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process is executed to start the lamp effect on the decoration part 27.

Here, in the jackpot game, the ending effect is such that the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, moves between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the operating position, which is the drive side position, depending on the number of round games corresponding to the jackpot type. This is a display performance that is executed on the symbol display section 341, which is a controlled object different from the opening/closing door 319, after the opening/closing execution mode in which a series of specific operations that reciprocate are executed. In this ending performance, for example, information that can identify the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game, the number of balls played in the jackpot game, the number of consecutive jackpots, and the total number of balls played during the jackpot series are displayed. can do. Furthermore, in the ending performance, information that allows identification of the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game may be displayed. For example, the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is a guaranteed variable jackpot (transition to the variable probability gaming state after the jackpot game ends) or a normal jackpot (the jackpot type is It is also possible to display information that can specify that the game will be shifted to a time-saving gaming state after the game ends. The former information is, for example, when the first control is performed after the opening/closing execution mode is ended by stopping the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, in the standby position which is the return side position. By doing so, a character image such as "○○ RUSH enters" will be displayed. On the other hand, the latter information is obtained from the second information after the opening/closing execution mode is ended by stopping the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, at the standby position which is the return side position. When controlled, text images such as ``Entering XXX chance mode'' are displayed. In this way, by displaying information that can identify the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game in the ending performance, even if the player has forgotten the jackpot type, the jackpot type can be identified. can be re-recognized by the ending performance.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending performance start flag to OFF (step S5222), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Step S5223>
If the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S5220: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S5220: No). S5223). The ending performance end flag is a flag that ends the ending performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ending end command is received in step S4335 in the command determination process of FIG. 122. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the ending effect.

If the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S5223: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5224. On the other hand, when the ending performance end flag is set to OFF (step S5223: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the ending performance, the MPU 51 ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Steps S5224 and S5225>
If the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S5223: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 executes processing to end the ending effect (step S5224). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to end the display effect on the symbol display section 341 of the ending effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. 121. Then, an audio control process is executed to end the audio effect on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process is executed to end the lamp effect on the decoration section 27.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending performance end flag to OFF (step S5225), and ends the jackpot game performance control process.

As described above, in the present invention, when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the movable control means moves the ball while one specific effect is displayed on the display means, depending on the lottery result of the winning/failure lottery means. One movement aspect for the means is determined. Further, in the present invention, while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the movable control means executes a series of specific operations for the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movable mode. .

Furthermore, in the present invention, while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the movable control means executes a series of specific operations for the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movable mode. In this case, when the movable means is located at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, the determining means determines whether or not a condition for ending the series of specific operations is satisfied. In this way, when the movable control means executes a series of specific operations for the movable means based on the specific information set corresponding to the one movable mode while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, When the movable means is located at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, the determination means determines whether or not the termination condition for a series of specific operations is satisfied, thereby performing movable control based on specific information. In a series of specific operations of the movable means by the means, each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, by the movable control means, the determination means determines whether the termination condition is satisfied. be done. Further, in the present invention, when the determining means determines that the termination condition is satisfied in the series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on the specific information, the termination means causes the position to be moved to the first position or its vicinity. The movement of the movable means is stopped, and the series of specific operations is completed. That is, in the present invention, in a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on the specific information, even before all movable control of the movable means based on the specific information is completed, the movable means may be moved at or near the first position. Each time the movable means is positioned, the termination means can stop the movement of the movable means and terminate the series of specific operations, provided that the termination condition is met. As a result, when the termination condition is satisfied during execution of a series of specific operations of the movable means, the movement of the movable means based on the specific information is performed at the stage where the movable means is located at or near the first position after the termination condition is satisfied. It is possible to stop and complete a series of specific operations. As a result, when it is determined that the conditions for ending the series of specific operations are satisfied, the series of specific operations of the movable means can be immediately terminated, so that the termination control of the movable means can be performed smoothly. can. Therefore, in the present invention, since it is possible to smoothly transition from a series of specific operations of the movable means to the next operation, the player is not made to feel uncomfortable after it is determined that the termination condition for the series of specific operations is met. , the series of specific operations of the movable means can be completed. Therefore, when another individual operation is subsequently performed after a series of specific operations of the movable means is completed, it is possible to smoothly transition from the series of specific operations to the other individual operations. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning to the action. Thereby, even if the movable means is operated for the purpose of displaying one specific performance by the display control means, it becomes possible to operate the movable means without impairing the performance effect.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the result of the jackpot lottery executed by lottery processing triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 as a ball entry starting part is announced. In the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a display effect is set by a special figure game effect setting process as a display control process, and a display variation pattern command is received by the display control device 6 as a display control process. A display effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 according to the processing of the case. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 as a movable body during execution of display performance is determined from a plurality of movable modes A to D by the accessory motion effect setting process as the movable body control process. , the movable rotary accessory member 37 as a movable body is movable based on one movable mode determined from a plurality of movable modes A to D during execution of the display effect by the movable rotating accessory control process as the movable body control process. be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, one drive data is used for operations in drive patterns A to C, which are common continuous operations in a plurality of movable modes A to D, and in which the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be indefinite. The movable rotary accessory member 37 as a movable body is moved based on the information of 1 (accessory object movement scenario data), and after the operation in drive patterns A to C is completed, individual movement according to each movement mode A to D is performed. The movable rotary accessory member 37 as a movable body is moved in one of the drive patterns D to G as a continuous operation based on the information of the drive data 2 to 5. In this way, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved based on the information of one drive data 1 for the operations in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations in the plurality of movable modes A to D. Not only can the memory load be reduced because the amount of drive data used for each of the movable modes A to D of 1 can be reduced, but it is also possible to control readout and temporary storage of drive data when operating the movable rotating accessory member 37. The burden is reduced.

In the present embodiment, the operations in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the plurality of movable modes A to D, and in which the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be undefined, constitute one drive. When executed based on the information of data 1 (accessory motion scenario data), the movable rotation is moved from the drive side position, intermediate operation position 1 or intermediate operation position 2, to the return side position, the standby position or intermediate operation position 1. At the timing when the accessory member 37 is returned, it is determined whether the end determination condition for the operation in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, is satisfied, that is, whether the operation button 20 has been operated by the player. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the conditions for determining the end of the operation in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the plurality of movable modes A to D, are not satisfied, the operation in the plurality of movable modes A to D is continued. The operations in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in to D, are continued. On the other hand, if the conditions for determining the end of the operation in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the plurality of movable modes A to D, are satisfied (the operation on the operation button 20 by the player is In some cases), even if the movable rotating accessory member 37 is in the middle of the operation in drive patterns A to C, which are common movements of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the information of the drive data 1 (accessory object operation scenario data), the movable rotating accessory member 37 The operations in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the object member 37, are completed. Then, based on the information of individual drive data 2 to 5 corresponding to each movable mode A to D determined according to the notification content, it is movable by movement in drive patterns D to G, which are individual movements as continuous movements. The movable rotary accessory member 37 as a body is moved.

As described above, in this embodiment, based on the information of drive data 1 (accessory object movement scenario data), drive patterns A to C, which are common movements of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in a plurality of movable modes A to D, are created. When the operation is executed based on the information of one drive data 1 (accessory object operation scenario data), the common rotation accessory member 37 is returned from the drive side position to the return side position at the timing It is determined whether the conditions for determining the end of the motions in drive patterns A to C, which are motions, are satisfied (whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player). In other words, in the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, each time the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the return side position, it is determined whether or not the end determination condition is met. It is determined whether the player operates the operation button 20 or not. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied in the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations (when the player presses the operation button 20 If it is determined that there has been an operation), the movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 located at the return side position is stopped, and the operations in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, are completed. As a result, if the end determination condition for the operation in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, is satisfied during the execution of the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive patterns A to C, which are the common operations, the end is completed. At the stage when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is located at the return side position after the determination condition is satisfied, the movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped and the operations in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, are completed. Can be done. As a result, if it is determined that the conditions for determining the end of the common motion in the drive patterns A to C are satisfied, the common motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the drive patterns A to C is immediately terminated. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to immediately shift to the next operation from the satisfaction of the termination determination condition of a continuous operation, which is common to the plurality of movable modes A to D, and the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be indefinite. As a result, after it is determined that the termination determination conditions of the plurality of movable modes A to D are satisfied, the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is terminated without causing any discomfort to the player, and the movable body is moved to the next operation. The transition can be made smoothly. Therefore, when another individual action is subsequently performed after the common action of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is completed, the common action can smoothly transition to the other individual action. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning to the action. As a result, even if the movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated for the purpose of display during execution of the display performance in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the movable rotation can be performed without impairing the production effect. It becomes possible to operate the accessory member 37.

Further, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first and second embodiments described above can be made within an applicable range.

Further, in each embodiment, matters described in other embodiments can be applied within the applicable range.

[Fourth embodiment]
In gaming machines, various gaming states with different profit states are set to increase interest in gaming. In a gaming machine, it is desired that the transition between each gaming state be appropriately controlled and that the control be performed so as not to cause unnecessary disadvantage to the player.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention has the following features:
Equipped with a firing means that can fire a game ball into a game area by adjusting the firing force by the player,
A first game performed by firing a game ball in a first direction, and a second game performed by firing a game ball in a second direction different from the first direction,
a display means capable of executing a game with variable symbols;
a plurality of starting means capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
auxiliary means for assisting in establishing the starting condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine capable of generating a specific gaming state by switching the control state for the auxiliary means when the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing the special game,
a first ball entering means provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball fired in the second direction with a predetermined firing force flows down a specific flow path;
a second ball entrance means including an opening/closing means capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area;
opening execution means for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means;
Execution of a specific period game in which a specific period game is executed as the profit game in a specific period different from the special game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. means and
Equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, when the game for the predetermined specific period ends, the control state changes from the first control state to the specific gaming state. The control state is changed to a second control state corresponding to the second control state.

The profit game may be any game that can provide some kind of profit to the player. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized as a profit game, for example, a game in which a big winning hole (variable winning hole) is opened, a game in which a V winning hole provided in the big winning hole can be opened, a jackpot game, a variable winning hole, etc. Probability variable jackpot game that generates a gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), time saving jackpot game that generates a time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) A normal jackpot game that generates a latent probability variable game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode), a variable probability game that generates a latent probability variable game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode), a variable probability game by entering the game ball into the V prize opening provided in the big prize opening A jackpot game that generates a state, a jackpot game that generates a time-saving gaming state by entering a game ball into a V-win slot provided in a jackpot game, a round game that opens a jackpot slot in a jackpot game, and a jackpot game that opens a jackpot slot. A round game in which a V winning hole provided is opened, a small winning game in which a large winning hole is opened for a short time, a small winning game in which a jackpot is generated by a game ball entering a V winning hole provided in the large winning hole, A game that is executed based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry area provided outside the big winning opening (variable winning opening), and a special call that is executed based on a gaming ball entering a special electric starting opening. A special electric starting game in which a prize opening is opened, a game that is executed based on a game ball entering a prize opening that is opened by the operation of an electric accessory, a game that is executed based on a game ball entering a prize opening that is opened by the operation of an electric accessory. A variable game with a special symbol that is executed based on the ball entering the ball, a variable game with a decorative symbol that is executed based on the game ball entering the winning hole opened by the operation of an electric accessory, and a through game. Examples include variable games with normal symbols that are executed based on a game ball entering the gate, and arbitrary combinations thereof.

The special game may be any game that can be awarded when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized as a special game, for example, a game in which a big winning hole (variable winning hole) is opened, a game in which a V winning hole provided in the big winning hole can be opened, a jackpot game, a variable winning hole, etc. Probability variable jackpot game that generates a gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), time saving jackpot game that generates a time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) A normal jackpot game that generates a latent probability variable game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode), a variable probability game that generates a latent probability variable game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode), a variable probability game by entering the game ball into the V prize opening provided in the big prize opening A jackpot game that generates a state, a jackpot game that generates a time-saving gaming state by entering a game ball into a V-win slot provided in a jackpot game, a round game that opens a jackpot slot in a jackpot game, and a jackpot game that opens a jackpot slot. A round game in which a V winning hole provided is opened, a small winning game in which a large winning hole is opened for a short time, a small winning game in which a jackpot is generated by a game ball entering a V winning hole provided in the large winning hole, Examples include any combination thereof.

A specific period game is a game that is different from a special game, and is a game that is executed based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry area while an opening/closing means that can switch between an open state and a closed state is open. That's fine. As a specific period game, if it is possible to realize the purpose of the present invention, for example, a game that is executed based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry area provided outside the big winning hole (variable winning hole), A special electric start game in which a special electric prize winning hole is opened based on a game ball entering a special electric starting hole, and a game ball entering a winning hole opened by the operation of an electric accessory. A game that is executed based on a game ball entering a winning hole opened by the operation of an electric accessory, a variable game with a special symbol that is executed based on a game ball entering a winning hole that is opened by the operation of an electric accessory Examples include a variable game with decorative symbols that is executed based on the ball entering the ball, a variable game with normal symbols that is executed based on the game ball entering the through gate, and any combination thereof.

The specific gaming state may be a gaming state that is generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a special game. The specific gaming state may be a time-saving gaming state (low probability mode) that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a special game, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized. and high-frequency support mode), a time-saving gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a jackpot game, and a normal gaming state (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode). A time-saving gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a special game, and a time-saving gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a jackpot game in the normal gaming state. In the time-saving gaming state (b-time-saving gaming state) that occurs when Occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a normal gaming state that occurs when the number of executions reaches the upper limit, or in a fixed variable gaming state where the upper limit is specified. A normal gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit number without executing a special game in a time-saving gaming state where the upper limit number of times is specified. Examples include a normal gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit number without executing a jackpot game in a time-saving gaming state, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined gaming state may be a gaming state different from the specific gaming state. As the predetermined gaming state, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a variable probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), a time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), a latent probability variable gaming state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode), normal gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), variable probability gaming state that is transferred after the jackpot game ends, variable gaming state with an upper limit on the number of variable games, fluctuation Fixed variable game state with no upper limit on the number of games, time-saving game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games, time-saving game state with no upper limit on the number of variable games, time-saving game state that is transferred after the end of the jackpot game (a time-saving game state), a time-saving gaming state that is transferred from the normal gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state (b. state), a time-saving game state (c time-saving game state) that is transitioned to when a specific symbol stops in a special symbol or decorative symbol variation game, a normal game state that is transitioned to after the end of a jackpot game, and a transition from the time-saving game state. A normal gaming state that is transferred from the time-saving gaming state, b a normal gaming state that is transferred from the time-saving gaming state, c a normal gaming state that is transferred from the time-saving gaming state, and a jackpot that is transferred from the variable probability gaming state. Gaming state, jackpot gaming state transferred from time saving gaming state, jackpot gaming state transferred from latent probability variable gaming state, jackpot gaming state transferred from time saving gaming state, small winning gaming state transferred from probability variable gaming state, time saving Examples include a small winning gaming state that is transferred from a gaming state, a small winning gaming state that is transferring from a potential variable gaming state, a small winning gaming state that is transferring from a time saving gaming state, and any combination thereof.

The first control state may be any control state in which the control state for the auxiliary means that assists in establishing the starting condition does not correspond to the specific gaming state. As the first control state, if it is possible to realize the purpose of the present invention, for example, the control for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting conditions in the starting means corresponding to the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) state, a control state corresponding to a variable game state and a control state for an electric accessory that assists the establishment of starting conditions at the ball entrance, a control state corresponding to a variable game state and a variable game at the ball entrance. A control state for an electric accessory that supports the establishment of the starting conditions for the game, a control state for the electric accessory that supports the establishment of the starting condition for the special figure game at the entrance to the ball, and a time saving control state for the electric accessory that supports the establishment of the starting condition for the special figure game at the entrance A control state corresponding to the gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), which is a control state for the auxiliary means that assists the starting condition for the starting means to be established, and a control state corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, which is the control state for the auxiliary means that assists the starting condition for the starting means to be established. A control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting condition at the opening; a control state for the electric accessory that supports the time-saving gaming state and assists in establishing the starting condition for the variable game at the ball entrance; This is a control state that corresponds to the time-saving game state, and is a control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions for the special figure game at the ball entrance, and corresponds to the latent probability variable game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode). A control state for the auxiliary means that is in a control state that supports the establishment of the starting condition at the starting means, and an electric accessory that is in a control state corresponding to the latent probability variable game state that assists the establishment of the starting condition at the entrance of the ball. A control state corresponding to a game state with a variable latency, a control state corresponding to a game state with a variable latency, a control state with respect to an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entrance, a control state corresponding to a game state with a variable latency, A control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting conditions for a special figure game at the ball entrance, a control state that corresponds to the normal game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a starting condition for the starting means. A control state for the auxiliary means that assists in establishing the time-saving gaming state, a control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition at the ball entrance, which is a control state corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, and a control state corresponding to the time-saving gaming state. A control state for electric accessories that supports the establishment of the starting conditions for variable games at the ball entrance, and a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state that assists the establishment of the starting conditions for the special figure game at the ball entrance. A control state for an electric accessory that is a control state that corresponds to a variable probability game state that is transferred to after the end of a jackpot game, and a control state for an auxiliary means that assists the starting condition for the starting means to be established, and a control state that is shifted to after the end of a jackpot game. It is a control state corresponding to a variable probability gaming state that is played, and is a control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting condition at the entrance of the ball, and a control state corresponding to a variable probability gaming state that is transferred to after the end of a jackpot game. A control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entrance, and a control state corresponding to the variable probability game state that is transferred after the end of the jackpot game, and is a special figure game at the ball entrance. A control state for an electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition, and a control state for the auxiliary means that supports the establishment of the starting condition in the starting means, which corresponds to a variable game state where the number of variable games is limited. , a control state corresponding to a variable game state where the number of variable games can be played is an upper limit, and a control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting condition at the ball entrance, and a variable game state where there is an upper limit to the number of variable games. It is a control state corresponding to the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting conditions for the variable game at the entrance, and a control state corresponding to the variable game state where there is an upper limit on the number of variable games. A control state for an electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting conditions for a special figure game with a ball mouth, a control state corresponding to a fixed variable game state where there is no upper limit on the number of variable games, and that supports the establishment of the starting conditions in the starting means. A control state for an auxiliary means to assist, a control state corresponding to a variable game state where there is no upper limit to the number of variable games, and a control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting condition at the ball entrance, and a control state for the number of variable games. This is a control state corresponding to a variable game state where there is no upper limit on the number of variable games, and a control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions for variable games at the ball entrance, and corresponds to a variable game state where there is no upper limit on the number of variable games. A control state corresponding to a time-saving game state in which there is an upper limit to the number of fluctuating games, and a control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting conditions for a special figure game at the ball entrance, and a starting means. A control state for an auxiliary means that assists in establishing the starting condition at the entrance, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state where there is an upper limit on the number of fluctuating games, and a control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting condition at the ball entrance. Control state, a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state where there is an upper limit on the number of fluctuating games, and a control state for electric accessories that assist in establishing the starting conditions for the fluctuating game at the ball entrance, and an upper limit on the number of fluctuating games. This is a control state corresponding to a certain time-saving game state, which is a control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions for the special figure game at the entrance, and corresponds to a time-saving game state where there is no upper limit to the number of fluctuating games. A control state for an auxiliary means that assists the starting condition for the starting means to be met; a control state that corresponds to a time-saving game state where there is no upper limit to the number of fluctuating games, and the starting condition is met at the ball entrance; A control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entrance, which is a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state where there is no upper limit to the number of variable games. , a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state where there is no upper limit to the number of fluctuating games, a control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting conditions for a special figure game at the entrance, and a control state that is transferred after the end of a jackpot game. A control state corresponding to the time-saving gaming state (a-time-saving gaming state), which is a control state for the auxiliary means that assists the starting condition for the starting means to be established; A control state for the electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting condition at the entrance; a control state for the electric accessory that supports the time-saving game state and assists in establishing the starting condition for the variable game at the ball entrance; a A control state corresponding to the time-saving game state, which is a control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions for the special figure game at the entrance, and a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state that is transferred from the normal game state. A control state for the auxiliary means that assists the starting condition in the starting means, and a control state corresponding to the time-saving gaming state transitioned from the normal gaming state, which assists in establishing the starting condition at the ball entrance. A control state for the electric accessories, a control state for the electric accessories that corresponds to the time-saving gaming state that is transferred from the normal gaming state, and that assists in establishing the starting conditions for the variable game at the ball entrance, and a normal gaming state. This is a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state that is transferred from the start, and is a control state for electric accessories that assists the establishment of the starting conditions for the special figure game at the entrance, and is a control state for electric accessories that is set without executing a jackpot game in the normal game state. A control state corresponding to a time-saving gaming state (b-time-saving gaming state) that is generated when the number of executions of the variable game reaches a predetermined number of times, and is a control state for the auxiliary means that assists the starting condition for the starting means to be satisfied. ,b A control state corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, which is a control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting conditions at the entrance to the ball, and b, a control state corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, which changes at the entrance to the ball. A control state for the electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting conditions for the game, and b a control state for the electric accessory that supports the time-saving game state and assists in establishing the starting condition for the special figure game at the ball entrance. , A control state corresponding to the time-saving game state (c-time-saving game state) that is transitioned to when a specific symbol stops in a special symbol or decorative symbol variable game, and is an auxiliary that assists the starting condition for the starting means to be established. A control state for the means, c a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state and a control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting conditions at the ball entrance, and c a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state and entering the ball. A control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting conditions for a fluctuating game at the mouth; c. A control state for an object, a control state for an auxiliary means that corresponds to the normal gaming state that is transferred to after the end of a jackpot game, and that assists the establishment of the starting conditions in the starting means, and a normal control state that is transferred to after the end of the jackpot game. A control state corresponding to the game state, which is a control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions at the entrance of the ball, and a control state corresponding to the normal game state, which is transferred to after the end of the jackpot game, when the ball enters. A control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions for fluctuating games at the mouth, and a control state corresponding to the normal gaming state that is transferred to after the end of the jackpot game, and the starting conditions for the special figure game at the ball entrance. A control state for the electric accessory that assists in establishing the start condition, a control state for the auxiliary means that supports the establishment of the starting condition in the starting means, which is a control state corresponding to the normal gaming state transferred from the time-saving gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state. This is a control state corresponding to the normal gaming state that is transitioned from , and is a control state for the electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting conditions at the entrance of the ball, and is a control state that corresponds to the normal gaming state that is transitioning from the time-saving gaming state. A control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entrance, and a control state corresponding to the normal game state that is transferred from the time-saving game state and a special game at the ball entrance. A control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition for the starting means, a control state for the auxiliary means that supports the establishment of the starting condition for the starting means, which is a control state corresponding to the normal gaming state transferred from the time-saving gaming state. , A is a control state corresponding to the normal gaming state that is transferred from the time-saving gaming state, and is a control state for electric accessories that assists the establishment of the starting conditions for the variable game at the ball entrance, a is a control state that is transferred from the time-saving gaming state. A control state corresponding to the normal gaming state, which is a control state for electric accessories that assists the establishment of the starting conditions at the entrance of the ball; A control state for an electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting conditions for the special figure game at the ball mouth, b. A control state corresponding to the normal game state that is transferred from the time-saving game state, and that supports the establishment of the starting conditions at the starting means. A control state for an auxiliary means to assist, b a control state corresponding to the normal gaming state transferred from the time-saving gaming state, and a control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting condition at the ball entrance, b a time-saving gaming state This is a control state corresponding to the normal gaming state that is transferred from , and is a control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions for the variable game at the ball entrance, and corresponds to the normal gaming state that is transferred from the time-saving gaming state. a control state for the electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions for the special figure game at the ball entrance; A control state for the auxiliary means that assists in establishing the starting condition at c, a control state corresponding to the normal gaming state that is transferred from the time-saving gaming state, and for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting condition at the ball entrance. Control state, c A control state corresponding to the normal gaming state that is transferred from the time-saving gaming state, and a control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions for the variable game at the ball entrance, c. Transitioning from the time-saving gaming state A control state corresponding to the normal game state in which the electric accessory is set to assist in establishing the starting conditions for the special figure game at the ball entrance, and a control state corresponding to the jackpot game state that is transferred from the variable probability game state. A control state for the auxiliary means that assists in establishing the starting condition at the starting means, and a control state corresponding to the jackpot gaming state that is transferred from the variable probability gaming state and assists in establishing the starting condition at the ball entrance. A control state for the electric accessory that supports the jackpot game state that is transferred from the variable probability game state, and that assists the establishment of the starting conditions for the variable game at the ball entrance, a control state for the electric accessory that supports the variable game state, A control state corresponding to a jackpot game state that is transferred from the state and a control state for an electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition of the special figure game at the ball entrance, an arbitrary combination thereof, and the like.

The second control state may be a control state as long as the control state for the auxiliary means for assisting the establishment of the starting condition corresponds to the specific gaming state. As the second control state, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode), which is a control state for an auxiliary means that assists the starting condition for the starting means to be established, and the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a special game. This is a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state that occurs when the ball enters the entrance, and is a control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions at the ball entrance, and execution of a predetermined variable game without executing a special game. This is a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state that occurs when the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times, and is a control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions for the variable game at the ball entrance, and executes a special game. An electric accessory that is in a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that is generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times without any interruption, and that assists in establishing the starting conditions for a special figure game at the ball entrance. A control state corresponding to a time-saving gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a jackpot game, and assists the establishment of the starting condition by the starting means. A control state for the auxiliary means to perform a jackpot game, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a jackpot game, and a starting condition at the ball entrance. A control state for electric accessories that assists in the establishment of a game, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a jackpot game. A control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions for variable games with the mouth, and a time-saving game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a jackpot game. This is a control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting conditions for the special figure game at the entrance, without executing the special game in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). A control state corresponding to a time-saving gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times, a control state for an auxiliary means that assists the starting condition for the starting means to be established, and a normal gaming state. A control state that corresponds to a time-saving game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a special game, and is an electric function that assists the establishment of starting conditions at the ball entrance. A control state for objects, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a special game in a normal game state, A control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions for variable games, and a time-saving game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a special game in the normal game state. A corresponding control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting conditions for a special figure game at the ball entrance, and a predetermined number of executions of a predetermined variable game without executing a jackpot game in a normal game state. A control state corresponding to the time-saving gaming state (b-time-saving gaming state) that occurs when the number of times reaches A control state for electric accessories that is a control state that assists in establishing the starting conditions at the ball entrance, and b a control state that corresponds to the time-saving game state that assists in establishing the starting conditions for the variable game at the ball entrance. b) A control state for an electric accessory that corresponds to the time-saving game state and that assists in establishing the starting conditions for the special figure game at the entrance, and a fixed variation in which an upper limit number of times is specified. A control state corresponding to the normal gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a special game in the gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). This occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a special game in a variable game state where the upper limit is specified, and the control state for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting conditions in the means. It is a control state corresponding to the normal game state, which is a control state for electric accessories that assist the establishment of the starting conditions at the ball entrance, and a control state for the electric accessory that supports the establishment of the starting condition at the ball entrance. A control state corresponding to the normal gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of the variable game reaches the upper limit, and a control state and upper limit for the electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting conditions for the variable game at the ball entrance. A control state corresponding to the normal gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit number of times without executing a special game in a fixed variable gaming state with a specified number of times. Control state for electric accessories that assist in establishing the starting conditions for special figure games, when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a fixed variable game state where the upper limit is specified. A control state corresponding to the normal gaming state that is generated, which is a control state for the auxiliary means that assists the starting conditions for the starting means to be established, and a predetermined control state for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting condition with the starting means, in a variable probability gaming state where the upper limit number of times is specified, without executing a jackpot game. This is a control state corresponding to the normal gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a variable game reaches the upper limit number of times, and the upper limit number of times is specified as a control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting condition at the ball entrance. A control state corresponding to a normal gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a fixed variable gaming state, and a variable game at the entrance of the ball. A control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting condition, and a normal condition that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a fixed variable game state where the upper limit is specified. A control state corresponding to the game state, which is a control state for electric accessories that assists in establishing the starting conditions for the special figure game at the ball entrance, and a time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is specified, without executing the special game. A control state corresponding to a normal gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches an upper limit number of times, and a control state for an auxiliary means that assists the establishment of a starting condition in the starting means, and an upper limit number of times is specified. A control state corresponding to the normal gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a special game in the time-saving gaming state, and is a control state that corresponds to the starting condition at the ball entrance. A control state for electric accessories that assist the establishment of a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a special game in a time-saving game state with a specified upper limit number of times. A control state for an electric accessory that is in a corresponding control state and assists in establishing the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entrance, and a predetermined variable game without executing a special game in a time-saving game state with a specified upper limit number of times. A control state corresponding to the normal game state that occurs when the number of executions reaches the upper limit number of times, and a control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting conditions for the special figure game at the entrance, and the upper limit number of times. A control state corresponding to a normal gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a time-saving gaming state where control state for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the above, and a normal gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a time-saving gaming state where the upper limit is specified. The corresponding control state is a control state for an electric accessory that assists in establishing the starting conditions at the ball entrance, and the number of times a predetermined variable game is executed without executing a jackpot game in a time-saving game state where an upper limit number of times is specified. This is a control state corresponding to the normal gaming state that occurs when the number of times reaches the upper limit, and the control state and upper limit number of times are specified for the electric accessories that assist the establishment of the starting conditions for the variable game at the ball entrance. This is a control state that corresponds to the normal gaming state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in the time-saving gaming state, and the special symbol game starts at the entrance of the ball. Examples include control states for electric accessories that assist the establishment of conditions, arbitrary combinations thereof, and the like.

By the way, in a gaming machine, when the number of special symbol fluctuations in the normal gaming state reaches a specified number without executing a special symbol jackpot game as a large profit game, the game machine enters the time saving gaming state (first profit gaming state). As a control, there are some that shift to the so-called time-saving gaming state). b The time-saving game state ends when the special figure jackpot game is executed or the special figure game is executed the upper limit number of times the special figure jackpot game is executed. In addition, when the b-time saving game state ends because the special figure game is executed the upper limit number of times without executing the special figure jackpot game, it shifts to the normal game state.

However, in the gaming machine, in the normal gaming state that is transferred from the time-saving gaming state, if the number of special pattern fluctuations reaches the specified number without a special pattern jackpot game being executed after the transition to the normal gaming state. Even if it is, it will not be transferred to the time-saving gaming state b again. That is, in the normal gaming state that is transferred from the time-saving gaming state b, the time-saving gaming state b does not occur (first auxiliary state control), and the normal gaming state that is transferred to after the end of the special jackpot game or the end of the variable probability gaming state In this case, the time-saving gaming state b may occur (second auxiliary state control). Therefore, the b time-saving game state can only occur once from when the special figure jackpot game is first executed until when the special figure jackpot game is executed next.

On the other hand, in the present invention, in a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting condition for the variable symbol game is a first control state that does not correspond to a specific game state, the opening and closing for a predetermined period of time is achieved. When a game for a specific period different from a special game as a profit game ends based on a game ball entering a specific ball entering area while the means is open, the first control state changes from the first control state to the specific game state. The control state is changed to a corresponding second control state. That is, in the present invention, even if the control state of the auxiliary means is in the predetermined gaming state, which is the first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, the game ball is not allowed to enter the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open. By making the ball fly and executing the game for a predetermined specific period, it is possible to generate a specific gaming state in which the control state for the auxiliary means is the second control state. This makes it possible to generate a specific gaming state again even if the specific gaming state has ended, so if the gaming machine is left unattended because the specific gaming state has ended and the specific gaming state will not occur. Therefore, a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine is suppressed.

More specifically, in this embodiment, a special figure jackpot game which is a large profit game and a V prize jackpot game which is a small profit game can be given to the player as a gaming profit. A special figure jackpot game as a big profit game is when the result of a special figure jackpot lottery that is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 as a starting means is a jackpot. This is a highly profitable game for the player who can win a large amount of game balls by opening and closing the variable prize opening 316 multiple times. On the other hand, the V-winning jackpot game as a small profit game is a special electric start game that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start opening 37 as the first ball entry means, in which the second ball entry means is provided with an opening/closing mechanism. It is executed when a game ball enters the special electric V prize opening 383 as a specific ball entry area provided in the second ball entry means which is opened by the operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382 as a means, and the game ball enters the special electric large prize winning hole 381. Although it is possible to enter game balls, the number of game balls that can be won by entering the special electric prize winning hole 381 is small, and the profit for the player is small. In addition, in this embodiment, the special electric start opening 37, the special electric large winning opening 381, and the special electric V winning opening 383 are used for games flowing down a second flow path 392 as a specific flow path set in the right side area of the game board 31. It is placed in a position where the ball can enter. In other words, the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game can be executed by launching a game ball into the second channel 392.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the V prize winning jackpot game as a small profit game ends, the number of special figure games as a variable game that can generate b time saving game state which is the first profit game state control is The maximum value is set. Here, the time saving gaming state b, which is the first profit gaming state control, is the opening/closing frequency of the electric accessory 315b as an auxiliary means for opening and closing the second winning opening 315 (the frequency of opening and closing of the electric accessory 315b to the second winning opening 315 by the electric accessory 315b). In the low frequency support mode, which is the second auxiliary state control with low ball support frequency), when the special pattern game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special pattern jackpot game as a large profit game. This is a time-saving gaming state in which the upper limit number of times (for example, 1000) that can be shifted to is specified. That is, in this embodiment, by the player continuing to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392, the special figure game can be shifted to the time-saving game state b, which is the first profit game state control. The maximum value is set as the number of times.

In the present embodiment, a special figure game in which a time-saving game state b, which is the first profit game state control, can be generated by the player continuing to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392. By setting the maximum value as the number of times, when the special pattern game is executed for the upper limit number of times without executing the special pattern jackpot game as a large profit game in the b time saving gaming state which is the first profit gaming state control. Even if the player is transferred from the time-saving gaming state b to the normal gaming state, and the first auxiliary state control is in which the time-saving gaming state b, which is the first profit gaming state control, does not occur, the player cannot use the second channel 392. By continuing to launch the game ball toward the player, it is possible to generate the second auxiliary state control that can generate the time-saving game state b, which is the first profit gaming state control, according to the player's intention. In this way, in this embodiment, since the player can generate the state that is the second auxiliary state control that can generate the b time-saving gaming state that is the first profit gaming state control, it is possible to It becomes possible to improve the operation rate for the gaming machine in which the time-saving gaming state b, which is the first profit gaming state control, is completed without executing the special figure jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special figure game allows the player to generate the time-saving game state b, which is the first profit game state control, by continuing to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392. Since the maximum value is set as the number of times, if the player ends the game in the second auxiliary state control that can generate b time-saving gaming state, which is the first profit gaming state control, the player can By continuing to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392 before ending the game, the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game is executed, and the time-saving game state b, which is the first profit game state control, is activated. It is possible to clear the number of special figure games executed by the player in a state where the second auxiliary state control is possible. As a result, the player can avoid the disadvantage caused by the player playing the game under the second auxiliary state control, which is the first profit gaming state control, which is the second auxiliary state control that can generate the time-saving gaming state b, to the benefit of others. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In other words, the player invests time, money, effort, etc. for the number of times the special figure game is executed in the second auxiliary state control that can generate the first profit gaming state control b, which is the time-saving gaming state. Continuing to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392 ensures that such investment will benefit others who later play games with the game machine, that is, be subject to so-called hyena behavior. This can be prevented depending on the player's intention.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 154 to 190, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine is equipped with a "gaming profit" as a profit game, a "large profit game" as a special game, and a "small profit game" as a specific period game. It also includes a "first profit gaming state control" as a specific gaming state, a "second profit gaming state control" as a predetermined gaming state, and a "first auxiliary state control" as a first control state. and a "second auxiliary state control" as a second control state.

[Configuration of gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. Here, FIG. 154 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIGS. 155 and 156 are diagrams for explaining the special electric prize winning device 38 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 154. It is.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determining section 21, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination section 27, etc. .

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, when the player performs a rotational operation on the firing handle 22, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 as a firing means with a force corresponding to the amount of rotational operation. A game is played. For example, a left-handed game as a first game in which a game ball is launched into the left side area of the game board 31 in the first direction in response to a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 by the player, and a game in the second direction. A right-handed game as a second game in which a game ball is launched to the right side area of the board 31 can be executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a right-handed game, it is possible to execute a strong right-handed game in which the game ball is launched to the right side of the separating section 393, which will be described later, and a weak right-handed game in which the game ball is launched to the left side of the separating section 393, which will be described later. It is.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game state, a left-handed game is encouraged in order to enter the game ball into the first winning hole 314 as a starting means and execute the first special symbol game as a variable game. . In addition, in the variable game state and various time-saving game states (a-time-saving game state, b-time-saving game state), a game ball is entered into the through gate 317 and the second prize opening 315 as a starting means, and the second winning game is started as a variable game. In order to execute the special figure game, a strong right-handed game is encouraged, and in the special figure jackpot game, which is a large profit game that is a gaming profit for the player, the game ball is made to flow down the first channel 391, which will be described later. A hard right-handed game is encouraged in order to cause the game ball to enter the variable winning hole 316. In addition, a game ball is entered into the special electric start opening 37 to be described later to execute the special electric start game, and a game ball is entered into the special electric V winning opening 383 of the special electric big winning device 38 to be described later to execute the V winning jackpot game. In order to make this happen, weak right-handed games are encouraged. Therefore, the player can prevent the occurrence of disadvantages by performing a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 that is encouraged depending on the game state.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIG. 154, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, left and right general winning holes 313, a first winning hole 314 and a second winning hole 315 as starting means, and a through gate. 317, an out port 318, a symbol display section 341 as a display means, a main display section 36 having a first special symbol display section 362 and a second special symbol display section 363 as display means, and a special electric start opening 37. , a special electric prize winning device 38, a variable winning opening 316, a first flow path 391, and a second flow path 392 as a specific path are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending out the fired game balls toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 31 can enter the general prize opening 313 and the first prize opening 314 on the left side, and The game ball flowing down the right side area can enter the general winning hole 313, the second winning hole 315, the variable winning hole 316, the through gate 317, the special electric start opening 37, and the special electric big winning device 38 on the right side. On the other hand, game balls that did not enter the left and right general winning openings 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315 which is a specific ball entry area, variable winning opening 316, special electric starting opening 37, or special electric big winning device 38 is discharged from the outlet 318. Then, when a game ball enters the left and right general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315, variable winning opening 316, special electric start opening 37 or special electric big winning device 38, a preset number of The prize ball is paid out. For example, as shown in FIG. 157(B), the number of prize balls when the ball enters the left and right general winning holes 313 is 10, and the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. The number of balls is 3, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the variable winning hole 316 is 10, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the special electric starting hole 37 is one, the special electric large winning device 38 (specific winning area described later) When a ball enters the special electric V winning hole 383 or the special electric regular winning hole 384), the number of prize balls is one. Note that when a game ball enters the through gate 317, the number of prize balls is 0.

Further, based on the game ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41 of the main control device 4) executes processing related to the special drawing jackpot lottery. When the main control unit 331 performs a special pattern jackpot lottery, a special pattern game as a small profit game in a specific period different from the large profit game is executed as a gaming profit for the player, and the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery is Notify. Specifically, the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first winning hole 314 is a small profit game in which the first special pattern is displayed variably in the first special pattern display section 362. It will be announced in the first special figure game during the specific period. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the through gate 317, the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means, is opened for a predetermined period by the opening/closing execution means, and the game ball enters the second prize opening 315, which is opened. The result of the special chart jackpot lottery executed based on the entry of the ball is determined by the specific period game execution means as a small profit game in which the second special symbol is displayed variably in the second special symbol display section 363. It will be notified in the second special figure game.

Further, when the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery is a jackpot, after the special pattern game as a small profit game ends, a special pattern jackpot game as a large profit game is executed as a gaming profit for the player. In this special figure jackpot game, a round game is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times) in the opening/closing execution mode. In each round game, the opening/closing door 319, which is the opening/closing means, is switched between a standby position in which the variable prize opening 316 is closed and an operating position in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened. In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the number of round games is determined from a plurality of number of round games (for example, 5 or 16) according to the result of the jackpot lottery, and the determined number of round games is executed. Door 319 is activated repeatedly. In this way, in the special figure jackpot game, the variable prize opening 316 is repeatedly opened by the opening/closing door 319, so the special figure jackpot game is a large profit game in which a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out as a gaming profit.

Here, the right side area of the game board 31 that allows a right-handed game as a second game to be executed is separated into two game areas by a separation part 393 made of resin or the like. Note that the separation portion 393 can also be provided by driving a plurality of nails. The two game areas on the right side of the game board 31 define specific paths along which the game ball flows in right-handed games, and each game area has a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means. It is provided.

A first flow path 391 is defined as a specific path in a first region as a game region set on the right side of the separating section 393 in the right region of the game board 31. Further, in the first area, a through gate 317 is provided as a first ball entry means, and a second winning hole 315 is provided as a specific ball entry area included in the second ball entry means. Therefore, in a right-handed game, the game ball flowing down the first channel 391 can enter the through gate 317 and the second prize opening 315. Further, the second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b as an opening/closing means included in the second ball entering means. This electric accessory 315b switches the second prize opening 315 between a closed state and an open state.

When a game ball enters the through gate 317, no prize ball is paid out, but when the game ball enters the through gate 317, a process related to the lottery per normal symbol is executed, and the normal symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. By doing so, a common figure game is executed as a profit game that notifies the result of the common figure winning lottery. When the result of the winning lottery is a winning lottery, the opening/closing execution means executes a process for the winning game as a profit game in which the second prize opening 315 is opened for a predetermined period. In this normal figure winning game, the second prize opening 315 is opened by operating the electric accessory 315b. In other words, by executing the opening/closing control process for the electric accessory 315b, multiple movable modes (for example, short opening of 0.1 seconds, long opening of 6 seconds (see FIGS. 12(A) and 12(B)) ), the first movable mode is determined, and in the normal game, depending on the first movable mode, the electric accessory 315b is placed in a standby position where the second winning opening 315 is closed, and a waiting position where the second winning opening 315 is opened. By being operated between the operating position and the operating position, the second winning a prize opening 315 is switched between a closed state and an open state. In this way, when the second winning hole 315 is opened in the normal winning game, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315.

Further, a plurality of nails are driven above the through gate 317, and a flow path through which game balls can enter the through gate 317 and a flow path through which game balls cannot enter into the through gate 317 are set. A part of the game ball that is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 and flows down the first channel 391 enters the through gate 317. In addition, a plurality of nails are driven above the second winning opening 315, and there is a channel in which a game ball can enter the second winning opening 315, and a channel in which a gaming ball cannot enter the second winning opening 315. A part of the game ball that is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 and flows down the first flow path 391 enters the second winning hole based on the game ball entering the through gate 317. 315 is opened, the ball enters the second winning hole 315. As described above, when a game ball enters the through gate 317, the number of prize balls is 0. In addition, as described above, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the number of prize balls is three (see FIG. 157(B)), and the time during which the second winning hole 315 is in the open state is , 0.1 seconds for short opening and 6 seconds for long opening (see FIG. 157(C) and FIG. 157(D)). In this embodiment, the game ball is played as the first game in both the high frequency support mode (variable probability gaming state, a time saving gaming state, b time saving gaming state) and the low frequency support mode (normal gaming state). When executing a game in which game balls are launched into the right side area of the game board 31 and flow down in the first channel 391, which is a specific path, a specific number of game balls are sent down the first channel 391 by continuous launching of game balls. If the ball is allowed to flow down, the number of profit game balls that the player can acquire will be smaller than the specific number. As a result, in the high-frequency support mode (variable probability gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, b time-saving gaming state) and the low-frequency support mode (normal gaming state), by causing the game ball to flow down the first channel 391, the game ball can be increase is prevented. In other words, since the flow area of the game ball can be freely adjusted by the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, the player can freely flow the game ball down the first channel 391, which is a specific path, at any time. Although it is possible to launch the game ball in such a way that the game ball can be launched into the first flow path 391, the structure is such that the number of balls held by the player does not increase even if the game ball is caused to flow down the first flow path 391. The hitting method that causes the ball to flow down the first flow path 391 is prevented from becoming a winning hitting method.

A second flow path 392 is defined as a specific path in a second region as a game region set on the left side of the separating section 393 in the right region of the game board 31. Further, in the second region, a special electric starting opening 37 is provided as a first ball entering means, and a special electric winning prize device 38 is provided below the special electric starting opening 37 as a second ball entering means. Therefore, in a right-handed game, the game ball flowing down the second channel 392 can enter the special electric start opening 37 and the special electric big prize winning device 38.

The special electric start opening 37 operates the special electric winning device 38 when a game ball enters, and executes a special electric starting game in which a game ball can enter the special electric V winning opening 383 of the special electric winning device 38, which will be described later. It provides an opportunity to do so. The special electric starting port 37 is provided with a ball entry sensor 37a (see FIG. 157) that detects when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 37.

In addition, when a game ball enters the special electric V winning hole 383 in the special electric start game, that is, when the game ball is detected by the ball entering sensor 37a (see FIG. 157), the later-described game that is a small profit game is considered as a gaming profit. A V-winning jackpot game is executed.

Here, FIG. 95(A) is a front view of the special electric prize winning device 38, FIG. 95(B) is a longitudinal sectional view of the special electric prize winning device 38, and FIG. 95(C) is a front view of the special electric prize winning device 38. A) is a cross-sectional view of the special electric prize winning device 38 along the line X1-X1, and FIG. 95(D) is a cross-sectional view of the special electric prize winning device 38 along the line X2-X2 of FIG. FIG. 96(A) is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 95(C) in a state where the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric large prize winning device 38 is opened and a game ball can enter the special electric V winning opening 383. 96(B) is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 95(C) in a state where the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric large winning device 38 is opened and the game ball cannot enter the special electric V winning opening 383, and FIG. (C) is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 95(D) in a state in which the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric large winning device 38 is opened and the game ball cannot enter the special electric V winning opening 383.

As shown in FIGS. 95(A) and 95(B), the special electric prize winning device 38 includes a special electric prize winning opening 381, a special electric opening/closing door 382, a special electric V winning opening 383 which is a specific ball entry area, and a special electric regular winning opening. 384, and a V winning opening opening/closing door 385 which is an opening/closing means.

The special electric prize winning hole 381 is opened on the front side of the game board 31. The special electric opening/closing door 382 is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special electric prize winning opening 381 shown in FIGS. 95(C) and 95(D), and in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special electric winning opening 381 shown in FIGS. 95(A) and 95(C). The large prize opening 381 is switched between an open state in which a game ball can enter.

As shown in FIG. 95(A), when the special electric V winning opening 383 is opened by the opening/closing means V winning opening opening/closing door 385, the special electric V winning opening 383 can be entered from the special electric big winning opening 381. It is possible to enter the game ball that has been pitched. Further, the special electric V winning hole 383 is provided with a ball entry sensor 383a (see FIG. 157) that detects that a game ball has entered the special electric V winning hole 383.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 95(B), when the special electric V winning hole 383 is closed by the V winning hole opening/closing door 385, the ball enters the special electric V winning hole 383 from the special electric big winning hole 381. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 95(C), it is possible to enter the game ball entered from the special electric large winning hole 381 into the special electric regular winning hole 384. Further, the special electric normal winning hole 384 is provided with a ball entry sensor 384a (see FIG. 157) that detects that a game ball has entered the special electric V winning hole 383.

The Tokuden big prize winning device 38 is operated to execute the Tokuden starting game, which is a small profit game, based on the game ball being entered into the Tokuden starting opening 37, which is the first ball entry means. In this special electric start game, a game ball can enter the special electric large winning hole 381 by switching the special electric big winning hole 381 between the closed state and the open state by the special electric opening/closing door 382.

Also, the special electric big winning device 38 executes a V winning jackpot game which is a small profit game based on the game ball being entered into the special electric V winning hole 383 of the special electric big winning device 38 in the special electric starting game. is activated. In this V-winning jackpot game, a game ball can enter the special electric jackpot 381 by switching the special electric jackpot 381 between the closed state and the open state by the special electric opening/closing door 382.

Here, a plurality of nails are driven above the special electric starting port 37, and there is a channel in which a game ball can enter the special electric starting port 37, and a channel in which a game ball cannot enter the special electric starting port 37. is set. Therefore, a part of the game ball that is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 and flows down the second channel 392 enters the special electric starting port 37. As described above, when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 37, the number of prize balls is one (see FIG. 157(B)). Therefore, when a game ball is launched toward the special electric starting port 37 in order to generate a special electric starting game, the number of game balls that a player can obtain is greater than the number of game balls required to generate a special electric starting game. The number becomes smaller.

In addition, as mentioned above, when the game ball entered from the special electric large winning hole 381 enters the special electric V winning hole 383, the number of prize balls is one; When the game ball enters the special electric normal winning slot 384, the number of prize balls is one (see FIG. 157(B)). Therefore, in the special electric start game and the V winning jackpot game, an increase in the number of game balls played by players cannot be expected.

In this way, when launching a game ball toward the special electric starting port 37 in order to generate a special electric starting game, the number of game balls launched (specific number of balls) required to generate a special electric starting game is The number of profit game balls that a player can acquire decreases, and an increase in the number of game balls that a player can acquire cannot be expected in the special electric start game and the V winning jackpot game. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game ball is played as the first game in both the high frequency support mode (variable probability gaming state, a time saving gaming state, b time saving gaming state) and the low frequency support mode (normal gaming state). When executing a game in which game balls are launched into the right side area of the game board 31 and flow down in the second channel 392, which is a specific path, a specific number of game balls are sent down the second channel 392 by continuous launching of game balls. 392, the number of profit game balls that the player can acquire will be smaller than the specific number of balls. As a result, in the high-frequency support mode (variable probability gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, b time-saving gaming state) and the low-frequency support mode (normal gaming state), the gaming ball can be increase is prevented. In other words, since the flow area of the game ball can be freely adjusted by the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, the player can freely flow the game ball down the second channel 392, which is a specific path, at any time. Although it is possible to launch the game ball in such a way that the game ball flows down into the second channel 392, the number of balls held by the player does not increase. The hitting method that causes the ball to flow down the second flow path 392 is prevented from becoming a winning hitting method.

As shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning hole 316 as a specific ball entering area is provided below the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means provided in the two game areas on the right side area of the game board 31. There is. In addition, the variable prize opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 which is an opening/closing means. This opening/closing door 319 repeatedly switches the variable prize opening 316 between the closed state and the open state in the special figure jackpot game as described above. In other words, the variable prize opening 316 and the opening/closing door are third ball entering means different from the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means. A game ball can enter the variable winning hole 316 by executing a right-handed game in which a game ball is hit to the right side area of the game board 31 as a second game. Specifically, a game ball enters the variable prize opening 316 even if the game ball is launched into either the game area on the right side of the separation section 393 in the right area of the game board 31 or the game area on the left side of the separation section 393. Ball is possible.

In this way, the third ball entry means, which includes the variable prize opening 316 and the opening/closing door, is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, so that the special jackpot game, which is a large profit game, can be changed to a small profit game. It becomes possible to give the player a gaming profit that is different from the regular game winning game or the V winning jackpot game. In addition, since the third ball entry means is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, it is possible to independently execute the special drawing jackpot game, the V winning jackpot game, and the regular drawing jackpot game. Therefore, the special pattern jackpot game, the V prize winning jackpot game, and the general pattern jackpot game are executed at the same time, and conversely, two or more games of the special pattern jackpot game, the V prize winning jackpot game, and the general pattern jackpot game are executed. It becomes possible to realize a game that does not require simultaneous execution of the following functions. For example, a small profit game can be prevented from being executed while a large profit game is being executed, a large profit game can be executed while a small profit game is being executed, and other small profit games can be executed while a small profit game is being executed. It is conceivable to prevent this from happening, and to enable other small profit games to be executed while the small profit game is being executed. Specifically, by preventing the special electric opening/closing door 382 as an opening/closing means from being operated during the execution of the special drawing jackpot game, the V winning prize, which is a small profit game, is prevented while the special drawing jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is being executed. By preventing the jackpot game from starting and by not operating the electric accessory 315b as an opening/closing means during the execution of the special figure jackpot game, the general figure which is a small profit game is executed while the special figure jackpot game which is a large profit game is being executed. By preventing the winning game from starting and preventing the special electric opening/closing door 382 as an opening/closing means, which is a small profit game, from being operated during the execution of the special figure game, which is a small profit game, the V winning jackpot game is not executed. By making the special electric opening/closing door 382 as an opening/closing means operable during the execution of the special figure game, which is a small profit game, the V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, is started. By preventing the electric accessory 315b as an opening/closing means from being operated during the execution of a certain special figure game, a game with a common figure, which is a small profit game, is prevented from being executed, and a special figure game, which is a small profit game, is prevented from being executed. By activating the electric accessory 315b as an opening/closing means inside, it is also possible to start a game with a common figure, which is a small profit game.

In this way, by preventing a small profit game from being executed while a large profit game is being executed, and by making it possible to execute a large profit game while a small profit game is being executed, the profits of the large profit game can be treated as gaming profits. It is possible to realize a gaming experience that reliably provides the following. Further, by preventing other small profit games from being executed while a small profit game is being executed, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which the profit of one type of small profit game can be obtained as a gaming profit. Moreover, by making it possible to execute other small profit games while a small profit game is being executed, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which profits from a plurality of small profit games can be obtained as gaming profits.

[Game system]
First, a gaming system including the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 157(A) and 157(C). Here, FIG. 157(A) is a block diagram showing an example of a part of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 154, and FIG. 157(C) is a diagram showing signal types output to the outside of the gaming machine. be.

As shown in FIG. 157(A), the gaming system according to this embodiment includes a gaming machine 10, a hall computer 102, and a data display 103.

The gaming machine 10 includes an external output terminal board 101 as a signal output means for outputting gaming information of the gaming machine 10 to an external device such as a hall computer 102. This external output terminal board 101 has, for example, a plurality of output terminal sections (not shown), and each output terminal section (not shown) is an input/output I/O terminal that performs data communication with the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. It is connected to F42 by wiring (not shown) to enable data communication (reception). As a result, the game information of the game machine 10 is outputted to the outside of the game machine 10 as various signals via the output terminal section (not shown) of the corresponding external output terminal board 101. Furthermore, each output terminal section (not shown) is capable of outputting one type of predetermined signal to the outside. That is, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the type of the output terminal section (not shown) and the type of signal that can be outputted to the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. 157(C), among the plurality of output terminals (not shown), the first terminal can output jackpot signal 1 as a special signal, and the second terminal can output jackpot signal 2. The third terminal can output a V winning jackpot game signal as an identification signal, and the fourth terminal can output a special figure fluctuation stop signal as an identification signal.

As shown in FIG. 158(A), the jackpot signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output during the execution of the special figure jackpot game, which is a big profit game. This jackpot signal 1 makes it possible to identify that the special figure jackpot game is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 158(B), the jackpot signal 2 is generated during the execution of the special figure jackpot game, which is a big profit game, and in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, ) is a signal that is continuously output during execution. By this jackpot signal 2, it can be identified that the special figure jackpot game is being executed or the high frequency support mode is shifted to the end of the special figure jackpot game. In addition, by comparing jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2, for example, when both jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 are output, it can be identified that a special figure jackpot game is being executed, and the jackpot When the signal 1 is not output and the jackpot signal 2 is output, it can be identified that the mode is the high-frequency support mode that is shifted to after the end of the special figure jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 159(A), the V winning jackpot game signal is a signal that is continuously output during the execution of the V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game. This V winning jackpot game signal makes it possible to identify that the V winning jackpot game is being executed. The V-winning jackpot game signal may be a pulse signal that is output only at the start of the V-winning jackpot game, and in this case, the V-winning jackpot game signal identifies that the V-winning jackpot game has started. can. Further, the V winning jackpot game signal may be a pulse signal that is output only at the end of the V winning jackpot game. In this case, it can be identified from the V winning jackpot game signal that the V winning jackpot game has ended.

Here, in this embodiment, as a jackpot game, a special drawing jackpot game as a big profit game that is executed when the result of a special drawing jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a game ball entering the special electric starting opening 37. This includes a V winning jackpot game as a small profit game that is executed when a game ball enters the special electric V winning hole 383 in the special electric starting game executed based on the above. In this embodiment, when the special figure jackpot game is executed, jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 are output, and a V winning jackpot game signal different from jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 is not output, while When the V-winning jackpot game is executed, the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 are not output, but the V-winning jackpot game signal is output.

In this way, when the V-winning jackpot game is executed, the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 are not output, so that the game hall can generate the V-winning jackpot that can be freely generated by the player in the hall computer 102. A jackpot game is prevented from being recognized as a special figure jackpot game. Thereby, the game hall can accurately manage the number of executions of the special pattern jackpot game in the hall computer 102 and accurately display the number of executions of the special pattern jackpot game on the data display 103.

Furthermore, when the V-winning jackpot game is executed, a V-winning jackpot game signal different from the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is output, so that the game hall can confirm that the V-winning jackpot game is executed in the hall computer 102. It is possible to know that the game has been executed, that is, the number of times the special figure game has been executed until the b-time saving game state is generated has been reset. As a result, even if the V-winning jackpot game is executed in the hall computer 102, the gaming hall can play the remaining special figure games necessary from the end of the previous normal jackpot game until the b time-saving game state occurs. It becomes possible to grasp the number of executions. Therefore, the game hall clears the RAM before the game hall opens, based on the remaining number of executions of the special symbol game required before the time-saving game state b occurs, which is grasped from the hall computer 102. It can be used as a reference for determining whether or not to reset the number of executions of the special figure game to the maximum value.

As shown in FIG. 159(B), the special figure fluctuation stop signal is a pulse signal that is output when the special figure is stopped and displayed. This special figure fluctuation stop signal makes it possible to identify that the special figure game has ended. Therefore, the number of executions of the special figure game can be identified based on the special figure fluctuation stop signal. In addition, instead of the special figure variation stop signal, a pulse signal may be output as a special figure variation start signal when the variable display of the special figure is started. This special figure fluctuation start signal makes it possible to identify that the special figure game has started, so it is possible to identify the number of executions of the special figure game based on the special figure fluctuation start signal. Further, instead of the special figure fluctuation stop signal, a special figure fluctuation signal may be continuously output while the special figure is being displayed in a variable manner. This special figure fluctuation signal makes it possible to identify that the special figure game is being executed, so the number of executions of the special figure game can be identified based on the special figure fluctuation signal.

As shown in FIG. 157(A), a plurality of output terminal sections (not shown) are connected to the hall computer 102 on the gaming hall side by wiring or the like so as to enable data communication (transmission). Thereby, the hall computer 102 can obtain gaming information according to the gaming situation and gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on various signals output from each output terminal section (not shown) of the gaming machine 10. . As a result, the gaming hall side can grasp the gaming status and gaming state of each gaming machine 10 based on the various signals received by the hall computer 102. Furthermore, the game hall side can select a necessary output terminal section from a plurality of output terminal sections (not shown) and connect it to the hall computer 102 via wiring or the like. As a result, the gaming hall side can selectively obtain gaming information managed by the gaming hall side by selecting the output terminal section (not shown) connected to the hall computer 102, so that necessary gaming information can be obtained. It can be managed efficiently, and necessary game information can be displayed on the data display 103.

Here, the gaming information signaled from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 includes, for example, that a game is in progress, that a jackpot game has started (that a jackpot game is in progress), and that the high-frequency support mode (probability variable the game state, time-saving game state), the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the special figure game has started (the special figure game is in progress), the number of game balls fired (out ball number), number of balls played, number of difference balls, etc. Therefore, on the gaming hall side, based on the gaming information signaled from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102, the hall computer determines, for example, the number of jackpots for the current day and the past several days, the consecutive jackpots for the current day and the past several days. number of times, the highest number of jackpots in the past, the highest number of consecutive jackpots in the past, the current number of consecutive jackpots, the total number of fluctuating games on the current day and the past few days, the number of special game games between the jackpots on the current day and the past few days, It is possible to manage the number of special symbol games from the previous jackpot of the day to the current variable game, the balls put out and the difference balls for the current day and the past several days, and also the gaming status and gaming status of each gaming machine 10, For example, it is possible to manage whether you are playing games, playing jackpot games, being in high frequency support mode (variable gaming state, time saving gaming state), being in low frequency support mode (normal gaming state), etc. can.

The data display 103 displays, for example, the gaming status and gaming status of the gaming machines 10, and is provided, for example, above each gaming machine 10 in the island equipment of the gaming hall. This data display 103 is connected to the hall computer 102 by wiring or the like so that it can communicate (receive) data, and by receiving gaming information managed by the hall computer 102, it can display the gaming status and information based on this gaming information. The gaming status can be displayed directly or indirectly. Specifically, the data display 103 displays, for example, the number of jackpots on the current day and the past few days, the number of consecutive jackpots on the current day and the past few days, the highest number of jackpots in the past, the highest number of consecutive jackpots in the past, and the current number of consecutive jackpots. Number of successive jackpots, total number of fluctuating games on the current day and the past few days, number of special game games between jackpots on the day and the past few days, number of special game games from the previous jackpot on the day to the current fluctuating game, on the day and the past few days' worth of balls and difference balls, being in a game, being in a jackpot game, being in a high-frequency support mode (variable game state, time-saving game state), low-frequency support mode (normal game It can be displayed directly or indirectly.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 184.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
The main timer interrupt processing of this embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above because the through gate 317 of this embodiment is provided only in the right side area of the game board 31. are different.

[Through gate processing]
Here, FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the through gate process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. In the through-gate process, when a game ball passes through the through-gate 317, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the general figure reservation storage area 412c (see FIG. 11) of the RAM 412. The through gate process will be described below with reference to FIG. 160.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 160, in the through gate process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317, which is the first ball entry means (step S1301). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 is determined based on winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process in step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), the process moves to step S1302, and if it determines that the game ball has not passed through the through gate 317L (step S1301: No), the through gate process ends.

<Step S1302>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), the MPU 41 selects the normal pattern that is stored in the normal pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA that is set in the normal pattern storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether the variable pending number X is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment) (step S1302). The MPU 41 terminates the through gate processing when the number of regular pattern fluctuations pending X is the maximum number of reservations (step S1302: Yes), and when the number X of regular pattern fluctuations pending is not the maximum number of pendings (step S1302: No), The process moves to step S1303.

<Steps S1303 and S1304>
If the number X of regular pattern fluctuations pending is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1302: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number X of general pattern fluctuations pending (step S1303), and in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Obtain the counter values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5 that are updated, and the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 that is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main process in FIG. 163, which will be described later, and The value is stored in the first vacant holding area among the first to fourth holding areas SE4 of the holding area 412c in the RAM 412 (step S1304), and the through gate process ends.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 163. The main processes of this embodiment include special figure game count management process (step S1406-1), special electric start game control process (step S1407-2), V prize jackpot game control process (step S1407-3), and signal output process. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that (step S1408-1) is executed. These processes will be explained below, and processes necessary for understanding this embodiment will also be explained as appropriate.

Before explaining the main processing of the main control device 4, the transition of gaming states in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 161. Here, FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example of transition of the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 161(A), in this embodiment, the basic gaming states include a normal gaming state, a variable probability gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, b time-saving gaming state, and a special figure jackpot gaming state, and a predetermined When the conditions are met, the gaming state is transferred.

The normal game state is a low probability mode in which a special figure jackpot lottery is executed based on a low probability mode win/fail table (see FIG. 9(A)) in which the probability of a jackpot is low as a result of the special figure jackpot lottery. This is a mode in which it is difficult to shift to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, the normal game state is a low frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 315b operates less frequently and it is difficult for game balls to enter the second prize opening 315. Therefore, in the normal game state, in order to enter the game ball into the first prize opening 314 and execute the first special figure game, the first game is to launch the game ball into the left side area of the game board 31, which is the first direction. Left-handed games are encouraged. This normal game state is entered when the special figure game is executed a specified number of times without transitioning to the special figure jackpot game state in the time-saving game state a or the time-saving game state b. Specifically, the normal gaming state can be entered by, for example, 100 special drawing games being executed without shifting to the special jackpot gaming state in the time-saving gaming state a, or when the special drawing game is executed 100 times in the time-saving gaming state b. The state shifts to the figure jackpot game state when the special figure game is executed, for example, 1000 times. Then, the normal game state that transitions from the time-saving game state a is achieved by executing the special figure game a specified number of times (for example, 1000 times) without shifting to the special figure jackpot game state after the end of the normal jackpot game. This is a second auxiliary state control that can transition to a gaming state. On the other hand, the normal game state that transitions from the b-time saving gaming state is the b-time saving even if the special pattern game is executed a specified number of times (for example, 1000 times) without shifting to the special pattern jackpot gaming state after the transition to the normal game. This is the first auxiliary state control that does not shift to the gaming state.

The probability variable gaming state is a high probability mode in which a special drawing jackpot lottery is executed based on a high probability mode winning/failure table (see FIG. 9(B)) in which the probability of a jackpot is high as a result of the special drawing jackpot drawing. This is a mode in which it is easy to shift to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, the variable probability game state is a high frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 315b operates frequently and the game ball easily enters the second prize opening 315. Therefore, in the variable probability game state, in order to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315 and execute the second special figure game, the game is placed on the right side of the separation part 393 in the right area of the game board 31, which is the second direction. A second game of hitting the ball, a hard right-handed game, is encouraged. This variable probability game state is entered from the variable probability jackpot game state after the completion of the variable probability jackpot game which is a large profit game.

a Time-saving gaming state is a low probability mode in which the special drawing jackpot lottery is executed based on the low probability mode win/fail table (see FIG. 9(A)) in which the probability of the result of the special drawing jackpot drawing being a jackpot is low. This is a mode in which it is difficult to shift to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, the time-saving game state a is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 315b operates frequently and the game ball easily enters the second prize opening 315. Therefore, in the time-saving game state a, in order to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315 and execute the second special figure game, the game area where the through gate 317 and the second winning hole 315 are provided, that is, the game board A game in which the game ball is hit hard to the right in the game area on the right side of the separation part 393 in the right side area of 31 is encouraged. This time-saving game state a is entered from the normal jackpot game state after the end of the normal jackpot game, which is a large profit game.

b The time-saving gaming state is a low probability mode in which the special drawing jackpot lottery is executed based on the low probability mode win/fail table (see FIG. 9(A)) in which the probability of the result of the special drawing jackpot drawing being a jackpot is low. This is a mode in which it is difficult to shift to a jackpot gaming state. Further, the time-saving game state b is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 315b operates frequently and the game ball easily enters the second prize opening 315. Therefore, in the b-time saving game state, in order to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315 and execute the second special figure game, the game area where the through gate 317 and the second winning hole 315 are provided, that is, the game board A game in which the game ball is hit hard to the right is encouraged in the game area on the right side of the separation part 393 in the right side area of 31. This B time-saving game state is entered by executing the special figure game a specified number of times (for example, 1000 times) without transitioning to the special figure jackpot game state after the end of the normal jackpot game, which is a large profit game. do.

The special figure jackpot game state is a predetermined round game in which the variable winning hole 316 as the third ball entry means is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until the upper limit number (for example, 9) or more game balls are won. This is a game state in which a special figure jackpot game, which is a large profit game that is played many times, is executed. The special figure jackpot gaming state includes a 5R normal jackpot gaming state, a 5R probability-variable jackpot gaming state, and a 16R probability-variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R normal jackpot game state is a game state in which a 5R normal jackpot game in which a round game is played five times is executed, and after the 5R normal jackpot game ends, the game state is shifted to the time-saving game state a. The 5R probability variable jackpot game state is a gaming state in which a 5R probability variable jackpot game in which a round game is played five times is executed, and after the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot game, the game state is shifted to the probability variable game state. The 16R probability variable jackpot game state is a gaming state in which a 16R probability variable jackpot game in which round games are played 16 times is executed, and after the end of the 16R probability variable jackpot game, the game state is shifted to the probability variable game state.

As shown in FIG. 161(B), in this embodiment, the gaming state further includes a V winning jackpot gaming state. This V winning jackpot game state is a gaming state in which a V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, is executed. The V-winning jackpot game is a special electric jackpot game that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start opening 37 as the first ball entry means in the normal game state, variable probability game state, a time-saving game state, and b time-saving game state. In the starting game, a game ball enters the special electric V prize opening 383 as a specific ball entering area provided in the second ball entering means, which is opened by the operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382 as the opening/closing means provided in the second ball entering means. Executed in case. In other words, when a game ball enters the special electric start opening 37 during the execution of a special figure game which is a small profit game (while the special figure is changing), the special electric start game is executed, and the special electric start game is executed by the operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382. By allowing a game ball to enter the V winning hole 383, a V winning jackpot game can occur. Therefore, while the special figure game is being executed (while the special figure is changing), the V winning jackpot game can be executed at the same time as the special figure game. As a result, the V winning jackpot game state is generated separately from the normal game state, variable probability game state, a time-saving game state, and b time-saving game state, and independently of these game states.

In this embodiment, the game state is the same before and after the start and end of the V winning jackpot game. Specifically, when a V-winning jackpot game state occurs in a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is maintained from before the start of the V-winning jackpot game until after it ends, and a V-winning jackpot game occurs in a variable probability gaming state. If the condition occurs, the variable probability game state is maintained from before the start of the V-winning jackpot game to after it ends, and if the V-winning jackpot gaming state occurs in the time-saving gaming state, before the start of the V-winning jackpot game. The time-saving game state a is maintained from the time to the end of the game, and if the V-winning jackpot game state occurs in the time-saving game state b, the time-saving gaming state b is maintained from before the start to after the end of the V-winning jackpot game. is maintained. That is, before and after the execution of the V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, the gaming state does not change, and the player's gaming profit does not change.

In this way, by not changing the gaming state before and after executing the V-winning jackpot game, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by the V-winning jackpot game, and the player's vested interest before executing the V-winning jackpot game is prevented. The profits of the player are continuously protected after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game. Specifically, if the gaming state before the execution of the V-winning jackpot game is a variable probability gaming state, even after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, the high probability mode with a high special jackpot probability of the special drawing jackpot lottery is A high-frequency support mode is maintained in which the probability of winning a regular symbol in a lottery with a winning symbol is high. In addition, if the gaming state before the execution of the V-winning jackpot game is a time-saving gaming state or b-time-saving gaming state, even after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, the probability of winning a common symbol in the lottery per common symbol is high. The frequency support mode is maintained and does not affect the remaining number of time-saving games. Therefore, when the player intentionally causes a V-winning jackpot game, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged, and his vested interests are protected.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode (variable probability gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or b time-saving gaming state), by causing the game ball to flow down the first channel 391, the through gate 317 and the second winning prize can be achieved. It is possible to enter the game ball into the mouth 315 and execute the second special figure game. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, a strong right-handed game in which the game ball is hit to the right side of the separation part 393 in the right side area of the game board 31 is encouraged. However, even if a player launches a game ball with the intention of playing a hard right-handed game, due to poor firing of the game ball or mutual interference between the game balls, the ball may be thrown into the second ball against the player's will. It is assumed that the game ball flows down the path 392. In this case, the game ball that flows down the second flow path 392 is a special electric starter that allows the game ball to enter the special electric V prize opening 383 by entering the special electric starter opening 37 against the player's will. It is assumed that a game is executed and a game ball is further entered into the special electric V winning hole 383 in the special electric starting game, so that a V winning jackpot game is executed. Then, the number of executions of the special figure game until the time-saving game state b occurs due to the execution of the special electric V prize opening 383 based on the game ball flowing down the second channel 392 against the player's will. If the game status is changed before and after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game when the game is reset, the player will be at a great disadvantage. For example, when a V-winning jackpot game is executed in a variable probability gaming state that is most advantageous to the player, a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than another gaming state, that is, a variable probability gaming state (the special jackpot lottery is in a low probability mode) If it were to be shifted to , the player would lose the benefit of the special map jackpot lottery being in a high probability mode, which would be a great disadvantage to the player. In contrast, in this embodiment, by preventing the game state from being changed before and after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, the player's benefit from being in the high-frequency support mode or high-probability mode is The jackpot game can be maintained even after execution, and great disadvantages to the player can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, the V winning jackpot game state occurs separately (at the same time) from the normal gaming state, the variable probability gaming state, the time saving gaming state a, and the working time saving gaming state b, but the V winning jackpot gaming state is different from the normal gaming state. The game state may be made so that it does not occur simultaneously with the variable probability game state, the time-saving game state a, or the time-saving game state b, and the game state may not be changed even when the V winning jackpot game is executed. Even in this case, the player's gaming profit will not change before and after executing the V-winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, and the gaming profit before the execution of the V-winning jackpot game will change after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game. will also be maintained.

In addition, if the gaming state before the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, is the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state will be maintained even after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, but the After execution, the maximum value as the number of executions of the special figure game required to generate the b time-saving game state which is the first profit game state control is set.

Then, the game state before the execution of the V winning jackpot game is the normal game state of the first auxiliary state control transferred from the time-saving gaming state b, that is, the normal game of the second profit gaming state control in which the time-saving gaming state b cannot occur. In the case of the state, the maximum value is set as the number of executions of the special figure game required to generate the time-saving game state b, and the control is changed to the second auxiliary state control that can generate the time-saving game state b. Ru. In other words, in this embodiment, the V winning jackpot game is executed when the b working time saving gaming state transferred from the b working time saving gaming state is a normal gaming state in which it cannot occur, so that after the execution of the V winning jackpot game, b The game is changed to a normal game state in which a time-saving game state can be generated. In addition, in the V winning jackpot game, the game ball is entered into the special electric starting opening 37 which is the first ball entering means, and the special electric V winning opening which is a specific ball entry area of the special electric big winning device 38 which is the second ball entering means. This is executed by inserting a game ball into the ball 383. The special electric start opening 37 and the special electric large prize winning device 38 are provided in a second area as a gaming area set on the left side of the separating section 393 in the right side area of the game board 31. Therefore, the player can intentionally execute the V-winning jackpot game by launching the game ball toward the second area and causing the game ball to flow down the second channel 392 by playing a weak right-handed game. . Thereby, the player can change to the normal game state in which the time-saving game state b cannot occur by launching a game ball toward the second area in the normal game state in which the time-saving game state b cannot occur. As a result, the time-saving game state b ends without the special drawing jackpot game being executed, thereby motivating the player to start playing on a gaming machine in which the time-saving gaming state b cannot occur. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate.

On the other hand, if the gaming state before the execution of the V winning jackpot game is the normal gaming state of the second auxiliary state control transferred from the time-saving gaming state a, that is, the normal gaming state in which the time-saving gaming state b can occur, After the execution of the V winning jackpot game, the second auxiliary state control is maintained in the normal gaming state, but as in the normal gaming state in which the b time saving gaming state cannot occur, after the execution of the V winning jackpot game, the b time saving game A maximum value is set as the number of executions of the special figure game necessary to generate the state. Therefore, when the player ends the game in a state where the b time-saving game state can be generated, the player launches the game ball toward the second area and drives the game ball into the second flow path 392 by playing a weak right-handed game. By causing the V-winning jackpot game to be executed, it is possible to clear the number of times the special figure game has been executed by the player in a state in which the b time-saving game state can be generated. Thereby, the player can prevent the disadvantage suffered by the player from playing the game in a state in which the time-saving gaming state b can be generated from becoming an advantage to others. In other words, the player invests time, money, effort, etc. for the number of times the special figure game is executed in a state where the time-saving game state b can be generated, and such investment is used for later games with the game machine. By launching the game ball toward the second area and causing the game ball to flow down the second flow path 392 by playing a weak right-handed game, the game ball can be made to benefit others who perform the action, that is, become the target of so-called hyena behavior. This can be prevented depending on the player's intention.

In addition, if a game ball enters the special electric starting port 37 during execution of the special figure jackpot game which is a large profit game, the special electric starting game will not be executed and the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric big winning device 38 will not be operated. . In this way, the game ball does not enter the special electric V winning hole 383 during the execution of the special drawing jackpot game, and the V winning jackpot game does not occur, so that the special drawing jackpot game state changes to the V winning jackpot gaming state. will not be migrated. In this way, since the V-winning jackpot game does not occur during the execution of the special drawing jackpot game, the profits that the player can obtain from the special drawing jackpot game, which is a large profit game, disappear due to the V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game. be prevented from being

It should be noted that while the V prize winning jackpot game is being executed, the special figure jackpot game can be executed. In this way, while the V winning jackpot game is being executed, the special drawing jackpot game can be executed, and because the V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, is being executed, the special drawing jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is executed. It is prevented that the profit of the special figure jackpot game cannot be obtained, and the profit of the special figure jackpot game can be appropriately obtained.

Here, FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main controller 4. As shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 162(A) is a diagram showing an example of a special electric start propriety table, FIG. 162(B) is a diagram showing an example of a low frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table, and FIG. C) is a diagram showing an example of a high frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table, and FIG. 162(D) is a diagram showing an example of a V winning jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 162(A), the special electric start success/failure table shows that the special electric big winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is selected based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric start opening 37, which is the first ball entry means. This table is referred to by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in order to determine whether or not to execute the activated special electric start game, and is stored in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. In this special electric start success/failure table, 16 special electric start random number counters from 0 to 15 are set, and the values of all the special electric start random number counters are wins. That is, when the validity judgment is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric start opening 37, the special electric start game as a small profit game in which the special electric big prize winning device 38 is activated is executed.

However, if a game ball enters the special electric starting port 37 during execution of a special figure jackpot game which is a large profit game, the validity determination is not executed. Therefore, the special electric start game is not executed while the special figure jackpot game is being executed, and as a result, the V winning jackpot game is not executed while the special figure jackpot game is being executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the result of the judgment of whether or not to execute the special electric start game based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric start opening 37 is that the winning is 1/1, but the result is that the winning is 1/1. It is conceivable to set it so that a win occurs with a predetermined probability, or it is also conceivable to set it so that the probability that the result of the hit/fail determination is a win differs depending on the gaming state or the like.

Here, in the special electric starting game, the special electric winning opening 381 of the special electric winning prize device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is switched between the closed state and the open state by the special electric opening/closing door 382, which is the opening/closing means. A game ball can enter the special electric prize winning hole 381. In addition, when the special electric large winning hole 381 is opened in the special electric starting game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special electric V winning hole 383 which is a specific ball entry area. Therefore, by executing the special electric start game, it becomes possible to execute the V winning jackpot game based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric V winning hole 383 as a specific period game. In this embodiment, two types of special electric start games with different maximum opening times of the special electric large winning hole 381 and the special electric V winning hole 383 are set (see FIG. 162(B) and FIG. 162(C)). . Specifically, in this embodiment, as the special electric start game, the maximum opening time of the special electric large winning hole 381 and the special electric V winning hole 383 is 0.1 seconds, and the maximum opening time to the special electric big winning hole 381 and the special electric V winning hole 383 is The short-open special electric start game in which it is difficult to enter the game ball, and the maximum opening time of the special electric large winning hole 381 and the special electric V winning hole 383 is 1.2 seconds, and the special electric large winning hole 381 and the special electric V winning hole 383 are This includes a long open special electric start game in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball. In the short-open special electric starting game, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the special electric V winning hole 383, so it is difficult to generate a V winning jackpot game when the short-opening special electric starting game is executed. On the other hand, in the long open special electric starting game, since it is easy to enter the game ball into the special electric V winning hole 383, the V winning jackpot game is likely to occur with the execution of the long open special electric starting game as a trigger.

The low frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table shown in FIG. 162(B) and the high frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table shown in FIG. 162(C) are used to This table is referred to by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in order to sort the type of special electric start game when the result of the judgment based on the winning result is a win, and is stored in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4.

The low-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table determines the type of special electric start game when the result of the judgment based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric start opening 37 in the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode is a win. used for sorting. In this low frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table, all the values of the special electric start type random number counter from 0 to 49 are long open special electric start games. That is, in the special electric starting game based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting opening 37 in the normal game state, it is easy to enter the game ball into the special electric V winning opening 383, and it is easy to generate a V winning jackpot game. Therefore, in the normal game state where a left-handed game is encouraged as the first game in which the game ball is hit in the left side area of the game board 31, which is the first direction, the left-handed game is changed from the left-handed game to the left side area of the game board 31, which is the second direction. By changing to a weak right-handed game in which the game ball is launched to the left of the separation part 393 in the right side area, the special figure game necessary to easily generate the V winning jackpot game and generate the time-saving game state b is executed. It is possible to change the number of times to the maximum value.

On the other hand, the high-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table is used for judgment of validity based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric start opening 37 in the high-frequency support mode, i.e., fixed variable game state, a time-saving game state, or b time-saving game state. It is used to sort the type of special electric start game when the result is a win. In this high frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table, all the values of the special electric start type random number counter from 0 to 49 are short open special electric start games. That is, the special electric start game based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric start opening 37 in the variable probability game state, a time saving game state or b time saving game state which is a high frequency support mode, is based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric start V prize opening 383. It is difficult to enter the ball and it is difficult to generate a V-winning jackpot game.

By the way, in the variable probability game state, a time-saving game state, or b time-saving game state, which are high-frequency support modes, there is a strong right-handed game in which the game ball is launched to the right of the separation part 393 in the right area of the game board 31, which is the second direction. is encouraged. On the other hand, the V winning jackpot game can be generated by a weak right-handed game in which the game ball is hit to the left of the separation part 393 on the right side area of the game board 31, which is the second direction. However, even when attempting to play a hard right-handed game that is encouraged in the variable probability game state, a time-saving game state, or b time-saving game state, which are high-frequency support modes, stray balls etc. It is quite possible that it will flow down. In this case, when the game ball enters the special electric start opening 37, the special electric start game is executed, and in this special electric start game, the game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383, so that the game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383 against the player's will. A winning jackpot game may also be executed. Therefore, by making it difficult to generate a V winning jackpot game in the variable probability gaming state, a time saving gaming state or b time saving gaming state which is a high frequency support mode, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the time saving gaming state b against the player's will. The required number of executions of the special figure game is prevented from being changed to the maximum value.

In addition, in this embodiment, two different types of special electric start type distribution tables are provided depending on the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, that is, depending on whether the game ball is encouraged to be hit left-handed or right-handed. However, the same table may be used in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, that is, the game ball is encouraged to hit left-handed and right-handed. Depending on the situation, three or more types of tables may be set.

As shown in FIG. 162(D), the V winning jackpot type distribution table distributes the type of the V winning jackpot game to be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric V winning hole 383 in the special electric starting game. This is a table that is referenced by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 for this purpose, and is stored in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. In this V winning jackpot type distribution table, all values of the jackpot type random number counter from 0 to 19 are set to jackpot, and no miss is set. Therefore, when the game ball enters the V winning jackpot game of the special electric winning machine 38 in the special electric starting game, the V winning jackpot game is executed with a 100% probability. In this V-winning jackpot game, the special electric prize winning opening 381 of the special electric prize winning device 38 which is the second ball entry means is switched between the closed state and the open state by the special electric opening/closing door 382 which is the opening/closing means. Although a game ball can enter the big winning hole 381, the special electric V winning hole 383, which is a specific ball entry area of the special electric big winning device 38, which is the second ball entering means, is not opened. Therefore, in the V winning jackpot game, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the special electric V winning hole 383, and the occurrence of a new V winning jackpot game based on the entering of the game ball into the special electric V winning hole 383 is prohibited. Limited. Of course, it may be possible to make it possible to enter the game ball into the special electric V winning hole 383 in the V winning jackpot game, and in that case, by entering the game ball into the special electric V winning hole 383, a new ball can be entered. The system is configured so that a V-winning jackpot game will not occur.

By the way, when a game ball is entered into the special electric V winning hole 383 and the special electric ordinary winning hole 384 in the special electric big winning device 38 which is the second ball entering means, the number of prize balls is one. Therefore, the maximum recovery rate of game balls in the V winning jackpot game is 100% when all the game balls launched enter the special electric V winning hole 383 and the special electric regular winning hole 384 (the difference ball is 0 balls) ) Therefore, an increase in game balls cannot be expected in the V winning jackpot game. Further, the number of prize balls when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 37, which is the second ball entry means, is also one. Then, the special electric starting port 37 flows down the second flow path 392 by executing a weak right-handed game as a second game in which a game ball is launched into a game area on the left side of the separation part 393 in the right side area of the game board 31. A part of the game ball enters the ball. As a result, when the game balls are caused to flow down the second flow path 392 by executing a weak right-handed game, an increase in the number of game balls of the player is not expected, and the number of balls held by the player decreases. Therefore, allowing the game ball to flow down into the second flow path 392 is prevented from becoming a winning batting method.

In addition, in the V winning jackpot type distribution table of this embodiment, the distribution of jackpots is set to 100%; You can.

[Public figure game control process]
Here, FIG. 164 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the regular game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of FIG. 163. The general figure game control process is a process related to the general figure game which is a small profit game. In this common symbol game control process, processing for controlling the fluctuating display and stop display of common symbols on the common symbol display section 361 as a display means of the main display section 36 is executed. Hereinafter, the normal figure game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 164.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 164, in the normal pattern game control process, the MPU 41 first turns on the normal pattern fluctuation display flag, which indicates that the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (during execution of the normal pattern game as a profit game). It is determined whether there is one (step S1501). The normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to ON in step S1711 when the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern game) is started in the normal pattern fluctuation start process of FIG. 166 described later, and the normal pattern is stopped and displayed ( When the general figure game ends), it is set to OFF in step S1510 in the corresponding general figure game control process.

The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1507 when the flag during normal figure fluctuation display is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the common figure game is being executed. On the other hand, when the flag during normal pattern fluctuation display is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
When the normal figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal figure game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means, is open (profit It is determined whether or not the electric accessory opening flag indicating that the game is in progress (playing a normal figure winning game as a game) is on (step S1502). The electric accessory opening flag is set to ON in step S1811 when the electric accessory 315b is opened, and is set to ON in step S1818 when the electric accessory 315b is closed, in the normal figure winning game control process of FIG. Set to off.

When the electric accessory opening flag is on (step S1502: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a game for winning a regular symbol that is given as a gaming profit based on the result of the lottery for winning a regular symbol being a winning symbol for a regular symbol. If it is in the middle, the general figure game control process is ended. On the other hand, when the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the game per common figure is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
When the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the regular figure winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets a special figure indicating that the special figure jackpot game, which is a big profit game, is being executed. It is determined whether the figure jackpot game flag is on (step S1503). The special figure jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3406 when the special figure jackpot game is started in the later-described special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 173, and is set to ON in step S3452 when the special figure jackpot game ends. is set to off.

When the flag during the special pattern jackpot game is on (step S1503: Yes), that is, when the special pattern jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the general pattern game control process. That is, in this embodiment, the regular figure game as a profit game is not started while the special figure jackpot game is being executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, while the special figure jackpot game is being executed, the regular figure winning game as a profit game is not started. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the through gate 317, which is the first ball entry means, during the execution of the special jackpot game, the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means in the second ball entry means, is closed. There is no switching from the closed state to the open state, and the closed state of the second prize opening 315 in the second ball entry means is maintained.

Of course, the normal figure game which is a small profit game and the normal figure winning game which is a small profit game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed. In this case, the general figure game is shifted to the special figure jackpot game state according to the support mode type (high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode) before the special figure jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is started. According to the game state before the game, the validity information (random number counter C4 per regular symbol, type random number counter C5 per regular symbol, Based on the value of the figure variation type counter CS2), a determination of whether or not the normal figure winning lottery is made is executed. In other words, if the gaming state before the special figure jackpot game is executed is the probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state (a working-time saving gaming state, b working-time-saving gaming state) which is the high-frequency support mode which is the first auxiliary state control, Based on the common pattern winning/failing table for high-frequency support mode (see Figure 12 (B)), the common pattern per type table (see Figure 12 (D)), and the general pattern fluctuation table (not shown) (hit or miss on a regular map), type of hit on a regular map (hit on a long open regular map or hit on a short open regular map), and regular map fluctuation display time are set. On the other hand, if the game state before the special figure jackpot game is executed is the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode which is the second auxiliary state control, the regular figure winning success/failure table for the low frequency support mode (Figure 12 ( A)), based on the type table per type table (see Figure 12 (C)) and the variation table (not shown) per type per type, the lottery per type per type (normal hit or miss), type per type per type (long open) (per regular map or per short open regular map), and the regular map fluctuation display time are set.

On the other hand, when the special figure jackpot game flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game which is a large profit game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
If the special figure jackpot game flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, if the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 stores the general figure fluctuation pending number storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not the number of regular pattern fluctuations pending stored in the area SNA is 0 (step S1504). The MPU 41 ends the general pattern game control process when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), and when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 ends the processing. The process moves to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 executes normal pattern data setting processing for the normal pattern validity information stored in the general pattern pending storage area 412c (step S1505), The process moves to step S1506. Note that details of the ordinary map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 165.

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol fluctuation start process for causing the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 to execute a variable display of the normal symbol based on the information stored in the common symbol holding storage area 412c. , the general figure game control process ends. Note that the details of the ordinary figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 165.

<Step S1507>
If the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, if the normal pattern game, which is a small profit game, is being executed, the MPU 41 indicates that the special pattern jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is being executed. It is determined whether the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1507). The special figure jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3406 when the special figure jackpot game is started in the later-described special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 173, and is set to ON in step S3452 when the special figure jackpot game ends. is set to off.

When the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1507: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1509. On the other hand, when the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
If the special pattern jackpot game flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, if the special pattern jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is not being executed, the MPU 41 adjusts the normal pattern fluctuation display time from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display. It is determined whether the time has elapsed (step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed on the normal symbol display section 361 as a display means of the main display section 36 (end the common symbol game).

When the normal symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ends the common symbol game). If there is, the process moves to step S1509. On the other hand, if the normal pattern fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ends the normal pattern game). ), if it is not the timing to do so, the general figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S1509 to S1511>
If the normal figure fluctuation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), and if the special figure jackpot game flag is on (step S1507: Yes), that is, the special figure jackpot game starts while the normal figure game is being executed. or when the normal symbol fluctuation display time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to stop displaying the fluctuating normal symbol (end the common symbol game), the MPU 41, The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol according to the result of the lottery per common symbol corresponding to the common symbol game (step S1509), and the common symbol is displayed to indicate that the normal symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed (the common symbol game is being executed). The variable display flag is set to OFF (step S1510). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern variation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed, that is, the normal pattern game has ended (step S1511), and ends the normal pattern game control process.

In addition, the ordinary figure fluctuation stop display flag indicates whether or not it is the timing to start the ordinary figure winning game as a profit game (release the electric accessory 315b) in step S1801 of the ordinary figure winning game control process in FIG. 167, which will be described later. referenced to determine whether

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution of the normal pattern game is not limited to the timing to stop displaying the normal pattern that is variably displayed (end the normal pattern game) as the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern passes. When a special figure jackpot game is started during the game, the fluctuatingly displayed normal symbols are stopped and displayed (the normal figure game is ended). That is, when the special pattern jackpot game is started, the normal pattern game as a gaming profit is forcibly terminated before the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern passes. Of course, even when the special pattern jackpot game is started, the normal pattern game may be continuously executed until the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern has elapsed.

[Public figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general map data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1505 of FIG. 164. In the ordinary figure data setting process, the storage contents of the ordinary figure holding storage area 412c in the storage area of the main control device 4 in FIG. 11 are updated. The ordinary map data setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 165.

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in FIG. 165, in the normal pattern data setting process, the MPU 41 first subtracts 1 from the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X stored in the normal pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA (step S1601), and The general pattern validity information is moved from the holding area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE (step S1602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the common symbol validity information stored in the common symbol second holding area SE2 to the common symbol fourth holding area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the common figure validity information of the common figure second holding area SE2 is moved to the common figure first holding area SE1, and the common figure correctness information of the common figure third holding area SE3 is moved to the common figure second holding area SE3. The area SE2 is moved to the area SE2, and the general pattern validity information of the general pattern fourth holding area SE4 is moved to the general pattern third holding area SE3.

[General figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of FIG. 164. In the normal symbol variation start process, the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display section 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery results in the common symbol winning lottery. Hereinafter, the normal pattern fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to FIG. 166.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 166, in the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the MPU 41 provides high-frequency support as the first profit game state control in which the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means, is the first auxiliary state control. It is determined whether the mode is (variable probability gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or b time-saving gaming state) (step S1701). Whether or not it is high-frequency support is determined by whether any of the variable probability game state flag, a time-saving game state flag, and b time-saving game state flag is set to ON.

In addition, the probability variable gaming state flag is set to ON when the probability variable gaming state is transferred from another gaming state to the probability variable gaming state in the gaming state transition processing explained with reference to FIGS. 179 to 183 described later. It is set to off when transitioning to another gaming state. In addition, the time-saving game state a is set to ON when the time-saving game state a is transferred from another game state to the time-saving game state a in the game state transition process explained with reference to FIGS. 179 to 183, which will be described later. This is set to OFF when the state is transferred to another gaming state. In addition, the b time saving game state flag is set to ON when transitioning from another gaming state to the b time saving gaming state in the game state transition processing explained with reference to FIGS. It is set to OFF when transitioning from a gaming state to another gaming state.

If the MPU 41 is in the high-frequency support mode (step S1701: Yes), that is, in the variable probability gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or b time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1702, and if it is not in the high-frequency support mode ( Step S1701: No), that is, when the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means, is in the normal gaming state, which is the low-frequency support mode as the second profit gaming state control, which is the second auxiliary state control, The process moves to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
When the game is in the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state that is the high-frequency support mode (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the common symbol hits based on the high-frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is normal based on the high-frequency support mode per-normal pattern propriety table (see FIG. 12(B)) and the high-frequency support mode per-normal pattern classification table (see FIG. 12(D)). Whether the values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal drawing validity information stored in the normal drawing execution area SAE of the drawing holding storage area 412c, correspond to the normal drawing winning. Make a judgment as to whether or not it is true or not.

On the other hand, if the normal gaming state is the low-frequency support mode (step S1701: No), a determination is made as to whether or not a common symbol has been hit based on the low-frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is normal based on the low-frequency support mode per-normal pattern propriety table (see FIG. 12(A)) and the low-frequency support mode per-normal pattern classification table (see FIG. 12(C)). Whether or not the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal drawing correctness information stored in the normal drawing execution area SAE of the drawing holding storage area 412c, correspond to the winning of a normal drawing. A judgment is made as to whether the statement is correct or not.

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
When the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is a common symbol (step S1702 or S1703), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the determination is a long opening in which the second prize opening 315, which is the specific ball entry area in the second ball entry means, is opened for a long time. It is determined whether or not it is a common figure (step S1704). If the result of the judgment is that the long open standard is a hit (step S1704: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the long open standard hit flag indicating that the result of the check is that the long open standard is a hit ( Step S1705), the process moves to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the validity determination is that the long open normal pattern is not hit (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1706.

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
If the result of the win/fail determination is not a long open regular hit (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the win/fail determination is that the second winning hole 315, which is the specific ball entry area in the second ball entry means, is opened short. It is determined whether or not it is a short open regular hit (step S1706). When the result of the validity determination is that the short open regular pattern is hit (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the short open regular pattern hit flag indicating that the result of the validity determination is the short open regular pattern hit ( Step S1707), the process moves to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the validity determination is not a short open regular hit (step S1706: No), that is, if the result of the validity determination is a failure, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
When the long open general map hit flag is set to on (step S1705), when the short open general map hit flag is set to on (step S1707), or when the result of the validity determination is negative (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, which is the variable display time of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display section 361, which is the display means in the main display section 36, with reference to the common symbol fluctuation display table (not shown). Execute the general figure fluctuation pattern setting process. As mentioned above, the common pattern fluctuation display table (not shown) includes the high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation table that is referred to when in the high frequency support mode, and the low frequency fluctuation table that is referred to when in the low frequency support mode. Support mode includes normal figure fluctuation display table. Therefore, in the general pattern fluctuation pattern setting process, the general pattern fluctuation pattern is set based on the general pattern fluctuation display table according to the support mode type. In addition, since the high frequency support mode ordinary symbol fluctuation display table is set so that the average time of the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol is shorter than the low frequency support mode ordinary symbol fluctuation display table, the high frequency support mode In this case, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the time during which the regular figure game, which is given as a gaming profit based on the entry of a game ball into the through gate 317, is executed is shortened.

Then, in addition to the general pattern fluctuation pattern set in step S1708, the MPU 41 receives the result of the validity determination in step S1702 or S1703 (result of the general pattern winning lottery) and the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode). A general figure fluctuation pattern command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of the support mode (different from the support mode) (step S1709), and the process moves to step S1710.

Note that the general figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, in the audio lamp control device 5, based on the general pattern fluctuation pattern command, an effect corresponding to the general pattern game, for example, an effect indicating that the general pattern game is being executed, is displayed on the symbol display section 341 etc. An effect showing the results of a drawing or lottery for a common map is executed.

Further, the general pattern fluctuation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of at least the general pattern fluctuation pattern, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern result or the type of support mode is not necessarily the general pattern fluctuation pattern command. There is no need to notify the audio lamp control device 5. For example, the result of the lottery for common symbols can be determined by setting the lottery result command for common symbols when the judgment is made in step S1702 or S1703, and the type of support mode can be set to high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode. When the transition is made, the voice lamp control device 5 may be notified by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of support mode after the transition.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts the normal symbol game, which is a small profit game, by starting the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 displays a normal pattern fluctuation display indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, that is, a normal pattern game that is given as a gaming profit based on the entry of the game ball into the through gate 317 is being executed. The medium flag is set to on (step S1711), and the normal pattern fluctuation start process is ended.

In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is referred to in step S1501 in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 163 to determine whether the normal pattern game is being executed (during the normal pattern fluctuation display).

[Game control processing per regular map]
Here, FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. 163. The normal figure winning game control process is a process related to the normal figure winning game which is a profit game. In this ordinary figure winning game control process, when the result of the ordinary figure winning lottery is a win, the second ball entering means is opened and closed by controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 315b which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means. Processing is executed to switch between a closed state that restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315, which is a specific ball entry area, and an open state that allows the entry of gaming balls into the second winning opening 315. . Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 167, the game control process per normal symbol will be explained.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 167, in the normal pattern per game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern game has ended) is on. (Step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to start a game with common symbols, which is a small profit game. In addition, the normal symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1511 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game control process of FIG. 167.

If the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the timing at which the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1802. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), in other words, the MPU 41 controls the normal pattern winning game which is given as a gaming profit based on the result of the normal pattern winning lottery. If it is not the timing to start, the process moves to step S1813.

<Step S1802>
If the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the timing when the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 determines that the special pattern jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is being executed. It is determined whether or not the special figure jackpot game flag indicating the flag is on (step S1802). The special figure jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3406 when the special figure jackpot game is started in the later-described special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 173, and is set to ON in step S3452 when the special figure jackpot game ends. is set to off.

If the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1802: Yes), that is, if the special figure jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the regular figure winning game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, when a special figure jackpot game that is a large profit game is being executed, a general figure winning lottery based on the game ball entering the through gate 317, which is the first ball entry means, is executed. Even if the result is a normal figure win, a normal figure winning game which is a small profit game is not started. That is, in this embodiment, while the special figure jackpot game is being executed, the regular figure winning game is not started, and the second ball entering means is opened and closed by the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means. The second winning a prize opening 315, which is the specific ball entry area, is never switched between the closed state and the open state. Of course, a new normal pattern game or a normal pattern winning game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed. On the other hand, during the execution of the special figure game, a normal figure winning game can be started, and a game ball can enter the second winning hole 315. As a result, the right to execute the second special figure game can be reserved due to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 315 during the execution of the special figure game, so the high frequency support mode (probable variable game state, It becomes possible to repeatedly execute the second special figure game without giving excessive stress to the player in the game state and the time-saving game state b).

On the other hand, when the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
If the special figure jackpot game flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, if the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the long open regular figure hit flag is set to on. (Step S1803). The long open flat map hit flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per flat map is a long open flat map. It is set to ON in step S1705 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished winning game, which is the small profit game, is a long open winning lottery. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1804 when the long open general map hit flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), and when the long open general map hit flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), the process moves to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long open general map winning flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the general winning lottery for the completed general map game is a long open general winning map, the MPU 41 The opening time of the electric accessory 315b which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means in the game per long open normal figure given (the opening time of the game ball to the second prize opening 315 which is the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means) A value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the possible entry time), is set as the value of the open time counter (step S1804). The opening time counter is referred to in step S1815 of the normal symbol game control process in order to determine the return timing of the electric accessory 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open standard hit flag to OFF (step S1805), and moves the process to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long open double hit flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the lottery to win a short open double for the completed double open game is not a long open double hit, the MPU 41 selects a short open double hit. It is determined whether the hit flag is set on (step S1806). The short open regular map winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per regular map is a short open regular map, and when the result of the lottery per regular map is a short open regular map, the short open regular map hit flag in Figure 167 It is set to ON in step S1707 of the figure fluctuation start process. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished winning game, which is the small profit game, is a short open winning lottery. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1807 when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), and when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to OFF (step S1806: No), that is, if the result of the winning lottery for the finished coin game is a loss, the process moves to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the flag for winning a short open regular map is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the winning lottery for the completed regular map game is a winning short open regular map, the MPU 41 The opening time of the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means in the short-open normal drawing game, which is given as a gaming profit based on the result of the lottery winning the normal drawing (the opening time of the electric accessory 315b of the second ball entry means) A value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the time allowed for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315 which is the specific ball entry area, is set as the value of the open time counter (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open regular pattern hit flag to OFF (step S1808), and moves the process to step S1809.

<Steps S1809 to S1811>
If the result of the winning lottery is a win and the flag indicating the winning type (long open winning flag or short opening winning flag) is set to OFF (step S1805 or S1808), the MPU 41 The electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means, is activated (step S1809). As a result, the second winning hole 315, which is the specific ball entry area, is switched from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole 315. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory release command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is released (step S1810), and also sets an electric accessory release command that indicates that the electric accessory 315b is released. The electric accessory opening flag is set to on (step S1811), and the process moves to step S1812.

Note that the electric accessory release command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. From this, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an effect indicating that the electric accessory 315b is released, for example, on the symbol display section 341 serving as a display means, based on the electric accessory release command. can.

<Step S1812>
If the result of the winning lottery is a win, and the process of opening the electric accessory 315b is executed (steps S1803 to S1811), or both the long open regular winning flag and the short open regular winning flag are turned off. If set (if the result of the lottery winning the normal symbol is a loss) (step S1803 and step S1806 are both No), the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (the game ball enters the through gate 317). The normal pattern variation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern game given as a gaming profit based on the ball has ended is set to OFF (step S1812), and the normal pattern per game control process is ended.

<Step S1813>
When the ordinary figure fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 sets the electric accessory that is set to ON when the electric accessory 315b is released in step S1811 of the ordinary figure per game control process. It is determined whether the open flag is set to on (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game with common symbols, which is a small profit game, is being executed. When the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the common map winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1814. On the other hand, when the electric accessory opening flag is set to OFF (step S1813: No), that is, when the game per common symbol is not being executed, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per common symbol.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
When the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the game per common symbol is being executed, the MPU 41 sets the flag in step S1804 or S1807 of the corresponding common symbol game control process. 1 is subtracted from the value of the open time counter (step S1814), and it is determined whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815). That is, the MPU 41 returns the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means, at the timing to switch the second winning hole 315, which is the specific ball entering area of the second ball entering means, from the open state to the closed state. Determine whether it exists or not. If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1816. On the other hand, when the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, when it is not the timing to return the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per normal symbol.

<Steps S1816 to S1818>
When the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 returns the electric accessory 315b (step S1816). As a result, the second winning hole 315, which is the specific ball entering area, is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory closing command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is closed (step S1817), and also sets an electric accessory closing command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is closed (step S1817). The accessory opening flag is set to OFF (step S1818), and the normal figure game control process is ended.

Note that the electric accessory closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 is able to terminate, for example, the performance that is executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like to indicate that the electric accessory is open, based on the electric accessory closing command.

[Special figure game control processing]
Here, FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. 163. The special figure game control process is a process related to a special figure game which is a small profit game. In this special figure game control process, the storage contents of the special figure holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is controlled, for example. The variable display and stop display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 which is the display means or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 which is the display means is controlled. Hereinafter, the special figure game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 168.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 168, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether the special figure jackpot game flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is being executed is on. The special figure jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3406 when the special figure jackpot game is started in the special figure jackpot game control process in FIG. 173, which will be described later. When the game ends, it is set to OFF in step S3452.

When the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1901: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special figure game control process. That is, in this embodiment, when the special figure jackpot game which is a large profit game is being executed, the special figure game which is a small profit game is not started. Of course, the special figure game may be started while the special figure jackpot game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the special figure jackpot game flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, if the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the first special symbol It is determined whether the special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that the game or the second special figure game is being executed is on (step S1902). The special symbol variation display flag is set to ON in step S2107 when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 170, which will be described later, and the special symbol game control When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the process, it is set to off in step S1910.

If the special symbol variable display flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is variable and displayed (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1906. On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when the special symbol jackpot game is not being executed, the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed). , the process moves to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the special pattern fluctuation display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, if the special pattern jackpot game is not being executed and the special pattern is not being displayed in a variable manner (the special pattern game is being executed), the MPU 41 The first special figure reservation number N is stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the figure reservation storage area 412b, and the second special figure reservation number M is stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB. It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1903).

When both the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M are 0 (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 suspends the right to execute the first special figure game and the second special figure reservation. If there is no reservation of the right to play the game, the special figure game control process is ended. On the other hand, if either the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 suspends the right to execute the first special figure game; If at least one of the rights to execute the second special figure game is reserved, the process moves to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If either the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, the right to execute the first special figure game is reserved and the second special figure game is held. If there is at least one of the reservations of the right to execute the ( Step S1904), the process moves to step S1905. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 169.

<Step S1905>
In step S1905, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 (first special symbol game or second special symbol). A special figure fluctuation start process is executed to execute the figure game, and the special figure game control process is ended. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170.

<Step S1906>
When the special symbol fluctuation display flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol. From the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the second special symbol game, the special symbol for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set in the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process of step S2104 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 170, which will be described later. It is determined whether the figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1906). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the special symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner and to end the special symbol game which is a small profit game.

When the special symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), that is, the timing to stop displaying the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game. If so, the process moves to step S1907. On the other hand, if the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: No), the MPU 41 stops and displays the special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is not the timing to end the figure game, the special figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S1907 to S1910>
If the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), that is, at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner and ending the special symbol game. In some cases, the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, which is the display means of the main display section 36, in a manner according to the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game. The special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1907). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1908), and also sets the special symbol game count flag on (step S1908). Step S1909). This special figure game number count flag is used to calculate the remaining number of special figure games in the a time-saving game state and the time-saving game state b, and the time-saving game state b in step S3301 of the special figure game number management process in FIG. 171, which will be described later. It is referred to in order to judge whether or not to subtract the remaining number of special figure games until the game is played. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag to ON (step S1909). This special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is output via the No. 4 terminal in a plurality of output terminal sections (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101 (see FIG. 157(A)) in step S3819 of the signal output process described later. It is referred to in order to determine whether or not to output a special figure fluctuation stop signal as an identification signal to the outside of the gaming machine 10. Then, a flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed) is set to OFF (step S1910), and the special symbol game control process is performed. end.

[Special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1904 of the special symbol game control process of FIG. 168. In the special figure data setting process, the storage contents of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special figure data setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 169.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 169, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game, which is a small profit game, is 0. When the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the first special figure reservation for the first special figure game which is a small profit game without the second special figure reservation for the second special figure game. If there is a figure pending (see step S1903 in the special figure game control process in FIG. 168), the process moves to step S2002. On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), that is, if there is a second special figure reservation for the second special figure game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2005. That is, the MPU 41 starts the second special pattern game with priority over the first special pattern game by determining whether the second special pattern reservation number M for the second special pattern game is 0 or not.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special pattern game is started with priority over the first special pattern game, but the first special pattern game is started with priority over the second special pattern game. Also, the special figure game is started in the order in which the game balls enter the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 (order of reservation), and either the first special figure game or the second special figure game is started. may be executed. In addition, the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other without setting a priority order for starting the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, and the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other. The second special figure game may be executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation of special figures).

<Steps S2002 to S2004>
When the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 stores the first special figure reservation stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. The number N is subtracted by 1 (step S2002), and the special symbol validity information is moved from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol validity information of the second to fourth reservation areas REA2 to REA4 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in step S2004, the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REA2 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2. It is moved to the reservation area REA2, and the special symbol validity information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. When the process of step S2004 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2008.

<Steps S2005 to S2007>
If the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 stores the second special figure reservation number stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. M is subtracted by 1 (step S2005), and the special symbol validity information is moved from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2006). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB one by one (step S2007). Specifically, in step S2007, the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the fourth reservation area REB2. The special symbol validity information in the reservation area REB4 is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S2007 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2008.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 41 controls the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA, or the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REB4 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB. A special figure shift command indicating that the special figure validity information has been shifted is set in the RAM 412, and the special figure data setting process is ended. This special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 changes the number of pending displays corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the second special symbol pending displayed on the symbol display section 341 based on the special symbol shift command. be able to.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 of the special symbol game control process of FIG. 168. In the special symbol variation start process, it is a small profit game by starting the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362, which is the display means, or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363. The first special game or the second special figure game (special figure game) is started, and various processes accompanying the start of the special figure game are executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to FIG. 170.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 170, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is the high probability mode. The high probability mode is a variable probability game state in which the control state of the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means, is the high frequency support mode of the first auxiliary state control. Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined by whether or not the variable probability gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state which is the high probability mode is set on. The variable probability gaming state flag is set to ON when the gaming state is transferred from the variable probability jackpot gaming state to the variable probability gaming state in step S3722 of FIG. 179 in the gaming state transition process described later, and the gaming state is set to is set to OFF when transitioning from a variable probability gaming state to a variable probability jackpot gaming state or a normal jackpot gaming state.

If the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state that is a high probability mode (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2102, and if the gaming state is not a variable probability gaming state that is a high probability mode (step S2101: No). ), that is, when the gaming state is a low probability mode, i.e., the time-saving gaming state, b, the time-saving gaming state, or the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S2103.

Note that the time-saving game state a and the time-saving game state b are high-frequency support modes in which the control state of the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means, is the first auxiliary state control. On the other hand, in the normal game state, the control state of the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means, is a low frequency support mode in which the second auxiliary state control is performed.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
If the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state that is a high probability mode (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the high probability mode is appropriate or not, which is saved according to the gaming setting value in step S2410 in the gaming setting value change process of FIG. The table (see FIG. 9(B)) is read out, and the validity determination is executed based on the high probability mode validity table (step S2102).

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a variable probability gaming state that is a high probability mode (step S2101: No), that is, if the gaming state is a time saving gaming state, b, a time saving gaming state or a normal gaming state that is a low probability mode, the MPU 41 , In step S2410 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 35, the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 9(A)) stored according to the game setting value is read out, and the success/failure of the low probability mode is determined based on the low probability mode success/failure table. The determination is performed (step S2103).

In this way, in this embodiment, the special drawing jackpot lottery (judgment) is based on whether the mode related to the special drawing jackpot drawing when the special drawing game is started is a high probability mode or a low probability mode. is executed. In other words, in this embodiment, a high probability and a low probability are set as the probability of a jackpot as a result of the special drawing jackpot lottery (special drawing jackpot probability). It is not affected by the execution of the starting game, the V-winning jackpot game, or the regular winning game. Therefore, in this embodiment, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to execution of the game for a specific period regarding the special symbol jackpot probability.

In addition, in steps S2102 and S2103, the propriety determination is performed based on the high probability mode propriety table or the low probability mode propriety table that is saved in step S2410 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 35 according to the game setting value. However, in steps S2102 and S2103, after reading the game setting values saved in step S2408 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 35, a high probability mode propriety table or a low probability mode propriety table is created according to the game setting values may be selected one by one to determine the validity.

<Step S2104>
When the judgment is made in step S2102 or S2103, the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in the special symbol game. The symbol fluctuation display time is set as a special symbol fluctuation pattern (step S2104).

In addition, the variable display time (special figure variation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is a small profit game is a special symbol variation when the result of the judgment in step S2102 or S2103 is a normal jackpot. It is set based on the type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 10(A)), and if the result of the judgment in step S2102 or S2103 is a probability variable jackpot, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation table are set. It is set based on the jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 10(B)), and if the result of the judgment in step S2102 or S2103 is a loss, the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 and the loss fluctuation table (see FIG. 10(B) C)).

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 41 sends a special figure fluctuation pattern command that includes the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game, which is the result of the validity determination in step S2102 or S2103, and the special figure fluctuation pattern set in step S2104. is set in the RAM 412, and the process moves to step S2106. The special figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute the special pattern game performance on the pattern display section 341, which is the display means, based on the special pattern variation pattern command.

As mentioned above, when the result of the special drawing jackpot lottery is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "A" to the special drawing fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Any one of "A01" to "A03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the special drawing jackpot lottery is a "5R sure-change jackpot", the MPU 41 generates "B01" with "B" attached to the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" indicating that it is a 5R sure-change jackpot. - "B03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. Furthermore, when the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery is a "16R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "C" to the special pattern variation patterns "01" to "03" with "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, "C01". - "C03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the special drawing jackpot lottery is a "loss", the MPU 41 selects "D01" to "D08" with a "D" indicating a loss to the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "08". Either of these is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is "lost", the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of miss (front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete miss) in the special figure variation pattern command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, which is the display means in the main display section 36, to display a special symbol that is a small profit game. The game is started and the process moves to step S2107.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets on the special symbol variation display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed), and ends the special symbol variation start process. The special symbol fluctuation display flag indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol This is referred to in order to determine whether or not a figure game is being executed.

[Special figure game number management process]
Here, FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game number management process executed in step S1406-1 in the main process of FIG. 163. In the special figure game number management process, based on the execution of the special figure game which is a small profit game, the remaining time saving game count in the time saving game state (a time saving game state and b time saving game state) and the first profit game state control The process of managing the remaining number of special figure games, which is the second auxiliary state control, until the b time-saving game state is generated is executed. Hereinafter, the special figure game number management process will be explained with reference to FIG. 171.

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
As shown in FIG. 171, in the special figure game number management process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the special figure fluctuation count flag is set to on (step S3301). The special symbol fluctuation count flag is set to ON when the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 is stopped and displayed in step S1909 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. Ru.

When the special figure variation count flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special figure variation count flag to OFF (step S3302), and moves the process to step S3303. On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation count flag is set to OFF (step S3301: No), the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game number management process.

<Step S3303>
In step S3303, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game whose fluctuation has been stopped is a normal jackpot. If the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special figure game whose variation has been stopped is a normal jackpot (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3304, and selects the special figure for the special figure game whose variation has been stopped. If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a normal jackpot (step S3303: No), the process moves to step S3311.

<Steps S3304 and S3305>
If the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery for the special pattern game whose variation has been stopped is a normal jackpot (S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the ceiling activation remaining number indicating the remaining number of special pattern games until the time-saving gaming state b occurs. The maximum value of 1000 is set as the value of the number of times counter (step S3304). That is, in this embodiment, the second auxiliary state control is performed after the end of the normal jackpot game, and after the end of the normal jackpot game, the special chart jackpot game is not executed (the state is shifted to the special chart jackpot game state). b), when the special figure game is executed 1000 times as a small profit game, the time-saving game state b is generated. The MPU 41 also sets a ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag indicating that the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set (second auxiliary state control) (step S3305), and returns the process to step S3306. Transition.

<Steps S3306 and S3307>
In step S3306, the MPU 41 sets the maximum value 100 as the value of the a time saving remaining number of times counter indicating the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the a time saving gaming state as the second profit gaming state control. That is, in this embodiment, after the end of the normal jackpot game, the time saving game state is transferred to a time-saving gaming state, which is given as a gaming profit, and the special drawing jackpot game, which is the large profit game, is not executed (transferring to the special drawing jackpot gaming state). When the special figure game is executed 100 times, the time-saving game state a is ended and the game mode is shifted to the normal game state as the first profit game state control. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the a remaining time saving counter set flag indicating that the remaining time saving counter a is set (step S3307), and moves the process to step S3308.

<Step S3308>
In step S3308, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter is set is set on. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3309 if the b time saving remaining number counter set flag is set to on (step S3308: Yes), and if the b time saving remaining number counter set flag is set to off (step S3308: Yes). S3308: No), the special figure game number management process ends.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
When the b time saving remaining number of times counter set flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the value of the remaining b time saving remaining number counter that can be executed in the b time saving gaming state as the first profit gaming state control. is cleared (step S3309), and the b time saving remaining number counter flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter is set is set to OFF (step S3310), and the special figure game number management process is ended.

<Step S3311>
If the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special figure game whose fluctuation has been stopped is not a normal jackpot (S3303: No), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special figure game whose fluctuation has been stopped is a probability-variable jackpot (5R probability-variable It is determined whether it is a jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S3311). If the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special figure game whose variation has been stopped is a guaranteed variable jackpot (S3311: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3312, and determines the special figure jackpot for the special figure game whose variation has been stopped. If the lottery result is not a probability-variable jackpot (S3311: No), the process moves to step S3318 in FIG. 172.

<Step S3312>
If the result of the special drawing jackpot lottery for the special drawing game whose variation has been stopped is a probability variable jackpot (S3311: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the ceiling activation remaining number counter indicating that it is the second auxiliary state control. It is determined whether the remaining activation count counter set flag is on (step S3312). This ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag indicates that the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery for the special pattern game whose fluctuation has been stopped is a normal jackpot (step S3303: Yes), and the second ceiling activation remaining number counter is set. When it is set as auxiliary state control (step S3304), it is set to ON in step S3305 of the special symbol game number management process.

If the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is on (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3313, and if the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is off (step S3312: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3313. The process moves to step S3315.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter set flag is on (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 41 clears the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter indicating the remaining number of special symbol games that need to be executed before the b time saving game state occurs. At the same time (step S3313), the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag indicating that the second auxiliary state control is in which the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set is set to OFF (step S3314), and the process moves to step S3315. .

<Step S3315>
If the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is set to OFF (step S3314), or if the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter set flag is OFF (step S3311: No), the MPU 41 determines that the time saving remaining number counter a is set. It is determined whether or not the remaining time saving counter set flag a indicating that the time saving number is on is set on (step S3315: Yes).

If the a time saving remaining count counter set flag is set to ON (step S3315: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3316. On the other hand, if a time saving remaining number of times counter set flag is set to off (step S3315: No), the processes of steps S3308 to S3310 described above are executed, and if b time saving remaining number of times counter is set, The b time saving remaining number of times counter is cleared, and the b time saving remaining number of times counter set flag is set to OFF, and the special symbol fluctuation number of times management process is ended.

<Steps S3316 and S3317>
If the a time saving remaining number of times counter set flag is set to ON (step S3315: Yes), the MPU 41 clears the value of the remaining a time saving remaining number of times counter that can be executed in the a time saving gaming state (step S3316). , by setting the remaining time saving counter flag a, which indicates that the remaining time saving counter a is set, to OFF (step S3317), and executing the processes of steps S3308 to S3310 described above, the remaining time saving counter b is set to OFF. If it is set, the b time saving remaining number of times counter is cleared, the b time saving remaining number of times counter set flag is set to OFF, and the special figure game number management process is ended.

<Step S3318>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game whose variation has been stopped is not a probability variable jackpot (step S3311: No), as shown in FIG. 172, the ceiling activation remaining number counter indicates that the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set. It is determined whether the set flag is set on (step S3318).

If the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter set flag is on (step S3318: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3319, and if the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter set flag is off (step S3318: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3319. The process moves to step S3325.

<Steps S3319 and S3320>
If the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is on (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter (step S3319), and the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0. It is determined whether or not (step S3320). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to generate the b time-saving gaming state, which is the first profit gaming state control.

If the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3320: Yes), that is, if the b time-saving gaming state is to be generated, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3321. On the other hand, if the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3320: No), that is, if the time saving game state b is not generated, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3325.

<Steps S3321 to S3324>
When the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3320: Yes), that is, when the b time-saving game state is to be generated, the MPU 41 calculates the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the b time-saving game state. The maximum value of 1000 is set as the value of the time saving remaining number counter shown in b (step S3321). That is, in this embodiment, 1000 times is set as the maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the time saving game state b. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter is set (step S3322).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the b time-saving game state transition flag for transitioning the game state to the b-time saving game state (step S3323). This b time-saving gaming state transition flag is referred to in step S3726 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 180, which will be described later, in order to determine whether to shift to the b-time saving gaming state. Then, the MPU 41 sets the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag to OFF (step S3324), and ends the special symbol game number management process.

<Step S3325>
When the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is off (step S3318: No), or when the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3320: Yes), that is, when the time-saving gaming state b is not generated. , the MPU 41 determines whether or not the a remaining time saving counter set flag indicating that the remaining time saving counter a is set (step S3325).

The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3326 when the a time saving remaining number of times counter set flag is on (step S3325: Yes), and when the a time saving remaining number of times counter set flag is off (step S3325: No), the process proceeds to step S3326. The process moves to step S3330.

<Steps S3326 and S3327>
If the a time saving remaining number counter set flag is on (step S3325: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the a time saving remaining number counter (step S3326), and the value of the a time saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0. It is determined whether or not (step S3327). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the time-saving gaming state a and transition to the normal gaming state.

If the value of the a time saving remaining number of times counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3327: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the a time saving gaming state and transition to the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3328. Transition. On the other hand, if the value of the a time saving remaining number of times counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3327: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the a time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game number management process.

<Steps S3328 and S3329>
If the value of the a time saving remaining number of times counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3327: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the a time saving gaming state and transition to the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 changes the gaming state to the normal gaming state. The normal game state transition flag to be transitioned to the state is set on (step S3328). This normal gaming state transition flag is referred to in step S3731 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 181, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to transition to the normal gaming state. Then, the MPU 41 sets the a time saving remaining number counter set flag to OFF (step S3329), and ends the special symbol game number management process.

<Step S3330>
If the remaining time saving counter set flag a is off (step S3325: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining time saving counter set flag b, which indicates that the remaining time saving counter is set, is set to on. (Step S3330).

If the b time saving remaining number counter set flag is on (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3331, and if the b time saving remaining number counter set flag is off (step S3325: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3331. The special figure game number management process ends.

<Steps S3331 and S3332>
If the b time saving remaining number counter set flag is on (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the b time saving remaining number counter (step S3331), and the value of the b time saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0. It is determined whether or not (step S3332). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to end the b-time saving gaming state and transition to the normal gaming state.

When the value of the b time saving remaining number of times counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3332: Yes), that is, when the b time saving gaming state is ended and the transition is made to the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3333. On the other hand, if the value of the b time saving remaining number of times counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3332: No), that is, if the b time saving game state is not to be ended, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game number management process.

<Steps S3333 and S3334>
If the value of the b time saving remaining number of times counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3332: Yes), that is, if the b time saving gaming state is to be ended and transitioned to the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state. The normal game state transition flag is set on (step S3333). This normal gaming state transition flag is referred to in step S3731 in FIG. 181 or step S3737 in FIG. 182 of the gaming state transition process described later to determine whether to transition to the normal gaming state. Then, the MPU 41 sets the b time saving remaining number counter set flag to OFF (step S3334), and ends the special figure game number management process.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set when a special pattern fluctuation (special pattern game) in which the result of the jackpot lottery is usually a jackpot ends, but the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set when the result of the jackpot lottery is usually a jackpot. It may also be set when a special pattern variation (special pattern game) in which the result is a probability variable jackpot ends. Further, the ceiling activation remaining number counter may be set not at the end of the special figure variation (special figure game) but at the end of the normal jackpot game (at the time of transition from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state a).

[Special figure jackpot game control process]
Here, FIGS. 173 to 176 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the special figure jackpot game control process executed in step S1407-1 in the main process of FIG. 163. In the special figure jackpot game control process, processing for controlling the progress of the special figure jackpot game, such as opening and closing control of the opening/closing door 319 provided in the variable prize opening 316, is executed. Hereinafter, the special figure jackpot game control process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176.

<Step S3400>
As shown in FIG. 173, in the special pattern jackpot game control process of this embodiment, first, the MPU 41 turns on the special pattern jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the special pattern jackpot game as a large profit game is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step S3400). The special figure jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3406 of the special figure jackpot game control process when starting the special figure jackpot game, and is set to ON in step S3406 of the special figure jackpot game control process when ending the special figure jackpot game. It is set to off in step S3452.

When the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3400: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3411. On the other hand, when the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3400: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3401.

<Step S3401>
When the special pattern jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3400: No), that is, when the special pattern jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 turns on the special pattern fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special pattern is stopped and displayed. It is determined whether there is one (step S3401). The special symbol fluctuation stop flag is set to ON in step S1908 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. 168 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and is set to ON in step S1908 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. It is set to OFF in step S2108 in the special figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 can start the special pattern jackpot game as a large profit game by determining whether or not the special pattern jackpot game as a small profit game that has been started when the special pattern jackpot game is not being executed is finished. Determine whether the timing is right.

If the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is on (step S3401: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the special symbol jackpot game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3402. On the other hand, if the special pattern fluctuation stop flag is off (step S3401: No), that is, if the special pattern jackpot game cannot be started because the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 41 executes the special pattern jackpot game control process. finish.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game as a small profit game is being executed), the special symbol jackpot game as a large profit game is not started (executed), but the special symbol The special figure jackpot game may be started (executed) while is being displayed in a variable manner (while the special figure game is being executed). For example, a special figure jackpot game is started (executed) while the first special figure is displayed in a variable manner, and conversely, a special figure jackpot game is started (executed) while the second special figure is displayed in a variable manner. You can. Specifically, as mentioned above, by making it possible to change the first special pattern and the second special pattern simultaneously, the second special pattern game can be changed while the special pattern jackpot game is being executed for the first special pattern game. The first special figure game may be executed during execution of the special figure jackpot game for the second special figure game. Furthermore, the special figure jackpot game for the first special figure game and the special figure jackpot game for the second special figure game may be executed simultaneously, or the special figure jackpot game for the first special figure game and the special figure jackpot game for the second special figure game may be executed simultaneously. If the start conditions for the other special pattern jackpot game are met during the execution of one of the special pattern jackpot games for the special pattern game, the other special pattern jackpot game will be executed after the end of one special pattern jackpot game. A game may be started.

<Step S3402>
If the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is on (step S3401: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol fluctuation stop flag to off (step S3402), and returns the process to step S3403. Transition.

<Step S3403>
In step S3403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery for the special pattern game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a special pattern jackpot. Whether or not the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery for the special pattern game in which the special pattern is stopped and displayed is a special pattern jackpot is stored in the special pattern execution area AE of the special pattern holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 41, for example. The judgment is made based on the special figure winning/failure information for the special figure jackpot lottery.

When the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery for the special pattern game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a special pattern jackpot (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3404. On the other hand, if the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery for the special pattern game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is not a special pattern jackpot (step S3403: No), that is, if the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery is a loss, The figure jackpot game control process ends.

<Step S3404>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a special pattern jackpot (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 starts the special pattern jackpot game and determines the type of the special pattern jackpot game (probability variation). A special figure jackpot game start command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of a jackpot game or a normal jackpot game (step S3404), and the process moves to step S3405. The special figure jackpot game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute a special pattern jackpot game production according to the special pattern jackpot game type based on the special pattern jackpot game start command.

<Step S3405>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 sets on the special figure jackpot game start flag indicating the start of the special figure jackpot game as a large profit game, and moves the process to step S3406. The special figure jackpot game start flag is referred to in step S3701 in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 179, which will be described later, when determining whether to shift the gaming state to the probability variable jackpot gaming state or the normal jackpot gaming state.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 41 sets on the special figure jackpot game flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game is being executed, and moves the process to step S3407. The special figure jackpot game in progress flag is used in step S3400 of the special figure jackpot game control process as well as step S1503 of the regular figure game control process in FIG. 164 in order to determine whether or not the special figure jackpot game is being executed. and S1507, step S1802 of the normal figure game control process in FIG. 167, and step S1901 of the special figure game control process in FIG. 168.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 41 sets a round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and shifts the process to step S3408. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round number counter to "5" when the result of the special map jackpot lottery is a 5R definite variable jackpot and 5R regular jackpot, and when the result of the special diagram jackpot lottery is a 16R probable variable jackpot. Set the round number counter to "16".

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of starting the opening of the special figure jackpot game, and moves the process to step S3409. The opening start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the opening performance of the special pattern jackpot game on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening start command.

<Step S3409>
In step S3409, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time, and moves the process to step S3410. The opening time counter is referred to in step S3413 in FIG. 174 of the special figure jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the opening.

<Step S3410>
In step S3410, the MPU 41 sets on the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed, and ends the special figure jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S3411 in the special map jackpot game control process in order to determine whether or not the opening is in progress.

<Step S3411>
If the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3400: Yes), that is, if the special figure jackpot game as a large profit game is being executed, the MPU 41 sets the opening in progress flag indicating that the opening is in progress. is on (step S3411).

If the opening flag is on (step S3411: Yes), that is, if the opening is in progress, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3412 in FIG. 175. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S3411: No), that is, if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S3422.

<Steps S3412 and S3413>
If the opening flag is on (step S3411: Yes), that is, if the opening is being executed, as shown in FIG. 175, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening ( Step S3412), it is determined whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (Step S3413). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the opening.

If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3413: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3414. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3413: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 ends the special figure jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3414 and S3415>
If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3413: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the opening of the special figure jackpot game will end. An opening end command to be notified is set (step S3414). The opening end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the opening performance of the special pattern jackpot game executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress to OFF (step S3415), and moves the process to step S3416.

<Step S3416>
In step S3416, the MPU 41 issues an opening/closing execution mode start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the opening/closing execution mode is started as a gaming profit in which a plurality of rounds (5 or 16) of round games are executed. settings, and the process moves to step S3417. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the opening/closing execution mode performance of the special pattern jackpot game executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening/closing execution mode start command.

<Step S3417>
In step S3417, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that a round game is to be started, and moves the process to step S3418. The round game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start a round game performance corresponding to each round game of the special pattern jackpot game including round number display etc. on the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the round game start command. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the round game performance is executed individually in each round game, but the round game performance is a series of one performance in the opening/closing execution mode, and in each round game, the number of rounds of the round game is may also be displayed. In this case, it is not necessary to perform an interval performance between round games, or a performance that displays the number of rounds of a round game to be executed next time may be performed as an interval performance.

<Steps S3418 and S3419>
In step S3418, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and further opens the variable prize opening 316 by operating the opening/closing door 319 (step S3419), and processes The process moves to step S3420.

<Steps S3420 and S3421>
In step S3420, the MPU 41 sets on the round game in progress flag indicating that the round game is being executed, further sets a round game time counter indicating the remaining time of the round game (step S3421), and The figure jackpot game control process ends. The round game time counter determines whether it is the timing to end the round game (return the opening/closing door 319 and close the variable prize opening 316) when the specified time has elapsed. Reference is made in step S3424.

<Step S3422>
Returning to FIG. 173, if the opening flag is off (step S3411: No), that is, if the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the round game flag indicating that the round game is being executed to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3422). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a round game is being executed.

If the round game flag is on (step S3422: Yes), that is, if the round game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3423 in FIG. 175. On the other hand, when the round game flag is off (step S3422: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3436.

<Steps S3423 and S3424>
When the round game in progress flag is on (step S3422: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, as shown in FIG. Subtract 1. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3424). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the round game (close the variable prize opening by returning the opening/closing door 319) after the predetermined time has elapsed.

If the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3424: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the round game at the timing to end the round game after the specified time has elapsed (close the variable prize opening by returning the opening/closing door 319). If there is, the process moves to step S3428. On the other hand, if the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3424: No), the MPU 41 determines the timing to end the round game when the specified time has elapsed (close the variable prize opening by returning the opening/closing door 319). If not, the process moves to step S3425.

<Step S3425>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3424: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the round game (close the variable prize opening by returning the door 319), the MPU 41 , it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 (step S3425). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 can be determined by detecting the entry of a game ball into the ball entry sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. The determination is made based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412.

If the game ball enters the variable winning hole 316 (step S3425: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3426, and if the game ball does not enter the variable winning hole 316 (step S3425: No), the special figure jackpot game control process is ended.

<Steps S3426 and S3427>
When a game ball enters the variable winning hole 316 (step S3425: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the value of the ball entering number counter indicating the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole 316 in the round game. Add 1 (step S3426). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the ball entering number counter after addition has reached 10 (step S3427), that is, the round game is ended by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 (opening/closing door Upon the return of 319, it is determined whether it is the timing to close the variable winning opening.

When the value of the number of balls entered after addition has reached 10 (step S3427: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the round game when the upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning hole 316 (opening/closing door 319). When it is the timing to close the variable winning a prize opening due to the return of , the process moves to step S3428. On the other hand, if the value of the entered ball counter after addition has not reached 10 (step S3427: No), the MPU 41 ends the round game by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 (opening/closing). If it is not the timing to close the variable winning opening due to the return of the door 319, the special drawing jackpot game control process is ended.

<Step S3428>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3424: Yes), or if the value of the number of balls entered counter reaches 10 (step S3427: Yes), that is, if it is the end timing of the round game , the MPU 41 closes the variable prize opening by returning the opening/closing door 319 (step S3428), and moves the process to step S3429. That is, when it is the timing to end the round game due to the passage of the specified time or due to the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316, the MPU 41 closes the variable winning hole 316 and ends the round game. .

<Steps S3429 to S3431>
In step S3429, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the round game ends. The round game end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the round game performance of the special pattern jackpot game executed on the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears an entry number counter indicating the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole 316 in the round game (step S3430), and also clears the entry number counter indicating that the round game is being executed. The flag is set to OFF (step S3431), and the process moves to step S3432.

<Step S3432>
In step S3432, the MPU 41 determines whether the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 0 (step S3432), that is, it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode (unplayed round games ).

If the round number counter is 0 (step S3432: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3441. On the other hand, if the round number counter is not 0 (step S3432: No), that is, if there is an unplayed round game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3433.

<Step S3433>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S3432: No), that is, if there is an unplayed round game, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start an interval between round games. (step S3433), and the process moves to step S3434. The interval start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the interval performance of the special pattern jackpot game on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the interval start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the interval performance is performed in the interval between round games, but the interval performance may be omitted and the round game performance for the previously executed round game may be continuously performed in the interval. Also, a round game effect may be executed for the next round game to be executed.

<Steps S3434 and S3435>
In step S3434, the MPU 41 sets on an interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval time counter indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S3435), and ends the special figure jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is referred to in step S3438 of FIG. 176 in the special figure jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the interval (start the round game).

<Step S3436>
Returning to FIG. 173, when the round game flag is off (step S3422: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. It is determined whether it is on (step S3436). The during interval flag is set to ON in step S3434 of FIG. 175 in the special pattern jackpot game control process when starting the interval, and is set to ON in step S3434 of FIG. 176 in the special pattern jackpot game control process when ending the interval. It is set to off in S3440.

If the during-interval flag is on (step S3436: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3437 in FIG. 176. On the other hand, if the during-interval flag is off (step S3436: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3445.

<Steps S3437 and S3438>
If the during-interval flag is on (step S3436: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the interval time counter indicating the remaining time of the interval, as shown in FIG. Subtract (step S3437). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3438), that is, whether or not it is the timing to end the interval (start the round game).

If the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3438: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3439. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3438: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the interval (start the round game), the MPU 41 ends the special chart jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3439 and S3440>
If the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3438: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 sends an audio signal to the lamp control device 5 to notify that the interval has ended. Set the interval end command to be notified. The interval end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the interval performance of the jackpot game executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed to OFF (step S3440), and shifts the process to step S3417 described above. By moving the process to step S3417 in FIG. 174 described above, the process of steps S3417 to S3421 regarding the start of the round game is executed, and the special figure jackpot game control process is ended.

<Step S3441>
Returning to FIG. 175, when the round number counter is 0 (step S3432: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 uses an audio lamp to indicate that the opening/closing execution mode of the special figure jackpot game is to be terminated. An opening/closing execution mode end command to be notified to the control device 5 is set (step S3441), and the process moves to step S3442. The opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the round game performance (opening/closing execution mode performance) of the special pattern jackpot game when executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening/closing execution mode end command.

<Step S3442>
In step S3442, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start the ending of the special figure jackpot game, and moves the process to step S3443. The ending start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the ending performance of the special pattern jackpot game on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the ending start command.

<Steps S3443 and S3444>
In step S3443, the MPU 41 sets on the ending-in-progress flag indicating that the ending is in progress. Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending time counter indicating the remaining ending time (step S3444), and ends the special map jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referred to in step S3447 in FIG. 176 of the special figure jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the ending (special figure jackpot game).

<Step S3445>
Returning to FIG. 173, if the interval flag is off (step S3436: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, whether the ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed is on or not. is determined (step S3445).

If the ending flag is on (step S3445: Yes), that is, if the ending is in progress, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3446 in FIG. 176. On the other hand, when the ending flag is off (step S3445: No), that is, when the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3450.

<Steps S3446 and S3447>
If the ending flag is on (step S3445: Yes), that is, if the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter indicating the remaining ending time, as shown in FIG. 176 ( Step S3446). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3447). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the ending (special figure jackpot game).

If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3447: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the ending (special map jackpot game), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3448. On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3447: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the ending (special pattern jackpot game), the MPU 41 ends the special pattern jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3448 and S3449>
If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3447: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the ending (special figure jackpot game), the MPU 41 determines that the ending of the special figure jackpot game will end. An ending end command to be notified to the audio lamp control device 5 is set. The ending end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the ending effect of the special pattern jackpot game executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag indicating that the ending is in progress to OFF (step S3449), and ends the special map jackpot game control process.

<Step S3450>
Returning to FIG. 173, if the ending flag is off (step S3445: No), that is, if the game is not in the opening, round game, interval, or ending, the MPU 41 determines that the special jackpot game ends. A special figure jackpot game end command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 (step S3450), and the process moves to step S3451. The special figure jackpot game end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the special pattern jackpot game performance executed in the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the special pattern jackpot game end command.

<Steps S3451 and S3452>
In step S3451, a special figure jackpot game end flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game ends is set to ON. The special figure jackpot game end flag is used to determine whether to shift from the special figure jackpot game state to the high-frequency support mode (variable probability game state or time-saving game state) in the step of the game state transition process in FIG. 179, which will be described later. Referenced in S3717.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the special figure jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game is being executed to OFF (step S3452), and ends the special figure jackpot game control process.

[Special electric start game control processing]
Here, FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special electric start game control process executed in step S1407-2 in the main process of FIG. 163. In the special electric start game control process of this embodiment, the special electric large winning device 38, which is the second ball entering means, is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting opening 37, which is the first ball entering means. A process for controlling the progress of the special electric start game as a profit game is executed. Hereinafter, the special electric start game control process of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 177.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 177, in the special electric starting game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether a game ball has entered the special electric starting opening 37 (step S3501). Whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric starting port 37 can be determined by detecting the entry of a game ball into the entering ball sensor 37a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The determination is made based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412.

If the game ball enters the special electric starting port 37 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3502, and if the game ball does not enter the special electric starting port 37 (step S3501: No). , the process moves to step S3512.

<Step S3502>
When a game ball enters the special electric starting port 37 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special drawing jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the special drawing jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step S3502). In the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 173, the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3406 when the special figure jackpot game is started, and is turned off in step S3452 when the special figure jackpot game ends. is set to

When the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3502: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special figure starting game. That is, in this embodiment, the special electric start game is not started while the special figure jackpot game is being executed. In this way, by preventing the special electric start game as a small profit game from starting while the special figure jackpot game as a large profit game is being executed, it is possible to prevent the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game from starting. This prevents the execution of the small profit game from hindering the profits obtained from the large profit game.

Here, in this embodiment, when the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the remaining number of special pattern games (the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter) required to generate the b time-saving gaming state is the maximum. The value is set to 1000, and the time-saving game state a is generated after the normal jackpot game ends. That is, after the end of the special figure jackpot game, a time-saving game state is generated in which the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set to 1000, which is the maximum value.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is determined not only when a jackpot is hit normally, but also when the game ball enters the special electric start opening 37, and when the game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383 in the special electric start game. It is set to the maximum value of 1000 after the end of the V winning jackpot game that is executed based on the ball entering. That is, the special electric start game and the V winning jackpot game are executed to set the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter to the maximum value of 1000.

Then, in a situation where the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set to the maximum value of 1000 and the a time-saving game state is scheduled to occur, that is, when a special map jackpot game is being executed, the ceiling There is no point in executing a special electric start game or a V winning jackpot game to set the value of the activation remaining number counter to the maximum value of 1000. On the contrary, when the special figure jackpot game is being executed, starting the special electric start game or the special figure jackpot game is the process of executing the special electric start game, the process of executing the V winning jackpot game, the ceiling activation remaining number counter Since it is necessary to wastefully execute the process of setting the value of 1000 to the maximum value of 1000, there is a disadvantage that the process necessary for the progress of the game becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, during the execution of the special map jackpot game in which the a time-saving game state in which the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set to the maximum value of 1000 is scheduled to occur, , the special electric start game does not start. Therefore, the process of executing the special electric start game, the process of executing the V-winning jackpot game, and the process of setting the value of the remaining ceiling activation number counter to the maximum value of 1000 are prevented from being executed in vain, and the game progresses. This prevents the necessary processing from becoming complicated.

On the other hand, when the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3502: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3503.

<Step S3503>
When the special figure jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3502: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the V flag indicating that the V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, is being executed. It is determined whether the winning jackpot game in progress flag is set on (step S3503). The V winning jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3606 when the V winning jackpot game is started in the V winning jackpot game control process in FIG. is set to off.

When the V winning jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3503: Yes), that is, when the V winning jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special electric start game. That is, in this embodiment, the special electric start game is not started while the V winning jackpot game is being executed. On the other hand, when the V winning jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3503: No), that is, when the V winning jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3504.

<Step S3504>
When the V-winning jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3503: No), that is, when the V-winning jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 activates the special electric starting game, which indicates that the special electric starting game, which is a small profit game, is being executed. It is determined whether the gaming flag is set on (step S3504). In the special electric start game control process, which will be described later, the special electric start game flag is set to ON in step S3507 when the special electric start game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3516 when the special electric start game ends. .

When the special electric start game flag is on (step S3504: Yes), that is, when the special electric start game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special electric start game. That is, in this embodiment, the special electric start game is not started while the special electric start game is being executed. On the other hand, when the special electric start game flag is off (step S3504: No), that is, when the special electric start game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3505.

<Step S3505>
When the special electric starting game flag is off (step S3504: No), that is, when the special electric starting game is not being executed, the MPU 41 controls the special electric opening/closing door which is the opening/closing means of the special electric big winning device 38 which is the second ball entry means. 382, the special electric prize winning opening 381 is switched from the closed state to the open state (step S3505). As a result, a game ball can enter the special electric prize winning hole 381. In addition, the MPU 41 operates the V winning opening opening/closing door 385, which is the opening/closing means of the special electric big prize winning device 38, which is the second ball entering means, so that the special electric V winning opening 383, which is a specific ball entering area, changes from the closed state to the open state. (step S3506). As a result, the game ball can enter the special electric V winning hole 383, and it becomes possible to start the V winning jackpot game which is a small profit game.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the special electric start game flag indicating that the special electric start game is being executed (step S3507), and moves the process to step S3508. The tokuden starting game in progress flag is used in step S3504 or S3515 of the tokuden starting game control process to determine whether the tokuden starting game is being executed, or in step S3802 of the V winning jackpot game control process in FIG. 178, which will be described later. Referenced in

In this way, the special electric starting game is not started while the special drawing jackpot game, the V winning jackpot game, or the special electric starting game is being executed, and the V winning jackpot game is also not started during the execution of the special drawing jackpot game, the V winning jackpot game, or the special electric starting game. It is not started while the game is in progress. On the other hand, the special electric start game and the V winning jackpot game can be started while the special figure game is being executed. As a result, it is possible to start the special electric start game and the V-winning jackpot game without waiting for the end of the special figure game, so when you want to reset the number of times the special figure game is executed until the b-time saving game state occurs, Can be reset instantly. For example, if the right to play a special figure game is reserved or if a reach effect is executed, it may take a lot of time to finish all the special figure games, but in such cases However, it is possible to immediately reset the number of executions of the special figure game until the b-time saving game state occurs. In addition, by being able to immediately reset the number of executions of the special figure game until the time saving game state b occurs, if the special figure game is reset while the special figure game is being executed, the special figure game will also be executed after the reset. In addition, if there is a reservation of the right to execute a special figure game, the number of special figure games related to the reservation that will be executed after the reset will also be counted as the number of special figure games executed after the reset. It can be counted as the number of times. Therefore, for example, in a state where b time saving gaming state does not occur due to the occurrence of b time saving gaming state, the number of times the special figure game is executed by the player until b time saving gaming state occurs is reset and a new b time saving gaming state is created. When it becomes possible to generate the special figure game, the right to execute the special figure game generated by the player can be effectively counted as the number of special figure games necessary to generate the time-saving game state b. can.

<Step S3508>
In step S3508, the MPU 41 operates in a high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, or (b) time-saving gaming state) (step S3508). Whether or not it is high-frequency support is determined by whether any of the variable probability game state flag, a time-saving game state flag, and b time-saving game state flag is set to ON.

If the MPU 41 is in the high-frequency support mode (step S3508: Yes), that is, in the variable probability gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or b time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3509, and if it is not in the high-frequency support mode ( Step S3508: No), the process moves to step S3509.

<Step S3509>
If it is in the high-frequency support mode (step S3508: Yes), that is, if it is in the variable probability gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or b time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 returns the special electric opening/closing door 382 and opens the special electric big prize opening 381. A special electric operation time counter indicating the remaining time until switching from the state to the closed state is set (step S3509), and the special electric starting game control process is ended. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the value of the special electric operation time counter to a value corresponding to the time set based on the high frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table (see FIG. 162(C)), that is, 0.1. Set the value corresponding to seconds.

In addition, the special electric operation time counter is referred to in step S3514 of the special electric start game control process in order to judge whether it is the timing to close the special electric large prize winning opening 381.

<Step S3510>
If it is not the high frequency support mode (step S3508: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the mode is the low frequency support mode (normal gaming state) (step S3510). That is, the MPU 41 executes the process when the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means, is in the normal gaming state, which is the low-frequency support mode as the first profit gaming state control, which is the second auxiliary state control. The process moves to step S1703.

If the MPU 41 is in the low-frequency support mode (step S3510: Yes), that is, in the normal game state, the process moves to step S3511, and if it is not the low-frequency support mode (step S3510: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to the special electric start game. Control processing ends.

<Step S3511>
If it is in the low frequency support mode (step S3510: Yes), that is, if it is in the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 determines the remaining time until the special electric opening/closing door 382 is restored and the special electric big prize opening 381 is switched from the open state to the closed state. A special electric operation time counter indicating the amount is set (step S3511), and the special electric start game control process is ended. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the value of the special electric operation time counter to a value corresponding to the time set based on the low frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table (see FIG. 162(B)), that is, 1.2. Set the value corresponding to seconds.

In addition, the special electric operation time counter is referred to in step S3514 of the special electric start game control process in order to judge whether it is the timing to close the special electric large prize winning opening 381.

<Step S3512>
If no game ball has entered the special electric start opening 37 (step S3501: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special electric start game in progress flag indicating that the special electric start game is being executed is set to on. A judgment is made (step S3512). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special electric start game is being executed. In addition, in the said special electric starting game control process, the special electric starting game flag is set to ON in step S3507 when the special electric starting game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3516 when the special electric starting game is ended. Ru.

When the special electric start game flag is set to ON (step S3512: Yes), that is, when the special electric start game is being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3513. On the other hand, when the flag during the special electric start game is set to OFF (step S3512: No), that is, when the special electric start game is not being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special electric start game control process.

<Steps S3513 and S3514>
When the special electric start game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3512: Yes), that is, when the special electric start game is being executed, the MPU 41 returns the special electric opening/closing door 382 and leaves the special electric large prize opening 381 open. 1 is subtracted from the value of the special electric operating time counter indicating the remaining time until switching to the closed state (step S3513), and it is determined whether the value of the special electric operating time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3514). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the special electric opening/closing door 382 and switch the special electric large winning opening 381 from the open state to the closed state.

If the value of the special electric operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to return the special electric opening/closing door 382 and switch the special electric large prize opening 381 from the open state to the closed state. , the process moves to step S3519. On the other hand, if the value of the special electric operating time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3514: No), that is, if it is not the timing to return the special electric opening/closing door 382 and switch the special electric large prize opening 381 from the open state to the closed state, the process is performed. The process moves to step S3515.

<Step S3515>
If the value of the special electric operation time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3514: No), that is, if it is not the timing to return the special electric opening/closing door 382 and switch the special electric large prize winning hole 381 from the open state to the closed state, the special electric V winning hole is closed. 383, it is determined whether or not the V winning hole flag indicating that a game ball has entered the ball is set on (step S3515). The V winning hole flag is set to ON in step S3517 of the special electric start game control process when a game ball enters the special electric V winning hole 383.

If the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the special electric V winning opening 383 is set to ON (step S3515: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the special electric starting game control process and sets the V winning flag to If it is set to off (step S3515: No), the process moves to step S3516.

<Step S3516>
When the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3515: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has entered the special electric V winning hole 383 (step S3516). Whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric V winning hole 383 is determined by checking whether the game ball enters the ball entering sensor 383a (see FIG. 157) in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The determination is made based on winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 when a ball hitting is detected.

When the game ball enters the special electric V winning hole 383 (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3517, and when the game ball does not enter the special electric V winning hole 383 (step S3516: No), the special electric start game control process ends.

<Steps S3517 and S3518>
When the game ball enters the special electric V winning hole 383 (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the special electric V winning hole 383 (step S3517). ), sets a V winning command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that a game ball has entered the special electric V winning hole 383 (step S3518), and ends the special electric starting game control process.

Note that the V winning command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, in the voice lamp control device 5, based on the V winning command, the symbol display unit 341 etc. informs the player that the game ball has entered the special electric V winning hole 383 in the special figure starting game. Execute the specified performance.

<Steps S3519 to S3521>
If the value of the special electric operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to return the special electric opening/closing door 382 and switch the special electric large prize opening 381 from the open state to the closed state, the MPU 41 , returns the special electric opening/closing door 382 to switch the special electric prize opening 381 from the open state to the closed state (step S3519), and returns the V winning opening opening/closing door 385 to change the V winning opening 383 from the open state to the closed state. Switch (step S3520). Further, the MPU 41 sets the special electric start game in progress flag indicating that the special electric start game is being executed to OFF (step S3521), and ends the special electric start game control process.

[V winning jackpot game control process]
Here, FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the V winning jackpot game control process executed in step S1407-3 in the main process of FIG. 163. In the V winning jackpot game control process of this embodiment, a process for controlling the progress of the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game in which the special electric big winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is activated is executed. Hereinafter, the V winning jackpot game control process of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 178.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 178, in the V winning jackpot game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the V winning jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the V winning jackpot game is being executed is set to ON. is determined (step S3601). The V-winning jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3606 of the V-winning jackpot game control process when the V-winning jackpot game is started, and is set to ON in step S3606 of the V-winning jackpot game control process when the V-winning jackpot game is ended. It is set to off in step S3620 of the process.

The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3611 when the V winning jackpot playing flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), and when the V winning jackpot playing flag is set to OFF (step S3601: No), the process moves to step S3602.

<Step S3602>
When the V-winning jackpot game flag is set to OFF (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special electric start game flag indicating that the special electric start game is being executed as a small profit game to be turned on. It is determined whether or not (step S3602). The tokuden starting game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3507 of the tokuden starting game control process in FIG. 177 when the tokuden starting game is started, and when the tokuden starting game is ended, the tokuden starting game in FIG. It is set to off in step S3521 of the control process.

If the special electric starting game flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, if the special electric starting game is being executed, the MPU 41 executes the V winning jackpot without starting the V winning jackpot game. End the game control process. On the other hand, when the special electric start game flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), that is, when the special electric start game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
When the flag during the special electric start game is set to OFF (step S3602: Yes), the MPU 41 activates the special electric V prize opening 383 of the special electric large prize winning device 38 which is the second ball entry means in the special electric start game as a small profit game. It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the ball is set on (step S3603). The V winning flag is set to ON in step S3517 of the special electric starting game control process in FIG. 177 when a game ball enters the special electric V winning hole 383 in the special electric starting game.

If the V winning flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3604, and if the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), the MPU 41 transfers the process to step S3604, and if the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), the MPU 41 transfers the process to step S3604. The jackpot game control process ends.

<Steps S3604 to S3607>
When the V winning prize flag is set on (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the V winning jackpot game start flag indicating that the V winning jackpot game is started (step S3604).

The V winning jackpot game start flag is referred to in step S3741 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 183 to determine whether or not to generate the V winning jackpot gaming state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets 2 as the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be executed in the V winning jackpot game (step S3605). That is, in the V winning jackpot game of this embodiment, two round games are executed as described above (see FIG. 162(D)).

In addition, the MPU 41 sets the V-winning jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the V-winning jackpot game is being executed (step S3606), and also indicates that the game ball has entered the special electric V-winning opening 383 in the special electric starting game. The V winning flag indicating this is set to OFF (step S3607), and the process moves to step S3608.

<Steps S3608 to S3610>
In step S3608, the MPU 41 operates the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric grand prize winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, to switch the special electric grand prize opening 381 from the closed state to the open state, thereby opening the special electric grand prize winning opening 381. (Step S3608), and further subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be executed in the V winning jackpot game (Step S3609). Then, the MPU 41 sets a special electric prize opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the special electric prize winning hole 381 (step S3610), and ends the V prize winning jackpot game control process. In addition, in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the value of the special electric winning opening opening time counter (see FIG. 162(D)).

<Steps S3611 and S3612>
When the V-winning jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, when the V-winning jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 displays the special electric jackpot flag indicating the remaining opening time of the special electric jackpot jackpot 381. 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning opening opening time counter (step S3611), and it is determined whether the value of the special electric winning opening opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3612). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the maximum opening time of the special electric prize opening 381 has elapsed.

If the value of the special electric large winning hole opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3612: Yes), that is, if the maximum opening time of the special electric big winning hole 381 has elapsed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3618. do. On the other hand, if the value of the special electric big winning hole opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3612: No), that is, if the maximum opening time of the special electric big winning hole 381 has not elapsed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3613. Transition.

<Step S3613>
If the value of the special electric big winning hole opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3612: No), that is, if the maximum opening time of the special electric big winning hole 381 has not elapsed, the MPU 41 is the second ball entry means. It is determined whether a game ball has entered the special electric regular winning hole 384 of the special electric big winning device 38 (step S3613). Whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric normal winning hole 384 is determined by the ball entering sensor 384a provided in the special electric ordinary winning hole 384 (Fig. 157 The judgment is made based on winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 when the entry of a game ball into the ball (see (A)) is detected.

Note that in the V winning jackpot game, unlike the special electric starting game, the special electric V winning opening 383 of the special electric winning prize device 38 is not opened, and no game ball is entered into the special electric V winning opening 383. Therefore, in the V winning jackpot game control process, the process of confirming the entry of the game ball into the special electric V winning hole 383 is not executed.

When the game ball enters the special electric normal winning hole 384 (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3614, and when the game ball does not enter the special electric ordinary winning hole 384 (step S3613: No), the V winning jackpot game control process ends.

<Steps S3614 and S3615>
When a game ball enters the special electric normal winning hole 384 (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the number of entering balls counter indicating the number of game balls entering the special electric ordinary winning hole 384 (step S3613: Yes). S3614). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ball entering number counter after the addition is 10 (step S3615). That is, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of game balls that have entered the special electric normal winning hole 384 set for the round game of the V winning jackpot game have entered the special electric ordinary winning hole 384.

If the value of the number of balls entered after addition is 10 (step S3614: Yes), the MPU 41 selects a game with the maximum number of balls entered into the special electric normal winning opening 384 set for the round game of the V winning jackpot game. When the ball enters the special electric normal winning hole 384, the process moves to step S3616. On the other hand, if the value of the ball entering number counter after addition is not 10 (step S3615: No), the V winning jackpot game control process is ended.

<Steps S3616 and S3617>
If the value of the ball entering number counter after addition is 10 (step S3614: Yes), the game ball with the maximum number of balls entering the special electric normal winning opening 384 set for the round game of the V winning jackpot game is the special electric ball. When a ball enters the normal winning hole 384, the MPU 41 clears the value of the ball entering number counter (step S3616), and also clears the special electric big winning hole opening time counter that indicates the remaining opening time of the special electric big winning hole 381. (Step S3617), the process moves to step S3618.

<Step S3618>
In step S3618, the MPU 41 returns the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric prize winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, and switches the special electric prize opening 381 from the open state to the closed state to close the special electric prize winning opening 381. (Step S3618), the process moves to step S3619. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the special electric winning hole opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (when the maximum opening time of the special electric winning hole 381 has elapsed) (step S3612: Yes), or when the special electric winning hole opening time counter is 0 (step S3612: Yes), When the value of the number of balls entered into the ball counter is 10 due to the entry of game balls into the opening 384 (the maximum number of game balls entered into the special electric normal winning opening 384 set for the round game of the V winning jackpot game is When the ball enters the special electric regular winning hole 384) (step S3614: Yes), the round game of the V prize winning jackpot game is ended by closing the special electric big winning hole 381.

<Step S3619>
In step S3619, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be executed in the V-winning jackpot game is 0, that is, whether it is the timing to end the V-winning jackpot game. to decide.

When the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be executed in the V-winning jackpot game is 0 (step S3619: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the V-winning jackpot game, the MPU 41 executes the process. The process moves to step S3620.

On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be executed in the V-winning jackpot game is not 0 (step S3619: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the V-winning jackpot game, the MPU 41 executes the process. The process moves to step S3608, and the next round game is executed.

<Steps S3620 and S3621>
When the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be executed in the V winning jackpot game is 0 (step S3619: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the V winning jackpot game, the MPU 41 executes the V winning jackpot game. The V winning jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set to OFF (step S3620), and the V winning jackpot game end flag indicating that the V winning jackpot game is ending is set to ON (step S3620). S3621), the V winning jackpot game control process is ended.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIGS. 179 to 183 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in FIG. 163. In the game state transition process of this embodiment, a process for controlling the transition of various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variable game state, probability variable jackpot game state, and normal jackpot game state) is executed. The game state transition process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 179 to 183.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 179, in the game state transition process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the special figure jackpot game start flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game is to be started is on (step S3701 ). The special figure jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S3405 when the special figure jackpot game is started in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 173, and is set to ON in step S3451 when the special figure jackpot game is ended. Set to off.

When the special figure jackpot game start flag is on (step S3701: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the special figure jackpot game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3702. On the other hand, when the special figure jackpot game start flag is off (step S3701: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the special figure jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3716.

<Steps S3702 and S3703>
When the special figure jackpot game start flag is on (step S3701: Yes), that is, when starting the special figure jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets the special figure jackpot game state flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game state is on. (Step S3702). The special figure jackpot game state flag is referred to in step S3716 in FIG. 179 of the game state transition process in order to determine whether or not the special figure jackpot game state is in effect.

In addition, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot signal 1 output start flag that starts outputting the jackpot signal 1 (see FIG. 158(A)) as a special signal from the No. 1 terminal of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3703). . The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is referred to in step S3801 of the signal output process in FIG. 184 to determine whether to start outputting the jackpot signal 1.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the special figure jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S3704), and moves the process to step S3705.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 determines whether the special figure jackpot game to be started is a variable probability jackpot game. Whether or not the special figure jackpot game to be started is a probability-variable jackpot game is determined based on the special figure correctness information stored in the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special figure holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 412. be judged.

When starting the probability-variable jackpot game (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3706. On the other hand, if the variable probability jackpot game is not to be started (step S3705: No), that is, if the normal jackpot game is to be started, the process moves to step S3707.

<Step S3706>
When starting a variable probability jackpot game (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on a variable probability game state transition flag that causes the transition to a variable probability jackpot game state after the end of the variable probability jackpot game (step S3706), and returns the process to step S3707. to move to. The variable probability game state transition flag is used in the game state transition process shown in FIG. Referenced in step S3721.

<Steps S3707 and S3708>
In step S3707, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state is on. The normal gaming state flag is set to ON when transitioning from another gaming state to the normal gaming state (step S3732 in FIG. 181 or step S3738 in FIG. 182 of the gaming state transition process), and when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the normal gaming state. It is set to off when the game state is transitioned to (step S3708 in FIG. 179 or step S3728 in FIG. 180 of the game state transition process).

If the normal gaming state flag is on (step S3707: Yes), that is, in the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag to off (step S3708), and moves the process to step S3711. On the other hand, when the normal gaming state flag is off (step S3707: No), that is, when the high frequency support mode (variable probability gaming state, a time saving gaming state, or b working time saving gaming state) is not the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 performs processing. The process moves to step S3709.

<Steps S3709 and S3710>
If the normal gaming state flag is off (step S3707: No), it is not the normal gaming state of the high frequency support mode which is the second auxiliary state control, but the high frequency support mode (probable variable game) which is the first profit gaming state control. (a time-saving game state or b time-saving game state), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b-time-saving game state flag indicating the b-time-saving game state is on (step S3709). The b time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the b-time-saving gaming state (step S3727 in FIG. 180 of the gaming state transition process), and the b-time-saving gaming state is set to the normal gaming state or the special jackpot. It is set to off when transitioning to the gaming state (step S3710 in FIG. 179 or step S3739 in FIG. 182 of the gaming state transition process).

If the b time-saving game state flag is on (step S3709: Yes), that is, in the b time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S3710), and moves the process to step S3711. do. On the other hand, when the b time saving game state flag is off (step S3709: No), that is, when it is not in the b time saving game state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3712.

<Step S3711>
In step S3711, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot signal 2 output start flag that starts outputting the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 158(A)) from the second terminal of the external output terminal board 101. The jackpot signal 2 output start flag is referred to in step S3804 of the signal output process in FIG. 184 to determine whether to start outputting the jackpot signal 2.

Here, the process moves to step S3711 when the special figure game started in the normal game state or b time-saving game state is to notify that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In other words, in this embodiment, if the special figure game started in the normal game state or the time-saving game state is to notify that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a jackpot, when the special figure game ends The output of the jackpot signal 2 is started (at the start of the special figure jackpot game).

In addition, in the variable probability game state and the time saving game state a, since the jackpot signal 2 is being output (see FIG. 158 (B)), the special figure game started in the variable probability game state or the time saving game state a is a special figure jackpot. Even if the result of the lottery is to notify a jackpot, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is not started at the end of the special drawing game (at the start of the special drawing jackpot game).

<Steps S3712 and S3713>
If the b-time-saving gaming state flag is off (step S3709: No), that is, if it is not in the b-time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 determines whether the probability variable gaming state flag is on, that is, whether it is in the probability variable gaming state. to decide. The variable probability gaming state flag is set to ON when the game state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to the variable probability gaming state (see step S3722 in FIG. 179 of the gaming state transition process), and when the gaming state is shifted from the variable probability gaming state to the jackpot gaming state. (See step S3713 in FIG. 179 of the gaming state transition process).

When the variable probability gaming state flag is on (step S3712: Yes), that is, in the case of a variable probability gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the variable probability gaming state flag to OFF (step S3713), and moves the process to step S3741 in FIG. 183. do. On the other hand, when the variable probability gaming state flag is off (step S3712: No), that is, when it is not in the variable probability gaming state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3714.

<Steps S3714 and S3715>
When the probability variable gaming state flag is off (step S3712: No), that is, when the probability variable gaming state is not, the MPU 41 determines whether the a time saving gaming state flag is on (step S3714), that is, the a time saving gaming state is. Determine whether or not. The a time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON when transitioning from the jackpot gaming state to the a-time-saving gaming state (see step S3724 in FIG. 179 of the gaming state transition process), and is set to ON when the time-saving gaming state a is transferred to the jackpot gaming state or normal. It is set to off when transitioning to the gaming state (see step S3715 in FIG. 179 or step S3734 in FIG. 181 of the gaming state transition process).

When the a time saving game state flag is on (step S3714: Yes), that is, when the a time saving game state is in effect, the MPU 41 sets the a time saving game state flag to OFF (step S3715), and the process proceeds to the step of FIG. 183. The process moves to S3741. On the other hand, when the a time saving game state flag is off (step S3714: No), that is, when it is not in the a time saving game state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3741 in FIG. 183.

<Step S3716>
If the special figure jackpot game start flag is off (step S3701: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the special figure jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets the special figure jackpot game state flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game state is in the special figure jackpot game state. It is determined whether it is on (step S3716). The special figure jackpot game state flag is set to ON in step S3702 in FIG. 179 of the game state transition process when the special figure jackpot game state is transferred.

If the special figure jackpot game state flag is on (step S3716: Yes), that is, if the special figure jackpot game state is in progress (the special figure jackpot game is being executed), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3717. . On the other hand, if the special figure jackpot game state flag is off (step S3716: No), that is, if the special figure jackpot game is not in the state (the special figure jackpot game is not being executed), the process moves to step S3725 in FIG. 180. .

<Step S3717>
If the special figure jackpot game state flag is on (step S3716: Yes), that is, if the special figure jackpot game is in the special figure jackpot game state (when the special figure jackpot game is being executed), the MPU 41 ends the special figure jackpot game. It is determined whether the special figure jackpot game end flag indicating this is on (step S3717). The special figure jackpot game end flag is set to ON in step S3451 in the special figure jackpot game control process in FIG. 173 when the special figure jackpot game ends.

When the special figure jackpot game end flag is on (step S3717: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is to be ended, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3718. On the other hand, when the special figure jackpot game end flag is off (step S3717: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the special figure jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3741 in FIG. 183.

<Steps S3718 to S3720>
When the special figure jackpot game end flag is on (step S3717: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is to be ended, the MPU 41 outputs the jackpot signal 1 (FIG. 158 The jackpot signal 1 output stop flag that stops the output of (see (A)) is set on (step S3718). The jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is referred to in step S3807 of the signal output process in FIG. 184 to determine whether or not to stop outputting the jackpot signal 1.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the special pattern jackpot game state flag indicating that the special pattern jackpot game is in the special pattern jackpot gaming state to OFF (step S3719), and also sets the jackpot game end flag indicating that the special pattern jackpot game ends to OFF. (step S3720), and the process moves to step S3721.

<Steps S3721 to S3724-1>
In step S3721, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable probability game state transition flag that causes the state to shift from the special figure jackpot game state to the variable probability game state after the end of the special figure jackpot game is set to ON. The variable probability game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3706 in FIG. 179 of the game state transition process when the variable probability jackpot game is started.

When the probability variable gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3721: Yes), that is, when transitioning from the special drawing jackpot gaming state to the probability variable gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the probability variable gaming state flag indicating that the probability variable gaming state is the variable probability gaming state. is set to ON (step S3722), and a variable probability gaming state command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the variable probability gaming state is present (step S3722-1).

The variable probability gaming state command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute a special symbol performance corresponding to the variable probability gaming state on the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the variable probability gaming state command (see FIG. 189 (B1)).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the variable probability game state transition flag to OFF (step S3723), and moves the process to step S3741 in FIG. 183.

On the other hand, when the variable probability game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3721: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game state is to be transferred to the a time-saving game state instead of the probability variable game state, the MPU 41 executes the a time-saving game. The a time saving game state flag indicating that the a time saving game state is in the state is set to ON (step S3724), and the a time saving game state command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the a time saving game state is in the a time saving game state (step S3724- 1), the process moves to step S3741 in FIG. 183.

The time saving game state command a is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute the special figure effect corresponding to the time-saving game state command a on the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the time-saving game state command a (see FIG. 189 (B2)). .

<Step S3725>
When the special figure jackpot game state flag is off (step S3716: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game state is not in progress (when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the normal game state flag indicating the state is set to on (step S3725).

If the normal gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3725: Yes), that is, if the normal gaming state is present, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3726. On the other hand, if the normal gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3725: No), that is, if the normal gaming state is not present, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3730 in FIG. 181.

<Step S3726>
When the normal gaming state flag is set to on (step S3725: Yes), that is, when the normal gaming state is set, the MPU 41 turns on the b-time-saving gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state to the b-time-saving gaming state. is set (step S3726). b The time saving game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3323 of FIG. 179 of the game state transition process when the normal jackpot game ends.

The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3727 when the b time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3726: Yes), and when the b time-saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3726: No), the process moves to step S3741 in FIG. 183.

<Steps S3727 to S3729>
When the b time saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3726: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the b time saving game state flag indicating the b time saving gaming state to ON (step S3727), and b A time-saving game state command b is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the time-saving game state is present (step S3727-1).

b The time saving game state command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute the special figure performance corresponding to the b time-saving game state command on the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the b time-saving game state command (see FIG. 190 (B1)). .

Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state to OFF (step S3728), sets the b-time saving gaming state transition flag to OFF (step S3729), and returns the process to the steps shown in FIG. The process moves to S3741.

<Step S3730>
If the normal gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3725: No), that is, if it is not the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. is set to on (step S3730).

When the a-time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3730: Yes), that is, when the a-time-saving game state is in effect, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3731. On the other hand, when the a time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3731: No), that is, when it is not in the a time saving game state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3736 in FIG. 182.

<Step S3731>
If the time-saving game state flag a is set to ON (step S3730: Yes), that is, if the time-saving game state is a, the MPU 41 turns on the normal game state transition flag for transitioning the game state to the normal game state. is set (step S3731). The normal game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3328 of the special figure game number management process in FIG. 172 when the time-saving game state a is ended and the state is transitioned to the normal game state.

If the normal gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3731: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3732, and if the normal gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3731: No). , the process moves to step S3741 in FIG. 183.

<Steps S3732 to S3733>
If the normal gaming state b time-saving gaming state shift flag is set to ON (step S3731: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state to ON (step S3732), A normal gaming state command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of the normal gaming state (step S3732-1).

The normal game state command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute a special symbol performance corresponding to the normal gaming state command on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the normal gaming state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag that stops the output of the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 158(B)) that is being output from the No. 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3733), The process moves to step S3734. The jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is referred to in step S3810 of the signal output process in FIG. 184 to determine whether to stop outputting the jackpot signal 2.

<Steps S3734 to S3735>
In step S3734, the MPU 41 sets off the a time-saving game state flag indicating the a time-saving game state, further sets the normal game state shift flag to off (step S3735), and returns the process to the steps of FIG. The process moves to S3741.

<Step S3736>
If the a time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3730: No), that is, if it is not in the a-time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the status flag is set to on (step S3736).

When the b time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3736: Yes), that is, when it is in the b time-saving game state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3737. On the other hand, when the b time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3736: No), that is, when it is not in the b time saving game state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3741 in FIG. 183.

<Step S3737>
If the b-time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3736: Yes), that is, if the b-time-saving gaming state is set, the MPU 41 turns on the normal gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state to the normal gaming state. is set (step S3737). The normal game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3333 of the special figure game number management process in FIG. 172 when the b-time saving game state is ended and the game state is transitioned to the normal game state.

If the normal gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3737: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3738, and if the normal gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3737: No). , the process moves to step S3741 in FIG. 183.

<Steps S3738 and S3738-1>
If the normal gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3737: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state to ON (step S3738), and also sets the normal gaming state transition flag to ON (step S3738). A normal game state command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of this fact (step S3738-1), and the process moves to step S3739.

The normal game state command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute a special symbol performance corresponding to the normal gaming state command on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the normal gaming state command.

<Steps S3739 and S3740>
In step S3739, the MPU 41 sets the b time saving game state flag indicating the b time saving game state to OFF, further sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S3740), and returns the process to the steps in FIG. The process moves to S3741.

<Step S3741>
In step S3741, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning jackpot game start flag indicating that the V winning jackpot game is started is set to ON. The V winning jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S3604 of the V winning jackpot game control process in FIG. 178 when the V winning jackpot game is started.

If the V winning jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S3741: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3742, and if the V winning jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S3741: No), the process moves to step S3744.

<Steps S3742 and S3743>
When the V winning jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S3741: Yes), the MPU 41 starts outputting the V winning jackpot game signal as an identification signal from the No. 3 terminal of the external output terminal board 101. The game signal output start flag is set on (step S3742). Then, the MPU 41 sets the V winning jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S3743), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3744>
When the V winning jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S3741: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the V winning jackpot game execution flag indicating that the V winning jackpot game is being executed is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3744). The V winning jackpot game execution flag is set to ON when the V winning jackpot game is started in step S3606 of the V winning jackpot game control process in FIG. 178.

The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3745 when the V prize winning jackpot game execution flag is set to ON (step S3744: Yes), and when the V prize winning jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF (step S3744: Yes). S3744: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3745>
If the V-winning jackpot game execution flag is set to ON (step S3744: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the V-winning jackpot game end flag indicating that the V-winning jackpot game is ended is set to ON. (Step S3745). The V winning jackpot game end flag is set to ON when the V winning jackpot game is ended in step S3621 of the V winning jackpot game control process in FIG. 178.

If the V winning jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S3745: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3746, and if the V winning jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S3745: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3746>
When the V-winning jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S3745: Yes), the MPU 41 stops outputting the V-winning jackpot game signal output as an identification signal from the No. 3 terminal of the external output terminal board 101. The V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to ON (step S3746), and the process moves to step S3747.

<Steps S3747 and S3748>
In step S3747, the MPU 41 sets the maximum value of 1000 as the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter indicating the remaining number of special symbol games until the time saving game state b occurs. That is, in this embodiment, when the V winning jackpot game ends, the ceiling activation remaining number counter is reset to the maximum value of 1000. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag indicating that the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set (step S3748), and moves the process to step S3749.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the V winning jackpot game ends, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter is reset to the maximum value of 1000, and the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter set flag is set to on. In the normal gaming state, which is the first auxiliary state control in which the time-saving gaming state b cannot occur, the normal gaming state can be the normal gaming state, which is the second auxiliary state control in which the time-saving gaming state b can occur. As a result, the player can generate the normal gaming state of the second auxiliary state control by executing the V winning jackpot game, and can newly generate the b time-saving gaming state, so the player can It is possible to motivate the player to start the game in the normal gaming state, which is the first auxiliary state control in which the time-saving gaming state b cannot occur. On the other hand, in the normal game state which is the second auxiliary state control in which the b time-saving game state can occur, the number of executions of the special figure game required before the b time-saving game state occurs can be changed to the maximum value. As a result, when the gaming machine is terminated in the normal gaming state, which is the second auxiliary state control in which the b time-saving gaming state can occur, the V winning jackpot game is executed, and the special figure game executed by the end of the game is The number of times is not reflected in the number of times the special figure game is executed before the time-saving game state b occurs, and the game can be ended, preventing the player from becoming the target of so-called hyena actions by others. be done.

<Steps S3749 and S3750>
In step S3749, the MPU 41 sets a ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the remaining ceiling activation number has been reset (step S3749). The ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 163) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure effect corresponding to the fact that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset on the symbol display section 341, etc., based on the ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command (Fig. 190(B2)).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the V winning jackpot game end flag to OFF (step S3750), and ends the game state transition process.

[Signal output processing]
Here, FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the signal output process executed in step S1408-1 of the main process in FIG. 163. In the signal output processing of this embodiment, processing for outputting various signals to the outside of the gaming machine 10 is executed. The signal output processing of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 184.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 184, in the signal output process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first starts outputting the jackpot signal 1 (see FIG. 158(A)) as a special signal from the No. 1 terminal of the external output terminal board 101. It is determined whether the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to on (step S3801). The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to ON when the special figure jackpot game is started in step S3703 of the game state transition process in FIG. 179.

If the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to ON (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3802, and if the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to OFF (step S3801: No), the process moves to step S3804.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
When the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to ON (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the jackpot signal 1 (see FIG. 158(A)) as a special signal from the No. 1 terminal of the external output terminal board 101. Output is started (step S3802). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output start flag to OFF (step S3803), and ends the signal output processing.

<Step S3804>
When the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to OFF (step S3801: No), the MPU 41 outputs the jackpot signal 1 as a special signal output from the No. 1 terminal of the external output terminal board 101 (Fig. It is determined whether or not the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag for stopping the output of (see ) is set to on (step S3804). The jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to ON when the special figure jackpot game is ended in step S3718 of the game state transition process in FIG. 179.

If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3804: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3805, and if the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3804: No), the process moves to step S3807.

<Steps S3805 and S3806>
When the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3804: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the jackpot signal 1 as a special signal output from the No. 1 terminal of the external output terminal board 101 (see FIG. )) is stopped (step S3805). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag to OFF (step S3806), and ends the signal output processing.

<Step S3807>
If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3804: No), the MPU 41 starts outputting the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 158(B)) from the No. 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 101. It is determined whether the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to on (step S3807). The jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set in step S3711 of the game state transition process in FIG. is set to on when it is terminated.

If the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to ON (step S3807: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3808, and if the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to OFF (step S3807: No), the process moves to step S3810.

<Steps S3808 and S3809>
If the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to ON (step S3807: Yes), the MPU 41 starts outputting the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 158(B)) from the No. 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 101. (Step S3808). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2 output start flag to OFF (step S3809), and ends the signal output processing.

<Step S3810>
When the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to OFF (step S3807: No), the MPU 41 outputs the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 158(B)) output from the No. 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 101. It is determined whether the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag for stopping the output is set on (step S3810). The jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to ON in step S3733 of the game state transition process in FIG. 181 when the time saving game state a is transitioned to the normal game state.

If the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3811, and if the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3810: No), the process moves to step S3813.

<Steps S3811 and S3812>
When the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 158(B)) output from the No. 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 101. The output is stopped (step S3811). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag to OFF (step S3812), and ends the signal output processing.

<Step S3813>
When the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3810: No), the MPU 41 outputs the V winning jackpot game signal (see FIG. 159(A)) from the No. 3 terminal of the external output terminal board 101 as an identification signal. It is determined whether the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag for starting the output of is set on (step S3813). The V winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to ON when the V winning jackpot game is started (when the V winning jackpot game state is generated) in step S3742 of the game state transition process in FIG. 179.

If the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to ON (step S3813: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3814, and if the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to OFF. (Step S3813: No), the process moves to step S3816.

<Steps S3814 and S3815>
When the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to ON (step S3813: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the V winning jackpot gaming signal (FIG. 159(A)) from the No. 3 terminal of the external output terminal board 101 as an identification signal. (see step S3814). Then, the MPU 41 sets the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag to OFF (step S3815), and ends the signal output processing.

<Step S3816>
When the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to OFF (step S3813: No), the MPU 41 outputs the V winning jackpot game signal (Fig. 159(A)) is set to ON (step S3816). The V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to ON when the V winning jackpot game is ended (when the V winning jackpot gaming state is ended) in step S3746 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 179.

If the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to ON (step S3816: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3817, and if the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to OFF. (Step S3816: No), the process moves to step S3819.

<Steps S3817 and S3818>
When the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to ON (step S3816: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the V winning jackpot gaming signal (Fig. 159(A)) is stopped (step S3817). Then, the MPU 41 sets the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag to OFF (step S3818), and ends the signal output processing.

<Step S3819>
When the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3816: No), the MPU 41 outputs a special figure variation stop signal as an identification signal from the No. 4 terminal of the external output terminal board 101. It is determined whether the stop signal output flag is set to on (step S3819). The special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to ON when the special figure game is ended in step S1909 of the special figure game control process in FIG.

If the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to ON (step S3819: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3820, and if the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to OFF (step S3819: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3820. S3819: No), the process moves to step S3823.

<Step S3820>
When the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to ON (step S3819: Yes), the MPU 41 sets to ON the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag indicating that the special figure fluctuation stop signal is being output. (step S3820), and the process moves to step S3821. The special figure fluctuation stop signal outputting flag is referred to in step S3823 of the signal output process to determine whether or not to stop outputting the special figure fluctuation stop signal.

<Steps S3821 and S3822>
In step S3821, the MPU 41 starts outputting a special figure fluctuation stop signal as an identification signal from the No. 4 terminal of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3821). Then, the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag to OFF (step S3822), and ends the signal output processing.

<Step S3823>
If the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to OFF (step S3819: No), the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag indicating that the special figure fluctuation stop signal is being output to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3823).

If the special figure fluctuation stop signal outputting flag is set to ON (step S3823: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3824, and if the special figure fluctuation stop signal outputting flag is set to OFF. (Step S3823: No), the signal output process ends.

<Steps S3824 and S3825>
When the special figure fluctuation stop signal outputting flag is set to ON (step S3823: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the special figure fluctuation stop signal as an identification signal output from the No. 4 terminal of the external output terminal board 101. is stopped (step S3824). Then, the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation stop signal outputting flag to OFF (step S3825), and ends the signal output processing. That is, in this embodiment, the special figure fluctuation stop signal is output from the time when step S3820 of the previously executed signal output process is executed until the time when step S3824 of the next signal output process is executed. be done. In other words, the output period of the special figure fluctuation stop signal corresponds or approximately corresponds to the execution cycle of the main process in FIG. 163, and the special figure fluctuation stop signal is output as a pulse signal having a pulse width of, for example, 2 msec or approximately 2 msec. be done.

Of course, when the special figure fluctuation stop signal is output as a pulse signal, the pulse width does not need to be 2 msec or approximately 2 msec, and may have another pulse width, for example, an integral multiple of 2 or more of the execution cycle of the main process in FIG. 163, or It may be a substantially integer multiple. Moreover, the special figure fluctuation stop signal may be output as a signal other than a pulse signal.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, a part of the procedure of the command determination process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 is different from the above-described first embodiment.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, various game states (for example, jackpot game state, variable probability game state, a time-saving game, When the process for executing the background effect (stage effect) corresponding to the state (b), time-saving game state, and normal game state) is executed, and when the V-winning jackpot game ends, the symbol display section 341 as a display means displays a Processing is executed to execute a ceiling remaining number reset effect indicating that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset as game state information. Here, FIGS. 185 to 187 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing according to this embodiment. The output method when the symbol display section 341 displays images as output information is mainly the display of moving images.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 185, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether a command has been received (step S3901). If the MPU 51 receives the command (step S3901: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3902, and if the command is not received (step S3901: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Step S3902>
When the command is received (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special map jackpot game start command (step S3902). The special figure jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start a special figure jackpot game as a large profit game, and is executed in step S3404 in the special figure jackpot game control process in FIG. 173 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. This is set when starting a jackpot game.

If the received command is a special figure jackpot game start command (step S3902: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3903, and if the received command is not a special figure jackpot game start command (step S3902: No), The process moves to step S3905.

<Steps S3903 and S3904>
When the special figure jackpot game start command is received (step S3902: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the special figure jackpot game effect setting process (step S3903), and also executes the jackpot game indicating that the special figure jackpot game is being executed. The medium flag is set to on (step S3904), and the command determination process ends.

The jackpot game in progress flag is referred to in order to control the jackpot game effect in the jackpot game effect control process executed in step S2705 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 42 (see step S3201 in FIG. 54). The jackpot game performance control process of this embodiment is similar to the jackpot game performance control process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 54), so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Here, FIG. 188 is a diagram showing an example of a special pattern jackpot game effect displayed on the symbol display section 341 as a display means.

FIG. 188(A) is a diagram showing an example of the opening performance of the special pattern jackpot game performance displayed on the symbol display section 341. As shown in FIG. 188(A), in the opening performance, when a special symbol game that is a small profit game as a specific period game in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a specific period ends, the special symbol is Based on the fact that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery informed by the game is a jackpot, a notification display corresponding to the fact that the newly set gaming state is the special figure jackpot game state is executed. Specifically, in the opening performance of this embodiment, the symbol display section 341 displays a text image of "Jackpot" which is game status information, and also displays the number of consecutive jackpot wins (text image of "Xth"). be done.

FIG. 188(B) is a diagram showing an example of a round game performance of the special pattern jackpot game performance displayed on the symbol display section 341. As shown in FIG. 188(B), in the round game performance, the symbol display section 341 indicates that the round game is being executed and what round the round game is in the opening/closing execution mode. Notification display is executed. Specifically, in the round game performance of this embodiment, a character image of "Round X" indicating the number of rounds being executed in the jackpot game is displayed on the symbol display section 341, and An image related to the number of balls played (number of balls put out) ("800/1200" indicating the current number of balls played compared to the balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, and the total number of balls played in the jackpot consecutive games including the jackpot game) The character image "Total 3,800 shots") is displayed.

FIG. 188(C) is a diagram showing an example of the ending effect of the special pattern jackpot game effect displayed on the symbol display section 341. As shown in FIG. 188(C), in the ending performance, the symbol display section 341 clearly indicates the end of the jackpot game and the destination of the game state after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, in the ending effect of this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the variable probability game state, a character image of "○○ RUSH enters" is displayed as game state information on the symbol display section 341, and a time saving is performed. When transitioning to the gaming state, a character image of "XX mode entered" is displayed as gaming state information. In addition, in the ending effect, instead of or in addition to the illustrated example, a character image of "Jackpot End" indicating that the jackpot game ends, and "RUSH X times" indicating the number of jackpot games including the jackpot game are displayed. A character image and a character image of "balls released △△△△" indicating the total number of balls played in the jackpot series including the jackpot game may be displayed.

<Step S3905>
If the received command is not a special map jackpot game start command (step S3902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S3905). The opening start command is a command indicating to start the opening of the special figure jackpot game, and when the opening is started in step S3408 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 173 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. is set to

If the received command is an opening start command (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3906, and if the received command is not an opening start command (step S3905: No), the process moves to step S3907. do.

<Step S3906>
If the opening start command is received (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 52 sets the opening presentation start flag to ON (step S3906), and ends the command determination process. The opening performance start flag is a flag that starts the opening performance of the special figure jackpot game as a large profit game, and is used to determine whether or not to start the opening performance in step S3202 of the jackpot game performance control process in FIG. Referenced.

<Step S3907>
If the received command is not an opening start command (step S3905: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening end command (step S3907). The opening end command is a command indicating to end the opening of the jackpot game, and is set when the opening is ended in step S3414 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 174 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. be done.

If the received command is an opening end command (step S3907: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3908, and if the received command is not an opening end command (step S3907: No), moves the process to step S3909. do.

<Step S3908>
If the opening end command is received (step S3907: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the opening performance end flag to ON (step S3908), and ends the command determination process. The opening performance end flag is a flag for ending the opening performance of the jackpot game, and is referenced in step S3205 in the jackpot game performance control process in FIG. 54 to determine whether or not to end the opening performance.

<Step S3909>
If the received command is not an opening end command (step S3907: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command (step S3909). The round game start command is a command that indicates the start of a round game in the opening/closing execution mode and also indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is a command that is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as shown in the special figure in FIG. 174. It is set when starting the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in step S3417 in the jackpot game control process.

When the received command is a round game start command (step S3909: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3910, and when the received command is not a round game start command (step S3909: No), the process moves to step S3912. to move to.

<Steps S3910 and S3911>
When the round game start command is received (step S3909: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game production start flag to ON (step S3910), and stores the round number information indicating what round the round game is in the RAM 512. (step S3911), and the command determination process ends. The round game performance start flag is referred to in step S3208 of the jackpot game performance control process in FIG. 54 to determine whether to start each round game performance of the opening/closing execution mode performance.

<Step S3912>
If the received command is not a round game start command (step S3909: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command (step S3912). The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and the round game is ended in step S3429 in the special figure jackpot game control process in FIG. 175 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Set when

When the received command is a round game end command (step S3912: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3913, and when the received command is not a round game end command (step S3912: No), the process moves to step S3914. to move to.

<Step S3913>
If the round game end command is received (step S3912: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance end flag to ON (step S3913), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game performance in step S3211 in the jackpot game performance control process in FIG.

<Step S3914>
If the received command is not a round game end command (step S3912: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval start command (step S3914). The interval start command is a command indicating to start the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and is a command that indicates the start of the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode. Set when starting.

Here, if the received command is an interval start command (step S3914: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3915, and if the received command is not an interval start command (step S3914: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3915. The process moves to S3916.

<Step S3915>
If the received command is an interval start command (step S3914: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect start flag to ON (step S3915), and ends the command determination process. The interval performance start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the interval performance in step S3214 in the jackpot game performance control process of FIG.

<Step S3916>
If the received command is not an interval start command (step S3914: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval end command (step S3916). The interval end command is a command indicating to end the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and is a command that indicates the end of the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode. Set when terminating.

Here, if the received command is an interval end command (step S3916: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3917, and if the received command is not an interval end command (step S3916: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3917. The process moves to step S3918 of 186.

<Step S3917>
If the received command is an interval end command (step S3916: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to ON (step S3917), and ends the command determination process. The interval performance end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the interval performance in step S3217 in the jackpot game performance control process of FIG.

<Step S3918>
If the received command is not an interval end command (step S3916: No), as shown in FIG. 186, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command (step S3918). The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set when starting the ending in step S3442 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. be done.

Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3919, and if the received command is not an ending start command (step S3918: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3919. The process moves to S3920.

<Step S3919>
If the received command is an ending start command (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON (step S3919), and ends the command determination process. The ending performance start flag is referred to when determining whether to start the ending performance in step S3220 of the jackpot game performance control process in FIG.

<Step S3920>
If the received command is not an ending start command (step S3918: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending end command (step S3920). The ending end command is a command indicating that the ending of the jackpot game ends, and is set when the ending is ended in step S3448 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 176 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. be done.

Here, if the received command is an ending end command (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3921, and if the received command is not an ending end command (step S3920: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3921. The process moves to S3922.

<Step S3921>
If the received command is an ending end command (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to ON (step S3921), and ends the command determination process. The ending performance end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the ending performance in step S3223 of the jackpot game performance control process in FIG.

<Step S3922>
If the received command is not an ending end command (step S3920: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special map jackpot game end command (step S3922). The special figure jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the special figure jackpot game, and the special figure jackpot game is terminated in step S3450 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 173 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Set when exiting.

Here, if the received command is a special figure jackpot game end command (step S3922: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3923, and if the received command is not a special figure jackpot game end command (step S3922: No), the process moves to step S3924.

<Step S3923>
If the received command is a special drawing jackpot game end command (step S3922: Yes), the MPU 51 sets off the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the special drawing jackpot game as a large profit game is being executed ( Step S3923), the command determination process ends.

<Steps S3924 and S3925>
If the received command is not a special figure jackpot game end command (step S3922: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variable probability gaming state command indicating that the game has shifted to a variable probability gaming state (step S3924). ). The variable probability gaming state command is set in step S3722-1 in the gaming state transition process in FIG. 179 when the game state shifts to the variable probability gaming state.

When the MPU 51 receives the probability variable gaming state command (step S3924: Yes), it sets the probability variable gaming state flag indicating the probability variable gaming state to ON (step S3925), and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the variable probability gaming state command (step S3924: No), the process proceeds to step S3926.

<Steps S3926 and S3927>
If the probability-changing gaming state command is not received (step S3924: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an a-time-saving gaming state command indicating that the command has shifted to the a-time-saving gaming state as the second profit gaming state control. It is determined whether or not (step S3926). The a time saving gaming state command is set in step S3724-1 in the gaming state transition process in FIG. 179 when transitioning to the a time saving gaming state.

When the MPU 51 receives the a time-saving game state command (step S3926: Yes), it sets on the time-saving game state flag indicating the a time-saving game state (step S3927), and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the a time saving game state command (step S3926: No), the process moves to step S3928.

<Steps S3928 to S3930>
If the a time-saving gaming state command has not been received (step S3926: No), the MPU 51 receives the b-time-saving gaming state command, which indicates that the received command has shifted to the b-time-saving gaming state, which is the second profit gaming state control. It is determined whether or not (step S3928). The b time saving gaming state command is set in step S3727-1 in the gaming state transition process in FIG. 180 when transitioning to the b time saving gaming state.

When the MPU 51 receives the b-time-saving gaming state command (step S3928: Yes), it sets the time-saving gaming state flag indicating the b-time-saving gaming state to ON (step S3929), and also sets the b-time-saving gaming state flag to indicate that it is the normal gaming state. The normal game state flag shown is set to OFF (step S3930), and the command determination process ends. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the b time-saving game state command (step S3928: No), the process moves to step S3931.

<Steps S3931 to S3933>
b If the time saving gaming state command has not been received (step S3928: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a normal gaming state command indicating that the command has shifted to the normal gaming state which is the first profit gaming state control. (Step S3931). The normal gaming state command is set in step S3732-1 in FIG. 181 or step S3738-1 in FIG. 182 in the gaming state transition process when the normal gaming state is entered.

When the MPU 51 receives the normal gaming state command (step S3931: Yes), it sets the normal gaming state flag indicating that the normal gaming state is on (step S3932), and also sets the normal gaming state flag indicating that the normal gaming state is on (step S3932), and Other gaming state flags (a time-saving gaming state flag or b time-saving gaming state) corresponding to the gaming state are set to OFF (step S3933), and the command determination process ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the normal gaming state command (step S3931: No), the process moves to step S3934 in FIG. 187.

<Steps S3934 and S3919>
If the normal gaming state command is not received (step S3931: No), as shown in FIG. 187, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3934). The special pattern fluctuation pattern command is a command that includes the variable display time of the special symbol in the special pattern game to be started, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, etc. , is set in step S2105 in the special figure fluctuation start process in FIG.

When the MPU 51 receives the special figure variation pattern command (step S3934: Yes), it moves the process to step S3935. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the special figure variation pattern command (step S3934: No), the process moves to step S3943.

<Step S3935>
When the special figure variation pattern command is received (step S3934: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state is set to on (step S3935). The normal gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3932 of FIG. 187 in the command determination process when the normal gaming state is entered.

If the normal gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3935: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3936, and if the normal gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3935: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3936. The process moves to step S3937.

<Step S3936>
If the normal gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3935: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the normal gaming state effect setting process corresponding to the normal gaming state (step S3936), and ends the command determination process.

Here, in the normal game state performance setting process, the command determination in FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above is based on the variable display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variable pattern command, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, etc. By executing processes similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the process, the effects to be executed in the special figure game are set. Further, in the normal game state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect, stage effect) indicating the normal game state is set. Therefore, the player can identify that the player is in the normal gaming state based on the fact that gaming state information such as a background image (background effect, stage effect) unique to the normal gaming state is displayed.

<Steps S3937 and S3938>
If the normal gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3935: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the variable probability gaming state flag indicating the variable probability gaming state is set to ON (step S3937). . The variable probability gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3925 of FIG. 186 in the command determination process when the game state is shifted to the variable probability gaming state.

When the variable probability gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3937: Yes), the MPU 51 executes variable probability gaming state performance setting processing (step S3938) and ends the command determination processing. On the other hand, when the variable probability gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3937: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3939.

Here, in the variable probability game state effect setting process, the command determination in FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above is based on the variable display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variable pattern command, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, etc. By executing processes similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the process, the effects to be executed in the special figure game are set. In addition, in the probability-variable gaming state performance setting process, a unique background image (background production, stage production) indicating that the probability-variable gaming state is in effect is set, and a character image (for example, "○○ RUSH " character image) is set (see FIG. 189 (B1)). Therefore, the player can be in a variable probability gaming state based on the notification display of gaming state information such as a background image (background effect, stage effect) specific to the variable probability gaming state and a text image indicating that the player is in a variable probability gaming state. It is possible to identify that In the variable probability game state, the symbol display section 341 may display the number of successive jackpots and the number of balls put out.

In addition, as described above, in the variable jackpot game, the electric accessory 315b is activated when the game ball enters the first prize opening 314 or when the game ball enters the through gate 317 of the electric accessory. When the result of the special drawing jackpot lottery executed by entering the game ball into the second winning hole 315 by being played is a variable jackpot, the special drawing is a small profit game in which the special drawing is displayed in a variable manner for a specific period. The transition is made after the execution of the special figure game as a period game. Further, the game state shifts to the variable probability game state after the end of the variable probability jackpot game. Therefore, in the symbol display section 341, when the game state information is displayed as the ending image of the probability variable jackpot game (see FIG. 189 (A1)) and then the probability variable gaming state is shifted, it is indicated that the probability variable gaming state is in progress. Game status information is displayed (see FIG. 189 (B1)).

<Steps S3939 and S3940>
If the variable probability game state flag is set to OFF (step S3937: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the a time-saving game state flag indicating the a time-saving game state is set to on (step S3937: No). S3939). The a time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3724 in FIG. 179 in the game state transition process when the time-saving game state a is shifted.

When the a time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3939: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the a time saving game state performance setting process (step S3940) and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, when the a time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3939: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3941.

Here, in the time-saving game state production setting process a, the command of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above is based on the variable display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc. By executing processes similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the determination process, the performance to be executed in the special figure game is set. In addition, in the a time saving game state performance setting process, a unique background image (background performance, stage performance) indicating that the a time saving gaming state is set is set, and a character image (for example, " In addition to the text image of "XX mode"), the remaining number of special figure games that can be played in the a time-saving game state (for example, the text image of "Remaining time-saving 100 times"), etc. are set (see Figure 189 (B2)) . Therefore, the player is informed of the background image (background effect, stage effect) specific to the time-saving gaming state a and the text image indicating that the player is in the time-saving gaming state a. It is possible to identify that the game is in a time-saving gaming state. In the variable probability game state, the symbol display section 341 may display the number of successive jackpots and the number of balls put out.

In addition, as described above, in a normal jackpot game, the electric accessory 315b is activated when a game ball enters the first prize opening 314 or when a game ball enters the through gate 317 of the electric accessory. When the result of the special drawing jackpot lottery executed by entering the game ball into the second winning hole 315 by being played is a normal jackpot, the special drawing is a small profit game in which the special drawing is displayed in a variable manner for a specific period. The transition is made after the execution of the special figure game as a period game. Further, the game state shifts to the variable probability game state after the end of the variable probability jackpot game. Therefore, in the symbol display section 341, when the game state information is displayed as the ending image of the normal jackpot game (see FIG. 189 (A2)) and then the time-saving game state a is entered, it is assumed that the game state is in the time-saving game state a. Game status information indicating the information is displayed (see FIG. 189 (B2)).

In addition, in the time-saving game state production setting process a, it is determined whether or not it is the last special figure game in the time-saving game state a, and if it is the last special figure game in the time-saving game state a, the special figure game is the last special figure game in the time-saving game state a. If the result of the special figure jackpot lottery notified by the figure game is a loss, at the end of the special figure game as a specific period game, the symbol display section 341 shows a game state indicating that the time-saving game state a ends. As information, a time saving end display is displayed (see FIG. 190(A)). In this embodiment, for example, a character image "RUSH END" indicating that the time saving game state a ends is displayed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time saving end display a is also used as a result screen for a jackpot series, and displays the character image "RUSH Y times" indicating the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of balls rolled out for the jackpot series. The results of the jackpot series are displayed, such as the text image of "7500 balls" shown in the figure.

<Steps S3941 and S3942>
When the a time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3939: No), the MPU 51 sets the b time-saving game state flag indicating the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, to on. It is determined whether or not (step S3941). The b time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3727 of FIG. 180 in the gaming state transition process when the b-time saving gaming state is shifted.

When the b time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3941: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the b time saving game state performance setting process (step S3942) and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, when the b time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

Here, in the b-time saving game state effect setting process, the command of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above is based on the variable display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variable pattern command, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, etc. By executing processes similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the determination process, the performance to be executed in the special figure game is set. In addition, in the b time-saving game state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect, stage effect) indicating that the b time-saving game state is set is set, and a character image (for example, " In addition to the character image "Ceiling RUSH"), the remaining number of special figure games that can be played in the b time-saving game state (for example, the character image "1000 times remaining"), etc. are set (see FIG. 190 (B1)). Therefore, the player is informed of the game state information such as a background image (background effect, stage effect) specific to the time-saving gaming state b and a text image indicating that the player is in the time-saving gaming state b. It is possible to identify that the game is in a time-saving gaming state. In the variable probability game state, the symbol display section 341 may display the number of successive jackpots and the number of balls put out.

In addition, as described above, in a normal jackpot game, the electric accessory 315b is activated when a game ball enters the first prize opening 314 or when a game ball enters the through gate 317 of the electric accessory. When the result of the special drawing jackpot lottery executed by entering the game ball into the second winning hole 315 by being played is a normal jackpot, the special drawing is a small profit game in which the special drawing is displayed in a variable manner for a specific period. The transition is made after the execution of the special figure game as a period game. Further, the game state shifts to the variable probability game state after the end of the variable probability jackpot game. Therefore, in the symbol display section 341, when the game state information is displayed as the ending image of the normal jackpot game (see FIG. 189 (A2)) and then the time-saving game state a is entered, it is assumed that the game state is in the time-saving game state a. Game status information indicating the information is displayed (see FIG. 189 (B2)).

<Steps S3943 and S3944>
If the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S3934: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command indicating that the ceiling activation remaining number counter has been set. is determined (step S3943). The ceiling activation remaining number of times counter reset command is based on the execution of the V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, and the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter that indicates the number of remaining special figure games until the b time saving game state is generated is reset. In this case, it is set in step S3748 in FIG. 183 in the gaming state transition process.

If the received command is a ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command indicating that the ceiling activation remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of special symbol games until the b-time saving gaming state is generated has been reset (step S3943 :Yes), the process moves to step S3944. On the other hand, if the received command is not a ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3945.

<Step S3944>
If the received command is a ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command (step S3943: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a ceiling activation remaining number reset display indicating that the remaining ceiling activation number has been reset on the symbol display section 341 ( Step S3944). For example, in this embodiment, the character image "Reset ceiling remaining number of times" is displayed on the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 190 (B2)). Therefore, the player can identify that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset based on the notification display of the remaining number of ceiling activations reset display indicating that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset as game status information. be.

Here, the ceiling activation remaining number counter is reset after the end of the V winning jackpot game as a specific period game which is a small profit game. In addition, the V winning jackpot game is a special electric starting game based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric starting opening 37 as the first ball entering means, and the special electric V winning opening as a specific ball entry area as the second ball entering means. 383. In other words, by executing a weak right-handed game in which the game ball is hit to the left of the separation part 393 on the right side area of the game board 31, which is the second direction, the player generates a V-winning jackpot game and leaves the ceiling activated. The number of times can be reset intentionally, and it can be confirmed that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset based on the reset display of the remaining number of ceiling activations as game state information on the symbol display section 341.

In addition, it is conceivable that the ceiling activation remaining number reset display is displayed for at least a certain period of time after the end of the V winning jackpot game. In addition, the display for resetting the remaining number of ceiling activations may be displayed on the standby screen (demonstration screen) that is transitioned to when neither the special drawing game nor the special drawing jackpot game is being executed, and it is also possible for the player to It is also conceivable that the screen be displayed by a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 or the selection button 21A. By doing so, the player can understand that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset before starting a game on the gaming machine 10.

Here, there may be differences in the players' knowledge and understanding of the functions and gaming methods of the gaming machine 10. For example, the gaming machine 10 may be in the high-frequency support mode by executing the special figure game a predetermined number of times. (b) Having a ceiling function that generates a time-saving gaming state, and (b) determining the number of special figure games necessary until the time-saving gaming state is generated by entering the game ball into the special electric V prize opening 383 of the special electric large prize winning device 38. It has a function to reset the remaining number of ceiling activations to the maximum value, and this function can be activated by causing the game ball to flow down the second flow path 392 by playing a light right-handed game. While there may be players who understand this, it is assumed that there are players who do not understand some of the functions and gaming methods of the gaming machine 10. It is thought that many people understand the ceiling function because it is widely used, and even in game halls, it is necessary to clearly indicate that the game machine has a ceiling function by using a notation such as ``Play Time.'' It is widely practiced. On the other hand, although the gaming machine 10 has a function of resetting the remaining number of ceiling activations in a weak right-handed game, it is difficult for players to understand such a characteristic function immediately until it is widely used among players. There may be players who play the game without knowing the function to reset the remaining number of ceiling activations or the method for resetting the remaining number of ceiling activations.

In the present embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the remaining number of ceiling activations can be reset by causing the game ball to flow down the second flow path 392 in a weak right-handed game in which the game ball is hit to the left of the separation part 393. However, against the player's will, the game ball may flow down the second flow path 392 due to poor firing of the game ball or mutual interference between the game balls, causing the ceiling to be activated. It may happen that the remaining number of times is reset. Therefore, players who do not understand the remaining ceiling activation count reset function or the remaining ceiling activation count reset method of the gaming machine 10 may not be able to understand what has happened if they only see the ceiling activation remaining count reset display (see Figure 190 (B2)). I can't understand. As a result, there is a possibility that the player continues playing the game while misunderstanding that the remaining number of executions of the special figure game required to generate the b-time saving game state is the number before resetting the remaining number of ceiling activations. In that case, even though the player executes the special figure game that he/she had imagined, the ceiling will not be activated (the time-saving game state B will occur), so the player will not be able to use the game machine 10 or the display ( This may result in distrust of the player (display of the number of times the special figure game has been played since the regular jackpot game was finished first), which may lead to a decrease in interest in the gaming machine 10 and to a sense of distrust towards the gaming hall. undesirable for this reason. Therefore, in order to solve this problem, instead of or in addition to displaying a reset display for the remaining number of ceiling activations (see FIG. 190 (B2)), a display that indicates that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset by the player's own actions is displayed. For example, it is preferable to perform this on the symbol display section 341. Specifically, in the symbol display section 341, an explanatory text using a text image or a message indicating that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset based on the game ball entering the special electric V prize opening 383 of the special electric large prize winning device 38 is displayed. , it is conceivable to clearly indicate it by a moving image or a still image including an image imitating the special electric prize winning device 38. In addition, not only when the remaining number of ceiling activations is reset, but also when a game ball enters the special electric V prize opening 383 of the special electric large prize winning device 38 on the demo screen while the special figure game is being executed or the game is not being executed. It is also conceivable to explain in advance that the remaining number of ceiling activations will be reset based on the above.

<Step S3945>
If the received command is not a ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on another command (step S3945), and ends the command determination processing.

As described above, in the present invention, in a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting condition for the variable symbol game is the first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state, the opening/closing for a predetermined period of time is achieved. When a game ball enters a specific ball entry area while the means is open and a game for a specific period that is different from a special game as a profit game ends, the first control state changes from the first control state to the specific game state. The control state is changed to a corresponding second control state. That is, in the present invention, even if the control state of the auxiliary means is in the predetermined gaming state, which is the first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, the game ball is not allowed to enter the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open. By making the ball fly and executing the game for a predetermined specific period, it is possible to generate a specific gaming state in which the control state for the auxiliary means is the second control state. This makes it possible to generate a specific gaming state again even if the specific gaming state has ended, so if the gaming machine is left unattended because the specific gaming state has ended and the specific gaming state does not occur. Therefore, a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine is suppressed.

More specifically, in this embodiment, a special figure jackpot game which is a large profit game and a V prize jackpot game which is a small profit game can be given to the player as a gaming profit. A special figure jackpot game as a big profit game is when the result of a special figure jackpot lottery that is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 as a starting means is a jackpot. This is a highly profitable game for the player who can win a large amount of game balls by opening and closing the variable prize opening 316 as the third ball entry means multiple times. On the other hand, the V-winning jackpot game as a small profit game is a special electric start game that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start opening 37 as the first ball entry means, in which the second ball entry means is provided with an opening/closing mechanism. It is executed when a game ball enters the special electric V prize opening 383 as a specific ball entry area provided in the second ball entry means which is opened by the operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382 as a means, and the game ball enters the special electric large prize winning hole 381. Although it is possible to enter game balls, the number of game balls that can be won by entering the special electric prize winning hole 381 is small, and the profit for the player is small. In addition, in this embodiment, the special electric start opening 37, the special electric large winning opening 381, and the special electric V winning opening 383 are used for games flowing down a second flow path 392 as a specific flow path set in the right side area of the game board 31. It is placed in a position where the ball can enter. In other words, the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game can be executed by launching a game ball into the second channel 392.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the V prize winning jackpot game as a small profit game ends, the number of special figure games as a variable game that can generate b time saving game state which is the first profit game state control is The maximum value is set. Here, the time saving gaming state b, which is the first profit gaming state control, is the opening/closing frequency of the electric accessory 315b as an auxiliary means for opening and closing the second winning opening 315 (the frequency of opening and closing of the electric accessory 315b to the second winning opening 315 by the electric accessory 315b). In the low frequency support mode, which is the second auxiliary state control with low ball support frequency), when the special pattern game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special pattern jackpot game as a large profit game. This is a time-saving gaming state in which the upper limit number of times (for example, 1000) that can be shifted to is specified. That is, in this embodiment, by the player continuing to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392, the special figure game can be shifted to the time-saving game state b, which is the first profit game state control. The maximum value is set as the number of times.

In the present embodiment, a special figure game in which a time-saving game state b, which is the first profit game state control, can be generated by the player continuing to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392. By setting the maximum value as the number of times, when the special pattern game is executed for the upper limit number of times without executing the special pattern jackpot game as a large profit game in the b time saving gaming state which is the first profit gaming state control. Even if the player is transferred from the time-saving gaming state b to the normal gaming state, and the first auxiliary state control is in which the time-saving gaming state b, which is the first profit gaming state control, does not occur, the player cannot use the second channel 392. By continuing to launch the game ball toward the player, it is possible to generate the second auxiliary state control that can generate the time-saving game state b, which is the first profit gaming state control, according to the player's intention. In this way, in this embodiment, since the player can generate the state that is the second auxiliary state control that can generate the b time-saving gaming state that is the first profit gaming state control, it is possible to It becomes possible to improve the operation rate for the gaming machine in which the time-saving gaming state b, which is the first profit gaming state control, is completed without executing the special figure jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special figure game allows the player to generate the time-saving game state b, which is the first profit game state control, by continuing to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392. Since the maximum value is set as the number of times, if the player ends the game in the second auxiliary state control that can generate b time-saving gaming state, which is the first profit gaming state control, the player can By continuing to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392 before ending the game, the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game is executed, and the time-saving game state b, which is the first profit game state control, is activated. It is possible to clear the number of special figure games executed by the player in a state where the second auxiliary state control is possible. As a result, the player can avoid the disadvantage caused by the player playing the game under the second auxiliary state control, which is the first profit gaming state control, which is the second auxiliary state control that can generate the time-saving gaming state b, to the benefit of others. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In other words, the player invests time, money, effort, etc. for the number of times the special figure game is executed in the second auxiliary state control that can generate the first profit gaming state control b, which is the time-saving gaming state. Continuing to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392 ensures that such investment will benefit others who later play games with the game machine, that is, be subject to so-called hyena behavior. This can be prevented depending on the player's intention.

Further, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to third embodiments described above can be made within an applicable range.

Further, in each embodiment, matters described in other embodiments can be applied within an applicable range.

[Fifth embodiment]
In a gaming machine that can shift to a value-adding state when a predetermined count information update reaches a predetermined number of times in a predetermined gaming state, it is desired to improve the method of notifying the player.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention has the following features:
A firing means capable of firing a game ball;
A starting ball entry area provided in the game area where game balls can flow down;
a display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area and performing opening/closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising:
an updating means for updating specific information based on establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display;
profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state in a specific gaming state;
Notification control means that performs predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode;
determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
Profit generation that generates a specific profit when a predetermined gaming condition is established based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player when the result of the predetermined judgment executed by the judgment means is a specific judgment result. means and
Equipped with
When the result of the predetermined judgment executed by the judgment means is a specific judgment result, the notification control means may control the notification control unit until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined update state, when the result of the predetermined judgment executed by the judgment unit is a specific judgment result. A switching means is provided for notifying that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.

The specific information may be information that is updated based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display of a predetermined symbol. The specific information may include various counters set in the RAM, various commands, various flags, propriety information and reservation number information regarding the reservation of the right to play a special figure game, and general figure information, as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized. Information regarding the right to execute a change, various information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, information stored in various buffers, a predetermined series of data groups, a pointer for grasping the updated position in the data group, time-saving games A time saving number counter (a time saving number counter, b time saving number counter, c time saving number counter) corresponding to the maximum remaining number of time saving times in the state, a counter corresponding to the remaining number of special figure games until the time saving game state b occurs ( Ceiling activation remaining number counter), jackpot random number counter, jackpot type counter, reach random number counter, special pattern fluctuation type counter, jackpot random number initial value counter, random number counter per regular pattern, random number per type per standard pattern counter, random number counter by general pattern fluctuation type , a random number initial value counter per common figure, an opening time counter that indicates the remaining opening time of the electric accessory, a round number counter that corresponds to the remaining number of rounds of the jackpot game, and an opening time that corresponds to the remaining opening time of the jackpot game. counter, round game time counter corresponding to the maximum remaining time of the round game, ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time of the ending of the jackpot game, special pattern fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, pending ball number command, fixed display command, special Figure shift command, 1st special figure hold command, 2nd special figure hold command, small winning game start command, profit display OP command, loss display OP command, small winning opening start command, small winning opening end command, movable wing part operation Start command, small winning game end command, jackpot game start command, opening start command, opening end command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, ending start command, ending end command, jackpot game End command, special pattern fluctuation display flag, special pattern fluctuation stop flag, regular pattern fluctuation display flag, general pattern fluctuation stop display flag, electric accessory opening flag, jackpot game start flag, jackpot game flag, opening flag , Round game flag, Interval flag, Ending flag, Jackpot game end flag, Small win game start flag, Small win opening flag, V winning opening/closing part operation flag, Movable wing operation flag, V winning flag, Small win Game flag, variable probability game state flag, normal game state flag, jackpot game state flag, small win game state flag, normal game state flag, time-saving game state flag (a time-saving game state flag, b time-saving game state flag, c time-saving game state flag), special pattern validity information stored in the first special pattern holding area regarding the reservation of the right to execute the first special pattern game, information regarding the number of reservations for the first special pattern game, and the right to execute the second special pattern game. Special pattern validity information stored in the second special pattern holding area for the reservation of , information regarding the number of reservations for the second special pattern game, special pattern validity information stored in the special pattern execution area for the special pattern fluctuation, general pattern fluctuation Information regarding the validity of common symbols stored in the common symbol reservation storage area for the reservation of the right to execute, information related to the number of common symbols fluctuation reservations, and information regarding the entirety of one special symbol game when executing a special symbol game. A series of drawing lists that are set, a series of drawing lists that are set for the whole of one jackpot game when a jackpot game is executed, a series of drawing lists that are set for the whole of one small win game when a small win game is executed. A series of drawing lists set for special figure games, a pointer for grasping the updated position in the drawing list set for special figure games, a pointer for grasping the updated position in the drawing list set for jackpot games , a pointer for grasping the updated position in the drawing list set for the small winning game, information stored in the display data table buffer (display data table), information stored in the additional data table buffer (additional data table) ), information stored in a transfer data table buffer (transfer data table), drawing information stored in a frame buffer, and any combination thereof.

The updating means may be any process that updates specific information. As an update means, as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, processing by software, overwrite control processing, write control processing, load processing, processing by hardware circuit, updating various counters set in RAM (addition, subtraction), etc. , initialization, clearing), updating (setting) various commands, updating various flags (on/off switching processing), validity information regarding suspension of the right to execute special drawing games, and information on the number of suspensions. , processing to update information regarding the right to execute general pattern fluctuations, processing to update various information stored in predetermined addresses of RAM, processing to update information stored in various buffers, Processing to store a series of data groups in a predetermined storage area such as a buffer, processing to update (move) a pointer to grasp the update position in the data group, and the number of time reductions corresponding to the remaining maximum number of time reductions in the time-saving gaming state. Processing to update (subtract, add, initialize, clear) the counters (a time-saving number counter, b time-saving number counter, c time-saving number counter), b correspond to the remaining number of special figure games until the time-saving game state occurs. Processing to update (subtract or add) the counter (ceiling activation remaining number counter), processing to update the jackpot random number counter, processing to update the jackpot type counter, processing to update the reach random number counter, updating the special symbol fluctuation type counter. Processing, processing to update the jackpot random number initial value counter, processing to update the random number counter per ordinary symbol, process to update the type random number counter per ordinary symbol, process to update the ordinary symbol fluctuation type random number counter, initial random number value per ordinary symbol Processing to update the value counter, processing to update (subtract, add or clear) the opening time counter corresponding to the remaining opening time of the electric accessory, updating (subtract) the round number counter corresponding to the remaining number of rounds of the jackpot game. process to update (subtract or add) the opening time counter corresponding to the remaining opening time of the jackpot game, process to update (subtract, add, or add) the round game time counter corresponding to the maximum remaining time of the round game. processing to update (subtract or add) the ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time of the ending of the jackpot game, processing to update (set) the special pattern fluctuation pattern command, processing to update (set) the stop type command , processing for updating (setting) the number of reserved balls command, processing for updating (setting) the confirmed display command, processing for updating (setting) the special figure shift command, processing for updating (setting) the first special figure reservation command, Processing for updating (setting) the second special figure hold command, processing for updating (setting) the small winning game start command, processing for updating (setting) the profit display OP command, processing for updating (setting) the loss display OP command. , Processing for updating (setting) the small winning opening start command, Processing for updating (setting) the small winning opening end command, Processing for updating (setting) the movable wing operation start command, Updating (setting) the small winning game end command ) processing, processing for updating (setting) the jackpot game start command, processing for updating (setting) the opening start command, processing for updating (setting) the opening end command, processing for updating (setting) the round game start command, Process to update (set) the round game end command, process to update (set) the interval start command, process to update (set) the interval end command, process to update (set) the ending start command, update the ending end command (setting) process, process to update (set) the jackpot game end command, process to update the special figure fluctuation display flag (on/off switching process), process to update the special figure fluctuation stop flag (on/off (switching process), processing to update the general figure fluctuation display flag (on/off switching process), process to update the general figure fluctuation stop display flag (on/off switching process), process to update the electric accessory opening flag Processing to update (on/off switching process), process to update the jackpot game start flag (on/off switching process), process to update the jackpot game flag (on/off switching process), process to update the jackpot game flag (on/off switching process), Processing to update (on/off switching processing), processing to update flag during round play (on/off switching processing), processing to update flag during interval (on/off switching processing), updating flag during ending Processing to update the jackpot game end flag (on/off switching process), process to update the small winning game start flag (on/off switching process), small winning opening flag (on/off switching process), processing to update the V prize opening/closing part operation flag (on/off switching process), process to update the movable wing part operation flag (on/off switching process) , processing to update the small winning game flag (on/off switching processing), processing to update the V winning flag (on/off switching processing), processing to update the probability variable gaming state flag (on/off switching processing) , processing to update the normal gaming state flag (on/off switching processing), processing to update the jackpot gaming state flag (on/off switching processing), processing to update the small winning gaming state flag (on/off switching) processing), processing to update the normal gaming state flag (on/off switching processing), processing to update the time-saving gaming state flag (a time-saving gaming state flag, b working-time saving gaming state flag, c working-saving gaming state flag) (on/off processing), OFF switching processing), processing for updating the special pattern validity information (addition or shift) stored in the first special pattern holding area for the reservation of the right to execute the first special pattern game, and the number of reservations for the first special pattern game. A process of updating (adding or subtracting) the information regarding the second special figure game, a process of updating (adding or shifting) the special figure validity information stored in the second special figure reservation area for the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, Processing to update (add or subtract) information regarding the reserved number of special pattern games, process to update (overwrite) the special pattern validity information stored in the special pattern execution area, and processing to update (overwrite) the information regarding the number of reservations for special pattern games; A process for updating the information regarding the validity of common symbols and the number of variations in common symbols stored in the reservation storage area, and a series of drawing lists that are set for the entirety of one special symbol game when a special symbol game is executed. (stored in the drawing list area (buffer) set in the work RAM), and updating a series of drawing lists set for the entire jackpot game when executing a jackpot game (stored in the drawing list area (buffer) set in the work RAM). When a small winning game is executed, a series of drawing lists set for the entire small winning game are updated (stored in the drawing list area (buffer) set in the work RAM). Processing to update (move) the pointer to grasp the updated position in the drawing list set for special figure games, drawing set for jackpot games Processing to update (move) a pointer to grasp the updated position in the list, processing to update (move) the pointer to grasp the updated position in the drawing list set for small winning games, display data table buffer Processing to update the information stored in the (display data table), processing to update the information stored in the additional data table buffer (additional data table), updating information stored in the transfer data table buffer (transfer data table) Examples include processing to update drawing information stored in a frame buffer, processing to update drawing information stored in a frame buffer, and any combination thereof.

The specific gaming state may be any state related to gaming. As a specific game state, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a normal game state, a time-saving game state (a-time-saving game state, b-time-saving game state, c-time-saving game state), the start or end of a jackpot game, etc. a state in which the number of executions of the special figure game in the time-saving gaming state has been initialized; b, a state in which the number of executions of the special figure game necessary to generate the time-saving gaming state by the start or end of the jackpot game has been initialized; By clearing the RAM of the gaming machine, the number of executions of the special figure game necessary to generate the time-saving gaming state b is initialized, and the jackpot game starts from the initialization of the number of executions of the special figure game in the time-saving gaming state a. b) From the initialization of the number of executions of the special figure game in the time-saving gaming state until the start of the jackpot game, c from the initialization of the number of executions of the special figure game in the time-saving gaming state Game state until the start of a jackpot game, state from the end of a jackpot game until the start of the next jackpot game, variable probability game state, small win game state, state where the opening is executed in a small win game, small win A state in which the V winning opening is opened in the game, a jackpot game state, a state in which the opening is executed in the jackpot game, a state in which the opening/closing execution mode is executed in the jackpot game, a state in which each round game is executed in the jackpot game. The state where the ending is executed in the jackpot game, the state from the start of the normal winning game to the end of the normal winning game, the normal electric accessory is activated (the second prize opening is opened). state, the fluctuation state of the predetermined symbol (the state from the start of the fluctuation of the predetermined symbol until the end of the fluctuation), the fluctuation state of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (the state of the special symbol) (state from the start of the fluctuation until the end of the fluctuation), fluctuation state of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, fluctuation state of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, jackpot lottery The fluctuation state of the special symbol when the result is a loss, the fluctuation state of the regular symbol (the state from the start of the fluctuation of the regular symbol until the end of the fluctuation), the fluctuation state of the regular symbol when the result of the lottery is a hit The fluctuating state of the normal symbol, the fluctuating state of the regular symbol when the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the state in which the movable body provided on the game board is operating, the execution state of various performances, and the execution of performances in jackpot games Examples include a state in which a special figure game is being played, a state in which a performance is being executed in a special figure game, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined update state may be any state in which some kind of profit can be given to the player as a result of the specific information being updated based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display of the predetermined symbols. The predetermined update state may be, for example, a state in which a jackpot game can be started, a state in which a jackpot game can be ended, a state in which a small win game can be started, or a state in which a small win game can be finished, as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized. A state in which a game with a common figure can be started, a state in which a game with a common figure can be finished, a state in which a variable probability gaming state can be started, a state in which a variable probability gaming state can be ended, a state in which a time saving gaming state can be started. , a state in which the time-saving game state can be ended, b a state in which the time-saving game state can be started, b a state in which the time-saving game state can be ended, c a state in which the time-saving game state can be started, c a state in which the time-saving game state can be ended. , a state in which a variable display of a predetermined symbol can be started, a state in which a variable display of a predetermined symbol can be ended, a state in which a variable display of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be started, a special symbol ( A state in which the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol) can be ended, a state in which the variable display of the special symbol can be started when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a state in which the fluctuating display of the special symbol can be started when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. A state where the variable display of the special symbol has started, a state where the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, a state where the variable display of the special symbol is stopped when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win. a state in which the fluctuating display of decorative symbols can be started, a state in which the fluctuating display of decorative symbols can be ended, a state in which the fluctuating display of decorative symbols can be started when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the result of the jackpot lottery A state in which the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern has started when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, a state in which the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is being displayed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, and a decorative pattern when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win. A state in which the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is stopped, a state in which the fluctuating display of the normal symbol can be started, a state in which the fluctuating display of the regular symbol has started when the result of the lottery with a common symbol is a win, a state where the fluctuating display of the regular symbol is started, A state in which the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being displayed when it is a win, a state in which the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is stopped when the result of the winning lottery is a win, a state in which various counters have become 0, and a state in which the various counters are set to predetermined values. B time-saving game state based on the subtraction type counter (ceiling activation remaining number of times counter) corresponding to the number of executions of the special figure game necessary to generate the time-saving game state b becomes 0. A time-saving game state based on the addition type counter (ceiling activation remaining number counter) corresponding to the number of executions of the special figure game required to generate the time-saving game state b, which is possible to occur, and a time-saving game state b. A state in which it can occur, a state in which the value of the jackpot random number counter corresponds to a jackpot, a state in which the value of the jackpot random number counter corresponds to a small win, a state in which the value of the random number counter per common figure corresponds to a win. A state in which a variable probability gaming state can be generated based on the subtraction type ending time counter that corresponds to the remaining time of the ending of the variable probability jackpot game, and an addition corresponding to the remaining time of the ending of the variable variable jackpot game. A state in which a fixed-variable gaming state can be generated based on the formula ending time counter being equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and a time-saving gaming state based on the subtraction formula ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time becoming 0 for the ending of the time-saving jackpot game. A state in which the time-saving game state can be generated, a state in which the time-saving game state can be generated, and the ending of the normal jackpot game corresponds to the remaining time based on the addition type ending time counter being equal to or higher than a predetermined value. A state in which a time-saving game state can be generated based on the subtractive ending time counter becoming 0, and a time-saving state based on the fact that the additive ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time of the normal jackpot game becomes more than a predetermined value. A state in which a gaming state can be generated, a state in which the value of the subtractive time counter corresponding to the remaining time of the small winning game when a game ball enters the V winning hole during the execution of the small winning game becomes 0, When the game ball enters the V winning hole during the execution of the small winning game, the value of the incremental time counter corresponding to the remaining time of the small winning game is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, and the special figure game is executed. In this case, when the series of drawing lists set for the entire one special figure game are updated (stored in the drawing list area (buffer) set in the work RAM), when executing the special figure game, A state in which a series of drawing lists set for the entire one special figure game has been executed to the end (a state in which the drawing process on the display means in the special figure game has been completed), and once when a jackpot game is executed. A state in which the series of drawing lists set for the entire jackpot game has been executed to the end (a state in which the drawing process on the display means in the jackpot game has been completed), and one small win when executing a small win game. A state in which a series of drawing lists set for the entire game has been executed to the end (a state in which drawing processing on the display means in small winning games has been completed), and an updated position in the drawing list for special figure games. A state in which the pointer indicates the last updated position in the drawing list, a state in which the pointer for grasping the updated position in the drawing list for jackpot games indicates the last updated position in the drawing list, an updated position in the drawing list for small winning games Examples include a state in which the pointer for grasping the drawing list indicates the last updated position in the drawing list, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined profit state may be any state that provides some kind of profit to the player. The predetermined profit state may be, for example, a state in which prize balls are easily awarded, a jackpot game state, a small win game state, a state in which the result of a jackpot lottery is likely to become a jackpot, or a state in which a jackpot lottery is likely to result. A state in which the result is likely to be a small win, a probability game state, a state in which the electric accessory is likely to operate, a state in which the result of the regular drawing lottery is likely to be a win, a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, c time-saving game state, small In a winning game, the expected ball payout value is higher if you win a V prize than if you win a V prize and the b time saving gaming state occurs, and in a small winning game, if you win a V prize, the b time saving gaming state occurs without making a V prize. A state in which the expected ball payout value is higher, a state in which a specific performance is executed in the special figure game, a state in which a guaranteed jackpot effect is executed in the special figure game, a state in which a guaranteed variable jackpot effect is executed in the special figure game. , a state in which a performance that guarantees a small hit is executed in a special figure game, a state in which a performance related to a gaming method that has an advantageous expected ball payout value in a special figure game, a state in which it is better to win a V prize when a small hit occurs in a special figure game. A state in which a performance indicating that it is advantageous in terms of expected value is executed, a state in which a performance indicating that it is advantageous in terms of expected value of balls to be played if the player does not win a V prize at the time of a small hit in a special figure game, A state in which a specific performance is executed, a state in which a variable promotion performance is executed in a jackpot game, a state in which a held consecutive winning performance is executed in a jackpot game, a time-saving game in which it is better to win a V prize than to win a V prize in a small winning game. A state in which a performance is executed that indicates that the expected ball payout value is more advantageous than the state that occurs, and a ball payout is more expected when the b time-saving game state occurs without making a V win than when a V win is made in a small winning game. Examples include a state in which a performance indicating that the game is advantageous in terms of value is executed, and an arbitrary combination thereof.

The notification mode may be any mode as long as it corresponds to a predetermined notification. The notification mode may be an image notification mode, a light notification mode, a voice notification mode, a mode of notifying the player's profit, a mode of notifying the player's disadvantage, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized. , a mode of notifying an event that will occur in the future, a mode of notifying that a prize ball is likely to be awarded, a mode of notifying that a jackpot game state is in progress, a mode of notifying a state of a small win game state, A mode of informing that the result of a jackpot lottery is in a state where it is likely to become a jackpot, a mode of informing that the result of a jackpot lottery is in a state where it is likely to be a small win, a mode of informing that it is a probability game state, an electric combination A mode of notifying that the object is in a state where it is easy to operate, a mode of notifying that the result of the lottery winning a common figure is in a state where it is easy to win, a mode of notifying that it is in a time-saving gaming state, and b a mode of notifying that it is in a time-saving gaming state. A mode of notifying a certain thing, a mode of notifying that c is a time-saving gaming state, a state in which the expected value of the ball is higher when V is won in a small winning game than when the time-saving gaming state b is generated without a V winning. A mode of informing that the expected value of balls is higher when the b time-saving game state occurs without making a V win than when making a V win in a small winning game, A mode of informing that the expected ball output value is higher when a B time saving game state occurs without making a V win, when a small win occurs in a special figure game A mode of informing that a state is being executed that shows that it is more advantageous in terms of the expected value of balls to be won if the player wins a V prize, and in a special figure game, it is more advantageous in terms of the expected value of balls to be won than not to have a V prize at the time of a small win. The display mode of the reach effect in the special figure game (reach effect type), the mode of informing the type of reach effect that will occur in the future in the special figure game (e.g. (Stock), mode of informing that some effect will occur in the special drawing game (for example, timer effect), mode of informing that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, mode of informing that the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win. A mode of notification, a mode of informing that the result of a jackpot lottery is a loss, a mode of informing that the result of a jackpot lottery is a loss and then informing that it is a jackpot (for example, a revival performance), a mode of informing that the result of a jackpot lottery is a loss. After announcing that the result is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is more advantageous to the player (probable jackpot, RUSH rush jackpot, jackpot with a larger number of rounds). Stopping manner of a predetermined symbol in a figure game (stopping type), stopping manner of a special symbol in a special figure game (stopping type), stopping manner of a special symbol to notify a jackpot in a special figure game, definite change in a special figure game How special symbols stop to notify you of a jackpot, how to stop a special symbol to notify you of a normal hit in a special game, how to stop a special symbol to notify you of a time-saving jackpot in a special game, A stop mode that notifies you of a small hit in a figure game, a stop mode that alerts you to a miss in a special figure game, a stop mode (stop type) of decorative symbols in a special figure game, a big hit in a special figure game. A stop mode of a decorative pattern that announces a special figure game (e.g. a double stop), a stop mode of a decorative pattern that alerts a special figure game to a guaranteed odd jackpot (for example, a double stop of 7 symbols), a normal jackpot in a special figure game. A stop mode of a decorative pattern that informs that a special figure game is a time-saving jackpot (for example, an even-numbered symbol), a stop mode of a decorative pattern that alerts a person to a time-saving jackpot in a special figure game, a decorative pattern that informs a small win in a special figure game. A stopping mode of a decorative pattern that notifies you of a miss in a special pattern game (for example, a non-Zero stop), a stopping mode of a decorative pattern that notifies you that you are out of reach in a special pattern game, a special pattern game A stop mode of a decorative pattern that notifies you that it is a reach other than being out of the front or back in a special figure game, a stop mode of a decorative pattern that alerts you that it is a complete miss in a special figure game (e.g., a stop on a random number), a stop mode of a decorative pattern that alerts you that it is a reach in a special figure game. A state in which a decorative pattern to notify a stop state (for example, a non-zero stop state) changes to a stop state of a decorative pattern to notify a loss in a special figure game (for example, a double stop state), and a jackpot in a special figure game. From the stopped state of the decorative pattern that notifies the player (for example, the stopped state of even numbered doubles) to the stopped state of the decorative pattern that notifies the player of a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player (probable variable jackpot, RUSH rush guaranteed jackpot, jackpot with a larger number of rounds) (for example, the 7th zero stop state), the stopping mode (stop type) of the normal symbol in the common pattern game, the stopping state of the normal symbol that notifies you of a win in the common pattern game, and the stopping condition of the normal pattern that informs you that it is a hit in the general pattern game, Examples include stopping modes of normal symbols that notify something, arbitrary combinations thereof, and the like.

The notification control means may be any process as long as it controls the notification mode. As the notification control means, as long as it is possible to realize the purpose of the present invention, for example, a process for controlling the notification mode by image, a process for controlling the notification mode by light, a process for controlling the notification mode by sound, a process for controlling the notification mode by voice, etc. Processing to control in a manner to notify, process to control in a manner to notify disadvantage of the player, process to control in manner to notify of events that will occur in the future, and notification that prize balls are likely to be awarded. Processing to control the mode in a manner that notifies you that it is a jackpot gaming state, processing that controls it in a mode that notifies you that it is a small winning gaming state, and a state in which the result of the jackpot lottery is likely to become a jackpot. A process for controlling the mode to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is in a state where it is likely to become a small win, a process for controlling the mode to notify that the result is a probability game state, an electric accessory. Processing to control in a manner to notify that it is in a state where it is easy to operate, a process to control in a manner to notify that it is in a time-saving gaming state, b processing to control in a manner to notify that it is in a time-saving gaming state, c Processing to control the mode of notifying that it is a time-saving gaming state, and informing that in a small winning game, the expected value of balls is higher when a V prize is won than when a time-saving gaming state occurs without a V winning. Processing to control in a mode, processing to control in a mode to notify that the expected ball output value is higher when the B time saving game state occurs without V winning than when V winning in a small winning game, Special figure game A process for controlling a state in which a state is executed that indicates that it is more advantageous in terms of expected ball payout value to make a V win at the time of a small hit in a special figure game, Processing to control the mode of notifying that a production indicating that the ball is advantageous in terms of expected value is to be executed, processing to control the display mode of the reach production in the special figure game (ready-to-reach production type), special figure Processing to control the mode of notifying the type of reach effect that will occur in the future in the game (for example, effect stock), processing to control the mode of notifying that some effect will occur in the special figure game (for example, timer effect), jackpot A process for controlling a mode to notify that the result of a lottery is a jackpot, a process for controlling a mode for notifying that a result of a jackpot lottery is a small win, a mode for controlling a mode to notify that a result of a jackpot lottery is a loss. Processing to control, processing to control in a manner to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss and then notify that it is a jackpot (for example, a revival effect), a process to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. A process for controlling a mode (e.g., promotion performance) to notify the player that the type of jackpot from is more advantageous to the player (probable variable jackpot, RUSH rush guaranteed jackpot, jackpot with a larger number of rounds), predetermined symbols in the special figure game A process to control the stop mode (stop type) of a special symbol in a special figure game, a process to control a stop mode of a special symbol that notifies you of a jackpot in a special figure game. , Processing to control the stop mode of special symbols to notify that it is a probability-variable jackpot in special figure games, Process to control the stop mode of special symbols to notify that it is a normal hit in special figure games, Time saving in special figure games Processing to control the stopping mode of special symbols to notify that it is a jackpot, processing to control the stopping mode to notify that it is a small hit in special pattern games, and processing to control the stopping mode to notify that it is a loss in special pattern games. A process to control, a process to control the stop mode (stop type) of a decorative pattern in a special figure game, a process to control a stop mode (for example, a double stop) of a decorative pattern that notifies you of a jackpot in a special figure game, a special process. A process for controlling the stop mode of decorative symbols that informs that it is a probability-variable jackpot in figure games (for example, the stop of a 7-symbol double), and a process that controls the stop mode of decorative symbols that alerts that it is a normal jackpot in special figure games (for example, an even-numbered stop mode) Processing to control the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern (Zero of the pattern), processing to control the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern to notify that it is a time-saving jackpot in the special pattern game, process to control the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern to notify that it is a small hit in the special pattern game. A process to control, a process to control the stop mode of a decorative pattern that notifies you that you are out of position in a special pattern game (for example, a non-Zero stop), a process that controls the stop mode of a decorative pattern that notifies you that you are out of reach in a special pattern game, and a stop of a decorative pattern that notifies you that you are out of reach in the special pattern game. Processing to control the stop mode of the decorative pattern that notifies you that it is a reach other than front and back miss in the special figure game, process to control the stop mode of the decorative pattern that notifies you that it is completely missed in the special figure game (e.g. A process for controlling the state of a decorative pattern (for example, a non-Zero number stopped state) that notifies you of a loss in a special pattern game, and a stop state of a decorative pattern that notifies you of a loss in a special pattern game. RUSH A process for controlling the manner in which a decorative pattern changes to a stopped state (for example, a 7th zero stop state) that notifies you of a confirmed jackpot or a jackpot with a larger number of rounds, and a process for controlling the state in which a decorative pattern changes to a stopped state (for example, a 7th zero stop state). Processing to control the stop mode of normal symbols to notify a win in a normal pattern game, process to control the stopping mode of a normal pattern to notify a loss in a normal pattern game, and so on. Examples include any combination of the following.

The predetermined gaming condition may be any condition that is satisfied based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determining means is a specific determination result. The predetermined game conditions include conditions that hold true when the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, conditions that hold true when the result of a jackpot lottery is a variable win, and conditions that hold true when the result of a jackpot lottery is a variable win, as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized. Conditions that hold true when the result of a jackpot lottery is a short-time win, conditions that hold true when the result of a jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, conditions that hold when the result of a jackpot lottery is a small win, and conditions that hold when the result of a jackpot lottery is a loss. A condition that holds true in a certain case, a condition that holds true in a jackpot game that is executed when the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a player operates the firing handle in a jackpot game that is executed when the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Conditions that are established when a game ball is fired based on a jackpot, conditions that are established when a game ball enters a predetermined prize opening in a jackpot game that is executed when the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a jackpot. A condition that is established when a game ball enters a predetermined prize opening by firing a game ball based on the player operating the firing handle in a jackpot game that is executed when the lottery result is a jackpot. , a condition that is established when a game ball enters the V winning slot in a jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a variable probability jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variable jackpot Conditions that hold true when a game ball enters the V winning slot in a variable jackpot game that is executed when the result of a jackpot lottery is a variable jackpot, conditions that hold when the result of a jackpot lottery is a time-saving jackpot. Conditions that hold true in a time-saving jackpot game that is executed, conditions that hold true in a normal jackpot game that is executed when the result of a jackpot lottery is a regular jackpot, and small win games that are executed when the result of a jackpot lottery is a small win. Conditions that hold true when a game ball is fired based on the player operating the firing handle in a small win game that is executed when the result of a jackpot lottery is a small win, Conditions that hold true when a game ball is fired based on the player operating the firing handle, Results of a jackpot lottery A condition that is established when a game ball enters a predetermined prize opening by firing a game ball based on a player operating a firing handle in a small winning game that is executed when is a small winning; Conditions that are established when a game ball enters the V prize opening in a small win game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, conditions that are established based on the operation of the operation button, the front side of the game board A condition that is established based on a touch operation on the button, a condition that is established when a game ball is fired based on the player operating the firing handle, and a condition that is established when the game ball is fired based on the player operating the firing handle. A condition that is established when a game ball enters a predetermined prize opening by doing so, a condition that is established when a game ball is fired to the left side area of the game board based on an operation on the firing handle, and a predetermined operation on the firing handle. A condition that is established by firing a game ball to the right side area of the game board based on , a condition that is established by firing a game ball to the right side area of the game board based on a predetermined operation on the firing handle, and any of these conditions. Examples include combinations.

The specific profit may be a profit given when a predetermined gaming condition is met. Specific benefits include, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, benefits granted when the result of a predetermined lottery is a specific result, benefits granted when the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, Execution of a jackpot game, execution of a variable probability jackpot game, generation of a variable probability game state based on the entry of a game ball into the V winning slot in a variable probability jackpot game, execution of a time-saving jackpot game, execution of a game ball into the V winning slot in a variable probability jackpot game Occurrence of a time-saving gaming state based on the entry of a ball, execution of a normal jackpot game, occurrence of a time-saving gaming state based on the execution of a normal jackpot game, profit awarded when the result of a jackpot lottery is a small win, a small win Execution of a game, execution of a jackpot game based on the entry of a game ball into the V prize opening in a small winning game, profits awarded when the result of a jackpot lottery is a loss, and when the result of a jackpot lottery is a loss. b. Subtraction of the number of executions of the special figure game necessary to generate the time-saving gaming state, the profit that will be awarded if the result of the lottery with a common figure is a win, the execution of the game with a common figure, and the entry into the specified winning slot. Profit granted by entering a game ball, awarding of prize balls based on entering a game ball into a designated winning opening, granting of prize balls based on entering a gaming ball into a general winning opening (normal winning opening) , awarding a prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the first prize opening which provides an opportunity to start the first special figure game, and awarding a prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening which provides an opportunity to start the second special figure game. Granting prize balls based on the entry of balls, granting prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole (big winning hole) in jackpot games, and giving game balls to the variable winning hole (big winning hole) in small winning games. awarding a prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole, executing a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole, executing the first special figure game based on the entering of the game ball into the first winning hole, Execution of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening, execution of the second special game based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening, entry of the game ball into the through gate (passage) Execution of a lottery for a regular figure based on the game, execution of a game for a regular figure based on the entry (passing) of a game ball into the through gate, execution of a specific production, execution of a specific production in a special pattern game, execution of a specific production in a special pattern game, Execution of a guaranteed jackpot effect, promotion effect in a special figure game, revival effect in a special figure game, execution of a specific effect in a jackpot game, execution of a promotion effect in a jackpot game, any combination thereof, etc. can be mentioned.

The profit generating means may be any process that generates a specific profit. As a profit generating means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a process that generates a profit that is given when the result of a predetermined lottery is a specific result, a process that generates a profit that is given when the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, etc. processing to generate a profit that will be given, processing to execute a jackpot game, process to execute a variable probability jackpot game, process to generate a variable probability game state based on the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole in a variable probability jackpot game, a time-saving jackpot game , a process for generating a time-saving gaming state based on the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole in a probability-variable jackpot game, a process for executing a normal jackpot game, a process for generating a time-saving gaming state based on the execution of a normal jackpot game. processing to generate a profit, processing to generate a profit that is awarded when the result of a jackpot lottery is a small win, processing to execute a small win game, a jackpot game based on the entry of a game ball into the V prize opening in a small win game processing to generate a profit to be given when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, and execution of the special figure game necessary to generate the b time-saving gaming state when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. The process of subtracting the number of times, the process of generating the profit that is awarded when the result of the lottery with a common symbol is a win, the process of executing the game with a common symbol, and the process of generating the profit that is awarded by entering the game ball into the predetermined winning hole. processing to generate a profit based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening, processing to award prize balls based on the entry of a gaming ball into a general winning opening (normal winning opening); , a process of awarding a prize ball based on the entry of a game ball into a first prize opening that provides an opportunity to start a first special figure game, and a game to a second prize opening that provides an opportunity to start a second special figure game. The process of awarding prize balls based on the ball entering the ball, the process of awarding the prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the variable winning hole (big winning hole) in jackpot games, the process of awarding the prize ball based on the ball entering the variable winning hole (big winning hole) in small winning games processing for awarding prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first prize opening), processing for executing a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first prize opening; A process of executing the first special figure game based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening, a process of executing a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening, a process of executing the second special figure game based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening. A process to be executed, a process to execute a lottery for a regular game based on the entry (passage) of a game ball into a through gate, a process to execute a game for a regular game based on the entry (passage) of a game ball into a through gate, A process for executing a specific performance, a process for executing a specific performance in a special figure game, a process for executing a jackpot confirmation effect in a special figure game, a process for executing a promotion effect in a special figure game, a process for executing a revival effect in a special figure game. Examples include processing, processing for executing a specific performance in a jackpot game, processing for executing a promotion performance in a jackpot game, and any combination thereof.

By the way, in recent gaming machines, for example, in a predetermined gaming state such as a low probability mode (a gaming state in which the probability that the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot), the number of changes in special symbols as update information is displayed. (For example, when the counter corresponding to the number of executions of the special figure game required to generate the time-saving game state b) reaches the specified number of times, the time-saving game state is set as a predetermined profit state (the so-called profit game state b time-saving game state, ceiling time-saving game state). The notifications for this are monotonous, such as simply notifying the remaining number of special figure games required to reach the specified number of times, or displaying the same content up to the specified number of times, so further ingenuity is required. is required. For example, specifically, in the time-saving game state b, which is the profit game state, the second prize opening, which provides an opportunity to execute a jackpot lottery, is opened at a high frequency by operating the electric accessory at a high frequency. Therefore, in the b-time saving game state, it is easy to receive a prize ball award and a jackpot lottery as a benefit award based on the entry of a game ball into the second winning opening. As a result, in the time-saving gaming state b, the player can receive a jackpot lottery while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls, so the player can enter the normal gaming state where it is unnecessary or difficult to enter the game balls into the second prize opening. In comparison, the number of game balls required to generate a jackpot game as a bonus award can be reduced.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, compared to the case where a jackpot game is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole as a bonus award, compared to the case where a jackpot game is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole. When a jackpot game is generated as a bonus, the profit given to the player tends to be set larger. For example, when a game ball enters the second winning slot as a trigger, a jackpot game is more likely to occur (a so-called RUSH state) than when a game ball enters the first winning slot as a trigger. ) entry rate may be given preferential treatment. In one example, the RUSH entry rate is set to 50% when the game ball enters the first prize opening, whereas the RUSH entry rate is set to 50% when the game ball enters the second prize opening. In this case, the RUSH entry rate is set to 100%. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state b, which is a profit gaming state, the RUSH entry rate is higher than in the normal gaming state, and as a result, the low probability mode (playing state where the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is low) Compared to the case where the first jackpot game occurs in the normal gaming state where The expected ball output value (the average value of the total number of prize balls obtained by the player) becomes higher. In this way, the expected ball payout value is higher in the b time-saving game state when the first jackpot game occurs than in the normal game state.

Here, in order to shift from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state b, it is necessary to execute the special figure game a specified number of times in the normal gaming state in which the number of game balls decreases more than in the time-saving gaming state b. As a result, until the minus difference ball (the difference between the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls fired) in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number, The expected difference ball value (the average value obtained by subtracting the number of game balls fired from the total number of prize balls) is higher than that when the first jackpot game is generated in the time-saving game state b. On the other hand, after the minus difference balls in the normal gaming state reach a predetermined number, the expected value of the difference balls when the first jackpot game occurs in the time-saving gaming state b becomes the first jackpot game in the normal gaming state. It will be higher than if you do it. In this way, from the perspective of the expected difference ball value, there are two situations in which it is more advantageous for the player to generate a jackpot game in the normal gaming state, and a situation in which it is more advantageous for the player to generate a jackpot game in the normal gaming state and to shift to the time-saving gaming state b without generating a jackpot game in the normal gaming state. There are situations in which it is more advantageous for the player to generate a jackpot game.

However, with gaming machines, it is not possible to control the timing at which jackpot games occur. Therefore, a jackpot game may occur at a timing when the expected value of difference balls in the normal gaming state is negative, for example, just before shifting to the b time-saving gaming state. In the normal gaming state, as a result of the jackpot lottery being executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first prize opening, the game may not enter RUSH. In this case, the player cannot benefit from the RUSH entry, and may lose interest and interest in the game.

In contrast, in the present invention, when the predetermined determination result is a specific determination result, the specific information updated by the updating means based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display is Until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the update state, the first notification mode is used to notify that a specific determination result has been obtained, and the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. In this way, the fact that the result of a predetermined determination has become a specific determination result is notified in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the predetermined update state is reached, and the specific determination result after the predetermined timing is notified. By switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at the timing, whether the timing at which the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result is before the predetermined timing is reached or after the specific timing is reached. can be judged. As a result, the player can determine whether or not it is advantageous to receive a specific benefit based on the specific judgment result, based on the type of notification mode that allows the timing of the specific judgment result to be determined. It can be determined whether or not a predetermined gaming condition is satisfied. As a result, based on the type of notification mode that allows the timing of the specific judgment result to be determined, the player can receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined gaming condition for the current specific judgment result, or receive a specific profit this time. If you do not meet the specified gaming conditions for the specified judgment result and do not receive the specified profit, and the specified information is later updated to the specified state and the specified profit state occurs, then for the specified judgment result Since the player can choose whether to receive a specific profit by fulfilling predetermined gaming conditions, it becomes possible to receive a specific profit at a timing that is determined to be advantageous by the player himself. Therefore, players can avoid receiving a specific benefit when receiving a specific benefit is judged to be disadvantageous. A decrease in interest and interest in games caused by putting them away is prevented.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when the result of the special jackpot lottery which is the result of a predetermined determination is a small win which is a specific determination result, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter which is specific information is set to the predetermined value. Until the break-even point is reached at a predetermined timing, which is a predetermined period of time before reaching 0, which is the update state, a small win, which is a specific judgment result, is notified by the profit display opening effect, which is the first notification mode. After the break-even point, which is a specific timing, is reached, the second notification mode, which is a loss display opening performance, is switched so that the small win, which is a specific determination result, is notified. In other words, in the present embodiment, the expected value of the profit at the opening of the small winning game is reported in a notification manner according to the expected value of the profit that the player can acquire at the stage when the small winning game occurs. . Therefore, when a small winning game occurs, the player can understand the profit or loss that the player can earn at that stage by focusing on the opening performance of the small winning game. The player can determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game based on the notification mode in the opening performance of the small win game. As a result, if the expected value of the profit that can be obtained is higher if the expected value of the profit that can be obtained is higher if the jackpot game is not generated based on the small winning game, it is better to choose not to generate the jackpot game, and to generate the jackpot game based on the small winning game. It becomes possible to select to generate a jackpot game when the expected value of obtainable profits is high. As a result, the player can avoid the disadvantage of not transitioning to the time-saving game state b due to the occurrence of a jackpot game when the transition to the time-saving game state b, which is the ceiling time-saving game state, is approaching, thereby increasing the interest of the game. is improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the opening performance of the small winning game is switched after reaching the break-even point, which is a specific timing when it is advantageous for the player to shift to the b-time-saving game state, which is the ceiling time-saving game state. Therefore, even if a small winning game occurs during a period in which it is difficult to judge profit or loss near the break-even point, the player can more reliably make judgments that are advantageous to himself based on the notification mode of the opening performance of the small winning game. becomes possible.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 191 to 254, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine includes "update information" as specific information, "update processing" as update means, and "playing state" as a specific gaming state. It also has an "update end state" as a predetermined update state, a "profit gaming state" as a predetermined profit state, a "notification display" as a notification mode, and a notification control means. It is equipped with "notification display control", "privilege granting conditions" as predetermined game conditions, "privilege granting" as a specific profit, and "privilege granting control" as a profit generating means.

[Configuration of gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193 in addition to FIGS. 1 to 3 described above. Here, FIG. 191 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIGS. 192 and 193 are cross-sectional views showing main parts of the wing accessory device of the game machine shown in FIG. be.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determining section 21, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination section 27, etc. .

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 7) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 depending on whether or not it is pressed. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20, as described above (see FIGS. 45 and 46). This operation button 20 is triggered by an operation on the operation button 20 by a player during a predetermined operation reception period in a special figure game performance executed in a special figure game that clearly shows the lottery result of a jackpot lottery to the player. The operation button to be executed is operated to execute the performance, change the background performance (background stage) in the special figure game performance, and customize the game such as the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined performance and character selection.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the game machine 10, when the player performs a rotational operation on the firing handle 22 as a predetermined game operation, a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotational operation. A basic game is played. For example, in response to a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 by the player, a game ball is launched to the left side of the game board 31, which is called a left-handed hit, and a game ball is launched to the right side of the game board 31, which is called a right-handed hit. can be executed. In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is encouraged in order to execute the first special symbol game by entering the game ball into the first winning hole 314 as the starting ball entry area, and a predetermined In profit conditions, right-handed hitting is encouraged. Specifically, for example, in the time-saving gaming state (a-time-saving gaming state and b-time-saving gaming state) which is a profit gaming state, the game ball enters the second prize opening 315 or the through gate 317 as the starting ball entry area. In order to establish the privilege awarding condition and execute the second special figure game as a privilege award, right hitting is encouraged, and in the small winning game state which is the profit gaming state, the V winning of the feather accessory device 83 as the privilege awarding condition is promoted. Right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to make the game ball enter the opening 833 and generate a jackpot game as a bonus award. Right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to successfully land the game ball and receive a large amount of prize balls as a bonus. Therefore, the player can receive appropriate benefits by performing a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 that is encouraged depending on the game state.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game ball firing mechanism 32 as a firing means, a game board 31 in which a game area where game balls can flow down is set, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The firing rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and directs the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is something that guides. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the firing rail 321 one ball at a time. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for firing the game ball supplied onto the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, when the player is performing a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the player's operation of the firing handle 22, and one solenoid is activated every 0.6 seconds. A game ball is fired toward the game area. In addition, the game ball firing mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that fires the game balls using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

As shown in FIG. 191, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning hole 313, a first winning hole 314 and a second winning hole 315 as starting ball entry areas, and a small winning hole. A V winning hole 833 and a normal winning hole 834 of the feather accessory device 83, which will be described later, are operated in the game, a variable winning hole 316 is operated as a variable ball entering means in the jackpot game, a through gate 317 is used as a starting ball entering area, An out port 318, a variable display unit 34 as a display means, a main display section 36 as a display means, and a wing accessory device 83 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending game balls fired by a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 by the player toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. The game balls fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 by the player's predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 are sent to the general prize opening 313, the first prize opening 314, the second prize opening 315, and the V winning opening 833. , game balls that do not enter the normal winning hole 834 or the variable winning hole 316 are discharged from the out hole 318. On the other hand, game balls fired by a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 by the player are the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, the V winning hole 833, the normal winning hole 834, or the variable winning hole. When the ball enters 316, a preset number of prize balls are paid out by executing a prize ball granting process as a benefit granting control. For example, in the prize ball granting process as privilege granting control, 10 prize balls are given for each game ball that enters the general winning hole 313, and the game balls entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 are given 10 prize balls. Three prize balls are awarded for each ball that enters the ball, and 10 prize balls are awarded for each game ball that enters the V winning hole 833, the normal winning hole 834, or the variable winning hole 316. Ru.

In addition, when a game ball enters the through gate 317, the prize ball is not paid out, but when the game ball enters the through gate 317 as a condition for awarding a benefit, a lottery process is performed as a benefit award. Privilege grant control regarding the general lottery drawing is executed. Then, when a winning pattern is established as a result of the random drawing drawing as a bonus granting condition, a game winning a general pattern is executed as a bonus award. In this normal figure winning game, the electric accessory 315b is operated as a privilege awarding control, thereby executing a privilege awarding in which the second prize opening 315, which is the starting ball entry area, is opened. In this way, when the second winning hole 315 is opened in the normal winning game, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315.

In addition, when the bonus granting condition is satisfied with the game ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 as the starting ball entry area, a special map jackpot lottery is executed as the bonus granting. This special drawing jackpot lottery is realized by execution of privilege provision control by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41 of the main control device 4). Then, the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery conducted by the main control unit 331 is displayed on the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36, which is a display means, showing the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) that is a predetermined symbol. The notification is made when a special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) in which a special figure) is variably displayed is executed. At the same time, the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery is also notified by performing a variable display of a decorative pattern, which is a predetermined pattern, on the pattern display section 341 of the variable display unit 34, which is a display means.

Furthermore, if the bonus award condition is satisfied because the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a small win, a small win game is executed as a bonus award after the end of the special figure game. In this small winning game, the movable wing section 832 of the wing accessory device 83 and the V winning hole opening/closing section 835 are operated as a privilege awarding control, and the game ball can enter the V winning hole 833 and the normal winning hole 834. Become. In addition, if the bonus award conditions are met by the game ball fired by the player's predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22 entering the V winning slot 833 or the normal winning slot 834, a prize ball will be awarded as a bonus award. be done. In addition, in a small winning game, if the game ball fired by the player's predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 enters the V winning hole 833 and the bonus award condition is satisfied, the bonus award is for the small winning game. After the game ends, a jackpot game is generated. In this way, in the small winning game, based on the fact that the game ball enters the V winning hole 833 or the normal winning hole 834 as a privilege awarding condition by a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 by the player, A prize ball can be given as a bonus, and the game ball enters the V winning hole 833 or the normal winning hole 834 as a condition for giving a bonus by performing a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 by the player. Based on this, it becomes possible to generate a jackpot game as a bonus award. On the contrary, if the player does not perform a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22, the ball will not enter the V winning hole 833 and the normal winning hole 834 as a condition for granting the bonus, and the bonus will be awarded. is not received and a jackpot game does not occur after the end of the small winning game, so the special drawing game based on the entry of the game ball into the first prize opening 314 or the second prize opening 315 after the completion of the small winning game. The state is set to be executable.

In addition, as mentioned above, in a small winning game, if the game ball fired by the player's predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 enters the V winning hole 833 and the bonus grant condition is satisfied, the small winning A jackpot game is generated after the game ends. In this jackpot game, round games are repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 or 16 times) in the opening/closing execution mode as privilege grant control. It is operated between a position where the opening 316 is closed and a position where the variable winning opening 316 is opened. In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, by executing the benefit grant control for the opening/closing door 319, a number of round games determined according to the result of the jackpot lottery from a plurality of number of round games (for example, 5 or 16) is executed. executed. In this way, in the jackpot game, since the variable winning hole 316 as the variable ball entry means is repeatedly opened in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning hole 316 as a privilege granting condition is opened by the player's predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22. Based on the fact that the game ball enters the game ball, it can be expected that a large amount of prize balls will be awarded as a bonus. On the contrary, if the player does not perform a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22, the entry of the game ball into the variable prize opening 316 as a condition for awarding the award does not occur and the award is not granted. After the end of the jackpot game, a special figure game can be executed based on the game ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

[Feather accessory device 83]
The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above, and is configured as a 1 type and 2 type mixing machine instead of a loop probability changing machine, and is equipped with the feather accessory device 83 as described above. The feather accessory device 83 is operated in a small winning game in which a bonus is awarded when the bonus awarding condition is satisfied as a result of a jackpot lottery. When the feather accessory device 83 is activated in this small winning game, based on the fact that the game ball enters the V winning hole 833 described below as a condition for awarding the award, a type 2 jackpot game is performed as a bonus award. is executed.

The wing accessory device 83 is provided above the variable winning hole 316 as a variable entry means and on the right side of the symbol display section 341 as a display means. As shown in FIG. 192, the feather accessory device 83 has an introduction port 831 for introducing the game ball 99 into the interior of the feather accessory device 83, and a closed position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 192) in which the introduction port 831 is closed. It has a movable vane portion 832 that is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between the opening position (the position indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 192) and the opening position (position indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 192) where the introduction port 831 is opened. In a state where the introduction port 831 is closed by the movable wing portion 832 in the standby position, the game ball 99 is not introduced into the wing accessory device 83. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 193(A) and 193(B), when the movable wing portion 832 is in the open position and the introduction port 831 is open, the movable wing portion 832 does not allow the game ball 99 to be received. It is possible. The game ball 99 received by the movable wing part 832 can be introduced into the interior of the wing accessory device 83 via the introduction port 831. The movable wing portion 832 is moved to the open position when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entry area, is a small win (see FIG. 204(A)). When activated, the inlet 831 is opened for a predetermined period of time, for example, the time required for one to three game balls 99 to enter the wing accessory device 83 (1.8 seconds or less). Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 at the time of a small win may be set as appropriate and is not limited to the time shown above.

Inside the wing accessory device 83, a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, and a V winning opening opening/closing part 835 are provided. Ball entering sensors 833a and 834a (see FIG. 194) are provided in the V winning hole 833 and the normal winning hole 834, respectively. It is detected that the ball has entered the ball. Then, when the bonus granting condition is established by detecting that the game ball has entered by the ball entry sensors 833a and 834a of the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834, the bonus granting control is executed and the bonus is awarded. Prize balls are awarded as grants.

The V winning hole opening/closing part 835 is between the closed position (see FIG. 193(A)) where the V winning hole 833 is closed and the open position (see FIG. 193(B)) where the V winning hole 833 is opened. It is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). The V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 normally waits at a closed position where the V winning opening 833 is closed, and when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a small win, it is operated at a predetermined timing to open the V winning opening. The prize opening 833 is opened.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the V winning hole 833 and the normal winning hole 834 are provided inside the wing accessory device 83, the normal winning hole 834 may be omitted. In addition, in this embodiment, the wing accessory device 83 is provided separately from the T-hole 316 as a variable ball entry means, but the variable prize opening 316 is omitted and the wing accessory device 83 is operated in a jackpot game. It may also be used as a variable ball entry means.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment and various tables used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 194 to 207.

Here, FIG. 194 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 194, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 is basically the same as that of the first embodiment described above. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a ball entering sensor 833a that detects the entering of a game ball and a ball entering sensor 834a that detects the entering of the game ball into the normal winning hole 834 are provided.

[Electrical configuration of display control device 6]
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the display control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 191. As shown in FIG. 195, the display control device 6 includes an MPU 631, a work RAM 633, a character ROM 634, a resident video RAM 635, a normal video RAM 636, an image controller 637, an input port 638, and an output port 639. , bus lines 640, 641.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 5 is connected to the input side of the input port 638, and the MPU 631, work RAM 633, character ROM 634, and image controller 637 are connected to the output side of the input port 638 via a bus line 640. . The image controller 637 is connected to a resident video RAM 635 and a normal video RAM 636, and is also connected to an output port 639 via a bus line 641. Further, a symbol display section 341 is connected to the output side of the output port 639.

Below, the MPU 631, character ROM 634, image controller 637, resident video RAM 635, and normal video RAM 636 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 633 will be explained.

First, the MPU 631 controls the display contents of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 5 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 4. The MPU 631 has a built-in instruction pointer 631a whose address destination is updated (moved) by update processing, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 631a, and performs various processing according to the instruction code. Execute. The MPU 631 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply control device 9 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 631a, the value of the instruction pointer 631a as update information is set to "0000H" by an update process automatically executed by the hardware of the MPU 631. Then, each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 631a as update information is incremented by one by an update process. Furthermore, when the MPU 631 executes a setting instruction for the instruction pointer 631a, the value of the pointer as update information specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 631a.

In this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 631 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in the character ROM 634 provided for storing data of images to be displayed on the symbol display section 341. is stored in the memory. Of course, the control program executed by the MPU 631 and various fixed value data used in the control program may be stored in a dedicated program ROM.

The character ROM 634 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 634a that can have a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 634, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 6 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 631 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 634 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 631, the processing performance of the display control device 6 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 631 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 634a of the character ROM 634 is first transferred to the work RAM 633 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 631 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 633. The work RAM 633 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 631 can read out instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 6, and using the symbol display section 341, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 634 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 631 and image data displayed on the symbol display section 341, and is connected to the MPU 631 via a bus line 640. The MPU 631 directly accesses the character ROM 634 via the bus line 640 after the system reset is canceled, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 634a1 (described later) of the character ROM 634 to the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633. An image controller 637 is also connected to the bus line 640, and the image controller 637 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 634a2 (described later) of the character ROM 634 to a resident video RAM 635 connected to the image controller 637, Transfer to the normal video RAM 636.

This character ROM 634 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 634a, a ROM controller 634b, a buffer RAM 634c, and a NOR ROM 634d.

The NAND flash memory 634a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 634, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 631 and fixed value data for driving the symbol display section 341. It has at least a second program storage area 634a1 and a character storage area 634a2 that stores data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the symbol display section 341.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 634 can be easily increased. As a result, in this gaming machine 10, by using the NAND flash memory 634a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 634a2 as images to be displayed on the symbol display section 341. . Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the symbol display section 341 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 634a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 634a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 634a1. In this way, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 634 provided for storing data of images to be displayed on the symbol display section 341, without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 6 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 634b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 634, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 631 or the image controller 637 via the bus line 640, the ROM controller 634b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 634a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 631 or the image controller 637 via the bus line 640.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 634a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 634b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 634a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 634a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 634b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 634a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 634a is used as the character ROM 634, errors may be made due to incorrect data. It is possible to suppress the MPU 631 from performing processing or the image controller 637 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 634b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 634a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 631 and the image controller 637 can analyze different defective data blocks in each NAND flash memory 634a. The character ROM 634 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 634a is used as the character ROM 634, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 634 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 634c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 634a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 634 is specified from the MPU 631 or the image controller 637 via the bus line 640, the ROM controller 634b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether data is set in the buffer RAM 634c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 634a (or NOR ROM 634d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 634c. do. The ROM controller 634b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 631 and the image controller 637 via the bus line 640.

This buffer RAM 634c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 634a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 634b can, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 634a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 634a to the outside as specified by the MPU 631 or the image controller 637. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 634a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 631 or image controller 637 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 631 or the image controller 637 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 634 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 634d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 634, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 634a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 634, this NOR type ROM 634d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the NAND flash memory 634a. At least a first program storage area 634d1 is provided to store a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 6 so that various controls on the symbol display section 341 can be executed, and the MPU 631 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. Thereby, the display control device 6 can be brought into a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 634d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 634c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 634a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 634c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 6. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 631 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 631a as update information to "0000H" and sends the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 631a to the bus line 640. configured to specify. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 634b of the character ROM 634 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 640, the ROM controller 634b of the character ROM 634 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR type ROM 634d to one bank of the buffer RAM 634c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 631.

When the MPU 631 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 634, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, and also executes an update process of adding 1 to the instruction pointer 631a as update information. Assign the indicated address to bus line 640. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 640 indicates the program stored in the NOR type ROM 634d, the ROM controller 634b of the character ROM 634 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR type ROM 634d to the buffer RAM 634c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 634c, and outputs it to the MPU 631.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 634a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 634d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 634a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 634a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 631 via the bus line 640 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 631 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 634 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 634a and set it in the buffer RAM 634c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 634a, it takes a lot of time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 634c, so the MPU 631 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 631, a problem arises in that the control of the symbol display section 341 in the display control device 6 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 634d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 631 via the bus line 640 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 634 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR type ROM 634d to the buffer RAM 634c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 631. Therefore, the MPU 631 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 631 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634 made up of the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow readout speed, control of the symbol display section 341 in the display control device 6 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the NAND flash memory 634a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR ROM 634d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, additional data table, transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 634a) in the work RAM 633. It is programmed to be transferred to the program storage area 633a and data table storage area 633b. Then, the MPU 631 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 634d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 634d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 633a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 634c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 is configured with a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 634c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 634d1 is set in the buffer RAM 634c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 634c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 634d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 634c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 634d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 634d1 in the buffer RAM 634c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 631a in the program storage area 633a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 631 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 631a is moved to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 633a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 634a1 is stored in the program storage area 633a, the MPU 631 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 633a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 634a having the second program storage area 634a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 631 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 633 having the program storage area 633a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 633 is constituted by a DRAM, read operations are performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634 constituted by the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 631 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 634d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 631a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 631a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 633a.

Thereby, the MPU 631 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

This remaining boot program stores all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 633a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, display data tables, additional data tables, transfer data tables, etc., which will be described later). A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a or the data table storage area 633b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 631a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 633a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initialization process (step S4102 in FIG. 240) that is executed after the boot process (see step S4101 in FIG. 240) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 633a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to (see).

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 631 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a or data table storage area 633b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 631, the instruction pointer 631a is set to the second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 631 is transferred to the program storage area 633a without referring to the NAND flash memory 634a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634 configured by the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow readout speed, the control program can be transferred to the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633 after the system reset is released. , the MPU 631 can read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 6, and using the symbol display section 341, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 634d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 631 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 634d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the NAND flash memory 634a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 633a. Therefore, the character ROM 634 can start up the MPU 631 in a short time by simply adding the NOR type ROM 634d of extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 634 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 637 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that executes an update process to draw an image as update information and displays the drawn image on the pattern display section 341 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 637 executes an update process of drawing an image for one frame as update information based on a drawing list (see FIG. 202, which will be described later) sent from the MPU 631, and then updates the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer (described later). The symbol display section 341 expands the image drawn in either one of the frame buffers 636c, and outputs the image information for one frame that was developed earlier in the other frame buffer to the symbol display section 341. display the image. The image controller 637 performs a drawing process as an update process for an image for one frame as this update information and a display process for an image for one frame within the image display time for one frame in the pattern display section 341 (this embodiment Then, parallel processing is performed within 20 milliseconds).

The image controller 637 sends a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 631 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process as the update process for one frame of image as update information is completed. ) to send. Every time the MPU 631 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 241(B)) and requests the image controller 637 to draw the next frame of image as update information. (update). In response to this instruction, the image controller 637 executes a drawing process (update process) for the next frame of image as update information, and also causes the pattern display section 341 to display the image developed by drawing. Execute.

In this way, the MPU 631 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 637, and instructs the image controller 637 to draw, so the image controller 637 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 631 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 637 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image until the image drawing processing and display processing are completed, so it is not possible to start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 637 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 631 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 635 and the normal video RAM 636. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636 based on instructions from the MPU 631 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 6, the MPU 631 instructs the image controller 637 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 635 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 637 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 635. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 635, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634 configured with the NAND flash memory 634a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing the image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the symbol display section 341.

In particular, the resident video RAM 635 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 4 or display controller 6 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 634 is configured with a NAND flash memory 634a, high responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the symbol display section 341.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 635, the display control device 6 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 631 is configured to instruct the image controller 637 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 636 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; Since there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634 configured with the above, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the pattern display section 341.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 636, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 635, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 635. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 635 can be suppressed.

The image controller 637 has a buffer RAM 637a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which has a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 634a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 631 to the image controller 637 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 634 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636), and beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 637 reads out one block of data as update information from a predetermined address of the character ROM 634 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 637a in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, and executes an update process to read the data for one block as update information from a predetermined address of the character ROM 634, and stores it in the resident video RAM 635 or the normal use. When the video RAM 636 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 637a is transferred to the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 634 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 637a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 637a to the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636, the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, as the resident video RAM 635 and normal video RAM 636 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 635 and 636 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the symbol display section 341 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 637 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 637a to the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636, the resident video RAM 635 and the normal video RAM 636 perform image drawing processing and the symbol display section 341. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 635 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 634 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 635e and an error message image area 635f, at least a power-on variation image area 635b and a decorative pattern area 635d are provided.

The power-on main image area 635a corresponds to the power-on main image displayed on the symbol display section 341 after the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 is stored. This is an area for storing data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 635b is displayed when the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 and a ball entering the first winning hole 314 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image for displaying the lottery results conducted in the main control device 4 by means of a special figure game effect.

The MPU 631 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 634 to the power-on main image area 635a when power supply is started from the power supply control device 9. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 637 (see steps S4103 and S4104 in FIG. 240).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 196. FIG. 196 shows a power-on image displayed on the symbol display section 341 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 635 is being transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 immediately after the display control device 6 is powered on. FIG.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 6 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 634 to the power-on main image area 635a and the power-on variation image area 635b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 635 is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 6 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 635a to display the power-on main image area 635a as shown in FIG. 196(A). The image is displayed on the pattern display section 341.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 4, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 6 executes the command shown in FIG. 196(B). As shown in FIG. 196(C), on the display screen of the power-on main image, there is a power-on fluctuation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and as shown in FIG. 196(C), a "○" A power-on variation image of an "x" symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the symbol during the variation period. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 4, the jackpot lottery is performed by the main control device 4. If the result is a "small win", the image shown in FIG. 196(B) is displayed for a certain period of time after the special figure game effect is stopped, and if it is a "miss", the image shown in FIG. 196(C) is displayed. is displayed for a certain period of time after the special figure game effect is stopped.

The MPU 631 causes the image controller 637 to use the image data stored in the main image area 635a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 is transferred to the resident video RAM 635. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 635, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the symbol display section 341. Therefore, while displaying the main image on the symbol display section 341 when the power is turned on, the display control device 6 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. can. In addition, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the power is turned on, the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 635 is Until the image data is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 635 is completed without worrying that the operation will stop.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the power is turned on, so that it can be confirmed that the symbol display section 341 has started operating without any problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 634a, which can be checked immediately and has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 634, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 and a ball entering the first winning hole 314 is detected, the power-on variation image area 635b is displayed. A power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the resident power-on variation image, and the images shown in FIGS. 196(B) and 196(C) are alternately displayed on the pattern display section 341. The MPU 631 instructs the image controller 637 to. Thereby, it is possible to perform a simple special figure game performance using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is being displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been drawn through the simple special symbol game performance.

Furthermore, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the symbol display section 341, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 635b. If a ball entering the first winning hole 314 is detected while the image is displayed on the symbol display section 341, the corresponding special figure game performance can be immediately displayed on the symbol display section 341.

Returning to FIG. 195, the back image area 635c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the symbol display section 341. Here, with reference to FIGS. 197 and 198, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 635c will be described. 197 and 198 are explanatory diagrams illustrating three types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 for each back image. 197(B) is for the back surface A corresponding to the "city stage", FIG. 197(B) is for the back surface B corresponding to the "sky stage", and FIG. 198 is for the back surface C corresponding to the "island stage". These are shown respectively.

As shown in FIG. 197, among back images A to C, back images corresponding to back surfaces A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed in the symbol display section 341. provided. The image controller 637 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the pattern display section 341 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scroll images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as a display area, and then when the image located between position a and position a' is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as a display area, the back image is smoothly connected to the symbol display section 341. It is displayed scrolling.

When the player operates the operation button 20 to change the stage to the "city stage" or "sky stage," the MPU 631 first changes the position from position a to position a' of the corresponding back image to the initial position of the display area. The image controller 637 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the symbol display section 341. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 637 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the symbol display section 341. When an image between position c and position d is reached, the image controller 637 is controlled so that the display area is displayed on the symbol display section 341 again as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, on the symbol display section 341, images between positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 198, the back image on the back surface C is displayed in the pattern display area in the order of (A) → (B) → (C) → (A) →... in FIG. 198 as time passes. 341. Specifically, on the back side C, an image of the mountain towering over the island, an image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in the pattern display section with their display positions fixed. 341. On the other hand, the color tone of an image of the sky above a mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage" by the player's operation of the operation button 20, the back image shown in FIG. 198(A) is displayed as the initial back image of the back surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 198(A), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined period of time, the back image shown in FIG. 198(B) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 198(B), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined period of time, the back image shown in FIG. 198(C) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 198(C), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 198(A) is returned to, and the back images of FIGS. 198(A) to 198(C) are displayed on the pattern display section 341 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 635c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 197(A), the back surface A corresponding to the town stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to positions a to d are stored in the back surface of the resident video RAM 635. It is stored in the image area 635c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the town stage, is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the town stage, which is frequently displayed, is stored in the back image area. By making it resident in the character ROM 635c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 634 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 6 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 197(B), the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only the image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, the image between position a and position b, in the resident video RAM 635. is stored in the rear image area 635c. In addition, the image data corresponding to the back surface image between FIG. 198(A) and FIG. 198(B) including FIG. 198(A) and excluding FIG. 198(B) is During the start-up process after the input, it is stored in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 and becomes resident.

Here, since the operation of the operation button 20 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the operation button 20 is operated at an arbitrary timing, In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 635, but in this case, the resident video RAM 635 is extremely A RAM with a large capacity must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in this gaming machine 10, when the stage is changed, the initial position of the back image displayed first is set to the range from position a to position a' or as shown in FIGS. 198(A) to 198(B). The image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 634 is configured with a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow readout speed, when the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player, the data is stored in the resident video RAM 635. By using the image data resident in the back image area 635c, the initial position of the back side B or back side C can be immediately displayed on the pattern display section 341, and the initial position of the back side B or back side C can be displayed on the pattern display section 341, and the display can be displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone as time passes. It can be displayed. Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 635 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back side B, the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635. During this time, the range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 634 to normal video RAM 636. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 636, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 636 is used to scroll the range from position b' to position d and the pattern is displayed. 341.

Similarly, after the initial position image is displayed, the rear surface C displays the images of FIGS. 198(A) to 198(B) using the image data resident in the rear image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635. 198(B) to 198(C) and 198(C) to 198(A) from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636. 198(A) to FIG. 198(B) are set. As a result, while the images in FIGS. 198(A) to 198(B) are displayed, the images corresponding to the images in FIGS. 198(B) to 198(C) and FIGS. 198(C) to 198(A) are displayed. Since the data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 636, there is no delay after displaying the images in FIGS. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 636, the images in FIGS. , can be displayed on the symbol display section 341.

The image data stored in the normal video RAM 636 on the back surface B and the back surface C is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear surface images provided in the image storage area 636a (see FIG. 195) of the normal video RAM 636. Thereby, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on the back side B, the image data stored in the back side image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 636 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 637 by the MPU 631, the image up to position b is displayed on the symbol display section 341 using the image data stored in the rear image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, and then the image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the normal video RAM 636. By displaying the image from position b' on the symbol display section 341 using the stored image data, the back images are scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner on the symbol display section 341.

Furthermore, when the MPU 631 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 636 to control the image controller 637 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as a display area, the MPU 631 then Using the image data of the rear image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, the image controller 637 is controlled so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as a display area. As a result, images between positions a to c can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 while being scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 195, the explanation will be continued. The decorative pattern area 635d is an area in which a decorative pattern as a predetermined pattern displayed on the pattern display section 341 as a display means resides. That is, in the decorative pattern area 635d, image data corresponding to nine types of decorative patterns numbered from "1" to "9" (see FIG. 207) are resident. As a result, when performing a special game effect on the symbol display section 341, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 634 one by one, so even if the NAND flash memory 634a is used as the character ROM 634, the symbol display section 341 can quickly display the special image data. Figure game performance can be started. Therefore, even though the variable display of the first special symbol has started in the first special symbol display section 362 as a display means after the ball enters the first winning hole 314 as the starting ball entry area. First, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the special symbol game performance is not immediately started on the symbol display section 341 as a display means.

In addition, in the decorative pattern area 635d, for example, as a predetermined decorative pattern that is not numbered from "1" to "9", a decorative pattern consisting of a backward pattern such as a wooden box, a backward pattern and a planer, a wrapping cloth, etc. Image data corresponding to a decorative pattern consisting of an attached pattern imitating a character such as a helmet or the like is also stored. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the symbol display section 341 when, for example, the next variation associated with a starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variation stopped. As a result, when the demonstration performance is displayed on the pattern display section 341, a decorative pattern without a number is displayed as a decorative pattern in the demonstration performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the gaming machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the decorative symbols to which no numbers are attached from the display image of the symbol display section 341.

The character pattern area 635e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the pattern display section 341 as a display means. In this gaming machine 10, various characters such as a "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character pattern area 635e, so that the display When changing the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 5, the control device 6 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634, but changes the character design area 635e of the resident video RAM 635. By reading the image data stored in advance in the image controller 637, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 637. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634, so even if the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 634, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 635f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the gaming machine 10. In this game machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 5 detects vibration from the output of the vibration sensor attached to the back surface of the game board 31, the voice lamp control device 5 informs the display control device 6 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Notify. Furthermore, even if another error occurs, for example, when magnetic force or radio waves are detected by a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor, the audio lamp controller 5 uses an error command to detect the occurrence of the error. The display control device 6 is notified along with the error type. The display control device 6 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the symbol display section 341.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this gaming machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 635f. By reading the image data resident in the image area 635f in advance, the image controller 637 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 634, so even if a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 634, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 636 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 636a, a first frame buffer 636b, and a second frame buffer 636c.

The image storage area 636a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 635 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the symbol display section 341. The image storage area 636a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 631 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 635 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 634 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636. , instructs the image controller 637 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 637 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 631 from the character ROM 634, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 636a via the buffer RAM 637a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 631 instructs the image controller 637 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 631 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 637, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 as a display means. The image controller 637 writes one frame's worth of image as update information drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 631 into either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c through an update process. At the same time as developing an image for one frame into a frame buffer, while the image is being developed into one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read from the other frame buffer, and this image information is read out from the other frame buffer. By transmitting it to the symbol display section 341 together with the drive signal, a process for displaying one frame's worth of images on the symbol display section 341 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c, the image controller 637 can develop one frame's worth of image as update information drawn in one frame buffer. At the same time, it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the symbol display section 341 serving as a display means.

The frame buffer that expands one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer that reads one frame's worth of image information as update information in order to display the image on the symbol display section 341 as a display means are the same as one frame's worth of image information. Every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for the image is completed, either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c is alternately designated by the MPU 631.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information as update information is read. When the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the image drawing process for one frame is completed, the second frame buffer is used as a frame buffer to develop the image for one frame as update information. 636c is designated, and the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 636b can be read out and displayed on the symbol display section 341, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 636c.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 636b is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information as update information is read. Buffer 636c is designated. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 636c can be read out and displayed on the symbol display section 341, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 636b. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed to either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c, respectively, every 20 milliseconds. By alternating the specifications, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame of the image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process (update process) of the image of one frame as update information. can.

The work RAM 633 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 634, and also for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 631 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 633 includes a program storage area 633a, a data table storage area 633b, a simple image display flag 633c, a display data table buffer 633d, an additional data table buffer 633e, a transfer data table buffer 633f, a pointer 633g, a drawing list area 633h, and a time counter. 633i, a stored image discrimination flag 633j, and a drawing target buffer flag 633k.

The program storage area 633a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 631. When the system reset is released, the MPU 631 reads the control program from the character ROM 634, transfers it to the work RAM 633, and stores it in the program storage area 633a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 633a, the MPU 631 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 633a. As described above, since the work RAM 633 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634 constituted by the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 6, and the symbol display section 341 can be used. This makes it possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 633b stores a display data table that describes the display contents to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 4, and An additional data table that describes the display contents to be displayed as time passes for the effect to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 in addition to the first effect based on the command from , and the first effect displayed by the display data table. This area stores a transfer data table that defines transfer data information and transfer timing of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 635 among the image data used in the video RAM 635.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 634a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 634a of the character ROM 634, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 634 to the work RAM 633 and stored in this data table storage area 633b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 633b, the MPU 631 thereafter controls the display of the symbol display section 341 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 633b. As described above, since the work RAM 633 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 634 constituted by the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 6, and the symbol display section 341 can be By using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the symbol display section 341 based on commands from the main control device 4. , a display data table corresponding to a confirmed display effect, a restart effect, and a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) which is a special effect (see FIGS. 206 and 207) is prepared.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is a symbol used as a display means when the next special pattern game performance is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first special pattern game performance stopped. This is an effect displayed on the display unit 341, in which a decorative pattern as a predetermined pattern without numbers "1" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the symbol display section 341, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the gaming machine 10.

Further, the confirmed display effect is the effect displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the stopped symbol is confirmed to be displayed by receiving a confirm command (display confirm command) from the main control device 4 via the audio lamp control device 5. It is. For example, when the result of a jackpot lottery is a loss, notification display control is performed to emphasize that the stop symbol as a notification display is a loss symbol, and when the result of a jackpot lottery is a small win, a notification display control is performed to emphasize that the stop symbol is a loss symbol. Notification display control is performed to emphasize that the stopped symbol as a display is a small winning symbol. The player can easily judge the gaming value given based on the contents of the stopped symbols by visually recognizing this confirmed display performance.

Note that the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 1 type and 2 type mixing machine, but when the gaming machine 10 is configured as a loop fixed machine, an ST machine, or a V-ST machine, the stop as a notification display. If the symbol is a jackpot, notification display control is performed to emphasize the jackpot.

In addition, the restart performance is performed when the confirmation command sent from the main controller 4 is not received even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the decorative pattern as a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed around a predetermined position. This is an effect in which a vibrated (oscillating) image is displayed on the pattern display section 341. When the player visually recognizes that the decorative pattern is displayed in a vibrating manner after the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the pattern display section 341, the player recognizes that the stopped pattern has not been finalized at that point. Can be done.

In addition, in the re-lottery performance (re-lottery display), which is a special performance, in the special figure game that is in the game state, a decorative pattern that is a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed as a notification display, and then the decorative pattern is changed and the notification is announced. This is an effect (display) that is confirmed and displayed as a display. In this embodiment, the re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) includes at least a resurrection effect (resurrection display) (see FIG. 206(B)) and a promotion effect (promotion display) (see FIG. 206(C)).

In this embodiment, the resurrection effect (resurrection display) is a notification display with a combination of decorative symbols as predetermined symbols that correspond to the loss when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win in the special figure game that is in the playing state. This is an effect (display) in which decorative symbols are stopped and displayed by a notification display in a combination corresponding to a small win. Specifically, the resurrection performance (resurrection display) is a performance (display) in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a notification display at a position other than the zero number, and then the final number is displayed as a notification display (FIG. 206(B)) reference).

In this embodiment, the promotion performance (promotion display) is a small win that generates a 4R time-saving jackpot game when a game ball enters the V winning hole 833 in a small win game in the special figure game that is in the playing state. After the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed by the notification display to notify that something is going on, the decoration notifies that it is a small win that will generate a 16R time-saving jackpot game when the game ball enters the V winning hole 833 in the small win game. This is an effect in which the symbol is confirmed and displayed by a notification display. Specifically, in the promotion effect (promotion display), the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed as a notification display at a number other than "777", and then the final result is displayed as a notification display at a number other than "777" (display). ) (see FIG. 206(C)).

Although the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 1 type and 2 type mixing machine, even when the gaming machine 10 is configured as a loop fixed machine, an ST machine, or a V-ST machine, the gaming machine 10 can be used in the gaming state. As a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) which is a special effect in the special figure game, it is conceivable to perform a promotion effect (promotion display) or a revival effect (resurrection display). In this case, the promotion effect (promotion display) may be one that notifies the promotion from a normal jackpot to a guaranteed strange jackpot in a special map game that is currently being played, and a resurrection effect (resurrection display) may be, for example, a notice of promotion from a normal jackpot to a guaranteed strange jackpot. One possibility is to announce a jackpot from a player.

Furthermore, the re-lottery presentation (re-lottery display) in the special figure game that is in the game-in-progress state does not include any presentation (display) that is disadvantageous to the player. For example, notification of a decrease in the number of round games executed as a jackpot game (demotion), notification of a regular jackpot from notification of a variable jackpot (demotion), notification of a deviation from notification of a jackpot or small win (win cancellation) is a re-lottery effect. (Re-lottery display) is not included. Specifically, for example, by executing a promotion performance (promotion display) that is a special performance in a special figure game, a small win that generates a 16R time-saving jackpot game by entering a game ball into the V winning hole 833 in a small win game. After being notified that this is the case, it will not be reported that it is a small win that generates the 4R time-saving jackpot game or that it is a loss until at least the small win game is started or ended. In addition, after the promotion display (promotion display) is performed as a special performance that notifies the promotion from the normal jackpot notification display to the probability-variable jackpot notification display in the special figure game, after it is announced that it is a probability-variable jackpot. , at least until the probability-variable jackpot game is started or ended, it is not usually reported that the game is a jackpot or a miss. In this way, since the re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) does not include any effect (display) that is disadvantageous to the player, the game can be improved by executing the promotion effect (promotion display) or revival effect (revival display), which are special effects. Since the profits that the player is notified of being able to obtain are prevented from being reduced or canceled, a decrease in interest and interest in the game due to execution of unreasonable performances (displays) is prevented.

The data table storage area 633b stores one display data table each corresponding to a demonstration effect, a confirmed display effect, a restart effect, and a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display). In addition, for example, if there are 32 performance patterns to be set, a variable display data table which is a display data table for special figure game performance is prepared, one table for each performance pattern, 32 tables in total.

Furthermore, in the display data table for variation, if the production pattern instructed by the main control device 4 via the audio lamp control device 5 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the special symbol game production do not match, for example, A display pattern table for special variations is also prepared, which is used when a stop symbol for a miss is instructed by the main controller 4 when the performance pattern is a winning performance pattern. This special variation causes the decorative pattern to be displayed in a high-speed variable manner until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) sent from the main controller 4 via the voice lamp control device 5 is received. At the same time, a special stop symbol indicating a miss (for example, a symbol displayed as "3", "4", and "1" in order from the left column) is determined as a stop symbol.

If the performance pattern instructed by the main control device 4 via the audio lamp control device 5 and the stop symbol to be displayed when the special symbol game performance is stopped and displayed do not match, the display control device 6 There is a possibility that it may not be possible to correctly reflect the results of the lottery conducted and perform a final display in the special figure game performance. On the other hand, in this gaming machine 10, in such a case, a special fluctuation effect is performed, and after the fluctuation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special miss is displayed as confirmed on the symbol display section 341, so that the main controller 4 Even if the lottery result is a loss, it is possible to prevent the confirmation display of a jackpot from being erroneously displayed on the symbol display section 341. Furthermore, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display section 341, if the lottery result in the main controller 4 is a small win, the actual gaming state in the gaming machine 10 will shift to the small winning gaming state, so the game The player can continue playing the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by making the confirmation display a special stop symbol, even if the confirmation display is off, it is possible to suggest to the player that the gaming machine 10 may be in a small winning state. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy because the gaming machine 10 enters into a small winning state even though the confirmed display is incorrect.

[Display data table]
Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table is associated with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the symbol display section 341, which is a display means, as a unit, and is displayed at that time. The content (drawing content) of one frame's worth of images, which is update information to be updated, is specified in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing sprites on the pattern display section 341, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the symbol display section 341 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. Note that if the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image displayed on the back side of the sprite will be. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame, which is update information specified corresponding to each address, include one back image, nine decorative patterns (design 1, design 2, ...), Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of light in an image, or a character used for various effects such as a boy's image or text, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the symbol display section 341, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time. Therefore, in the variable display data table, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined. This type of back surface is determined by displaying either back surface A to back surface C that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or displaying back surface A. ~Information specifying whether to display a back image different from back surface C is described. Furthermore, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A to C is to be displayed, the back type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 631 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed based on the back surface type, the MPU 631 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 631 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display of the symbol display section 341) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 631 determines the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database, and determines the range of the back image that was displayed at the stage when image drawing (or display on the pattern display section 341) was started. It is specified based on the position of the image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the symbol display section 341) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, the position information includes, depending on the type of the back surface, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the pattern display section 341). ) may indicate any of the information that indicates the elapsed time since the start of the process, or the type information of the position information (for example, the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position), as well as the back type and position information. Information indicating whether the information indicates the elapsed time since it was displayed or the information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the symbol display section 341) was started. ) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the decorative patterns (design 1, pattern 2, . . . ), pattern type offset information is written as pattern type information for specifying the decorative pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each decorative pattern. Rather than directly specifying the type of decorative pattern, the offset information is specified because the display of the decorative pattern in the special pattern game performance is based on the stop pattern in the previous special pattern game performance and the one that will be performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol in the special pattern game performance, and the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined period of time has elapsed is the offset from the stopped symbol in the previous special pattern game performance. Enter information. As a result, the special pattern game performance is started from the stopped symbol in the previous special pattern game performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 4 via the audio lamp control device 5. Enter information. Thereby, in the special figure game performance, it is possible to stop with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 4.

In addition, since each decorative pattern has a unique number, the variable pattern in the previous special game performance or the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control device 4 can be changed to that decorative pattern. By managing the offset information by the numbers attached to each decorative pattern and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each decorative pattern, it is possible to easily specify the decorative pattern to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time period for switching from the offset information of the stop symbol in the previous special symbol game performance to the offset information of the stop symbol in the special symbol game performance that is being performed this time is It is set so that the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. While the decorative pattern is being displayed in a high-speed variable manner, the decorative pattern is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbols in the special figure game production that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers in the decorative symbols is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. can do.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the example of FIG. 199 is the last address of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is written. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 631 operates in advance according to the variable display time and jackpot lottery results specified from commands (for example, display variable pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on commands from the main control device 4. A display data table to be used is selected from a plurality of prepared display data tables, and the selected display data table is read out from the data table storage area 633b and stored in the display data table buffer 633d, and the pointer 633g is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 633g is incremented by 1 as an update process, and based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d. , specifies the image content to be drawn next and creates a drawing list (see FIG. 202), which will be described later. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 637, an instruction to draw the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 633g is updated by the update process, the drawing contents as update information are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the symbol display section 341. be done.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the display control device 6 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on commands from the main control device 4, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 631, the effect to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 can be changed by simply performing an update process of appropriately replacing the display data table, which is update information, with the display data table buffer 633d. Images can be changed (updated).

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured such that a program executed by the MPU 631 is started every time the effect image displayed on the symbol display section 341 is changed, it becomes complicated due to the diversification of effect images. In addition, since the processing of starting and executing the increasingly large number of programs imposes a heavy load, the processing capacity of the display control device 6 is limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable performance images. . In contrast, in the gaming machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 can be changed (updated) simply by simply replacing the display data table, which is update information, with the display data table buffer 633d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 6, various types of effect images can be displayed on the symbol display section 341, which is a display means.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and one frame as update information is generated according to the set data table. In the gaming machine 10, the drawing list can be created in advance by displaying a drawing list on the symbol display section 341 from a plurality of performance patterns in accordance with the lottery results and variable time of the jackpot lottery performed based on the starting winnings. This is because it is determined. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operations, so the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and each frame is updated by update processing according to the set data table. The configuration for creating a drawing list as information can only be realized based on the fact that the gaming machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 based on a jackpot lottery that is performed based on starting winnings. It is.

[Additional data table]
Next, details of the additional data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 200. FIG. 200 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display contents that should be displayed over time for the effect to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 in addition to the first effect based on the command from the main control device 4. It is. Here, "adding to the first effect" means changing the display content of the first effect based on a command from the main control device 4, for example, displaying an image that is not normally displayed in the first effect. This concept includes the concept of displaying one performance overlaid with another, changing the color tone of part or all of the first performance, and changing the image displayed in the first performance. .

In other words, the additional data table contains the drawing content necessary for displaying an additional image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 4. , the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all of the first effect, and the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the first effect are predefined. It is.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is displayed in addition to the special figure game effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main control device 4. A case will be described in which the display contents for displaying continuous preview effects are defined by an additional data table.

That is, the additional data table is prepared in correspondence with, for example, a continuous notice effect that is additionally set for the special figure game effect. Additional data tables corresponding to "egg", "chick", "chicken", and "chicken group" are stored in the data table storage area 633b.

In this additional data table, the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is defined in detail in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is an additional display object to be displayed in one frame of the image, and also specifies the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, etc. according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing sprites on the pattern display section 341, such as translucent values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

For example, in the example of FIG. 200, two effects (effect 1, effect 2) and two characters (character 1, character 2) are respectively associated with the address "0097H" defined in the display data table. The sprite type (effect type, character type), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are defined. On the other hand, if there is no display item to be added at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no display item to be added corresponding to that address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (address "0001H" in FIG. 200 corresponds).

Note that "0000H", which is the start address of the additional data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 200, "00FDH") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the additional data table. is listed.

When the MPU 631 receives a continuous notice command from the audio lamp control device 5, it reads an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice mode indicated by the continuous notice command from the data table storage area 633b, and stores the additional data table in the work RAM 633, which will be described later. The data is stored in the buffer 633e. Each time the pointer 633g is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g is drawn from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e. The content of the image to be drawn next is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 202) as update information, which will be described later, is created.

For example, in the example of FIG. 200, when the pointer 633g becomes "0097H", the MPU 631 assigns various sprites defined to the address "0097H" of the display data table to the address "0097H" of the additional data table. The sprites of effect 1, effect 2, character 1, and character 2 are added to create a drawing list that is update information, and the image controller 637 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 633g is "0001H", Null data is defined in the address "0001H" of the additional data table, so it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address "0001H" of the display data table is determined to be null. A drawing list, which is update information, is generated based on the various sprites specified in "0001H". Further, if the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the additional data table is "End" information, or if the pointer 633g indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example, , in the example of FIG. 200, when the pointer 633g indicates an address after "00FEH"), it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and updates are made based on the various sprites specified in the display data table. Generate a drawing list that is information.

Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 637, an instruction to draw the image is given. As a result, according to the update process of the pointer 633g, which is update information, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added, so that the display data table and The image as defined by the additional data table is displayed on the symbol display section 341.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the display control device 6 changes the symbols according to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 5 based on commands from the main control device 4, etc. When displaying another effect image (for example, a continuous preview effect image) in addition to the effect image to be displayed on the display unit 341 (for example, a special figure effect image), the other effect image to be additionally displayed. By setting the additional data table corresponding to the additional data table in the additional data table buffer 633e, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. As a result, for example, in a case where there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a display in which an image in which another effect image is superimposed on each original effect image is specified. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 x (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables must be prepared, but as in the gaming machine 10, data tables corresponding to other effect images can be used as additional data tables. By specifying this separately, it is sufficient to prepare 32+5=37 types of display and additional data tables, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 633b. Therefore, data tables corresponding to various presentation modes can be stored within the capacity provided in the data table storage area 633b, and further diversification of presentation images can be easily achieved.

Further, as in the gaming machine 10, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 633d, Even if it is decided to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d. By simply setting it in the data table buffer 633e, another effect image to be additionally displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 633e From the table, while updating the pointer 633g every time, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and from these, one drawing is performed by updating processing corresponding to one frame. A list can be easily generated as update information. Therefore, even if the audio lamp control device 5 or the like decides to display other effects in addition to the effects performed based on commands from the main control device 4, the effects to be displayed in addition to those effects may be displayed. By defining the display contents using the additional data table, it is possible to easily display a wide variety of effects from a small number of data tables.

[Transfer data table]
Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as mentioned above, the transfer data table is the one that is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance. Transfer data information and its transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the normal video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636 are defined.

Note that if all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 635, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 633b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 201). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 201 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 634 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 201, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 631 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on a command from the main control device 4, the MPU 631 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 633b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 633f of the work RAM 633, which will be described later. Each time the pointer 633g is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g is drawn from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e. The image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that point is created from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f. Obtain the transfer data information of and add the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 201, when the pointer 633g becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 631 transfers the transfer data information specified in the corresponding address of the transfer data table to the display data table and the additional data table. The added drawing list is then added to the drawing list created based on this, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 637. On the other hand, if the pointer 633g is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 637 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 631, the image controller 637 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 636a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 635 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 636a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 636a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 634 is configured with the NAND flash memory 634a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 634 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 636, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the pattern display section 341. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 635 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the display control device 6 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on a command or the like from the main control device 4. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 633f, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 636 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. can.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 195, the simple image display flag 633c displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 196(A) to 196(C) in the symbol display section 341. This is a flag indicating whether or not to display. This simple image display flag 633c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 635a or the variable image at power-on area 635b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 240) executed by the MPU 631 (see step S4105 in FIG. 240). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 635 through the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the symbol display section 341 is turned off in order to display an image other than the power-on image. is set (see step S6105 in FIG. 252(B)).

This simple image display flag 633c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 631 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 637 is detected (see step S4301 in FIG. 241), and the simple image display flag 633c is When the flag 633c is on, a simple command determination process (see step S4308 in FIG. 241(B)) and a simple display setting process (see step S4308 in FIG. 241(B)) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the symbol display section 341. ) is executed (see step S4309). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 633c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 5 based on commands from the main control device 4, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 242 to 246) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 247 to 250) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 633c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 631 in the V interrupt process (see step S6001 in FIG. 252(A)), and the simple image display flag 633c is on. In this case, there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 635, so the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 252(B)) is performed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. If the simple image display flag 633c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 253) is executed to transfer the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636.

The display data table buffer 633d is for storing a display data table corresponding to the production mode to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on a command etc. from the main control device 4. buffer. The MPU 631 determines the presentation mode to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 based on commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5, and selects a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode from the data table storage area 633b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 633d. Then, the MPU 631 increments the pointer 633g by 1 and sends the image controller 633 to the image controller 633 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d. A drawing list (see FIG. 202), which will be described later as update information, is generated that describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the symbol display section 341 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d.

The additional data table buffer 633e generates an effect (which is displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the symbol display section 341) based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d in response to commands from the audio lamp control device 5, etc. This is a buffer for storing additional data tables corresponding to continuous preview performances, etc.). At the same time as storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 633d, the MPU 631 temporarily writes Null data indicating that there is no display item to be added to the additional data table buffer 633e. Clear the contents.

Thereafter, the MPU 631 determines whether or not there is an effect to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the symbol display section 341 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d based on a command etc. from the audio lamp control device 5. If there is an additional effect to be displayed based on the judgment, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 633b, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 633e. .

Then, the MPU 631 adds the pointer 633g by 1 through the update process, and adds the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table buffer 633e. A drawing list (described later as update information) that describes image drawing instructions to the image controller 637 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the additional data table stored in the . (see Figure 202). Thereby, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is additionally displayed on the symbol display section 341 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Furthermore, if the additional data table buffer 633e does not store the additional data table, the additional data table buffer 633e stores Null data, so the symbol display section 341 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table as is. Is displayed.

The transfer data table buffer 633f transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on a command etc. from the main control device 4. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 633d, the MPU 631 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 633b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 633f. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is stored in the resident video RAM 635, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 631 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 633f by writing Null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, the MPU 631 increments the pointer 633g by 1 through the update process, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f. If specified (that is, if Null data is not written), a drawing list (see FIG. 202) as update information, which will be described later, describes the content of image drawing instructions to the image controller 637, which is generated for each frame. Add the transfer data information to .

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 631, the image controller 637 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 636a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the information necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 635 can always be stored in the image storage area 636a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 634 is configured with the NAND flash memory 634a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 634 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 636, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the pattern display section 341. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 635 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636.

The pointer 633g selects the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image from the display data table, additional data table, and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d, additional data table buffer 633e, and transfer data table buffer 633f, respectively. This is used to specify the address from which data transfer data information should be obtained. The MPU 631 once initializes the pointer 633g to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 633d. Then, display setting processing for the V interrupt processing (steps in FIG. 247 In step S4303), a pointer update process (see step S5411 in FIG. 247) is executed as an update process, and the value of the pointer 633g, which is update information, is incremented by one.

Every time such update processing of the pointer 633g is performed, the MPU 631 selects the display data table indicated by the pointer 633g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e. Specifies the drawing content specified in the address, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 247), which is update information described later, and starts transfer at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be processed is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is displayed on the symbol display section 341, and if the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, the additional data The effect corresponding to the table can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the symbol display section 341. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 6.

In addition, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 635 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 636a. As a result, even if the character ROM 634 is configured with the NAND flash memory 634a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 634 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 636, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the pattern display section 341. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 635 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636.

The drawing list area 633h is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f. This area is for storing a drawing list as update information that instructs the image controller 637 to draw one frame worth of images.

[Drawing list]
Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list, which is update information, is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 637 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Decorative symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effects (effect 1, effect 2, ...), characters (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls) Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite such as pattern 2, . . . , error pattern is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 637 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and The image controller 637 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 637 A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and an obtained image is drawn. Then, the image controller 637 performs an update process to develop the drawn image into either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 633k.

The MPU 631 updates the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e with the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g, which is update information, and other data. Detailed drawing of all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the content of the image to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays the number of pending pitches, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.) A drawing list is created by generating information (detailed information) and rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are specified from the sprite type specified in the display data table and additional data table and other image contents. Generated according to the sprite type. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 635 or the subarea of the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 631 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 631 stores display data tables and additional data regarding other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy the information specified in the table as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 631 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the decorative designs (design 1, design 2, etc.), which are predetermined designs, and the effects (effect 1, effect 2, etc.) are described. ), the detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , pending ball number pattern 1, pending ball number pattern 2, . . . , error pattern).

The image controller 637 executes a drawing process for each sprite as an update process in accordance with the order described in the drawing list as update information, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f, the MPU 631 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 634, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 636a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 637 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 634 (area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 195, the time counter 633i is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the symbol display section 341 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 633d, the MPU 631 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the symbol display section 341 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 241(B ) Each time the display setting process (see step S5413 in FIG. 247) is executed, the time counter 633i, which is update information, is decremented by 1 (see step S5413 in FIG. 247). As a result, when the value of the time counter 633i becomes 0 or less, the MPU 631 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image determination flag 633j determines, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 635, whether the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not the data is stored.

The stored image discrimination flag 633j, which is update information, is generated by the initial setting process (see step S4102 in FIG. 240) executed by the MPU 631 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 633j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 636a.

The process of updating the stored image determination flag 633j is performed when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 631. be exposed. In this update process, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 636a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 636a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636, the MPU 631 refers to the stored image discrimination flag 633j and selects the image of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the data has already been stored in the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636 (see step S6215 in FIG. 253). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 636a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see step S3216 in FIG. 253). ), causes the image controller 637 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 636a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 636a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 6 and the traffic on the bus line 640. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 633k specifies a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 637 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 636b and second frame buffer 636c). When the rendering target buffer flag 633k is 0, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 636c is designated. Information on the specified drawing target buffer is then transmitted to the image controller 637 together with the drawing list that is update information (see step S6302 in FIG. 254).

Thereby, the image controller 637 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 637 first reads the expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image information to the pattern display section 341 together with the drive signal. By transferring the image, display processing for displaying the image on the symbol display section 341 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 633k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 637 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 633k, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c every time the drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the drawing list is transmitted via a V interrupt executed by the MPU 631 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 637 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 241) is executed (see step S6302 in FIG. 254).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 636b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 636c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing processing and display processing are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 636b can be read out and displayed on the symbol display section 341, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 636c.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 636c can be read out and displayed on the symbol display section 341, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 636b. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed to either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c, respectively, every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

[General figure hit/failure table]
Here, FIGS. 203(A) and 203(B) are diagrams illustrating an example of a common figure hit/failure table. In this embodiment, there are two types of normal game winning success/failure tables: the normal game state normal game winning success/failure table shown in FIG. 203(A), and the time-saving gaming state normal winning success/failure table shown in FIG. 203(B). has been done. That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the probability of hitting a normal figure is different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, and the probability of hitting a normal figure is different in the time-saving gaming state. The probability of winning a normal figure is set higher than that in the gaming state.

The normal game state normal game hit/fail table shown in FIG. 203(A) shows that in the normal game state (low frequency support mode, low probability mode) as the in-game state, a bonus is awarded when a game ball passes through the through gate 317. This is a table used in a general drawing lottery that is performed as a bonus award when conditions are met. As shown in FIG. 203(A), in the normal game state normal figure per win/failure table, when the value of the normal figure random number counter C4 which is update information is 0, the value of the normal figure random number counter C4 is 0. If the number is between 1 and 299, it is set to be out of order. That is, in the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to 1/300, and the operation frequency and operation probability of the electric accessory 315b are set low.

The time-saving game state normal figure winning/falsifying table shown in FIG. 203(B) shows that when a game ball passes through the through gate 317 in the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state) as the playing state, a bonus is awarded. This is a table used in a general drawing lottery that is executed as a bonus grant when the granting conditions are met. As shown in FIG. 203(B), in the time-saving gaming state normal figure win/failure table, contrary to the normal game state normal figure win/fail table, when the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure which is update information is 0, If the value of the random number counter C4 is between 1 and 299, it is set to be a normal figure. In other words, in the time-saving game state, the probability of winning a common symbol is set to 299/300, and the probability of winning a common symbol is set higher than that in the normal gaming state, and the frequency and probability of operation of the electric accessories 315b are increased. There is.

The normal winning random number counter C4, which is update information, is periodically incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 299, for example, by executing the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. It is updated to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 317 is stored in the normal pattern first holding area SE1 to the normal pattern fourth holding area SE4 of the normal pattern holding storage area 412c. .

It should be noted that the probability of winning a common symbol in the normal gaming state and the probability of winning a common symbol in the time-saving gaming state are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 203(A) and 203(B) and can be changed as appropriate.

[Classification table per ordinary map]
Here, FIG. 203(C) and FIG. 203(D) are diagrams showing an example of a type distribution table per ordinary figure. In this embodiment, as the type distribution table per normal figure, the type distribution table per normal game state normal figure shown in FIG. 203(C) and the type allocation table per normal figure in the time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 203(D) Two types are set: That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the type of normal pattern (short open normal pattern and long open normal pattern) The distribution probabilities for (per ordinary map) are different.

Here, when the bonus granting condition is established because the result of the lottery to win a regular ticket is a winning ticket, and the game to win a regular ticket that is executed as a bonus award is a short open regular ticket, the electric accessory 315b By being operated for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the maximum opening time of the second prize opening 315, which is the starting ball entry area, is set to a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds). In this short opening regular game, since the operating time of the electric accessory 315b is short and the opening time of the second winning opening 315 is short, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315, and in many cases, the second winning opening 315 is difficult to enter. A game ball does not enter the second prize opening 315.

On the other hand, if the bonus granting condition is satisfied because the result of the lottery to win a regular symbol is a winning symbol, and the game to win a regular symbol that is executed as a bonus award is a long open symbol, the electric accessory 315b is a long open symbol. By being operated for a long time (for example, 6 seconds), the maximum opening time of the second prize opening 315, which is the starting ball entry area, is set to a long time (for example, 6 seconds). In this long open regular figure game, the operating time of the electric accessory 315b is long and the opening time of the second prize opening 315 is long, so the game ball easily enters the second prize opening 315, and the second special figure game It is possible to reserve the right to execute up to an upper limit number (for example, 4).

The normal game state normal figure per type distribution table shown in FIG. 203(C) is a table used for distributing the normal figure per type in the normal gaming state as the in-game state. As shown in FIG. 203(C), in the normal game state per normal pattern type distribution table, when the value of the updated information per normal pattern random number counter C5 is from 0 to 199, it is a short open normal pattern and a long open normal pattern. There is no distribution per open general map. That is, in the normal game state, when the bonus award condition is satisfied because the result of the lottery for regular tickets is a regular ticket, a short open regular ticket game that is executed as a bonus grant is executed. Therefore, the normal gaming state is set as a gaming state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second prize opening 315.

The time-saving gaming state per normal figure type distribution table shown in FIG. 203(D) is used to allocate the type per normal figure in the time-saving gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, b time-saving gaming state) as the playing state. This is a table that As shown in FIG. 203(D), in the time-saving game state per normal pattern type distribution table, when the value of the updated information per normal pattern random number counter C5 is from 0 to 199, it is a long open normal pattern, and a short There is no distribution per open general map. That is, in the time-saving game state, if the bonus award condition is satisfied because the result of the lottery for regular tickets is a regular ticket, a long open regular ticket game that is executed as a bonus award is executed. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state is set as a gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second winning hole 315.

The normal winning type random number counter C5, which is update information, is periodically incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, for example, by executing the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. It is updated periodically and reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 317 is stored in the normal pattern first holding area SE1 to the normal pattern fourth holding area SE4 of the normal pattern holding storage area 412c. Ru. In addition, when the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area SE4 is a general pattern win, the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area Depending on the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 stored in area SE4, the type per normal drawing (per short open normal drawing and per long open normal drawing), that is, the operating time of the electric accessory 315b (for the second prize opening 315) maximum opening time) is set.

Of course, the allocation ratio between the short open regular game and the long open regular game in the normal game state and the time saving game state (a time saving game state, b time saving game state) is not necessarily limited to the above example, It can be changed as appropriate, for example, it may be possible to generate a game per long open general figure at a certain rate in the normal gaming state, or it may be possible to generate a game per short open general figure at a fixed rate in the time saving gaming state.

Further, the electric accessory 315b is not limited to being opened once per game per common figure, but may be opened multiple times. In this case, the opening time and opening interval (interval between openings) of each opening of the electric accessory 315b in one game per common figure may be one type or multiple types.

[Jackpot success/failure table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 204(A) to 204(C), the jackpot success/failure table used in the special drawing jackpot lottery will be described. Here, FIG. 204(A) is a diagram showing an example of a special 1 jackpot success/failure table, FIG. 204(B) is a diagram showing an example of a b-time saving special 2 jackpot success/failure table, and FIG. 204(C) is a diagram showing an example of a It is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving special 2 jackpot success/failure table. In this embodiment, as the jackpot jackpot table, there is a special jackpot jackpot table used in the special jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize opening 314 shown in FIG. 204(A); The special 2 jackpot success/failure table used in the special jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize opening 315 in the b time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 204(B), and the ) A special 2 jackpot winning/falsifying table is set which is used in the special drawing jackpot lottery which is executed when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state a shown in (a).

As shown in FIG. 204(A), in the special 1 jackpot success/failure table, 206 random numbers from 0 to 205 are selected from among the values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 65536 from 0 to 65535, which are in the updated state. corresponds to a small win, the other random values correspond to a loss, and the small win probability is set to approximately 1/318.1 (206/65536). That is, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, a small winning game is unlikely to occur.

Here, in the normal gaming state as the playing state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315 when hitting the right hand, so in order to enter the game ball into the first winning hole 314, Hitting is encouraged. Therefore, in the special 1 jackpot winning table, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315 when hitting right-handed, and left-handed hitting is encouraged in order to get the game ball into the first winning hole 314. It is used in the normal gaming state, which is the in-game state. As a result, in the normal gaming state, when the player performs a left-handed hit that is encouraged by a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22, the special jackpot lottery using the special jackpot winning table is mainly performed, and the small As a result of the fact that a winning game is difficult to occur, a jackpot game based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in a small winning game is also difficult to occur.

As shown in FIG. 204(B), in the b time-saving special 2 jackpot success/failure table, among the 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) from 0 to 65535 that are in the updated state, 206 values from 0 to 205 are Random numbers correspond to small wins, other random numbers correspond to misses, and the small win probability is set to about 1/318.1 (206/65536). In other words, the small winning probability in the b time-saving special 2 jackpot winning table is set to be the same as that in the special 1 jackpot winning table, and when the game ball enters the second prize opening 315 in the b time-saving gaming state, , it is difficult for small winning games to occur. In other words, in the b time-saving game state as the gaming state, there is a special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning slot 314 in the b time-saving game state, and a second lottery in the b time-saving game state. The small winning probability is set to be the same for the special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the winning hole 315. Therefore, in the b-time saving game state, even if it is a special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into either the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, a small winning game is unlikely to occur. As a result, jackpot games are less likely to occur.

Here, b time-saving game state is executed every time a special figure game starts or ends as a result of a specified number of special figure games being executed in the in-game state from the end of a jackpot game until the next jackpot game is executed. The normal game state is transitioned to when the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter as update information (to be described later) reaches the update completion state (for example, 0) through the update process performed. Right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to allow the game ball to enter the winning hole 315. Therefore, the b time saving special 2 jackpot win/fail table is mainly used when the player executes a right-handed hit that is encouraged by a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22.

As shown in FIG. 204(C), in the a time saving special 2 jackpot success/failure table, among the 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535 that are in the updated state, 8484 values from 0 to 8483 are Random numbers correspond to small wins, other random numbers correspond to misses, and the small win probability is set to about 1/7.725 (8484/65536). In other words, the probability of a small win in the a Time-saving special 2 big win table is set significantly higher than that in the special 1 big win table (see Figure 204 (A)) and b The time-saving special 2 big win table (see Figure 204 (C)). has been done.

Here, in the time-saving gaming state a, when the bonus awarding condition is satisfied when the game ball fired by the player's predetermined gaming operation on the firing handle 22 enters the V winning hole 833 in the small winning game, the said The bonus is given after the end of the small winning game.The transition is made when the big winning game ends. Therefore, when the jackpot game ends, a small win game that becomes an opportunity for the jackpot game to occur is likely to occur.

In addition, the jackpot random number counter C1, which is the update information, is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 65536 from 0 to 65535, for example, by executing the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. It is updated periodically and reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, in the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding area RE1 of the special drawing holding storage area 412b, or to the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REAB of the second special drawing holding area REB. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the timing when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 is stored.

[Jackpot type distribution table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 204(D) and 204(E), the jackpot type table used in the special drawing jackpot lottery will be described. Here, FIG. 204(D) is a diagram showing an example of a special 1 jackpot type distribution table, and FIG. 204(E) is a diagram showing an example of a special 2 jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 204(D), in the special 1 jackpot type distribution table, among the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) from 0 to 19 that are in the updated state, 19 values from 0 to 18 are The random number is a 4R time-saving jackpot, and one random number of 19 is a 16R time-saving jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, in the small winning game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small winning, the privilege awarding condition is set based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83. If the game is established, the type of jackpot game to be executed as a bonus award is set at the time of the special drawing jackpot lottery. In this embodiment, in the special drawing jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first winning hole 314, the distribution of the 5R time-saving jackpot is 95%, and the distribution of the 16R time-saving jackpot is 5%.

As shown in FIG. 204(E), in the special 2 jackpot type distribution table, among the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) from 0 to 19 that are in the updated state, five values from 0 to 4 are The random number is a 4R time-saving jackpot, and the 15 random numbers from 5 to 19 are a 16R time-saving jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, in the small winning game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small winning, the privilege grant condition is set based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83. If the game is established, the type of jackpot game to be executed as a bonus award is set at the time of the special drawing jackpot lottery. In this embodiment, in the special drawing jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first winning hole 314, the distribution of the 5R time-saving jackpot is 25%, and the distribution of the 16R time-saving jackpot is 75%. In other words, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315 as a trigger, compared to a case where a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 as a trigger, a 16R jackpot game is more likely to occur. The expected ball output value is higher when the game ball enters the second prize opening 315 as an opportunity.

In addition, the jackpot type counter C2, which is update information, is incremented by 1 in the range of 20 from 0 to 19, for example, by executing the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. It is updated periodically and reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, in the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding area RE1 of the special drawing holding storage area 412b, or to the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REAB of the second special drawing holding area REB. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the timing when a game ball wins in the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 is stored. In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a small hit, the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding area RE1 of the special drawing holding storage area 412b, or the second special drawing holding area The type of jackpot (4R jackpot and 16R jackpot), that is, the number of round games when a jackpot game is executed, is set by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REAB of REB. be done.

Here, when a predetermined number of game balls (5 or 9) enter the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving game state a, the normal game state as the playing state is shifted from the time-saving game state a. . In other words, a small winning game is executed based on the result of the special jackpot lottery in the normal game state becoming a small winning, and in the small winning game, the game ball 99 enters the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83. When a jackpot game is started based on what has been done, the jackpot game becomes what is called a first win. In this embodiment, the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state a when the first jackpot game ends is set to 1, and the second game based on the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 is set to one time. The maximum number of reserved rights to execute the special figure game is four. Therefore, the number of times that the special drawing jackpot lottery (second special drawing game) that can be executed by opening the second prize opening 315 that is started in the time-saving gaming state is 5 at maximum (1 time-saving game + remaining pending game). 4 times). As a result, in the first win from the normal gaming state, the number of time-saving games in the a-time-saving gaming state is set to one, so the probability of entering RUSH, where jackpot games are likely to occur consecutively, is 50%. . On the other hand, when the jackpot game that occurred based on the game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving game state a or the time-saving game state b ends, the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state a is 5 times. It is set. Therefore, the number of times the special drawing jackpot lottery (second special drawing game) that can be executed by opening the second prize opening 315 that is started in the time-saving gaming state a or the working-time saving gaming state b is 9 times at maximum (time-saving 5 times + 4 remaining pending times). As a result, the RUSH entry rate for the first win from the time-saving gaming state b is 100%, and the time-saving gaming state b due to ceiling activation is a profit gaming state. In addition, the RUSH continuation rate in the time-saving game state a that shifts after the end of the jackpot game is 71.3%.

[Variation table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 205(A) and FIG. 205(B), special figures (first special figure, second special figure game) which are predetermined symbols in special figure games (first special figure game, second special figure game) 2 special figures) and a variation table for setting the variation pattern (variation display time) of decorative symbols will be explained. Here, FIG. 205(A) is a diagram showing an example of a winning variation table, and FIG. 205(B) is a diagram showing an example of a winning variation table.

As shown in FIG. 205(A), the loss fluctuation table sets the fluctuation display time of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) and decorative pattern when the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery is a loss. used for Two types of tables are defined as this deviation variation table depending on the type of deviation. Specifically, there are two types of misses: cases in which the reach of the decorative pattern is involved (missing reach in front and back, reach other than the reach in the front and back), and cases in which the type of miss is not accompanied by reach in the decorative pattern (complete miss). It is set.

If the miss type is one that involves a reach of a decorative pattern (a reach that is out of front and back, a reach other than a reach that is out of front and back), among the 200 values (random value) of the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 from 0 to 199 that are in the updated state, The variable display time of 100 random numbers from 0 to 99 is 30 seconds (special figure variation pattern "01"), and the variable display time of 50 random numbers from 100 to 149 is 60 seconds (special figure variation pattern "01"). 02"), and the fluctuation display time of 100 random numbers from 150 to 199 is 90 seconds (special figure fluctuation pattern "03").

On the other hand, if the miss type does not involve the reach of the decorative pattern (complete miss), 150 of the 200 special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 values (random values) of 0 to 149 in the updated state The random number fluctuation display time is 7 seconds (special figure fluctuation pattern "04"), and the fluctuation display time of 50 random numbers from 150 to 199 is 10 seconds (special figure fluctuation pattern "05").

In addition, the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1, which is the update information, is updated in the range of 200 from 0 to 199, for example, by executing the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17 and step S1414 in FIG. 209. It is updated periodically by adding 1 in sequence within the range, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, in the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding area RE1 of the special drawing holding storage area 412b, or to the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REAB of the second special drawing holding area REB. The value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 at the timing when a game ball wins in the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 is stored.

Here, in this embodiment, one of the special pattern fluctuation patterns "01" to "05" is selected in the deviation fluctuation table according to the value of the special pattern fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, when the special figure variation pattern "01" is selected (when the front and back off reach or the front and back off reach is selected), the audio lamp control device 5 sets the variation display time to 30 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type). A certain normal reach effect pattern is determined, and a special game effect is executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like according to the normal reach effect pattern. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which a normal reach performance is performed after a high-speed fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation display), and is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is a normal reach performance (Fig. 205 (C) )reference). In addition, when the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected (when the front and back off reach or the front and back off reach is selected), the audio lamp control device 5 sets the variation display time to 60 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type). A certain super reach performance pattern is determined, and a special game performance is executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like according to the super reach performance pattern. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which a high-speed fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation display) is followed by a normal reach performance, then a super reach performance pattern, and the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is a super reach performance. This is a pattern (see FIG. 205(D)). Furthermore, when the special figure variation pattern "03" is selected (when the front/back off reach or the front/back off reach is selected), the audio lamp control device 5 has the longest variation display time of 90 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern). A special reach performance pattern is determined, and a special game performance is executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like according to the special reach performance pattern. The special reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which a high-speed fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation display) is followed by a normal reach performance, then a super reach performance pattern, and then a special reach performance, and the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is special. This is a performance pattern that is a reach performance (see FIG. 205(E)). In addition, when the special figure variation pattern "04" is selected (completely missed), the audio lamp control device 5 uses a non-reach production pattern with the shortest variation display time of 7 seconds as the variation type (production pattern). is determined and the special figure variation pattern "05" is selected (completely off is selected), the audio lamp control device 5 selects a non-reach production pattern with a variation display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (production pattern). is determined, and a special game performance is executed in accordance with the non-reach performance pattern on the symbol display section 341 or the like. The non-reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which a high-speed fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation display) is performed without a reach performance (see FIG. 205(F)).

As shown in FIG. 205(B), in the winning variation table, when the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery is a small win, the variation display time of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) and decorative pattern is Used to configure. In this winning fluctuation table, the fluctuation display time of 20 random numbers from 0 to 19 is 30 seconds (special Figure fluctuation pattern "01"), the fluctuation display time of 100 random numbers from 20 to 119 is 60 seconds (special diagram fluctuation pattern "02"), and the fluctuation display of 70 random numbers from 120 to 199 The time is 90 seconds (special figure fluctuation pattern "03").

In addition, the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1, which is the update information, is updated in the range of 200 from 0 to 199, for example, by executing the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17 and step S1414 in FIG. 209. It is updated periodically by adding 1 in sequence within the range, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, in the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding area RE1 of the special drawing holding storage area 412b, or to the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REAB of the second special drawing holding area REB. The value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 at the timing when a game ball wins in the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 is stored.

Here, in this embodiment, in the winning variation table, one of the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Then, when the special figure variation pattern "01" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 30 seconds as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the normal reach effect pattern is displayed in the symbol display section 341 etc. A special game performance is executed according to the performance pattern. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which a normal reach performance is performed after a high-speed fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation display), and is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is a normal reach performance. In addition, when the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern with a variation display time of 60 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 etc. A special game performance is executed according to the super reach performance pattern. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which a high-speed fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation display) is followed by a normal reach performance, then a super reach performance pattern, and the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is a super reach performance. It's a pattern. Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the special reach production pattern with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds as the variation type (production pattern), and the symbol display section 341 etc. A special game performance is executed according to a special reach performance pattern. The special reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which a high-speed fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation display) is followed by a normal reach performance, then a super reach performance pattern, and then a special reach performance, and the final individual performance type in the special figure game performance is special. This is a performance pattern that is a reach performance.

In this way, when the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery is a small win, by selecting one of "01" to "03" as the special pattern fluctuation pattern, the symbol display section 341 can control the sound lamp. In the device 5, a reach performance pattern (normal reach performance pattern, super reach performance pattern, or special reach performance pattern) is determined as a variation type (performance pattern).

In addition, in the win variation table of this embodiment, unlike the loss variation table, as a reach effect pattern (normal reach effect pattern, super reach effect pattern, or special reach effect pattern), a re-lottery effect (re-draw) which is the above-mentioned special effect is included. Includes a reach effect pattern in which a lottery display) is executed.

Here, FIG. 206(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a performance pattern in which a re-lottery performance (re-lottery display) is performed. The performance pattern shown in FIG. 206(A) is a special reach performance pattern in which, after the execution of the special reach performance, a revival performance (revival display) and a promotion performance (promotion display) are performed as a re-lottery performance (re-lottery display). This is an example of a case.

Although the drawings are omitted, the special reach performance pattern includes a performance pattern in which only a revival performance (resurrection display) is performed as a re-lottery performance (re-lottery display) after the execution of the special reach performance, and a performance pattern in which only a revival performance (resurrection display) is performed as a re-lottery performance (re-lottery display) after the execution of the special reach performance. It may include a performance pattern in which only a promotion performance (promotion display) is performed as a re-lottery performance (re-lottery display).

In addition, in a normal performance pattern in which a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) is executed, after the normal effect is executed, at least one of a revival effect (resurrection display) and a promotion effect (promotion display) is performed as a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display). is executed. In addition, in a special performance pattern in which a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) is executed, after the execution of the special effect, at least one of a revival effect (resurrection display) and a promotion effect (promotion display) is performed as a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display). is executed.

Note that the winning variation table of this embodiment differs from the losing variation table in that it does not include a non-reach performance pattern, but when the winning variation table includes a non-reach performance pattern, the re-lottery performance ( You may set an effect pattern in which a re-lottery display) is executed.

Next, the re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) will be described with reference to FIGS. 206(B), 206(C), and 207. Here, FIG. 206(B), FIG. 206(C), and FIG. 207 are diagrams for explaining the re-lottery effect (re-lottery display).

As shown in FIG. 206(B), the resurrection effect (resurrection display), which is a special effect in the special figure game that is in the playing state, is a decorative pattern as a predetermined pattern when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win. This is an effect (display) in which a combination corresponding to a win is stopped and displayed by a notification display, and then a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed by a notification display in a combination corresponding to a small win. Specifically, the resurrection effect (resurrection display) is such that after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a notification display at a location other than the zeroth one, for example, for a certain period of time, the decorative symbol oscillates (vibrates) without completely stopping at the other location. ), this is an effect (display) in which the decorative pattern is changed from a non-zero number to a zero number and displayed as a notification display.

As shown in FIG. 206(C), the promotion effect (promotion display), which is a special effect in the special figure game that is in the playing state, is for example 4R by entering the game ball into the V winning hole 833 in the small winning game. After the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed by the notification display to notify that it is a small win that will generate a time-saving jackpot game, a 16R time-saving jackpot game will be generated by entering the game ball into the V winning hole 833 in the small winning game. This is an effect in which a decorative pattern that notifies you of a small win is confirmed and displayed by the notification display. Specifically, the promotion effect (promotion display) is such that the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a notification display at a number other than "777", and then the decoration pattern is displayed as a number other than "777" as a notification display (see FIG. 207(A)). ) and the double number of "777" (see Figure 207(B)) are alternately displayed as the notification display, and then the double number of "777" is displayed as the notification display. (See FIG. 207(C)). Note that if the promotion effect (promotion display) is not executed, the notification display will be a double number other than "777" (see Figure 207 (A)), and the notification display will be a double number of "777" (Figure 207 (B)). (see FIG. 207(D)).

The resurrection effect (resurrection display) and promotion effect (promotion display) in such a special figure game that is in the playing state are based on a specific variation type (effect pattern) that is set for one special figure game as described above. ). In other words, the resurrection effect (resurrection display) and promotion effect (promotion display) in the special figure game that is in the playing state are variable types (effects) that are set multiple times according to the variable display time of the decorative symbol and the result of the special figure jackpot lottery. If a specific variation type (effect pattern) is set from the pattern) in which a revival effect (resurrection display) or promotion effect (promotion display) is executed when the result of the special jackpot lottery is a small hit, It is executed as part of the special figure game performance (part of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols). Therefore, the revival effect (revival display) and promotion effect (promotion display) update the drawing list, which is update information, based on the specific variation type (effect pattern) set for the special figure game. It is executed by repeating the number of times specified according to the variation type (effect pattern). In other words, in the special figure game that is in the playing state, the update information is displayed as a notification display before resurrection or promotion in the update process up to a predetermined period before the update end state where the last drawing list update process was executed. The symbols are stopped and displayed, and the drawing list, which is update information, is updated to the end through update processing using the subsequent period, thereby making it possible to display the decorative symbols as a notification display. As a result, during the playing state of a single special figure game that notifies a jackpot, the revival effect (resurrection display) and promotion effect (promotion display) of decorative symbols on the pattern display section 341 are smoothly and reliably executed as special effects. It becomes possible to do so.

[Start winning process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17 will be described. Here, FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the starting winning process.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 208, in the starting winning process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not there is a winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101). Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there has been a winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process moves to step S1102, and if it determines that there has been no winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), the process moves to step S1110.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol reserved ball number N stored in the first special symbol reserved number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved pitch number (4 in this embodiment). do. Here, if the first special figure reserved ball number N is the maximum reserved ball number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1110. On the other hand, if the first special figure reserved ball number N is not the maximum reserved ball number (step S1103: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the first special figure reserved ball number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 confirms the contents of the special symbol validity information before it is subject to determination of the validity of the jackpot in step S2102 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 216, which will be described later, and updates the information based on this confirmation result A command for the number of reserved pitches as follows is set in the RAM 412. This held pitch count command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. When the voice lamp control device 5 receives the number of reserved balls command, it executes a process of updating the image (special pattern data image) related to the special pattern data displayed on the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 53).

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as the update information updated by the update processing in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. Obtain the counter value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 as update information updated by the update processing in steps S1402 and S1414 in the main process, and store the counter value in the first special symbol of the special symbol pending storage area 412b in the RAM 412. It is stored in the first vacant reservation area among the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 in the figure reservation storage area REA. At this time, the first vacant holding area among the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA is stored in the gaming state (normal gaming state, a Time-saving game state, b time-saving game state) is stored.

<Steps S1106 and S1107>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 uses the special 1 jackpot propriety table based on the various counter values stored in the first vacant holding area among the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA. (Refer to FIG. 204(A)) is used to perform a validity determination, and it is determined whether or not the result of the validity determination is a small win (step S1107). If the result of the determination is a small hit (step S1106: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1108, and if the result of the determination is not a small hit but a miss (step S1106: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1108. The process moves to step S1109.

<Step S1108>
If the result of the negative determination is a small hit (step S1106: Yes), the MPU 41 stores the special drawing in the first vacant holding area among the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA. A first special figure hold command is set in the RAM 412 that can specify the type of jackpot hit and the fluctuation pattern. This first special figure hold command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. When the audio lamp control device 5 receives the first special figure hold command, it executes an update process of the special figure data which is update information stored in the special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512.

<Step S1109>
If the result of the win/fail determination is not a small hit but a miss (step S1106: No), the MPU 41 selects the first vacant reservation among the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA. A first special figure hold command is set in the RAM 412 that allows the identification of the out-of-order type and fluctuation pattern stored in the area. This first special figure hold command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. When the audio lamp control device 5 receives the first special figure hold command, it executes an update process of the special figure data which is update information stored in the special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a win in the second winning hole 315. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there has been a winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1110: Yes), the process moves to step S1111, and if it determines that there has been no winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1110: No). ), the start winning process ends.

<Steps S1111 and S1112>
In step S1111, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special symbol reserved ball number M stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved ball number (4 in this embodiment). do. Here, if the second special figure reserved ball number M is the maximum reserved ball number (step S1111: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the starting winning process. On the other hand, if the second special figure reserved ball number M is not the maximum number of reserved balls (step S1111: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the second special figure reserved ball number M as an update process ( Step S1112).

<Step S1113>
In step S1113, the MPU 41 confirms the contents of the special symbol validity information before it is subject to determination of the propriety of the jackpot in step S2102 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 216, which will be described later, and updates the information based on this confirmation result. A command for the number of reserved pitches as follows is set in the RAM 412. This held pitch count command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. When the voice lamp control device 5 receives the number of reserved balls command, it executes a process of updating the image (special pattern data image) related to the special pattern data displayed on the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 53).

<Step S1114>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 stores the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 as update information updated by the update process in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Obtain the counter value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 as update information updated by the update processing in steps S1402 and S1414 in the main process, and store the counter value in the second special symbol of the special symbol pending storage area 412b in the RAM 412. It is stored in the first vacant reservation area among the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the reservation storage area REB in the figure. At this time, the first vacant holding area among the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB has the gaming state (normal gaming state, a Time-saving game state, b time-saving game state) is stored.

<Steps S1115 to S1117>
In step S1115, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the a-time-saving gaming state flag indicating the a-time-saving gaming state, which is the profit gaming state, is on. The time saving gaming state flag a is set to ON in step S3638 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 230 when transitioning from the jackpot gaming state which is the profit gaming state, and is set to ON in step S3638 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 231 when transitioning to the normal gaming state. It is set to OFF in step S3651 of the gaming state transition process.

When the a time-saving game state flag indicating the a time-saving game state is on (step S1115: Yes), the MPU 41 stores the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. Based on the various counter values stored in the first vacant holding area, a judgment is made using the a time saving special 2 jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 204(B)) (step S1116), and the process proceeds to step S1118. Transition. On the other hand, when the a time-saving game state flag indicating that the a-time-saving game state is off (step S1115: Yes), the MPU 41 controls the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. Based on the various counter values stored in the first free holding area of REB4, the success/failure determination is made using the b time saving special 2 jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 204(C)) (step S1117), and the process is then carried out in step S1117. The process moves to S1118.

<Step S1118>
In step S1118, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the win/fail determination is a small win. If the result of the determination is a small hit (step S1118: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1119, and if the result of the determination is not a small hit but a miss (step S1118: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1119. The process moves to step S1120.

<Step S1119>
If the result of the negative determination is a small hit (step S1118: Yes), the MPU 41 stores it in the first vacant holding area among the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REB4 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB. A second special figure hold command is set in the RAM 412 that allows the type of jackpot hit and the fluctuation pattern to be specified. This second special figure hold command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. When the audio lamp control device 5 receives the second special figure hold command, it executes an update process of the special figure data which is update information stored in the special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512.

<Step S1120>
If the result of the win/fail determination is not a small hit but a miss (step S1118: No), the MPU 41 selects the first vacant reservation area among the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB. A second special figure holding command is set in the RAM 412 that allows the identification of the type of deviation and variation pattern stored in the area. This second special figure hold command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. When the audio lamp control device 5 receives the second special figure hold command, it executes an update process of the special figure data which is update information stored in the special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512.

[Main processing]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 209 to 231. The main process of this embodiment is the above-mentioned first in that the special figure game number management process (step S1406-1 in FIG. 209) and the small winning game control process (step S1406-2 in FIG. 209) are executed. Unlike the main processing of the embodiment, some of the other processing is also different from the main processing of the first embodiment described above. The main processing of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the main processing of the first embodiment.

[Public figure game control process]
Here, FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the common figure game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of FIG. 209. In the common symbol game control process, processing for controlling the fluctuating display and stop display of the common symbol (common symbol) in the common symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 is executed. Hereinafter, the normal figure game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 210.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 210, in the normal pattern game control process, the MPU 41 first turns on the normal pattern fluctuation display flag, which indicates that the normal pattern is in the in-game state where the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (the normal pattern game is being executed). It is determined whether there is one (step S1501). The normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to ON in step S1711 when the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern game) is started in the normal pattern fluctuation start process of FIG. 212 described later, and the normal pattern is stopped and displayed ( When the general figure game ends), it is set to OFF in step S1511 in the corresponding general figure game control process.

The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508 when the flag during normal figure fluctuation display is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the common figure game is being executed. On the other hand, when the flag during normal pattern fluctuation display is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
If the common figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, if the common figure game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric accessory 315b is open (the common figure game is being executed) or during the game. It is determined whether the electric accessory opening flag indicating the state is on (step S1502). The electric accessory opening flag is set to ON in step S1811 when the electric accessory 315b is opened, and is set to ON in step S1818 when the electric accessory 315b is closed, in the normal figure winning game control process of FIG. Set to off.

When the electric accessory opening flag is on (step S1502: Yes), that is, when the game per common symbol is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the common symbol game control process. On the other hand, when the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the game per common figure is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
When the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the regular winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the small winning game state indicating that the small winning game is being executed. It is determined whether the flag is on (step S1503). The small winning game state flag is set to ON in step S3602 when the small winning game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3614 when the small winning game ends, in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 229, which will be described later. Ru.

If the small winning game state flag is on (step S1503: Yes), and if the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the general figure game control process. That is, in this embodiment, the common figure game is not started while the small winning game is being executed. Of course, the common figure game may be started while the small winning game is being executed. On the other hand, when the small winning game state flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
When the small winning game state flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 turns on the jackpot playing flag indicating that the small winning game is in the playing state where the jackpot game is being executed. It is determined whether there is one (step S1504). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 229, which will be described later, the jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3507 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3554 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1504: Yes), and if the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process. That is, in this embodiment, the common figure game is not started while the jackpot game is being executed. Of course, the common figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S1504: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
When the jackpot game flag is off (step S1504: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 stores it in the normal pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA set in the normal pattern pending storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not the number of pending changes in ordinary figures X is 0 (step S1505). The MPU 41 ends the general pattern game control process when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S1505: Yes), and when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1505: No), the MPU 41 ends the processing. The process moves to step S1506.

<Step S1506>
If the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1505: No), the MPU 41 executes the general pattern data setting process for the general pattern validity information stored in the general pattern pending storage area 412c (step S1506), The process moves to step S1507. Note that details of the ordinary map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 211.

<Step S1507>
In step S1507, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol fluctuation start process for causing the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 to execute a variable display of the normal symbol based on the information stored in the common symbol holding storage area 412c. , the general figure game control process ends. Note that the details of the ordinary figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 212.

<Step S1508>
If the normal figure fluctuation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, if the normal figure game is being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on. It is determined whether or not (step S1508). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 229, which will be described later, the jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3507 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3554 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game flag is on (step S1508: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1509. On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S1508: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509.

<Step S1509>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1508: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed since the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display ( Step S1509). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (end the common symbol game).

When the normal symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ends the common symbol game). If there is, the process moves to step S1510. On the other hand, if the normal pattern fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S1509: No), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ends the normal pattern game). ), if it is not the timing to do so, the general figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S1510 to S1512>
When the normal figure fluctuation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes) and when the jackpot game flag is on (step S1508: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is started while the normal figure game is being executed, Or, if the regular symbol fluctuation display time of the regular symbols has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to stop displaying the fluctuating regular symbols (end the regular symbol game), the MPU 41 The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery for the common symbol (step S1510), and the common symbol fluctuation display flag is set to indicate that the normal symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (the common symbol game is being executed). is set to off (step S1511). Furthermore, the MPU 41 turns on the normal pattern variation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed, that is, the normal pattern game has ended (step S1512), and ends the normal pattern game control process.

In addition, the ordinary figure fluctuation stop display flag is used to determine whether it is the timing to start the ordinary figure winning game (release the electric accessory 315b) in step S1801 of the ordinary figure winning game control process in FIG. 213, which will be described later. Referenced for.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution of the normal pattern game is not limited to the timing to stop displaying the normal pattern (to end the normal pattern game), which is fluctuatingly displayed as the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern has elapsed. If a jackpot game is started during the game, the fluctuating normal symbols are stopped and displayed (the common symbol game is ended). That is, when the jackpot game is started, the normal pattern game is forcibly ended before the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern passes. Of course, even when a jackpot game is started, the normal pattern game may be continuously executed until the normal pattern fluctuation display time elapses.

[Public figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general map data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of FIG. 210. In the ordinary figure data setting process, a process of updating the storage contents of the ordinary figure pending storage area 412c in the storage area of the main control device 4 in FIG. 11 is executed. The general map data setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 211.

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in FIG. 211, in the general pattern data setting process, the MPU 41 first executes an update process of subtracting 1 from the general pattern fluctuation pending number X, which is update information stored in the general pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA. (Step S1601), update processing is executed to move the general pattern validity information from the general pattern first holding area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE (step S1602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 executes an update process of shifting the common symbol validity information stored in the common symbol second reservation area SE2 to the common symbol fourth reservation area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the common figure validity information of the common figure second holding area SE2 is moved to the common figure first holding area SE1, and the common figure correctness information of the common figure third holding area SE3 is moved to the common figure second holding area SE3. An update process is executed to move the regular map to area SE2 and move the regular map validity information of the regular map fourth reservation area SE4 to the regular map third reservation area SE3.

[General figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1507 of FIG. 210. In the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the normal pattern fluctuation display on the normal pattern display section 361 is started, and an update process is performed in which various commands and flags, which are update information, are set based on the lottery results in the normal pattern winning lottery. is executed. Hereinafter, the normal pattern fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to FIG. 212.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 212, in the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal gaming state indicating the normal gaming state is on (step S1701). The normal gaming state is set to ON in step S3628 in FIG. 230, step S3649 in FIG. When transitioning from the normal gaming state to another gaming state, it is set to OFF in step S3604 in FIG. 229 and step S3645 in FIG. 230.

When the normal gaming state is on (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1702, and when the normal gaming state is off (step S1701: No), the process moves to step S1705.

<Steps S1702 to S1704>
When the normal gaming state is on (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the normal gaming state per normal pattern win/failure table (see FIG. 203(A)) and the normal gaming state per common pattern type distribution table (see FIG. 203(C)). )), the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5, which are update information included as numerical information in the normal drawing correctness information stored in the normal drawing execution area SAE of the normal drawing holding storage area 412c. It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to a common figure hit (step S1702). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the determination of whether or not the winning pattern is a winning pattern (step S1703).

If the result of the determination of whether or not it is a win for a regular symbol is a winning symbol (Step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a long open regular symbol winning flag indicating that the second winning opening 315 is a long open regular symbol winning that is opened long. is set to on (step S1704), and the process moves to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the normal pattern hit determination is that the normal pattern is not a hit (step S1703: No), that is, if it is a miss, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1708.

<Steps S1705 to S1707>
When the normal gaming state is off (step S1701: No), that is, when the time-saving gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, b )) and the type distribution table per time saving game state per normal figure (see FIG. 203(D)), the normal figure validity information stored in the normal figure execution area SAE of the normal figure holding storage area 412c is added as numerical information. It is determined whether or not the values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5, which are included update information, are values corresponding to the normal winning pattern (step S1706). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the determination of whether or not the winning pattern is a winning pattern (step S1707).

When the result of the determination of whether or not it is a win for a regular symbol is a winning symbol (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a flag for a short open symbol to indicate that the second winning opening 315 is a short open symbol for winning the short opening symbol. is set to on (step S1707), and the process moves to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the normal pattern hit determination is that the normal pattern is not a hit (step S1706: No), that is, if it is a loss, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1708.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
In step S1708, the MPU 41 refers to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the normal symbol fluctuation display time on the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 in the normal pattern game, by referring to the normal pattern fluctuation display table (not shown). Execute the general figure fluctuation pattern setting process to be set.

Then, in addition to the general pattern fluctuation pattern set in step S1708, the MPU 41 controls the general pattern fluctuation pattern for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the result of the judgment of validity in step S1702 or S1705 (the result of the general pattern winning lottery). A pattern command is set (step S1709), and the process moves to step S1710.

Note that the common figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, in the audio lamp control device 5, based on the general pattern fluctuation pattern command, an effect corresponding to the general pattern game, for example, an effect indicating that the general pattern game is being executed, is displayed on the symbol display section 341 etc. An effect showing the results of a drawing or lottery for a common map is executed.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, that is, that the normal pattern game is being executed (step S1711), and starts the normal pattern fluctuation start process. finish.

In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is referred to in step S1501 in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 210 in order to determine whether the normal pattern game is being executed (during the normal pattern fluctuation display).

[Game control processing per regular map]
Here, FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. 209. In the normal figure winning game control process, when the result of the common figure winning lottery is a win, a permissible state is established in which the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening 315 is permitted by controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 315b. Processing for switching between the restricted state and the restricted state is executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 213, the game control process per normal symbol will be explained.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 213, in the normal pattern winning game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern game has ended) is on. (Step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing at which the game per common symbol can be started. In addition, the normal symbol fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1512 when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game control process of FIG. 210.

If the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the timing at which the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1802. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1813.

<Step S1802>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, when the timing is such that the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed. It is determined whether it is on (step S1802). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 225, which will be described later, the jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3507 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3554 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1802: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the normal winning game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if a jackpot game is forced to end due to the start of the jackpot game, even if the result of the jackpot lottery for the jackpot game is a jackpot, the jackpot game will not be played. Will not start. That is, in this embodiment, the normal winning game is not started while the jackpot winning game is being executed. Of course, a new common figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
If the jackpot game flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether the long open general hit flag is set to on (step S1803). . The long open regular map hit flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per regular map is a long open regular map, and when the result of the lottery per regular map is a long open regular map, the normal map in Figure 212 It is set to ON in step S1704 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished playing game is a long open playing winning. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1804 when the long open general map hit flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), and when the long open general map hit flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), the process moves to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long open regular map hit flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular open regular lottery for the completed regular map game is a long open regular match, the MPU 41 A value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the per-figure game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315), is set as update information as the value of the opening time counter (step S1804 ). The opening time counter is referred to in step S1815 of the normal symbol game control process in order to determine the return timing of the electric accessory 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open standard hit flag to OFF (step S1805), and moves the process to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long open double hit flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the lottery to win a short open double for the completed double open game is not a long open double hit, the MPU 41 selects a short open double hit. It is determined whether the hit flag is set on (step S1806). The short open regular map hit flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per regular map is a short open regular map, and when the result of the lottery per regular map is a short open regular map, the short open regular map hit flag in Figure 24 It is set to ON in step S1707 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished betting game is a short opening winning. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1807 when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), and when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to OFF (step S1806: No), that is, if the result of the winning lottery for the finished coin game is a loss, the process moves to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
When the short open regular map winning flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, when the result of the regular winning lottery for the finished regular map game is a short open regular hit, the MPU 41 The value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the game per figure (the time during which the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315), is set as the value of the opening time counter as update information ( Step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open regular pattern hit flag to OFF (step S1808), and moves the process to step S1809.

<Steps S1809 to S1811>
If the result of the winning lottery is a win and the flag indicating the winning type (long open winning flag or short opening winning flag) is set to OFF (step S1805 or S1808), the MPU 41 The electric accessory 315b is activated (step S1809). As a result, the second winning a prize opening 315, which is the starting ball entry area, is opened, and the game ball enters a permissible state in which entry of the game ball into the second winning a prize opening 315 is permitted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory release command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is released (step S1810), and also sets an electric accessory release command that indicates that the electric accessory 315b is released. The electric accessory opening flag is set to on (step S1811), and the process moves to step S1812.

Note that the electric accessory release command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. From this, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an effect indicating that the electric accessory 315b is released, for example, on the symbol display section 341, based on the electric accessory opening command.

<Step S1812>
If the result of the winning lottery is a win, and the process of opening the electric accessory 315b is executed (steps S1803 to S1811), or both the long open regular winning flag and the short open regular winning flag are turned off. If set (if the result of the lottery to win the normal symbol is a loss) (step S1803 and step S1806 are both No), the MPU 41 indicates that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed (that the common symbol game has ended). The normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag shown is set to OFF (step S1812), and the normal pattern per game control process is ended.

<Step S1813>
When the ordinary figure fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 sets the electric accessory that is set to ON when the electric accessory 315b is released in step S1811 of the ordinary figure per game control process. It is determined whether the open flag is set to on (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game per common symbol is being executed. When the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the common map winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1814. On the other hand, when the electric accessory opening flag is set to OFF (step S1813: No), that is, when the game per common symbol is not being executed, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per common symbol.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
If the electric accessory opening flag is set to on (step S1813: Yes), that is, if the game per common symbol is being executed, the MPU 41 updates the game in step S1804 or S1807 of the game control process for the common symbol. An update process is performed to subtract 1 from the value of the open time counter set as information (step S1814), and it is determined whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the updated state (step S1815). ). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b. If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1816. On the other hand, when the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, when it is not the timing to return the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per normal symbol.

<Steps S1816 to S1818>
When the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to return the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 returns the electric accessory 315b (step S1816). As a result, the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entry area, is closed, and the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory closing command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is closed (step S1817), and also sets an electric accessory closing command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is closed (step S1817). The accessory opening flag is set to OFF (step S1818), and the normal figure game control process is ended.

Note that the electric accessory closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 is able to terminate, for example, the performance performed on the symbol display section 341, which indicates that the electric accessory is opened, based on the electric accessory closing command.

[Special figure game control processing]
Here, FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. 209. In the special figure game control process, the process of updating the storage contents of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is executed, and the progress of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is controlled. For example, the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 is controlled. Hereinafter, the special figure game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 214.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 214, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is on. In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 229, which will be described later, the jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3507 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3554 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game flag is on (step S1901: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game control process. That is, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the jackpot game flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the small win game state flag indicating that the small win game is in the playing state is on. It is determined whether there is one (step S1902). The small winning game state flag is set to ON in step S3602 when the small winning game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3614 when the small winning game ends, in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 229, which will be described later. Ru.

When the small winning game state flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special figure game control process. That is, in this embodiment, when the small winning game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special figure game may be started while the small winning game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the small winning game status flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the small winning game state flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 controls whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the first special symbol game or It is determined whether or not the special symbol variation displaying flag indicating that the second special symbol game is being executed is on (step S1903). The special symbol variation display flag is set to ON in step S2107 or S2117 when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 216, which will be described later. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the game control process, it is set to off in step S1912.

When the special symbol variation display flag is on (step S1903: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is variable and displayed (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1907. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation display flag is off (step S1903: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not in progress and the special symbol is not in variation display (the special symbol game is in progress), the MPU 41 processes the The process moves to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the special symbol fluctuation display flag is off (step S1903: No), that is, if the jackpot game or small win game is not being executed, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 , the first special figure reserved ball number N, which is update information stored in the first special figure reserved number storage area NAA of the special figure reserved storage area 412b, and the second special figure reserved number storage area NAB. It is determined whether both of the second special figure reserved ball number M, which is the update information, are 0 (step S1904).

When both the first special figure reserved ball number N and the second special figure reserved ball number M, which are update information, are 0 (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 suspends the right to execute the first special figure game. , and when there is no reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, the special figure game control process is ended. On the other hand, if either the first special figure reserved ball number N or the second special figure reserved ball number M is not 0 (step S1904: No), the MPU 41 reserves the right to execute the first special figure game. If there is at least one of , and reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, the process moves to step S1905.

<Step S1905>
If either the first special figure reserved ball number N or the second special figure reserved ball number M, which are update information, is not 0 (step S1904: No), that is, the right to execute the first special figure game is reserved, If there is at least one of the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game and the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, the MPU 41 stores the data of the special figure validity information (special figure data) which is the update information stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b. The special figure data setting process which is the update process is executed (step S1904), and the process moves to step S1906. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, on the first special symbol display section 362, which is a display means, or the first special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, on the second special symbol display section 363, which is a display means. 2. A special pattern fluctuation start process is executed to start the variable display of the special pattern (execution of the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game), and the special pattern game control process is ended. The details of the special figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 216.

<Step S1907>
When the special symbol fluctuation display flag is on (step S1903: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, is fluctuatingly displayed (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 is set in the special pattern fluctuation pattern setting process of step S2103 or S2111 in the special pattern fluctuation start process of FIG. It is determined whether the special symbol fluctuation display time for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has elapsed (step S1906). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the special symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game.

If the special symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1907: Yes), that is, the special symbol game is ended by the notification display due to the stop display of the special symbol during the variable display. If it is the timing to do so, the process moves to step S1907.

On the other hand, if the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1907: No), the MPU 41 displays a notification by stopping the special symbol during the variable display. If it is not the timing to end the special figure game, the special figure game control process is ended.

<Step S1908>
If the variable display time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1907: Yes), that is, the special symbol game is ended by a notification display due to the stop display of the special symbol during the variable display. If it is the timing, the MPU 41 executes notification display control on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, which is the display means, so that the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 is displayed. In the symbol display section 363, special symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S1908). Specifically, the MPU 41 executes notification display control on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, so that when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, the small win A special symbol corresponding to the winning lottery is stopped and displayed to notify that it is a small win, while if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, a special symbol corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed to indicate a small win. Execute the notification display.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the jackpot lottery, a small win and a miss are set, and a jackpot is not set. By executing notification display control on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, the special symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed, and the notification display that it is a jackpot is executed. .

<Steps S1909 and S1910>
In step S1909, the MPU 41 sets on a special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, is stopped and displayed by executing the notification display control, and further, The special symbol variable display flag indicating that the special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed) is set to OFF (step S1910), and the process moves to step S1911.

<Step S1911>
In step S1911, the MPU 41 sets the special figure game count flag to ON. This special figure game number count flag is used to manage the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game states (a-time-saving game state, b-time-saving game state) in step S3310 of the special figure game number-of-time management process in FIG. It is referred to in managing the number of special figure games to manage the remaining number of special figure games required before transitioning to the gaming state.

<Step S1912>
In step S1912, the MPU 41 sets a final display command and ends the special figure game control process. The confirmation display command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed. This confirmed display command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. When the voice lamp control device 5 receives the confirmation display command, it executes a confirmation display effect of a decorative pattern which is a predetermined pattern in the pattern display section 341, and ends the special pattern game effect.

[Special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 214. In the special figure data setting process, a process of updating the storage contents of the special figure pending storage area 412b in which update information set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is stored is executed. Hereinafter, the special figure data setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 215.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 215, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special figure reserved ball number M, which is update information for the second special figure game, is 0. The MPU 41 determines that when the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), that is, there is no second special figure reservation for the second special figure game and there is a first special figure reservation for the first special figure game. If so, the process moves to step S2002. On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation ball number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), that is, if there is a second special figure reservation for the second special figure game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2006. In other words, the MPU 41 starts the second special pattern game with priority over the first special pattern game by determining whether or not the second special pattern reserved ball number M for the second special pattern game is 0. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special pattern game is started with priority over the first special pattern game, but the first special pattern game is started with priority over the second special pattern game. Also, the special figure game is started in the order in which the game balls enter the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 (order of reservation), and either the first special figure game or the second special figure game is started. may be executed. In addition, the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other without setting a priority order for starting the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, and the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other. The second special figure game may be executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation of special figures).

<Steps S2002 to S2005>
When the second special figure reserved ball number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the first special figure reserved number storage area NAA of the first special figure reserved storage area REA. An update process is executed to subtract 1 from the first special figure reservation number N (step S2002), and an update is performed to move the special figure validity information from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA to the special figure execution area AE. Processing is executed (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 executes an update process of shifting the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in the update process of step S2004, the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REA2 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved. is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the special symbol validity information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3.

When the process of step S2004 is completed, the MPU 41 sets on the first special figure game start flag indicating that the first special figure game is started (step S2005), and moves the process to step S2010. This first special figure game start flag is referred to in order to judge whether or not to start the first special figure game in step S2101 in the special figure game start process of FIG. 216, which will be described later.

<Steps S2006 to S2009>
When the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 updates the second special figure reservation number M, which is the update information stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. An update process of subtracting 1 from the number M of reserved special figure balls (step S2006), and an update process of moving the special figure validity information from the first holding area REB1 of the second special figure holding storage area REB to the special figure execution area AE. (Step S2007). Subsequently, the MPU 41 executes an update process of shifting the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB one by one (step S2008). Specifically, in step S2008, the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the fourth reservation area REB2. The special symbol validity information in the reservation area REB4 is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S2008 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2009.

When the process of step S2008 is completed, the MPU 41 sets on the second special figure game start flag indicating that the second special figure game is started (step S2009), and moves the process to step S2010. This second special figure game start flag is referred to in step S2109 in the special figure game start process of FIG. 216, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to start the second special figure game.

<Steps S2010 and S2011>
In step S2010, the MPU 41 controls the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA, or the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REB4 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB. A special figure shift command indicating that the special figure validity information has been shifted is set in the RAM 412. This special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 changes the number of pending displays corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the second special symbol pending displayed on the symbol display section 341 based on the special symbol shift command. be able to.

In addition, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a number of reserved balls command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of reserved balls after the special figure game is started (step S2011), and ends the special figure data setting process. . This held pitch count command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. When the voice lamp control device 5 receives the number of reserved balls command, it executes a process of updating the image (special pattern data image) related to the special pattern data displayed on the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 53).
The special figure data setting process ends.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1906 of the special symbol game control process in FIG. 214. In the special symbol variation start process, the first special symbol is a predetermined symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 which is the display means, or the first special symbol is a predetermined symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 which is the display means. The first special game or the second special figure game (special figure game) is started by the start of the variable display of the two special symbols, and various processes in the in-game state accompanying the start of the special figure game are executed. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to FIG. 216.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 216, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol game start flag indicating that the first special symbol game is started is set to ON. The first special figure game start flag is set by the update process of the validity information for the special figure execution area AE of the special figure holding storage area 412b in order to start the first special figure game in step S2005 of the special figure data setting process of FIG. Set to on when finished.

If the first special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2102, and if the first special figure game start flag is not set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2102. S2101: No), the process moves to step S2109.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
If the first special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the validity information stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure holding storage area 412b (step S2102), The variable display time of the first special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, on the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36, which is a display means, is set as a special symbol variation pattern, and the time of the first special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, is set as a special symbol variation pattern. A stop type is set (step S2103), and the process moves to step S2104.

In addition, when the result of the judgment in step S2102 is a small hit, the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol (special symbol fluctuation pattern) is determined by updating the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 and the winning fluctuation table ( 205(B)), and if the result of the judgment in step S2102 is an error, the update information is the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the error variation table (see FIG. 205(A)). reference).

In addition, the stop type of the first special symbol is set to a symbol corresponding to a small hit when the result of the judgment in step S2102 is a small hit, and a symbol corresponding to a small hit when the result of the judgment is a loss. A corresponding pattern is set. By determining the stop type of the first special symbol in this way, a notification is displayed that the result of the win/fail determination is a small hit or a miss.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the jackpot lottery, a small win and a miss are set, and a jackpot is not set. In this case, a symbol corresponding to a jackpot is set as the stop type of the first special symbol. By determining the stop type of the first special symbol in this way, it is displayed to notify that the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot.

<Steps S2104 and S2105>
In step S2104, the MPU 41 sends a special pattern fluctuation pattern command that includes the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the first special pattern game, which is the result of the judgment in step S2102, and the special pattern fluctuation pattern set in step S2103. is set in the RAM 412, and furthermore, a stop type command that specifies the stop type of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 set in step S2103 is set (step S2105), and the process is shifted to step S2107. do.

The special figure variation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 sets a performance pattern (special pattern game performance) on the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the special pattern variation pattern command and the stop type command, and updates information based on the performance pattern. By creating a drawing list to the end and displaying it, you can create a promotion effect (promotion display) that is a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) as a special effect in the first special figure game that is in the playing state. It is possible to perform a resurrection effect (resurrection display). Note that the stop type command does not necessarily need to be set separately from the special symbol variation pattern command, and the special symbol variation pattern command may be set as a command that can specify the stop type of the first special symbol.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 to bring the first special symbol game into a playing state, and shifts the process to step S2107. do.

<Steps S2107 and S2108>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets on the special symbol variation display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (playing state during execution of the special symbol game), and further starts the first special symbol game. The first special figure game start flag to be set to OFF is set to OFF (step S2108), and the fluctuation start process is ended.

In addition, the special symbol fluctuation display flag indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in step S1903 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. It is referred to in order to determine whether or not the state is (playing state where a special figure game is being executed).

<Step S2109>
If the first special figure game start flag is not set to ON (step S2101: No), the MPU 41 determines that the second special figure game start flag indicating that the second special figure game is started is set to ON. It is determined whether or not there is one (step S2109). The second special figure game start flag is set by the update process of the validity information for the special figure execution area AE of the special figure holding storage area 412b in order to start the second special figure game in step S2009 of the special figure data setting process of FIG. Set to on when finished.

If the second special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2110, and if the first special figure game start flag is not set to ON (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2110. S2109: No), the variation start process ends.

<Steps S2110 and S2111>
If the second special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the validity information stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure holding storage area 412b (step S2110), The variable display time of the second special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, on the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36, which is the display means, is set as a special symbol variation pattern, and the second special symbol is displayed as a notification display. A stop type is set (step S2111), and the process moves to step S2112.

In addition, when the result of the judgment in step S2110 is a small hit, the variable display time of the second special symbol (special figure variation pattern) is determined based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the hit variation table (which is updated information). 205(B)), and if the result of the judgment in step S2110 is an error, the update information is the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the error variation table (see FIG. 205(A)). reference).

In addition, the stop type of the second special symbol is set to a symbol corresponding to a small hit if the result of the judgment in step S2110 is a small hit, and a symbol corresponding to a small hit if the result of the judgment in step S2110 is a loss. A corresponding pattern is set. By determining the stop type of the second special symbol in this way, a notification is displayed that the result of the win/fail determination is a small hit or a miss.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the jackpot lottery, a small win and a miss are set, and a jackpot is not set. In this case, a symbol corresponding to a jackpot is set as the stop type of the second special symbol. By determining the stop type of the second special symbol in this way, it is displayed to notify that the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot.

<Steps S2112 and S2113>
In step S2112, the MPU 41 sends a special figure fluctuation pattern command that includes the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game, which is the result of the judgment in step S2110, and the special figure fluctuation pattern set in step S2111. is set in the RAM 412, and furthermore, a stop type command that specifies the stop type of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 set in step S2111 is set (step S2113), and the process moves to step S2114. do.

The special figure variation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 sets a performance pattern (special pattern game performance) on the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the special pattern variation pattern command and the stop type command, and updates information based on the performance pattern. By creating a drawing list to the end and displaying it, you can create a promotion effect (promotion display) that is a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) as a special effect in the second special figure game that is in the playing state. It is possible to perform a resurrection effect (resurrection display). Note that the stop type command does not necessarily need to be set separately from the special symbol variation pattern command, and the special symbol variation pattern command may be set as a command that can specify the stop type of the second special symbol.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 to bring the second special symbol game into a playing state, and moves the process to step S2115. do.

<Steps S2115 and S2116>
In step S2115, the MPU 41 sets on the special symbol variation display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (playing state during execution of the special symbol game), and further starts the second special symbol game. The second special figure game start flag is set to OFF (step S2116), and the fluctuation start process is ended.

In addition, the special symbol fluctuation display flag indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in step S1903 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. It is referred to in order to determine whether or not the state is (playing state where a special figure game is being executed).

[Special figure game number management process]
Here, it is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game number management process executed in step S1406-1 in the main process of FIGS. 217, 218, and 209. In the special figure game number management process, based on the execution of the special figure game, the remaining time-saving game count, which is update information in the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state), which is a profit game state, and the profit game A process is executed to manage the remaining number of special figure games, which is update information, until the time-saving game state b, which is the state, is generated. Hereinafter, the special figure game number management process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 217, in the special figure game number management process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first updates the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter, which is update information indicating the number of special figure games required before transitioning to the time-saving gaming state b. It is determined whether the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag for setting is set on (step S3301). This ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is set to ON in step S3553 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 225, which will be described later, when the jackpot gaming state that is the profit gaming state ends.

When the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), that is, when setting the ceiling activation remaining number counter which is update information, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3302. On the other hand, if the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is set to OFF (step S3301: No), that is, if the ceiling activation remaining number counter is not set as update information, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3311.

<Step S3302>
When the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), that is, when setting the ceiling activation remaining number counter which is update information, the MPU 41 sets 1000 as the initial value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter. Set. In other words, in this embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state, which is the profit gaming state, ends, the bonus granting condition is satisfied when the special figure game is executed 1000 times without transitioning to the jackpot gaming state. , a time-saving gaming state b, which is a profit gaming state, is generated as a bonus.

In this embodiment, the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is update information, is set as a subtractive counter, but the ceiling activation remaining number counter may be set as an addition type counter. Further, the initial value set in the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is update information, is not limited to 1000, and may be set as appropriate depending on the probability of a small hit.

By the way, in this embodiment, compared to a case where a jackpot game occurs based on a small winning game that occurs when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the game ball enters the second winning hole 315. When a jackpot game occurs based on a small win game triggered by a ball being entered, the probability of entering the RUSH state where consecutive jackpots are more likely to occur is given preferential treatment (Figure 204 (D) and Figure 204 ( (See E). Specifically, while the rate of entry into the RUSH state after the end of a jackpot game based on a small win game triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 314 is 50%, The entry rate into the RUSH state after the end of the jackpot game based on the small win game that occurred when the game ball entered the second prize opening 315 is 100%.

On the other hand, in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is encouraged, the game ball can easily enter the first winning hole 314 by hitting left-handed, and in the time-saving game state including the b-time saving game state where right-handed hitting is encouraged, right-handed hitting is encouraged. By doing so, the game ball can easily enter the second winning hole 315. Therefore, the rate of entering the RUSH state is higher and the expected value of balls is higher after shifting to the b-time-saving gaming state than before shifting to the b-time-saving gaming state which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state. As a result, at the stage where the transition to the b time-saving gaming state approaches, there is a break-even point, which will be described later, at which it is more advantageous not to generate a jackpot game.

Similarly, in some conventional gaming machines, there is a break-even point where it is advantageous not to generate a jackpot game when the transition to the time-saving gaming state b approaches. In conventional gaming machines where such a break-even point exists, a jackpot game occurs against the player's will even though the player wishes to shift to the time-saving gaming state b. It may not be possible to move to In other words, in conventional gaming machines, it is not possible to control the timing at which a jackpot game occurs, so when a jackpot game is generated at a timing when the expected difference ball value is lower than when the game is shifted to the time-saving game state b, for example, the time-saving game b A jackpot game may occur just before the state changes. In this case, the player cannot enjoy the benefit of shifting to the time-saving gaming state b (higher expected ball payout value), and the number of difference balls that can be expected will decrease.

On the other hand, in the win/fail table of this embodiment, there is no distribution of jackpots, and only small wins and misses are set (see Figures 204(A) to 204(E)), so the results of the jackpot lottery are It's never going to be a jackpot. In addition, by performing a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 in order to hit right in a small winning game, the game ball enters the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, which is a predetermined game condition. When established, a jackpot gaming state with a specific profit is generated. Therefore, the jackpot game state is not generated without passing through the small win game, and in order to generate the jackpot game state, it is necessary to hold the firing handle 22 at a predetermined distance in order to perform a right hit in the small win game. It is necessary to perform game operations.

In addition, the ceiling activation remaining number counter of this embodiment is not set to the initial value of 1000 depending on the occurrence of a small winning game, and when a jackpot game is executed, the jackpot activation number counter is not set to the initial value of 1000 due to the termination of the jackpot game. Regardless of the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter at the time of termination, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set to the initial value of 1000. On the other hand, if the predetermined game operation is not performed on the launch handle 22 in order to hit right in a small winning game, the game ball will not enter the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, which is a predetermined game condition. Therefore, no jackpot games occur (so-called flat-out state). In other words, even if a small winning game is executed, the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 833 of the wing accessory device 83, which is a predetermined gaming condition, and the jackpot game state is a specific profit. If this does not occur, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter at the end of the small winning game will be carried over, and if a special figure game is executed after that, the ceiling activation will be carried over by the number of executions of the special figure game. Subtracted from the remaining count counter value. As a result, even if a small winning game occurs, the player can stop firing the game ball or hit the game ball to the left, that is, perform the predetermined game operation for hitting the ball to the right with respect to the firing handle 22. By not having this, it is possible to intentionally prevent the game ball from entering the V winning hole 833 of the wing accessory device 83, which is a predetermined game condition.

In this way, in this embodiment, since the distribution of jackpots is not set in the win/fail table, the result of the jackpot lottery will never be a jackpot. As a result, if a player wishes to have a time-saving game state b due to a ceiling activation rather than a jackpot game, a jackpot game will occur before the ceiling activation, against the player's will, and the remaining ceiling activation count will be counted. This prevents the value from being set to the initial value of 1000.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a small winning game is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small winning. When the game ball enters the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83, which is a predetermined game condition, a jackpot game state with a specific profit is generated, while a small win game with a right If a predetermined game operation is not performed on the firing handle 22 in order to strike, a jackpot game will not occur because the game ball will not enter the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, which is a predetermined game condition. (So-called flat tire condition). That is, in this embodiment, in the small winning game, whether or not to perform a predetermined game operation on the firing handle 22 in order to hit right, that is, the V prize opening of the feather accessory device 83 which is a predetermined game condition. By selecting whether or not to allow the game ball to enter 833, you can either generate a jackpot game (initialize the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter) or do not generate a jackpot game (initialize the ceiling activation remaining number counter). It is possible to select whether or not to inherit the value of the remaining ceiling activation number counter before the occurrence of the small winning game (without initializing the value of the remaining activation number counter). In other words, even if a small winning game occurs, you will not be able to enjoy the profits of the jackpot game, but you will be able to enjoy the same benefits as before the small winning game (maintaining the same state) and receive a new special prize. It becomes possible to execute the game. As a result, when the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter approaches 0 and the transition to the ceiling time-saving game state b time-saving game state is imminent, in other words, it is advantageous for the player not to generate a jackpot game. In some cases, when a small winning game is executed, a game ball is not allowed to enter the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 to generate a jackpot game (initialization of the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter) By executing the special figure game a prescribed number of times while avoiding this, it is possible to generate the b time-saving game state, which is the ceiling time-saving game state, as desired by the player. That is, in this embodiment, by not generating a jackpot game even if a small win game occurs, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter at the end of the small win game is inherited, and the value is inherited by the execution of the subsequent special figure game. By subtracting the value of the remaining ceiling activation counter, the player can generate the ceiling time-saving gaming state (b-time-saving gaming state). A game feature is provided in which it is possible to select whether to generate a jackpot game or activate a ceiling based on the judgment. Specifically, by being able to select the occurrence of the time-saving gaming state b due to ceiling activation, the player can enjoy the benefits of the time-saving gaming state b (preferential treatment of RUSH entry rate and high expected ball output value) at his/her own discretion. can. On the other hand, by being able to choose whether or not to play a jackpot game, players can use this option when they do not have enough time to play (for example, when there is little time remaining until the closing time of the game hall, or when there are restrictions on the remaining play time due to personal circumstances, etc.) ), it becomes possible to give priority to the occurrence of jackpot games by triggering the ceiling.

In addition, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the opening performance of the small winning game is different before and after the break-even point is reached (see FIGS. 222(A) and 222(B)), so that the break-even point is not reached. The player is informed whether or not the point has been reached. Therefore, when a small winning game occurs, the player can select whether to generate a jackpot game based on his/her own judgment based on the notification mode of the opening performance of the small winning game. Note that the details of the notification mode of the opening performance will be described later.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the remaining jackpot activation counter, which is update information, is set to 1000, but the initial value set as the value of the remaining jackpot activation counter is not limited to 1000, and may be other than 1000. may be the value of

In addition, if you set multiple initial values to be set as the value of the jackpot activation remaining number of times counter, and the conditions for setting the initial value as the value of the jackpot activation remaining number of times counter are met, you can draw a lottery from the multiple set initial values. The initial value may be set by In one example, it is conceivable to set 200, 400, 600, 800, and 1000 as initial values, and to set one of these values by lottery with equal or unequal probability.

In this way, by setting the initial value by lottery from among multiple set initial values, the ceiling activation balance, which is the remaining number of special symbol games required until the ceiling time-saving game state b time-saving game occurs, can be set. It becomes difficult for the player to grasp the number of times (the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations). Therefore, whether or not the remaining number of ceiling activations (the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations) has been set, for example, whether the gaming hall has cleared the RAM of the gaming machine or changed the setting value that defines the small winning probability (big winning probability). Since it becomes difficult for the player to know whether the RAM has been cleared or the setting values have been changed, a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine due to the player having to know whether the RAM has been cleared or the setting values have been changed is prevented. In addition, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of ceiling activations (the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations), resulting in a ceiling time-saving game state. This prevents aircraft 10 from being targeted by so-called hyena acts. In addition, since it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of ceiling activations (the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations), the notification mode of the opening effect when a small winning game occurs will be the first notification mode described below. It also becomes difficult to grasp the timing of switching from the display (see FIG. 222(A)) to the loss display (see FIG. 222(B)), which is the second notification mode. Therefore, when a small winning game occurs, it is expected that the first notification mode, which is the gain display (see FIG. 222(A)), will be switched to the second notification mode, which is the loss display (see FIG. 222(B)). Since the user can enjoy the progress of the game while playing the game, interest and interest in the game are increased.

<Steps S3303 and S3304>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 217, in step S3303, the MPU 41 determines that the counter for the remaining number of ceiling activations is set, that is, the ceiling indicating that the time-saving gaming state b of the profit gaming state which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state has not occurred. The non-activation flag is set on (step S3303), and the process moves to step S3304. The ceiling unactivated flag is referred to in step S3312 of the special symbol game number management process in order to determine whether or not to subtract the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is update information.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag to OFF (step S3304), and moves the process to step S3305.

<Step S3305>
In step S3305, the MPU 41 determines whether the a time saving 5 time set flag is set on. The a time saving 5 times set flag sets 5 times as the number of times of the a time saving gaming state which is the profit gaming state that is transferred when the jackpot gaming state which is the profit gaming state ends (the remaining time saving in the a time saving gaming state This is a flag that sets 5 as the initial value of the remaining time counter (a, which indicates the number of games), and when the game ball enters the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state (a-time-saving gaming state, b-time-saving gaming state). When a jackpot gaming state, which is a profit gaming state, is generated based on the entry of a game ball into the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 during the playing state of the small winning game, which is triggered by It is set to ON in step S3622 or step S3625 of the gaming state transition process.

If the a time saving 5 times set flag is set to ON (step S3305: Yes), the MPU 41 sets 5 as the initial value of the a time saving remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games in the a time saving gaming state. If so, the process moves to step S3306. On the other hand, when the a time saving 5 times set flag is set to OFF (step S3305: No), the MPU 41 sets 5 as the initial value of the a time saving remaining number of times counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games in the a time saving game state. If not set, the process moves to step S3308.

<Steps S3306 and S3307>
When the a time saving 5 times set flag is set to ON (step S3305: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a time saving remaining number of times counter as the initial value, which is update information indicating the remaining number of time saving games in the a time saving gaming state. 5 (step S3306), the a time saving 5 times set flag is set to OFF (step S3307), and the special figure game number management process ends.

<Step S3308>
If the a time saving 5 times set flag is set to OFF (step S3305: No), that is, if 5 is not set as the initial value of the a time saving remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games in the a time saving gaming state, The MPU 41 determines whether the a time saving one-time set flag is set to on (step S3308). The a time saving 1 time set flag sets 1 time as the number of times of the a time saving gaming state which is the profit gaming state that is transferred when the jackpot gaming state which is the profit gaming state ends (the remaining time saving in the a time saving gaming state This is a flag that sets 1 as the initial value of the time saving remaining counter that indicates the number of games played, and is used during a small winning game that occurs when a game ball enters the first prize opening 314 in the normal game state. When a jackpot game state, which is a profit game state, is generated based on the entry of a game ball into the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the state, it is set to ON in step S3618 of the game state transition process described below. be done.

If the a time saving one-time set flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 41 sets 1 as the initial value of the a time saving remaining number of times counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games in the a time saving gaming state. If so, the process moves to step S3309. On the other hand, when the a time saving one-time set flag is set to OFF (step S3308: No), the MPU 41 sets the initial value of the a time saving remaining number of times counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games in the a time saving gaming state to 1. If not set, the special figure game number management process is ended.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
When the a time saving one time set flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a time saving remaining number of times counter as the initial value, which is update information indicating the remaining number of time saving games in the a time saving game state. 1 (step S3309), the a time saving one-time set flag is set to OFF (step S3310), and the special figure game number management process ends.

<Steps S3311 and S3312>
When the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is set to OFF (step S3301: No), that is, when the ceiling activation remaining number counter is not set as update information, the MPU 41 sets the special figure game number count flag to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3311). The special figure game number count flag is a flag that executes updating processing of the values of various counters managed in the special figure game number management process, and is a flag that executes updating processing of the values of various counters managed in the special figure game number management process. It is set to ON when the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the display section 36.

When the special figure game count flag is set to ON (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special figure game count flag to OFF (step S3312), and moves the process to step S3313. On the other hand, when the special figure game count flag is set to OFF (step S3311: No), the MPU 41 ends the special figure game count management process.

<Step S3313>
In step S3313, the MPU 41 confirms that the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is the update information, is set, that is, that the b time-saving gaming state of the profit gaming state, which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state, is in the playing state where the time-saving gaming state is not occurring. It is determined whether the ceiling unactivated flag shown is set to on.

The MPU 41 determines that when the ceiling unactivated flag indicating that the b time saving gaming state of the profit gaming state which is the ceiling time saving gaming state is in the gaming state where the time saving gaming state is not occurring is set to ON (step S3313: Yes), that is, If the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is update information, is set, the process moves to step S3314. On the other hand, if the ceiling unactivated flag indicating that the b time saving gaming state of the profit gaming state which is the ceiling time saving gaming state has not occurred is set to off (step S3313: No), that is, the b time saving gaming state occurs. When the non-playing game state has ended and the time-saving game state b has already occurred, the special figure game number management process is ended. That is, in this embodiment, when the b time-saving gaming state occurs, if a jackpot game does not occur in the b time-saving gaming state, the normal gaming state is entered, and the b time-saving gaming state is generated again. There isn't.

<Steps S3314 and S3315>
If the MPU 41 is set to ON, the ceiling unactivated flag indicating that the b time-saving gaming state of the profit gaming state which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state is a specific gaming state in which the time-saving gaming state is not occurring (step S3313: Yes), That is, if the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is specific information, is set, an update process is performed to subtract 1 from the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter (step S3314), and the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after the subtraction is updated. It is determined whether the state is 0, which is the end state (step S3315).

If the value of the remaining ceiling activation number counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the predetermined update state (step S3315: Yes), the mPU 41 moves the process to step S3316, and the value of the remaining ceiling activation number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3315: Yes). If it is not 0, which is the predetermined update state (step S3315: No), the process moves to step S3320 in FIG. 218.

<Steps S3316 to S3319>
If the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the predetermined update state (step S3315: Yes), the MPU 41 updates information as update information indicating the remaining number of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving game state b. 1000 is set as the initial value of the remaining time saving counter (step S3316). In other words, when the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter becomes 0, which is the predetermined update state, and the predetermined game condition is satisfied, the predetermined profit state is a profit game state in which a maximum of 1000 time-saving games are possible, and B time-saving is performed. A gaming state is generated.

Then, the MPU 41 sets on the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter which is update information is set (step S3317). The b time saving remaining number counter set flag is used to set the b time saving remaining number counter set flag in order to determine whether or not to execute the updating process of the b time saving remaining number counter when the b time saving remaining number counter which is update information is set. Reference is made in step S3325 in FIG. 218 of the number of times management process.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the b-time-saving game state transition flag that shifts the gaming state to the b-time-saving gaming state which is the profit gaming state (step S3318), and also sets the b-time-saving gaming state shift flag in the profit gaming state which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state to b-time-saving gaming state. The ceiling unactivated flag indicating that the state is in a gaming state where no state has occurred is set to OFF (step S3319), and the special symbol game number management process is ended.

In addition, the b time-saving gaming state transition flag is referred to in step S3642 in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 230 in order to determine whether to shift to the b-time saving gaming state which is the profit gaming state.

<Step S3320>
If the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after the subtraction is not 0, which is the predetermined update state (step S3315: No), the MPU 41 determines that the update information a time saving remaining number counter is set, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the time saving remaining number counter set flag a, which indicates that there is a time saving remaining number of times, is set on (step S3320).

When the a time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the a time saving remaining number counter which is update information is set is set to ON (step S3320: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3321, When the a time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the a time saving remaining number of times counter that is update information is set is set to OFF (step S3320: No), the process moves to step S3325.

<Steps S3321 and S3322>
If the a remaining time saving counter set flag indicating that the a remaining time saving counter that is update information is set to ON (step S3320: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the remaining time saving counter a. The update process is executed (step S3321), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining a time saving counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update completion state (step S3322).

If the value of the a time saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update completion state (step S3322: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3323, and the value of the a time saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is updated. If it is not 0, which is the end state (step S3322: No), the special figure game number management process is ended.

<Steps S3323 and S3324>
If the value of the remaining a time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update completion state (step S3322: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state to the normal gaming state to ON. At the same time (step S3323), the a time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the a time saving remaining number counter which is the update information is set is set to OFF (step S3324), and the corresponding special figure game number management process is ended. do.

Note that the normal gaming state transition flag is referred to in step S3648 or S3654 in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 231 in order to determine whether or not to transition the gaming state to the normal gaming state.

<Step S3325>
If the a remaining time saving counter set flag indicating that the update information a remaining time saving counter is set is set to OFF (step S3320: No), the MPU 41 updates the update information b remaining time saving number. It is determined whether the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the counter is set is set on (step S3325).

When the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter which is update information is set is set on (step S3325: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3326, When the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter which is update information is set is set to OFF (step S3325: No), the special figure game number management process is ended.

<Steps S3326 and S3327>
When the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter which is update information is set to ON (step S3325: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the b time saving remaining number counter. The update process is executed (step S3326), and it is determined whether the value of the b time saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update completion state (step S3327).

If the value of the b time saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update completion state (step S3327: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3328, and the value of the b time saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is updated. If it is not 0, which is the end state (step S3327: No), the special figure game number management process is ended.

<Steps S3328 and S3329>
If the value of the b time saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update completion state (step S3327: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state to the normal gaming state to ON. At the same time (step S3328), the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter, which is update information, is set is set to OFF (step S3329), and the special symbol game number management process ends. do.

Note that the normal gaming state transition flag is referred to in step S3648 or S3654 in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 231 in order to determine whether or not to transition the gaming state to the normal gaming state.

[Small winning game control process]
Here, FIGS. 219 and 220 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407-2 in the main process of FIG. 209. In the small winning game control process of the present embodiment, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entering area, is a small winning. In the small winning game that is executed based on this, a process for controlling the operation of the wing accessory device 83 is executed.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 77, in the small winning game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first sets a special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, is stopped and displayed. It is determined whether it is set to on (step S3401). That is, the MPU 41 starts the small winning game when the in-game state of the special pattern game (first special pattern game, second special pattern game) is ended by the stop display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern. Determine whether the timing is possible. The special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when the first special figure or the second special figure is stopped and displayed in step S1909 in the special figure game control process of FIG. 214.

If the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the small winning game after the in-game state of the special figure game has ended, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S3402. to move to. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3401: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3412.

<Step S3402>
If the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, if it is the timing when the small winning game can be started after the playing state of the special figure game has ended, the MPU 41 It is determined whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win (step S3402). Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win is determined based on the validity information read from the special pattern execution area AE of the special pattern holding storage area 412b in step S2102 or S2110 in the special pattern fluctuation start process of FIG. 216. be done.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a small win (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3403. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small win (step S3402: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the MPU 41 ends the small win game control process.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a small win (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the small win game start flag indicating that the small win game is started (step S3403). Then, the MPU 41 sets a small winning game start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the small winning game is started (step S3404), and moves the process to step S3405.

The small winning game start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the audio lamp control device 5, by receiving the small winning game start command, it is possible to set a small winning game performance to be executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like.

<Steps S3405 and S3406>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 sets on the opening flag indicating that the opening of the small winning game is being executed. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining opening time (step S3406), and moves the process to step S3407.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter, which is update information indicating the number of special symbol games required before shifting to the b-time saving gaming state, is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Here, the predetermined value in step S3407 is a jackpot game in which a game ball enters the V prize opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83, which is a predetermined game condition in the small win game, and a specific profit is achieved. The break-even point is set as to whether it is more advantageous or disadvantageous for the player to generate the state.

This break-even point is set, for example, based on the design value for the gaming machine 10 when the gaming machine 10 is shipped from the factory. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 209(A), the <factory design value> for the game machine 10 at the time of factory shipment is 1 when (1) left-handed play, which is encouraged in the normal gaming state, is performed; The number of balls required to execute the special figure game is 12.5 balls (20 times per ball with a difference of -250 balls), (2) Before reaching the ceiling time-saving game state b, which is the time-saving game state The expected ball difference when the first jackpot game (first hit) occurs is +3000 balls, (3) the ceiling time-saving game state b, the first jackpot game (first hit) occurs when reaching the time-saving game state If the expected difference ball value in this case is +4500 balls, <calculated value> is (1) the expected difference ball value between the first hit in the b time-saving gaming state and the first hit before reaching the b time-saving gaming state. The difference is 1,500 balls, and (2) the theoretical value of the number of executions of the special figure game that can be executed with 1,500 balls, which is the difference between the expected ball difference value, is 120 times. Therefore, as a <result>, (1) If the remaining number of times until reaching b time saving gaming state which is the ceiling time saving gaming state is 120 or less, the expected difference in winnings when reaching b time saving gaming state If the number becomes positive and (2) the remaining number of times until reaching b time saving gaming state, which is the ceiling time saving gaming state, is 121 or more, the expected difference in the number of balls when reaching b time saving gaming state is negative. becomes. Therefore, if the design value for the gaming machine 10 is as shown in FIG. 209(A) when the gaming machine 10 is shipped from the factory, the break-even point is set to 121.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 219, if the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (step S3407: Yes), for example, if the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is 121 or more, the MPU 41 executes the process in step S3409. to move to. On the other hand, if the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than the predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, if the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than 121 (120 or less), the MPU 41 causes the process to proceed to step S3408. Transition.

<Step S3408>
If the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter is less than the predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, if the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter is less than 121 (120 or less), the MPU 41 determines that b is in the time saving gaming state. It is determined whether or not the b time-saving game state flag indicating b is set to on (step S3408).

Here, if the value of the remaining ceiling activation number counter is less than the predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, if the value of the remaining ceiling activation number counter is less than 121 (120 or less), the remaining ceiling activation number counter This includes cases where the value of is 0. On the other hand, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter becomes 0 when in the b time-saving game state (the ceiling time-saving game state is in effect), or in the normal game state after the end of the b-time saving game state (in the ceiling time-saving game state). (already activated). Therefore, by determining whether or not the b time saving game state flag is set to on, it is possible to check whether the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is 0 because it is in the b time saving game state (the ceiling time saving game state is being activated). , b It is determined whether the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is 0 because the game is in a normal gaming state (the ceiling time saving gaming state has already been activated) after the time saving gaming state has ended.

When the b time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3408: Yes), that is, when the b time saving game state is in effect (the ceiling time saving game state is in effect), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3409. On the other hand, when the b time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3408: No), that is, when the b-time-saving game state is in the normal game state after the end of the time-saving game state (ceiling time-saving game state has been activated), the MPU 41 processes the The process moves to step S3410.

<Step S3409>
In step S3409, the MPU 41 issues a profit display OP command to the audio lamp control device 5 to set a profit display opening performance (see FIG. 222(A)) in the symbol display section 341, which will be described later, as the opening performance of the small winning game. Set. This profit display OP command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. By receiving the profit display OP command, the audio lamp control device 5 can set a profit display opening performance as the opening performance of the small winning game to be executed in the symbol display section 341.

As shown in FIG. 222(A), the profit display opening performance indicates in the first notification mode that the break-even point has not been reached, that is, it is more advantageous to generate a jackpot game in the small win game. This is a performance announced at the opening of a game. In the example shown in FIG. 222(A), the symbol display section 341 is based on the small winning game in the first notification mode using a character image that says "Aim for V by hitting right! Because it's more profitable!" It is reported that it is more advantageous to generate a jackpot game.

<Step S3410>
The value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter is less than the predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter is less than 121 (120 or less), and b time-saving game indicating that the b-time saving game state is in effect. If the status flag is set to OFF (step S3408; No), the MPU 41 causes the audio lamp control device 5 to display a loss display opening performance (see Figure 1) on the symbol display section 341, which will be described later, as an opening performance for the small winning game. 222(B))) is set (step S3410). This loss display OP command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the audio lamp control device 5, by receiving the loss display OP command, a loss display opening performance can be set as the opening performance of the small winning game to be executed on the symbol display section 341.

As shown in FIG. 222(B), the loss display opening performance indicates in the second notification mode that the break-even point has been reached, that is, it is more advantageous not to generate a jackpot game in the small win game. This is a performance announced at the opening of a game. In the example shown in FIG. 222(B), the symbol display section 341 says, ``Well, if you wait a little longer, you will definitely be able to go to RUSH in a short time, so I don't think it's necessary to put it in V now and multiply it by 1/2. If you want to do that, why don't you hit it right?'' In a second notification mode using a character image, it is notified that it is more advantageous not to generate a jackpot game based on the small win game.

Here, in step S3409 where the profit display OP command is set, if the value of the remaining ceiling activation number counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (step S3407: Yes), for example, the value of the remaining ceiling activation number counter is 121 or more. be migrated in case. That is, until the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter becomes less than a predetermined value, for example, until the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter becomes less than 120, the expected value of the difference ball is higher than that of being transferred to the time saving gaming state b. Therefore, at the opening of the small winning game, the symbol display section 341 is notified in the first notification mode that it is more advantageous to generate a jackpot game based on the small winning game.

Further, the step S3409 where the profit display OP command is set is also transferred when a small winning game occurs in the b time saving game state (step S3408: Yes). That is, in a small winning game that occurs in the b-time saving game state, the probability of entering the RUSH state when the jackpot game ends is 100%, so at the opening of the small winning game, the symbol display section 341 shows the number. In one notification mode, it is reported that it is more advantageous to generate a jackpot game based on the small win game.

On the other hand, in step S3410 where the loss display OP command is set, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than the predetermined value (step S3407: No), and for example, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than 121 ( 120 or less), and the b time-saving game state flag indicating the b time-saving game state is set to OFF (step S3408; No). That is, until the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter becomes less than a predetermined value and the time saving game state b is entered, for example, if the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter is between less than 120 and 0, the time saving gaming state b is entered. Since the expected value of the difference ball is higher when the transition is made, it is advantageous to not generate a jackpot game based on the small win game by the second notification mode on the symbol display section 341 at the opening of the small win game. be notified.

In other words, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 221(B), even if the result of the jackpot lottery is the same small win, as the opening performance of the small win game, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Until the break-even point is reached (for example, until the remaining number of times until the transition to the time-saving game state b, which is the ceiling time-saving game state, is 121), the profit display opening performance according to the first notification mode is executed, After the value of the ceiling activation remaining number of times counter is less than the predetermined value and reaches the break-even point (for example, when the remaining number of times until moving to the ceiling time-saving game state B time-saving game state is 120), the After the loss display opening performance according to the second notification mode is executed and the state shifts to the b time-saving game state which is the ceiling time-saving game state, the profit display opening performance according to the first notification mode is executed.

<Step S3411>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 219, when the gain display OP command is set (step S3409) or when the loss display OP command is set (step S3410), the MPU 41 controls the audio lamp to indicate that the opening of the small winning game will start. A small winning opening start command to be notified to the device 5 is set (step S3411), and the small winning game control process is ended.

The small winning opening start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the audio lamp control device 5, by receiving the small winning opening start command, the first notification mode shown in FIG. It is possible to start the display opening effect or the loss display opening effect which is the second notification mode shown in FIG. 222(B).

By the way, as with the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, there is a conventional gaming machine that generates the b time-saving gaming state, which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state, by executing the special figure game a prescribed number of times. As mentioned above, there are conventional gaming machines equipped with such a ceiling function that notify the remaining number of special figure games required to reach the specified number of times, but such notifications do not , it is difficult to judge whether or not the above-mentioned break-even point has been exceeded, that is, it is difficult to judge whether or not it is advantageous for the player to generate a jackpot. Furthermore, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with a ceiling function, when a small winning game occurs, a display prompting the player to play right is displayed in the opening performance of the small winning game. Therefore, when a small winning game occurs, the player will unconditionally hit the right ball in accordance with the display prompting the player to hit the right ball.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 in which the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is not initialized by not generating a jackpot game even if a small winning game occurs, as in the present embodiment, the small winning game is If a display is displayed to encourage players to play right in the opening performance of , the player will be able to play when the break-even point is exceeded and it is more advantageous to benefit from the ceiling time-saving game state without causing a jackpot game. There is a concern that the player will unconditionally play right-handed and not be able to benefit from the time-saving game state b, which is the ceiling time-saving game state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the result of the special map jackpot lottery that is the result of a predetermined determination is a small win that is a specific determination result, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter that is specific information is updated in a predetermined manner. Until the break-even point is reached at a predetermined timing, which is a predetermined period of time before the state reaches 0, a small win, which is a specific determination result, is notified by the profit display opening effect, which is the first notification mode, After the break-even point, which is a specific timing, is reached, the second notification mode, which is a loss display opening effect, is switched so that the small win, which is a specific determination result, is notified. In other words, in this embodiment, the expected value of the profit at the opening of the small winning game is reported in a notification manner according to the expected value of the profit that the player can obtain at the stage when the small winning game occurs. . Therefore, when a small winning game occurs, the player can understand the profit or loss that the player can earn by focusing on the opening performance of the small winning game. It can be determined whether or not to generate a jackpot game based on the notification mode in the opening performance of the small win game. As a result, if the expected value of the profit that can be obtained is higher if the expected value of the profit that can be obtained is higher if the jackpot game is not generated based on the small winning game, it is better to choose not to generate the jackpot game, and to generate the jackpot game based on the small winning game. It becomes possible to select to generate a jackpot game when the expected value of obtainable profits is high. As a result, the player can avoid the disadvantage of not transitioning to the time-saving game state b due to the occurrence of a jackpot game when the transition to the time-saving game state b, which is the ceiling time-saving game state, is approaching, so that the player can avoid the disadvantage of not transitioning to the time-saving game state b. Interest will be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the opening performance of the small winning game is switched after reaching the break-even point, which is a specific timing when it is advantageous for the player to shift to the b-time-saving game state, which is the ceiling time-saving game state. Therefore, even if a small winning game occurs during a period in which it is difficult to judge profit or loss near the break-even point, the player can more reliably make judgments that are advantageous to him/her based on the notification mode of the opening performance of the small winning game. becomes possible.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the opening performance of the small winning game, a profit display opening performance in the first notification mode is executed until the break-even point is reached, and after the break-even point is reached, the second notification mode is executed. A loss display opening performance is executed. In other words, when the loss display opening performance according to the second notification mode is executed as the opening performance of the small win game that occurred before moving to the ceiling time saving game state b time saving game state, the time saving game state b which is the ceiling time saving game state is executed. The advantageous display opening performance in the first notification mode is not executed until the state is shifted to the state.

In this way, when the loss display opening performance according to the second notification mode is executed as the opening performance of the small win game that occurred before moving to the b time-saving game state which is the ceiling time-saving game state, the profit display according to the first notification mode Since the opening performance is not executed, the player can continuously understand that it is advantageous not to generate a jackpot game when a small win game occurs. Therefore, if the loss display opening performance according to the second notification mode is first performed as the opening performance of a small winning game, and then the loss display opening performance according to the second notification mode is executed, a jackpot will not occur in a short time. can be judged to be advantageous. As a result, when it would be more advantageous not to generate a jackpot game in the event of a small win game, the possibility of accidentally generating a jackpot game is reduced, so that the player will not suffer an unexpected disadvantage. is prevented.

By the way, the break-even point set as a characteristic of the gaming machine 10 is effective for players who have plenty of time to play, but the amount of time a player can play depends on the remaining time until the closing time of the gaming hall and , differs depending on the player's personal circumstances. That is, the break-even point may not be effective in situations where the player does not have enough time to play.

Further, as described above, the break-even point is set pinpointly based on, for example, the design value at the time of factory shipment. On the other hand, the actual break-even point differs for each game machine 10 depending on the state of the game nails driven into the game board 31 at the time of shipment and the degree of deterioration over time, and also varies depending on the strength of the game balls fired by the player. . In other words, the winning rate of game balls into the various winning holes 313 to 316 can change depending on deterioration over time, the intensity of firing of game balls by the player, etc., and therefore the break-even point is not constant. In addition, the break-even point is the presence or absence of a stop hit when a certain number of rights to execute a special figure game are reserved, the presence or absence of a stop hit when a reach effect with a long variable display time occurs, and the presence or absence of a stop hit when a reach effect with a long variable display time occurs, a small winning game or a jackpot game. It also varies depending on the game technique, such as whether or not there is a stop shot at the opening. In other words, the actual break-even point varies depending on factors unique to each gaming machine 10, factors based on the player's gaming technique, and the like. Therefore, the actual break-even point cannot be fixed and pinpointed, but is an approximate value set based on the design value at the time of factory shipment.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special drawing jackpot lottery is a small win, a timing a certain period before reaching the break-even point is set as the predetermined timing, and after reaching the break-even point, A timing after a certain period of time may be set as the specific timing. That is, an intermediate period including a break-even point may be set between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. In this case as well, as the opening performance of the small winning game, the profit display opening performance which is the first notification mode is executed until a predetermined timing, and the loss display opening performance which is the second notification mode is executed from the specific timing. Then, during the intermediate period including the break-even point set between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, the opening performance of the small winning game is performed in a third notification mode different from the first notification mode and the second notification mode. It is possible that

For example, as shown in FIG. 222(A), for example, when the break-even point is the ceiling time-saving game state b, the remaining number of special symbol games (remaining number of ceiling activations) until the time-saving game state occurs is 120. , the specified timing is the point when the remaining number of ceiling activations 20 times before the break-even point is 140, the specific timing is the point when the remaining number of ceiling activations 20 times after the break-even point is 100, and the ceiling is activated 20 times before the break-even point. It is conceivable to set the remaining number of activations from 100 to 140 times as an intermediate period. Then, as the opening performance of the small winning game, the first notification mode is the profit display opening performance until the remaining number of ceiling activations is 140 times at a predetermined timing, and when the remaining number of ceiling activations is 100 times at a specific timing, the winning display opening performance is executed. It is conceivable to execute the loss display opening effect as the second notification mode, and execute the opening effect in the third notification mode during the intermediate period when the remaining number of ceiling activations is 100 to 140 times.

Further, as the opening performance of the third notification mode at the opening of the small winning game, for example, a border notification between the two, which is neither a gain display nor a loss display, can be considered. As a border notification, for example, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 223(B), the symbol display section 341 says, "Well, I can't say either way. You have to decide whether to hit right and hit V. A third notification mode using a character image is considered, in which the advantages and disadvantages of generating a jackpot game based on the small win game are vaguely notified.

Note that other forms of border notification in the third notification form in the intermediate period including the break-even point are also possible. For example, as shown in FIG. 223(C), as the border notification in the third notification mode, a mode may be considered in which a gain display in the first notification mode and a loss display in the second notification mode are alternately switched and displayed.

In this way, in this embodiment, an intermediate period including the break-even point between the predetermined timing and the specific timing is set, and by making the border notification of the third notification mode in this intermediate period, the actual Even if the break-even point is variable and different from the break-even point pinpointed based on the design value at the time of factory shipment, the border notification of the third notification mode in the intermediate period including the break-even point will When a small winning game occurs, it is reported that the situation is such that it is difficult to judge the profit or loss of generating a large winning game. As a result, when the border notification of the third notification mode is made as an opening effect when a small winning game occurs, the player can generate a jackpot game at his/her own discretion by taking into account fluid factors, etc. can be determined.

<Step S3412>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 219, if the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3401: No), that is, if it is not the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 executes the opening of the small winning game. It is determined whether the opening flag indicating that the opening flag is set on (step S3412).

If the opening flag is set to ON (step S3412: Yes), that is, if the opening of the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3413. On the other hand, if the opening flag is set to off (step S3412: No), that is, if the opening of the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3423 in FIG. 120.

<Steps S3413 to S3416>
When the opening flag is set to on (step S3412: Yes), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 calculates 1 from the value of the opening time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the opening. An update process of subtraction is executed (step S3413), and it is determined whether the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update completion state (step S3414). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the opening and start the operation of the movable wing part 832 of the wing accessory device 83 in the small winning game.

If the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3414: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that it is the timing to end the opening and start operating the movable wing section 832 of the wing accessory device 83 in the small winning game. If so, the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed is set to OFF (step S3415), and a small winning opening end command is further set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the small winning opening is ending ( Step S3416), the process moves to step S3417.

The small winning opening end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. By receiving the small winning opening end command, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the opening performance in the small winning game executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like.

On the other hand, if the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3414: No), in other words, it is not the timing to end the opening and start the operation of the movable wing part 832 of the wing accessory device 83 in the small winning game. If so, the small winning game control process is ended.

<Steps S3417 and 3418>
In step S3417, the operation of the movable wing part 832 of the wing accessory device 83 is started (step S3417), and the process moves to step S3418. In this way, by starting the operation of the movable wing part 832 of the wing accessory device 83 in the small winning game, the introduction port 831 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened, and the game into the inside of the feather accessory device 83 is opened. The ball can enter the ball.

Then, the MPU 41 sets a movable wing operation start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the operation of the movable wing section 832 of the wing accessory device 83 is started (step S3418), and the process returns to step S3419. Transition.

The movable vane actuation start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the audio lamp control device 5, by receiving the movable wing section operation start command, it is possible to execute a movable wing section operation effect in a small winning game executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like.

<Steps S3419 and S3420>
In step S3419, the MPU 41 sets on the movable wing operation flag indicating that the movable wing section 832 is being operated. Then, the MPU 41 executes processing to set a movable wing section operating time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining operating time of the movable wing section 832 (step S3420), and moves the process to step S3421.

<Steps S3421 and S3422>
In step S3421, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing part 835, and further sets a V winning opening opening/closing part operation time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 (step S3422). , the small winning game control process ends.

<Step S3423>
When the opening flag is set to OFF (step S3412: No), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is not being executed, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the V winning a prize opening/closing part operation flag indicating that the V winning a prize opening/closing part operation flag is set to on (step S3423). The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3424 when the V winning opening opening/closing part operation flag is set to ON (step S3423: Yes), and when the V winning opening opening/closing part operation flag is set to OFF (step S3423: Yes). S3423: No), the process moves to step S3432.

<Step S3424>
If the V winning hole opening/closing part operation flag is set to ON (step S3423: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83. is set (step S3424). The V winning flag is set to ON in step S3426 when a game ball enters the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83.

If the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to ON (step S3424: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3428, and If the winning flag is set to OFF (step S3424: No), the process moves to step S3425.

<Steps S3425 to S3427>
When the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3424: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has entered the V winning hole 833 of the wing accessory device 83 (step S3425). Whether or not a game ball has entered the V-winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 can be determined by checking, for example, when the game ball 99 has entered the V-winning hole 833 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main process of FIG. The determination is made based on whether or not a ball entry sensor (not shown) detects that the ball has been hit.

When the game ball enters the V winning hole 833 of the wing accessory device 83 (step S3425: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to ON (step S3426), and furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to ON (step S3426), and A V winning command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that a game ball has entered the winning hole 833 (step S3427), and the process moves to step S3428.

The V winning command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the audio lamp control device 5, by receiving the V winning command, it is possible to end the V winning performance in the small winning game executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like.

On the other hand, when the game ball has not entered the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3425: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3428.

<Steps S3428 and S3429>
In step S3428, the MPU 41 executes an update process of subtracting 1 from the V winning opening/closing part operation time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining operating time of the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83, and further, The MPU 41 determines whether the value of the V winning opening/closing part operation time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update end state (step S3429). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the V winning opening/closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (closing the V winning opening 833).

If the value of the V winning opening opening/closing part operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3429: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (closes the V winning opening 833). ), the process moves to step S3430. On the other hand, if the value of the V winning opening opening/closing part operation time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3429: No), the MPU 41 returns the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (the V winning opening opening/closing part 833 is If it is not the timing to close (close), the process moves to step S3432.

<Steps S3430 and S3431>
If the value of the V winning opening opening/closing part operating time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update completion state (step S3430: Yes), that is, the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is restored (the V winning opening 833 is If it is the timing to close), the MPU 41 returns the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 (step S3430) and turns off the V winning opening opening/closing part operation flag indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 is activated. settings (step S3431), and the process moves to step S3433.

<Step S3432>
In step S3432, the MPU 41 determines whether the movable wing section operation flag indicating that the movable wing section 832 is operated is set to on. If the movable blade operation flag is set to ON (step S3432: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3433, and if the movable blade operation flag is set to OFF (step S3432: No). , the small winning game control process ends.

<Steps S3433 and S3434>
If the movable blade operation flag is set to ON (step S3432: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the movable blade operation time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining operation time of the movable blade 832. Update processing is executed (step S3433). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the movable blade operation time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update completion state (step S3434). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the small winning game by returning the movable wing portion 832 and closing the introduction port 831.

If the value of the movable blade operation time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update completion state (step S3434: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the movable blade part 832 and closes the introduction port 831 to play the small winning game. If it is the timing to end the process, the process moves to step S3435. On the other hand, if the value of the movable vane operating time counter after the subtraction is not 0, which is the updated state (step S3434: No), the MPU 41 returns the movable vane 832 and closes the introduction port 831 to win a small hit. If it is not the timing to end the game, the small winning game control process is ended.

<Steps S3435 to S3438>
If the value of the movable blade operation time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update end state (step S3434: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the small winning game by returning the movable blade 832 (step S3435). Then, the MPU 41 turns off the movable wing operation flag indicating that the movable wing section 832 is being operated (step S3436), and turns on the small winning game end flag indicating that the small winning game has ended. (Step S3437), and further sets a small winning game end command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the small winning game ends (Step S3438), and ends the small winning game control process.

Note that the small winning game end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the audio lamp control device 5, by receiving the small winning game end command, it is possible to end the small winning game performance executed on the symbol display section 341 and the like.

[Jackpot game control processing]
Here, FIGS. 225 to 228 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 in the main process of FIG. 209. In the jackpot game control process, when a predetermined game condition is established by the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in a small winning game, the profit generation means generates a specific profit as a variable entry ball entry means. Processing for generating a jackpot game, such as opening/closing control of the opening/closing door 319 provided in the variable prize opening 316, is executed. Hereinafter, the jackpot game control process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 225 to 228.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 225, in the jackpot game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the small win game end flag indicating that the small win game ends is on (step S3501). The small winning game end flag is set to ON in step S3447 in the small winning game control process in FIG. 220 when ending the small winning game.

When the small winning game end flag is on (step S3501: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the small winning game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3502. On the other hand, when the small winning game end flag is off (step S3501: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the small winning game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3512.

<Step S3502>
When the small winning game end flag is on (step S3501: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the small winning game, the small winning game end flag is set to off (step S3502), and the process moves to step S3503. do.

<Steps S3503 and S3504>
In step S3503, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines that a game ball has entered the V prize opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83 in a small win game where a specific profit of executing a jackpot game is a predetermined game condition in which a profit generating means generates a specific profit. Determine whether or not.

Note that the V winning flag is set to ON in step S3426 in the small winning game control process in FIG. 220 when a game ball enters the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game.

If the V winning flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to OFF (step S3504), and moves the process to step S3505. On the other hand, when the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3503: No), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S3505>
In step S3505, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the start of a jackpot game and the type of jackpot game (4R time-saving jackpot game or 16R time-saving jackpot game), and the process proceeds to step S3505. The process moves to S3506. The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute a jackpot game effect according to the jackpot game type based on the jackpot game start command.

<Step S3506>
In step S3506, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is to be started, and moves the process to step S3507. The jackpot game start flag is updated information indicating the remaining number of a time saving games in the a time saving game state that is transferred after the end of the jackpot game in step S3516 in the game state transition process of FIG. 220, which will be described later. It is referenced when determining whether to set the initial value of the remaining number of times counter.

<Step S3507>
In step S3507, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and moves the process to step S3508. The jackpot game in progress flag is referred to in step S1504 of the regular figure game control process in FIG. 210 and step S1901 of the special figure game control process in FIG. 214 in order to determine whether or not the jackpot game is being executed.

<Step S3508>
In step S3508, the MPU 41 sets a round number counter, which is update information indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and shifts the process to step S3507. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round number counter to "4" when the jackpot type is a 4R time-saving jackpot, and sets the round number counter to "16" when the jackpot type is a 16R probability variable jackpot.

<Step S3509>
In step S3509, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of starting the opening of the jackpot game, and moves the process to step S3510. The opening start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the opening effect on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening start command.

<Step S3510>
In step S3510, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining opening time, and moves the process to step S3511. The opening time counter is referred to in step S3514 of FIG. 226 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the opening.

<Step S3511>
In step S3511, the MPU 41 sets on the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S3512 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether or not the opening is in progress.

<Step S3512>
When the small winning start flag is off (step S3501: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the small winning game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed is on. A judgment is made (step S3512).

If the opening flag is on (step S3512: Yes), that is, if the opening is in progress, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3513 in FIG. 226. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S3512: No), that is, if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S3523.

<Steps S3513 and S3514>
If the opening flag is on (step S3512: Yes), that is, if the opening is being executed, as shown in FIG. An update process of subtracting 1 is executed (step S3513), and it is determined whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3514). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the opening.

If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3515. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3514: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3515 and S3516>
If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game will end. An opening end command is set (step S3515). This opening end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the opening performance executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress to OFF (step S3516), and moves the process to step S3517.

<Step S3517>
In step S3517, the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing execution mode start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game is executed a plurality of times (4 or 16 times) is started, and processes The process moves to step S3518. The opening/closing execution mode start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the opening/closing execution mode performance executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening/closing execution mode start command.

<Step S3518>
In step S3518, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that a round game is to be started, and moves the process to step S3519. The round game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start a round game presentation corresponding to each round game including round number display etc. on the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the round game start command.

<Steps S3519 and S3520>
In step S3519, the MPU 41 executes an update process of subtracting 1 from the round number counter, which is update information indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and further operates the opening/closing door 319 to control the variable ball entry means. The variable prize opening 316 is opened (step S3520), and the process moves to step S3521.

<Steps S3521 and S3522>
In step S3521, the MPU 41 sets on the round game in progress flag indicating that the round game is being executed, and further sets the round game time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the round game (step S3522 ), the jackpot game control process ends. The round game time counter performs the step in FIG. 227 of the jackpot game control process in order to judge whether it is the timing to end the round game (return the opening/closing door 319 and close the variable prize opening 316) after the elapse of the specified time. Referenced in S3525.

<Step S3523>
Returning to FIG. 225, if the opening flag is off (step S3512: No), that is, if the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the round game flag indicating that the round game is being executed to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3523). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a round game is being executed.

When the round game flag is on (step S3523: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3524 in FIG. 227. On the other hand, when the round game flag is off (step S3523: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3537.

<Steps S3524 and S3525>
When the round game in progress flag is on (step S3523: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, as shown in FIG. 227, the MPU 41 updates the round game time, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the round game. Update processing is performed to subtract 1 from the counter value (step S3524). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3525). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the round game (close the variable prize opening 316, which is the variable ball entry means, by returning the opening/closing door 319) after the specified time has elapsed.

If the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3525: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the round game when the specified time has elapsed (by returning the opening/closing door 319, the variable prize opening, which is the variable ball entry means), is terminated. 316), the process moves to step S3529. On the other hand, if the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3525: No), the MPU 41 ends the round game when the specified time has elapsed (by returning the opening/closing door 319, the variable prize winning means, which is a variable ball entry means) If it is not the timing to close the mouth 316, the process moves to step S3526.

<Step S3526>
If the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3525: No), that is, the round game ends when the specified time has elapsed (the variable prize opening 316, which is the variable ball entry means, is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319). If it is not the timing to do so, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 (step S3526). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 can be determined by detecting the entry of a game ball into the ball entry sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. The determination is made based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412.

If the game ball enters the variable winning hole 316 (step S3526: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3527, and if the game ball does not enter the variable winning hole 316 (step S3526: No), the jackpot game control process ends.

<Steps S3527 and S3528>
When a game ball enters the variable winning hole 316 (step S3526: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the number of balls entering which is updated information indicating the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole 316 in the round game. Update processing is performed to add 1 to the counter value (step S3527). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the number of balls entered after the addition reaches 10 (step S3528), that is, the round game ends when the upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning hole 316 (opening/closing door 319 returns, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to close the variable winning hole 316 which is the variable ball entry means.

If the value of the ball entering number counter after addition has reached 10 (step S3528: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the round game by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable prize opening 316 (opening/closing door 319). When it is the timing to close the variable winning a prize opening 316 which is the variable ball entry means due to the return of the variable ball entry means, the process moves to step S3529. On the other hand, if the value of the ball entering number counter after addition has not reached 10 (step S3528: No), that is, the MPU 41 ends the round game by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 (opening/closing). If it is not the timing to close the variable prize opening 316 which is the variable ball entry means due to the return of the door 319, the jackpot game control process is ended.

<Step S3529>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3525: Yes) or if the value of the number of balls entered counter reaches 10 (step S3528: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the opening/closing door 319. As a result, the variable prize opening 316 is closed (step S3529), and the process moves to step S3530. That is, when it is the timing to end the round game due to the passage of the specified time or due to the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316, the MPU 41 closes the variable winning hole 316 and ends the round game. .

<Steps S3530 to S3532>
In step S3530, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the round game ends. The round game end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the round game performance executed in the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 executes an update process for clearing the ball entry counter, which is update information indicating the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole 316 in the round game (step S3531), and executes the round game. The flag indicating that the round game is in progress is set to OFF (step S3532), and the process moves to step S3533.

<Step S3533>
In step S3533, the MPU 41 determines whether the round number counter, which is update information indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, is 0 (step S3533), that is, it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode (until There is a round game to be executed).

If the round number counter is 0 (step S3533: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3542. On the other hand, if the round number counter is not 0 (step S3533: No), that is, if there is an unplayed round game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3534.

<Step S3534>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S3533: No), that is, if there is an unplayed round game, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start an interval between round games. (step S3534), and the process moves to step S3535. The interval start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an interval effect on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the interval start command.

<Steps S3535 and S3536>
In step S3535, the MPU 41 sets on the interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval time counter that is update information indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S3536), and ends the jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is referred to in step S3539 in FIG. 228 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the interval (start the round game).

<Step S3537>
Returning to FIG. 228, when the round game flag is off (step S3523: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. It is determined whether it is on (step S3537). The during-interval flag is set to ON in step S3534 of FIG. 227 in the jackpot game control process when starting an interval, and is turned off in step S3541 of FIG. 228 in the jackpot game control process when ending the interval. Set.

If the during-interval flag is on (step S3537: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3538 in FIG. 228. On the other hand, if the during-interval flag is off (step S3537: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3547.

<Steps S3538 and S3539>
If the during-interval flag is on (step S3537: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, as shown in FIG. 228, the MPU 41 updates the interval time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the interval. An update process is performed to subtract 1 from the value of (step S3538). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3539), that is, whether or not it is the timing to end the interval (start the round game).

If the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3539: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3540. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3539: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the interval (start the round game), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3540 and S3541>
If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3539: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 sends an audio signal to the lamp control device 5 to notify that the interval has ended. An interval end command to be notified is set (step S3540). The interval end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the interval effect executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the during-interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed (step S3541), and shifts the process to step S3518 in FIG. 226 described above. By moving the process to step S3517 in FIG. 226 described above, the processes of steps S3518 to S3522 regarding the start of the round game are executed, and the jackpot game control process is ended.

<Step S3542>
Returning to FIG. 227, when the round number counter is 0 (step S3533: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 uses the voice lamp control device to notify the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. 5 is set (step S3542), and the process proceeds to step S3543. The opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the round game performance (opening/closing execution mode performance) executed in the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the opening/closing execution mode end command.

<Step S3543>
In step S3543, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start the ending of the jackpot game, and moves the process to step S3544. The ending start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the ending effect on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the ending start command.

<Steps S3544 and S3545>
In step S3544, the MPU 41 sets on the ending-in-progress flag indicating that the ending is in progress. Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending time counter indicating the remaining ending time, which is update information (step S3545), and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referred to in step S3548 in FIG. 228 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game).

<Step S3546>
Returning to FIG. 225, if the interval flag is off (step S3537: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, whether the ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed is on or not. is determined (step S3546).

If the ending flag is on (step S3546: Yes), that is, if the ending is in progress, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3547 in FIG. 228. On the other hand, if the ending flag is off (step S3546: No), that is, if the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3551.

<Steps S3547 and S3548>
When the ending flag is on (step S3546: Yes), that is, when the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 calculates the ending time from the value of the ending time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining ending time, as shown in FIG. 228. An update process of subtracting 1 is executed (step S3547). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3548). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the ending (big hit game).

If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3548: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3549. On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3548: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the ending (big hit game), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3549 and S3550>
When the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3548: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 sends an audio lamp control device to end the ending of the jackpot game. 5 is set (step S3549). The ending end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the ending effect executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag indicating that the ending is in progress to OFF (step S3550), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S3551>
Returning to FIG. 225, if the ending flag is off (step S3546: No), that is, if the game is not in the opening, round game, interval, or ending, the MPU 41 sends a voice message indicating that the jackpot game is over. A jackpot game end command to be notified to the lamp control device 5 is set (step S3551), and the process moves to step S3552. The jackpot game end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the jackpot game performance executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the jackpot game end command.

<Steps S3552 to S3554>
In step S3552, a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set on. The jackpot game end flag is referred to in step S3621 of the game state transition process in FIG. 230, which will be described later, in order to determine whether to shift from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state a.

Then, the MPU 41 turns on the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag for setting the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is update information indicating the number of special symbol games required before transitioning to the time-saving gaming state b (step S3553), the process moves to step S3554. The ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is referred to in step S3301 in the special symbol game number management process of FIG. 217 to determine whether or not to set the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is update information.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed to OFF (step S3554), and ends the jackpot game control process.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIGS. 229 to 231 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in FIG. 209. In the gaming state transition process, processing for controlling the transition of various gaming states (normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, b time-saving gaming state, small winning gaming state, jackpot gaming state) is executed. The gaming state transition process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 229 to 231.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 229, in step S3601, the MPU 41 determines whether a small winning game start flag indicating that a small winning game is to be started is on. The small winning game start flag is set to ON in step S3403 when the small winning game is started in the small winning game control process of FIG. 219.

When the small winning game start flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the small winning game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3602. On the other hand, when the small winning game start flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the small winning game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3613.

<Steps S3602 and S3603>
When the small winning game start flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, when starting the small winning game, the MPU 41 turns on the small winning game state flag indicating that the small winning game is in the in-game state. (step S3602). The small hit game status flag is referred to when determining whether to start the regular figure game in step S1503 of the regular figure game control process in FIG. 210, and when the special figure game is started in step S1902 of the special figure game control process in FIG. Referenced when determining whether to start.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the small winning game start flag to OFF (step S3603), and moves the process to step S3604.

<Steps S3604 to S3606>
In step S3604, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state is on.

When the normal gaming state flag is on (step S3604: Yes), that is, when it is in the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery triggered by the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 in the normal gaming state. A normal small win flag indicating that the small win is started based on the result being a small win is set on (step S3605). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag to OFF (step S3606), and ends the gaming state transition process.

On the other hand, if the normal gaming state flag is off (step S3604: No), that is, if the normal gaming state is not present, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3607.

<Steps S3607 to S3609>
If the normal gaming state flag is off (step S3604: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the a time-saving gaming state flag indicating the a-time-saving gaming state, which is the profit gaming state, is set to on. (Step S3607).

When the a time-saving gaming state flag is on (step S3607: Yes), that is, when the a-time-saving gaming state is in effect, the MPU 41 uses the first prize opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 in the a-time-saving gaming state as a trigger. A time-saving small win flag a indicating that the small win is started based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win is set on (step S3608). Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag a to OFF (step S3609), and ends the game state transition process.

On the other hand, when the a time saving game state flag is off (step S3607: No), that is, when it is not in the a time saving game state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3610.

<Steps S3610 to S3612>
If the a time-saving gaming state flag is off (step S3607: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the b time-saving gaming state flag, which is a profit gaming state and b indicating the time-saving gaming state, is set to on. (Step S3610).

When the b time-saving game state flag is on (step S3610: Yes), that is, in the b time-saving game state, the MPU 41 uses the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 in the b time-saving game state as a trigger. The b time-saving small win flag indicating that the small win is started based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win is set on (step S3611). Then, the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving gaming state flag to OFF (step S3612), and ends the gaming state transition process.

On the other hand, when the b time-saving game state flag is off (step S3610: No), that is, when it is not in the b time-saving game state, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3613>
When the small winning game start flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the small winning game, the MPU 41 determines whether the small winning game end flag indicating to end the small winning game is on. It is determined whether or not (step S3613). The small winning game end flag is set to ON in step S3437 when the small winning game is ended in the small winning game control process of FIG. 219.

When the small winning game end flag is on (step S3613: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the small winning game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3614. On the other hand, when the small winning game end flag is off (step S3613: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the small winning game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3636 in FIG. 230.

<Steps S3614 and S3615>
When the small winning game end flag is on (step S3613: Yes), that is, when ending the small winning game, the MPU 41 turns off the small winning game state flag indicating that the small winning game is in the in-game state. (step S3614). Then, the MPU 41 sets the small winning game end flag to OFF (step S3615), and moves the process to step S3616.

<Steps S3616 and S3617>
In step S3616, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is to be started is set to on. The jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S3506 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 225.

When the jackpot game start flag is on (step S3616: Yes), that is, when starting the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot game state flag indicating that the jackpot game is being played (step S3617). ), the process moves to step S3618. On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3616: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3627 in FIG. 230.

<Steps S3618 to S3620>
In step S3618, the MPU 41 indicates that the small win is started based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 in the normal gaming state is a small win. It is determined whether the normal small hit flag is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game to be started is based on the small win game that occurred in the normal gaming state.

If the normal small win flag is set to ON (step S3618: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the number of time-saving games to one in the a-time-saving game state, which is transferred when the jackpot game in the playing state ends. A time saving one-time set flag is set to ON (step S3619). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal small hit flag to OFF (step S3620), and ends the game state transition process.

On the other hand, when the normal small hit flag is set to OFF (step S3618: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3621.

<Steps S3621 to S3623>
When the normal small win flag is set to OFF (step S3618: No), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 in the a time-saving gaming state is a small win. It is determined whether or not a time-saving small win flag indicating that the small win is started based on the above is set on (step S3621). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game to be started is based on the small win game that occurred in the time-saving game state a.

If the a time-saving small winning flag is set to ON (step S3621: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the number of time-saving games to 5 in the a-time-saving gaming state, which is transferred when the jackpot game in the playing state ends. The a time saving 5 times set flag for setting is set on (step S3622). Then, the MPU 41 sets the a time saving small win flag to OFF (step S3623), and ends the game state transition process.

On the other hand, when the a time saving small hit flag is set to OFF (step S3621: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3624.

<Steps S3624 to S3626>
When the a time saving small winning flag is set to off (step S3621: No), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 in the working time saving gaming state is small. It is determined whether or not the b time-saving small win flag, which indicates that the small win is started based on the winning, is set on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game to be started is based on the small win game that occurred in the time-saving game state b.

If the b time-saving small winning flag is set to ON (step S3624: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the number of time-saving games to 5 in the a-time-saving gaming state, which is transferred when the jackpot game in the playing state ends. The a time saving 5 times set flag for setting is set on (step S3625). Then, the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving small win flag to OFF (step S3626), and ends the game state transition process.

On the other hand, when the b time saving small winning flag is set to OFF (step S3624: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S3627 to S3629>
When the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3616: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not started, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the normal small win flag indicating that the small win is started based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the small win is set on (step S3627). That is, when a small winning game ends without generating a jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small winning game occurs in the normal gaming state.

When the normal small winning flag is set to ON (step S3627: Yes), that is, when the small winning game that ends without generating a jackpot game occurs in the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 changes the gaming state. In order to return to the normal gaming state before the small winning game occurs, a normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state is set on (step S3628). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal small hit flag to OFF (step S3629), and ends the game state transition process.

On the other hand, if the normal small winning flag is set to OFF (step S3627: No), that is, if the small winning game that ends without generating a large winning game does not occur in the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 processes the The process moves to step S3630.

<Steps S3630 to S3632>
If the normal small winning flag is set to OFF (step S3627: No), that is, if the small winning game that ends without generating a large winning game is not generated in the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 executes a time saving game. The time-saving small win flag a, which indicates that the small win is started based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 in the state is a small win, is set to on. It is determined whether or not it has been set (step S3630). That is, when a small winning game ends without generating a jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small winning game occurs in the time-saving gaming state a.

If the a time saving small win flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), that is, if the small winning game that ends without generating a jackpot game occurs in the a time saving game state, In order to return the gaming state to the a time saving gaming state before the small winning game occurs, the a time saving gaming state flag indicating the a time saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3631). Then, the MPU 41 sets the a time saving small winning flag to OFF (step S3632), and ends the game state transition process.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 determines that when the a time saving small winning flag is set to OFF (step S3630: No), that is, when the small winning game that ends without generating a jackpot game does not occur in the a time saving game state. , the process moves to step S3633.

<Steps S3633 to S3635>
If the a time-saving small win flag is set to off (step S3630: No), that is, if the small winning game that ends without generating a jackpot game is not generated in the time-saving game state a, the MPU 41 selects b b The time-saving small win flag is turned on, indicating that the small win is started based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state is a small win. is set (step S3633). That is, when a small winning game ends without generating a jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small winning game occurs in the time saving game state b.

If the b time-saving small win flag is set to ON (step S3633: Yes), that is, if the small winning game that ends without generating a jackpot game occurs in the b time-saving game state, In order to return the gaming state to the b time-saving gaming state before the small winning game occurs, the b time-saving gaming state flag indicating the b time-saving gaming state is set on (step S3634). Then, the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving small win flag to OFF (step S3635), and ends the game state transition process.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 determines that when the b time-saving small win flag is set to OFF (step S3633: No), that is, when the small winning game that ends without generating a jackpot game is not generated in the b time-saving game state. , the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3636>
When the small winning game end flag is off (step S3613: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the small winning game, as shown in FIG. 230, the jackpot game status flag indicating that the jackpot game is in the playing state is set to on (step S3636).

If the jackpot game state flag indicating that the jackpot game is in the playing state is set to ON (step S3636: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3637, and determines that the jackpot game is in the playing state. When the jackpot game state flag indicating , is set to OFF (step S3636: No), the process moves to step S3641.

<Step S3637>
When the jackpot game state flag indicating that the jackpot game is in the playing state is set to ON (step S3636: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3637).

If the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set to ON (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3638, and sets the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends. is set to off (step S3637: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3638 to S3640>
When the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set on (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the a time saving game state flag indicating that the a time saving game state is in effect ( Step S3638), a time-saving game state command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the time-saving game state is a (step S3639).

The time saving game state command a is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute the special figure game production corresponding to the time-saving game state a based on the time-saving game state command a.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends to OFF (step S3640), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3641>
If the jackpot game state flag indicating that the jackpot game is in the playing state is off (step S3636: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state flag indicating that the jackpot game is in the normal gaming state is set to on. (Step S3641).

If the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state is set to ON (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3642 and sets the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state. is set to off (step S3641: No), the process moves to step S3647 in FIG. 231.

<Step S3642>
If the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state is set to on (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the b-time-saving gaming state shift flag, which causes the transition to b-time-saving gaming state, is set to on. It is determined whether or not (step S3642). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to transition from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state b.

If the transition flag to the b-time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3642: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3643, and shifts the b-time-saving gaming state to the b-time-saving gaming state. If the transition flag is set to OFF (step S3642: No), the gaming state transition process is ended.

<Steps S3643 to S3646>
If the transition flag to the b-time-saving gaming state is set on (step S3642: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the b-time-saving gaming state flag indicating the b-time-saving gaming state to on. (Step S3643), a b time saving game state command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that it is in the b time saving game state (step S3644).

b The time saving game state command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute the special figure game production corresponding to the b time-saving game state based on the b time-saving game state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state to OFF (step S3645), and further sets the b-time-saving gaming state transition flag to shift to the b-time-saving gaming state to OFF (step S3646). ), the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3647>
If the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state is set to OFF (step S3641: No), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the flag is set on (step S3647).

If the a time-saving game state flag indicating that the a time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3647: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3648, When the time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3647: No), the process moves to step S3653.

<Step S3648>
If the a time-saving game state flag indicating that the a-time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3647: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag for transitioning to the normal game state is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3648). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift from the time-saving gaming state a to the normal gaming state.

If the normal gaming state transition flag for transitioning to the normal gaming state is set to ON (step S3648: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3649, and sets the normal gaming state transition flag for transitioning to the normal gaming state to be OFF. (Step S3648: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3649 to S3652>
If the normal gaming state transition flag for transitioning to the normal gaming state is set on (step S3648: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state to on (step S3649). , a normal gaming state command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the normal gaming state is present (step S3650).

The normal game state command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure game performance corresponding to the normal game state based on the normal game state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the a time saving game state flag indicating that the a time saving game state is in effect (step S3651), and further sets the normal game state transition flag for transitioning to the normal game state to off (step S3652). ), the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3653>
If the a time-saving game state flag indicating that the a time-saving game state is set to OFF (step S3647: No), the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving game state flag indicating that the b time-saving game state is on. It is determined whether or not (step S3653).

When the b time saving game state flag indicating that the b time saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3653: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3654, and b indicating that the b time saving gaming state is being set. When the time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3653: No), the game state transition process is ended.

<Step S3654>
b When the time-saving game state flag b indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3653: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag for transitioning to the normal game state is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3654). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to transition from the b-time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

If the normal game state transition flag for transitioning to the normal gaming state is set on (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3655, and turns off the normal gaming state transition flag for transitioning to the normal gaming state. (Step S3654: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3655 to S3658>
If the normal gaming state transition flag for transitioning to the normal gaming state is set on (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state to on (step S3655). , a normal gaming state command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the normal gaming state is present (step S3656).

The normal game state command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 209) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure game performance corresponding to the normal game state based on the normal game state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the b time-saving game state flag indicating that the b time-saving game state is in effect (step S3657), and further sets the normal game state transition flag for transitioning to the normal game state to off (step S3658). ), the game state transition process ends.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 239. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

[Main processing of audio lamp control device 5]
<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 232, in the main process, it is first determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of step S3701 was previously executed (step S3701). If more than one second has not elapsed (step S3701: No), the process proceeds to step S3712 without performing the processes of steps S3702 to S3711. In the process of step S3701, determining whether 1 ms has elapsed is because steps S3702 to S3711 are related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in step S3713 in a short cycle. By executing the process in step S3713 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 4, and by executing the process in step S3712 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent commands from being received by the command determination process. Based on the commands, settings related to the special figure game effects can be made without delay.

<Steps S3702 to S3704>
If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of step S3701 (step S3701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 6 set in the processes of steps S3703 to S3713 are sent to the display control device 6. (Step S3702). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the illumination section 27 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of step S3709, which will be described later (step S3703), and then the power-on notification process is executed ( Step S3704). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27. Alternatively, a command may be sent to the display control device 6 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the symbol display section 341. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S3705 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

<Steps S3705 to S3707>
In the process of step S3705, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a pending number display update process is executed (step S3706). In the customer waiting production, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the gaming machine 10 is not played by a player, a setting is made to switch the display of the symbol display section 341 to the title screen, and the setting is sent to the display control device 6 as a command. Sent. In the pending number display update process, a process is performed to display special figure data images (see FIGS. 51 and 52) in the special figure data image display sections 75, 76, and 77 set in the symbol display section 341.

Thereafter, operation button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (step S3707). In this operation button input monitoring/presentation process, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the operation button 20 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored, and when the input of the operation button 20 is confirmed, a corresponding action is taken. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when an operation of the operation button 20 by the player is detected, an operation button operation command is set to notify the display control device 6 that the operation button 20 has been operated.

In addition, if the operation button 20 is pressed during a period in which the special figure game effect is not being executed or during a period in which decorative symbols are rapidly changing, for example, a process to change the stage is performed, and a back image change command is sent to the display control device 6. Set. By including information regarding the type of back image corresponding to the changed stage in this back image change command, the display control device 6 changes the back image displayed on the symbol display section 341 to an image corresponding to the stage. processing is performed. In addition, when a preview character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the operation button 20 will display the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, and pressing the operation button 20 during the reach effect will display the expectation of a jackpot. The effect may be changed to a more appealing effect, or the operation button 20 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of a plurality of ready-to-reach effects. Note that if the operation button 20 is not provided, the process of step S3707 is omitted.

<Step S3708>
When the operation button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (step S3708). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from a vibration sensor (not shown) and detecting whether or not vibration is applied to the gaming machine 10.

[Vibration sensor input monitoring process of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (step S3708) will be described with reference to FIG. 233. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing vibration sensor input monitoring processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5.

<Steps S3801 and S3802>
In the vibration sensor input monitoring process, first, an output value (vibration level) from a vibration sensor (not shown) is read (step S3801), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level (step S3801). S3802). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (step S3802: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is ended and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 232).

<Steps S3803 and S3804>
On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (step S3802: Yes), it is determined that vibration has been applied to the gaming machine 10, and the lighting section 27 is set to output an alarm sound (step S3803). , sets an error command to notify the display control device 6 of the occurrence of a vibration error (step S3804), and returns to the main process (FIG. 232). Thereby, the display control device 6 performs a process of displaying an error message image notifying a vibration error on the symbol display section 341.

<Steps S3709 to S3711>
Returning to FIG. 232, the description of the main processing will be continued. After the vibration sensor input monitoring process (step S3708) is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (step S3709), and then a sound editing/output process is executed (step S3710). In the lamp editing process, the lighting pattern of the illumination section 27 is set to correspond to the display performed on the symbol display section 341. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the speaker 26 is set to correspond to the display performed on the symbol display section 341, and sound is output from the speaker 26 according to the setting. Furthermore, if the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 233) (see step S3710), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing/output process, and the alarm sound is It is output from the speaker 26.

After the process of step S3710, liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (step S3711), and the process moves to step S3712. In the liquid crystal performance execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the symbol display section 341 is set based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 4. Lamp editing processing in step S3709 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal presentation execution management processing. Note that the sound editing/output processing in step S3710 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the symbol display section 341.

<Step S3712>
In the process of step S3712, in order to display a special pattern game effect on the pattern display section 341, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the special pattern variation pattern command received from the main control device 4, and the command is used to control the display. This is the process of setting for sending to the device 6. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 234. After this processing, processing according to the command received from the main control device 4 is performed (FIGS. 234 and 235).

<Steps S3713 to S3717>
When the process of step S3712 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 512 (step S3713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 4. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of step S3713 (step S3713: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (step S3715), and the power-off process is executed (step S3715). S3716). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (step S3717), and the process is then looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the occurrence of an interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of step S3713 (step S3713: No), it is determined whether the RAM 512 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 512 (step S3714), If the RAM 512 is not destroyed (step S3714: No), the process returns to step S3701 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 512 is destroyed (step S3714: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the symbol display section 341 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the gaming machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 512 is destroyed, the speaker 26 or the illumination section 27 may be used to notify that the RAM is destroyed.

[Command determination processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the command determination process executed in step S3712 of the main process of the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 238. FIGS. 234 to 238 are flowcharts showing this command determination process. In this command determination process, as described above, the command received from the main controller 4 is determined. In addition, this process also determines the start of a continuous preview performance by the symbol display section 341 when the number of reserved balls command is received from the main control device 4.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 234, in the command determination process of the audio lamp control device 5, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 512 (step S3901). If there is an unprocessed command (step S3901: Yes), the process moves to step S3902, and if there is no unprocessed command (step S3901: No), the command determination process ends.

<Step S3902>
If there is an unprocessed command (step S3901: Yes), the first command received from the main controller 4 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 512, analyzed, and sent to the main controller 4. 4, it is determined whether or not a special figure variation pattern command has been received (step S3902). If it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command has been received (step S3902: Yes), the process moves to step S3903, and if it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received (step S3901: No). ), the process moves to step S3908.

<Step S3903>
If it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command has been received (step S3902: Yes), the variation type (production pattern) setting process (step S3903) is executed based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Then, the process of step S3904 is executed. In this variation type (effect pattern) setting process, special figure game effects to be executed by various effect means (symbol display section 341, speaker 26, illumination section 27) in the special figure game are set. Specifically, as described above, based on the special figure variation pattern command, the variation type (effect pattern) and variation display time are set by referring to the variation type table (see FIG. 49), and the variation type (effect pattern) is set. The effect pattern type is set based on the effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 50) corresponding to the effect pattern).

<Step S3904>
In step S3904, the variable display time corresponding to the received special figure variable pattern command is set in the variable display counter, and then the process of step S3905 is executed. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the special figure variable pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining display time, etc. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol fluctuation display has ended when the fluctuation display counter reaches 0.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the effect pattern type set in step S3103 of the command determination process to the display control device 6, and moves the process to step S3906. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the production pattern type. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores performance images and the like corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the effect display on the symbol display section 341 according to the effect type corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Steps S3908 and S3909>
If it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received (step S3902: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 4 (step S3908). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (step S3908: Yes), a display stop type command is set in order to transmit the stop type command as it is to the display control device 6 (step S3909). On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (step S3908: No), the process moves to step S3910.

<Steps S3910 to S3913>
If it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (step S3908: No), it is determined whether or not a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 4 (step S3910). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has been received (step S3910: Yes), the first special number reserved number storage area NAA or the second special number storage area NAA, which is the update information of the main control device 4 included in the number of reserved balls command, is received. The value of the number of reserved figures storage area NAB (ie, the number of special figure games reserved in the main control device 4) is extracted and stored in the number of reserved balls counter of the audio lamp control device 5 (step S3911).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 4 when a game ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, or when a special figure game starts. Therefore, each time a starting winning prize or a special figure game is started, the value of the reserved ball number counter of the audio lamp control device 5 is adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter of the main control device 4 by the process of step S3911. be able to. Therefore, even if the value of the reserved ball number counter of the audio lamp control device 5 deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter of the main controller 4 due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the reserved ball number counter of the audio lamp control device 5 will be changed at the time of starting winning detection. The value of the number counter can be corrected to match the value of the held ball number counter of the main controller 4.

Further, after the processing in step S3911, a display number of reserved pitches command for notifying the display control device 6 of the value of the reserved pitches counter updated by the processing in step S3911 is set (step S3912). As a result, the display control device 6 executes a process to display on the symbol display section 341 a number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved pitches.

Thereafter, continuous notice determination processing is executed (step S3913), and the process returns to the main processing. In this continuous notice determination process, the value of the number of pending balls received from the main controller 4 by the number of pending balls command, and the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated information, are determined. It is determined whether or not to perform a continuous preview performance in which preview performance images are continuously displayed over the special figure game performances suspended at the time. In addition, when performing the continuous preview performance, the continuous preview performance mode may be a continuous preview performance mode of the same performance type in which the same image (for example, a "bubble" image) is displayed across multiple special figure game performances. Or, step-up type where related images are displayed in order each time a special game effect is performed (for example, each image is displayed in the order of "egg" → "chick" → "chicken" → "flock of chickens") Determine whether to use a continuous preview presentation mode.

Specifically, the decision as to whether or not to perform the continuous preview performance is made based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are update information, at the time when the pending pitch number command is transmitted. The result of a lottery to be held in response to the hold and the type of stop after the special figure game performance is estimated, and the game is carried out based on the estimation result and the number of balls held on hold at that time. For example, when it is estimated that the stop type after the special figure game performance is a 16R probability-variable jackpot or a close-out reach, it may be determined that continuous preview performances are performed with respective predetermined probabilities. Furthermore, in this case, it may be determined that the greater the number of reserved balls, the higher the probability that the continuous preview performance will be performed.

In addition to this, if the estimated lottery result is a jackpot, continuous preview effects may be performed with a predetermined probability regardless of the stop type, or if the lottery result is a jackpot. However, when the stop type is a reach, that is, when it is estimated that it is a reach that is out of front and back or a reach other than a reach that is out of front and back, continuous preview effects may be performed with a predetermined probability. In this way, the conditions for deciding to perform the continuous notice performance may be set as appropriate depending on the gaming nature to be provided to the gaming machine 10.

In addition, conditions for whether the continuous preview presentation mode is the same presentation type or a step-up type may also be set as appropriate. For example, a random number counter may be provided inside the audio lamp control device 5, and the continuous preview performance mode may be determined according to the value of the random number counter.

In this gaming machine 10, the main controller 4 inputs each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are update information acquired at the time of start-up winning, to the voice lamp control device 5 by the hold ball number command. Based on the values of various counters and the value of the number of pending pitches notified by the pending pitch count command, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the start of the continuous preview performance and sets the mode of the continuous preview performance. . As a result, the process in the main control device 4 is changed to the lottery process of drawing a lottery for the gaming state to be changed based on the ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, which is the most important process of the gaming machine 10. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 with high processing capacity is used in the audio lamp control device 5, the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance can be set in various ways.

Further, the number of held balls and the values of various counters can be transmitted from the main controller 4 to the audio lamp control device 5 with a single held ball number command. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of various counters acquired with the starting winning and the number of balls held at the time when the starting winning is detected. When it is decided to execute the continuous notice performance, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of reserved pitches to which the continuous notice performance is added. Therefore, the control in the voice lamp control device 5 is made easier compared to the case where the number of balls on hold and the values of various counters are transmitted from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5 by separate commands. be able to.

<Steps S3914 and S3915>
As a result of the process in step S3910, if it is determined that the held pitch count command has not been received (step S3910: No), it is determined whether or not a confirmed display command has been received (step S3914). If it is determined that the final display command has been received (step S3914: Yes), a display demonstration command is set (step S3915), and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the final display command has not been received (step S3914: No), the process moves to step S3916.

<Step S3916>
If it is determined that the confirmed display command has not been received (step S3914: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3916). The special figure shift command is used when the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M decreases due to the start of the special figure game (fluctuating display of special figures). 1 holding area REA1 to 4th holding area REA4, or 1st holding area REB1 to 4th holding area REB4 of the 2nd special drawing holding storage area REB (see FIG. 8). Showing the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. This command indicates that information has shifted.

When the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3916: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3917, and when the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S3916: No), the process moves to step S3918. to move to.

<Step S3917>
When the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a special figure data setting process (step S3917) and returns to the main process.

Here, the special figure data setting process executed in step S3917 is the special figure validity information data (special figure This is the process of shifting (updating) the data (figure data). The special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) is an area corresponding to the special figure holding storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4, and is equivalent to the special figure holding storage area 412b. Special map data is stored. The special figure holding storage area corresponding areas (not shown) include the first special figure holding storage area REA, the second special figure holding storage area REB of the special figure holding storage area 412b, and the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8). It includes a first special figure pending storage area corresponding area, a second special figure pending storage area corresponding area, and a special figure execution area corresponding area, respectively. In addition, the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area is the first special figure holding storage area corresponding to the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4 (see FIG. 8) of the first special figure holding storage area REA in the special figure holding storage area 412b. It includes an area corresponding to the first to fourth reservation areas in the figure (not shown) and a first special symbol reservation number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number storage area (see FIG. 8). Furthermore, the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area corresponds to the first to fourth holding areas REB1 to REB4 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure holding storage area REB in the special figure holding storage area 412b. It includes an area corresponding to the first to fourth reservation areas in the figure, and an area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area (see FIG. 8).

<Step S3918>
If the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special figure hold command (step S3918). The first special figure reservation command includes information indicating that the second special figure reservation number M for the first special figure game increases, information regarding the second special figure reservation number M after the increase, and information regarding the increasing second reservation number M. It includes information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3919, and if the received command is not the first special figure hold command (step S3918: No), The process moves to step S3920.

<Step S3919>
If the received command is the second special figure reservation command (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special figure reservation information update process (step S3919) and returns to the main process.

Here, the first special figure holding information update process executed in step S3919 is performed in the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area. This is the process of adding (updating) special figure data). Specifically, in the first special figure holding information update process, the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 ( (See Figure 8), the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first vacant holding area corresponds to the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 in which the special figure validity information is stored. It is stored in the first to fourth reservation area corresponding areas (not shown) that are set as follows. For example, when special figure validity information is stored in the third holding area REA3 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure holding storage area REA in the special figure holding storage area 412b, the information corresponding to the third holding area REA3 is stored. The special figure data is stored in the set first special figure third reservation area corresponding area (not shown). In addition, in the first special figure reservation information update process, 1 is added to the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area. .

<Step S3920>
If the received command is not the first special figure hold command (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special figure hold command (step S3920). The second special figure reservation command includes information indicating that the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game increases, information regarding the second special figure reservation number M after the increase, and information regarding the increasing second reservation number M. It includes information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the received command is the second special figure holding command (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3921, and if the received command is not the second special figure holding command (step S3920: No), The process moves to step S3922 in FIG. 235.

<Step S3921>
If the received command is the second special figure reservation command (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special figure reservation information update process (step S3921) and returns to the main process.

Here, the second special figure holding information update process executed in step S3921 is performed in the second special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area. This is the process of adding (updating) special figure data). Specifically, in the second special figure holding information update process, the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 ( (see Figure 8), the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first vacant reservation area corresponds to the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 in which the special figure validity information is stored. It is stored in the second special chart first to fourth holding area corresponding areas (not shown) set by the following. For example, when the special figure validity information is stored in the third holding area REB3 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure holding storage area REB in the special figure holding storage area 412b, the information corresponding to the third holding area REB3 is stored. The special figure data is stored in the set second special figure third reservation area corresponding area (not shown). In addition, in the second special figure reservation information update process, 1 is added to the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area. .

<Step S3922>
If the received command is not the second special figure hold command (step S3920: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a small winning game start command, as shown in FIG. 235 (step S3922) . The small winning game start command is a command indicating to start a small winning game, and when starting the small winning game in step S3404 in the small winning game control process of FIG. 219 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. is set to

If the received command is a small winning game start command (step S3922: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3923, and if the received command is not a small winning game start command (step S3922: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3923. The process moves to step S3930.

<Steps S3923 and S3924>
If the received command is a small winning game start command (step S3922: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a profit display OP command has been received (step S3923). The profit display OP command is for setting the profit display opening performance of the first notification mode (see FIG. 222(A)) as the performance to be executed on the symbol display section 341 at the opening of the small winning game, and In the winning game control process, it is set in step S3409 when it is determined that the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is update information when a small winning game occurs, is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 121).

If the MPU 41 has received the profit display OP command (step S3923: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the profit display opening performance in the first notification mode (FIG. 222 ( A) is set (step S3924), and the process moves to step S3927.

<Steps S3925 and S3926>
If the profit display OP command has not been received (step S3923: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the loss display OP command has been received (step S3925). The loss display OP command is used to set the loss display opening performance in the second notification mode (see FIG. 222(B)) as the performance to be executed on the symbol display section 341 at the opening of the small winning game. In the win game control process, it is set in step S3410 when it is determined that the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is update information when a small win game occurs, is less than a predetermined value (for example, 121).

If the MPU 41 has received the loss display OP command (step S3925: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the loss display opening performance in the second notification mode (FIG. 222 ( B)) is set (step S3926), and the process moves to step S3927.

<Steps S3927 to S3929>
In step S3927, the MPU 41 sets a movable wing part operation performance that is a performance while the movable wing part 832 of the wing part device 83 is operating in the small winning game, and also A V winning effect is set when a game ball enters the V winning hole 833 of 83 (step S3928). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the small winning game flag indicating that the small winning game is in the playing state where the small winning game is being executed (step S3929), and ends the command determination process.

<Steps S3930 and S3931>
If the received command is not a small winning game start command (step S3922: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the received command is a small winning opening start command (step S3930). The small winning opening start command is a command indicating that the opening of the small winning game is started, and is set in step S3411 when the opening of the small winning game is started in the small winning game control process of FIG. 219. .

If the received command is a small winning opening start command (step S3930: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on a small winning opening start flag that starts the opening performance in the small winning game (step S3931), and executes the command determination process. end. On the other hand, when the received command is not a small winning opening start command (step S3930: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3932.

<Steps S3932 and S3933>
If the received command is not a small winning opening start command (step S3930: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the received command is a small winning opening end command (step S3932). The small win opening end command is a command indicating that the opening of the small win game is ended, and is set in step S3416 when the opening of the small win game is ended in the small win game control process of FIG. .

If the received command is a small winning opening end command (step S3932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the small winning opening end flag that ends the opening performance in the small winning game (step S3933), and executes the command determination process. end. On the other hand, if the received command is not the small winning opening end command (step S3932: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3934 in FIG. 236.

<Steps S3934 and S3935>
If the received command is not a small winning opening end command (step S3932: No), as shown in FIG. 236, the MPU 41 determines whether the received command is a movable blade operation start command (step S3934). . The movable wing part operation start command indicates that the operation of the movable wing part 832 of the wing accessory device 83 is started in the small winning game, and in the small winning game control process of FIG. It is set in step S3419 when the operation of the movable wing portion 832 of 83 is started.

When the received command is a movable wing operation start command (step S3934: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on a movable wing operation performance start flag that starts the movable wing operation performance in the small winning game (step S3935). ), the command determination process ends. On the other hand, if the received command is not a movable blade operation start command (step S3932: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3936 in FIG. 236.

<Steps S3936 to S3938>
If the received command is not a movable wing operation start command (step S3934: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the received command is a V winning command (step S3936). The V winning command indicates that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game, and in the small winning game control process in FIG. It is set in step S3427 when it is confirmed that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 833 of the accessory device 83.

If the received command is a V winning command (step S3936: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a V winning effect to notify that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83 (step S3937). ), furthermore, the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to ON (step S3938), and the command determination process ends. On the other hand, if the received command is not a V winning command (step S3936: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3939.

<Steps S3939 and S3940>
If the received command is not a V winning command (step S3936: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the received command is a small winning game end command (step S3939). The small winning game end command indicates that the small winning game ends, and is set in step S3438 when the small winning game is ended in the small winning game control process of FIG. 219.

If the received command is a small winning game end command (step S3939: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the small winning game performance end slug that ends the small winning game performance (movable wing operation performance) (step S3940). ), the command determination process ends. On the other hand, if the received command is not a small winning game end command (step S3939: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3941 in FIG. 237.

<Step S3941>
If the received command is not a small winning game end command (step S3939: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command, as shown in FIG. 237 (step S3941). The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start a jackpot game, and is set when starting a jackpot game in step S3505 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 225 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. .

When the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S3941: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3942, and when the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3941: No), the process moves to step S3944. to move to.

<Steps S3942 and S3943>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S3941: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game performance setting process (step S3942), sets the jackpot game in progress flag to ON (step S3943), and returns to the main process. .

In the jackpot game performance setting process, a process for setting a jackpot performance including an opening performance, opening/closing execution mode performance (round game performance and interval performance), and ending performance to be executed in the jackpot game is executed.

In addition, the jackpot game in progress flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed, and in the jackpot game performance control process described below, controls whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, that is, the progress of the jackpot game performance. referenced to determine whether or not to do so.

<Step S3944>
If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S3944). The opening start command is a command indicating to start the opening of the jackpot game, and is set when starting the opening in step S3509 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 225 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. .

If the received command is an opening start command (step S3944: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3945, and if the received command is not an opening start command (step S3944: No), the process moves to step S3946. do.

<Step S3945>
If the opening start command is received (step S3944: Yes), the MPU 52 sets the opening presentation start flag to ON (step S3945), and returns to the main process. The opening performance start flag is a flag for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game, and is referenced in the jackpot game performance control process described later to determine whether or not to start the opening performance.

<Step S3946>
If the received command is not an opening start command (step S3944: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening end command (step S3946).The opening end command ends the opening of the jackpot game. This is a command indicating that the opening is ended in step S3515 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 226 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an opening end command (step S3946: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3947, and if the received command is not an opening end command (step S3946: No), the process moves to step S3948. do.

<Step S3947>
If the opening end command is received (step S3946: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening performance end flag to ON (step S3947), and returns to the main process. The opening performance end flag is a flag that ends the opening performance of the jackpot game, and is referenced in the jackpot game performance control process described later to determine whether or not to end the opening performance.

<Step S3948>
If the received command is not an opening end command (step S3946: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command (step S3948). The round game start command is a command that indicates the start of the round game in the open/close execution mode and also indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is a command that indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is a command that indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is a command that indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time. In step S3518 in the control process, it is set when starting a round game in the opening/closing execution mode.

When the received command is a round game start command (step S3948: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3949, and when the received command is not a round game start command (step S3948: No), the process moves to FIG. The process moves to step S3951.

<Steps S3949 and S3950>
When the round game start command is received (step S3948: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game production start flag to ON (step S3949), and stores the round number information indicating what round the round game is in the RAM 512. (step S3950), and returns to the main process. The round game performance start flag is referred to in order to determine whether to start each round game performance of the opening/closing execution mode performance in the jackpot game performance control process to be described later.

<Step S3951>
If the received command is not a round game start command (step S3948: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command (step S3951). The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and the round game is ended in step S3530 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 227 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Set in case.

When the received command is a round game end command (step S3951: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3952, and when the received command is not a round game end command (step S3951: No), the process moves to step S3953. to move to.

<Step S3952>
When the round game end command is received (step S3951: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S3952), and returns to the main process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game performance in the jackpot game performance control process to be described later.

<Step S3953>
If the received command is not a round game end command (step S3951: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval start command (step S3953). The interval start command is a command indicating to start the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and the interval is started in step S3534 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 227 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Set when

Here, if the received command is an interval start command (step S3953: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3954, and if the received command is not an interval start command (step S3953: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3954. The process moves to S3955.

<Step S3954>
If the received command is an interval start command (step S3953: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval presentation start flag to ON (step S3954), and returns to the main process. The interval performance start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the interval performance in the jackpot game performance control process to be described later.

<Step S3955>
If the received command is not an interval start command (step S3953: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval end command (step S3955). The interval end command is a command indicating to end the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and ends the interval in step S3540 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 228 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Set in case.

Here, if the received command is an interval end command (step S3955: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3956, and if the received command is not an interval end command (step S3955: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3956. The process moves to S3957.

<Step S3956>
If the received command is an interval end command (step S3955: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to ON (step S3956), and returns to the main process. The interval performance end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the interval performance in the jackpot game performance control process described later.

<Step S3957>
If the received command is not an interval end command (step S3956: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command (step S3957). The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set when starting the ending in step S3543 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 227 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Ru.

Here, when the received command is an ending start command (step S3957: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3958, and when the received command is not an ending start command (step S3957: No), the process moves to step S3958. The process moves to S3959.

<Step S3958>
If the received command is an ending start command (step S3957: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON (step S3958), and returns to the main process. The ending performance start flag is referred to when determining whether to start the ending performance in the jackpot game performance control process described later.

<Step S3959>
If the received command is not an ending start command (step S3957: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending end command (step S3959). The ending end command is a command indicating that the ending of the jackpot game ends, and is set when ending the ending in step S3549 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 228 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Ru.

Here, if the received command is an ending end command (step S3959: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3960, and if the received command is not an ending end command (step S3959: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3960. The process moves to S3961.

<Step S3960>
If the received command is an ending end command (step S3959: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to ON (step S3960), and returns to the main process. The ending performance end flag is referred to when determining whether to end the ending performance in the jackpot game performance control process described later.

<Step S3961>
If the received command is not an ending end command (step S3959: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3961). The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set in step S3551 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 225 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 when the jackpot game is ended. Ru.

Here, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3962 when the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3961: Yes), and when the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3961: No), the process The process moves to step S3963.

<Step S3962>
If the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3961: Yes), the MPU 51 sets off the jackpot game flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed (step S3962), and returns to the main process.

<Step S3963>
If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3961: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4 (step S3963), and ends the command determination processing.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, with reference to FIG. 239, the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 will be described. Here, FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, a sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process with a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 239, in the sub-timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 performs counter update processing (step S4001), special figure game production control processing (step S4002), small hit game production control processing (step S4003), and jackpot game Performance control processing (step S4004) is executed.

[Counter update processing]
In the counter update process (step S4001), the MPU 51 executes update process of the performance pattern type counter, the first stop symbol type counter, the variable display counter, etc., which are update information. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the production type counter and the first stop symbol type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The production pattern type counter is used to determine the variation type (production pattern) based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Further, the first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to know the remaining variable display time, that the variable display is in progress, that the variable display of the symbol display section 341 has ended, etc.

[Special figure game production control processing]
In the special figure game performance control process (step S4002), the MPU 51 controls the special figure game performance according to the variation type (performance pattern) set in step S3903 of the command determination process in FIG. 234 when the special figure variation pattern command is received. Processing that controls progress is executed.

[Small winning game production control processing]
In the small winning game effect control process (step S4003), the MPU 51 controls the opening effect set in step S3923 or S3926 of the command determination process in FIG. 235 when the small winning game start command is received, and the movable effect set in step S3927. Processing is executed to control the progress of the small winning game performance according to the wing part operation performance and the V winning performance set in step S3928.

[Jackpot game production control processing]
In the jackpot game performance control process (step S4004), the MPU 51 performs a process of controlling the progress of the jackpot game performance according to the jackpot game performance set in step S3942 of the command determination process in FIG. 237 when the jackpot game start command is received. executed.

[Processing of display control device 6]
Next, each control executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 240 to 254. The processing of the MPU 631 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 5, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 637. There is a V interrupt process which is an update process executed when the MPU 631 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 631 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 5 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

[Main processing of display control device 6]
First, with reference to FIG. 240, the main processing executed by the MPU 631 in the display control device 6 will be described. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply control device 9 to the display control device 6 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 631 changes the instruction pointer 631a, which is update information provided in the MPU 631, to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration. ” and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 631a to the bus line 640. When the ROM controller 634b of the character ROM 634 detects that the address specified on the bus line 640 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR type ROM 634d in the buffer RAM 634c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 631. Then, the MPU 631 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 634 and starting execution of a process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 634a, the character ROM 634 will recognize that the address specified on the bus line 640 is "0000H". When detected, an update process must be executed in which one page of data, which is update information including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H", is read from the NAND flash memory 634a and set in the buffer RAM 634c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 634a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 634c, so the MPU 631 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 631, a problem arises in that the control of the symbol display section 341 in the display control device 6 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 634d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since this is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 631 via the bus line 640 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 634 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR type ROM 634d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 634c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 631. Therefore, since the MPU 631 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 631 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634 made up of the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow readout speed, control of the symbol display section 341 in the display control device 6 can be started immediately.

<Step S4101>
When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (step S4101), and the display control device 6 is activated so that various controls on the symbol display section 341 can be executed. to start. In the boot process, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, additional data table, transfer data table) are stored. is stored in the data table storage area 633b.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 631 are stored in the symbol display section 341, rather than being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. A character ROM 634 provided for storing data of images to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 634. The character ROM 634 is composed of a NAND flash memory 634a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 6 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access, so if the MPU 631 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 634a, the MPU 631 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 6 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the NAND flash memory 634a are stored in the program storage area 633a provided in the work RAM 633 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 633b is executed. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 631a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 631 uses the control program and the data transferred to the program storage area 633a without referring to the NAND flash memory 634a. , executes various processes using the data table storage area 633b.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634 constituted by the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow reading speed, the control program etc. is transferred to the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 631 can perform various controls by reading control programs etc. from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM with a high read speed, so that high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 6, and the pattern display By using the section 341, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 634d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 634a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 634a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 633a. Therefore, the character ROM 634 can start up the MPU 631 in a short time by simply adding the NOR type ROM 634d of extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 634 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. Can be done.

<Step S4102>
When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633 (step S4102). Specifically, processing is performed to initialize the MPU 631 and clear the memories in the work RAM 633, resident video RAM 635, and normal video RAM 636. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 633 as update information, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 637 is performed, the image controller 637 is instructed to draw and display an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen in the pattern display section 341. Instruct execution of processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the symbol display section 341. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the symbol display section 341 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the gaming machine. As a result, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the game machine 10 can be properly operated by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the pattern display section 341 immediately after power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not booting can be started.

<Step S4103>
Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 637 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 635a of the resident video RAM 635 (step S4103). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 634 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 635), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 637 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 634 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 635. The image is transferred to the image area 635a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 637 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 631. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 631 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 637 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 637 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 637 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 631 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 637 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 635a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

<Step S4104>
When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 635a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 637 through the process of step S4103, the power-on change A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image to the power-on variation image area 635b of the resident video RAM 635 (step S4104). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 634 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 635). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 635b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 635b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 635b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

<Step S4105>
When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 635b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 637 in the process of step S4104, the simple image display flag is then set. 633c is turned on (step S4105). As a result, while the simple image display flag 633c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 252(A)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 637 to transfer (see step S3002 in FIG. 252(B)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 633c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 is not transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 637 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 241(B)), the simple command A determination process (see step S4308 in FIG. 241(B)) and a simple display setting process (see step S4309 in FIG. 241(B)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this gaming machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 634a is used as the character ROM 634, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 635 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635, and the power-on main image is displayed as a pattern. By displaying it on the symbol display section 341, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 635, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the symbol display section 341. can do. Therefore, the display control device 6 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 while displaying the main image on the symbol display section 341 at power-on. can. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 at power-on, so the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 635 is Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation will stop.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the power is turned on, so that it can be confirmed that the symbol display section 341 has started operating without any problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 634a, which can be checked immediately and has a slow read speed as the character ROM 634, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 6 of the gaming machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is displayed on the symbol display section. 341, the player starts playing the game, a ball enters the first prize opening 314 (starting prize winning), and an instruction to start the special drawing game performance is sent from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device. 5, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation images shown in FIGS. You can display it and perform simple fluctuation effects. Therefore, even while the main image is being displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been drawn through the simple special symbol game performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the symbol display section 341, but the character ROM 634 is read out. Since it is constituted by the slow NAND flash memory 634a, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on becomes long. However, in this gaming machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple special figure game effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 635 after the power is turned on, so that immediately after the power is turned on, for example, To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while a main image is being displayed at power-on, such as immediately after power is restored.

<Step S4106>
After the process in step S4105, interrupt permission is set (step S4106), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in step S4106, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

[Command interrupt processing of display control device 6]
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 241(A). FIG. 241(A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 631 executes the command interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 241(A), in the command interrupt processing, received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 633 (step S4201). The command interrupt processing ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

[V interrupt processing of display control device 6]
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 241(B). FIG. 241(B) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process which is the update process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display section 341, the image of that image is By creating a drawing list (see FIG. 202) that is update information and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 637, the image controller 637 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image. .

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal, which is update information from the image controller 637, is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 637 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is sent to the MPU 631. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 637 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 637 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is finished, so it may not start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

<Steps S4301 to S4303>
Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 241(B), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 633c is on (step S4301), and if the simple image display flag 633c is not on, that is, , if it is off (step S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 635 has been completed, so instead of the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the effect image on the symbol display section 341, a command determination process (step S4302) is executed, and then a display setting process (step S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (step S4302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 5 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and the data table corresponding to the set display data table is set. The transfer data table to be transferred is set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. Further, if a continuous preview command is stored, an additional data table for continuous preview corresponding to the continuous preview image type is set in the additional data table buffer 633e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 4 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that the display variable pattern command, stop type command, continuous notice command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the special figure game effect or continuous notice effect selected by the main control device 4 and the audio lamp control device 5, and to execute the mode according to the mode. Image drawing can be controlled so that the effect image is displayed on the symbol display section 341. Note that details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 242 to 246.

In the display setting process (step S4303), based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table buffer 633e by the command determination process (step S4302), etc., in the symbol display section 341. Next, the content of one frame of image to be displayed is specifically specified. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 633d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 247 to 250.

<Step S4304>
After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (step S4304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the symbol display section 341, which is specified by the display setting process (step S4303) or the simple display setting process (step S4309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

<Step S4305>
Next, transfer setting processing is executed (step S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 633c is on, the image controller 637 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 635. Set instructions. Furthermore, while the simple image display flag 633c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the image controller 637 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 636a of the video RAM 636, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 5, continuous notification is sent to the image controller 637. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview performance and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636.

<Step S4306>
Next, drawing processing is executed (step S4306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (step S4304) and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (step S4305) are used. From this, an update process is executed in which a drawing list as update information shown in FIG. 202 is generated and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 637 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 637 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 254.

<Step S4307>
Next, updating processing of various counters, which are update information provided in the display control device 6, is executed (step S4307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of step S4307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 633, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop corresponds to the stop type (small hit, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. The type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbols after the special pattern game performance of the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display section 341 are finally set.

<Steps S4308 and S4309>
In the process of step S4301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag is on (step S4301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 635 has not been completed. In order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 196 on the symbol display section 341, a simple command determination process (step S4308) is executed, and then a simple display setting process (step S4309) is executed, and the steps in step S4304 are executed. Move to processing.

[Command determination processing of display control device 6]
Next, details of the interrupt processing command determination process executed in step S4302 of the V interrupt processing in FIG. 241(B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 254. First, FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing command determination processing.

<Steps S4401 to S4403>
As shown in FIG. 242, in the command determination process, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (step S4401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (step S4401: No). , ends the command determination process and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (step S4401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (step S4303 in FIG. 241) that the new command has been processed is set to on (step S4401: Yes). S4402), then the type of all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (step S4403).

<Steps S4404 and S4505>
First, it is determined whether or not there is a command for the number of reserved pitches for display among the unprocessed commands (step S4404), and if there is a command for the number of reserved pitches for display (step S4404: Yes), the number of reserved pitches for display is determined (step S4404). Command processing is executed (step S4405), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Held pitch count command processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 243(A), the reserved pitch count command process executed in step S4405 of the command determination process of the display control device 6 in FIG. 242 will be described. FIG. 243(A) is a flowchart showing the reserved pitch count command processing. This held pitch number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the held pitch number command for display received from the audio lamp control device 5.

As shown in FIG. 243(A), in the held pitch count command processing, first, the new held pitch count is notified to the display setting process (step S4303 in FIG. 241) that the held pitch count command for display has been processed in the on state. The command flag is turned on (step S4501), and then the held pitch number information included in the held pitch count command for display is acquired (step S4502). In addition, in the process of step S4502, if two or more held pitch count commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, the held pitch number information is acquired from the held pitch count command for display that was stored last. This makes it possible to obtain the latest information on the number of balls on hold.

Then, among the number discrimination flags provided for each number of held balls, the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of held balls acquired in the process of step S4502 is turned on, and the number discrimination flags corresponding to the other numbers of held balls are turned off. (step S4503), and the process returns to the command determination process in FIG.

As a result, in the display setting process, when the new number of held balls command flag is on, by referring to the number discrimination flag, the number of held balls corresponding to the number of held balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag that is set to on is displayed. The pending image data is expanded so that it is displayed on the symbol display section 341.

<Steps S4406 and S4507>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in FIG. 242, if it is determined in the process of step S4404 that there is no command for the number of reserved pitches for display (step S4404: No), then, among the unprocessed commands, It is determined whether or not there is a command (step S4406), and if there is a confirmed command for display (step S4406: Yes), a confirmed command process is executed (step S4407), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Confirm command processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 243(B), regarding the confirmed command process executed in step S4407 of the command determination process of the display control device 6 executed in step S4407 of the command determination process of the display control device 6 in FIG. explain. FIG. 243(B) is a flowchart showing confirmed command processing. This confirmation command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

As shown in FIG. 243(B), in the confirmed command processing, the confirmed command flag that notifies the display setting process (step S4303 in FIG. 241) that the display confirmed command has been received in the ON state is set to ON ( Step S4601) ends this process and returns to the command determination process in FIG. 242. As a result, in the display setting process, the state of the confirmed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that display of the confirmed display effect is started on the symbol display section 341. do. Furthermore, when setting the display of a special figure game effect is processed, if the confirmation command flag does not turn on even after the effect time set for that special figure game effect has elapsed, the restart effect is set in the symbol display section 341. Execute the display setting process so that it is displayed on the screen.

<Steps S4408 and S4509>
Returning to the command determination process in FIG. 242, if it is determined in the process of step S4406 that there is no confirmed command for display (step S4406: No), then there is a demo command for display among the unprocessed commands. It is determined whether there is a display demo command (step S4408), and if there is a display demo command (step S4408: Yes), the demo command processing is executed (step S4409) and the process returns to step S4401.

[Demo command processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 243(C), the demonstration command process executed in step S4409 of the command determination process of the display control device 6 in FIG. 242 will be described. FIG. 243(C) is a flowchart showing demo command processing. This demo command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display demo command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

<Steps S4701 and S4702>
As shown in FIG. 243(C), in the demo command process, first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 633b and set in the display data table buffer 633d (step S4701). . Next, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 633e, and in the demonstration display data table, it is necessary to newly transfer the image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636. Since the drawing of the image is specified so that the corresponding transfer data table is not prepared in the data table storage area 633b, null data is also written to the transfer data table buffer 633f to clear its contents (step S4702).

<Steps S4703 to S4705>
Next, time data corresponding to the demonstration performance is set in the time counter 633i (step S4703), and the pointer 633g is initialized to 0 (step S4704). Then, a demo display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is displayed in the on state in the symbol display section 341 is set to on, and a confirmed display flag indicating that a confirmed display effect is displayed in the symbol display section 341 in the on state. is set to OFF, and a confirmed display flag indicating that a confirmed display performance is in progress is set to OFF (step S4705), and the command process is ended and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this demo command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 633g, which is the update information initialized by the processing of step S4701, is updated, and the display data table buffer 633d is updated by the processing of step S4701. The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 633g is extracted from the set demonstration display data table, and the content of one frame of image to be displayed next in the pattern display section 341 is specified. In addition, in the display setting process, the time of the demonstration performance specified in the demonstration display data table is measured using the time counter 633i, which is updated information in which time data corresponding to the demonstration performance has been set in the process of step S4703. At the same time, based on the states of the demo display flag and final display flag, which are the update information set by the process of step S4705, the demonstration performance in the demonstration display data table is completed by timing of the display setting control time counter 633i, which is the update information. If it is determined that the demo performance has been performed, the demonstration performance is controlled to be displayed again as the next performance to be displayed.

<Steps S4410 and S4511>
Returning to the command determination process in FIG. 242, if it is determined in the process of step S4408 that there is no display demo command (step S4408: No), then the display variation pattern command is included in the unprocessed commands. If there is a variable pattern command for display (step S4410: Yes), variable pattern command processing is executed (step S4411), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Variation pattern command processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 244(A), the variable pattern command process executed in step S4411 of the command determination process of the display control device 6 in FIG. 242 will be described. FIG. 244(A) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

<Step S4801>
As shown in FIG. 244(A), in the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is It is read from the data table storage area 633b and set in the display data table buffer 633d (step S4801).

Here, since the main controller 4 always determines the start of the fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display fluctuation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process will not be performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it may be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In the process of step S4801, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is The data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 633d, in reality, a special figure game production with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will be displayed. If the instruction has been given by the main controller 4, the confirmation command (display (confirmation command) is received, and the fluctuating decorative pattern suddenly stops being displayed, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 633d, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even if a special figure game production having a variable time period is instructed by the main controller 4, as will be described later, after the special figure game production according to the display data table buffer 633d is completed, the main control device 4 The display of the symbol display section 341 is controlled by the display setting process so that the restart effect is displayed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the player. can be visually recognized as part of the special figure game production, and the user can continue to watch the fluctuations of the ornamental symbols on the symbol display section 341 without feeling any discomfort until the stop display of the ornamental symbols is confirmed.

<Steps S4802 and S4803>
Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in step S4801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 633b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 633f (step S4802). Then, by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 633e, its contents are cleared (step S4803).

<Step S4804>
Thereafter, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set in the process of step S4801 is turned on, and Data table discrimination flags corresponding to other variable display data tables are set to OFF (step S4804). In the display setting process, it is determined to which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d corresponds by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of step S4804. can be easily determined. Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is a contradiction between the fluctuation pattern of the set fluctuation display data table and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later, and if there is a discrepancy, As will be described later, the display data table corresponding to the special fluctuation is set in the display data table buffer 633d.

<Steps S4805 to S4808>
Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for fluctuation set in the display data table buffer 633d in the process of step S4801, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 633i (step S4805 ), the pointer 633g is initialized to 0 (step S4806). Then, the confirmed command flag, demo display flag, and confirmed display flag are all set to OFF (step S4807), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (step S4808). The pattern command ends and returns to command determination processing.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 633g, which is the update information initialized by the process of step S4806, the display data table buffer 633d is updated by the process of step S4801. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g is extracted from the variable display data table set in The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 633g is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 633f by the process of S4802, and the image data of the necessary sprite is extracted in the set variable display data table. The image controller 637 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636 in advance.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 633i, which is the update information in which the variable time data has been set in the process of step S4805, is used to measure the time of the special figure game performance specified in the variable display data table, and When it is determined that the special figure game effect in the display data table for If the confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within a predetermined time after the end of the game performance, the setting of the display is controlled so that the restart performance is displayed on the symbol display section 341.

Here, if both the display fixed command and the display variation pattern command are stored as unprocessed commands in the command buffer area, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display fixed command, the display Since the special figure game effect associated with the variable pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variable pattern command for display. In contrast, in this command determination process, it is determined whether there is a confirmed display command first, so the confirmed command processing, which is the process that corresponds to the display fixed command, is always executed first. The process corresponding to the variable pattern command for use is executed later, and the confirmed command flag set by the confirmed command for display can be set to off by overwriting, as in the process of step S4807. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be given priority over the display confirmation command, and the special pattern game performance associated with the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 with priority.

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored as unprocessed commands in the command buffer area, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display demo command, the display Since the special figure game effect associated with the variable pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variable pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, the presence or absence of the display demo command is determined first, so the demo command processing, which is the process corresponding to the display demo command, is always executed first. The process corresponding to the variable pattern command is executed later, and as in the process of step S4801, the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d by the display demo command is overwritten with the variable display data table. be able to. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be given priority over the display demonstration command, and the special figure game production associated with the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 with priority.

<Steps S4412 and S4413>
Returning to the command determination process in FIG. 242, if it is determined in the process of step S4410 that there is no display variation pattern command (step S4410: No), then the display stop type is included in the unprocessed commands. It is determined whether there is a command (step S4412), and if there is a display variation type command (step S4411: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (step S4413), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Stop type command processing]
Here, the stop type command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 244(B). FIG. 244(B) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed in step S4413 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in FIG. 242. This stop type command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

<Steps S4901 to S4903>
As shown in FIG. 244(B), in the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information (small hit, front/back off reach, reach other than front/back off, or completely off) indicated by the display stop type command is handled. The stop type table is determined (step S4901), and the value of the stop type counter, which is update information that is updated every time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 241(B)) is executed, is determined. By comparison, the stop symbols displayed on the symbol display section 341 after the special symbol game performance are finally set (step S4902).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of step S4542 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to off (step S4903).

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since variation based on the data table has started, the step Offset information from the stopped symbols (symbol offset information) set by the process of S4902 is described. In the task processing in the above-mentioned V interrupt processing (step S4304 in FIG. 241(B)), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the processing in step S4902 is performed from the stop symbol discrimination flag set in step S4543. The decorative pattern to be actually displayed is specified by specifying the stop pattern set by and adding the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop pattern. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified decorative pattern is stored is specified. In addition, the image data corresponding to the decorative pattern is stored in the decorative pattern area 635d of the resident video RAM 635, as described above.

<Step S4904>
After the process in step S4903, the comparison flag is turned on (step S4904), this stop type command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process in FIG. 242. By turning on this comparison flag, in the display setting process, there is no contradiction between the variation pattern of the variation display data table set by the above-described variation pattern command setting process and the stop symbol set by the process of step S4902. If there is a contradiction, a display data table corresponding to the special fluctuation is set in the display data table buffer 633d, as will be described later.

Note that since the main controller 4 always determines the start of fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of step S4901, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely off, and the stop Determine the type table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of step S4902.

If a stop symbol corresponding to a jackpot is set, the stop symbol of the jackpot will be displayed on the symbol display section 341 even if it is actually a miss, and the player will not be able to play the game. There is a possibility that the reliability of the gaming machine 10 may be lowered because the player may be misled into thinking that the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 has become a jackpot. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss, in reality, if it is a jackpot, even if the stop symbol that is a complete miss is displayed on the symbol display section 341, Since the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, it is possible to please the player.

<Steps S4414 and S4415>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in FIG. 242, if it is determined in the process of step S4412 that there is no display stop type command (step S4412: No), then a continuous notice command is included among the unprocessed commands. It is determined whether there is a continuous notice command (step S4414), and if there is a continuous notice command (step S4414: Yes), continuous notice command processing is executed (step S4415), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Continuous notice command processing]
Here, details of continuous notice command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 245(A). FIG. 245(A) is a flowchart showing continuous notice command processing executed in step S4415 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in FIG. 242. This continuous notice command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the continuous notice command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

<Steps S5001 and S5002>
As shown in FIG. 245(A), in the continuous notice command process, first, the transfer setting process of the V interrupt process (step S4305 in FIG. 241(A)) is notified that the continuous notice command has been processed in the ON state. A new continuous notice command flag is set on (step S5001). Next, an additional data table for continuous preview corresponding to the continuous preview image type (one of "bubbles", "egg", "chick", "chicken", and "flock of chickens") indicated by the continuous preview command is determined. , reads the determined additional data table for continuous notice from the data table storage area 633b, and sets it in the additional data table buffer 633e (step S5002).

As a result, in the display setting process, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d corresponds to the continuous preview additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e in the process of step S4552. The display contents of the next one frame of images in the symbol display section 341 are specified so that the continuous preview performance is additionally displayed.

<Step S5003>
Then, among the continuous notice determination flags set for each continuous notice image type, the continuous notice judgment flag corresponding to the continuous notice image type included in the continuous notice command is turned on, and the continuous notice judgment flag corresponding to the continuous notice image type included in the continuous notice command is turned on, and the continuous notice judgment flag corresponding to the continuous notice image type included in the continuous notice command is turned on The advance notice determination flag is set to OFF (step S4553), this continuous advance notice command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process in FIG. 242.

In the transfer setting process of the V interrupt process (step S4305 in FIG. 241(A)), when it is detected that the new continuous notice command flag set in the process of step S5001 is turned on, additional data is transferred by the continuous notice command process. It is determined that a predetermined additional data table for continuous notice is set in the table buffer 633e, and based on the continuous notice determination flag set by the process of step S4553, it corresponds to the additional data table for continuous notice set in the additional data table buffer 633e. Specify the continuous notice type. Then, an instruction is given to the image controller 637 to transfer the image data necessary to display the specified continuous preview type.

<Steps S4416 and S4417>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in FIG. 242, if it is determined in the process of step S4414 that there is no continuous notice command (step S4414: No), then there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a back image change command (step S4416: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (step S4417), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Back image change command processing]
Here, the back image change command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 245(B). FIG. 245(B) is a flowchart showing the back image change command process executed in step S4417 of the command determination process of the display control device 6 in FIG. 242. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

<Steps S5101 and S5102>
As shown in FIG. 245(B), in the back image change command process, first, the back image change is notified to the transfer setting process (step S2405) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. The flag is set on (step S5101). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back surface A to back surface C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image discrimination flags are turned on. The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the image type is set to OFF (step S5102), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing in FIG. 242.

In the transfer setting process of the V interrupt process (step S4305 in FIG. 241(A)), when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process in step S5101 is turned on, the flag is set in the process in step S5102. The changed back image type is specified from the back image discrimination flag. When the identified back image type is back B or back C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 637 so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images is transferred from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636.

Furthermore, in the task processing of the V interrupt processing (step S4304 in FIG. 241(A)), it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C will be displayed, depending on the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table. If so, the type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified from the back image discrimination flag set in step S5102, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the back image type is The RAM type (resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636) in which image data corresponding to the image range is stored and the address of that RAM are specified.

Note that since the player does not operate the operation button 20 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. There should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is also a risk that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of step S5102, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the gaming machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the gaming machine 10.

<Steps S4418 and S4419>
Returning to the command determination process in FIG. 242, if it is determined in the process of step S4416 that there is no rear image change command (step S4416: No), then there is no operation button operation command among the unprocessed commands. It is determined whether there is an operation button operation command (step S4418), and if there is an operation button operation command (step S4418: Yes), operation button operation command processing is executed (step S4419), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Operation button operation command processing]
Here, the operation button operation command processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 246(A). FIG. 246(A) is a flowchart showing the operation button operation command process executed in step S4419 of the command determination process of the display control device 6 in FIG. 242. This operation button operation command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the operation button operation command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

As shown in FIG. 246(A), in the operation button operation command, the operation button operation flag indicating that the operation button was operated in the on state is set to on (step S5201), this processing is ended, and the command Return to determination processing.

In the display setting process of the V interrupt process (step S4303 in FIG. 241(A)), the super reach selection screen is displayed on the symbol display section 341 according to the variable display data table based on the operation button operation flag set in the process in step S5201. If it is detected that the operation button has been operated while the super reach is being displayed, a process is executed to update the type of super reach to be displayed later. This allows the player to select his or her favorite super reach performance.

<Steps S4420 and S4421>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in FIG. 242, if it is determined in the process of step S4418 that there is no operation button operation command (step S4418: No), then whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands or not. If there is an error command (step S4420: Yes), error command processing is executed (step S4421), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Error command processing]
Here, error command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 246(B). FIG. 246(B) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed in step S4421 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in FIG. 242. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 5.

As shown in FIG. 246(B), in the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (step S5301). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (step S5302). The command processing is ended and the process returns to the command determination processing in FIG. 242.

In the display setting process of the V interrupt process (step S4303 in FIG. 241(A)), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process in step S5301, the display setting process (step S4303 in FIG. 241(A)) The type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag, and processing is executed to display a warning image corresponding to the error type on the symbol display section 341.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S5302, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. . As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the symbol display section 341, allowing players and hall personnel to accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

<Step S4822>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in FIG. 242, if it is determined in the process of step S4420 that there is no error command (step S4420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (step S4422), the process returns to step S4401.

In the process of step S4401, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (step S4401 :Yes), the processes of steps S4402 to S4422 are executed again. Then, the processes of steps S4401 to S4422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of step S4401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, This command determination process ends.

Note that the simple command determination process (step S4308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 633c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 241(B)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Only commands and display stop type commands are extracted and processes corresponding to each command are defined command processing (see FIG. 243(B)), variable pattern command processing (see FIG. 244(A)), and stop type. Command processing (see FIG. 244(B)) is executed, and other commands are discarded without executing the processing corresponding to the commands.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 244(A)) executed in this case, in the processing of step S4801, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is changed to the display data table buffer 633d. In addition, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 635a and the power-on variation image area 635b of the resident video RAM 635. Therefore, in the process of step S4802, null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 633f and its contents are cleared.

[Display setting processing]
Next, the display setting process (step S4303) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 in FIG. 241(B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 250. Here, FIGS. 247 and 248 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

<Steps S5401 and S5402>
As shown in FIG. 247, in the display setting process, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (step S5401), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (step S5401: No). , it is determined that no new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process skips steps S5402 to S5410 and proceeds to step S5411. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (step S5401: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (step S5402), Through the processing from S5403 to S5410, processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

<Steps S5403 and S5404>
In the process of step S5403, it is determined whether the new held pitch count command flag is on (step S5403), and if the new held pitch count command flag is on (step S5403: Yes), the previous command determination process In step S5404, it is determined that the command for the number of reserved pitches for display has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (step S5404).

[Hold image setting process]
Here, details of the pending image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 249(A). FIG. 249(A) is a flowchart showing the pending image setting process. This pending image setting process is performed using image data that causes the pattern display section 341 to display a pending pitch number symbol corresponding to the number of pending pitches notified from the audio lamp control device 5 in accordance with the processing of the display pending pitch number command. This is the process to expand the .

<Steps S5501 and S5502>
As shown in FIG. 249(A), in the hold image setting process, first, the number discrimination flag is referred to, and the number of held balls symbols for the number of held balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag set to on are displayed on the symbol display section 341. The reserved image data to be displayed in the small area is developed (step S5501). In the task processing of the V interrupt processing (step S4304 in FIG. 249(A)), based on this expanded pending image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that constitutes the pending image is specified, and First, determine the various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

In the hold image setting process, after the process in step S5501, the new hold pitch count command is set to OFF (step S5502), and the process returns to the display setting process in FIG. 247.

<Steps S5405 and S5406>
Returning to the explanation of the display setting process in FIG. 247, if it is determined that the new pending pitch count command flag is not on, that is, off, after the pending image setting process (step S5404) or in the process of step S5403 ( Step S5403: No), then it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (step S5405). If the error occurrence flag is on (step S5405: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (step S5406).

[Warning image setting process]
Here, the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 249(B). FIG. 249(B) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing.

<Steps S5601 and S5602>
As shown in FIG. 249(B), the warning image setting process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the pattern display section 341, and first refers to the error determination flag. , develops warning image data that causes the symbol display section 341 to display error warning images corresponding to all error determination flags set to on (step S5601).

In the V-interrupt processing task process (step S4304 in FIG. 241), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and the display Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of step S5601, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (step S5602), and the process returns to the display setting process of FIG. 247.

<Steps S5407 and S5408>
Returning to the explanation of the display setting process in FIG. 247, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, off after the warning image setting process (step S5406) or in the process of step S5405 (step S5405: No), then it is determined whether the operation button operation flag is on (step S5407). If the operation button operation flag is on (step S5407: Yes), operation button operation processing is executed (step S5408).

[Operation button operation processing]
Here, the operation button operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 249(C). FIG. 249(C) is a flowchart showing the operation button operation process. In the operation button operation processing, when the operation button 20 is operated by the player while the selection screen for selecting the display mode of the super reach is displayed on the symbol display section 341, the operation button operation process changes the super reach to be displayed according to the operation. This is a process for selecting a mode.

<Steps S5701 and S5702>
As shown in FIG. 249(C), in the operation button operation process, first, after setting the operation button operation flag to OFF (step S5701), it is determined whether or not the super reach selection screen is displayed on the symbol display section 341. It is determined (step S5702). This super reach selection screen is displayed on the symbol display section 341 according to the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 633d, and the display for variation set during the V interrupt process executed last time. When the image controller 637 is instructed to draw a sprite for the super reach selection screen based on the data table, it is determined that the super reach selection screen is being displayed on the symbol display section 341.

<Step S5703>
In the process of step S5702, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is not displayed on the symbol display section 341 (step S5702: No), the operation button operation process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process of FIG. 247. . On the other hand, as a result of the process in step S5702, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the symbol display section 341 (step S5702: Yes), the super reach type flag provided for each super reach display mode is Among them, the super reach type flags are updated so that only the super reach type flag corresponding to one display mode is turned on and the other super reach type flags are set to off in accordance with a predetermined order (step S5703). , returns to the display setting process in FIG. 247.

In this embodiment, when specifying the display mode of super reach in the mode selected by the player in the display data table for variation, the drawing content corresponding to the display mode of each super reach is defined for each address. In the display setting process, when developing the contents of the display data table in the process of step S5412 described later, only the drawing content corresponding to the display mode of the super reach with the super reach type flag turned on is extracted. As a result, during task processing, the type of sprite (displayed object) that corresponds to the display mode of the selected Super Reach is specified, and for each sprite, various information necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc. Since the parameters are set, the super reach effect is displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the selected display mode.

<Steps S5409 and S5410>
Returning to the explanation of the display setting process in FIG. 247, if it is determined that the operation button operation flag is not on, that is, off after the operation button operation process (step S5408) or in the process of step S5407 (step S5407 : No), it is determined whether the comparison flag is on (step S5409). If the comparison flag is on (step S5409: Yes), comparison processing is executed (step S5410).

[Comparison processing]
Here, details of the comparison process will be described with reference to FIG. 250. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the comparison process. This process is performed especially when the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d based on the display variation pattern command is inconsistent with the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. The figure game effect is changed to a special variable effect in which decorative symbols are displayed in a high-speed variable manner until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 4 via the audio lamp control device 5 is received. This is a process for

<Steps S5801 and S5802>
As shown in FIG. 250, in the comparison process, first, among the data table discrimination flags, a data table discrimination flag that is set to the on state is identified, and from the identified data table discrimination flag, the display data table buffer 633d The type of the variable display data table stored in is specified (step S5801). Next, among the stopped symbol discrimination flags, the stopped symbol discrimination flag that is set to the ON state is specified, and the set stopped symbol is specified from the specified stopped symbol discrimination flag (step S5802).

<Steps S5803 and S5804>
Then, it is determined whether the type of the variation display data table specified by the process of step S5802 matches the stop symbol specified by the process of step S5802 (step S5803). As described above, the display data table for variation is prepared for each variation pattern, and each variation pattern includes one for miss, one for small hit, etc. Therefore, in the process of step S5803, for example, if the stop symbol is set to a jackpot symbol even though the variation display data table corresponds to a variation pattern for losing, it is determined that these do not match. do.

In the process of step S5803, if it is determined that there is a match (step S5803: Yes), the process moves to step S5808, and after setting the comparison flag to OFF (step S5808), the process returns to the display setting process of FIG. 247. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no match (step S5803: No), first, the special variation display data table in which the special variation is defined is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and the additional data table buffer 633e and the transfer data By writing Null data into each table buffer 633f, their contents are cleared (step S5804).

<Steps S5805 to S5808>
Next, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the special stop symbol (for example, symbols displayed as "3", "4", and "1" from the left column) is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. is set to OFF (step S5805), and time data corresponding to the performance time of the special variable performance is set in the time counter 633i (step S5806). In addition, as mentioned above, the special variation effect displays decorative patterns in high-speed variation until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) sent from the main control device 4 via the audio lamp control device 5 is received. Therefore, the performance time is set to a long time (for example, 90 seconds). Therefore, 90 seconds (90000 milliseconds)÷20 milliseconds=4500 is set in the time counter 633i as update information as time data corresponding to the production time of the special variation production.

Then, the pointer 633g as update information is initialized to 0 (step S5807), the comparison flag is set to OFF (step S5808), and the process returns to the display setting process.

In this way, if the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d based on the display variation pattern command is inconsistent with the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command, a special Since the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 633d, the symbol display section 341 displays a special variation effect in which the decorative symbols continue to vary at high speed. Since a special stop symbol is set as the stop pattern, when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 4 via the audio lamp control device 5 is received, the special stop symbol is set as the stop pattern. can be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display section 341.

Here, if the variable effect pattern instructed by the main control device 4 via the audio lamp control device 5 and the stop symbol to be displayed when the variable effect is stopped and displayed do not match, the display control device 6 There is a possibility that the fluctuating effect or the fixed display effect cannot be performed while correctly reflecting the results of the lottery conducted in step 4. On the other hand, in this gaming machine 10, in such a case, a special fluctuation effect is performed, and after the fluctuation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special miss is displayed as confirmed on the symbol display section 341, so that the main controller 4 Even if the lottery result is a loss, it is possible to prevent a jackpot confirmation display performance from being erroneously performed on the symbol display section 341. Furthermore, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display section 341, if the lottery result in the main controller 4 is a jackpot, the gaming state in the actual gaming machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state, so the player can You can continue playing with peace of mind. Furthermore, by making the confirmation display a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that the gaming machine 10 may be in a jackpot state even if the confirmation display is off. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy because the gaming machine 10 enters a jackpot state even though the confirmed display is a failure.

<Step S5411>
Returning to the explanation of the display setting process in FIG. 247, after the comparison process (step S5410) or in the process of step S5409, if it is determined that the comparison flag is not on, that is, it is off (step S5409: No), Pointer update processing is executed (step S5411).

[Pointer update processing]
Here, pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process is performed by selecting the corresponding drawing content or transfer from the display data table, additional data table, and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d, additional data table buffer 633e, and transfer data table buffer 633f, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 633g that specifies the address from which the transfer data information of the target image data is to be obtained.

<Step S5901>
As shown in FIG. 251, in the pointer update process, 1 is first added to the pointer 633g, which is update information (step S5901). That is, the pointer 633g is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 633g is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 633d, the value will be updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

<Steps S5902 to S5905>
After the value of the pointer 633g, which is update information, is updated by the update process in step S5901, the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 633g is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d. It is determined whether there is one (step S5902). If the result is End information (step S5902: Yes), it means that the pointer 633g has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d. .

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is a demonstration display data table or a restart display data table (step S5903), and the demo display data table or restart display data table is determined (step S5903). If it is a data table (step S5903: Yes), the pointer 633g is set to 1 (step S5904), and the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d is added. The time data corresponding to is set in the time counter 633i (step S5905), and the process moves to step S5907. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so the symbol display section 341 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect or the restart effect. be able to.

<Step S5906>
In the process of step S5903, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is neither a demonstration display data table nor a restart display data table (step S5903: No), the update information is The value of a certain pointer 633g is subtracted by 1 (step S5906), and the process moves to step S5907. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, for example, a variable display data table or a fixed display data table, , the drawing content of the previous address in which the End information is written is always developed, so it is possible to display the last image specified in the display data table in the pattern display section 341 in a stopped state. can.

As a result of the process in step S5902, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d, if it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 633g after being updated in the process in step S5901 is not End information, step The process skips steps S5903 to S5905 and moves to step S5907.

<Steps S5907 to S5909>
In the process of step S5907, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is on, and if the confirmed command flag is not on but off (step S5907: No), the pointer update process is immediately terminated, and the pointer update process shown in FIG. Return to display setting processing. On the other hand, if the confirmed command flag is on (step S5907: Yes), it means that a confirmed command (confirmed command for display) has been received from the main controller 4 via the audio lamp control device 5, so the display data table The value of the pointer 633g is set to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where End information is stored in the display data buffer set in the buffer 633d (step S5908), and the value of the time counter, which is update information, is set. is set to 1 (step S5909), and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, when a confirmation command is received, in the display setting process, it is possible to develop the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table and to control the start of the confirmation display performance.

<Step S5412>
Returning to the explanation of the display setting process in FIG. 247, after the pointer update process, the display data table and additional data table set in the display data table buffer 633d and additional data table buffer 633e are updated by the pointer update process. The drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 633g are expanded (step S5412). In the task processing of the V-interrupt processing (step S4304 in FIG. 241(B)), an image is constructed based on the drawing content developed in the process of step S5412, along with the previously developed pending image, warning image, etc. The type of sprite (displayed object) is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite. Note that if Null data is written in the additional data table, it is assumed that there is no sprite to be added, and the subsequent processing is executed. Further, when the additional data table buffer 633e is cleared with Null data, the Null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 633e.

<Steps S5413 to S5421>
Next, an update process is performed in which the value of the time counter 633i, which is update information, is subtracted by 1 (step S5413), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 633i after the subtraction is 0 or less (step S5414). If the value of the time counter 633i is 1 or more (step S5414: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 633i is 0 or less (step S5414: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, a confirmation command (display confirmation command ) should be transmitted, so in the subsequent process of step S5415, it is checked whether the confirmed command flag is on (step S5415).

As a result, if the confirmed command flag is on (step S5415: Yes), it means that a confirmed command (display confirmed command) has been received from the main controller 4 via the audio lamp control device 5. The final display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 633e and transfer data table buffer 633f, respectively, thereby clearing their contents (step S5416). Next, time data corresponding to the performance time of the confirmed display is set in the time counter 633i, which is update information (step S5417), and further, the value of the pointer 633g, which is update information, is initialized to 0 (step S5418). Then, the confirmed command flag is set to OFF (step S5419), and then the confirmed display flag is set to ON (step S5420), which indicates that the confirmed display performance is being performed in the ON state, and the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are left unchanged. It is copied to the previously stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 633 (step S5421), and the process returns to the V interrupt process in FIG. 241(B).

As a result, when a display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 633d, a confirmation command (confirmation for display When a command) is received, the drawing contents can be set so that the final display effect of the stop symbol in the special figure game effect is displayed on the symbol display section 341. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the symbol display section 341 can be easily changed to the final display performance. In addition, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no large load placed on the MPU 631. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 6, various types of effect images can be displayed on the symbol display section 341.

In addition, the previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of step S5421 is used to specify the decorative symbol to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the next special symbol game performance. That is, as mentioned above, the display of decorative symbols in a special pattern game performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous special pattern game performance, and in the variable display data table, Until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on, symbol offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous special symbol game performance is written. In the task processing of the V interrupt processing (step S4304 in FIG. 241(B)), from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed, the previous line is displayed from the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag set in step S5421. The decorative pattern to be actually displayed is specified by specifying the stop pattern of the special pattern game performance that has been received, and by adding pattern offset information acquired by display setting processing to the specified stop pattern. As a result, the special pattern game performance is started from the stopped symbol in the previous special pattern game performance.

<Steps S5422 to S5427>
In the process of step S5415, if the confirmed command flag is not on but off (step S5415: No), the process moves to step S5422 shown in FIG. 248, and it is determined whether the confirmed display flag is on ( Step S5422). If the confirmed display flag is on (step S5422: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of step S5414 (step S5414: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is turned off. After setting (step S5423), the display data table for mo is set in the display data table buffer 633d (step S5424), and then time data corresponding to the presentation time of data display is set in the time counter 633i which is update information. (Step S5425). Then, the pointer 633g is initialized to 0 (step S5426), and the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed is set to on (step S5427), and the V interrupt processing in FIG. 241(B) is executed. finish.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next special figure game effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the time the confirmed display effect ends, the In addition, the drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the symbol display section 341.

Note that the branch condition of step S5422: Yes is satisfied when the final display effect is performed, and in this case, both the additional data table buffer 633e and the transfer data table buffer 633f are Contents have been cleared. Therefore, in the process of step S5424, the clearing process of those data table buffers is omitted. Thereby, the processing load on the MPU 631 can be reduced.

<Step S5428>
In the process of step S5422, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (step S5422: No), it is then determined whether the demo display flag is on (step S5428). If the demo display flag is on (step S5428: Yes), the determination result in the process of step S5414 (step S5414: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process performs various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so that the audio lamp control device 5 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the symbol display section 341 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

<Steps S5429 and S5430>
In the process of step S5428, if the demo display flag is not on but off (step S5428: No), the result of the determination in the process of step S5414 (step S5414: Yes) is that the special figure game production has ended. means. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a predetermined period of time has passed after the end of the special figure game effect, in order to start the restart effect, the display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the special figure game effect is changed to the display data table. An update process is executed to add 1 to the restart timer counter, which is update information initialized to 0 in accordance with the setting in the buffer 633d (step S5429), and the value of the restart timer counter after the addition is a predetermined value. It is determined whether the value has become the value (step S5430).

<Steps S5431 to S5433>
If the restart timer counter is not the predetermined value (step S5430: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process in FIG. 241(B). If the restart timer counter, which is update information, is a predetermined value (step S5430: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and the additional data table buffer 633e and transfer data table buffer 633f are set. By writing null data to each of them, their contents are cleared (step S5431). Then, time data, which is update information corresponding to the production time of the restart production, is set in the time counter 633i (step S5432), and further, the value of the pointer 633g, which is update information, is initialized to 0 (step S5433), Returning to the V interrupt processing in FIG. 241(B).

As a result, in the display control device 6, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the decorative symbols were stopped and displayed with the end of the special figure game performance, the confirmation transmitted from the main control device 4 via the audio lamp control device 5 If the command (display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the pattern display section 341. As described above, since the restart performance is a performance that causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image in which the decorative symbols are vibrated, the player can see that the fluctuations of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341. If the user visually confirms that the decorative pattern is displayed in a vibrating manner after that, it can be recognized that the stopped pattern has not been determined at that point.

Note that after the last drawing content specified by the restart display data table is developed, the above-described pointer update process causes the drawing content to be developed again from the beginning of the restart display data table. Therefore, until a display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp control device 5 or a new display variation pattern command is received, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the symbol display section 341. Here, the restart effect is to display the decorative pattern on the pattern display section 341 in such a manner that it vibrates (swings) around a predetermined position, and in the restart display data table, the decorative pattern is oscillated at least once. Specify only the drawing content necessary for moving and displaying. Then, by repeatedly developing the drawing content from the top of this restart display data table, a restart effect in which the decorative pattern is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the pattern display section 341. In this way, by setting the restart effect to be one in which the decorative pattern is displayed by vibrating it on the pattern display section 341, the restart display data table can be displayed by vibrating the decorative pattern at least once. Since only necessary drawing contents need be stored, the capacity required to store the restart display data table can be kept small.

Further, if a display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp control device 5 while a restart effect is being performed using the restart display data table, the process of step S5416 shown in FIG. 247 is performed, and the display data table is A final display data table is set in the buffer 633d. As a result, even during the restart production, in response to the reception of the display confirmation command, the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed using the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol discrimination flag, and the confirmation display is displayed on the symbol display section 341. .

Further, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 5 while a restart effect is being performed using the start display data table, the process of step S4801 in FIG. 244(A) is performed, and the display A variable display data table is set in the data table buffer 633d, and a special pattern game effect is displayed on the pattern display section 341. Further, if a display demonstration command is received from the audio lamp control device 5 while a restart effect is being performed using the start display data table, the process of step S4701 in FIG. 243(C) is performed, and the display data A demonstration display data table is set in the table buffer 633d, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the symbol display section 341. In the restart performance, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the decorative symbols were stopped and displayed due to the end of the special figure game performance, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should have been received is received from the main control device 4. Since this is an effect that is displayed when the restart effect is not restarted, there is a possibility that the confirmation command will not be received even while the restart effect is being displayed due to the effects of noise, malfunction, etc. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if a display variation pattern command or a display demonstration command is received during the restart performance, the performance corresponding to the command can be displayed on the symbol display section 341, so the symbol display Various performances in the section 341 can be performed in accordance with the gaming state of the gaming machine 10.

Note that the simple display setting process (step S4309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 633c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 241(B)) is similar to the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 4 via the audio lamp control device 5 after the production time of the special figure game production using the power-on variation image has ended. stops displaying one of the power-on fluctuation images (either FIG. 196(B) or FIG. 196(C)) according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying this is set in the display data table buffer 633d. In addition, after the performance time of the special figure game performance using the power-on variation image ends, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should originally be received from the main control device 4 via the audio lamp control device 5 is accepted. If not, a process is performed in which a display data table that specifies restarting the special figure game effect of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 633d.

In the comparison process, the variation pattern instructed by the display variation pattern command and the stop type instructed by the display stop type are compared, and if they do not match, a missed symbol is set as the stop symbol.

[Forwarding settings processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 252 and 253, the transfer setting process (step S4305) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described. Here, FIG. 252(A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

<Steps S6001 to S6003>
As shown in FIG. 252(A), in the transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 633c is on (step S6001). If the simple image display flag 633c is on (step S6001: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 has not been transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (step S6002), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 637 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 252(B).

On the other hand, as a result of the process in step S6001, if the simple image display flag 633c is not on, that is, off (step S6001: No), all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. It is transferred to the video RAM 635. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (step S6003), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 634 is performed to the normal video RAM 636. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 253.

[Resident image transfer setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 252(B), the resident image transfer setting process (step S6002), which is one process of the transfer setting process (step S4305) executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6, will be described. FIG. 252(B) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (step S6002).

<Steps S6101 and S6102>
As shown in FIG. 252(B), in the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 637 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (step S6101), and the transfer instruction is If it has been transmitted (step S6101: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 637 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (step S6102). In the process of step S6102, after instructing the image controller 637 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 637, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. do. If it is determined in step S6102 that the transfer process has not finished (step S6102: No), the image controller 637 continues to perform the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting Finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (step S6102: Yes), the process moves to step S6103. Also, as a result of the process in step S6101, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 637 (step S6101: No), the process proceeds to step S6103.

<Steps S6103 and S6104>
In the process of step S6103, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 has been transferred (step S6103), and if there is resident target image data that has not been transferred (step S6103: No). , sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 637 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 (step S6104), and ends the resident image transfer setting process.

As a result, the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list as update information sent to the image controller 637 in the drawing process, and the image controller 637 Based on the described transfer data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 634 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 635), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 635 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 637 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 634, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 637a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 637a while the resident video RAM 635 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 635. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 631.

<Step S6105>
As a result of the process in step S6103, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (step S6103: Yes), the simple image display flag 633c is set to OFF (step S6105), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. . As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 241(B)), instead of the simple command determination process (see step S4308 in FIG. 241(B)) and the simple display setting process (see step S4309 in FIG. 241(B)). , the command determination process (see FIGS. 242 to 246) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 247 to 250) are executed, so the normal image drawing is set, and the symbol display section 341 shows The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 634 is performed to the normal video RAM 636 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 253) (see step S6001: No in FIG. 252(A)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 631 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 635, except for the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. Target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. Then, the MPU 631 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 635 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 635 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 635 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 is transferred to the resident video RAM 635, the display control device 6 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 635 while transferring the image data to the image controller 637. Image drawing processing can be performed using . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 635, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634 configured with the NAND flash memory 634a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the symbol display section 341.

In particular, the resident video RAM 635 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, decorative designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 4, audio lamp controller 5, display controller 6, etc. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by Responsiveness can be maintained high until some image is displayed on the symbol display section 341.

[Normal image transfer setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the normal image transfer setting process (step S6003), which is one process of the transfer setting process (step S4305) executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6, will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process.

<Steps S6201 to S6204>
As shown in FIG. 253, in the normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 633f, the pointer update process (step S5411) of the previously executed display setting process (step S4303) is performed. ) is obtained from the address indicated by the pointer 633g (step S6201). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (step S6202), and if it is transfer data information (step S6202: Yes), it is determined from the transfer data information that the image data to be transferred is stored. Extracts the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 634 and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636) and stores them in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 633. (Step S6203), and further sets on the transfer start flag which is provided in the work RAM 633 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state (Step S6204), and proceeds to the process of Step S6205. .

<Steps S6205 and S6206>
Further, in the process of step S6202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (step S6202: No), the process of steps S6203 and S6204 is skipped and the process moves to the process of step S6205. In the process of step S6205, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 637 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (step S6205), and the transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 637. If it has been set (step S6205: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 637 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (step S6206).

In the process of step S6206, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 637, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 637, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. do. If it is determined in step S6206 that the transfer process has not finished (step S6206: No), the image controller 637 continues to perform the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer settings Finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (step S6206: Yes), the process moves to step S6207. Furthermore, as a result of the process in step S6205, even if no image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 637 after the previous transfer process is completed (step S6205: No), the process proceeds to step S6207.

<Steps S6207 to S6211>
In the process of step S6207, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not. If the transfer start flag is on (step S6207: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. It is turned off (step S6208), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of step S6203 is set as the image to be transferred, and then the process moves to step S6215. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (step S6207: No), it is then determined whether the new continuous notice command flag is on (step S6209).

If the new continuous notice command flag is on (step S6209: Yes), it means that the continuous notice command has been processed and the continuous notice additional data table for the continuous notice performance has been set in the additional data table buffer 633e. Therefore, after setting the new continuous notice command flag to OFF (step S6210), the continuous notice image corresponding to the continuous notice discrimination flag that is in the on state among the continuous notice discrimination flags provided for each continuous notice image type is The first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 634 in which image data is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636) are specified (step S6211), and the After setting the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various information as the transfer target image, the process moves to step S6215.

<Steps S6212 to S6214>
In the process of step S6209, if the new continuous notice command flag is not on but off (step S6209: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (step S6212). If the back image change flag is not on but off (step S6212: No), there is no image data to start transferring, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (step S6212: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (step S6213), the Among the back image discrimination flags, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 634 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag that is in the on state is stored; , the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636) is specified (step S6214), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various information is set as the transfer target image, and the process moves to step S6215.

Note that if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 636 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of step S6214, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer process is immediately terminated.

<Steps S6215 to S6217>
In the process of step S6215, it is determined whether the image to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 636. The determination in the process of step S6215 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 633j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image is read from the stored image discrimination flag 633j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is stored in the normal video RAM 636. If it is determined that the image data is stored and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 636.

As a result of the process in step S6215, if the image to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 636 (step S6215: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is ended. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 6 and the traffic on the bus line 640. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in step S6215, if the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 636 (step S6215: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image is set (step S6216). As a result, the transfer data information of the image to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 637 in the drawing process, and the image controller 637 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list as the basis. In addition, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 634 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 636), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 637 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 634, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 636). forward to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 631.

After the process in step S6216, the stored image discrimination flag 633j is updated (step S6217), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image discrimination flag 633j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image to "on", and also by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image to the subarea of the same image storage area 636a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process for the continuous preview command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process corresponding to the continuous preview image indicated by the continuous preview command is executed. When the additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 633e, the image data of the continuous preview images used in the additional data table can be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 635 is Image data not stored in the image area 635c can be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 633d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on a command from the main control device 4, etc. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 631 transfers data to the image controller 637 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 633g of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. Since the transfer instruction for the target image is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 at the desired timing. .

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, the image data is transferred to the predetermined address according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 635 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 636a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 634 is configured with a NAND flash memory 634a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 634 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 636, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the pattern display section 341. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 635 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

[Drawing processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the drawing process (step S4306) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the drawing process.

<Step S6301>
As shown in FIG. 253, in the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process of the V interrupt process (step S4304 in FIG. 241) and the parameters (display From the transfer instructions set by the transfer setting process (step S4305 in FIG. 241) of the V interrupt process (position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, filter specification information), A drawing list as update information shown in FIG. 202 is generated (step S3301). That is, in the process of step S6301, image data of the sprite is stored for each sprite based on the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process of the V interrupt process (step S4304 in FIG. 241). The specified storage RAM type and address are specified, and the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing of the V interrupt processing (step S4304 in FIG. 241) are set for the specified storage RAM type and address. Match. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. Further, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (step S4305 in FIG. 241) of the V interrupt process, the character ROM 634 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. Add the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 635 or the subarea of the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 631 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

<Step S6302>
Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 633k are transmitted to the image controller (step S6302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 633k is 0, information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 636b is included as the drawing target buffer information, and when the drawing target buffer flag 633k is 1; includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 636c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 637 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 631, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 634 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 634 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 637a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 637a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 636 at a time when the normal video RAM 636 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 636 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 631, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 637 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information along with the drive signal to the pattern display section 341. do. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the symbol display section 341. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the pattern display section 341, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. can.

<Step S6303>
In the drawing process, after the process of step S6302, updating process of the drawing target buffer flag 633k is executed (step S6303). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process in FIG. 241. The drawing target buffer flag 633k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 631 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 637 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 241(B)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 636b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 636c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first frame is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 636b can be read out and displayed on the symbol display section 341, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 636c.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 636c can be read out and displayed on the symbol display section 341, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 636b. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed to either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c, respectively, every 20 milliseconds. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

In this way, in this embodiment, the special pattern game performance executed in the symbol display section 341 for one special pattern game is based on the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery. This is executed by repeating the process of updating the drawing list, which is update information, a predetermined number of times in accordance with the set variation type (effect pattern). In other words, the special pattern game performance in the pattern display section 341 ends when the drawing list, which is update information, is updated a number of times corresponding to the variable display time of the decorative pattern after the special pattern game is started. do. Then, when the update processing of the drawing list, which is update information corresponding to the variable display time of the special figure game, is completed, it is to notify that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a loss, If there is a hold on a special figure game that should be executed after the end of the special figure game, the special figure game for the hold is started, and the update process of the drawing list, which is update information, is again performed for the said special figure game. A special figure game effect is executed by repeating the number of times. In other words, the special pattern game is repeatedly executed until the special pattern game that notifies that the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery is a small win is executed, and in each special pattern game, the special pattern game executed on the pattern display section 341 The effect is executed by repeating the process of updating the drawing list, which is update information, a predetermined number of times. Thereby, it becomes possible to smoothly and reliably execute the special pattern game performance on the symbol display section 341 for one special pattern game.

On the other hand, if the special figure game is to notify that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a small win, when the update process of the drawing list, which is the update information corresponding to the variable display time of the special figure game, is completed. , A small winning game state which is a profit gaming state is generated by executing a small winning game after the end of the special figure game performance. In the playing state of a special figure game that generates a small winning game, a decorative pattern is definitely displayed as a double mark as a notification display to notify that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a small win. Then, in the playing state of the special figure game that generates the small winning game, as mentioned above, the special effect is the re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) and the resurrection effect (resurrection display) (see FIG. 206(B)). A promotion effect (promotion display) (see FIG. 206(C)) may be executed.

The resurrection effect (resurrection display), which is a special effect in the special figure game that is in the game state, is a notification display with a combination of decorative symbols as predetermined symbols that correspond to the loss when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit. This is an effect (display) in which decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and then stopped and displayed by a notification display in a combination that corresponds to a small win. Specifically, the resurrection effect (promotion display) in the special figure game that is in the playing state is the effect (display) in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a notification display at a position other than the zero number, and then the final number is displayed as the notification display. ) (see FIG. 206(B)).

On the other hand, in the promotion effect (promotion display) which is a special effect in the special figure game that is in the game state, for example, a small win that generates a 4R time-saving jackpot game by entering the game ball into the V winning hole 833 in a small win game. After the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed by the notification display to inform that the game is a small winning game, the game ball enters the V winning hole 833 in the small winning game to notify that it is a small winning that will generate a 16R time-saving jackpot game. This is an effect in which a decorative pattern is displayed as confirmed by a notification display. Specifically, in the promotion effect (promotion display) in the special figure game that is in the playing state, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at a double number other than "777" as a notification display, and then a zero number of "777" is displayed as a notification display. This is an effect (display) in which the eyes are displayed as confirmed (see FIG. 206(C)).

As mentioned above, the promotion effect (promotion display) and resurrection effect (resurrection display) in special figure games that are in the playing state are for one special figure game that is in the playing state to notify a jackpot, as described above. This is a performance incorporated in a specific variation type (performance pattern) that is set (see FIG. 206(A)). In other words, the promotion effect (promotion display) and resurrection effect (resurrection display) are selected from among multiple variable types (performance patterns) that are set according to the variable display time of the decorative symbol and the result of the special figure jackpot lottery. When a specific variation type (performance pattern) is set in which a promotion effect (promotion display) or a revival effect (resurrection display) is executed when the result is a small hit, a part of the special figure game effect (decoration) is set. This is executed as part of the fluctuating display of symbols). Therefore, promotion performance (promotion display) and resurrection performance (resurrection display) update the drawing list, which is update information, based on the specific variation type (performance pattern) set for the special figure game. It is executed by repeating the number of times specified according to the variation type (effect pattern). In other words, when performing a promotion effect (promotion display) or a resurrection effect (resurrection display) in one special figure game that is in the gaming state that notifies a jackpot, the last drawing list update process is executed as update information. In the update process up to a predetermined period before the update completion status update process, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a notification display before promotion or resurrection, and the drawing list that is the update information is displayed until the end by the update process using the subsequent period. By updating, the decorative pattern can be displayed as a notification display. As a result, it is possible to smoothly and reliably execute the promotion effect (promotion display) and revival effect (resurrection display) of decorative symbols on the symbol display section 341 for one special figure game in the in-game state that notifies a jackpot. It becomes possible.

As mentioned above, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 1 type and 2 type mixing machine, but when the gaming machine 10 is configured as a loop fixed machine, an ST machine, or a V-ST machine, Also, in a special map game that is in the playing state to notify a jackpot, a re-lottery display (re-lottery display), which is a special display such as a promotion display (promotion display) or a resurrection display (resurrection display), is executed, and a jackpot is announced. In the special figure game which is the in-game state to be notified, for example, it is possible to notify a promotion from a normal jackpot to a variable jackpot, a promotion that increases the number of rounds played in a jackpot game, and a return to a jackpot from a loss. However, in the promotion performance or resurrection performance in this case, the decorative pattern is displayed as a pre-promotion or pre-resurrection notification display in the update process up to a predetermined period before the update completion state in which the last drawing list update process was executed as update information. By updating the drawing list, which is update information, to the end through update processing using the subsequent period after the display is stopped and the update is completed, the decorative pattern can be displayed as a notification display.

Further, in this embodiment, the break-even point is set based on, for example, a factory-shipped design value, but instead, the break-even point may be set based on other criteria. For example, it is conceivable to conduct a trial play test on the gaming machine 10 before shipment from the factory, and to set the break-even point based on the result of this trial play test.

Furthermore, the break-even point may not be fixed, but may be changeable based on a program installed in the gaming machine 10. For example, among the above-mentioned game information (performance information), "base information", "continuous accessory ratio information", "accessory ratio information", "unit jackpot lottery number", etc. stored in the game information storage area 412d, It is also possible to change the break-even point based on one or more pieces of game information (performance information). As a result, the break-even point can be changed in response to variations in the game nails driven into the game board 31 of each game machine 10 at the time of shipment and deterioration of the game nails over time, so that the current state of the game machine 10 can be changed. It becomes possible to set a break-even point accordingly.

The timing of changing the break-even point is when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the RAM is cleared, every time a certain number of special figure games are played (for example, every 10,000 times), and every time a certain number of jackpot games are played (for example, every 10,000 times). For example, every 1000 times).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small winning game occurs, the opening performance executed on the symbol display section 341 changes from the profit display opening performance, which is the first notification mode, to the second notification mode, before and after the break-even point. Although it is switched to a certain loss display opening performance, in the gain display opening performance and the loss display opening performance, in addition to or in place of the symbol display section 341, there is a notification of the loss or profit of generating a jackpot game based on the small win game. may be performed by other presentation means, such as the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, the movable accessory member 39 (see FIG. 4), etc. Specifically, in the opening performance of a small winning game, the speaker 26 outputs an audio message such as "It's better to hit to the right" as a gain notification (first notification mode), and a loss notification (second notification mode). As a notification mode), it is conceivable to output a voice such as "Don't hit the ball with your right hand." In addition, in the opening performance of a small winning game, for example, while the illumination part 27 is made to emit light in blue or the like to notify a win (first notification mode), the illumination part 27 is made to emit light in red or the like to notify a loss. It is conceivable to perform notification (second notification mode). Furthermore, in the opening performance of the small winning game, two types of movable modes of the movable accessory member 39 are set, and one of these movable modes is used as a gain notification (first notification mode), while the other is used as a loss notification. (Second notification mode) may be considered. Two movable modes of notification of profit and loss of generating a jackpot game using the movable accessory member 39 include, for example, vertical movement when moving the movable accessory member 39 so as to overlap the display surface of the symbol display section 341. It is conceivable to set two types of moving distance (stroke, amplitude) and moving speed of the reciprocating motion.

In addition, in this embodiment, a predetermined timing (for example, the remaining number of ceiling activations 20 times before the break-even point is 140) and a specific timing (for example, the remaining number of ceiling activations 20 times after the break-even point) If a small winning game occurs during the intermediate period (for example, the remaining number of ceiling activations is 100 to 140 times) including the break-even point between 100 times and 100 times, a symbol will be displayed as the opening performance of the small winning game. Although the border notification of the third notification mode is made in the section 341, such border notification may be performed in the special figure game executed in the intermediate period. For example, as shown in FIG. 224, in the special figure game executed during the intermediate period, a text image telop is displayed in an area that does not obstruct the visibility of the special figure game performance including the fluctuating display of decorative symbols on the symbol display section 341. It is possible to do something like this.

Here, if a small winning game occurs in the intermediate period including the break-even point between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, and the border notification of the third notification mode is made at the opening of the small winning game, the border notification The period during which this is done is limited to the opening when a small winning game occurs. Therefore, from the player's perspective, it takes a short amount of time to judge whether or not to generate a jackpot game, that is, whether or not to make the game ball enter the V winning hole 833 of the wing accessory device 83 by hitting right. Therefore, while the player is considering whether or not to play right-handed, the period during which the game ball can enter the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 has passed, and the player cannot play the jackpot game. Things can happen that cannot be made to happen. In particular, for players who have little gaming knowledge about the gaming machine 10, even if a border notification in the third notification mode is made at the opening of a small winning game, they may not be able to understand the meaning or may take a long time to understand the meaning. Therefore, a situation is likely to occur in which a jackpot game cannot be generated based on a small win game for which border notification of the third notification mode was made at the opening. On the contrary, when a small winning game is started, the player may unconditionally hit the right hand, causing a jackpot game against the player's will.

On the other hand, the probability of a small winning game occurring is low (approximately 1/318.1 in this embodiment (see FIG. 204(A))), and the number of executions of the special figure game that can be executed during the intermediate period is also relatively low. Many times (40 times in this embodiment (see FIG. 223(A))). Therefore, by performing border notification in the special figure game executed in the intermediate period including the break-even point between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, border notification can be performed for a long time. As a result, when border notification is made in the special figure game, it becomes possible to judge in advance whether to generate a jackpot game when a small win game occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent a jackpot game from occurring against the player's will, or conversely, to prevent a jackpot game from occurring against the player's will. It becomes possible for players to enjoy the benefits of

Although there is no particular restriction on the execution timing of the border notification in the special figure game, it is preferable to set it to the timing when, for example, a high-speed fluctuation performance in which decorative symbols are displayed in high-speed fluctuation is being performed. In this way, by setting the execution timing of the border notification in the special figure game to the timing when the high-speed fluctuation effect is being executed, even if the reach effect is executed later, the border notification will affect the reach effect. Obstruction of visual recognition and hearing of audio output is prevented.

In addition to the symbol display section 341, or in place of the symbol display section 341, the border notification (third notification mode) in the special pattern game executed during the intermediate period including the break-even point between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, It may also be executed by means of presentation, for example, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, the movable accessory member 39 (see FIG. 4), etc. Specifically, in the special figure game executed in the intermediate period, the speaker 26 broadcasts a border notification (third notification mode) such as ``loss, gain, loss, gain, loss, gain...''. may produce ambiguous audio output. In addition, in the special figure game executed during the intermediate period, the player may blink the illumination part 27 in a specific manner, such as high-speed blinking, slow blinking, or blinking at irregular intervals. It is conceivable to perform a performance that makes people feel uncomfortable. Furthermore, in the special figure game executed in the intermediate period, the movable accessory member 39 may be moved in a specific manner so as to overlap the display surface of the symbol display section 341, for example, the movable accessory member 39 may be moved by high-speed microvibration. It is conceivable that performances that make the player feel uncomfortable, such as low-speed micro-vibrations, micro-vibrations at irregular intervals, etc., may be executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special map jackpot lottery that is the result of a predetermined determination is a small win that is a specific determination result, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter that is specific information is updated in a predetermined manner. Until the break-even point is reached at a predetermined timing, which is a predetermined period of time before the state reaches 0, a small win, which is a specific determination result, is notified by the profit display opening effect, which is the first notification mode, After the break-even point, which is a specific timing, is reached, the second notification mode, which is a loss display opening effect, is switched so that the small win, which is a specific determination result, is notified. In other words, in this embodiment, the expected value of the profit at the opening of the small winning game is reported in a notification manner according to the expected value of the profit that the player can obtain at the stage when the small winning game occurs. . Therefore, when a small winning game occurs, the player can understand the profit or loss that the player can earn at that stage by focusing on the opening performance of the small winning game. The player can determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game based on the notification mode in the opening performance of the small win game. As a result, if the expected value of the profit that can be obtained is higher if the expected value of the profit that can be obtained is higher if the jackpot game is not generated based on the small winning game, it is better to choose not to generate the jackpot game, and to generate the jackpot game based on the small winning game. It becomes possible to select to generate a jackpot game when the expected value of obtainable profits is high. As a result, the player can avoid the disadvantage of not transitioning to the time-saving game state b due to the occurrence of a jackpot game when the transition to the time-saving game state b, which is the ceiling time-saving game state, is approaching, thereby increasing the interest of the game. is improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the opening performance of the small winning game is switched after reaching the break-even point, which is a specific timing when it is advantageous for the player to shift to the b-time-saving game state, which is the ceiling time-saving game state. Therefore, even if a small winning game occurs during a period in which it is difficult to judge profit or loss near the break-even point, the player can more reliably make judgments that are advantageous to him/her based on the notification mode of the opening performance of the small winning game. becomes possible.

Note that in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to fourth embodiments described above can be made within an applicable range.

Further, in each embodiment, matters described in other embodiments can be applied within an applicable range.

[Sixth embodiment]
In pachinko gaming machines, when a jackpot game is executed in response to a winning result of a jackpot lottery, it is desired to improve the impact of the balls put out in the jackpot game.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention has the following features:
a firing means for firing a game ball in a predetermined direction in a gaming area according to a firing operation by a player;
a predetermined flow path through which a game ball flows down based on a predetermined firing operation by a player;
Equipped with
a first ball entry means whose state is variable between an acceptance permission state for accepting game balls and an acceptance non-permission state for not accepting game balls, as an area into which game balls flowing down the predetermined flow path can enter; A second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means is used to determine whether or not to generate a state in which the game ball enters the second ball entering means when a game ball enters the ball. A gaming machine equipped with an opening/closable entering ball sorting means,
deriving means capable of deriving at least a specific benefit result when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering when the first ball entering means is in the acceptance permission state during a predetermined gaming state; ,
state ending means for terminating the specific gaming state based on a specific switching condition being satisfied in the specific gaming state that is executed based on the specific benefit result being derived;
When a game ball enters the ball inputting means in the specific gaming state, the second inputting means enters a state in which the game ball enters the second ball inputting means based on the distribution. actuating means for opening and operating the ball means;
operation terminating means for terminating the opening operation of the second ball entering means based on at least the entry of a plurality of predetermined game balls;
Control for generating a special game state that is advantageous to the player without fail or with a high probability based on the fact that a special condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the ball during the opening operation of the second ball entry means. generation control means for performing
When the special game state is executed multiple times based on the special condition being met, a specific performance display means for performing a specific performance display that displays the special game state of the plurality of times as a series of advantageous game states;
It is equipped with

The firing means may be any firing mechanism as long as it can fire the game ball in a predetermined direction of the game area by the player's firing operation. As the firing means, as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a firing mechanism that applies a firing force to the game ball, an electric firing mechanism using a solenoid, a spring-type firing mechanism, a firing handle that can be rotated, etc. Examples include a firing mechanism equipped with a firing lever that can be operated, a firing mechanism equipped with a firing button that can be operated, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined flow path may be any game ball flow path through which the game ball flows down based on a predetermined firing operation by the player. The predetermined flow path may be, for example, a flow path that allows a game ball to enter a ball entry section where a prize ball is paid out based on the entry of a game ball, or a flow path where a game ball enters. A game ball channel that allows game balls to enter into a ball entry section (e.g., through gate, outlet) where prize balls are not paid out even when the prize ball is paid out, and a predetermined lottery (e.g., jackpot lottery, regular lottery) A game ball channel where a game ball can enter into a ball entry section (for example, a first (special 1) winning hole, a second (special 2) winning hole, a through gate) where a winning lottery is executed; A game ball channel in which a game ball can enter into a ball entrance part (for example, a general (ordinary) prize opening, an outlet) in which a prescribed lottery is not executed depending on the ball, and a jackpot lottery is executed based on the entrance of the game ball. A game ball flow path where game balls can enter the ball entry portion (for example, the first (Special 1) winning hole, the second (Special 2) winning hole), and a small winning lottery is executed based on the entering of the game ball. A game ball flow path where a game ball can enter into the ball entry part (for example, the first (Special 1) winning hole, the second (Special 2) winning hole), and a normal winning lottery is drawn based on the entering of the game ball. A game ball flow path that allows a game ball to enter a ball entry portion (for example, a through gate) to be executed, a game ball flow path that allows a game ball to enter a ball entry portion that is in a ball entry possible state in a specific game, A game ball channel that allows a game ball to enter a ball entry part (for example, a big winning hole (variable winning hole)) that is in a state where the ball can enter in a jackpot game, A game ball flow path where a game ball can enter a ball entry part (for example, a so-called V winning hole) that generates a variable probability gaming state or a time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game based on the entry of the ball, and a small winning game. A game ball channel that allows a game ball to enter a ball entry part (for example, a large winning opening (variable winning opening)) that is set to be able to accept a gaming ball in a small winning game, A game ball channel that allows a game ball to enter a ball entry part (for example, a so-called V winning hole) that generates a jackpot game after the completion of the small winning game based on the entry of the game ball, and a game in a regular winning game. A game ball channel that allows a game ball to enter the ball entry part (second (special 2) prize opening) that is in a ball-acceptable state, and a game ball that can be placed in an acceptable state and a non-acceptable state by an electric accessory. A game ball flow path that allows game balls to enter a variable ball entry section, and a game ball that can enter a ball entry section that can be changed between a state where game balls can be accepted and a state where they cannot be accepted using a special electric accessory. Game ball flow path, game ball flow path that allows game balls to enter the ball entry section that can be changed between a state where game balls can be accepted and a state that cannot be accepted using a normal electric accessory, and a game ball reception area using a non-electric accessory. A game ball flow path through which a game ball can enter a ball entry part that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can be accepted and a state in which it cannot be accepted; A game ball channel that allows game balls to enter a ball entry section where a jackpot lottery is executed based on the ball's entry, and a state that can be changed to a state in which game balls can be accepted and a state in which they cannot be accepted by a non-electric accessory. , a game ball channel where a game ball can enter into a ball entry section where a small winning lottery is executed based on the entry of a game ball, and a game ball channel where a game ball can enter into a ball entry section where a non-electric accessory is actuated by the entry of a game ball. A game ball channel into which a ball can enter, a non-electric accessory that opens and closes a ball entry section where a jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of a game ball, and a game ball entry section that is activated by the entry of a game ball. A non-electric accessory that opens and closes a game ball channel into which a ball can enter, and a ball entry section (first (special 1) prize opening) where the first special jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of game balls. , a game ball flow path through which a game ball can enter a ball entry section that is activated by the entry of a game ball, and a ball entry section (a second ball entry section (second ( Special 2) A non-electric accessory that opens and closes the prize opening (winning slot) is activated by the entry of a game ball.A game ball flow path that allows the game ball to enter the ball entry part, and a small winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball. A game ball flow channel through which a game ball can enter the ball entrance part where a game ball can enter the ball entrance part which operates a non-electric accessory that opens and closes the ball entry part where the game ball enters, and a lower part of the display means where the effect display is performed. A game ball flow path (so-called warp route) where game balls are guided to a stage where the front side of the area or lower area is provided on the front side, and a left side area of the game area (for example, a left side area of the display means where an effect display is executed). The game ball flow path that is set (so-called left-handed route), the game ball flow path that is set in the right side area of the gaming area (for example, the right side area of the display means where the effect display is executed), and the various inputs. Examples include a game ball channel that allows game balls to enter a discharge port that discharges game balls to the back side of the game board without allowing the game balls to enter the ball portion, and any combination thereof.

The acceptance permission state may be any state in which the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter is accepted; and an acceptance state in which a specific process is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section. On the other hand, the acceptance-disallowed state may be any state in which the entry of game balls into the ball entry area where game balls can enter is not accepted, and at least the state where game balls are not physically accepted into the entry area. This includes an unacceptable state in which no game ball enters the ball entry section, and an unacceptable state in which no specific processing is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the acceptance permission state and the acceptance non-permission state may include, for example, the open state and closed state of the ball entry section where a prize ball is paid out based on the entry of a game ball, and the entry state of a game ball. A predetermined lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery, a regular lottery) is carried out based on the open and closed states of the ball entry section (e.g., through gate, discharge port) in which prize balls are not paid out even when the ball enters the game ball. The open and closed states of the ball entry section (for example, the first (Special 1) winning hole, the second (Special 2) winning hole, through gate), and the entry of balls that do not cause the prescribed lottery to be executed even when the game ball enters. The opening and closing states of the winning slots (for example, the general (ordinary) winning opening, the exit opening), and the opening and closing states of the entrance parts (for example, the first (special 1) winning opening, the second (Special 2) winning hole) open state and closed state, ball entry section where a small winning lottery is executed based on the entry of game balls (for example, 1st (Special 1) winning hole, 2nd (Special 2) winning hole) The open and closed states of the entrance part (for example, a through gate) where a normal winning lottery is executed based on the entry of game balls, and the open and closed states of the entrance part (for example, a through gate) that allows entry of balls in a specific game. The open state and closed state of the ball part, the open state and closed state of the ball entry part (for example, the big winning hole (variable winning hole)) that is in a state where balls can be entered in a jackpot game, and the state in which a game ball can be accepted in a jackpot game. and the open and closed states of the ball entry part (for example, the so-called V winning hole) that generates a variable probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball in the small winning game. The open and closed states of the ball entry part (for example, the big winning hole (variable winning hole)) that is in a state where it can accept game balls, and the state where it is possible to accept game balls in small winning games, and the corresponding state is determined based on the entry of game balls. After the end of the small winning game, the ball entry part (for example, the so-called V winning hole) that generates the jackpot game is in the open and closed state, and the ball entry part (second ( Special 2) The open and closed states of the winning opening), the open and closed states of the ball entry part that can be changed between the state in which game balls can be accepted and the state that cannot be accepted by electric accessories, and the opening and closed states of the ball entry part that can be changed between the states in which game balls can be accepted and the states that cannot be accepted by electric accessories. An open state and a closed state of the ball entry part that can be changed between an acceptable state and an unacceptable state, and an open state and a closed state of a ball entry part that can be changed between a state where game balls can be accepted and a state where they cannot be accepted by a normal electric accessory. state, open and closed states of the ball entry part that can be changed between a state in which game balls can be accepted and a state in which they cannot be accepted by non-electric accessories, and a state in which game balls can be accepted and a state in which they cannot be accepted by non-electric accessories. It is possible to change the open state and closed state of the ball entry part where the jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of game balls, and the state in which game balls can be accepted and the state in which they cannot be accepted, depending on the non-electric accessory. An open state and a closed state of a ball entry part where a small winning lottery is executed based on the entry of a game ball, an open state and a closed state of a ball entry part which operates a non-electric accessory by the entry of a game ball, and a game ball. A jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of a game ball.A non-electric accessory that opens and closes the ball entry part is activated by the entry of a game ball. An open state and a closed state of the ball entry part in which a non-electric accessory that opens and closes the ball entry part (first (special 1) prize opening) where the first special jackpot lottery is executed is activated by the entry of the game ball; A ball entry device that operates a non-electric accessory that opens and closes a ball entry section (second (special 2) prize opening) where a second special jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of a game ball. an open state and a closed state of the ball entry part, and an open state of the ball entry part in which a non-electric accessory that opens and closes the ball entry part in which a small winning lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball is activated by the entry of the game ball; A closed state, a state in which execution of a predetermined lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery, a regular lottery) is permitted or not permitted based on the entry of a game ball into the entrance part, and a state in which execution is not permitted based on the entry of a game ball into the entrance part. Execution permission state and execution non-permission state of the jackpot lottery, execution permission state and execution non-permission state of the small win lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the entering ball section, Execution permission state and execution non-permission state of the drawing winning lottery, acquisition permission state and acquisition non-permission state based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section, acquisition permission state and acquisition non-permission state of a predetermined counter value based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section; Acquisition permission state and acquisition non-permission state of the jackpot random number counter value based on the ball entering the ball, acquisition possible state and acquisition non-permission state of the regular hit random number counter value based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, to the ball entry section The update permission state and update non-permission state of predetermined numerical information based on the entry of game balls into the ball entry section correspond to the reserved number of rights to execute a predetermined game or a predetermined lottery based on the entry of game balls into the entry section. Update permission state and update non-permission state of information, update permission state and update non-permission state of information corresponding to the reserved number of rights to execute a special map game or jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section, Examples include update permission status and update non-permission status of information corresponding to the reserved number of rights to execute a general game game or general lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section, and any combination thereof. .

The first ball entry means is an area into which game balls flowing down the game ball channel can enter, and the state of the first ball entry means can be changed between an acceptable state where game balls are accepted and a non-acceptable state where no game balls are accepted. It only needs to be a spherical part. The second ball entry means is a region into which the game ball flowing down the game ball channel can enter, and may be a ball entry part different from the first ball entry means. As the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a ball entering section where a prize ball is paid out based on the entering of the game ball, a ball entering section where the game ball enters, etc. A ball entry section (for example, a through gate, an ejection port) where prize balls are not paid out even when the game ball is entered, and a ball entry section (for example, a ball entry section where a predetermined lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery, a regular lottery) is executed based on the entry of game balls. 1st (Special 1) winning opening, 2nd (Special 2) winning opening, through gate), ball entry area where the prescribed lottery is not executed even when a game ball enters (for example, general (ordinary) winning opening, outlet) , a ball entry section where a jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of a game ball (for example, the first (special 1) winning opening, the second (special 2) winning opening), a small winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball A ball entry section (for example, the first (special 1) winning hole, a second (special 2) winning hole) where a game ball enters the game ball, and a ball entry section where a normal winning lottery is performed based on the ball entering the game ball (for example, a through gate). ), a ball entry part that is in a state in which balls can be entered in a specific game, a ball entry part that is in a state in which a ball can be entered in a jackpot game (for example, a jackpot (variable winning hole)), a state in which a game ball can be accepted in a jackpot game. Based on the entry of the game ball, after the end of the jackpot game, a ball entry part (for example, a so-called V winning hole) that generates a variable probability gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, and a state where the game ball can be accepted in a small winning game. A ball entering part (for example, a big winning opening (variable winning opening)) is set in a state where it can accept game balls in a small winning game, and a jackpot game is generated after the end of the small winning game based on the entering of the game ball. Ball entry part (for example, so-called V winning hole), ball entry part (second (special 2) winning hole) that is in a state where it can accept a game ball in a regular game, a state where a game ball can be accepted by an electric accessory. A ball entry part that can be changed between a state in which game balls can be accepted and a state in which it cannot be accepted, a ball entry part that can be changed into a state in which game balls can be accepted and a state in which it cannot be accepted by a special electric accessory, and a state in which game balls can be accepted and accepted by a normal electric accessory. A ball entry part that can be changed to a disabled state, a ball entry part that can be changed to a state in which game balls can be accepted and a state in which it cannot be accepted by a non-electric accessory, a state in which a game ball can be accepted and a state in which it cannot be accepted by a non-electric accessory. It can be changed into a state in which game balls can be accepted and a state in which it cannot be accepted by a ball entry part where a jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of game balls, and a non-electric accessory. A ball entering section where a small winning lottery is executed based on the entering of a game ball, a ball entering section which operates a non-electric accessory based on the entering of a game ball, and a ball entering section where a jackpot lottery is executed based on the entering of a game ball. A ball entry part that operates a non-electric accessory that opens and closes by the entry of a game ball, and a ball entry part (first (special 1) winning lottery) where the first special jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball. A ball entrance part (second (special 2 ) A non-electric accessory that opens and closes the prize opening (a winning opening), which is activated by the entry of a game ball, and a non-electric accessory that opens and closes the entry part where a small winning lottery is executed based on the entry of a game ball. , a ball entry section that is activated by the entry of a game ball, and any combination thereof.

The entering ball distribution means is an area into which a game ball flowing down a predetermined flow path can enter, and when a game ball enters the area, generates a state in which the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry area. Any sorting function section that can be opened and closed to sort whether or not it is acceptable is sufficient. As the entering ball sorting means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, when a game ball enters, an electric movable member is used to cause the game ball to enter a predetermined ball entry area. A sorting function unit that opens and closes to sort whether or not the game ball enters the ball, and a sorting function unit that opens and closes to sort whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area using a mechanical movable member when the game ball enters the ball. A sorting function unit that opens and closes to perform a game ball, and a movable member that can reciprocate in whole or in part in a predetermined direction when a game ball enters the ball, to generate a state in which the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry area. A sorting function unit that opens and closes to sort whether or not to play, and when a game ball enters, a movable member that can rotate in whole or in part creates a state in which the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry area. A sorting function section that opens and closes to sort whether or not the game ball enters, and a movable member that can slide when a game ball enters the ball to sort whether or not to cause the game ball to enter a predetermined ball entry area. A sorting function part that opens and closes to perform the operation, and a sorting function part that can be opened and closed to perform sorting based on the entering of the game ball to determine whether or not to cause a state in which the game ball enters the ball entering part from which the prize ball is paid out. The function section determines whether or not to cause a state in which a game ball enters a ball entry section (for example, a through gate, a discharge port) from which a prize ball is not paid out even when a game ball enters. a sorting function section that can be opened and closed based on the game balls, and a ball entry section (for example, the first (special 1) prize opening) where a predetermined lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery, a regular lottery) is executed based on the entry of game balls. , a game ball sorting function unit that can be opened and closed to perform sorting as to whether or not to cause a state in which a game ball enters a second (special 2) prize opening, through gate) based on the entry of a game ball; The system determines whether or not to cause a state in which a game ball enters a ball entry section (for example, a general (ordinary) prize opening, an ejection port) in which a prescribed lottery is not executed even when a game ball enters. A sorting function part that can be opened and closed based on the game ball, and a ball entry part (for example, the first (Special 1) winning hole, the second (Special 2) winning hole) where the jackpot lottery is executed based on the entering of the game ball. A sorting function section that can be opened and closed to determine whether or not to generate a state where a ball enters based on the entry of a game ball, and an entry ball that performs a small winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball. It can be opened and closed to determine whether or not to cause a game ball to enter the opening (for example, the first (Special 1) winning hole, the second (Special 2) winning hole) based on the entering of the game ball. A sorting function section, which determines whether or not to cause a state in which a game ball enters a ball entry section (for example, a through gate) where a normal winning lottery is executed based on the entry of a game ball, A sorting function section that can be opened and closed based on the entry of a game ball, which distributes whether or not to cause a state in which a game ball enters the ball entry section that is allowed to enter in a specific game. The sorting function section that can be opened and closed based on the above, and whether or not to generate a state in which game balls are allowed to enter the ball entering section (for example, the big winning hole (variable winning hole)) that is allowed to enter in the jackpot game. A sorting function part that can be opened and closed to perform sorting based on the entry of game balls, and a state in which game balls can be accepted in a jackpot game, and a variable game state after the end of the jackpot game based on the entry of game balls. Or, an openable/closable distribution device that determines whether or not to generate a state in which a game ball enters a ball entry part (for example, a so-called V winning hole) that generates a time-saving gaming state, based on the entry of a game ball. Functional part, ball entry part that is in a state where it is possible to accept game balls in small winning games (for example, large winning opening (variable winning opening)), which is in a state where it is possible to accept game balls in small winning games, and is in a state where game balls can be entered Based on the entry of the game ball, whether or not to cause the game ball to enter the ball entry part (for example, the so-called V winning hole) that generates the jackpot game after the end of the small winning game, is determined based on the entry of the game ball. Whether or not to generate a state in which a game ball enters the ball entry part (second (special 2) prize opening) which is able to accept a game ball in a game with a normal figure winning game. A sorting function part that can be opened and closed (for example, an electric chew type starting port) performs sorting based on the entry of game balls, and an input device that can change the state in which game balls can be accepted and the state in which they cannot be accepted using an electric accessory. A sorting function section that can be opened and closed that determines whether or not a game ball is allowed to enter the ball section based on the entry of a game ball, and a special electric accessory that determines whether or not a game ball can be received. A distributing function section that can be opened and closed, which distributes whether or not a state in which a game ball enters a ball entry section that can be changed between a disabled state and a disabled state, based on the entry of a game ball, and a normally electric accessory. An openable/closable sorter that determines whether or not a state in which a game ball enters a ball entry section that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can be accepted and a state in which a game ball cannot be accepted is generated based on the entry of a game ball. The functional unit determines whether or not to cause a state in which a game ball enters the ball entry section, which can be changed between a state in which a game ball can be accepted and a state in which a game ball cannot be received, by a non-electric accessory. a sorting function section that can be opened and closed based on the game ball, and a ball entry section that can be changed between a game ball accepting state and a non-acceptable state using a non-electric accessory, and a jackpot lottery is executed based on the game balls entering the game ball. A sorting function part that can be opened and closed to determine whether or not to cause a game ball to enter the state based on the state of the game ball entering the ball, and a non-electric accessory that determines whether or not a game ball is allowed to enter the state. Based on the entry of the game ball, the system determines whether or not to cause the game ball to enter the ball entry section where the small winning lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball. A sorting function section that can be opened and closed, and a distribution function section that can be opened and closed, and a distribution function section that determines whether or not a state in which a game ball enters the ball entry section that activates a non-electric accessory when the game ball enters the ball is determined by the entry of the game ball. A distribution function section that can be opened and closed based on the input of game balls, a non-electric accessory that opens and closes the ball entry section where a jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of game balls, and a non-electric accessory that opens and closes the ball entry section that is activated by the entry of game balls. A sorting function part that can be opened and closed performs sorting as to whether or not to generate a state in which a ball enters, based on the entry of a game ball, and a first special jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of a game ball. A non-electric accessory that opens and closes the ball entry part (first (special 1) prize opening) is activated by the entry of the game ball. a sorting function part that can be opened and closed based on the entry of game balls, and a ball entry part (second (special 2) prize opening) where a second special jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of game balls. A non-electric accessory that opens and closes is actuated by the entry of a game ball.It is possible to open and close based on the entry of a game ball to determine whether or not to generate a state in which a game ball enters the ball entry part. A sorting function section, a non-electric accessory that opens and closes the ball entry section where a small winning lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball, is activated by the entry of the game ball.The game ball enters the ball entry section. Examples include a sorting function section that can be opened and closed to sort whether or not to generate a state based on the entry of game balls, and arbitrary combinations thereof.

The predetermined gaming state may be any gaming state that can be realized while the game is in progress. The predetermined gaming state may be, for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state (a-time-saving gaming state, b-time-saving gaming state, c-time-saving gaming state), a fixed-variable gaming state, or a predetermined ball entering state, as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized. A game state in which the part is opened and closed by an electric accessory, a game state in which a predetermined ball entry part can be opened and closed by a normal electric accessory, a state in which game balls can be accepted into the distribution function part, and a game ball into the distribution function part. a game state in which the predetermined ball entry part can be opened and closed by a special electric accessory, a game state in which the predetermined ball entry part can be opened and closed by a non-electric accessory, a jackpot game state, and an opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game state. execution state, execution state of each round game in the jackpot gaming state, state in which game balls can be accepted into the V winning opening in the jackpot gaming state, state in which game balls cannot be accepted into the V winning opening in the jackpot gaming state, small winning game state, a state in which game balls can be accepted into the V winning hole in the small winning game state, a state in which game balls cannot be accepted into the V winning hole in the small winning gaming state, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined condition may be a game condition as long as it is established based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry portion. The predetermined conditions include, as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a gaming condition where the gaming state shifts, a gaming condition where the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, a gaming condition where the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to another gaming state, a variable probability game, etc. gaming conditions that transition to the state, gaming conditions that transition from the variable probability gaming state to other gaming states, gaming conditions that transition to the time-saving gaming state (a working-time-saving gaming state, b working-time-saving gaming state, c working-saving gaming state), gaming conditions that shift from the time-saving gaming state Game conditions that transition to another gaming state, gaming conditions that transition to a jackpot gaming state, gaming conditions that transition from a jackpot gaming state to another gaming state, gaming conditions that shift to a small winning gaming state, gaming conditions that shift from a small winning gaming state to another Game conditions to transition to a gaming state, game conditions to execute a specific game, game conditions to execute a special figure game, game conditions to execute a jackpot game, game conditions to execute a small win game, game conditions to execute a regular figure game. , a game condition for executing a regular drawing game, a gaming condition for executing a predetermined lottery (obtaining a random number value corresponding to the lottery type), a gaming condition for executing a jackpot lottery (obtaining a jackpot random number counter value) (special figure game) ), the result of the jackpot lottery is a predetermined result (the obtained jackpot random number counter value corresponds to the predetermined result) (gaming conditions for executing a specific game or gaming conditions for not executing a specific game), The result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (the acquired jackpot random number counter value corresponds to a jackpot) (game condition for executing the jackpot game), and the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win (the acquired jackpot random number counter value is a small win). (game conditions for executing a small winning game), and the result of the jackpot lottery is a losing win (the acquired jackpot random number counter value corresponds to a winning game) (a game condition for executing a small winning game). The result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop (the acquired jackpot random number counter value corresponds to the time-saving symbol stop) (c) the game condition for shifting to the time-saving gaming state), and the jackpot lottery is executed. Game conditions for updating the reserved number of rights or rights to play special drawing games, entering a game ball into the big winning hole (variable winning hole) opened in a jackpot game or a small winning game, a jackpot game or a small winning game Entering the game ball into the V winning hole of the big winning hole (variable winning hole) opened in (gaming conditions), the result of the random drawing per ordinary figure is a predetermined result (the acquired random number counter value per ordinary figure corresponds to the predetermined result) (gaming conditions for executing a game per ordinary figure or executing a game per ordinary figure) (playing conditions for executing a jackpot game), the result of the lottery with a common symbol is a win (the obtained random number counter value per common symbol corresponds to a win) (gaming conditions for executing a jackpot game), the result of a lottery with a common symbol is a loss It is a win (the obtained random number counter value for a common symbol corresponds to an error) (gaming conditions that do not execute a common symbol winning), the number of reservations for the right to execute a lottery for a common symbol or the right to execute a special symbol game. , any combination thereof, etc.

The specific benefit result may be a game result that can be derived when a predetermined game condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry section that is set to be in an acceptable state. As a specific reward result, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, an indication or suggestion that a predetermined gaming condition has been met, a specific display on a display means based on the fulfillment of a predetermined gaming condition, a predetermined A stop display of a specific symbol on the symbol variation display means based on the fulfillment of the gaming conditions, a stop display of a specific symbol on the special symbol variation display means based on the establishment of a predetermined gaming condition, and a jackpot lottery result. A stop display of the jackpot symbol on the symbol fluctuation display means based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, a stop display of the small winning symbol on the symbol fluctuation display means based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, A stop display of a missed symbol on the symbol variation display means based on this, a stop display of a time-saving symbol on the symbol variation display means based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop (transition to the time-saving gaming state c), a predetermined The stop display of a specific symbol on the decorative symbol variation display means based on the fulfillment of the gaming condition, the stop display of a specific symbol on the normal symbol variation display means based on the establishment of a predetermined gaming condition, and the lottery for winning a common symbol. Stop display of a winning symbol on the normal symbol fluctuation display means based on the result being a winning symbol; Stop display of a winning symbol on the ordinary symbol fluctuation display means based on the result of a winning lottery. , any combination thereof, and the like.

The specific gaming state may be any gaming state that is executed based on the derivation of a predetermined gaming result. Specific gaming states include, as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state (a-time-saving gaming state, b-time-saving gaming state, c-time-saving gaming state), a fixed-variable gaming state, and a predetermined ball entry state. A game state in which the part is opened and closed by an electric accessory, a game state in which a predetermined ball entry part can be opened and closed by a normal electric accessory, a game state in which a predetermined ball entry part is opened and closed by an ordinary electric accessory, a predetermined ball entry part by an ordinary electric accessory. A long open state of the ball entry part (for example, an open state in which a game ball can enter a predetermined ball entry part), a short open state of a predetermined ball entry part by an ordinary electric accessory (for example, a game ball can enter a predetermined ball entry part) a state in which the ball cannot enter or is difficult to open), a state in which the prescribed ball entry section is closed by a normal electric accessory, a state in which the game ball can be accepted into the distribution function part, a state in which the game ball cannot be accepted into the distribution function part. , a game state in which the predetermined ball entry part can be opened and closed by a special electric accessory, a game state in which the predetermined ball entry part can be opened and closed by a non-electric accessory, a jackpot game state, an execution state of the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game state, The execution state of each round game in the jackpot gaming state, the state in which game balls can be accepted into the V winning slot in the jackpot gaming state, the state in which game balls cannot be accepted into the V winning slot in the jackpot gaming state, the small winning gaming state, the small winning Examples include a state in which game balls can be accepted into the V winning hole in the gaming state, a state in which game balls cannot be accepted into the V winning hole in the small winning gaming state, and any combination thereof.

The switching condition may be any termination condition that terminates a predetermined gaming state based on being satisfied in a predetermined gaming state that is executed based on the derivation of a specific benefit result. As the switching conditions, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, the termination condition of the normal gaming state, the termination condition of the time-saving gaming state (a-time-saving gaming state, b-time-saving gaming state, c-time-saving gaming state), the variable probability gaming state end conditions for a game state in which a predetermined ball entry part can be opened and closed by an electric accessory, end conditions for a game state in which a predetermined ball entry part can be opened and closed by a normal electric accessory, End conditions for the open state of the ball entry section, end conditions for the long open state of a predetermined ball entry section by a normal electric accessory (for example, an open state in which a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section), a normal electric accessory Conditions for ending the short opening state of the predetermined ball entry part (for example, a state in which a game ball cannot enter the predetermined ball entry part or a difficult opening state), and conditions for ending the closed state of the predetermined ball entry part by a normal electric accessory. , conditions for ending a state in which game balls can be accepted into the sorting function section, conditions for ending a state in which game balls cannot be accepted into the sorting function section, and conditions for a game state in which a predetermined ball entry section can be opened and closed by a special electric accessory. End conditions, end conditions for a game state in which a predetermined ball entry part can be opened and closed by a non-electric accessory, end conditions for a jackpot game state, end conditions for an execution state of the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot play state, each round in the jackpot play state. End conditions for the game execution state, end conditions for the state in which game balls can be accepted into the V winning opening in the jackpot gaming state, ending conditions for the state in which game balls cannot be accepted into the V winning opening in the jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state end conditions, end conditions for a state in which game balls can be accepted into the V winning opening in the small winning gaming state, ending conditions for a state in which gaming balls cannot be accepted into the V winning opening in the small winning gaming state, any combination thereof, etc. can be mentioned.

The actuating means controls the predetermined ball entry section so that when the game ball enters the distribution function section in a predetermined gaming state, the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry section based on the distribution. Any actuating function part that causes an open operation may be used. The operation termination means may be any termination function section that terminates the opening operation of the predetermined ball entry section based on at least the entry of a plurality of predetermined game balls. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the actuating means and the actuating end means may include, for example, an actuating function part that opens the entering ball section from which the prize ball is paid out based on the entering of the game ball, and an actuating function section that ends the opening action. A termination function section, an operation function section that opens the ball entry section (for example, a through gate, a discharge port) from which prize balls are not paid out even when a game ball enters, and a termination function section that terminates the opening operation, a game ball entering the ball. The ball entry section (for example, the first (Special 1) winning opening, the second (Special 2) winning opening, the through gate) in which a predetermined lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery, a regular winning lottery) is executed based on this is opened and operated. An operating function unit and a termination function unit that terminates the opening operation, an operation function unit that operates to open the ball entry unit (for example, a general (ordinary) prize opening, an ejection opening) where a predetermined lottery is not executed even when a game ball enters the ball, and an opening function unit that terminates the opening operation. A termination function section that ends the operation, and an operation that opens the ball entry section (for example, the first (Special 1) winning hole, the second (Special 2) winning hole) where the jackpot lottery is executed based on the entering of the game ball. A functional part, a termination function part that ends the release operation, and a ball entry part where a small winning lottery is executed based on the entry of game balls (for example, the first (special 1) winning hole, the second (special 2) winning hole) An operating function section that opens and operates the opening operation, a termination function section that ends the opening operation, an operation function section that operates to open the ball entry section (for example, a through gate) where a normal winning lottery is performed based on the entry of game balls, and the opening operation. an operation function section that opens the ball entry section that is set to be in a state where the ball can be entered in a specific game, and a termination function section that ends the opening operation; (For example, a big winning opening (variable winning opening)) An operating function unit (opening control) that opens the opening operation and a termination function unit (closing process) that ends the opening operation, and the game ball is set to be ready to accept a game ball in a jackpot game. An operation function section that opens a ball entry section (for example, a so-called V winning hole) that generates a variable probability gaming state or a time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game based on the entry of a ball, and a termination function section that ends the opening operation; An operating function section that opens the ball entering part (for example, a large winning hole (variable winning hole)) that is ready to receive a game ball in a small winning game, and a termination function section that ends the opening operation, and a game ball in a small winning game. The operation function unit opens the ball entry part (for example, the so-called V winning hole) that generates the jackpot game after the end of the small winning game based on the entry of the game ball, and the opening operation ends. A termination function unit that opens the ball entry part (second (special 2) winning hole) that is set to be in a state where game balls can be accepted in the normal map winning game, and a termination function unit that terminates the opening operation, electric. An operating function section that opens and operates the ball entry part, which can be changed between a state in which game balls can be accepted and a state that cannot be accepted, depending on an accessory, and a termination function section that ends the opening operation, and a state in which game balls can be accepted and a state that cannot be accepted by a special electric accessory. An operating function section (opening mechanism) that opens the ball entry section, which can be changed to an unacceptable state, and an end function section (closing process) that terminates the opening operation, and a state where game balls can be accepted using a normal electric accessory. An operation function part that opens the ball entry part and a termination function part that ends the opening operation, which can change the state between the ball entry part and an unacceptable state, and an end function part that ends the opening operation, and an entry part that can change the game ball entry state between the acceptable state and the unacceptable state by means of a non-electric accessory. An operating function section (opening mechanism) that opens the ball part and a termination function section (closing mechanism) that ends the opening operation, which can be changed between a state in which a game ball can be accepted and a state in which it cannot be accepted, by means of non-electric accessories. An operating function unit (opening mechanism) that opens and operates the ball entry unit where a jackpot lottery is executed based on the ball entering the ball, a termination function unit (closing mechanism) that ends the opening operation, and receiving game balls using a non-electric accessory. An operating function section that opens the ball entry section that can be changed between a possible state and an unacceptable state and that performs a small winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball, and a termination function section that ends the opening operation, and a game ball. an operating function section that opens and operates a ball entry section that activates a non-electric accessory when a game ball enters, and a termination function section that ends the opening operation, and an opening/closing section that opens and closes a ball entry section that executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball. an actuating function section that opens and activates the ball entering part that is activated by the entry of the game ball, and a termination function section that ends the opening operation, and a first special jackpot lottery is drawn based on the entry of the game ball. A non-electric accessory that opens and closes the ball entry part (first (special 1) prize opening) to be executed is activated by the entry of a game ball, an operating function part that opens the ball entry part, and an end that ends the opening operation. The functional part is a non-electric accessory that opens and closes the ball entry part (second (special 2) prize opening) where the second special jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball, which is activated by the entry of the game ball. A non-electric accessory that opens and closes the ball entry part where a small winning lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball, and an operation function part that opens and operates the ball entrance part to open the game ball, and a termination function part that ends the opening operation. Examples include an actuation function section that opens the ball entering section that is activated by the ball entering the ball, a termination function section that ends the opening operation, and any combination thereof.

The special condition may be any special game condition that is satisfied when a game ball enters during the opening operation of a predetermined ball entry section. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the special conditions include, for example, a special game condition that is established when a game ball enters the ball entry section that is activated to open in a specific game, and a special game condition that is established when the ball enters the ball entry section that is activated to open in a jackpot game. A special game condition that is established when a game ball enters the ball part (for example, a big winning hole (variable winning hole)), which is activated in a jackpot game, and the probability changes after the end of the jackpot game based on the entry of the game ball. A special game condition that is established when a game ball enters a ball entry part that generates a gaming state or a time-saving gaming state (for example, a so-called V winning hole), a ball entry part that is opened and activated in a small winning game (for example, a big winning hole). A special game condition that is established when a game ball enters the opening (variable winning opening), is activated in a small winning game, and a jackpot game occurs after the small winning game ends based on the entering of the game ball. A special game condition that is established when a game ball enters the ball entering part (for example, the so-called V winning hole), and a game in which the ball entering part (second (special 2) winning hole) that is opened and activated in a game with a regular figure. A special gaming condition that is established when a ball enters a ball, a special gaming condition that is established when a game ball enters a ball entry section that can be changed between a state where a game ball can be accepted and a state where it cannot be accepted by an electric accessory; A special gaming condition that is established when a game ball enters the ball entry section that is opened and operated by a special electric accessory, and is established when a game ball enters the ball entry section that is opened and operated by a normal electric accessory. Special game conditions, special game conditions that are established when a game ball enters the ball entry part that is activated by a non-electric accessory, and a jackpot lottery based on the game ball that enters the ball that is activated to open by a non-electric accessory. A special game condition that is established when a game ball enters the ball entry section where a game ball enters the ball entry section, which is opened and closed by a non-electric accessory, and where a small winning lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball. Special game conditions that are established when a game ball enters the ball, the game ball enters a ball entry section that opens and activates a non-electric accessory when the game ball enters, and a jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the ball. The game ball enters the ball entry part that opens and operates the ball entry part when the game ball enters, and the first special feature is based on the entry of the game ball. The game ball enters the ball entry part that opens and operates a non-electric accessory that opens and operates the ball entry part (first (special 1) prize opening) where the jackpot lottery is executed, when the game ball enters; A non-electric accessory that opens and operates the ball entry part (second (special 2) prize opening) where the second special jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball is opened and operated by the entry of the game ball. Examples include the game ball entering the ball entry section, and any combination thereof.

The special game state may be any special game advantageous to the player that occurs when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry section during an opening operation. As a special game state, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a special game that occurs when a game ball enters a ball entry part that is opened in various game states, or a special game that is opened in a jackpot game. It is activated in special games and jackpot games that occur when a game ball enters a ball entry part (for example, a big winning hole (variable winning hole)), and the jackpot game ends based on the ball entering the game ball. Opening operation in special games (time-saving games or probability-changing games) and small winning games that occur when a game ball enters the ball entry part (for example, the so-called V winning hole) that later generates a variable-rate game state or a time-saving game state. In special games and small winning games that occur when a game ball enters the ball entry area (for example, large winning hole (variable winning hole)), the small winning is activated based on the entering of the game ball. A special game that occurs when a game ball enters a ball entry part (for example, a so-called V winning hole) that generates a jackpot game after the end of the game (for example, a so-called V winning jackpot game, opening/closing execution of the winning jackpot game) mode), a special game that occurs when a game ball enters the ball entry part (second (special 2) prize opening) that is opened in a game with a normal figure, and a state in which the game ball can be accepted by an electric accessory. A special game that occurs when a game ball enters a ball entry section that can be changed to a state where it cannot be accepted, and a special game that occurs when a game ball enters a ball entry section that is opened and operated by a special electric accessory. A special game that occurs when a game ball enters a ball entering section that is opened and operated by a normal electric accessory, and a special game that occurs when a game ball enters a ball entering section that is opened and operated by a non-electric accessory. A special game that occurs when a game ball enters the ball entry section that is activated by a non-electric accessory and a jackpot lottery is executed based on the game ball's entry. A special game that occurs when a game ball enters the ball entry section that is opened and closed by an electric accessory and a small winning lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball, and a non-motorized award that occurs when a game ball enters the ball entry section. A special game that occurs when a game ball enters the ball entry part that opens the object, and a non-electric accessory that opens the ball entry part that performs a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball. A special game that occurs when a game ball enters the ball entry section that is opened and activated by the entry of the game ball, and a ball entry section (first ball entry section) where the first special jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball. 1 (Special 1) A special game that occurs when a game ball enters the ball entry part that opens and activates the non-electric accessory that opens and activates the winning hole when the game ball enters, and the game ball enters the ball. A non-electric accessory that opens and operates the ball entry part (second (special 2) prize opening) where the second special jackpot lottery is executed based on the game ball entry part that opens and operates when the game ball enters the game. Examples include special games that occur when a ball enters the ball, arbitrary combinations thereof, and the like.

The advantageous gaming state may be an advantageous game in which, when a special gaming state based on the special condition being satisfied is executed a plurality of times, the special gaming state is a series of the plurality of special gaming states. The specific performance display may be an advantageous performance that, when a plurality of special game states are executed, is displayed as a series of advantageous game states. As the advantageous game state and specific performance display, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a series of advantageous games consisting only of a plurality of special game states, and a plurality of advantageous performances that are displayed as the series of advantageous games, for example. A series of advantageous games consisting of only one jackpot game state, an advantageous performance that is displayed as the series of advantageous games, a series of advantageous games that includes a game state in addition to a plurality of special game states, and the series of advantageous games. A series of advantageous games including a small win game state in addition to a plurality of jackpot game states; A series of advantageous games including a game state in which a figure game is executed, an advantageous effect that is displayed as the series of advantageous games, a game in which a special figure game is executed in a time-saving game state in addition to a plurality of jackpot game states. In addition to a series of advantageous games including states, an advantageous performance that is displayed as the series of advantageous games, and a plurality of jackpot game states, a special figure game in a time-saving game state and a special figure game in a time-saving game state are executed. A series of advantageous games (pseudo jackpot game state) including a game state in which a special figure game is executed for the reservation of the right to hold the right (so-called remaining reservation), and an advantageous performance (pseudo jackpot game performance) that is displayed as the series of advantageous games. display)), a series of advantageous games including multiple jackpot game states as well as a variable probability gaming state, and an advantageous performance that is displayed as the series of advantageous games; In addition to a series of advantageous games including a game state in which a special figure game is executed, an advantageous performance that is displayed as the series of advantageous games, and a plurality of jackpot game conditions, a special figure game is executed in a variable probability game state. A series of advantageous games including a game state in which a special figure game is executed for the reservation of the right to execute a special figure game in a gaming state and a variable probability game condition (so-called remaining reservation), and a performance display as the series of advantageous games. Examples include advantageous effects and arbitrary combinations thereof.

By the way, in a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters a predetermined prize opening, a jackpot game can be executed in which a large number of game balls can be obtained and is advantageous to the player. For example, a jackpot game is executed when the result of a jackpot lottery that is executed based on a game ball entering a predetermined winning hole (Special 1 winning hole, Special 2 winning hole) is a jackpot. A game ball enters a predetermined winning hole (so-called V winning hole) in a small winning game that is executed when the result of a jackpot lottery that is executed based on a game ball entering a winning hole is a small win. Executed when

Here, the maximum number of balls (upper limit number of balls) that can be obtained in one jackpot game is determined by laws, regulations, lottery probability, etc. Currently, for example, in so-called middle-spec gaming machines with a low winning probability of about 1/300, the maximum number of balls in one jackpot game is 1,500 balls, and for many middle-spec gaming machines, the maximum number of balls is , is set in the range of 1000 to 1500 balls.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the maximum number of balls in one jackpot game was 2400 balls. With current gaming machines, the maximum number of balls in one jackpot game is at most 1,500 balls, which is higher than previous games, even in mid-spec gaming machines where the probability of winning is low. It is less compared to the machine. For this reason, the current gaming machines lack the impact of the feeling of rolling balls in jackpot games, and as a result, there is a concern that players will not be able to be fully satisfied when jackpot games are executed.

In contrast, in the present invention, at least a specific benefit result is derived when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on, for example, a game ball entering the first ball entering means during a predetermined gaming state. A series in which a special game state is executed a plurality of times based on a special condition being satisfied when a game ball enters the second ball entering means in this specific game state. It is possible to generate advantageous gaming states. As a result, a specific gaming state occurs when a predetermined condition is met in a predetermined gaming state, and a series of advantageous gaming states are created in which special gaming states are executed multiple times due to the fulfillment of a special condition in a specific gaming state. Since the game performance can be realized, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present invention, for example, when a special game state is executed a plurality of times, a specific effect image as a specific effect display that is effect-displayed as a series of advantageous game states is a first special game state and a first special game state. It is continuously displayed between the state and the second special game state and between the second special game state. Therefore, even though a special game state has occurred a plurality of times in a series of advantageous game states, a performance display that appears to be a series of advantageous game states is executed by the specific performance display. The profit (for example, the payout) given to the player is greater when the special game state occurs multiple times than when the special game state occurs one time. As a result, by executing a specific effect display in a series of advantageous gaming states in which special gaming states occur multiple times, the player is given the impression that a large amount of profit has been obtained in a series of advantageous gaming states. It becomes possible to give satisfaction to As a result, even if the profits that can be obtained are limited due to the occurrence of a single special gaming state, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction with the profits, thereby preventing a decline in interest and interest in the game. Prevented.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the predetermined conditions are met based on the fact that a game ball enters the first prize opening 391 as the first ball entry means during the time-saving game state a as the predetermined game state, for example. When the c time saving transition symbol stops as established, the transition to the c time saving gaming state is derived at least as a specific benefit result. If the open state (or c time-saving gaming state) is executed and a game ball enters the second winning opening 315 in the opening state of the second winning opening 315 (or c time-saving gaming state), the special condition is satisfied. Based on the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 383, a pseudo jackpot game state as a series of advantageous gaming states in which the V winning hole jackpot game as a special gaming state is executed a plurality of times can be generated. As a result, the opening state of the second winning opening 315 (or the c working time saving gaming state) occurs due to the establishment of the c working saving transition symbol in the a working saving gaming state, and the opening state of the second winning opening 315 (or the c working saving gaming state). ), a new gaming experience can be realized in which a pseudo jackpot game state occurs in which multiple V winning hole jackpot games are executed based on the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 383, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 383. Interest will be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, for example, in a pseudo jackpot game state, a pseudo jackpot game effect (display) is executed as a specific effect display. Therefore, even though multiple V winning slot jackpot games have occurred in the pseudo jackpot game state, the pseudo jackpot game performance (display) makes it appear as if one V winning slot jackpot game is being executed. Display is executed. The prize balls (balls put out) awarded to the player are larger when a plurality of V winning hole jackpot games occur than in a single V winning hole jackpot game. As a result, by executing a pseudo-jackpot game performance (display) in a pseudo-jackpot game state in which multiple V-winning jackpot games occur, the impression is that a large amount of profit has been obtained from one V-winning jackpot jackpot game. By giving this to the player, it becomes possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction. As a result, even if the maximum number of balls that can be earned and rolled out in one V-winning slot jackpot game is limited, the player will feel satisfied with the maximum number of balls that can be won and rolled out when a V-winning jackpot jackpot game occurs. This prevents a decline in interest and interest in the game.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 255 to 293, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine is equipped with a "launching mechanism" as a firing means, a "gaming ball flow path" as a predetermined flow path, and an "acceptable state" as an acceptance permission state. '', an "unacceptable state" as a state in which acceptance is not permitted, a "ball entry section" as a first ball entry means, and a "ball entry section" as a second ball entry means. It is also equipped with a "distribution function part" as an incoming ball distribution means, a "gaming state" as a predetermined gaming state, a "gaming condition" as a predetermined condition, and a specific bonus result. It has a "gaming result" as a specific gaming state, a "gaming state" as a specific gaming state, an "termination condition" as a switching condition, an "operation function part" as an operating means, and an operation termination function. It is equipped with an "end function section" as a means, "special gaming conditions" as special conditions, "special game" as a special gaming state, and "advantageous game" as an advantageous gaming state, It also has an "advantageous effect" as a specific effect display.

[Configuration of gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 255 to 259. Here, FIG. 255 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game ball firing mechanism 32 as a firing means, a game board 31 in which a game area where game balls can flow down is set, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The firing rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and directs the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is something that guides. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the firing rail 321 one ball at a time. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for firing the game ball supplied onto the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, when the player is performing a firing operation on the firing handle 22, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the player's operation of the firing handle 22, and one game ball is fired every 0.6 seconds. is fired towards the gaming area. In addition, the game ball firing mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that fires the game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

As shown in FIG. 255, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning hole 313 as a ball entry part, and a ball entry sensor 314a as a ball entry part for left-handed players. A first winning hole 314 for right-handed players, which is provided with a ball entering sensor 391a as a ball entering section, a second winning hole 315, which is provided with a ball entering sensor 315a, and a distribution function section. a through gate provided with a ball entering sensor 317a as a ball entering section, a variable winning device 38 with a V winning opening that is operated in small winning games and jackpot games as special games, and a ball entering sensor 317a as a ball entering section. 317, an out port 318 as a ball entry section, a variable display unit 34 (symbol display section 341), and a main display section 36.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out game balls that are fired when a player performs a firing operation on the firing handle 22 toward a game area on the board surface of the game board 31. In other words, in response to the firing operation on the firing handle 22, the player shoots the game ball to the left side of the game board 31, which is called left-handed hitting, and the player shoots the game ball to the right side of the game board 31, which is called right-handed hitting. can be used properly.

Here, four flow path regulating sections 35A to 35D are provided in the right side area of the game board 31, and these flow channel regulating sections 35A to 35D form a first route 351 and a second route 352 as game ball flow channels. and a third route 353 are defined. In other words, a right-handed route game ball fired to the right area of the game board 31 by right-handed batting is distributed to the right area of the game board 31, and is routed to one of the first route 351, second route 352, and third route 353. The game ball flows down the flow path.

The first route 351 is a game ball flow path through which game balls can enter the entering ball sorting device 37. The second route 352 is a game ball flow path through which game balls can enter the entering ball sorting device 37 and the variable prize winning device 38. The third route 353 is a game ball flow path through which game balls can enter the first winning hole 391, the second winning hole 315, the through gate 317, the entering ball sorting device 37, and the variable winning device 38.

When the player executes a left-handed shot by a firing operation on the firing handle 22, the game balls fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are distributed in the left-handed route provided in the left side area of the gaming area. The ball can flow down the path and enter the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314. On the other hand, when the player executes a right-handed shot by the firing operation on the firing handle 22, the game ball fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 to the right route flows down the game ball flow path and is used as the ball entry part. The first winning hole 391, the second winning hole 315 as a ball entering part, the through gate 317 as a ball entering part, the entering ball sorting device 37 as a sorting function part operated in the normal winning game, the small winning game Balls can be entered into the variable winning device 38 with a V winning hole as a ball entering portion operated in a jackpot game, or the variable winning device 38 having a variable winning hole 381 as a ball entering portion.

The through gate 317 is a ball entry section provided with a ball entry sensor 317a, and is provided at a position where it can receive game balls flowing down the third route 353 as a game ball flow path. When a game ball enters the through gate 317, that is, when the ball entry sensor 317a detects the entry of the game ball, the game is played as a special game based on the value of the random number counter C4 per regular figure. The allocation function unit executes a random drawing that determines whether or not to generate a normal pattern winning game, and the winning result of the normal pattern winning lottery as a game condition is established and the normal pattern winning game is determined as a game result. When the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, a game state is generated in which the winning symbol game is executed in which the entering ball sorting device 37 is activated as will be described later.

The first prize opening 391 for right-handed players uses the distribution function unit to perform a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to execute a special jackpot game (open/close execution mode) as a special game, triggered by the entry of a game ball. , and is provided at a position where it can receive game balls flowing down the third route 353. A first opening/closing member 39A is provided in the first winning opening 391, and the first opening/closing member 39A is operated by the operating function section to open and close the first winning opening 391. Here, FIGS. 256(A) and 256(B) are diagrams for explaining the first winning opening 391 and the first opening/closing member 39A.

As shown in FIGS. 256(A) and 256(B), the first opening/closing member 39A is configured such that its distal end rotates clockwise and It is a non-electric accessory that can be rotated counterclockwise. The first opening/closing member 39A is rotated counterclockwise from the standby position to the operating position by the operating function section when a game ball enters the first non-electric operating opening 371 of the entering ball sorting device 37, which will be described later. is configured to be When the first opening/closing member 39A is in the operating position, the first prize opening 391 as a ball entry part is opened. Further, the operating position of the first opening/closing member 39A is a position where the third route 353 is closed. Therefore, the first opening/closing member 39A can guide the game ball to the first winning opening 391 when it is in the operating position. In other words, the first prize opening 391 is opened when the first opening/closing member 39A is operated by the operating function section based on the entry of the game ball into the first non-electric operating opening 371, and the third route 353 is opened. It is set in an acceptable state in which it can accept game balls that have flown down.

On the other hand, the first opening/closing member 39A is moved from the operating position to the standby position by the operation ending part when the ending condition is satisfied when one game ball enters the first winning hole 391 that is in the receivable state. It is configured to be rotated in a clockwise direction. When the first opening/closing member 39A is in the standby position, the first winning opening 391 as a ball entry part is closed. Further, the standby position of the first opening/closing member 39A is a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball on the third route 353. Therefore, when the first opening/closing member 39A is in the standby position, it is impossible to guide the game ball flowing down the third route 353 to the first winning opening 391. In other words, the first prize opening 391 is closed when the termination condition is satisfied by the entry of one game ball into the first non-electric operation opening 371 and the first opening/closing member 39A is returned. The game balls flowing down the third route 353 are brought into an unacceptable state.

Further, the first winning hole 391 is provided with a ball entering sensor 391a, and it is possible to detect that a game ball has entered the first winning hole 391 by this ball entering sensor 391a. Then, the MPU 41 executes a special map jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) as a special game based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired when the entry of a game ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 391a. A jackpot lottery for distributing whether or not to generate a jackpot is executed by a distributing function part.

As shown in FIG. 255, the second prize opening 315 uses the distribution function unit to execute a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to execute a special jackpot game as a special game, triggered by the entry of a game ball. , is provided above the first prize opening 391 at a position where the game ball flowing down the third route 353 can be received. This second winning opening 315 is provided with a second opening/closing member 39B, and the second winning opening 315 is opened/closed by operating the second opening/closing member 39B by the operating function section. Here, FIGS. 256(C) to 256(E) are diagrams for explaining the second winning opening 315 and the second opening/closing member 39B.

As shown in FIGS. 256(C) to 256(E), the second opening/closing member 39B is a non-motorized accessory that is movable in the front and rear direction by a mechanical mechanism such as a known link mechanism employed in non-electric accessories. It is an electric accessory. The second opening/closing member 39B has a plate shape as a whole, and includes a slit-shaped penetrating portion 39B1 for moving the game ball provided from the tip in the front-back direction to the center, and a game ball provided at the rear end in the front-back direction. It includes a circular penetrating portion 39B2 through which the ball falls. The second opening/closing member 39B can guide the game ball to the rear side through the slit-shaped penetrating portion 39B1, and can guide the game ball downward through the circular penetrating portion 39B2.

The second opening/closing member 39B is moved to the standby position by the operating function section when a game ball enters a second non-electric actuation port 372 as a ball entry section of the entering ball sorting device 37 as a distribution function section to be described later. The actuator is configured to be moved forwardly from the position to the actuated position. When the second opening/closing member 39B is in the operating position, the second prize opening 315 as a ball entry part is opened. Further, the operating position of the second opening/closing member 39B is a position where the third route 353 is closed. Therefore, the second opening/closing member 39B can guide the game ball to the second prize opening 315 when it is in the operating position. In other words, the second winning opening 315 is opened when the second opening/closing member 39B is operated by the operating function section when a game ball enters the second non-electric operating opening 372, and the third route 353 is opened. It is set in an acceptable state in which it can accept the game balls that have flown down.

On the other hand, the second opening/closing member 39B is moved to the operating position by the operation end section when the termination condition is satisfied by four game balls entering the second winning hole 315 which is in the receivable state. It is configured to be moved rearward from the position to the standby position. When the second opening/closing member 39B is in the standby position, the second prize opening 315 as a ball entry part is closed. Further, the standby position of the second opening/closing member 39B is a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball along the third route 353. Therefore, when the second opening/closing member 39B is in the standby position, it is impossible to guide the game ball flowing down the third route 353 to the second prize opening 315. In other words, the second prize opening 315 is closed when the end condition is satisfied by the entry of four game balls into the second non-electric operation opening 372 and the second opening/closing member 39B is returned. The game balls flowing down the third route 353 are brought into an unacceptable state.

Further, the second winning hole 315 is provided with a ball entering sensor 315a, and it is possible to detect that a game ball has entered the second winning hole 315 by this ball entering sensor 315a. Then, the MPU 41 executes a special map jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) as a special game based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired when the entry of a game ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 315a. A jackpot lottery for distributing whether or not to generate a jackpot is executed by a distributing function part.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first opening/closing member 39A is returned when the termination condition is met by the entry of one game ball, and the second opening/closing member 39B is reset by the termination condition by the entry of four game balls. It is restored when the following is established. That is, in this embodiment, the second winning hole 315 as a ball entering portion is larger than the upper limit number of game balls that can enter the first winning hole 391, which makes the first winning hole 391 as a ball entering portion unable to receive the balls. The upper limit number of game balls that can enter the second prize opening 315 that cannot be accepted is set to be large. As a result, the number of balls entering the second winning hole 315 due to one opening/closing operation of the second winning hole 315 is greater than the number of balls entering the first winning hole 391 when the first winning hole 391 is in the acceptable state at one time. There will be more. As a result, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the expectation of transition to the c time-saving gaming state as a gaming result is low, so the entry of the gaming ball into the second prize opening 315 has a high probability of While the time-saving game state c, which is a game state in which the V-winning jackpot game state is executed as a special game advantageous to the player triggered by the winning game state, is difficult to occur, when the time-saving game state c occurs, By entering the game ball into the second winning hole 315, a plurality of V winning jackpot game states can be generated. In other words, while it is difficult to shift from the normal gaming state to the c-time-saving gaming state, when shifting to the c-time-saving gaming state, a gaming feature is provided in which the player can earn a large amount of profit by generating the V-winning jackpot gaming state. Therefore, the interest in the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the first opening/closing member 39A is movable back and forth, whereas the second opening/closing member 39B is rotatable in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions. and the second opening/closing member 39B may be configured to operate in a similar manner.

Further, in this embodiment, the first winning hole 391 is closed when one game ball enters, and the second winning hole 315 is closed when four game balls enter, but the first winning hole 391 The upper limit number of balls that enter the second winning hole 391 is closed, and the upper limit number of balls that enter the second winning hole 391 can be changed as appropriate. The number may be the same. Of course, the first opening/closing member 39A and the second opening/closing member 39B may be configured as electric accessories instead of non-electric accessories.

[Entering ball sorting device 37]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a first winning opening 391 that is opened and closed by a first opening/closing member 39A which is a non-electric accessory, and a second winning opening 391 which is opened and closed by a second opening and closing member 39B which is a non-electric accessory. Unlike the first embodiment described above, the first non-electric operating opening 371 serves as a ball entrance portion that operates the first opening/closing member 39A, and the second opening/closing member 39B. An incoming ball sorting device 37 as a sorting function section is provided, which has a second non-electric actuating port 372 as a ball entering section. Here, FIG. 257 is a diagram showing the incoming ball sorting device 37 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

The entering ball distribution device 37 distributes which of the first opening/closing member 39A that opens and closes the first winning opening 391 and the second opening/closing member 39B that opens and closes the second winning opening 315 is to be operated from the standby position to the operating position. This is activated when the result of the random drawing is a win and the game conditions are met. This entering ball sorting device 37 is capable of receiving game balls that flow down a second route 352 or a third route 353 as a game ball flow path among game balls that are hit to the right and flow down a right-handed route. (See Figure 255). The incoming ball sorting device 37 includes, in addition to the first non-electric operation opening 371 and the second non-electric operation opening 372 described above, an electric accessory 373, a movable distribution member 374, a movable distribution member 374, and a fixed distribution member 375. Equipped with.

The electric accessory 373 is operable by a driving means such as an actuation function section such as a solenoid (not shown) and a termination function section, and is in an unacceptable state that restricts the entry of game balls into the entering ball sorting device 37. (see FIG. 257(A)) and an open state as an acceptable state that allows game balls to enter the ball sorting device 37 (see FIG. 257(B) and FIG. 257(C)). This is a distribution function section that can be varied. This electric accessory 373 is a game ball that is executed when a game condition is established based on the result of the lottery winning game that is executed when a game ball enters the through gate 317. In a game, the operating function unit opens the ball into an accepting state that allows the game ball to enter the ball sorting device 37. In addition, a ball entry sensor 37a is provided between the electric accessories 373, and the entry of a game ball into the ball distribution device 37 can be detected by this ball entry sensor 37a. When the entry sensor 37a detects the entry of a game ball into the entering ball sorting device 37, the electric accessory 373 is brought into a closed state by the operation end section when the termination condition is satisfied, and the entering ball sorting device 37 is closed. The ball is in an unacceptable state that restricts the entry of game balls into the ball. In other words, the entering ball sorting device 37 separates one ball by opening and closing the electric accessory 373 every time a game per normal pattern is executed, triggered by the entry of a game ball into the through gate 317 serving as the ball entering section. It is possible to enter game balls.

A game ball that has entered the ball distributing device 37 when the electric accessory 373 is in the open state can enter the first non-electric operating port 371 and the second non-electric operating port 372 (FIG. 257(B) and FIG. 257(C)). The first non-electric operating port 371 and the second non-electric operating port 372 are arranged below the electrically-driven accessory 373 with a gap in the left-right direction.

The first non-electric operation opening 371 operates a first opening/closing member 39A, which is a non-electric accessory that opens and closes the first winning opening 391, based on the entry of a game ball, using a known link mechanism or the like as an operation function part. It is operated from the standby position to the operating position by a mechanical mechanism, and the first prize opening 391 is brought into an accepting state. On the other hand, the second non-electric actuation opening 372 uses a known link mechanism as an operation function part to operate the second opening/closing member 39B, which is a non-electric accessory that opens and closes the second winning opening 315, based on the entry of the game ball. It is operated from the standby position to the operating position by a mechanical mechanism such as the like, and the second prize opening 315 is brought into an accepting state.

The movable sorting member 374 is a sorting function part that can be operated by a drive means such as an actuation function part such as a solenoid (not shown) and a termination function part, and is a sorting function part that can be operated by a driving means as an actuation function part such as a solenoid (not shown) and a termination function part. 373 and the first non-electric operating port 371 and the second non-electric operating port 372. This movable sorting member 374 is in a sorting state in which the game balls that have entered the ball sorting device 37 can be guided toward the first non-electric operating opening 371, but cannot be guided towards the second non-electric operating opening 372. (See FIG. 257(B)), the game balls that have entered the ball sorting device 37 can be guided toward the second non-electric operating port 372, but cannot be guided toward the first non-electric operating port 371. It can be changed to a minute state (see FIG. 257(C)).

The fixed distribution member 375 controls the direction in which the game ball enters the incoming ball distribution device 37 and flows down toward the first non-electric operating port 371, and the first direction. It is a sorting function unit that distributes balls into non-electrically operated openings 371 and directions in which balls are not allowed to enter. It is placed in a closer position. In other words, some of the game balls that enter the ball sorting device 37 and flow down toward the first non-electric operating port 371 enter the first non-electric operating port 371, while the remaining part flows down the right side of the first non-electric operating port 371 and is discharged below the incoming ball sorting device 37. As a result, the game balls that enter the ball sorting device 37 and flow down toward the first non-electric operating port 371 do not enter the first non-electric operating port 371 with a 100% probability; The balls enter the first non-electric operating port 371 at a constant rate.

On the other hand, a game ball that enters the ball sorting device 37 and flows down toward the second non-electric operating port 372 enters the second non-electric operating port 372 with a probability of 100%.

Here, the movable distribution member 374 is configured to change the gaming state when the normal winning game is started to the later-described c Only in the time-saving gaming state, the operating function section can guide the game balls that have entered the ball sorting device 37 toward the second non-electric operating port 372 and guide them toward the first non-electric operating port 371. It is assumed to be in an uninducible distribution state (see FIG. 257(C)). In other words, since the second non-electric operating port 372 is opened only when the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state c, the benefit (profit) based on the game ball entering the second non-electric operating port 372 is not available. This can be accepted on the condition that the gaming state changes to the time-saving gaming state.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second non-electric operation opening 372 serving as a ball entry part, the second winning opening 315 can accept until four game balls enter. state. In addition, when four game balls enter the second winning slot 315, a jackpot lottery is executed by the distribution function unit based on the special 2 jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 263(C)), as described later. be done. In this special 2 jackpot win/fail table, the random number that makes the jackpot lottery result as a game condition a small win is about 2/3, and the jackpot lottery result becomes a small win, and the small win symbol is stopped and displayed as the game result. After that, a small winning game is executed. In the small winning game, since the V winning hole 383 as the ball entry part of the variable winning device 38 is opened, the V winning hole 383 is used as a special game condition to generate the V winning jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) as a special game. It is easy for the game ball to enter the ball. Moreover, since the second prize opening 315 remains in an accepting state until four game balls are entered, the V prize jackpot game as a special game can be executed multiple times (up to four times) in a short period of time. This can be a series of advantageous games. Therefore, when the gaming state shifts to c-time-saving gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefit (profit ) can be received.

[Variable winning device 38]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above, and is configured as a 1 type and 2 type mixing machine instead of a loop constant changing machine, and is configured as a one type and two type mixing machine, and is operated in a jackpot game and a small win game. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it includes a variable winning device 38. Here, FIGS. 258 and 259 are diagrams showing the variable winning device 38 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 258 and 259, the variable winning device 38 includes a variable winning opening 381, an opening/closing door 382, a V winning opening 383, a normal winning opening 384, and a V winning opening opening/closing door 385.

The variable prize opening 381 is open to the front side of the game board 31, and is a ball entry part into which a game ball can enter. The opening/closing door 382 is in an unacceptable state in which a game ball cannot enter the variable prize opening 381 shown in FIGS. 258(C) and 258(D), and in a variable winning state shown in FIGS. 259(A) to 258(C). This is a sorting function unit that switches between a state where game balls can enter the opening 381 and an acceptable state.

As shown in FIG. 259(A), the V winning opening opening/closing door 385 serving as the sorting function unit is operated by the operating function unit, so that the V winning opening 383 serving as the ball entry unit can receive game balls. When the state is set to be acceptable, a game ball entered from the variable winning hole 381 can enter the V winning hole 383. Further, the V winning hole 383 is provided with a ball entering sensor 383a that can detect that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 383.

As shown in FIG. 259(B), when the V winning opening opening/closing door 385 is returned by the operating function unit and the V winning opening 383 is in an unacceptable state in which game balls cannot enter, the V winning opening The game ball entered from the variable winning hole 381 cannot enter the opening 383, while the normal winning hole 384 as a ball receiving part has a variable winning hole. Game balls entered from 381 can be entered. Further, the normal winning hole 384 is provided with a ball entering sensor 384a that can detect that a game ball has entered the normal winning hole 384.

The variable prize winning device 38 is operated in a jackpot game or a small win game as described above. Specifically, in the jackpot game and the small win game, the opening/closing door 382 is operated by the operation function section, so that the game ball can enter the variable prize opening 381 as the ball entrance section. In addition, in the jackpot game, the V winning opening opening/closing door 385 is closed, and the game ball that enters from the variable winning opening 381 can enter only into the normal winning opening 384 as a ball entry section. In addition, in the jackpot game, the opening/closing door 382 is set as an end condition when a specified time elapses after the opening/closing door 382 is operated, or when the upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning opening 381 (normal winning opening 384). is closed by the termination function when the following is true. On the other hand, in a small winning game, since the V winning opening opening/closing door 385 is opened by the operating function unit, the game ball that enters from the variable winning opening 381 can enter not only the normal winning opening 384 but also the V winning opening 383. It is. In addition, in the small winning game, the opening/closing door 382 is closed by the ending function section when the end condition is satisfied by the passage of a specified time after the opening/closing door 382 is operated by the operating function section. In this embodiment, the jackpot lottery is executed not only when the result of the jackpot lottery by the operating function unit is a jackpot for which the gaming conditions are met, but also when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win for which the gaming conditions are met. In a small winning game, a jackpot game (V winning jackpot game) is also generated when a game ball enters the V winning hole 383 as a special entering ball area and a special game condition is established. As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment functions as a 1 type and 2 type mixed machine in which a V winning jackpot game occurs when a game ball enters the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38 in a small winning game. It is configured.

In addition, in this embodiment, one variable winning device 38 is shared by the jackpot game and the small winning game, but the variable winning device for the jackpot game and the variable winning device for the small winning game may be provided separately. good.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is not limited to a one-type and two-type mixing machine, and special gaming conditions are established by entering a game ball into the V winning hole 383 as a special entering ball area in the variable winning device 38. It can also be configured as a V-ST machine (V-probable variable machine) in which an advantageous game occurs, for example, a variable probability game state in which the jackpot probability increases. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment may be configured as a so-called loop fixed machine or ST machine in which the condition for generating an advantageous game is not the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38. can. In this case, the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38 can be omitted.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment and various tables used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 260 to 264.

[Ball entry sensor]
Here, FIG. 260(A) is a block diagram showing an example of a main part of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG. 260(A), the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 is basically the same as that of the first embodiment described above, but a part of the ball entry sensor is different from that of the first embodiment described above. different. Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a ball entry sensor 391a that detects the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 391, and a ball entry sensor 391a that detects the entry of a game ball into the entry ball sorting device 37. Ball entry sensor 37a, ball entry sensor 383a that detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38, and entry sensor 383a that detects the entry of a game ball into the normal winning hole 384 of the variable winning device 38. A ball sensor 384a is provided. These ball entering sensors 391a, 37a, 383a, 384a are connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 like the other ball entering sensors 313a to 318a, and are connected to the second winning hole 391, the ball entering distribution device 37, The MPU 41 can detect that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 383 or the normal winning hole 384.

[Number of prize balls]
Here, FIG. 260(B) is a diagram showing the number of prize balls when game balls enter the various ball entry sections. As shown in FIG. 260(B), the number of prize balls for the game balls entering the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, 391, and the second winning hole 315 is three, and the variable winning device 38 The number of prize balls for the game balls entering the V winning hole 383 and the normal winning hole 384 is 15.

Note that the ball entry portions not shown in FIG. 260(B) (the through gate 317, the entering ball sorting device 37, the first non-electric operating port 371 and the second non-electric operating port 372 of the entering ball distributing device 37) When a game ball enters the ball, the number of prize balls is 0 (no prize ball).

In this embodiment, as the special game, a 4R jackpot game and a 10R jackpot game are set as the special games (see FIG. 263(D)). In addition, in each round game of the jackpot game, the variable winning hole 381 as a ball entering section in the variable winning device 38 is opened by the operating function section, and the end function section ends when the upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning hole 381. The variable prize opening 381 is closed by this. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of game balls that enter the variable winning hole 381 that is opened and the variable winning hole 381 that is closed is adjusted so that a large number of balls can be won in one jackpot game. More than the upper limit of the number of entering balls that change from an unacceptable state to an unacceptable state (for example, 4 for the general figure fluctuation reservation number X and the 1st special figure reservation number N, and 3 for the 2nd special figure reservation number M) It is set to 10. Therefore, in this embodiment, the maximum number of balls to be played in one jackpot game is set to 1500 balls (see FIG. 263(D)).

[Game flow (transition of game state)]
Here, FIG. 261 is a diagram showing the game flow (transition of gaming state) of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 261, in this embodiment, the normal gaming state, a time saving gaming state, c working time saving gaming state, special figure jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, and V winning jackpot gaming state are set as the gaming states. ing.

The normal game state is the basic game state where it is easiest to stay in the progress of the game, and is a game state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first winning hole 391 and the second winning hole 315 as the ball entering section. . On the other hand, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first winning hole 314 by hitting the game ball to the left in the left side area of the game board 31. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is preferable to receive a jackpot lottery by the distribution function section by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314, so in order to make the game ball flow down the game ball channel of the left route, Left-handed hitting, in which the game ball is hit to the left side of the board 31, is encouraged.

The normal gaming state is transferred from the time-saving gaming state when the later-described termination condition of the time-saving gaming state is satisfied in the time-saving gaming state (a-time-saving gaming state or c-time-saving gaming state). In addition, even if the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 383 as a special entry ball area in a small winning game and the end condition of the small winning game state is met, the small winning game state can be changed to the normal gaming state. will be migrated.

In the time-saving gaming state a, the electric accessory 373 as a sorting function part of the ball entering sorting device 37 is activated by the operating function part based on the entry of the game ball into the through gate 317 as the ball entering part, This is a game state in which an advantageous game is executed in which the end function section is likely to open and close, and the incoming ball sorting device 37 is likely to be in an acceptable state. In addition, in the time-saving game state a, the movable distribution member 374 is in the standby position, so that the first winning hole 391 as the ball entry section can receive the game ball that has entered the entry ball distribution device 37. This is a gaming state that is likely to become an acceptable state. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state a, it is preferable to enter the game ball into the through gate 317 and the entering ball sorting device 37 and receive a jackpot lottery by the sorting function section. Right-handed hitting, in which the game ball is hit to the right side of the game board 31 in order to cause the ball to flow down, is encouraged.

In addition, to the time-saving gaming state a, the end of the special figure jackpot gaming state that occurs when the gaming condition is satisfied because the result of the jackpot lottery by the distribution function unit in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state a is a jackpot. When the conditions are met, the state is shifted from the special figure jackpot game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the termination condition of the special figure jackpot game state is satisfied, the a time-saving game state is transferred with a 100% probability (see FIG. 263(D)), but the special figure jackpot game state is terminated. The probability of transitioning to the time-saving gaming state a when the conditions are met may be other than 100%, for example, 50%. In this case, even if the end condition of the special figure jackpot game state is satisfied, if the time saving game state a is not changed, the game state is changed to the normal game state.

In the time-saving game state c, as in the time-saving game state a, the electric accessory 373 as the sorting function part of the entering ball sorting device 37 operates based on the entry of the game ball into the through gate 317 serving as the ball entering part. This is a game state in which an advantageous game is executed in which the operating function section and the termination function section are likely to be opened and closed, and the incoming ball sorting device 37 is likely to be in an acceptable state. In addition, in the c time-saving game state, the movable sorting member 374 as a sorting function part is in the operating position, so that the second prize opening 315 as a ball entering part is a game in which a ball enters the entering ball sorting device 37. This is a game state in which it is easy to enter a receptive state in which a ball can enter. Therefore, in the c time-saving gaming state, it is preferable to enter the game ball into the through gate 317 and the entering ball sorting device 37 and receive a jackpot lottery by the sorting function section, so the game ball is placed in the right route game ball flow path. Right-handed hitting, in which the game ball is hit to the right side of the game board 31 in order to cause the ball to flow down, is encouraged.

In addition, in the c time saving game state, if the game condition is satisfied because the result of the jackpot lottery by the distribution function unit is c time saving transition, the special symbol or decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as the c time saving transition symbol as a game result. Based on this fact, when the conditions for ending the time-saving game state a are satisfied, the game is transferred from the time-saving game state a. Here, the result of the jackpot lottery shifts to c time-saving in the case of the a-time-saving gaming state where the a-time-saving special 1 jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 263(B)) is referred to during the jackpot lottery (see FIG. 263(A) to FIG. 263(C)). That is, the time-saving game state c is transferred from the time-saving game state a when the special symbol or the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-saving transition symbol c in the time-saving game state a, and the end condition of the time-saving game state a is satisfied. Ru.

In the special figure jackpot game state, the opening/closing door 382 as the sorting function part of the variable prize winning device 38 is opened by the operation function part a number of times according to the jackpot type (4 times or 10 times in this embodiment), and the closing function is performed. This is a game state in which an advantageous game is executed in which the variable winning hole 381 as the ball entry portion of the variable winning device 38 is made receptible multiple times by being repeatedly closed by the variable winning device 38. In the special figure jackpot game state, a game ball that enters from the variable winning hole 381 enters the normal winning hole 384 as a ball entering portion of the variable winning device 38. Therefore, in the special figure jackpot game state, a special figure jackpot game as a special game in which a prize ball can be won is executed by opening and closing the opening/closing door 382 multiple times and allowing the game ball to enter the normal prize opening 384. Ru. In addition, in the special figure jackpot game state, it is preferable to let the game ball enter the variable prize opening 381, so the game ball is sent to the right side area of the game board 31 in order to make the game ball flow down the game ball channel of the right route. Right-handed hitting is encouraged.

In addition, in the special pattern jackpot game state, when the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game conditions are met, in a special pattern game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery, a special symbol or a decorative pattern is a jackpot as a game result. The transition is made when the end condition is met by the symbol being stopped and displayed. Here, the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in the normal gaming state where the regular special 1 jackpot success/failure table (see Figure 263(A)) is referred to during the jackpot lottery, or in the normal gaming state where the "a time saving special 1 jackpot success/failure table" (see Figure 263(A)) is referred to. 263(B)) is the case of the time-saving game state a (see FIGS. 263(A) to 263(C)). That is, the special pattern jackpot game state is entered from the normal game state or the time-saving game state a when the end condition is met by the special symbol or decorative symbol being stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol in the normal game state or the time-saving game state a. will be migrated.

In the small winning game state, the opening/closing door 382 as the distribution function section of the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed by the operation function section and the ending function section, so that the variable winning opening 381 as the ball entering section of the variable winning device 38 opens and closes. This is a gaming state in which an advantageous game is executed, which is an acceptable state. In the small winning game state, a game ball that enters from the variable winning hole 381 enters the V winning hole 383 or the normal winning hole 384 as a ball entering portion of the variable winning device 38. In addition, in the small winning game state, it is preferable to cause the game ball to enter the V winning hole 383 to generate the V winning jackpot gaming state, so in order to cause the game ball to flow down the right route game ball flow path, the game board Right-handed hitting, in which the game ball is hit to the right area of 31, is encouraged.

In the small hit game state, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win and the game conditions are established, in the second special game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol or decorative pattern is small as the game result. When the ending condition is satisfied by stopping and displaying the winning symbol, the game state at the end of the second special symbol game (for example, c time-saving game state, normal game state) is transferred.

In the V prize jackpot game state, similarly to the special figure jackpot game state, the opening/closing door 382 as the distribution function section of the variable prize winning device 38 is activated the number of times (10 times in this embodiment) according to the jackpot type. This is a game state in which an advantageous game is executed in which the variable winning opening 381 as the ball entry part of the variable winning device 38 is made receptible multiple times by repeating the opening process by the unit and the closing process by the end function unit. . In the V-winning jackpot game state, as in the special figure jackpot game state, a game ball is entered into the normal prize opening 384 by opening and closing the opening/closing door 382 multiple times, and as a special game, a prize ball can be won. A V-winning jackpot game is executed. In addition, in the V winning jackpot game state, it is preferable to let the game ball enter the variable prize opening 381, so the game ball is sent to the right side area of the game board 31 in order to make the game ball flow down the game ball channel of the right route. Right-handed hitting is encouraged.

In addition, the V winning jackpot game state is a small winning game state in which a special condition is established for a game ball to enter the V winning hole 383 as a special ball entry area which is the ball entry part of the variable winning device 38 in a small winning game. When the termination condition is satisfied, the game is shifted from the small winning game state.

[General figure hit/failure table]
Here, FIG. 262(A) and FIG. 262(B) are diagrams showing an example of a common symbol winning/failing table used in the common symbol winning lottery by the sorting function unit. The winning lottery for a common symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the through gate 317 serving as the ball entry section, and is executed by referring to the winning/failing table for a common symbol depending on the gaming state. In this embodiment, two types are set as the winning normal figure table: the normal game state normal drawing winning winning table shown in FIG. has been done. In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a normal figure is different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (a-time-saving gaming state or c-time-saving gaming state). The probability of winning a normal figure is set higher in the normal game state than in the normal game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the winning lottery on the winning winning table, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed as a game result in the winning lottery in the ordinary symbol game that notifies the result of the lottery winning the winning symbol. In the normal pattern game where the normal pattern winning game is executed after the end of the normal pattern winning game, and in the general pattern game which announces the result of the general pattern winning lottery, the normal pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the game. , is set. In the ordinary figure hit/failure table of this embodiment, 300 values from 0 to 299 are set as the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure, and when a game ball enters the through gate 317 (or when a game ball enters the through gate 317) By determining whether the value of the random number counter C4 for winning a winning pattern (at the start of the game) corresponds to winning or losing the winning pattern set in the hit winning table, the result of the lottery for hitting a winning pattern is determined. It is divided into either a hit or a miss.

The normal game state normal figure win/failure table shown in FIG. 262(A) is a table used in the normal figure winning lottery by the distribution function section when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. As shown in FIG. 262(A), in the normal game state per normal figure win/fail table, if the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is 0, it is distributed to the normal figure, and the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is 1. - 299, it will be classified as an outlier. In addition, when the game condition is established as a result of the lottery winning a normal symbol, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a winning symbol as a game result, and the electric winning symbol as a sorting function part of the entering ball sorting device 37 is used. The object 373 is actuated by the operating function section, and is closed by the termination function section when a closing condition as a termination condition of the electric accessory 373 is satisfied. In other words, in the normal gaming state, the probability of winning a normal figure is set to 1/300, the frequency of operation of the electric accessory 373 of the entering ball sorting device 37 is low, and the frequency of operation of the electric accessory 373 of the entering ball sorting device 37 (the first non-electric operated It is difficult for a game ball to enter the opening 371). As a result, when a game ball enters the through gate 317 in the normal gaming state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first prize opening 391 for right-handed players.

The time-saving gaming state normal figure win/failure table shown in FIG. 262(B) is a table used in the normal figure winning lottery by the distribution function unit when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (a-time-saving gaming state or c-time-saving gaming state). be. As shown in FIG. 262(B), in the time-saving game state per normal figure winning/falsifying table, when the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is 0, it is out, and when the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is 1 to 299, it is out. It is distributed according to the general map. In addition, if the game condition is established as the result of the lottery winning a normal symbol, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a winning symbol as a game result, and the electric accessory 373 of the entering ball sorting device 37 is activated. . In other words, in the time-saving game state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to 299/300, and the electric accessory 373 as the sorting function section of the ball sorting device 37 operates frequently. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, game balls are likely to enter the entering ball sorting device 37 (first non-electric operating port 371 or second non-electric operating port 372). As a result, when a game ball enters the through gate 317 in the time-saving game state, the game ball is likely to enter the first winning hole 371 or the second winning hole 315 for right-handed players.

[Classification table per ordinary map]
Here, FIG. 262(C) and FIG. 262(D) are diagrams showing an example of a type distribution table per ordinary figure. In this embodiment, as the type distribution table per normal figure, there is a type distribution table per normal game state normal figure shown in FIG. 262(C), and a type allocation table per normal figure in the time saving gaming state shown in FIG. Two types are set: That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the result of the lottery for a regular figure is different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (a-time-saving gaming state or c-time-saving gaming state). The sorting probabilities of the type of regular symbols (per short open regular symbol and per long open regular symbol) derived when the game condition is satisfied by winning a symbol are different. In this embodiment, when the number X of regular fluctuations pending is not the upper limit value and the acceptance permission state is such that the number X of regular fluctuations pending can be increased by the entry of game balls into the through gate 317, the game to the through gate 317 is If the result of the winning lottery that is executed when a ball enters the ball is a winning winning pattern as a game condition, if the gaming state is a normal gaming state, a short opening winning winning pattern is derived, and the gaming state is a time saving game. In the gaming state (a time saving gaming state or c working time saving gaming state), the long open normal map win is derived.

Here, in the case of a short open regular symbol hit as a game condition, a game result is derived in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the regular symbol corresponding to the regular symbol hit (or short open regular symbol hit) in the regular symbol game. After that, the electric accessory 373 as a sorting function part is activated by the actuation function part to open the incoming ball sorting device 37, and after a predetermined short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has passed, the end condition is met. Based on this, the electric accessory 373 is returned by the actuating function section, and the entering ball sorting device 37 is closed, so that a short open normal pattern winning game is executed. In other words, in the short open regular game, the time during which the game ball can enter the ball distributing device 37 is set to a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds). In this short open regular game, the game ball enters the entering ball sorting device 37 (first non-electric operating port 371 or second non-electric operating port 372) because the opening time of the electric accessory 373 is short. hard. As a result, in a gaming state in which a short open regular winning game is executed, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first winning hole 371 or the second winning hole 315. Of course, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first winning hole 371 or the second winning hole 315 even in the short open regular winning game, and in this case, the game ball can enter the first winning hole 371 or the second winning hole 315. If the ball is hit, a jackpot lottery is executed, and a jackpot game or a small win game in which the variable winning device 38 is activated can occur. However, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the entering ball sorting device 37 in the short open regular game, it is difficult for a jackpot game or a small win game to occur as an opportunity for the short open regular game to occur.

On the other hand, in the case of a long open common symbol hit as a game condition, a game result is derived in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the normal symbol corresponding to the common symbol hit (or long open common symbol hit) in the common symbol game. After that, the electric accessory 373 as a sorting function part is activated by the operation function part to open the incoming ball sorting device 37, and the termination condition is satisfied after a predetermined long period of time (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed. Based on this, the electric accessory 373 is returned by the actuating function section, and thereby the entering ball sorting device 37 is closed, and a long open standard winning game is executed. In other words, in the long open regular game, the time during which the game ball can enter the ball distributing device 37 is set to a long time (for example, 6 seconds). In this long-open regular game, the game ball enters the ball sorting device 37 (first non-electric operating port 371 or second non-electric operating port 372) due to the long opening time of the electric accessory 373. easy. As a result, in a gaming state in which a long open regular winning game is executed, the game ball is likely to enter the first winning hole 371 or the second winning hole 315 for right-handed players. Therefore, when a long open regular winning game occurs, a jackpot game or a small winning game is less likely to occur than when a short open regular winning game occurs as a trigger.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, only the short open normal map win is set as the gaming condition, and when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (a-time-saving gaming state or c-time-saving gaming state) Only the long open standard hit is set as the game condition, but the short open standard hit and the long open standard hit are set as the game conditions when the game state is one or both of the normal game state and the short time game state. You may set both winnings.

The normal game state per normal figure type distribution table shown in FIG. This is the table used. As shown in FIG. 262(C), in the normal game state per normal pattern type distribution table, the values 0 to 199 of the type random number counter C5 per normal pattern are distributed to each short open normal pattern, and the values 0 to 199 are distributed to each short open normal pattern, There is no sorting. Of course, the normal game state per normal game type distribution table may set the distribution per short open standard size to other than 100% (the allocation per long open standard size is 0%).

The time-saving gaming state normal map type distribution table shown in FIG. 262(D) indicates that a game ball enters the through gate when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (a-time-saving gaming state or c-time-saving gaming state). This is a table used in the regular lottery drawn based on the event. As shown in FIG. 262(D), in the time saving game state per normal pattern type distribution table, the value of the type random number counter C5 per normal pattern from 0 to 199 is distributed per long open normal pattern, and per short open normal pattern. There is no distribution. Of course, the time saving game state per normal pattern type distribution table may set the allocation per long open normal pattern to other than 100% (the allocation per short open normal pattern is 0%).

[Jackpot success/failure table]
Here, FIGS. 263(A) to 263(C) are diagrams showing an example of the jackpot success/failure table used in the jackpot lottery by the distribution function unit. The jackpot lottery is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 314, first winning hole 391, or second winning hole 315 as the entering ball section, and the type of the entering ball section into which the game ball entered. This is executed by referring to the jackpot success/failure table according to the gaming state. In this embodiment, the jackpot success/failure tables include a regular special 1 jackpot success/failure table shown in FIG. 263(A), a time-saving special 1 jackpot success/failure table shown in FIG. 262(B), and a special 2 special 1 jack success/failure table shown in FIG. 262(C). There are three types of tables: a jackpot table and a jackpot table.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the jackpot lottery on the jackpot success/failure table, jackpot, small win, c-time saving transition, and loss are set. A jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery is a special symbol game that announces the result of the jackpot lottery.The special symbol and decorative symbol are stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol as a game result, and the jackpot game is executed after the special symbol game ends. This is the gaming condition for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state. A small win as a result of a jackpot lottery is a special symbol game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery.Special symbols and decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as a small prize symbol as a game result, and after the special symbol game ends, the small prize game This is a gaming condition for transitioning to a small winning gaming state where this is executed. The c time-saving transition as a result of the jackpot lottery is a special symbol game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery, in which the special symbols and decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the c time-saving transition symbol as a game result, and after the end of the special symbol game, c This is a gaming condition for shifting to a time-saving gaming state. A winning lottery result as a result of a jackpot lottery is a lottery result in which special symbols and decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as a winning symbol in a special figure game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery. In the jackpot success/failure table of this embodiment, 65536 pieces from 0 to 65535 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, 391 (or special figure game By determining whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained at the start of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot, small win, c time-saving transition, or loss set in the jackpot propriety table, the result of the jackpot lottery is determined as follows. It is divided into jackpot, small win, time saving transition, and loss.

As shown in FIG. 263(A), the normal special 1 jackpot win/fail table is used for the jackpot lottery in the normal game state for game balls entering the first winning holes 314, 391 as the ball entry section. In the normal special 1 jackpot win/fail table, among the 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 206 random numbers from 0 to 205 are distributed as jackpots, and the other random numbers are distributed as losers. It's sorted out. In other words, in the jackpot lottery by the distribution function unit in the normal gaming state for game balls entering the first winning slots 314, 391, the jackpot probability is distributed to approximately 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the remaining is classified as a loss, and is not classified as a small win or a time-saving transition.

As shown in FIG. 263(B), the a time saving special 1 jackpot winning/falsifying table is used for the jackpot lottery in the a time saving gaming state for the game ball entering the first winning hole 314, 391 as the ball entry section. Ru. a In the time saving special 1 jackpot success/failure table, out of 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 206 random numbers from 0 to 205 are distributed as jackpots, and 412 random numbers from 206 to 617 are distributed. A random value of c is allocated to time-saving transition, and other random values are allocated to outliers. In other words, in the jackpot lottery by the sorting function unit in the time-saving gaming state for game balls entering the first winning slots 314, 391, the jackpot probability is distributed to approximately 1/318.1 (206/65536), c Time-saving shift probability is distributed to approximately 2/318.1 (512/65536), and the rest are distributed to losers and are not distributed to small wins.

As shown in FIG. 263(C), the special 2 jackpot success/failure table is used for the jackpot lottery for the game ball entering the second winning hole 315 as the ball entry section. In the special 2 jackpot success/failure table, among the 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 43691 random numbers from 0 to 43690 are distributed as small wins, and the other random numbers are distributed as losers. It's sorted out. In other words, in the jackpot lottery by the sorting function unit for game balls that enter the second winning slot 315, the small winning probability is divided into approximately 2/3 (43691/65536), and the rest is distributed to losers, and the jackpot or c) They will not be assigned to the time-saving transition.

[Jackpot type distribution table]
Here, in FIGS. 263(D) and 263(E), two types are set: a jackpot type distribution table and a V winning jackpot type distribution table.

The jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 263(D) is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot type distribution table. In this embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot as a game condition, it is used to sort out the type of jackpot. As shown in FIG. 263(D), in the special figure jackpot type distribution table, among the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) from 0 to 19, 19 random values from 0 to 18 are 4R. One random value of 19 will be distributed as a 10R jackpot. That is, in this embodiment, two types of special map jackpots are set, either the 4R jackpot or the 10R jackpot, and the allocation rate for the 4R jackpot is set to 95%, and the allocation rate for the 10R jackpot is set to 5%. It is set.

Here, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the game conditions for the special map jackpot game as a special game are established, and the round game in which the opening/closing door 382 of the variable winning device 38 is opened is changed to the jackpot type. Accordingly, a special figure jackpot game is executed in which an opening/closing execution mode is repeated a plurality of times. After the special drawing jackpot game is over, the electric accessory 373 of the ball sorting device 37 is likely to be activated, and the first non-electric operation opening 371 of the ball sorting device 37 opens the first winning hole 391. A transition is made to the time-saving game state in which the game ball can easily enter the game ball. In addition, in this embodiment, as a condition for ending the time-saving game state a, the game condition is the execution of the special figure game 100 times, and the result of the jackpot lottery by the distribution function section before the execution of the special figure game 100 times. The game ends when a jackpot or c-time saving transition is announced as a game result by the stop display of special symbols and decorative symbols. In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum number of times the special figure game is executed in the time-saving game state a is set to 100 times, but the maximum number of times the special figure game is executed is not limited to 100 times and may be another number of times. . Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-saving gaming state a occurs with a 100% probability after the end of the special drawing jackpot game, but the probability that the time-saving gaming state a occurs after the end of the special drawing jackpot game is not limited to 100%. , other probabilities may be used.

The V winning jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 263(E) is used to allocate the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a small win. It is used to determine the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed when the end condition is satisfied by the game ball entering the game ball. As shown in FIG. 263(E), in the V winning jackpot type distribution table, among the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) from 0 to 19, all random values from 0 to 19 are 10R jackpot. be distributed to. That is, in this embodiment, in the V winning jackpot, the distribution rate of the 10R jackpot is set to 100%. Therefore, when the V-winning jackpot game is executed, it is more advantageous in terms of balls being paid compared to when the special figure jackpot game is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the 10R jackpot is set as the type of the V winning jackpot, but the types of the V winning jackpot are set to multiple types with different numbers of round games and expected ball output values, and these multiple types are set as the type of the V winning jackpot. From this, the type of V winning jackpot may be randomly determined (determined by random number lottery). That is, the number of round games to be executed in a jackpot game in a so-called rush state may be randomly determined from a plurality of types. In this way, when the type of V-winning jackpot is randomly determined from multiple types of V-winning jackpots, when the V-winning jackpot game is executed, the player expects to win a large amount of balls. Since the game can be executed, the interest in the game is improved. In particular, in a pseudo-jackpot game state (rush state) in which multiple V-winning jackpot games can be executed, if the pseudo-jackpot game presentation (display) makes it appear as if it is a single V-winning jackpot game, multiple Since the player can play the game while expecting a larger total number of balls in the V-winning jackpot game, the game becomes more interesting.

[Variation table]
Here, FIGS. 264(A) to 264(D) are diagrams showing examples of variation tables. The variable table is used to set the variable display time of special symbols in the special symbol game that informs the results of the jackpot lottery. In this embodiment, the fluctuation tables include a special 1 out fluctuation table shown in FIG. 264(A), a special 1 hit fluctuation table shown in FIG. 264(B), a special 2 fluctuation table A shown in FIG. 264(C), and Four types of special 2 variation table B shown in 264(D) are set.

As shown in FIG. 264(A), the special 1 loss variation table is the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the first winning hole 391 as the ball entering section. It is used when the transition is off or c is a time-saving transition. In the special 1 off variation table, special symbol variation patterns are sorted according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. In this special 1 off variation table, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a reach that is out of order or a reach other than out of order, the special pattern variation pattern is "01" with a variation display time of 30 seconds, and a variation display time of 60 seconds. The variable display time is divided into either "02", which is seconds, or "03", which is 90 seconds. In addition, in the special 1 winning fluctuation table, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a complete winning reach or c time saving transition, the special pattern fluctuation pattern is "04" with a fluctuation display time of 7 seconds, and a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds. The variable display time is divided into either "05", which is seconds, or "06", which is 15 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 264(B), the special 1 winning variation table is a distribution function executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the first winning hole 391 as a ball entering section. It is used when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot as the gaming conditions are met. In the special 1 per fluctuation table, the special pattern fluctuation pattern is "01" with a fluctuation display time of 30 seconds, "02" with a fluctuation display time of 60 seconds, or "03" with a fluctuation display time of 90 seconds. It is divided into crabs.

The special 2 variation table A and the special 2 variation table B shown in FIG. 264(C) and FIG. 264(D) are a jackpot executed based on the game ball entering the second winning hole 315 as the ball entering section. It is used to set the variable display time in the special figure game that announces the lottery results. Here, the second prize opening 315 can be changed between an acceptable state and an unacceptable state by the second opening/closing member 39B, which is a non-electric accessory, and after being set to the acceptable state by the operating function section, the end condition is When four game balls enter the game ball, the termination function section makes the ball unacceptable. That is, when the second winning a prize opening 315 is made into the acceptable state once, four game balls can enter the second winning a prize opening 315 during this accepting possible state.

The special 2 variation table A shown in FIG. 264(C) is based on the fact that a game ball is first entered into the second winning hole 315 among the four game balls that are entered into the second winning hole 315. When setting a variable display time for the second special figure game that is executed by Used when setting display time. In the special 2 variation table A, only "06" with a variation display time of 15 seconds is assigned. That is, the variable display time for the second special figure game that is executed based on the game ball being first entered into the second winning hole 315 is always set to 15 seconds.

Special 2 variation table B shown in FIG. 264(D) shows that among the four game balls that enter the second winning hole 315, the second to fourth game balls enter the second winning hole 315. Used when setting a variable display time for the second special figure game that is executed based on being hit, that is, when setting a variable display time when the value of the special 2 winning counter is between 2 and 4. . In the special 2 variation table B, only "07" with a variation display time of 1 second is assigned. That is, the variable display time for the second special figure game that is executed based on the second to fourth game balls entering the second winning hole 315 is always set to 1 second.

In addition, the variable display time set in the special 2 variable table A and the special 2 variable table B may be set in multiple types, and the variable display time for all four game balls that enter the second winning hole 315. A common special 2 fluctuation table may be used as the special 2 fluctuation table.

By the way, the firing interval of the game balls when the game balls are fired continuously is, for example, 0.6 seconds, as described above. On the other hand, the variable display time for the second special figure game that is executed based on the game ball being first entered into the second winning hole 315 is always set to 15 seconds. Therefore, when the second special figure game is started based on the first game ball being entered into the second winning hole 315, 25 balls (=15 It is possible to fire a game ball at a speed of 0.6 seconds/0.6 seconds. In this way, by setting the variable display time to 15 seconds for the second special figure game that is executed based on the first game ball entering the second winning hole 315, the second special figure game Until the end of the game, it becomes possible to enter the remaining three game balls into the second winning hole 315. As a result, after the second prize opening 315 serving as the ball entry part is opened and the second special figure reservation number M can be increased, it becomes an acceptable state, and then the second special figure reservation number M cannot be increased and it becomes an unacceptable state. The maximum number of reservations can be set to 3.

Furthermore, in the jackpot lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the second winning slot 315, the probability that the result will be a small win is set as high as approximately 2/3 (see Figure 263(C)). There is. On the other hand, as mentioned above, it is possible to set the second special figure reservation number M to three while the special figure game is being executed based on the fact that the game ball is first entered into the second winning hole 315. can. Therefore, when four game balls enter the second winning hole 315 by opening the second winning hole 315, there is a high possibility that the results of the jackpot lottery for these balls will include multiple small wins. As a result, based on the execution of the small winning game a plurality of times, a series of rush states are likely to occur in which a plurality of V winning jackpot games are executed consecutively in a short period of time.

In this embodiment, as described later, when the second winning hole 315 is opened, a plurality of game balls are entered into the second winning hole 315, and a plurality of V winning jackpot games are played. In the case of a series of rush states that are executed continuously, a special figure game that is executed at least during the period of advantageous games from the first V winning jackpot game to the end of the last V winning jackpot game. And in the small winning game, a pseudo display as a specific effect image similar to the effect when the V winning jackpot game is executed is executed (see FIG. 279). As a result, when a plurality of V winning jackpot games are executed with one opening of the second winning opening 315, at least the first V winning jackpot game starts and the last V winning jackpot game ends. Even if a special figure game or a small winning game is executed during the advantageous gaming period until the game is played, a pseudo jackpot game effect (display) is executed in which one jackpot game is continuously executed as an advantageous effect. It becomes possible to do so. As a result, it is possible to give the impression to the player that the balls put out in multiple V winning jackpot games are the balls put out in one V winning jackpot game. Even if the number of balls acquired is small, when multiple V-winning jackpot games are executed, it is possible to give an impact of the ball output as if a large amount of balls were obtained by one V-winning jackpot game. can.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 290.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
The main timer interrupt process of this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in some of the procedures of the start winning process and the through gate process. Hereinafter, the start winning process and the through gate process will be described as processes executed in the main timer interrupt process.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17. Hereinafter, the starting prize winning process will be explained with reference to FIG. 265.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 265, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a win in the first winning hole 314 or the first winning hole 391 as the ball entry section. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there has been a winning in the first winning opening 314, 391 (step S1101: Yes), the process moves to step S1102, and if it determines that there has been no winning in the first winning opening 314, 391 ( Step S1101: No), the process moves to step S1109.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines that the first special symbol reservation number N stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (in this embodiment) as an unacceptable state that cannot be increased. 4) Determine whether or not. Here, if the first special symbol reservation number N is the maximum number of reservations as an unacceptable state (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1109. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is in an acceptable state in which the first reserved number of special symbols N is not the maximum number of reserved symbols (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the first reserved number of special symbols N (step S1103). .

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17, and in step S1402 in the main process in FIG. 267, which will be described later. And obtain the counter value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S1414, and apply the counter value to the first reservation areas REA1 to 4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. It is stored in the first vacant reservation area of the reservation area REA4.

<Steps S1105 to S1108>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state is on. When the normal gaming state flag is on (step S1105: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 determines the validity based on the normal special 1 jackpot validity table (see FIG. 263(A)). (step S1106), and the process moves to step S1108. On the other hand, when the normal gaming state flag is off (step S1105: No), that is, when the gaming state is not the normal gaming state but the a time-saving gaming state, the ) (see step S1107), and the process moves to step S1108. In step S1108, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot is correct or not in step S2103 in the special pattern fluctuation start process of FIG. The content of the special figure validity information is confirmed before it becomes a determination target, and the first special figure hold command is set in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result.

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a win in the second winning hole 315. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there has been a winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1109: Yes), the process moves to step S1110, and if it determines that there has been no winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1109: No). ), the start winning process ends.

<Steps S1110 to S1112>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines that the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number as an unacceptable state that cannot be increased (in this embodiment, Unlike the first embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not 3). Here, if the second special symbol pending number M is the maximum pending number as an unacceptable state (step S1110: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the starting winning process. On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number M is in an acceptable state where it is not the maximum reservation number (step S1110: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the second special figure reservation number M (step S1111). . Furthermore, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the special 2 winnings counter for counting the number of game balls entering the second winning hole 315 (step S1112), and moves the process to step S1113.

<Step S1113>
In step S1113, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17, and in step S1402 in the main process in FIG. 267, which will be described later. And obtain the counter value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S1414, and apply the counter value to the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth of the second special figure reservation storage area REB of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. It is stored in the first vacant reservation area in the reservation area REB4.

<Steps S1114 and S1115>
In step S1114, the MPU 41 makes a judgment based on the special 2 jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 263(C)). In step S1115, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol validity information for the second special symbol reservation obtained in steps S1113 and S1114 is used for determining whether the jackpot is valid or not in step S2119 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 281, which will be described later. The content of the special figure validity information is confirmed, and based on this confirmation result, a second special figure hold command is set in the RAM 412, and the process moves to step S1116.

<Step S1116>
In step S1116, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the Special 2 winnings counter added in step S1112 is 4 or not. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether four game balls, which are the maximum number of balls, have entered the second winning hole 315. When the value of the special 2 prize winning number counter is 4 (step S1116: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1117, and when the value of the special 2 winning prize number counter is not 4 (step S1116: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1117. Finish the winning process.

<Steps S1117 and S1118>
When the value of the special 2 winnings number counter is 4 (step S1116: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the pseudo jackpot game state flag to on (step S1117), and clears the special 2 winnings number counter (step S1118). , the start winning process ends.

Here, the pseudo jackpot game state flag indicates that a series of rush games are in progress as an advantageous game in which multiple V winning jackpot games can be executed consecutively, that is, a pseudo jackpot game state (pseudo jackpot game performance (display)) This is a flag indicating that it is the timing to execute, and is referenced in step S1912 of FIG. 273 to determine whether or not to set a pseudo jackpot game pattern command.

[Through gate processing]
Here, FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the through gate process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. In the through gate process, when a game ball enters the through gate 317 serving as the ball entry section, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the regular figure holding storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The through gate process will be described below with reference to FIG. 266.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 266, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether a game ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S1301). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 is determined based on winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process in step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S1301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1302, and if it determines that the game ball has not passed through the through gate 317 (step S1301: No), the through gate process ends.

<Step S1302>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S1301: Yes), the MPU 41 selects the normal drawings stored in the normal drawing fluctuation pending number storage area SNA set in the normal drawing holding storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether the variable pending number X is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment) as an unacceptable state that cannot be increased (step S1302). If the general figure fluctuation pending number S1302: No), the process moves to step S1303.

<Steps S1303 and S1304>
If the number X of regular pattern fluctuations pending is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1302: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number X of general pattern fluctuations pending (step S1303), and in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Obtain the counter values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5 that are updated, and the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 that is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main process in FIG. The value is stored in the first vacant holding area among the first to fourth holding areas SE4 of the holding area 412c in the RAM 412 (step S1304), and the through gate process ends.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing procedure executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main process of this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a small winning game control process (step S14007-1) is executed. Hereinafter, the small winning game control process will be explained, and the processes necessary for understanding this embodiment will also be explained as appropriate.

[Public figure game control process]
Here, FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the regular game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of FIG. 267. In the normal pattern game control process, processing for controlling the fluctuating display and stop display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 is executed. Hereinafter, the normal figure game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 268.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 268, in the normal pattern game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (the normal pattern game is being executed) is on. is determined (step S1501). The normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to ON in step S1711 when the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern game) is started in the normal pattern fluctuation start process of FIG. 270 described later, and the normal pattern is stopped and displayed ( When the general figure game ends), it is set to OFF in step S1510 in the general figure game control process.

The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1507 when the flag during normal figure fluctuation display is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the common figure game is being executed. On the other hand, when the flag during normal pattern fluctuation display is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
If the normal figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, if the normal figure game is not being executed, the MPU 41 activates the electric accessory 373 as the sorting function part of the sorting ball entering device 37. It is determined by the functional unit whether or not the electric accessory opening flag indicating that the electric accessory is being opened (playing a normal game as an advantageous game) is on (step S1502). The electric accessory opening flag is set to ON in step S1815 when the electric accessory 373 is opened in the normal game control process described later (see FIG. 271), and is set to ON in step S1815 when the electric accessory 373 is closed. It is set to off in S1824 (see FIG. 272).

When the electric accessory opening flag is on (step S1502: Yes), that is, when the game per common symbol is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the common symbol game control process. On the other hand, when the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the game per common figure is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
When the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the normal game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on. It is determined whether or not (step S1503). In the jackpot game control process described later, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S2213 when the jackpot game starts (see FIG. 282), and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends. (See Figure 283).

When the jackpot game flag is on (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the general figure game control process. That is, in this embodiment, the common figure game is not started while the jackpot game is being executed. Of course, the common figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
If the jackpot game flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small win game flag indicating that a small win game is being executed is on. (Step S1504). The flag during a small winning game is set to ON when a small winning game is started, and is set to OFF when a small winning game ends in a small winning game control process to be described later.

When the small winning game flag is on (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the general figure game control process. That is, in this embodiment, the common figure game is not started while the small winning game is being executed. Of course, the common figure game may be started while the small winning game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the small winning game flag is off (step S1504: No), that is, when the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
When the small winning game in progress flag is off (step S1504: No), that is, when the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 stores the general pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA set in the general pattern pending storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not the number of regular pattern fluctuations pending stored in 1 is 0 (step S1505). The MPU 41 ends the general pattern game control process when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S1505: Yes), and when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1505: No), the MPU 41 ends the processing. The process moves to step S1506.

<Step S1506>
If the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1505: No), the MPU 41 executes the general pattern data setting process for the general pattern validity information stored in the general pattern pending storage area 412c (step S1506), The process moves to step S1507. Note that details of the ordinary map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 269.

<Step S1507>
In step S1507, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol fluctuation start process for causing the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 to execute a variable display of the normal symbol based on the information stored in the common symbol holding storage area 412c. , the general figure game control process ends. Note that the details of the ordinary figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 270.

<Step S1508>
If the normal figure fluctuation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, if the normal figure game is being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on. It is determined whether or not (step S1508).

When the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1508: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1511. On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S1508: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509.

<Step S1509>
If the jackpot game flag is off (step S1508: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small win game flag indicating that a small win game is being executed is on. (Step S1509).

When the small winning game flag is on (step S1509: Yes), that is, when the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1511. On the other hand, when the small winning game flag is off (step S1509: No), that is, when the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1510.

<Step S1510>
When the small winning game flag is off (step S1509: No), that is, when the jackpot game and the small winning game are not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display and which is advantageous. It is determined whether the conditions for ending the common figure game as a game are satisfied (step S1510). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop displaying the normal symbols variably displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 as a game result (end the common symbol game).

If the regular symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1510: Yes), the MPU 41 stops displaying the regular symbol fluctuatingly displayed in the regular symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 as a game result (ends the regular symbol game). ), the process moves to step S1511. On the other hand, if the normal symbol fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S1510: No), the MPU 41 stops displaying (normally If it is not the timing to end the figure game, the general figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S1511 to S1513>
When the flag during normal figure fluctuation display is on (step S1501: Yes), and when the flag during jackpot game or small winning game flag as an advantageous game is on (Yes at step S1508 or S1509), that is, when the normal figure game is displayed. When a jackpot game or a small win game is started during execution, or when the normal symbol fluctuation display time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S1510: Yes), the normal symbol that is fluctuatingly displayed is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol game is stopped). If it is the timing to end), the MPU 41 stops and displays the normal symbol on the symbol according to the result of the lottery per common symbol corresponding to the regular symbol game (step S1511). For example, if the result of the random drawing by the distribution function unit is a normal pattern winning as a game condition, the normal pattern is stopped and displayed as a symbol corresponding to the normal pattern winning as a game result, while the normal pattern is stopped and displayed If the result is a loss and the game conditions are not satisfied, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed with the symbols corresponding to the loss.

In addition, the MPU 41 sets to OFF the flag indicating that the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner (while the normal symbol game is being executed) (step S1512). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern variation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed, that is, the normal pattern game has ended (step S1513), and ends the normal pattern game control process.

In addition, the ordinary figure fluctuation stop display flag is used to determine whether it is the timing to start the ordinary figure winning game (release the electric accessory 315b) in step S1801 of the ordinary figure winning game control process in FIG. 270, which will be described later. Referenced for.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution of the normal pattern game is not limited to the timing to stop displaying the normal pattern (to end the normal pattern game), which is fluctuatingly displayed as the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern has elapsed. If a jackpot game or a small win game is started during the game, the fluctuating normal symbols are stopped and displayed (the common symbol game is ended). That is, when a jackpot game or a small win game is started, the normal pattern game is forcibly terminated before the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern elapses. Of course, even when a jackpot game or a small win game is started, the normal pattern game may be continuously executed until the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern elapses.

[Public figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general map data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of FIG. 268. In the ordinary figure data setting process, the storage contents of the ordinary figure holding storage area 412c in the storage area of the main control device 4 in FIG. 11 are updated. The general map data setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 269.

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in FIG. 269, in the normal pattern data setting process, the MPU 41 first subtracts 1 from the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X stored in the normal pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA (step S1601). For example, if the number X of normal pattern fluctuations pending before subtraction is 4, the number X of normal pattern fluctuations pending after subtraction is set to 3. As a result, in the case of 4, which is an unacceptable state where it is impossible to increase the number of general fluctuations pending, the number X of general fluctuations pending is in an acceptable state where it is possible to increase the number It is said that there are 3.

Then, the MPU 41 moves the general pattern validity information from the general pattern first holding area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE (step S1602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the common symbol validity information stored in the common symbol second holding area SE2 to the common symbol fourth holding area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the common figure validity information of the common figure second holding area SE2 is moved to the common figure first holding area SE1, and the common figure correctness information of the common figure third holding area SE3 is moved to the common figure second holding area SE3. The area SE2 is moved to the area SE2, and the general pattern validity information of the general pattern fourth holding area SE4 is moved to the general pattern third holding area SE3.

[General figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1507 of FIG. 268. In the normal symbol variation start process, the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display section 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery results in the common symbol winning lottery. Hereinafter, the normal pattern fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 270.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 270, in the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state is on (step S1701).

When the normal gaming state flag is on (step S1701: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1702, and when the normal gaming state flag is off (step S1701 : No), that is, in the time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S1705.

<Step S1702>
When the normal gaming state flag is on (step S1701: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 as a sorting function unit uses the normal gaming state normal/normal figure hit/fail table (FIG. 262(A) (see) and the normal game state per-pat figure type distribution table (see FIG. 262(C)), it is included as numerical information in the standard pattern validity information stored in the standard pattern execution area SAE of the standard pattern holding storage area 412c. It is determined whether or not the values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5 corresponding to the normal winning pattern are values corresponding to the normal pattern winning, that is, whether or not the normal pattern winning is the normal pattern winning as a gaming condition. , the process moves to step S1703.

<Steps S1703 and S1704>
In step S1703, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol hit in step S1702 is a common symbol hit. If the result of the determination of whether or not it is a win on a regular symbol is a winning on a regular symbol that satisfies the game conditions (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 operates as an electric role player as a sorting function section of the entering ball sorting device 37 in a game on a winning symbol on a regular symbol. A flag for hitting a short open normal figure that causes the object 373 to open briefly is set on (step S1704), and the process moves to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the determination of whether or not the winning of the common symbol is correct is that the game conditions are not satisfied (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708.

<Step S1705>
When the normal gaming state flag is off (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 displays the time-saving gaming state per-regular figure win/failure table (see FIG. 262(B)) and the time-saving gaming state per normal pattern per-type distribution table (see FIG. 262(B)). D)), the values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal drawing correctness information stored in the normal drawing execution area SAE of the normal drawing holding storage area 412c, are A determination is made as to whether the value corresponds to a normal figure hit or not, and the process moves to step S1706.

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
In step S1706, the MPU 41 as a sorting function unit determines whether or not the result of the determination of whether or not the winning of a common symbol in step S1705 is a winning of a common symbol that satisfies the gaming conditions. If the result of the determination of whether or not winning a common symbol is a winning symbol that satisfies the game conditions (step S1705: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the electric accessory 373 of the sorting ball entering device 37 to be opened for a long time in the game of winning a common symbol. The long open normal map hit flag is set on (step S1707), and the process moves to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the determination of whether or not the winning of the common symbol is correct is that the game conditions are not satisfied (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
In step S1708, the MPU 41 refers to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the normal symbol fluctuation display time on the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 in the normal pattern game, by referring to the normal pattern fluctuation display table (not shown). Execute the general figure fluctuation pattern setting process to be set. The ordinary figure fluctuation display table (not shown) includes, for example, a normal gaming state ordinary figure fluctuation table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and a time saving gaming state that is referred to when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state. Contains a general figure fluctuation table. Therefore, in the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern setting process, the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is set based on the ordinary figure fluctuation display table according to the type of gaming state. In addition, since the time-saving game state normal pattern fluctuation display table is set so that the average time of normal symbol fluctuation display time is shorter than the normal game state normal pattern fluctuation display table, in the time-saving game state, The time for executing the regular figure game is shorter than that in the game state.

Then, in addition to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern set in step S1708, the MPU 41 receives the result of the normal pattern winning determination in step S1702 or S1705 (the normal pattern winning lottery result), and the type of gaming state (normal gaming state, A regular figure fluctuation pattern command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the time-saving gaming state (step S1709), and the process moves to step S1710.

Note that the common pattern variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, in the audio lamp control device 5, based on the general pattern fluctuation pattern command, an effect corresponding to the general pattern game, for example, an effect indicating that the general pattern game is being executed, is displayed on the symbol display section 341 etc. An effect showing the results of a drawing or lottery for a common map is executed.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 recognizes that the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, that is, that the normal symbol game is being executed as an advantageous game in which a game result can be derived by the stop display of the normal symbols when the gaming conditions are met. The common figure fluctuation displaying flag shown in FIG.

In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is referred to in step S1501 in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 22 to determine whether the normal pattern game is being executed (during the normal pattern fluctuation display).

[Game control processing per regular map]
Here, FIG. 271 and FIG. 272 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. 267. In the normal pattern winning game control process, since the result of the normal pattern winning lottery is a general pattern winning as the gaming condition is satisfied, the normal pattern is stopped and displayed as a pattern corresponding to the normal pattern winning as a game result in the normal game. In this case, by controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 373 of the sorting ball entering device 37 as a sorting function section, an accepting state is established in which the game balls are allowed to enter the sorting ball entering device 37, and a game ball is Processing is executed to switch between the unacceptable state and the unacceptable state that limits the entry of balls. In addition, in the normal figure game control process, the operation control of the movable distribution member 374 of the distribution ball entry device 37 is executed by the switching function section. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, the game control process per normal symbol will be explained.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 271, in the normal pattern winning game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed (the normal pattern game has ended) is on. (Step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the normal symbol winning game as an advantageous game. In addition, the normal symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1513 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game control process of FIG. 268.

If the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the timing at which the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1802. On the other hand, if the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), that is, if it is not the timing at which the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1817 in FIG. 272.

<Step S1802>
When the normal figure fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, when the timing is such that the normal figure winning game can be started, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game in progress flag or the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed. It is determined whether or not the small winning game flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed is on (step S1802).

When the flag during a jackpot game or the flag during a small win game is on (step S1802: Yes), that is, when a jackpot game or a small win game as an advantageous game is being executed, the MPU 41 executes the normal game winning game control process. end. In other words, in the present embodiment, if a regular game is forcibly terminated due to the start of a jackpot game or a small winning game, the result of the regular lottery for the relevant regular game is the regular lottery as the game condition. Even if this is the case, the game won by winning a normal figure is not started. That is, in the present embodiment, the regular winning game is not started while the jackpot game and the small winning game are being executed. Of course, a new common figure game may be started while a jackpot game or a small win game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag and the small win game flag are off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game or the small win game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
When the jackpot game flag and the small win game flag are off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game and the small win game are not being executed as advantageous games, the MPU 41 sets the long open regular hit flag to on. is set (step S1803). The long open regular map hit flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per regular map is a long open regular map, and when the result of the lottery per regular map is a long open regular map, the normal map of Figure 270 It is set to ON in step S1707 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished standard game is a long open standard winning as the game condition. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1807 when the long open general map hit flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), and when the long open general map hit flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), the process moves to step S1804.

<Step S1804>
If the long open double hit flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the lottery to win a short open double for the completed double open game is not a long open double hit, the MPU 41 selects a short open double hit. It is determined whether the hit flag is set on (step S1804). The short open regular map hit flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per regular map is a short open regular map, and when the result of the lottery per regular map is a short open regular map, the short open regular map hit flag in Figure 270 It is set to ON in step S1704 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished standard game is a short open standard winning as the game condition. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1805 when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to ON (step S1804: Yes), and when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to OFF (step S1804: No), that is, if the result of the winning lottery for the finished coin game is a loss, the process moves to step S1816.

<Steps S1805 and S1806>
When the short open regular map winning flag is set to ON (step S1805: Yes), that is, when the result of the short open regular lottery for the completed regular regular map game is a short open regular lottery, the MPU 41 The value corresponding to 0.1 second, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 373 of the entering ball sorting device 37 in the per-figure game (the time during which the game ball can enter the entering ball sorting device 37), is set in the opening time counter. Set as a value (step S1805). The opening time counter is referred to in step S1819 of FIG. 272 of the normal symbol game control process in order to determine the return timing of the electric accessory 373. Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open regular pattern hit flag to OFF (step S1806), and moves the process to step S1813.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the long open regular map hit flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular open regular lottery for the completed regular map game is a long open regular match, the MPU 41 Set the value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the electric accessory 373 of the entering ball sorting device 37 (the time during which the game ball can enter the entering ball sorting device 37) in the game per figure, as the value of the open time counter ( Step S1807). The opening time counter is referred to in step S1819 of FIG. 272 of the normal symbol game control process in order to determine the return timing of the electric accessory 373. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open normal pattern hit flag to OFF (step S1808), and moves the process to step S1809.

<Step S1809>
In step S1809, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the c-time-saving gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the c-time-saving gaming state is set to on. If the c time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S1809: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1810, and if the c time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S1809: No). , the process moves to step S1813.

<Step S1810 to Step S1812>
c When the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S1809: Yes), the MPU 41 operates the movable distribution member 374 as a distribution function section in the incoming ball distribution device 37 (step S1810). Specifically, the MPU 41 moves the movable sorting member 374 so that the game balls that have entered the ball sorting device 37 can be guided toward the first non-electric operation opening 371 and can be guided toward the second non-electric operation opening 372. The first non-electric operating opening 371 is capable of guiding game balls that have entered the ball sorting device 37 from a sorting state in which it cannot be guided (see FIG. 257(B)) toward the second non-electric operating opening 372. 257(C)). As a result, in the entering ball sorting device 37, when a game ball can enter the entering ball sorting device 37 due to the operation of the electric accessory 373 as a sorting function section, the entering ball sorting device 37 operates as a ball entering section. The second non-electric operating opening 372 is placed in a state where it can receive game balls. When a game ball enters the second non-electric actuation opening 372 serving as a ball entry part, the actuation function part operates the second opening/closing member 39B serving as a distribution function part, and the second opening/closing member 39B serving as a ball entry part operates. The second winning hole 315 is kept in an accepting state until the end condition is satisfied by the entry of four game balls.

Further, when the movable distribution member 374 is activated in step S1810, the MPU 41 sets a movable distribution member activation flag indicating that the movable distribution member 374 is activated (step S1811). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the normal gaming state transition flag that causes the gaming state to shift from the c time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state (step S1812), and moves the process to step S1813. That is, the condition for ending the time saving game state c is that the movable distribution member 374 as the distribution function section is activated by the operation function section.

In addition, the conditions for ending the c time-saving game state are that the electric accessory 373 as a sorting function part is activated by the operation function part in the c time-saving game state, and the electric accessory 373 activated in the c time-saving game state ends. c) that the normal figure winning game as an advantageous game is started in the time-saving game state; c) the normal figure winning game that was started in the time-saving gaming state ends; The second winning hole 315 is set to an accepting state, and the upper limit number (four in this embodiment) of game balls are entered into the second winning hole 315 which is in an accepting state, and the second winning hole 315 is set to an unacceptable state. It may also be something like being done.

<Steps S1813 to S1815>
c When the time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S1809: No), the MPU 41 operates the electric accessory 373 using the operation function section (step S1813). As a result, the entering ball sorting device 37 is changed from an unacceptable state in which it is impossible to enter a game ball to an accepting state in which it is possible to enter a game ball.

Here, in the incoming ball sorting device 37, the movable sorting member 374 can guide the game balls that have entered the incoming ball sorting device 37 toward the first non-electric operation opening 371 as the ball entering part. A distribution state in which the ball cannot be guided toward the second non-electric operating port 372 as a ball portion (see FIG. 257(B)), and a game ball that has entered the ball sorting device 37 is transferred to the second non-electric operating port 372. The distribution state is changed to a distribution state in which it can be guided towards the first non-electric actuation port 371 and cannot be guided towards the first non-electric actuating port 371 (see FIG. 257(C)). Therefore, in the incoming ball sorting device 37, depending on the attitude of the movable sorting member 374 as a sorting function section, the first non-electric operating port 371 is rendered unreceivable, while the second non-electric operating port 372 can be changed into a distribution state in which the first non-electric actuation port 371 is in an acceptable state and a distribution state in which the second non-electric actuation port 372 is in an unacceptable state. It is.

Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory release command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 373 as a sorting function unit is released (step S1814), and also A flag indicating that the electric accessory is being opened is set to ON (step S1815), and the process moves to step S1816.

Note that the electric accessory release command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. From this, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an effect indicating that the electric accessory 373 is released, for example, on the symbol display section 341, based on the electric accessory release command.

<Step S1816>
In step S1816, the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern variation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern game has ended) to OFF, and ends the normal pattern per game control process.

<Step S1817>
When the ordinary figure fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), as shown in FIG. 272, the MPU 41 releases the electric accessory 373 in step S1815 of FIG. It is determined whether the electric accessory opening flag, which is set to on in the above case, is set to on (step S1817). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game with common symbols as an advantageous game is being executed. When the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S1817: Yes), that is, when the game per common map is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1818. On the other hand, when the electric accessory opening flag is set to OFF (step S1817: No), that is, when the game per common symbol is not being executed, the MPU 41 ends the game control process for the common symbol.

<Steps S1818 and S1819>
If the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S1817: Yes), that is, if the game per normal figure is being executed, the MPU 41 executes step S1805 in FIG. 271 of the corresponding normal figure game control process or 1 is subtracted from the value of the open time counter set in S1807 (step S1818), and it is determined whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1819). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the electric accessory 373 as the distribution function section based on the satisfaction of the termination condition due to the elapse of the opening time. If the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1819: Yes), that is, if it is the return timing of the electric accessory 373 due to the elapse of the open time, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1822. On the other hand, if the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1819: No), that is, if it is not the return timing of the electric accessory 373 due to the elapse of the open time, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1820.

<Steps S1820 and S1821>
If the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1819: No), that is, if it is not the return timing of the electric accessory 373 due to the elapse of the open time, the MPU 41 causes the incoming ball sorting device 37 as the incoming ball part to It is determined whether the game ball has entered the ball (step S1820). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time for the electric accessory 373 to return due to the game ball entering the ball distributing device 37 serving as the distributing function unit, based on the satisfaction of the termination condition. Whether or not the game ball has entered the entering ball sorting device 37 is determined based on whether the game ball has entered the ball entering sensor 37a provided in the entering ball sorting device 37.

When the game ball enters the entering ball sorting device 37 (step S1820: Yes), that is, when it is the timing for the electric accessory 373 to return due to the game ball entering the entering ball sorting device 37, The time release counter is cleared (step S1821), and the process moves to step S1822. On the other hand, when the game ball has not entered the entering ball sorting device 37 (step S1820: No), the MPU 41 determines the return timing of the electric accessory 373 due to the game ball entering the entering ball sorting device 37. If not, the per-regular symbol game control process is ended.

<Steps S1822 to S1824>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1819: Yes), or if the game ball enters the ball sorting device 37 and clears the open time counter (step S1821), that is, the open time If it is time for the electric accessory 373 as a sorting function unit to return based on the passage of time or the completion of the termination condition due to the arrival of a game ball into the input ball sorting device 37, the MPU 41 as an operation termination unit Accessory object 373 is restored (step S1822). As a result, the entering ball sorting device 37 is closed, changing the accepting state to the unaccepting state, and the entry of game balls into the entering ball sorting device 37 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory closing command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 373 is closed (step S1823), and also sets an electric accessory closure command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 373 is closed (step S1823). The accessory opening flag is set to OFF (step S1824), and the process moves to step S1825.

Note that the electric accessory closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 is able to terminate, for example, the performance performed on the symbol display section 341, which indicates that the electric accessory is opened, based on the electric accessory closing command.

<Step S1825>
In step S1825, the MPU 41 determines whether the movable distribution member flag indicating that the movable distribution member 374 of the incoming ball distribution device 37 is activated is set to ON. If the movable distribution member flag is set to ON (step S1825: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1826, and if the movable distribution member flag is set to OFF (step S1825: No). , the per-regular symbol game control process ends.

<Steps S1826 and S1827>
If the movable sorting member flag is set to ON (step S1825: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the movable sorting member 374 as a sorting function section to return to its original state using the termination function section (step S1826), and further The division member flag is set to OFF (step S1827), and the per-regular symbol game control process is ended.

In this way, in the game control process per normal figure of this embodiment, when the electric accessory 373 of the incoming ball sorting device 37 is activated, the movable sorting member 374 is activated in the c time-saving game state; In any other gaming state, the movable distribution member 374 is not operated. As a result, in the entering ball sorting device 37, when a game ball enters the through gate 317, the game ball is allowed to enter the second non-electric operation opening 372 in the c time-saving gaming state, In any other gaming state, a game ball can enter the first non-electric operating opening 371. As a result, in this embodiment, the game ball is allowed to enter the second non-electric operating port 372 when transitioning to the c-time saving gaming state, so that the game ball enters the second non-electric operating port 372. When the second opening/closing member 39B is operated, the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315. On the other hand, when the time-saving game state c has not been entered, for example, in the time-saving game state a, a game ball can enter the first non-electric operating port 371, so that a game ball can enter the first non-electric operating port 371. When the ball enters, the first opening/closing member 39A is operated to allow the game ball to enter the first prize opening 391.

[Special figure game control processing]
Here, FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. 267. In the special figure game control process, the storage contents of the special figure holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is controlled, for example, the The variable display and stop display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 is controlled. Hereinafter, the special figure game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 273.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 273, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game flag indicating that a jackpot game as an advantageous game is being executed is on. In the jackpot game control process described later, the jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S2212 of FIG. 282 when a jackpot game is started, and is turned OFF in step S2259 of FIG. 283 when the jackpot game ends. Set.

When the jackpot game flag is on (step S1901: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game control process. That is, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 turns on the small win game flag indicating that a small win game as an advantageous game is in progress. It is determined whether or not (step S1902). When the small winning game flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game control process. That is, in this embodiment, when the small winning game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special figure game may be started while the small winning game is being executed. On the other hand, when the small winning game flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the jackpot game flag and the small win game flag are off (No in steps S1901 and S1902), that is, when the jackpot game and the small win game are not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether the flag indicating that the variable display is in progress (the first special figure game or the second special figure game is being executed) is on (step S1903). The special symbol variation display flag is set to ON in step S2107 or S2125 when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 281, which will be described later. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the game control process, it is set to off in step S1911.

When the special symbol fluctuation display flag is on (step S1903: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 causes the process to step. The process moves to S1907. On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when the jackpot game and the small win game are not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed ( If the special figure game is not in progress), the process moves to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the special symbol variation display flag is off (step S1903: No), that is, if the jackpot game or small prize game is not being executed, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (execution of the special symbol game). ), the MPU 41 stores the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b and the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB. It is determined whether both of the second special figure reservation numbers M are 0 (step S1904).

When both the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M are 0 (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 suspends the right to execute the first special figure game and the second special figure reservation. If there is no reservation of the right to play the game, the special figure game control process is ended. On the other hand, if either the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1904: No), the MPU 41 suspends the right to execute the first special figure game; If at least one of the rights to execute the second special figure game is reserved, the process moves to step S1905.

<Step S1905>
If either the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1904: No), that is, the right to execute the first special figure game is reserved, and the second special figure game is held. If there is at least one of the reservations of the right to execute the ( Step S1905), the process moves to step S1906. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 280.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 (first special symbol game or second special symbol). A special figure fluctuation start process is executed to execute the figure game, and the special figure game control process is ended. The details of the special figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 281.

<Step S1907>
When the special symbol fluctuation display flag is on (step S1903: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol. The first special symbol or the second special symbol is set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process of step S2103 or S2120 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 281, which will be described later, from the start of the variable display of the symbol or second special symbol game It is determined whether the end condition of the special figure variation has been satisfied as the special figure variation display time has elapsed (step S1907). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the special symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game.

If the special symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1907: Yes), that is, the timing to stop displaying the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game. If so, the process moves to step S1908. On the other hand, if the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1907: No), the MPU 41 stops and displays the special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is not the timing to end the figure game, the special figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S1908 to S1911>
If the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1907: Yes), that is, at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner and ending the special symbol game. In that case, the MPU 41 displays a special symbol as a game result on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in a manner according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game. The display is stopped (step S1908). Then, the MPU 41 turns on the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1909), and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. A special figure fluctuation stop command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the change has been made (step S1910). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets off the special symbol variable display flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the variable display state (the special symbol game is being executed) (step S1911), and the process proceeds to step S1911. The process moves to S1912.

<Step S1912>
In step S1912, the MPU 41 determines whether the pseudo jackpot game state flag is set to on. The pseudo jackpot game state flag indicates that the game is in a series of rush, which is an advantageous game in which multiple V winning jackpot games can be executed consecutively, that is, a pseudo jackpot game state (pseudo jackpot game performance (display)) is executed. This is a flag indicating that it is the timing, and is set to ON in step S1117 of the start prize winning process in FIG. 265.

If the pseudo jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S1912: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to execute the pseudo jackpot game state (pseudo jackpot game performance (display)), the MPU 41 causes the process to proceed to step S1913. Transition. On the other hand, when the pseudo jackpot state flag is set to OFF (step S1912: No), that is, when it is not the timing to execute the pseudo jackpot game state (pseudo jackpot game production (display)), the MPU 41 controls the special figure game control. Finish the process.

<Steps S1913 and S1914>
When the pseudo jackpot state flag is set to ON (step S1912: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to execute the pseudo jackpot game state (pseudo jackpot game performance (display)), the MPU 41 executes the pseudo jackpot game pattern command. settings (step S1914). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the pseudo jackpot game state flag to OFF (step S1914), and ends the special symbol game control process.

[Pseudo jackpot game pattern command]
The pseudo jackpot game pattern command is a series of advantageous games in which a plurality of V winning jackpot games can be executed consecutively by entering the game ball into the second winning hole 315 as the ball entering part. This is a command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of the combination of jackpot lottery results based on the entry of game balls into the winning hole 315. By receiving the pseudo jackpot game pattern command, the audio lamp control device 5 sets a pseudo jackpot production pattern corresponding to the pseudo jackpot game pattern command, and converts multiple V winning jackpot games as advantageous games into one V. It becomes possible to execute a pseudo jackpot game presentation (display) (see FIG. 279) as an advantageous presentation that makes it appear as if it is a winning jackpot game.

Here, FIG. 274 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo jackpot game pattern command. As shown in FIG. 274, the pseudo jackpot game pattern command is set as a combination of jackpot drawings in each second special pattern game according to the number of fluctuations in the second special pattern (number of times the second special pattern game is executed). Ru.

The number of fluctuations of the second special figure (the number of times the second special figure game is executed) is determined when the fourth game ball enters the second prize opening 315 and the pseudo jackpot game status flag is set to ON (special figure 2 When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches 4) (step S1117 of the starting winning process in FIG. 265), the second special figure game at that time and the fourth game in the second winning hole 315 This is the total number M of second special symbols held when the ball enters the ball. Therefore, the number of times the second special figure changes (the number of times the second special figure game is executed) is 1 to 4 times.

For example, while the second special figure game is being executed based on the first game ball entering the second winning hole 315 (15 seconds in this embodiment), the fourth ball enters the second winning hole 315. When the game ball enters the ball, the second special figure pending number M during the execution of the second special figure game is 3, so the number of fluctuations of the second special figure (the number of executions of the second special figure game) is The second special figure game and the second special figure reservation number M of 3 pieces make a total of 4 times.

In addition, the jackpot lottery combination based on the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is stored, for example, in the special pattern execution area AE of the special pattern storage area 412b and the second special pattern storage area REB. It can be set based on validity information.

In addition, the combination of the jackpot lottery is such that the jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the second prize opening 315 is executed based on the special 2 jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 263(C)). This includes one or both of the winning lottery results, and the jackpot lottery results become small wins 0 to 4 times. When the jackpot lottery is a small win, the small win game is executed after the second special figure game that notifies that the jackpot lottery is a small win, and in this small win game, the V prize opening of the variable winning device 38 When the game ball enters 383, a V winning jackpot game is executed. Therefore, in a series of advantageous games in which a plurality of V-winning jackpot games can be executed consecutively by entering the game ball into the second winning hole 315 as the ball entry section, no V-winning jackpot game is executed even once. Or, one to four V winning jackpot games are executed. In other words, the number of V winning jackpot games when the pseudo jackpot game performance (display) executed based on the pseudo jackpot game pattern command is executed is not constant but indefinite. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict how many times the V-winning jackpot game will be executed in a series of advantageous games, and as a result, it is difficult for the player to predict how many times the V-winning jackpot game will be executed in a series of advantageous games. Since the player can enjoy playing a series of advantageous games while hoping to win, the interest in playing the game is improved.

[Pseudo jackpot game production pattern]
Here, FIG. 275 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo jackpot game performance pattern. As shown in FIG. 275, the pseudo jackpot game performance pattern is set as a combination of a plurality of individual performance patterns (special 2 game performance pattern, small win game performance pattern, or jackpot game performance pattern). Each pseudo-jackpot game performance pattern has a one-to-one correspondence with the pseudo-jackpot game pattern command, and the audio lamp control device 5 generates one pseudo-jackpot game performance pattern corresponding to the type of the received pseudo-jackpot game pattern command. Set. For example, when the audio lamp control device 5 receives the pseudo jackpot game pattern command A1, it sets the pseudo jackpot game performance pattern A1, and when it receives the pseudo jackpot game pattern command A10, it sets the pseudo jackpot game performance pattern A10. .

Here, FIGS. 276(A) to 276(E) are diagrams for explaining the special 2 game effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 276(A), the special 2 game performance patterns include special 2 game performance pattern A (special 2A), special 2 game performance pattern B (special 2B), special 2 game performance pattern C (special 2C), It includes four patterns: and Special 2 game effect pattern D (Special 2D).

As shown in FIGS. 276(A) and 276(B), special 2 game performance pattern A (special 2A) is a performance corresponding to a special symbol fluctuation display time of 15 seconds, and the requested A production in which there is a right hit display as a display, there is no ball output display as a specific production image, a large variable display of decorative symbols is displayed, and a stage production for a special figure game is executed as a stage production (background production). It is. This special 2 game performance pattern A (special 2A) is executed as a performance of the second special figure game that is executed first after the second winning hole 315 is opened. In addition, in the special 2 game production pattern A (special 2A), by displaying a right hit as a request display, it is made clear to the player that the game ball should enter the second winning hole 315 by right hitting. .

As shown in FIGS. 276(A) and 276(C), special 2 game performance pattern B (special 2B) is a performance corresponding to a special symbol fluctuation display time of 1 second, and the requested A production in which there is no right hit display as a display, there is no display of balls being rolled out as a specific production image, the fluctuating display of decorative symbols is displayed small, and a stage production for a special figure game is executed as a stage production (background production). It is. This special 2 game production pattern B (special 2B) is used when the second special figure game is executed between the first second special figure game and the first small winning game (V prize winning jackpot game) (first When the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game of the second special figure game is a loss), it is executed as the performance of the second special figure game. As a result, when the second special figure game is executed consecutively without a small winning game or a V-winning jackpot game being executed, the subsequent second special figure game is a part of the previous second special figure game. It can be pretended to be. In addition, in the special 2 game performance pattern A (special 2A), the right hit display is not displayed as the request display, but the right hit display may be performed as the request display.

As shown in FIGS. 276(A) and 276(D), the special 2 game production pattern C (special 2C) is a production corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation display time of 1 second, and the requested There is a right hit display as a display, a ball out display as a specific production image, a small variable display of decorative symbols, and a pseudo display as a stage production (background production) for jackpot games as a specific production display. This is a stage performance in which a stage performance is performed. This special 2 game production pattern C (special 2C) is executed as a production of the second special figure game that is executed between these V prize winning jackpot games when a plurality of V prize winning jackpot games are executed. . Thereby, the second special figure game executed during a plurality of V winning jackpot games can be made to look like a part of the V winning jackpot game production.

As shown in FIGS. 276(A) and 276(E), the special 2 game performance pattern D (special 2D) is a performance corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation display time of 1 second, and the requested There is a right hit display as a display, and a variable display of decorative symbols is displayed in a small size, similar to the ending effect (see Figure 278 (D)) described later in the V winning jackpot game that is executed at the end in the pseudo jackpot game state. This is an effect that includes a jackpot end display and a total ball roll display (ball roll result display) as a notification display. The total ball output display (ball output result display) may be for balls issued only in multiple V-winning jackpot games in a pseudo-jackpot game state, or for balls issued in multiple V-winning jackpot games in a pseudo-jackpot gaming state. It may be added to the balls put out in response to winnings in other winning holes (for example, the general winning hole 313) in the pseudo jackpot game state. This special 2 game production pattern D (special 2D) is executed as a production of the second special figure game that is executed after the last V winning jackpot game is executed. As a result, after the end of the last V-winning jackpot game in the so-called rush state, which is a series of advantageous games in which jackpot games can be executed multiple times, the total ball output display (ball output result display) is displayed as a notification display. ) is done. Therefore, the second special figure game executed after the last V-winning jackpot game can be disguised as the ending performance of the V-winning jackpot game that is part of the V-winning jackpot game performance. In addition, in the special 2 game performance pattern D (special 2D), the right hit display is performed as the request display, but the right hit display as the request display does not have to be performed.

Here, FIGS. 277(A) to 277(C) are diagrams for explaining the small winning game effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 277(A), the small winning game presentation pattern includes two patterns: a small winning game presentation pattern A (small winning A) and a small winning game presentation pattern B (small winning B).

As shown in FIGS. 277(A) and 277(B), the small winning game performance pattern A (small winning A) has a right hit display as a request display in the symbol display section 341, and a specific performance image. This is a performance in which there is no display of the balls put out, and a stage performance for a small winning game is executed as a stage performance (background performance). In addition, in the small winning game production pattern A (small winning A), the symbol display section 341 displays a request display that requests the player to enter a game ball into the V winning opening 383 of the variable winning device 38 (for example, " "Aim for V" is displayed. This small winning game effect pattern A (small winning A) is executed as the effect of the first small winning game.

As shown in FIGS. 277(A) and 276(C), the small winning game performance pattern B (small winning B) has a right hit display as a request display in the symbol display section 341, and a specific performance image. This is a performance in which a stage performance for a jackpot game is executed as a specific performance display which is a pseudo display as a stage performance (background performance). In addition, in the small winning game production pattern B (small winning B), the symbol display section 341 displays a request display requesting the player to enter a game ball into the V winning opening 383 of the variable winning device 38 (for example, " "Aim for V" is displayed. This small winning game production pattern B (small winning B) is executed as a production of the small winning game that is executed from the second time onwards when the small winning game is executed a plurality of times. As a result, when the small winning game is executed multiple times, the small winning game executed from the second time onward can be disguised as part of the V winning jackpot game performance, and the game ball is placed in the V winning opening 383. The display requesting the player to do so can prevent a game ball from entering the V winning hole 383 and a jackpot game from occurring.

Here, FIGS. 278(A) to 277(D) are diagrams for explaining the jackpot game performance pattern.

As shown in FIG. 278(A), the jackpot game production patterns include jackpot game production pattern A (jackpot A), jackpot game production pattern B (jackpot B), jackpot game production pattern C (jackpot C), and It includes four patterns of jackpot game effect pattern D (jackpot D).

As shown in FIGS. 278(A) and 278(B), in the jackpot game performance pattern A (jackpot A), there is a right hit display as a request display in the symbol display section 341, and there is a right hit display as a request display. This is a production in which there is a ball output display, a jackpot start display at the opening, and a stage production for a jackpot game as a stage production (background production). This jackpot game performance pattern A (jackpot A) is executed as a performance of the V winning jackpot game that is executed first when the V winning jackpot game is executed a plurality of times. Thereby, when the V-winning jackpot game is executed a plurality of times, the first V-winning jackpot game to be executed can be made to appear as part of one V-winning jackpot game.

As shown in FIGS. 278(A) and 278(C), in the jackpot game performance pattern B (jackpot B), there is a right hit display as a request display in the symbol display section 341, and a specific performance image is displayed. This is a production in which there is a ball payout display, there is no jackpot start display and jackpot end display, and a stage production for a jackpot game is executed as a stage production (background production). This jackpot game production pattern B (jackpot B) is executed between the first V-winning jackpot game to be executed and the last V-winning jackpot game to be executed when the V-winning jackpot game is executed three or more times. This is executed as a presentation of the V-winning jackpot game. As a result, when the V-winning jackpot game is executed three or more times, the V-winning jackpot game executed between the first and last V-winning jackpot games to be executed is made to appear as part of one V-winning jackpot game. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 278(A), in the jackpot game performance pattern C (big win C), there is a right hit display as a request display in the symbol display section 341, a ball output display as a specific performance image, A stage production for the jackpot game is executed as a stage production (background production), and as shown in FIG. 278 (D), at the ending (at the end of the V-winning jackpot game), a jackpot end display and a total balls display (as a notification display) are displayed. This is a production with a ball roll result display). The total ball output display (ball output result display) may be for balls issued only in multiple V-winning jackpot games in a pseudo-jackpot game state, or for balls issued in multiple V-winning jackpot games in a pseudo-jackpot gaming state. It may be added to the balls put out in response to winnings in other winning holes (for example, the general winning hole 313) in the pseudo jackpot game state. This jackpot game production pattern C (jackpot C) is executed as a production of the V winning jackpot game that is executed at the end when the V winning jackpot game is executed a plurality of times. As a result, at the end of the V-winning jackpot game that is executed last in a so-called rush state, which is a series of advantageous games in which jackpot games can be executed multiple times, the total ball output (balls output) is displayed as a notification display. Results are displayed). Therefore, when the V-winning jackpot game is executed a plurality of times, the last V-winning jackpot game to be executed can be disguised as a part of one V-winning jackpot game. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the balls put out in a plurality of V winning jackpot games as if the balls were put out in a single V winning jackpot game. As a result, even if the maximum number of balls that can be paid out in one jackpot game is limited, it is possible to give the player the impression that a large number of balls can be put out in one jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction with the ball payout.

As shown in FIG. 278(A), in the jackpot game performance pattern D (jackpot D), there is a right hit display as a request display in the symbol display section 341, a ball output display as a specific performance image, A stage production for a jackpot game is executed as a stage production (background production), and there is a jackpot start display at the opening, similar to jackpot game production pattern A (see Fig. 278(B)), and a jackpot game production pattern C (see Fig. 278(B)). As in (see B)), there is a jackpot completion display at the ending. This jackpot game presentation pattern D is executed as a presentation of the V winning jackpot game when the V winning jackpot game is executed once. In other words, the jackpot game performance pattern D (jackpot D) is a normal jackpot game performance.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game production patterns include jackpot game production pattern A (jackpot A), jackpot game production pattern B (jackpot B), jackpot game production pattern C (jackpot C), and jackpot game production pattern C (jackpot C). By including the four patterns of game performance pattern D (big win D), in a so-called rush state, which is a series of advantageous games in which multiple jackpot games can be executed, multiple (2 to 4) V When a winning jackpot game is executed, these V winning jackpot games can be disguised as jackpot games. On the other hand, when one V-winning jackpot game is executed in a rush state, it is naturally possible to execute the jackpot game performance as one V-winning jackpot game. As a result, whether the V-winning jackpot game is executed once or multiple times in the rush state, it becomes possible to execute the same jackpot game performance. As a result, whether the number of V jackpot games executed in the rush state is one time or multiple times, as long as at least one V jackpot game is executed, the number of V jackpot games will be increased. Regardless of the execution, a series of jackpot game performances can be executed without becoming unnatural. In addition, regardless of the number of V jackpot games, it is possible to execute the jackpot game performance without making it look unnatural, so if you enter a rush state, how many balls can you get (V jackpot game Even if the V-winning jackpot game is executed only once, the jackpot game effect for this one V-winning jackpot game can be executed without any unnaturalness, while realizing the excitement of determining how many times the V-winning jackpot game is executed. can do.

Here, FIG. 279 is a diagram for explaining a pseudo jackpot game performance (display) in an example of the jackpot game performance pattern (jackpot game performance pattern A1).

A jackpot game performance pattern A1, which is an example of a jackpot game performance pattern shown in FIG. 279, is a performance pattern that is set when a pseudo jackpot game pattern command A1 is received. The pseudo jackpot command A1 includes the first variation (the second special figure game), the second variation (second special figure pending 1), the third variation (second special figure pending 2), and the fourth variation (second special figure pending 2). A command indicating that the results of the jackpot lottery for hold 3) are a small win, a small win, a small win, and a small win, respectively (see FIG. 275). On the other hand, the jackpot game production pattern A1 corresponding to the pseudo jackpot game pattern command A1 is (Special 2A → Small win A → Jackpot A) → (Special 2C → Small win B → Jackpot B) → (Special 2C → Small win B → Big hit B) → (Special 2C → Small hit B → Big hit C).

Specifically, in the jackpot game production pattern A1, a stage production (background production) for the jackpot game is executed in each of the V winning jackpot games that are executed four times. In addition, in the second special figure game and the small winning game that are executed between the V winning jackpot games, a stage presentation for the jackpot game is executed as a specific presentation display which is a pseudo display as a stage presentation (background presentation). Therefore, in the jackpot game performance pattern A1, in a series of advantageous games from the start of the first V winning jackpot game to the end of the last V winning jackpot game, including the second special figure game and the small winning game, the jackpot game The stage production continues without interruption. As a result, in the jackpot game performance pattern A1, a series of advantageous games from the start of the first V winning jackpot game to the end of the last V winning jackpot game are made to appear as if one jackpot game is continuing. Can be done.

In addition, in the jackpot game performance pattern A1, in the second special figure game and the small win game that are executed between the V winning jackpot games, as a pseudo display, a right hit display as a request display and an out ball display as a specific performance image is executed. Therefore, in the jackpot game production pattern A1, in a series of advantageous games from the start of the first V winning jackpot game to the end of the last V winning jackpot game, including the second special figure game and the small winning game, the right-hitting display and The ball output display is executed continuously without interruption. This also makes it possible to make a series of advantageous games from the start of the first V-winning jackpot game to the end of the last V-winning jackpot game appear to be one continuous jackpot game.

In addition, in the jackpot game performance pattern A1, among the V winning jackpot games executed four times, a jackpot start display is made at the opening of the first V winning jackpot game, and a jackpot end display is made at the ending of the last V winning jackpot game. In the second and third V winning jackpot games, neither the jackpot start display nor the jackpot end display is made. Therefore, in the jackpot game production pattern A1, it is possible to clearly indicate the start and end points of a series of advantageous games from the start of the first V-winning jackpot game to the end of the last V-winning jackpot game, and the first to It is possible to make it difficult to understand that the third V-winning jackpot game has ended and that the second to fourth V-winning jackpot games have started. This also makes it possible to make a series of advantageous games from the start of the first V-winning jackpot game to the end of the last V-winning jackpot game appear to be one continuous jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the jackpot game performance pattern A1, at the ending of the last V winning jackpot game, a total ball output display (ball output result display) is executed as a notification display. Therefore, in the jackpot game performance pattern A1, in the so-called rush state, which is a series of advantageous games from the start of the first V-winning jackpot game to the end of the last V-winning jackpot game, the winnings in the four V-winning jackpot games are It is possible to make the player recognize the balls as if they were rolled out in a series of advantageous games. As a result, even if the maximum number of balls that can be paid out in one jackpot game is limited, it is possible to give the player the impression that a large number of balls can be put out in one jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction with the ball payout.

In this way, in the jackpot game performance pattern A1, the jackpot start display is executed at the opening of the V-winning jackpot game, and as a pseudo display in the second special figure game and small winning game that are executed between the V-winning jackpot games, A right hit display as a request display, a ball output display as a specific production image, and a stage production (background production) are executed, and at the ending of the final V winning jackpot game, a jackpot end display and a total number of balls produced as a notification display. By executing the display (ball output result display), a series of advantageous games that are executed with the transition to c time-saving game state as a trigger by the pseudo jackpot game performance (display), one jackpot game is You can make it look like it's continuing. Similarly, in other jackpot game production patterns, when a series of advantageous games are executed with the transition to the c time-saving game state as an opportunity, one jackpot game continues this series of advantageous games. It can be made to look like this.

In addition, in the pseudo jackpot game performance (display), for example, in a series of advantageous games from the start of the first V winning jackpot game to the end of the last V winning jackpot game when multiple V winning jackpot games are executed. It is also possible to notify that it is an advantageous game by displaying a character image such as "RUSH" on the symbol display section 341 as an advantageous effect.

Here, in this embodiment, the ball output display as a specific effect image and the total ball output display (ball output result display) as a notification display executed in the pseudo jackpot game performance (display) are shifted to the time-saving gaming state c. This is executed targeting the balls that are put out in a series of advantageous games (balls that are put out only in the V-winning jackpot game) that are executed in response to this. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while being aware of the balls that will be rolled out in a series of advantageous games as a so-called rush state that is disguised as a single jackpot game. Further, at the end of a series of advantageous games, the total number of balls played can be grasped as a result of the series of advantageous games.

In addition, the ball output display as a specific performance image and the total ball output display (ball output result display) as a notification display in the pseudo jackpot game production (display) are in the normal gaming state that triggered the transition to the time-saving gaming state a. It is also possible to execute the game including the balls that come out in the special jackpot game (so-called first win) based on the jackpot lottery. In addition, when the first winning special figure game shifts to a time-saving game state, and a special figure jackpot game (so-called consecutive game jackpot) is executed based on the jackpot lottery in the a time-saving game state, in the consecutive game jackpot Including the balls put out, the balls put out display and the total balls put out display (balls put out result display) may be displayed in the pseudo jackpot game performance (display). In this way, the ball output display and the total ball output display (ball output result display) in the pseudo jackpot game performance (display) are added to the ball output in a series of advantageous games (balls output only in the V-winning jackpot game). By including the balls put out in the most recently executed special jackpot game that is transferred to an advantageous game, the balls put out in the pseudo jackpot game performance (display) and the total balls put out display (balls put out result display) , it is possible to give the player the impression that more balls have been rolled out in a rush state, giving a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, in this embodiment, a total ball output display (ball output result display) is executed as a notification display in the pseudo jackpot game performance (display), but as a notification display, a V prize jackpot in a series of advantageous games (rush state) is executed. A number-of-times image display may be performed that clearly or suggests the number of times a game has occurred. As this number of times image display, for example, a character image table such as "RUSH 4 times", "Jackpot 4 times", etc. can be considered.

By the way, when a total ball output display (ball output result display) is executed as a notification display in a pseudo jackpot game production (display), it is possible to give the impression that a large number of balls have been issued in a series of advantageous games. , It is difficult to grasp the number of occurrences of the V winning jackpot game in a series of advantageous games only by displaying the total number of balls put out (displaying the number of balls put out). In particular, when multiple types of V-winning jackpot games with different maximum payouts (for example, 500 balls and 1500 balls) are set, it is difficult to grasp the number of occurrences of the V-winning jackpot games. On the other hand, as a notification display in the pseudo jackpot game performance (display), in addition to the total ball output display (ball output result display), the number of times image display is executed, so that the player can see the result of a series of advantageous games. , it is possible to know not only the total number of balls put out but also the number of occurrences of V-winning jackpot games. Thereby, the player can enjoy guessing the number of rounds of each V-winning jackpot game when the V-winning jackpot game is executed a plurality of times when a series of advantageous games ends.

In addition, the number of times image display as a notification display is similar to the case where the total ball output display (ball output result display) is executed as a notification display, the number of times image display is the same as the case where the total ball output display (ball output result display) is executed. It may be executed including the number of times. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that more jackpot games have occurred in the rush state, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 of the special symbol game control process of FIG. 273. In the special figure data setting process, the storage contents of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special figure data setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 280.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 280, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is 0 or not. The MPU 41 determines that when the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), that is, when there is no second special figure reservation for the second special figure game and there is a first special figure reservation for the first special figure game. (See step S1903 in the special figure game control process in FIG. 26), the process moves to step S2002. On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), that is, if there is a second special figure reservation for the second special figure game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2006. That is, the MPU 41 starts the second special pattern game with priority over the first special pattern game by determining whether or not the second special pattern reservation number M for the second special pattern game is 0.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special pattern game is started with priority over the first special pattern game, but the first special pattern game is started with priority over the second special pattern game. Also, the special figure game is started in the order in which the game balls enter the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 (order of reservation), and either the first special figure game or the second special figure game is started. may be executed. In addition, the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other without setting a priority order for starting the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, and the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other. The second special figure game may be executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation of special figures).

<Steps S2002 to S2005>
When the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 stores the first special figure reservation stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. The number N is subtracted by 1 (step S2002). For example, when the first special figure reservation number N before subtraction is 4, the first special figure reservation number N after subtraction is set to three. As a result, if the first special figure reservation number N is 4, which is an unacceptable state in which it is impossible to increase, the first special figure reservation number N becomes an acceptance state where it is possible to increase the first special figure reservation number N. It is set to 3, which is a possible state.

Then, the special figure validity information is moved from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA to the special figure execution area AE (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in step S2004, the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REA2 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2. It is moved to the reservation area REA2, and the special symbol validity information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the first special symbol game start flag for starting the first special symbol game as an advantageous game (step S2005), and moves the process to step S2010.

<Steps S2006 to S2009>
If the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 stores the second special figure reservation number stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. M is subtracted by 1 (step S2006), and the special symbol validity information is moved from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2007). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to third reservation area REB4 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB one by one (step S2008). Specifically, in step S2007, the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, and the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second winning hole 315 is opened, this second winning hole 315 is closed when four game balls enter, so the maximum of the second special drawing reservation number M There are 3 values. Therefore, in this embodiment, three holding areas REB1 to 3 are set in the second special figure holding storage area REB.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the second special figure game start flag for starting the second special figure game as an advantageous game (step S2009), and moves the process to step S2010.

<Steps S2010 and S2011>
In step S2010, the MPU 41 controls the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA, or the first holding area REB1 to fourth holding area REB4 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB. A special figure shift command indicating that the special figure validity information has been shifted is set in the RAM 412, and a reservation number indicating the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M after the special figure validity information has been shifted is further set. A command is set (step S2011), and the special figure data setting process is ended. The special figure shift command and the reservation number command are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 controls the number of pending displays corresponding to the first special pattern pending and the second special pattern pending displayed on the symbol display section 341 based on the special pattern shift command and the pending number command. etc. can be changed.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1906 of the special symbol game control process of FIG. 273. In the special symbol variation start process, the first special game or the second special symbol is started by starting the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363. A game (special figure game) is started, and various processes associated with the start of the special figure game are executed. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to FIG. 281.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 281, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first special symbol game start flag indicating that the first special symbol game is started is set on. The first special figure game start flag is set to start the first special figure game in step S2005 of the special figure data setting process in FIG. is set to on when

If the first special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2102, and if the first special figure game start flag is not set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2102. S2101: No), the process moves to step S2116.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
If the first special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the validity information stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure holding storage area 412b (step S2102), The variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 is set as a special symbol variation pattern, and the stop type of the first special symbol is set (step S2103), and the process is performed in step S2103. The process moves to S2104.

<Steps S2104 to S2106>
In step S2104, the MPU 41 sends a special pattern fluctuation pattern command that includes the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the first special pattern game, which is the result of the judgment in step S2102, and the special pattern fluctuation pattern set in step S2103. is set in the RAM 412, and a stop type command that specifies the stop type of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 set in step S2103 is set (step S2105). The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display section 362 of the display section 36 (step S2106), and the process moves to step S2107.

Note that the stop type command does not necessarily need to be set separately from the special symbol variation pattern command, and the special symbol variation pattern command may be set as a command that can specify the stop type of the first special symbol.

<Steps S2107 and S2108>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets on the special symbol variation display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed), and further sets the first special symbol to start the first special symbol game. The figure game start flag is set to OFF (step S2108), and the process moves to step S2109.

In addition, the special symbol fluctuation display flag indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in step S1903 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. (Special figure game is being executed).

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, it is determined whether or not the a-time-saving game state flag indicating that the game state is the a-time-saving game state is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state at the start of the special symbol fluctuation (at the time of starting the special symbol game) is the time-saving gaming state a. If the a time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2110, and if the a time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S2109: No). , the special figure fluctuation start process ends.

<Step S2110>
If the a time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S2109: Yes), that is, if the game state at the time of starting the special figure fluctuation (at the start of the special figure game) is the a time-saving game state, the MPU 41 displays the fluctuation display. It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery by the distribution function unit for the special figure game to be started is a shift to c time saving. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to the time-saving gaming state c after the end of the special symbol game in which the variable display is started. If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game for which the variable display is started is c time saving transition (step S2110: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2111, and the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2111 for the special figure game for which the variable display is started. If the result of the jackpot lottery is not c time saving shift (step S2110: No), the process moves to step S2113.

<Steps S2111 and S2112>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game for which the variable display is started is c time saving shift (step S2110: Yes), the MPU 41 controls c for shifting the game state from a time saving gaming state to c working time saving gaming state. The time saving game state transition flag is set on (step S2111). That is, in this embodiment, when the first special figure game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is c time-saving shift is started, the condition for ending the time-saving game state a is satisfied. In addition, the end condition of the time saving game state a is that the result of the jackpot lottery by the distribution function unit is the fulfillment of the game condition. It may be established that the game ends when a game result that is stopped and displayed with a symbol corresponding to the transition is derived.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears the a time-saving game number counter indicating the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the a time-saving game state (step S2112), and ends the special figure fluctuation start process.

<Steps S2113 to S2115>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game in which the variable display is started is not c time-saving shift (step S2110: No), the MPU 41 selects the a time-saving game that indicates the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the a time-saving game state. 1 is subtracted from the number of times counter (step S2113), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving game number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2114). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the condition for ending the time-saving game state a is satisfied by executing the maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the time-saving game state a. If the value of the a time-saving game count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2114: Yes), the MPU 41 changes the gaming state to the a-time-saving game state by executing the maximum number of special figure games that can be executed in the a-time-saving game state. When transitioning to the normal gaming state from , the normal gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state to the normal gaming state is set to ON (step S2115), and the special symbol fluctuation start process is ended. That is, in this embodiment, when the upper limit number (100th) first special figure game is started in the time-saving game state a, the condition for ending the time-saving game state a is satisfied. In addition, the termination condition of the time-saving game state a may be established when the upper limit number (100th) first special figure game is ended in the time-saving game state a.

On the other hand, if the value of the a time-saving game count counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2115: No), that is, if there is a remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the a time-saving game state, the MPU 41 controls the special figure concerned. End the fluctuation start process.

<Step S2116>
If the first special figure game start flag is not set to ON (step S2101: No), the MPU 41 determines that the second special figure game start flag indicating that the second special figure game is started is set to ON. It is determined whether there is one (step S2116). The second special figure game start flag is set in step S2009 of the special figure data setting process in FIG. 280 to start the second special figure game after completing the shift of the validity information from the special figure holding storage area 412b to the special figure execution area AE. is set to on when

If the second special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2116: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2117, and if the first special figure game start flag is set to OFF (step S2116: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2117. S2116: No), the fluctuation start process ends.

<Steps S2117 and S2118>
When the second special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2116: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the validity information stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure reservation storage area 412b (step S2117), The variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 is set as a special symbol variation pattern, and the stop type of the second special symbol is set (step S2118), and the process is performed in step S2118. The process moves to S2119.

<Steps S2119 to S2121>
In step S2119, the MPU 41 issues a special pattern fluctuation pattern command that includes the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the second special pattern game, which is the result of the judgment in step S2110, and the special pattern fluctuation pattern set in step S2118. in the RAM 412, and further sets a stop type command that specifies the stop type of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 set in step S2118. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 is started (step S2121), and the process moves to step S2122.

Note that the stop type command does not necessarily need to be set separately from the special symbol variation pattern command, and the special symbol variation pattern command may be set as a command that can specify the stop type of the second special symbol.

<Steps S2122 and S2123>
In step S2122, the MPU 41 sets on the special symbol variation display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed), and further, the MPU 41 starts the second special symbol game. The second special figure game start flag is set to OFF (step S2123), and the fluctuation start process is ended.

In addition, the special symbol fluctuation display flag indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in step S1903 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. (Special figure game is being executed).

[Jackpot game control processing]
Here, FIGS. 282 to 286 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 in the main process of FIG. 267. In the jackpot game control process, processing for controlling the progress of the jackpot game, such as opening/closing control of the opening/closing door 382 of the variable prize winning device 38, is executed. Hereinafter, the jackpot game control process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 282 to 286.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 282, in step S2201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game flag indicating that a jackpot game as an advantageous game is being executed is on. The jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S2213 of the jackpot game control process when starting a jackpot game (special figure jackpot game or V prize jackpot game), and is set to ON in step S2213 of the jackpot game control process when ending the jackpot game. is set to off in step S2259.

When the jackpot game flag is on (step S2201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2218 in FIG. 283. On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S2201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2202.

<Step S2202>
When the jackpot game flag is off (step S2201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed is on or not. to judge. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the jackpot game by determining whether or not the special figure game that was started when the jackpot game is not being executed has ended.

If the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the jackpot game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2203. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation stop flag is off (step S2202: No), that is, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2206.

<Step S2203>
When the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 controls the jackpot lottery as the distribution function unit for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is determined whether the result is a jackpot as the gaming conditions are met. Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot is determined based on the result of the jackpot lottery stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 41, for example. Judgment is made based on the special map validity information.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2204. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is not a jackpot (step S2203: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process. .

<Steps S2204 and S2205>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game in which the special pattern is stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the special pattern jackpot indicating that the special pattern jackpot will be executed (step S2203: Yes). S2204). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a special figure jackpot game start command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of starting the special figure jackpot game and the type of the jackpot game (4R jackpot game or 10R jackpot game) (step S2205). , the process moves to step S2206. The special figure jackpot game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute a jackpot game production according to the jackpot game type based on the special figure jackpot game start command.

<Steps S2206 and S2207>
When the special symbol variation stop flag is off (step S2202: No), that is, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 41 sets the small winning game end flag indicating that the small winning game ends to ON. It is determined whether there is one (step S2206).

When the small winning game end flag is set to ON (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the small winning game end flag to OFF (step S2206), and moves the process to step S2208. On the other hand, when the small winning game end flag is set to OFF (step S2206: No), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
In step S2208, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38 in the small winning game is set on. If the V winning flag is set to ON (step S2208: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to OFF (step S2209), and moves the process to step S2210. On the other hand, when the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S2208: No), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 41 sets on the V winning jackpot flag that causes the V winning jackpot game to be executed (step S2210). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a special figure jackpot game start command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of starting the V-winning jackpot game and the type of jackpot game (10R jackpot game) (step S2211), and executes the process in step S2211. The process moves to S2212. The V winning jackpot game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute the jackpot game effect based on the V winning jackpot game start command.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
In step S2212, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game is to be started, and further sets the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed ( Step S2213), the process moves to step S2214.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
In step S2214, the MPU 41 sets a round number counter that indicates the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and further, the MPU 41 starts the opening to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game will start. A command is set (step S2215), and the process moves to step S2216. The opening start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the opening effect on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening start command.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time, and moves the process to step S2210. The opening time counter is referred to in step S2220 of FIG. 284 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the opening.

<Step S2217>
In step S2217, the MPU 41 sets on the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S2218 in FIG. 283 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether or not the opening is in progress.

<Step S2218>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S2201: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is in progress, the MPU 41 turns on the opening in progress flag indicating that the opening is in progress, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S2218).

If the opening flag is on (step S2218: Yes), that is, if the opening is in progress, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2219 in FIG. 284. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S2218: No), that is, if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S2229.

<Steps S2219 and S2220>
If the opening flag is on (step S2218: Yes), that is, if the opening is being executed, as shown in FIG. 284, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time ( Step S2219), it is determined whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (Step S2220). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the opening.

If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2220: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2221. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2220: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2221 and S2222>
If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2220: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game will end. An opening end command is set (step S2221). The opening end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the opening performance executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress to OFF (step S2222), and moves the process to step S2223.

<Step S2223>
In step S2223, the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing execution mode start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game is executed a plurality of times (4 or 10 times) is started, and processes The process moves to step S2224. The opening/closing execution mode start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the opening/closing execution mode performance executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening/closing execution mode start command.

<Step S2224>
In step S2224, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that a round game is to be started, and moves the process to step S2225. The round game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start a round game presentation corresponding to each round game including round number display etc. on the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the round game start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the round game performance is executed individually in each round game of the special figure jackpot game, but the round game performance is a series of one performance in the opening/closing execution mode, and the corresponding round game performance is executed in each round game. The number of rounds of a round game may be displayed. In this case, it is not necessary to perform an interval performance between round games, or a performance that displays the number of rounds of the round game to be executed next time may be performed as an interval performance.

<Steps S2225 and S2226>
In step S2225, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and further, the MPU 41 controls the opening/closing door 382 as the distribution function section of the variable prize winning device 38 to the operating function section. By operating, the variable winning a prize opening 381 is opened (step S2226), and the process moves to step S2227.

<Steps S2227 and S2228>
In step S2227, the MPU 41 sets on the round game in progress flag indicating that the round game is being executed, further sets a round game time counter indicating the remaining time of the round game (step S2228), and End the game control process. The round game time counter executes the corresponding jackpot game control process in order to judge whether it is the timing to end the round game (return the opening/closing door 382 of the variable winning device 38 and close the variable winning opening 381) after the specified time has elapsed. Reference is made in step S2231 of FIG. 285.

<Step S2229>
Returning to FIG. 283, if the opening flag is off (step S2218: No), that is, if the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the round game flag indicating that the round game is being executed to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S2229). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a round game is being executed.

When the round game flag is on (step S2229: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2230 in FIG. 285. On the other hand, when the round game flag is off (step S2229: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2243.

<Steps S2230 and S2231>
When the round game in progress flag is on (step S2229: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, as shown in FIG. Subtract 1 (step S2230). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2231). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the round game (return the opening/closing door 382 of the variable winning device 38 and close the variable winning opening 381) after the specified time has elapsed.

If the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2231: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the round game when the specified time has elapsed (returns the opening/closing door 382 of the variable winning device 38 and closes the variable winning opening). 381), the process moves to step S2235. On the other hand, if the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2231: No), in other words, the MPU 41 ends the round game when the specified time has elapsed (returns the opening/closing door 382 of the variable winning device 38 to win a variable prize). If it is not the timing to close the mouth 381, the process moves to step S2232.

<Step S2232>
If the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), that is, the round game ends when the specified time has elapsed (the opening/closing door 382 of the variable winning device 38 is returned to close the variable winning opening 381). If it is not the timing to do so, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 381 (V winning hole 383 or normal winning hole 384) (step S2232). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 is determined by detecting the entry of a game ball into the ball entry sensors 382a and 383a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. The determination is made based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the case of winning.

If the game ball enters the variable winning hole 381 (step S2232: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2233, and if the game ball does not enter the variable winning hole 381 (step S2232: No), the jackpot game control process ends.

<Steps S2233 and S2234>
When a game ball enters the variable winning hole 381 (step S2232: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the value of the ball entering number counter indicating the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole 381 in the round game. Add 1 (step S2233). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the number of balls entered after addition reaches 10 (step S2234), that is, ends the round game by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 381 (variable winning hole 381). It is determined whether it is the timing to close the variable prize opening 381 by returning the opening/closing door 382 of the device 38.

If the value of the number of balls entered after addition has reached 10 (step S2234: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the round game when the upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning hole 381 (opening/closing door 382). When it is the timing to close the variable winning a prize opening 381 due to the return of , the process moves to step S2235. On the other hand, if the value of the number of balls entered after addition has not reached 10 (step S2234: No), the MPU 41 ends the round game by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 381 (opening/closing). If it is not the timing to close the variable prize opening 381 due to the return of the door 382, the jackpot game control process is ended.

<Step S2235>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2231: Yes), or if the value of the number of balls entered counter reaches 10 (step S2231: Yes), the MPU 41 operates as a sorting function unit. The variable winning a prize opening 381 is closed by returning the opening/closing door 382 by the end function unit (step S2235), and the process moves to step S2236. That is, when it is time to end the round game due to the passage of a specified time or due to the upper limit number of game balls entering the variable winning hole 381, the MPU 41 closes the variable winning hole 381 and ends the round game. .

<Steps S2236 to S2238>
In step S2236, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the round game ends. The round game end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the round game performance executed in the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears an entry number counter indicating the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole 381 in the round game (step S2237), and also clears the entry number counter indicating that the round game is being executed. The flag is set to OFF (step S2238), and the process moves to step S2239.

<Step S2239>
In step S2239, the MPU 41 determines whether the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 0, that is, whether it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode (there is an unexecuted round game). Decide whether or not.

If the round number counter is 0 (step S2239: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2248. On the other hand, if the round number counter is not 0 (step S2239: No), that is, if there is an unplayed round game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2240.

<Step S2240>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S2239: No), that is, if there is an unplayed round game, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start an interval between round games. (step S2240), and the process moves to step S2241. The interval start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an interval effect on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the interval start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the interval performance is executed in the interval between the round games in the special figure jackpot game, the interval performance is omitted and the round game performance for the previously executed round game is continued in the interval. Alternatively, a round game effect may be executed for the next round game to be executed.

<Steps S2241 and S2242>
In step S2241, the MPU 41 sets on an interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval time counter indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S2242), and ends the jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is referred to in step S2245 of FIG. 32 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the interval (start the round game).

<Step S2243>
Returning to FIG. 283, when the round game flag is off (step S2229: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. It is determined whether it is on (step S2243). The during-interval flag is set to ON in step S2241 of FIG. 285 in the jackpot game control process when starting an interval, and is turned off in step S2247 of FIG. 286 in the jackpot game control process when ending the interval. Set.

If the during-interval flag is on (step S2243: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2244 in FIG. 286. On the other hand, if the during-interval flag is off (step S2243: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2252.

<Steps S2244 and S2245>
If the during interval flag is on (step S2243: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, as shown in FIG. Subtract (step S2244). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2245), that is, whether or not it is the timing to end the interval (start the round game).

If the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2245: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2246. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2245: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the interval (start the round game), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2246 and S2247>
If the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2245: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 sends an audio signal to the lamp control device 5 to notify that the interval has ended. An interval end command to be notified is set (step S2246). The interval end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the interval effect executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the during-interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed (step S2247), and shifts the process to step S2224 in FIG. 284 described above. By moving the process to step S2224 in FIG. 284 described above, the process of steps S2224 to S2228 regarding the start of the round game is executed, and the jackpot game control process is ended.

<Step S2248>
Returning to FIG. 285, when the round number counter is 0 (step S2239: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 uses the voice lamp control device to notify the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. The opening/closing execution mode end command to be notified to No. 5 is set (step S2248), and the process proceeds to step S2249. The opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the round game performance (opening/closing execution mode performance) executed in the symbol display section 341 etc. based on the opening/closing execution mode end command.

<Step S2249>
In step S2249, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start the ending of the jackpot game, and moves the process to step S2250. The ending start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the ending effect on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the ending start command.

<Steps S2250 and S2251>
In step S2250, the MPU 41 sets on the ending-in-progress flag indicating that the ending is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending time counter indicating the remaining ending time (step S2251), and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referred to in step S2254 in FIG. 286 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game).

<Step S2252>
Returning to FIG. 283, if the interval flag is off (step S2243: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, whether the ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed is on or not. is determined (step S2252).

If the ending flag is on (step S2252: Yes), that is, if the ending is in progress, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2253 in FIG. 286. On the other hand, if the ending flag is off (step S2252: No), that is, if the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2253.

<Steps S2253 and S2254>
When the ending flag is on (step S2252: Yes), that is, when the ending is being executed, as shown in FIG. 286, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter indicating the remaining ending time ( Step S2253). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2254). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the ending (big hit game).

If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2254: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2255. On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2254: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the ending (big hit game), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2255 and S2256>
When the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2254: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 uses the audio lamp control device to notify the end of the ending of the jackpot game. 5 is set (step S2255). The ending end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the ending effect executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag indicating that the ending is in progress to OFF (step S2256), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2257>
Returning to FIG. 283, if the ending flag is off (step S2252: No), that is, if it is not during the opening, round game, interval, or ending, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game as a special game. A jackpot game end command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the game will be played (step S2257), and the process moves to step S2258. The jackpot game end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the jackpot game performance executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the jackpot game end command.

<Steps S2258 and S2259>
In step S2258, a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set on. The jackpot game end flag is referred to in step S2313 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 289, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to shift the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed (step S2259), and ends the jackpot game control process.

[Small winning game control process]
Here, FIGS. 287 and 288 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407-1 in the main process of FIG. 267. In the small winning game control process of this embodiment, the small winning game is executed based on the fact that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening 315 is a small winning. In this step, a process for controlling the operation of the variable prize winning device 38 is executed.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 287, in the small winning game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first sets the special symbol fluctuation stop flag to ON, which indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is determined whether there is one (step S3401). That is, the MPU 41 starts a small winning game as an advantageous game when the special pattern game (first special pattern game, second special pattern game) is ended by the stop display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern. Determine whether the timing is possible. The special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when the first special figure or the second special figure is stopped and displayed in step S1909 in the special figure game control process of FIG. 273.

When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, when the timing is such that the small winning game can be started after the special figure game has ended, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3402. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3401: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3408.

<Step S3402>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, when the special figure game ends and it is time to start the small winning game, the MPU 41 controls the distribution for the special figure game. It is determined whether the result of the jackpot lottery by the functional unit is a small win as the gaming conditions are satisfied (step S3402). Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win is determined based on the validity information read from the special pattern execution area AE of the special pattern holding storage area 412b in step S2102 or S2116 in the special pattern fluctuation start process in FIG. 281. be done.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a small win (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3403. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small win (step S3402: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the MPU 41 ends the small win game control process.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a small win (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the small win game start flag indicating that the small win game is started (step S3403). Then, the MPU 41 sets a small winning game start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the small winning game is started (step S3404), and moves the process to step S3405.

The small winning game start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the audio lamp control device 5, by receiving the small winning game start command, it is possible to set a small winning game performance to be executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like.

<Steps S3405 to S3407>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 sets on the opening flag indicating that the opening of the small winning game is being executed. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time (step S3406). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a small winning opening start command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the opening of the small winning game is to be started (step S3406), and ends the small winning game control process.

The small winning opening start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. By receiving the small winning opening start command, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the opening performance in the small winning game executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like.

<Step S3408>
If the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3401: No), that is, if it is not the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening of the small winning game is being executed. is set to on (step S3408).

If the opening flag is set to ON (step S3408: Yes), that is, if the opening of the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3409. On the other hand, if the opening flag is set to OFF (step S3408: No), that is, if the opening of the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3419 in FIG. 288.

<Steps S3409 to S3412>
When the opening flag is set to ON (step S3408: Yes), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S3408: Yes). S3409), and it is determined whether the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3410). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the opening and start operating the opening/closing door 832 of the variable winning device 38 in the small winning game.

If the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3410: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening and start operating the opening/closing door 832 of the variable winning device 38 in the small winning game, The opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed is set to OFF (step S3414), and a small winning opening end command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the small winning opening is ending (step S3412). ), the process moves to step S3413.

The small winning opening end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. By receiving the small winning opening end command, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the opening performance in the small winning game executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like.

On the other hand, if the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3410: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening and start operating the opening/closing door 832 of the variable winning device 38 in the small winning game, The small winning game control process ends.

<Steps S3413 to 3415>
In step S3413, the opening/closing door 832 as the distribution function section of the variable prize winning device 38 is operated by the operation function section, and the process moves to step S3414. In this way, when the opening/closing door 832 of the variable winning device 38 starts operating in the small winning game, the variable winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 39 is opened, and the game ball enters the inside of the variable winning device 38. The ball becomes possible.

Then, the MPU 41 sets on the opening/closing door operation flag indicating that the opening/closing door 832 of the variable winning device 38 is being operated (step S3414), and further, the operation of the opening/closing door 832 of the variable winning device 38 is started. An opening/closing door operation start command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of this (step S3415), and the process moves to step S3416.

The opening/closing door operation start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the audio lamp control device 5, by receiving the opening/closing door operation start command, it is possible to execute a movable wing section operation effect in a small winning game executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like.

<Steps S3416 and S3417>
In step S3416, the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing door operating time counter indicating the remaining operating time of the opening/closing door 832 of the variable winning device 38 (step S3416), and moves the process to step S3417.

<Steps S3417 and S3418>
In step S3417, the MPU 41 operates the V winning opening/closing door 385 as the distribution function section of the variable winning device 38 using the operating function section, and further, the MPU 41 operates the V winning opening/closing door 385, which is the distribution function section of the variable winning device 38, using the operating function section. A prize opening opening/closing door operation time counter is set (step S3418), and the small winning game control process is ended.

<Step S3419>
When the opening flag is set to OFF (step S3408: No), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is not executed, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the V winning opening opening/closing door operation flag indicating that there is is set to ON (step S3419). The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3420 when the V winning opening opening/closing door operation flag is set to ON (step S3419: Yes), and when the V winning opening opening/closing door operation flag is set to OFF (step S3419: Yes). S3419: No), the process moves to step S3428.

<Step S3420>
When the V winning opening/closing door operation flag is set to ON (step S3419: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 383 of the variable winning device 39. It is determined whether it has been set (step S3420). The V winning flag is set to ON in step S3422 when a game ball enters the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 39.

If the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 39 is set to ON (step S3420: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3424 and enters the V winning hole. If the flag is set to off (step S3420: No), the process moves to step S3421.

<Steps S3421 to S3423>
When the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3420: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has entered the V winning opening 383 of the variable winning device 39 (step S3421). Whether or not a game ball has entered the V-winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 39 can be determined by determining whether the game ball 99 has entered the V-winning hole 383 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main process of FIG. 267, for example. The determination is made based on whether or not a ball entry sensor (not shown) detects that the ball has been hit.

When a game ball enters the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 39 (step S3421: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to ON (step S3422), and further opens the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 39. 383, a V winning command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that a game ball has entered the ball (step S3423), and the process moves to step S3424.

The V winning command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the audio lamp control device 5, by receiving the V winning command, it is possible to end the V winning presentation in the small winning game executed on the symbol display section 341 or the like.

On the other hand, when the game ball has not entered the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 39 (step S3421: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3424.

<Steps S3424 and S3425>
In step S3424, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the V winning opening opening/closing door operating time counter indicating the remaining operating time of the V winning opening opening/closing door 385 of the variable winning device 38, and further, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the V winning opening opening/closing door operating time counter after the subtraction. It is determined whether the value of the partial operation time counter is 0 (step S3425). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the V winning opening/closing door 385 of the variable winning device 38 (closing the V winning opening 383).

If the value of the V winning opening/closing door operating time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3425: Yes), the MPU 41 restores the V winning opening/closing door 385 of the variable winning device 38 (closes the V winning opening 383). If it is the timing to do so, the process moves to step S3426. On the other hand, if the value of the V winning opening/closing door operation time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3425: No), the MPU 41 returns the V winning opening opening/closing door 385 of the variable winning device 38 (closes the V winning opening 383). ), the process moves to step S3428.

<Steps S3426 and S3427>
If the value of the V winning opening/closing door operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3425: Yes), that is, at the timing of returning the V winning opening/closing door 385 of the variable winning device 38 (closing the V winning opening 383). If so, the MPU 41 causes the V winning opening opening/closing door 385 serving as the distribution function unit to return to its original state using the termination function unit (step S3426), and the V winning opening opening/closing door indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing door 385 is operated. The activation flag is set to OFF (step S3427), and the process moves to step S3428.

<Step S3428>
In step S3428, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening/closing door operation flag indicating that the opening/closing door 832 of the variable winning device 38 is in operation is set to ON. If the opening/closing door operation flag is set to ON (step S3428: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3429, and if the opening/closing door operation flag is set to OFF (step S3428: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3429. The small winning game control process ends.

<Steps S3429 and S3430>
If the opening/closing door operation flag is set to ON (step S3428: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening/closing door operation time counter indicating the remaining operating time of the opening/closing door 832 of the variable winning device 38 (step S3428: Yes). S3429). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the opening/closing door operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3430). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the small winning game by returning the opening/closing door 832 of the variable winning device 38 and closing the variable winning opening 381.

If the value of the opening/closing door operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3430: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the opening/closing door 832 of the variable winning device 38 and closes the variable winning opening 381 to play the small winning game. If it is the timing to end the process, the process moves to step S3331. On the other hand, if the value of the movable blade operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3430: No), the MPU 41 returns the opening/closing door 832 of the variable winning device 38 and closes the variable winning opening 381. If it is not the timing to end the winning game, the small winning game control process is ended.

<Steps S3431 to S3434>
If the value of the opening/closing door operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3430: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the opening/closing door 832 as the distribution function section of the variable prize winning device 38 by the ending function section, thereby starting the special game. The small winning game is ended (step S3431). Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening/closing door operation flag indicating that the opening/closing door 832 is operated to OFF (step S3432).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 39 is set to ON (step S3433). If the V winning flag is set to ON (step S3433: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a V non-winning command (step S3434), and moves the process to step S3435. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3433: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3435.

<Steps S3435 and S3436>
In step S3435, the MPU 41 sets on the small winning game end flag indicating that the small winning game has ended, and further, the MPU 41 sends a small winning game that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the small winning game has ended. A game end command is set (step S3436), and the small winning game control process is ended.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIGS. 289 and 290 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in FIG. 267. In the gaming state transition process, processing for controlling the transition of various gaming states (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state, variable probability jackpot gaming state, and normal jackpot gaming state) is executed. The game state transition process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 289 and 290.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 289, in step S3601, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game (special figure jackpot game or V prize jackpot game) is to be started as an advantageous game is on. .

If the jackpot game start flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3602. On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3605.

<Steps S3602 to S2304>
When the jackpot game start flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, when starting the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot game state flag indicating that the jackpot game state is a special game (step S3601: Yes). S3602). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S3603), and sets to OFF the other gaming state flags for the gaming state in which the end condition before transitioning to the jackpot gaming state is satisfied (step S3604), The game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3605 to S2307>
When the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 turns on the jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the jackpot game will end when the ending condition is met. It is determined whether or not (step S3605). When the jackpot game end flag is on (step S3605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag to OFF (step S3606), sets the jackpot game state end flag to OFF (step S3607), and executes the process. The process moves to step S3608. On the other hand, when the jackpot game end flag is off (step S3605: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3615.

<Step S3608>
In step S3608, the MPU 41 determines whether the special figure jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot game to be ended is a special figure jackpot game is on. That is, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed due to the fulfillment of the end condition, the MPU 41 determines whether the game result has been derived by the special symbol based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery by the distribution function unit is a jackpot as the gaming condition. Decide whether or not.

If the special drawing jackpot flag is on (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3609, and if the special drawing jackpot flag is off (step S3608: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3612. .

<Steps S3609 to S2311>
If the special figure jackpot flag is on (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a time-saving gaming state flag indicating that the a-time-saving gaming state is on (step S3609), and the operation can be executed in the a-time-saving gaming state. A time-saving game counter indicating the remaining number of special figure games is set (step S3610). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special map jackpot flag to OFF (step S3611), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3612>
If the special figure jackpot flag is off (step S3608: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the V winning jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot game to be ended is a V winning jackpot game as a special game is on. is determined (step S3612). If the V winning jackpot flag is on (step S3612: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3613, and if the V winning jackpot flag is off (step S3608: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition processing. do.

<Steps S3613 and S2314>
If the V winning jackpot flag is on (step S3612: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state to on (step S3613), and sets the V winning jackpot flag off. (Step S3614), the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3615>
When the jackpot game end flag is off (step S3605: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the small win game start flag is on (step S3615). That is, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed due to the fulfillment of the end condition, the MPU 41 derives the game result based on the special symbol based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery by the distribution function section is a small win as a gaming condition. Determine whether or not.

When the small winning game start flag is on (step S3615: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the small winning game as a special game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3616. On the other hand, when the small winning game start flag is off (step S3615: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the small winning game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3619.

<Steps S3616 to S2318>
When the small winning game start flag is on (step S3615: Yes), that is, when starting the small winning game, the MPU 41 sets the small winning game state flag indicating that the small winning game state is on (step S3616). Then, the MPU 41 sets the small winning game start flag to OFF (step S3617), and sets to OFF the other gaming state flags for the gaming state in which the end condition before transitioning to the small winning gaming state is satisfied (step S3618). ), the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3619>
If the small winning game start flag is off (step S3615: No), it is determined whether the small winning game end flag indicating that the small winning game as a special game ends when the ending condition is satisfied is on. (Step S3619). If the small winning game end flag is on (step S3619: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3620, and if the small winning game ending flag is off (step S3619: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3620 as shown in FIG. The process moves to step S3623.

<Steps S3620 to S2322>
If the small win game end flag is on (step S3619: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the small win game state flag to OFF (step S3620), and sets the small win game state end flag to OFF (step S3621). , sets the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state to ON (step S3622), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S3623>
If the small winning game end flag is off (step S3619: Yes), as shown in FIG. S3623). If the normal gaming state transition flag is on (step S3623: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3624, and if the normal gaming state shift flag is off (step S3623: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3627. Transition.

<Steps S3624 to S2326>
If the normal gaming state transition flag is on (step S3623: Yes), the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state is set on (step S3624). Then, the MPU 41 sets other gaming state flags to off for the gaming state in which the end conditions before transitioning to the normal gaming state are satisfied (step S3625), and sets the normal gaming state transition flag to off (step S3626). , the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3627>
If the normal gaming state transition flag is off (step S3623: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the c working time saving gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state to the c working time saving gaming state is on (step S3627). . That is, the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery by the distribution function unit for the special symbol game in which the variable display is started is that the game condition is met, and c, the time-saving transition is established, so that the condition for ending the time-saving game state is satisfied. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the time saving game state transition flag c for shifting the gaming state from the time saving gaming state a to the time saving gaming state c is on.

The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3628 when the c-time-saving game state transition flag is on (step S3627: Yes), and when the c-time-saving game state transition flag is off (step S3623: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to the corresponding game state. Finish the migration process.

<Steps S3628 to S2330>
When the c-time-saving gaming state shift flag is on (step S3627: Yes), the c-working-time-saving gaming state flag indicating the c-time-saving gaming state is set to on (step S3628). Then, the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving game state flag, which is the gaming state before shifting to the c-time-saving game state, to OFF (step S3629), sets the c-time-saving game state transition flag to OFF (step S3630), and The game state transition process ends.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, a part of the procedure of the command determination process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 is different from the above-described first embodiment.

[Command processing]
Here, FIGS. 291 to 293 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing. The command determination process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 291 to 293.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 291, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4 (step S3701). Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S3701: Yes), the process moves to step S3702. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

Note that the command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. In addition, the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is erased from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S3701 and becomes the target of processing. is memorized.

<Step S3702>
When a command is received (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a pseudo jackpot game pattern command. If the received command is a pseudo jackpot game pattern command (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3703, and if the received command is not a pseudo jackpot game pattern command (step S3702: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3703. The process moves to step S3706.

<Steps S3703 to S3705>
If the received command is a pseudo jackpot game pattern command (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 51 creates the pseudo jackpot game performance pattern described above (see FIG. 275) based on the type of pseudo jackpot game pattern command (see FIG. 274). is set (step S3703), and a pseudo jackpot special pattern fluctuation number counter indicating the number of special pattern games to be executed in the pseudo jackpot game performance pattern is set (step S3704). Then, the MPU 51 turns on the pseudo jackpot game effect pattern set flag indicating that the pseudo jackpot game effect pattern has been set (step S3705), and ends the command determination process.

In addition, in this embodiment, a pseudo jackpot game performance pattern is set when a pseudo jackpot game pattern command is received. In other words, in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the second prize opening 315 after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state c, a pseudo jackpot game performance (display) is executed, and the transition to the time-saving gaming state c. The previous time-saving gaming state a is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, but the pseudo jackpot game effect (display) is not executed in the time-saving gaming state a. On the other hand, when a game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is started before a series of advantageous games in which multiple jackpot games can be executed, a rush performance (for example, "RUSH") is started as an advantageous performance. It is also conceivable to start an image presentation (including a character image). Of course, in the time-saving game state a, a performance different from the pseudo jackpot game performance (display) may be performed as a performance unique to the time-saving game state a.

<Step S3706>
In step S3706, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the first special figure variation pattern command. The first special symbol variation pattern command is a command that indicates the variable display time of the first special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) in the first special symbol game and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

Here, if the received command is the first special figure variation pattern command (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3707, and if the received command is not the first special figure variation pattern command (step S3706: No), the process moves to step S3711.

<Steps S3707 to S3710>
If the received command is the first special symbol variation pattern command (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 performs variation type (performance pattern) setting processing (step S3707) and sets a stop symbol combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341. The process (step S3708) is executed. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time of the decorative symbols (step S3709), and displays a display variation pattern command for specifying the variation type (effect pattern) and the content of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341. The command is transmitted to the control device 6 (step S3710), and the command determination process ends. Note that the processing in steps S3707 to S3710 in the command determination processing of this embodiment is similar to the processing in steps S3103 to S3106 in the command determination processing of the first embodiment described above, and therefore detailed explanation will be omitted.

<Step S3711>
In step S3711, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second special figure variation pattern command. The second special figure variation pattern command is a command that indicates the variable display time (special figure variation pattern) of the second special symbol in the second special figure game and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

Here, if the received command is the second special figure variation pattern command (step S3711: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3712, and if the received command is not the second special figure variation pattern command (step S3711: No), the process moves to step S3725 in FIG. 292.

<Step S3712>
In step S3712, the MPU 51 determines whether the pseudo jackpot game performance pattern set flag indicating that a pseudo jackpot game performance pattern has been set is on. If the pseudo jackpot game performance pattern set flag is on (step S3712: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3713, and if the pseudo jackpot game performance pattern set flag is off (step S3712: No), the process proceeds to step S3713. The process moves to step S3716.

<Steps S3713 to S3715>
In step S3713, the MPU 51 sets the second special figure game performance pattern A (see FIG. 276) as the second special figure game performance pattern. Furthermore, the MPU 51 executes a process of setting a stop symbol combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 (step S3714), sets a variable display time of decorative symbols to 15 seconds (step S3715), and returns the process to step S3724. Transition.

<Steps S3716 to S3720>
In step S3716, the MPU 51 reads out the pseudo jackpot game performance pattern, and further, the MPU 51 reads out the value of the pseudo jackpot special symbol fluctuation number counter (step S3717). Then, the MPU 51 sets any of the special 2 game performance patterns B to D (see FIG. 276) as the performance for the second special pattern game based on the read pseudo jackpot game performance pattern and the value of the special pattern fluctuation number counter. (Step S3718). Furthermore, the MPU 51 executes a process of setting a stop symbol combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 (step S3719), sets a variable display time of decorative symbols to 1 second (step S3720), and returns the process to step S3721. Transition.

<Steps S3721 to S3723>
In step S3721, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the pseudo jackpot special pattern fluctuation number counter, and further, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the pseudo jackpot special pattern fluctuation number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3722). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second special figure game is the last second special figure game in the pseudo jackpot game production pattern.

If the value of the pseudo jackpot special figure fluctuation number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3722: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the pseudo jackpot game performance pattern set flag to OFF (step S3723), and moves the process to step S3724. do. On the other hand, when the value of the pseudo jackpot special symbol fluctuation number counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3722: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3724.

<Step S3724>
In step S3724, the MPU 51 transmits a display variation pattern command for specifying the variation type (performance pattern) and the content of the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 to the display control device 6 (step S3724), and Command determination processing ends. Thereby, the display control device 6 can execute an effect display for the second special symbol game on the symbol display section 341. Further, when a pseudo-jackpot game performance pattern corresponding to a series of advantageous games in which a plurality of jackpot games can be executed is set, the display control device 6 displays a pseudo-jackpot game performance pattern as an advantageous performance in the symbol display section 341. It becomes possible to execute a performance display for the second special figure game as part of the game performance. Specifically, in the pattern display section 341, a stage effect (background effect) for the jackpot game is displayed as a effect display for the second special figure game, and a ball appearance or notification display as a specific effect image is displayed. The total ball output display (ball output result display) is executed as follows.

<Step S3725>
As shown in FIG. 292, in step S3725, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a small winning game start command, that is, whether or not it is the timing to start the small winning game. If the received command is a small winning game start command (step S3725: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3726, and if the received command is not a small winning game start command (step S3725: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3726. The process moves to step S3730.

<Steps S3726 to S3729>
In step S3726, the MPU 51 reads the pseudo jackpot game performance pattern, and further, the MPU 51 sets any of the small win game performance patterns A to B (see FIG. 277) as the performance for the small win game (step S3727). . Furthermore, the MPU 51 executes a process (step S3728) of setting a stop symbol combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341. Furthermore, the MPU 51 transmits a display variation pattern command for specifying the variation type (performance pattern) and the content of the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 to the display control device 6 (step S3729), and determines the command. Finish the process. Thereby, the display control device 6 can execute an effect display for the small winning game on the symbol display section 341. Further, when a pseudo-jackpot game performance pattern corresponding to a series of advantageous games in which a plurality of jackpot games can be executed is set, the display control device 6 displays a pseudo-jackpot game performance pattern as an advantageous performance in the symbol display section 341. It becomes possible to display an effect for the small winning game as part of the game effect. Specifically, in the symbol display section 341, a stage effect (background effect) for the jackpot game is displayed as an effect display for the small win game, and a ball payout is displayed as a specific effect image. In addition, in the small winning game production, as a production unique to the small winning game, a display such as "Aim for V" that requests the game ball to enter the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38 is executed, and a V winning prize is displayed. When a game ball enters the mouth 383, a V winning prize display such as "V" is executed.

<Step S3730>
In step S3730, it is determined whether the received command is a special map jackpot game start command. If the received command is a special figure jackpot game start command (step S3730: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3731, and if the received command is not a special figure jackpot game start command (step S3730: No), The process moves to step S3733.

<Steps S3731 to S3751>
In steps S3731 to S3751, the MPU 51 executes various processes for executing the jackpot game effect executed in the special figure jackpot game, depending on the type of command regarding the received jackpot game. The processes in steps S3729 to S3750 in the command determination process of this embodiment are similar to the processes in steps S3117 to S3137 in the command determination process of the first embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

<Step S3752>
In step S3752, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a V winning jackpot game start command indicating starting a V winning jackpot game. If the received command is a V winning jackpot game start command (step S3752: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3753, and if the received command is not a V winning jackpot game start command (step S3752: No), The process moves to step S3756.

<Steps S3753 to S3755>
In step S3753, the MPU 51 reads the pseudo jackpot game performance pattern, and selects the jackpot performance to be executed in the V prize winning jackpot game from the jackpot performance patterns A to D (see FIG. 278) according to the read pseudo jackpot game performance pattern. (Step S3754). Furthermore, the MPU 51 transmits a display variation pattern command for specifying the variation type (performance pattern) and the content of the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 to the display control device 6 (step S3755), and determines the command. Finish the process. Thereby, the display control device 6 can execute an effect display for the V winning jackpot game on the symbol display section 341. Further, when a pseudo-jackpot game performance pattern corresponding to a series of advantageous games in which a plurality of jackpot games can be executed is set, the display control device 6 displays a pseudo-jackpot game performance pattern as an advantageous performance in the symbol display section 341. As part of the game performance, it becomes possible to execute a performance display for the V-winning jackpot game. Specifically, in the symbol display section 341, a stage production (background production) for the jackpot game is displayed as a production display for the V prize winning jackpot game, and a ball output display or a total ball output display (ball output result display) is displayed. ) is executed.

<Step S3756>
In step S3756, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4, and ends the command determination processing.

As described above, in the present invention, at least a specific benefit result is derived when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on, for example, a game ball entering the first ball entering means during a predetermined gaming state. A series in which a special game state is executed a plurality of times based on a special condition being satisfied when a game ball enters the second ball entering means in this specific game state. It is possible to generate advantageous gaming states. As a result, a specific gaming state occurs when a predetermined condition is met in a predetermined gaming state, and a series of advantageous gaming states are created in which special gaming states are executed multiple times due to the fulfillment of a special condition in a specific gaming state. Since the game performance can be realized, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present invention, for example, when a special game state is executed a plurality of times, a specific effect image as a specific effect display that is effect-displayed as a series of advantageous game states is a first special game state and a first special game state. It is continuously displayed between the state and the second special game state and between the second special game state. Therefore, even though a special game state has occurred a plurality of times in a series of advantageous game states, a performance display that appears to be a series of advantageous game states is executed by the specific performance display. The profit (for example, the payout) given to the player is greater when the special game state occurs multiple times than when the special game state occurs once. As a result, by executing a specific effect display in a series of advantageous gaming states in which special gaming states occur multiple times, the player is given the impression that a large amount of profit has been obtained in a series of advantageous gaming states. It becomes possible to give satisfaction to As a result, even if the profits that can be obtained are limited due to the occurrence of a single special gaming state, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction with the profits, thereby preventing a decline in interest and interest in the game. Prevented.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the predetermined conditions are met based on the fact that a game ball enters the first prize opening 391 as the first ball entry means during the time-saving game state a as the predetermined game state, for example. When the c time saving transition symbol stops as established, the transition to the c time saving gaming state is derived at least as a specific benefit result. When the open state (or c time-saving gaming state) is executed and a game ball enters the second winning a prize opening 315 in the open state of this second winning a prize opening 315 (or c time-saving gaming state), the special condition is satisfied. Based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 383, a pseudo jackpot game state as a series of advantageous game states in which the V winning hole jackpot game as a special game state is executed a plurality of times can be generated. As a result, the opening state of the second winning opening 315 (or c working time saving gaming state) occurs due to the establishment of c working saving transition symbol in the a working saving gaming state (or c working saving gaming state), the opening state of the second winning opening 315 (or c working saving gaming state) ), a new gaming experience can be realized in which a pseudo-jackpot game state occurs in which multiple V-winning hole jackpot games are executed based on the entry of a game ball into the V-winning hole 383, which is triggered by a game ball entering the V-winning hole 383. Interest will be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, for example, in a pseudo jackpot game state, a pseudo jackpot game effect (display) is executed as a specific effect display. Therefore, even though multiple V winning slot jackpot games have occurred in the pseudo jackpot game state, the pseudo jackpot game performance (display) makes it appear as if one V winning slot jackpot game is being executed. Display is executed. The prize balls (balls put out) awarded to the player are larger when a plurality of V winning slot jackpot games occur than when a single V winning slot jackpot game occurs. As a result, by executing a pseudo-jackpot game performance (display) in a pseudo-jackpot game state where multiple V-winning slot jackpot games occur, it is possible to create an impression that a large amount of profit has been obtained in one V-winning slot jackpot game. By giving this to the player, it becomes possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction. As a result, even if the maximum number of balls that can be earned and rolled out in one V-winning slot jackpot game is limited, the player will feel satisfied with the maximum number of balls that can be won and rolled out when a V-winning jackpot jackpot game occurs. This prevents a decline in interest and interest in the game.

Note that in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to fifth embodiments described above can be made within an applicable range.

Further, in each embodiment, matters described in other embodiments can be applied within an applicable range.

[Seventh embodiment]
In pachinko gaming machines, when a jackpot game is executed based on a winning result of a jackpot lottery, it is desired to improve the impact of the ball thrown in the jackpot game without complicating the gameplay. .

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention has the following features:
an inflow section (371) through which game balls flow in one ball at a time;
a first operating means (372) operable to cause a game ball to flow into the inflow section when a predetermined condition (a winning of a winning lottery in a time-saving gaming state) is satisfied;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, a second operating means (39A) different from the first operating means can be caused to perform a predetermined operation (opening operation of the second prize opening 315A). The first ball entry section (376A) is the trigger,
a first detection section (376Aa) for detecting entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, at least a specific operation (of the second prize opening 315B) is performed on the third operation means (39B) different from the first operation means and the second operation means. a second ball entry portion (376B) that serves as an opportunity to perform the opening operation);
a second detection section (376Ba) for detecting entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section;
a guiding means (374) for guiding the game ball to a predetermined flow path by acting on the progress of the game ball flowing in from the inflow portion;
A gaming machine comprising:
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section, the guiding means, which is in a first state for guiding game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section, is activated. Switching means (drive control (processing) of the movable guide section 374) for switching to a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry section and can enter the second ball entry section ).
Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, the arrangement position of the third operating means is vertically higher than the arrangement position of the second operating means when the gaming machine is viewed from the front; Or it is upstream in the downstream direction of the game ball from the arrangement position of the second operating means.

The inflow portion may be any inflow area that allows game balls to flow in one ball at a time. As long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, the inflow section may be, for example, an inflow area into a game area provided on a game board, an inflow area into a left side area of a game area provided on a game board, or a game area provided on a game board. Inflow area to the right area of the area, inflow area of various ball entry parts, inflow area of the entry part where a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters, entry ball where a prize ball is not awarded even when a game ball enters the area. The inflow area of the ball entry area that provides an opportunity to execute a special figure game when a game ball enters, the first prize opening (first prize opening) that provides an opportunity to execute the first special figure game when a game ball enters. 1 starting hole), an inflow area of the 2nd winning hole (second starting hole) which provides an opportunity to execute the 2nd special drawing game when the game ball enters, and a regular drawing game is executed when the game ball enters. The inflow area of the ball entry part such as a through gate that provides an opportunity to play, the inflow area of the ball entry part that is opened and closed by an electric accessory, the inflow area of the ball entry part that is opened and closed by a normal electric accessory, and the inflow area of the ball entrance part that is normally opened and closed by an electric accessory. The inflow area of the starting opening, which is released from the operation of the electric accessory and provides an opportunity to execute the special figure game (first special figure game, second special figure game) when the game ball enters, is opened and closed by the special electric accessory. The inflow area of the ball entering part, the inflow area of the big winning opening (variable winning opening) that is opened by the operation of a special electric accessory in a winning game (big winning game or small winning game), the inflow area of the big winning opening (variable winning opening) that is opened in a jackpot game, The inflow area of the winning hole (so-called V winning hole) that generates a time-saving gaming state when a ball enters, and the inflow area of the winning hole (so-called V winning hole) that is opened in a small winning game and generates a jackpot game when a game ball enters. , an inflow area of the ball entry part that is opened and closed by a non-electric accessory, an opportunity to execute a special pattern game (first special pattern game, second special pattern game) when a game ball enters, which is opened and closed by a non-electric device. The inflow area of the prize opening (starting port) that gives the player a chance to move, the inflow area of the ball entry part that provides the opportunity to activate the non-electric accessory, the inflow area of the flow path (so-called warp route) that guides the game ball to the stage, any of these areas. Examples include combinations of.

The predetermined condition may be any game condition as long as it operates a game operation unit that can operate so that game balls flow into the inflow area. The predetermined conditions include, as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, the establishment of a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, the operating conditions of an electric accessory, the operating conditions of an ordinary electric accessory, and the operation of an ordinary electric accessory. The execution conditions for the regular game per game, the operation of the regular electric accessory provided in the ball entry part that provides an opportunity to execute the special game (first special game, second special game) when the game ball enters. Conditions, the result of the general drawing drawing is a normal drawing, the operating conditions of the special electric accessory, the execution conditions of the winning game (big winning game, small winning game) in which the special electric accessory is operated, the result of the jackpot drawing is a winning one (big hit, small win), operating conditions of non-electric accessories, entry of the game ball into the ball entry part that operates the non-motorized accessory, and flow path that allows the game ball to enter the specific ball entry part. By firing a game ball into the game area of the game board where the ball can fall, by firing the game ball into the left side of the game area, by firing the game ball into the right side of the game area, by entering the game ball. A game ball can be launched into the playing area of a game board through which a game ball can flow down a channel that allows a game ball to enter a ball entry section that provides an opportunity for a lottery to win a common map, and a game ball can enter a through gate. A game ball is flown down a flow path that allows a game ball to enter a ball entry section that provides an opportunity for a jackpot lottery when the game ball enters. Possible operations include firing a game ball into the game area of the game board, and arbitrary combinations thereof.

The first operating means may be any gaming operating unit that can operate so that game balls flow into the inflow area. The second operating means may be a game operating unit different from the first operating means that can be operated based on the entry of game balls that have flowed in from the inflow area. The third operating means may be a game operating unit that is different from the first operating means and the second operating means that can be operated based on the entry of game balls that have flowed in from the inflow area. As these first to third operating means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a game operating section that is activated when a game ball enters the various ball entry sections, and a predetermined lottery are executed. A game operation part that operates based on the result of a lottery, an electric accessory that operates when the lottery result is a predetermined lottery result, and an electric accessory that operates when the result of the lottery is a winning lottery. Normal electric accessories, special electric accessories that are activated when the result of a jackpot lottery is a win (big win, small win), non-electric accessories that are activated when a game ball enters a designated ball entry area, A non-electric accessory that opens and closes the ball entry part that is activated by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry part and provides an opportunity to execute a jackpot lottery when the game ball enters the entry part, and a game device that opens and closes the ball entry part that is operated by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined operating opening. A first non-electric accessory that opens a first prize opening (first starting opening) that is activated by the entry of a ball and executes a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball, and a game ball is placed into a predetermined operating opening. A second non-electric accessory that opens a second prize opening (second starting opening) that is activated by the entry of a game ball and executes a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball into a predetermined ball entry part. A game operation section that operates based on the execution of a predetermined lottery triggered by a predetermined lottery, and a predetermined symbol changing display based on the execution of a predetermined lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry section. The variable display is controlled by a main control device (main control device) that displays a predetermined symbol in a variable manner based on execution of a predetermined lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry section. A variable display device, a variable display controlled by a sub-control device (sub-control device) in which a predetermined symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on execution of a predetermined lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry section. A fluctuating display in which symbols are displayed in a changing manner based on the fact that a game ball enters a ball entry area such as a through gate, and a lottery that hits a regular symbol is executed. The fluctuation display of ordinary symbols is controlled by the main control device based on the general pattern fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display of the symbols is controlled by the sub-control device (sub-control device) based on the execution of the winning lottery. Execution of a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering a display device such as a liquid crystal display that is controlled, the first prize opening (first starting opening) or the second winning opening (second starting opening). A variable display in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the above, a special symbol variable display in which the variable display of special symbols is controlled by the main control device based on the execution of the jackpot lottery, and a special symbol variable display in which the variable display of special symbols is controlled based on the execution of the jackpot lottery. A presentation display such as a liquid crystal display whose variable display of decorative patterns (decorative patterns) is controlled by a sub-control device (sub-control device) based on the changes made, and a display device for shooting game balls in a shooting area into a predetermined area. Examples include a game operating unit to be operated, a firing mechanism for firing the game ball, a firing mallet that applies firing force to the game ball, a firing drive source that operates the firing hammer, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined operation may be any gaming operation that is executed by the second operating means based on the game ball entering the ball entry section from the inflow area. The specific operation may be a game operation executed by the third operation means based on the game ball entering the ball entry section from the inflow area. As the predetermined operation and specific operation, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, the operation of the game operation section triggered by the entry of a game ball into the various ball entry sections, or the execution of a predetermined lottery. The operation of the game operation unit based on the above, the operation of the electric accessory when it is a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory when the result of the lottery is a winning lottery, The operation of special electric accessories when the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big hit, small win), the operation of non-electric accessories when the game ball enters the prescribed ball entry section, the operation of the non-electric accessory when the game ball enters the prescribed ball entry section, Opening/closing operation of the ball entry part of a non-electric accessory that is activated by the entry of a game ball and provides an opportunity to execute a jackpot lottery when the game ball enters, and is operated by the entry of the game ball into a predetermined operating opening. The opening operation of the first prize opening (first starting opening) that executes a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball of the first non-electric accessory, which is operated by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined operating opening. Opening operation of a second prize opening (second starting opening) that executes a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball of the second non-electric accessory, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry part. The operation of the game operation unit is based on the execution of a predetermined lottery, and the predetermined symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a variable display based on the execution of a predetermined lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry section. , The fluctuating display of special symbols on the special symbol display under the control of the main controller (main controller) based on the execution of the jackpot lottery, and the game ball entering the first prize opening (first starting opening). A variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display under the control of the main control device (main control device) based on the execution of the jackpot lottery triggered by The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display under the control of the main controller (main control device) based on the execution of the jackpot lottery triggered by the ball entering the ball, and the execution of the jackpot lottery. A special figure game (first special figure game, The sub-control device (sub-control device) executes various effects on a presentation display such as a liquid crystal display when executing the second special figure game, and the sub-control device when executing the winning game (big winning game, small winning game). The control device (sub-control device) uses various effects on display devices such as liquid crystal displays (jackpot start display, jackpot end display, number of rounds display, ball out display (balls out display), V winning prize) (display performance), variable display of symbols on the variable display based on the execution of the winning lottery for common symbols, variable display under the control of the main controller (main control device) based on the execution of the lottery for winning the regular symbols. , the variable display of symbols on a production display such as a liquid crystal display under the control of a sub-control device (sub-control device) based on the execution of a lottery per common symbol, and any of these Examples include combinations.

The first ball entry portion may be any ball entry portion that triggers the second operation means to perform a predetermined operation based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow area. The second ball entry portion may be any ball entry portion that triggers the third operating means to perform a specific action based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow area. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section may be, for example, a ball entering section where a prize ball is given when a game ball enters, or a prize ball may be awarded when a game ball enters. A ball entry section where no ball is awarded, a ball entry section where a special symbol is variably displayed on the special symbol display when a game ball enters, and a first special symbol is variably displayed on a first special symbol display when a game ball enters. 1st winning hole (1st starting hole), 2nd winning hole (2nd starting hole) that changes and displays the 2nd special symbol on the 2nd special symbol display when the game ball enters, normal when the game ball enters A ball entrance part such as a through gate that displays normal symbols in a fluctuating manner on the symbol display, a ball entrance part that is opened and closed by an electric accessory that is operated based on the establishment of the game conditions, and a lottery result that is a common symbol. The ball entry part is opened and closed by a normal electric accessory that is operated in a normal game that is executed based on a certain event, and is released from the operation of the normal electric accessory in a game that is played based on a certain situation, and is specially opened and closed by the entry of a game ball. A ball entry part that provides an opportunity to execute the figure games (first special figure game, second special figure game), a ball entry part that is opened and closed by a special electric accessory that is operated based on the establishment of game conditions, a jackpot lottery A big winning opening (variable winning opening) that is opened by the operation of a special electric accessory in a winning game (big winning game or small winning game) that is executed based on a winning result, and a game ball that is opened in a jackpot game. A winning hole (so-called V winning hole) that generates a time-saving gaming state when a game ball enters, a winning hole that is opened in a small winning game and generating a jackpot game when a game ball enters (a so-called V winning hole), and the establishment of gaming conditions. A winning opening (starting hole) that is opened and closed by a non-electric accessory and provides an opportunity to execute a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the game ball; a first prize opening (first starting opening) which is opened and closed by a non-electric accessory, and which announces the result of a jackpot lottery executed in response to the entry of a game ball through a fluctuating display of the first special symbol; A second prize opening (second starting opening) that notifies you of the result of the jackpot lottery executed by the entry of a game ball through a variable display of a second special symbol, and a ball entry part that provides an opportunity to activate a non-electric accessory. , A first non-electric accessory operating opening that opens and closes a first prize opening (first starting opening) based on the entry of a game ball (first) that operates a non-electric accessory, based on the entry of a game ball; A second non-electric accessory operating opening that opens and closes the second winning opening (second starting opening) (second) that operates a non-electric accessory, and a flow path (so-called warp route) that guides the game ball to the stage. part, any combination thereof, and the like.

The first detection section may be any detection section for detecting entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section. The second detection section may be any detection section as long as it detects entry of the game ball into the second ball entry section. As the first detection part and the second detection part, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor, an optical sensor, a contact type sensor, the ball entry part provided in various ball entry parts, etc. A detection unit that detects a game ball entering the ball, a detection unit that is installed in a ball entry unit that awards a prize ball when a game ball enters, and a detection unit that is installed in a ball entry unit that does not award a prize ball even when a game ball enters the ball. part, a detection part provided in the ball entry part that causes a special symbol to be variably displayed on the special symbol display when the game ball enters, and a detection section that variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display when the game ball enters the ball. A detection unit provided in the first winning opening (first starting opening), and a detection unit provided in the second winning opening (second starting opening) that causes the second special symbol to be displayed variably on the second special symbol display due to the entry of the game ball. part, a ball entry part such as a through gate that displays a normal symbol on a normal symbol display in response to the entry of a game ball, and a ball entry part that is opened and closed by an electric accessory operated based on the establishment of game conditions. Detection unit, detection unit installed in the ball entry part that is opened and closed by a normal electric accessory operated in a game to win a game that is executed based on the result of the lottery to win a game to win a game, a detection unit to win a game to a ball A detection unit provided in a ball entry part that is released from the operation of a normal electric accessory in a game and provides an opportunity to execute a special pattern game (first special pattern game, second special pattern game) when a game ball enters the game. A detection unit installed in the ball entry part that is opened and closed by a special electric accessory that operates based on the establishment of conditions, and a winning game (big winning game or small winning game) that is executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a win. ), the detection part is installed in the big winning hole (variable winning hole) that is opened by the operation of a special electric accessory, and the winning hole (so-called V winning hole) that is opened in jackpot games and generates a time-saving gaming state when a game ball enters. The detection unit is installed in the winning opening (so-called V winning opening), which is opened in small winning games and generates a jackpot game when a game ball enters, and is operated based on the establishment of gaming conditions. A detection unit installed in a ball entry part that is opened and closed by a non-electric accessory, and a detection unit installed in a winning opening (starting opening) that is opened and closed by a non-electric accessory and provides an opportunity to execute a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters. , a detection unit provided in a first prize opening (first starting opening) that is opened and closed by a non-electric accessory and that notifies the result of a jackpot lottery executed in response to the entry of a game ball by a variable display of a first special symbol; , a detection unit installed in a second prize opening (second starting opening) that is opened and closed by a non-electric accessory and that notifies the result of a jackpot lottery executed in response to the entry of a game ball through a variable display of a second special symbol; , a ball entrance part that provides an opportunity to activate the non-electric accessory, and (1) a first non-electric accessory that operates the non-electric accessory that opens and closes the first prize opening (first starting opening) based on the entry of the game ball. Detection unit provided in the electric accessory actuation opening, opens and closes the second prize opening (second starting opening) based on the entry of the game ball (second) Second non-electric accessory actuation that operates the non-electric accessory Examples include a detection section provided at the mouth, a detection section provided at the ball entry section of a channel (so-called warp route) that guides the game ball to the stage, and any combination thereof.

The guide means may be a guide part that acts on the progress of the game balls flowing in from the inflow area and guides the game balls to a predetermined flow path. As the guiding means, as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a non-movable guiding part such as a nail, a windmill, a resin member, a movable guiding part at least in part, a game ball in a predetermined ball entry part, etc. A guide part that can guide a game ball into a flow path where a ball can enter, a guide part that can guide a game ball into a flow path where a game ball cannot enter into a predetermined ball entry part, and a game ball into a predetermined ball entry part. A movable member that changes the permission and restriction on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section that changes the special symbol display on the special symbol display when the game ball enters, a game ball that switches the permission and restriction on the entry of the game ball An electric accessory that changes the special symbol display on the special symbol display when a game ball enters the ball, which changes the permission and restriction of the entry of game balls into the ball entry section, and when the game ball enters the first special symbol display, A normal electric accessory that changes the permission and restriction of entering the game ball into the first winning hole (first starting hole) that changes the special symbol, and when the game ball enters, the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display. A normal electric accessory that changes the permission and restriction of entering the game ball into the second winning hole (second starting hole) that displays the symbols in a variable manner, and changes the special symbol on the special symbol display when the game ball enters. A non-electric accessory that switches permission and restriction on the entry of game balls into the ball entry part, and a first prize opening (first start) that changes and displays a first special symbol on the first special symbol display when a game ball enters the ball entry section. A non-electric accessory that switches the permission and restriction of the entry of game balls into the second prize opening (second starting opening) that changes and displays a second special symbol on the second special symbol display when the game ball enters the second prize opening. ) A non-motorized accessory that switches the permission and restriction on the entry of game balls into the ball entry section, which changes the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display when the game ball enters. A non-electric accessory that changes the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display when the game ball enters, a non-electric accessory that switches the permission and restriction on the entry of game balls into the ball entry section, and a big prize opening in winning games. A special electric accessory that switches the permission and restriction on the entry of game balls into the (variable winning hole), and a special electric accessory that switches the permission and restriction on the entry of game balls into the big winning hole (variable winning hole) in jackpot games. A special electric accessory that switches the permission and restriction of the entry of game balls into the big winning hole (variable winning hole) in small winning games, and game balls into the winning hole provided in the big winning hole (variable winning hole). A movable member that switches between allowing and restricting the entry of balls, is provided in the big winning hole (variable winning hole), and goes to the winning hole (so-called V winning hole) that generates a time-saving gaming state when the game ball enters the jackpot game. A movable member that switches between allowing and restricting the entry of game balls, is provided in the large winning hole (variable winning hole), and is a winning hole (so-called V winning hole) that generates a jackpot game by entering a game ball in a small winning game. a movable member that switches between allowing and restricting the entry of game balls into the opening), a movable member that switches between allowing and restricting the entry of game balls into the non-motorized accessory actuation opening that provides an opportunity to operate the non-motorized accessory; Opening and closing the first prize opening (first starting opening) based on the entry of the game ball (first) allowing the entry of the game ball into the first non-electric accessory operating opening that activates the non-electric accessory; A movable member that switches restrictions, a game ball that opens and closes a second prize opening (second starting opening) based on the entry of the game ball (second) to a second non-electric accessory operating opening that operates a non-electric accessory. A movable member that switches between allowing and restricting the entry of balls, a distributing member that distributes game balls to one of the plurality of channels and one of the other channels, and a distributing member that distributes the game balls to one channel and the other channel. A non-electric distribution member that distributes game balls to one of the channels, a non-electric distribution member that is movable by the interference of game balls and that distributes game balls to one channel and another channel, a plurality of channels An electric distributing member that distributes game balls to one of the flow channels and one of the other flow channels, and a game ball to one of the plurality of ball entry parts and one of the other ball entry parts. A non-motorized distribution member that distributes game balls to one of a plurality of ball entrance parts and one of the other ball entrance parts, which is movable by the interference of game balls, and a plurality of A non-electric distribution member that distributes game balls to one of the ball entering sections and one of the other ball entering sections, one of the plurality of ball entering sections and the other ball entering section. A first non-electric distribution member that operates a non-electric accessory that opens and closes a first prize opening (first starting opening) based on the entry of game balls into one of the parts. A movable member that guides the game ball to the accessory actuation opening, a second non-electric role that operates the non-electric accessory that opens and closes the second prize opening (second starting opening) based on the entry of the game ball. A movable member that guides the game ball to the object operation opening, a first non-electric accessory that operates the (first) non-electric accessory that opens and closes the first prize opening (first starting opening) based on the entry of the game ball. A game is played between the operating opening and the second non-electric accessory operating opening that operates a (second) non-electric accessory that opens and closes the second prize opening (second starting opening) based on the entry of the game ball. Examples include movable members that distribute balls, arbitrary combinations thereof, and the like.

The switching means switches the guiding part in a state of guiding game balls from the inflow area to the one ball entering part, which is a trigger for causing the one game operating part to execute a gaming action, to the one guiding part that guides the game balls from the inflow area to the one ball entering part. The entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section is not possible, and the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section may cause another gaming operation section to execute a gaming action. Any switching process may be sufficient as long as the switching process switches to a state in which the ball can enter the ball entry section. As a switching means, as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, it is possible to switch the guiding state of a game ball to a guiding section, at least a part of which is movable, and to enter the game ball into a predetermined ball entering section. Switching process for a guiding part in a state where a game ball can be guided into a flow path to a state where a game ball can be guided into a flow path where it is impossible for a game ball to enter a predetermined ball entry part; The guiding section is in a state where the game ball can be guided into a flow path where the game ball cannot enter into a state where the game ball can be guided into the flow path where the game ball can enter a predetermined ball entry section. switching processing between a ball entry permission state and an entry restriction state for a movable member capable of switching between a ball entry permission state and an entry restriction state for a movable member that can switch between a ball entry permission state and an entry restriction state, and entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry portion. A switching process between a ball entry permission state and a ball entry restriction state for a movable member that changes the state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the ball entry section and a ball entry restriction state that causes a special symbol to be variably displayed on the special symbol display; A special symbol is displayed variably on the special symbol display when a game ball enters the ball entry section. Switching between a ball entry permission state and an entry restriction state for an electric accessory. A switching process, a state in which a game ball is allowed to enter a first prize opening (a first starting opening) and a state in which a ball is restricted from entering, in which the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display due to the entry of the game ball. A switching process between a ball entry permissible state and an entry restriction state for the normal electric accessory to be switched, and a second winning opening (second starting opening) that variably displays a second special symbol on the second special symbol display when a game ball enters. ) Switching between the ball entry permission state and ball entry restriction state for normal electric accessories, and the special symbol display on the special symbol display when the game ball enters the game ball. Switching between a state where a game ball is allowed to enter the ball entry section and a state where it is restricted. 1 A state in which the entry of a game ball into the first prize opening (first starting port) is allowed and a state in which the entry of the game ball into the ball is restricted is switched between a state in which the entry of the game ball into the first prize opening (first start opening) is variably displayed and a first special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device, and a state in which the ball is allowed to enter the non-electric accessory. A state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole (second starting hole) in which the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display when the game ball enters the ball entry restricted state. A switching process between a ball entry permissible state and a ball entry restriction state for a non-electric accessory that switches between a ball entry restricted state and a ball entry restricted state, and a game to the ball entry part that changes and displays normal symbols on the normal symbol display when a game ball enters the ball. Switching process between the ball entry permissible state and the ball entry restriction state for an electric accessory that switches between the ball entry permissible state and the ball entry restricted state, and the input that changes and displays normal symbols on the normal symbol display when a game ball enters the ball. Switching process between the ball entry permission state and ball entry restriction state for non-electric accessories that switch between the ball entry permission state and ball entry restriction state for the game ball into the ball club, and the big winning hole (variable winning hole) in the winning game. A special electric accessory that switches between a state where a game ball is allowed to enter and a state where it is restricted; Switching process between a state where balls are allowed to enter and a state where balls are restricted, a special electric accessory that switches between a state where a game ball is allowed to enter a big winning hole (variable winning hole) and a ball restricted state in a small winning game, and a big prize. Switching process between a ball entry permission state and a ball entry restriction state for a movable member that switches permission and restriction of entry of game balls into a winning hole provided in a winning hole (variable winning hole), a big winning hole (variable winning hole) A movable member that switches between a state in which a game ball is allowed to enter a winning hole (so-called V winning hole) and a state in which a ball is restricted from entering into a winning hole (so-called V winning hole) that is provided in the jackpot and generates a time-saving gaming state when a game ball enters in a jackpot game. Switching process between the ball permissible state and ball entry restricted state, the winning hole (so-called V winning hole) that is provided in the big winning hole (variable winning hole) and generates a big winning game by entering the game ball in the small winning game. A switching process between a ball entry permission state and a ball entry restriction state for a movable member that switches between a ball entry permission state and an entry restriction state for a game ball, and a non-electric accessory activation port that provides an opportunity to activate a non-electric accessory. Switching processing between a ball entry permission state and an entry restriction state for a movable member that switches between a ball entry permission state and an entry restriction state; Opening and closing (first) activating a non-electric accessory operating the first non-electric accessory actuating opening for a movable member that switches between a ball entry permissible state and an entry restricted state for a game ball into the first non-electric accessory operating opening; Switching process with the ball restriction state, opening and closing the second prize opening (second starting opening) based on the entry of game balls (second) to the second non-electric accessory operating opening that activates the non-electric accessory Switching process between a ball entry permission state and a ball entry restriction state for a movable member that switches between a ball entry permission state and an entry restriction state for game balls, and whether one channel out of a plurality of channels or another channel. Switching processing of the distribution state for the distribution member that distributes the game balls to crabs, switching processing of the distribution state for the non-electric distribution member that distributes the game balls to either one flow path or another flow path, due to the interference of the game balls A non-motorized distributing member that is movable and distributes game balls to either one channel or another channel, a game ball to one of the multiple channels or one of the other channels switching processing for a distribution state of an electric distribution member that distributes game balls, switching processing of a distribution status for a distribution member that distributes game balls to one of a plurality of ball input portions and one of the other ball input portions; A distribution state switching process for a non-electric distribution member that distributes game balls to one of a plurality of ball entrance parts and one of the other ball entrance parts, movable by interference of game balls, and a plurality of switching processing of the distribution state of a non-electric distribution member that distributes game balls to one of the ball entering sections and one of the other ball entering sections; ball entering one of the plurality of ball entering sections; Switching processing of the distribution state for the electric distribution member that distributes the game balls to either the game ball section or other ball entry section, and opening/closing the first prize opening (first starting port) based on the entry of the game ball (the first ) The switching process of the guiding state of the game ball of the movable member that guides the game ball to the first non-electric accessory actuation opening that activates the non-electric accessory, and the second prize opening (second start) based on the entry of the game ball. switching processing of the guidance state of the game ball of the movable member that guides the game ball to the second non-motorized accessory actuation port that operates the non-electric accessory, based on the entry of the game ball; The first non-electric accessory actuation opening opens and closes the first winning opening (first starting opening) and operates the non-electrical accessory (first), and the second winning opening (second starting opening) opens and closes the first winning opening (second starting opening) based on the entry of the game ball. Examples include switching processing of the distribution state for a movable member that distributes game balls to either a second non-electric accessory operating opening that opens and closes (a second) non-electric accessory operating opening that operates a non-electric accessory, and any combination thereof. It will be done.

By the way, in a gaming machine, a plurality of types of gaming members (for example, various displays, various winning devices, and distribution devices) are arranged in the gaming area of the gaming board in order to generate gaming properties that improve the interest of the game. There is. Conventionally, when there is sufficient space in the game area of the board, there are few restrictions on the size and arrangement of a plurality of game members, and they can be freely arranged.

However, as the size and number of game members used to increase interest increase, the efficiency of the game and the player's identifiability and visibility will decline unless they are properly arranged on the game board. Therefore, in game machines, it is desired to improve the efficiency and visibility of games by devising the types and positions of members arranged on the game board.

In the present invention,
an inflow section that allows game balls to flow in one ball at a time;
a first operating means operable to cause game balls to flow into the inflow section when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
a first ball entering section that is a trigger for causing a second operating means different from the first operating means to execute a predetermined operation based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section;
a first detection section for detecting entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section;
A second input triggers a third operating means different from the first operating means and the second operating means to perform at least a specific action based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow portion. The bulb and
a second detection section for detecting entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section;
Guiding means for guiding the game balls to a predetermined flow path by acting on the progress of the game balls flowing in from the inflow part;
A gaming machine comprising:
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section, the guiding means, which is in a first state for guiding game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section, is activated. comprising a switching means for switching to a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry section and can enter the second ball entry section;
The arrangement position of the third operating means is vertically higher than the arrangement position of the second operating means when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, or the arrangement position of the third operating means is is on the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball from the arrangement position of the second operating means when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

In the present invention, by arranging the game members in this manner, it is possible to improve the player's identifiability or visibility, and to play the game efficiently.

More specifically, in the present invention, for example, when the first operating means is operated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the first operating means operates to guide the game balls that have flowed in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section. The guiding means, which is in the first state, is configured to disable the game balls from entering the first ball entering section by the switching means when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entering section. , and the ball is switched to the second state in which the ball can enter the second ball entry section. Therefore, when game balls flow in from the inflow section due to the operation of the first operating means, a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section first, and then game balls enter the second ball entry section. The ball is thrown. As a result, when a game ball flows in from the inflow section by operating the first operating means due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the predetermined operation of the second operating means may be executed first, and then the third operation is performed. Certain operations of the means may be performed.

Further, in the present invention, for example, the arrangement position of the third operating means is above the arrangement position of the second operating means in the vertical direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, or in the downward direction of the game ball. It is on the upstream side. Therefore, when a game ball flows in from the inflow part by operating the first operating means due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the second operating means on the lower side in the vertical direction or the downstream side in the flowing direction of the game ball is first activated. After that, a specific operation of the third operating means on the upper side in the vertical direction or on the upstream side in the downward direction of the game ball may be executed.

According to the present invention, when the first operating means is operated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section are continuously launched toward the first operating means. Game balls are entered one after another, and the game ball that is hit first among the game balls that are successively shot out is placed on the lower side in the vertical direction where the predetermined action was performed or on the downstream side in the flowing direction of the game ball. The second operating means is reached, and the subsequent game ball reaches the third operating means on the upper side in the vertical direction where the specific action was performed or on the upstream side in the downward direction of the game ball. In other words, the order of operation of the second operating means and the third operating means can be matched with the order of arrival of the game balls to the second operating means and the third operating means. Therefore, the operations of the second operating means and the third operating means are executed in the shortest possible time (for example, the shortest time) after the first operating means is operated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the second operating means and the third operating means are operated. It becomes possible to execute a process based on the arrival of a game ball at the means (for example, a jackpot lottery process or a winning lottery process based on the game ball entering a predetermined prize opening). As a result, if the predetermined condition is met, the player can move the game ball to the second and third operating means by simply continuously launching the game ball toward the first operating means, even if the player does not understand the gameplay. It becomes possible to execute the process based on the arrival of the game ball while increasing the identifiability or visibility. As a result, when the predetermined condition is met, the player can perform a simple firing operation of continuously launching the game ball toward the first operating means, thereby obtaining the benefit that would be achieved when the predetermined condition is met, that is, the second motion means. Since the benefits of the game ball reaching the operating means and the third operating means can be received in the shortest possible time (for example, the shortest time), the enjoyment of the game can be efficiently enjoyed without complicating the gameplay. It becomes possible to improve.

More specifically, in this embodiment, for example, as a game condition, the normal electric power as a game operation unit is activated due to the occurrence of a normal figure win in the normal figure lottery in the a time-saving gaming state that is transferred after the end of the special figure jackpot game. When the inlet 371 as the inflow region of the non-electrically actuated device 37 is opened by executing the drive control (processing) as the switching process, the accessory 372 is normally operated. A first guiding state (a state in which the game ball 99 can be detected by the ball entering sensor 376Aa serving as a detection part) is established in which the game ball 99 flowing in from the introduction port 371 is guided to the first non-electric actuating port 376A serving as a ball entering part. The movable guiding part 374 as a guiding part of the non-electrically actuated device 37 performs drive control (processing) as a switching process, so that the game ball 99 enters the first non-electrically actuated opening 376A. is detected by the ball entry sensor 376Aa serving as a detection unit, it is impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the first non-electric operating opening 376A, and the second non-electric operating opening serving as the ball entry unit is disabled. The game ball 99 is switched to a second guidance state (a state in which the game ball 99 can be detected by the ball entry sensor 376Ba as a detection unit) in which the ball can enter the ball 376B. Therefore, when the game ball 99 flows in from the introduction port 371 of the non-electric actuation device 37 by operating the normal electric accessory 372, the game ball 99 first enters the first non-electric actuation port 376A, and then Then, the game ball 99 is inserted into the second non-electric operating opening 376B. As a result, if the game ball 99 flows in from the inlet 371 of the non-electric actuation device 37 due to the occurrence of a normal figure hit in the time-saving game state a and the normal electric accessory 372 is operated, the game ball 99 will first act as the game operation part. The first non-electric accessory 39A can be opened as a gaming operation so that the game ball 99 can enter the second prize opening 315A as a ball entrance part (the game ball 99 can be detected by the ball entrance sensor 376Aa), After that, the second non-electric accessory 39B as a game operation part allows the game ball 99 to enter the second prize opening 315B as a ball entry part (the game ball 99 is detected by the ball entry sensor 376Ba) as a game action. Can be operated open.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the arrangement position of the second non-electric accessory 39B as the game operation section is set to the first non-electric accessory 39B as the game operation section when the gaming machine 10 (game board 31) is viewed from the front. It is on the upper side in the vertical direction or on the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99 than the arrangement position of 39A. Therefore, as a game condition, in the time-saving game state a, when a normal figure is established in the normal figure winning lottery, the normal electric accessory 372 as a game operation part is operated, and the game ball 99 is passed from the inlet 371 as an inflow area. When the flow occurs, first the first non-electric accessory 39A as a game operation section on the lower side in the vertical direction or the downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball 99 can be opened as a game operation, and then the vertical direction The second non-electric accessory 39B as a game operation section on the upper side or the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99 can be opened as a game operation.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the normal electric accessory 372 is operated due to the occurrence of a winning symbol in the winning lottery by the main control unit 331 in the time-saving gaming state a, the ordinary electric accessory 372 is activated. By continuously launching the game balls 99 toward the right side area of the game board 31 toward the ball 372, the game balls 99 are sequentially entered into the first non-electric operation opening 376A and the second non-electric operation opening 376B, resulting in a right-handed hitting style. As the plurality of game balls 99 continuously flow down the path 35C, the game balls 99 flow down above and near the first non-electric accessory 39A when the first non-electric accessory 39A is operated. . Therefore, when the first non-electric accessory 39A is operated, the game ball 99 flowing down the right-hand channel 35C is immediately guided to the second prize opening 315A by the first non-electric accessory 39A, so that it is immediately A game ball 99 is entered into the second prize opening 315A. Of the game balls 99 that are continuously hit to the right, the game balls 99 that are hit first and flow down the right-hand channel 35C on the downstream side are on the lower side in the vertical direction where the action was performed first or the game balls. 99 reaches the first non-electric accessory 39A (second winning opening 315A) on the downstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99, and the subsequent game ball 99 reaches the upper side in the vertical direction in which the operation was performed later or in the downstream direction of the game ball 99. It reaches the second non-electric accessory 39B (second winning opening 315B) on the upstream side of . In other words, the operating order of the first non-electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory 39B (the opening order of the second winning opening 315A and the second winning opening 315B), the first non-electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory The order in which the game balls 99 arrive at the accessory 39B (the order in which the game balls 99 enter the second winning hole 315A and the second winning hole 315B) can be matched. Therefore, the first non-motorized accessory 39A and the second non-motorized accessory 39B are activated in the shortest possible time (for example, the shortest time) after the normal electric accessory 372 is operated due to the occurrence of a normal figure in the a time-saving game state. The main control unit 331 can execute the special drawing jackpot lottery process by executing the operation and entering the game balls 99 into the second winning holes 315A and 315B. As a result, if the player wins a normal pattern, the player continuously launches the game ball 99 toward the normal electric accessory 372 onto the right side area of the game board 31, even if the player does not understand the gameplay. Only by this, it becomes possible to execute the process based on the game ball 99 reaching the first non-electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory 39B while increasing the identifiability or visibility. As a result, when a normal figure hit occurs as a game condition in the time-saving game state a, the player can perform a simple firing operation of continuously shooting the game ball 99 toward the normal electric accessory 372. The benefit when a regular figure hit occurs in the time-saving gaming state is that the execution of the special figure jackpot lottery process by the main control unit 331 can be carried out in as short a time as possible (for example Since the game can be received in the shortest possible time, it is possible to efficiently improve the interest of the game without complicating the gameplay. That is, if it takes time to enter the game balls 99 into the second winning holes 315A, 315B, the second special figure reserved number M, which is the reserved number of rights to execute the second special figure game, becomes the maximum reserved number. There is a concern that not only will it take a long time until the player wins, but the player may also be confused about the game operations while playing the game. If it is possible to land the ball in the shortest possible time, there is no need to worry about game operations, and the player can receive the maximum benefit by simply continuing to hit the ball to the right.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 294 to 327, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine is equipped with an "inflow region" as an inflow section, a "gaming condition" as a predetermined condition, and a "gaming operation section" as a first operation means. It also includes a "game operation section" as a second operation means, a "game operation section" as a third operation means, a "gaming operation" as a predetermined operation, and a "gaming operation" as a specific operation. It also includes a "game operation" as a first ball entry section, a "detection section" as a first detection section, and a "ball entry section" as a second ball entry section. ", a "detection section" as a second detection section, a "guidance section" as a guide means, and a "switching process" as a switching means.

[Configuration of gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 294 to 301. Here, FIG. 294 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, FIGS. 295 and 296 are views showing an example of the display on the symbol display section 341, and FIG. 297 is the second winning slot. and a diagram showing the vicinity of a non-electric accessory.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game ball firing mechanism 32, a game board 31 in which a game area where a game ball 99 can flow is set, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321 as a guiding section, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the launch rail 321 directs the game ball 99 launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It leads to Further, the inner rail 311 is provided with a return spring 310 (return valve) formed as a leaf spring. This return spring 310 is for returning the game balls 99 that have been given less firing force or the game balls 99 that are poorly fired to the firing rail 321 side, and returns the game balls 99 from the upper left of the game board 31 to the game area. Specifies whether or not to allow each ball to flow in. That is, the return spring 310 defines an inflow area to the game area of the game board 31, and the game ball 99 that has flowed into the game area from the upper left of the game board 31 via the inflow area is moved as described below. The water flows down the left side area or right side area of the game board 31 from above to below. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid as a game operation section, and feeds the game balls 99 stored in the upper tray 23 onto the firing rail 321 one ball at a time. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for firing the game ball 99 supplied onto the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the game machine 10, in a situation where the game condition is established by the player performing a firing operation on the firing handle 22, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the player's operation of the firing handle 22, and the solenoid 323 is driven for 0.6 seconds. One game ball 99 is fired toward the game area. For example, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 22 exceeds a specified amount, the game ball 99 flows into the game area from the upper left of the game board 31, and in a game where the amount of operation of the firing handle 22 exceeds the specified amount and is less than or equal to the specified amount. When the condition is met, the game ball 99 is fired into the left side area of the game board 31 (so-called left-handed hitting), and when the game condition is met, the amount of operation of the firing handle 22 exceeds a predetermined amount, the game ball 99 is fired into the left side area of the game board 31. A game ball 99 is fired into the right side area (so-called right-handed hitting). In addition, the game ball firing mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that fires the game ball 99 using other driving means such as a motor as a game operation section instead of the solenoid 323.

As shown in FIG. 294, the game board 31 has a general winning hole 313 in the left side area as a ball entry part, and a first winning hole 314 below a symbol display part 341 provided in the center area of the game board 31. , an outlet 318 is provided in the lowermost region. The general winning hole 313 and the first winning hole 314 can receive a so-called left-handed game ball 99 that is fired into the left side area of the gaming area on the game board 31 by the player's firing operation. In addition, in each of the general winning hole 313 and the first winning hole 314, ball entering sensors 313a and 314a connected to the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 are installed as detection units for detecting the ball entering of the game ball 99. They are individually provided (see FIG. 302), and the game balls 99 are sent to the general winning hole 313 and the first winning hole 314 by the main controller 4 of the main control unit 331 based on the outputs from the ball entry sensors 313a and 314a. When the ball entering the game is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded to the player.

Note that the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and does not enter the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 via the out port 318 as a discharge port. Further, the out port 318 is provided with an out ball sensor 318a connected to the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 as a detection unit for detecting the entry of the game ball 99 (see FIG. 302). The number of out balls can be counted by detecting out balls by the main controller 4 of the main control unit 331 based on the output from the ball sensor 318a. In addition, the out port 318 is located on the back side of the game board 31 for the game ball 99 that has not entered the various ball entry areas where the game ball 99 hit right into the right area of the game board 31 can enter. can be discharged. That is, in the game machine 10, the fired game ball 99 moves upward between the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 provided on the left side of the game board 31, and then moves to the return spring 310 on the upper left side of the game board 31. The game ball 99 flows into the game area from the upper left side through the inflow area defined by , and flows down the left side area or the right side area of the game board 31 from above to the bottom depending on the firing intensity. In the process of falling, the ball can enter various ball entry sections, and if the ball does not enter the various ball entry sections, it is ejected to the back side of the game board 31 via the outlet 318, which is an ejection port. Therefore, the game ball 99 launched into the game area of the game board 31 will not stay in the game area of the game board 31 even if the ball does not enter the various ball entry sections. In addition, when the player executes the firing operation of the game ball 99, the player must check whether the game ball 99 properly flows into the game area of the game board 31, and if the game ball 99 flows into the game area. During the game, the player visually checks (moves his/her line of sight) the upper side of the game board 31 in order to check the falling path of the game ball 99 (strength/weakness of the firing strength).

Further, the game board 31 is provided with a main display section 36, which is a game member serving as a game operation section, at the lower right portion of the game board 31, which is different from the game area of the game balls 99. This main display section 36 is provided at the lower right portion of the game board 31, which is not in the game area where the game ball 99 flows down, but outside the game area. In other words, the main display section 36 is at a substantially diagonal position of the return spring 310 provided at the upper left of the game board 31, which is the inflow area of the game ball 99 into the game area of the game board 31, and is located away from the return spring 310. located at the location. The main display section 36 is for notifying at least the results of the general lottery winning lottery and the special winning jackpot lottery results by the main control unit 331 (main control device 4), and the control of the gaming operation is performed by various control processes described below. is executed by the main control unit 331 (main control device 4). Specifically, the main display section 36 includes a normal symbol display section 361 that informs the results of the ordinary symbol winning lottery, a first special symbol display section 362 and a second special symbol display section 363 that informs the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery. Equipped with. The normal symbol display section 361, the first special symbol display section 362, and the second special symbol display section 363 are constituted by a simple display such as an LED lamp or a 7-segment display device. Therefore, the results of the regular symbol winning lottery and the special symbol jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331 (main controller 4) are displayed on the main display section 36 by the main control unit 331 (main controller 4). It is notified by a predetermined game (normal game or special game) realized by simple control such as variable display and stop display of (or special symbols).

Further, the game board 31 is provided with a symbol display section 341 and a movable accessory member 35, which are game members serving as a game operation section, in the central region of the game area of the game balls 99. That is, game members such as the symbol display section 341 and the movable accessory member 35 are placed at the four corners of the game board 31 in order to improve their identifiability and visibility (so that players can easily identify or visually recognize them). It is provided at or around the center of the game board 31, avoiding areas with low visibility. The symbol display section 341 and the movable accessory member 35, which are such game members, are used to play small winning games and jackpot games, as well as special drawing games that notify the results of the special drawing jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331 (main control device 4). In a game (special figure jackpot game, V prize jackpot game), a game performance is executed as a game operation.

For example, in a special figure game, the symbol display section 341 and the movable accessory member 35, which are game members serving as a game operation section, are connected to the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 provided at the lower right portion of the game board 31. Alternatively, while a special pattern game is being executed in which the main control unit 331 (main control device 4) notifies the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery on the second special symbol display section 363, the sub control unit 332 (display control device 6) A game performance as a game operation is executed by control. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 (main controller 4) is notified on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36. However, the symbol display section 341 and the movable accessory member 35 indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery will be a big hit or a small win, depending on the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery and the variable display time of the special symbol. A game performance or a game performance that notifies that the result of the special drawing jackpot lottery is a big hit or a small win is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 295, in the special figure game, in the symbol display section 341, variable display and stop display of decorative symbols displayed as symbols such as numbers are executed as game operations. For example, in a special pattern game where the first special pattern display section 362 or the second special pattern display section 363 of the main display section 36 informs that the special pattern jackpot lottery is a loss, FIGS. 295(A) to 295(C) ), decorative patterns such as numbers that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed in non-Zero (non-identical patterns) such as rose-shaped numbers. On the other hand, in a special pattern game where the first special pattern display section 362 or the second special pattern display section 363 of the main display section 36 informs that the special pattern jackpot lottery is a hit (big hit, small win), ), as shown in FIGS. 295(B) and 295(D), decorative patterns such as numbers that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed as the same pattern such as a square.

In addition, in the symbol display section 341 and the movable accessory member 35 as the game operation section, in addition to the game performance in the special figure game, the game operation is performed in the small hit game and the jackpot game (the special figure jackpot game and the V prize jackpot game). A game performance is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 296(A), in a small winning game, by executing a right hit on the symbol display section 341, a V winning opening 383B of a variable winning device 38B for a small winning game in a variable winning device 38, which will be described later. A game effect that encourages the player to enter the game ball 99 (in addition to displaying the text "Hit right" and displaying a rightward arrow to encourage hitting the game ball 99 to the right as shown in FIG. 296(A), displaying the text "Aim for V") is executed, For example, as shown in FIG. 296(B), in addition to displaying the text "Right hit" and displaying a rightward arrow to encourage right-handed hitting, when a game ball 99 enters the V-winning hole 383B, the game ball enters the V-winning hole 383B. A game effect (character display of "V" in FIG. 296(B)) indicating that the ball 99 has been entered is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 296(C), if the result of a jackpot game, that is, a (first) special drawing jackpot lottery that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the first prize opening 314, is a jackpot. In the (first) special figure jackpot game executed in the (first) special drawing jackpot game and the V winning jackpot game executed in response to the game ball 99 being entered into the V winning opening 383B in the small winning game, the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game is In the round game, the symbol display section 341 displays a game effect that encourages right-handed hitting (display of the words "right-handed hitting" and a right-pointing arrow to encourage right-handed hitting in FIG. 296(C)), and the number of round games in the jackpot game. In the game performance shown (character display of "Round The current number of balls out based on the entry of game balls 99 (character display of "900 balls" in FIG. 296(C)) is executed as a game operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 296(D), at the ending of the jackpot game, in the symbol display section 341, in addition to the first winning game (special figure jackpot), a consecutive jackpot game including the number of V winning jackpot games is displayed. In addition to the game effect that indicates the number of times (the character display of "RUSH x 2" in FIG. 296(D)), there is also a display for the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning hole 383A as the ball entry section until the jackpot game ends. A game effect (character display of "3000 balls" in FIG. 296(D)) indicating the total ball output based on the game is executed as a game operation.

Here, the symbol display section 341 and the movable accessory member 35 are provided in the central area of the game board 31, but as described above, the part of the game board 31 that is visible to the player when performing the firing operation of the game ball 99 is Since it is on the upper side, the symbol display section 341 and the movable accessory member 35 are visible to the player who is checking the shot game ball 99, and the player can see the symbol display section 341 and the movable accessory member 35. Efficiently visible.

By the way, the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331 (main controller 4) is displayed on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 36 of the main display section 36 controlled by the main control unit 331 (main controller 4). The first special symbol (first special symbol) or the second special symbol (second special symbol) in the special symbol display section 363 is notified by a special symbol game in which the variable display and stop display are performed, and in this special symbol game, the sub-control The result of the special jackpot lottery is notified by the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 controlled by the unit 332 (display control device 6), and the result of the special jackpot lottery is notified by the symbol display section 341, the movable accessory member 35, etc. A game performance is executed. Here, the sub-control unit 332 (display control device 6) executes the game effect because the main control unit 331 (main control device 4) needs to execute many controls. This is to reduce the control burden on the main control unit 331 by transmitting the information and executing the game performance. The visibility of the game performance is improved by executing the game performance on the symbol display section 341 and the movable accessory member 35 that can be efficiently viewed by the player. Further, the identifiability is improved by notifying the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery by displaying the decorative symbols in the pattern display section 341 in a fluctuating manner and in a static manner. Furthermore, the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is not only announced on the symbol display section 341, but also executed on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36. 341 and the result of the special jackpot lottery, even if it is a simple display, the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 By notifying the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery at , the result of the special pattern jackpot lottery can be confirmed on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363.

As mentioned above, the main display section 36 is located at a substantially diagonal position of the return spring 310 provided at the upper left of the game board 31, which is the inflow area of the game ball 99 into the game area of the game board 31. It is provided at the lower right part of the game board 31 of the game board 31 that is away from the game board 31. On the other hand, the symbol display section 341 and the movable accessory member 35 are provided in the central area of the game board 31. That is, compared to the main display section 36, the symbol display section 341 and the movable accessory member 35 have a return spring 310 provided at the upper left of the game board 31, which is the area where the game ball 99 flows into the game area of the game board 31. It is located in a position that is easy to see by being located close to it. In this way, the symbol display section 341 and the movable accessory member 35 are easier to see than the main display section 36 (the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363). The visibility of the game performance executed by the movable accessory member 35 is improved, and the distinguishability of the fluctuating display and stop display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display section 341 is improved.

As described above, in terms of game control, the main display section 36 (first special symbol display section 362 or second special symbol display section 363) is more important and necessary than the symbol display section 341. In addition, the symbol display section 341, which is controlled by the sub-control unit 332 that performs control based on commands from the main control unit 331, may be affected by noise, a defective harness connecting the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332, etc. There is a high possibility of malfunction due to the cause, and the reliability of operation is lower than that of the main display section 36 (first special symbol display section 362 or second special symbol display section 363) controlled by the main control unit 331. Depending on the situation, even if the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is announced as a jackpot on the symbol display section 341, the jackpot variable winning device 38A (see FIG. 298) may not operate. However, as long as the symbol display section 341 is operating normally, it is an important game member that provides interest to the player by executing the game performance. Therefore, the main display section 36, which is constituted by a simple display, is provided at the lower right portion of the game board 31 so as not to interfere with the installation of various game components for providing gaming features. The symbol display section 341, which plays an important role in providing interest to the players, is provided at the center of the game board 31 for easy viewing.

Note that the main display section 36 is not limited to the lower right portion of the game board 31, but may be placed in other positions such as the lower left portion of the game board 31, as long as it does not interfere with the installation of various game components for providing gameplay. It may be provided.

In addition, on the right side of the symbol display section 341 provided in the right side area of the game board 31, that is, approximately in the center of the game board 31, and on the right side of the movable accessory member 35 provided on the right side of the symbol display section 341, there are two Two right route regulating portions 35A, 35B are provided, and a right-handed flow path 35C as a guiding portion is defined by these right route regulating portions 35A, 35B. Therefore, the so-called right-handed game balls 99 flow into the right-handed channel 35C one ball at a time from the introduction part 35D of the right-handed channel 35C, which serves as an inflow region in the right-handed channel 35C. Flow down.

Note that a plurality of obstacles such as nails or resin may be provided in the right-hand channel 35C. The game balls 99 may be sorted by these obstacles and decelerated to give randomness to the flow of the game balls 99.

In addition, the right side area of the game board 31 has a through-ball entry area into which a game ball 99 that is introduced from the introduction part 35D as an inflow area to the right-handed channel 35C and flows down the right-handed channel 35C can enter. A gate 317, two second prize openings 315A, 315B, and a non-electric actuation device 37 are provided, and the game board 31 further has a variable prize winning hole into which a game ball 99 released from the right-hand channel 35C can enter. A device 38 is provided.

The through gate 317 is a ball entry part provided with a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 302) connected to the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 as a detection part for detecting the entry of the game ball 99. It is provided between the second winning opening 315A and the second winning opening 315B in the right-handed channel 35C. That is, out of the game balls 99 that are so-called right-handed hits and are introduced from the introduction section 35D as an inflow area in the right-handed channel 35C, the game balls 99 that did not enter the second prize opening 315B are included in the through gate 317. is pitched.

The main control unit 331 (main controller 4) also detects that the ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 302) as a detection unit has detected that the game ball 99 has entered the through gate 317 as a ball entry part. Taking this as a trigger, a lottery for winning a regular symbol is executed to determine whether a game condition for generating a game for winning a regular symbol is established. When a winning lottery is executed, a fluctuating display of regular symbols is executed as a gaming operation in the regular symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 located at the lower right of the game board 31, and the result of the lottery winning a regular symbol is displayed. By executing the normal pattern game in which the normal pattern is stopped and displayed with the corresponding pattern, it is notified whether the result of the normal pattern winning lottery is a normal pattern winning or not. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display section 361 with a symbol that is a common symbol, that is, when it is announced that the result of the lottery that is a common symbol is a common symbol, a game that is a common symbol is generated. When the game conditions are established, the drive control (processing) of the normal electric accessory 372 as the game operation part is executed as described later, and the inlet 371 as the inflow area in the non-electric actuation device 37 is opened. , the game ball 99 can enter the non-electrically actuated device 37 (see FIG. 300(B)).

The second winning hole 315A is equipped with a ball entering sensor 315Aa (see FIGS. 297 and 302) connected to the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 as a detection unit for detecting the entering of the game ball 99. Department. Similarly, the second winning hole 315B is provided with a ball entering sensor 315Ba (see FIGS. 297 and 302) connected to the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 as a detection unit for detecting the entering of the game ball 99. This is the club that I joined. In other words, whether or not the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315A and the second winning hole 315B is determined by the main controller 4 based on the outputs (signals) from the ball entering sensor 315Aa and the ball entering sensor 315Ba. Ru.

The second winning hole 315B is provided above the second winning hole 315A in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the second winning opening 315B is provided upstream of the second winning opening 315A in the right-hand channel 35C (upstream of the second winning opening 315A in the downstream direction of the game ball 99) when viewed from the front. There is. Therefore, when the second winning hole 315A and the second winning hole 315B are both in a state where the game ball 99 can enter, the game ball 99 is entered preferentially to the second winning hole 315A than to the second winning hole 315A. Ball is possible.

In addition, the main control unit 331 detects that the game ball 99 has entered the second winning hole 315A or the second winning hole 315B as a ball entering portion by using a ball entering sensor 315Aa or a ball entering sensor 315Ba (see FIG. 297). , see FIG. 302), a (second) special drawing jackpot lottery is executed to determine whether the game conditions for generating a small winning game are satisfied (see FIG. 304(B)). When the (second) special symbol jackpot lottery is executed by the main control unit 331, the second special symbol ( By executing the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol) and executing the second special symbol game in which the second special symbol (second special symbol) is stopped and displayed with a symbol according to the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery, Whether or not the result of the special map jackpot lottery is a small win is notified. Then, when the second special symbol (second special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display section 363 with a symbol that is a small win, it is announced that the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a small win. In this case, the game conditions for generating a small winning game are established, and as described later, the drive control (processing) of the opening/closing door 382B as a game operation part in the variable winning device 38B for small winning games is executed, and the variable winning game for small winning games is executed. By opening the variable winning hole 381B as an inflow area in the winning device 38B, it becomes possible to enter the game ball 99 into the variable winning device 38B for small winning games (see FIGS. 298 and 299).

As shown in FIGS. 297(A) and 297(B), a first non-electric accessory 39A as a game operation part is provided in the second prize opening 315A as a ball entry part. This first non-electric accessory 39A is in a state where the game ball 99 can enter the second winning opening 315A (see FIG. 297(B)) and a state where the game ball 99 can enter the second winning opening 315A. This is used to switch between a state in which the ball cannot enter the ball (see FIG. 297(A)). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 297(A), the first non-electric accessory 39A closes the second winning opening 315A and opens the side of the second winning opening 315A in the right-hand channel 35C. By placing the game ball 99 in a position where it can flow down, a state where the game ball 99 cannot enter the second prize opening 315A is realized. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 297(B), the first non-electric accessory 39A opens the second winning hole 315A and connects the game ball 99 to the side of the second winning hole 315A in the right-hand channel 35C. By being in a position where it cannot flow down, it functions as a guide part and realizes a state in which the game ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315A. That is, when the game board 31 is viewed from the front, the first non-motorized accessory 39A can rotate (rotate) clockwise and counterclockwise as a game operation, and the first non-motorized accessory 39A serves as a game operation section. When the object 39A is rotated (rotated) as a gaming operation, there is a state in which the game ball 99 cannot enter the second prize opening 315A, and a state in which the game ball 99 cannot enter the second prize opening 315A. A state in which the ball can enter is realized.

Here, the first non-electric accessory 39A is moved from an inlet 371 as an inflow area in the non-electrically actuated device 37, which will be described later, by the action of a mechanical mechanism such as a known link mechanism employed in the non-electric accessory. When the game ball 99 that has entered the non-electric actuating device 37 enters the first non-electric actuating opening 376A serving as the ball entry portion of the non-electric actuating device 37, the tip portion rotates clockwise as a gaming motion. It is possible to move (rotate). In this way, when the tip of the first non-electric accessory 39A is turned (rotated) in the clockwise direction as a gaming operation, the second prize opening 315A as a ball entry part opens into the ball entry part of the game ball 99. The ball entering state is switched from the ball entering impossible state (see FIG. 297(A)) in which the game ball 99 is not allowed to enter the ball entering state (see FIG. 297(B)).

In addition, the first non-electric accessory 39A allows a predetermined number of game balls 99 (real money) to be inserted into the second prize opening 315A as a ball entry part by a mechanical mechanism such as a known link mechanism employed in non-electric accessories. In the embodiment, when two balls (for example) enter, the tip can pivot (rotate) in the counterclockwise direction as a gaming operation. In this way, when the tip of the first non-electric accessory 39A is rotated (rotated) in the counterclockwise direction as a gaming operation, the second prize opening 315A as a ball receiving part is opened to allow the game ball 99 to enter. The state in which a ball can be entered (see FIG. 297(B)) is switched to the state in which the game ball 99 cannot be entered (see FIG. 297(A)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 297(B), when the game ball 99 enters from the second prize opening 315A in the state where the ball can enter, this game ball 99 is detected by the ball entry sensor 315Aa as a detection unit. Thereafter, it is guided to the back side of the game board 31 via the discharge port 315Ab. In addition, when the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315A is detected by the ball entry sensor 315Aa, the main control unit 331 executes the (second) special jackpot lottery as described above, and the (second) ) The result of the special figure jackpot lottery is announced by the second special figure game in which variable display and stop display of the second special figure are executed.

As shown in FIGS. 297(C) and 297(D), the second winning opening 315B as a ball entry portion has a gaming operation portion that can be slid back and forth as a gaming operation when viewed from the front of the game board 31. A second non-electric accessory 39B is provided. That is, the second non-motorized accessory 39B is positioned shifted in the front-rear direction from the first non-motorized accessory 39A when viewed from the front of the game board 31 (gaming machine 10). In this way, the first non-motorized accessory 39A and the second non-motorized accessory 39B are positioned shifted in the front and back direction when viewed from the front of the game board 31 (gaming machine 10), so that the first The shapes and operation modes of the electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory 39B become more diverse. This makes it possible to reduce the space required for arranging the first non-motorized accessory 39A and the second non-motorized accessory 39B. It becomes possible to secure a large amount of space. For example, in the symbol display section 341, when a game effect is executed in a small win game or a jackpot game in addition to a special symbol game (see FIGS. 295 and 296), the display area of the symbol display section 341 (front view Therefore, it is possible to secure a large front view area of the movable accessory member 35 (see FIG. 294) and a large movable range of the movable accessory member 35. As a result, in addition to the special figure game, it becomes possible to diversify the game performance in the small winning game and the jackpot game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second non-electric accessory 39B is in a state where the game ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315B (see FIG. 297(D)), and a state where the game ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315B. This is to switch between the ball entry impossible state (see FIG. 297(C)) in which the ball entry of 99 is impossible. Specifically, the second non-electric accessory 39B is in a retracted position where the tip part does not protrude to the front side (front side) from the game board 31, so that the game ball 99 flowing down the right-hand channel 35C is 2. A state in which the ball cannot enter the ball passing through the front side of the non-electric accessory 39B is realized (see FIG. 297(C)). On the other hand, the second non-electric accessory 39B functions as a guiding part because its tip is in a protruding position protruding from the game board 31 to the front side (front side), and the game ball 99 flowing down the right-hand channel 35C The game ball 99 is received and guided to the second winning hole 315B to realize a ball entry possible state (see FIG. 297(D)).

Here, the second non-electric accessory 39B is connected to the non-electric accessory from an inlet 371 as an inflow area in the non-electric actuator 37, which will be described later, by a mechanical mechanism such as a known link mechanism employed in non-electric accessories. When the game ball 99 that has entered the actuating device 37 enters the second non-electric actuating opening 376B as a ball entry portion in the non-electric actuating device 37, a gaming operation is performed in which the ball slides to the front side (forward side). It is possible. In this way, by executing the game operation in which the second non-electric accessory 39B slides to the front side (forward side), the second winning hole 315B as a ball entry part is opened to the ball where the game ball 99 enters. The state in which the ball cannot be entered (see FIG. 297(C)) is switched to the ball into possible state (see FIG. 297(D)) in which the game ball 99 can be entered.

In addition, the second non-electric accessory 39B allows a predetermined number of game balls 99 (real money) to be inserted into the second prize opening 315B as a ball entry part by a mechanical mechanism such as a known link mechanism employed in non-electric accessories. In the embodiment, it is possible to perform a game operation in which the player slides toward the back side (rear side) when two balls (for example, 2 balls) enter the ball. In this way, by executing the game operation in which the second non-electric accessory 39B slides to the back side (rear side), the second prize opening 315B as a ball entry part is opened to the player where the game ball 99 enters. The ball entry possible state (see FIG. 297(D)) is switched to the ball entry impossible state (see FIG. 297(C)) in which the game ball 99 cannot enter the ball.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 297(B), when the game ball 99 enters from the second prize opening 315B in the state where the ball can be entered, the game ball 99 enters the through hole 391B of the second non-electric accessory 39B. The ball is guided downward through the ball and is detected by the ball entry sensor 315Ba as a detection unit. In addition, when the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315B is detected by the entry sensor 315Ba, the main control unit 331 executes the (second) special jackpot lottery as described above, and the (second) ) The result of the special figure jackpot lottery is announced by the second special figure game in which variable display and stop display of the second special figure are executed.

By the way, in this embodiment, the game operation of the first non-motorized accessory 39A as the game operation section is by rotation (rotation) in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction when the game board 31 (gaming machine 10) is viewed from the front. On the other hand, the game operation of the second non-motorized accessory 39B as a game operation section is a sliding movement in the front and back direction when viewed from the front of the game board 31 (gaming machine 10), and the first non-motorized accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory 39B differ in the mode of gaming operation when the gaming board 31 (gaming machine 10) is viewed from the front. In this way, the first non-motorized accessory 39A and the second non-motorized accessory 39B have different game operation modes when viewed from the front of the game board 31 (gaming machine 10). The shape and operation mode of the second non-electric accessory 39B are more diverse. This makes it possible to reduce the space required for arranging the first non-motorized accessory 39A and the second non-motorized accessory 39B. It becomes possible to secure a large amount of space. For example, in the symbol display section 341, when a game effect is executed in a small win game or a jackpot game in addition to a special symbol game (see FIGS. 295 and 296), the display area of the symbol display section 341 (front view Therefore, it is possible to secure a large front view area of the movable accessory member 35 (see FIG. 294) and a large movable range of the movable accessory member 35. As a result, in addition to the special figure game, it becomes possible to diversify the game performance in the small winning game and the jackpot game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the first non-electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory 39B have different game operation modes when viewed from the front of the game board 31 (gaming machine 10), they can be adjusted according to the board space of the game board 31. In addition to the second winning hole 315A and the second winning hole 315B, various winning devices such as a non-electrically actuated device 37 and a variable winning device 38 can be installed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first non-motorized accessory 39A as a game operation part is rotatable (rotatable) in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction, whereas the second non-motorized accessory 39A as a game operation part is Although the electric accessory 39B is movable back and forth, the first non-electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory 39B may be configured to operate in the same manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second winning hole 315A and the second winning hole 315B as the ball entering portions are rendered unable to enter due to the entry of two game balls 99, but the second winning hole 315A and The upper limit number of game balls 99 that can be entered into the second winning hole 315B can be changed as appropriate, and the maximum number of balls 99 that can be entered into the second winning hole 315A can be changed as needed. The upper limit number of balls that can be entered by 315B may be different. Of course, an electric accessory may be employed instead of the first non-electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory 39B as the game operation section.

[Variable winning device 38]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is configured as a 1-type and 2-type mixer instead of a loop fixed variable machine, and is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is configured as a variable prize winning device. 38 have different configurations. Here, FIGS. 298 and 299 are diagrams showing the variable winning device 38 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 298 and 299, the variable winning device 38 includes a variable winning device 38A for jackpot games that is operated in jackpot games (special figure jackpot game, V prize jackpot game), and a variable winning device 38A that is operated in small winning games. A variable winning device 38B for winning games is provided. The variable winning device 38A for jackpot games and the variable winning device 38B for small winning games are introduced into the right-hand channel 35C from the introduction section 35D as an inflow region, and flow down the right-hand channel 35C as a guide section. The game ball 99 that did not enter the second winning hole 315A, the second winning hole 315B, and the non-electric actuation device 37 can enter.

As shown in FIG. 298, the variable prize winning device 38A for jackpot games is a special jackpot game or a special jackpot game that is executed when the game condition is satisfied because the result of the special jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot. In a small win game that is executed when the game condition is satisfied because the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, a game ball 99 is entered into the V prize opening 383B of the variable prize winning device 38B for the small win game, which will be described later. This is activated in the V winning jackpot game that is executed when the game conditions are satisfied. This variable winning device 38A for jackpot games includes an opening 381A, an opening/closing door 382A as a game operation section, and a variable winning opening 383A as a ball entry section.

The opening 381A is open to the upper side of the game board 31, and is a ball entry part into which the game ball 99 can enter. The opening/closing door 382A can be slid in the front-rear direction of the game board 31 as a game operation by switching processing. In addition, the opening/closing door 382A is slid forward as a gaming operation by the switching process and positioned at the front side, thereby closing the opening 381A and opening the door to the variable winning device 38A for jackpot games (variable winning opening 383A). It is impossible to enter the game ball 99 (see FIG. 298(A)). On the other hand, the opening/closing door 382A is slid to the rear as a gaming operation by the switching process and positioned at the rear, thereby opening the opening 381A and opening the door to the variable winning device 38A for jackpot games (variable winning opening 383A). It is possible to enter the game ball 99 (see FIG. 298(B)).

The variable winning a prize opening 383A is provided below the opening 381A, and is a ball entering portion in which a ball entering sensor 383Aa is provided as a detection portion for detecting the ball entering of the game ball 99. The ball entry sensor 383Aa is connected to the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 (see FIG. 302), and whether or not the game ball 99 enters the variable winning hole 383A is determined by the output from the ball entry sensor 383Aa. Based on this, the main controller 4 makes a determination. In addition, in the variable winning opening 383A, when the opening 381A is opened by the opening/closing door 382A as a gaming operation part being operated backward, the variable winning opening 38A for jackpot games is inserted through the opening 381A. A game ball 99 that has been entered can enter the inside of the ball. In other words, in the jackpot game, the game ball 99 can enter the variable winning opening 383A by operating the opening/closing door 382A backward, and the game ball 99 can enter the variable winning opening 383A. A prize ball is awarded when detected by sensor 383Aa.

As shown in FIGS. 298 and 299, the variable winning device 38B for small winning games is operated in a small winning game that is executed when the result of the special jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331 is a small winning. This variable winning device 38B for small winning games includes an opening 381B, an opening/closing door 382B as a game operation section, a V winning opening 383B as a ball entering section, a non-V winning opening 384B as a ball entering section, and a guiding section. It is equipped with a V winning opening opening/closing part 385B.

The opening 381B is open to the upper side of the game board 31 and is a ball entry part into which the game ball 99 can enter. The opening/closing door 382B can be slid in the front-rear direction of the game board 31 as a game operation by switching processing. In addition, the opening/closing door 382B is slid forward as a gaming operation by the switching process and positioned at the front side, thereby closing the opening 381B and closing the opening 381B. It is impossible to enter the game ball 99 into the V winning hole 384B (see FIG. 298). On the other hand, the opening/closing door 382B is slid to the rear side as a gaming operation by the switching process and positioned at the rear side, thereby opening the opening 381B and opening/closing door 382B for the small winning game variable winning device 38B (V winning opening 383B, non- This allows the game ball 99 to enter the V winning hole 384B (see FIG. 299).

The V winning a prize opening 383B is provided below the opening 381A, and is a ball entering portion in which a ball entering sensor 383Ba is provided as a detection portion for detecting the ball entering of the game ball 99. The ball entry sensor 383Ba is connected to the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 (see FIG. 302), and whether or not the game ball 99 enters the V winning hole 383B is determined by the output from the ball entry sensor 383Ba. Based on this, the main controller 4 makes a determination. When the main control device 4 determines that the game ball 99 has entered the V-winning slot 383B, a prize ball is awarded and a V-winning jackpot game occurs after the small winning game ends due to the fulfillment of the gaming conditions. be done.

The non-V winning a prize opening 384B is provided below the opening 381A, and is a ball entering portion in which a ball entering sensor 384Ba is provided as a detection portion for detecting the ball entering of the game ball 99. The ball entry sensor 384Ba is connected to the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 (see FIG. 302), and whether or not the game ball 99 enters the non-V winning hole 384B is determined by the output from the ball entry sensor 384Ba. This is determined by the main controller 4 based on the following. Then, when the main control device 4 determines that the game ball 99 has entered the non-V winning hole 384B, a prize ball is awarded.

The V winning hole opening/closing part 385B can slide in the left and right direction as a gaming operation between the upper side of the V winning hole 383B and the upper side of the non-V winning hole 384B by switching processing, and It is a guide part that can guide the game ball 99 to either of the openings 384B. This V winning a prize opening/closing part 385B is moved to the right as a gaming operation by the switching process and is positioned above the non-V winning a prize opening 384B (see FIG. 299(A)). When the V winning hole opening/closing part 385B is located above the non-V winning hole 384B, the game ball 99 can enter the V winning hole 383B by opening the V winning hole 383B, while the non-V winning hole 384B is closed, the game ball 99 cannot enter the non-V winning opening 384B (see FIG. 299(A)). On the other hand, the V winning a prize opening/closing part 385B is moved to the left as a gaming operation by the switching process and is positioned above the V winning a prize opening 383B (see FIG. 299(B)). When the V winning hole opening/closing part 385B is located above the V winning hole 383B, the game ball 99 cannot enter the V winning hole 383B because the V winning hole 383B is closed, while the non-V winning hole 384B Since the is closed, the game ball 99 cannot enter the non-V winning opening 384B (see FIG. 299(B)).

Here, in a small winning game, when the opening/closing part 385B is slid rearward as a gaming operation by switching processing for the opening/closing door 382B and the opening 381B is opened, the V winning opening/closing part 385B is placed above the non-V winning opening 384B. , and the V winning opening 383B is in an open state (see FIG. 299(A)). Then, when a predetermined number of game balls 99 (for example, one ball in this embodiment) enters the V winning hole 383B in a small winning game, the V winning hole opening/closing section 385B performs a game operation by switching processing. It is slid to the left and positioned above the V winning opening 383B, so that the non-V winning opening 384B is opened (see FIG. 299(B)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the V winning opening opening/closing part 385B is capable of sliding in the left-right direction between the upper part of the V winning opening 383B and the upper part of the non-V winning opening 384B, but the V winning opening opening/closing part 385B is By being movable in the front and back direction of the game board 31, the V winning hole 383B may be switched between a closed state (a state in which a ball cannot be entered) and an open state (a state in which a ball can be entered).

In addition, in this embodiment, as the variable winning device 38, a variable winning device 38A for jackpot games and a variable winning device 38B for small winning games were separately provided, but one variable winning device is provided for jackpot games and small winning games. Equipment may be shared. For example, the variable winning device 38A for the jackpot game in this embodiment may be omitted, and a variable winning device corresponding to the variable winning device 38B for the small winning game in this embodiment may be shared between the jackpot game and the small winning game.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is not limited to the 1 type 2 type mixing machine, but by establishing the game condition by entering the game ball 99 into the V winning hole 383B of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games, For example, it may be configured as a V-ST machine (V-probability variable machine) in which a variable probability gaming state in which the jackpot probability increases. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a so-called loop fixed machine or an ST machine in which the establishment of the gaming condition does not require the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 383B of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games. It can also be configured as . In this case, the variable winning device 38B for small winning games can be omitted in the variable winning device 38.

[Non-electric actuation device 37]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a second winning opening 315A that is opened and closed by the first non-electric accessory 39A, and a second winning opening 315B that is opened and closed by the second non-electric accessory 39B. , unlike the first embodiment described above, includes a non-electric actuation device 37 that operates the first non-electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory 39B. Here, FIGS. 300 and 301 are diagrams showing the non-electrically actuated device 37 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 300, the non-electrically actuated device 37 moves the game ball 99 in the right area of the game board 31 on the vertically lower side than the second winning hole 315A and the second winning hole 315B as the ball entry portion. It is located on the downstream side in the flow direction. Therefore, in the non-electric actuation device 37, it flows into the right-handed flow path 35C from the introduction part 35D as an inflow area, flows down the right-handed flow path 35C as a guiding part, and enters the second winning opening 315A and the second winning opening. Game balls 99 that have not entered the opening 315B can flow in. This non-electrically actuated device 37 includes an inlet 371 , a normal electric accessory 372 , a flow path forming portion 373 , a non-electrically actuated portion 375 , and an outlet 378 .

The inlet 371 is an inflow area that allows the game balls 99 to flow into the non-electric actuation device 37 one ball at a time. A ball entry sensor 371a (see FIG. 302) as a detection section connected to the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 is provided at the introduction port 371 as the inflow region. That is, whether or not the game ball 99 has flowed into the non-electrically actuated device 37 from the introduction port 371 is determined by the main control device 4 based on the output (signal) from the ball entry sensor 371a.

The normal electric accessory 372 is a guiding part that opens and closes the introduction port 371 to restrict or allow the game balls 99 to flow into the non-electrically actuated device 37. This normal electric accessory 372 is placed in a standby position (see FIG. 300(A) ) and a guiding position (FIG. 300( It is possible to rotate (rotate) in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions as a gaming operation between (see B)). This normal electric accessory 372 is operated in a game between a standby position and a guidance position in a normal figure winning game. On the other hand, the normal electric accessory 372 is in the standby position in games other than the normal map winning game. Therefore, the introduction port 371 is closed by the normal electric accessory 372, and the entry of the game ball 99 into the non-electrically actuated device 37 is restricted. Therefore, the game ball 99 can flow into the non-electric actuating device 37 only during the execution of the normal game.

Here, the game based on the fact that when the game ball 99 enters the through gate 317 serving as the ball entry section, the result of the lottery for the standard game executed by the main control unit 331 is a win. It is executed when the game conditions are met. In the normal figure winning game, the normal electric accessory 372 in the standby position is rotated (rotated) in the counterclockwise direction by the switching process, so that the game operation is performed to the guiding position. This allows the game balls 99 to flow into the non-electrically actuated device 37. In addition, by establishing a game condition in which the game ball 99 is caused to flow down the right-hand ball channel 35C as a guiding section by performing a right-hand ball hit in the normal game, the non-electric actuating device 37 can cause a predetermined number of game balls 99 (the main ball 99 In the embodiment, when two balls (for example, 2 balls) flow in, the normal electric accessory 372 in the guidance position is rotated (rotated) clockwise by the switching process, thereby performing a game operation in the standby position. Specifically, when the entry of a predetermined number of game balls 99 (for example, two balls in this embodiment) into the non-electric actuation device 37 is detected by the ball entry sensor 371a serving as a detection unit, the normal electric action is activated. The object 372 is game operated from the guiding position to the standby position. In this way, when the normal electric accessory 372 is operated from the guiding position to the standby position, the flow of the game balls 99 into the non-electrically actuated device 37 is restricted, and a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the non-electrically actuated device 37. The game ends when the ball 99 (for example, two balls in this embodiment) enters the ball.

By the way, as will be described later, in the normal gaming state, there is no sorting out that the result of the lottery for common symbols by the main control unit 331 is a win, and the result is a loss with a 100% probability (see FIG. 303(A)). On the other hand, in the time-saving game state a, which can be transferred to after the end of the special jackpot game, the main control unit 331 does not assign the result of the general jackpot lottery as a loss, resulting in a win with a 100% probability (Fig. 303(B) )reference). That is, in this embodiment, since the normal game winning game can be executed only in the time-saving game state a, the normal electric accessory 372 can be operated only in the time-saving game state a. Further, the through gate 317 as a ball entry portion is provided in the right-handed ball passage 35C as a guiding portion. Therefore, the game ball 99 can flow into the non-electrically actuated device 37 by performing a right hit in the time-saving game state a and establishing a game condition that causes the game ball 99 to flow down into the right hit channel 35C serving as the guide section. It is.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving game state a ends when the normal electric accessory 372 is operated from the guiding position to the standby position, that is, when the common figure game ends. Further, the time-saving game state a may end when the normal electric accessory 372 is operated from the standby position to the guiding position, that is, when the normal figure game starts.

The flow path forming part 373 is a guiding part that guides the game ball 99 that has flowed into the non-electrically actuated device 37 from the inlet 371 as an inflow area toward the non-electrically actuated part 375. This flow path forming part 373 has an opening 373A provided on the right side of the introduction port 371 as an inflow area for the game balls 99, and an opening 373A provided above the non-electric actuating part 375 as an outflow area for the game balls 99. an opening 373B. Moreover, the flow path forming part 373 includes two deceleration parts 373C and 373D as deceleration means provided between the opening part 373A and the opening part 373B. The speed reducer 373C is formed in a protrusion shape, and the speed reducer 373D is formed in a step shape. In such a flow path forming portion 373, the game ball 99 that has flowed into the flow path forming portion 373 interferes with the deceleration portions 373C and 373D before flowing out from the opening 373B (FIG. 303(B) reference). That is, in the flow path forming part 373, the game ball 99 interferes with the deceleration parts 373C and 373D, so that the game ball 99 does not flow down linearly in the vertical direction but in a meandering manner. The vertical velocity of the flow is reduced. In this way, by providing the deceleration parts 373C and 373D in the flow path forming part 373, the game balls 99 flowing into the non-electrically actuated device 37 from the inlet 371 as an inflow area reach the non-electrically actuated part 375. Since it becomes possible to secure a long time until the end of the process, the following effects are achieved.

The non-electric actuating part 375 has a first opening 377A and a second opening 377B as an inflow area for game balls 99 that open upward, and a first opening 377A that communicates with the first opening 377A to allow game balls flowing in from the first opening 377A. A first non-electric actuation opening 376A serves as a ball entry portion into which 99 balls enter, and a second non-electric actuation port 376A serves as a ball entry portion into which game balls 99 that communicate with the second opening portion 377B and enter from the second opening portion 377B. 2 non-electric actuation port 376B.

The first non-electric actuation opening 376A, based on the entry of the game ball 99, operates the first non-electric accessory 39A, which closes the second winning opening 315A as a ball entry part, into a known part as a game operation part. A mechanical mechanism such as a link mechanism executes a game operation of turning (rotating) the game ball clockwise so that the game ball 99 can enter the second prize opening 315A. On the other hand, the second non-electric actuation opening 376B, based on the entry of the game ball 99, moves the second non-electric accessory 39B, which makes the second winning a prize opening 315B as a ball entry part into a state in which a ball cannot enter, into the game operation part. A mechanical mechanism such as a well-known link mechanism executes a game operation of sliding the ball to the front side, so that the game ball 99 can enter the second prize opening 315B.

As shown in FIGS. 301(A) and 301(B), above the non-electric actuating portion 375, there is a guiding portion which has a triangular shape in front view and has an inclined left guiding surface 374A and a right guiding surface 374B. A movable guide section 374 is provided as a movable guide section 374. The left guide surface 374A can guide the game ball 99 flowing down from the upper side to the left side, and the right guide surface 374B can guide the game ball 99 flowing down from the upper side to the right side. The movable guiding part 374 moves between a position directly above the first opening 377A as an inflow area of the non-electrically actuated part 375 and an inflow area of the non-electrically actuated part 375 based on a driving force from a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). It is possible to slide in the left-right direction as a gaming operation between the position directly above the second opening 377B as a region.

As shown in FIG. 301(A), when the movable guiding part 374 is located directly above the second opening 377B, the game ball 99 is inserted from the first opening 377A to the first non-electric operating opening 376A as a ball entry part. The ball can enter, but the game ball 99 cannot enter from the second opening 377B to the second non-electric operating opening 376B serving as a ball entry section. Furthermore, when the movable guiding section 374 is located directly above the second opening 377B, the movable guiding section 374 is directed from the flow path forming section 373 as a guiding section toward the non-electrically actuated section 375 via the opening 373B. A first guiding state is reached in which the outflowing game ball 99 is guided toward the first opening 377A (first non-electric operating opening 376A) by the left guiding surface 374A.

Further, directly above the first opening 377A as the inflow region and below the moving path of the movable guide section 374 as the guide section, there is an input section as a detection section connected to the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331. A ball sensor 376Aa is provided (see FIG. 302). That is, the ball entry sensor 376Aa is provided on the upper side in the vertical direction than the first opening 377A and the first non-electric actuation port 376A and on the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99. Therefore, the game ball 99 that flows in from the opening 373B of the flow path forming part 373 and is guided toward the first non-electric actuation opening 376A by the left guiding surface 374A of the movable guiding part 374 is detected by the ball entering sensor 376Aa. After that, the ball enters the first non-electric operating port 376A. That is, in this embodiment, before the game ball 99 enters the first non-electric operating port 376A, the entering ball sensor 376Aa detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the first non-electric operating port 376A. In addition, the ball entry sensor 376Aa may be provided on the downstream side of the first non-electric actuating port 376A in the flowing direction of the game ball 99. That is, the ball entry sensor 376Aa may detect the entry of the game ball 99 into the first non-electric operating opening 376A after the gaming ball 99 enters the first non-electric operating opening 376A.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301(B), when the movable guiding part 374 is located directly above the first opening 377A, the game ball is inserted from the first opening 377A into the first non-electric operating opening 376A as a ball entry part. 99 cannot enter, but the game ball 99 can enter from the second opening 377B into the second non-electric operation opening 376B serving as a ball entry section. Furthermore, when the movable guiding section 374 is located directly above the first opening 377A, the movable guiding section 374 is directed from the flow path forming section 373 as a guiding section toward the non-electrically actuated section 375 via the opening 373B. A second guiding state is reached in which the outflowing game ball 99 is guided toward the second opening 377B (second non-electric operating opening 376B) by the right guiding surface 374B.

Further, directly above the second opening 377B as the inflow region and below the movement path of the movable guide section 374 as the guide section, there is an input section as a detection section connected to the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331. A ball sensor 376Ba is provided (see FIG. 302). That is, the ball entry sensor 376Ba is provided above the second opening 377B and the second non-electric actuation port 376B in the vertical direction and on the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99. Therefore, the game ball 99 that flows in from the opening 373B of the flow path forming part 373 and is guided toward the second non-electric operating opening 376B by the right guiding surface 374B of the movable guiding part 374 is detected by the ball entering sensor 376Ba. After that, the ball enters the second non-electric operating port 376B. That is, in this embodiment, before the game ball 99 enters the second non-electric operating port 376B, the entry of the game ball 99 into the second non-electric operating port 376B is detected by the ball entry sensor 376Ba. Note that the ball entry sensor 376Ba may be provided on the downstream side of the second non-electric actuation port 376B in the flowing direction of the game ball 99. That is, the ball entry sensor 376Ba may detect the entry of the game ball 99 into the second non-electric operating opening 376B after the gaming ball 99 enters the second non-electric operating opening 376B.

As described above, a predetermined number of game balls 99 (for example, two balls in this embodiment) can flow into the non-electrically actuated device 37 only during the execution of a game per normal figure. In addition, the movable guide section 374 as a guide section is configured to prevent game balls 99 flowing out from the flow path forming section 373 as a guide section toward the non-electrically operated section 375 through the opening section 373B at the start of a game per normal figure. is in a first guiding state in which it is guided by the left guiding surface 374A toward the first opening 377A (first non-electric actuation port 376A) serving as the inflow region (see FIG. 300). Further, when the movable guide section 374 is in the first guide state, when a predetermined number of game balls 99 (in this embodiment, one ball) enters the first non-electric actuation opening 376A as a ball entry section, That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the ball entering sensor 376Ba as a detection part, the movable guide part 374 is slid to the left by the switching process, and the movable guide part 374 is moved from the flow path forming part 373 as a guide part. The game ball 99 flowing out towards the non-electric actuating part 375 through the opening 373B is brought into a second guiding state where it is guided towards the second opening 377B (second non-electric actuating port 376B) by the right guiding surface 374B. (See FIG. 301(B)). Furthermore, when the movable guiding part 374 is in the second guiding state, when a predetermined number of game balls 99 (in this embodiment, one ball) enters the second non-electric operating opening 376B as a ball entering part, That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the ball entry sensor 376Ba serving as a detection unit, the movable guiding unit 374 is slid to the right by the switching process, and the movable guiding unit 374 is switched to the first guiding state (FIG. 301(A). )reference).

In other words, in this embodiment, when a specific jackpot game (in this embodiment, the 10R special figure jackpot game) ends, the transition to the a time-saving gaming state is triggered by the normal figure winning. When the game starts, the normal electric accessories 372 are operated in the non-electrically actuated device 37 and the inlet 371 as an inflow area is opened, so that two game balls 99 are placed in the non-electrically actuated device 37. Since the movable guiding part 374 is in the first guiding state when the game starts per normal figure, the one game ball 99 that entered the non-electric operating device 37 first enters the first non-electric operating opening. A game in which the ball enters the non-electrically actuated device 37 after entering the ball 376A, and the movable guide portion 374 is brought into the second guiding state by the entry of one game ball 99 into the first non-electrically actuated opening 376A. The ball 99 enters the second non-electric operating port 376B, and the entry of one game ball 99 into the second non-electric operating port 376B causes the movable guide portion 374 to enter the first guiding state. When the game ball 99 enters the first non-electric operating opening 376A, the first non-electric accessory 39A is operated by the action of a mechanical mechanism such as a known link mechanism, and a game ball is entered into the second winning opening 315A. When the ball 99 is brought into the entry-enabled state (see FIG. 298(B)) and the game ball 99 enters the second non-electric operating port 376B, a mechanical mechanism such as a known link mechanism is activated. The second non-electric accessory 39B is activated by the action, and the game ball 99 is brought into a state where it can enter the second prize opening 315B (see FIG. 298(D)).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the normal game is started in the time-saving game state a, two game balls 99 flow into the non-electric actuation device 37, and the one game ball 99 that flowed in first After the ball enters the first non-electric operating port 376A, one game ball 99 that subsequently entered enters the second non-electric operating port 376B. Therefore, when the game ball 99 enters the first non-electric operation opening 376A, the first non-electric accessory 39A is activated first, and the game ball 99 can enter the second winning opening 315A, and then the second When the game ball 99 enters the non-electric operation opening 376B, the second non-electric accessory 39B is later activated, and the game ball 99 can enter the second winning opening 315B. In the present embodiment, the second winning a prize opening 315A is changed from a state in which balls can be entered to a state in which balls cannot be entered into the second winning hole 315A by the operation of the first non-electric accessory 39A due to the entry of two game balls 99. In addition, in this embodiment, the second winning a prize opening 315B is changed from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state by the operation of the second non-electric accessory 39B due to the entry of two game balls 99. As a result, by transitioning to the time-saving game state a due to the end of a specific special drawing jackpot game, two game balls 99 each are entered into the second winning hole 315A and the second winning hole 315B, so the maximum It is possible to receive the special jackpot lottery drawn by the main control unit 331 four times. Therefore, including the specific jackpot game, the player can generate five jackpot games (one specific special jackpot game + four V prize jackpot games) in a row, and one special jackpot game. A large number of balls can be released by hitting the figure jackpot. Specifically, in this embodiment, 15 prize balls are obtained by entering the game balls 99 into the variable winning hole 383A, the V winning hole 383B, and the non-V winning hole 384B, and 150 prize balls are obtained per round of the jackpot game. It is set up so that you can get the ball out of the way. Therefore, with one special drawing jackpot as an opportunity, it becomes possible to obtain a large number of balls, 10R special drawing jackpot game (1500 balls) x 1 play + 10RV winning jackpot game (1500 balls) x 4 times = 7500 balls. (See Figure 304).

Here, in the gaming machine 10, when the game balls 99 are hit right so that they are continuously fired, a plurality of game balls 99 flow down the right-hand ball passage 35C (see FIG. 324(A)). In the time-saving game state a, the game ball 99 that has flowed down the right-hand channel 35C enters the through gate 317, and the main control unit 331 generates a winning pattern in the winning lottery, and the game operation unit is activated. The normal electric accessory 372 is operated, and the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the non-electrically actuated device 37 (see FIG. 324(A)). In addition, when the ball entry sensor 371a detects that two game balls 99 have flown in from the inlet 371 as the inflow area of the non-electrically actuated device 37 due to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 372, the ordinary electric accessory 372 is restored, and the game ball 99 is not allowed to enter the non-electrically actuated device 37 (see FIG. 324(B)).

The two game balls 99 that have flowed into the non-electrically actuated device 37 flow down the flow path forming part 373 as a guiding part while being decelerated by the deceleration parts 373C and 373D, and from the flow path forming part 373 they flow down the flow path forming part 373 as a guiding part. It flows out toward the section 374. At this time, the movable guide portion 374 is located directly above the second opening 377B of the non-electrically actuated portion 375. Therefore, the movable guiding part 374 makes it impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the second opening 377B (second non-electric operating opening 376B) of the non-electric operating part 375, and at the same time, the movable guide part 374 A first guiding state is established in which the game ball 99 is guided to the first opening 377A (first non-electric actuation opening 376A). As a result, the game ball 99 that entered first of the two game balls 99 that entered the non-electrically actuated device 37 is detected by the ball entry sensor 376Aa by the left guide surface 374A of the movable guide section 374, and then The ball enters the non-electric actuation port 376A (see FIGS. 325(A) and 325(B)).

Further, when the game ball 99 enters the first non-electric operating opening 376A, the first non-electric accessory 39A is operated and the second winning opening 315A is opened (see FIG. 326(A)). The second prize opening 315A is closed when the first non-electric accessory 39A is returned by the entry of two game balls 99 (see FIG. 326(B)). Here, when the game balls 99 are hit right so that they are continuously fired as described above, the plurality of game balls 99 continuously flow down the right-hand ball channel 35C. Therefore, when the first non-electric accessory 39A is activated and the second prize opening 315A is opened, the game ball 99 moves above and near the first non-electric accessory 39A when the first non-electric accessory 39A is operated. It is in a state of flowing down. Therefore, when the first non-electric accessory 39A is operated, the game ball 99 flowing down the right-handed channel 35C is immediately guided to the second prize opening 315A by the first non-electric accessory 39A, so that the game ball 99 is immediately guided to the second prize opening 315A. A game ball 99 is entered into the second prize opening 315A.

Further, when the game ball 99 is detected by the ball entering sensor 376Aa, the movable guiding part 374 moves from directly above the second opening 377B of the non-electrically actuating part 375 to directly above the first opening 377A of the non-electrically actuating part 375. A switching process is executed. Through this switching process, the movable guiding section 374 disables the game ball 99 from entering the first opening 377A (first non-electric operating opening 376A) of the non-electric operating section 375, and at the same time It is switched to the second guiding state in which the game ball 99 is guided to the second opening 377B (second non-electric operation opening 376B) of 375 (see FIGS. 325(A) and 325(B)). At this time, of the two game balls 99 that have flowed into the non-electric actuation device 37, the game ball 99 that has flowed in later is located above the movable guide portion 374. As a result, the game ball 99 that entered the second of the two game balls 99 that entered the non-electrically actuated device 37 is detected by the right guide surface 374B of the movable guide section 374 by the ball entry sensor 376Ba, and then the second The ball enters the electric actuation port 376B (see FIGS. 327(A) and 327(B)).

Further, when the game ball 99 enters the second non-electric operating opening 376B, the second non-electric accessory 39B is operated and the second winning opening 315B is opened (see FIG. 327(C)). The second prize opening 315B is closed when the second non-electric accessory 39B is returned by the entry of two game balls 99 (see FIG. 327(D)). Here, when the game balls 99 are hit right so that they are continuously fired as described above, a plurality of game balls 99 flow down the right-hand ball passage 35C. Therefore, when the second non-electric accessory 39B is activated and the second prize opening 315B is opened, the game ball 99 flowing down above the second non-electric accessory 39B in the right-handed flow path 35C immediately moves to the second non-electric accessory 39B. The ball is entered into the winning hole 315B.

Further, when the game ball 99 is detected by the ball entering sensor 376Ba, the movable guiding part 374 moves from directly above the first opening 377A of the non-electrically actuating part 375 to directly above the second opening 377B of the non-electrically actuating part 375. A switching process is executed. With this switching process, the movable guide section 374 allows the game ball 99 to enter the second opening 377B (second non-electric operating port 376B) of the non-electric operating section 375, while allowing the movable guide section 374 to It is switched to the second guiding state in which the game ball 99 is guided to the first opening 377A (second non-electric operation opening 376B) of 375 (see FIGS. 327(A) and 327(B)).

Here, in the gaming machine 10, the arrangement position of the second non-motorized accessory 39B as the game operation section is the same as that of the first non-motorized accessory as the game operation section when the gaming machine 10 (game board 31) is viewed from the front. This is the upper side in the vertical direction than the arrangement position of the object 39A or the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99. Therefore, first, the first non-electric accessory 39A as a game operation part on the lower side in the vertical direction or the downstream side in the flowing direction of the game ball 99 can be opened as a game operation, and then on the upper side in the vertical direction. Alternatively, the second non-electric accessory 39B as a game operation section on the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99 may be opened as a game operation.

By the way, when the second non-electric accessory 39B is opened, the second non-electric accessory 39B protrudes to the front side of the game board 31 in the right-hand channel 35C. Close the right-handed channel 35C. Therefore, when the second non-electric accessory 39B is opened, the game balls 99 that are continuously hit to the right are moved to the vertically lower side or lower than the second non-electric accessory 39B in the right-handed channel 35C. It does not flow down the downstream side of the game ball 99 in the downstream direction. That is, when the second non-electric accessory 39B is opened, the game ball 99 does not exist near the upper and upstream side of the first non-electric accessory 39A. Therefore, contrary to the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the second non-motorized accessory 39B is first opened and then the first non-motorized accessory 39A is opened, the first non-motorized accessory 39B is opened. A situation may occur in which the game ball 99 is not present near the first non-electric accessory 39A at the start of the opening operation of the object 39A. In this case, the game ball 99 that enters first when the first non-motorized accessory 39A is released is more vertical than the second non-motorized accessory 39B when the second non-motorized accessory 39B returns. The game ball 99 is located above the game ball 99 or on the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99. As a result, contrary to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the second non-motorized accessory 39B is first opened and then the non-motorized accessory 39A is opened, the first non-motorized accessory In order for the game ball 99 to enter when the opening operation of 39A is performed, the game ball 99 that is located above or upstream of the second non-motorized accessory 39B when the second non-motorized accessory 39B is returned must be on the right side. In the striking channel 35C, it is necessary to flow down to the position where the first non-electric accessory 39A is placed. That is, after the second non-electric accessory 39B is returned until the game ball 99 flows down from above or upstream of the second non-electric accessory 39B to the position where the first non-electric accessory 39A is placed. distance and time required. As a result, contrary to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the second non-electric accessory 39B is first opened and then the non-electric accessory 39A is opened, the second prize opening 315A and It is not possible to enter the predetermined number of game balls 99 into both of the second winning holes 315B at the fastest speed.

On the other hand, when the first non-motorized accessory 39A is opened, the first non-motorized accessory 39A blocks the right-handed channel 35C, but the game ball 99 that was hit to the right is continuously hit to the right. The game ball 99 flows down in the right-hand channel 35C not only near the upper and upstream side of the first non-electric accessory 39A but also near the upper and upstream side of the second non-electric accessory 39B. That is, when the first non-electric accessory 39A is opened, the game ball 99 is also present near the upper and upstream side of the second non-electric accessory 39B. Therefore, like the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, first the first non-electric accessory 39A on the lower side in the vertical direction or the downstream side in the flowing direction of the game ball 99 is opened, and then the upper part in the vertical direction When the second non-motorized accessory 39B on the upstream side or the downstream direction of the game ball 99 is opened, when the first non-motorized accessory 39A is returned, the second non-motorized accessory 39B is opened on the upper side and upstream. A game ball 99 also exists near the side. As a result, at the start of the opening operation of the second non-motorized accessory 39B, the presence of the game ball 99 near the upper and upstream side of the second non-motorized accessory 39B causes the second non-motorized accessory 39B to open. It becomes possible to enter the game ball 99 into the second prize opening 315B at the fastest speed from the start of the opening operation. This makes it possible to enter a predetermined number of game balls 99 into the second winning hole 315A and to enter a predetermined number of game balls 99 into the second winning hole 315B continuously and at the fastest speed. .

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the normal electric accessory 372 is operated due to the occurrence of a normal figure in the normal figure winning lottery by the main control unit 331 in the time-saving gaming state a, the normal electric accessory 372 is activated. When the game balls 99 are continuously launched toward the right side area of the game board 31, the game balls 99 are sequentially entered into the first non-electric operating port 376A and the second non-electric operating port 376B, and the right-hand hitting channel 35C is hit. As the plurality of game balls 99 continuously flow down, the game balls 99 flow down near the upper and upstream side of the first non-motorized accessory 39A when the first non-motorized accessory 39A is operated. There is. Therefore, when the first non-electric accessory 39A is operated, the game ball 99 flowing down the right-handed channel 35C is immediately guided to the second prize opening 315A by the first non-electric accessory 39A, so that the game ball 99 is immediately guided to the second prize opening 315A. A game ball 99 is entered into the second prize opening 315A. Of the game balls 99 that are continuously hit to the right, the game balls 99 that are hit first and flow down the right-hand channel 35C on the downstream side are on the lower side in the vertical direction where the action was performed first, or the game balls 99 reaches the first non-electric accessory 39A (second winning opening 315A) on the downstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99, and the subsequent game ball 99 reaches the upper side in the vertical direction in which the operation was performed later or in the downstream direction of the game ball 99. The second non-electric accessory 39B (second winning opening 315B) on the upstream side is reached. In other words, the operating order of the first non-electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory 39B (the opening order of the second winning opening 315A and the second winning opening 315B), the first non-electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory The order in which the game balls 99 arrive at the accessory 39B (the order in which the game balls 99 enter the second winning hole 315A and the second winning hole 315B) can be matched. That is, when the second winning opening 315A is opened by the operation of the first non-electric accessory 39A, the game ball 99 is made to exist near the upper and upstream side of the second winning opening 315A, and the operation of the second non-electric accessory 39B When the second winning hole 315B is opened, the game ball 99 can be present near the upper side and upstream side of the second winning hole 315B, and as a result, the second winning hole is opened by the operation of the first non-electric accessory 39A. 315A is opened until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are entered into the second winning hole 315A, and the second winning hole 315B is opened due to the operation of the second non-electric accessory 39B. It is possible to minimize both the time until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the winning hole 315B. Therefore, the first non-motorized accessory 39A and the second non-motorized accessory 39B are activated in the shortest possible time (for example, the shortest time) after the normal electric accessory 372 is operated due to the occurrence of a normal figure in the a time-saving game state. The main control unit 331 can execute the special drawing jackpot lottery process by executing the operation and entering the game balls 99 into the second winning holes 315A and 315B. As a result, if the player wins a normal pattern, the player continuously launches the game ball 99 toward the normal electric accessory 372 onto the right side area of the game board 31, even if the player does not understand the gameplay. Only by this, it becomes possible to execute the process based on the game ball 99 reaching the first non-electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory 39B while increasing the identifiability or visibility. As a result, when a normal figure hit occurs as a game condition in the time-saving game state a, the player can perform a simple firing operation of continuously shooting the game ball 99 toward the normal electric accessory 372. The benefit when a regular figure hit occurs in the time-saving gaming state is that the execution of the special figure jackpot lottery process by the main control unit 331 can be carried out in as short a time as possible (for example Since the game can be received in the shortest possible time, it is possible to efficiently improve the interest of the game without complicating the gameplay. That is, if it takes time to enter the game balls 99 into the second winning holes 315A, 315B, the second special figure reserved number M, which is the reserved number of rights to execute the second special figure game, becomes the maximum reserved number. There is a concern that not only will it take a long time until the player wins, but the player may also be confused about the game operations while playing the game. If it is possible to land the ball in the shortest possible time, there is no need to worry about game operations, and the player can receive the maximum benefit by simply continuing to hit the ball to the right.

By the way, in the non-electric operating device 37, due to the occurrence of an irregular situation, the game ball 99 that has flowed into the non-electric operating device 37 enters both the first non-electric operating port 376A and the second non-electric operating port 376B. It can be assumed that the ball will not enter the ball. For example, when the game ball 99 reaches the movable guide section 374 during the transition process from the first guide state to the second guide state of the movable guide section 374 (see FIG. 301(C)), the opening of the flow path forming section 373 If the game ball 99 flows out from the 373B in an unexpected direction or the movable guide part 374 has a movement failure, the game ball 99 will not be released from either the first non-electric operating port 376A or the second non-electric operating port 376B. It may happen that the ball is not entered. In this case, if no measures are taken, the so-called game balls 99 that have not entered either the first non-electric operating opening 376A or the second non-electric operating opening 376B may occur inside the non-electric operating device 37. There is a concern that a ball clogging may occur and the non-electrically actuated device 37 may not function.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301(C), in the present embodiment, the non-electrically actuated device 37 includes a discharge passage 378A and a discharge passage 378B as a guide section provided on the side of the non-electrically operated part 375. A discharge port 378 for discharging the game balls 99 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and communicating with these discharge passages 378A and 378B. Therefore, the game balls 99 that flowed into the non-electric actuation device 37 and did not enter either the first non-electric actuation port 376A or the second non-electric actuation port 376B flow down the discharge paths 378A, 378B. , are discharged to the back side of the game board 31 via the discharge port 378. As a result, even if the game ball 99 that has flowed into the non-electric operating device 37 does not enter either the first non-electric operating port 376A or the second non-electric operating port 376B, the inside of the non-electric operating device 37 This prevents so-called ball clogging from occurring.

In addition to the case where a game ball 99 flows into the non-electric operating device 37 and does not enter either the first non-electric operating opening 376A or the second non-electric operating opening 376B, the first non-electric operating opening 376A In the case where two game balls 99 enter the ball, or when only one game ball 99 enters the non-electrically actuated device 37, the second guiding state of the movable guiding section 374 is maintained, and the second guiding state is maintained. It can be assumed that the movable guide portion 374 is in the second guide state at the start of the winning game. In this case, since the game ball 99 is entered into the second non-electric operating opening 376B before the first non-electric operating opening 376A, the order is not the intended order (second winning opening 315A→second winning opening 315B). There is a concern that the second winning opening 315A and the second winning opening 315B may be opened in the order of the second winning opening 315B→second winning opening 315A. Therefore, the position (guidance state) of the movable guiding section 374 is checked at the start of a winning game or after a predetermined period of time after the end of a game winning a standard game, and if necessary, the movable guiding section 374 is changed to the first guiding state. It is also conceivable to execute the switching process so that At this time, it is also considered that the movable guiding portion 374 is chucked.

Further, in this embodiment, when the entry of the game ball 99 into the first non-electric operating opening 376A is detected, the movable guide portion 374 is switched from the first guide state to the second guide state. On the other hand, by providing the ball entry sensor 376Aa directly above the first non-electric operating port 376A, the game ball enters the first non-electric operating port 376A before the game ball 99 enters the first non-electric operating port 376A. 99 entering balls are detected. In this way, by detecting the entry of the game ball 99 into the first non-electric operating opening 376A before the gaming ball 99 enters the first non-electric operating opening 376A, the first non-electric operating opening 376A Compared to the case where the detection is performed after the game ball 99 enters, the movable guiding part 374 is moved to the left in a shorter time after the game ball 99 flows out from the opening 373B of the flow path forming part 373, The movable guide portion 374 can be switched from the first guide state to the second guide state. In other words, the time from when the game ball 99 flows out from the opening 373B of the channel forming section 373 until the movable guiding section 374 is switched from the first guiding state to the second guiding state can be shortened. As a result, the two game balls 99 that have flowed into the non-electric operating device 37 are effectively prevented from entering the first non-electric operating opening 376A, and the first non-electric operating opening 376A and the second It becomes possible to enter the game balls 99 one ball at a time into the non-electric operating opening 376B. As a result, when a normal game is started in the time saving game state a, a disadvantage occurs due to the game ball 99 not entering the second non-electric operating opening 376B. It is possible to prevent a reduction in the number of acquired balls due to not being able to enter the ball 99 and not being able to generate two V-winning jackpot games.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, by providing the deceleration parts 373C and 373D in the flow path forming part 373 of the non-electrically actuated device 37, the game that flows into the non-electrically actuated device 37 from the inlet 371 If it becomes possible to secure a long time for the ball 99 to reach the non-electric actuation part 375, after the game ball 99 enters the first non-electric actuation port 376A, the subsequent game ball 99 is movably guided. It is also possible to secure a long time until reaching the section 374. Therefore, since the game ball 99 can be made to reach the movable guide section 374 and the second non-electric operating port 376B after switching the movable guiding section 374 to the second guiding state, the game ball 99 can reach the second non-electric operating port 376B more reliably. A game ball 99 can be entered. As a result, the occurrence of disadvantages caused by the game ball 99 not entering the second non-electric actuation opening 376B and the game operation of the second non-electric accessory 39B not being executed is prevented. That is, since the game ball 99 is not entered into the second winning hole 315A, the number of times that the main control unit 331 can receive the special jackpot lottery is reduced, and the number of times that small winning games (V winning jackpot games) occur is reduced. This prevents a decrease in the number of pitches that can be obtained.

In addition, as the deceleration parts 373C and 373D, an electric stopper or the like that retains the game ball 99 can also be adopted. For example, a stopper may be provided to retain the game ball 99 that has flowed in after the two game balls 99 that have flowed into the non-electric operating device 37, and the game ball 99 can be stopped after a predetermined period of time or at the first non-electric operating port 376A. The retention of the game balls 99 may be released after the ball 99 enters the ball, and both of the two game balls 99 that have flowed into one or two non-electric actuation devices 37 are retained, and the time is increased. The retention of the individual game balls 99 may be released by shifting them. Furthermore, instead of the deceleration parts 373C and 373D, the time from when the game ball 99 flows into the non-electrically actuated device 37 from the inlet 371 until the game ball 99 flows out from the opening 373B of the flow path forming part 373 It is also considered to provide a plurality of balls (for example, two) with different distances and to distribute the game balls 99 that have flowed into the non-electrically actuated device 37 from the inlet 371 into each flow path using an electric or mechanical sorting member. It will be done. In addition, by opening and closing the normal electric accessory 372 as a game operation part multiple times in the game per normal figure, and adjusting the opening time and opening/closing interval of each opening/closing, the non-electrically actuated device 37 can be operated twice with a time difference of a certain amount or more. It is also conceivable to allow the game balls 99 to flow in.

In addition, the second non-electric accessory 39B has a return spring 310 (return valve ) (on the upstream side in the moving direction of the game ball 99). In this way, the second non-electric accessory 39B is arranged in a position close to the return spring 310 (return valve) provided at a predetermined position that defines the inflow area to the game area of the game board 31. The moving distance (moving time) of the game ball 99 from the predetermined position to the second non-electric accessory 39B is longer than the moving distance (moving time) of the game ball 99 from the predetermined position to the first non-electric accessory 39A. Set. Therefore, it becomes possible to secure a long time for the game balls 99 that have flowed in from the inflow region beyond the predetermined position to reach the second non-electric actuation opening 376B as the ball entry portion. Therefore, the movable guiding part 374 as a guiding part that is in the first guiding state that guides the game ball 99 that has flowed in from the inflow area to the first non-electric operating opening 376A is used to guide the gaming ball 99 that has flowed in from the inflow area to the first non-electric operating opening 376A. It is possible to secure a long time until switching to the second guidance state in which the game ball 99 cannot be entered and the game ball 99 can be entered into the second non-electric operation opening 376B. This allows the game ball 99 to reach the second non-electric operating port 376B after switching the movable guide portion 374 to the second guiding state, so that the game ball 99 can be more reliably placed in the second non-electric operating port 376B. You can let the ball enter. As a result, the occurrence of disadvantages caused by the game ball 99 not entering the second non-electric actuation opening 376B and the game operation of the second non-electric accessory 39B not being executed is prevented.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment and various tables used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 302 to 305.

[Ball entry sensor]
Here, FIG. 302 is a block diagram showing an example of a main part of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 302, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 is basically the same as that of the first embodiment described above, but a part of the ball entry sensor as a detection section is different from that of the first embodiment described above. is different. Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a ball entry sensor 315Aa that detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315A, and a ball entry sensor 315Aa that detects the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the second winning opening 315B. a ball entry sensor 315Ba that detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the through gate 317, a ball entry sensor 317a that detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the non-electric operating device 37, and a first non-electronic ball entry sensor 315Ba that detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the non-electrically operated device 37. A ball entry sensor 376Aa that detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the operating port 376A, an entry sensor 376Ba that detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the second non-electric operating port 376B, and a variable prize winning device 38A for jackpot games. Ball entry sensor 383Aa that detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the variable winning hole 383A, Ball entry sensor 383Ba that detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning hole 383B of the variable winning device 38A for small winning games, Small It is equipped with a ball entering sensor 384Ba that detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the non-V winning hole 384B of the variable winning device 38A for winning games. These ball entry sensors 315Aa, 315Ba, 317a, 371a, 376Aa, 376Ba, 383Aa, 383Ba, and 384Ba are connected to the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 like the other ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, and 318a. The MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the 2 winning holes 315A, 315A, the through gate 317, the non-electric actuation device 37, the variable winning hole 383A, the V winning hole 383B, or the non-V winning hole 384B. There is.

[General figure hit/failure table]
Here, FIG. 303(A) and FIG. 303(B) are diagrams showing an example of a common symbol winning/failing table used in the common symbol winning lottery by the main control unit 331. The winning lottery for a common symbol is triggered by the game ball 99 entering the through gate 317 serving as the ball entry section, and is executed with reference to the winning common symbol table according to the gaming state. In this embodiment, there are two types of winning/non-winning tables: a normal gaming state winning/winning winning/failing table shown in FIG. 303(A), and a time-saving gaming state winning/winning matching table shown in FIG. 303(B). It is set. In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a normal figure is different when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, and the probability of winning a normal symbol is higher in the time-saving gaming state than in the normal gaming state. The probability of winning is set high.

The normal game state normal figure hit/failure table shown in FIG. 303(A) is a table used in the normal figure winning lottery by the main control unit 331 when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. As shown in FIG. 303(A), in the normal game state normal figure hit win/fail table, if the value of the normal figure random number counter C4 is between 0 and 299, the game is assigned to a loser and there is no win distribution. That is, even if a lottery to win a common symbol is executed in the normal gaming state, the lottery result will not be a win.

The a time-saving gaming state normal figure win/failure table shown in FIG. 303(B) is a table used in the normal figure winning lottery by the main control unit 331 when the gaming state is the a time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 303(B), in the a-time-saving game state normal figure win/fail table, when the value of the normal figure random number counter C4 is 0 to 299, it is distributed to the normal figure, and there is no allocation of losers. In other words, when the normal lottery is executed in the time-saving gaming state a, it becomes a 100% jackpot. Therefore, when shifting to the time-saving gaming state a, at least one game per normal symbol is executed, and it becomes possible to cause the game balls 99 to flow into the non-electrically actuated device 37 using the shifting to the time-saving gaming state a as an opportunity.

[Classification table per ordinary map]
Here, FIG. 303(C) and FIG. 303(D) are diagrams showing an example of a type distribution table per ordinary figure. In this embodiment, as the type distribution table per normal figure, the type distribution table per normal game state normal figure shown in FIG. There are two types: table and table. That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the result of the lottery for winning a regular symbol by the main control unit 331 is a winning for a regular symbol in the case where the gaming state is the normal gaming state and when the gaming state is in the time saving gaming state. The distribution probabilities of the types of per-popular symbols (per short-open regular symbols and per long-open regular symbols) derived when the game conditions are satisfied are different. Specifically, in this embodiment, if the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the maximum operating time of the normal electric accessory 372 (the maximum opening time of the inlet 371 as the inflow area of the non-electrically actuated device 37) is 0. .1 second is derived, and if the game state is a time-saving game state, the maximum operating time of the normal electric accessory 372 (the maximum opening of the inlet 371 as the inflow area of the non-electric actuator 37) is calculated. A long open common map hit whose time) is 10 seconds is derived.

The normal game state per normal figure type distribution table shown in FIG. 303(C) is executed when the game ball 99 enters the through gate 317 as the ball entry section when the game state is the normal game state. This is a table used in the regular lottery drawn by the main control unit 331. As shown in FIG. 303(C), in the normal game state per normal pattern type distribution table, the values 0 to 19 of the type random number counter C5 per normal pattern are distributed to each short open normal pattern, There is no sorting. Of course, the normal game state per normal game type distribution table may set the distribution per short open standard size to other than 100% (the allocation per long open standard size is 0%).

The time-saving gaming state normal pattern per-type distribution table shown in FIG. This is a table used in the general drawing lottery based on 331. As shown in FIG. 303(D), in the time saving game state per normal pattern type distribution table, the values 0 to 19 of the type random number counter C5 per normal pattern are distributed per long open normal pattern, and per short open normal pattern. There is no distribution. Of course, the time saving game state per normal pattern type distribution table may set the allocation per long open normal pattern to other than 100% (the allocation per short open normal pattern is 0%).

[Jackpot success/failure table]
Here, FIGS. 304A and 304B are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot success/failure table used in the special chart jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. The jackpot lottery is triggered when the game ball 99 enters the first prize opening 314 or the second prize opening 315A, 315B as the entrance part, and the lottery is held according to the type of the entrance part into which the game ball 99 enters. It is executed by referring to the jackpot success/failure table. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot success/failure tables are set: a special 1 jackpot success/failure table shown in FIG. 304(A) and a special 2 jackpot success/failure table shown in FIG. 304(B).

Further, in this embodiment, a jackpot, a small jackpot, and a miss are set as the jackpot lottery results in the jackpot win/fail table. A jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery is a special symbol game that announces the result of the jackpot lottery.The special symbol and decorative symbol are stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol as a game result, and the jackpot game is executed after the special symbol game ends. This is the gaming condition for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state. A small win as a result of a jackpot lottery is a special symbol game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery.Special symbols and decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as a small prize symbol as a game result, and after the special symbol game ends, the small prize game This is a gaming condition for transitioning to a small winning gaming state where this is executed. A winning lottery result as a result of a jackpot lottery is a lottery result in which special symbols and decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as a winning symbol in a special figure game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery. In the jackpot success/failure table of this embodiment, 65536 pieces from 0 to 65535 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315A, 315B is set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. By determining whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained at the time of the ball (or at the start of the special figure game) corresponds to the jackpot, small win, or loss set in the jackpot table, the jackpot lottery is determined. The results are divided into jackpots, small wins, and misses.

As shown in FIG. 304(A), the special 1 jackpot success/failure table is used for the special jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331 regarding the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 as the ball entry section. In the special 1 jackpot success/failure table, among the 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 206 random numbers from 0 to 205 are distributed as jackpots, and the other random values are distributed as losers. It is being In other words, in the lottery for game balls 99 entering the first winning slot 314, the jackpot probability is divided into approximately 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the rest are divided into losers and small wins. There isn't.

As shown in FIG. 304(B), the special 2 jackpot success/failure table is used for the special jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331 regarding the entry of game balls 99 into the second winning slots 315A, 315B as ball entry sections. Ru. In the special 2 jackpot success/failure table, among the 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, all 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535 are divided into small wins, jackpots and misses. You won't be disappointed. That is, in the jackpot lottery for the game balls 99 entering the second winning holes 315A, 315B, the probability of a small win is 100%.

[Jackpot type distribution table]
Here, FIGS. 304(C) and 304(D) are diagrams showing an example of the jackpot type distribution table. In this embodiment, two types are set as the jackpot type distribution table: a special figure jackpot type distribution table and a V winning jackpot type distribution table.

The special figure jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 304(D) is used when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331 for the game ball 99 entering the first prize opening 314 is a jackpot as a game condition. It is used to allocate the type of jackpot. As shown in FIG. 304(D), in the special figure jackpot type distribution table, among the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) from 0 to 19, 19 random values from 0 to 9 are 4R. 10 random numbers from 10 to 19 will be distributed as a 10R jackpot. That is, in this embodiment, the special figure jackpot is a 4R jackpot in which the number of balls thrown is 600 and the game enters the normal game state after the end of the special figure jackpot game, and a 4R jackpot in which the number of balls thrown is 1500 balls and the special figure jackpot game is finished after the end of the special figure jackpot game. Two types of 10R jackpots that shift to a time-saving gaming state are set, the distribution rate of 4R jackpots is set to 50%, and the distribution rate of 10R jackpots is set to 50%. That is, in this embodiment, if the game condition that the result of the special drawing jackpot lottery is a jackpot is established, it is possible to acquire a large amount (7500 balls) of game balls 99 with a probability of 50%.

Here, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game conditions for the special figure jackpot game are established, and a round game in which the opening/closing door 382A of the variable prize winning device 38A for the jackpot game is opened is played. , a special figure jackpot game is executed in which an opening/closing execution mode is repeated multiple times depending on the jackpot type (see FIG. 298). After the 10R special jackpot game ends, the normal electric accessory 372 as the game operating part is activated, and the first non-electrically actuated device 37 opens the second prize openings 315A and 315B as the ball entry part. A transition is made to the time-saving gaming state in which the game balls 99 can easily enter the electric operating opening 376A and the second non-electric operating opening 376B. In addition, in this embodiment, the termination condition of the time-saving game state a is set to the termination of one opening/closing operation of the normal electric accessory 372.

In addition, in this embodiment, the end condition of the time-saving game state a is set to the end of the game per normal figure, but the end condition of the time-saving game state a is set to the start of the game per normal figure. There may be. Further, the number of times the game per normal figure is executed in the time-saving game state a is not limited to one time, but may be another number of times.

The V prize jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 304(D) is used to distribute the jackpot type when the lottery result in the special jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331 is a small win, that is, after the small win game ends. It is used to determine the number of rounds of the V-winning jackpot game to be executed when the game ball 99 enters the V-winning hole 383B of the variable winning device 38B in the small-winning game. As shown in FIG. 304 (D), in the V prize jackpot type distribution table, among the values (random values) of the 20 jackpot type counters C2 from 0 to 19, all random values from 0 to 19 win 10RV prizes. It will be divided into jackpots. That is, in this embodiment, in the V winning jackpot, the distribution rate of the 10 RV winning jackpot is set to 100%. Therefore, when the V-winning jackpot game is executed, it is more advantageous in terms of balls being paid compared to when the special figure jackpot game is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the 10R jackpot is set as the type of the V winning jackpot, but the types of the V winning jackpot are set to multiple types with different numbers of round games and expected ball output values, and these multiple types are set as the type of the V winning jackpot. From this, the type of V winning jackpot may be randomly determined (determined by random number lottery). That is, the number of round games to be executed in a jackpot game in a so-called rush state may be randomly determined from a plurality of types. In this way, when the type of V-winning jackpot is randomly determined from multiple types of V-winning jackpots, when the V-winning jackpot game is executed, the player expects to win a large amount of balls. Since the game can be executed, the interest in the game is improved.

[Variation table]
Here, FIGS. 305(A) to 305(C) are diagrams showing examples of variation tables. The variation table is used to set the variable display time of special symbols in the special symbol game that notifies the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. In this embodiment, there are three types of variation tables: a special 1 off variation table shown in FIG. 305(A), a special 1 hit variation table shown in FIG. 305(B), and a special 2 variation table shown in FIG. 305(C). It is set.

As shown in FIG. 305(A), the special 1 winning variation table is a special drawing jackpot lottery executed by the main control unit 331 based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 as the entry part. is used when the result is an outlier. In the special 1 off variation table, special symbol variation patterns are sorted according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. In this special 1 off variation table, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a reach that is out of order or a reach other than out of order, the special pattern variation pattern is "01" with a variation display time of 30 seconds, and a variation display time of 60 seconds. The variable display time is divided into either "02", which is seconds, or "03", which is 90 seconds. In addition, in the special 1 loss fluctuation table, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a complete loss reach, the special pattern fluctuation pattern is "04" with a fluctuation display time of 7 seconds and "04" with a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds. 05" and "06" with a variable display time of 15 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 305(B), the special jackpot variation table is the special jackpot lottery executed by the main control unit 331 based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 as the ball entry section. It is used when the result is a jackpot as the gaming conditions are met. In the special 1 per fluctuation table, the special pattern fluctuation pattern is "01" with a fluctuation display time of 30 seconds, "02" with a fluctuation display time of 60 seconds, or "03" with a fluctuation display time of 90 seconds. It is divided into crabs.

As shown in FIG. 305(C), the special 2 variation table is a special figure jackpot executed by the main control unit 331 based on the game ball 99 entering the second winning hole 315A, 315B as the ball entering part. It is used to set the variable display time in the special figure game that announces the lottery results. In the special 2 variation table, only "07" with a variation display time of 1 second is assigned. That is, the variable display time for the second special figure game executed based on the game ball 99 being entered into the second winning a prize opening 315A, 315B is always set to 1 second.

Note that a plurality of types of variable display times may be set in the special 2 variable table.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 to 323.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
The main timer interrupt process of this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in some of the procedures of the start winning process and the through gate process. Hereinafter, the start winning process and the through gate process will be described as processes executed in the main timer interrupt process.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the starting prize winning process will be explained with reference to FIG. 306.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 306, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a win in the first winning hole 314 as the ball entry section. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process moves to step S1102, and if it determines that there is no winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), the process moves to step S1107.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol reservation number N stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the first special symbol reservation number N is the maximum reservation number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process. On the other hand, if the first special figure reservation number N is not the maximum reservation number (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the first special figure reservation number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17, and in step S1402 in the main process in FIG. 308, which will be described later. And obtain the counter value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S1414, and apply the counter value to the first reservation areas REA1 to 4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. It is stored in the first vacant reservation area of the reservation area REA4.

<Steps S1105 and S1106>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 makes a judgment based on the special jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 304(A)) (step S1105). Next, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol is valid or not before the special symbol validity information for the first special symbol reservation acquired in step S1105 becomes a target for determination of the propriety of the jackpot in step S2102 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 314, which will be described later. The content of the information is confirmed, and based on the confirmation result, the first special figure hold command is set in the RAM 412, and the start winning process is ended.

<Step S1107>
When determining that there is no winning in the first winning hole 314 (step S1101: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a winning in the second winning hole 315A, 315B (step S1107). Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there has been a winning in the second winning openings 315A, 315B (step S1107: Yes), the process moves to step S1108, and if it determines that there has been no winning in the second winning openings 315A, 315B ( Step S1107: No), the start winning process is ended.

<Steps S1108 and S1109>
In step S1108, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above). 3) Determine whether or not. Here, if the second special figure reservation number M is the maximum reservation number (step S1108: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process. On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number M is not the maximum reservation number (step S1108: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the second special figure reservation number M (step S1109).

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17, and in step S1402 in the main process in FIG. 308, which will be described later. And obtain the counter value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S1414, and apply the counter value to the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth of the second special figure reservation storage area REB of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. It is stored in the first vacant reservation area in the reservation area REB4.

<Steps S1111 and S1112>
In step S1111, the MPU 41 makes a judgment based on the special 2 jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 304(B)). In step S1112, the MPU 41 specifies that the special symbol validity information for the second special symbol reservation obtained in step S1110 is used as a special symbol before the special symbol validity information for the second special symbol reservation acquired in step S1110 becomes a target for determining the validity of the jackpot in step S2110 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 314, which will be described later. The contents of the figure correctness information are confirmed, and based on the confirmation result, a second special figure hold command is set in the RAM 412, and the start winning process is ended.

[Through gate processing]
Here, FIG. 307 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the through gate process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. In the through gate process, when the game ball 99 enters the through gate 317 serving as the ball entry section, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the regular figure reservation storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The through gate process will be described below with reference to FIG. 307.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 307, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the through gate 317 (step S1301). Whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the through gate 317 is determined based on winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process in step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has passed through the through gate 317 (step S1301: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1302, and if it determines that the game ball 99 has not passed through the through gate 317 (step S1301: No), the through gate process ends.

<Step S1302>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has passed through the through gate 317 (step S1301: Yes), the MPU 41 stores the normal figures stored in the normal figure fluctuation pending number storage area SNA set in the normal figure holding storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not the number of diagram fluctuation reservations X is the maximum number of reservations (4 in this embodiment) (step S1302). The MPU 41 terminates the through gate processing when the number of regular pattern fluctuations pending X is the maximum number of reservations (step S1302: Yes), and when the number X of regular pattern fluctuations pending is not the maximum number of pendings (step S1302: No), The process moves to step S1303.

<Steps S1303 and S1304>
If the number X of regular pattern fluctuations pending is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1302: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number X of general pattern fluctuations pending (step S1303), and in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Obtain the counter values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5 that are updated, and the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 that is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main process in FIG. The value is stored in the first vacant holding area among the first to fourth holding areas SE4 of the holding area 412c in the RAM 412 (step S1304), and the through gate process ends.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 308 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the main processing procedure executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main process of this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a small winning game control process (step S14007-1) is executed. Hereinafter, the small winning game control process will be explained, and the processes necessary for understanding this embodiment will also be explained as appropriate.

[Public figure game control process]
Here, FIG. 309 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the common figure game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of FIG. 308. In the common symbol game control process, processing for controlling the fluctuating display and stop display of the common symbols (common symbols) on the common symbol display section 361 as the game operation section of the main display section 36 is executed. Hereinafter, the normal figure game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 309.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 309, in the normal pattern game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (the normal pattern game is being executed) is on. is determined (step S1501). The normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to ON when the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern game) is started in the normal pattern fluctuation start process in step S1507, and the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern game ends). ), it is set to off in step S1512.

The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508 when the flag during normal figure fluctuation display is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the common figure game is being executed. On the other hand, when the flag during normal pattern fluctuation display is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
If the normal figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, if the normal figure game is not being executed, the MPU 41 indicates that the normal electric accessory 372, which is the game operation part of the non-electric actuation device 37, is open. (Step S1502) It is determined whether or not the electric accessory opening flag indicating that the game is in progress (playing a normal figure winning game) is on. The electric accessory opening flag is set to ON in step S1811 when the normal electric accessory 372 is opened in the game control process per ordinary figure (described later) (see FIG. 310), and when the ordinary electric accessory 372 is closed. is set to off in step S1826 (see FIG. 311).

When the electric accessory opening flag is on (step S1502: Yes), that is, when the game per common symbol is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the common symbol game control process. On the other hand, when the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the game per common figure is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
When the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the normal game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on. It is determined whether or not (step S1503). In the jackpot game control process described later, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S2213 when the jackpot game starts (see FIG. 315), and is set to OFF in step S2258 when the jackpot game ends. (See Figure 316).

When the jackpot game flag is on (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the general figure game control process. That is, in this embodiment, the common figure game is not started while the jackpot game is being executed. Of course, the common figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
If the jackpot game flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small win game flag indicating that a small win game is being executed is on. (Step S1504). In the small winning game control process described below, the small winning game flag is set to ON in step S3408 when the small winning game is started (see FIG. 320), and is turned off in step S3440 when the small winning game ends. (See Figure 321).

When the small winning game flag is on (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the general figure game control process. That is, in this embodiment, the common figure game is not started while the small winning game is being executed. Of course, the common figure game may be started while the small winning game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the small winning game flag is off (step S1504: No), that is, when the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
When the small winning game in progress flag is off (step S1504: No), that is, when the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 stores the general pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA set in the general pattern pending storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not the number of regular pattern fluctuations pending stored in 1 is 0 (step S1505). The MPU 41 ends the general pattern game control process when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S1505: Yes), and when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1505: No), the MPU 41 ends the processing. The process moves to step S1506.

<Step S1506 and Step S1507>
If the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1505: No), the MPU 41 executes the general pattern data setting process for the general pattern validity information stored in the general pattern pending storage area 412c (step S1506), The process moves to step S1507. In step S1507, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol fluctuation start process for causing the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 to execute a variable display of the normal symbol based on the information stored in the common symbol holding storage area 412c. , the general figure game control process ends.

<Step S1508>
If the normal figure fluctuation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, if the normal figure game is being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on. It is determined whether or not (step S1508).

When the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1508: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1511. On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S1508: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509.

<Step S1509>
If the jackpot game flag is off (step S1508: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small win game flag indicating that a small win game is being executed is on. (Step S1509).

When the small winning game flag is on (step S1509: Yes), that is, when the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1511. On the other hand, when the small winning game flag is off (step S1509: No), that is, when the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1510.

<Step S1510>
When the small winning game flag is off (step S1509: No), that is, when the jackpot game and the small winning game are not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed since the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display. (Step S1510). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed on the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (end the common symbol game).

When the normal symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1510: Yes), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ends the common symbol game). If there is, the process moves to step S1511. On the other hand, if the normal pattern fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S1510: No), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ends the normal pattern game). ), if it is not the timing to do so, the general figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S1511 to S1513>
If the normal figure fluctuation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), and if the jackpot game flag or small winning game flag is on (Yes in step S1508 or S1509), that is, the jackpot occurs during the normal figure game. When a game or a small winning game is started, or when the regular symbol fluctuation display time of the regular symbol has elapsed (step S1510: Yes), that is, the timing to stop and display the fluctuating regular symbol (end the regular symbol game) If so, the MPU 41 stops and displays the normal symbol on the symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery per common symbol corresponding to the regular symbol game (step S1511). For example, if the result of a lottery that hits a regular symbol is a hit as a game condition, the regular symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol corresponding to the winning symbol, while the result of a lottery that hits a regular symbol is a loss and the game condition is If not established, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol corresponding to the miss.

In addition, the MPU 41 sets to OFF the flag indicating that the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner (while the normal symbol game is being executed) (step S1512). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern variation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed, that is, the normal pattern game has ended (step S1513), and ends the normal pattern game control process.

In addition, the ordinary figure fluctuation stop display flag is used to determine whether or not it is the timing to start the ordinary figure winning game (release the ordinary electric accessory 372) in step S1801 of the ordinary figure winning game control process in FIG. 310, which will be described later. referenced to do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution of the normal pattern game is not limited to the timing to stop displaying the normal pattern (to end the normal pattern game), which is fluctuatingly displayed as the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern has elapsed. If a jackpot game or a small win game is started during the game, the fluctuating normal symbols are stopped and displayed (the common symbol game is ended). That is, when a jackpot game or a small win game is started, the normal pattern game is forcibly terminated before the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern elapses. Of course, even when a jackpot game or a small win game is started, the normal pattern game may be continuously executed until the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern elapses.

[Game control processing per regular map]
Here, FIGS. 310 and 311 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. 308. In the normal figure winning game control process, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 372 of the non-electric actuating device 37 is performed when the result of the common figure winning lottery is a common figure winning as the game condition is satisfied. In addition, in the game control process per common symbol, the operation control of the movable guide section 374, which is the game operation section in the sorting ball entering device 37, is executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 310 and 311, the game control process per normal symbol will be explained.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 310, in the normal pattern winning game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed (that the normal pattern game has ended) is on. (Step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing at which the game per common symbol can be started. In addition, the normal symbol fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1513 when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game control process of FIG. 309.

If the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the timing at which the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1802. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the normal pattern winning game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1816 in FIG. 311.

<Step S1802>
When the normal figure fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, when the timing is such that the normal figure winning game can be started, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game in progress flag or the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed. It is determined whether or not the small winning game flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed is on (step S1802).

When the jackpot game flag or the small win game flag is on (step S1802: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game or the small win game is in progress, the MPU 41 turns off the normal figure fluctuation stop display flag and then (Step S1802), the normal symbol winning game control process is ended. In other words, in the present embodiment, if a regular game is forcibly terminated due to the start of a jackpot game or a small winning game, the result of the regular lottery for the relevant regular game is the regular lottery as the game condition. Even if this is the case, the game won by winning a normal figure is not started. That is, in the present embodiment, the regular winning game is not started while the jackpot game and the small winning game are being executed. Of course, a new common figure game may be started while a jackpot game or a small win game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag and the small win game flag are off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game or the small win game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
When the jackpot game flag and the small win game flag are off (step S1802: No), that is, when the win game and the small win game are not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the long open regular hit flag is set to on. It is determined whether there is one (step S1803). The long open flat map hit flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the lottery per flat map is a long open standard hit, and when the result of the lottery per flat map is a long open standard hit, the fluctuation of the regular map starts. It is set to ON in the process (step S1507 in the normal figure game control process in FIG. 309). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished standard game is a long open standard winning as the game condition. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1807 when the long open general map hit flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), and when the long open general map hit flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), the process moves to step S1804.

<Step S1804>
If the long open double hit flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the lottery to win a short open double for the completed double open game is not a long open double hit, the MPU 41 selects a short open double hit. It is determined whether the hit flag is set on (step S1804). The short open regular map hit flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the lottery per regular map is a short open regular map, and when the result of the lottery per regular map is a short open regular map, the fluctuation of the regular map starts. It is set to ON in the process (step S1507 in the normal figure game control process in FIG. 309). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the finished standard game is a short open standard winning as the game condition. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1805 when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to ON (step S1804: Yes), and when the flag for hitting a short open regular map is set to OFF (step S1804: No), that is, when the result of the winning lottery for the finished regular symbol game is a loss, the corresponding winning regular symbol game control process is ended.

<Steps S1805 to S1807>
When the short open regular map winning flag is set to ON (step S1805: Yes), that is, when the result of the short open regular lottery for the completed regular regular map game is a short open regular lottery, the MPU 41 The value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the normal electric accessory 372 as the game operation part of the non-electric actuator 37 in the per-figure game (the time during which the game ball 99 can flow into the non-electric actuator 37). This is set as the value of the open time counter (step S1805), and the process moves to step S1806. The opening time counter is referred to in step S1822 of FIG. 311 of the normal symbol game control process in order to determine the return timing of the normal electric accessory 372.

In step S1806, the MPU 41 sets a value corresponding to the playing time of the short open normal pattern game as the value of the playing time counter (step S1806). The game time counter is referred to in step S1830 in FIG. 311 of the per-regular symbol game control process in order to determine the end timing of the per-regular symbol game.

Here, the value of the game time counter set in step S1806 is set to the same value or a larger value as the open time counter set in step S1805. In other words, the short open normal figure winning game may be ended when the normal electric accessory 372 returns, or may be ended after a predetermined period of time has passed after the normal electric accessory 372 has returned.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open regular pattern hit flag to OFF (step S1807), and moves the process to step S1811.

<Steps S1808 to S1810>
If the long open regular map hit flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the regular open regular lottery for the completed regular map game is a long open regular match, the MPU 41 The opening time is the value corresponding to 10 seconds, which is the opening time of the normal electric accessory 372 (the time during which the game ball 99 can flow into the non-electric actuating device 37) as the game operating part of the non-electric actuating device 37 in the game per figure. The value is set as a counter value (step S1808). The opening time counter is referred to in step S1822 of FIG. 311 of the normal symbol game control process in order to determine the return timing of the normal electric accessory 372.

Here, the value of the game time counter set in step S1809 is set to a larger value than the open time counter set in step S1808. That is, the long open normal figure winning game ends after a predetermined period of time has passed since the normal electric accessory 372 returns. This is because after the normal electric accessory 372 returns due to the inflow of two game balls 99 into the non-electric actuating device 37, the first non-electric actuating opening 376A and the second non-electric actuating opening 376B as ball entry parts are opened. Since the game ball 99 enters the ball, in the long open regular game, the entry of the game ball 99 into the first non-electric operating port 376A and the second non-electric operating port 376B is detected, and the movable guide as a guiding part This is to enable the switching process of the guidance state of the section 374 to be executed.

In addition, the detection of the entry of the game ball 99 into the first non-electric operating opening 376A and the second non-electric operating opening 376B and the switching process of the guiding state of the movable guiding unit 374 are not necessarily executed in the game control per normal figure. It is not necessary and may be executed as a separate process from the normal figure game control process. In this case, in the game control process per normal figure, detection of the entry of the game ball 99 into the first non-electric operating port 376A and the second non-electric operating port 376B, and switching processing of the guiding state of the movable guiding unit 374 are executed. Since it is not necessary, the value of the game time counter set in step S1809 is set to the same value as the open time counter set in step S1808, and the normal game is terminated by the return of the normal electric accessory 372. Alternatively, when the normal electric accessory 372 returns to end the normal figure winning game, one of the game time counter and the open time counter may be omitted.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open standard hit flag to OFF (step S1810), and moves the process to step S1811.

<Steps S1811 and S1812>
In step S1811, the MPU 41 executes a switching process to operate the normal electric accessory 372. As a result, the non-electrically actuated device 37 switches from a state in which it is impossible for game balls 99 to flow in from the introduction port 371 serving as an inflow region to a state in which it is possible for game balls 99 to flow in from the introduction port 371 as an inflow region. It will be done. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the normal electric accessory operating flag indicating that the ordinary electric accessory 372 is being operated (step S1812), and moves the process to step S1813. The flag in operation of the normal electric accessory is referred to in order to judge whether or not to execute the process of returning the normal electric accessory 372 in step S1816 of FIG. 311 of the game control process per normal symbol.

<Steps S1813 to S1815>
In step S1813, the MPU 41 sets a normal winning game command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that a normal winning game is being executed, and moves the process to step S1814. Note that the normal electric accessory release command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 starts an effect indicating that the normal electric accessory 372 is released, for example, on the symbol display section 341 as a game operation section, based on the ordinary electric accessory release command. can be done.

In step S1814, the MPU 41 sets on the flag indicating that the game based on the normal pattern is being executed, and moves the process to step S1815. The in-game flag per regular symbol is referred to in step S1827 of FIG. 311 of the per-regular symbol game control process to determine whether or not a game per regular symbol is being executed.

In step S1815, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variation stop display flag indicating that the normal symbols are stopped and displayed (that the common symbol game has ended) to OFF, and ends the normal symbol per game control process.

<Step S1816>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), as shown in FIG. 311, the MPU 41 operates the normal electric accessory 372 in step S1812 of FIG. It is determined whether the normal electric accessory in operation flag, which is set to on when the normal electric accessory is in operation, is set to on (step S1816). When the normal electric accessory operating flag is set to ON (step S1816: Yes), that is, when the ordinary electric accessory 372 is operating, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1817. On the other hand, if the normal electric accessory operating flag is set to OFF (step S1816: No) or if the ordinary electric accessory 372 is not operating, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1827.

<Step S1817>
When the normal electric accessory operating flag is set to on (step S1816: Yes), that is, when the ordinary electric accessory 372 is operating, the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has flowed into the non-electrically actuated device 37. It is determined whether or not (step S1817). Whether or not the game ball 99 has entered the non-electrically actuated device 37 is determined based on the output from the ball entry sensor 371a as a detection section.

If the game ball 99 has flowed into the non-electrically actuated device 37 (step S1817: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1818, and if the game ball 99 has not flowed into the non-electrically actuated device 37 (step S1817: No), the process moves to step S1821.

<Steps S1818 to S1820>
When game balls 99 have flowed into the non-electric actuator 37 (step S1817: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the inflow number counter indicating the number of game balls 99 that have flowed into the non-electric actuator 37 (step S1818). ), it is determined whether the value of the inflow number counter after addition is 2 (step S1819). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to return the normal electric accessory 372 as a game operation part before the prescribed time elapses due to the inflow of the two game balls 99 into the non-electric actuation device 37.

If the value of the inflow counter after addition is 2 (step S1819: Yes), that is, if the normal electric accessory 372 is returned before the specified time elapses, the MPU 41 determines the remaining opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 372. The value of the open time counter indicating the value is cleared (step S1820), and the process moves to step S1823. On the other hand, if the game balls 99 have not flowed into the non-electrically actuated device 37 (step S1817: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1821.

<Steps S1821 and S1822>
If the game ball 99 has not flowed into the non-electrically actuated device 37 (step S1817: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the normal electric accessory 372 (step S1821). , it is determined whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1822). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to restore the normal electric accessory 372 as the game operation unit after the specified time has elapsed.

If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1822: Yes), that is, if the normal electric accessory 372 is to be returned after the specified time has elapsed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1823. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1822: No), that is, if the normal electric accessory 372 is not to be returned, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1827.

<Steps S1823 to S1826>
In step S1823, the MPU 41 clears the value of the inflow number counter indicating the number of game balls 99 that have flowed into the non-electric actuation device 37. Furthermore, the MPU 41 returns the normal electric accessory 372 as a game operation unit (step S1824), and sets the normal electric accessory operating flag indicating that the ordinary electric accessory 372 is in operation to OFF (step S1824). S1825). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the normal gaming state transition flag that causes the gaming state to shift from the time-saving gaming state a to the normal gaming state (step S1826), and moves the process to step S1827. The normal gaming state transition flag is referred to in step S3631 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 323, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to shift the gaming state from the time-saving gaming state a to the normal gaming state.

<Step S1827>
In step S1827, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the flag indicating that the game per normal symbol is being executed is set to on. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1828 when the flag is set to be on during the game per common symbol (step S1827: Yes), that is, when the game according to the common symbol is being executed. On the other hand, when the flag during the game per normal symbol is set to OFF (step S1827: No), that is, when the game per common symbol is not being executed, the MPU 41 ends the per-regular symbol game control process.

<Steps S1828 and S1829>
If the flag for playing a game per normal pattern is set to ON (step S1827: Yes), that is, if a game based on a normal pattern is being executed, the MPU 41 calculates the value of the game time counter indicating the remaining time of the game per normal pattern. is subtracted by 1 (step S1828), and it is determined whether the value of the gaming time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1829). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the game per common symbol.

When the value of the game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1829: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the game per common symbol, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1830. On the other hand, when the value of the game time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1829: No), that is, when continuing the game per common map without ending, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1832.

<Steps S1830 and S1831>
If the value of the game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1829: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the game per normal pattern, the MPU 41 sets a command to end the game per normal pattern (step S1830), The process moves to step S2831. The common figure game end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 provides an effect to be executed in response to the execution of the game per normal pattern on the symbol display section 341 as a game operation section based on the normal pattern winning game end command. can be terminated.

In step S2831, the MPU 41 sets the flag indicating that the game per normal pattern is being executed to OFF the flag during the game per normal pattern (step S1831), and ends the game control process for the normal pattern.

<Steps S1832 and S1833>
If the value of the game time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1829: No), that is, if the game is continued without ending, the MPU 41 controls the first It is determined whether the game ball 99 has entered the electric actuation opening 376A (step S1832). Whether or not the game ball 99 has entered the first non-electric operating opening 376A is determined based on the output from the ball entry sensor 376Aa as a detection section.

When the game ball 99 enters the first non-electric actuation opening 376A (step S1832: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the movable guiding part 374 as a guiding part from directly above the second opening 377B to the first opening 377A. By sliding the ball directly upward and to the left, the game ball 99 can enter the first non-electric operating opening 376A, but it cannot enter the second non-electric operating opening 376B (see FIG. 301). (A)) to a second guiding state (see FIG. 301(B) ) is executed (step S1833), and the per-regular symbol game control process is ended.

On the other hand, if the game ball 99 has not entered the first non-electric operating opening 376A (step S1832: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1834.

<Steps S1834 and S1835>
If the game ball 99 has not entered the first non-electric operating port 376A (step S1832: No), the MPU 41 causes the game ball 99 to enter the second non-electric operating port 376B as the ball entry portion of the non-electric operating device 37. It is determined whether the ball has entered the ball (step S1834). Whether or not the game ball 99 has entered the second non-electric operating opening 376B is determined based on the output from the ball entry sensor 376Ba as a detection section.

When the game ball 99 enters the second non-electric operating opening 376B (step S1834: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the movable guiding part 374 as a guiding part from directly above the first opening 377B to the second opening 377B. By sliding the ball directly upwards and to the right, a second guidance state is created in which the game ball 99 cannot enter the first non-electric operating opening 376A but can enter the second non-electric operating opening 376B (FIG. 301). 301 (B)), the game ball 99 can enter the first non-electric operating port 376A, and the game ball 99 cannot enter the second non-electric operating port 376B (see FIG. 301(A)). ) is executed (step S1835), and the normal game control process ends.

On the other hand, when the game ball 99 has not entered the second non-electric operating opening 376B (step S1842: No), the MPU 41 ends the game control process per common symbol.

With such a normal figure winning game control process, it is possible to cause two game balls 99 to flow into the non-electrically actuated device 37 in the normal figure winning game that is started in the time saving game state a, and the non-electrically actuated device Of the two game balls 99 that flowed into the 37, the game ball 99 that flowed in first enters the first non-electric operating port 376A, and the game ball 99 that flowed later enters the second non-electric operating port 376B. You can let the ball enter the field. As a result, in the normal game, the first non-motorized accessory 39A is placed above the first non-motorized accessory 39A in the vertical direction when viewed from the front of the game board 31 and on the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99. It becomes possible to operate the second non-electric accessory 39B first, and then operate the second non-electric accessory 39B. This makes it possible to first open the second winning hole 315A and then open the second winning hole 315B, taking the win game as an opportunity. Therefore, as described above, when a normal figure hit occurs as a game condition in the time-saving game state a, the player performs a simple firing operation of continuously shooting the game ball 99 toward the normal electric accessory 372. By doing so, the benefit in the case where a normal figure hit occurs in the time-saving gaming state, that is, the execution of the jackpot lottery process by entering the game ball 99 into the second prize openings 315A and 315B in the shortest possible time (for example, the shortest time) In addition, the player can enjoy the benefit of acquiring a large amount of game balls 99, and can improve the interest of the game without complicating the gameplay.

[Special figure game control processing]
Here, FIG. 312 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. 308. In the special figure game control process, the storage contents of the special figure holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is controlled, for example, the The variable display and stop display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 is controlled. Hereinafter, the special figure game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 312.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 312, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game flag indicating that a jackpot game (special figure jackpot game, V prize jackpot game) is being executed is on. In the jackpot game control process described later, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S2213 when the jackpot game starts (see FIG. 315), and is set to OFF in step S2258 when the jackpot game ends. (See Figure 316).

When the jackpot game flag is on (step S1901: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game control process. That is, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special figure game may be started while the jackpot game is being executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the jackpot game flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small win game flag indicating that a small win game is being executed is on. (Step S1902). In the small winning game control process described below, the small winning game flag is set to ON in step S3408 when the small winning game is started (see FIG. 320), and is turned off in step S3440 when the small winning game ends. (See Figure 321).

When the small winning game flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game control process. That is, in this embodiment, when the small winning game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special figure game may be started while the small winning game is being executed. On the other hand, when the small winning game flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the jackpot game flag and the small win game flag are off (No in both steps S1901 and S1902), that is, when neither the jackpot game nor the small win game is being executed, the MPU 41 controls the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is determined whether the flag indicating that the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner (during execution of the first special figure game or the second special figure game) is on (step S1903). The special symbol variation display flag is set to on in step S2107 or S2115 when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 314, which will be described later. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the game control process, it is set to off in step S1911.

When the special symbol fluctuation display flag is on (step S1903: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 causes the process to step. The process moves to S1907. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation display flag is off (step S1903: No), that is, when neither the jackpot game nor the small win game is being executed, the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a variable manner. If not (the special figure game is being executed), the process moves to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
When the special symbol variation display flag is off (step S1903: No), that is, when the jackpot game and the small prize game are not being executed, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (execution of the special symbol game). ), the MPU 41 stores the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b and the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB. It is determined whether both of the second special figure reservation numbers M are 0 (step S1904).

When both the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M are 0 (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 suspends the right to execute the first special figure game and the second special figure reservation. If there is no reservation of the right to play the game, the special figure game control process is ended. On the other hand, if either the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1904: No), the MPU 41 suspends the right to execute the first special figure game; If at least one of the rights to execute the second special figure game is reserved, the process moves to step S1905.

<Step S1905>
If either the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1904: No), that is, the right to execute the first special figure game is reserved, and the second special figure game is held. If there is at least one of the reservations of the right to execute the ( Step S1905), the process moves to step S1906. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 313.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 as a game operation section or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 as a game operation section. (Executing the first special figure game or the second special figure game) special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, and the special figure game control process is ended. The details of the special figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 314.

<Step S1907>
When the special symbol fluctuation display flag is on (step S1903: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed (the special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 controls the game operation unit From the start of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol game, the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the game operation section set in step S2103 or S2111 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 2. It is determined whether or not to end the special symbol variation as the special symbol variation display time for the special symbol passes (step S1907). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the special symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner in the game operation section and end the special symbol game.

If the special symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1907: Yes), that is, the timing to stop displaying the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game. If so, the process moves to step S1908. On the other hand, if the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1907: No), the MPU 41 stops and displays the special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is not the timing to end the figure game, the special figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S1908 to S1911>
When the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1907: Yes), that is, at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner and ending the special symbol game. In some cases, the MPU 41 displays a special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 as a game operation section of the main display section 36 in a manner corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game. The symbols are stopped and displayed (step S1908). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1909), and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. A special figure fluctuation stop command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the change has been made (step S1910).

The special figure fluctuation stop command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 stops, for example, the decorative symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display section 341 as a game operation section, based on the special symbol fluctuation stop command, in a symbol combination that corresponds to the result of the jackpot lottery. The display effect can be executed (see FIG. 295(C) and FIG. 295(D)).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets off the special symbol variation display flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being varied (the special symbol game is being executed) (step S1911), and End the game control process.

[Special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 of the special symbol game control process of FIG. 312. In the special figure data setting process, the storage contents of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special figure data setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 313.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 313, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is 0 or not. The MPU 41 determines that when the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), that is, when there is no reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game and there is a reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game. , the process moves to step S2002. On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), that is, if the right to execute the second special figure game is reserved, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2006. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number M, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the second special figure game, is 0, so that the MPU 41 is able to The second special figure game is started with priority.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special pattern game is started with priority over the first special pattern game, but the first special pattern game is started with priority over the second special pattern game. Also, the special figure game is started in the order in which the game balls 99 enter the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315A, 315B (order of reservation), and the first special figure game and the second special figure game are started. Either one may be executed. In addition, the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other without setting a priority order for starting the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, and the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are executed independently of each other. The second special figure game may be executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation of special figures).

<Steps S2002 to S2005>
When the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 stores the first special figure reservation stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. The number N is subtracted by 1 (step S2002). For example, when the first special figure reservation number N before subtraction is 4, the first special figure reservation number N after subtraction is set to three.

Then, the special figure validity information is moved from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA to the special figure execution area AE (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol validity information of the second to fourth reservation areas REA2 to REA4 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in step S2004, the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REA2 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2. It is moved to the reservation area REA2, and the special symbol validity information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the first special symbol game start flag for starting the first special symbol game in the game operation section (step S2005), and moves the process to step S2010.

<Steps S2006 to S2009>
If the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 stores the second special figure reservation number stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. M is subtracted by 1 (step S2006), and the special symbol validity information is moved from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2007). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to third reservation area REB3 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB one by one (step S2008). Specifically, in step S2007, the special symbol validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, and the special symbol validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second winning hole 315A is opened, this second winning hole 315A is closed when two game balls 99 enter, and when the second winning hole 315B is opened. Since this second prize opening 315B is closed when two game balls 99 enter, the maximum value of the second special figure reservation number M is three. Therefore, in this embodiment, three holding areas REB1 to 3 are set in the second special figure holding storage area REB.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the second special symbol game start flag for starting the second special symbol game in the game operation section (step S2009), and moves the process to step S2010.

<Steps S2010 and S2011>
In step S2010, the MPU 41 controls the first holding area REA1 to fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA, or the first holding area REB1 to third holding area REB3 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB. A special figure shift command indicating that the special figure validity information has been shifted is set in the RAM 412, and a reservation number indicating the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M after the special figure validity information has been shifted is further set. A command is set (step S2011), and the special figure data setting process is ended. The special figure shift command and the reservation number command are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 makes it possible to respond to the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold displayed on the symbol display section 341 as the game operation section based on the special figure shift command and the hold number command. You can change the number of pending displays, etc.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1906 of the special symbol game control process of FIG. 312. In the special symbol variation start process, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started by starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363. A game (special figure game) is started, and various processes accompanying the start of the special figure game are executed. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to FIG. 314.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 314, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol game start flag indicating that the first special symbol game is started is set to ON. The first special figure game start flag is set to start the first special figure game in step S2005 of the special figure data setting process in FIG. is set to on when

If the first special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2102, and if the first special figure game start flag is not set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2102. S2101: No), the process moves to step S2109.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
If the first special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the validity information stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure holding storage area 412b (step S2102), The variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 as a game operation section of the main display section 36 is set as a special symbol variation pattern, and the stop type of the first special symbol is set (step S2103 ), the process moves to step S2104.

<Steps S2104 to S2106>
In step S2104, the MPU 41 sends a special pattern fluctuation pattern command that includes the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the first special pattern game, which is the result of the judgment in step S2102, and the special pattern fluctuation pattern set in step S2103. is set in the RAM 412. In addition, the MPU 41 sets a stop type command that specifies the stop type of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 set in step S2103 (step S2105), and further, the MPU 41 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display section 362 (step S2106), and the process proceeds to step S2107.

Note that the stop type command does not necessarily need to be set separately from the special symbol variation pattern command, and the special symbol variation pattern command may be set as a command that can specify the stop type of the first special symbol.

<Steps S2107 and S2108>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets on the special symbol variable display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the first special symbol game start flag for starting the first special symbol game to OFF (step S2108), and ends the special symbol fluctuation start process.

In addition, the special symbol fluctuation display flag is set in step S1903 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. It is referenced to determine whether or not the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol game is being executed).

<Step S2109>
If the first special figure game start flag is not set to ON (step S2101: No), the MPU 41 determines that the second special figure game start flag indicating that the second special figure game is started is set to ON. It is determined whether or not there is one (step S2109). The second special figure game start flag is set in step S2009 of the special figure data setting process in FIG. 313 to start the second special figure game after the shift of the validity information to the special figure execution area AE of the special figure holding storage area 412b is completed. is set to on when

If the second special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2110, and if the second special figure game start flag is set to OFF (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2110. S2109: No), the variation start process ends.

<Steps S2110 and S2111>
If the second special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the validity information stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure holding storage area 412b (step S2110), The variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 as a game operation section of the main display section 36 is set as a special symbol variation pattern, and the stop type of the second special symbol is set (step S2111 ), the process moves to step S2112.

<Steps S2112 to S2114>
In step S2112, the MPU 41 sends a special figure fluctuation pattern command that includes the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game, which is the result of the judgment in step S2110, and the special figure fluctuation pattern set in step S2111. is set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a stop type command that specifies the stop type of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 set in step S2111. Furthermore, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 as a game operation section of the main display section 36 (step S2114), and moves the process to step S2115.

Note that the stop type command does not necessarily need to be set separately from the special symbol variation pattern command, and the special symbol variation pattern command may be set as a command that can specify the stop type of the second special symbol.

<Steps S2115 and S2116>
In step S2115, the MPU 41 sets on the special symbol variable display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being executed). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the second special symbol game start flag for starting the second special symbol game to OFF (step S2116), and ends the fluctuation start process.

In addition, the special symbol fluctuation display flag is set in step S1903 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. It is referenced to determine whether or not the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol game is being executed).

[Jackpot game control processing]
Here, FIGS. 315 to 319 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 in the main process of FIG. 308. In the jackpot game control process, processing for controlling the progress of the jackpot game, such as controlling the gaming operation of the opening/closing door 382A as a gaming operation section of the variable winning device 38A for jackpot games in the variable winning device 38 (see FIG. 298), is executed. Ru. Hereinafter, the jackpot game control process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 315 to 319.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 315, in step S2201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is on. The jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S2213 of the jackpot game control process when starting a jackpot game (special figure jackpot game or V prize jackpot game), and is set to ON in step S2213 of the jackpot game control process when ending the jackpot game. is set to off in step S2259 of FIG.

When the jackpot game flag is on (step S2201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2218 in FIG. 316. On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is off (step S2201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2202.

<Step S2202>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S2201: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed is on or not. to judge. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the jackpot game by determining whether or not the special figure game that was started when the jackpot game is not being executed has ended.

If the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the jackpot game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2203. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation stop flag is off (step S2202: No), that is, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2206.

<Step S2203>
When the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed satisfies the game condition. Judge whether it is a jackpot or not. Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot is determined based on the result of the jackpot lottery stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol holding storage area 412b set in the RAM 41, for example. Judgment is made based on the special map validity information.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is a jackpot and the game conditions are satisfied (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2204-1. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is not a jackpot (step S2203: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss and the game conditions are not satisfied, the MPU 41 selects the jackpot game. Control processing ends.

<Steps S2204-1 to S2204-3>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot type in the jackpot lottery is a 10R jackpot (step S2203: Yes). S2204-1).

If the jackpot type in the jackpot lottery is a 10R jackpot (step S2204-1: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 10R special map jackpot flag on (step S2204-2), and moves the process to step S2205. The 10R special figure jackpot flag indicates that the 10R special figure jackpot game will be executed based on the result of the special figure jackpot lottery being a 10R jackpot, and after the end of the said jackpot game, the state will be shifted to the time-saving game state a. It is referred to in step S2256-2 of FIG. 319 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether to set the a time-saving game state transition flag to ON.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type in the jackpot lottery is not the 10R jackpot (step S2201: No), the MPU 41 sets the 4R special map jackpot flag to ON (step S2204-3), and moves the process to step S2205. The 4R special figure jackpot flag indicates that a 4R special figure jackpot game will be executed based on the result of the special figure jackpot lottery being a 4R jackpot, and the 4R special figure jackpot flag indicates that a 4R special figure jackpot game will be executed based on the result of the special figure jackpot lottery. In order to determine whether to set the gaming state transition flag on, reference is made to step S2256-5 in FIG. 319 of the jackpot gaming control process.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 41 instructs the start of the special drawing jackpot game (10R special drawing jackpot game or 4R special drawing jackpot game) and the type of jackpot game (the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode (4R or 10R)). A special figure jackpot game start command to be notified to the lamp control device 5 is set, and the process moves to step S2212. The special figure jackpot game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 controls the jackpot game production (for example, whether or not to enter RUSH) according to the jackpot game type in the symbol display section 341 as a game operation section based on the special figure jackpot game start command. performance) can be performed.

<Steps S2206 and S2207>
When the special symbol variation stop flag is off (step S2202: No), that is, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 41 sets the small winning game end flag 1, which indicates that the small winning game ends, to on. It is determined whether or not (step S2206). The small winning game end flag 1 is a flag indicating that the small winning game ending flag 1 ends, and is set to ON when the small winning game ends in step S3439 of FIG. 321 of the small winning game control process described later. Ru. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing at which it is possible to start the V winning jackpot game due to the end of the small winning game.

When the small winning game end flag 1 is set to ON (step S2206: Yes), that is, when the small winning game ends and the timing is such that it is possible to start the V winning jackpot game, the MPU 41 starts the small winning game. The end flag 1 is set to OFF (step S2207), and the process moves to step S2208. On the other hand, when the small winning game end flag 1 is set to OFF (step S2206: No), that is, when it is not possible to start the V prize jackpot game, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process. .

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
In step S2208, the MPU 41 determines whether the V winning flag indicating that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 383B (see FIG. 299) of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games in the small winning game is set to ON. Decide whether or not. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to start the V winning jackpot game. When the V winning flag is set to ON (step S2208: Yes), that is, when the game ball 99 enters the V winning hole 383B in the small winning game, the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to OFF (step S2208: Yes). S2209), the process moves to step S2210. On the other hand, when the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S2208: No), that is, when the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning hole 383B (see FIG. 299) in the small winning game, the MPU 41 The jackpot game control process ends.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 41 sets on the V winning jackpot flag indicating that the V winning jackpot game is being executed (step S2210). The V winning jackpot flag indicates that a V winning jackpot game will be executed based on a V winning game in a small winning game, and after the end of the V winning jackpot game, the gaming state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to the normal gaming state. In order to determine whether or not to set the normal game state transition flag on, reference is made to step S2256-7 in FIG. 319 of the jackpot game control process.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a special figure jackpot game start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of starting the V winning jackpot game and the type of jackpot game (10 RV winning jackpot game) (step S2211), and starts the process. The process moves to step S2212. The V winning jackpot game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can execute the V winning jackpot game effect on the symbol display section 341 as the game operation section based on the V winning jackpot game start command.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
In step S2212, the MPU 41 turns on a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is to be started. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed (step S2213), and moves the process to step S2214.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
In step S2214, the MPU 41 sets a round number counter indicating the remaining number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game will start (step S2215), and moves the process to step S2216. The opening start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the opening performance in the symbol display section 341 as the game operation section, etc., based on the opening start command.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time, and moves the process to step S2210. The opening time counter is referred to in step S2220 in FIG. 317 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the opening.

<Step S2217>
In step S2217, the MPU 41 sets on the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S2218 in FIG. 316 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether or not the opening is in progress.

<Step S2218>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S2201: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is in progress, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S2218).

If the opening flag is on (step S2218: Yes), that is, if the opening is in progress, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2219 in FIG. 317. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S2218: No), that is, if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S2229.

<Steps S2219 and S2220>
If the opening flag is on (step S2218: Yes), that is, if the opening is being executed, as shown in FIG. 317, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening ( Step S2219), it is determined whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (Step S2220). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the opening.

If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2220: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2221. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2220: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2221 and S2222>
If the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2220: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game will end. An opening end command is set (step S2221). The opening end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the opening performance being executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like as a game operation section based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress to OFF (step S2222), and moves the process to step S2223.

<Step S2223>
In step S2223, the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing execution mode start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game is executed a plurality of times (4 or 10 times) is started, and processes The process moves to step S2224. The opening/closing execution mode start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start the opening/closing execution mode effect executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like as the game operation section based on the opening/closing execution mode start command.

<Step S2224>
In step S2224, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that a round game is to be started, and moves the process to step S2225. The round game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start a round game presentation corresponding to each round game, including display of the number of rounds, etc. in the symbol display section 341 as a game operation section, based on the round game start command. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the round game performance is executed individually in each round game of the special figure jackpot game, but the round game performance is a series of one performance in the opening/closing execution mode, and the corresponding round game performance is executed in each round game. The number of rounds of a round game may be displayed. In this case, it is not necessary to perform an interval performance between round games, or a performance that displays the number of rounds of a round game to be executed next time may be performed as an interval performance.

<Steps S2225 and S2226>
In step S2225, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round number counter indicating the remaining number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, the MPU 41 opens the opening 381A as a ball entrance part by executing a switching process to operate the opening/closing door 382A as a game operating part of the variable winning device 38A for jackpot games in the variable winning device 38 (step S2226 ) (see FIG. 298(B)), the process moves to step S2227. This step S2226 allows the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning hole 383A as the ball entry portion.

<Steps S2227 and S2228>
In step S2227, the MPU 41 sets on the round game in progress flag indicating that the round game is being executed. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a round game time counter indicating the remaining time of the round game (step S2228), and ends the jackpot game control process. The round game time counter ends the round game when the specified time has elapsed (by executing a switching process that operates the opening/closing door 382A as the game operation part of the variable prize winning device 38A for jackpot games, the round game is finished as a variable prize winning part as a ball entering part). Step S2231 in FIG. 318 of the jackpot game control process is referred to in order to determine whether it is the timing to allow the game ball 99 to enter the mouth 383A.

<Step S2229>
Returning to FIG. 316, if the opening flag is off (step S2218: No), that is, if the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the round game flag indicating that the round game is being executed to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S2229). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a round game is being executed.

If the round game in progress flag is on (step S2229: Yes), that is, if the round game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2230 in FIG. 318. On the other hand, when the round game flag is off (step S2229: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2243.

<Steps S2230 and S2231>
When the round game in progress flag is on (step S2229: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, as shown in FIG. Subtract 1 (step S2230). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2231). That is, the MPU 41 ends the round game after the specified time has elapsed (by executing a switching process that returns the opening/closing door 382A as the game operation part of the variable winning device 38A for jackpot games, the variable winning opening as the ball entry part). It is determined whether or not it is the timing to disable the game ball 99 from entering the ball 383A.

If the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2231: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the round game (return the opening/closing door 382A) after the specified time has elapsed, the MPU 41 executes the process. The process moves to step S2235. On the other hand, if the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2231: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the round game (return the opening/closing door 382A) due to the elapse of the specified time, the MPU 41 executes the process. The process moves to step S2232.

<Step S2232>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the round game (return the opening/closing door 382A) due to the elapse of the specified time, the MPU 41 controls the variable winning slot 383A. It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has entered the target (step S2232). Whether or not the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning hole 383A can be determined by checking whether the game ball 99 has entered the ball entering sensor 383Aa as a detection unit in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The determination is made based on winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 when a ball is detected.

If the game ball 99 enters the variable winning hole 383A (step S2232: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2233, and if the game ball 99 does not enter the variable winning hole 383A (step S2232: Yes). S2232: No), the jackpot game control process is ended.

<Steps S2233 and S2234>
When the game ball 99 enters the variable winning hole 383A (step S2232: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the number of balls entering the ball counter indicating the number of game balls 99 entering the variable winning hole 383A in the round game. Add 1 to the value (step S2233). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ball entering number counter after addition reaches 10 (step S2234), that is, ends the round game by entering the upper limit number of game balls 99 into the variable winning hole 383A ( It is determined whether or not it is the timing to return the opening/closing door 382A.

When the value of the number of balls entered after addition has reached 10 (step S2234: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the round game by entering the upper limit number of game balls 99 into the variable winning hole 383A (opening/closing). If it is the timing to return the door 382A, the process moves to step S2235. On the other hand, if the value of the ball entering number counter after addition has not reached 10 (step S2234: No), that is, if it is not the timing to return the opening/closing door 382A, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2235>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2231: Yes), or if the value of the number of balls entered counter reaches 10 (step S2231: Yes), the MPU 41 opens and closes as a game operation unit. By executing the switching process of returning the door 382A, the opening 381A is closed to make it impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the variable prize opening 383A as a ball entry part (step S2235), and the process returns to step S2236. Transition. That is, when it is time to end the round game due to the passage of a specified time or the entry of the upper limit number of game balls 99 into the variable prize opening 383A, the MPU 41 closes the opening 381A with the opening/closing door 382A and enters the variable winning hole 383A. The round game is ended by disabling the game ball 99 from entering the winning hole 383A.

<Steps S2236 to S2238>
In step S2236, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the round game ends. The round game end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the round game performance executed in the symbol display section 341 as a game operation section based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears an entry number counter indicating the number of game balls 99 entering the variable winning hole 383A in the round game (step S2237), and also clears the entry number counter indicating that the round game is being executed. The medium flag is set to OFF (step S2238), and the process moves to step S2239.

<Step S2239>
In step S2239, the MPU 41 determines whether the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 0, that is, whether it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode (there is an unexecuted round game). Decide whether or not.

If the round number counter is 0 (step S2239: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2248. On the other hand, if the round number counter is not 0 (step S2239: No), that is, if there is an unplayed round game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2240.

<Step S2240>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S2239: No), that is, if there is an unplayed round game, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start an interval between round games. (step S2240), and the process moves to step S2241. The interval start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an interval effect in the symbol display section 341 or the like as a game operation section based on the interval start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the interval performance is executed in the interval between round games in the jackpot game, but the interval performance is omitted and the round game performance for the previously executed round game is continuously executed in the interval. Alternatively, a round game effect may be executed for the next round game to be executed.

<Steps S2241 and S2242>
In step S2241, the MPU 41 sets on an interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval time counter indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S2242), and ends the jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is referred to in step S2245 in FIG. 319 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the interval (start the round game).

<Step S2243>
Returning to FIG. 316, when the round game flag is off (step S2229: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. It is determined whether it is on (step S2243). The during interval flag is set to ON in step S2241 of FIG. 318 in the jackpot game control process when starting an interval, and is turned off in step S2247 of FIG. 319 in the jackpot game control process when ending the interval. Set.

If the during-interval flag is on (step S2243: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2244 in FIG. 319. On the other hand, if the during-interval flag is off (step S2243: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2252.

<Steps S2244 and S2245>
If the during interval flag is on (step S2243: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, as shown in FIG. Subtract (step S2244). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2245), that is, whether or not it is the timing to end the interval (start the round game).

If the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2245: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2246. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2245: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the interval (start the round game), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2246 and S2247>
If the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2245: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 sends an audio signal to the lamp control device 5 to notify that the interval has ended. An interval end command to be notified is set (step S2246). The interval end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the interval performance executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like as a game operation section based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the during-interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed (step S2247), and shifts the process to step S2224 in FIG. 317 described above. In this way, by moving the process to step S2224 in FIG. 317 described above, the processes of steps S2224 to S2228 regarding the start of the round game are executed, and the jackpot game control process is ended.

<Step S2248>
Returning to FIG. 318, when the round number counter is 0 (step S2239: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 uses the voice lamp control device to notify the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. 5 is set (step S2248), and the process proceeds to step S2249. The opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the round game performance (opening/closing execution mode performance) executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like as a game operation section based on the opening/closing execution mode end command.

<Step S2249>
In step S2249, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start the ending of the jackpot game, and moves the process to step S2250. The ending start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an ending performance in the symbol display section 341 as a game operation section based on the ending start command.

<Steps S2250 and S2251>
In step S2250, the MPU 41 sets on an ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending time counter indicating the remaining ending time (step S2251), and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referred to in step S2254 in FIG. 319 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game).

<Step S2252>
Returning to FIG. 316, if the interval flag is off (step S2243: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, whether the ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed is on or not. is determined (step S2252).

If the ending flag is on (step S2252: Yes), that is, if the ending is in progress, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2253 in FIG. 319. On the other hand, if the ending flag is off (step S2252: No), that is, if the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2257.

<Steps S2253 and S2254>
When the ending flag is on (step S2252: Yes), that is, when the ending is being executed, as shown in FIG. 319, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter indicating the remaining ending time ( Step S2253), it is determined whether the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (Step S2254). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the ending (big hit game).

When the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2254: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2255. On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2254: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the ending (big hit game), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2255>
When the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2254: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 uses a voice lamp control device to notify ending the ending of the jackpot game. 5 is set (step S2255), and the process moves to step S2256-1. The ending end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the ending effect executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like as a game operation section based on the ending end command.

<Step S2256-1>
In step S2256-1, the MPU 41 sets off the ending-in-progress flag indicating that the ending is being executed, and moves the process to step S2256-2.

<Step S2256-2>
In step S2256-2, the MPU 41 determines whether the 10R special map jackpot flag is set on. The 10R special figure jackpot flag indicates that the 10R special figure jackpot game will be executed based on the fact that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a 10R jackpot, and the 10R special figure jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a 10R jackpot. When a 10R special figure jackpot game is executed based on this, it is set to ON in step S2204-2 of FIG. 315 of the jackpot game control process.

If the 10R special chart jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2256-2: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2256-3, and if the 10R special chart jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2256-2: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2256-3. S2256-2: No), the process moves to step S2256-5.

<Steps S2256-3 and S2256-4>
If the 10R special map jackpot flag is set on (step S2256-2: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the a time-saving game state transition flag that shifts the gaming state from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state a. (Step S2256-3). The time-saving gaming state transition flag a is referenced when the gaming state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to the time-saving gaming state a after the end of the jackpot game in step S3611 of FIG. 322 of the gaming state transition process. Then, the MPU 41 sets the 10R special map jackpot flag to OFF (step S2256-4), and ends the jackpot game restriction process.

<Steps S2256-5 and S2256-6>
If the 10R special chart jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2256-2: No), it is determined whether the 4R special chart jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2256-5). The 4R special figure jackpot flag indicates that the 4R special figure jackpot game will be executed based on the fact that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a 4R jackpot, and the 4R special figure jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a 4R jackpot. When the 4R special figure jackpot game is executed based on this, it is set to ON in step S2204-3 of FIG. 315 of the jackpot game control process.

If the 4R special chart jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2256-5: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 4R special chart jackpot flag to OFF (step S2256-6), and moves the process to step S2256-9. do. On the other hand, when the 4R special map jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2256-5: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2256-7.

<Steps S2256-7 and S2256-8>
If the 10R special chart jackpot flag is set to off (step S2256-2: No) and if the 4R special chart jackpot flag is set to off (step S2256-5: No), that is, the jackpot game is If it is not a figure jackpot game, it is determined whether the V winning jackpot flag is set on (step S2256-7). The V winning jackpot flag indicates that the V winning jackpot game is executed based on the V winning prize in the small winning game, and when the V winning jackpot game is started, step S2210 in FIG. 315 of the jackpot game control process is executed. is set to on.

<Step S2256-9>
When the 4R special map jackpot flag that had been set to on was set to off (step S2256-6), and the V prize jackpot flag that had been set to on was set to off (step S2256-8), the MPU 41 , the normal gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the normal gaming state is set on (step S2256-9), and the jackpot gaming restriction processing is ended. The normal game state transition flag is referred to in step S3614 in FIG. 322 of the game state transition process when the game state is transitioned from the jackpot game state to the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game.

<Step S2257>
Returning to FIG. 316, if the ending flag is off (step S2252: No), that is, if the game is not in the opening, round game, interval, or ending, the MPU 41 will sound that the jackpot game ends. A jackpot game end command to be notified to the lamp control device 5 is set (step S2257), and the process moves to step S2258. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 308) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the jackpot game performance executed in the symbol display section 341 as the game operation section based on the jackpot game end command.

<Steps S2258 and S2259>
In step S2258, a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set on. The jackpot game end flag is used in the step of the game state transition process in FIG. Referenced in S3608.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed to OFF (step S2259), and ends the jackpot game control process.

[Small winning game control process]
Here, FIGS. 320 and 321 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407-1 in the main process of FIG. 308. In the small winning game control process of this embodiment, it is based on the fact that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315A or the second winning hole 315B is a small winning. In the small winning game executed in the small winning game, the control of the gaming operation of the opening/closing door 382B as the gaming operation part of the variable winning device 38B for the small winning game in the variable winning device 38 (see FIGS. 298 and 299), etc. Processing that controls progress is executed.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 320, in the small winning game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first sets the special symbol fluctuation stop flag to ON, which indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is determined whether there is one (step S3401). That is, the MPU 41 determines the timing at which the small winning game can be started when the special figure game (first special figure game, second special figure game) is ended by the stop display of the first special figure or the second special figure. Decide whether it has happened or not. The special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when the first special figure or the second special figure is stopped and displayed in step S1909 in the special figure game control process of FIG. 312.

If the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, if it is the timing when the small winning game can be started due to the end of the special figure game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3402. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3401: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3409.

<Step S3402>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, when the small winning game can be started due to the end of the special figure game, the MPU 41 controls the jackpot lottery for the special figure game. It is determined whether the result is a small win as the gaming conditions are met (step S3402). Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win is determined based on the validity information read from the special pattern execution area AE of the special pattern holding storage area 412b in step S2102 or S2110 in the special pattern fluctuation start process in FIG. 314. be done.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a small win (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3403. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small win (step S3402: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the MPU 41 ends the small win game control process.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a small win (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the small win game start flag indicating that the small win game is started (step S3403). Then, the MPU 41 sets a small winning game start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the small winning game is started (step S3404), and moves the process to step S3405.

The small winning game start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the audio lamp control device 5, by receiving the small winning game start command, it is possible to execute a small winning game performance executed in the symbol display section 341 as a game operation section.

<Steps S3405 to S3408>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 sets on the small winning opening flag indicating that the opening of the small winning game is being executed. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a small winning opening time counter that indicates the remaining time of the small winning opening (step S3406). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a small winning opening start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the opening of the small winning game is started (step S3407).

The small winning opening start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the audio lamp control device 5, by receiving the small winning opening start command, the opening performance in the small winning game executed in the symbol display section 341 as a game operation section, for example, the right A display effect (see FIG. 296(A)) that encourages hitting can be started.

Then, the MPU 41 sets on the small winning game flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed (step S3408), and ends the small winning game control process. The small winning game flag is referred to in the control processing of these games in order to determine whether it is the timing to start the normal pattern game, the normal pattern winning game, or the special pattern game (in Fig. 309). (See step S1504, step S1802 in FIG. 310, and step S1902 in FIG. 312).

<Step S3409>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3401: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the small winning game, the MPU 41 generates a small winning that indicates that the opening of the small winning game is being executed. It is determined whether the opening flag is set on (step S3409).

When the small winning opening flag is set to ON (step S3409: Yes), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3410. On the other hand, if the small winning opening flag is set to OFF (step S3409: No), that is, if the opening of the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3420 in FIG. 321.

<Steps S3410 to S3413>
When the small winning opening flag is set to ON (step S3409: Yes), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 sets the small winning opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the small winning opening. 1 is subtracted from the value (step S3410), and it is determined whether the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3411). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the opening and start operating the opening/closing door 832B of the variable winning device 38B for the small winning game in the small winning game.

If the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3411: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to end the opening and start operating the opening/closing door 832B of the variable winning device 38B in the small winning game, The small win opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed is set to OFF (step S3412), and the small win opening end command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the small win opening ends (step S3412). Step S3413), the process moves to step S3414.

The small winning opening end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the audio lamp control device 5, by receiving the small winning opening end command, it is possible to end the opening performance in the small winning game executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like as the game operation section.

On the other hand, if the small winning opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3411: No), the MPU 41 ends the opening in the small winning game and starts operating the opening/closing door 832B of the variable winning device 38B for the small winning game. If it is not the timing to do so, the small winning game control process is ended.

<Steps S3414 to 3416>
In step S3414, the opening/closing door 832B as a game operating section of the variable prize winning device 38B for small winning games is operated by switching processing, and the processing moves to step S3415. In this way, when the opening/closing door 832B of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games starts operating in the small winning game, the opening 381B of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games is opened, and the V winning opening 383B or The game ball 99 can enter the non-V winning hole 384B.

Then, the MPU 41 sets on the opening/closing door operation flag indicating that the opening/closing door 832B of the variable prize winning device 38B for small winning games is being operated (step S3415), and further indicates that the operation of the opening/closing door 832B is started. An opening/closing door operation start command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 (step S3416), and the process moves to step S3417.

The opening/closing door operation start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. By receiving the opening/closing door operation start command, the audio lamp control device 5 can continue to display a display effect (see FIG. 296(A)) urging the player to hit right on the symbol display section 341 serving as the game operation section. Can be done.

<Step S3417>
In step S3417, the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing door operating time counter indicating the remaining operating time of the opening/closing door 832B of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games, and moves the process to step S3418.

<Steps S3418 and S3419>
In step S3418, the MPU 41 operates the V winning opening opening/closing section 385B as a gaming operation section of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games by switching processing. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a V winning opening opening/closing part operating time counter indicating the remaining operating time of the V winning opening opening/closing part 385B (step S3419), and ends the small winning game control process.

<Step S3420>
When the small winning opening flag is set to off (step S3409: No), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is not being executed, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the V winning a prize opening/closing part operation flag indicating that the game is in progress is set to ON (step S3420). The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3421 when the V winning opening opening/closing part operation flag is set to ON (step S3420: Yes), and when the V winning opening opening/closing part operation flag is set to OFF (step S3420: Yes). S3420: No), the process moves to step S3429.

<Step S3421>
When the V winning opening/closing part operation flag is set to ON (step S3420: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning opening/closing part operation flag to indicate that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 383B of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games. It is determined whether the winning flag is set on (step S3421). The V winning flag is set to ON in step S3423, which will be described later, when the game ball 99 enters the V winning hole 383B of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games.

If the V winning flag is set to ON (step S3421: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3425, and if the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3421: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3425. The process moves to S3422.

<Steps S3422 to S3424>
If the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3421: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 383B of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games (step S3422). Whether or not the game ball 99 has entered the V winning hole 383B can be determined, for example, by determining whether the game ball 99 has entered the V winning hole 383B in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main process of FIG. The determination is made based on whether or not it is detected by the ball entry sensor 383B.

When the game ball 99 enters the V winning hole 383B (step S3422: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to ON (step S3423), and further, when the game ball 99 enters the V winning hole 383B. A V winning command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of this (step S3424), and the process moves to step S3425.

The V winning command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the audio lamp control device 5, by receiving the V winning command, it is possible to execute the V winning effect (see FIG. 296(B)) in the small winning game executed in the symbol display section 341 etc. as the game operation section. Can be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball 99 has not entered the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 39 (step S3421: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3424.

<Steps S3425 and S3426>
In step S3425, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the V winning opening/closing part operating time counter indicating the remaining operating time of the V winning opening/closing part 385B of the small winning variable winning device 38B. Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the V winning opening/closing part operating time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3426). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the V winning opening/closing part 385B (closing the V winning opening 383B).

If the value of the V winning opening/closing part operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3426: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to return the V winning opening/closing part 385B (close the V winning opening 383B). , the process moves to step S3427. On the other hand, if the value of the V winning opening/closing part operation time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3426: No), that is, if it is not the timing to return the V winning opening/closing part 385B (close the V winning opening 383B). , the process moves to step S3429.

<Steps S3427 and S3428>
If the value of the V winning opening/closing part operating time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3426: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to return the V winning opening/closing part 385B (closing the V winning opening 383B), the MPU 41 , the V winning opening opening/closing part 385B as a guiding part is restored by the switching process (step S3427), and the V winning opening opening/closing part operation flag indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing part 385B is activated is set to OFF ( Step S3428), the process moves to step S3429.

<Step S3429>
In step S3429, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening/closing door operation flag indicating that the opening/closing door 382B of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games is in operation is set to ON. If the opening/closing door operation flag is set to ON (step S3429: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3430, and if the opening/closing door operation flag is set to OFF (step S3429: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3430. The small winning game control process ends.

<Steps S3430 and S3431>
If the opening/closing door operation flag is set to ON (step S3428: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening/closing door operation time counter indicating the remaining operating time of the opening/closing door 832B of the variable winning device 38B (step S3428: Yes). S3429). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the opening/closing door operating time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3431). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the small winning game by returning the opening/closing door 832B of the variable winning device 38B and closing the opening 381B.

If the value of the opening/closing door operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3431: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the opening/closing door 382B of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games and closes the opening 381B. If it is the timing to end the small winning game, the process moves to step S3332. On the other hand, if the value of the opening/closing door operating time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3431: No), the MPU 41 determines the timing for returning the opening/closing door 832B of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games (closing the opening 381B). If it is not the timing to end the small winning game), the small winning game control process is ended.

<Steps S3432 to S3434>
When the value of the opening/closing door operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3431: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the opening/closing door 832B as a game operation unit by switching processing (step S3432), and the opening/closing door 832B is not operated. The opening/closing door operation flag indicating that the opening/closing door operation flag is set to OFF (step S3433).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 383B of the variable winning device 38B for small winning games is set to ON (step S3434). If the V winning flag is set to ON (step S3434: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3435, and if the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3434: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3435. The process moves to S3437.

<Steps S3435 and S3436>
When the V winning flag is set on (step S3434: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot game state transition flag that shifts the gaming state from the small win gaming state to the jackpot gaming state (step S3435). The jackpot gaming state transition flag is referred to in step S3627 of FIG. 323 of the gaming state transition process to determine whether or not to shift the gaming state from the small winning gaming state to the jackpot gaming state. That is, when there is a V winning prize in a small winning game, the V winning jackpot game is executed after the end of the big winning game. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to OFF (step S3436), and moves the process to step S3439.

<Steps S3437 and S3438>
When the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3434: No), the MPU 41 sets to ON the normal game state transition flag that shifts the gaming state from the small winning game state to the normal game state (step S3437). The normal gaming state transition flag is referred to in step S3630 of FIG. 323 of the gaming state transition process to determine whether or not to transition the gaming state from the small winning gaming state to the normal gaming state. In other words, if there is no V winning game in the small winning game, the game is shifted to the normal jackpot game without executing the V winning jackpot game after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a V non-winning command to transmit to the audio lamp control device 5 that there is no V winning in the small winning game (step S3438), and moves the process to step S3439.

<Steps S3439 to S3441>
In step S3439, the MPU 41 turns on the small winning game end flag 1 and the small winning game end flag 2, which indicate that the small winning game has ended. The small winning game end flag 1 is referred to in step S2206 of FIG. 315 of the jackpot game control process to determine whether or not to generate a V winning jackpot game. On the other hand, the small winning game end flag 2 is referred to in step S3624 of FIG. 323 of the game state transition process to determine whether or not to transition the game state.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a small winning game end command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the small winning game ends (step S3440). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the small winning game in progress flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed to OFF (step S3441), and ends the small winning game control process.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIGS. 322 and 323 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in FIG. 308. In the game state transition process, a process for controlling the transition of various game states (normal game state, a time-saving game state, small win game state, and jackpot game state) is executed. The gaming state transition process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 322 and 323.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 322, in step S3601, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game (special figure jackpot game or V prize jackpot game) is to be started is on.

If the jackpot game start flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3602. On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3608.

<Steps S3602 to S2307>
When the jackpot game start flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, when starting the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot game state flag indicating the jackpot game state (step S3602). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S3603), sets other gaming state flags for the gaming state before shifting to the jackpot gaming state to OFF (steps S3604 to S3607), and sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S3604 to S3607), Finish the migration process. Specifically, when the a time-saving game state flag is on (step S3604: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a time-saving game state flag to off (step S3605), and the normal game state flag is on. If so (step S3606: Yes), the normal gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3607).

<Steps S3608 to S2310>
If the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game end flag indicating to end the jackpot game is on. (Step S3608). When the jackpot game end flag is on (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag to OFF (step S3609), sets the jackpot game end flag to OFF (step S3610), and returns the process to step S3608. The process moves to S3611. On the other hand, when the jackpot game end flag is off (step S3605: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3617 in FIG. 323.

<Step S3611>
In step S3611, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving game state transition flag a is set to on. That is, after the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the time-saving gaming state a. The a-time-saving game state transition flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the a-time-saving game state, and is turned on in step S2256-4 of FIG. 319 of the jackpot game control process when the jackpot game to be ended is a 10R special chart jackpot. is set to

The MPU 41 moves the process to step S3612 when the a time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3611: Yes), and when the a time-saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3612: No), the process moves to step S3614.

<Steps S3612 and S3613>
When the a time saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3611: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a time saving game state flag indicating the a time saving gaming state to ON (step S3612). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state transition flag a to OFF (step S3613), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3614>
a If the time-saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3611: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3614). That is, after the end of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the normal gaming state. The normal game state transition flag is a flag for transitioning the game state to the normal game state, and when the jackpot game to be ended is a 4R special figure jackpot game or a V prize jackpot game, the jackpot game control process shown in FIG. 319 It is set to on in step S2256-9.

If the normal gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3614: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3615, and if the normal gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3612: No). , the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3615 and S3616>
If the normal gaming state transition flag is set on (step S3614: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating that the normal gaming state is on (step S3615). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S3616), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3617>
When the jackpot game end flag is off (step S3608: No), as shown in FIG. 323, the MPU 41 determines whether the small win game start flag is on (step S3617). When the small winning game start flag is on (step S3617: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the small winning game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3618. On the other hand, when the small winning game start flag is off (step S3617: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the small winning game, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3624.

<Steps S3618 to S2323>
When the small winning game start flag is on (step S3617: Yes), that is, when starting the small winning game, the MPU 41 sets the small winning game state flag indicating that the small winning game state is on (step S3617: Yes). S3618). Then, the MPU 41 sets the small winning game start flag to OFF (step S3619), sets the flag related to the gaming state before starting the small winning game to OFF, and ends the game state transition process. Specifically, when the a time saving game state flag indicating the a time saving game state is on (step S3620: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a time saving game state flag to OFF (step S3621), and The game state transition process ends. Further, when the normal gaming state flag indicating that the normal gaming state is on is on (step S3622: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag to OFF (step S3623) and ends the gaming state transition process. do.

<Step S3624>
When the small winning game start flag is off (step S3617: No), it is determined whether the small winning game end flag 2 indicating that the small winning game ends is on (step S3624). When the small winning game end flag 2 is on (step S3624: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3625, and when the small winning game ending flag is off (step S3625: No), the process moves to step S3633. to move to.

<Steps S3625 and S2326>
If the small win game end flag is on (step S3624: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the small win game state flag to OFF (step S3625), and sets the small win game state end flag 2 to OFF (step S3626). ), the process moves to step S3627.

<Step S3627>
In step S3627, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state is set on. If the jackpot game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3627: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3628, and if the jackpot game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3627: No). , the process moves to step S3630.

<Steps S3628 and S2329>
When the jackpot gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3627: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming state flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is on (step S3628), and the jackpot gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3629), and the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3630>
If the jackpot gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3627: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal gaming state transition flag for transitioning the gaming state to the normal gaming state is set to ON ( Step S3630). If the normal gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3631, and if the normal gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3630: No). , the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S3631 and S2332>
If the normal gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state to ON (step S3631), and sets the normal gaming state transition flag to ON (step S3631). is set to OFF (step S3632), and the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3633>
When the small winning game end flag 2 is off (step S3624: Yes), it is determined whether or not the a time saving game state flag indicating the a time saving game state is on (step S3633). When the a time saving game state flag is on (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3634, and when the a time saving game state flag is off (step S3633: No), the MPU 41 executes the corresponding game state transition process. end.

<Step S3634>
a If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag for shifting the game state to the normal game state is on (step S3634). When the normal gaming state transition flag is on (step S3634: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3635, and when the normal gaming state flag is off (step S3634: No), the MPU 41 executes the gaming state shifting process. finish.

<Steps S3635 to S2337>
When the normal game state transition flag is on (step S3634: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a time saving game state flag to OFF (step S3635), and sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S3636). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state to ON (step S3637), and ends the gaming state transition process.

As described above, in the present invention, by arranging the game members in this manner, it is possible to improve the identifiability or visibility of the player and to play the game efficiently.

More specifically, in the present invention, when the first operating means is operated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, for example, the first operating means operates to cause the game balls 99 that have flowed in from the inflow portion to enter the first ball entry portion. The guiding means, which is in the first guiding state, causes the game balls 99 to enter the first ball entering section by the switching means when a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the first ball entering section. The state is switched to a second state in which the ball is not allowed to enter the second ball entry section. Therefore, when the game balls 99 flow in from the inflow part due to the operation of the first operating means, a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the first ball entry part first, and then the game balls 99 enter the second ball entry part. 99 is pitched. As a result, when the game ball 99 flows in from the inflow portion by operating the first operating means due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the predetermined operation of the second operating means may be executed first, and then the third operating means may be executed. Certain operations of the operating means may be performed.

Further, in the present invention, for example, the arrangement position of the third operating means is higher in the vertical direction than the arrangement position of the second operating means when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, or in the downward direction of the game ball 99. This is the upstream side of . Therefore, when the game ball 99 flows in from the inflow part by operating the first operating means due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the second operating means is first located on the lower side in the vertical direction or on the downstream side in the flowing direction of the game ball 99. A predetermined operation may be executed, and then a specific operation of the third operation means on the upper side in the vertical direction or on the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99 may be executed.

According to the present invention, when the first operating means is operated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the game ball 99 is continuously launched toward the first operating means, so that the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are The game balls 99 are sequentially entered into the area, and the game balls 99 that are hit out first among the game balls 99 that are successively hit out are placed on the lower side in the vertical direction where the predetermined action was performed or on the downstream side of the game balls 99. The game ball 99 reaches the second operating means on the downstream side in the direction, and the subsequent game ball 99 reaches the third operating means on the upper side in the vertical direction where the specific action was performed or the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99. In other words, the order of operation of the second operating means and the third operating means can be matched with the order of arrival of the game balls 99 to the second operating means and the third operating means. Therefore, the operations of the second operating means and the third operating means are executed in the shortest possible time (for example, the shortest time) after the first operating means is operated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the second operating means and the third operating means are operated. It becomes possible to execute a process based on the arrival of the game ball 99 at the means (for example, a jackpot lottery process or a regular winning lottery process based on the game ball 99 entering a predetermined prize opening). As a result, if the predetermined condition is met, the player can simply launch the game ball 99 continuously toward the first operating means, and the second operating means and the third operating means, even if the player does not understand the gameplay. It becomes possible to execute the process based on the arrival of the game ball 99 while increasing the identifiability or visibility. As a result, when the predetermined condition is met, the player can perform a simple firing operation of continuously launching the game ball 99 toward the first operating means, thereby obtaining the benefit when the predetermined condition is met, that is, the first operation means. Since the benefits based on the arrival of the game ball 99 to the second operating means and the third operating means can be received in the shortest possible time (for example, the shortest time), the game can be played efficiently without complicating the gameplay. It is possible to increase interest.

More specifically, in this embodiment, for example, as a game condition, the normal electric power as a game operation unit is activated due to the occurrence of a normal figure win in the normal figure lottery in the a time-saving gaming state that is transferred after the end of the special figure jackpot game. When the inlet 371 as the inflow region of the non-electrically actuated device 37 is opened by executing the drive control (processing) as the switching process, the accessory 372 is normally operated. A first guiding state (a state in which the game ball 99 can be detected by the ball entering sensor 376Aa serving as a detection part) is established in which the game ball 99 flowing in from the introduction port 371 is guided to the first non-electric actuating port 376A serving as a ball entering part. The movable guiding part 374 as a guiding part of the non-electrically actuated device 37 performs drive control (processing) as a switching process, so that the game ball 99 enters the first non-electrically actuated opening 376A. is detected by the ball entry sensor 376Aa serving as a detection unit, it is impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the first non-electric operating opening 376A, and the second non-electric operating opening serving as the ball entry unit is disabled. The game ball 99 is switched to a second guidance state (a state in which the game ball 99 can be detected by the ball entry sensor 376Ba as a detection unit) in which the ball can enter the ball 376B. Therefore, when the game ball 99 flows in from the introduction port 371 of the non-electric actuation device 37 by operating the normal electric accessory 372, the game ball 99 first enters the first non-electric actuation port 376A, and then Then, the game ball 99 is inserted into the second non-electric operating opening 376B. As a result, when the game ball 99 flows in from the inlet 371 of the non-electric actuation device 37 due to the occurrence of a normal figure hit in the time-saving game state a and the normal electric accessory 372 is operated, the game ball 99 first acts as a game operation part. The first non-electric accessory 39A can be opened as a gaming operation so that the game ball 99 can enter the second prize opening 315A as a ball entry part (the game ball 99 can be detected by the ball entry sensor 376Aa), After that, the second non-electric accessory 39B as a game operation part allows the game ball 99 to enter the second prize opening 315B as a ball entry part (the game ball 99 is detected by the ball entry sensor 376Ba) as a game action. Can be operated open.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the arrangement position of the second non-electric accessory 39B as the game operation section is set to the first non-electric accessory 39B as the game operation section when the gaming machine 10 (game board 31) is viewed from the front. It is on the upper side in the vertical direction than the arrangement position of 39A or on the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99. Therefore, as a game condition, in the time-saving game state a, when a normal figure is established in the normal figure winning lottery, the normal electric accessory 372 as a game operation part is operated, and the game ball 99 is passed from the inlet 371 as an inflow area. When the flow occurs, first the first non-electric accessory 39A as a game operation section on the lower side in the vertical direction or the downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball 99 can be opened as a game operation, and then the vertical direction The second non-electric accessory 39B as a game operation section on the upper side or the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99 can be opened as a game operation.

In this way, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the normal electric accessory 372 is operated due to the occurrence of a normal figure in the normal figure winning lottery in the time-saving gaming state a, the game board moves towards the normal electric accessory 372. By continuously launching the game balls 99 into the right side area of 31, the game balls 99 are sequentially entered into the first non-electric operating opening 376A and the second non-electric operating opening 376B, and are continuously launched into the right area. The first non-electric accessory 39A (second winning prize) of the game balls 99 that was launched first is located on the lower side in the vertical direction where the action was performed first or on the downstream side in the flowing direction of the game balls 99. opening 315A), and the subsequent game ball 99 enters the second non-electric accessory 39B (second winning opening 315B) on the upper side in the vertical direction where the action was later performed or on the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball 99. reach. In other words, the operating order of the first non-electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory 39B (the opening order of the second winning opening 315A and the second winning opening 315B), the first non-electric accessory 39A and the second non-electric accessory The order in which the game balls 99 arrive at the accessory 39B (the order in which the game balls 99 enter the second winning hole 315A and the second winning hole 315B) can be matched. Therefore, the first non-motorized accessory 39A and the second non-motorized accessory 39B are activated in the shortest possible time (for example, the shortest time) after the normal electric accessory 372 is operated due to the occurrence of a normal figure in the a time-saving game state. It becomes possible to execute the operation, and also to cause the game balls 99 to enter the second winning holes 315A and 315B to execute the jackpot lottery process. As a result, if the player wins a normal pattern, the player continuously launches the game ball 99 toward the normal electric accessory 372 onto the right side area of the game board 31, even if the player does not understand the gameplay. By just doing this, it becomes possible to execute a process based on the game ball 99 reaching the first non-motorized accessory 39A and the second non-motorized accessory 39B. As a result, when a normal figure hit occurs in the time-saving game state, the player can play the time-saving game The benefit in the event of a winning on a regular map in the state, that is, you can receive the execution of the jackpot lottery process in the shortest possible time (for example, the shortest time) by inserting the game ball 99 into the second prize opening 315A, 315B. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game without complicating the gameplay.

Note that in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to sixth embodiments described above can be made within an applicable range.

Further, in each embodiment, matters described in other embodiments can be applied within an applicable range.

[Summary of the invention]
Hereinafter, a summary of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, reference numerals may be added to the description for convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numeral. It's not a thing. Furthermore, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
Judgment to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315). means (41);
A game round operation in which predetermined symbols (a first special symbol, a second special symbol) are variably displayed is triggered by the determination by the determination means (41) as to whether or not to generate the special game state. A game round operation execution means (41) to be executed;
a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game time operation executed by the game time operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball entering means (314, 315) is configured with a first starting ball entering means (314), and a disadvantageous state in which entry of a game ball is restricted and entry of the game ball is easier than in the disadvantageous state. a second starting ball entering means (315) different from the first starting ball entering means (314) to which an advantageous state is switched;
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed upon entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means (314), and a second starting ball entering means (315). ), a second symbol (second special symbol) that is displayed in a variable manner triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second symbol;
The game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. A second game round operation (second special figure game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game round operation by the reservation means (41) includes the first reservation (first special figure reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game round operation, and the second game round operation. A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special figure reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second hold in a predetermined gaming state (a state in which a continuous performance such as a RUSH performance can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game based on a game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state can be executed) The first numerical information is input to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number (second special figure reservation number M). first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is satisfied (starting a second special figure game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) while the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the predetermined gaming state;
When a specific condition (time saving symbol stop failure) that can generate a specific game state (c time saving gaming state) in which a specific game can be executed is established, a second counting means (c time saving gaming state) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game is established. a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of executable special figure games in the time-saving game state c) different from the first numerical information to the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means upon establishment of an update condition (start of a special figure game);
In the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, if the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, the specified condition is set in at least the first counting means. means for continuing to execute the specific effect during the predetermined gaming state until the first numerical information becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is met; (41,51) and
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state c) is set in the second counting means. without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means set (display of the remaining number of c time-saving games in the c time-saving game state (performance)), and when the specific performance is being executed. When the update condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation, the specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance without executing the correspondence display;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1, the specific correspondence display is not started even if the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance. Further, in the present invention, even if the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during execution of the specific performance, the updated specific correspondence display is not started. In this way, if the specific condition or update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, the specific corresponding display will not start, so that the second game operation during the execution of the specific effect will not be started. Even if the specific conditions or update conditions are met during execution, the specific response display prevents the specific performance from being terminated midway, so the game will not be affected by the specific performance being terminated midway. A decline in interest is prevented.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix A1, based on the end of the specific performance, a specific correspondence display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the specific performance is started. In this way, by starting the specific correspondence display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the specific performance, it is possible to start the specific correspondence display without ending the specific performance midway. Therefore, a decrease in interest in the game due to the specific correspondence display not being started is prevented.

[Appendix B1]
Judgment to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315). means (41);
A game round operation in which predetermined symbols (a first special symbol, a second special symbol) are variably displayed is triggered by the determination by the determination means (41) as to whether or not to generate the special game state. A game round operation execution means (41) to be executed;
a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game time operation executed by the game time operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball entering means (314, 315) is configured with a first starting ball entering means (314), and a disadvantageous state in which entry of a game ball is restricted and entry of the game ball is easier than in the disadvantageous state. a second starting ball entering means (315) different from the first starting ball entering means (314) to which an advantageous state is switched;
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed upon entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means (314), and a second starting ball entering means (315). ), a second symbol (second special symbol) that is displayed in a variable manner triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second symbol;
The game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. A second game round operation (second special figure game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game round operation by the reservation means (41) includes the first reservation (first special figure reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game round operation, and the second game round operation. A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special figure reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second hold in a predetermined gaming state (a state in which a continuous performance such as a RUSH performance can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game based on a game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state can be executed) The first numerical information is input to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number (second special figure reservation number M). first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is satisfied (starting a second special figure game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) while the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the predetermined gaming state;
When a specific condition (time saving symbol stop failure) that can generate a specific game state (c time saving gaming state) in which a specific game can be executed is established, a second counting means (c time saving gaming state) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game is established. a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of executable special figure games in the time-saving game state c) different from the first numerical information to the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means upon establishment of an update condition (start of a special figure game);
In the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, if the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, the specified condition is set in at least the first counting means. means for continuing to execute the specific effect during the predetermined gaming state until the first numerical information becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is met; (41,51) and
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state c) is set in the second counting means. without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means set (display of the remaining number of c time-saving games in the c time-saving game state (effect)), and when the specific effect is being executed. When the update condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation, the specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance without executing the correspondence display;
means (51) for executing a performance (branching performance, left-handed display, etc.) that clearly or suggests a gaming state after the end of the specific performance when the specific performance is ended;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix B1, when ending a specific performance, a performance that clearly or suggests a gaming state after the end of the specific performance is executed. In this way, when ending a specific performance, a performance that specifies or suggests the gaming state after the end of the specific performance is executed, and based on the performance, the player can It becomes possible to understand the status. This allows the player to know what kind of performance will be executed even in a situation where the player's interest in the game decreases because the termination of a specific performance clearly or suggests the end of a situation advantageous to the player. In other words, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the game state after the end of the specific performance will be advantageous to the player.

[Appendix B2]
The game machine according to appendix B1, wherein the performance that clearly indicates or suggests the gaming state after the end of the specific performance includes a performance that clearly indicates or suggests a launch area of the game ball on the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B2, the performance that specifies or suggests the gaming state after the end of the specific performance includes a performance that specifies or suggests the launch area of the game ball on the game board. In this way, by including a performance that specifies or suggests the gaming state after the end of the specific performance, including a performance that clearly indicates or suggests the launch area of the game ball on the game board, the player can It is possible to grasp the launch area of the game ball on the game board after the end of the performance. This allows the player to properly launch the game ball after the end of the specific performance, which prevents unnecessary loss of game balls (so-called wasted hits) due to inappropriate launch of the game ball. This makes it possible to appropriately secure profits.

[Appendix C1]
Judgment to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315). means (41);
A game round operation in which predetermined symbols (a first special symbol, a second special symbol) are variably displayed is triggered by the determination by the determination means (41) as to whether or not to generate the special game state. A game round operation execution means (41) to be executed;
a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game time operation executed by the game time operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball entering means (314, 315) is configured with a first starting ball entering means (314), and a disadvantageous state in which entry of a game ball is restricted and entry of the game ball is easier than in the disadvantageous state. a second starting ball entering means (315) different from the first starting ball entering means (314) to which an advantageous state is switched;
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed upon entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means (314), and a second starting ball entering means (315). ), a second symbol (second special symbol) that is displayed in a variable manner triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second symbol;
The game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. A second game round operation (second special figure game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game round operation by the reservation means (41) includes the first reservation (first special figure reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game round operation, and the second game round operation. A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special figure reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second hold in a predetermined gaming state (a state in which a continuous performance such as a RUSH performance can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game based on a game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state can be executed) The first numerical information is input to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number (second special figure reservation number M). first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is satisfied (starting a second special figure game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) while the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the predetermined gaming state;
When a specific condition (time saving symbol stop failure) that can generate a specific game state (c time saving gaming state) in which a specific game can be executed is established, a second counting means (c time saving gaming state) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game is established. a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of executable special figure games in the time-saving game state c) different from the first numerical information to the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means upon establishment of an update condition (start of a special figure game);
In the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, if the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, the specified condition is set in at least the first counting means. means for continuing to execute the specific effect during the predetermined gaming state until the first numerical information becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is met; (41,51) and
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state c) is set in the second counting means. without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means set (display of the remaining number of c time-saving games in the c time-saving game state (performance)), and when the specific performance is being executed. When the update condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation, the specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance without executing the correspondence display;
Equipped with
In both cases where the specific conditions are met during the execution of the specific production, and cases where the specific conditions are not met during the execution of the specific production, the gaming method (the recommended game ball) after the completion of the specific production A game machine characterized by having the same launch (launch).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the gaming method after the end of the specific performance is the same regardless of whether the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific performance or if the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of the specific performance. be. In this way, in both cases where the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific performance and when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of the specific performance, the gaming method after the end of the specific performance is the same, The player can proceed with the game using the same gaming method regardless of whether the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the specific performance. This prevents the gaming method from becoming complicated after the end of the specific performance, and prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the gaming method relates to a method of launching a game ball onto a gaming board that is advantageous for the player.

The gaming machine according to appendix C2 relates to a method of launching a game ball onto a game board that is advantageous for the player. In this way, since it is related to the method of launching the game ball against the game board that is advantageous to the player, the player can be The method of launching game balls, which is advantageous for players, is standardized. This prevents the game ball launch method that is advantageous to the player from becoming complicated after the end of the specific performance, and prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming method includes a first gaming method in which it is encouraged to enter a game ball into the first starting ball entry means (314), and a game ball is encouraged to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315). a second gaming method in which it is encouraged to
The gaming machine according to appendix C2, wherein the gaming method after the end of the specific performance is the first gaming method.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, the gaming method includes a first gaming method in which it is encouraged to enter the game ball into the first starting ball entering means, and a first gaming method in which it is encouraged to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering means. A second gaming method is encouraged, and the gaming method after the end of the specific performance is the first gaming method. In this way, the first gaming method encourages entering the game ball into the first starting ball entering means, and the first gaming method encourages entering the gaming ball into the second starting ball entering means. and a second gaming method, and the gaming method after the end of the specific performance is the first gaming method, so that after the end of the specific performance, regardless of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific performance. , it is sufficient to practice the first game method in which it is encouraged to enter the game ball into the first starting ball entry means. This simplifies the method of launching the game ball that is advantageous to the player after the end of the specific performance, and prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

[Appendix D1]
Judgment to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315). means (41);
A game round operation in which predetermined symbols (a first special symbol, a second special symbol) are variably displayed is triggered by the determination by the determination means (41) as to whether or not to generate the special game state. A game round operation execution means (41) to be executed;
a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game time operation executed by the game time operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball entering means (314, 315) is configured with a first starting ball entering means (314), and a disadvantageous state in which entry of a game ball is restricted and entry of the game ball is easier than in the disadvantageous state. a second starting ball entering means (315) different from the first starting ball entering means (314) to which an advantageous state is switched;
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed upon entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means (314), and a second starting ball entering means (315). ), a second symbol (second special symbol) that is displayed in a variable manner triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second symbol;
The game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. A second game round operation (second special figure game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game round operation by the reservation means (41) includes the first reservation (first special figure reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game round operation, and the second game round operation. A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special figure reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second hold in a predetermined gaming state (a state in which a continuous performance such as a RUSH performance can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game based on a game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state can be executed) The first numerical information is input to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number (second special figure reservation number M). first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is satisfied (starting a second special figure game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) while the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the predetermined gaming state;
When a specific condition (time saving symbol stop failure) that can generate a specific game state (c time saving gaming state) in which a specific game can be executed is established, a second counting means (c time saving gaming state) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game is established. a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of executable special figure games in the time-saving game state c) different from the first numerical information to the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means upon establishment of an update condition (start of a special figure game);
In the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, if the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, the specified condition is set in at least the first counting means. means for continuing to execute the specific effect during the predetermined gaming state until the first numerical information becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is met; (41,51) and
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state c) is set in the second counting means. without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means set (display of the remaining number of c time-saving games in the c time-saving game state (performance)), and when the specific performance is being executed. When the update condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation, the specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance without executing the correspondence display;
Equipped with
A game characterized in that the specific correspondence display is a display that allows identification of the second game round operation in which the specific condition is satisfied among the second game round operations executed during the execution of the specific performance. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the specific correspondence display is a display that allows identification of a second game round operation in which a specific condition is satisfied among the second game round operations executed during execution of a specific performance. In this way, since the specific correspondence display is a display that allows identification of the second game round operation in which the specific condition is satisfied among the second game round operations executed during the execution of the specific performance, the player can It is possible to determine whether or not the specific condition is satisfied in which second game operation among the second game operation performed during execution of the specific performance. As a result, when the specific response display is displayed after the end of the specific performance, the player can guess whether or not the specific condition was satisfied in which second game operation during the execution of the specific performance and execute the specific performance. You can enjoy the game after it ends.

[Appendix E1]
Judgment to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315). means (41);
A game round operation in which predetermined symbols (a first special symbol, a second special symbol) are variably displayed is triggered by the determination by the determination means (41) as to whether or not to generate the special game state. A game round operation execution means (41) to be executed;
a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game time operation executed by the game time operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball entering means (314, 315) is configured with a first starting ball entering means (314), and a disadvantageous state in which entry of a game ball is restricted and entry of the game ball is easier than in the disadvantageous state. a second starting ball entering means (315) different from the first starting ball entering means (314) to which an advantageous state is switched;
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed upon entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means (314), and a second starting ball entering means (315). ), a second symbol (second special symbol) that is displayed in a variable manner triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second symbol;
The game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. A second game round operation (second special figure game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game round operation by the reservation means (41) includes the first reservation (first special figure reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game round operation, and the second game round operation. A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special figure reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second hold in a predetermined gaming state (a state in which a continuous performance such as a RUSH performance can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game based on a game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state can be executed) The first numerical information is input to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number (second special figure reservation number M). first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is satisfied (starting a second special figure game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) while the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the predetermined gaming state;
When a specific condition (time saving symbol stop failure) that can generate a specific game state (c time saving gaming state) in which a specific game can be executed is established, a second counting means (c time saving gaming state) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game is established. a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of executable special figure games in the time-saving game state c) different from the first numerical information to the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means upon establishment of an update condition (start of a special figure game);
In the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, if the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, the specified condition is set in at least the first counting means. means for continuing to execute the specific effect during the predetermined gaming state until the first numerical information becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is met; (41,51) and
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state c) is set in the second counting means. without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means set (display of the remaining number of c time-saving games in the c time-saving game state (performance)), and when the specific performance is being executed. When the update condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation, the specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance without executing the correspondence display;
When the specific effect ends, different effects are performed depending on whether the specific condition was satisfied during the execution of the specific effect or when the specific condition was not satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. possible means and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, when a specific performance ends, there are differences between cases where the specific condition was met during the execution of the specific performance and cases where the specific condition was not satisfied during the execution of the specific performance. The performance is executed. In this way, when a specific performance ends, a different performance will be executed depending on whether the specific condition was met during the execution of the specific performance or the case where the specific condition was not satisfied during the execution of the specific performance. By doing so, the player can grasp whether or not the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific performance based on the performance that will be executed when the specific performance ends. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, when the specific effect ends, an effect will be executed that allows the player to understand that the specific condition for displaying the specific corresponding display has been met. can.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the performance that can be executed when the specific performance ends includes a performance that clearly or suggests a profit state at the time when the specific performance ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2, the performance that can be executed when the specific performance ends includes a performance that specifies or suggests the profit state at the time the specific performance ends. In this way, the performance that can be executed when the specific performance ends includes a performance that clearly or suggests the profit status at the time the specific performance ends, and based on the performance, the player can It becomes possible to grasp the profit status after the end of the period. As a result, even in situations where the player's interest in the game decreases because the termination of a specific performance clearly indicates or suggests the end of a situation advantageous to the player, it is possible to look forward to seeing what kind of performance will be executed or not. In other words, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the profit state after the end of the specific performance will be advantageous to the player.

[Appendix F1]
Judgment to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315). means (41);
A game round operation in which predetermined symbols (a first special symbol, a second special symbol) are variably displayed is triggered by the determination by the determination means (41) as to whether or not to generate the special game state. A game round operation execution means (41) to be executed;
a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game time operation executed by the game time operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball entering means (314, 315) is configured with a first starting ball entering means (314), and a disadvantageous state in which entry of a game ball is restricted and entry of the game ball is easier than in the disadvantageous state. a second starting ball entering means (315) different from the first starting ball entering means (314) to which an advantageous state is switched;
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed upon entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means (314), and a second starting ball entering means (315). ), a second symbol (second special symbol) that is displayed in a variable manner triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second symbol;
The game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. A second game round operation (second special figure game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game round operation by the reservation means (41) includes the first reservation (first special figure reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game round operation, and the second game round operation. A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special figure reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second hold in a predetermined gaming state (a state in which a continuous performance such as a RUSH performance can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game based on a game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state can be executed) The first numerical information is input to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number (second special figure reservation number M). first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is satisfied (starting a second special figure game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) while the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the predetermined gaming state;
When a specific condition (time saving symbol stop failure) that can generate a specific game state (c time saving gaming state) in which a specific game can be executed is established, a second counting means (c time saving gaming state) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game is established. a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of executable special figure games in the time-saving game state c) different from the first numerical information to the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means upon establishment of an update condition (start of a special figure game);
In the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, if the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, the specified condition is set in at least the first counting means. means for continuing to execute the specific effect during the predetermined gaming state until the first numerical information becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is met; (41,51) and
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state c) is set in the second counting means. without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means set (display of the remaining number of c time-saving games in the c time-saving game state (performance)), and when the specific performance is being executed. When the update condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation, the specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance without executing the correspondence display;
Equipped with
The predetermined game state is a state in which the special game state (jackpot game state) is likely to occur (a second special game is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving game state). A game machine characterized in that the game machine is in a state where

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the predetermined gaming state is a state in which a special gaming state is likely to occur. Here, in a predetermined gaming state, even if the specific condition is satisfied, the specific effect is continuously executed until the first numerical information reaches the specific value. Therefore, since the predetermined gaming state is a state where the special gaming state is likely to occur, the player is made to recognize that the special gaming state is likely to occur while the specific performance is continuously executed. becomes possible. Thereby, the player can grasp whether or not the special game state is likely to occur by paying attention to whether or not the specific performance continues, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix G1]
Judgment to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315). means (41);
A game round operation in which predetermined symbols (a first special symbol, a second special symbol) are variably displayed is triggered by the determination by the determination means (41) as to whether or not to generate the special game state. A game round operation execution means (41) to be executed;
a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game time operation executed by the game time operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball entering means (314, 315) is configured with a first starting ball entering means (314), and a disadvantageous state in which entry of a game ball is restricted and entry of the game ball is easier than in the disadvantageous state. a second starting ball entering means (315) different from the first starting ball entering means (314) to which an advantageous state is switched;
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed upon entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means (314), and a second starting ball entering means (315). ), a second symbol (second special symbol) that is displayed in a variable manner triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second symbol;
The game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. A second game round operation (second special figure game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game round operation by the reservation means (41) includes the first reservation (first special figure reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game round operation, and the second game round operation. A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special figure reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second hold in a predetermined gaming state (a state in which a continuous performance such as a RUSH performance can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game based on a game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state can be executed) The first numerical information is input to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number (second special figure reservation number M). first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is satisfied (starting a second special figure game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) while the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the predetermined gaming state;
When a specific condition (time saving symbol stop failure) that can generate a specific game state (c time saving gaming state) in which a specific game can be executed is established, a second counting means (c time saving gaming state) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game is established. a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of executable special figure games in the time-saving game state c) different from the first numerical information to the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means upon establishment of an update condition (start of a special figure game);
In the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, if the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, the specified condition is set in at least the first counting means. means for continuing to execute the specific effect during the predetermined gaming state until the first numerical information becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is met; (41,51) and
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state c) is set in the second counting means. without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means set (display of the remaining number of c time-saving games in the c time-saving game state (effect)), and when the specific effect is being executed. When the update condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation, the specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance without executing the correspondence display;
Equipped with
The specific performance is a state in which the special game state (jackpot game state) is likely to occur (a second special figure game is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving game state (c). A game machine characterized by a performance that clearly or suggests that the state is

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1, the specific performance is a performance that clearly indicates or suggests that a special gaming state is likely to occur. In this way, since the specific performance is a performance that clearly or suggests that the special game state is likely to occur, the player can easily cause the special game state to occur while the specific performance is being executed. It becomes possible to grasp the status. Thereby, the player can grasp whether or not the special game state is likely to occur by paying attention to whether or not the specific performance continues, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix H1]
Judgment to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315). means (41);
A game round operation in which predetermined symbols (a first special symbol, a second special symbol) are variably displayed is triggered by the determination by the determination means (41) as to whether or not to generate the special game state. A game round operation execution means (41) to be executed;
a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game time operation executed by the game time operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball entering means (314, 315) is configured with a first starting ball entering means (314), and a disadvantageous state in which entry of a game ball is restricted and entry of the game ball is easier than in the disadvantageous state. a second starting ball entering means (315) different from the first starting ball entering means (314) to which an advantageous state is switched;
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed upon entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means (314), and a second starting ball entering means (315). ), a second symbol (second special symbol) that is displayed in a variable manner triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second symbol;
The game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. A second game round operation (second special figure game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game round operation by the reservation means (41) includes the first reservation (first special figure reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game round operation, and the second game round operation. A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special figure reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second hold in a predetermined gaming state (a state in which a continuous performance such as a RUSH performance can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game based on a game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state can be executed) The first numerical information is input to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number (second special figure reservation number M). first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is satisfied (starting a second special figure game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) while the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the predetermined gaming state;
When a specific condition (time saving symbol stop failure) that can generate a specific game state (c time saving gaming state) in which a specific game can be executed is established, a second counting means (c time saving gaming state) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game is established. a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of executable special figure games in the time-saving game state c) different from the first numerical information to the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means upon establishment of an update condition (start of a special figure game);
In the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, if the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, the specified condition is set in at least the first counting means. means for continuing to execute the specific effect during the predetermined gaming state until the first numerical information becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is met; (41,51) and
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state c) is set in the second counting means. without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means set (display of the remaining number of c time-saving games in the c time-saving game state (performance)), and when the specific performance is being executed. When the update condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation, the specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance without executing the correspondence display;
In the predetermined gaming state (the state in which the second special figure game is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the c time-saving gaming state), the second reservation (second special figure reservation) ) means for displaying an image (second special figure pending image) that allows the number of images to be recognized;
Means for displaying an image (first special figure pending image) that allows the number of the first pending (first special figure pending) to be recognized in a specific gaming state that can be transitioned to after the end of the predetermined gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, in a predetermined gaming state, an image that allows the number of second holds to be recognized is displayed, and in a specific gaming state that can be transitioned to after the end of the predetermined gaming state, the number of first holds is displayed. A recognizable image is displayed. In this way, it is preferable to display an image that allows the number of second holds to be recognized in a predetermined gaming state, thereby causing the second start ball entry means to enter the game ball and execute the second game round. On the other hand, by displaying an image that allows the player to recognize the number of first holds in a specific gaming state that can be transitioned to after the end of a predetermined gaming state, it is possible to It becomes possible for the player to understand that it is preferable to cause the game ball to enter the ball means and execute the first game round. Therefore, when transitioning from a predetermined gaming state to a specific gaming state, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the first starting ball entering means from a state where it is preferable to enter the gaming ball into the second starting ball entering means. It becomes possible for the player to understand that the game has been shifted to a preferable state based on the display type of the number of pending games. As a result, the player can determine whether the game ball launch method that is advantageous to the player is a launch method that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry means, or the second starting ball entry means, based on the display type of the number of pending players. It becomes possible to grasp whether the launching method is easy for the game ball to enter the ball means. As a result, by paying attention to the display type of the number of pending games, the player can enjoy the progress of the game without putting himself at a disadvantage.

[Appendix I1]
Judgment to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315). means (41);
A game round operation in which predetermined symbols (a first special symbol, a second special symbol) are variably displayed is triggered by the determination by the determination means (41) as to whether or not to generate the special game state. A game round operation execution means (41) to be executed;
a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game time operation executed by the game time operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball entering means (314, 315) is configured with a first starting ball entering means (314), and a disadvantageous state in which entry of a game ball is restricted and entry of the game ball is easier than in the disadvantageous state. a second starting ball entering means (315) different from the first starting ball entering means (314) to which an advantageous state is switched;
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed upon entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means (314), and a second starting ball entering means (315). ), a second symbol (second special symbol) that is displayed in a variable manner triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second symbol;
The game round operation includes a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a first game round operation (first special figure game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. A second game round operation (second special figure game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game round operation by the reservation means (41) includes the first reservation (first special figure reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game round operation, and the second game round operation. A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special figure reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second hold in a predetermined gaming state (a state in which a continuous performance such as a RUSH performance can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game based on a game ball entering the second prize opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state can be executed) The first numerical information is input to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number storage area) that is capable of counting corresponding to the number (second special figure reservation number M). first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is satisfied (starting a second special figure game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) while the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the predetermined gaming state;
When a specific condition (time saving symbol stop failure) that can generate a specific game state (c time saving gaming state) in which a specific game can be executed is established, a second counting means (c time saving gaming state) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game is established. a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of executable special figure games in the time-saving game state c) different from the first numerical information to the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means upon establishment of an update condition (start of a special figure game);
In the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, if the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, the specified condition is set in at least the first counting means. means for continuing to execute the specific effect during the predetermined gaming state until the first numerical information becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is met; (41,51) and
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state c) is set in the second counting means. without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means set (display of the remaining number of c time-saving games in the c time-saving game state (performance)), and when the specific performance is being executed. When the update condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation, the specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific performance without executing the correspondence display;
a first state (normal gaming state) in which the probability that the second starting ball entering means (315) is in the advantageous state is a first probability; and a first state (normal gaming state) in which the second starting ball entering means (315) is in the advantageous state. means for switching between a second state (a time-saving gaming state including a time-saving gaming state) in which a second probability is higher than the first probability;
Equipped with
At least a part of the period in the predetermined gaming state is in the second state (a time-saving gaming state).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, at least part of the period in the predetermined gaming state is a state in which the probability that the second starting ball entering means is in an advantageous state is high. Here, in a predetermined gaming state, even if the specific condition is satisfied, the specific effect is continuously executed until the first numerical information reaches the specific value. Therefore, if the predetermined game state is such that at least part of the period in the predetermined game state is a state in which there is a high probability that the second starting ball entering means will be in an advantageous state, the specific performance is continuously executed. During this time, it is possible for the player to recognize that the probability that the second starting ball entry means will be in an advantageous state is high. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the probability that the second starting ball entering means is in an advantageous state is high by paying attention to whether or not the specific effect continues, which increases the interest of the game. Improved.

[Appendix A1]
a plurality of starting ball entering means (314, 315) provided in the gaming area;
a winning lottery means (41) that performs a winning lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means;
Depending on the lottery result of the win/fail lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed on the display means (341) provided in the gaming area is determined and executed from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns). Display control means (51);
one movable mode (moveable mode A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the gaming area and operated while the first specific performance is displayed on the display means (341) is determined from among a plurality of modes; a movable control means (51) that executes the operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The movable control means (51) is configured to select one of the plurality of movable control means (51) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP evolution, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R definite variable promotion, 16R definite variable non-promotion). Based on the specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the first movable mode (moveable mode A to D), the movable means (37) performs a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement). It is intended to cause
The movable means (37) is located between a first position (standby position, intermediate actuation position 1) which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations and a second position (actuation position) which is the most moved position. It is movable and controlled by
The series of specific operations is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (actuation position) or near the first position (intermediate actuation position 1),
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined operation is executed during the movement control of the series of specific operations based on the specific information, the termination condition for the series of specific operations is satisfied (end of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation). determination means (51) for determining whether or not the
When it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied based on the determination means (51), the movable means (37) located at or near the first position is stopped; terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific operations;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, while the display control means is displaying the first specific effect, the movable control means executes a series of specific operations for the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to the first movable mode. In this case, when the movable means is located at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, the determining means determines whether or not a condition for ending the series of specific operations is satisfied. In this way, when the movable control means executes a series of specific operations for the movable means based on the specific information set corresponding to the one movable mode while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, When the movable means is located at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, the determination means determines whether or not the termination condition for a series of specific operations is satisfied, thereby performing movable control based on specific information. In a series of specific operations of the movable means by the means, each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, by the movable control means, the determination means determines whether the termination condition is satisfied. be done. In addition, in the gaming machine, when the determining means determines that the termination condition is satisfied in a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on the specific information, the termination means causes the end condition to be set at or near the first position. The movement of the movable means at the position is stopped, and the series of specific operations is completed. That is, in the gaming machine, in a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on the specific information, even before all movable control of the movable means based on the specific information is completed, the first position or the vicinity thereof Each time the movable means is positioned, the termination means can stop the movement of the movable means and terminate the series of specific operations, provided that the termination condition is satisfied. As a result, when the termination condition is satisfied during execution of a series of specific operations of the movable means, the movement of the movable means based on the specific information is performed at the stage where the movable means is located at or near the first position after the termination condition is satisfied. It is possible to stop and complete a series of specific operations. As a result, when it is determined that the conditions for ending a series of specific operations are satisfied, the series of specific operations of the movable means can be immediately terminated, so that termination control of the movable means can be performed smoothly. can. Therefore, in this gaming machine, it is possible to smoothly transition from a series of specific operations of the movable means to the next operation, so that the player does not feel a sense of discomfort after it is determined that the conditions for ending the series of specific operations are satisfied. The series of specific operations of the movable means can be completed without any trouble. Therefore, when another individual operation is subsequently performed after a series of specific operations of the movable means is completed, it is possible to smoothly transition from the series of specific operations to the other individual operations. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning to the action. Thereby, even if the movable means is operated for the purpose of displaying one specific performance by the display control means, it becomes possible to operate the movable means without impairing the performance effect.

[Appendix B1]
a plurality of starting ball entering means (314, 315) provided in the gaming area;
a winning lottery means (41) that performs a winning lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means;
Depending on the lottery result of the win/fail lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed on the display means (341) provided in the gaming area is determined and executed from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns). Display control means (51);
one movable mode (moveable mode A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the gaming area and operated while the first specific performance is displayed on the display means (341) is determined from among a plurality of modes; a movable control means (51) that executes the operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The movable control means (51) is configured to select one of the plurality of movable control means (51) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP evolution, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R definite variable promotion, 16R definite variable non-promotion). Based on the specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the first movable mode (moveable mode A to D), the movable means (37) performs a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement). It is intended to cause
The movable means (37) is located between a first position (standby position, intermediate actuation position 1) which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations and a second position (actuation position) which is the most moved position. It is movable and controlled by
The series of specific operations is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (actuation position) or near the first position (intermediate actuation position 1),
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined operation is executed during the movement control of the series of specific operations based on the specific information, the termination condition for the series of specific operations is satisfied (end of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation). determination means (51) for determining whether or not the
When it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied based on the determination means (51), the movable means (37) located at or near the first position is stopped and the terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific operations;
Equipped with
The periods during which the series of specific operations are executed include a first period (for example, when the operation according to drive data 1 is completed by button operation) and a second period that is longer than the first period (for example, when all processes are executed). (The operation according to drive data 1 ends).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the period during which the movable means executes a series of specific operations includes a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period. That is, in the gaming machine according to appendix B1, at least two types of modes having different operation times are set as a series of specific operations by the movable means. In this way, by setting at least two types of modes with different operation times as a series of specific actions by the movable means, various information can be provided to the player depending on the operation time of the series of specific actions by the movable means. (for example, display effects). For example, by performing a series of specific actions from a first period, advantageous information (for example, a premium display effect) is provided to the player, and by performing a series of specific actions from a second period, information advantageous to the player is provided. It becomes possible to provide disadvantageous information (for example, default display effects). As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the period in which a series of specific actions are executed and expecting to be provided with advantageous information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix C1]
a plurality of starting ball entering means (314, 315) provided in the gaming area;
a winning lottery means (41) that performs a winning lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means;
Depending on the lottery result of the win/fail lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed on the display means (341) provided in the gaming area is determined and executed from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns). Display control means (51);
one movable mode (moveable mode A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the gaming area and operated while the first specific performance is displayed on the display means (341) is determined from among a plurality of modes; a movable control means (51) that executes the operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The movable control means (51) is configured to select one of the plurality of movable control means (51) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP evolution, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R definite variable promotion, 16R definite variable non-promotion). Based on the specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the first movable mode (moveable mode A to D), the movable means (37) performs a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement). It is intended to cause
The movable means (37) is located between a first position (standby position, intermediate actuation position 1) which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations and a second position (actuation position) which is the most moved position. It is movable and controlled by
The series of specific operations is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (actuation position) or near the first position (intermediate actuation position 1),
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined operation is executed during the movement control of the series of specific operations based on the specific information, the termination condition for the series of specific operations is satisfied (end of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation). determination means (51) for determining whether or not the
When it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied based on the determination means (51), the movable means (37) located at or near the first position is stopped and the terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific operations;
Equipped with
The periods during which the movable means (37) is moved toward the second position include a first period (processing No. 03 and No. 06 of drive data 1) and a period longer than the first period. 2 (processing No. 11 and No. 15 of drive data 1).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the period in which the movable means is moved to the second position includes a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period. That is, in the gaming machine according to appendix C1, at least two types of modes are set as a series of specific operations by the movable means, in which the period during which the movable means is positioned at the second position side is different. In this way, by setting at least two types of modes in which the movable means is positioned at the second position side for different periods as a series of specific operations by the movable means, the movable means is moved to the second position side. The movable means can be moved in different ways depending on the period of time. This makes it possible to diversify the operations of the movable means in a series of specific operations. When the movable means is moved for the purpose of performance, it becomes possible to enhance the performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix D1]
a plurality of starting ball entering means (314, 315) provided in the gaming area;
a winning lottery means (41) that performs a winning lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means;
Depending on the lottery result of the win/fail lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed on the display means (341) provided in the gaming area is determined and executed from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns). Display control means (51);
one movable mode (moveable mode A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the gaming area and operated while the first specific performance is displayed on the display means (341) is determined from among a plurality of modes; a movable control means (51) that executes the operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The movable control means (51) is configured to select one of the plurality of movable control means (51) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP evolution, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R definite variable promotion, 16R definite variable non-promotion). Based on the specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the first movable mode (moveable mode A to D), the movable means (37) performs a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement). It is intended to cause
The movable means (37) is located between a first position (standby position, intermediate actuation position 1) which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations and a second position (actuation position) which is the most moved position. It is movable and controlled by
The series of specific operations is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (actuation position) or near the first position (intermediate actuation position 1),
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined operation is executed during the movement control of the series of specific operations based on the specific information, the termination condition for the series of specific operations is satisfied (end of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation). determination means (51) for determining whether or not the
When it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied based on the determination means (51), the movable means (37) located at or near the first position is stopped and the terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific operations;
Equipped with
The controls executed after completing the series of specific operations include a first control (SP evolution, SPSP evolution, 16R variable promotion) and a second control different from the first control (SP non-evolution, SPSP non-development, 16R fixed variable non-promotion), and
Regardless of whether the control executed after completing the series of specific operations is the first control or the second control, the movable means (37) is located at the first position side. A game machine characterized in that it starts in a state where

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, regardless of whether the control executed after completing the series of specific operations is the first control or the second control different from the first control, the movable means The process starts with the button being positioned at the first position. On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the series of specific operations are satisfied, the movable means located at or near the first position is stopped, and the series of specific operations is completed. In other words, the position of the movable means at the end of the series of specific operations and the starting position of the first control and second control executed after the series of specific operations are both on the first position side. Therefore, when a series of specific operations is completed, the subsequent control of the movable means is smoothly started without any discomfort, regardless of whether the subsequent control of the movable means is the first control or the second control. can be done. As a result, if it is determined that the end condition for a series of specific actions is met, even if the timing of the end determination is indefinite, the first control or the second control is determined from the series of specific actions. It is possible to move on to the next operation executed by.

[Appendix E1]
a plurality of starting ball entering means (314, 315) provided in the gaming area;
a winning lottery means (41) that performs a winning lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means;
Depending on the lottery result of the win/fail lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed on the display means (341) provided in the gaming area is determined and executed from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns). Display control means (51);
one movable mode (moveable mode A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the gaming area and operated while the first specific performance is displayed on the display means (341) is determined from among a plurality of modes; a movable control means (51) that executes the operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The movable control means (51) is configured to select one of the plurality of movable control means (51) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP evolution, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R definite variable promotion, 16R definite variable non-promotion). Based on the specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the first movable mode (moveable mode A to D), the movable means (37) performs a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement). It is intended to cause
The movable means (37) is located between a first position (standby position, intermediate actuation position 1) which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations and a second position (actuation position) which is the most moved position. It is movable and controlled by
The series of specific operations is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (actuation position) or near the first position (intermediate actuation position 1),
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined operation is executed during the movement control of the series of specific operations based on the specific information, the termination condition for the series of specific operations is satisfied (end of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation). determination means (51) for determining whether or not the
When it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied based on the determination means (51), the movable means (37) located at or near the first position is stopped and the terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific operations;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the termination conditions of the series of specific operations is satisfied based on a predetermined gaming operation (operation of an operation button) by a player.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, at least one of the conditions for ending the series of specific operations of the movable means is satisfied based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player. In this way, at least one of the conditions for ending the series of specific operations of the movable means is satisfied based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player, and the series of specific operations of the movable means are satisfied based on the predetermined gaming operation of the player. Even if a series of termination conditions for a specific operation are satisfied before all control processing for the specific operation is completed, the determination means is determined when the movable means is located at or near the first position, which is the initial position side. It is determined whether the termination conditions for the series of specific operations are satisfied. Therefore, if the termination condition for the series of specific operations is satisfied before all control processes for the series of specific operations of the movable means are completed due to a predetermined game operation by the player, the movable means returns to the first position after the termination condition is satisfied. The series of specific operations can be completed at a stage at or near the location. As a result, when the conditions for ending a series of specific actions are met, the series of specific actions of the movable means can be immediately ended, so the player may feel a sense of discomfort after the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are met. A series of specific operations of the movable means can be completed without having to be memorized. Therefore, if another action is subsequently performed after the end of a series of specific actions of the movable means, it is possible to smoothly transition from the series of specific actions to the other action. This prevents people from feeling uncomfortable. Thereby, even if the movable means is operated for the purpose of displaying one specific performance by the display control means, it becomes possible to operate the movable means without impairing the performance effect.

[Appendix F1]
a plurality of starting ball entering means (314, 315) provided in the gaming area;
a winning lottery means (41) that performs a winning lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means;
Depending on the lottery result of the win/fail lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed on the display means (341) provided in the gaming area is determined and executed from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns). Display control means (51);
one movable mode (moveable mode A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the gaming area and operated while the first specific performance is displayed on the display means (341) is determined from among a plurality of modes; a movable control means (51) that executes the operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The movable control means (51) is configured to select one of the plurality of movable control means (51) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP evolution, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R definite variable promotion, 16R definite variable non-promotion). Based on the specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the first movable mode (moveable mode A to D), the movable means (37) performs a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement). It is intended to cause
The movable means (37) is located between a first position (standby position, intermediate actuation position 1) which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations and a second position (actuation position) which is the most moved position. It is movable and controlled by
The series of specific operations is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (actuation position) or near the first position (intermediate actuation position 1),
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined operation is executed during the movement control of the series of specific operations based on the specific information, the termination condition for the series of specific operations is satisfied (end of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation). determination means (51) for determining whether or not the
When it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied based on the determination means (51), the movable means (37) located at or near the first position is stopped and the terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific operations;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the control executed after completing the series of specific operations includes a control target (symbol display section 341, display effect) different from the movable means (37).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the control executed after the series of specific operations of the movable means is completed includes a controlled object different from the movable means. In this way, the control executed after completing a series of specific operations of the movable means includes a control target different from that of the movable means, so that the control executed after completing a series of specific operations of the movable means is different from that of the movable means. It becomes possible to reapply the information that was applied to the target by the movable means. As a result, even if the player misses the operation of the movable means or does not understand the content provided by the operation of the movable means, the player can be reminded of the information on the controlled object different from the movable means. It becomes possible to grant. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the control executed after the series of specific operations of the movable means includes a control target different from the movable means, so that the control executed after the series of specific operations of the movable means is executed later according to the operation of the movable means. It also becomes possible to specify or suggest a performance. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the operation of the movable means and expecting that the performance that is advantageous to the player will be specified or suggested, thereby increasing the interest of the game. is improved.

[Appendix G1]
a plurality of starting ball entering means (314, 315) provided in the gaming area;
a winning lottery means (41) that performs a winning lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means;
Depending on the lottery result of the win/fail lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed on the display means (341) provided in the gaming area is determined and executed from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns). Display control means (51);
one movable mode (moveable mode A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the gaming area and operated while the first specific performance is displayed on the display means (341) is determined from among a plurality of modes; a movable control means (51) that executes the operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The movable control means (51) is configured to select one of the plurality of movable control means (51) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP evolution, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R definite variable promotion, 16R definite variable non-promotion). Based on the specific information (drive data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the first movable mode (moveable mode A to D), the movable means (37) performs a series of specific operations (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating movement). It is intended to cause
The movable means (37) is located between a first position (standby position, intermediate actuation position 1) which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations and a second position (actuation position) which is the most moved position. It is movable and controlled by
The series of specific operations is configured to perform a predetermined operation multiple times to position the movable means at the first position (actuation position) or near the first position (intermediate actuation position 1),
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined operation is executed during the movement control of the series of specific operations based on the specific information, the termination condition for the series of specific operations is satisfied (end of all processing based on drive data 1, button operation). determination means (51) for determining whether or not the
When it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied based on the determination means (51), the movable means (37) located at or near the first position is stopped and the terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific operations;
Equipped with
When the movable control means (51) executes control to move the movable means (37) toward the second position in the series of specific operations, the movable control means (51) determines whether a condition for ending the series of specific operations is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that it does not determine whether or not the game is rejected.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1, when the movable means is controlled to move to the second position side in a series of specific operations of the movable means, it is determined whether the termination condition of the series of specific operations is satisfied. do not. In this way, when the movable means is controlled to move to the second position side in a series of specific operations of the movable means, it is not determined whether or not the termination condition of the series of specific operations is satisfied. This prevents it from being determined that the termination condition is met when the movable means is moved to the second position. Therefore, when the movable means is moved to the second position, the series of specific operations of the movable means is prevented from being terminated, so that when the series of specific operations moves to another operation, the player This will prevent you from feeling uncomfortable. Thereby, even if the movable means is operated for the purpose of displaying one specific performance by the display control means, it becomes possible to operate the movable means without impairing the performance effect.

[Appendix A1]
Equipped with a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area by adjusting the firing force by the player,
The first game is played by shooting a game ball in a first direction (a game played with left-handed players), and the second game is played by shooting a game ball in a second direction different from the first direction (a game played with right-handed players). games), and can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable games (special pattern games) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols);
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
auxiliary means (315b) for assisting in establishing the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). It is a gaming machine,
a first ball entering means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) in a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. A specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
Equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state b), the predetermined specific period of gaming ends. The gaming machine is characterized in that the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving gaming state) corresponding to the specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1, in a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means for assisting the establishment of the starting condition for the variable symbol game is a first control state that does not correspond to a specific gaming state, the opening/closing means for a predetermined period of time. When a game ball enters the specified ball entry area during the opening of the game and a game for a specific period that is different from the special game as a profit game ends, the first control state corresponds to the specific game state. The control state is changed to the second control state. That is, in the present invention, even if the control state of the auxiliary means is in the predetermined gaming state, which is the first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, the game ball is not allowed to enter the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open. By making the ball fly and executing the game for a predetermined specific period, it is possible to generate a specific gaming state in which the control state for the auxiliary means is the second control state. This makes it possible to generate a specific gaming state again even if the specific gaming state has ended, so if the gaming machine is left unattended because the specific gaming state has ended and the specific gaming state will not occur. Therefore, a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine is suppressed.

[Appendix B1]
Equipped with a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area by adjusting the firing force by the player,
The first game is played by shooting a game ball in a first direction (a game played with left-handed players), and the second game is played by shooting a game ball in a second direction different from the first direction (a game played with right-handed players). games), and can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable games (special pattern games) of symbols (special patterns, decorative patterns);
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
auxiliary means (315b) for assisting in establishing the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). It is a gaming machine,
a first ball entering means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) in a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. A specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state b), the predetermined specific period of gaming ends. If so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving gaming state) corresponding to the specific gaming state,
Equipped with a signal output means (101) capable of outputting a signal according to the gaming state to the outside of the gaming machine,
The signal output means outputs a special signal (jackpot signal 1) when executing the special game as the profit game, and does not output the special signal when executing the specific period game as the profit game. A gaming machine with special features.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the signal output means capable of outputting a signal according to the gaming state to the outside of the gaming machine outputs a special signal when executing a special game as a profit game, and outputs a special signal when executing a special game as a profit game, and performs a game for a specific period as a profit game. When executed, no special signal is output. In this way, the signal output means capable of outputting a signal according to the gaming state to the outside of the gaming machine outputs a special signal when executing a special game as a profit game, and outputs a special signal when executing a game for a specific period as a profit game. By not outputting the special signal, the hall computer at the gaming parlor can grasp whether the special game is being executed and the number of times the special game has been executed, based on the special signal, and can also determine whether the special game has been executed during a specific period. When a game is executed, the special signal is not output, thereby preventing the specific period game from being added to the number of times the special game has been executed. This makes it possible to display the accurate number of times a special game has been played, which does not reflect the number of times the game has been played during a specific period, on a so-called data display installed on the top of the gaming machine.

[Appendix C1]
Equipped with a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area by adjusting the firing force by the player,
The first game is played by shooting a game ball in a first direction (a game played with left-handed players), and the second game is played by shooting a game ball in a second direction different from the first direction (a game played with right-handed players). games), and can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable games (special pattern games) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols);
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
auxiliary means (315b) for assisting in establishing the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). It is a gaming machine,
a first ball entering means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) in a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. A specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
Equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state b), the predetermined specific period of gaming ends. If so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving gaming state) corresponding to the specific gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying, on the display means, gaming state information for a gaming state corresponding to the end of the execution of the game for the specific period, when the execution of the game for the specific period ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, when the execution of the game for a specific period that is executed based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means is open, Game state information for a game state corresponding to the end of execution of a specific period game is displayed on a display means capable of executing a variable symbol game. That is, in the gaming machine according to appendix C1, when the execution of the game for a specific period ends, the control state of the auxiliary means for assisting the establishment of the starting condition for the symbol variation game is changed to the second control state corresponding to the specific gaming state. Game status information indicating that this is displayed on a display means that allows a symbol variation game to be executed. As a result, the player can confirm that the player is in the second control state corresponding to the specific gaming state, that is, when the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches the predetermined number without executing the special game, the specific gaming state is activated. It is possible to understand that the situation is likely to occur.

[Appendix D1]
Equipped with a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area by adjusting the firing force by the player,
The first game is played by shooting a game ball in a first direction (a game played with left-handed players), and the second game is played by shooting a game ball in a second direction different from the first direction (a game played with right-handed players). games), and can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable games (special pattern games) of symbols (special patterns, decorative patterns);
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
auxiliary means (315b) for assisting in establishing the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). It is a gaming machine,
a first ball entering means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) in a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. A specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state b), the predetermined specific period of gaming ends. If so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving gaming state) corresponding to the specific gaming state,
Equipped with a signal output means (101) capable of outputting a signal according to the gaming state to the outside of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized in that the signal output means outputs an identifiable identification signal when executing the specific period game as the profit game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the signal output means capable of outputting a signal according to the gaming state to the outside of the gaming machine outputs an identifiable identification signal when executing a game for a specific period as a profit game. In this way, when the signal output means capable of outputting a signal according to the gaming state to the outside of the gaming machine executes a game for a specific period, the signal outputting means can output an identifiable identification signal (V winning jackpot gaming signal). Based on the identification signal, the hall computer of the gaming parlor can determine that the game will be played during the specific period and the number of times the game will be played during the specific period.

[Appendix E1]
Equipped with a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area by adjusting the firing force by the player,
The first game is played by shooting a game ball in a first direction (a game played with left-handed players), and the second game is played by shooting a game ball in a second direction different from the first direction (a game played with right-handed players). games), and can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable games (special pattern games) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols);
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
auxiliary means (315b) for assisting in establishing the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). It is a gaming machine,
a first ball entering means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) in a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. A specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
Equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state b), the predetermined specific period of gaming ends. If so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving gaming state) corresponding to the specific gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized in that a third ball entering means (316) different from the second ball entering means is provided as a ball entering means that enters a specific open/close state in the special game.

The gaming machine according to appendix E1 includes a third ball entering means different from the second ball entering means as a ball entering means that enters a specific opening/closing state in a special game as a profit game. Here, the second ball entry means is provided with a specific ball entry area, and provides an opportunity to execute a game for a specific period as a profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area. . That is, in the gaming machine according to appendix E1, the third ball entry means that opens and closes in the special game is provided as different from the second ball entry means that provides an opportunity to execute the game for a specific period. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide the player with a gaming profit different from that of the specific period game through the special game. In addition, since the third ball entry means is different from the second ball entry means, it is possible to execute the special game and the specific period game independently, so the special game and the specific period game can be executed at the same time. On the contrary, it is possible to realize a gaming experience in which a special game and a specific period game are not executed at the same time. For example, it is possible to enable execution of a special game while a specific period game is being executed, but to disable execution of a specific period game while a special game is being executed.

[Appendix F1]
Equipped with a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area by adjusting the firing force by the player,
The first game is played by shooting a game ball in a first direction (a game played with left-handed players), and the second game is played by shooting a game ball in a second direction different from the first direction (a game played with right-handed players). games), and can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable games (special pattern games) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols);
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
auxiliary means (315b) for assisting in establishing the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). It is a gaming machine,
a first ball entering means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) in a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. A specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
Equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state b), the predetermined specific period of gaming ends. If so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving gaming state) corresponding to the specific gaming state,
In the predetermined gaming state, when a specific number of gaming balls are fired toward the specific flow path, the number of profit gaming balls that the player can obtain is smaller than the specific number of balls. A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, in a predetermined gaming state, a player obtains the following when a specific number of game balls are fired toward a specific flow path in which the game balls can enter the first ball entry means. The number of possible profit game balls is smaller than the specific number of balls. Here, the control state of the auxiliary means is changed from the first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state to the second control state that corresponds to the specific gaming state when the specific period of play as a profit game ends. In this specific period game, the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means is opened based on the game ball flowing down a specific flow path entering the first ball entering means. This is executed based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means while the opening/closing means is open. Therefore, in order to execute the game for a specific period in order to change the control state of the auxiliary means from the first control state to the second control state, the first ball entering means fires a game ball toward a specific flow path. However, if the control state of the auxiliary means is changed from the first control state to the second control state due to the player's convenience, the number of game balls that can be acquired is greater than the number of game balls fired. If the number increases, the number of balls held by the player will increase by firing the game balls toward a specific flow path, leading to what is called a strategic hit. Therefore, as in the gaming machine according to appendix F1, when a specific number of game balls are launched toward a specific flow path in which game balls can enter the first ball entry means in a predetermined gaming state, the game The system is configured such that the number of profit playing balls that can be obtained by the player is less than the specific number of balls, and when the control state of the auxiliary means is changed from the first control state to the second control state, the ball is fired. Since the number of game balls that can be acquired can be made smaller than the number of game balls, so-called attack hitting is prevented.

[Appendix G1]
Equipped with a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area by adjusting the firing force by the player,
The first game is played by shooting a game ball in a first direction (a game played with left-handed players), and the second game is played by shooting a game ball in a second direction different from the first direction (a game played with right-handed players). games), and can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable games (special pattern games) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols);
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
auxiliary means (315b) for assisting in establishing the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). It is a gaming machine,
a first ball entering means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) in a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. A specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
Equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state b), the predetermined specific period of gaming ends. If so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving gaming state) corresponding to the specific gaming state,
When a predetermined game ball enters the first ball entry means during execution of the special game as the profit game, the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means is opened and closed for the predetermined period of time with respect to the entered ball. A game machine characterized by comprising means for setting the machine so that it will not be opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, when a predetermined game ball enters the first ball entering means during execution of a special game as a profit game, the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means is activated for the entering ball. It is set so that it will not be opened for a predetermined period of time. In this way, when a predetermined game ball enters the first ball entering means during execution of a special game as a profit game, the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means is opened for a predetermined period with respect to the entered ball. Since the game ball is set so as not to enter the specific ball entering area of the second ball entering means during the execution of the special game, it is possible to prevent the game from entering as a profit game during the execution of the special game. No games are played during the specific period. As a result, the game does not end for a specific period while the special game is being executed, so the control state of the auxiliary means is prevented from being changed from the first control state to the second control state while the special game is being executed. .

[Appendix H1]
Equipped with a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area by adjusting the firing force by the player,
The first game is played by shooting a game ball in a first direction (a game played with left-handed players), and the second game is played by shooting a game ball in a second direction different from the first direction (a game played with right-handed players). games), and can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable games (special pattern games) of symbols (special patterns, decorative patterns);
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
auxiliary means (315b) for assisting in establishing the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). It is a gaming machine,
a first ball entering means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) in a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. A specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
Equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state b), the predetermined specific period of gaming ends. If so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving gaming state) corresponding to the specific gaming state,
The opening executing means opens and closes the second ball entering means based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means while the variable game is being executed based on the establishment of the starting condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the means can be opened for the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means is predetermined based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means while the variable game is being executed based on the establishment of the starting condition. It is possible to open it for a period of time. In this way, the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means is opened for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means while the variable game is being executed based on the establishment of the starting condition. By being possible, the game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means during the execution of the variable game, so a specific period game as a profit game can be executed during the execution of the variable game. . As a result, since the game may end for a specific period during the execution of the variable game, it becomes possible to change the control state of the auxiliary means from the first control state to the second control state during the execution of the variable game.

[Appendix I1]
Equipped with a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area by adjusting the firing force by the player,
The first game is played by shooting a game ball in a first direction (a game played with left-handed players), and the second game is played by shooting a game ball in a second direction different from the first direction (a game played with right-handed players). games), and can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable games (special pattern games) of symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols);
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
auxiliary means (315b) for assisting in establishing the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). It is a gaming machine,
a first ball entering means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) in a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. A specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state b), the predetermined specific period of gaming ends. If so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving gaming state) corresponding to the specific gaming state,
The probability that the result of the variable game becomes the predetermined result and the special game as the profit game is executed includes a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability. ,
If the probability is one of the first probability and the second probability before the execution of the specific period game, the probability is changed from the one probability based on the execution of the specific period game. , A gaming machine characterized in that the first probability and the second probability are configured so that the one probability is not changed to the other probability that is different from the one probability.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, the probability that the result of the variable game before the execution of the specific period game becomes a predetermined result and the special game as a profit game is executed is higher than the first probability and the first probability. If one of the second probabilities is one of the second probabilities, based on the execution of the game for a specific period, the first probability and the second probability are different from the other probability. It is configured so that the probability cannot be changed. That is, in the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, the probability that the result of the variable game will be the predetermined result is the same before and after the specific period game is executed. In this way, since the probability that the result of the variable game will be the predetermined result is the same before and after the specific period game is executed, the probability is changed to a second level that is advantageous to the player after the specific period game ends. Since the probability is prevented from being changed to the first probability, which is a low probability that is disadvantageous to the player, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by playing the game for a specific period.

[Appendix A1]
a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) that variably displays a predetermined pattern (regular pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
a variable ball entry means (316) that is provided in the game area and that performs opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising:
an updating means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining number counter) based on establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of special figure game) in the variable display;
In a specific gaming state (low probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving gaming state) is achieved at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining number counter = 0). Profit status generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) that performs predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
A determination means (41) that executes a predetermined determination (special map jackpot lottery) based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
When the result of the predetermined judgment executed by the judgment means is a specific judgment result, and a predetermined gaming condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player. a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game);
Equipped with
The notification control means is configured to control the notification control means at a predetermined timing (a predetermined period of time before the specific information enters the predetermined update state) when the predetermined determination result executed by the determination means is the specific determination result. a switching means (51) that notifies that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point) and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing; A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific determination result, the specific information updated by the updating means based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display is updated as the predetermined update. Until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the state, the first notification mode is used to notify that the specific determination result has been reached, and the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. In this way, the fact that the result of a predetermined determination has become a specific determination result is notified in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the predetermined update state is reached, and the specific determination result after the predetermined timing is notified. By switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at the timing, whether the timing at which the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result is before the predetermined timing is reached or after the specific timing is reached. can be judged. As a result, the player can determine whether or not it is advantageous to receive a specific benefit based on the specific judgment result, based on the type of notification mode that allows the timing of the specific judgment result to be determined. It can be determined whether or not a predetermined gaming condition is satisfied. As a result, based on the type of notification mode that allows the timing of the specific judgment result to be determined, the player can either satisfy the predetermined gaming conditions for the current specific judgment result and receive a specific profit, or If you do not meet the specified gaming conditions for the specified judgment result and do not receive the specified profit, and the specified information is later updated to the specified state and the specified profit state occurs, then for the specified judgment result Since the player can choose whether to receive a specific profit by fulfilling predetermined gaming conditions, it becomes possible to receive a specific profit at a timing that is determined to be advantageous by the player himself. Therefore, players can avoid receiving a specific benefit when receiving a specific benefit is judged to be disadvantageous. A decrease in interest and interest in games caused by putting them away is prevented.

[Appendix B1]
a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) that variably displays a predetermined pattern (regular pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
a variable ball entry means (316) that is provided in the gaming area and performs opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising:
an updating means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining number counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special figure game) in the variable display;
In a specific gaming state (low probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving gaming state) is achieved at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining number counter = 0). Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) that performs predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
A determination means (41) that executes a predetermined determination (special map jackpot lottery) based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
When the result of the predetermined judgment executed by the judgment means is a specific judgment result, and a predetermined gaming condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player. a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game);
Equipped with
The notification control means is configured to control the notification control means at a predetermined timing (a predetermined period of time before the specific information enters the predetermined update state) when the predetermined determination result executed by the determination means is the specific determination result. a switching means (51) that notifies that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point) and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing; Prepare,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for providing notification in a third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, when the predetermined determination result is a specific determination result, the specific information that is updated by the update means based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display is updated as the predetermined update. Until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the state, the first notification mode is used to notify that the specific determination result has been reached, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode, and the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. The notification is made in the third notification mode between the timing and the specific timing. In this way, the first notification mode is displayed until a predetermined timing, the third notification mode is displayed between the predetermined timing and a specific timing, and the current specific judgment is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing. It becomes possible to determine whether or not to receive a specific profit by establishing predetermined gaming conditions in response to the result, using three types of periods. Specifically, the notification timing of the first notification mode (period up to a predetermined timing), the notification timing of the third notification mode (period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing), and the notification timing of the second notification mode (specific timing) In the following period), based on the type of notification mode that allows the timing of the specific judgment result to be determined, whether to establish a predetermined gaming condition for the current specific judgment result and receive a specific profit, or to receive a specific profit from the current specific judgment result. If the specified gaming conditions are not established for the specified judgment result and the specified profit is not received, and the specified information is later updated to the specified state and the specified profit state occurs, then the specified judgment result is It is possible to determine whether or not to receive a specific profit by fulfilling predetermined gaming conditions.

Here, there are cases in which a predetermined gaming condition is established for a specific judgment result and a specific profit is received, and a case in which the predetermined gaming condition is not established for a specific judgment result and a specific profit is not received, and the specified profit is not obtained later. Whichever is more advantageous for the player is the case where a predetermined gaming condition is established for a specific judgment result after the information is in a predetermined updated state and a predetermined profit state occurs and a specific profit is received. Which one is more advantageous varies depending on the timing of the specific determination result, but the borderline of which one is more advantageous is not uniformly determined and may change depending on the gaming situation. For example, there are differences in the rate of balls entering the starting ball area based on differences in the firing strength of game balls in the gaming area, the stability of the firing strength of game balls originating from gaming machines, and the difference in the rate of ball entry into the starting ball area based on differences in the firing strength of game balls in the gaming area, the stability of the firing strength of game balls originating from gaming machines, It can change depending on various factors such as the degree of deterioration over time and the presence or absence of so-called stop shots for the purpose of shooting game balls wastefully. Therefore, the fact that the result of a predetermined determination has become a specific determination result is notified in the third notification mode before switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, thereby reducing the variation in the borderline. It becomes possible to select a corresponding player. As a result, if the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result at a timing near the expected borderline, the player can move to the starting ball entry area until the result of the predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result. It is possible to determine whether or not it is advantageous to satisfy a predetermined game condition and receive a specific profit by taking into consideration the game situation such as the ball entry rate.

In addition, if the third notification mode is used to notify the user between the predetermined timing and the specific timing near the border line, and the first notification mode is used, the specific timing will not be determined because the border line has not been reached. While it is clarified that it is advantageous to receive a specific profit by establishing predetermined gaming conditions for the result, when being notified in the second notification mode, the predetermined benefit is If the specified gaming condition is not established and the specified profit is not received, then the specified gaming condition is established for the specified judgment result after the specified information is updated to a specified state and the specified profit state occurs. It will be clearer if the company receives specific benefits. As a result, when the player is notified by the first notification mode or the second notification mode, the player can easily judge whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for him/her to satisfy the predetermined gaming condition, and thus You will definitely be able to receive advantageous benefits for yourself.

[Appendix C1]
a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) that variably displays a predetermined pattern (regular pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
a variable ball entry means (316) that is provided in the gaming area and performs opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising:
an updating means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining number counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special figure game) in the variable display;
In a specific gaming state (low probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving gaming state) is achieved at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining number counter = 0). Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) that performs predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
A determination means (41) that executes a predetermined determination (special map jackpot lottery) based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
When the result of the predetermined judgment executed by the judgment means is a specific judgment result, and a predetermined gaming condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player. a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game);
Equipped with
The notification control means is configured to control the notification control means at a predetermined timing (a predetermined period of time before the specific information enters the predetermined updated state) when the predetermined determination result executed by the determination means is the specific determination result. a switching means (51) that notifies that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point) and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing; Prepare,
comprising means for providing notification in a third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing;
The gaming machine characterized in that the third notification mode is a mode in which the first notification mode and the second notification mode are switched and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific determination result, the specific information updated by the updating means based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display is updated by the predetermined update. Until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the state, the first notification mode is used to notify that the specific determination result has been reached, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode, and the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. The notification is made in the third notification mode between the timing and the specific timing. In this way, the first notification mode is displayed until a predetermined timing, the third notification mode is displayed between the predetermined timing and a specific timing, and the current specific judgment is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing. It becomes possible to determine whether or not to receive a specific profit by establishing predetermined gaming conditions in response to the result, using three types of periods. Specifically, the notification timing of the first notification mode (period up to a predetermined timing), the notification timing of the third notification mode (period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing), and the notification timing of the second notification mode (specific timing) In the following period), based on the type of notification mode that allows the timing of the specific judgment result to be determined, whether to establish a predetermined gaming condition for the current specific judgment result and receive a specific profit, or to receive a specific profit from the current specific judgment result. If the specified gaming conditions are not established for the specified judgment result and the specified profit is not received, and the specified information is later updated to the specified state and the specified profit state occurs, then the specified judgment result is It is possible to determine whether or not to receive a specific profit by fulfilling predetermined gaming conditions.

Here, there are cases in which a predetermined gaming condition is established for a specific judgment result and a specific profit is received, and a case in which the predetermined gaming condition is not established for a specific judgment result and a specific profit is not received, and the specified profit is not obtained later. Whichever is more advantageous for the player is the case where a predetermined gaming condition is established for a specific judgment result after the information is in a predetermined updated state and a predetermined profit state occurs and a specific profit is received. Which one is more advantageous varies depending on the timing of the specific determination result, but the borderline of which one is more advantageous is not uniformly determined and may change depending on the gaming situation. For example, there are differences in the rate of balls entering the starting ball area based on differences in the firing strength of game balls in the gaming area, the stability of the firing strength of game balls originating from gaming machines, and the difference in the rate of ball entry into the starting ball area based on differences in the firing strength of game balls in the gaming area, the stability of the firing strength of game balls originating from gaming machines, It can change depending on various factors such as the degree of deterioration over time and the presence or absence of so-called stop shots for the purpose of shooting game balls wastefully. Therefore, the fact that the result of a predetermined determination has become a specific determination result is notified in the third notification mode before switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, thereby reducing the variation in the borderline. It becomes possible to select a corresponding player. As a result, if the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result at a timing near the expected borderline, the player can move to the starting ball entry area until the result of the predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result. It is possible to determine whether or not it is advantageous to satisfy a predetermined game condition and receive a specific profit by taking into consideration the game situation such as the ball entry rate.

In particular, when the timing at which the result of a predetermined determination becomes a specific determination result is between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are switched and notified as the third notification mode. This makes it possible to clarify that the benefit situation corresponds to the first notification mode and the benefit situation corresponding to the second notification mode. As a result, it is possible to decide whether to receive a benefit based on a specific judgment result, or to receive a benefit based on the specific information being in a predetermined updated state without receiving a benefit based on a specific judgment result. It becomes possible to more reliably make the player understand that the situation is difficult to judge whether it is advantageous or not.

In addition, if the third notification mode is used to notify the user between the predetermined timing and the specific timing near the border line, and the first notification mode is used, the specific timing will not be determined because the border line has not been reached. While it is clarified that it is advantageous to receive a specific profit by establishing predetermined gaming conditions for the result, when being notified in the second notification mode, the predetermined benefit is If the specified gaming condition is not established and the specified profit is not received, then the specified gaming condition is established for the specified judgment result after the specified information is updated to a specified state and the specified profit state occurs. It will be clearer if the company receives specific benefits. As a result, when the player is notified by the first notification mode or the second notification mode, the player can easily judge whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for him/her to satisfy the predetermined gaming condition, and thus You will definitely be able to receive advantageous benefits for yourself.

[Appendix D1]
a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) that variably displays a predetermined pattern (regular pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
a variable ball entry means (316) that is provided in the game area and that performs opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising:
an updating means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining number counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special figure game) in the variable display;
In a specific gaming state (low probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving gaming state) is achieved at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining number counter = 0). Profit status generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) that performs predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
A determination means (41) that executes a predetermined determination (special map jackpot lottery) based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
When the result of the predetermined judgment executed by the judgment means is a specific judgment result, and a predetermined gaming condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player. a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game);
Equipped with
The notification control means is configured to control the notification control means at a predetermined timing (a predetermined period of time before the specific information enters the predetermined updated state) when the predetermined determination result executed by the determination means is the specific determination result. a switching means (51) that notifies that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point) and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing; Prepare,
comprising means for providing notification in a third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the third notification mode is a mode in which a specific movable object (39) is moved so as to overlap the display surface of the display means.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific determination result, the specific information updated by the updating means based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display is updated as the predetermined update. Until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the state, the first notification mode is used to notify that the specific determination result has been reached, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode, and the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. The notification is made in the third notification mode between the timing and the specific timing. In this way, the first notification mode is displayed until a predetermined timing, the third notification mode is displayed between the predetermined timing and a specific timing, and the current specific judgment is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing. It becomes possible to determine whether or not to receive a specific profit by establishing predetermined gaming conditions in response to the result, using three types of periods. Specifically, the notification timing of the first notification mode (period up to a predetermined timing), the notification timing of the third notification mode (period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing), and the notification timing of the second notification mode (specific timing) In the following period), based on the type of notification mode that allows the timing of the specific judgment result to be determined, whether to establish a predetermined gaming condition for the current specific judgment result and receive a specific profit, or to receive a specific profit from the current specific judgment result. If the specified gaming conditions are not established for the specified judgment result and the specified profit is not received, and the specified information is later updated to the specified state and the specified profit state occurs, then the specified judgment result is It is possible to determine whether or not to receive a specific profit by fulfilling predetermined gaming conditions.

Here, there are cases in which a predetermined gaming condition is established for a specific judgment result and a specific profit is received, and a case in which the predetermined gaming condition is not established for a specific judgment result and a specific profit is not received, and the specified profit is not obtained later. Whichever is more advantageous for the player is the case where a predetermined gaming condition is established for a specific judgment result after the information is in a predetermined updated state and a predetermined profit state occurs and a specific profit is received. Which one is more advantageous varies depending on the timing of the specific determination result, but the borderline of which one is more advantageous is not uniformly determined and may change depending on the gaming situation. For example, there are differences in the rate of balls entering the starting ball area based on differences in the firing strength of game balls in the gaming area, the stability of the firing strength of game balls originating from gaming machines, and the difference in the rate of ball entry into the starting ball area based on differences in the firing strength of game balls in the gaming area, the stability of the firing strength of game balls originating from gaming machines, It can change depending on various factors such as the degree of deterioration over time and the presence or absence of so-called stop shots for the purpose of shooting game balls wastefully. Therefore, the fact that the result of a predetermined determination has become a specific determination result is notified in the third notification mode before switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, thereby reducing the variation in the borderline. It becomes possible to select a corresponding player. As a result, if the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result at a timing near the expected borderline, the player can move to the starting ball entry area until the result of the predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result. It is possible to determine whether or not it is advantageous to satisfy a predetermined game condition and receive a specific profit by taking into consideration the game situation such as the ball entry rate.

In particular, when the timing at which the predetermined determination result becomes a specific determination result is between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, the specific movable object is movable so as to overlap the display surface of the display means as the third notification mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to clarify that the benefit situation is between the benefit situation corresponding to the first notification mode and the benefit situation corresponding to the second notification mode by the movement of the movable object. As a result, it is possible to decide whether to receive benefits based on a specific judgment result or to receive benefits based on specific information being in a predetermined updated state without receiving benefits based on a specific judgment result. It becomes possible to more reliably make the player understand that the situation is difficult to judge whether it is advantageous or not.

In addition, if the third notification mode is used to notify the user between the predetermined timing and the specific timing near the border line, and the first notification mode is used, the specific timing will not be determined because the border line has not been reached. While it is clarified that it is advantageous to receive a specific profit by establishing predetermined gaming conditions for the result, when being notified in the second notification mode, the predetermined benefit is If the specified gaming condition is not established and the specified profit is not received, then the specified gaming condition is established for the specified judgment result after the specified information is updated to a specified state and the specified profit state occurs. It will be clearer if the company receives specific benefits. As a result, when the player is notified by the first notification mode or the second notification mode, the player can easily judge whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for him/her to satisfy the predetermined gaming condition, and thus You will definitely be able to receive advantageous benefits for yourself.

[Appendix E1]
a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) that variably displays a predetermined pattern (regular pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
a variable ball entry means (316) that is provided in the game area and that performs opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising:
an updating means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining number counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special figure game) in the variable display;
In a specific gaming state (low probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving gaming state) is achieved at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining number counter = 0). Profit status generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) that performs predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
A determination means (41) that executes a predetermined determination (special map jackpot lottery) based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
When the result of the predetermined judgment executed by the judgment means is a specific judgment result, and a predetermined gaming condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player. a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game);
Equipped with
The notification control means is configured to control the notification control means at a predetermined timing (a predetermined period of time before the specific information enters the predetermined updated state) when the predetermined determination result executed by the determination means is the specific determination result. a switching means (51) that notifies that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point) and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing; Prepare,
If the second notification mode is displayed when the result of the predetermined judgment executed by the judgment means is the specific judgment result, a new notification of the predetermined symbol is displayed without generating the specific profit. A gaming machine characterized by being able to perform a variable display.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, if the second notification mode is displayed when the predetermined determination result is a specific determination result, a new variable display of the predetermined symbol is executed without generating a specific profit. It is possible. In this way, when the result of a predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result and it is displayed in the second notification mode, it is possible to execute a new variable display of the predetermined symbol without generating a specific profit. If the predetermined game condition is not satisfied when the predetermined determination result is a specific determination result, the specific information can be updated based on the establishment of the update condition in the variable display. . As a result, by not establishing the predetermined game condition when the predetermined determination result is a specific determination result, it becomes possible to continue updating the specific information and bring the specific information into a predetermined updated state. As a result, you will not receive a specific profit without establishing the predetermined gaming conditions for the specific judgment result, and after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and a predetermined profit state has occurred, the specific judgment result will not be received. Since it is possible to receive a specific benefit by establishing predetermined gaming conditions for To prevent a decrease in interest and interest in games caused by receiving a specific profit at an unexpected timing.

[Appendix F1]
a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) that variably displays a predetermined pattern (regular pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
a variable ball entry means (316) that is provided in the gaming area and performs opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising:
an updating means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining number counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special figure game) in the variable display;
In a specific gaming state (low probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving gaming state) is achieved at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining number counter = 0). Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) that performs predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
A determination means (41) that executes a predetermined determination (special map jackpot lottery) based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
When the result of the predetermined judgment executed by the judgment means is a specific judgment result, and a predetermined gaming condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player. a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game);
Equipped with
The notification control means is configured to control the notification control means at a predetermined timing (a predetermined period of time before the specific information enters the predetermined updated state) when the predetermined determination result executed by the determination means is the specific determination result. a switching means (51) that notifies that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point) and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing; Prepare,
A gaming machine characterized in that a special performance is executed during variable display of the predetermined symbol between the predetermined timing and the specific timing.

Here, as mentioned above, when the result of a predetermined judgment is a specific judgment result, there is a case where a predetermined gaming condition is established for the specific judgment result and a specific profit is received, and a case where the specific judgment result is Not receiving a specific profit without fulfilling a predetermined gaming condition, and later establishing a predetermined gaming condition for a specific judgment result after the specific information has been updated to a predetermined state and a predetermined profit state has occurred. Which one is more advantageous for the player, depending on the timing of the specific judgment result, but the borderline of which one is more advantageous is uniformly determined. However, it can also change depending on the gaming situation. On the other hand, if the result of the predetermined judgment is a specific judgment result, the period during which the predetermined gaming conditions for generating a specific profit can be established is limited due to the timing of generating a specific profit. is imposed. Therefore, when a predetermined notification is made in the first notification mode or the second notification mode when the predetermined determination result is a specific determination result, the notification time is also subject to restrictions. As a result, the player has no choice but to judge whether or not to satisfy the predetermined gaming condition in a relatively short time after the predetermined notification starts in the first notification mode or the second notification mode. It's easy to make mistakes, which can put you in a disadvantageous situation.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix F1, when the predetermined determination result is a specific determination result, the specific information updated by the updating means based on the establishment of the update condition in the variable display is A special performance is executed during the variable display of a predetermined symbol between a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the state and a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing. That is, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, even if the result of the predetermined determination is not a specific determination result, the special performance is executed during the variable display of the predetermined symbol. Therefore, during the fluctuating display of a predetermined symbol at a time when the result of a predetermined judgment is not a specific judgment result, it is possible to perform a predetermined notification by a special effect instead of the first notification mode or the second notification mode. It becomes possible. In other words, by giving a predetermined notification by executing a special performance while a predetermined symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the player can grasp the current situation before the predetermined judgment result becomes a specific judgment result. . Therefore, the player determines whether or not to satisfy the predetermined gaming conditions when the predetermined result of the predetermined judgment becomes a specific judgment result based on the special performance while the predetermined symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. You can either satisfy the predetermined gaming conditions and receive a specific benefit, or do not satisfy the predetermined gaming conditions with respect to the specific judgment result and do not receive the specific benefit, and later the specific information is updated to a predetermined state. It becomes possible to determine in advance whether or not to receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined gaming condition with respect to a specific determination result after a predetermined profit state has occurred. This makes it difficult for a user to make a judgment error even when the result of a predetermined judgment is a specific judgment result, and prevents the user from unexpectedly putting himself in a disadvantageous situation.

[Appendix G1]
a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) that variably displays a predetermined pattern (regular pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
a variable ball entry means (316) that is provided in the gaming area and performs opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising:
an updating means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining number counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special figure game) in the variable display;
In a specific gaming state (low probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving gaming state) is achieved at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining number counter = 0). Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) that performs predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
A determination means (41) that executes a predetermined determination (special map jackpot lottery) based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
When the result of the predetermined judgment executed by the judgment means is a specific judgment result, and a predetermined gaming condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player. a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game);
Equipped with
The notification control means is configured to control the notification control means at a predetermined timing (a predetermined period of time before the specific information enters the predetermined updated state) when the predetermined determination result executed by the determination means is the specific determination result. a switching means (51) that notifies that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point) and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing; Prepare,
After the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode by the switching means (51), the game machine does not switch to the first notification mode until at least the specific profit occurs.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, after the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing after a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches a predetermined update state, at least a specific profit There is no switching to the first notification mode until this occurs. Here, for example, if a user does not receive a specific profit without fulfilling a predetermined gaming condition, and the specific information is later updated to a predetermined state and a predetermined profit state occurs, a predetermined determination result may be specified. If it is advantageous for the player to obtain a specific profit by establishing a gaming condition, a predetermined notification is made in the first notification mode. When a predetermined notification is made in the second notification mode when it is advantageous for the player to receive the notification, if the predetermined notification is made in the first notification mode after the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing. In other words, if a notification mode that is advantageous to the player is switched to a notification mode that is disadvantageous to the player, the player may be confused, and even if it is more advantageous to satisfy the predetermined game condition, the predetermined game condition may be changed. This may induce the player to make a mistake in judgment of not realizing the goal, and therefore the player's profits cannot be sufficiently secured. On the other hand, after the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing, the player is advantageous because the notification mode does not switch to the first notification mode at least until a specific profit is generated. Since this can be continuously grasped until a specific profit is received, the player is not confused and the player is prevented from receiving an unexpected disadvantage.

[Appendix H1]
a firing means (32) capable of firing a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) that variably displays a predetermined pattern (regular pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
a variable ball entry means (316) that is provided in the gaming area and performs opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising:
an updating means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining number counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special figure game) in the variable display;
In a specific gaming state (low probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving gaming state) is achieved at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining number counter = 0). Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) that performs predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
A determination means (41) that executes a predetermined determination (special map jackpot lottery) based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
When the result of the predetermined judgment executed by the judgment means is a specific judgment result, and a predetermined gaming condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player. a profit generating means (41) that generates a specific profit (jackpot game);
Equipped with
The notification control means is configured to control the notification control means at a predetermined timing (a predetermined period of time before the specific information enters the predetermined updated state) when the predetermined determination result executed by the determination means is the specific determination result. a switching means (51) that notifies that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point) and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing; Prepare,
The number of updates until the specific information reaches the predetermined update state (initial value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter) is characterized in that one update number is determined by lottery from among a plurality of update numbers. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, as the number of updates until the specific information reaches a predetermined update state, one number of updates is determined by lottery from among a plurality of numbers of updates. In this way, the number of updates until the specific information reaches a predetermined update state is decided by lottery from among a plurality of update times, so that the timing at which a predetermined profit state occurs is determined. It will no longer be uniform. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the number of updates until the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to know whether the number of times the specific information has been updated has been cleared or not, for example, whether the gaming hall has cleared the RAM of the gaming machine or changed the setting value that defines the jackpot probability. This prevents a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine due to the player having to know whether the RAM has been cleared or the setting values have been changed. In addition, by making it difficult for players to grasp the number of times the specific information is updated until it reaches a predetermined update state, players are targeting gaming machines that display fewer fluctuations of a predetermined symbol required to generate a predetermined profit state. In addition, they are prevented from being subject to so-called hyena behavior. In addition, since it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the number of updates until the specific information reaches the predetermined update state, the predetermined notification when the predetermined determination result becomes the specific determination result may be changed to the second notification mode. It also becomes difficult to know when to switch. Therefore, if the result of a predetermined determination becomes a specific determination result, you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the predetermined notification will be switched to the second notification mode, which will reduce your interest and interest in the game. Improved.

[Appendix A1]
A firing means (launching handle 22) that fires the game ball in a predetermined direction in the gaming area by the player's firing operation;
A predetermined flow path (third route 353) through which the game ball flows down based on a predetermined firing operation (hitting right) by the player;
Equipped with
The area into which game balls flowing down the predetermined channel can enter is an acceptance permission state where game balls are accepted (first opening/closing member 39A is open) and an acceptance non-permission state where game balls are not accepted (first opening/closing member 39A). a first ball entry means (first winning hole 391) whose state can be varied between the closed state of , an openable and closable incoming ball sorting device (ball sorting device 37) that distributes whether or not to cause the game ball to enter the second ball incoming device when a game ball enters the ball. A gaming machine comprising:
A predetermined condition (the jackpot lottery result shifts to c-time saving) is established based on the game ball entering when the first ball entering means is in the acceptance permission state during the predetermined gaming state (a time saving gaming state). a deriving means (MPU 41) capable of deriving at least a specific benefit result (transition to c time-saving gaming state) when
In a specific gaming state (c time saving gaming state, opening state of the second prize opening 315) that is executed based on the derivation of the specific benefit result, a specific switching condition (c time saving gaming state ending condition, e.g. 2. A state ending means (MPU 41) that ends the specific gaming state based on the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the winning hole 315 and the return of the electric accessory 373 of the sorting ball entry device 37. ,
When a game ball enters the ball inputting means in the specific gaming state, the second inputting means enters a state in which the game ball enters the second ball inputting means based on the distribution. an operating means (opening mechanism for the second opening/closing member 39B) for opening the ball means;
an operation terminating means (closing mechanism of the second opening/closing member 39B) for terminating the opening operation of the second ball entering means based on at least the entry of a plurality of predetermined game balls;
Based on the fact that a special condition (the game ball enters the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38) is satisfied when a game ball enters during the opening operation of the second ball entering means, or generation control means (MPU 41) that performs control to generate a special game state (execution state of the opening/closing execution mode of the V winning opening jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player with a high probability;
a starting means (MPU51) that executes a specific effect display (pseudo jackpot game effect (display)) based on the occurrence of the special game state in a predetermined state;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
When the special game state is executed a plurality of times based on the special condition being satisfied in the display state of the specific effect display, continuing the specific effect display;
A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of special gaming states are displayed as a series of advantageous gaming states (pseudo jackpot gaming states).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, at least a specific benefit result is derived when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the first ball entering means during a predetermined gaming state. When a specific gaming state is executed and a game ball enters the second ball entering means in this specific gaming state, a series of advantageous situations in which the special gaming state is executed multiple times based on the special condition being satisfied. It is possible to generate a gaming state. As a result, a specific gaming state is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state, and a series of advantageous gaming states are generated in which special gaming states are executed multiple times due to the establishment of a special condition in a specific gaming state. Since the game performance can be realized, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix A1, a specific performance display is displayed based on the occurrence of a special gaming state in a predetermined gaming state. Therefore, the specific performance display is displayed not only when the special game state is generated once, but also when the special game state is executed a plurality of times as a series of advantageous game states. Therefore, even though a special game state has occurred a plurality of times in a series of advantageous game states, the performance display is performed as if it were a single special game state due to the specific performance display. The profit (for example, the payout) given to the player is greater when the special game state occurs multiple times than when the special game state occurs one time. As a result, by executing a specific effect display in a series of advantageous gaming states in which special gaming states occur multiple times, it gives the impression that a large amount of profit has been obtained in a series of advantageous gaming states, giving the player a sense of satisfaction. It becomes possible to give As a result, even if the profits obtained by the occurrence of a single special gaming state are limited, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction regarding the profits obtained when a series of advantageous gaming states occur. , a decrease in interest and interest in games is prevented.

[Appendix A2]
At the end of or after the end of the last special game state in the case where the special game state is generated a plurality of times, a notification display corresponding to the case where the specific effect display is to be ended is executed. The gaming machine described in Appendix A1.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, when or after the end of the last special game state when a plurality of special game states occur, a notification display corresponding to the end of the specific effect display is executed. Ru. In this way, the notification display corresponding to the case where the specific effect display is to be ended is executed at the end of or after the end of the last special game state that is executed when a plurality of special game states are generated. To enable a player to recognize the end of a series of advantageous gaming states based on a notification display, and to make a player recognize the results of a plurality of special gaming states as being the results of a series of advantageous gaming states. is possible. As a result, even if the profits obtained by the occurrence of a single special gaming state are limited, it is possible to give the player the impression that a large amount of profits can be obtained from a series of advantageous gaming states. , it becomes possible to give players a sense of satisfaction.

[Appendix A3]
If the special gaming state based on the establishment of the special condition does not occur after the start of the specific effect display, when the special gaming state in the predetermined state ends or after the end, the specific effect display is terminated. The gaming machine according to appendix A2, which executes a corresponding notification display.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, if the special gaming state based on the establishment of the special condition does not occur after the start of the specific effect display, the specific effect display is ended at the end of the special gaming state in the predetermined state or after the end. A corresponding notification display is executed. In this way, if the special gaming state based on the establishment of the special condition does not occur after the start of the specific effect display, the notification corresponding to the case where the specific effect display ends at the end of the special gaming state in the predetermined state or after the end By executing the display, even if a special gaming state does not occur multiple times in a series of advantageous gaming states (a special gaming state occurs only once, so-called single-shot), a series of It becomes possible to recognize that the advantageous gaming state ends.

[Appendix B1]
A firing means (launching handle 22) that fires the game ball in a predetermined direction in the gaming area by the player's firing operation;
A predetermined flow path (third route 353) through which the game ball flows down based on a predetermined firing operation (hitting right) by the player;
Equipped with
The area into which game balls flowing down the predetermined channel can enter is an acceptance permission state where game balls are accepted (first opening/closing member 39A is open) and an acceptance non-permission state where game balls are not accepted (first opening/closing member 39A). a first ball entry means (first winning hole 391) whose state can be varied between the closed state of , an openable and closable incoming ball sorting device (ball sorting device 37) that distributes whether or not to cause the game ball to enter the second ball incoming device when a game ball enters the ball. A gaming machine comprising:
A predetermined condition (the jackpot lottery result shifts to c-time saving) is established based on the game ball entering when the first ball entering means is in the acceptance permission state during the predetermined gaming state (a time saving gaming state). a deriving means (MPU 41) capable of deriving at least a specific benefit result (transition to c time-saving gaming state) when
In a specific gaming state (c time saving gaming state, opening state of the second prize opening 315) that is executed based on the derivation of the specific benefit result, a specific switching condition (c time saving gaming state ending condition, e.g. 2. A state ending means (MPU 41) that ends the specific gaming state based on the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the winning hole 315 and the return of the electric accessory 373 of the sorting ball entry device 37. ,
When a game ball enters the ball inputting means in the specific gaming state, the second inputting means enters a state in which the game ball enters the second ball inputting means based on the distribution. an operating means (opening mechanism for the second opening/closing member 39B) for opening the ball means;
an operation terminating means (closing mechanism of the second opening/closing member 39B) for terminating the opening operation of the second ball entering means based on at least the entry of a plurality of predetermined game balls;
Based on the fact that a special condition (the game ball enters the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38) is satisfied when a game ball enters during the opening operation of the second ball entering means, or generation control means (MPU 41) that performs control to generate a special game state (execution state of the opening/closing execution mode of the V winning opening jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player with a high probability;
a starting means (MPU51) that executes a specific effect display (pseudo jackpot game effect (display)) based on the occurrence of the special game state in a predetermined state;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
When the special game state is executed a plurality of times based on the special condition being satisfied in the display state of the specific effect display, continuing the specific effect display;
Displaying the plurality of special gaming states as a series of advantageous gaming states (pseudo jackpot gaming states);
The plurality of special game states include a first special game state and a second special game state different from the first special game state,
The specific performance display means displays a specific performance image (stage performance, ball display) as the specific performance display during the period of the first special game state, the first special game state, and the second special game state. Continuously displaying between the period of the non-special gaming state (gaming state where a special figure game is executed, small winning gaming state) between the gaming state and the period of the second special gaming state. A gaming machine featuring:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, in a series of advantageous gaming states in which a plurality of special gaming states occur, a specific performance image is displayed as a specific performance display during the period of the first special gaming state and during the first special gaming state. It is continuously displayed between the period between the state and the second special gaming state and the period of the second special gaming state. Therefore, in a series of advantageous gaming states, even if a non-special gaming state occurs between multiple special gaming states, the special gaming state will continue due to a specific effect image during the period of the non-special gaming state. You can pretend that you are.

[Appendix C1]
A firing means (launching handle 22) that fires the game ball in a predetermined direction in the gaming area by the player's firing operation;
A predetermined flow path (third route 353) through which the game ball flows down based on a predetermined firing operation (hitting right) by the player;
Equipped with
The area into which game balls flowing down the predetermined channel can enter is an acceptance permission state where game balls are accepted (first opening/closing member 39A is open) and an acceptance non-permission state where game balls are not accepted (first opening/closing member 39A). a first ball entry means (first winning hole 391) whose state can be varied between the closed state of , an openable and closable incoming ball sorting device (ball sorting device 37) that distributes whether or not to cause the game ball to enter the second ball incoming device when a game ball enters the ball. A gaming machine comprising:
A predetermined condition (the jackpot lottery result shifts to c-time saving) is established based on the game ball entering when the first ball entering means is in the acceptance permission state during the predetermined gaming state (a time saving gaming state). a deriving means (MPU 41) capable of deriving at least a specific benefit result (transition to c time-saving gaming state) when
In a specific gaming state (c time saving gaming state, opening state of the second prize opening 315) that is executed based on the derivation of the specific benefit result, a specific switching condition (c time saving gaming state ending condition, e.g. 2. A state ending means (MPU 41) that ends the specific gaming state based on the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the winning hole 315 and the return of the electric accessory 373 of the sorting ball entry device 37. ,
When a game ball enters the ball inputting means in the specific gaming state, the second inputting means enters a state in which the game ball enters the second ball inputting means based on the distribution. an operating means (opening mechanism for the second opening/closing member 39B) for opening the ball means;
an operation terminating means (closing mechanism of the second opening/closing member 39B) for terminating the opening operation of the second ball entering means based on at least the entry of a plurality of predetermined game balls;
Based on the fact that a special condition (the game ball enters the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38) is satisfied when a game ball enters during the opening operation of the second ball entering means, or a generation control means (MPU 41) that performs control to generate a special game state (execution state of the opening/closing execution mode of the V winning opening jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player with a high probability;
a starting means (MPU51) that executes a specific performance display (pseudo jackpot game performance (display)) based on the occurrence of the special game state in a predetermined state;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
When the special game state is executed a plurality of times based on the special condition being satisfied in the display state of the specific effect display, continuing the specific effect display;
Displaying the plurality of special gaming states as a series of advantageous gaming states (pseudo jackpot gaming states);
The number of game balls entering the predetermined plurality of balls at which the opening/closing operation of the second ball entering means is completed is lower than the upper limit number (for example, one) at which the first ball entering means becomes in the acceptance non-permitted state. A gaming machine characterized in that there are a large number (for example, four).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the number of entering game balls at which the opening/closing operation of the second ball entering means is completed is higher than the upper limit number at which the first ball entering means becomes in a non-accepting state. There are many. In this way, the predetermined number of game balls that enter the game ball for which the opening/closing operation of the second ball entry means is completed is greater than the upper limit number at which the first ball entry means becomes in a non-accepting state. Therefore, the number of balls entering the second ball entering means due to one opening/closing operation of the second ball entering means is greater than the number of balls entering the first ball entering means when the first ball entering means is in the acceptance state at one time. There will be more incoming balls. As a result, the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a specific bonus result in a predetermined gaming state is lowered, so that a special gaming state advantageous to the player will always or with high probability occur due to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. While the specific game state to be executed is difficult to occur, when the specific game state occurs, the special game state can be generated multiple times by entering the game ball into the second ball entry means. In other words, while it is difficult to shift from a predetermined gaming state to a specific gaming state, when the gaming state is shifted to a specific gaming state, the occurrence of a special gaming state gives the player a gaming feature that allows the player to earn a large amount of profits. Interest will be improved.

[Appendix D1]
A firing means (launching handle 22) that fires the game ball in a predetermined direction in the gaming area by the player's firing operation;
A predetermined flow path (third route 353) through which the game ball flows down based on a predetermined firing operation (hitting right) by the player;
Equipped with
The area into which game balls flowing down the predetermined channel can enter is an acceptance permission state where game balls are accepted (first opening/closing member 39A is open) and an acceptance non-permission state where game balls are not accepted (first opening/closing member 39A). a first ball entry means (first winning hole 391) whose state can be varied between the closed state of , an openable and closable incoming ball sorting device (ball sorting device 37) that distributes whether or not to cause the game ball to enter the second ball incoming device when a game ball enters the ball. A gaming machine comprising:
A predetermined condition (the jackpot lottery result shifts to c-time saving) is established based on the game ball entering when the first ball entering means is in the acceptance permission state during the predetermined gaming state (a time saving gaming state). a deriving means (MPU 41) capable of deriving at least a specific benefit result (transition to c time-saving gaming state) when
In a specific gaming state (c time saving gaming state, opening state of the second prize opening 315) that is executed based on the derivation of the specific benefit result, a specific switching condition (c time saving gaming state ending condition, e.g. 2. A state ending means (MPU 41) that ends the specific gaming state based on the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the winning hole 315 and the return of the electric accessory 373 of the sorting ball entry device 37. ,
When a game ball enters the ball inputting means in the specific gaming state, the second inputting means enters a state in which the game ball enters the second ball inputting means based on the distribution. an operating means (opening mechanism for the second opening/closing member 39B) for opening the ball means;
an operation terminating means (closing mechanism of the second opening/closing member 39B) for terminating the opening operation of the second ball entering means based on at least the entry of a plurality of predetermined game balls;
Based on the fact that a special condition (the game ball enters the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38) is satisfied when a game ball enters during the opening operation of the second ball entering means, or generation control means (MPU 41) that performs control to generate a special game state (execution state of the opening/closing execution mode of the V winning opening jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player with a high probability;
a starting means (MPU51) that executes a specific effect display (pseudo jackpot game effect (display)) based on the occurrence of the special game state in a predetermined state;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
When the special game state is executed a plurality of times based on the special condition being satisfied in the display state of the specific effect display, continuing the specific effect display;
Displaying the plurality of special gaming states as a series of advantageous gaming states (pseudo jackpot gaming states);
A game characterized in that, when the specific effect display means executes the specific effect display, the number of times the specific game state is executed during that time is different (for example, 2 to 4 times). Machine.

The gaming machine according to appendix D1 is configured such that when a specific performance display is executed, the number of times the specific game state is executed during that time is different. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict how many times a specific gaming state will be executed in an advantageous gaming state, and as a result, it is difficult for the player to predict how many times a specific gaming state will be executed in an advantageous gaming state. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game in an advantageous gaming state while expecting to obtain a certain amount of money, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix E1]
A firing means (launching handle 22) that fires the game ball in a predetermined direction in the gaming area by the player's firing operation;
A predetermined flow path (third route 353) through which the game ball flows down based on a predetermined firing operation (hitting right) by the player;
Equipped with
The area into which game balls flowing down the predetermined channel can enter is an acceptance permission state where game balls are accepted (first opening/closing member 39A is open) and an acceptance non-permission state where game balls are not accepted (first opening/closing member 39A). a first ball entry means (first winning hole 391) whose state can be varied between the closed state of , an openable and closable incoming ball sorting device (ball sorting device 37) that distributes whether or not to cause the game ball to enter the second ball incoming device when a game ball enters the ball. A gaming machine comprising:
A predetermined condition (the jackpot lottery result shifts to c-time saving) is established based on the game ball entering when the first ball entering means is in the acceptance permission state during the predetermined gaming state (a time saving gaming state). a deriving means (MPU 41) capable of deriving at least a specific benefit result (transition to c time-saving gaming state) when
In a specific gaming state (c time saving gaming state, opening state of the second prize opening 315) that is executed based on the derivation of the specific benefit result, a specific switching condition (c time saving gaming state ending condition, e.g. 2. A state ending means (MPU 41) that ends the specific gaming state based on the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the winning hole 315 and the return of the electric accessory 373 of the sorting ball entry device 37. ,
When a game ball enters the ball inputting means in the specific gaming state, the second inputting means enters a state in which the game ball enters the second ball inputting means based on the distribution. an operating means (opening mechanism for the second opening/closing member 39B) for opening the ball means;
an operation terminating means (closing mechanism of the second opening/closing member 39B) for terminating the opening operation of the second ball entering means based on at least the entry of a plurality of predetermined game balls;
Based on the fact that a special condition (the game ball enters the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38) is satisfied when a game ball enters during the opening operation of the second ball entering means, or generation control means (MPU 41) that performs control to generate a special game state (execution state of the opening/closing execution mode of the V winning opening jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player with a high probability;
a starting means (MPU51) that executes a specific effect display (pseudo jackpot game effect (display)) based on the occurrence of the special game state in a predetermined state;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
When the special game state is executed a plurality of times based on the special condition being satisfied in the display state of the specific effect display, continuing the specific effect display;
Displaying the plurality of special gaming states as a series of advantageous gaming states (pseudo jackpot gaming states);
The plurality of special game states include a first special game state and a second special game state that occurs after the first special game state,
comprising a request display execution means for executing a request display (right-handed display) requesting the player to perform the predetermined firing operation when executing the special game state;
The request display includes the first special game state, between the first special game state and the second special game state (second special figure game state, small winning game state), and the second special game state. A gaming machine characterized in that a special gaming state of is continuously displayed over .

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, in a series of advantageous gaming states in which a plurality of special gaming states occur, a request display requesting a predetermined firing operation is displayed in the first special gaming state and in the first special gaming state. and the second special game state, and are continuously displayed between the second special game state and the second special game state. Therefore, in a series of advantageous gaming states, even if a gaming state other than the special gaming state occurs between the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state, the gaming state other than the special gaming state , it is possible to make it appear that a special gaming state is occurring by displaying a request. As a result, even if the series of advantageous gaming states includes gaming states other than the special gaming states, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction regarding the profit when the special gaming state occurs, so that the player can continue playing. This prevents a decline in interest and interest.

Further, since the request display is continuously displayed in the series of advantageous gaming states, the player can understand that he should perform a predetermined firing operation in accordance with the request display in the series of advantageous gaming states. Therefore, if a player does not perform a prescribed firing operation in a series of advantageous gaming states, there will be disadvantages to the player, such as disadvantages in not being able to obtain benefits in special gaming states (for example, a large amount of balls put out), and It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of non-occurrence of a special game state due to the special condition not being satisfied even when the game ball enters the ball entering means in step 2.

[Appendix F1]
a firing means (launching handle 22) that fires the game ball in a predetermined direction in the gaming area according to the player's firing operation;
A predetermined channel (third route 353) through which the game ball flows down based on a predetermined firing operation (right-handed hit) by the player;
Equipped with
The area into which game balls flowing down the predetermined channel can enter is an acceptance permission state where game balls are accepted (first opening/closing member 39A is open) and an acceptance non-permission state where game balls are not accepted (first opening/closing member 39A). a first ball entry means (first winning hole 391) whose state can be varied between the closed state of , an openable and closable incoming ball sorting device (ball sorting device 37) that distributes whether or not to cause the game ball to enter the second ball incoming device when a game ball enters the ball. A gaming machine comprising:
A predetermined condition (the jackpot lottery result shifts to c-time saving) is established based on the game ball entering when the first ball entering means is in the acceptance permission state during the predetermined gaming state (a time saving gaming state). a deriving means (MPU 41) capable of deriving at least a specific benefit result (transition to c time-saving gaming state) when
In a specific gaming state (c time saving gaming state, opening state of the second prize opening 315) that is executed based on the derivation of the specific benefit result, a specific switching condition (c time saving gaming state ending condition, e.g. 2. A state ending means (MPU 41) that ends the specific gaming state based on the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the winning hole 315 and the return of the electric accessory 373 of the sorting ball entry device 37. ,
When a game ball enters the ball inputting means in the specific gaming state, the second inputting means enters a state in which the game ball enters the second ball inputting means based on the distribution. an operating means (opening mechanism for the second opening/closing member 39B) for opening the ball means;
an operation terminating means (closing mechanism of the second opening/closing member 39B) for terminating the opening operation of the second ball entering means based on at least the entry of a plurality of predetermined game balls;
Based on the fact that a special condition (the game ball enters the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38) is satisfied when a game ball enters during the opening operation of the second ball entering means, or generation control means (MPU 41) that performs control to generate a special game state (execution state of the opening/closing execution mode of the V winning opening jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player with a high probability;
a starting means (MPU51) that executes a specific effect display (pseudo jackpot game effect (display)) based on the occurrence of the special game state in a predetermined state;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
When the special game state is executed a plurality of times based on the special condition being satisfied in the display state of the specific effect display, continuing the specific effect display;
Displaying the plurality of special gaming states as a series of advantageous gaming states (pseudo jackpot gaming states);
A gaming machine characterized in that the special conditions include at least that a game ball enters a special ball entry area (V winning hole 383 of variable winning device 38) (V winning).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the special condition for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player that can be established by the entry of a game ball during the opening operation of the second ball entry means is a special entry condition. It includes at least the entry of the game ball into the ball area. That is, the player can generate a special game state by entering the game ball into the special ball entry area and satisfying the special condition. In this way, the special condition for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player that can be established by the entry of a game ball during the opening operation of the second ball entry means is such that the special condition for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is established when the second ball entry means is opened. By including at least the entry of the game ball, the special conditions for generating the special game state are clarified, and the player can simply perform a firing operation that allows the game ball to enter the special entry area. , it becomes possible to establish a special condition and generate a special gaming state. Therefore, the disadvantage that a special gaming state does not occur because the special condition is not satisfied can be prevented.

[Appendix G1]
a firing means (launching handle 22) that fires the game ball in a predetermined direction in the gaming area according to the player's firing operation;
A predetermined channel (third route 353) through which the game ball flows down based on a predetermined firing operation (right-handed hit) by the player;
Equipped with
The area into which game balls flowing down the predetermined channel can enter is an acceptance permission state where game balls are accepted (first opening/closing member 39A is open) and an acceptance non-permission state where game balls are not accepted (first opening/closing member 39A). a first ball entry means (first winning hole 391) whose state can be varied between the closed state of , an openable and closable incoming ball sorting device (ball sorting device 37) that distributes whether or not to cause the game ball to enter the second ball incoming device when a game ball enters the ball. A gaming machine comprising:
A predetermined condition (the jackpot lottery result shifts to c-time saving) is established based on the game ball entering when the first ball entering means is in the acceptance permission state during the predetermined gaming state (a time saving gaming state). a deriving means (MPU 41) capable of deriving at least a specific benefit result (transition to c time-saving gaming state) when
In a specific gaming state (c time saving gaming state, opening state of the second prize opening 315) that is executed based on the derivation of the specific benefit result, a specific switching condition (c time saving gaming state ending condition, e.g. 2. A state ending means (MPU 41) that ends the specific gaming state based on the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the winning hole 315 and the return of the electric accessory 373 of the sorting ball entry device 37. ,
When a game ball enters the ball inputting means in the specific gaming state, the second inputting means enters a state in which the game ball enters the second ball inputting means based on the distribution. an operating means (opening mechanism for the second opening/closing member 39B) for opening the ball means;
an operation terminating means (closing mechanism of the second opening/closing member 39B) for terminating the opening operation of the second ball entering means based on at least the entry of a plurality of predetermined game balls;
Based on the fact that a special condition (the game ball enters the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38) is satisfied when a game ball enters during the opening operation of the second ball entering means, or generation control means (MPU 41) that performs control to generate a special game state (execution state of the opening/closing execution mode of the V winning opening jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player with a high probability;
a starting means (MPU51) that executes a specific effect display (pseudo jackpot game effect (display)) based on the occurrence of the special game state in a predetermined state;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
When the special game state is executed a plurality of times based on the special condition being satisfied in the display state of the specific effect display, continuing the specific effect display;
Displaying the plurality of special gaming states as a series of advantageous gaming states (pseudo jackpot gaming states);
When the series of advantageous gaming states is ended at the end of or after the end of the last special gaming state that is performed during the execution of the specific performance display that is performed as the series of advantageous gaming states (pseudo jackpot gaming state), A gaming machine characterized by executing a notification display (total ball output display (ball output result display)) corresponding to the result of a series of advantageous gaming states.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1, at the end of or after the end of the last special gaming state that is performed during execution of a specific performance display that displays the performance as a series of advantageous gaming states, notification corresponding to the result as a series of advantageous gaming states is made. Display is executed. In this way, at the end of or after the end of the last special game state that is performed during the execution of a specific effect display that is effect-displayed as a series of advantageous game states, a notification display corresponding to the result as a series of advantageous game states is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize the results of multiple special game states as if they were the results of one special game state. As a result, even if the profits obtained by the occurrence of a single special gaming state are limited, it is possible to give the player the impression that a large amount of profits can be obtained from a series of advantageous gaming states. , it becomes possible to give players a sense of satisfaction.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine according to appendix G1, further comprising means for displaying a display according to the number of special gaming states that have occurred during the series of advantageous gaming states.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2, a display is performed according to the number of special gaming states that have occurred during a series of advantageous gaming states. In this way, by displaying a display corresponding to the number of special gaming states that occurred during a series of advantageous gaming states, the number of special gaming states that occurred during a series of advantageous gaming states (so-called It is possible to grasp the number of consecutive games in a rush state).

[Appendix H1]
A firing means (launching handle 22) that fires the game ball in a predetermined direction in the gaming area by the player's firing operation;
A predetermined flow path (third route 353) through which the game ball flows down based on a predetermined firing operation (hitting right) by the player;
Equipped with
The area into which game balls flowing down the predetermined channel can enter is an acceptance permission state where game balls are accepted (first opening/closing member 39A is open) and an acceptance non-permission state where game balls are not accepted (first opening/closing member 39A). a first ball entry means (first winning hole 391) whose state can be changed between the closed state of , an openable and closable incoming ball sorting device (ball sorting device 37) that distributes whether or not to cause the game ball to enter the second ball incoming device when a game ball enters the ball. A gaming machine comprising:
A predetermined condition (the jackpot lottery result shifts to c-time saving) is established based on the game ball entering when the first ball entering means is in the acceptance permission state during the predetermined gaming state (a time saving gaming state). a deriving means (MPU 41) capable of deriving at least a specific benefit result (transition to c time-saving gaming state) when
In a specific gaming state (c time saving gaming state, opening state of the second prize opening 315) that is executed based on the derivation of the specific benefit result, a specific switching condition (c time saving gaming state ending condition, e.g. 2. A state ending means (MPU 41) that ends the specific gaming state based on the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the winning hole 315 and the return of the electric accessory 373 of the sorting ball entry device 37. ,
When a game ball enters the ball inputting means in the specific gaming state, the second inputting means enters a state in which the game ball enters the second ball inputting means based on the distribution. an operating means (opening mechanism for the second opening/closing member 39B) for opening the ball means;
an operation terminating means (closing mechanism of the second opening/closing member 39B) for terminating the opening operation of the second ball entering means based on at least the entry of a plurality of predetermined game balls;
Based on the fact that a special condition (the game ball enters the V winning hole 383 of the variable winning device 38) is satisfied when a game ball enters during the opening operation of the second ball entering means, or generation control means (MPU 41) that performs control to generate a special game state (execution state of the opening/closing execution mode of the V winning opening jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player with a high probability;
a starting means (MPU51) that executes a specific effect display (pseudo jackpot game effect (display)) based on the occurrence of the special game state in a predetermined state;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
When the special game state is executed a plurality of times based on the special condition being satisfied in the display state of the specific effect display, continuing the specific effect display;
Displaying the plurality of special gaming states as a series of advantageous gaming states (pseudo jackpot gaming states);
In the case of executing the special gaming state based on the fulfillment of the special condition, the invention further includes means for randomly determining a value (number of rounds of jackpot games) to be given in the special gaming state from among a plurality of games. A gaming machine with special features.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, when a special gaming state is executed based on the fulfillment of special conditions, the value to be given in the special gaming state is randomly determined from among a plurality of values. In this way, when a special gaming state is executed based on the fulfillment of special conditions, the value to be given in the special gaming state is randomly determined from among multiple numbers, so that when the special gaming state is executed, Since the player can play the game while expecting to be given a large value, the interest in the game is improved. In particular, when a series of advantageous gaming states in which multiple special gaming states are executed is made to appear as a single special gaming state, the sum of the results of the multiple special gaming states is of great value. Since the player can play the game while anticipating the future, the game becomes more interesting.

[Appendix A1]
an inflow section (371) through which game balls flow in one ball at a time;
a first operating means (372) operable to cause a game ball to flow into the inflow section when a predetermined condition (a winning of a winning lottery in a time-saving gaming state) is satisfied;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, a second operating means (39A) different from the first operating means can be caused to perform a predetermined operation (opening operation of the second prize opening 315A). The first ball entry section (376A) is the trigger,
a first detection section (376Aa) for detecting entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, at least a specific operation (of the second prize opening 315B) is performed on the third operation means (39B) different from the first operation means and the second operation means. a second ball entry portion (376B) that serves as an opportunity to perform the opening operation);
a second detection section (376Ba) for detecting entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section;
a guiding means (374) for guiding the game ball to a predetermined flow path by acting on the progress of the game ball flowing in from the inflow portion;
A gaming machine comprising:
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section, the guiding means, which is in a first state for guiding game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section, is activated. Switching means (drive control (processing) of the movable guide section 374) for switching to a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry section and can enter the second ball entry section ),
A gaming machine characterized in that the arrangement position of the third operating means is vertically higher than the arrangement position of the second operating means when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1, when the first operating means is operated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the first operating means operates to guide game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section. The guiding means in the state is such that, triggered by a predetermined number of game balls entering the first ball entering section, the switching means makes it impossible for the game balls to enter the first ball entering section, and The state is switched to a second state in which the ball can enter the second ball entry section. Therefore, when game balls flow in from the inflow section due to the operation of the first operating means, a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section first, and then game balls enter the second ball entry section. The ball is thrown. As a result, when a game ball flows in from the inflow section by operating the first operating means due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the predetermined operation of the second operating means may be executed first, and then the third operation is performed. Certain operations of the means may be performed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, the third operating means is located above the second operating means in the vertical direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. Therefore, when a game ball flows in from the inflow portion by operating the first operating means due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the predetermined operation of the second operating means on the lower side in the vertical direction may be executed first, and then , a specific movement of the third movement means on the vertically upper side may be performed.

In such a gaming machine, by arranging the gaming members as described above, it is possible to improve the player's identifiability or visibility, and to play the game efficiently.

[Appendix B1]
an inflow section (371) through which game balls flow in one ball at a time;
a first operating means (372) operable to cause a game ball to flow into the inflow section when a predetermined condition (a winning of a winning lottery in a time-saving gaming state) is satisfied;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, a second operating means (39A) different from the first operating means can be caused to perform a predetermined operation (opening operation of the second prize opening 315A). The first ball entry section (376A) is the trigger,
a first detection section (376Aa) for detecting entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, at least a specific operation (of the second prize opening 315B) is performed on the third operation means (39B) different from the first operation means and the second operation means. a second ball entry portion (376B) that serves as an opportunity to perform the opening operation);
a second detection section (376Ba) for detecting entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section;
a guiding means (374) for guiding the game ball to a predetermined flow path by acting on the progress of the game ball flowing in from the inflow portion;
A gaming machine comprising:
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section, the guiding means, which is in a first state for guiding game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section, is activated. Switching means (drive control (processing) of the movable guide section 374) for switching to a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry section and can enter the second ball entry section; ),
A gaming machine characterized in that the arrangement position of the third operating means is upstream of the arrangement position of the second operating means in the downstream direction of the game ball when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B1, when the first operating means is operated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the first operating means operates to guide game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section. The guiding means in the state is such that, triggered by a predetermined number of game balls entering the first ball entering section, the switching means makes it impossible for the game balls to enter the first ball entering section, and The state is switched to a second state in which the ball can enter the second ball entry section. Therefore, when game balls flow in from the inflow section due to the operation of the first operating means, a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section first, and then game balls enter the second ball entry section. The ball is thrown. As a result, when a game ball flows in from the inflow section by operating the first operating means due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the predetermined operation of the second operating means may be executed first, and then the third operation is performed. Certain operations of the means may be performed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the arrangement position of the third operating means is upstream in the downstream direction of the game ball than the arrangement position of the second operating means when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. . Therefore, when a game ball flows in from the inflow part by operating the first operating means due to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the predetermined operation of the second operating means on the downstream side in the flowing direction of the gaming ball may be executed first. After that, a specific operation of the third operation means on the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball can be executed.

In such a gaming machine, by arranging the gaming members as described above, it is possible to improve the player's identifiability or visibility, and to play the game efficiently.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the second operating means and the third operating means are arranged so as to be shifted in the front-rear direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, the second operating means and the third operating means are disposed offset in the front-rear direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. In this way, the second operating means and the third operating means are arranged so as to be shifted in the front and back direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, so that the shape and operation mode of the second operating means and the third operating means are changed. The diversity of will be higher. This makes it possible to reduce the space required for arranging the second operating means and the third operating means, so it is possible to secure a large space for the production means that can execute the game production. become. For example, when a game performance is performed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a large display area (front view area) of the display device can be secured, and when a game performance is performed on a movable accessory member, It becomes possible to increase the size of the movable accessory member and to secure a large range of movement of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B3]
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the predetermined operation of the second operation means and the specific operation of the third operation means are different operation modes.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B3, the predetermined operation of the second operating means and the specific operation of the third operating means are different operating modes. In this way, the predetermined operation of the second operating means and the specific operation of the third operating means have different operating modes, so that the shapes and operating modes of the second operating means and the third operating means are highly diverse. Become. This makes it possible to reduce the space required to arrange the second operating means and the third operating means, so it is possible to secure a large space for the production means that can execute the game production. become. For example, when a game performance is performed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a large display area (front view area) of the display device can be secured, and when a game performance is performed on a movable accessory member, It becomes possible to increase the size of the movable accessory member and to secure a large range of movement of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B4]
Supplementary note B1 characterized in that the game ball includes an outlet (378) into which game balls that flow from the inflow portion and do not enter either the first ball entry portion or the second ball entry portion can enter. The gaming machine described in .

The gaming machine according to Appendix B4 includes an outlet into which game balls that flow from the inflow portion and do not enter either the first ball entry portion or the second ball entry portion can enter. In this way, by providing an outlet through which game balls that have flowed in from the inflow part and have not entered either the first ball entry part or the second ball entry part can enter, the game balls can be placed on the game board. It becomes possible to prevent unnecessary retention. For example, even if an excessive number of game balls enter from the inflow section, or even if the guiding means is neither in the first state nor in the second state, the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section Game balls that have not entered the game ball can be discharged from the discharge port. Thereby, it is possible to prevent balls from clogging around the inflow portion, the first ball entry portion, and the second ball entry portion in the event of an irregular situation.

[Appendix B5]
A deceleration means (373C, 373D) for decelerating the downward speed of the game ball is provided in the flow path until the game ball flowing in from the inflow part reaches the placement position of the second ball entry part. The gaming machine according to appendix B1, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix B5, a deceleration means is provided in the flow path for the game balls flowing in from the inflow part to reduce the flowing speed of the game balls until they reach the placement position of the second ball entry part. . In this way, by providing a deceleration means for reducing the speed of the game balls flowing into the flow path until the game balls that flowed in from the inflow part reach the placement position of the second ball entry part, the inflow can be reduced. It becomes possible to secure a long time for the game balls flowing in from the section to reach the placement position of the second ball entry section. For example, a guiding means that is in the first state that guides game balls flowing in from the inflow part to the first ball entry part may be set to a state where the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part is in the first state. It is possible to secure a long time until switching to the second state in which the ball can enter the club. Thereby, by decelerating the falling speed of the game ball with the deceleration means, the game ball can be made to reach the placement position of the second ball entry part after switching the guiding means to the second state, so that the game ball can be more reliably A game ball can be entered into the second ball entry section. As a result, the occurrence of disadvantages caused by the game ball not entering the second ball entering portion and the specific action of the third operating means not being executed is prevented.

[Appendix B6]
A distributing means is provided for distributing the game balls flowing in from the inflow section to one of a plurality of channels from the inflow section to the arrangement position of the second ball entry section. The gaming machine described in Appendix B1.

The gaming machine according to appendix B6 is provided with a distribution means for distributing the game balls flowing in from the inflow portion to one of the plurality of flow paths from the inflow portion to the arrangement position of the second ball entry portion. There is. In this way, by providing the distribution means for distributing the game balls flowing in from the inflow part to one of the plurality of flow paths from the inflow part to the arrangement position of the second ball entry part, It becomes possible to set a difference between the time it takes the game balls flowing in from the inflow part to reach the arrangement position of the first ball entry part and the time until they reach the arrangement position of the second ball entry part. . For example, if the moving speed of the game ball in one of the flow paths is lower than that in other flow paths that allow the game ball to reach the placement position of the first ball entry part, the second ball entry part This makes it possible to secure a longer time until reaching the installation position of the part. Therefore, the guiding means, which is in the first state for guiding the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow part to the first ball entry part, is set to the second state where the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part is in the first state. It is possible to secure a long time until switching to the second state in which the ball can enter the club. As a result, by providing the distributing means, it is possible to make the game ball reach the placement position of the second ball entry section after switching the guiding means to the second state, so that the game ball can reach the second ball entry section more reliably. A game ball can be entered. As a result, the occurrence of disadvantages caused by the game ball not entering the second ball entering portion and the specific action of the third operating means not being executed is prevented.

[Appendix B7]
A game machine that enters a game area formed by a game board (31) when a fired game ball exceeds a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the third operating means is disposed at a position closer to the predetermined position than the second operating means.

In the game machine according to appendix B7, when the fired game ball exceeds the predetermined position, it enters the game area formed on the game board, and the third operating means is located at a position closer to the predetermined position than the second operating means. Because of this arrangement, players can play games efficiently. Specifically, for example, when a fired game ball exceeds a predetermined position, it enters a game area formed on a game board, and the third operating means is disposed at a position closer to the predetermined position than the second operating means. By doing so, the moving distance (moving time) of the game ball from the predetermined position to the third operating means is set longer than the moving distance (moving time) of the gaming ball from the predetermined position to the second operating means. Ru. Therefore, it becomes possible to secure a long time for the game balls that have flowed in from the inflow section beyond the predetermined position to reach the arrangement position of the second ball entry section. Therefore, the guiding means, which is in the first state for guiding the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow part to the first ball entry part, is set to the second state where the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part is in the first state. It is possible to secure a long time until switching to the second state in which the ball can enter the club. Thereby, by decelerating the falling speed of the game ball with the deceleration means, the game ball can be made to reach the placement position of the second ball entry part after switching the guiding means to the second state. A game ball can be entered into the second ball entry section. As a result, the occurrence of disadvantages caused by the game ball not entering the second ball entering portion and the specific action of the third operating means not being executed is prevented.

[Appendix C1]
an inflow section (371) through which game balls flow in one ball at a time;
a first operating means (372) operable to cause a game ball to flow into the inflow section when a predetermined condition (a winning of a winning lottery in a time-saving gaming state) is satisfied;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, a second operating means (39A) different from the first operating means can be caused to perform a predetermined operation (opening operation of the second prize opening 315A). The first ball entry section (376A) is the trigger,
a first detection section (376Aa) for detecting entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, at least a specific operation (of the second prize opening 315B) is performed on the third operation means (39B) different from the first operation means and the second operation means. a second ball entry portion (376B) that serves as an opportunity to perform the opening operation);
a second detection section (376Ba) for detecting entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section;
a guiding means (374) for guiding the game ball to a predetermined flow path by acting on the progress of the game ball flowing in from the inflow portion;
A gaming machine comprising:
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section, the guiding means, which is in a first state for guiding game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section, is activated. Switching means (drive control (processing) of the movable guide section 374) for switching to a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry section and can enter the second ball entry section ),
The arrangement position of the third operating means is vertically higher than the arrangement position of the second operating means when the gaming machine is viewed from the front;
A gaming machine characterized in that the second operating means and the third operating means are arranged so as to be shifted in the front-rear direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the second operating means and the third operating means are disposed offset in the front-rear direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. In this way, the second operating means and the third operating means are arranged so as to be shifted in the front and back direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, so that the shape and operation mode of the second operating means and the third operating means can be changed. The diversity of will be higher. This makes it possible to reduce the space required to arrange the second operating means and the third operating means, so it is possible to secure a large space for the production means that can execute the game production. become. For example, when a game performance is performed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a large display area (front view area) of the display device can be secured, and when a game performance is performed on a movable accessory member, It becomes possible to increase the size of the movable accessory member and to secure a large range of movement of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix D1]
an inflow section (371) through which game balls flow in one ball at a time;
a first operating means (372) operable to cause a game ball to flow into the inflow section when a predetermined condition (a winning of a winning lottery in a time-saving gaming state) is satisfied;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, a second operating means (39A) different from the first operating means can be caused to perform a predetermined operation (opening operation of the second prize opening 315A). The first ball entry section (376A) is the trigger,
a first detection section (376Aa) for detecting entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, at least a specific operation (of the second prize opening 315B) is performed on the third operation means (39B) different from the first operation means and the second operation means. a second ball entry portion (376B) that serves as an opportunity to perform the opening operation);
a second detection section (376Ba) for detecting entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section;
a guiding means (374) for guiding the game ball to a predetermined flow path by acting on the progress of the game ball flowing in from the inflow portion;
A gaming machine comprising:
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section, the guiding means, which is in a first state for guiding game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section, is activated. Switching means (drive control (processing) of the movable guide section 374) for switching to a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry section and can enter the second ball entry section ),
The arrangement position of the third operating means is vertically higher than the arrangement position of the second operating means when the gaming machine is viewed from the front;
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined operation of the second operation means and the specific operation of the third operation means have different operation modes.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the predetermined operation of the second operating means and the specific operation of the third operating means are different operating modes. In this way, the predetermined operation of the second operating means and the specific operation of the third operating means have different operating modes, so that the shapes and operating modes of the second operating means and the third operating means are highly diverse. Become. This makes it possible to reduce the space required to arrange the second operating means and the third operating means, so it is possible to secure a large space for the production means that can execute the game production. become. For example, when a game performance is performed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a large display area (front view area) of the display device can be secured, and when a game performance is performed on a movable accessory member, It becomes possible to increase the size of the movable accessory member and to secure a large range of movement of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix E1]
an inflow section (371) through which game balls flow in one ball at a time;
a first operating means (372) operable to cause a game ball to flow into the inflow section when a predetermined condition (a winning of a winning lottery in a time-saving gaming state) is satisfied;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, a second operating means (39A) different from the first operating means can be caused to perform a predetermined operation (opening operation of the second prize opening 315A). The first ball entry section (376A) is the trigger,
a first detection section (376Aa) for detecting entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, at least a specific operation (of the second prize opening 315B) is performed on the third operation means (39B) different from the first operation means and the second operation means. a second ball entry portion (376B) that serves as an opportunity to perform the opening operation);
a second detection section (376Ba) for detecting entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section;
a guiding means (374) for guiding the game ball to a predetermined flow path by acting on the progress of the game ball flowing in from the inflow portion;
A gaming machine comprising:
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section, the guiding means, which is in a first state for guiding game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section, is activated. Switching means (drive control (processing) of the movable guide section 374) for switching to a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry section and can enter the second ball entry section; ),
The arrangement position of the third operating means is vertically higher than the arrangement position of the second operating means when the gaming machine is viewed from the front;
A game machine comprising an outlet (378) into which game balls that flow from the inflow portion and do not enter either the first ball entry portion or the second ball entry portion can enter. .

The gaming machine according to appendix E1 includes an outlet into which game balls that flow from the inflow portion and do not enter either the first ball entry portion or the second ball entry portion can enter. In this way, by providing an outlet through which game balls that have flowed in from the inflow part and have not entered either the first ball entry part or the second ball entry part can enter, the game balls can be placed on the game board. It becomes possible to prevent unnecessary retention. For example, even if an excessive number of game balls enter from the inlet part or if the guiding means is neither in the first state nor in the second state, the first ball inlet part and the second ball inlet part Game balls that have not entered the game ball can be discharged from the discharge port. Thereby, it is possible to prevent balls from clogging around the inflow portion, the first ball entry portion, and the second ball entry portion in the event of an irregular situation.

[Appendix F1]
an inflow section (371) through which game balls flow in one ball at a time;
a first operating means (372) operable to cause a game ball to flow into the inflow section when a predetermined condition (a winning of a winning lottery in a time-saving gaming state) is satisfied;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, a second operating means (39A) different from the first operating means can be caused to perform a predetermined operation (opening operation of the second prize opening 315A). The first ball entry section (376A) is the trigger,
a first detection section (376Aa) for detecting entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, at least a specific operation (of the second prize opening 315B) is performed on the third operation means (39B) different from the first operation means and the second operation means. a second ball entry portion (376B) that serves as an opportunity to perform the opening operation);
a second detection section (376Ba) for detecting entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section;
a guiding means (374) that acts on the progress of the game balls flowing in from the inflow portion and guides the game balls to a predetermined flow path;
A gaming machine comprising:
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section, the guiding means, which is in a first state for guiding game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section, is activated. Switching means (drive control (processing) of the movable guide section 374) for switching to a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry section and can enter the second ball entry section; ),
The arrangement position of the third operating means is vertically higher than the arrangement position of the second operating means when the gaming machine is viewed from the front;
A deceleration means (373C, 373D) for decelerating the downward speed of the game balls is provided in the flow path until the game balls flowing in from the inflow part reach the placement position of the second ball entry part. A gaming machine featuring:

In the game machine according to appendix F1, a deceleration means is provided in the flow path for the game balls flowing in from the inflow portion to reach the placement position of the second ball entry portion for decelerating the downward speed of the game balls. . In this way, by providing the deceleration means for reducing the speed of the game balls flowing in the flow path until the game balls that flowed in from the inflow part reach the placement position of the second ball entry part, the inflow can be reduced. It becomes possible to secure a long time for the game balls flowing in from the part to reach the placement position of the second ball entry part. For example, a guiding means that is in the first state that guides game balls flowing in from the inflow part to the first ball entry part may be set to a state where the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part is It is possible to secure a long time until switching to the second state in which the ball can enter the club. Thereby, by decelerating the falling speed of the game ball with the deceleration means, the game ball can be made to reach the placement position of the second ball entry part after switching the guiding means to the second state. A game ball can be entered into the second ball entry section. As a result, the occurrence of disadvantages caused by the game ball not entering the second ball entering portion and the specific action of the third operating means not being executed is prevented.

[Appendix G1]
an inflow section (371) through which game balls flow in one ball at a time;
a first operating means (372) operable to cause a game ball to flow into the inflow section when a predetermined condition (a winning of a winning lottery in a time-saving gaming state) is satisfied;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, a second operating means (39A) different from the first operating means can be caused to perform a predetermined operation (opening operation of the second prize opening 315A). The first ball entry section (376A) is the trigger,
a first detection section (376Aa) for detecting entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, at least a specific operation (of the second prize opening 315B) is performed on the third operation means (39B) different from the first operation means and the second operation means. a second ball entry portion (376B) that serves as an opportunity to perform the opening operation);
a second detection section (376Ba) for detecting entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section;
a guiding means (374) that acts on the progress of the game balls flowing in from the inflow portion and guides the game balls to a predetermined flow path;
A gaming machine comprising:
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section, the guiding means, which is in a first state for guiding game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section, is activated. Switching means (drive control (processing) of the movable guide section 374) for switching to a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry section and can enter the second ball entry section; ),
The arrangement position of the third operating means is vertically higher than the arrangement position of the second operating means when the gaming machine is viewed from the front;
A distributing means is provided for distributing the game balls flowing in from the inflow section to one of a plurality of channels from the inflow section to the arrangement position of the second ball entry section. A gaming machine that does.

The gaming machine according to Appendix G1 is provided with a distribution means for distributing the game balls flowing in from the inflow portion to one of the plurality of flow paths from the inflow portion to the arrangement position of the second ball entry portion. There is. In this way, by providing the distribution means for distributing the game balls flowing in from the inflow part to one of the plurality of flow paths from the inflow part to the arrangement position of the second ball entry part, It becomes possible to set a difference between the time it takes the game balls flowing in from the inflow part to reach the arrangement position of the first ball entry part and the time until they reach the arrangement position of the second ball entry part. . For example, if the moving speed of the game ball in one of the flow paths is lower than that in other flow paths that allow the game ball to reach the placement position of the first ball entry part, the second ball entry part This makes it possible to secure a longer time until reaching the installation position of the part. Therefore, the guiding means, which is in the first state for guiding the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow part to the first ball entry part, is set to the second state where the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part is in the first state. It is possible to secure a long time until switching to the second state in which the ball can enter the club. As a result, by providing the distributing means, it is possible to make the game ball reach the placement position of the second ball entry section after switching the guiding means to the second state, so that the game ball can reach the second ball entry section more reliably. A game ball can be entered. As a result, the occurrence of disadvantages caused by the game ball not entering the second ball entering portion and the specific action of the third operating means not being executed is prevented.

[Appendix H1]
an inflow section (371) through which game balls flow in one ball at a time;
a first operating means (372) operable to cause a game ball to flow into the inflow section when a predetermined condition (a winning of a winning lottery in a time-saving gaming state) is satisfied;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, a second operating means (39A) different from the first operating means can be caused to perform a predetermined operation (opening operation of the second prize opening 315A). The first ball entry section (376A) is the trigger,
a first detection section (376Aa) for detecting entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section;
Based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section, at least a specific operation (of the second prize opening 315B) is performed on the third operation means (39B) different from the first operation means and the second operation means. a second ball entry portion (376B) that serves as an opportunity to perform the opening operation);
a second detection section (376Ba) for detecting entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section;
a guiding means (374) for guiding the game ball to a predetermined flow path by acting on the progress of the game ball flowing in from the inflow portion;
A gaming machine comprising:
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section, the guiding means, which is in a first state for guiding game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section, is activated. Switching means (drive control (processing) of the movable guide section 374) for switching to a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry section and can enter the second ball entry section; ),
The arrangement position of the third operating means is vertically higher than the arrangement position of the second operating means when the gaming machine is viewed from the front;
A game machine that enters a game area formed by a game board (31) when a fired game ball exceeds a predetermined position,
The gaming machine characterized in that the third operating means is disposed at a position closer to the predetermined position than the second operating means.

In the game machine according to appendix H1, when the fired game ball exceeds the predetermined position, it enters the game area formed on the game board, and the third operating means is located at a position closer to the predetermined position than the second operating means. Because of this arrangement, players can play games efficiently. Specifically, for example, when a fired game ball exceeds a predetermined position, it enters a game area formed on a game board, and the third operating means is disposed at a position closer to the predetermined position than the second operating means. By setting, the moving distance (moving time) of the game ball from the predetermined position to the third operating means is set longer than the moving distance (moving time) of the gaming ball from the predetermined position to the second operating means. be done. Therefore, it becomes possible to secure a long time for the game balls that have flowed in from the inflow section beyond the predetermined position to reach the arrangement position of the second ball entry section. Therefore, the guiding means, which is in the first state for guiding the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow part to the first ball entry part, is set to the second state where the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part is in the first state. It is possible to secure a long time until switching to the second state in which the ball can enter the club. Thereby, by decelerating the falling speed of the game ball with the deceleration means, the game ball can be made to reach the placement position of the second ball entry part after switching the guiding means to the second state. A game ball can be entered into the second ball entry section. As a result, the occurrence of disadvantages caused by the game ball not entering the second ball entering portion and the specific action of the third operating means not being executed is prevented.

10: Game machine 31: Game board 314: First winning hole 315: Second winning hole 316: Variable winning hole 317L, 317R: Through gate 341: Symbol display section 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411:ROM
412:RAM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
511:ROM
512:RAM

Claims (1)

an inflow section that allows game balls to flow in one ball at a time;
a first operating means operable to cause game balls to flow into the inflow section when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
a first ball entering section that is a trigger for causing a second operating means different from the first operating means to execute a predetermined operation based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow section;
a first detection section for detecting entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section;
A second input triggers a third operating means different from the first operating means and the second operating means to perform at least a specific action based on the entry of the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow portion. The bulb and
a second detection section for detecting entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section;
Guiding means for guiding the game balls to a predetermined flow path by acting on the progress of the game balls flowing in from the inflow part;
A gaming machine comprising:
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined number of game balls enter the first ball entry section, the guiding means, which is in a first state for guiding game balls flowing in from the inflow section to the first ball entry section, is activated. comprising a switching means for switching to a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry section and can enter the second ball entry section;
A gaming machine characterized in that the arrangement position of the third operating means is vertically higher than the arrangement position of the second operating means when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

Images